JP2019080689A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of supporting upsizing of a front decoration part of an opening/closing part.SOLUTION: A game machine includes: an opening/closing part 3 which configures a front surface side and has a window part 101a for visualizing a game area; and a front decoration part 450 which is positioned in front of a prescribed part (an arrangement area 420) of the opening/closing part 3 in a closed state and protrudes forward the window part 101a. A front decoration part 450 of the game machine can change from a game playable state locked on a front side of the prescribed part (the arrangement area 420) of the opening/closing part 3 to a maintenance state that it is not positioned in front of the prescribed part (the arrangement area 420) of the opening/closing part 3 by prescribed release operation.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 91D

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

  A game machine such as a pachinko machine is an openable / closable opening / closing unit having a window portion for making the game area visible as described in, for example, Patent Document 1 (see "front frame 5" of Patent Document 1) Is provided on the front of the outer frame, and on the front side of the opening and closing part thereof, around the window part, a front decoration part for effect (“front side effect part 13” and “front frame transparent part 18” in Patent Document 1) Reference) is provided.

JP, 2010-099190, A

  In recent years, in order to increase the interest of the game, decorative effects are becoming a major issue. Therefore, with regard to the decoration of the opening and closing part as well, it is difficult to achieve further improvement in interest with the same configuration as in the prior art.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine which can further improve interest as compared with the prior art.

An effective solution for achieving the above purpose is shown below.
(Solution 1)
An opening / closing portion which constitutes a front side of the gaming machine and has a window portion for making a predetermined gaming area visible.
And a front decoration portion positioned in front of a predetermined portion of the opening and closing portion and disposed to project forward than the window portion,
The front decoration portion is configured to be changeable between a game available state in which an operation for effect is possible and a maintenance state in which an operation for effect is not possible,
Further, a power supply path used for electrical connection to the front decorative portion is configured using a drawer connector without using a harness.

  According to this gaming machine, it is possible to provide a gaming machine which can further improve interest as compared with the prior art.

(Solution 2)
The gaming machine according to solution means 1, wherein the maintenance state of the front decoration portion is a state in which the front decoration portion is moved to a position not overlapping the opening / closing track of the opening / closing portion and waiting.
According to this gaming machine, the front decorative portion in the maintenance state stands by at a position not overlapping the opening / closing track of the opening / closing portion, that is, separated from the opening / closing of the opening / closing portion. However, there is almost no risk of contact with people, and the opening and closing of the opening and closing portion can be performed lightly and lightly without the possibility of interference with adjacent game machines and the like.

(Solution 3)
The maintenance state of the front decorative portion includes a state in which the surface of the front decorative portion in the game enable state facing the front portion is exposed to the outside. Gaming machine.
According to such a gaming machine, it is possible to easily perform a defect check, a repair, and the like from the surface which is not exposed to the outside in the game-ready state of the front decorative portion.

(Solution 4)
The gaming machine according to any one of solution means 1 to 3, wherein the front decoration part changes to the maintenance state by movement in a direction different from opening and closing of the opening and closing part.
According to such a gaming machine, since the maintenance state is changed by the noticeable movement in the direction different from the opening and closing of the opening and closing part, it can be easily understood from a distance that the front decorative part is in the maintenance state. Therefore, it is easy to find an illegal act of the manner in which the front decorative portion is put into the maintenance state and executed, and that also serves as a deterrent of the fraud.

(Solution 5)
The game machine according to any one of solution means 1 to 4, wherein the open / close unit is capable of an open operation on condition that the front decorative portion is changed to the maintenance state by a predetermined release operation.
According to such a gaming machine, when the opening and closing part is opened to perform an illegal act, since the releasing operation of the front decorative part is essential as the premise, it is difficult to perform the illegal work and it takes time for the illegal work. Discovery is also easier.

(Solution 6)
The opening / closing unit can be opened by a tool-less opening operation unit that does not require any tool including a key, and the opening operation unit can be opened when the front decoration unit is changed to the maintenance state by a predetermined release operation. Is exposed to the outside to enable an open operation.
According to such a gaming machine, when it is attempted to carry out an illegal work with the opening / closing part opened, it is necessary to release the front decorative part as its premise, so it is difficult for the fraud to be made and it takes time for the illegal work. Discovery is also easier.
On the other hand, since the opening / closing unit does not require a tool for the opening operation of the opening operation unit, employees etc. have only to carry, for example, a key necessary for the release operation of the front decoration unit. There is no need, and neither the employee nor the burden of carrying a plurality of tools together or having to extract a specific tool from a plurality of tools is required.

By the way, since the front decoration part of the conventional game machine is attached to the front side of the opening and closing part by a plurality of screws, it takes time to attach and detach the front decoration part. Therefore, once a problem occurs in the front decorative portion, it takes time until the front decorative portion is removed and repaired or replaced with a new one, so that there is a problem that the gaming machine can not be used for a long time.
Therefore, effective solutions A to D for solving such a problem are shown below.
(Solution means A)
An openable / closable opening / closing portion which constitutes a front side and has a window portion for making the game area visible.
And a front decorative portion provided in an arrangement area formed at least at a part of the periphery of the window, and located on the front side of the opening and closing portion so as to project forward than the window. A gaming machine,
The front decoration portion is formed detachably with respect to the placement area and is locked by a tool-less engagement portion that does not require a tool for the attachment / detachment operation with respect to the placement area.
The lock unit is changed to a state in which the lock unit can be attached and detached by a predetermined release operation, and in the state, the lock unit is operated to enable attachment and detachment of the front decorative unit to the arrangement area. Gaming machine.

According to such a gaming machine, since the front decorative portion is locked by the tool-less locking portion which does not require a tool for the attaching / detaching operation, for example, only the front decorative portion in which a failure occurs is removed from the arrangement area The game can be quickly resumed by replacing it with a substitute. Of course, it is also easy to change the front decoration to a new model.
On the other hand, since the tool-less locking portion locking the front decorative portion can be attached and detached on the premise of a predetermined releasing operation of, for example, the opening / closing portion or the front decorative portion itself, even if the locking portion is a tool There is little risk of being removed by someone other than a specific person, such as a game arcade employee, even if he is not.

(Solution means B)
The gaming machine according to solution means A, wherein the locking portion is capable of performing an attaching / detaching operation from the back side of the opening / closing portion only when the opening / closing portion which can be opened by a predetermined release operation is in an open state.
According to such a gaming machine, the attaching / detaching operation of the locking portion can be performed from the back side of the opening / closing portion only when the opening / closing portion that can be opened by the predetermined release operation is in the open state. There is almost no risk of removal by anyone other than the specific person who can perform the release operation.

(Solution means C)
The locking portion is formed so that a plurality of types having different locking structures are mixed in one front face decoration portion, and the operation order by type at the time of attachment and detachment can be identified by the mark portion. Solution A or B gaming machine.
According to such a gaming machine, for example, a plurality of types of locking portions having different locking structures in that the locking structure is excellent in reliability and the locking structure is excellent in operability by one-touch operation. By mixing them together, it is possible to achieve both locking reliability and workability of attachment and detachment.
Also, in such a case, the preferred order of operation at the time of attachment / detachment, for example, the locking structure excellent in workability is immediately removed and it is difficult to take fall prevention measures of the front decoration part. It is possible to recognize by the indication of the mark that the stop structure is removed and there is time to take fall prevention measures of the front face decoration part later because it is removed.

(Solution means D)
In the placement area, a reference effect unit is formed toward the front side,
On the other hand, an accommodation space is formed in the front decorative portion at a position where it overlaps with the reference effect portion in a state of being attached to the arrangement area,
In the state in which the front decoration part is attached to the arrangement area, the reference effect part constitutes at least a part of the presentation means of the front decoration part. Gaming machine.
According to this gaming machine, the reference effect part can be used as it is even if the front decorative part is changed by changing the specification or the like, so that it is possible to suppress the cost of replacing the front decorative part and the change cost of effect control.

  According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine which can further improve interest as compared with the prior art.

It is a front view of a pachinko machine. It is a right side view of a pachinko machine. It is a left side view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is the perspective view which looked at a pachinko machine from the right front. It is the perspective view which looked at a pachinko machine from the left front. It is the perspective view which looked at a pachinko machine from the back. It is a front view of a pachinko machine when the press operation part of a production operation unit is a raise position. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine when the press operation part of a production operation unit is a raise position from the right front. It is a perspective view of a pachinko machine including a partially enlarged view seen from the front in a state where the door frame is opened from the main body frame and the main body frame is opened from the outer frame. The other form is shown and it is a perspective view of a pachinko machine including a partially enlarged view seen from the front in a state where the door frame is opened from the main body frame and the main body frame is opened from the outer frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the pachinko machine into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled a pachinko machine into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame, and was seen from back. It is a front view of the outer frame in a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of an outer frame. It is a right view of an outer frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the outer frame from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the outer frame from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the outer frame for every main member, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the outer frame left assembly and outer frame right assembly of an outer frame, respectively, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the outer frame lower assembly of the outer frame and was seen from the front. (A) is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the outer frame upper hinge assembly of the outer frame 2 and was seen from the front upper, and (b) is the disassembled perspective view which looked at (a) from the front lower. It is a front view of the door frame in a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a door frame. It is a left side view of a door frame. It is a right side view of a door frame. It is the perspective view which looked at a door frame from the front right. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame for every main member, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame for every main member, and was seen from back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame base unit of the door frame from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame base unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame base unit into every main member, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame base unit into every main member, and was seen from back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the ball | bowl feed unit of the door frame base unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the ball | bowl feed unit from the back. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit disassembled and seen from the front, (b) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit after removing the rear case of the ball feeding unit and the tamperproof member and seen from behind. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the fal cover unit of the door frame base unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the fal cover unit from the back. (A) is the disassembled perspective view which removed the cover member from the front and removed the cover member, (b) is the disassembled perspective view which removed the cover member and was seen from the back. It is the XX sectional view taken on the line of FIG. 38 (a). It is the YY sectional view taken on the line of FIG. 39 including a partially enlarged view. FIG. 14 is an exploded perspective view of the fowl cover unit including a partially enlarged exploded view showing another form of the operation line disabling member. It is a cross-sectional top view including the elements on larger scale of the fal cover unit which shows the other form of the operation line invalidation member. It is a cross-sectional top view including the elements on larger scale of the fal cover unit which shows the other form of the operation line invalidation member. (A) is a longitudinal cross-sectional front view of the fal cover unit which shows the other form of the operation line invalidation member, (b) is a cross-sectional top view. It is a longitudinal front view of a fal cover unit which shows other fraud prevention means. (A), (b) is the principal part enlarged view of FIG. 45 which shows the normal flow of a game ball (far ball), (c) is a principal part enlarged view of FIG. 45 which shows the reverse movement prevention state of an irregular | improper ball . It is a top view of a foul cover unit. It is a top view of the fal cover unit which shows the other form of the operation line invalidation member. It is a longitudinal front view of a fal cover unit which shows other fraud prevention means. (A) is an enlarged view of the Z section of FIG. 49, (b) is an enlarged view of the Z section of FIG. 49 showing a state in which a far ball passes. (A), (b) is an enlarged view of the Z section of FIG. 49 which shows the state in which the operation line is invalidated. (A), (b) shows the state which electrically operated the operation line invalidation member, and is an enlarged view corresponded to the Z section of FIG. 49 which shows the state in which the operation line is inactivated. It is a perspective view of the principal part which shows the other form of the operation line invalidation member. (A) is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the handle unit in a door frame, and was seen from the front, (b) is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled a handle unit and was seen from the back. It is the perspective view which looked at the plate unit of a door frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the saucer unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the tray unit into every main member, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the tray unit into every main member, and was seen from back. It is the perspective view which looked at the plate base unit in a plate unit from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the saucer base unit in a saucer unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the dish base unit into every main member and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the dish base unit into every main member and was seen from back. It is the perspective view which looked at the dish decoration unit in a dish unit from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the dish decoration unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the dish decoration unit into every main member, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the dish decoration unit into every main member and was seen from back. It is the top view which looked at the production operation unit in a saucer unit from the direction of movement of a production operation part button unit. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the production operation unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the production operation unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the presentation operation unit into every main member, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the presentation operation unit into every main member, and was seen from back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the production operation ring of the production operation unit from the upper front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the production operation ring from the lower front. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation ring disassembled and viewed from above, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation ring disassembled and viewed from the lower front. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the rotational drive unit of a rendering operation unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the rotational drive unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the rotational drive unit and was seen from the right front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the rotational drive unit and was seen from the left front. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the production operation button unit of the production operation unit and was seen from the front upper side. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the presentation operation button unit and was seen from the front lower. (A) is a cross-sectional view of the effect operation button unit when the pressing operation unit is at the lowered position, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the effect operation button unit when the pressing operation unit is at the raised position. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship of a production operation ring and a rotational drive unit in the left view of a production operation unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship of a production operation ring and a production operation ring decoration board | substrate in the top view which looked at the production operation unit from the press direction of the press operation part. (A) is a front view of the pan unit shown in a normal state, (b) is a front view of the pan unit when the pressing operation section is at the raised position, (c) is a central pressing operation section of the pressing operation section It is a front view of a plate unit when pressing. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame left side unit of the door frame from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame left side unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame left side unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame left side unit and was seen from back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame right side unit of a door frame from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame right side unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame right side unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame right side unit and was seen from back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame top unit in a door frame from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame top unit from the back, (c) is the state which removed the top lower cover It is a bottom view of the door frame top unit shown by. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame top unit and was seen from front top. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame top unit and was seen from the front lower. It is a front view of a door frame shown with each decoration board. It is the perspective view which looked at a pachinko machine from the right side. It is an upper right side view of the pachinko machine which shows a door frame top unit. It is an upper right side view of a pachinko machine which shows the state which the door frame top unit changed into the maintenance state. It is a perspective view which shows a 2nd locking unit. It is an upper right side view of the pachinko machine which shows the door frame top unit of other forms. It is an upper right side view of a pachinko machine which shows the state in which the door frame top unit of the other form changed into the maintenance state. It is a front view of the main body frame in a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of the main body frame in a pachinko machine. It is the perspective view which looked at the main body frame from the front right. It is the perspective view which looked at the main body frame from the left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the main body frame from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the main body frame for every main member, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the main body frame for every main member, and was seen from back. (A) is an enlarged perspective view showing a front lower left corner of the main body frame, and (b) is an enlarged perspective view showing a front lower left corner of the main body frame when the door frame is opened with respect to the main body frame. It is explanatory drawing which shows operation | movement of the connection cable guide member of a main body frame at the time of opening and closing of the door frame with respect to a main body frame. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the ball launcher in the main body frame from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the ball launcher from the back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the delivery base unit of the main body frame from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the delivery base unit from the back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the delivery unit in the main body frame from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the delivery unit from the back. (A) is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the delivery unit into every main structure, and was seen from the front, (b) is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the payout unit into every main structure, and was seen from back. It is the back sectional view which cut the delivery apparatus of the delivery unit in the front-back direction center of a delivery blade. (A) is a back sectional view which cut a dispensing device in the front-back direction center of a dispensing blade, when a ball extraction movable piece is an open state, (b) is a sectional view cut by the AA line in (a) . It is a rear view of the delivery apparatus for demonstrating the rotation position of a delivery blade. It is a rear view of the delivery apparatus for demonstrating ball clogging and ball fall prevention. It is a modification of a payment device. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the foul cover unit of a door frame, and a lower full-tan ball path unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the game ball in a main body frame. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the substrate unit of the main body frame from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the substrate unit from the back. It is the perspective view which looked at the board | substrate unit from back bottom. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the board | substrate unit by main structure, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the board | substrate unit by main structure, and was seen from back. It is an expanded side sectional view showing the lower part of a pachinko machine which was cut at the center in the left-right direction. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the locking unit of the main body frame from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the locking unit from the back. (A) is a top view of a main body frame, (b) is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the BB line in (a). It is an enlarged view which expands and shows upper part in the perspective view which looked at a main body frame from back. (A) is the perspective view seen from the front upper in the state which assembled the tank rail etc. in the ball | bowl tank, (b) is the perspective view which looked at (a) from the front lower. FIG. 120 is an exploded perspective view of FIG. 120 (a) disassembled and viewed from the front. It is explanatory drawing which shows the area | region where the game ball which overflowed from the ball | bowl tank in a main body frame upper part distribute | circulates. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the game ball which overflowed from the ball tank in a main body frame upper part. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the game ball to the detour passage in a main body frame upper part. It is an enlarged view which expands and shows tank rail vicinity in the perspective view which looked at the main body frame from the back of the hinge side. It is the figure which expanded a part of sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the CC line of FIG. 118 (a). It is the other structure (The structure of the metal powder countermeasure which concerns on 2nd Embodiment) of this invention to which a metal powder countermeasure is taken. It is the other structure (The structure of the metal powder countermeasure which concerns on 3rd Embodiment) of this invention to which a metal powder countermeasure is taken. It is the other structure (The structure of the metal powder countermeasure which concerns on 4th Embodiment) of this invention to which a metal powder countermeasure is taken. It is the other structure (The structure of the metal powder countermeasure which concerns on 5th Embodiment) of this invention to which a metal powder countermeasure is taken. It is a front view of the game board in a pachinko machine. It is a principal part enlarged front view of the game board of FIG. It is a principal part enlarged front view of the game board which shows other forms. It is a principal part enlarged front view of the game board which shows other forms. (A), (b) is a principal part enlarged front view of the game board which shows other form. It is a principal part enlarged front view of the game board which shows other forms. It is a principal part enlarged front view of the game board which shows other forms. FIG. 138 is a partially enlarged front view of the game board of FIG. 137. It is a principal part enlarged front view of the game board which shows the modification of FIG. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the game board into every main structure, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the game board into every main structure, and was seen from back. Is a schematic view of a function display unit attached to the upper left corner of the front component outside the game area. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board from the back. It is a schematic explanatory drawing of drawing of the wiring from the function display unit in a main control board. It is a perspective view of a main control unit. It is an exploded perspective view of a main control unit. It is a perspective view of a main control unit. It is a perspective view of a main control unit. It is a principal part expansion front view of a main control unit. FIG. 144F is a cross-sectional view of FIG. 144F taken along the line Z-Z. It is a principal part expansion partial front view of a main control unit which shows the state which the change suppression means changed to the 2nd state from FIG. 144F. It is an exploded perspective view of a main control unit. It is a principal part expanded sectional view of a main control unit. It is a principal part expanded sectional view of a main control unit. It is a schematic perspective view of internal structures, such as back left movable ornaments. It is a front disassembled perspective view of a periphery control unit. It is a rear exploded perspective view of a peripheral control unit. It is a front view of a peripheral control unit. FIG. 148 is a cross-sectional view taken along line XX of FIG. 148. FIG. 148 is a view on arrow A of FIG. 148. It is a block diagram which roughly shows the control structure of a pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows the structure of a frame earthing | grounding board. It is the schematic of the handling of the conductor floated with respect to the earth | ground equipped with the various presentation units equipped with a game board. It is a circuit diagram explaining an outline of a circuit composition of a power supply board. It is the perspective view which partially expanded the power supply board. FIG. 156 is a view on arrow B of FIG. 155. It is silk printing (the 1) of the electronic component printed on the mounting surface of a power supply board. It is silk printing (the 2) of the electronic component printed on the mounting surface of a power supply board. It is a perspective view explaining the outline of the production discontinuation electronic component. It is the structure of the commercial power supply voltage countermeasure which concerns on 2nd Embodiment. It is a schematic circuit diagram showing a circuit of a main control board. It is a schematic circuit diagram showing a circuit of a payout control board. It is a perspective view explaining the outline | summary of the wiring to the board | substrate handled as a main board | substrate. It is a block diagram explaining the electrical connection of each decoration board | substrate with which a door frame is equipped. It is a block diagram showing an example of a decoration board provided with one LED constant current drive circuit. It is a block diagram showing an example of a decoration board provided with two LED constant current drive circuits. It is a schematic diagram of the arrangement method of a LED constant current drive circuit. It is the enlarged view seen from the LED non-mounting surface in the D section of FIG. It is the composition of measures, such as a reflectance fall concerning a 2nd embodiment. It is the composition of measures, such as a reflectance fall concerning a 3rd embodiment. FIG. 170 is an enlarged view of an LED non-mounting surface in a portion D 'of FIG. 169 or a portion D' 'of FIG. 170. It is the composition of measures, such as a reflectance fall concerning a 4th embodiment. FIG. 172 is an enlarged view of a D ′ ′ ′ portion of FIG. 172 as viewed from an LED non-mounting surface. It is a block diagram showing an example of a decoration board provided with a magnetic type pole change detection circuit etc. of a magnetic type. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a process at the time of main control side power activation. It is a flowchart which shows the continuation of the process at the time of main control side power-on of FIG. It is a flow chart which shows an example of main control side timer interrupt processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of setting change processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a setting value confirmation display process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an error display process. It is a flow chart which shows an example of processing at the time of payout control part power-on. It is a flowchart which shows the continuation of the process at the time of the payout control part power supply ON of FIG. FIG. 182 is a flowchart illustrating the continuation of the process when the payout control unit is powered on, following FIG. 182. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a payment control part timer interruption process. It is a flow chart which shows an example of processing at the time of peripheral control part power activation. It is a flowchart which shows an example of peripheral control part V blank interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a peripheral control part 1 ms timer interrupt process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a periphery control part command reception interruption process. It is a flow chart which shows an example of peripheral control part power failure notice signal interrupt processing. It is a front view of a pachinko machine. It is a perspective view of a door frame. It is a right side view of a door frame. It is a perspective view of a game board. It is a front view of a game board. It is a center longitudinal cross-sectional view of a game board including a partially enlarged view. Fig. 195 is an enlarged view of a portion indicated by arrow Z1 in Fig. 195 including a partially enlarged view. FIG. 195 is an enlarged view of a Z2 part shown by an arrow. It is XX sectional drawing of FIG. FIG. 198 is an enlarged view of a Z3 portion of FIG. 198. It is an end elevation view of the game board which cut the middle of the thickness direction of a light guide plate. It is the front view disassembled with the front view of the game panel and center member which abbreviate | omitted the back decoration member, and were put in order. It is a disassembled perspective view of a game board. It is a disassembled perspective view which shows the base panel and front enclosure member of a game panel. It is a perspective view which shows the base panel and back decoration member of a game panel. It is an exploded perspective view showing a base panel and a back decoration member of a game panel. It is a disassembled perspective view of a presentation unit. It is an exploded perspective view showing a production support frame and a drum unit of a production unit. It is an exploded perspective view showing the drum unit of a production unit. It is an exploded perspective view showing the back cover of an effect unit. It is a center longitudinal cross-sectional view of the principal part explaining the movement state of a drum. FIG. 191 is an enlarged view of a Z4 part of FIG. 191. It is a partially expanded front view of the door frame which shows a handle unit. It is the SS sectional view taken on the line of FIG. It is a disassembled sectional view showing a handle unit. It is a principal part expanded sectional view of the door frame which shows the other form of a handle unit. It is a front view of a pachinko machine provided with two handle units. It is a perspective view of the door frame provided with two handle units. It is a right side view of a door frame. It is an enlarged view of Z5 part of FIG. It is a partially expanded front view of the door frame which shows the handle unit on the right side toward FIG. It is the TT sectional view taken on the line of FIG. FIG. 221 is a cross-sectional view of the handle unit showing a state of being linearly moved from FIG. 221. It is a disassembled sectional view showing a handle unit. FIG. 216 is a cross-sectional view corresponding to line T-T of FIG. 220 showing the handle unit on the left side toward the side of FIG. 216; FIG. 224 is a cross-sectional view of the handle unit showing a state of being linearly moved from FIG. 224. FIG. 225 is a cross-sectional view of FIG. 225 taken along the line U-U. It is a principal part expanded sectional view of the door frame which shows the other form of a handle unit. It is the principal part expansion perspective view which looked at the upper part of the pachinko machine from the right front. It is the principal part expansion perspective view which looked at the upper part of the pachinko machine from the back. It is a principal part enlarged front view of the upper part of a pachinko machine. It is a principal part enlarged right side view of the upper part of a pachinko machine. It is the principal part expansion right side view of the upper part of the pachinko machine which shows the modification of a front top plate. It is a principal part expansion right side view of a pachinko machine upper part which shows other forms of a front top board. It is a front view of the game board in a pachinko machine. FIG. 250 is a partial enlarged front view showing the lower half of the gaming board of FIG. 234; It is a perspective view of a game board. It is a disassembled perspective view of a game board. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board from the back. FIG. 239 is a perspective view of the game board as viewed from the rear opposite side of FIG. 239. It is a center longitudinal cross-sectional view including a partially enlarged view. It is the combination plane sectional view which changed the cutting position centering on the lower layer game zone of the game board. It is a perspective view of a 3rd display apparatus. It is a front view of a 3rd display apparatus. It is a front view of the 3rd display which shows the changed state. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the front side of the 3rd display. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the rear surface side of the 3rd display. It is a perspective view which decomposes | disassembles and shows the lower layer game zone of a game board. FIG. 247 is an exploded perspective view showing a lower layer game zone of the game board viewed from a direction different from that in FIG. 247. (A) is a longitudinal cross-sectional view which shows the distribution apparatus of a 3rd distribution part, (b) is a longitudinal cross-sectional view of the distribution apparatus which shows the state of the game ball which received the vibration by external force. It is a principal part expanded sectional view of the ball | bowl rolling member which shows the other form of a ball | bowl guidance | induction part. It is a perspective view of the right-handed game zone including a partially enlarged view. FIG. 14 is a cross-sectional view of the back box partially bent in the left-right direction along the vertical direction and cut away, and is a schematic view (a) showing how to attach the vibration detection switch and the back stick member for gaming balls; (B). It is a block diagram which roughly shows the control structure of a pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows the D cut angle position formed in the rotating shaft of a 1st, 2nd distribution stepping motor. It is a circuit diagram of a voltage switching circuit. It is a schematic diagram showing arrangement of a poly switch. It is a table explaining the drive management block of the 1st distribution stepping motor. It is a table explaining the drive management block of the 2nd distribution stepping motor. It is the schematic of the mounting method of a field effect transistor. It is a circuit diagram showing a vibration detection circuit. It is a flow chart which shows an example of vibration detection effective timer processing for distribution devices. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the abnormal vibration 2 step alerting | reporting process for distribution apparatuses. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the abnormal vibration 2 step alerting | reporting process for big winning opening. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a vibration discrimination | determination process. It is a schematic perspective view of a slot machine. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the lower part of the main body frame from the left side, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the lower part of the main body frame from the right side. It is the perspective view which looked at the lower part of the door frame from the rear surface side. It is a principal part expansion perspective view showing the upper left corner of a game board. It is a block diagram which roughly shows the control structure of a pachinko machine.

[1. Overall structure of pachinko machine]
The pachinko machine 1 of the embodiment will be described in detail below with reference to the drawings. Note that for convenience of explanation, the side of the pachinko machine facing the player is referred to as "front" or "front", and the opposite side as "rear" or "back".

  First, the entire configuration of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 13. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine. FIG. 2 is a right side view of the pachinko machine, FIG. 3 is a left side view of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 4 is a rear view of the pachinko machine. FIG. 5 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine as viewed from the right front, FIG. 6 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine as viewed from the left front, and FIG. 7 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine as viewed from the rear. FIG. 8 is a front view of the pachinko machine when the pressing operation unit of the rendering operation unit is at the rising position, and FIG. 9 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine when the pressing operation unit of the rendering operation unit is at the rising position from the right front is there. 10 and 11 are perspective views of the pachinko machine viewed from the front in a state in which the door frame is opened from the main body frame and the main body frame is opened from the outer frame. FIG. 12 is an exploded perspective view of a pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a body frame, and an outer frame, and FIG. 13 is a door frame for a pachinko machine, a game board, a body frame, and an outer frame It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled and was seen from back.

  The pachinko machine 1 supports a frame-like outer frame 2 installed on an island facility (not shown) of the game hall, a door frame 3 for closing the front of the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable, and an openable door frame 3 The main frame 4 is attached to the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable, and is detachably attached to the main frame 4 from the front side and can be viewed from the player side through the door frame 3. And a game board 5 having a game area 5a into which the game player is driven (see FIG. 106).

  The outer frame 2 is formed in a rectangular frame in which the shape in a front view extends vertically. The outer frame 2 connects the upper ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 which are separated left and right and extend vertically, and the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 Attached to the upper surface left end of the outer frame upper member 30, and the outer frame lower assembly 40 connecting lower ends of the outer frame upper member 30, the lower end of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20; An outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 and an outer frame lower hinge member 60 attached to the lower right side surface of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the upper end of the upper surface of the outer frame lower assembly 40 are provided.

  The outer frame 2 is attached to the island facility of the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, and the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 and the outer frame lower hinge member 60 make the main frame upper hinge member 510 of the main body frame 4 and the main body The frame lower hinge assembly 520 is rotatably supported coaxially, and the main body frame 4 is mounted so as to be able to open and close in a forward direction centering on the left side in a front view.

  In the door frame 3, when the main body frame 4 is closed, the outer frame lower assembly 40 cooperates with the speaker unit 620 a of the substrate unit 620 in the main body frame 4 to partially cover the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622. The sound outputted to the rear of the main body frame speaker 622 is phase-reversed and radiated forward to allow the player to hear a more deep bass sound.

  The door frame 3 closes the gaming area 5a of the gaming board 5 in which the gaming ball B is struck so as to be visible from the front side, stores the gaming ball B for hitting into the gaming area 5a, and stores the gaming It has a handle 182 which is an operation medium operated by the player to drive the ball B into the game area 5a. Moreover, the door frame 3 decorates the whole front of the pachinko machine 1.

  Further, the door frame 3 is provided with the effect operation unit 301 which can be operated by the player separately from the handle 182, and the player operates the effect operation unit 301 when the player participation type effect is executed. Thus, the player can participate in the effect, and in addition to the game by the game ball B, the player can be entertained also by the operation of the effect operation unit 301.

  The main body frame 4 has a frame-like main body frame base unit 500 which can be inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 at its rear portion and can support the outer periphery of the game board 5, and the main body frame 4 against the outer frame 2. Main frame upper hinge member 510 and lower main frame lower hinge assembly 520 for mounting the door frame 3 openably and closably, and a metal main frame reinforcing frame 530 reinforcing the main frame base unit 500 And a payout base unit 550 for receiving the gaming balls B supplied from the island facilities of the gaming hall, and a payout base unit 550, and a ball launching device 540 for hitting the gaming balls B into the gaming area 5a of the gaming board 5. Payout control in addition to a payout unit 560 for paying out the received gaming ball B to the player side, and a power supply substrate 630 provided with a power switch 630a capable of turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1 A base unit 620 having a plate 633, a back cover 640 for covering the rear side of the game board 5 attached to the body frame base 501, an outer frame 2 and a body frame 4, and a door frame 3 and a body frame 4. And a locking unit 650 for locking the gap.

  The main unit frame 4 holds the game board 5 having the game area 5a in which the game is performed by hitting the game ball B, and pays out the game ball B to the player side, or the game ball B used for the game. To the rear of the pachinko machine 1 (the island equipment side of the game hall). The main body frame 4 is formed in a box shape whose front is open, and the game board 5 is detachably accommodated in the inside from the front. In addition, the main body frame 4 is attached to the frame-like outer frame 2 attached to the island facility of the game hall so as to be openable and closable at the upper and lower ends of the front left side, and the door frame 3 is closed. Is mounted so that it can be opened and closed.

  The game board 5 has a game area 5a in which the game ball B is driven by the operation of the player, a front component 1000 which divides the outer periphery of the game area 5a and whose outer shape is substantially square in a front view; It is attached to the plate-shaped game panel 1100 attached to the rear side and partitioning the rear end of the game area 5a, the substrate holder 1200 attached to the lower rear side of the game panel 1100, and the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200 A main control unit 1300 having a main control board 1310X and a setting change board 1310Y, a function display unit 1400 for displaying a game situation based on a control signal from the main control board 1310X, and a back side of the game panel 1100 A predetermined effect image is displayed, which is arranged at the center of the game area 5a in a front view and the peripheral control unit 1500 arranged. Noh rendition display device 1600, and a table unit 2000 attached to the front of the gaming panel 1100, a back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of the gaming panel 1100, the. The back unit 3000 includes a back effect unit 3100 capable of performing a movable effect and a light emission effect according to the game state.

  In the gaming area 5a of the gaming board 5, a plurality of obstacle nails 2007, which are placed on the front of the gaming panel 1100 in a predetermined gauge arrangement and change the movement of the gaming ball B, receive the gaming ball B For the general winning opening 2001 which gives a predetermined benefit (for example, payout of a predetermined number of gaming balls B) to the person, the first starting opening 2002, the second starting opening 2004 and the winning opening 2005 etc. A gate unit 2003 for providing a player with a predetermined benefit (for example, enabling a second start hole 2004 for a predetermined time) by passing the ball B, and a game ball B that can enter the ball Is provided with a disadvantageous first receiving port 2006 (details will be described later). The general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the gate section 2003, the second starting opening 2004, the large winning opening 2005, and the first receiving opening 2006 are provided in the front unit 2000.

  In the game area 5a of the game board 5, the player operates the handle unit 180 for operating the player and inputs the game for adjustment of the batting power, thereby hitting the game ball B with an arbitrary strength. be able to. As a result, the game ball B is allowed to pass through the general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the gate section 2003, the second starting opening 2004, the second winning opening 2005, etc. The player can enjoy the operation of hitting the handle 182, such as not entering the entrance 2006.

  In addition, the game board 5 displays a predetermined effect image on the effect display device 1600 according to the game state which changes by hitting the game ball B in the game area 5a, or the movable effect or the like by the back effect unit 3100 The player can be entertained by making the light emission effect.

  In the pachinko machine 1, when the player rotates the handle 182 in a state where gaming balls are stored in the upper plate 201 described later, the ball launcher 540 has strength according to the rotation angle of the handle 182 (operation amount of the handle 182). The game ball is launched at the same time, and the game ball is guided into the game area 5a of the game board 5 through the launch ball passage formed by the launch passage portion 1012 of the launch rail 544, the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002. Ru. Then, when the game ball driven into the game area 5a is received by the general winning opening 2001 etc., a predetermined number of game balls are opened by the payout device 580 according to the received winning opening. Are dispensed to the upper plate 201.

  In the case where the strength which can not reach the game area 5a does not reach the game area 5a, that is, the game ball fired with a weak firing power does not reach the inside of the game area 5a due to the relationship of the hitting strength of the game ball, FIG. As shown in FIG. 39, it falls into the ball drop opening 1013 opened between the end (end) of the firing rail 544 and the end (start) of the outer rail 1001, which is returned as described later The ball is received by the ball receiving portion 150c of the far cover unit 150 constituting the passage portion 1014, passes through the inside of the far cover unit 150, and is discharged to the lower plate 202 from the lower circular ball supply port 211c serving as a ball opening.

[2. Overall configuration of outer frame]
The outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 14 to 19. FIG. 14 is a front view of the outer frame of the pachinko machine, FIG. 15 is a rear view of the outer frame, and FIG. 16 is a right side view of the outer frame. FIG. 17 is a perspective view of the outer frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 18 is a perspective view of the outer frame as viewed from the back. FIG. 19 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame disassembled into main members and viewed from the front. The outer frame 2 is attached to an island facility (not shown) on which the pachinko machine 1 such as a game hall is installed. The outer frame 2 is formed in a rectangular frame in which the shape in a front view extends vertically.

  The outer frame 2 is, as shown in the figure, separated from the left and right and extending vertically, the left outer frame assembly 10 and the right outer frame assembly 20, and the left outer frame assembly 10 and the right outer frame assembly 20. Outer frame upper member 30 connecting upper ends, outer frame lower assembly 40 connecting lower ends of outer frame left assembly 10 and outer frame right assembly 20, and upper surface of outer frame upper member 30 An outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 attached to the left end, and an outer frame lower hinge member 60 attached to the lower right side surface of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the upper surface left end of the outer frame lower assembly 40 ing.

  In the outer frame 2, when the main body frame 4 is closed, the lower outer frame assembly 40 cooperates with the speaker unit 620 a of the substrate unit 620 in the main body frame 4 to form a part of the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 The sound outputted to the rear of the main body frame speaker 622 can be phase-reversed and emitted forward.

  The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 can detachably support the main frame upper hinge member 510 of the main body frame 4 of the outer frame 2. The outer frame 2 coaxially rotatably supports the main frame upper hinge member 510 of the main frame 4 and the main frame lower hinge assembly 520 by the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 and the outer frame lower hinge member 60. Thus, the main body frame 4 can be mounted so as to be openable and closable to the front centering on the left side in a front view.

[2-1. Outer frame left assembly and outer frame right assembly]
The outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIG. FIG. 20 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame left assembly and the outer frame right assembly of the outer frame, respectively, as viewed from the front. The outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 of the outer frame 2 extend in the vertical direction, and are spaced apart from each other in the left-right direction. The left outer frame assembly 10 and the right outer frame assembly 20 coaxially rotatably support the main frame upper hinge member 510 and the lower main frame hinge assembly 520 of the main frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2. It is for attaching the main body frame 4 so that opening and closing is possible.

  First, the outer frame left assembly 10 has an outer frame left member 11 extending vertically with a constant width (depth) in the front-rear direction, and an upper left connecting member 12 attached to the upper right end of the outer frame left member 11. And the lower left connecting member 13 attached to the lower end of the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11.

  The outer frame left member 11 extends up and down with a constant cross-sectional shape, and is formed of an aluminum alloy extruded material. The outer frame left member 11 is a portion from the side opposite to the concave portion 11a which is recessed to the right in a flat shape in the rear side portion of the left side in the front-rear direction divided into three, and the right side from the side opposite to the concave portion 11a The bulging part 11b bulging toward the direction and the hollow part 11c which penetrates the bulging part 11b up and down are provided. The outer frame left member 11 is enhanced in strength and rigidity by the concave portion 11a and the bulging portion 11b, and reduced in weight by the hollow portion 11c.

  Moreover, the outer frame left member 11 is formed with a plurality of grooves extending vertically in the left and right side surfaces. The plurality of grooves on the left side are formed in a V shape, and the plurality of grooves on the right side are formed in a semicircular shape. The outer frame left member 11 is formed to be symmetrical with the outer frame right member 21 of the outer frame right assembly 20 described later.

  The upper left connecting member 12 is for connecting the upper end of the outer frame left member 11 and the left end of the outer frame upper member 30. The upper left connecting member 12 includes a horizontally extending flat horizontal fixing portion 12a, a flat upper horizontal fixing portion 12b extending upward from the middle of the left side of the horizontal fixing portion 12a in the front-rear direction, and a horizontal fixing portion A flat plate-like pair of lower horizontal fixing portions 12c extending downward from the front and rear sides of the upper horizontal fixing portion 12b at the left side of 12a is provided. The upper left connecting member 12 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

  The upper left connecting member 12 inserts the lower horizontal fixing portion 12c on the rear side into the hollow portion 11c of the outer frame left member 11 and brings the horizontal fixing portion 12a into contact with the upper end of the outer frame left member 11 And in a state where the lower horizontal fixing portion 12c on the rear side is in contact with the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11, the screw is screwed into the lower horizontal fixing portion 12c from the outside of the left side surface of the outer frame left member 11 , Attached to the outer frame left member 11. The upper left connecting member 12 brings the horizontal fixing portion 12a into contact with the lower surface of the outer frame upper member 30 on the left end side, and inserts the upper horizontal fixing portion 12b into the notch 30a of the left side of the outer frame upper member 30. In this state, the screw is screwed into the outer frame upper member 30 through the horizontal fixing portion 12a and the upper horizontal fixing portion 12b, whereby the outer frame upper member 30 is attached.

  The lower left connecting member 13 is for connecting the lower end of the outer frame left member 11 and the left end of the outer frame lower assembly 40 (outer frame lower member 41). The lower left connecting member 13 is a flat horizontal fixing portion 13a extending horizontally and a flat upper horizontal portion extending upward from the left side of the horizontal fixing portion 13a and further rearward than the horizontal fixing portion 13a. The fixing portion 13b, a flat lower horizontal fixing portion 13c extending downward from a portion behind the horizontal fixing portion at the lower side of the upper horizontal fixing portion 13b, and the right side from the rear side of the upper horizontal fixing portion 13b And a flat contact portion 13d which extends short. The lower left connecting member 13 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

  The lower left connecting member 13 brings the rear surface of the contact portion 13d into contact with the front surface of the bulging portion 11b of the outer frame left member 11, and brings the left side of the upper horizontal fixing portion 13b into contact with the right surface of the outer frame left member 11. With the lower surface of the horizontal fixing portion 13a being in contact with the lower end of the outer frame left member 11, the screw is screwed into the upper horizontal fixing portion 13b from the outside of the left side surface of the outer frame left member 11 It is attached to the frame left member 11. The lower left connecting member 13 causes the horizontal fixing portion 13a to abut the upper surface of the outer frame lower member 41 on the left end side, and inserts the lower horizontal fixing portion 13c into the notch 41a on the left side of the outer frame lower member 41. In this state, the screw is attached to the outer frame lower member 41 by screwing a screw into the outer frame lower member through the horizontal fixing portion 13a and the lower horizontal fixing portion 13c.

  Next, the outer frame right assembly 20 has an outer frame right member 21 extending vertically with a constant width (depth) in the front-rear direction, and an upper right connecting member attached to the upper left end of the outer frame right member 21 22, the lower right connecting member 23 attached to the lower end of the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21, the upper hooking member 24 attached to the upper left side surface of the outer frame right member 21, and the outer frame right member 21. And a lower hooking member 25 attached to a lower portion of the left side surface.

  The outer frame right member 21 extends up and down with a constant cross-sectional shape, and is formed of an aluminum alloy extruded material. The outer frame right member 21 is provided with a recess 21a recessed leftwardly in a flat shape at the rear side of the right and left sides of the right and left sides from the front and back, and a left side from the side opposite to the recess 21a in the left side A bulging portion 21 b bulging in the direction, and a hollow portion 21 c penetrating the bulging portion 21 b up and down are provided. The outer frame right member 21 is enhanced in strength and rigidity by the recessed portion 21a and the bulging portion 21b, and reduced in weight by the hollow portion 21c.

  Further, the outer frame right member 21 is formed with a plurality of grooves extending vertically in the left and right side surfaces. The plurality of grooves on the right side is formed in a V shape, and the plurality of grooves on the left side is formed in a semicircular shape. The outer frame right member 21 is formed symmetrically with the outer frame left member 11 of the outer frame left assembly 10.

  The upper right connecting member 22 is for connecting the upper end of the outer frame right member 21 and the right end of the outer frame upper member 30. The upper right connecting member 22 includes a horizontally extending flat horizontal fixing portion 22a, a flat upper horizontal fixing portion 22b extending upward from the middle in the front-rear direction on the right side of the horizontal fixing portion 22a, and a horizontal fixing portion A flat plate-like pair of lower horizontal fixing portions 22c extending downward from the front and rear sides of the upper horizontal fixing portion 22b on the right side of the right side 22a are provided. The upper right connecting member 22 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

  The upper right connecting member 22 inserts the rear lower horizontal fixing portion 22c into the hollow portion 21c of the outer frame right member 21 and brings the horizontal fixing portion 22a into contact with the upper end of the outer frame right member 21 and further front side And in a state where the lower horizontal fixing portion 22c on the rear side is in contact with the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21, the screw is screwed into the lower horizontal fixing portion 22c from the outside of the right side surface of the outer frame right member 21 , Attached to the outer frame right member 21. Further, the upper right connecting member 22 brings the horizontal fixing portion 22a into contact with the lower surface of the right end of the outer frame upper member 30, and inserts the upper horizontal fixing portion 22b into the cutout 30a of the right side of the outer frame upper member 30. In this state, the screw is screwed into the outer frame upper member 30 through the horizontal fixing portion 22a and the upper horizontal fixing portion 22b, whereby the outer frame upper member 30 is attached.

  The lower right connecting member 23 is for connecting the lower end of the outer frame right member 21 and the right end of the outer frame lower assembly 40 (outer frame lower member 41). The lower right connecting member 23 is a flat plate-like horizontal fixing portion 23a extending horizontally, and a flat plate-like upper portion extending upward from the right side of the horizontal fixing portion 23a and further rearward than the horizontal fixing portion 23a. A horizontal fixing portion 23b, a flat lower horizontal fixing portion 23c extending downward from a portion behind the horizontal fixing portion at the lower side of the upper horizontal fixing portion 23b, and a left side from the rear side of the upper horizontal fixing portion 23b And a flat contact portion 23d extending short in the direction. The lower right connecting member 23 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

  The lower right connecting member 23 causes the rear surface of the contact portion 23d to abut on the front surface of the bulging portion 21b of the outer frame right member 21, and the right side surface of the upper horizontal fixing portion 23b to the left surface of the outer frame right member 21. By screwing a screw into the upper horizontal fixing portion 23b from the outside of the right side surface of the outer frame right member 21 in a state in which the lower surface of the horizontal fixing portion 23a is in contact with the lower end of the outer frame right member 21 It is attached to the outer frame right member 21. The lower right connecting member 23 causes the horizontal fixing portion 23a to abut the upper surface of the right end of the outer frame lower member 41, and inserts the lower horizontal fixing portion 23c into the cutout 41a of the right side of the outer frame lower member 41. In this state, the screw is attached to the outer frame lower member 41 by screwing a screw into the outer frame lower member through the horizontal fixing portion 23a and the lower horizontal fixing portion 23c.

  The upper hooking member 24 and the lower hooking member 25 are members to which an outer frame collar 653 of a locking unit 650 in the main body frame 4 described later is hooked. The upper hooking member 24 extends vertically from the front side of the mounting portion 24a to a flat mounting portion 24a that extends vertically with a constant width in the front-rear direction and is attached to the left side of the outer frame right member 21 And a flat plate-like locking piece portion 24b on which the outer frame collar 653 at the upper side is locked.

  The lower hooking member 25 extends up and down with a constant width in the front-rear direction, and extends from the front side of the mounting portion 25a to the left from a flat mounting portion 25a attached to the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21 The flat-plate shaped hooking piece 25b on which the lower outer frame collar 653 is locked and the insertion through which the lower outer frame collar 653 can be inserted through the hooking piece 25b. And a mouth 25c.

[2-2. Outer frame upper member]
The outer frame upper member 30 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIG. The outer frame upper member 30 is for connecting the upper ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 which are separated to the left and right. The outer frame upper member 30 has a width in the longitudinal direction substantially the same as the longitudinal direction of the outer frame left member 11 and the outer frame right member 21 and has a constant thickness in the vertical direction and extends in the lateral direction. It is formed by The outer frame upper member 30 is formed to have the same length in the left-right direction as the length in the left-right direction of the outer frame lower member 41 of the outer frame lower assembly 40 described later.

  The outer frame upper member 30 is provided with a notch 30a that is recessed to the center in the left-right direction in a state of penetrating vertically at the center in the front-rear direction on both left and right side surfaces. The upper horizontal fixing portion 12b of the upper left connecting member 12 and the upper horizontal fixing portion 22b of the upper right connecting member 22 are respectively inserted into the left and right notches 30a.

  Moreover, the outer frame upper member 30 is provided with the attachment step part 30b in which the upper surface and front surface were recessed rather than the general surface in the left side edge part. An outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 described later is attached to the attachment step 30b.

[2-3. Outer frame lower assembly]
The outer frame lower assembly 40 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIG. FIG. 21 is an exploded perspective view of the lower outer frame assembly of the outer frame as viewed from the front. The lower outer frame assembly 40 connects the lower ends of the left outer frame assembly 10 and the right outer frame assembly 20 spaced apart to the left and right, and closes the lower side of the door frame 3 in the pachinko machine 1. It is for decoration.

  The outer frame lower assembly 40 connects the lower ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 which are separated left and right, and extends in the left and right direction; A box-shaped front curtain member 42 which is disposed forward of the member 41 and extends left and right along the outer frame lower member 41 and whose rear is open, and is attached to the rear side of the front curtain member 42 And a box-shaped rear curtain plate member 43 attached to the upper surface of the outer frame lower member 41 and extending forwardly open, and a ball biting prevention formed on the left end of the upper surface of the rear curtain plate member 43 And a mechanism 44.

  The outer frame lower member 41 has a width in the longitudinal direction substantially the same as the longitudinal direction of the outer frame left member 11 and the outer frame right member 21 and has a constant thickness in the vertical direction and extends in the lateral direction. It is formed by The outer frame lower member 41 is formed to have the same length in the left-right direction as the length in the left-right direction of the outer frame upper member 30.

  The outer frame lower member 41 is provided with notches 41 a that are respectively recessed to the left and right center sides in a state of penetrating vertically at the centers of the left and right side surfaces in the front and rear direction. The lower horizontal fixing portion 13c of the lower left connecting member 13 and the lower horizontal fixing portion 23c of the lower right connecting member 23 are attached to the cutouts 41a at the left and right ends, respectively. Thereby, the lower ends of the outer frame left member 11 and the outer frame right member 21 can be connected.

  Further, the outer frame lower member 41 is recessed from the upper surface, and is provided with a recess 41 b into which the lower portion of the rear curtain plate member 43 is inserted. The concave portion 41 b extends in the left and right direction, and extends from the rear position of the center in the front-rear direction to the front end side. The recessed portion 41 b widens the volume of the inner space 40 a of the curtain plate formed by the front plate member 42 and the rear plate member 43 as much as possible.

  The front curtain plate member 42 is formed in a horizontally-long rectangular parallelepiped box shape whose length in the left-right direction extends to the same length as the outer frame lower member 41, and the depth in the front-rear direction is short with respect to the height The entire rear side is open. The front curtain member 42 closes the open rear side with the rear curtain plate member 43 so as to cooperate with the rear curtain plate member 43 to be part of the enclosure 624 of the main frame speaker 622 The space 40a is formed. The front curtain member 42 has an elongated opening 42a penetrating in the front and back direction and extending in the left and right direction on the front surface near the right end.

  The rear curtain plate member 43 has a length in the left-right direction extending slightly shorter than that of the outer frame lower member 41, and is formed in a box shape whose front is open. The rear curtain plate member 43 cooperates with the front curtain plate member 42 to form the inner curtain plate space 40 a which becomes a part of the enclosure 624 of the main frame speaker 622 by attaching the front curtain plate member 42 to the front. The rear curtain plate member 43 has a cylindrical connection cylindrical portion 43a which extends in the left and right direction and protrudes upward and communicates with the inner curtain plate space 40a at the center in the left-right direction on the upper surface. The connecting cylindrical portion 43 a is inclined such that the upper end thereof is positioned upward from the front end side, which coincides with the general upper surface of the rear curtain plate 43, toward the rear. In the present embodiment, the upper end of the connection cylindrical portion 43a is inclined at an angle of 45 degrees.

  The connecting cylindrical portion 43a has a length in the left-right direction which is about 1/3 the length of the entire rear curtain plate member 43, and a depth in the front-rear direction is greater than the depth of the entire rear curtain plate member 43. Is also formed slightly short. In the connection cylindrical portion 43a, a plurality of ribs 43b connecting the front end side and the rear end side are provided. The connection portion 621c of the speaker cover 621 of the speaker unit 620a of the board unit 620 in the main body frame 4 is connected to the upper end of the connection cylindrical portion 43a when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. In communication with the internal space of 620 a, an enclosure 624 is formed.

  In the ball biting prevention mechanism 44, the gaming ball B is retained at the portion of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 at the left end of the upper surface of the curtain plate rear member 43, so that the gaming ball B is held between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4. It is for preventing that it is pinched.

  The ball biting prevention mechanism 44 is formed at the left end of the upper surface of the curtain plate rear member 43, and is provided with a mounting portion 44a formed flat so that the outer frame lower hinge member 60 to be described later may be involved; A first discharge port 44b opened upward at the left end of the left end 44a, and a second discharge port 44c opened upward on the right side of the first discharge port 44b in the mounting portion 44a; An upright wall portion 44d extending upward from the rear side and the right side of the resting portion 44a, and an upper end projection projecting forward from the upper end of the upright wall portion 44d and inclined to be positioned upward as the upper surface goes rearward And a unit 44e.

  The first discharge port 44 b is formed at a position that matches the discharge hole 60 d of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 described later. The first discharge port 44b and the second discharge port 44c are formed in a size that allows the game ball B to pass through. The first discharge port 44 b and the second discharge port 44 c do not communicate with the inner space 40 a of the curtain plate, and open at the rear surface of the curtain plate rear member 43. Therefore, the gaming ball B that has entered the first discharge port 44 b and the second discharge port 44 c can be discharged to the rear of the rear curtain plate member 43.

  In the ball biting prevention mechanism 44, when the ball biting preventing mechanism 44 is inserted into a gap between the outer frame lower hinge member 60 and the main frame lower hinge assembly 520 described later, an incorrect tool such as a piano wire is inserted. The rising wall portion 44d rising from the rear end of the mounting portion 44a can prevent unauthorized tool entry. Even if the tip of the incorrect tool abuts against the upright wall portion 44d, even if it is bent upward, it abuts on the forwardly projecting upper end projecting portion 44e provided on the upper end of the upright wall portion 44d, and further intrusion Can be blocked. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the fraudulent action from being performed through the portion of the outer frame lower hinge member 60.

  By the way, when the standing wall portion 44d is provided at the rear end of the placing portion 44a, when the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2, the gaming ball B dropped onto the placing portion 44a for some reason is the standing wall portion Since the movement of the outer frame 2 to the rear is blocked by 44d, the gaming ball B is easily retained on the placement portion 44a. Then, when the game ball B is staying on the placement portion 44a, when the main body frame 4 is closed to the outer frame 2, the game ball B is sandwiched between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 As a result, there arises a problem that the body frame 4 can not be closed.

  On the other hand, in the ball biting prevention mechanism 44 of the present embodiment, the game ball B dropped on the outer frame lower hinge member 60 or the placement portion 44a is discharged from the discharge hole 60d of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 and the first discharge. The game ball B can be discharged to the rear of the rear curtain plate member 43 (rearward of the outer frame 2) through the outlet 44b or through the second discharge port 44c, so that the game is performed between the outer frame 2 and the main frame 4 It is possible to prevent the ball B from being pinched.

  The lower outer frame assembly 40 closes a pair of guide members 45 disposed on the upper surfaces of the front and rear curtain plate members 42 and 43 at a distance to the left and right and the opening 42a of the front curtain plate member 42 from the rear side. A flat plate-like grill member 46, and a port member 47 having two cylinders extending in the front and rear direction and attached to the inside of the front curtain plate member 42 so as to close the opening 42a across the grill member 46; And a frame-like seal member 48 disposed at the upper end of the connection cylindrical portion 43 a of the rear curtain plate member 43.

  When the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the lower end of the door frame 3 abuts on the pair of guide members 45. The guide member 45 is formed of a low friction material having low friction resistance, and the lower end of the main body frame 4 is made slippery to facilitate opening and closing.

  The grill member 46 is formed of punching metal having innumerable small holes. The port member 47 communicates the curtain inner space 40 a (the enclosure 624) with the front of the outer frame 2 through the grill member 46 by two cylinders. In the port member 47, two cylinders are formed with a predetermined inner diameter and a predetermined length, and resonate and amplify the bass emitted from the main body frame speaker 622 to the rear (in the enclosure 624) according to the principle of Helmholtz resonance. Thus, rich bass can be radiated to the front of the outer frame 2 (player's side). That is, in the present embodiment, the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 is of a bass reflex type, so that the player can hear a deep bass.

  The seal member 48 is compressed between the upper end of the connection cylindrical portion 43a and the lower end of the connection portion 621c of the speaker cover 621 in the main body frame 4 when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. Thus, it is possible to prevent the sound in the enclosure of the speaker from leaking between the connection cylindrical portion 43a and the connection portion 621c.

[2-4. Outer frame and upper hinge assembly]
The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIG. Fig.22 (a) is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the outer frame upper hinge assembly of the outer frame 2 and was seen from the front upper side, (b) is the disassembled perspective view which looked at (a) from the front lower side. The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 is attached to the upper end of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the left end of the outer frame upper member 30, and is for attaching the main frame 4 to the outer frame 2 so as to be hinge rotatable. It is. The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 is attached to the outer frame upper hinge member 51 attached to the upper end of the recess 11 a of the outer frame left member 11 and the mounting step 30 b of the outer frame upper member 30 and the outer frame upper hinge member 51 And an attachment screw 53 for attaching the lock member 52 to the outer frame upper hinge member 51.

  The outer frame upper hinge member 51 extends from the front side of the upper fixing portion 51a to the upper fixing portion 51a attached to the upper surface of the mounting step portion 30b of the outer frame upper member 30 and extends horizontally from the front side of the upper fixing portion 51a. A flat front extension 51b, a bearing groove 51c extending to the left and right center of the front extension 51b from the middle of the right side of the front extension 51b and penetrating vertically, and an upper fixing portion The plate-like horizontal fixing portion 51d extending downward from the left side of 51a, and extending downward from the end edge to the portion where the bearing groove 51c is open from the left side to the front side of the front extension 51b And a flat plate-like end edge wall 51e which is continuous with the cage horizontal fixing portion 51d. The outer frame upper hinge member 51 is formed by punching and bending a metal plate by press molding. The outer frame upper hinge member 51 can rotatably support a later-described main frame upper hinge pin 512 of the main frame upper hinge member 510 in the bearing groove 51c.

  The lock member 52 has a strip-shaped lock main body 52a extending in the front and rear direction, an operation piece 52b projecting rightward from the rear end of the lock main body 52a, and a left side extending from the rear end of the lock main body 52a. An elastically deformable rod-like elastic portion 52c extending diagonally forward to the left and an attachment hole 52d penetrating vertically in the vicinity of the rear end of the lock main body 52a are provided. The lock member 52 is formed of a synthetic resin. The lock member 52 is rotatably attached to the rear side of the bearing groove 51c on the lower surface of the front extension 51b of the outer frame upper hinge member 51 by the mounting screw 53.

  With the lock member 52 attached to the outer frame upper hinge member 51, the lock main body 52a can block the bearing groove 51c in plan view, and the right side near the front end is the end of the outer frame upper hinge member 51. It extends forward so as to be able to abut on a portion of the edge wall 51e which extends to the opening of the bearing groove 51c. Further, the tip end of the elastic portion 52 c extending leftward from the rear end of the lock main body 52 a is in contact with the inner peripheral surface of the end edge wall portion 51 e of the outer frame upper hinge member 51. The lock member 52 is biased in a direction such that the front end pivots to the left around the attachment hole 52d by the biasing force of the elastic portion 52c. Therefore, in the normal state, the right side surface in the vicinity of the front end of the lock main body 52a of the lock member 52 is in contact with the edge wall 51e. In this state, a space capable of accommodating the main frame upper hinge pin 512 of the main frame upper hinge member 510 is formed in a portion on the front side of the lock main body 52a in the bearing groove 51c.

  The lock member 52 can rotate the lock main body 52a against the biasing force of the elastic portion 52c by operating the operation piece 52b. Then, the lock body 52a can be retracted from the bearing groove 51c in plan view by rotating the lock body 52a in the direction in which the front end moves leftward by the operation of the operation piece 52b, and the bearing groove 51c Can be completely through. Thereby, the main frame upper hinge pin 512 can be inserted into the bearing groove 51c, or the main frame upper hinge pin 512 can be removed from the inside of the bearing groove 51c.

[2-5. Outer frame lower hinge member]
The outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIG. The outer frame lower hinge member 60 includes a horizontally extending flat plate-like horizontal portion 60a, and a flat plate-like rising portion 60b rising upward from a portion behind the center in the front-rear direction on the left side of the horizontal portion 60a. And an outer frame lower hinge pin 60c projecting upward from the vicinity of the front end of the horizontal portion 60a; and a discharge hole 60d which has a size that allows the game ball B to pass through vertically through the horizontal portion 60a. ing. The outer frame lower hinge member 60 is formed by punching and bending a metal plate by press molding.

  The horizontal portion 60a of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 is formed in a trapezoidal shape with the left side as the base in a plan view. The outer frame lower hinge pin 60c has a cylindrical shape and is formed in a truncated cone shape whose upper end is narrowed at the upper end than the center in the vertical direction. The outer frame lower hinge pin 60c is attached at a left position near the front end of the horizontal portion 60a. The discharge hole 60d is formed in the horizontal portion 60a so as to be in contact with a central portion of the upright portion 60b in the front-rear direction, and extends in a reverse U shape from the left side of the horizontal portion 60a to the right. The discharge hole 60 d is formed to have substantially the same size as the first discharge port 44 b of the ball bite prevention mechanism 44 in the outer frame lower assembly 40.

  The lower portion of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 is mounted on the mounting portion 44a of the rear curtain plate member 43 in the outer frame lower assembly 40 in the state assembled to the outer frame 2, and a screw not shown Is fixed to the rear curtain member 43 by the Further, the rising portion 60 b is attached to a portion on the front side of the bulging portion 11 b in the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11 by a screw (not shown). The outer frame lower hinge member 60 cooperates with the outer frame upper hinge member 51 by inserting the outer frame lower hinge pin 60 c into the outer frame lower hinge hole 521 a in the main frame lower hinge assembly 520 of the main frame 4. Then, the main body frame 4 can be attached so as to be able to open and close.

  Further, in the assembled state of the outer frame 2, the discharge hole 60 d matches the first discharge port 44 b of the anti-ball bite mechanism 44 in the outer frame lower assembly 40. Thereby, the game ball B on the horizontal portion 60a can be dropped (discharged) to the rear of the outer frame 2 through the discharge hole 60d and the first discharge port 44b. More specifically, when closing the main frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2, the game ball B dropped between the outer frame 2 and the main frame 4 is closed as the main frame 4 is closed. Since the gap between 4 and 4 gradually narrows, it rolls to the rear side where the distance is wide, and can be discharged from the discharge hole 60d. At this time, the discharge hole 60d is formed at a position substantially the same as the rear end of the main body frame 4 when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 in a state assembled to the pachinko machine 1. The game balls B dropped between the outer frame 2 and the main frame 4 can be more easily prevented from rolling backward than the main frame 4 by discharging the game balls B from the discharge holes 60 d. It is possible to make it difficult for the gaming ball B to stay at the portion of the lower hinge member 60.

[3. Overall configuration of the door frame]
The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 23 is a front view of a door frame in a pachinko machine, FIG. 24 is a rear view of the door frame, FIG. 25 is a left side view of the door frame, and FIG. 26 is a right side view of the door frame. 27 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the front right, FIG. 28 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the front left, and FIG. 29 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the rear. FIG. 30 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled into main members and viewed from the front, and FIG. 31 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled into main members and viewed from the rear.

  The door frame 3 has a substantially the same size as the inside of the frame of the outer frame 2 and is formed in a rectangular shape extending in the vertical direction in a front view, and the inside of the frame of the outer frame 2 can be attached openably from the front side It is done. The door frame 3 closes the gaming area 5a of the gaming board 5 in which the gaming ball B is struck so as to be visible from the front side, stores the gaming ball B for hitting into the gaming area 5a, and stores the gaming It has a handle 182 operated by the player in order to drive the ball B into the game area 5a. Moreover, the door frame 3 decorates the whole front of the pachinko machine 1.

  The door frame 3 is a rectangular frame-shaped door frame base unit 100 whose outer shape in the front view extends vertically, and the game board 5 which is removably attached to the door frame base unit 100 and attached to the main body frame 4 A glass unit 160 closing the gaming area 5a so as to be visible from the front, a crime prevention cover 170 attached to the door frame base unit 100 so as to cover the lower part of the glass unit 160 from the rear side, A handle unit 180 attached to the front lower right corner, a pan unit 200 mounted to the lower front of the door frame base unit 100, and a front upper portion of the door frame base unit 100 above the pan unit 200. The door frame left side unit 400 is attached to the front right side of the door frame base unit 100 above the plate unit A frame right side unit 410, and a door frame top unit 450 which is attached to the upper front portion of the door frame base unit 100 at the upper side of the door frame left side unit 400 and the door frame right side unit 410, a.

  The door frame base unit 100 has a door frame base 101 having a door window 101 a which is formed in a rectangular shape (rectangular shape) in which the outer shape of the front view extends vertically, and the front right of the door frame base 101 Handle attachment member 102 attached below, speaker duct 103 attached to the lower right corner in rear view on the rear side of the door frame base 101, and attached near the rear end right end in the lower part on the rear side of the door frame base 101 The door frame main relay board 104, the door frame sub relay board 105 mounted on the left side of the door frame main relay board 104, and the door frame sub relay board 105 on the left side A door frame relay board cover 107 that covers the rear handlebar relay board 106, the door frame main relay board 104, and part of the door frame sub relay board 105 from the rear side, and the handlebar relay board 106 from the rear side A handle after the relay board cover 108 for covering a cable cover 109 for covering the distribution cable, and a.

  In addition, the door frame base unit 100 includes a frame-shaped door frame reinforcing unit 110 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101, and a door frame upper hinge assembly 120 attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110 and a door A frame lower hinge member 125, a cylinder lock 130 for opening and closing attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and a ball feeding unit 140 attached above the rear handle relay board 106 on the rear side of the door frame base 101. And a foul cover unit 150 mounted on the right of the rear lower portion of the door frame base 101 in a rear view.

  The door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 to reinforce the door frame base 101 and impart rigidity. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 and the door frame lower hinge member 125 are for attaching the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4 so as to be able to open and close. The cylinder lock 130 is used for opening and closing the door frame 3 and the body frame 4 and for opening and closing the outer frame 2 and the body frame 4 in cooperation with the locking unit 650 of the body frame 4.

  Further, the ball feeding unit 140 is for supplying the gaming balls B in the upper tray 201 one by one to the ball launching device 540 of the main body frame 4. Also, the foul cover unit 150 guides the game ball B (fowl ball) that has been fired with a weak launch force by the ball launcher 540 and has not reached the gaming area 5 a of the gaming board 5 to the lower tray 202 and The game balls B paid out from the payout device 580 are to be guided to the upper tray 201 or the lower tray 202.

  The glass unit 160 has a transparent glass plate 162 and closes the door window 101 a of the door frame base 101. The crime prevention cover 170 is attached to the door frame base 101 so as to cover the lower part of the glass unit 160 from the rear. The handle unit 180 is provided with a handle 182 which can be operated by the player. By operating the handle 182, the game ball B in the upper tray 201 can be inserted into the game area 5a of the game board 5 by the ball launcher 540. To

[3-1. Overall configuration of door frame base unit]
The door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. Fig. 32 (a) is a perspective view of the door frame base unit of the door frame as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the door frame base unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 33 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled into main members and viewed from the front, and FIG. 34 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled into main members and viewed from the rear is there.

  The door frame base unit 100 is mounted on the left side in a front view in a hinge rotatable manner with respect to the main body frame 4 and closes the front of the main body frame 4 so as to be openable and closable. The game area is visible from the front. The door frame base unit 100 has a rectangular, flat door frame base 101 whose outer shape extends vertically, and a handle attachment member 102 attached to the front lower right of the door frame base 101 for attaching the handle unit 180. And a speaker duct 103 attached to the lower right corner in a rear view on the rear side of the door frame base 101.

  In addition, the door frame base unit 100 is a door frame main relay board 104 mounted near the right end in the rear view in the lower portion on the rear side of the door frame base 101 and a door frame main relay in the lower portion on the rear side of the door frame base 101 A door frame sub relay board 105 attached to the left side of the rear view of the substrate 104 and a handle back relay board attached to the left side of the door frame sub relay board 105 at the lower rear side of the door frame base 101 106, a door frame relay board cover 107 mounted on the rear side of the door frame base 101 and covering the door frame main relay board 104 and a part of the door frame sub relay board 105 from the rear side, the door frame base 101 The back handle handle relay board cover 108 is attached to the back of the handlebar and covers the handle back handle relay board 106 from the back side, and is attached to the back side of the door frame base 101 to cover the wiring cable. And Burukaba 109, and a.

  Further, the door frame base unit 100 includes a frame-like door frame reinforcing unit 110 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101, and a door frame upper hinge assembly 120 and a door attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110. A frame lower hinge member 125, a cylinder lock 130 for opening and closing attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and a ball feeding unit 140 attached above the rear handle relay board 106 on the rear side of the door frame base 101. And a foul cover unit 150 mounted on the right of the rear lower portion of the door frame base 101 in a rear view.

  In the door frame base unit 100, the handle unit 180 is in the front lower corner, the dish unit 200 is in the lower front of the door window 101a, the door frame left side unit 400 is in the front left outside of the door window 101a, and A door frame right side unit 410 is attached to the right outer front, and a door frame top unit 450 is attached to the upper outer front of the door window 101a.

  Further, the glass frame 160 is attached to the door frame base unit 100 so as to close the door window 101a from the rear, and the transparent crime prevention cover 170 is attached to cover the lower part of the glass unit 160 from the rear. .

[3-1-1. Door frame base]
The door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The door frame base 101 is formed in a quadrangle (rectangle) in which the outer shape in a front view extends vertically. The door frame base 101 is penetrated back and forth, and is provided with the door window 101a formed in a substantially rectangular shape whose inner peripheral shape in a front view extends vertically. The upper side and the left and right sides forming the inner periphery of the door window 101a approach the outer periphery of the door frame base 101 respectively, and the lower side forming the inner periphery is from the lower end of the door frame base 101 vertically It is located at a height of about 1/3 of the direction. Thus, the door frame base 101 is formed in a frame shape as a whole by the door window 101 a penetrating in the front and back direction. The door frame base 101 is integrally molded of synthetic resin.

  The door frame base 101 is formed at the front right lower corner of the front view and is inclined such that the left end side protrudes slightly more forward than the right end side, the handle mounting surface 101b, and the door window 101a. Between the front end and the insertion recess 101c in which the cylinder mounting frame 115 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 is inserted and the insertion recess 101c penetrates back and forth in the cylinder lock 130 The cylinder insertion hole 101d into which the cylinder main body 131 is inserted, and the cylinder insertion hole 101d and the handle mounting surface 101b are penetrated back and forth in front view left side, and the entrance 141a and the ball outlet 141b of the ball feeding unit 140 And a ball feed opening 101e for facing the

  The door frame base 101 penetrates back and forth at the same height as the handle mounting seat surface 101b to the left of the center in the left-right direction and penetrates the ball outlet 150d of the far cover unit 150 forward for the lower bowl ball A passing hole 101f, a ball passing hole 101g for the upper tray which penetrates forward and backward through the ball passage 150a of the far cover unit 150 so as to penetrate forward and backward adjacent to the lower side of the door window 101a near the left end in front view And a glass unit attachment portion 101h into which the glass frame 161 of the glass unit 160 is inserted, which is recessed forward from the rear surface along the inner periphery of the window 101a.

  Further, the door frame base 101 is provided with a plurality of vertically elongated slits 101i which are formed at the lower left corner (below the ball passage opening 101g for the upper plate) in a front view and penetrate through the front and rear. The speaker duct 103 is attached to the rear side of the plurality of slits 101i. In the state where the pachinko machine 1 is assembled, the plurality of slits 101i has the speaker opening 211b of the plate unit base 211 of the plate unit 200 located forward and the main body frame of the speaker unit 620a of the main body frame 4 rearward. The speaker 622 is located, and the sound from the main body frame speaker 622 can be emitted forward.

  Furthermore, the door frame base 101 is provided with a through hole 101 j which passes through in the front and rear direction below the door window 101 a and above the handle mounting seat surface 101 b. A wiring cable (not shown) for connecting the door frame base unit 100 side and the plate unit 200 side is inserted through the through hole 101 j, and the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 in the door frame reinforcing unit 110 to be described later penetrates It is formed to coincide with the portion 114b.

[3-1-2. Handle mounting member]
The handle attachment member 102 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The handle attachment member 102 is for attaching a handle unit to the front surface of the door frame base 101, and is attached to the handle attachment seat surface 101 b on the front surface of the door frame base 101.

  The handle mounting member 102 includes a cylindrical tubular portion 102a extending in the front-rear direction, an annular flange portion 102b extending outward in a direction perpendicular to the axis of the tubular portion 102a from the rear end of the cylindrical portion 102a, and a tubular A plurality of (three in this example) ridges 102c which project into the portion 102a and extend over the entire axial length of the cylindrical portion 102a and are arranged at irregular intervals with respect to the circumferential direction of the cylindrical portion 102a The outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical portion 102a and the front surface of the flange portion 102b are connected to each other, and a plurality of reinforcing ribs 102d arranged in the circumferential direction of the cylindrical portion 102a are provided.

  The handle attachment member 102 is attached to the handle attachment seat surface 101 b with a screw in a state where the rear surface of the flange portion 102 b is in contact with the front surface of the handle attachment seat surface 101 b of the door frame base 101.

  The cylindrical portion 102 a is formed to have an inner diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the base portion 181 a of the handle base 181 in the handle unit 180. One of the three ridges 102c is provided on the upper portion of the cylindrical portion 102a, and the remaining two are provided on the lower portion of the cylindrical portion 102a. The three ridges 102 c are formed at positions corresponding to the three grooves 181 c in the handle base 181. Therefore, the handle attachment member 102 can insert the base portion 181a of the handle base 181 into the cylindrical portion 102a only in a state in which the three ridges 102c and the three groove portions 181c of the handle base 181 coincide with each other. The rotational position of the handle base 181 (handle unit 180) can be regulated with respect to the door frame base 101.

  The handle mounting member 102 is mounted on the inclined handle mounting surface 101b of the door frame base 101 because the axis of the cylindrical portion 102a extends perpendicularly to the rear surface of the flange 102b. The axis of the cylindrical portion 102a is inclined so as to extend to the right front, and the handle unit 180 can be attached to the door frame base 101 in a similar inclined state.

[3-1-3. Speaker duct]
The speaker duct 103 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The speaker duct 103 is formed in a tubular shape, and is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 at a portion where a plurality of slits 101i are formed. When the speaker duct 103 is in a state where the pachinko machine 1 is assembled, the rear end of the cylindrical portion is located in front of the main body frame speaker 622 of the main body frame 4. Thereby, the sound (sound) radiated (output) from the main body frame speaker 622 of the main body frame 4 can be guided forward without being diffused, and the plurality of slits 101i of the door frame base 101 and the plate unit 200 The player can be favorably guided to the front (player side) of the pachinko machine 1 through the speaker opening 211 b of the dish unit base 211.

  Moreover, the speaker duct 103 is equipped with the cable holder 103a which hold | maintains the connection cable 503 in the back surface of the downward direction of a cylindrical site | part. The cable holder 103 a is disposed to the left of the door frame relay board cover 107 in a front view, and the connection cable 503 connected to the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 is the same as that of the door frame 3. It is held so as to extend to the left end side.

[3-1-4. Door frame main relay board / door frame sub relay board / handle back relay board]
The door frame main relay board 104, the door frame sub relay board 105, and the handle back relay board 106 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. The door frame main relay substrate 104 is formed in a rectangular shape whose outer shape extends in the vertical direction, and is attached to the lower right corner of the rear lower portion of the door frame base 101 in a rear view. The door frame main relay board 104 is for relaying the connection between the handle back relay board 106 and the interface board 635 in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4, and the connection cable 503 extending from the main body frame 4 (FIG. And FIG. 100) are connected.

  The outer shape of the door frame sub relay board 105 is formed in an inverted L shape in which a quadrangle extending right and left on the front view right side of the upper part of the quadrangle extending vertically is combined and extends vertically. It is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 so as to be adjacent to the left of the frame main relay board 104 in a rear view. The door frame sub relay board 105 includes the handle decoration board 184 of the handle unit 180, the plate unit relay board 214 of the dish unit 200, the door frame left side decoration board 402 of the door frame left side unit 400, and the side of the door frame right side unit 410. It is for relaying the connection between the in-window decoration portion decoration substrate 413 and the door frame right side decoration substrate 418, the door frame top relay substrate 467 of the door frame top unit 450, etc. and the interface substrate 635 of the main body frame 4. The rest of the connection cable 503 extending from the body frame 4 is connected.

  The door frame main relay substrate 104 and the door frame sub relay substrate 105 are attached to the door frame base 101 such that the connection terminals project rearward. In the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105, the door frame main relay board 104 and the parts extending above and below the door frame sub relay board 105 with the door frame base unit 100 assembled are The rear side is covered by the frame relay board cover 107, and the remaining part of the door frame sub relay board 105 is covered by the rear cover unit 150.

  The handle back relay board 106 is formed in a rectangular shape whose outer shape extends to the left and right, and is attached to the rear side of the handle mounting surface 101 b below the ball feeding opening 101 e on the rear side of the door frame base 101. The handle back relay board 106 is connected to the door frame main relay board 104 and the handle rotation detection sensor 189 of the handle unit 180, the handle touch sensor 192, the single button operation sensor 194, and the ball feed solenoid 145 of the ball feed unit 140. To relay the When the door frame base unit 100 is assembled, the handle back relay board 106 is in a state in which the rear side is covered by the handle back relay board cover 108.

[3-1-5. Door frame relay board cover · handle back relay board cover · cable cover]
The door frame relay board cover 107, the back handle handle relay board cover 108, and the cable cover 109 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. By attaching the door frame relay board cover 107 to the rear side of the door frame base 101, the back of the door frame main relay board 104 and a part of the door frame sub relay board (a part extending in the reverse L shape up and down) It covers the side. The door frame relay board cover 107 is formed in a box shape whose front and left in front view are open. In the state assembled to the door frame base unit 100, the connection terminals of the door frame main relay board 104 covering the rear side and the door frame sub relay board 105 are exposed inside the door frame relay board cover 107 and are opened. The connection cable 503 can be inserted into the inside from the left side and connected to those terminals.

  The handle back relay board cover 108 is attached to the back side of the door frame base 101 so as to cover the back side of the handle back relay board 106. The cable cover 109 is attached to the rear side of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 in the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and a wiring cable (not shown) for connecting the door frame main relay board 104 and the ball lending operation unit 220 of the plate unit 200 is used. It is for coating. The cable cover 109 is formed in a box shape extending in the left and right direction, and an opening for passing the wiring cable is formed in the vicinity of the left end of the front surface and in the center in the left and right direction of the lower surface.

[3-1-6. Door frame reinforcement unit]
The door frame reinforcing unit 110 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 to reinforce the flat door frame base 101 and impart rigidity to the door frame base unit 100. The door frame reinforcing unit 110 is connected to the left reinforcing frame 111 and the right reinforcing frame 112 extending up and down, which are disposed apart from each other on the left and right, and the left and the right connecting the upper ends of the left reinforcing frame 111 and the right reinforcing frame 112. An upper reinforcement frame 113 which has been extended, an intermediate reinforcement frame 114 which is attached at the upper end from the lower end of the left reinforcement frame 111 to the left and extends rightward to the vicinity of the right reinforcement frame 112, and the right end of the intermediate reinforcement frame 114 A plurality of cylinder mounting frames 115 connecting the right reinforcing frame 112, and a plurality of vertically spaced apart mountings on the rear side of the right reinforcing frame 112, door frame hooks 652 of the locking unit 650 of the main body frame 4 are hooked And the hooking member 116.

  The left reinforcing frame 111 and the right reinforcing frame 112 have a constant width in the left-right direction, and extend in the vertical direction at substantially the same height as the vertical height of the door frame base 101. The right reinforcing frame 112 is formed with a plurality of insertion holes which are vertically separated and penetrated in the front-rear direction. In these insertion holes, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the tip of the door frame wedge 652 of the locking unit 650 is inserted. The upper reinforcing frame 113 has a constant width in the vertical direction, and extends in the left and right direction with substantially the same length as the width of the door frame base 101.

  The intermediate reinforcing frame 114 extends in the left-right direction with a width wider than the vertical width of the upper reinforcing frame 113 in the vertical direction. The intermediate reinforcing frame 114 has a notch 114a which is notched in a square shape from the upper end in the vicinity of the left end, and a penetrating portion 114b penetrating in the front-rear direction near the right end. The notch portion 114 a is formed at a position at which the upper plate ball passage opening 101 g of the door frame base 101 and the through portion 114 b coincide with the through hole 101 j of the door frame base 101.

  The cylinder mounting frame 115 is disposed to be separated from each other in the left and right direction, and has a pair of rear piece portions formed in a rectangular flat plate shape extending in the vertical direction in front view, and a pair of rear piece portions facing each other. A pair of side piece portions extending flatly forward from the side and a flat plate-like front piece portion connecting the sides of the front ends of the pair of front extending portions are provided. The cylinder mounting frame 115 is formed in a convex shape in which the shape in plan view is projected forward. In the cylinder mounting frame 115, the left rear piece is attached to the right end of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114, and the right rear piece is attached to the right reinforcing frame 112. The cylinder lock 130 is attached to the front piece of the cylinder attachment frame 115.

  The hooking member 116 is attached to the rear side of the right reinforcing frame 112 at the site of the insertion hole penetrating in the front and rear direction. A door frame hook 652 of the locking unit 650 is hooked to the hooking member 116.

  The left reinforcing frame 111, the right reinforcing frame 112, the upper reinforcing frame 113, the intermediate reinforcing frame 114, the cylinder mounting frame 115, and the hooking member 116 constituting the door frame reinforcing unit 110 are stamped and formed of a metal plate by press molding. It is formed by bending. These are assembled by rivets.

  In the door frame reinforcing unit 110, the left reinforcing frame 111, the right reinforcing frame 112, and the upper reinforcing frame 113 are assembled along the left side, the right side, and the upper side of the door frame base 101, and the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 is , And assembled so as to be located below the door window 101 a of the door frame base 101.

  The door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 by a plurality of screws (not shown). When the door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the door frame base 101, the notch portion 114a and the through portion 114b of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 coincide with the ball passing opening 101g for the upper tray of the door frame base 101 and the through hole 101j. The cylinder attachment frame 115 is inserted into the insertion recess 101 c of the door frame base 101.

[3-1-7. Door frame and hinge assembly]
The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 is attached to the upper left corner of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 in a front view. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 is for attaching the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4 so as to be hinge-rotatable in cooperation with the door frame lower hinge member 125. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 includes a hinge bracket 121 attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110, a door frame upper hinge pin 122 mounted movably in the vertical direction on the hinge bracket 121, and a hook attached to the door frame upper hinge pin 122. A member 123 and a lock spring 124 urging the door frame upper hinge pin 122 to move upward are provided.

  The hinge bracket 121 includes a flat mounting piece 121a having a square shape in a front view, and a flat protruding piece 121b extending forward from the upper side and the lower side of the mounting piece 121a. In the hinge bracket 121, the attachment piece 121a is attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110. The hinge bracket 121 is formed by bending a metal plate.

  The door frame upper hinge pin 122 is obtained by bending a cylindrical metal rod into an L shape. When the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is assembled to the door frame upper hinge assembly 120, the vertically extending portion penetrates from below near the front end of the pair of projecting pieces 121b of the hinge bracket 121, and the upper end is the upper side. A portion extending upward from the protruding piece 121b and extending horizontally is in contact with the lower surface of the lower protruding piece 121b. The upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is rotatably inserted into the door frame upper hinge hole 511 a of the upper hinge main body 511 of the main frame upper hinge member 510 of the main body frame 4.

  The wedge member 123 is an E-ring, and is attached to a portion between the pair of projecting pieces 121 b of the door frame upper hinge pin 122. The lock spring 124 is formed in a coil shape, and is placed around the vertically extending portion of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 between the wedge member 123 and the lower projecting piece 121 b of the hinge bracket 121. The door frame upper hinge pin 122 is biased upward by the lock spring 124 via the wedge member 123.

  The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 is in a state where the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is biased upward by the lock spring 124, and the horizontally extending portion of the lower end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is the lower projecting piece By coming into contact with the lower surface of 121 b, further upward movement is restricted. In this state, the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 protrudes upward by a predetermined amount than the upper surface of the upper protruding piece 121 b.

  When the horizontally extending portion of the lower end of the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 is moved downward against the biasing force of the lock spring 124, the entire door frame upper hinge pin 122 is entirely moved. The upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 can be recessed below the upper surface of the upper protruding piece 121b. Therefore, the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 can insert the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 into the door frame upper hinge hole 511a of the main frame upper hinge member 510 from below or pull it down. it can. Thus, the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is inserted into the door frame upper hinge hole 511a of the main frame upper hinge member 510, so that the upper left end of the door frame 3 in a front view is rotated with respect to the main body frame 4. It can be supported as much as possible.

  In the upper door frame hinge assembly 120, a portion of the upper door frame hinge pin 122 extending in the vertical direction is coaxial with the lower door frame hinge pin 126 of the lower door frame hinge member 125 described later. As a result, the door frame 3 can be hinge-rotated in a favorable state with respect to the main body frame 4 by the door frame upper hinge pin 122 and the door frame lower hinge pin 126.

[3-1-8. Door frame lower hinge member]
The door frame lower hinge member 125 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. The door frame lower hinge member 125 is attached to the lower left corner of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 in a front view. The door frame lower hinge member 125 is for attaching the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4 so as to be hinge-rotatable in cooperation with the door frame upper hinge assembly 120.

  The lower door frame hinge member 125 is attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110 and has a square-shaped flat plate-like mounting piece 125a, a flat plate-like protruding piece 125b extending forward from the lower side of the mounting piece 125a, and a projecting piece And a door frame lower hinge pin 126 (see FIG. 23 and the like) protruding downward from the lower surface near the front end of 125 b.

  The mounting piece 125 a and the protruding piece 125 b of the lower door frame hinge member 125 are formed by bending a metal plate. The door frame lower hinge pin 126 is a cylindrical metal rod, and the outer periphery of the lower end portion is tapered and chamfered. The lower door frame hinge pin 126 is coaxial with the vertically extending portion of the upper door frame hinge pin 122 of the upper door frame hinge assembly 120 in the projecting piece 125 b when assembled to the door frame base unit 100. It is attached.

  The door frame lower hinge member 125 supports the door frame 3 so that the door frame 3 can be hinged rotatably with respect to the body frame 4 by inserting the door frame lower hinge pin 126 into the door frame hinge hole of the body frame lower hinge member. Can.

[3-1-9. Cylinder lock]
The cylinder lock 130 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. The cylinder lock 130 is attached to the cylinder mounting frame 115 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 and cooperates with a locking unit 650 described later to open and close the door frame 3 and the body frame 4, and the outer frame 2 and the body frame 4. It is used for opening and closing locking with The cylinder lock 130 is attached to a cylindrical cylinder main body 131 extending in the front and rear direction, a key hole 132 formed on the front end face of the cylinder main body 131, and a rear side of the cylinder main body 131 and inserted into the key hole 132 And a rotation transmitting member 133 which rotates together with the rotation of the key.

  The cylinder body 131 of the cylinder lock 130 passes through the front piece of the cylinder mounting frame 115 from the rear and has its rear end attached to the front piece. The rotation transmission member 133 is formed in a cylindrical shape (specifically, a conical cylindrical shape whose diameter becomes larger toward the rear) opened at the rear, and is directed from the rear end to the front at a position opposite to sandwich the central axis. It has a pair of notched parts. The rotation transmission member 133 is formed such that the transmission cylinder 654 of the locking unit 650 in the main body frame 4 is inserted from the rear, and the pair of projections of the transmission cylinder 654 is inserted into the pair of cutouts to rotate. The rotation of the transmission member 133 (the key inserted into the keyhole 132) can be transmitted to the transmission cylinder 654 for rotation.

  When the cylinder lock 130 is assembled to the door frame 3, the front end of the cylinder body 131 substantially coincides with the front end of the cylinder insertion port 252h of the pan unit main body 252 in the pan unit 200 (see FIG. 23 and the like).

3-1-10. Ball feeding unit]
The ball feeding unit 140 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 35 and 36. FIG. 35 (a) is a perspective view of the ball feeding unit of the door frame base unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 35 (b) is a perspective view of the ball feeding unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 36 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit disassembled and seen from the front, and FIG. 36 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit with the back case removed and the tamperproof member removed. is there. The ball feeding unit 140 can supply the game balls B supplied from the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 to the ball emitting device 540 of the main body frame 4 one by one, and the game stored in the upper plate 201 The ball B can be pulled out to the lower plate 202 by the operation of the upper plate ball extraction button 222.

  The ball feeding unit 140 has an entrance 141a which is supplied with gaming balls B from the upper plate 201 of the dish unit 200 and penetrates in the front-rear direction, and a ball outlet 141b opened below the entrance 141a. And the rear end of the front cover 141 are closed and the front is opened in a box shape, and the game ball entered from the entrance 141a of the front cover 141 penetrating in the front and rear direction A front cover pivotally supported on a rear cover 142 having a striking ball supply port 142a for supplying B to the ball launcher 540, and an axis extending between the rear cover 142 and the front cover 141 in the front-rear direction. The ball extraction member 143 having a partition 143a that divides the entrance 141a from the ball outlet 141b on the rear side of the 141, and the game ball B on the partition 143a of the ball extraction 143 one back cover 14 The ball feeding member 144 and the ball feeding member 144 are rotatably supported around an axis extending in the vertical direction between the front cover 141 and the rear cover 142. And a ball feed solenoid 145.

  As shown in the figure, the ball feeding unit 140 has the ball feeding member 144 disposed on the right side of the entrance 141a in a front view, and the ball pulling member 143 on the left side of the ball feeding member 144 A ball feed solenoid 145 is disposed on the right side of the feed member 144.

  The front cover 141 of the ball feeding unit 140 has an arc-shaped slit 141c formed concentrically with respect to the rotation center of the ball extracting member 143 on the left side of the ball outlet 141b in a front view. From 141c, an operating rod 143c of a ball pullout member 143 described later extends forward. Also, the front cover 141 extends upward from the upper edge of the entrance 141a, and when the door frame 3 is assembled, the ball feed and guide passage 241b of the rear base 241 in the unit 240 after removing the upper ball. And it is formed so that the site | part currently open | released to the back of the upstream end side of the ball extraction guide path 241c may be closed from a back side.

  The ball extraction member 143 divides the space between the inlet 141a and the ball outlet 141b below the inlet 141a, and has a partition 143a whose upper surface is lowered in the direction of the ball feeding member 144; Around an axis extending downward from the end opposite to the ball feeding member 144 and being bent in a V shape toward the lower center of the ball outlet 141b from near the middle in the vertical direction and the lower end extends in the front and rear direction , A rod-like operating rod 143c projecting forward from the upper end of the rotating rod 143b, and a lower part of the rotating rod 143b below the operating rod 143c And a weight portion 143d protruding from the side surface to the opposite side to the partition portion 143a. The operating rod 143c of the ball removal member 143 is formed to project forward through an arc-shaped slit 141c formed in the front cover 141 (see FIG. 35A). The actuating rod 143c moves downward by the pressing operation of the upper disc ball extraction button 222 of the disc unit 200 through the ball feeding opening 101e of the door frame base 101 (the upper end of the operation transmitting portion 242b of the upper disc ball extracting slider 242 Contact with the upper surface).

  The ball feeding member 144 is directed to the entrance 141a and the partitioning portion 143a of the ball removing member 143, and the blocking portion 144a having a fan-like plan view centering on the rotation axis extending in the vertical direction, and the back of the blocking portion 144a. It has a ball holding portion 144b which is recessed in an arc shape from the end toward the rotation axis, and a rod-shaped collar portion 144c which extends downward from the rear end of the ball holding portion 144b. The blocking portion 144a and the ball holding portion 144b of the ball feeding member 144 are formed adjacent to each other within an angle range of about 180 ° centered on the rotation axis. Further, the ball holding portion 144b of the ball feeding member 144 has a size capable of holding one gaming ball B. The ball feeding member 144 rotates around the rotation axis by moving the collar portion 144c disposed at a position eccentric to the rotation axis by driving the ball feeding solenoid 145 in the left-right direction.

  The ball feed member 144 has a supply position in which the ball holding portion 144b is in communication with the ball hitting supply port 142a at the same time as the blocking portion 144a faces the partition portion 143a, and the ball holding portion 144b has a partition portion 143a. It is pivoted between the directionally oriented holding position. When the ball feed member 144 is at the supply position, the gaming ball B held by the ball holding portion 144b is supplied from the ball hitting supply port 142a to the ball firing device 540 and enters the partition 143a from the entrance 141a. The movement of the gaming ball B to the ball holding portion 144b (ball hitting supply port 142a) side is blocked by the blocking portion 144a, and the gaming ball B remains on the partition portion 143a (the state of staying at the standby position). On the other hand, when the ball feeding member 144 is turned to the holding position, the ball holding portion 144b is directed to the partition portion 143a, and the ball holding portion 144b is closed at the ball feeding port 142a. Thus, only one game ball B on the partition portion 143a, which is the standby position, is held in the ball holding portion 144b.

  In addition, the ball feeding unit 140 has a ball feeding operation rod 146 whose tip is swung in the vertical direction by driving (energization) of a ball feeding solenoid 145, and a tip of the ball feeding movement rod 146 which is swung in the vertical direction. And a ball feeding crank 147 for pivoting the ball feeding member 144 around the vertically extending axis.

  The ball feed operating rod 146 is provided with an iron plate 146 a at a position below the ball feed solenoid 145. The ball feeding operation rod 146 extends left and right, and the end (right end) opposite to the ball feeding crank 147 is attached to the front cover 141 and the rear cover 142 so as to be rotatable about an axially extending axis. It is done. When the ball feed solenoid 145 is driven, the ball feed operation rod 146 pulls the iron plate 146a toward the ball feed solenoid 145 (upward) by the generated magnetic force, and the ball feed around the right end The left end side closer to the crank 147 is pivoted to move upward. After that, when the drive of the ball feed solenoid 145 is released, the magnetic force disappears and the weight of the iron plate 146a acts, and the left end side near the ball feed crank 147 moves downward around the right end. As it is pivoted back to its initial state. As a result, the ball feed operating rod 146 causes the left end portion (tip) near the ball feed crank 147 to swing in the vertical direction by the ball feed solenoid 145.

  The ball feeding crank 147 engages with an engaging portion 147a which is engageable with the vertically moving tip of the ball feeding operating rod 146 and extends in the left and right direction, and the ball feeding operating rod 146 of the engaging portion 147a. A shaft portion 147b disposed on the side opposite to the side and pivotally supported about an axis extending in the front-rear direction between the front cover 141 and the rear cover 142, and extending upward from the shaft portion 147b And a transmission portion 147c engaged with a rod-like collar portion 144c (see FIG. 36B) protruding downward from a position eccentric to the center of rotation of the ball feeding member 144.

  The ball feeding unit 140 moves the tip (left end) of the ball feeding operation rod 146 upward by driving the ball feeding solenoid 145, whereby the ball feeding crank 147 is moved through the ball feeding operation rod 146. It can be pivoted about an axis extending back and forth.

  When the ball feed solenoid 140 is not driven (normal time), the ball feed unit 140 is in a state where the ball feed operation rod 146 is separated from the lower end of the ball feed solenoid 145 and the tip is positioned downward. Then, the ball feeding member 144 is in the state of being positioned at the feeding position. Further, when the ball feed solenoid 145 is driven, the ball feed operation rod 146 is attracted to the lower end of the ball feed solenoid 145 and the tip (left end) is positioned upward, and the ball feed member 144 is held Turn to That is, when the ball feed solenoid 145 is driven (ON state), the ball feed member 144 receives one gaming ball B in the standby position, and the drive of the ball feed solenoid 145 is released (OFF And the gaming ball B received by the ball feeding member 144 can be sent (supplied) to the ball launching device 540 side. The drive of the ball feed solenoid 145 in the ball feed unit 140 is controlled in synchronization with the drive control of the launch solenoid 542 by the launch control unit 633b (see FIG. 151) of the payout control board 633.

  Further, the ball feeding unit 140 is configured to apply a moment so as to rotate in a counterclockwise direction in a front view by the ball extracting member 143 pivotally supported pivotally or by the weight portion 143 d. However, the actuating rod 143c projecting forward of the ball extracting member 143 abuts on the upper end of the operation transmitting portion 242b of the upper disc ball extracting slider 242 operated by the pressing operation of the upper disc ball extracting button 222 of the disc unit 200. In the normal state, since the rotation is restricted, the partitioning portion 143a of the ball removal member 143 is located between the entrance 141a and the ball removal hole 141b, and is separated. The game ball B does not intrude.

  Then, when the player presses the upper disc ball extraction button of the dish unit downward, the upper disc ball extraction slider slides downward with the operation transmission unit, and the movement lever 143c is moved with the movement of the operation transmission section downward. Will move relatively downward. When the actuating rod 143c moves downward together with the actuating transmission portion, the ball extracting member 143 rotates in the counterclockwise direction in a front view, and the partitioning portion 143a moves from between the entrance 141a and the ball outlet 141b to partition Is released. As a result, the gaming ball B entering from the entrance 141a drops toward the ball outlet 141b, and is discharged from the ball outlet 141b to the ball withdrawal guiding path 241c of the unit 240 after pulling out the upper ball in the tray unit 200, It can be discharged (supplied) to the lower tray 202 via the lower tray ball supply port 211c.

  In addition, since the upper disc ball removal slider 242 formed with the operation transmission part 242 b with which the operation rod 143 c of the ball removal member 143 abuts is biased upward by the spring 243, the game ball B on the partition part 143 a Can be absorbed by the spring 243 through the actuating rod 143c, so that breakage of the ball pullout member 143 etc. can be prevented, and the gaming ball B is a partition It is possible to prevent bouncing back at 143a.

  Further, the ball feeding unit 140 has a rectangular attachment recess 142b (see FIG. 36 (b) and the like) that is recessed forward in the upper right as viewed from the back of the bat supply port 142a of the rear cover 142. An operation line disabling member 700, which is a first fraud prevention means, is mounted so as to be accommodated in the mounting recess 142b. The operation line disabling member 700 of the ball feeding unit 140 is formed of a hard metal plate such as tool steel or stainless steel, and is detachably attached to the inside of the mounting recess 142 b of the rear cover 142 from the rear side There is. In this case, invalidation of the operation line means that the operation of the irregular sphere can not be normally performed by cutting or pinching (stopping) the operation line, winding it up, bonding with hot melt or the like. It says to make it a state.

  The operation line invalidation member 700 is formed in a rectangular shape in which the outer shape in a front view extends left and right, and is separated into upper and lower portions substantially at the center in the vertical direction between predetermined distances from the right side to the left Inclined portions 703 each formed in a C-chamfered shape on the tip end side (the right end side in the front view) of the opposing sides of the portion 701 and the second piece portion 702 and the first piece portion 701 and the second piece portion 702 And have. The first piece 701 of the operation line invalidation member 700 is bent with respect to the flat plate surface of the operation line invalidation member 700 so that the right end in the front view in the rear view in FIG. On the other hand, the second piece portion 702 extends on the same plane as the flat surface of the operation line disabling member 700. Thus, in the plan view, the first portion 701 and the second portion 702 form a sheared portion 700v that spreads in a V-shape toward the right.

  The operation line invalidation member 700 is attached to the attachment recess 142 b of the rear cover 142 so that the V-shaped sheared portion 700 v formed by the first piece 701 and the second piece 702 is in the hitting supply port 142 a. It communicates with the

  According to this operation line invalidation member 700, an irregular ball (a game ball or a metal ball having substantially the same diameter as that of a game ball or the like) to which a flexible string-like operation line (a yarn, a piano wire, a wire or a linear member such as a catheter) is attached. Or, synthetic resin balls (of approximately the same diameter) are shot from the upper tray 201 through the ball feeding unit 140 into the game area 5a by the ball launcher 540, and are ejected to the upper tray 201 attached to the irregular sphere The ball firing device 540 plays a game when an operation line is operated to form an illegal ball flow path using an illegal ball, or an illegal action is performed such that an illegal ball is taken in and out of the first starting opening 2002 or the like. An operation line attached to the wrong ball is inserted between the first and second pieces 701 and 702 by the force of the wrong ball fired with a strength that can reach the area 5 a (hit ball). The first piece 701 and the second piece 702 Can be cut into as scissors by narrowed site of formation shear portion 700v, it is possible to suppress the fraud using a fraud sphere takes place thus invalidates the operating line.

  In addition, as a 1st fraud prevention means provided in the ball | bowl feed unit 140, not only the thing of an above-described form but another form may be sufficient. For example, if the operation line attached to the incorrect ball is cut or narrowed to suppress the cheating, the metal plate may be bent into a form different from the above or the operation line disabling member 700 may be bent. It is good also as composition provided, and it is good also as composition replacing with a metal plate and having a resin molded member which has a shape which can cut or narrow the operation line attached to a false ball.

  In addition, when the illegal ball is made of synthetic resin such as acrylic, the non-contact type (for example, proximity switch) of the metal game ball at the above-mentioned standby position (on the above-mentioned partition portion 143a) of the ball feeding unit 140. It is possible to prevent the firing of the illegal ball itself by detecting it with the sensor of (4) and adding the detection signal to the driving condition of the ball feeding solenoid 145 which is the electric feeding means. In the non-contact type sensor, an irregular ball made of synthetic resin is not detected, and the ball feeding solenoid 145 does not drive the ball feeding.

[3-1-11. Foul cover unit]
The fowl cover unit 150 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 37 and FIG. Fig.37 (a) is the perspective view which looked at the fal cover unit of a door frame base unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the fal cover unit from the back. FIG. 38 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the fall cover unit with the lid removed and seen from the front, and FIG. 38 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the fall cover with the lid removed and seen from the rear.

  The false cover unit 150 is attached to the lower portion on the rear side of the door frame base 101 on the right side in a rear view. The foul cover unit 150 is fired by the ball launcher 540 with a force (a launch force that can not reach the game area 5a) weaker than a predetermined force (a launch force that can reach the game area 5a). The game ball B (Fall ball) that did not reach the inside is guided to the lower plate 202, and the game ball B dispensed from the payout device 580 is guided to the upper plate 201 or the lower plate 202. .

  As shown in the figure, the fool cover unit 150 is a shallow box-like unit main body 151 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and opened on the front side, and a flat cover member attached to the front of the unit main body 151 And 152.

  The false cover unit 150 penetrates back and forth at the upper left corner in a front view, and the lower normal discharge passage 610 a of the lower full ball passage unit 610 of the main body frame 4 and the upper flat ball supply port 211 a which is a ball opening of the dish unit 200. And the rear ball passage 150a that communicates with the lower ball ball passage unit 610 of the lower part of the main body frame 4 can be communicated with the lower full tank discharge passage 610b of the main body frame 4 And the ball receptacle 150b.

  In addition, the far cover unit 150 is opened upward at the right side in a front view of the full tank receptacle 150b, and the momentum is insufficient in spite of being fired from the firing rail 544 by the ball launching device 540 of the main frame 4. A far ball receiving portion 150c for receiving the game ball B (fall ball) dropped to the far ball drop opening 1013 formed between the firing rail 544 and the outer rail 1001 without reaching the inside of the game area 5a; The lower flat ball supply port 211c, which is a forward opening near the lower corner and discharges the gaming ball B received by the full ball receiving hole 150b and the far ball receiving portion 150c forward, as well as an opening for the bowl unit 200. Communication passage 150 for connecting the ball discharge port 150d communicating with the ball, the ball discharge port 150d (strictly speaking, the storage passage 150e described later) and the far ball receiving portion 150c It has a, and. The communication passage 150h is provided on the lower side of the bottom wall 150g of the far ball receiving portion 150c at an upper passage wall 150i disposed on the opposite side of the bottom wall 150g, and approximately one game ball from the upper passage wall 150i The lower passage wall 150j is disposed in parallel at a distance of 1 ball), and the start end is opened upward to the lower inclined end of the bottom wall 150g of the far ball receiving portion 150c, and the end is stored. It opens downward to the passage 150e.

  In addition, a series of paths from the far ball drop opening 1013 opened between the firing rail 544 and the outer rail 1001 through the far ball receiving portion 150c, the communication passage 150h and the storage passage 150e to the ball outlet 150d It is a passage, and a return passage 1014 is formed by these series of elements.

  Further, the foul cover unit 150 is formed between the full ball receiving hole 150b and the far ball receiving portion 150c and the ball discharging hole 150d by the unit main body 151 and the lid member 152, and stores a predetermined amount of gaming balls B. A reservoir passage 150e having a possible size is provided.

  The through ball passage 150 a is formed across both the unit body 151 and the lid member 152. The full tank receptacle 150 b and the far ball receptacle 150 c are formed in the unit main body 151. The ball outlet 150 d is formed in the lid member 152. The storage passage 150 e is formed by the unit main body 151 and the lid member 152.

  In addition, the flat cover unit 150 constitutes a part of the inner wall of the storage passage 150e, and the flat movable piece 153 whose lower end is rotatably attached to the unit main body 151 and the lid member 152; And a spring 155 for biasing the movable piece 153 toward the storage passage 150e. The full tank detection sensor 154 detects rotation in a direction away from the storage passage 150e.

  In the far cover unit 150, when the lower plate 202 of the plate unit 200 is filled with the gaming balls B and the gaming balls B are not released from the ball discharge port 150d to the lower plate 202 side, to some extent in the storage passage 150e. The number of game balls B can be stored. Then, when a certain number of gaming balls B are stored in the storage passage 150e, the weight of the gaming balls B moves the upper end of the movable piece 153 away from the storage passage 150e against the biasing force of the spring 155. As the movable piece 153 rotates, the rotation is detected by the full tank detection sensor 154. As a result, it can be determined that the lower plate 202 is full of gaming balls B, so if fullness is detected by the full detection sensor 154, the payout of more gaming balls B is stopped At the same time, it is possible to notify the player or a person in charge of the game hall of that effect, and to urge the player to eliminate the filling of the lower tray 202.

  Further, the foul cover unit 150 is attached to the lower side of the through ball passage 150 a on the rear side of the unit main body 151, and the dispensing passage opening / closing door of the lower full ball passage unit 610 in the dispensing unit 560 described later of the body frame 4. A door opening / closing contact portion 150f is provided, which can be in contact with the actuating projection 613a of 613 (see FIG. 109). The door opening and closing contact portion 150f is inclined so as to move forward as the rear surface goes downward. When the operation projection 613a of the dispensing passage opening / closing door 613 abuts on the door opening / closing abutment portion 150f, the dispensing passage opening / closing door 613 is rotated to lower end of the lower normal dispensing passage 610a and the lower full delivery passage 610b The front opening can be opened.

  In addition, the fal cover unit 150 is provided with an operation line invalidation member 7000 which is a second fraud preventing means for deterring fraud due to the illicit ball Q to which the operation line L is attached. An operation line disabling member 7000H, 7000S, which is a third fraud prevention means, is provided at the foul ball drop opening 1013 established between them.

  The second operation line disabling member 7000 provided in the false cover unit 150 is an internal space between the upper passage wall 150i of the communication passage 150h and the bottom wall 150g of the false ball receiving portion 150c. As shown in the figure, the convex portions 7001 on both sides are fitted and supported in the mounting holes 151h of the unit main body 151 and the mounting holes 152h of the lid member 152, and attached (bonded) to the upper surface of the upper passage wall 150i. Furthermore, it is covered and accommodated from the outside by the unit main body 151 and the lid member 152 so that it is difficult for the employee or the assembly machine worker or the like to make contact with the hand for safety reasons.

  A specific operation line invalidation member 7000 includes the same components as the operation line invalidation member 700 provided in the ball feeding unit 140, and corresponds to the first bent portion 701 in FIG. A V-shape opening in the direction opposite to the flow-down direction of the ball of the communication passage 150 h by the one piece 7010 and the second piece 7020 extended from the convex 7001 corresponding to the straight second piece 702 The sheared portion 7000 v of is formed.

  As shown in the enlarged view of FIG. 40, the center of the V-shaped shearing portion 7000v of the operation line invalidation member 7000 of the cover unit 150 of the present embodiment is that of the lid member 152 constituting the far cover unit 150. It is disposed so as to be substantially flush with the inner surface and directed toward the shearing portion 7000v of the operation line disabling member 7000 at the folded portion of the bottom wall 150g of the ball receiving portion 150c and the upper passage wall 150i of the communication passage 150h. A tapered guiding portion 150k capable of guiding the operation line L is provided. Specifically, while the bottom wall 150g of the ball receiving portion 150c has a surface width necessary for the game ball to flow down on the upper surface, the bottom wall 150g is directed to the lid member 152 side at the folded portion with the upper passage wall 150i. The width is narrow toward the shearing portion 7000v of the operation line invalidation member 7000 along the lid member 152 so as to be continuous with the first inclined portion 150ka that descends to the operation line invalidation member 7000 side and the first inclination portion 150ka. And a tapered second guiding portion 150k having a tapered shape (a shape capable of capturing the operation line L). Then, when the operation line L, which is tensioned by rolling of the irregular ball Q or tension from the outside, is in sliding contact with the guiding portion 150k in a wound shape, the tension applied to the operation line L causes the second inclined portion 150ka to The operation line L is guided to the operation line disabling member 7000 so as to slide the inclined portion 150 kb of Thereby, the operation line L can be reliably captured by the operation line invalidation member 7000. In this way, it is responsible for the smooth flow of the normal balls and the guidance of the operation line L attached to the incorrect balls Q. In order to make it easier to capture the operation line L, corner portions of the first inclined portion 150ka and the second inclined portion 150kb of the guiding portion 150k may be formed in a curved shape.

  Since the second operation line disabling member 7000 provided in the fool cover unit 150 is configured as described above, the operation line L is set using the space communicating with the game area 5a from the lower ball supply port 211c. The illegal ball Q attached is made to enter the game area 5a, and the operation line L extending to the lower ball ball supply port 211c is operated to form an illegal ball flow path using the illegal ball Q, or illegal It is possible to prevent an unfair act that causes the ball Q to move in and out of the first starting opening and the like.

  For example, a fraudulent action such as pushing the wrong ball Q into the return passage 1014 from the lower bowl ball supply port 211c using a dedicated tool such as a cell plate and feeding it back to the firing position of the ball firing device 540 If the incorrect ball Q goes over the folded portion of the upper passage wall 150i of the communication passage 150h and the bottom wall 150g of the far ball receiving portion 150c to the firing position of the firing rail 544, When it is pulled (tension is applied), the operation line L turns around in the same U-turn along the same folding portion. Then, the operation line L is guided by the operation line invalidation member 7000 along the taper of the guiding portion 150k, and enters the V-shaped shearing portion 7000v formed by the first and second portions 7010 and 7020, and finally, Since the operation line L can not be operated as a result of disconnection, it becomes possible to inhibit an illegal act using the illegal sphere Q.

  In addition, a plurality of incorrect balls Q are connected to the operation line L, and one of them is sent from the hit ball supply port 142a to the firing position, and it is intentionally made into a far ball. Even when an illegal act (hereinafter referred to as "incorrect act B") is performed by grabbing the operation line L connected to the illegal ball that has become a far ball and firing the subsequent incorrect ball Q onto the game area 5a, The operation line L present at the folded back portion of the upper aisle wall 150i of the communication passage 150h and the bottom wall 150g of the far ball receiving portion 150c is pulled by the subsequent firing of the irregular ball Q (tension is applied) L is pressed against the same folded portion, and the operation line L enters the shearing portion 7000v and is cut in the same manner as described above, and as a result, the operation line L can not be manipulated, so that cheating using the illegal sphere Q can be suppressed. OK To become. 39 and 40 are explanatory views assuming the case where the injustice B is performed. In addition, for the above-mentioned fraudulent action B, there is a possibility that the operation line invalidation member 700 or the like as the first fraud prevention means can not sufficiently exert an effect on the fraudulent sphere Q which becomes a foul sphere (for example, it becomes a foul sphere Since the operation line L may not be invalidated by the first fraud prevention means even if the fraudulent ball Q is fired with a certain level of strength, the present embodiment reinforces the fraud prevention measures by the first fraud prevention means. It also has an effect. Therefore, when the fraudulent action B is to be performed, the operation line invalidation members 700 and 7000 as the first and second fraud prevention means and the operation line invalidation member 7000H as the third fraud prevention means described later. And 7000S as appropriate, and it is preferable to use a first operation line invalidation member 700 and another second operation line invalidation member 7000 or a third operation line invalidation member 7000H, 7000S. The pachinko machine 1 may be provided together. In this case, since the first operation line invalidation member 700 and the second operation line invalidation member 7000 are provided on the side of the door frame 3 so as not to be exposed to the outside together, they are hard to be noticeable Even if the door frame 3 is opened due to the trouble of the fraud countermeasure information is hard to leak. In addition, since the operation line invalidation members 700 and 7000 affect the crime prevention performance due to a reduction in sharpness, etc., it is easy to maintain the crime prevention performance if they are replaced together with the door frame 3.

  By the way, although the operation line invalidation members 700 and 7000, which are the first and second fraud prevention means described above, cut and invalidate the operation line L by the shearing portions 700v and 7000v, the operation line L is clamped. In other words, the operation line L is sandwiched between, for example, two metal plates 7011 and 7022 to make it impossible to push or pull the flexible operation line L, so that it is not possible to easily operate the irregular sphere Q connected to the operation line L May be invalidated.

  Specifically, for example, as shown in FIGS. 41 and 42, the operation line invalidation member 7000 is formed of two metal plates 7011 and 7022 joined at the hatched portion in the enlarged view of FIG. The front half of the non-joining portion at the front end of the front end is expanded in a V shape to form the introduction guide portion 7033, and the second half of the non-joining portion is a stopper portion 7044. Such an operation line invalidation member 7000 is fixedly attached to the inner surface of the lid member 152, and further, it is difficult to contact the hands of an employee or a game machine assembler, etc., for safety reasons. And is covered and accommodated from the outside by a lid member 152.

  According to the operation line invalidation member 7000, as shown in the enlarged view of FIG. 42, the operation line L is pulled by the incorrect ball Q and the upper passage wall 150i of the communication passage 150h and the bottom wall 150g of the far ball receiving portion 150c. When the folded back portion is turned into a U-turn, it is guided to the operation line disabling member 7000 along the taper of the guiding portion 150k of the folded back portion, and the holding portion in the second half of the non-joined portion of the metal plate 7011 and the metal plate 7022 It is pinched and pinched by 7044 like tweezers.

  As a result, the incorrect ball Q backflowing from the lower flat ball supply port 211c due to the above-mentioned incorrect action A reaches the firing position of the launch rail 544, or the incorrect ball Q intentionally turned into a far ball by the incorrect action B. Can be prevented from reaching the lower flat ball supply port 211c, which is a ball opening, and the operation line L is pinched by the operation line disabling member 7000 even if it reaches it. Because of the presence of the flexible operation line L from the lower ball supply port 211c, it is only slackened there, and as a result, the extension amount of the operation line L can not be adjusted (the irregular ball Q hanging in the game area 5a Since the height can not be adjusted), it is possible to deter fraudulent acts using the illicit ball Q.

  In the embodiment described above, the front half portion of the non-joining portion of the two metal plates 7011 and 7022 is expanded in a V shape to form the introduction guide portion 7033 and the rear half portion of the non-joint portion is the stopper portion 7044 However, instead of this, one metal plate is bent so as to overlap the plate surfaces, and the leading end portion of one bent plate surface is expanded in a V shape to introduce the introduction guide portion 7033 (guide portion) It is good also as composition which makes a pinching part 7044 the narrow part of both plate faces. As a result, it is possible to improve the assembling work efficiency by reducing the number of parts of the metal plate while achieving the same effect as the above-mentioned fraud deterrence effect.

  Although not shown, the operation line invalidation member 7000 for holding the operation line L is provided with a double-sided tape in the gap of the second inclined portion 150 kb in FIG. Thus, the adhesive portion may be formed, and the operation line L thus induced to the second inclined portion 150 kb may be adhered to the adhesive portion and be immobile.

  Further, the operation line disabling member 7000 for holding the operation line L changes the above-described one composed of the two metal plates 7011 and 7022 into a coil spring as shown in FIG. The guiding direction of the second inclined portion 150 kb of the guiding portion 150 k may be installed and formed so as to be substantially orthogonal to the central axis of the self. The operation line L guided by the second inclined portion 150 kb is fitted and held between adjacent coils of the coil spring.

  It is to be noted that coil springs having a structure in which adjacent coils are in contact with each other at no load, such as tension coil springs or torsion coil springs, need to be installed in compression as in compression coil springs. It is advantageous in installation work compared with.

  Also, the coil spring may of course be installed in a straight state with no load, but as shown in FIG. 43, the coils on the entry side of the operation line L are curved and installed in a slightly expanding direction This is preferable because the approach of the operation line L becomes smoother. As described above, when the operation line invalidation member 7000 is formed of a coil spring, it can be manufactured inexpensively, so that the cost can be reduced.

  Further, a foreign substance such as a cell plate is inserted into the operation line invalidation member 7000 described above from the ball opening (lower bowl ball supply port 211c), and the induction plate 150k to the operation line invalidation member 7000 is blocked with this cell plate. In the form described above to cope with this, the course change portion (the portion corresponding to the upper surface of the lower ball supply port 211c in the present embodiment) of the return passage 1014 of the far ball is considered. A slit 1015 into which such a cell plate (foreign substance) enters is formed (see FIG. 39). As a result, it is also possible to prevent a further fraudulent attempt to insert a foreign substance from the opening for ball (the lower flat ball supply port 211c) to close the guiding portion 150k. In addition, as correspondence of the illegal work which inserts foreign substances, such as a cell board, from the opening for balls (lower bowl ball supply port 211c) and tries to block the induction part 150k, foreign substances such as the cell board as the above-mentioned slit 1015 The configuration is not limited to the one that forms the intake port, but as shown by a two-dot chain line in FIG. 39, a configuration is provided that has a projection-like obstacle 1016 that causes foreign objects such as cell plates to collide and hinder reaching the induction 150k. As a further advanced fraud protection may be achieved.

  Also, the first and second operation line disabling members 700 and 7000 described above have a static structure that waits for entry of the operation line L to be disabled, but FIGS. 49, 50, and 51. As shown in FIGS. 52 and 53, a dynamic operation line invalidation member 7000D may be used to actively invalidate the operation line L due to the presence of the incorrect sphere Q.

  49, 50, and 51 show one specific example of the dynamic operation line invalidation member 7000D, and the operation line invalidation member 7000D is a ball return passage (return passage portion 1014). Is pivotally attached to a path change unit (a corner corresponding to the lower flat ball supply port 211c).

  That is, in FIG. 49, the operation line invalidation member 7000D has a horizontal plate-like ball receiving portion 2645, a plate-like invalidation portion 2646 vertically projecting from the right end of the ball receiving portion 2645, and a ball receiving portion 2645. And an arc-shaped ball stopper 2648 centered on the shaft hole 2647 which is provided on the right side of the upper edge of the invalidation section 2646, and has an axial hole 2647 formed at a corner where the invalidation section 2646 crosses A support shaft 2649 implanted in the fal cover unit 150 is rotatably inserted into the shaft hole 2647, and rotated about 90 ° counterclockwise from the ball receiving posture of FIG. 50 (a). It can swing to the release position. Further, a balance weight 2660 is provided on the opposite side of the ball receiving portion 2645 and the shaft hole 2647 of the invalidation portion 2646 in the operation line invalidation member 7000D, and the ball receiving portion 2645 is activated by the balance weight 2660. In the state where no external force (specifically, a load for one game ball) is applied, the ball receiving attitude of FIG. 50 (a) is maintained, while a load for one game ball is applied to the ball receiving portion 2645. When it is rocked to the release posture of FIG. 50 (b).

  Further, the end edge of the invalidation portion 2646 of the operation line invalidation member 7000D is an intersection side portion 2651 which pivots around the shaft hole 2647 and which crosses the far ball return passage (return passage portion 1014). When the disabling member 7000D swings to the release posture shown in FIG. 50 (b), the cross side 2651 is fitted to the receiving portion 2652 of the foul ball return passage.

  When a normal farball flows into the far cover unit 150 provided with the above-described dynamic operation line invalidation member 7000D, this far ball flows in the communication passage 150h of the far ball return passage as shown in FIG. 50 (a). Immediately after flowing down and changing the course downward in the course changing portion, the ball is placed on the ball receiving portion 2645 of the operation line invalidation member 7000D in the ball receiving posture. The load of the ball causes the operation line disabling member 7000D to rotate counterclockwise about the support shaft 2649 to change to the release posture shown in FIG. 50 (b). As a result, the ball placed on the ball receiving portion 2645 of the operation line invalidation member 7000D is discharged to the storage passage 150e downstream, so the operation line invalidation member 7000D released from the far ball is attached to the balance weight 2660. Return to the original ball receiving posture by the force.

  In rare cases, there may be a case where a plurality of fall balls are generated at one time, but even in such a case, while the previous fall ball is processed by the operation line invalidation member 7000D, the later fall ball is as shown in FIG. Is stopped by the arc-shaped ball stopper 2648, and the operation line invalidation member 7000D is returned and subsequently processed. Therefore, even if a plurality of foul spheres are generated at the same time, they can be processed one by one without any problem.

  Next, the above-mentioned fraudulent action B (a plurality of incorrect balls Q are connected to the operation line L to the fal cover unit 150 provided with the dynamic operation line invalidation member 7000D The ball is deliberately weakly fired to make a foul ball and removed from the lower ball supply port 211c, which is an opening for the ball, and further grasping the operation line L connected to the ball for subsequent fraud When an illegal ball Q flows into the game area 5a), the illegal ball Q flows down the communication passage 150h as shown in FIG. 51 (a), and the course changing portion changes the course downward. Immediately after, the ball is placed on the ball receiving portion 2645 of the operation line invalidation member 7000D in the ball receiving posture. Then, due to the load of the incorrect ball Q, the operation line invalidation member 7000D rotates counterclockwise around the support shaft 2649 to change to the release posture of FIG. 51 (b). At this time, the invalidation part 2646 of the operation line invalidation member 7000D is also rotated, and the cross side 2651 of the end edge crosses the far ball return passage and is fitted to the receiving part 2652 on the passage side. When crossing the fowl ball return path, the operation line L passing through it naturally also crosses, so that the operation line L can not move between the crossing side 2651 and the receiving portion 2652 as shown in FIG. 51 (b) Stop. In this case, since the illegal ball Q connected to the operation line L can not be dropped, the ball receiving portion 2645 of the operation line invalidation member 7000D is not released from the illegal ball Q and continues the release posture. Of course, since the operation line invalidating member 7000D is located at a position where it does not reach even if the hand is inserted from the lower flat ball supply port 211c which is an opening for balls, there is no possibility that the irregular ball Q stopping at this position is taken out from the outside.

  If reverse movement of the operation line L is made difficult by, for example, meandering the operation line L between the intersection side portion 2651 and the receiving portion 2652, the state captured in the operation line invalidation member 7000D It will also be difficult to pull the incorrect ball Q back to the hitting supply port 142a. Thereby, the irregular sphere Q remaining in the operation line invalidation member 7000D can be stored and recovered as a proof sphere.

  The above-described dynamic operation line invalidation member 7000D utilizes the weight of the incorrect ball Q. However, even if the operation line invalidation member 7000D is operated by the electric drive means as shown in FIG. Good.

  That is, the operation line disabling member 7000D shown in FIG. 52 connects the plunger 2654 of the solenoid 2653 serving as the electric drive means to the portion provided with the above-described balance weight 2660 and a ball detector in the disabling portion 2646 of the operation line disabling member 7000D. 2655 is provided, and when the gaming ball is placed on the ball receiving portion 2645 and detected by the ball detector 2655, the plunger 2654 of the solenoid 2653 is raised and the operation line disabling member 7000D changes from the ball receiving posture to the release posture Also, when the game ball is released from the ball receiving portion 2645 and detected by the ball detector 2655 (change of signal from presence to absence of the game ball), the plunger 2654 of the solenoid 2653 is lowered to operate the operation line The invalidation member 7000D returns from the release position to the ball receiving position .

  When a normal ball is mounted on the ball receiving portion 2645 of the operation line invalidation member 7000D, the generation and emission of the ball is detected by the change of the signal of the ball detector 2655, and the solenoid 2653 receives In order to operate appropriately, the balls are processed one by one in the same manner as the operation line invalidation member 7000D using the own weight.

  On the other hand, when the incorrect ball Q is placed on the ball receiving portion 2645 of the operation line invalidation member 7000D, the incorrect ball Q is detected by the ball detector 2655, so the plunger 2654 of the solenoid 2653 is raised to invalidate the operation line. Although the member 7000D changes to the release posture with the incorrect ball Q, as described above, the operation line L is held between the intersection side portion 2651 and the receiving portion 2652 of the invalidation unit 2646 and the incorrect ball Q does not fall Since the ball detector 2655 does not emit a release signal, the plunger 2654 of the solenoid 2653 stops at the raised position. Therefore, since the unfair ball Q can not be taken out from the targeted ball opening, it is possible to prevent unfairness in advance.

  The above-described dynamic operation line invalidation member 7000D cuts and invalidate the operation line L by providing a cutting blade at the intersection side 2651 and / or the receiving portion 2652 of the invalidation unit 2646. be able to. In addition, since the operation line invalidation member 7000D of the present embodiment has a function of blocking the intrusion of the incorrect ball Q from the ball opening side in a state where the ball receiving portion 2645 blocks the return passage portion 104, an incorrect ball described later It can also be used as means for preventing reverse travel. Therefore, a higher fraud prevention function is exhibited.

  In addition to the above-described configuration, the dynamic operation line disabling member 7000D has a shutter plate structure that opens and closes the communication passage 150h by linearly advancing and retracting the disabling portion, for example, and the tip of the shutter plate The ball detector is installed in the middle of the flow path of the communication passage 150h and downstream from the movable area of the intersection side while passing through the movable area of the intersection side. After this, the irregular sphere Q is detected by this sphere detector to activate the nullifying portion, and the operation line L is then pinched or cut off at the intersection side across the communication passage 150h. It is also good.

  Also, the above-described dynamic operation line disabling member 7000D can be applied to the first operation line disabling member 700 of the ball feeding unit 140. Specifically, the ball feeding solenoid 145 provided in the ball feeding unit 140 is replaced with the solenoid 2653 of the operation line disabling member 7000D, and the ball feeding member 144 is replaced with the operation line disabling member 7000D. In this case, since the illegal ball Q stops in the ball feeding unit 140 and is not supplied to the ball launcher 540, the fraud suppressing effect can be surely enhanced.

  Further, FIG. 53 shows a dynamic operation line invalidation member 7000D which winds up the operation line L to invalidate it.

  That is, the operation line disabling member 7000D is mounted in the communication passage 150h of the fal cover unit 150 so as to be rotatable about the rotation axis 2656 that is orthogonal to the passage, and the angular ring disabling portion 2646 is provided. And a horizontal bar crossing the communication passage 150h of the invalidation unit 2646 as the intersection side 2651 and provided downstream of the movable (rotational) area of the intersection side 2651. A sphere detector 2655 is provided, and the disabling unit 2646 is rotated once each time a sphere is detected by the ball detector 2655.

  When a normal farball flows into the far cover unit 150 provided with such an operation line invalidation member 7000D, this farball enters the communication passage 150h and passes through the invalidation section 2646, and the farball is detected as a ball. The invalidation unit 2646 idles once by being detected by the container 2655, but the foul sphere flows down as it is and is discharged from the ball opening to the outside.

  On the other hand, when the illegal ball Q due to the illegal act B flows into the fal cover unit 150 provided with the operation line invalidation member 7000D, the operation line L is also invalidated when the illegal sphere Q dives the invalidation unit 2646. Since the irregular sphere Q is detected by the sphere detector 2655 and the invalidation unit 2646 makes one rotation, the operation line L wraps around the invalidation unit 2646 because it passes through the conversion unit 2646. Therefore, since the illegal sphere Q remains in the communication passage 150h, there is no possibility that it will be in the hands of the illegal person.

  The sphere detector 2655 for detecting the irregular sphere Q may be displaced upon receiving the tension of the operation line L attached to the irregular sphere Q. In such a case, the irregular sphere Q can be detected with certainty. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate unnecessary idle rotation of the operation line disabling member 7000D that winds up the operation line L described above.

The above description of the dynamic operation line disabling member includes the following technical ideas.
"A game area where a game is played with a game ball,
A ball launcher for launching game balls;
A launch passage portion forming a launch ball passage communicating from the launch position of the sphere launcher to the gaming area;
A return passage portion forming a foul ball return passage connecting a foul ball drop opening established in the middle of the launch ball passage and a ball opening for releasing gaming balls to the outside in front of the machine;
The fraud prevention means capable of preventing the operation from the front of the operation line attached to the incorrect ball;
The fraud prevention means is an operation line invalidation member that inactivates by holding or cutting or winding the operation line,
The operation line invalidation member has an intersection side crossing the far ball return path of the game ball and activates the intersection side after the irregular sphere passes the movable area of the intersection side to activate the far side ball. A gaming machine characterized in that it is made to cross a return passage, and the operation line passing through the far ball return passage at the intersection side is stopped or cut or wound up. "

  Next, the third fraud prevention means provided at the above-mentioned foul ball drop opening 1013 is the end (end) of the firing rail 544 as shown in FIG. 10, FIG. 11, FIG. 39, FIG. And an operation line invalidation member 7000S provided at an end of the outer rail 1001 (specifically, a rail base 1001x made of resin).

  The operation line disabling member 7000H provided at the end of the launch side of the firing rail 544 is a sharp cutting blade, and a metal triangular plate is comb-shaped so that the operator's hand does not directly touch the cutting edge thereof. It covers with the safety cover part 1017 put in order. The cutting blade is supported by the safety cover portion 1017.

  Therefore, as described above, the illegal ball Q is pushed back into the return passage 1014 from the lower ball supply port 211c using a dedicated tool such as a cell plate and is fed back to the discharge position of the ball discharge device 540. When A is performed, when the incorrect ball Q is placed on the end of the firing rail 544 and rolled by inclination to the firing position, it is pulled (tension is applied) to it and the operating line L is the operating line disabling member It is cut by touching the 7000H cutting blade. Therefore, the operation line L can not be operated.

  In addition, a plurality of incorrect balls Q are connected to the operation line L, and one of them is sent from the hit ball supply port 142a to the firing position, and it is intentionally made into a far ball to be a ball opening lower ball supply port 211c. Even when an illegal act B is performed in which the operation line L connected to the illegal ball Q is fired to fire the subsequent illegal ball Q onto the game area 5a, the illegal ball Q becomes a far ball and the return passage 1014 Since the operation line L touches the cutting blade of the operation line disabling member 7000H in the process of falling, it is cut at that stage. Therefore, the operation line L can not be operated.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 10, 39 and 47, the operation line disabling member 7000S provided on the resin-made rail base 1001x that constitutes the outer rail 1001 includes a large number of hard resin-made wire members in a brush shape. It will be erected.

  According to the operation line invalidation member 7000S, the incorrect ball Q temporarily hangs in a state where it reaches the game area 5a and is connected to the operation line L, and the lower control ball supply port which is an opening for the ball is the end of the operation line L Even if an illegal person is grasping through 211c, when the operation line L is pulled from the outside to raise the incorrect sphere Q of the game area 5a, the tension of the operation line L is caused by the tension between the wires of the operation line invalidation member 7000S. After that, even if the hand operating the operation line L is loosened to lower the incorrect ball Q, the operation line L is not easily slipped due to the resistance received from the wire group of the operation line disabling member 7000S. The movement of the hand loosened from the ball is not transmitted to the wrong ball Q. That is, since the injustice ball Q in the game area 5a can not be lowered, it is possible to suppress the injustice using the injustice ball Q as a result.

  Thus, in the third fraud prevention means, the operation line disabling member 7000H on the side of the firing rail 544 exerts an effect at the initial stage of the fraudulent acts A and B, and even if it is broken, the outer rail 1001 Since the operation line disabling member 7000S on the side exerts an effect, a higher degree of fraud prevention effect can be obtained.

  Of course, either one of the operation line invalidation members 7000H and 7000S can be used alone, and both the operation line invalidation member 7000H and the specific invalidation member of the operation line invalidation member 7000S can be used. The forms may be interchanged, or the same invalidation member may be adopted.

  In addition to the case where the operation line invalidation members 7000H and 7000S are separately assembled as in this embodiment and attached to the firing rail 544 and the outer rail 1001, for example, the metal plate constituting the firing rail 544 is appropriately processed to invalidate the operation line The integral member 7000H is integrally formed, or a wire is integrally formed on the resin rail base 1001x forming the outer rail 1001, or a V groove shape is formed at the corner of the rail base 1001x as shown in FIG. 8B. The clamping portion 7000Sv may be engraved and the operation line L may be drawn and clamped in the back of the groove of the clamping portion 7000Sv.

  Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 48, the operation line invalidation member 7000S of the outer rail 1001 has the same configuration as the second operation line invalidation member 7000, for example, the two metal plates 7011 described in FIGS. , 7022, and the guide base 1501x formed of the first inclined portion 150ka and the second inclined portion 150kb may be provided on the rail base 1001x of the outer rail 1001.

  As described above, regarding the embodiment in which the second operation line invalidation member 7000 for invalidating the operation line L attached to the incorrect ball Q is provided in the return passage portion 1014, the third operation line invalidation member 7000 is Although the form provided in the drop opening 1013 has been described, the present invention is of course not limited to the form described above.

  For example, in the embodiment described above, the operation line disabling member 7000 is provided at the folded portion of the bottom wall 150g of the ball receiving portion 150c and the upper passage wall 150i of the communication passage 150h, that is, at the entrance of the communication passage 150h. An outer rail provided with a disabling member 7000 at the outlet portion of the communication passage 150h (see arrow z in FIG. 39), at the rear of the ball outlet 150d in FIG. The operation line L is a portion where the operation line L is bent in contact with a part of the return passage 1014, such as provided at each of the start end of 1001 and the end of the firing rail 544. Provided at any position in the return passage 1014 on the condition that it is a portion that receives a pressing force when trying to straighten under tension due to a tensile force by the user It may be. The installation position of the operation line invalidation member 7000 in this embodiment is a position where the player can not touch even if the player inserts a fingertip through the ball opening, and this position is the player's safety surface and operation line invalidation. It is preferable in consideration of a crime prevention surface that makes it difficult to tamper with the conversion member 7000 itself.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the operation line invalidation member 7000 is provided to be offset to one side of the communication passage 150h, but as the operation line invalidation member 7000 as shown in FIGS. 44 (a) and (b) A cutting blade may be arranged. In FIGS. 44 (a) and 44 (b), the end portion of the bottom wall 150g of the ball receiving portion 150c and the start end portion of the communication passage 150h are comb-shaped safety cover portions 1017 so that the cutting edge of the cutting blade is a worker Do not touch the The cutting blade of the operation line invalidation member 7000 in this case uses a known blade structure or tip structure and is installed in the sheath-like holder portion 1018 on the upper surface of the upper passage wall 150i and the unit main body 151 If a loading port 1019 and a discharge port 1020 are provided in each of the lid members 152 so that the cutting blade can be pushed out in a grater manner for replacement between new and old, sharp sharpness can always be maintained. In FIGS. 44 (a) and 44 (b), reference numeral 1021 denotes a holding parting line for the operation line L cut into the valley part of the safety cover 1017, and the operating line L can bite into the holding parting line 1021. It is supposed to be. Therefore, even if the operation line invalidation member 7000 of the cutting blade fails to cut the operation line L, the operation line L can bite into the holding parting line portion 1021 such as the bottom wall 150g or the like. improves.

  In the above embodiment, an example is shown in which the balls are returned to the lower plate, but there is also a gaming machine having a structure in which the balls are returned to the upper plate (including the case where there is no lower plate). In this case, the illegal ball Q having the operation line L attached is made to enter the game area 5a using the space communicating with the game area 5a from the upper ball and ball supply port (opening for ball) (the above-mentioned illegal acts A and B Cheating) may be performed. In the case of such a gaming machine, it is exemplified that the second fraud preventing means is provided at a predetermined portion of the foul return passage located in the space communicating with the gaming area 5a from the upper ball feeding port as in the embodiment described above. it can.

  Moreover, in the above-mentioned form, although the fall cover unit 150 which comprises the return channel | path part 1014 was provided in the door frame 3 side, you may provide the fall cover unit 150 in the main body frame 4 side.

  Moreover, in the above-mentioned form, although one second fraud prevention means was provided in the foul cover unit 150 which comprises the return channel | path part 1014, you may make it provide multiple. For example, in the case of a passage configuration in which a plurality of bent portions such as the above-described folded portion are formed in the return passage portion 1014, the second portion such as the above-described embodiment may be formed in each of the bent portions (in each of the folded portions). A means for preventing fraud may be provided. Thereby, it is possible to further enhance the deterrence effect of the fraudulent acts using the fraudulent sphere Q.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the metal cover is provided as the second fraud prevention means in the fall cover unit 150 which constitutes the return passage 1014, but not the metal sheet but the resin molded product having the same configuration is provided. Alternatively, the molding itself of the fal cover unit 150 may be made into a special shape so as to function as a second fraud prevention means. For example, without forming the metal plate which is the second fraud prevention means in the above-mentioned form, it is tapered instead provided in the return portion of the bottom wall 150g of the far ball receiving portion 150c and the upper passage wall 150i of the communication passage 150h. In order to capture the operation line L at the narrowest portion (the narrowest portion) of the guide portion 150k of the second embodiment, a slit-like capture portion is formed in the resin molded component that constitutes the return passage portion 1014, The operation line L attached to the irregular sphere Q may be held by the capture portion which is the narrowest portion of the guide portion 150k. Even with such a configuration, the same fraud suppression effect as that of the embodiment described above can be obtained.

  In the above-described embodiment, the operation line L attached to the incorrect ball Q is cut or clamped by the operation line invalidation member 7000. However, as shown in FIG. , FIG. 46 and FIG. 49, it prevents the entry of the wrong ball Q from the ball opening without affecting the flow of the normal far ball (does not reverse or reverse the wrong ball Q). By providing the means for preventing the movement, it is possible to prevent the fraud due to the fraud sphere Q.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 45, for example, a dedicated tool such as a cell plate (foreign substance) that pushes the incorrect ball Q into the path changing portion of the return passage portion 1014 (the portion corresponding to the upper right of the lower flat ball supply port 211c). Not only that, but it can be illustrated that the attractor 1022 is provided to attract the incorrect sphere Q itself to another passage and seal the movement (first incorrect sphere reverse prevention means). In this way, it is possible to prevent a fraudulent action such as the fraudulent action A described above that backflows the fraudulent sphere Q without affecting the flow of the normal farball. In addition, at the inlet portion of the inducer 1022, a capture valve (permits intrusion into the attractor 1022) which can swing only in the direction of intrusion of the counterfeit ball Q into the inducer 1022, and from the attractor 1022 A single-opening type valve (not shown) may be provided to make it impossible to withdraw, whereby it is possible to leave a trace of using the wrong ball Q and a proof of performing a wrongdo.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 46, a check valve 1023 which can be swung only in the flow-down direction of the game ball is provided at a predetermined portion of the return passage 1014 to prevent reverse movement of the incorrect ball Q. Yes (2nd illegal ball reverse prevention means). With such a configuration, it is also possible to prevent a cheating action that backs up a cheating ball Q such as the cheating action A described above without affecting the flow of normal far balls. The operation line disabling member 7000D shown in FIG. 49 is also a kind of check valve, and exhibits the same effect as the check valve 1023.

  Also, the above-described static operation line invalidation member and dynamic operation line invalidation member may naturally be combined.

  In the above-described embodiment, the operation line invalidation member different from the first operation line invalidation member 700 is provided in the return passage 1014, but such an operation line invalidation member may be, for example, a fall ball drop opening 1013 and the like. It may be provided between the launch position or between the ball drop outlet 1013 and the upper end of the inner rail 1002.

  In the above embodiment, although the game machine is applied to the pachinko machine 1, the invention is not limited thereto, and the invention is applied to a pachislot machine or a game machine formed by combining a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine. Also in this case, the same effect as the above can be exhibited.

[3-2. Glass unit]
The glass unit 160 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 30 and 31 and the like. The glass unit 160 is removably inserted from the rear into the glass unit attachment portion 101 h so as to close the door window 101 a of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100. When the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the glass unit 160 enables the game area 5 a of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4 to be visible from the player side (forward) It closes the front of the area 5a.

  The glass unit 160 has a frame-like glass frame 161 attachable to the glass unit attachment portion 101h larger than the inner peripheral shape of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101, and the inside of the glass frame 161 closed. Two transparent glass plates 162 attached to 161 and a pair of glass units rotatably attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 for attaching the glass frame 161 to the door frame base 101 And a mounting member 163.

  The glass frame 161 has a pair of mounting pieces 161a extending flatly outward from a position lower than the front left and right upper corners, and a band projecting downward from the lower end and extending along the lower side And a plate-like locking piece 161b. The mounting piece 161 a of the glass frame 161 can be in contact with the projection 163 b of the glass unit mounting member 163. The locking piece 161 b is insertable into the space between the door frame base 101 and the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 (see FIG. 116). The two glass plates 162 are attached to the front end side and the rear end side of the glass frame 161, respectively, and are separated in the front and back direction so as to form a space between each other (see FIG. 116).

  The glass unit attachment member 163 has a disk-like base 163a rotatably mounted around an axis extending back and forth on the rear side of the door frame base 101, and a bar-like projection from the base 163a in a direction perpendicular to the rotation axis. And a protruding portion 163b. The glass unit attachment members 163 are rotatably attached to the outside of the upper two corners of the four corners of the door window 101 a on the rear surface of the door frame base 101.

  In order to attach the glass unit 160 to the door frame base 101, first, the glass unit attachment member 163 attached to the door frame base 101 is rotated so that the protrusion 163b is positioned above the base 163a. Do. Then, from the rear side of the door frame base 101, the locking piece 161b of the glass frame 161 of the glass unit 160 is inserted from above into the gap between the door frame base 101 and the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110. Above, the front end of the glass frame 161 is brought into contact with the rear surface of the glass unit attachment portion 101 h of the door frame base 101. Thereafter, the glass unit attachment member 163 is rotated so that the protrusion 163b is located below the base 163a, and the protrusion 163b is brought into contact with the rear surface of the attachment piece 161a of the glass frame 161. Thereby, the glass unit 160 is attached to the door frame base 101.

  When removing the glass unit 160 from the door frame base 101, it can be removed by the reverse procedure to the procedure mentioned above. Thereby, the glass unit 160 is detachable with respect to the door frame base 101 (door frame base unit 100).

  In the glass unit 160, the protrusion 163b restricts the rearward movement of the glass frame 161 by the protrusion 163b when the protrusion 163b of the glass unit attachment member 163 is located below the base 163a. Therefore, even if vibration or the like acts on the glass unit attachment member 163, the protrusion 163b does not rotate to a position above the base portion 163a. Therefore, the restriction of the backward movement of the glass frame 161 is not naturally released, and the glass unit 160 does not naturally come off the door frame base 101.

[3-3. Security cover]
The crime prevention cover 170 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The crime prevention cover 170 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 so as to cover the lower part of the rear surface of the glass unit 160, and is formed of a transparent synthetic resin. Security cover 170 is disposed with a flat plate-like main body portion 171 whose outer periphery is formed in a predetermined shape, a flat plate-like rear projection 172 projecting short rearwardly along the outer peripheral edge of main body portion 171, and left and right And a pair of locking pieces 173 that project forward beyond the main body 171 and can be locked to the rear side of the door frame base 101.

  The main body portion 171 of the crime prevention cover 170 is formed so that the lower end thereof protrudes below the lower end of the glass unit 160 in a state of being attached to the door frame base unit 100. Further, the main body portion 171 is formed in a shape along the lower end of the game area 5 a in the game board 5 in a state where the upper end is assembled to the pachinko machine 1. More specifically, the upper end of the main body 171 is formed along a portion of the inner rail 1002 of the front component 1000 described later, the out guiding portion 1003, a portion of the lower right rail 1004, and the right rail 1005 It is formed so as not to protrude into the game area 5 a in a state where it is assembled in the pachinko machine 1.

  The rear protrusion 172 is formed over substantially the entire outer peripheral edge of the main body 171. Therefore, the crime prevention cover 170 is formed in the shape of a shallow box opened rearward by the main body portion 171 and the rear projection 172, and its strength and rigidity are high. Further, the rear protrusion 172 also protrudes rearward from a part of the rear surface of the main body 171 which is different from the outer peripheral edge of the main body 171. A rear projection 172 projecting rearward from a part of the rear surface of the main body 171 is formed along a part of the outer rail 1001 of the front component 1000 of the game board 5 in a state assembled to the pachinko machine 1 ing.

  The rear projection 172 is not formed in a portion of the game board 5 located between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 in the state of being assembled in the pachinko machine 1. As a result, the game ball B (the game ball B fired by the ball launcher 540) passing between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 does not abut the rear projection 172 of the security cover 170, and the game area It does not prevent the game ball B from being driven into 5a.

  The pair of locking pieces 173 is resiliently locked to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 (the speaker duct 103 and the cable cover 109). Thereby, the crime prevention cover 170 can be easily attached to and detached from the door frame base unit 100.

  In the state where the crime prevention cover 170 is assembled in the pachinko machine 1, the front surface of the main body 171 abuts on the rear surface of the glass unit 160 (the rear end of the glass frame 161), and the part projecting backward from the lower side of the main body 171 is The removed rear projection 172 is inserted into the security recess 1009 of the front component 1000. Further, the security cover 170 is in a state where the rear projection 172 projecting backward from the lower side of the main body 171 projects rearward than the front surface of the front component 1000 so as to contact the lower surface of the front component 1000. . Thus, the space between the crime prevention cover 170 and the game board 5 (the front component 1000) is intricately bent by the rear projection 172 of the crime prevention cover 170 and the crime prevention recess 1009 of the front component 1000. Even if an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire is made to enter the game area 5a from below the front of the board 5 between the crime prevention cover 170 and the front component 1000, it will be blocked by the rear projection 172 and the crime prevention recess 1009. , And can prevent unauthorized tools from entering the gaming area 5a.

[3-4. Handle unit]
The handle unit 180 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIG. 54 and the like. FIG. 54 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit in the door frame as viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit as viewed from the rear. The handle unit 180 is attached to the handle attachment member 102 (see FIGS. 30 and 32 to 34) of the door frame base unit 100, and operated by the player, the gaming ball B in the upper tray 201 is Of the game area 5a.

  The handle unit 180 covers the handle base 181 attached to the cylindrical portion 102 a of the handle attachment member 102 in the door frame base unit 100, the handle 182 rotatably attached to the front end of the handle base 181, and the front end side of the handle 182 A cover base 183 attached to the handle base 181, a handle decoration substrate 184 mounted on the front side of the cover base 183 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, and a front side of the handle decoration substrate 184 And a handle cap 185 attached to the cover pedestal 183.

  Further, the handle unit 180 is rotatably attached by an inner base 186 attached to the front of the handle base 181 on the rear side of the handle 182 and a handle 182 at the front end and rotatably attached by the inner base 186 and the handle base 181 It has a shaft member 187 having a drive gear portion 187a, a transmission gear 188 meshing with the drive gear portion 187a of the shaft member 187, and a detection shaft 189a integrally rotating with the transmission gear 188, and a handle base 181 and an inner And a handle rotation detection sensor 189 held between the base 186 and the base.

  Furthermore, the handle unit 180 is attached at one end to the handle base 181 and at the other end to the handle 182 to return the handle 182 to the initial rotation position (rotation start in the counterclockwise direction in front view). One end side is attached to the inner base 186 and the other end side is attached to the transmission gear 188, and the detection shaft 189a of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 is clockwise in a front view through the transmission gear 188. And an auxiliary spring 191 biased in a direction.

  Further, the handle unit 180 has a handle touch sensor 192 attached to the handle base 181 at the rear of the inner base 186 and a tip end projecting outward from the left side in a front view of the front end outer peripheral surface of the handle base 181 A single-shot button 193 attached to the handle base 181 and a single-shot button 193 rotatably mounted around an axis extending back and forth to the handle base 181 at the end side behind the inner base 186 and a single-shot button attached to the handle base 181 And an operation sensor 194.

  The handle base 181 of the handle unit 180 extends inward from the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical base 181a extending in the front and rear direction, the disk-like front end 181b radially projecting from the front end of the base 181a, and the cylindrical base 181a. And three grooves 181c extending in the axial direction and formed at irregular intervals in the circumferential direction. The outer diameter of the base portion 181 a of the handle base 181 is formed to be slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the cylindrical portion 102 a of the handle attachment member 102. Further, the three grooves 181 c are formed at positions corresponding to the three ridges 102 c of the cylindrical portion 102 a of the handle attachment member 102. Therefore, the base portion 181a can be inserted into the cylindrical portion 102a of the handle mounting member 102 in a state in which the three groove portions 181c coincide with the three ridges 102c, and the ridges 102c are respectively inserted in the three groove portions 181c. By being inserted, the handle base 181 can not be rotated relative to the handle attachment member 102.

  The handle 182 includes four first protrusions 182a, second protrusions 182b, third protrusions 182c, and fourth protrusions 182d, which protrude outward in a circumferential direction away from the outer peripheral surface, and a rotation shaft (shaft member 187). Two slits 182e extending in a circular arc shape as a center and penetrating in the front-rear direction, and projecting backward from a position inside with respect to the rotation center with respect to the slit 182e, the other end side of the handle return spring 190 is locked And a locking projection 182f.

  The four first protrusions 182a, the second protrusions 182b, the third protrusions 182c, and the fourth protrusions 182d are sequentially provided in the clockwise direction in front view. More specifically, the first protrusion 182a has a side in the clockwise direction in a front view clockwise direction of a portion of the handle 182 that protrudes most from the general outer peripheral surface bulging outward, and the opposite side is counterclockwise. The side of the direction is concave (curled) to curve inward. The portion of the second protrusion 182b that most protrudes from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 182 is separated from the most protruding portion of the first protrusion 182a in the clockwise direction by a rotation angle of about 85 degrees. Is slightly lower. The second protrusion 182 b is configured such that the side surface in the clockwise direction in the front view clockwise bulges outward and the side surface in the counterclockwise direction on the opposite side curves inward. And is formed in a shape similar to the first protrusion 182a.

  The third protrusion 182c has a portion most projecting from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 182 away from the most protruding portion of the second protrusion 182b in the clockwise direction at a rotational angle of about 70 degrees. It protrudes at about half height. The side surfaces of both sides of the third protrusion 182c are inclined substantially linearly, and the side surface in the clockwise direction is inclined more gently than the side surface in the counterclockwise direction which is the opposite side. In the fourth protrusion 182d, the most protruding part from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 182 is separated from the most protruding part of the third protrusion 182c in the clockwise direction at a rotation angle of about 55 degrees from the first protrusion 182a It also protrudes slightly high. The side surfaces of both sides of the fourth protrusion 182 d are inclined in a substantially linear shape, and are formed in a substantially isosceles triangle.

  The cover pedestal 183 is formed in a disk shape, and includes three mounting bosses 183 a protruding rearward from the rear surface. The three mounting bosses 183 a are attached to the front surface of the handle base 181 by penetrating the slit 182 e of the handle 182 from the front. Since the mounting boss 183a of the handle cap 185 penetrates the slit 182e of the handle 182, the mounting boss 183a abuts on the circumferential end of the slit 182e, thereby restricting the rotation angle of the handle 182. In the present example, the handle 182 can be rotated within a range of approximately 120 degrees of rotation.

  The front face of the handle cap 185 bulges forward and has a light transmitting property. The handle cap 185 is internally provided with a three-dimensionally formed lens member of a transparent member. The handle cap 185 can be lighted and decorated by appropriately emitting the LED on the front surface of the handle decoration substrate 184.

  The handle unit 180 is attached to the handle attachment seat surface 101 b of the door frame base 101 via the handle attachment member 102. The handle mounting seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101 is inclined so that the right end is positioned more rearward than the left end in plan view and faces the outside (the open side). The handle unit 180 to be attached via is also inclined outward in plan view (in other words, its tip is inclined to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 with respect to a line perpendicular to the front of the pachinko machine 1). It is attached and fixed to the door frame 3. As a result, the player can easily hold the handle 182 of the handle unit 180, and can make the user perform the turning operation without a sense of discomfort.

  The handle rotation detection sensor 189 of the handle unit 180 is a variable resistor, and when the handle 182 is rotated, the detection shaft 189 a of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 is rotated via the shaft member 187 and the transmission gear 188. The internal resistance of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 changes according to the rotation angle of the detection shaft 189a, and the driving force of the emission solenoid 542 in the ball emission device 540 described later changes according to the internal resistance of the handle rotation detection sensor 189. The game ball B is driven into the game area 5a with the strength according to the rotation angle of the handle 182, that is, the strength input by the player.

  The handle touch sensor 192 detects static electricity acting on the handle unit 180, and when the player contacts the handle 182 or the like, the static electricity acting from the player is detected, and the handle 182 or the like of the player is detected. Detect contact. Then, when the handle touch sensor 192 detects the player's touch, when the handle 182 is turned, the detection of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 is received, and the firing solenoid is applied with the strength according to the rotation angle of the handle 182. The drive of 542 is controlled, and the game ball B can be hit. That is, even if the player tries to hit the game ball B into the game area 5a by rotating the handle 182 in some way without touching the handle 182, the handle touch sensor 192 does not detect the player's contact. Thus, the firing solenoid 542 is not driven, and the game ball B can not be hit. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the player from playing the game by rotating the handle 182 in a method different from the original method, and it is possible to reduce the load (burden) associated with the gaming hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. .

  Also, when the player presses the one-shot button 193 while the player is rotating the handle 182, the one-shot button manipulation sensor 194 detects the operation of the one-shot button 193, and the firing control portion 633b of the payout control board 633 The drive of the firing solenoid 542 is stopped. Thus, the firing of the game ball B can be temporarily stopped without returning the rotation operation of the handle 182, and by releasing the pressing operation of the one-shot button 193, the operation before the one-shot button 193 is performed. The game ball B can be re-injected into the game area 5a by the driving strength.

  Furthermore, the handle unit 180 includes, in the handle 182, four first protrusions 182a, second protrusions 182b, third protrusions 182c, and fourth protrusions 182d, and the handle 182 is largely rotated in a clockwise direction as viewed from the front. And when the game ball B is strongly hit into the game area 5a (so-called "right-handed"), the position of the first protrusion 182a when the fourth protrusion 182d does not rotate the handle 182 The player can maintain the handle 182 at the “right-handed” position in a comfortable state by replacing the fourth protrusion 182 d with the first protrusion 182 a. It is possible to reduce the feeling of tiredness and to suppress the decrease in interest for the game.

[3-5. Overall configuration of dish unit]
The plate unit 200 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 55 to 58. FIG. 55 is a perspective view of the plate unit of the door frame, and FIG. 56 is a perspective view of the plate unit from the back. FIG. 57 is an exploded perspective view of the plate unit disassembled into main members and viewed from the front, and FIG. 58 is an exploded perspective view of the plate unit disassembled into main members and viewed from the rear. The plate unit 200 is attached to the front side of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 at a position lower than the door window 101 a. The dish unit 200 is arranged on the lower side of the upper dish 201 and the upper dish 201 for storing the game balls B for hitting into the game area 5a, and the game balls supplied from the upper dish 201 and the far cover unit 150 And a lower plate 202 capable of storing B.

  The pan unit 200 has a pan 201 and is mounted on the front of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100. The pan unit 210 is mounted on the front of the pan base unit 210. And a rendering operation unit 300 attached to the front of the dish decoration unit 250 and the dish base unit 210 and operable by the player.

  The plate base unit 210 includes a plate-like plate unit base 211 extending to the left and right, an upper plate body 212 attached to the front upper portion of the plate unit base 211 and having an upper plate 201, and the right side of the upper plate body 212. A mounting base 213 attached to the front and projecting forward, a plate unit relay board 214 mounted on the right of the mounting base 213, and a ball lending operation unit 220 mounted on the top surface of the mounting base 213; An upper counterball removal unit 230 mounted below the mounting base 213 and an upper counterball removal unit 240 mounted at the rear of the upper counterball removal unit 230 are provided.

  The dish decoration unit 250 is attached to the lower front of the dish unit base 211 and attached to the front of the dish unit base 211 so as to cover the outer periphery of the lower dish body 251 having the lower dish 202 and the outer periphery of the lower dish body 251. Tray unit main body 252, a lower plate ball pulling out unit 260 attached to the lower surface of the lower plate main body 251, and a plate upper left decorative unit 270 separately attached to the upper front of the plate unit main body 252 A dish upper right decoration unit 275, and a dish lower left decoration unit 280 and a dish lower right decoration unit 285 mounted below the dish upper left decoration unit 270 and the dish upper right decoration unit 275, respectively.

  The effect operation unit 300 includes, as the effect operation unit 301 operable by the player, a rotation operation unit 302 capable of rotating operation by the player, and a pressing operation unit 303 operable by pressing operation by the player. The rendering operation unit 300 is mounted on the top surface of the rendering operation portion cover unit 310 attached to the front of the dish decoration unit 250, the operation portion base 320 housed in the rendering operation portion cover unit 310, and the upper surface of the operation portion base 320. A ring-shaped effect operation ring 330 having a cage rotation operation unit 302, a rotation drive unit 340 for rotating the rotation operation unit 302, and a transmission for operation ring for transmitting the rotation of the rotation drive unit 340 to the rotation operation unit 302 A gear 350 and a gear mounting member 351 rotatably mounting the operating ring transmission gear 350 are provided.

  Further, the rendering operation unit 300 is attached to a rendering operation ring decoration substrate 352 for emitting and decorating the rendering operation ring 330, a decoration substrate cover 353 covering the upper side of the rendering operation ring decoration substrate 352, and the lower surface of the operation unit base 320 Vibration speaker 354, effect operation button unit 360 attached to the operation unit base 320 to face in the ring of the effect operation ring 330, and operation unit relay board unit 390 attached to the rear surface of the operation unit base 320 And have.

  The whole is bulging forward as a whole, and the rendering operation unit 300 is disposed so that the upper surface of the rendering operation unit 301 is obliquely upward forward at the center in the lateral direction, and the left side of the rendering operation unit 300 at the upper surface While the upper plate 201 is disposed on the right side of the effect operation unit 300, the ball lending operation unit 220 is disposed, and the lower plate 202 is disposed on the lower side of the upper plate 201 and to the left of the effect operation unit 300. As is apparent from the above description, the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200, the effect operation unit 300, and the like are projected toward the player in the left and right intermediate region of the lower front portion of the front surface of the door frame 3. Construct a forward bulging structure.

[3-5-1. Upper plate]
The upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 55 to 58 and the like. The upper plate 201 is formed of the plate unit base 211 and the upper plate main body 212, and is formed in the shape of a container which is largely expanded forward on the left side than the center in the left and right in a front view. In the upper tray 201 (upper tray main body 212), a portion about 1/3 of the width from the left end to the right with respect to the width in the left-right direction of the door frame 3 bulges forward most. In the upper tray 201, the front end recedes rearward as going from the most bulging part to the right in the front view, and the depth in the front-rear direction is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. See). In the upper tray 201, the entire bottom surface including the guiding passage portion 201a is inclined so that the right end is lower, and the right end side in a front view of the guiding passage portion 201a is below the ball lending operation unit 220.

  The upper plate 201 is assembled to the plate unit 200, and the bottom surface of the upper plate 201 is placed on the lower end of the plate unit base 211 with respect to the upper end of the upper ball supply port 211a. It inclines so as to be lower toward a position slightly lower than the outer diameter of B. Thus, the game ball B discharged forward from the upper ball supply port 211a can be received and stored in the upper plate 201, and the received game ball B can be received from the right end side of the guiding passage portion 201a. The ball can be supplied to the ball feeding unit 140 through the upper ball feeding port 211e.

  The induction passage portion 201a is provided with a metal earth metal fitting 201b electrically grounded (earth ground) in the pachinko machine 1, and the game ball B contacts (rolls) to make the game The static electricity charged to the ball B can be removed.

[3-5-2. Lower plate]
The lower tray 202 of the tray unit 200 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 55 to 58 and the like. The lower plate 202 is disposed below the upper plate 201 and to the left of the center of the plate unit 200 (door frame 3) in the left-right direction in a front view. The lower plate 202 is formed of a lower plate main body 251 and a plate unit base 211. The lower tray 202 is formed in the shape of a container capable of storing the gaming balls B, and is provided at the bottom wall with a lower countersink extraction hole 202a which penetrates up and down and can discharge the gaming balls B. The lower bowl ball extraction hole 202 a of the lower tray 202 is closed so as to be opened and closed by a lower bowl ball extraction unit 260.

  The lower plate 202 is formed in a substantially rectangular shape whose shape in plan view extends leftward and rightward, and the front end on the left side from the center in the left-right direction protrudes more forward than the right side. In the lower tray 202, lower countersink holes 202a penetrating vertically are disposed near the front end near the right end. The lower plate 202 is inclined so that the bottom surface is lower toward the lower ball open hole 202a. The lower bowl ball extraction hole 202a of the lower tray 202 is located in front of the lower bowl ball supply port 211c and below the effect operation unit 300 in a state of being assembled in the tray unit 200.

  The lower tray 202 can store the game balls B discharged forward from the lower flat ball supply port 211c in a state where the lower flat ball extraction hole 202a is closed, and open the lower flat ball extraction hole 202a. The game balls B stored in the above can be discharged to the lower side (e.g., dollar box) of the dish unit 200. Further, in the state where the lower flat ball extraction hole 202a of the lower plate 202 is opened, the lower flat ball extraction hole 202a is disposed in front of the lower flat ball supply port 211c, so It is possible to quickly discharge the released game ball B downward from the lower ball extraction hole 202a by the movement of the shortest distance.

[3-5-3. Dish base unit]
The dish base unit 210 in the dish unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 59 to 62. FIG. 59 is a front perspective view of the pan base unit in the pan unit, and FIG. 60 is a rear perspective view of the pan base unit in the pan unit. FIG. 61 is an exploded perspective view of the plate base unit disassembled into main members and viewed from the front, and FIG. 62 is an exploded perspective view of the plate base unit disassembled into main members and viewed from the rear is there. The dish base unit 210 is attached to the front of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 below the door window 101a, and the dish decoration unit 250 and the rendering operation unit 300 are attached to the front.

  The plate base unit 210 is a flat plate unit base 211 attached to the lower front of the door frame base unit 100 and extending left and right, and an upper plate attached to the upper front of the plate unit base 211 and having an upper plate 201. The mounting base 213 is attached to the right of the main body 212 and the upper pan body 212 at the upper front of the pan unit base 211 and protrudes forward, and is mounted to the right of the mounting base 213 at the front of the pan unit base 211 And the tray unit relay board 214.

  Further, the bowl base unit 210 includes a ball lending operation unit 220 attached to the upper surface of the mounting base 213, and an upper bowling ball extraction unit 230 attached to the front of the bowl unit base 211 below the mounting base 213. , And an after-the-counter ball removal unit 240 mounted on the rear side of the plate unit base 211 at the rear of the table ball removal front unit 230.

[3-5-3a. Dish unit base]
The dish unit base 211 of the dish base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 61 and 62. The plate unit base 211 is attached below the door window 101a on the front face of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and extends flat across the entire width of the door frame base 101 Box-shaped).

  The pan unit base 211 penetrates back and forth in the vicinity of the upper left corner of the front view, and penetrates back and forth under the upper pan ball supply port 211a and the upper pan and ball supply port 211a extending cylindrically rearward. A speaker port 211b to which a punching metal is attached on the front side, a lower circular bulb supply port 211c which penetrates back and forth in the lower part on the left side with respect to the left and right center in front view and cylindrically extends backward; A notch 211d is notched in the right side wall of the portion extending cylindrically to the rear of the ball supply port 211c and has a size that allows the game ball B to pass through, and front and rear in the front right upper side of the lower flat ball supply port 211c And an upper flat ball feed port 211e which extends upward and downward and whose upper portion is located at the right end of the upper flat body 212.

  Further, the plate unit base 211 protrudes forward on the right side of the upper flat ball feed port 211e, and is raised on the left side of the upper flat ball feed port 211e, on which the mounting base is placed. A slider insertion port 211g which penetrates back and forth in the lower part of the pan body and into which the operation transmission portion 242b of the upper disc ball removal slider 242 of the upper disc ball removal unit 240 is inserted and penetrates back and forth at the lower right corner Handle insertion opening 211h through which the cylindrical portion 102a of the handle mounting member 102 of the door frame base unit 100 is inserted, and cylinder insertion through which the cylinder body 131 of the cylinder lock 130 is inserted, which penetrates back and forth near the right corner in front view And a mouth 211i.

  The upper bowl ball supply port 211 a of the bowl unit base 211 is assembled to the door frame 3, and the front end is opened to the rear wall of the upper bowl 201, and the cylindrical rear end passes through the upper bowl ball for the door frame base 101. The mouth 101 g is penetrated from the front side to be connected to the front end of the through ball passage 150 a of the far cover unit 150. As a result, the gaming ball B dispensed from the dispensing device 580 of the dispensing unit 560 is supplied (dispensed) into the upper tray 201 through the upper ball dispensing port 211 a.

  The lower disc ball supply port 211c is assembled to the door frame 3, and the front end is opened to the rear wall of the lower plate 202, and the cylindrical rear end is the lower disc ball passage port 101f of the door frame base 101 from the front side. It penetrates and is connected with the front end of ball emission mouth 150d of far cover unit 150. As a result, the gaming ball B circulating in the storage passage 150e of the far cover unit 150 is supplied into the lower tray 202 through the lower countersink supply port 211c. In addition, the downstream end of the ball extraction guiding path 241c in the rear base 241 of the unit 240 after the removal of the upper ball is connected to the notch portion 211d formed in the cylindrically extending portion of the lower ball supply port 211c. ing. Thus, the game ball B stored in the upper plate 201 is operated by the upper plate ball extraction button 222, the upper ball supply port 211e, the entrance 141a and the ball extraction port 141b of the ball supply unit 140, and the upper The lower ball and ball supply port 211c is discharged into the lower plate 202 through the ball feeding and introducing passage 241b and the ball removal and introducing passage 241c of the unit 240 and the notch 211d.

  The upper flat ball feeding port 211 e is located in front of the ball receiving port 241 a of the rear base 241 in the upper flat ball dropping unit 240 in a state assembled to the flat base unit 210. B is supplied from the ball socket 241a of the unit 240 after ball removal to the ball feeding and introducing passage 241b.

[3-5-3b. Upper plate body]
The upper plate main body 212 of the plate base unit 210 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 61 and 62 and the like. The upper dish main body 212 is attached to the front of the dish unit base 211 and cooperates with the dish unit base 211 to form the upper dish 201. The upper dish main body 212 is formed in a container shape (dish shape) in which the upper side and the rear side are opened. The upper plate main body 212 extends in the left and right direction, and the left side of the upper plate main body 212 bulges forward largely from the center in the left and right in a front view. The upper plate main body 212 is formed such that the front end recedes backward as going from the most bulging part to the right in the front view, and the depth in the front-rear direction is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B ing. The bottom surface of the upper tray main body 212 is inclined so that the right end is lowest. The upper tray main body 212 is closed at the top near the right end.

  The upper tray main body 212 is attached to the lower end of the bowl unit 200 so that the portion closed at the upper side in the vicinity of the right end sinks below the ball lending operation unit 220 when assembled in the tray unit 200. Further, in the upper tray main body 212, a rendering operation unit mounting portion 212a is formed at an intermediate portion in the left-right direction in the upper portion, and a part of the rendering operation unit 300 is mounted on the rendering operation unit mounting portion 212a.

[3-5-3c. Mounting base]
The mounting base 213 of the pan base unit 210 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 61 and 62. The mounting base 213 is mounted on the front surface of the pan unit base 211 in a state of being mounted on the upper surface of the mounting protrusion 211 f of the pan unit base 211, and the ball lending operation unit 220 is mounted on the upper side. The mounting base 213 is formed in a shallow box shape whose upper side is open. The mounting base 213 is provided with an insertion port 213a penetrating vertically in the vicinity of the left end, and a penetration port 213b penetrating vertically in the rear right corner.

  The insertion hole 213a of the mounting base 213 is a hole through which the front slider 232 of the unit 230 is removed. Moreover, the wiring cable for connecting the ball lending operation unit 220 and the door frame main relay board 104 is inserted through the through hole 213 b.

[3-5-3 d. Plate unit relay board]
The plate unit relay substrate 214 of the plate base unit 210 relays the connection between the door frame sub relay substrate 105 in the door frame base unit 100 and the plate lower left decorative substrate 283, the plate lower right decorative substrate 288, and the operation unit relay substrate 392 It is to do. The tray unit relay substrate 214 is attached to the right of the mounting protrusion 211 f on the front surface of the tray unit base 211. When the plate unit relay board 214 is attached to the plate unit base 211, the rear surface faces the back side of the plate unit base 211.

[3-5-3e. Ball lending operation unit]
The ball lending operation unit 220 of the bowl base unit 210 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 55 to 62 and the like. The ball lending operation unit 220 is attached to the front of the dish unit base 211 via the attachment base 213. The ball lending operation unit 220 discharges the gaming balls B stored in the upper tray 201 to the lower tray 202, and cashes the ball lending machine (not shown) provided adjacent to the pachinko machine 1 Or, after inserting a prepaid card, lend a predetermined number of game balls B into the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200, display the remaining amount of cash or prepaid card inserted into the ball rental machine, or use the ball rental machine It is for deducting and returning the part of the game ball B from which the cash and prepaid card thrown in to were loaned out, or returning.

  The ball lending operation unit 220 has a base portion 221 attached to the upper side of the mounting base 213, an upper flat ball extraction button 222 disposed near the left end of the upper surface of the base portion 221, and an upper flat ball on the upper surface of the base portion 221 A light transmitting disc-like ball lending operation base 223 disposed to the right of the extraction button 222, a ball lending button 224 disposed on the front left side of the ball lending operation base 223, and a ball lending operation A return button 225 disposed on the front right side of the base 223 and a ball lending display unit (not shown) disposed below the rear of the ball lending operation base 223 are provided.

  The upper ball ball extraction button 222 protrudes upward in a cylindrical shape from the upper surface of the base portion 221, and can be moved downward by the player performing a pressing operation. The ball lending button 224 is formed in a circular shape. The return button 225 is formed in a triangular shape. The ball lending display unit is configured of three 7-segment LEDs, and can be viewed through the transparent ball lending operation base 223 in a light emitting state.

  The ball lending operation unit 220 can discharge the gaming balls B stored in the upper tray 201 to the lower tray by pressing the upper tray ball extraction button 222. Further, after inserting a prepaid card with cash or balance into the ball lending machine and pressing the ball lending button 224, a predetermined number of gaming balls B are supplied to the upper tray 201. When the return button 225 is pressed, the game ball B is deducted from the cash or prepaid card inserted in the ball lending machine and returned. The ball lending display unit displays the remaining amount of cash or prepaid card inserted into the ball lending machine. Further, an error code is displayed on the ball rental display unit when the ball rental machine breaks down.

[3-5-3f. Upper flat ball removal unit and upper flat ball removal unit]
The unit 230 for removing the counter ball and the unit 240 for removing the counter ball in the disc base unit 210 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 61 and 62 and the like. The upper flat ball extraction unit 230 and the upper flat ball extraction unit 240 cooperate with the ball feeding unit 140 when the upper flat ball extraction button 222 of the ball lending operation unit 220 is pressed to operate the upper tray 201. The game balls B stored inside are discharged to the lower tray 202.

  The upper bowl ball extraction front unit 230 is attached below the ball lending operation unit 220 on the left side of the placement projection 211 f on the front surface of the bowl unit base 211. The upper bowl ball removal unit 240 is attached to the rear surface of the bowl unit base 211 at a position behind the upper bowl ball removal unit 230.

  The upper ball and ball removal front unit 230 is attached to the front surface of the disk unit base 211 and extends in the up and down direction, and is movably inserted in the cylinder of the front base 231. And a slider 232. The front base 231 is attached to the front of the pan unit base 211 near the front of the upper pan and ball feed port 211 e and the slider insertion port 211 g. The front slider 232 extends vertically and its upper end is in contact with the lower end of the upper flat ball extraction button 222 and its lower end is the operation receiving portion 242 a of the upper flat ball extraction slider 242 of the unit 240 after the upper flat ball extraction. It is in contact with the upper surface.

  The upper countersink ball removal unit 240 is attached to the rear surface of the disk unit base 211 so as to close the upper ball and ball supply port 211e and the slider insertion port 211g from the rear, and the front surface of the rear base 241 in the vertical direction An upper ball ball slide slider 242 slidably mounted, a spring 243 urging the upper ball ball slide slider 242 upward, and a rear cover 244 mounted on the rear side of the rear base 241; Is equipped.

  The rear base 241 protrudes upward from a portion to which the upper ball ball slide slider 242 is slidably attached, and is opened forward and a ball socket 241a through which the game ball B can pass, and a ball socket 241a. The ball feeding guide path 241b that guides the received gaming ball B downward on the rear surface of the rear base 241 and then guides it backward, and the game on the rear surface of the rear base 241 from a position lower than the ball feeding guide path 241b And a ball extraction guide path 241c for guiding the ball B downward and guiding it to the right in a rear view.

  The ball socket 241a is assembled in the plate base unit 210, and is directed forward through the upper plate feeding port 211e of the plate unit base 211 at the downstream end (right end in front view) of the guide passage portion 201a of the upper plate 201. It is formed at an opening position. The ball feed guide path 241b is formed so that the entrance 141a of the ball feed unit 140 is located at the rear of the lower part in the state assembled to the door frame 3. As a result, the gaming ball B supplied to the upper tray 201 is made to enter the entrance 141 a of the ball feeding unit 140 through the ball receiving port 241 a and the ball feeding guide path 241 b.

  The portions of the ball extraction guide path 241c that extend to the left and right are projected to the right in the rear view and inclined so that the right end in the rear view is lower than the part to which the upper disc ball extraction slider 242 is slidably attached. And open on the right side in a rear view. The rear side of the ball extension guiding path 241 c is closed by the rear cover 244. The upper part of the part extending vertically up and down below the ball feeding and guiding passage 241b is located in front of the ball pulling out port 141b of the ball feeding unit 140 when the ball pulling and guiding passage 241c is assembled in the door frame 3. At the same time, the right end in the rear view of the portion extending leftward and rightward is formed so as to be connected to the notch portion 211 d of the lower circular bulb supply port 211 c in the dish unit base 211. As a result, the gaming ball B discharged from the ball outlet 141b of the ball feeding unit 140 is discharged into the lower tray 202 from the lower flat ball supply port 211c through the ball extraction guiding path 241c and the notch portion 211d.

  The upper flat ball slide slider 242 is formed in a square shape in a front view, and protrudes rearward from the rear surface which is the rear side of the operation receiving portion 242 a that protrudes forward from the upper left corner and the operation receiving portion 242 a And an operation transmission unit 242b. The upper surface of the operation receiving portion 242a is formed flat. In addition, the operation transmitting portion 242b is inclined so that the upper surface is positioned downward as it goes rearward, and the lower surface extends horizontally so as to be connected to the rear end of the upper surface.

  The upper ball ball removal slider 242 is assembled to the door frame 3, and the operation receiving portion 242a penetrates the slider insertion port 211g of the plate unit base 211 from the rear side and protrudes forward, and the operation receiving portion 242a The lower end of the front slider 232 of the unit 230 is in contact with the upper surface of the front flat ball. Further, the upper ball ball slide slider 242 is assembled to the door frame 3, and the operation transmission portion 242b protrudes to the rear of the rear base 241 and operates the ball extraction member 143 of the ball feeding unit 140 on the upper surface. A weir 143c is in contact.

  The upper end of the spring 243 is attached to the rear base 241, and the lower end is attached to the upper countersink slider 242, and the upper countersink slider 242 is biased upward. Therefore, the upper ball ball slide slider 242 is positioned at the upward moving end by the biasing force of the spring 243, and can move downward by resisting the biasing force of the spring 243.

  The upper counter ball removal unit 230 and the upper counter ball removal unit 240 have the upper counter ball removal slider 242 positioned at the upper moving end by the biasing force of the spring 243, and the upper counter ball removal slider 242 The upper flat screen extraction button 222 is positioned at the moving end upward through the front slider 232 that is in contact with the upper surface of the operation receiving portion 242a. Further, since the upper flat ball slide slider 242 is positioned at the upward moving end by the biasing force of the spring 243, the downward movement of the actuating rod 143c in contact with the upper surface of the actuating transmission portion 242b is blocked. The partition portion 143a of the ball removal member 143 is positioned between the entrance 141a and the ball removal hole 141b to separate the two.

  Therefore, in a state in which the upper ball and ball extraction button 222 is not pressed, the space between the entrance 141 a and the ball extraction hole 141 b is separated in the ball feeding unit 140, and is sent from the upper plate 201 to the ball socket 241 a. The game ball B can be sent from the hitting supply port 142a to the ball emitting device 540 via the entrance 141a and the ball feeding member 144.

  On the other hand, when the upper flat ball extraction button 222 is pressed downward against the biasing force of the spring 243, the upper flat ball extraction slider 242 moves downward via the front slider 232, and the operation of the upper flat ball extraction slider 242 The actuating rod 143c of the ball removal member 143 in contact with the upper surface of the transmission portion 242b can move downward, and the load of the weight portion 143d of the ball removal member 143 rotates the ball removal member 143 to divide the partition 143a. Is retracted from between the entrance 141a and the ball outlet 141b. As a result, the gaming ball B that has entered the entrance 141a from the upper plate 201 through the ball receptacle 241a and the ball feed guiding path 241b is discharged forward from the ball outlet 141b opened below the entrance 141a. It will be done. The gaming ball B discharged forward from the ball outlet 141b is guided from the notch portion 211d into the lower flat ball supply port 211c through the ball extraction guide path 241c, and then lower from the lower flat ball supply port 211c. The game balls B in the upper plate 201 are discharged into the lower plate 202 after being discharged into the plate 202.

  When the downward pressing of the upper flat ball extraction button 222 is released, the upper flat ball extraction slider 242 is moved upward by the biasing force of the spring 243, and the upper pan via the front slider 232 in contact with the operation receiving portion 242a. As the ball removal button 222 is lifted, the ball removal member 143 is rotated by the actuating rod 143c in contact with the actuating transmission portion 242b, and the partition portion 143a is positioned between the entrance 141a and the ball removal port 141b. It will return to the original state.

  As described above, the gaming ball B in the upper tray 201 is fed to the ball launcher 540 via the ball feeding unit 140 by the unit 230 for removing the upper bowl and the unit 240 for removing the upper bowl. It can be discharged to the lower tray 202 side.

[3-5-4. Dish decoration unit]
The dish decoration unit 250 in the dish unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 63 to 66 and the like. FIG. 63 is a perspective view of the dish decoration unit in the dish unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 64 is a perspective view of the dish decoration unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 65 is an exploded perspective view of the dish decoration unit disassembled into main members and viewed from the front, and FIG. 66 is an exploded perspective view of the dish decoration unit disassembled into main members and seen from the back is there. The dish decoration unit 250 has the lower dish 202 and is attached to the front of the dish base unit 210, and the rendering operation unit 300 is attached to the center in the left-right direction from the front. The dish decoration unit 250 is decorating almost the whole of the dish unit 200.

  The dish decoration unit 250 is attached to the lower front of the dish unit base 211 and cooperates with the dish unit base 211 to form the lower dish main body 251 and the dish unit base to cover the outer circumference of the lower dish main body 251. A bowl unit main body 252 attached to the front of the bowl 211, a lower bowl ball pulling out unit 260 attached to the lower surface of the lower bowl main body 251, and a bowl separately mounted on the upper front of the bowl unit main body 252 Upper left decorative unit 270 and lower right upper decorative unit 275, and lower left upper decorative unit 280 and lower right upper decorative unit 275 mounted on the entire surface of lower unit body 252, lower left lower decorative unit 280 and lower right lower decorative unit And 285.

[3-5-4a. Lower plate body]
The lower plate main body 251 in the plate decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 63 to 66 and the like. The lower tray body 251 cooperates with the plate unit base 211 of the plate base unit 210 to form the lower plate 202. The lower tray main body 251 is formed in a container shape (dish shape) which extends in the left and right direction and is open at the upper and the rear. The lower tray main body 251 is attached to a portion on the left side of the front lower portion of the tray unit base 211 from the center in the left-right direction so that the open rear is closed.

  The lower tray main body 251 is formed in a substantially rectangular shape whose shape in plan view extends in the left and right direction, and the front end on the left side from the center in the left-right direction protrudes forward than the right side. In the lower tray main body 251, in the vicinity of the front end of the right end in a plan view, a lower countersink hole 202a penetrating vertically is formed. The lower tray main body 251 is inclined so that the bottom surface thereof is lowered toward the lower spherical ball opening 202a. The lower ball ball extraction hole 202 a is closed by the lower ball ball extraction lid 265 so as to be opened and closed.

  The lower tray body 251 is in a state in which the outer periphery and a part of the lower surface are covered with the tray unit main body 252 in a state where the lower tray main body 251 is assembled in the tray decoration unit 250. Further, the lower tray main body is in a state assembled to the tray unit 200, the bottom surface is positioned lower than the lower tray ball supply port 211c of the plate unit base 211, and the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a is a lower plate ball supply port. It is located in front of 211c. Thereby, the game ball B discharged forward from the lower ball supply port 211c can be stored.

[3-5-4b. Dish unit body]
The dish unit main body 252 in the dish decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 63 to 66 and the like. The dish unit main body 252 is attached to the front of the dish unit base 211 in the dish base unit 210, and decorates the front of the dish unit 200. The pan unit body 252 bulges so that the center in the left and right direction protrudes forward on the upper side, and the left side in the left and right direction bulges forward on the lower side. Further, the upper surface of the plate unit main body 252 is curved such that the center in the left-right direction is lowest. The plate unit main body 252 is formed in the shape of a box opened rearward.

  The pan unit main body 252 bulges forward toward the center in the left and right direction from the left and right ends in the upper part and extends upward and separately from the upper side bulged part 252a spaced apart in the left and right And a bottom plate portion 252c extending in the form of a flat plate from the lower end of the lower front decorative portion 252b to the rear in such a manner as to cover the outer periphery of the lower tray main body 251. .

  The left and right upper side bulged parts 252a are formed in a box shape with an open rear, and the front left dish upper left decoration unit 270, the lower left lower decoration unit 280, the upper right upper decoration unit 275 and the lower right decoration unit 285 is attached. The right end of the lower surface of the left upper side bulging portion 252a is connected to the lower front decorative portion 252b. Further, the lower end of the upper side bulging portion 252a on the right side is connected to the lower front decorative portion 252b.

  The pan unit main body 252 is formed with a lower pan opening 252d which penetrates back and forth between the upper side bulging portion 252a on the left side and the lower front decorative portion 252b. The lower plate opening 252d has a size such that the player's finger can be inserted, and the lower plate opening 252d is formed to be wider upward and downward as it goes to the left. The lower plate opening 252d is formed in a cylindrical shape extending in the front-rear direction by the lower plate main body 251 and the lower surface of the upper side bulging portion 252a on the left side.

  Further, the plate unit main body 252 is a front notch portion 252e which is notched upward from the front lower end of a portion covering the outer periphery of the lower plate main body 251 in the lower front decorative portion 252b, and the lower plate main body 251 in the bottom plate portion 252c. And a bottom notch 252f which is notched at a lower part of The lower countersunk ball extraction unit 260 is inserted into the front notch 252e and the bottom notch 252f.

  Furthermore, the pan unit main body 252 penetrates back and forth at the lower right corner of the lower front decorative portion 252b, and the handle insertion port 252g through which the cylindrical portion 102a of the handle attachment member 102 is inserted; It is formed between the cylinder insertion port 252h which penetrates the decoration part 252b back and forth and into which the cylinder body 131 of the cylinder lock 130 is inserted, and a pair of upper side bulging parts 252a which becomes the center in the horizontal direction. And a rendering operation unit attachment portion 252i to which the 300 is attached. The effect operation unit attachment portion 252i is formed to have a width of about 1/3 of the width of the plate unit main body 252 in the left-right direction.

  The plate unit main body 252 is formed to entirely cover the front surface of the plate base unit 210 in a state assembled to the plate unit 200, and the speaker opening 211b faces forward through the lower plate opening 252d. . Further, in a state where it is assembled in the dish decoration unit 250, the lower disc ball extraction button 263 of the lower disc ball extraction unit 260 faces forward from the front notch portion 252e, and the lower disc ball extraction base 261 of the lower disc ball extraction unit 260. The bottom notch 252f is closed so that the lower surfaces are in the same plane.

[3-5-4c. Lower bowl ball removal unit]
The lower tray ball extraction unit 260 in the tray decoration unit 250 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 63 to 66 and the like. The lower tray ball removal unit 260 is attached to the lower surface of the lower plate main body 251 and stores the game balls B in the lower plate 202 or discharges the game balls B from the lower plate 202 by opening and closing the lower plate ball extraction holes 202a. It is intended to

  The lower disc ball extraction unit 260 is attached to the lower surface of the lower disc body 251 and has a flat lower disc ball extraction base 261 having a through hole penetrating vertically in the front right corner in plan view; A slider 262 slidably mounted to the front and back on the upper surface side of the base 261, a lower countersunk ball release button 263 attached to the front end of the slider 262, and a spring 264 biasing the slider 262 forward; The lower disc ball lid 265 opens and closes the through hole by the movement of the slider 262 in the front-rear direction, and the holding mechanism 266 holds the lower disc ball lid 265 in the open state via the slider 262.

  The lower ball ball extraction base 261 is formed to close the bottom notch 252f of the disk unit main body 252, and is vertically moved to a position corresponding to the lower ball ball extraction hole 202a of the lower disk 202 (lower disk main body 251). A penetrating through hole is formed. The through hole of the lower ball ball extraction base 261 is formed in the same size as the lower ball ball extraction hole 202a. The slider 262 is formed in the shape of a flat plate extending in the front and rear direction, and is slidably mounted on the lower disc ball removal base 261 in the front and rear direction at a position from the center in the left-right direction to the left. The slider 262 is provided with a projecting pin projecting cylindrically upward.

  The lower disc ball ejection lid 265 is attached to the lower disc ball ejection base 261 so as to be rotatable about an axis extending up and down at a position on the left side of the slider 262 at the left end side. The right end side is formed so as to be able to close the through hole. The lower flat ball lid 265 is formed with a slit extending in the left and right direction in which the protruding pin of the slider 262 is slidably inserted.

  In the lower tray ball removal unit 260, the lower tray ball removal base 261 closes the bottom surface cutout portion 252f of the plate unit main body 252 in a state assembled to the plate decoration unit 250, and the lower surface of the lower plate ball removal base 261 It is located on the same plane as the lower surface of the bottom plate 252c. In addition, the lower countersunk ball extraction button 263 is facing forward from the front cutout 252e of the main dish unit main body 252. Under normal conditions, the slider 262 is positioned at the front moving end by the biasing force of the spring 264, and the right end side of the lower microcontroller ball lid 265 is positioned directly above the through hole in the normal state. And the through hole (the lower countersink hole 202a) is closed.

  In this normal state, the lower ball extraction hole 202a is closed by the lower ball removal cover 265, and the gaming ball B can be stored in the lower plate 202. Further, in the normal state, the front surface of the lower ball ball extraction button 263 substantially coincides with the front surface around the front cutout portion 252e in the front surface of the lower front decorative portion 252b.

  Under normal conditions, when the lower ball extraction button 263 is pushed backward and moved backward against the biasing force of the spring 264, the slider 262 moves backward together with the lower ball extraction button 263. It becomes. When the slider 262 moves backward, the projecting pin of the slider 262 presses the lower flat ball lid 265 backward through the slit, and the lower flat ball lid 265 is centered on the left end side and the right end is backward It will turn in the direction of movement. Then, the right end side of the lower countersunk ball lid 265 located immediately above the through hole moves backward from the position of the through hole, so that the through hole is opened and the lower countersink hole 202a is opened, The gaming ball B in the lower tray 202 can be discharged to the lower side of the tray unit 200 through the lower tray ball extraction hole 202a.

  In addition, when the slider 262 is moved backward by the pressing of the lower ball lifting button 263, the rear end of the slider 262 is held by the holding mechanism 266, and the pressing of the lower ball lifting button 263 is released. However, the slider 262 is not moved forward by the biasing force of the spring 264. As a result, the right end side of the lower ball removal cover 265 is kept turned to the rear, and the lower ball removal hole 202a is maintained in the open state, and the gaming balls B in the lower plate 202 are continuously used. It can be discharged downward.

  In order to close the lower ball extraction hole 202a from this state, when the lower ball extraction button 263 which is retracted from the front surface of the lower front decorative portion 252b is pushed backward, the holding of the slider 262 by the holding mechanism 266 is released. Ru. Then, when the pressing of the lower ball releasing button 263 is released, the slider 262 moves forward by the biasing force of the spring 264, and the front surface of the lower ball releasing button 263 returns to the state where it matches the front surface of the lower front decorative portion 252b. At the same time, the lower ball removal cover 265 is pivoted so that the right end side is located immediately above the through hole, and the lower ball removal hole 202 a is closed by the lower ball removal cover 265. Thus, the gaming balls B can be stored in the lower tray 202.

[3-5-4 d. Upper left decoration unit and upper right decoration unit]
The dish upper left decoration unit 270 and the dish upper right decoration unit 275 in the dish decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 63 to 66 and the like. The upper left decoration unit 270 and the upper right decoration unit 275 are attached to the upper front of the upper side bulging portion 252 a of the main unit 252. The dish upper left decoration unit 270 and the dish upper right decoration unit 275 are for decorating the left and right sides of the rendering operation unit 300 at the upper part of the dish unit 200.

  The dish upper left decorative unit 270 is a semicylindrical shape extending in the left and right direction and has a light transmitting property. The dish upper left decorative body 271 and the dish upper left reflector 272 attached to the rear side of the dish upper left decorative body 271 A dish upper left decorative substrate 273 mounted on the back side of the dish upper left reflector 272 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface thereof.

  The dish upper left decorative body 271 extends curvilinearly so as to move forward and move downward from the left end to the right end, and is attached to the upper part of the left upper side bulging portion 252a. The upper left decorative body 271 has a shape in which the semicircular arc bulging forward has a central axis extending obliquely to the upper left at the left end, and a central axis extending to the left and right at the right end, and the half cylinder is twisted. It is formed. The dish upper left decorative body 271 is formed in milky white.

  The dish upper left reflector 272 is inserted from the back into the dish upper left decoration 271, and a through hole is formed in a portion corresponding to the LED of the dish upper left decoration substrate 273. The plate upper left decorative substrate 273 is formed in an elongated strip shape extending left and right along the plate upper left decorative body 271. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper left decoration substrate 273 are full color LEDs, and by emitting light, the upper left decoration 271 can be made to emit light.

  The left upper part of the upper left decorative unit 270 is assembled to the door frame 3, and the left end is continuous with the lower end of the left left side unit 400, and the right end is the left end of the upper central decorative body 312a of the unit front cover 312 in the presentation operation unit 300. And continuous. Since the upper left decoration unit 270 does not have a rib in the middle in the longitudinal direction in the upper left decoration 271, when the plurality of LEDs of the upper left decoration substrate 273 emit light, the entire front of the upper left decoration 271 is The light emitting decoration can be made substantially uniform, and it can appear as if a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

  The dish upper right decoration unit 275 has a semicylindrical shape extending laterally and has a light transmitting property, the dish upper right decoration 276 and the dish upper right reflector 277 mounted on the rear side of the dish upper right decoration 276, A dish upper right decoration substrate 278 is mounted on the back side of the dish upper right reflector 277 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front side.

  The dish upper right decoration 276 extends curvilinearly so as to move forward and move downward from the right end to the left end, and is attached to the upper part of the right upper side bulging portion 252a. The upper right decoration 276 has a shape in which the semicircular arc bulging forward has a central axis extending obliquely rightward at the right end, and a central axis extending left and right at the left end, and the half cylinder is twisted. It is formed. The dish upper right decoration 276 is formed in milky white.

  The dish upper right reflector 277 is inserted from behind into the dish upper right decoration 276, and a through hole is formed in a portion of the dish upper right decoration substrate 278 corresponding to the LED. The dish upper right decoration substrate 278 is formed in an elongated strip shape extending left and right along the dish upper right decoration 276. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the dish upper right decoration substrate 278 are full color LEDs, and by emitting light, the dish upper right decoration 276 can be decorated to emit light.

  The right upper part of the upper right decoration unit 275 is continuous with the lower end of the right side unit 410, and the left end is the right end of the upper part decoration 312a of the unit front cover 312 in the presentation operation unit 300. And continuous. Since the dish upper right decoration unit 275 does not have a rib in the middle in the longitudinal direction in the dish upper right decoration 276, when the plurality of LEDs of the dish upper right decoration substrate 278 are illuminated, the entire front face of the dish upper right decoration 276 The light emitting decoration can be made substantially uniform, and it can appear as if a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

[3-5-4e. Lower left decoration unit and lower right decoration unit]
The dish lower left decoration unit 280 and the dish lower right decoration unit 285 in the dish decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 63 to 66 and the like. The lower left decoration unit 280 and the lower right decoration unit 285 are attached to the lower front of the upper side bulging portion 252a of the main unit 252 so as to extend along the upper left decoration unit 270 and the upper right decoration unit 275, respectively. Be The dish lower left decoration unit 280 and the dish lower right decoration unit 285 cooperate with the dish upper left decoration unit 270 and the dish upper right decoration unit 275 to decorate the front of the dish unit 200 and the left and right sides of the rendering operation unit 300 .

  The lower left decoration unit 280 has a semi-cylindrical shape extending in the left and right direction and has a light transmitting property. The lower left decoration 281 has a lower left reflector 282 mounted on the rear side of the lower left decoration 281. A dish lower left decorative substrate 283 mounted on the back side of the dish lower left reflector 282 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front side.

  The lower left decorative body 281 extends curvilinearly to move forward and move downward from the left end to the right end, and extends in a circular arc having a center at the rear in plan view, Is attached to the lower portion of the upper side bulging portion 252a. The lower left decorative body 281 has a semicircular arc bulging forward at a smaller radius than the upper left decorative body 271 and the upper right decorative body 276. The shaft extends left and right, and is shaped so that the semi-cylinder is bent. The left lower end of the lower left decoration body 281 is formed in a spherical shape. The curvature of the semicircular arc changes so that the dish lower left decorative body 281 becomes thinner toward the left end. This dish lower left decoration 281 is formed milky white.

  The lower left reflector 282 is inserted into the lower left decorative body 281 from the rear, and a through hole is formed in a portion of the lower left decorative substrate 283 corresponding to the LED. The lower left decoration substrate 283 is formed in the shape of an elongated strip extending left and right along the lower left decoration 281. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the lower left decoration board 283 is a full color LED, and by emitting light, the lower left decoration 281 can be made to emit light.

  With the lower left decoration unit 280 assembled to the door frame 3, the left end is located below the left end of the upper left decoration unit 270, and the right end is the lower center decoration 312b of the unit front cover 312 in the rendering operation unit 300. It is continuous with the left end. In the lower left decoration unit 280, since the left end of the lower left decoration 281 is formed in a spherical shape, it looks as if the left end is sunk into the door frame 3. The lower left decorative unit 280 does not have a rib in the middle of the lower left decorative body 281 in the longitudinal direction. Therefore, when the plurality of LEDs of the lower left decorative board 283 emit light, the entire front surface of the lower left decorative body 281 The light emitting decoration can be made substantially uniform, and it can appear as if a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

  The dish lower right decoration unit 285 is a semi-cylindrical, horizontally extending, light transmitting dish lower right decoration 286 and a dish lower right decoration attached to the back of the dish lower right decoration 286. A reflector 287 and a dish lower right decoration substrate 288 mounted on the rear side of the dish lower right reflector 287 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface are provided.

  The dish lower right decoration 286 extends curvilinearly to move forward and move downward from the right end to the left end, and extends in a circular arc having a center at the rear in plan view, It is attached to the lower part of the upper side bulging part 252a of the right side. The lower right decoration 286 is a semicircular arc bulging forward at a smaller radius than the upper left decoration 271 and the upper right decoration 276. The central axis extends to the left and right, and the half cylinder is formed to be bent. The right lower end of the lower right decoration 286 is formed in a spherical shape. The curvature of the semicircular arc changes so that the dish lower right decoration 286 becomes thinner toward the right end. This dish lower right decoration 286 is formed milky white.

  The dish lower right reflector 287 is inserted from the back into the inside of the dish lower right decoration 286, and a through hole is formed in a portion corresponding to the LED of the dish lower right decoration substrate 288. The lower right decoration substrate 288 is formed in the shape of an elongated strip extending leftward and rightward along the lower right decoration 286. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the dish lower right decoration substrate 288 are full color LEDs, and by emitting light, the dish lower right decoration 286 can be decorated with light emission.

  The right lower end of the lower right decoration unit 285 is located below the right end of the upper right decoration unit 275, and the left end is the lower center decoration 312b of the unit front cover 312 in the rendering operation unit 300. It is continuous with the right end of. In the lower right decoration unit 285, the right end of the lower right decoration 286 of the lower right decoration of the lower right decoration of the lower right decoration of the lower right decoration of the lower right decoration appears to be embedded in the door frame 3. Since the dish lower right decoration unit 285 has no rib in the middle of the dish lower right decoration 286 in the longitudinal direction, when the plural LEDs of the dish lower right decoration substrate 288 emit light, the dish lower right decoration 286 The entire front surface of the light emitting device can be substantially uniformly emitted and decorated, and it can appear as if a fluorescent light is embedded.

[3-5-5. Overall Configuration of Production Operation Unit]
The entire configuration of the effect operation unit 300 in the pan unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 67 is a plan view of the effect operation unit in the dish unit as viewed from the direction of movement of the effect operation button. FIG. 68 (a) is a perspective view of the rendering operation unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 68 (b) is a perspective view of the rendering operation unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 69 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation unit disassembled into main members and viewed from the front, and FIG. 70 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation unit disassembled into main members and viewed from the rear. The rendering operation unit 300 is provided at the center in the left-right direction of the plate unit 200, and while decorating the plate unit 200, the player operates and participates in the rendering when the player participation type rendering is performed. It can be done. The rendering operation unit 300 is attached to the dish base unit 210 and the dish decoration unit 250.

  The effect operation unit 300 includes an effect operation unit 301 that can be operated by the player. The effect operation unit 301 is composed of a rotation operation unit 302 that can be rotated by the player and a pressing operation unit 303 that can be pressed by the player. In the effect operation unit 301, the rotation operation unit 302 is formed in an annular shape having an inner diameter of about 3/5 of the outer diameter, and the pressing operation unit 303 is disposed in the ring . The pressing operation unit 303 is disposed at the center of the rotation operation unit 302, and has a center pressing operation unit 303a having a diameter slightly larger than a half of the inner diameter of the rotation operation unit 302, an outer periphery of the center pressing operation unit 303a, and the rotation operation unit 302. It is comprised with the annular | circular shaped outer periphery press operation part 303b arrange | positioned between inner periphery.

  The rendering operation unit 300 is mounted on the top surface of the rendering operation portion cover unit 310 attached to the front of the dish decoration unit 250, the operation portion base 320 housed inside the rendering operation portion cover unit 310, and the upper surface of the operation portion base 320. The ring-shaped effect operation ring 330 having the rotation operation portion 302, the rotation drive unit 340 for rotating the rotation operation portion 302 of the effect operation ring 330, and the rotation operation of the rotation drive unit 340 and the effect operation ring 330 A transmission gear 350 for operation ring that transmits rotation between the unit 302 and the gear 302, and a gear attachment member 351 that rotatably attaches the transmission gear 350 for operation ring to the operation portion base 320.

  In addition, the rendering operation unit 300 is attached to the upper surface of the operation unit base 320 below the rendering operation ring 330, and a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the upper surface, and the rendering operation ring decorative substrate 352 The decorative substrate cover 353 attached to the operation unit base 320 so as to cover the upper side of the above, the vibration speaker 354 attached to the lower surface of the operation unit base 320, and the operation unit so as to face inside the ring of the effect operation ring 330 The rendering operation button unit 360 attached to the base 320 and the operation unit relay board unit 390 attached to the rear surface of the operation unit base 320 are provided.

[3-5-5a. Effect operation unit cover unit]
The effect operation unit cover unit 310 of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 69 and 70 and the like. The effect operation unit cover unit 310 is attached to the effect operation unit attachment portion 252i of the dish unit main body 252 of the dish decoration unit 250, and decorates the front surface of the effect operation unit 300 at the center in the left-right direction of the dish unit 200. The effect operation unit cover unit 310 is formed in the shape of a container whose upper and rear portions are open.

  The effect operation unit cover unit 310 includes a hemispherical unit lower cover 311 recessed downward, a semicircular annular unit front cover 312 attached to the front upper end of the unit lower cover 311 and expanded forward, and a unit front The dish center upper reflector 313 is mounted from the rear in the dish center upper decoration body 312a of the cover 312, and a plurality of LEDs mounted on the dish center upper reflector 313 and capable of emitting light forward are mounted. The plate center upper decoration substrate 314, the plate center lower reflector 315 mounted from the rear in the plate center lower decoration body 312b of the unit front cover 312, and the plate center lower reflector 315 And a lower center decoration substrate 316 on which a plurality of LEDs capable of irradiating the light are mounted.

  The unit lower cover 311 is formed in a hemispherical shape in which the unit lower cover 311 bulges downward from the center rear side in the front-rear direction, and the rear side is the effect operation unit attachment portion of the plate unit main body 252 It is attached to 252i so as to be placed from above. The unit lower cover 311 is attached in an inclined state such that an axis perpendicular to a virtual plane formed on the front semicircular arc extending upper end edge is positioned forward as it goes upward. In this embodiment, it is inclined at an angle of about 18 degrees (18.65 degrees) with respect to the vertical line. The unit lower cover 311 has a plurality of drainage holes 311 a formed at the lowest position when assembled into the pan unit 200.

  The unit front cover 312 is formed in a semicircular arc shape in which the shape of the unit front cover 312 bulges forward so that the shape in plan view follows the front end of the unit lower cover 311. It is attached. The unit front cover 312 is a plate central upper decoration 312a in which a semicircular arc bulging forward extends in a semicircular shape along the front end of the unit lower cover 311, and a front below the dish central upper decoration 312a. And a dish center lower decoration body 312 b extending in a semicircular arc shape so that the bulging semicircular arc follows the front end of the unit lower cover 311. The unit front cover 312 is attached to the unit lower cover 311 at the lower end of the dish center lower decoration 312 b.

  The plate center upper decoration body 312a of the unit front cover 312 and the plate center lower decoration body 312b are formed by dividing a cylinder of substantially the same thickness (radius) into halves and extending in a semicircular arc shape with the dividing surface facing the center side It is formed in a bent shape. The dish center lower decoration 312b extends with a large curvature in a semicircular arc shape with respect to the dish center upper decoration 312a, and the dish center lower decoration 312b has a slightly smaller thickness than the dish center upper decoration 312a. It has a semi-cylindrical shape. When the unit front cover 312 is assembled to the dish unit 200, the front end of the dish upper center decoration 312a protrudes forward than the front end of the dish center lower decoration 312b. Further, when assembled in the dish unit 200, the left and right ends of the dish upper center decoration body 312a are respectively continuous with the right end of the dish upper left decoration unit 270 and the left end of the dish upper right decoration unit 275 The left and right ends of 312 b are continuous with the right end of the lower left decoration unit 280 and the left end of the lower right decoration unit 285, respectively. The unit front cover 312 has translucency and is formed milky white.

  The front end of the unit front cover 312 is the front end of the door frame 3 when assembled to the door frame 3. The distance from the front surface of the door frame base 101 to the front end of the unit front cover 312 is the door frame The distance is about half the full width of the base 101 in the left-right direction.

  The dish upper central reflector 313 is formed in a semicircular arc shape which bulges forward, and is inserted from the rear into the dish central upper decoration body 312 a of the unit front cover 312 and attached. The dish center upper reflector 313 blocks the light from the LED mounted on the dish center upper decoration substrate 314 from leaking backward (inward). The dish center upper decoration substrate 314 is formed in a strip shape having a semicircular arc shape along the dish center upper decoration body 312a, and a plurality of LEDs capable of emitting light forward (outside) on the upper surface Has been implemented. The plurality of LEDs of the dish upper center decoration substrate 314 are full color LEDs, and by emitting light, the dish upper center decoration body 312a can be illuminated and decorated.

  The lower center dish reflector 315 is formed in the shape of a semicircular arc that bulges forward, and is inserted from the rear into the lower stage center decoration 312 b of the unit front cover 312 and attached. The lower center dish reflector 315 blocks the light from the LED mounted on the lower center dish decoration substrate 316 from leaking backward (inward). The lower center dish decoration substrate 316 is formed in an elongated strip shape having a semicircular arc shape along the lower dish center lower decoration body 312b, and a plurality of LEDs capable of emitting light forward (outside) on the upper surface Has been implemented. The plurality of LEDs of the lower center dish decoration substrate 316 are full color LEDs, and by emitting light, the lower dish center lower decoration body 312b can be lighted and decorated.

  The effect operation unit cover unit 310 does not have a reinforcing rib in the middle of extending in a semicircular arc shape in the upper plate center decoration 312a and the lower plate center decoration 312b of the unit front cover 312, so When the LEDs of the upper center decoration substrate 314 and the LEDs of the lower center lower decoration substrate 316 are made to emit light, the whole can be substantially uniformly emitted and decorated, and it can appear as if a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

  The effect operation unit cover unit 310 has a front end projecting forward more than the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202 in a state assembled to the plate unit 200. Further, in the effect operation unit cover unit 310, the dish upper center decoration body 312a is continuous with the dish upper left decoration body 271 and the dish upper right decoration body 276, and the dish center lower decoration body 312b is the dish lower left decoration body 281 and the dish right It is continuous with the lower decoration 286. Thus, the rendering operation unit 300 is made to stand out and the appearance is improved by the integrated decoration.

[3-5-5 b. Controller base]
The operation unit base 320 of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 69 and 70 and the like. The operation unit base 320 is inserted from above into the effect operation unit cover unit 310, the lower end is attached to the effect operation unit cover unit 310, and the upper rear end is attached to the effect operation unit of the upper tray main body 212 in the dish base unit 210. It is attached to the part 212a. The operation unit base 320 is formed in the shape of a container whose upper side is opened.

  The operation unit base 320 is formed in a box shape having a substantially cubic outer shape and extends outward from the upper end of the main body portion 321 whose upper portion is open, and the outer periphery is formed in a circular shape The upper attachment which is formed on the flange base 322, the plurality of (here four) legs 323 projecting downward from the bottom of the main body 321, and the rear end of the flange 322 and attached to the disc base unit 210 A portion 324, and a gear bearing portion 325 which is opened upward through the flange portion 322 on the left outside of the main body portion 321 and rotatably supports the transmission gear 350 for operation ring.

  The operation unit base 320 is formed in such a size that the main body 321 can accommodate the effect operation button unit 360 inside. The main body portion 321 has a bottom surface to which the vibration speaker 354 is attached from the lower side, and a portion of the lower surface to which the vibration speaker 354 is attached is formed to be a flat surface. The bottom wall of the main body 321 is formed so as to easily resonate with the vibration from the vibration speaker 354 and can amplify the vibration and convert the vibration into a sound such as voice or music and output it. it can.

  The leg 361 b of the button unit base 361 of the effect operation button unit 360 is attached to the upper surface of the bottom wall of the main body 321. Further, the main body portion 321 is formed with a through hole for discharging the liquid that has entered the main body portion 321 at the outer peripheral edge of the bottom wall. In the main body portion 321, the rotary drive unit 340 is attached to the outer side of the left side wall, and the operation unit relay board unit 390 is attached to the outer side of the rear wall.

  The flange portion 322 is formed to have a diameter such that the outer periphery thereof substantially matches the inner periphery of the plate center upper decoration 312 a of the unit front cover 312. A rendering operation ring decorative substrate 352 and a decorative substrate cover 353 are attached to the upper surface of the flange portion 322, and a ring attachment base 331 of the rendering operation ring 330 is attached. The lower ends of the plurality of legs 323 are attached to the upper surface of the unit lower cover 311 in the effect operation unit cover unit 310.

  The gear bearing portion 325 can rotatably mount the transmission gear for operation ring around an axis extending in the left and right direction in cooperation with the gear mounting member. When the transmission gear 350 for operation ring is attached to the gear bearing 325, the upper portion of the transmission gear 350 for operation ring protrudes upward, and the drive gear portion 350b of the transmission gear 350 for operation ring is a flange portion. It is exposed to the outside below 322.

  The upper surface of the flange portion 322 is positioned slightly lower than the upper surface of the plate center upper decoration 312 a of the unit front cover 312 in a state where the operation unit base 320 is assembled in the rendering operation unit 300. Moreover, in the state assembled to the rendering operation unit 300, the vibration speaker 354 is attached to the lower surface of the main body 321 in a state of being in contact with it.

[3-5-5 c. Production operation ring]
The effect operation ring 330 of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 71 and 72. FIG. 71 (a) is a perspective view of the effect operation ring of the effect operation unit as viewed from the top front, and FIG. 71 (b) is a perspective view of the effect operation ring as viewed from the bottom front. FIG. 72 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation ring disassembled and viewed from the top front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation ring disassembled and viewed from the bottom front. The effect operation ring 330 is attached to the upper surface of the flange portion 322 in the operation portion base 320, and has a rotation operation portion 302 which can be rotationally operated by the player. The effect operation ring 330 (rotation operation portion 302) has a diameter (outer diameter) about twice as large as the dimension in the front-rear direction of the upper plate 201, and the inner diameter is about 3/5 of the outer diameter. It is formed in an annular shape. In the present embodiment, the outer diameter of the effect operation ring 330 is approximately 13 cm.

  The rendering operation ring 330 includes an annular ring attachment base 331 attached to the upper surface of the flange portion 322 of the operation unit base 320, an annular rotation base 332 rotatably mounted on the ring attachment base 331, and a rotation base A plurality of bushes 333 that are in contact with the outer peripheral surface of 332 and rotatably mounted around a vertically extending shaft on the ring mounting base 331 and are attached to the ring mounting base 331 to move the rotating base 332 upward And a ring retaining member 334 which regulates the movement.

  Also, the rendering operation ring 330 is attached to the upper surface of the rotation base 332 and is attached to the lower side of the ring outer upper cover 335 that constitutes a part of the rotational operation portion 302 and the lower side of the ring outer upper cover 335. A ring outer lower cover 336 constituting a part of the rotation operation portion 302 and an inner peripheral side of the ring outer upper cover 335 are attached to the upper surface of the rotation base 332 to constitute a part of the rotation operation portion 302 And an in-ring cover 337. The ring outer upper cover 335, the ring outer lower cover 336, and the ring inner cover 337 are each formed in a light transmitting annular shape.

  The ring attachment base 331 has an outer diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the flange portion 322 of the operation portion base 320, and an inner diameter formed to be substantially the same as the inner diameter of the flange portion 322. The ring mounting base 331 is spaced apart in the circumferential direction outside the placement portion 331a on which the rotary base 332 is slidably disposed in the circumferential direction on the upper surface side along the inner peripheral edge and the placement portion 331a on the upper surface And a boss 331 b for projecting cylindrically upward from a plurality (four in this case) of parts and for mounting the bush 333 rotatably and spaced apart in the circumferential direction outside the mounting part 331 a on the upper surface And a through-hole 331c penetrating vertically at a plurality of sites. The plurality of through holes 331 c are formed at positions corresponding to the LEDs of the effect operation ring decoration substrate 352.

  The outer diameter of the rotation base 332 is slightly smaller than the diameter (outer diameter) of the mounting portion 331 a of the ring attachment base 331, and the inner diameter is smaller than the inner diameter of the ring attachment base 331. The rotation base 332 includes a ring gear 332 a that protrudes downward from the lower surface and extends in the circumferential direction. The ring gear 332 a is formed in a bevel gear so as to protrude downward as it goes to the center side of the rotation base 332. The ring gear 332 a is formed to have an outer diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the ring attachment base 331, and in a state of being assembled to the effect operation ring 330, the ring gear 332 a faces downward from the inner peripheral side of the ring attachment base 331. The ring gear 332 a meshes with the ring-side gear portion 350 a of the operation ring transmission gear 350 in a state assembled to the effect operation unit 300.

  The ring outer upper cover 335 is three-dimensionally formed on the outer upper surface portion 335a and the outer upper surface portion 335a in which circular arcs forming the outer and upper portions in a circular shape are arranged three-dimensionally And an outer upper cover attachment portion 335c extending in the circumferential direction after extending downward from the inner peripheral end of the outer upper surface portion 335a. There is. The outer upper surface portion 335 a of the ring outer upper cover 335 is formed in a shape in which a circular arc in the range of 1⁄4 of a circle extends in an annular shape. The decorative portion 335 b has a hexagonal outer shape. The outer upper cover attachment portion 335 c extends slightly lower than the lower end of the outer upper surface portion 335 a, and is attached to the upper surface of the rotation base 332.

  The outer ring lower cover 336 has an outer lower surface portion 336a in which a circular arc forming an outer lower portion in a circular shape extends in an annular shape, and protrudes upward from the inner side of the outer lower surface portion 336a in the circumferential direction And a plurality of outer lower cover attachment portions 336b arranged in plural. The outer lower surface portion 336a of the ring outer lower cover 336 is formed in a shape in which an arc within a range of 1/8 of a circle extends in an annular shape. The outer lower cover attachment portion 336 b is attached to the ring outer upper cover 335.

  The inner ring cover 337 has an inner surface portion 337a in which a circular arc constituting an inner upper portion in a circular shape extends in an annular shape, and a cylinder extending downward from the inner end portion of the inner surface portion 337a parallel to the central axis And an inner cover attachment portion 337c formed on the outer periphery of the cylinder surface portion 337b and arranged in the circumferential direction. The inner surface portion 337a of the inner ring cover 337 is formed in a shape in which an arc of 1⁄8 of a circle extends in an annular shape. The cylindrical surface portion 337 b has a cylindrical inner diameter that is the same as the inner diameter of the rotation base 332. The inner cover attachment portion 337 c is attached to the upper surface of the rotation base 332.

  When the ring outer upper cover 335, the ring outer lower cover 336, and the ring inner cover 337 are assembled to the effect operation ring 330, the outer upper surface portion 335a, the outer lower surface portion 336a, and the inner surface portion 337a are continuous. The outer upper upper surface portion 335a, the outer lower lower surface portion 336a, and the inner surface portion 337a constitute a portion in the range of 1/2 or more of a circle, and the whole is in a donut shape. The effect operation ring 330 is capable of emitting light by the effect operation ring decoration substrate 352.

[3-5-5 d. Rotary drive unit]
The rotary drive unit 340 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 73 to 75 and the like. FIG. 73 (a) is a perspective view of the rotary drive unit of the effect operation unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 73 (b) is a perspective view of the rotary drive unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 74 is an exploded perspective view of the rotary drive unit as viewed from the front right, and FIG. 75 is an exploded perspective view of the rotary drive unit as viewed from the left front. The rotation drive unit 340 is for rotating and driving the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 and detecting the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302. The rotary drive unit 340 is attached to the outside of the left side surface of the main body 321 of the operation unit base 320.

  The rotation drive unit 340 includes a rotation drive base 341 attached to the main body 321 of the operation unit base 320, and an operation ring drive motor 342 attached to the rear right side of the rotation drive base 341 so that the rotation shaft protrudes leftward. A drive gear 343 attached to the rotation shaft of the operation ring drive motor 342, a transmission gear 344 rotated by the drive gear 343, and a transmission detection gear member rotated by the transmission gear 344 and rotating the transmission gear 350 for operation ring A gear cover rotatably mounting the transmission gear 344 and the transmission detection gear member 345 in cooperation with the rotary drive base and covering the drive gear 343, the transmission gear 344 and the transmission detection gear member 345 from the left side 346, and.

  The rotation drive unit 340 is attached to the gear cover 346, and detects a rotation position of the transmission detection gear member 345. The first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348, and the first rotation detection sensor 347 And a sensor cover 349 attached to the gear cover 346 so as to cover the second rotation detection sensor 348 from the left.

  The rotary drive base 341 is formed in a shallow box shape which is short in the left-right direction and long in the front-rear direction and opened leftward. The operation ring drive motor 342 is a stepping motor. The drive gear 343 is a spur gear. The transmission gear 344 is constituted by a spur gear-like first gear 344a meshing with the drive gear, and a spur gear-like second gear 344b integrally rotating with the first gear 344a and having a large diameter. There is. The second gear 344 b of the transmission gear 344 meshes with the gear portion 345 a of the transmission detection gear member 345.

  The transmission detection gear member 345 protrudes leftward from the left side surface of the gear portion 345a having a diameter (a size twice the diameter of the second gear 344b) larger than the transmission gear 344 and extends in the circumferential direction. And a plurality of detection pieces 345b arranged at regular intervals. The gear portion 345a meshes with the second gear 344b of the transmission gear 344 and meshes with the drive gear portion 350b of the operation ring transmission gear 350. The plurality of detection pieces 345 b have a length in the circumferential direction equal to the interval at which they are separated in the circumferential direction. In the present embodiment, eight detection pieces 345 b are arranged circumferentially at intervals of a rotational angle of 45 degrees. The detection pieces 345 b are detected by the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348.

  The first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 detect the detection piece 345 b of the transmission detection gear member 345. The first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 are spaced apart in the circumferential direction at an interval different from an integral multiple of the interval between the detection pieces 345 b arranged in the circumferential direction. In the present embodiment, the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 are separated at a rotation angle of 101.25 degrees. Thereby, when the transmission detection gear member 345 rotates, the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 do not detect the detection piece 345b at the same timing, and one detects the detection piece 345b first. It is supposed to be. Thereby, the rotation direction and the rotation speed of the rotation operation unit 302 in the effect operation ring 330 can be detected through the transmission detection gear member 345.

  In the assembled state, the upper portion of the gear portion 345a of the transmission detection gear member 345 is exposed upward, and the exposed portion of the gear portion 345a is the drive gear portion 350b of the transmission gear 350 for operation ring. Engage with Further, the whole of the rotary drive unit 340 is located in the effect operation unit cover unit 310 in a state of being assembled to the effect operation unit 300.

  The rotation drive unit 340 can freely set the rotation operation portion 302 of the effect operation ring 330 via the drive gear 343, the transmission gear 344, the transmission detection gear member 345, and the transmission gear for operation ring by driving the operation ring drive motor 342. Can be rotated in the direction of In addition, the rotary drive unit 340 may cause the rotary operation unit 302 to oscillate in a reciprocating manner by oscillating the drive gear 343 by means of the operation ring drive motor 342 by repeating normal rotation and reverse rotation within a predetermined rotation angle range. it can.

  In the rotary drive unit 340, when the player rotates the rotary operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330, the transmission detection gear member 345 rotates via the operation ring transmission gear 350, and the transmission detection gear member 345 is rotated. The detection piece 345 b is detected by the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348, and the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 can be detected. Therefore, the content of the player participation type effect can be changed according to the rotation direction of the rotation operation unit 302.

  Further, in the rotation drive unit 340, since the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 can be detected by the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348, the operation ring is driven in the same direction as the rotation direction of the rotation operation. By driving the motor 342, the player's rotation operation can be assisted. Alternatively, by driving the operation ring drive motor 342 in the direction opposite to the rotation direction of the rotation operation unit 302, a load can be given to the rotation operation of the player. Therefore, by combining these as appropriate, it is possible to provide the rotation operation unit 302 with an operation feeling or click feeling according to the contents of the player participation type effect.

[3-5-5e. Transmission gear for operation ring]
The operation ring transmission gear 350 of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 69 and 70 and the like. The operation ring transmission gear 350 is for transmitting rotation between the transmission detection gear member 345 of the rotation drive unit 340 and the rotation base 332 of the rotation operation portion 302 of the effect operation ring 330, and the gear of the operation portion base 320 It is rotatably attached to the bearing 325.

  The transmission gear 350 for operation ring rotates integrally with the ring gear portion 350a in the bevel gear shape, which meshes with the ring gear 332a in the rotation base 332 of the effect operation ring 330, and the transmission detection of the rotation drive unit 340 And a spur gear-like drive-side gear portion 350b engaged with the gear portion 345a of the gear member 345. The pitch circle of the ring gear portion 350a and the drive gear portion 350b are formed to have the same diameter. The bevel gear-like ring side gear portion 350 a is narrowed in the direction of the rotation axis of the rotation base 332.

  The operation ring transmission gear 350 is attached to the operation unit base 320 such that the rotation axis extends in the left-right direction and intersects with the rotation axis of the rotation base 332 of the effect operation ring 330. The transmission gear 350 for operation ring is inserted from above into the gear bearing portion 325 of the operation portion base 320, and then the gear attachment member 351 is attached to the operation portion base 320, so that it is rotatably attached to the operation portion base 320. Be

  In the operation ring transmission gear 350, the ring side gear portion 350a meshes with the ring gear 332a of the rotation base 332 in the effect operation ring 330 in a state assembled in the effect operation unit 300, and the drive side gear portion 350b It meshes with the gear portion 345 a of the transmission detection gear member 345 in the rotational drive unit 340. Therefore, the operation ring transmission gear 350 can transmit the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 to the rotation drive unit 340 side, and the rotation drive of the operation ring drive motor 342 of the rotation drive unit 340 The rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 can be transmitted and rotated.

[3-5-5 f. Effect operation ring decoration board]
The effect operation ring decoration substrate 352 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 69 and 70 and the like. The effect operation ring decoration substrate 352 is attached to the upper surface of the flange portion 322 in the operation unit base 320, and a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the upper surface. The effect operation ring decoration substrate 352 is attached below the effect operation ring 330, and can emit light and decorate the effect operation ring 330 (rotation operation unit 302) by appropriately emitting a plurality of LEDs.

  The rendering operation ring decoration substrate 352 is formed in a form in which a ring is divided back and forth, and a front decoration substrate 352a formed in an elongated strip shape having a semicircular arc shape on the front side, and a semicircle on the rear side It is comprised with the back decoration board | substrate 352b formed in the elongate strip plate shape which has arc shape. A plurality of LEDs are arranged in a row along the outer circumference on each of the upper surfaces of the front decoration substrate 352a and the rear decoration substrate 352b. The plurality of LEDs of the effect operation ring decoration substrate 352 are full color LEDs.

  The effect operation ring decoration substrate 352 is located below the ring attachment base 331 of the effect operation ring 330 in a state of being assembled to the effect operation unit 300. The effect operation ring decoration substrate 352 is covered with a decoration substrate cover 353 whose upper side is transparent. Similar to the rendering operation ring decoration substrate 352, the decoration substrate cover 353 is formed in a form divided into front and rear, and is a front substrate cover that covers the front decoration substrate 352a from the upper side and is attached to the flange portion 322 of the operation portion base 320 A rear substrate cover 353 b and a rear substrate cover 353 b attached to the flange portion 322 of the operation unit base 320 from the upper side covering the rear decorative substrate 352 b are configured.

  The effect operation ring decoration substrate 352 emits a plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface, and thereby the rotation operation unit 302 is configured through the decoration substrate cover 353 and the through hole 331 c of the ring attachment base 331. The cover 335, the ring outer lower cover 336, and the ring inner cover 337 can be illuminated and decorated from the inside. Therefore, it is possible to show the player the light emission decoration that the LED is provided in the rotation operation unit 302.

[3-5-5 g. Vibration speaker]
The vibration speaker 354 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 69 and 70 and the like. The vibration speaker 354 is attached to the lower surface of the main body 321 of the operation unit base 320 with the output direction directed upward, and can output various frequencies of vibration in addition to sounds such as voice and music. It is.

  The vibration speaker 354 can output sounds (sounds) such as sound, sound effects, and music by vibrating the bottom wall of the operation unit base 320 as a diaphragm. In addition, the vibration speaker 354 can vibrate the entire effect operation unit 300 via the operation unit base 320. At this time, the player has a feeling as if the effect operation unit 300 is shaking. The vibration speaker 354 can generate vibrations of various frequencies as compared to a vibration device in which a decentered weight is rotated by a motor, and can provide a player with more various effects.

  The vibration speaker 354 is intended to give sound information to vibrate the effect operation unit 301, and to give sound information so that vibration can be obtained by resonance. Here, in order to resonate, it depends on the characteristics of the vibration speaker 354 attached to the game machine, the material of the member to which the vibration speaker is attached, the hardness, and the attachment method, so that sound information of only a specific frequency is input. In this case, vibration may not be obtained without resonance due to variations in the characteristics. In the present embodiment, in order to absorb variations in these characteristics, the frequency of the sound information to be input is input as a frequency having a width rather than being a single frequency. Specifically, a sine wave of 40 Hz ± 2 Hz, and 38 Hz to 42 Hz are changed (sweeped) eight times in about one second for each one cycle in 1 Hz units. Intermittently, this is intermittently input for 1 second, and input is repeated again after 1 second.

  In the assembly work of the gaming machine, the RAM clear switch provided on the main control board 1310X of the main control unit 1300 for controlling the progress of the game is operated for inspection (operation check) of the vibration speaker at the time of shipment. It is supposed to be based on that. Specifically, when the inspector operates the RAM clear switch within a predetermined period when the power of the gaming machine is turned on (or when the power of the gaming machine is turned on while the inspector operates the RAM clear switch), the main control board 1310 X transmits (outputs) a command to clear and initialize the RAM to the peripheral control board of the peripheral control unit 1500 described later. When the peripheral control board receives this command, the peripheral control board performs a vibration speaker operation check process for testing the vibration speaker (operation check). The inspector can confirm the sound (sound) such as voice and music from the vibration speaker 354 by the vibration speaker operation confirmation process, and can also check the vibration of the rendering operation unit 300 by the vibration speaker 354. .

[3-5-5 h. Production operation button unit]
The rendering operation button unit 360 in the rendering operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 76 to 78 and the like. FIG. 76 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation button unit of the effect operation unit disassembled and viewed from the front upper side, and FIG. 77 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation button unit disassembled and viewed from the lower front. FIG. 78 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the effect operation button unit when the pressing operation unit is at the lowered position, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the effect operation button unit when the pressing operation unit is at the raised position. The effect operation button unit 360 is attached to the operation unit base 320 so as to face in the ring of the effect operation ring 330, and has a pressing operation unit 303 which can be pressed by the player. The pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation button unit 360 is configured of a cylindrical center pressing operation unit 303a and a cylindrical outer periphery pressing operation unit 303b formed to cover the outer periphery of the center pressing operation unit 303a. ing.

  The effect operation button unit 360 has an outer periphery formed in a substantially circular shape, and is disposed at an object bordering on a central axis of the button unit base 361 attached within the main body 321 of the operation unit base 320 and the button unit base 361. A disc-like member having a pair of guide shafts 362 extending upward in a cylindrical shape and connecting the upper ends of the pair of guide shafts 362 and having a circular outer periphery smaller than the button unit base 361 Between the upper base 363 and the upper base 363 and the button unit base 361, the guide shaft 362 is movably attached in the vertical direction by a pair of guide shafts 362, and the outer periphery is formed in a circular shape substantially the same size as the button unit base 361. Disk-shaped elevating base 364 and a pair of guide shafts 362 A pair of lift springs 365 urges the provided lift base 364 is passed upwardly, and a.

  In addition, the presentation operation button unit 360 extends cylindrically upward from the center of the button unit base 361 and has a central shaft 366 whose upper end is attached to the upper base 363 and a rotation shaft on the lower surface of the button unit base 361 Engaging with the operation button elevating drive motor 367 mounted so as to project upward, the spur gear elevating drive gear 368 attached to the rotary shaft of the operation button elevating drive motor 367, and the elevating drive gear 368 A spur gear-like driven gear 369 rotatably mounted on the upper side of the cage button unit base 361 and an elevation cam drive gear member rotated by the driven gear 369 and rotatably inserted by the central shaft 366 being inserted therein. 370, the lifting cam drive gear member 370 and the lower end are connected and the central shaft A lift cam member 371 for vertically moving the lift base 364 by inserting and rotatably attaching and moving the lift base 364, the lift drive gear 368, the driven gear 369, and the lift cam drive gear member 370 is covered from above. And a disk-shaped gear cover 372 mounted on the upper side of the button unit base 361.

  Further, the rendering operation button unit 360 is formed in a bottomed cylindrical shape whose inner diameter is larger than the upper base and extends vertically, and is mounted movably in the vertical direction by the pair of guide shafts 362 above the lift base 364 Substantially the same as the central button main body 373 and a pair of button springs 374 disposed between the central button main body 373 and the elevation base 364 and biasing the central button main body 373 upward; The central button cover 375 is formed in a cylindrical shape with a diameter and the upper end side is closed and is attached to the upper end of the central button body 373 so as to cover the upper side of the upper base 363. And a central button decoration substrate 376 on which a plurality of LEDs capable of emitting light upward are mounted. In the effect operation button unit 360, the center button body 373 and the center button cover 375 constitute a center pressing portion 303a.

  Further, the effect operation button unit 360 is attached to a portion outside the central button main body 373 on the upper surface of the elevation base 364 and has an annular outer peripheral button decoration substrate 377 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted; An outer peripheral substrate cover 378 attached to the elevating base 364 so as to cover the upper side of the button decorative substrate 377 and cover the outer periphery of the central button main body 373 and a portion of the outer peripheral substrate cover 378 covering the outer periphery of the central button main body 373 The outer peripheral button decorative substrate 377 disposed on the outer peripheral side above the outer peripheral button decorative substrate 377 and raised and lowered so as to cover the outer peripheral surface and upper surface of the cylindrical outer peripheral decorative lens 379 having translucency with three-dimensional decoration A transparent perimeter button attached to the base 364 with the center button cover 375 facing upward at the center Is provided with a bar 380, a. In the effect operation button unit 360, an outer periphery pressing operation unit 303b is configured by the outer periphery substrate cover 378, the outer periphery decoration lens 379, and the outer periphery button cover 380.

  Further, the rendering operation button unit 360 is attached to the button unit base 361 and detects the pressing operation of the pressing operation unit 303, and is attached to the button unit base 361 and the elevation cam driving gear member 370. An elevation detection sensor 382 for detecting elevation of the elevation base 364 by detecting a rotational position.

  The button unit base 361 includes a base main body 361 a formed in a disk shape, and a plurality of legs 361 b projecting downward from the base main body 361 a. The base main body 361 a of the button unit base 361 is formed in a size slightly smaller than the inner circumferential diameter of the main body portion 321 of the operation portion base 320. The base body 361a has a pair of guide shafts 362, a central shaft 366, a driven gear 369, an elevation cam drive gear member 370, and a gear cover 372 attached to the upper surface, and a pressure detection sensor 381 and an elevation detection sensor 382 on the lower surface. Is attached. The lower end of the leg 361 b of the button unit base 361 is attached to the bottom wall of the main body 321 of the operation unit base 320.

  The pair of guide shafts 362 are attached on the top surface of the base main body 361 a of the button unit base 361 at a distance of half the diameter of the base main body 361 a from the center to the front and the rear. The pair of guide shafts 362 and the central shaft 366 are formed by metal rods. The pair of guide shafts 362 are formed thicker than the central shaft 366.

  The upper base 363 is formed to have an outer diameter that is about one half of the outer diameter of the base main body 361 a of the button unit base 361. The pair of lift springs 365 are coil springs, and the lower ends thereof are in contact with the base main body 361 a of the button unit base 361, and the upper ends are in contact with the lift base 364. The elevating spring 365 is a spring having a stronger biasing force than the button spring 374.

  The elevation base 364 is formed to have an outer diameter substantially the same as the outer diameter of the base main body 361 a of the button unit base 361. The lift base 364 has a pair of guide holes 364a into which a pair of guide shafts 362 is slidably inserted, and a central hole 364b vertically penetrated with a size that allows the lift cam member 371 to pass through at the center. An upright wall portion 364c cylindrically projecting upward from the periphery of the central hole 364b, and a pair of guide pins 364d projecting so as to face each other into the central hole 364b near the lower end of the upright wall portion 364c There is. The pair of guide pins 364d are opposed to each other on the same axial core and rotatably mounted around the axial core.

  The elevating base 364 is guided to be vertically movable in the vertical direction by inserting the pair of guide shafts 362 into the pair of guide holes 364a. The upper end of the upright wall 364c abuts on the upper base 363 to restrict the upward movement of the elevating base 364 and a space in which the bottom 373b of the central button main body 373 can move between the upper base 363 and the elevating base 364c. It is formed. Further, the elevating base 364 is moved in the vertical direction by the pair of guide pins 364 d being guided by the cam portion 371 a of the elevating cam member 371.

  The lift cam drive gear member 370 has a spur gear-like gear portion 370a engaged with the driven gear 369, a connecting portion 370b projecting upward from the gear portion 370a and to which the lower end of the lift cam member 371 is connected, and a gear portion 370a. The elevating detection piece 370 c has two cylindrical portions projecting downward from the lower side and facing each other, which are notched and detected by the elevating detection sensor 382. The lift cam drive gear member 370 is rotatably mounted by inserting the central shaft 366 into the center of the gear portion 370a.

  The lift cam member 371 is rotatably mounted by the central shaft 366 being inserted at the center. The lift cam member 371 is spaced 180 degrees in the circumferential direction on the cylindrical outer peripheral surface, and includes a pair of cam portions 371a protruding outward. The pair of cam portions 371 a guides the guide pins 364 d of the elevation base 364.

  The cam portion 371a has a first cam 371b extending in a direction perpendicular to the axial center near the lower end, a locking portion 371c recessed upward in the middle of the first cam 371b, and one of the first cam 371b. A second cam 371d extending upward from the end parallel to the axial center, and a third cam 371e extending spirally upward from the end of the first cam 371b opposite to the second cam 371d; (See FIG. 78). The second cam 371 d and the third cam 371 e extend upward to the same height, and are separated by a distance smaller than the diameter of the guide pin 364 d of the lift base 364 between the adjacent cam portions 371 a.

  Further, the lift cam member 371 is provided at the lower end thereof with a connected portion 371 f connected to the connection portion 370 b of the lift cam drive gear member 370.

  The lift cam member 371 extends upward from the rear end side of the first cam 371b when the second cam 371d rotates the lift cam member 371 in a counterclockwise direction in plan view in the cam portion 371a. It is formed as. The raising and lowering cam member 371 can rotate and thereby guide the guide pin 364d of the raising and lowering base 364 by the cam portion 371a to raise and lower the raising and lowering base 364.

  The central button body 373 penetrates the cylindrical portion 373a extending vertically, the bottom portion 373b closing the lower end side of the cylinder portion 373a, and the bottom portion 373b, and the pair of guide shafts A pair of guide holes 373c into which the guide 362 is slidably inserted, a central opening 373d penetrating at the center of the bottom 373b with a diameter larger than the outer diameter of the upright wall 364c of the elevation base 364 and downward from the bottom 373b It includes a pressing detection piece 373 e which is projected and detected by the pressing detection sensor 381, and a pair of guide bosses 373 f which project in a cylindrical shape rearward from the bottom portion 373 b and are inserted into the button spring 374.

  The central button main body 373 is formed in a bottomed cylindrical shape by the cylindrical portion 373a and the bottom portion 373b. The central button body 373 is formed such that the bottom 373 b is disposed between the upper base 363 and the elevating base 364, and the upper end of the cylindrical portion 373 a protrudes above the upper base 363. The central opening 373 d is formed in a cylindrical shape which is extended short downward, and the lower end abuts on the upper surface of the lift base 364, whereby the downward movement of the central button main body 373 is restricted. Through the central opening 373 d of the central button body 373, the upper end of the upright wall portion 364 c of the elevating base 364 abuts on the upper base 363.

  The central button body 373 is biased upward by a pair of button springs 374 into which a pair of guide bosses 373f is inserted. The pair of guide bosses 373f is formed such that the lower end extends downward through the lift base 364 and a screw having a washer inserted therein is attached to the lower end. The washer attached to the lower end of the guide boss 373f abuts the lower surface of the lift base 364 to restrict the upward movement of the central button body 373.

  When the bottom portion 373b (the lower end of the central opening 373d) of the central button body 373 abuts against the upper surface of the elevation base 364 against the biasing force of the pair of button springs 374, the pressing detection piece 373e of the central button body 373 It is formed to project downward through 364. The central button body 373 is formed to be opaque. The pair of button springs 374 are coil springs having a weaker biasing force than the elevation springs 365.

  The central button cover 375 includes a disk-shaped top plate portion 375a having substantially the same diameter as the cylindrical portion 373a of the central button body 373 and a cylindrical peripheral wall portion 375b extending downward from the outer periphery of the top plate portion 375a. It is provided so as to be translucent. The central button cover 375 is formed in a bottomed cylindrical shape by the top plate portion 375a and the peripheral wall portion 375b. The lower end of the peripheral wall portion 375b of the central button cover 375 is attached to the upper end of the cylindrical portion 373a of the central button main body 373.

  The central button decoration substrate 376 has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface as full color LEDs. The center button decoration substrate 376 can cause the center button cover 375 to emit light and decorate by appropriately emitting a plurality of LEDs. In the outer peripheral button decoration substrate 377, a plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface are full color LEDs. The outer circumference button decoration substrate 377 can cause the outer circumference decoration lens 379 and the outer circumference button cover 380 to emit light by appropriately emitting a plurality of LEDs.

  The outer peripheral substrate cover 378 covers the upper side of the outer peripheral button decoration substrate 377 and has an annular base portion 378a attached to the elevating base 364 and cylindrically extending upward from the inner periphery of the base portion 378a. And a cylindrical portion 378 b covering the outer periphery. The outer peripheral substrate cover 378 is formed transparent.

  In the outer peripheral decorative lens 379, twisted portions extending so as to move in the circumferential direction as going upward are arranged in a row at regular intervals in the circumferential direction. The outer peripheral decorative lens 379 is attached to the upper side of the substrate portion 378 a in the outer peripheral substrate cover 378. The outer peripheral button cover 380 includes a cylindrical tubular portion 380a covering the outer periphery of the outer peripheral decorative lens 379, and an annular annular portion 380b extending to the center side from the upper end of the cylindrical portion 380a. The lower end of the cylindrical portion 380 a of the outer peripheral button cover 380 is attached to the elevating base 364. The annular portion 380 b has an inner diameter that is substantially the same as that of the cylindrical portion 378 b of the outer peripheral substrate cover 378.

  When the effect operation button unit 360 is assembled, as shown in FIG. 78 (a), the guide pin 364d of the elevation base 364 is in a state where the elevation base 364 is biased upward by the pair of elevation springs 365, The locking portion 371 c of the cam portion 371 a of the lift cam member 371 is inserted from below. In this state, the lift base 364 is in the lowered position where it has moved downward, and the pair of lift springs 365 are compressed. Further, in this state, the central button main body 373 is positioned at the upward moving end by the biasing force of the button spring 374, and the upper surface of the central button cover 375 protrudes above the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380 It has become.

  Therefore, when assembled in the rendering operation unit 300, the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380 protrudes slightly above the upper surface of the rendering operation ring 330, and the upper surface of the center button cover 375 is from the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380 Also project upward (see FIG. 79 etc.).

  In this state (the state shown in FIG. 78A), when the center button cover 375 (center pressing operation portion 303a) is pressed downward and moved downward against the biasing force of the button spring 374, the center button main body 373 The pressing detection piece 373 e is detected by the pressing detection sensor 381, and the pressing operation of the central pressing operation unit 303 a is detected. In a state in which the center pressing operation portion 303a is pressed, the upper surface of the center button cover 375 has a height substantially coincident with the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380 (see FIG. 81 (c)).

  Further, in this state, even if the outer peripheral button cover 380 (the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b) is pressed downward, the outer peripheral button cover 380 does not move downward, and the pressing detection piece 373e of the central button main body 373 It is not detected by the detection sensor 381. That is, the pressing operation of the pressing operation unit 303 is not detected.

  In this lowered position, when the lift drive gear 368 is rotated in a counterclockwise direction in plan view by the operation button lift drive motor 367, the lift cam is driven through the driven gear 369 engaged with the lift drive gear 368. The gear member 370 rotates in the counterclockwise direction in plan view, and the lift cam member 371 connected to the lift cam drive gear member 370 also rotates in the same direction. When the lift cam member 371 rotates in the counterclockwise direction, the cam portion 371a seen from the front in FIG. 78 is moved to the right, and the guide pin 364d of the lift base 364 is moved from the locking portion 371c to the first position. While rolling to the left portion of the locking portion 371c in one cam 371b, the elevating base 364 moves downward against the biasing force of the elevating spring 365 via the guide pin 364d.

  Then, when the guide pin 364d, which rolls relative to the left along the first cam 371b with the rotation of the lift cam member 371, is positioned from the left end of the first cam 371b to the second cam 371d side, Since the two cams 371d extend vertically upward with respect to the first cam 371b, the biasing force of the lift spring 365 causes the guide pin 364d to move upward along the second cam 371d. At the same time, the lifting base 364 is raised to be in the raised position.

  In the raised position, as shown in FIG. 78 (b), the guide pin 364d of the lifting base 364 is in contact with the second cam 371d of one cam portion 371a and the third cam 371e of the remaining cam portion 371a. It is in the state. In this state, the drive of the operation button elevation drive motor 367 is temporarily stopped.

  In the raised position, the upper end of the vertical wall 364c of the lifting base 364 is in contact with the lower surface of the upper base 363, and the further upward movement of the lifting base 364 is restricted. In the state of the raised position, the positional relationship between the central button cover 375 (central pressing operation portion 303 a) and the outer peripheral button cover 380 (outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303 b) at the lowered position is maintained. The entire pressing operation portion 303 including the outer peripheral button cover 380 moves upward, and the upper surface of the central button cover 375 protrudes higher than the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380.

  When the central button cover 375 and the outer peripheral button cover 380 are projected to be larger than the upper surface of the effect operation ring 330 when moved to the raised position in a state assembled in the effect operation unit 300 (FIG. 81 (b) etc. reference).

  When the center button cover 375 (center pressing operation portion 303 a) is pressed downward with a force stronger than the biasing force of the button spring 374 in the raised position, the center button cover 375 and the center button main body 373 are attached with the button spring 374. It moves downward against the force, and the central button body 373 comes in contact with the lift base 364. In a state where the central button main body 373 is in contact with the elevation base 364, the pressing detection piece 373 e of the central button main body 373 protrudes downward relative to the elevation base 364, but the elevation base 364 is a button unit base 361. Because the pressure detection piece 373 e is not detected by the pressure detection sensor 381.

  When the center button cover 375 (center pressing operation portion 303 a) is pressed downward with a force stronger than the biasing force of the elevation spring 365, the center button cover 375 and the center button main body 373 resist the biasing force of the button spring 374, After the center button body 373 contacts the lift base 364, the lift base 364 moves downward against the biasing force of the lift spring 365, and the lower end of the lift base 364 contacts the button unit base 361. Become. When the elevating base 364 abuts on the button unit base 361, the elevating base 364 is in the lowered position, and along with the elevating base 364, the outer peripheral button cover 380 (the outer peripheral pressing portion 303b) is also in the lowered position.

  As described above, when the lifting base 364 contacts the button unit base 361 in a state where the center button main body 373 contacts the lifting base 364, the pressing detection piece 373 e of the center button main body 373 protruding downward from the lifting base 364 However, the pressure is detected by the pressure detection sensor 381, and the pressure on the center button cover 375 (center pressure operation unit 303a) is detected.

  On the other hand, when the outer peripheral button cover 380 (the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b) is pressed downward by a force more than the biasing force of the elevating spring 365 in the state of the raised position, the elevating base 364 lifts the elevating spring The lower end of the lifting base 364 abuts on the button unit base 361 by moving downward against the urging force of 365. In this state, the outer peripheral button cover 380 is in the lowered position together with the elevation base 364, but since the central button cover 375 (central pressing operation portion 303 a) protrudes upward by the biasing force of the button spring 374, the central button main body The pressing detection piece 373 e does not protrude downward from the elevation base 364, and the pressing detection piece 373 e is not detected by the pressing detection sensor 381.

  In order to return the center button cover 375 and the outer periphery button cover 380 (the pressing operation unit 303) from the raised position to the lowered position, the raising and lowering cam member 371 is rotated counterclockwise in plan view by the operation button raising and lowering drive motor 367. Then, in FIG. 78 (b), the third cam 371e in contact with the upper left of the guide pin 364d of the lift base 364 moves to the right (in the direction of the guide pin 364d). The guide pin 364d is pressed downward by 371e, and the elevating base 364 is moved downward against the biasing force of the elevating spring 365 via the guide pin 364d.

  When the guide pin 364d moves from the lower end of the third cam 371e to the first cam 371b side with the rotation of the lift cam member 371, the downward movement of the lift base 364 stops, and the guide pin 364d becomes the first cam Roll along 371b. Thereafter, when the guide pin 364d reaches the position of the locking portion 371c in the middle of the first cam 371b, the biasing force of the lifting spring 365 inserts the guide pin 364d into the locking portion 371c which is recessed upward, and the operation By stopping the rotation of the lift cam member 371 by the button lift drive motor 367, the original lowered position is obtained.

[3-5-5i. Operation unit relay board unit]
The operation unit relay board unit 390 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 69 and 70 and the like. The operation unit relay board unit 390 is attached to the rear surface of the operation unit base 320. The operation unit relay substrate unit 390 includes a box-shaped substrate box 391 attached to the rear surface of the main body 321 of the operation unit base 320, and an operation unit relay substrate 392 attached inside the substrate box 391.

  The substrate box 391 has a motor cover portion 391a that covers the operation ring drive motor 342 of the rotary drive unit 340 from the rear side when assembled in the effect operation unit 300. The operation unit relay substrate 392 is a dish center upper decoration board 314, a dish center lower decoration board 316, an operation ring drive motor 342, a first rotation detection sensor 347, a second rotation detection sensor 348, a presentation operation ring decoration board 352, a vibration speaker Relay the connection between the operation button elevation drive motor 367, the central button decoration substrate 376, the outer circumference button decoration substrate 377, the pressure detection sensor 381, the elevation detection sensor 382, and the plate unit relay substrate 214 of the plate base unit 210 There is.

[3-5-5 j. Action of production operation unit]
Next, the operation of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 79 to 81 and the like. FIG. 79 is an explanatory view showing the relationship between the effect operation ring and the rotary drive unit in the left side view of the effect operation unit. FIG. 80 is an explanatory view showing the relationship between the effect operation ring and the effect operation ring decoration substrate in the plan view of the effect operation unit as viewed from the pressing direction of the pressing operation unit. Fig. 81 (a) is a front view of the pan unit shown in a normal state, (b) is a front view of the pan unit when the pressing operation section is at the raised position, and (c) is a central pressing of the pressing operation section It is a front view of a saucer unit when an operation part is pressed.

  The effect operation unit 300 includes an effect operation unit 301 which can be operated by the player on the top surface. The effect operation unit 301 is configured of a large annular rotation operation unit 302 and a pressing operation unit 303 disposed in the ring of the rotation operation unit 302. The pressing operation unit 303 is a circular center pressing operation unit 303 a positioned at the center of the rotation operation unit 302, and an annular outer periphery pressing operation unit disposed between the center pressing operation unit 303 a and the rotation operation unit 302. And 303 b.

  The rotation operation unit 302 is formed by the ring outer upper cover 335, the ring outer lower cover 336, and the ring inner cover 337 of the effect operation ring 330. The center pressing operation unit 303 a is formed by the center button cover 375 and the center button main body 373 of the effect operation button unit 360, and the outer periphery pressing operation unit 303 b is formed by the outer periphery button cover 380 and the outer periphery substrate cover 378.

  The rendering operation unit 300 is assembled to the dish unit 200 in a state of being inclined so that the front side of the virtual plane formed by the upper surface of the annular rotation operating unit 302 (the rendering operation ring 330) is lower. Therefore, the pressing direction of the pressing operation unit 303 disposed in the ring of the rotation operation unit 302 is inclined so as to move backward as it goes downward (in other words, it moves forward as it goes upward) .

  In the normal state, the effect operation unit 300 is in a state where the pressing operation unit 303 slightly protrudes upward from the upper surface of the rotation operation unit 302. Specifically, the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380 protrudes slightly upward from the upper surface of the effect operation ring 330, and the upper surface of the central button cover 375 protrudes upward from the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380. (See Figure 79 etc.)

  In this normal state, when the transmission detection gear member 345 is rotated clockwise in left side view by the operation ring drive motor 342 of the rotation drive unit 340, the effect operation ring 330 is transmitted via the operation ring transmission gear 350. The rotation operation unit 302 rotates clockwise in a plan view. On the other hand, when the transmission detection gear member 345 is rotated counterclockwise in left side view by the operation ring drive motor 342, the rotation operation portion 302 of the effect operation ring 330 is rotated counterclockwise in plan view. .

  The operation ring drive motor 342 is a stepping motor, and can repeat the forward rotation and the reverse rotation in a range of a predetermined rotation angle to swing the rotation operation unit 302 back and forth to vibrate. This vibration is different from the vibration by the vibration speaker 354, and only the rotation operation unit 302 vibrates.

  The rotary operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 can be rotated not only by the operation ring drive motor 342 but also by the player. When the rotation operation unit 302 is rotated clockwise in plan view, the transmission detection gear member 345 of the rotation drive unit 340 is rotated clockwise in left side view through the transmission gear 350 for operation ring, and the rotation is performed. When the operation unit 302 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction in plan view, the transmission detection gear member 345 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction in left side view. The transmission detection gear member 345 detects rotation by two sensors of a first rotation detection sensor 347 and a second rotation detection sensor 348.

  The rotation of the transmission detection gear member 345 is detected by detecting the plurality of detection pieces 345 b by the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348. More specifically, the distance between the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 spaced apart in the circumferential direction is equal to the distance between the plurality of detection pieces 345b arranged in a row at equal intervals in the circumferential direction. The intervals are not integer multiples. Thereby, the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 are configured not to detect the detection piece 345b at the same timing.

  In this embodiment, when the transmission detection gear member 345 rotates clockwise in left side view, the second rotation detection sensor 348 detects the detection piece 345b and then the first rotation detection sensor 347 detects the detection piece 345b. . On the other hand, when the transmission detection gear member 345 rotates in a counterclockwise direction in left side view, the first rotation detection sensor 347 detects the detection piece 345b and then the second rotation detection sensor 348 detects the detection piece 345b. Detect Therefore, the rotation direction of the transmission detection gear member 345 (rotation operation unit 302) can be detected by the order in which the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 detect the detection piece 345b. The rotational speed of the transmission detection gear member 345 (rotation operation unit 302) can be detected by the detection time of the detection piece 345b in the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348.

  As described above, since the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 can be detected, the content of the player participation type effect can be changed according to the rotation direction of the rotation operation unit 302. Further, when the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 is detected, the rotation operation can be lightened and assisted by rotationally driving the rotation operation unit 302 in the same direction as the rotation operation direction by the operation ring drive motor 342. . Alternatively, by rotationally driving the rotation operation unit 302 in the direction opposite to the rotation operation direction by the operation ring drive motor 342, it is possible to make the rotation operation heavier or to give a click feeling.

  The rotation operation portion 302 of the effect operation ring 330 is formed by the ring outer upper cover 335, the ring outer lower cover 336, and the ring inner cover 337, and is formed in a shape in which a half or more circular arc extends annularly. ing. In other words, the rotation operation unit 302 is formed in a donut shape. And since the rotation operation part 302 is attached in the state which the outer peripheral surface, the upper surface, and a part of inner peripheral surface exposed, as shown in figure, it is formed in the shape which is easy to grasp with a player's hand .

  As a result, since the player can touch the rotation operation unit 302 from various directions, it is possible to rotate the rotation operation unit 302 in a way that the player can easily do, and the operation of the rotation operation unit 302 Sex is enhanced. Further, the rotation operation unit 302 can perform rotation operation even when the pressing operation unit 303 is in either the lowered position or the raised position. In addition, since the rotation operation part 302 is attached to the operation part base 320 on the lower surface side, it can not be grasped like a steering wheel of a car.

  As shown in FIG. 80, the rendering operation unit 300 is provided below the rendering operation ring 330 with a rendering operation ring decoration substrate 352 in which a plurality of LEDs are annularly arranged. Thus, the light emitting decoration of the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 can be performed by causing the LED of the effect operation ring decoration substrate 352 to emit light. Further, in the effect operation ring decoration substrate 352, since the plurality of LEDs are arranged in a ring along the rotation operation unit 302, the plurality of LEDs arranged in a row are sequentially arranged according to the rotation of the rotation operation unit 302. By emitting light, it is possible to emit light and decorate only a specific part of the rotating rotation operation unit 302. Thereby, the player can be illusive as if the LED (decorative substrate) is provided in the rotating operation unit 302.

  In the effect operation unit 300, in the normal state, as shown in FIG. 81A, the pressing operation unit 303 disposed in the ring of the rotation operation unit 302 has an upper surface that is higher than the upper surface of the rotation operation unit 302. It is in the state of the descent position which projected slightly upwards. In this state, the rotary operation unit 302 can be rotated, and the central pressing operation unit 303 a of the pressing operation unit 303 can be pressed. When the central pressing operation portion 303a is pressed downward, the upper surface of the central pressing operation portion 303a (central button cover 375) is lowered to substantially the same height as the upper surface of the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b (outer peripheral button cover 380). The sensor 381 detects a press.

  In this normal (downward position) state, even if the outer periphery pressing operation portion 303b of the pressing operation portion 303 is pressed downward, the outer periphery pressing operation portion 303b (outer periphery button cover 380) is not moved downward, and the pressing is detected The sensor 381 does not detect a press.

  In the normal state, when the lift cam member 371 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction in plan view by the operation button lift drive motor 367, the guide pin 364d of the lift base 364 is disengaged from the cam portion 371a (first cam 371b) The urging force of the pair of elevating springs 365 causes the pressing and operating portion 303 together with the elevating base 364 to vigorously project upward to be in the state of the raised position (see FIG. 81 (b)). In the state of the raised position, the upper surface of the pressing operation unit 303 is positioned above the upper surface of the rotation operating unit 302. In other words, the central button cover 375 and the outer peripheral button cover 380 protrude upward more than the upper surface of the effect operation ring 330.

  When the center pressing unit 303a is pressed downward with the pressing unit 303 in the raised position, first, the center pressing unit 303a moves downward against the biasing force of the button spring 374 to move the center pressing unit 303a. The upper surface and the upper surface of the outer peripheral pressing portion 303b are in substantially the same height. In this state, the press detection sensor 381 does not detect a press. Furthermore, the central pressing unit 303a moves downward together with the outer peripheral pressing unit 303b against the urging force of the elevating spring 365, and the upper surfaces of the central pressing operating unit 303a and the outer peripheral pressing unit 303b are the rotation operating unit 302. The height is substantially the same as the upper surface (see FIG. 81 (c)). In this state, the press detection sensor 381 detects a press.

  In addition, when the pressing operation unit 303 presses the outer periphery pressing operation unit 303b downward with the pressing operation unit 303 in the raised position, the upper surface of the center pressing operation unit 303a is projected above the upper surface of the outer periphery pressing operation unit 303b. The outer periphery pressing unit 303b and the center pressing unit 303a move downward, and the upper surface of the outer periphery pressing unit 303b becomes substantially flush with the upper surface of the rotation operating unit 302 (see FIG. 81A). . In this state, the press detection sensor 381 does not detect a press.

  As described above, regardless of the lowered position or the raised position, the pressing operation unit 303 according to the present embodiment does not detect the central pressing operation unit 303 a by the pressing detection sensor 381 unless the pressing operation unit 303 a is moved downward. There is. Therefore, since it is possible to urge the player to firmly press the central pressing operation unit 303a, attention can be drawn to the operation of the rendering operation unit 301 in the player participation type effect. , The player participation type can be more enjoyable.

  In addition, even when the pressing operation unit 303 is in the raised position, the rotation operation unit 302 can be rotated. Therefore, when the pressing operation unit 303 is in the raised position, depending on the player, the rotating operation may be facilitated by the pressing operation unit 303 or may be difficult to perform due to the pressing operation unit 303 being in the way. The operability of the rotation operation unit 302 can be changed, and more versatile operations can be enjoyed.

[3-6. Door frame left side unit]
The door frame left side unit 400 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 82 (a) is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit of the door frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 82 (b) is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 83 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 84 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. The door frame left side unit 400 is attached to the front left side of the door frame base unit 100 above the plate unit 200, and decorates the left outside of the game area 5a in a front view.

  The door frame left side unit 400 is attached to the front of the door frame left side base 401 attached to the left outside of the door window 101 a in the front of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 and to the front of the door frame left side base 401 A door frame left side decorative substrate 402 having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front of the cage, and a left side reflector 403 attached to the door frame left side base 401 so as to cover the front side of the door frame left side decorative substrate 402; A door frame left side decoration 404 is attached to the door frame left side base 401 so as to cover the front side of the left side reflector 403.

  The door frame left side base 401 is formed in a box shape which extends vertically and is opened forward. The door frame left side decorative substrate 402 is formed in an elongated strip shape extending up and down along the door frame left side decorative body 404, and is composed of a left side upper decorative substrate 402a and a left side lower decorative substrate 402b. It is done. In the door frame left side decorative substrate 402, a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface are full color LEDs. The door frame left-side decoration substrate 402 can cause the door frame left-side decoration 404 to emit light and decorate by causing the plurality of LEDs to emit light as appropriate.

  The left side reflector 403 is formed with a through hole 403 a penetrating in the front and rear direction at a position corresponding to the LED mounted on the door frame left side decorative substrate 402. The door frame left side decoration body 404 is formed in translucent milky white. The door frame left side decoration body 404 is formed in the form which the half circular arc bulging forward extended up and down. Thus, the door frame left side decoration 404 is formed in a semi-tubular shape opened rearward.

  The door frame left side unit 400 is formed such that the lower end is continuous with the left end of the plate upper left decoration 271 of the plate upper left decoration unit 270 in the plate unit 200 and the upper end is the door frame top decoration of the door frame top unit 450 It is formed to be continuous with the left lower end of 453.

  In the door frame left side unit 400, the width in the left-right direction and the depth in the front-rear direction are formed at substantially the same distance. The door frame left side unit 400, when assembled to the door frame 3, decorates the left outside of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101, and appears as if a cylindrical fluorescent lamp is embedded.

[3-7. Door frame right side unit]
The door frame right side unit 410 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 85 (a) is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit of the door frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 85 (b) is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 86 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 87 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit as viewed from the rear. The door frame right side unit 410 is attached to the front right portion of the door frame base unit 100 above the plate unit 200, and decorates the right outside of the game area 5a in a front view.

  The door frame right side unit 410 extends from the right side of the door frame 3 in the form of a flat plate to the front substantially to the same position as the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202 of the plate unit 200, and penetrates in the left and right direction And a light emitting side window interior decoration 410b disposed in a plurality in the side window 410a. The door frame right side unit 410 is a player who makes it difficult to see inside the gaming area of the pachinko machine disposed on the right in the gaming hall or the like in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed, or a player playing a game with the pachinko machine on the right. Thus, it is possible to make the inside of the game area 5a of the pachinko machine 1 inconspicuous, and to form a player's personal space that protects the privacy of the game.

  The door frame right side unit 410 includes a door frame right side base 411 attached to the right outside of the door window 101 a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 and extending vertically. A side window interior decoration member 412 having a plurality of side window interior decoration portions 410b attached to the front surface and extending forward cylindrically and arranged in a row vertically, and a plurality of sides of the side window interior decoration member 412 on the front surface A plurality of LEDs are mounted on a portion corresponding to the in-window decorative portion 410b, and the in-window decorative portion decoration substrate 413 attached to the front side of the door frame right side base 411 and the plurality of side window in-window decorative members 412 And an internal reflector 414 which is inserted into the interior of the side window interior decoration 410b.

  In addition, the door frame right side unit 410 is disposed to the front of the front end of the side window inner decoration member 412 and extends vertically, and is attached to the door frame right side base 411 and the door frame A door extending in a plate shape in the vertical and longitudinal directions so as to cover the right side surface of the right side base 411 and the right side reflector 415 and having a through hole 416a penetrating in the left and right direction to constitute a side window 410a It is attached to the frame right side outer panel 416, the door frame right side base 411 and the right side reflector 415, and is flat in the vertical and longitudinal directions so as to cover the left side of the door frame right side base 411 and the right side reflector 415 Door frame having a through-hole 417a which extends in the shape of a circle and which penetrates in the left-right direction to form a side window 410a The side panel and 417, and a.

  Furthermore, the door frame right side unit 410 is attached to the rear surface of the right side reflector 415 and covers the front side of the door frame right side decoration substrate 418 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted and the right side reflector 415 And a door frame right side decoration 419 attached to the right side reflector 415.

  The door frame right side base 411 is formed in a box shape extending vertically and being opened rearward. The in-side window decorative member 412 has a flat connection base 412a connecting the lower ends of a plurality of (here, three) in-side window decorative portions 410b arranged in the vertical direction. The side window inner decoration portion 410b of the side window inner decoration member 412 is formed in a truncated cone-like cylinder whose front end side has a slightly smaller outer diameter than the rear end side, and the front end of the cylinder is formed hemispherical ing. In the side window inner decoration member 412, the front end of the side window inner decoration portion 410b is attached to the door frame right side outer panel 416. The side window interior decoration member 412 is attached to the front side of the door frame right side base 411 from the lower side position to the upper side with respect to the vertical center. The side window interior decoration member 412 is formed to have a translucent white light.

  The side window interior decoration portion decoration substrate 413 is formed in an elongated strip shape extending up and down along the side window interior decoration member 412, and in the front surface of the door frame right side base 411, the side window interior decoration member 412 Is attached to the rear of the connection base 412a. The plurality of LEDs provided on the in-side window decoration portion decoration substrate 413 are full color LEDs. In the side window interior decoration portion decoration substrate 413, four LEDs are arranged in a cross shape of upper, lower, left, and right around the axis of the side window interior decoration portion 410b at the rear of each of the plurality of side window interior decoration portions 410b. It is done.

  The inner reflector 414 is formed in an X shape in a front view, and extends in the front-rear direction along the inner surface of the side window inner decorative portion 410b to be inserted. The inner reflector 414 divides the interior of the side window inner decoration portion 410b into four in the upper, lower, left, and right.

  The right side reflector 415 extends up and down at the same height as the door frame right side base 411, and is formed in a wave shape such that it moves forward and then moves backward as it goes from the upper end to the lower end. It is done. The right side reflector 415 penetrates in the front and rear direction, and a plurality of through holes 415 a are formed in which the LEDs of the door frame right side decorative substrate 418 face forward.

  The door frame right side outer panel 416 has a flat plate shape and extends vertically and longitudinally, and the rear side extends vertically and linearly, and the front side extends along the right side reflector 415 in a wavelike manner. In the door frame right side outer panel 416, a through hole 416a penetrating in the left and right direction is formed in a variable elliptical shape extending vertically, and a door frame of the front side of the connection base 412a of the in-window decorative member 412 and the door frame The rear side of the right side decorative substrate 418 (right side reflector 415) can be covered. The door frame right side outer panel 416 is formed to be opaque.

  The door frame right side inner panel 417 is flat and extends vertically and longitudinally, and the rear side extends vertically and linearly, and the front side extends along the right side reflector 415 in a wavelike manner. In the door frame right side inner panel 417, a through hole 417a penetrating in the left and right direction is formed in a variable elliptical shape extending vertically, and a door frame of the front side of the connection base 412a of the in-window decorative member 412 and the door frame The rear side of the right side decorative substrate 418 (right side reflector 415) can be covered. The door frame right side inner panel 417 is formed to be opaque.

  The door frame right side decoration substrate 418 is formed in an elongated strip shape extending up and down along the door frame right side decoration 419, and is configured of a right side upper decoration substrate 418a and a right side lower decoration substrate 418b. It is done. The door frame right side decorative substrate 418 has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface as full color LEDs. The door frame right side decoration substrate 418 can cause the door frame right side decoration 419 to emit light and decorate by emitting light from a plurality of LEDs as appropriate.

  The door frame right side decoration 419 is formed to have a translucent white light. The door frame right side decoration 419 is formed in a form in which a semicircular arc bulging forward extends vertically in a wavelike manner along the right side reflector 415. Thereby, the door frame right side decoration 419 is formed in the shape of a half tube opened to the rear.

  The door frame right side unit 410 is formed such that the lower end is continuous with the right end of the plate upper right decoration 276 of the plate upper right decoration unit 275 in the plate unit 200 and the upper end is the door frame top decoration of the door frame top unit 450 It is formed to be continuous with the right lower end of the body 453.

  The door frame right side unit 410, when assembled to the door frame 3, decorates the right outside of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101, and the portion of the door frame right side decoration 419 has a cylindrical fluorescent light Looks like it's embedded. The front end (front side) of the door frame right side unit 410 extends in a wavelike manner forward so that a quarter of the portion from the top protrudes forward, and is formed in a screen shape. The door frame right side unit 410 has a side window 410a penetrating in the left-right direction, and can visually recognize the opposite side through the side window 410a.

  The door frame right side unit 410 includes a cylindrical (cylindrical) side window inner decoration portion 410b extending in the front and rear direction in the side window 410a, and causes the LEDs of the side window inner decoration portion decoration substrate 413 to emit light. Thus, the side window interior decoration 410b can be illuminated and decorated. Then, the light emission decoration is performed on the side window inner decoration portion 410b, so that the inside of the side window 410a can be made bright and the opposite side can be made less visible through the side window 410a.

  According to the door frame right side unit 410 of this embodiment, since the LED of the in-window decorative portion decoration substrate 413 for emitting and decorating the plurality of in-window decorative portions 410b is turned off in the normal state, the side window 410a The inside of the game area 5a can be viewed from the side of the pachinko machine 1 (the end of the island facility) through the three side window interior decorations 410b. Therefore, even if a player who is looking for this pachinko machine 1 (this game board 5) as a pachinko machine to play a game does not move to the front of this pachinko machine 1 along the island facilities, this pachinko machine 1 is simplified. In the pachinko machine 1 according to the present invention, it is possible to enhance the sense of expectation for the game in the pachinko machine 1 and to suppress the decrease in interest.

  In addition, even if the side window 410a penetrates the door frame right side unit 410, the line of sight of the player located in the vicinity can be blocked by the other part including the in-side window decorative part 410b. It is possible to make the whole game area 5a hard to see from the player, and by making it hard to receive the feeling as seen from other players, it is possible to cause the other players to play the game without hesitation .

  Furthermore, when the three side window interior decoration portions 410b are caused to emit light by the LED of the side window interior decoration portion decoration substrate 413, the light can make the inside of the side window 410a glare, and the visibility through the side window 410a changes Let At this time, since the three side window inner decoration portions 410b are cylindrical, light is radiated in a band shape and in a radial manner, so the side window inner decoration portions 410b are made to be dazzling and the opposite side is made between them It is possible to make it difficult to visually recognize, and it is possible to make it difficult to look into the game area 5a from another player such as the next player. As described above, since it is possible to make it difficult to look into the game area 5a, it is possible to avoid that another player pays attention to the pachinko machine 1, and therefore, the other player is distracted by being noticed. Can prevent you from feeling uncomfortable because you can not concentrate on playing games, or you can feel you are lost due to the induction of mistakes, and you can make the game more fun by letting the player concentrate on playing games It is possible to suppress the decline in interest.

[3-8. Door frame top unit]
The door frame top unit 450 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 88 to 90 and the like. Fig. 88 (a) is a perspective view of the door frame top unit in the door frame as viewed from the front, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame top unit as viewed from the back, and (c) is an outside of the top lower cover. It is a bottom view of the door frame top unit shown in a closed state. FIG. 89 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top unit as viewed from the front upper side, and FIG. 90 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top unit as viewed from the front lower side. The door frame top unit 450 is attached to the arrangement area 420 of the front upper portion of the door frame base unit 100 above the door frame left side unit 400 and the door frame right side unit 410.

  The door frame top unit 450 covers the left and right sides and the front upper portion of the door frame top base 451 attached on the front side of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 above the door window 101a. The top upper cover 452 attached to the door frame top base 451, the door frame top decorative body 453 attached to the front end of the top upper cover 452, the lower end of the door frame top decorative body 453 and the door frame top base 451 And a door frame top bottom plate 454 connecting the lower end of the frame.

  In addition, the door frame top unit 450 is attached to the front center of the top upper cover 452 behind the door frame top decorative body 453 and has a door frame top central decorative substrate 455 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted. A door frame top left decorative substrate 456 attached to the left of the door frame top central decorative substrate 455 on the front of the top upper cover 452 behind the frame top decorative body 453 and on which the plurality of LEDs are mounted A door frame top right decoration substrate 457 attached to the right of the door frame top central decoration substrate 455 on the front of the top top cover 452 behind the frame top decoration 453 and on which the plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front Have.

  In addition, the door frame top unit 450 is disposed between the door frame top decorative body 453 and the door frame top central decorative substrate 455 and is attached to the front of the top upper cover 452, and the door frame top decoration Between the door frame top decoration 453 and the door frame top right decoration substrate 457, the top left reflector 459 disposed between the body 453 and the door frame top left decoration substrate 456 and attached to the front of the top upper cover 452 And a top right reflector 460 mounted on the front of the top top cover 452.

  Furthermore, the door frame top unit 450 includes a central speaker box 461 attached to the center of the upper surface of the door frame top bottom plate 454, a pair of top central speakers 462 attached downward to the central speaker box 461, and a door A pair of speaker brackets 463 attached near the front left and right ends of the frame top base 451, a pair of top side speakers 464 attached respectively to the pair of speaker brackets 463, and a door frame top bottom plate 454 from below And a lower cover frame 466 attached to the door frame top bottom plate 454 so as to press the outer peripheral edge of the top lower cover 465 from the lower side, and a door frame top Door frame top relay mounted near upper right end of base 451 A plate 467 is provided with a door frame top top plate 468 is attached to the top on the cover 452 so as to cover the upper part of the door frame top base 451, a.

  The door frame top base 451 is a flat plate-like main body portion 451a extending in the right and left in the same length as the width of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 in the left and right direction; And a forward projecting portion 451b projecting forward. The main body 451 a is formed in a curved shape such that the center in the left-right direction is positioned upward so that the lower side is along the upper edge of the door window 101 a of the door frame base 101. The left and right front protrusions 451b are inclined in such a way as to move rearward as the front end moves downward, and are formed in the shape of a box opened rearward. The front protrusion 451b on the right side in the front view is also opened upward.

  The top upper cover 452 is formed in substantially the same shape as the door frame top base 451 in a front view. The top upper cover 452 is formed in such a shape as to cover the outside of each of the left and right front protrusions 451b of the door frame top base 451 and to connect between the front end upper portions of the left and right front protrusions 451b. The front end of the top upper cover 452 has the center in the left-right direction most projecting forward, and extends in a curved shape so as to move downward and backward as going from the center in the left-right direction to both ends in the left-right direction. Further, the top upper cover 452 has an opening 452a which is largely cut out from the rear end to the front on the upper surface. The opening 452 a is closed by a door frame top plate 468.

  The door frame top decorative body 453 is formed to have a translucent white light. The door frame top decorative body 453 has a form in which the semicircular arc bulging forward has a curvature which becomes smaller as going from the left and right ends toward the center in the left and right direction and extends in the left and right direction along the front end of the top upper cover 452 It is formed. Thereby, the door frame top decorative body 453 is formed in the shape of a half tube opened to the rear. The door frame top decorative body 453 is oriented so that both ends in the left-right direction extend downward, and is formed to be continuous with the upper ends of the door frame left side decorative body 404 and the door frame right side decorative body 419, respectively.

  The door frame top bottom plate 454 extends in the front-rear direction so as to connect the lower end of the door frame top decorative body 453 and the lower end of the main body 451a of the door frame top base 451 and the center in the lateral direction bulges upward Extends in the left-right direction. The door frame top bottom plate 454 is formed in a bent shape such that the center in the front-rear direction protrudes downward. The door frame top bottom plate 454 is vertically separated between a pair of reinforcing ribs 454a and a pair of reinforcing ribs 454a which are spaced apart in the left-right direction and connect the front end and the rear end and extend upward in a flat plate shape. A pair of central speaker openings 454b facing the top central speaker 462; and a pair of side speaker openings 454c penetrating vertically in the lateral direction outside of the pair of reinforcing ribs 454a and facing the top side speaker 464; ing. A central speaker box 461 is attached between the pair of reinforcing ribs 454 a on the top surface of the door frame top bottom plate 454.

  The door frame top central decorative substrate 455 is formed in the shape of an elongated strip extending to the left and right. The door frame top central decorative substrate 455 has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front as full color LEDs. The door frame top central decorative substrate 455 can cause the central portion of the door frame top decorative body 453 to emit light and decorate by appropriately emitting a plurality of LEDs.

  The door frame top left decorative substrate 456 is formed in the shape of an elongated strip extending to the left and right. In the door frame top left decorative substrate 456, a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface are full color LEDs. The door frame top left decorative substrate 456 can emit light and decorate the left portion of the door frame top decorative body 453 by appropriately emitting light from a plurality of LEDs.

  The door frame top right decorative substrate 457 is formed in the shape of an elongated strip extending to the left and right. In the door frame top right decoration substrate 457, a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface are full color LEDs. The door frame top right decoration substrate 457 can cause the right portion of the door frame top decoration 453 to emit light and decorate by emitting a plurality of LEDs appropriately.

  The top center reflector 458, the top left reflector 459, and the top right reflector 460 extend in the left-right direction, respectively, and the door frame top center decoration substrate 455, the door frame top left decoration substrate 456, and the door frame top right decoration substrate 457 Through holes are formed at the positions corresponding to the mounted LEDs.

  The central speaker box 461 is formed in a box shape extending leftward and rightward, and is mounted such that the pair of top central speakers 462 face downward and frontward. The central speaker box 461 is attached between the pair of reinforcing ribs 454 a on the top surface of the door frame top bottom plate 454. The top center speaker 462 is a full range speaker and outputs sounds such as voice and music in a wide frequency band.

  The speaker bracket 463 is attached to the lower surface of the left and right front protrusions 451 b of the door frame top base 451. The top side speaker 464 is a tweeter and outputs the high range of sounds such as voice and music.

  The top lower cover 465 is formed of a punching metal made of a metal plate having innumerable through holes. The sound output from the top center speaker 462 and the top side speaker 464 is emitted forward and downward through the top lower cover 465.

  The door frame top relay substrate 467 includes the door frame top central decorative substrate 455, the door frame top left decorative substrate 456, the door frame top right decorative substrate 457, the top central speaker 462, the top side speaker 464, and the door frame base unit 100. It is for relaying the connection with the door frame sub relay board 105.

  The door frame top plate 468 closes the opening 452 a of the top upper cover 452, and the front end thereof is locked to the top upper cover 452 and the rear end is attached to the door frame base unit 100.

  The door frame top unit 450 decorates the upper and the outer sides of the door window 101 a of the door frame base 101 in a state of being assembled to the door frame 3. In the door frame top unit 450, the left and right ends of the door frame top decorative body 453 are respectively continuous with the upper ends of the door frame left side decorative body 404 and the door frame right side decorative body 419 to form an integral decoration. There is. Further, the door frame top unit 450 can output sounds such as voice and music to the player by the pair of top center speakers 462 and the pair of top side speakers 464.

[3-9. Door frame decoration]
The decoration in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 91A and the like. FIG. 91A is a front view of a door frame shown with each decorative substrate. As illustrated, the door frame 3 has, at the center in a front view, a substantially rectangular door window 101a extending vertically and closed by a transparent glass plate 162 of the glass unit 160. The door frame 3 is the dish upper left decoration 271 of the dish unit 200, the dish upper right decoration 276, the dish upper center decoration 312a of the rendering operation unit 300, the door frame left side decoration 404 of the door frame left side unit 400, the door frame The outer periphery of the door window 101 a is surrounded by the door frame 101 a by the door frame right side decoration 419 of the right side unit 410 and the door frame top decoration 453 of the door frame top unit 450.

  Top left decorative body 271 surrounding the outer periphery of the door window 101a, top right decorative body 276, top center decorative body 312a, door frame left side decorative body 404, door frame right side decorative body 419, and door frame top decorative body Since the reference numeral 453 is formed in a semi-tubular shape, it is possible to show the player a decoration in which the entire circumference of the door window 101a is surrounded by fluorescent lights.

  In the door frame 3, the dish upper left decorative body 271, the dish upper right decorative body 276, the dish upper center decorative body 312a, the door frame left side decorative body 404, the door frame right side decorative body 419, and the door frame 101 Behind the door frame top decoration 453, the dish upper left decoration board 273, dish upper right decoration board 278, dish upper center decoration board 314, door frame left side decoration board 402, door frame right side decoration board 418, door frame top central decoration Since the substrate 455, the door frame top left decorative substrate 456, and the door frame top right decorative substrate 457 are disposed, the entire outer periphery of the door window 101a can be made to emit light by emitting the LEDs of the decorative substrate appropriately. It is possible to show the player a light emission effect so that the light moves along the outer periphery of the door window 101a.

  The plate unit 200 of the door frame 3 is coaxially disposed on the upper surface in an annular annular donut-shaped rotation operating unit 302 whose diameter is larger than the distance in the front-rear direction of the upper tray 201 and the rotation operating unit 302. A pressing operation unit 303 including a cylindrical outer periphery pressing operation unit 303b and a cylindrical center pressing operation unit 303a is attached, and a semicircular arc similar to the rotation operation unit 302 below the rotation operation unit 302. Of the upper and lower two-centered upper decoration 322a and the lower center decoration 312b of a large diameter donut shape (semi-cylindrical shape or semi-tubular shape), The door frame left side decoration 404 of the door frame left side unit 400 having the same shape so as to be continuous with both ends of the decoration 312a and the lower center decoration of the plate 312b, the door frame right side unit 41 Door frame right side decorative body 419, and the door frame top decorative body 453 of the door frame top unit 450 is attached to the outside of Tobiramado 101a of the door frame base 101 so as to surround the outer periphery of the gaming region 5a.

  Thus, in the plate unit 200, three doughnut-shaped members are vertically aligned with the rotation operation unit 302 and the two upper and lower center decoration 3a and 312b, and the rotation operation unit 302 and the outer periphery Since the pressing operation unit 303 b and the center pressing operation unit 303 a are arranged concentrically, the visual impact can be enhanced, and the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 can be made to stand out.

  In addition, the dish upper left decoration 271, the dish upper right decoration 276, and the dish lower left decoration 281 disposed below the dish upper center decoration 312a, the dish lower right decoration 286 and the dish lower center decoration 312b, The tube-like tube has a slightly smaller thickness, and a hemispherical unit lower cover 311 is provided below the lower center dish decoration 312b. As a result, since the effect operation unit 300 is larger from the lower end toward the upper side, it is possible to emphasize the sense of perspective in the vertical direction, and the rotation operation portion 302 or the like operable by the player disposed on the upper side. The pressing operation unit 303 can be made to look large, and the player's interest is strongly attracted to the rotating operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 in the effect operation unit 300 on the upper surface of the plate unit 200 to suppress a decrease in interest. it can.

  Furthermore, on the upper surface of the tray unit 200, the doughnut-shaped rotational operation portion 302 is rotatably mounted about an axis extending forward as it goes upward, and the upper surface of the rotational operation portion 302 has the front end side Since the upper surface of the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 faces the direction of the head (face) of the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1, the upper surface of the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 turns. The entire volume of the operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 can be easily viewed, and the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 can be made to look large. Further, as described above, since the entire contents of the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 can be easily understood, the player can easily recognize that the rotation operation unit 302 has a donut shape. Therefore, since it is possible to immediately make the player recognize that the donut-shaped rotation operation unit 302 performs the rotation operation, the player rotates immediately when the player participation type effect is executed. The operation unit 302 can be rotated, and the player participation type effect can be enjoyed by the operation of the rotation operation unit 302 to suppress a decrease in interest.

  In addition, the diameter of the rotation operation portion 302 is made larger than the distance in the front-rear direction of the upper tray 201, and the diameters of the upper center dish decoration 312a and the lower center dish decoration 312b are larger than the rotation operation portion 302. In the plate unit 200 of the pachinko machine 1, the front end sides of the rotary operation unit 302, the plate center upper decoration body 312a and the plate lower center decoration body 312b project more forward than the upper plate 201, and Since the decoration body 312a and the lower center dish decoration 312b decorate the outer periphery of the rotary operation unit 302, the rotary operation section 302, the upper center dish decoration 312a and the lower center dish decoration 312b are made to stand out At the same time, the dish center upper decoration body 312a and the dish center lower decoration body 312b can improve the appearance around the rotation operation unit 302. Therefore, it is possible to make the player recognize that it is the pachinko machine 1 different from other pachinko machines at first glance, and it is possible to make the player's interest strongly attract and appeal to the player The pachinko machine 1 can be easily selected as a pachinko machine to be played.

[3-10. Measures to enlarge the decoration of the door frame]
In the pachinko machine 1 in recent years, the door frame left side unit 400, the door frame right side unit 410, and the door frame top unit 450, which are the decorations on the front of the door frame 3, are increased in size to increase the interest of gaming. The amount of protrusion that is pushing towards the person's side is increasing. As a result, when the employee opens and closes the door frame 3 during business hours, there is a possibility that the employee or the player may come in contact with the door frame top unit 450 or the like. Moreover, since it is necessary to prevent interference with the adjacent pachinko machine 1 and the flat ball rental machine, the opening angle of the door frame 3 may be greatly restricted.

An embodiment of a pachinko machine 1 capable of coping with the problem will be described with reference to FIGS. 91B to 91G.
As is clear from the above description, the pachinko machine 1 of the embodiment comprises an openable door frame 3 having a door window 101a for configuring the front side and making the game area 5a visible and a door in a closed state A door frame left side unit 400, a door frame right side unit 410, and a door frame top unit 450, which is a front decorative portion located on the front side of a predetermined portion of the frame 3 and arranged to project forward than the door window 101a. Is equipped. In the embodiment, of the three units, the door frame top unit 450 is provided with means for solving the problem, and therefore, the door frame top unit 450 will be described as the front decorative portion 450. Of course, the following description of the front decorative portion 450 is also applicable to the door frame left side unit 400 and the door frame right side unit 410.

[3-10-1. Front decoration section]
The front decorative portion 450 is rotatably and detachably provided in an arrangement area 420 which is the front of the door frame 3 and formed in the upper portion of the door window 101a. The three-way locking unit 6500 shown in FIG. 91C can be switched to the playable state locked in the placement area 420 as shown by the solid line in FIG. 91C and the maintenance state out of the placement area 420 as shown in the solid line in FIG. 91D.

[3-10-1-1. Placement area]
The placement area 420 is configured to substantially abut the front surface of the door side placement part 421 in a form in which the upper part of the door frame base 101 bulges forward and the upper end face of the door placement part 421. And a front surface of the main body side arrangement portion 422 protruding like a crosspiece on the upper front surface of the main body.
In addition, since the door side arrangement part 421 is integral with the door frame 3 and the main body side arrangement part 422 is integral with the main body frame 4, there is no hindrance to opening and closing independent of the main body frame 4 of the door frame 3 An appropriate clearance (clearance) is provided at an opposing location where the upper end surface of the door side arrangement portion 421 and the lower end surface of the main body side arrangement portion 422 face each other. Therefore, since there is a possibility that fraudulent action will be carried out through the gap, foreign matter may be inserted between the end faces of the door side arrangement part 421 and the main body side arrangement part 422. A foreign matter insertion preventing portion 425 is formed, in which the gap is made to meander by interlacing so as to make it difficult for the foreign matter to pass.

In the arrangement area 420, the top central speaker 462 provided in the door frame top unit 450 in FIG. 88 (c) corresponds to the reference effect portion on the door frame 3 side (the design and mechanism of the front decorative portion 450). Is provided on the front side of the main body side arrangement portion 422 as a reference element that can be used commonly for all effects, and thus the top center speaker 462 is not shown on the rear surface of the front decoration portion 450 of the embodiment. An accommodation space in which the top center speaker 462 can be accommodated is formed at a position corresponding to (reference effect unit).
By doing this, even if the front decorative portion 450 is changed by changing the specification or the like, the reference effect portion can be used as it is, so it is possible to suppress the cost of replacing the front decorative portion 450 and the change cost of effect control.

[3-10-1-2. Decorative hinges]
The front decorative portion 450 is rotatably and detachably mounted on the arrangement region 420, specifically, on the main-body-side arrangement portion 422 via the decorative hinge tool 450a pivotally attached to the upper rear side of the front portion 450. It is attached.
That is, as shown in the enlarged view of FIG. 91B, the decorative hinge tool 450a is a T-shaped resin or metal connecting member in plan view, and the hinge shaft 450b provided horizontally inside the front decorative portion 450 is used. A bearing piece 450d rotatably attached to the front decorative portion 450 through its own axial hole 450c, and a mounting piece 450e provided in a direction orthogonal to the bearing piece 450d from the rear end of the bearing piece 450d And consists of
On the other hand, in the main body side arrangement portion 422 of the arrangement region 420, a T groove 422t is formed in such a shape that all of the mounting piece 450e of the decorative hinge 450a and the base of the bearing piece 450d can be inserted and removed from above. A decorative hinge 450a is attached to 422t in a removable manner.

[3-10-1-3. Locking part]
Further, the decorative hinge tool 450a is locked by a tool-less locking portion 426 which does not require a tool such as a driver for the attaching / detaching operation in a state where the decorative hinge tool 450a is attached to the T groove 422t. The tool-less locking portion 426 is a screw (see FIG. 91B) provided with a knob for a screwdriver on the head (see FIG. 91B), a well-known snap lock that can be removed by one-touch operation to move the lever up or down. There is a known crescent lock that can be attached and detached by turning the

  The locking portion 426 is excellent in stability when provided with a plurality (two in the embodiment) at appropriate intervals for one front decorative portion 450, in which case as shown in FIG. 91B. The same thing of the same kind may be unified, or plural different kinds of locking structures may be mixed. Preferably, a plurality of types having different locking structures may be mixed in one front decorative portion 450, for example, by mixing a screw provided with a knob for a screwdriver on the head and a snap lock or crescent lock. It is possible to make up for the other drawback while making use of the respective features of the certainty of fixation and the ease of the detaching operation.

  Furthermore, in the case where a plurality of different types of locking structures are mixed with one front decorative portion 450, the operating order by type (by locking structure) at the time of attachment / detachment, for example, locking excellent in workability. The structure is removed at first because the clamp is suddenly removed by one-touch operation and it is difficult to take fall prevention measures (temporarily hold by hand etc.) of the front decoration 450, and the lock structure with excellent reliability is, for example, turning a screw. For example, the mark part (not shown) on the lever of the snap lock, according to the kind of operation order that the fall prevention measures (temporarily hold by hand etc.) of the front decorative part 450 have time to take It is good for workers to recognize it. As this mark part, a means to draw strong attention, for example by painting the said lever with an expanded color such as red or sticking a seal such as red, etc. may be mentioned.

  In addition, although the locking part 426 of embodiment used the tool-less thing as a preferable example, it is not limited to this, It is also possible to use the locking part 426 locked using tools, such as a driver. Of course it is possible.

[3-10-1-4. Three way locking unit]
The three-way locking unit 6500 shown in FIG. 91E will be described later [4-10. The lock unit] and a part of the lock unit 650 described in FIG. 117 are modified to combine three elements, ie, the door frame 3 and the front decorative portion 450, the body frame 4 and the door frame 3, the outer frame 2 and the body frame 4 Each combination is designed to be responsible for locking and unlocking.
The three-way locking unit 6500 includes a unit base 651 attached to the side of the rear surface of the main body frame base 501, a collar 6520 for a decorative portion which protrudes forward from the unit base 651 and is engageable with the front decorative portion 450. , A plurality of door frame wedges 652 capable of engaging with the door frame 3 by projecting forward from the front, a plurality of outer frame wedges 653 projecting backward from the unit base 651 and being capable of engaging with the outer frame 2; A transmission cylinder 654 projecting forward from the lower end of the front end and moving the decorative part ridge 6520 or outer frame ridge 653 in the vertical direction depending on the rotational direction, and projecting forward from the unit base 651 by manual operation of the operation rod 427a And a tool-less open operation unit 427 for moving the frame wedge 652 in the vertical direction.

  In addition, the three-way locking unit 6500 has a lock spring 655 for biasing the decorative part ridge 6520 downward and the outer frame collar 653 upward, and a transmission cylinder 654 at the front end of the unit base 651. Also, an outer frame unlocking lever 656 for moving the outer frame collar 653 downward by projecting forward from the upper position and sliding it downward is provided.

  In a state where the three-way locking unit 6500 is assembled on the rear side of the main body frame 4, the operation rod 427a of the open operation portion 427, the collar 6520 for a decorative portion, the collar 652 for a door frame, the transmission cylinder 654 and the unlocking lever for outer frame 656 project forward from the front surface of the main body frame base 501. The transmission cylinder 654 protrudes forward through the cylinder insertion opening 501f of the main body frame base 501, and closes the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4, whereby the front end rotates the cylinder lock 130 of the door frame 3. The transmission member 133 is engaged, and rotation of the key inserted into the keyhole 132 is transmitted and rotated.

  The three-way locking unit 6500 is engaged with a hooking member (not shown) in which the decorative part ridge 6520 is provided on the rear surface of the front decorative part 450, and the door frame ridge 652 is the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3. The outer frame collar 653 is locked to the hooking member 116 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and is locked to the upper hooking member 24 and the lower hooking member 25 of the outer frame right assembly 20 in the outer frame 2.

[3-10-1-5. Other elements]
In addition, reference numerals 428 in FIGS. 91B to 91E are urging means provided between the front decoration 450 and the placement area 420 for urging the front decoration 450 in the forward direction (specifically, the front decoration (A leaf spring attached to the rear surface of the part 450, but such a leaf spring or coil spring may be attached to the placement area 420 side), and the front decorative part 450 where the lock is released is at least for the decorative part. It is made to rotate to the position which is not relocked to the collar part 6520.
Reference numeral 429 is a drawer connector for directly connecting the electrical system of the front decorative portion 450 and the electrical system of the game board 5. The drawer connector 429 is a known plug that is inserted into the receiving side 429A into the receiving side 429B. In the embodiment, the inserting side 429A is attached to the rear surface of the front decorative portion 450, and the receiving side 429B is above the gaming board 5 Is attached to the outside of the game area 5a. Of course, contrary to this, the insertion side 429A of the drawer connector 429 may be provided outside the gaming area 5a of the gaming board 5, and the receiving side 429B may be provided on the rear surface of the front decorative portion 450. The drawer connector 429 has a horizontally long shape, and the longitudinal side thereof and the axis of the hinge axis 450 b of the front face decoration 450 are aligned in parallel. Since the door frame 3 (door side arrangement portion 421) is interposed between the front decorative portion 450 and the game board 5, a connector through hole for passing the drawer connector 429 is provided therein. The insertion side 429A or the receiving side 429B of the drawer connector 429 may be provided on the door frame 3 (door side arrangement portion 421) to electrically connect the front decorative portion 450 and the door frame 3 electrically.
In addition, reference numeral 430 is a detection means for detecting that the front decorative portion 450 is in the game-ready state. When the front decorative portion 450 changes from the playable state to the maintenance state, the detection means 430 detects the change before the drawer connector 429 is detached, and conversely, when the change from the maintenance state to the playable state. The change may be set to a position or structure that can be detected after the drawer connector 429 is coupled. By doing so, it is easy to take measures to protect each control unit from the electrical change due to the insertion and removal of the drawer connector 429.
Reference numeral 4681 is a movable top plate having the same structure as the swingable front top plate 4680 of the front top unit 4500 described later, and the closed attitude and the upstanding attitude of the movable top plate 4681 are the peripheral control board 1510. In conjunction with the game progress, or a predetermined timing determined separately from the game progress (for example, a summoning button is provided at a suitable place of the plate unit 200, and the summoning button forces the standing posture to the closed posture It is possible to switch as needed. Thereby, a movable decoration such as movable top plate 4681 is incorporated in front decoration 450, and even if the movable decoration is in operation, using summons button to safely change front decoration 450 to the maintenance state Can.

[3-10-2. Action and effect of measures to increase size]
The pachinko machine 1 of FIGS. 91B to E is configured as described above, and in the normal gaming state, the main body frame 4 is locked to the outer frame 2 by the outer frame collar 653 of the three-way locking unit 6500. Is locked to the main frame 4 by a door frame wedge 652 of the three-way locking unit 6500, and the front decoration 450 is locked to the door frame 3 by a decoration wedge 6520 of the three-way locking unit 6500. The state in which the front decorative portion 450 is locked by the decorative portion fence 6520 is detected by the detection means 430 as a playable state locked on the front side of the arrangement area 420, and the detection signal is detected by the main control portion 1310. It is transmitted and a game is possible on control.

  Next, when opening the door frame 3 to open the game area 5a in order to cope with troubles such as ball clogging etc., first, insert a key into the key hole 132 of the cylinder lock 130 and rotate this in a front view counterclockwise direction. Rotate in the direction. As a result, the decorative part fence 6520 moves upward through the transmission cylinder 654, and the front decorative part 450 which is on the front side of the placement area 420 and is locked in the playable state is unlocked, and at the same time the biasing means 428 The front decorative portion 450 is slightly pivoted by the bias of. A slight rotation of the front decorative portion 450 is detected by the detection means 430 (the detection means 430 is turned off), and the front decorative portion 450 is not in the game enable state by receiving the detection signal (OFF signal). It is determined that the main control unit 1310 and the peripheral control unit 1511 perform necessary processing (for example, execute a program for protecting the circuit before the disconnection of the drawer connector 429 is disconnected, or execute an alert program for fraudulent (At the top center speaker 462 or the like) to appeal that the door frame 3 is open in a flying manner at an appropriate volume. Specifically, a slight rotation of the front decorative portion 450 is detected by the detection unit 430, and the detection unit 430 is turned off or the drawer connector 429 is disconnected (including the case where the detection unit 430 is not provided). When the detection means 430 is turned off and the drawer connector 429 is disconnected, the signal is received from the top central speaker 462 etc. Will be opened for a predetermined time (20 seconds) (for different notification from the message notification of "the door is open" which is output when the door frame 3 is actually opened ") The process of outputting the various lamps and emitting the various lamps in the pre-alert mode is started. The pre-alert message notification ends after a predetermined time (20 seconds) elapses, but the pre-alert lamp emission continues until the detection unit 430 is turned on (until the front decorative portion 450 is normally connected ) Will be continued. As described above, as a warning program against fraud, immediately after the front decorative portion 450 is removed from the playable state (the detection means 430 is turned off), or immediately after the disconnection of the drawer connector 429, or the detection means 430. As soon as a message notification regarding the door frame 3 is started in a flying manner (in fact, when the door frame 3 is not open) immediately after the condition in which the state of the door connector 429 turns off and the condition in which the drawer connector 429 disconnects overlap, It is possible to prevent in advance the actual harm that may occur when the door frame 3 is opened.

  In the above description, although the message notification for the advance warning and the message notification output when the door frame 3 is actually opened are different notification, the present invention is not limited thereto. The message notification output when the door frame 3 is actually opened may be the notification of the same content. For example, when the drawer connector 429 is disconnected and a slight rotation of the front decorative portion 450 is detected by the detection unit 430 and the detection unit 430 is turned off and the detection signal (OFF signal) is received, the door frame A message notification of “door is open” that is output for a predetermined time (for example, 20 seconds) when 3 is actually opened, and various lamps in a mode when the door frame 3 is actually opened When the door frame 3 is actually opened after that, the process at the time of opening the door to light the light is started in advance, and the same process as the process at the time of opening the door is newly started. May be According to such a mode, when the door frame 3 is actually opened after the detection unit 430 is turned off and the predetermined time has elapsed, the process for opening the door is performed twice, and the predetermined operation is performed. A message notification ending in time can be started multiple times to make the notification to the outside regarding the opening of the door frame 3 sufficient. In addition, even when the door frame 3 is actually opened before the predetermined time has passed since the detection means 430 is turned off, the process when the door is opened is overwritten and extended. The message notification which ends in time can be extended to make the notification to the outside regarding the opening of the door frame 3 sufficient.

Next, in this state, the front decorative portion 450 is manually rotated in the flip-up direction about the hinge shaft 450b of the decorative hinge 450, and changes to a maintenance state not positioned in front of the placement area 420 as shown in FIG. Let Specifically, the front decorative portion 450 is made to stand by at a position not overlapping the opening / closing track of the door frame 3.
Incidentally, this maintenance state is maintained even when there is no support by a hand by a detachable stopper or the like (not shown). Further, in this maintenance state, since the bottom and back surfaces of the front decorative portion 450 hidden in the playable state are exposed to the outside, it is easy to carry out a defect or repair of the front decorative portion 450.
In addition, since the change of the front decorative portion 450 to the maintenance state is due to the movement in the direction different from the opening and closing of the door frame 3, it is noticeable that the employee who is distant that the front decorative portion 450 is in the maintenance state Even easy to understand from. Therefore, it is easy to find an illegal act of a technique performed after putting the front decorative portion 450 in a maintenance state, and that also serves as a deterrent of the illegality.

  When the front decorative portion 450 is changed to the maintenance state, as shown in FIG. 91D, the operation rod 427a of the open operation portion 427 of the three-way locking unit 6500 is exposed to the outside. Then, when the operating rod 427a is pushed by hand against the bias of the coil spring 427b, the linear movement in the pushing direction of the operating rod 427a is converted into rotational movement by a helical mechanism (not shown) in the cylinder 427d. The rotational movement is converted into a linear movement for pulling up the door frame wedge 652, and the locking of the door frame 3 by the door frame wedge 652 is released.

As a result, the door frame 3 can be opened as it passes under the front decorative portion 450 in the maintenance state as shown by the phantom line in FIG. 91D.
As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the embodiment, the front decorative portion 450 in the maintenance state stands by at a position not overlapping the opening / closing track of the door frame 3, that is, it is separated from the opening / closing of the door frame 3. There is almost no risk that the front decorative portion 450 will come into contact with people even if the front cover is opened, and there is almost no risk of interference with the adjacent pachinko machine etc. as the door frame 3 is opened and closed.
And, if it is necessary to open the door frame 3 to perform an illegal act, the above-described releasing operation of the front decorative portion 450 is essential as a premise thereof, so it is difficult for the fraud to be performed and it takes a long time for the unauthorized work. Discovery is also easier.
In addition, since no tool is required for the opening operation of the door frame 3, the workability is good, and furthermore, the employee or the like does not have to bother carrying a large bundle of keys and tools.

In the embodiment, the front decorative portion 450 is provided in the main body side disposition portion 422 of the main body frame 4, but it is also possible to provide the front decorative portion 450 in the door side disposition portion 421 of the door frame 3. Although the front decoration 450 moves with the door frame 3, if the front projection of the front decoration 450 is designed to be large in the playable state and small in the maintenance state, contact with people is achieved. It is sufficiently possible to reduce the risk, and interference with the adjacent pachinko machine, ball ball rental machine and the like can also be avoided.
Further, by attaching the decorative hinge tool 450a to the outer frame 2, the front decorative portion 450 can be supported by the outer frame 2. In such a case, the front decorative portion 450 in the maintenance state is opened and closed to the door frame 3. Of course, since it can be separated also from the opening and closing of the main body frame 4, it is possible to further reduce the risk of contact with a person or to avoid interference with an adjacent pachinko machine, a flat ball rental machine or the like.

  Next, when the door frame 3 is closed after finishing the necessary work such as clearing the ball clogging etc., the door frame wedge 652 is automatically locked and the door frame 3 is locked, and the front surface in that state When the decorative portion 450 is returned from the maintenance state to the playable state, the drawer connector 429 is first connected, and from there, the front decorative portion 450 is firmly fixed to the placement area 420 against the bias of the biasing means 428 (leaf spring). When pushed in, the decorative part fence 6520 is automatically locked and the front decorative part 450 is locked in a game-ready state, and the game-enabled state is detected by the detection means 430 and the aforementioned alert program by the main control unit 1310 Etc., and return to the state where the game is possible.

  In addition, although the front decoration part 450 mentioned above had fixed the rotation center to the hinge axis 450b of the decoration hinge tool 450a, if the front decoration part 450 changed to the maintenance state, the data display on the curtain plate side of the island equipment If there is a risk of interference with the body (display device indicating the progress of the game (number of big hit games, etc.) provided on the curtain board above the pachinko machine 1) etc., as shown in FIGS. The pivot hole 450c through which the hinge shaft 450b of the tool 450a passes may be elongated so that the rotation center of the front decorative portion 450 can be changed to the player side. Further, in the front decorative portion 450, in addition to the case of rotating around the hinge shaft 450b of the decorative hinge tool 450a, a guide arm is provided so as to protrude from the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2 and to be along the guide arm. It is also good.

3-11. Detachment structure of door frame decoration]
In the pachinko machine 1 of the embodiment, as described above, the front decoration 450 is formed detachably with respect to the placement area 420 via the decoration hinge 450a, and the decoration hinge 450a needs a tool such as a driver. It is locked by a plurality of toolless locking portions 426.
Therefore, for example, even if a problem occurs in the front decorative portion 450, first, the front decorative portion 450 is changed to the maintenance state as shown in FIG. 91D in the above manner, and the locking portion holding the decorative hinge 450a in that state. Remove the 426 by hand operation, and then pull up the front decoration 450 together with the decorative hinge 450a as shown in the imaginary line in FIG. 91C, remove it from the placement area 420, replace it with a substitute on the spot, and then reverse the front. The game can be resumed by returning the decorative portion 450 to the game enabled state. Of course, the front decorative portion 450 can be easily and quickly changed to another model compatible with the new model.
On the other hand, the tool-less locking portion 426 locking the front decorative portion 450 can be attached and detached on the premise of, for example, a release operation using a key on the front decorative portion 450, so even if the locking portion 426 is used. Even if the tool is toolless, there is almost no risk of being removed by anyone other than a specific person such as a game arcade employee.
By the way, although the above-described series of operations are performed with the power of the pachinko machine 1 turned off, if the locking of the front decorative portion 450 by the locking portion 426 is insufficient, the drawer connector 429 will have a coupling failure. Because there is a high possibility that the detection means 430 will not be switched to the ON state, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, a signal of poor connection of the drawer connector 429 alone including the case where the detection means 430 is not provided. Detection of either the signal in the OFF state of the detection means 430 alone, including the case where the drawer connector 429 is not provided, or the signal of both the signal of the coupling failure of the drawer connector 429 and the signal of the OFF state of the detection means 430 Determines the locking failure of the locking portion 426, for example, a notification such as "the attachment of the front decoration is not sufficient" is the top center speaker 62 may be performed, or the like. Of course, without using the signal of the drawer connector 429 or the signal of the detection means 430, a dedicated sensor for detecting the locking of the locking portion 426 may be provided to perform the same notification.

  In the embodiment, the unlocking operation of the locking portion 426 is made possible by the release operation of the front decorative portion 450 with the key, but the operation portion of the locking portion 426 is formed on the rear surface of the door frame 3. Provided and the release operation of the door frame 3 (in this case, the front decorative portion 450 may be fixed to the door frame 3, and the locking unit 650 described in [4-10. Locking unit] described later and FIG. The attaching / detaching operation of the locking portion 426 may be performed by the user.

[3-12. Relationship between claims and embodiments]
As described above, the pachinko machine 1 described in FIGS. 91B to 91G is an embodiment of the invention described in the claims of the claims or the inventions described in each solution means of the invention. It corresponds to the form. In this case, the "opening / closing portion" in the claims corresponds to the "door frame 3" in the embodiment, the "predetermined portion" similarly corresponds to the "arrangement region 420", and the "window" is the "door window". 101a ”.

[4. Overall configuration of body frame]
The entire configuration of the main body frame 4 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 92 to FIG. FIG. 92 is a front view of the main body frame of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 93 is a rear view of the main body frame of the pachinko machine. FIG. 94 is a perspective view of the main body frame as viewed from the front right, FIG. 95 is a perspective view of the main body frame as viewed from the left front, and FIG. 96 is a perspective view of the main body frame as viewed from the rear. FIG. 97 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled into main members and viewed from the front, and FIG. 98 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled into main members and viewed from the rear.

  The main unit frame 4 holds the game board 5 having the game area 5a in which the game is performed by hitting the game ball B, and pays out the game ball B to the player side, or the game ball B used for the game. To the rear of the pachinko machine 1 (the island equipment side of the game hall). The main body frame 4 is formed in the shape of a box whose front is open as shown in the figure, and the game board 5 is detachably accommodated in the inside from the front. The main body frame 4 is mounted so as to be openable and closable to the frame-like outer frame 2 attached to the island facility of the game hall at the upper and lower ends of the front left side, and the door frame 3 is opened and closed so that the open front side is closed. Can be mounted.

  The main body frame 4 has a frame-like main body frame base unit 500 whose rear portion is insertable into the frame of the outer frame 2 and is capable of supporting the outer periphery of the game board 5, and the left side of the main body frame base unit 500 in front view Body frame upper hinge member 510 to which the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 of the door frame 3 is rotatably mounted and the body frame mounted on the upper end of the outer frame 2 and rotatably attached to the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 of the outer frame 2; Body frame lower hinge set attached to the lower end of the left side of the base unit 500 in a front view and rotatably attached to the outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 and the door frame lower hinge member 125 of the door frame 3 rotatably attached And a solid 520.

  Further, the main body frame 4 is attached to the metal main body frame reinforcing frame 530 attached to the left side surface of the main body frame base unit 500 in front view, and to the lower front of the main body frame base unit 500. A ball emitting device 540 for driving the game ball B inside, an inverted L-shaped dispensing base unit 550 mounted along the front view upper side and the left side on the rear side of the main body frame base unit 500, and a dispensing base A payout unit 560 attached to the rear side of the unit 550 for dispensing the gaming ball B to the player, a substrate unit 620 attached to the lower portion of the rear surface of the main frame base unit 500, and the main frame base unit 500 A back cover 640 which is attached to the rear side of the game machine so as to be openable and closable and which covers the rear side of the game board 5 attached to the body frame base 501; And Tsu (500) viewed from the front right side with an installed and the outer frame 2 and the main frame 4, and the door frame 3 and locking unit 650 for locking between the body frame 4, and a.

  The main body frame base unit 500 is a connecting cable guide member for guiding a connecting frame 503 for connecting the main body frame base 501 which is formed in a rectangular frame shape whose shape in front view extends vertically and a door frame 3 side. And 502 a game board lock member 505 for detachably holding the game board 5.

  The dispensing base unit 550 is a dispensing base 551 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, and a box-like ball tank attached to the dispensing base 551 and extending left and right. 552, a tank rail 553 attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 and having a slot-like guide channel extending leftward in the form of a groove opened upward, and attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553 Between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555, the first rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553 so as to be spaced leftward from the first rail cover 554 At the upper end of the tank rail 553 and at the downstream end of the tank rail 553. It includes a Tamatome member 557 are, a.

  The payout unit 560 has a ball guiding unit 570 having one guiding passage for guiding the gaming ball B from the tank rail 553 in a meandering manner downward, and the gaming ball guided by the one guiding passage of the ball guiding unit 570. B. Payout device 580 that pays out one at a time based on an instruction from payout control board 633, upper full ball path unit 600 for guiding gaming ball B which has passed through discharge device 580 downward, and upper full ball path And a lower full ball path unit 610 for guiding the game ball B having passed through the unit 600 to the door frame 3 side or the board unit 620 side.

  The board unit 620 includes a speaker unit 620a attached to the body frame base 501 of the body frame base unit 500, a base unit 620b attached to the back surface of the body frame base 501, and a power supply unit attached to the back side of the base unit 620b. 620 c, a payout control unit 620 d attached to the rear side of the power supply unit 620 c, and an interface unit 620 e attached to the rear surface of the speaker unit 620 a.

  The locking unit 650 includes a unit base 651 attached to the main frame base 501, a plurality of door frame wedges 652 projecting forward from the unit base 651 and capable of locking with the door frame 3, and projecting rearward from the unit base 651. And a transmission cylinder 654 for moving the door frame ridge 652 or the outer frame ridge 653 in the vertical direction, and the door frame ridge 652 downward. A lock spring 655 which biases and presses the outer frame collar 653 upward, and an outer frame unlocking lever 656 which moves the outer frame collar 653 downward.

[4-1. Main unit frame base unit]
The main body frame base unit 500 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 92 to 100 and the like. FIG. 99 (a) is an enlarged perspective view showing a front lower left corner of the body frame, and FIG. 99 (b) is an enlarged perspective view showing a front lower left corner of the body frame when the door frame is opened with respect to the body frame. FIG. 100 is an explanatory view showing the operation of the connection cable guide member of the main body frame when the door frame is opened and closed with respect to the main body frame. The main body frame base unit 500 is inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 from the front to the rear, and holds the outer periphery of the game board 5 inserted from the front.

  The main body frame base unit 500 is attached to a main body frame base 501 formed in a rectangular frame shape extending in the vertical direction in a front view, and a lower left corner of the front surface of the main body frame base 501 to guide the connecting cable 503 And a game board lock member 505 rotatably mounted on a lower portion of the front surface of the body frame base 501 so as to be rotatable about an axis extending back and forth and for holding the game board 5 in an attachable and detachable manner. ing.

  The main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500 has a base main body 501a formed in a rectangular shape with a front view shape extending vertically and about 3/4 of the total height from a position slightly below the upper end of the base main body 501a. The game board insertion slot 501b which penetrates back and forth in the height range of the game board 5 is inserted from the front side, and the lower side of the game board insertion slot 501b is formed, and the game board on which the game board 5 is placed A placement board 501c, and a game board regulation part 501d that protrudes upward from the center in the left-right direction of the game board placement part 501c and regulates movement of the lower end of the game board 5 in the left and right and backward.

  Further, the main frame base 501 is recessed rearward on the lower right side of the gaming board placement portion 501c on the front of the base main body 501a in the front view, and the launcher attachment portion 501e for attaching the ball launcher 540; It penetrates back and forth in the cylinder insertion port 501f which penetrates back and forth in the front view right side of the part 501e and the transmission cylinder 654 of the locking unit 650 is inserted, and penetrates back and forth in the front view lower left side of the game board placement part 501c. A circular speaker opening 501g for facing the main body frame speaker 622 of the speaker unit 620a at 620 and the main body frame base 501 are recessed rearward under the speaker opening 501g and extend left and right. The cable attachment recess 501 h to which the connection cable guide member 502 is attached and the positive of the cable attachment recess 501 h And a, a cable insertion hole 501i extending through the front and rear at the right end upper viewing.

  Furthermore, the main frame base 501 extends in a plate shape from the front right side of the gaming board insertion slot 501b in the base main body 501a to the rear in a plate shape, the locking unit 650 is attached to the right side, and the back cover 640 is at the rear end. It is formed in the vicinity of the upper and lower end portions of the rear extension portion 501j rotatably mounted and the left end in the front view on the rear surface of the base main body 501a, and for mounting the main frame upper hinge member 510 and the main frame lower hinge assembly 520 An upper hinge attachment portion 501k and a lower hinge attachment portion 501l.

  In addition, the main body frame base 501 is a door for detecting the opening of the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 at a position below the cylinder insertion opening 501f through which the transmission cylinder 654 of the locking unit 650 is inserted. The frame opening switch 4a is attached. When the door frame 3 is opened (opened) with respect to the main body frame 4, the pressing of the door frame opening switch 4 a is released so that the opening of the door frame 3 can be detected. A detection signal from the door frame opening switch 4 a is input to the main control board 1310 X via the payout control board 633. Further, the main body frame base 501 is provided with a main body frame open switch 4b for detecting the opening of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 on the rear surface of the base main body 501a below the position where the door frame open switch 4a is attached. It is done. When the main body frame 4 is opened (opened) with respect to the outer frame 2, the pressing of the main body frame open switch 4 b is released and the opening of the main body frame 4 can be detected. A detection signal from the main body frame opening switch 4 b is input to the main control board 1310 X via the payout control board 633.

  A game board lock member 505 is rotatably mounted on the main body frame base 501 at a position below the gaming board placement portion 501c on the front and to the right of the speaker opening 501g. The game board lock member 505 can restrict the forward movement of the game board 5 inserted into the game board insertion slot 501b, thereby making the game board 5 inserted into the game board insertion slot 501b removable.

  The cable attachment recess 501h of the main frame base 501 extends from the right end side of the lower hinge attachment portion 501l to the position below the portion where the game board lock member 505 is attached to the right of the speaker opening 501g. . The cable attachment recess 501 h is formed to have a size capable of accommodating the connection cable guide member 502, and can be rotatably mounted on the right end side of the connection cable guide member 502 around an axis extending vertically.

  The connection cable guide member 502 of the main frame base unit 500 is projected forward on both the upper and lower sides of a flat guide body 502a extending in the left and right direction and the guide body 502a and extends to the right from the right end of the guide body 502a. A pair of strip-shaped frame pieces 502b that are extended, a cylindrical attachment shaft 502c connecting the right ends of the pair of frame pieces 502b, and the left and right ends of the guide main body 502a And a plurality of through holes 502d aligned in the direction.

  The connection cable guide member 502 has a length in the left-right direction slightly shorter than the length in the left-right direction of the cable attachment recess 501h of the main frame base 501, and has a size that can be accommodated in the cable attachment recess 501h. It is formed. The connecting cable guiding member 502 is rotatably mounted around an axis extending up and down near the right end in the cable mounting recess 501 h. Thereby, the connection cable guide member 502 can be rotated (hinge rotation) so that the left end side protrudes forward.

  The connection cable guide member 502 is for guiding the connection cable 503. The connection cable 503 includes a plurality of wiring cords, one end of which is connected to the interface board 635 of the board unit 620, and the other end of which is the door frame main relay board 104 of the door frame 3 and the door frame sub It is connected to the relay board 105.

  Then, the effect by the connection cable guide member 502 is demonstrated. As shown in FIG. 100 etc., the connection cable guiding member 502 is an end (right end) opposite to the side (left) to which the door frame 3 in the left-right direction is hinge-rotatably attached to the body frame base 501. ) Is rotatably mounted about an axis extending parallel to the hinge axis of the door frame 3.

  The connection cable 503 connecting the interface board 635 of the main frame 4 to the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 of the door frame 3 is connected to the interface board 635 by the connection cable guide member. In a state of being in contact with the front surface of the guide main body 502a so as to extend leftward from the right side of the guide main body 502a of 502, the lateral direction is the plurality of through holes 502d formed on the upper and lower ends of the guide main body 502a. It is attached to the guide main body 502a by being clamped together with the guide main body 502a by the binding band 504 which penetrated to the pair of through-holes 502d of the same position.

  The connection cable guide member 502 of the main frame 4 is the back of the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 of the door frame 3 in a state where the assembly door frame 3 is closed to the main frame 4 in the pachinko machine 1 (See FIG. 100 (a)). In this state, after the connection cable 503 extends leftward from the connection cable guide member 502, it is bent back in front of the lower hinge attachment portion 501l, passes through the cable holder 103a of the door frame 3, and the door frame relay board cover It extends into 107. The cable holder 103 a of the door frame 3 is disposed to the left of the left end of the connection cable guiding member 502.

  In this state, when the door frame 3 is hinged to open with respect to the main body frame 4, the left end side of the connection cable guiding member 502 is pulled forward by the side of the connection cable 503 attached to the door frame 3, The connection cable guiding member 502 is pivoted about the mounting shaft 502c at the right end. At this time, in the present embodiment, the relationship between the open angle α of the door frame 3 and the open angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 satisfies: α / 2 ≧ β (desirably, α / 3 ≧ β) It is formed (see FIG. 100 (b)).

  The open angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 is 0 degree when the door frame 3 is closed (the open angle α of the door frame 3 is 0 degree). The opening angle β of the connection cable guiding member 502 increases as the door frame 3 is opened and the opening angle α becomes larger, but the increase stops when the opening angle α becomes larger than a certain degree (for example, about 90 degrees) Transition as follows. In the present embodiment, the maximum angle of the open angle β is less than 45 degrees.

  Thus, when the door frame 3 is opened, the connection cable guide member 502 rotates so that the left end side of the connection cable guide member 502 moves forward relative to the main body frame base 501. The guiding of the connection cable 503 can prevent the connection cable 503 from hanging down between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4.

  When the open door frame 3 is closed, the portion of the connection cable 503 attached to the door frame 3 is relatively moved backward, so the left end side of the connection cable guide member 502 is pressed backward by the connection cable 503. As a result, the connection cable guiding member 502 is pivoted about the mounting shaft 502c so that the left end side moves rearward. At this time, since the connecting cable guiding member 502 is opened at an opening angle β of less than 45 degrees, the connecting cable guiding member 502 does not obstruct the movement of the door frame 3 in the closing direction, and the door frame 3 It can be closed smoothly. Further, since the connection cable 503 is guided by the connection cable guide member 502, the connection cable 503 is not pinched between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 when the door frame 3 is closed. Can be prevented from occurring.

  Further, since the connecting cable 503 guided by the connecting cable guiding member 502 is folded 180 degrees when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the connecting cable 503 is folded at the folded part. You can put on a bribe. Thus, when the door frame 3 is opened, the force for closing the connection cable 503 is acted upon by the fold when the 180-folded portion of the connection cable 503 is changed to open. Therefore, when the door frame 3 is closed, it is possible to prevent the connecting cable 503 (connection cable guiding member 502) from moving in the opening direction by its fold, and the connecting cable 503 (connection cable guiding member 502) It can be guided in the closing direction, and the door frame 3 can be smoothly closed.

  Furthermore, on the side of the door frame 3, the cable holder 103a is located closer to the central axis (axial center) of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 and the door frame lower hinge pin 126 than the tip of the connection cable guide member 502. When the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main frame 4, the distal end side of the connection cable guiding member 502 is the hinge pin 122 on the door frame by the connection cable 503 held by the cable holder 103a. The door frame lower hinge pin 126 can be pulled toward the central axis (axial core) side.

  Further, in this embodiment, the door frame of the speaker duct 103 relative to the cable holder 103 a is centered on the central axis (axial center) of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 and the door frame lower hinge pin 126 passing through the rotation center of the connection cable guide member 502. A tangent line in contact with a circle passing through a portion (pressing portion) protruding rearward on the central axis (axial center) side of the upper hinge pin 122 and the door frame lower hinge pin 126 and an angle intersecting the front surface of the main body frame 45 are 45 degrees or less It is configured to be Thereby, when closing the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4, the pressing portion abuts on the connection cable 503 to close the tip end side of the connection cable guiding member 502 opened through the connection cable 503. Since it is possible to press in the direction, the connection cable guide member 502 can be smoothly closed with the movement of the door frame 3 in the closing direction, and the door frame 3 can be closed reliably. Further, since the maximum opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 which rotates (opens and closes) with the opening and closing of the door frame 3 can be 45 degrees or less, the connection cable guide member 502 can be closed when the door frame 3 is closed. Can be reliably rotated in the closing direction, and the same effects as those described above can be obtained.

[4-2. Main frame upper hinge member]
The main frame upper hinge member 510 in the main frame 4 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. The main frame upper hinge member 510 is attached to the upper hinge attachment portion 501k of the main frame base 501 of the main frame base unit 500, and is rotatably attached to the outer upper hinge assembly 50 of the outer frame 2. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 is rotatably mounted.

  An upper hinge main body 511 in which a rear portion of a horizontally extending flat plate member is bent in an L shape downward, and a cylindrical shape protruding upward from the front end of the upper hinge main body 511 And a main frame upper hinge pin 512 pivotally supported by the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50. The upper hinge main body 511 penetrates vertically in the front view left side of the main frame upper hinge pin 512 at a horizontally extending portion, and the door frame upper hinge hole 511 a for pivotally supporting the upper door frame hinge assembly 120 Have.

  A portion of the upper hinge main body 511 which is bent downward and extends vertically is attached to the upper hinge attachment portion 501 k of the main frame base 501 of the main frame base unit 500. The main frame upper hinge member 510 is pivotally supported with the main frame upper hinge pin 512 inserted in the bearing groove 51 c of the outer frame upper hinge member 51 in the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50. A door frame upper hinge pin 122 in the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 of the door frame 3 is rotatably inserted from below into the door frame upper hinge hole 511 a of the upper hinge main body 511.

  The main frame upper hinge member 510 can be mounted so that the main frame 4 can be hinged rotatably relative to the outer frame 2 in cooperation with the lower main frame hinge assembly 520, and the door frame relative to the main frame 4 3 can be hingedly mounted.

[4-3. Body frame lower hinge assembly]
The lower main frame hinge assembly 520 of the main body frame 4 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 97 and 98. The main frame lower hinge assembly 520 is attached to the lower hinge attachment portion 501l of the main frame base 501 of the main frame base unit 500, and is rotatably attached to the outer lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2. The lower door frame hinge member 125 is rotatably mounted.

  The lower main frame hinge assembly 520 is disposed above the lower hinge first main body 521 and the lower hinge first main body 521 in which the rear portion of the horizontally extending flat plate member is bent in an L shape upward And a lower hinge second body 522 in which a rear portion of a flat plate material extending horizontally is bent in an L shape upward. The lower horizontal hinge assembly 520 is provided with a horizontally extending portion of the lower hinge second main body 522 at a distance from the horizontally extending portion of the lower hinge first main body 521 and a lower portion thereof. The vertically extending portion of the lower hinge second body 522 is in contact with the front surface of the vertically extending portion of the hinge first body 521.

  The lower hinge first main body 521 penetrates up and down near the front end of the horizontally extending portion, and the lower lower hinge pin 60c of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 is inserted from below for the outer frame It has a hinge hole 521a. The outer frame lower hinge hole 521 a is formed coaxially with the main frame upper hinge pin 512 of the main frame upper hinge member 510.

  The lower hinge second main body 522 penetrates up and down in the vicinity of the front end of the horizontally extending portion, and the lower door frame lower hinge pin 126 of the lower door frame hinge member 125 of the door frame 3 is inserted from above A hinge hole 522a, and a restriction piece 522b extending upward from a position behind the lower hinge hole 522a at the left side of the horizontally extending portion, for restricting the pivoting range of the door frame 3; And. The door frame lower hinge hole 522 a is formed coaxially with the door frame upper hinge hole 511 a in the upper hinge main body 511 of the main frame upper hinge member 510.

  The vertically extending portion of the lower hinge first main body 521 and the lower hinge second main body 522 is attached to the lower hinge attachment portion 5011 of the main frame base 501 of the main frame base unit 500. Be The main frame lower hinge assembly 520 can attach the main frame 4 to the outer frame 2 so as to be hinge-rotatable in cooperation with the main frame upper hinge member 510, and the door frame 3 to the main frame 4. The hinge can be mounted rotatably.

[4-4. Body frame reinforcement frame]
The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 97 and 98 and the like. The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 is attached to the left side surface of the main body frame base 501 in the main body frame base unit 500. The cross-sectional shape in plan view of the main body frame reinforcing frame 530 is formed in a U shape whose right side is opened, and extends vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape. In the present embodiment, the main body frame reinforcing frame 530 is formed of a metal extrusion material.

  In the main body frame reinforcing frame 530, the movement of the game board 5 inserted in the game board insertion slot 501b of the main body frame base 501 is restricted forward and upward to the rear side of the portion extending rightward from the front end. Two left position control members 531 are vertically spaced apart and attached.

  The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 reinforces the left side (hinge side) of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, and the inside of the main body frame 4 from the left passing between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 ( It prevents the insertion of unauthorized tools into the game board 5).

[4-5. Ball launcher]
The ball launcher 540 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIG. 101 and the like. FIG. 101 (a) is a front perspective view of the ball launcher in the main frame, and FIG. 101 (b) is a rear perspective view of the ball launcher. The ball launching device 540 is attached to the lower front of the main frame base unit 500, and the gaming ball B stored in the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 in the door frame 3 is It is for driving into the five game areas 5a. The ball launcher 540 can strike the gaming ball B with a strength according to the turning angle of the handle 182 of the handle unit 180 at the front lower right corner of the door frame 3.

  The ball launcher 540 is attached to a flat launch base 541 attached to the launcher attachment portion 501e of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500 and to the rear surface of the right side of the launch base 541 in a front view From around the tip of the hitting ball 543, a shooting solenoid 542 consisting of a rotary solenoid whose axis extends forward through the shooting base 541, a hitting ball 543 whose base end is attached to the rotating shaft of the shooting solenoid 542, and The game ball B is mounted on the front surface of the firing base 541 so as to extend obliquely upward and to the left, and the game ball B is rollable.

  In the ball launcher 540, the game ball B is supplied from the ball feed unit 140 of the door frame 3 to the launch position of the upper right end of the launch rail 544, and the game sphere B is placed at the launch position of the launch rail 544. In the supplied state, when the handle 182 is turned, the firing solenoid 542 is driven with the strength according to the turning operation angle, and the game ball B is hit by the hit ball 543. The game ball B hit by the hitting ball 543 passes through the firing ball passage (see FIG. 39) of the firing passage portion 1012 consisting of the firing rail 544 and the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 of the gaming board 5 to play the game area 5a It is driven in.

  If the fired game ball B does not reach the game area 5a due to the impact strength of the game ball B, etc., as shown in FIG. The ball drops from the ball drop opening 1013 opened in the lower part to the ball receiving part 150c of the far cover unit 150 constituting the return passage 1014, passes through the inside of the fal cover unit 150, and is from the lower flat ball supply port 211c It is discharged to the lower tray 202.

[4-6. Disbursement base unit]
The dispensing base unit 550 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIG. 102 and the like. FIG. 102 (a) is a perspective view of the dispensing base unit of the main body frame as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the dispensing base unit as viewed from the rear. Dispensing base unit 550 is formed in an inverted L shape, and is attached to the rear side of main body frame base unit 500.

  The dispensing base unit 550 includes a dispensing base 551 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 501 in the main body frame base unit 500. The dispensing base 551 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin, and has a top plate portion 551a extending in the left-right direction with a substantially constant width in the front-rear direction, and a top plate portion having a width in the front-rear direction from the left side of the top plate 551a A left side plate portion 551b that extends substantially the same width downward and a right side plate portion 551c whose width in the front-rear direction from the front right side of the top plate portion 551a is substantially the same width as the top plate portion 551a The back plate upper portion 551d extending downward from the rear side of the top plate portion 551a to the same position as the lower side of the right side plate portion 551c, and substantially constant rightward from a position closer to the front than the rear side of the left side plate portion 551b. Back plate left portion 551e which extends to the lower end by width, inner plate portion 551f extending backward from the right side of back plate left portion 551e to the same position as the rear side of left plate portion 551b, and left plate portion 551b From the front of the lower side to the right It includes a bottom plate portion 551g which extends substantially to the same position as 51e right side of the connecting plate portion 551h, which connects the lower side of the right inner plate portion 551f of the bottom plate portion 551g, a. The dispensing base 551 is formed in an inverted L shape in a front view, and is formed in a box shape opened forward and in an L shape. In addition, on the rear surface of the back plate upper portion 551d, a collar portion 551da protruding rearward is formed in the left and right direction at a portion separated from the lower side by a predetermined length.

  The payout base 551 has a top plate portion 551a extending in the lateral direction substantially the same as the width in the left-right direction of the game board slot 501b of the main frame base 501, and the left side plate portion 551b is the upper and lower sides of the game board slot 501b. It extends up and down with approximately the same length as the direction height. The front end of the top plate portion 551a, the left side plate portion 551b, and the right side plate portion 551c of the dispensing base 551 is attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 501.

  Further, the dispensing base 551 is provided with a shallow concave portion which is opened rearward and extends vertically by the left side plate portion 551b, the back plate left portion 551e, and the inner side plate portion 551f, and the portion is dispensed Unit 560 is attached. Further, the dispensing base 551 protrudes rightward in the upper part of the right side surface of the inner side plate portion 551 f in a front view, and has a back cover attaching portion 551 i to which the back cover 640 is attached.

  Dispensing base unit 550 is attached to the upper surface of top plate portion 551a of dispensing base 551 and extends in the left and right box-like ball tank 552 opened upward, and the portion of dispensing base 551 extending in the left and right And a tank rail 553 attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 at the upper side and extending in the form of a groove opened upward to the left.

  Further, the dispensing base unit 550 is separated from the first rail cover 554 on the left side of the first rail cover 554 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553 in the left and right direction, A second rail cover 555 attached and extending to the left end of the tank rail 553 and a ball straightening member 556 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553 at a position between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 And a ball stopper 557 attached near the left end in the front view at the lower end of the tank rail 553.

  The ball tank 552 is made of a conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate, and is molded to be opaque black, and the left and right direction is formed about half the width of the top plate portion 551 a of the dispensing base 551 in the left and right direction. In addition, the front-rear direction is formed to have a length shorter than the depth of the top plate 551a in the front-rear direction. The ball tank 552 is attached on the upper surface of the top plate 551a at a position on the right side in the left-right direction. The bottom surface of the ball tank 552 is inclined so that the left end side is lower. The left end of the ball tank 552 communicates with the tank rail 553.

  The tank rail 553 is molded of a nonconductive transparent synthetic resin, and is attached near the rear end on the left side of the top surface of the top plate 551 a of the dispensing base 551 with respect to the center in the left-right direction. The shape of the tank rail 553 in plan view is approximately one minute from the depth at which the depth in the front-rear direction is diagonal to the left and back from the right end communicating with the ball tank 552 and several times the outer diameter of the gaming ball B After extending so as to be depth, the depth in the front-rear direction is formed in a shape extending straight to the left at a depth slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. The bottom surface of the tank rail 553 is inclined so that the left end side is lower, and the left end of the bottom surface opens downward with a size slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B, thereby forming a single guiding passage. It is done. The opening at the left end of the bottom surface of the tank rail 553 is in communication with the upper end opening of one guiding passage 570 a in the ball guiding unit 570 of the dispensing unit 560.

  In addition, the tank rail 553 is steeper than the bottom surface so that the upper end of the portion extending straight to the left has a height slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B at the left end. It inclines so that the left end side becomes low at a certain angle. The tank rail 553 is attached to the upper surface of the top plate 551a such that the rear end of the portion extending straight to the left substantially coincides with the rear side of the top plate 551a. When the tank rail 553 is attached to the top plate portion 551a, the top plate portion 551a is disposed below the tank rail 553 and the rear surface of the tank rail 553 and the rear surface of the back plate upper portion 551d are disposed on substantially the same plane. It has become so. Note that the cross-sectional shape of the top plate portion 551a where the tank rail 553 is disposed is bent downward in a plurality according to the direction from the front side to the rear side of the top plate portion 551a It is formed in a stepped shape. In addition, the first rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555, the ball straightening member 556, and the ball stopper 557 are attached to the tank rail 553 at the upper end of the portion extending straight to the left.

  The first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 are made of polyamide (nylon) resin, are molded to be opaque white, and are attached to the upper end of a portion of the tank rail 553 extending straight to the left. . The first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 prevent the depth in the front-rear direction of the upper end of the tank rail 553 from spreading or narrowing due to the pressure of the game ball B in the tank rail 553. It is a thing.

  The ball straightening member 556 is made of polyamide (nylon) resin and is formed to be opaque white, and at a portion between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 at the upper end of the tank rail 553 The end on the side of one rail cover 554 is rotatably mounted about an axis extending in the front-rear direction. The ball | bowl rectification | straightening member 556 is provided with the rectification | straightening piece 556a which protrudes in the tank rail 553 and is extended in the left-right direction (refer FIG. 111). The flow of the game balls B on the upper side of the game balls B circulating in two stages in the upper and lower directions is delayed by the rectifying pieces 556a, and the flow is rectified in the downstream side to flow in the tank rail 553 Even if the height is lowered, it does not clog the ball.

  The ball stopper 557 is made of polyamide (nylon) resin, is molded in an opaque red color, and is mounted slidably in the left and right direction near the left end in the front view on the lower surface of the tank rail 553 By sliding it, the opening at the left end of the bottom surface of the tank rail 553 can be closed so that the gaming ball B does not flow from the tank rail 553 to the delivery unit side downstream.

  As described above, the cross-sectional shape of the top plate portion 551a in which the tank rail 553 is disposed is the downward direction from the front side to the rear side of the top plate portion 551a (from the front to the rear of the top plate portion 551a). It is formed in the shape of a step bent into a plurality. Among the portions formed in a plurality of bent steps, a partial region is formed as a substrate accommodating portion 551 aa to which the external terminal plate 558 and the frame ground substrate 559 are attached. The upper side of the external terminal plate 558 is covered by a terminal cover 551k molded of a transparent synthetic resin. The external terminal board 558 has its mounting surface and a plurality of electric wire connection terminals 558a (in the present embodiment, the external terminals XCN1 arranged in a row from left to right as viewed from the rear of the discharge base unit 550) When the dispensing base 551 is viewed from the front, and the mounting surface thereof is vertically directed rearward of the dispensing base 551 so that the ten external terminals of XCN10 are exposed) It is attached to section 551aa. On the other hand, the frame ground substrate 559 is horizontal with the mounting surface on which a plurality of ground terminals (in this embodiment, five ground terminals ECN1 to ECN5 are provided) is mounted downward. As viewed from the front, the dispensing base 551 is disposed in front of the external terminal plate 558 and attached to the substrate accommodation portion 551aa so as to be covered by the terminal cover 551k. For this reason, the frame ground substrate 559 is housed in the space formed by the substrate housing portion 551aa and the terminal cover 551k. Since the terminal cover 551k is molded of transparent synthetic resin, the frame ground substrate 559 accommodated in the space formed by the substrate accommodation portion 551aa and the terminal cover 551k can be viewed from the outside of the terminal cover 551k It has become.

  Of the ground terminals ECN1 to ECN5, the height of the ground terminals ECN2 to ECN4 is 13.4 mm (when the housing corresponding to the ground terminals ECN2 to ECN4 is inserted, the mounting height is 18.6 mm). In contrast to this, the height of the ground terminals ECN1 and ECN5 is 7 mm (when the housing corresponding to the ground terminals ECN1 and ECN5 is inserted, the mounting height is 9.8 mm). When the frame ground board 559 is accommodated and attached inside the board accommodation portion 551aa and the external terminal board 558 is attached to the rear surface of the substrate accommodation portion 551aa, the frame ground board 559 is viewed from the back of the pachinko machine 1 However, among the ground terminals ECN1 to ECN5 of the frame ground board 559, only the ground terminals ECN2 and ECN4 out of the lower side of the external terminal board 558 out of the ground terminals ECN1 to ECN5 of the frame earth board 559 It can be viewed from the back of 1 (see, for example, FIG. 93). The ground terminal ECN 3 is 13.4 mm high as described above, and is high. However, when the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the back, the ball rectifying member 556 hides and makes it difficult to view. The ground terminals ECN1 and ECN5 are as low as 7 mm as described above and can not project from the lower side of the external terminal board 558. When the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the back, the presence of the external terminal board 558 hides it. It is difficult to see A detailed description of the frame ground substrate 559 will be described later.

  The external terminal board 558 is for electrically connecting between the pachinko machine 1 and the island facility of the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. The frame earth substrate 559 is for temporarily collecting electromagnetic wave noise generated in various places and grounding it to the island facility of the game hall (earth ground).

[4-7. Overall configuration of the payout unit]
The entire configuration of the dispensing unit 560 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 103 and 104 and the like. FIG. 103 (a) is a perspective view of the dispensing unit in the main body frame as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the dispensing unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 104 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the dispensing unit disassembled into main components and viewed from the front, and FIG. 104 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the dispensing unit disassembled into main components and viewed from the rear is there. The dispensing unit 560 is attached to the rear surface of the back plate left portion 551 e of the dispensing base 551 of the dispensing base unit 550.

  The payout unit 560 is a ball guiding unit 570 for guiding the gaming ball B from the tank rail 553 downward in a meandering manner, and the gaming ball B disposed under the ball guiding unit 570 and guided by the ball guiding unit 570 A payout device 580 for paying out one at a time based on an instruction from the payout control board 633, an upper full ball path unit 600 for guiding the gaming ball B having passed through the payout device 580 downward, and an upper full ball path unit And a lower full ball path unit 610 for guiding the game ball B having passed through 600 to the door frame 3 side or the board unit 620 side.

  The ball guiding unit 570 supplies the game balls B aligned in one row by the guiding path of the tank rail 553 to the payout device 580. The payout device 580 is provided with one payout passage 580a through which the gaming balls B supplied from the one lead passage 570a of the ball guiding unit 570 can flow and a single ball withdrawal from the middle of the payout passage 580a. In the normal state, the game ball B is released from the payout passage 580a to the upper full ball passage unit 600 side based on an instruction from the payout control board 633, and the ball pulling lever 593 is operated. The game ball B is released from the ball extraction passage 580b to the upper full ball passage unit 600 side.

  The upper full tank path unit 600 separately guides the gaming ball B discharged from the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 and the gaming ball B discharged from the ball extraction passage 580b downward. The lower full tank path unit 610 guides the game ball B discharged from the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 to the door frame 3 side through the upper full tank path unit 600, and is released from the ball extraction passage 580b. The game ball B is guided to the substrate unit 620 side.

[4-7-1. Ball guidance unit]
The ball guiding unit 570 in the dispensing unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 103 and FIG. The ball guiding unit 570 is attached from the rear to the upper rear of the back plate left portion 551e of the payout base 551 of the payout base unit 550, receives the gaming ball B from the tank rail 553 and guides the gaming ball B to the payout device 580 side. It is to do.

  The ball guiding unit 570 has a box-like guiding unit base 571 having a meanderingly extending guiding passage 570a through which the game ball B can flow and is opened forward, and a front side of the guiding unit base 571 closed. The game ball B in the guide passage 570a is detected by detecting the movement of the flat guide channel front lid 572 and the movable piece member 573 movable by the game ball B circulating in the guide passage 570a. And a ball-off detection sensor 574 for detecting the presence or absence of (see FIG. 111).

  In the ball guiding unit 570, the shape of the guiding unit base 571 and the guiding path front cover 572 in a front view is formed in a rectangular shape extending in the vertical direction. The induction passage 570a opens upward near the left end of the upper surface of the induction unit base 571 and extends vertically downward from the upper end to near the center in the height direction of the induction unit base 571 and then bends to the right It extends downward in a meandering manner while repeatedly turning back and forth between the width of the unit base 571 and opens downward near the left end of the lower surface of the induction unit base 571.

  The guiding passage 570a is formed such that the depth in the front and rear right and the width in the right and left direction are slightly larger than the outer diameter of the gaming ball B with respect to the distribution direction in which the gaming ball B is distributed. It can be guided in one row.

  In the ball guiding unit 570, the movable piece member 573 is mounted to be able to move back and forth into the guiding passage 570a near the top. Specifically, the movable piece member 573 is rotatably mounted around an axis whose upper portion extends forward and backward at a portion on the right outer side in a front view of the guide passage 570a, and a portion of the lower end protrudes into the guide passage 570a It is formed to be. In this movable piece member 573, when the gaming ball B is in contact with the portion projecting into the guiding passage 570a, the projecting portion is pushed by the gaming ball B and does not protrude backward from the inside of the guiding passage 570a. It becomes.

  When a part of the movable piece member 573 protrudes into the guiding passage 570a, the ball breakage detection sensor 574 does not detect the movable piece member 573, and a part of the movable piece member 573 retracts from inside the guiding passage 570a. When not protruding, the movable piece member 573 is detected. Therefore, the ball breakage detection sensor 574 is in the detection state when the gaming ball B is present in the guidance passage 570a, and is in the non detection state when the gaming ball B is not present in the guidance passage 570a.

  When the ball guiding unit 570 is assembled to the main frame 4, the upstream end of the guiding passage 570 a communicates with the downstream end of the tank rail 553, and the downstream end of the guiding passage 570 a is a dispensing passage of the dispensing device 580. It is in communication with the upstream end of 580a. In the ball guiding unit 570, since the guiding passage 570a for guiding the gaming ball B extends in a serpentine manner, the guiding passage 570a extends longer than the entire height of the ball guiding unit 570, and many gaming can be performed in the guiding passage 570a. The ball B can be stored. Further, since the ball guidance unit 570 can detect the presence or absence of the gaming ball B in the guidance passage 570a by the ball breakage detection sensor 574, the presence or absence of the gaming ball B in the ball tank 552 is detected via the guidance passage 570a. can do.

[4-7-2. Dispensing device]
The dispensing device 580 in the dispensing unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 103 to 108 and the like. FIG. 105 is a rear cross-sectional view of the dispensing device of the dispensing unit taken along the center in the front-rear direction of the dispensing blade. FIG. 106 (a) is a back sectional view of the dispensing device cut at the center in the front-rear direction of the dispensing blade when the ball extracting movable piece is open, and FIG. 106 (b) is a sectional view taken along line A-A in (a) It is. FIG. 107 is a rear view of the dispensing device for illustrating the rotational position of the dispensing blade. FIG. 108 is a rear view of the dispenser for illustrating ball clogging and ball falling prevention. In addition, in order to demonstrate the rotation position of a delivery blade, FIG. 107 has described the delivery gear member which can not be visually recognized from the back of a delivery apparatus and a part of various gears visibly, and is object of description. A small circle is attached to the bottom portion of the ball accommodating portion 589b of the dispensing blade 589. Here, first, the configuration of the dispensing device 580 will be described, and then, the rotational position of the dispensing blade, ball clogging prevention and ball falling prevention will be described.

[4-7-2a. Configuration of Dispensing Device]
Dispensing device 580 is removably attached to the underside of ball guiding unit 570 on the rear surface of back plate left portion 551e of dispensing base 551 of dispensing base unit 550 from the rear. The payout device 580 has a box-like opening in the rear and has a payout passage 580a through which game balls B can be distributed and a payout device main body 581 having a ball extraction passage 580b branched from the middle of the payout passage 580a It has a flat-plate-like dispensing device rear lid 582 closing the device body 581 from the rear side, and a shallow box-like dispensing device front lid 583 attached to the front side of the dispensing device body 581 and opened rearward. ing. The dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device front cover 583 are made of polycarbonate resin and are molded in opaque black. The dispensing device back lid 582 is made of polycarbonate resin and is molded to be transparent. Therefore, the gaming balls B flowing down the payout passage 580a and the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 can be viewed from the back side of the payout device 580 through the transparent payout device rear cover 582.

  Further, the dispensing device 580 is attached to the rear surface of the dispensing device main body 581, and the rotating shaft is disposed between the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device front cover 583. Spur gear-shaped drive gear 585 (number of teeth Z0: 9) attached, and spur gear-shaped meshed with the drive gear 585 and rotatably mounted by the dispenser main body 581 and the dispenser front lid 583 Gear-shaped second gear engaged with the first transmission gear 586 (the number of teeth Z 1: 20) and the first transmission gear 586 and rotatably mounted by the dispenser main body 581 and the dispenser front lid 583 The transfer gear 587 (number of teeth Z2: 20) and the spur gear-like delivery gear 588a (number of teeth Z3: 24) meshing with the second transmission gear 587 extend outward from the delivery gear 588a. A discharge gear member 588 having a number of detection pieces 588b rotatably mounted between the discharge device main body 581 and the discharge device front cover 583 and a discharge between the discharge device main body 581 and the discharge device rear cover 582 Dispensing blade 589 having a plurality of blade pieces 589a integrally rotated with the gear member 588 and projecting into the dispensing passage 580a, and a detection piece 588b of the dispensing gear member 588 attached to the rear side of the dispensing device body 581 And a blade rotation detection sensor 590. The payout motor 584 is controlled by the payout control board 633 to be step-driven. When the dispensing motor 584 is driven stepwise, the rotating shaft is stepwise rotated at a predetermined angle (18 degrees in the present embodiment) accordingly. That is, the payout motor 584 rotates its rotation axis by 18 degrees in one step rotation. A detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590 is input to the payout control board 633. The drive gear 585, the first transmission gear 586, the second transmission gear 587, and the delivery gear member 588 are made of polyamide (nylon) resin and are molded in opaque black. The discharge blade 589 is made of polyamide (nylon) resin and is molded to be opaque white.

  Furthermore, the payout device 580 is attached at the downstream end of the payout passage 580a by the payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear cover 582, and detects the gaming ball B, and after the payout device main body 581 and the payout device The ball extraction movable piece 592 mounted so as to be able to open and close the ball extraction passage 580b at a site branched from the ejection passage 580a by the lid 582 and the ball extraction movable piece 592 can be held at the position where the ball extraction passage 580b is closed. And a ball extraction lever 593 which is attached slidably in the vertical direction by the dispenser main body 581 and the dispenser rear lid 582. The ball pullout movable piece 592 is made of polyamide (nylon) resin and is molded to be opaque white. The ball pulling lever 593 is made of polyamide (nylon) resin and is molded to be opaque red.

  The dispensing device 580 is formed in a rectangular shape extending in the vertical direction in a plan view. The dispensing device 580 is formed such that the width in the left-right direction is larger in the front view right than the width in the left-right direction of the ball guiding unit 570.

  As shown in FIG. 105, in the rear view, the upstream end of the dispensing passage 580a of the dispensing device 580 opens upward at a position near the left from the center in the lateral direction, and the downstream end at a position near the right end in the lateral direction. It opens downward. Dispensing passage 580a extends obliquely downward from the upper end by about 1/3 of the total height from the upper end so as to move little by little leftward, and after bending slightly diagonally downward from the upper side, It bends at about 1/3 of the left and right width and extends downward substantially vertically to the center (rotation axis) of the discharge blade 589. Then, after bending to the right in the rear view with a width slightly larger than the outer diameter of the gaming ball B above the center of the dispensing blade 589, a gap slightly larger than the gaming ball B with the outer periphery of the dispensing blade 589 It extends downward in a circular arc concentric with the discharge blade 589 so as to be formed, and extends vertically downward to the downstream end at a position on the right of the rear view from the center of the discharge blade 589.

  In the dispensing passage 580a, a dispensing detection sensor 591 is disposed below the dispensing blade 589 and immediately above the downstream end. A non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switch is used as the payout detection sensor 591.

  The ball removal passage 580b extends obliquely downward from the upstream end in the dispensing passage 580a and branches off at a portion bent rightward, and extends vertically along the left side in a rear view to the lower end in the rear view of the bottom surface It opens downward near the left end. A ball clogging prevention portion 581r is projected in a rib shape toward the ball removal passage 580b with a portion of the inner wall forming the dispensing passage 580a having a predetermined distance dimension at this branched portion, and the ball clogging prevention portion The upper surface 581r and the inner wall surface of the passage forming the dispensing passage 580a are formed in the same plane, and are inclined downward to the right in a rear view. A detailed description of the ball jam prevention unit 581 r will be described later.

  The payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear cover 582 face each other on the side where the ball pulling movable piece 592 is attached at the portion where the payout passage 580a and the ball pulling passage 580b are branched, and the outer diameter of the gaming ball B A main body side guide wall 581a which protrudes rearward and forward from each so as to form a narrower gap than the other, and which is formed to be continuous with the left side wall in a rear view of the discharge passage 580a and the ball removal passage 580b And a rear lid side guide wall 582a. The main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a are branched from the ball removal passage 580b in the dispensing passage 580a and are a back view of a portion extending to the right in a rear view at a height of about 1/3 from the top It is formed at the left position. The main-body-side guide wall 581a and the rear lid-side guide wall 582a are curved so as to be recessed obliquely upward to the left in a rear view, and are formed mainly to constitute the side wall of the ball removal passage 580b. The ball pulling movable piece 592 rotates through the space between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a.

  The dispensing motor 584 is attached to the right of the portion of the dispensing device body 581 where the dispensing passage 580a extends obliquely downward from the upstream end in a rear view. The drive gear 585, the first transmission gear 586, the second transmission gear 587, and the dispensing gear member 588 are disposed in front of the dispensing device body 581, and the front side is covered by the dispensing device front lid 583. The delivery gear member 588 is provided with three detection pieces 588b in the shape of flat plates having an arc shape extending outward, at an angular interval of 120 degrees in the circumferential direction.

  The dispensing blade 589 is disposed between the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device back cover 582. The discharge blade 589 is provided with a plurality of blade pieces 589a having a circular arc shape and extending concentrically outward from the rotation shaft in a plate shape at an angular interval of 120 degrees in the circumferential direction. The blade piece 589a is narrower than the outer diameter of the game ball B at the portion extending in the dispensing passage 580a from the upper side to the rotational axis and then extending to the right in the rear view. And protrudes into the dispensing passage 580a. Dispensing blade 589 is provided with three ball pieces 589a, and a ball accommodating portion 589b which is recessed to the center side with an arc having a radius larger than the radius of gaming ball B, and is recessed with a circular arc in a cylindrical outer peripheral portion. By forming the spherical ball accommodating portions 589 b at equal intervals, three blade pieces 589 a serving as peaks and three ball accommodating portions 589 b serving as valleys are alternately formed. Only one game ball B can be accommodated in the ball accommodation portion 589b. Thus, the payout blade 589 can regulate movement of the gaming ball B in the payout passage 580a to the downstream side of the payout blade 589 by the blade piece 589a and rotates in a clockwise direction as viewed from the rear. Thus, the gaming ball B housed in the ball housing portion 589b can be moved to the downstream side.

  The dispensing gear member 588 and the dispensing blade 589 are coaxially integrally rotatably mounted by the dispensing device rear lid 582 and the dispensing device front lid 583. The blade rotation detection sensor 590 is disposed on the left in the rear view of the rotation shaft of the delivery gear member 588 in the rear view. The blade rotation detection sensor 590 is for detecting the rotation of the discharge blade 589 by detecting the detection piece 588 b of the discharge gear member 588 that rotates integrally with the discharge blade 589.

  The upper end of the ball removal movable piece 592 is rotatably mounted around an axis extending in the back and forth direction at the upper ends of the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a. The ball removal movable piece 592 is bent in a V-shape, and is attached so that the recessed side faces in the dispensing passage 580a. The depth of the ball removal movable piece 592 is smaller than the gap between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a, and the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a Through the gap between the two, and may be projected into the ball removal passage 580b or retracted out of the ball removal passage 580b.

  The ball extracting lever 593 is attached to the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device rear cover 582 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction in the rear view left in the vicinity of the upper end of the ball extracting movable piece 592. A part of the ball extraction lever 593 penetrates the dispensing device rear lid 582 and protrudes rearward, and can be slid by operating the protruding portion. By positioning the ball extraction lever 593 at the lowering end, the lower portion can be in contact with the ball extraction movable piece 592, and it is possible to regulate the rotation of the ball extraction movable piece 592 in a clockwise direction as viewed from the rear. The ball removal movable piece 592 can close the ball removal passage 580 b. Further, by positioning the ball extraction lever 593 at the rising end, the ball extraction movable piece 592 can be turned to the outside of the ball extraction passage 580b, and the ball extraction passage 580b can be opened (see FIG. See 106). Thus, the ball can be removed by opening the ball removal passage 580b using the ball removal lever 593.

  When the ball extraction is performed by raising the ball extraction lever 593 to turn the ball extraction movable piece 592 into a rotatable state, the gaming ball B, which is in a state like a beaded connection on the upstream side of the ball extraction movable piece 592 Will flow down the ball removal passage 580 b beyond the ball removal movable piece 592. At this time, since the ball removal passage 580b extends straight from the upstream side of the discharge passage 580a, the gaming ball B that has flowed down from the upstream of the discharge passage 580a flows straight down to the ball removal passage 580b. At the same time, since the downstream side of the ball removal passage 580b communicates with the island equipment side, there is nothing like the payout wing 589 for suppressing the flow of the gaming ball B, so the gaming ball B is from the payout passage 580a side. It will flow down too early.

  As described above, in the state where the ball extraction movable piece 592 is rotatable, the gaming ball B flows down at a high speed in the ball extraction passage 580b, so the ball extraction movable piece 592 protruding into the ball extraction passage 580b. The game ball B comes into contact with the lower end side of the ball vigorously, but the ball extraction movable piece 592 passes between the main body side guide wall 581a of the dispenser main body 581 and the rear lid side guide wall 582a of the dispenser rear lid 582 Since the ball pullout movable piece 592 is moved to the outside of the ball pullout passage 580b by the contact force since it can move to the outer side than the inner surface of the ball pullout passage 580b, the ball pullout movable piece 592 is The game ball B is not pinched between the wall surface of the removal passage 580b and the game ball B, and a strong force can be prevented from acting on the ball extraction movable piece 592. Piece 59 Deterioration and breakage of the durability can be suppressed.

  From such a thing, since it is possible to make the ball removal movable piece 592 hard to break, more gaming balls B can be discharged faster to the island equipment side on the downstream side of the ball removal passage 580b. It is possible to suppress an increase in time required for replacement or maintenance of the machine 1, and to reduce the burden on the game hall side.

  In addition, when the ball extraction movable piece 592 is rotatable, the ball extraction passage 580b passes between the main-body-side guide wall 581a and the rear lid-side guide wall 582a at intervals where the ball extraction movable piece 592 is narrower than the gaming ball B. In order to move to the outside of the ball removal passage 580b, the game ball B is in contact with the ball removal movable piece 592 projecting into the ball removal passage 580b so that the ball removal movable piece 592 has a main body side guide wall 581a and a rear lid side guide wall 582a. Even when the game ball B is moved to the side between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a together with the ball extraction movable piece 592 when moving outward through the space, Only the game ball B can prevent outward movement by the space between the narrow main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a.

  Then, the movement of the gaming ball B to the outside is blocked between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a, so that the gaming ball B is separated from the ball pulling movable piece 592, and the ball thereafter Since the movement of the pullout movable piece 592 is due to an inertial force, a strong force does not act on the ball pullout movable piece 592, and the ball pullout movable piece 592 can be made hard to break and the main body side guide The gaming ball B does not protrude to the outside of the ball removal passage 580b from between the wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a, and the gaming ball B can be reliably circulated to the downstream side of the ball removal passage 580b.

[4-7-2 b. Rotation position of the dispensing blade]
As described above, the payout device 580 has the spur gear drive gear 585 (number of teeth Z0: 9) attached to the rotation shaft of the payout motor 584, and the spur gear first transmission gear 586 meshing with the drive gear 585 ( Number of teeth Z1: 20), spur gear-like second transmission gear 587 (number of teeth Z2: 20) meshing with the first transmission gear 586, spur gear-like delivery gear 588a meshing with the second transmission gear 587 (number of teeth) Z3: 24), a delivery gear member 588 having a plurality of detection pieces 588b, a delivery blade 589 integrally rotating with the delivery gear member 588, and a blade rotation detection sensor 590 for detecting the detection piece 588b of the delivery gear member 588; When the rotation shaft of the payout motor 584 is driven to rotate, the rotation is discharged through the drive gear 585, the first transmission gear 586, the second transmission gear 587, and the payout gear 588a of the payout gear member 588. It is transmitted to rotate the blade 589.

  Here, the rotational speed of the delivery gear member 588 is obtained by reducing the rotational speed of the delivery motor 584 by the drive gear 585, the first transmission gear 586, the second transmission gear 587, and the delivery gear 588a of the delivery gear member 588. . The reduction ratio n is set to the number of teeth Z0 of the drive gear 585 (= 9) / the number of teeth Z3 of the delivery gear 588a of the delivery gear member 588 (= 24) according to a calculation by mechanics. In the present embodiment, the payout motor 584 is a stepping motor excited by 2-2 phase excitation having a rotary shaft rotating 18 degrees in one step rotation (the rotary shaft of the payout motor 584 rotates 20 steps to 360 degrees = 18 degrees x 20 steps)), the discharge blade 589 integrally rotated with the discharge gear member 588 is 6.75 degrees (= 18 degrees x speed reduction ratio n) when the rotation shaft of the discharge motor 584 rotates one step. It will rotate. As a result, when the rotation shaft of the payout motor 584 rotates 54 steps, the payout blade 589 rotates 364.5 degrees (= 6.75 degrees × 54 steps), and when it makes one rotation (360 degrees rotation), 4.5 It will rotate an extra degree.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when the rotation shaft of the dispensing motor 584 is rotated 54 steps, the dispensing blade 589 rotates 364.5 degrees, so one rotation (360 degrees rotation) of the dispensing blade 589 is performed. Stepping drive to the dispensing motor 584 that corresponds to one rotation (360-degree rotation) of the dispensing blade 589 is required to rotate the rotating shaft of the dispensing motor 584 step 53.333 ... (= 360 degrees ÷ 6.75 degrees) The number of steps which is the number of times is not to be an integer.

  That is, in the present embodiment, three ball housing portions 589 b are formed at equal intervals in the discharge blade 589, and the rotary shaft of the discharge motor 584 rotates by 18 degrees as a predetermined angle according to step driving. The discharge blade 589 rotates by 6.75 degrees via the drive gear 585, the first transmission gear 586, the second transmission gear 587, and the discharge gear 588a of the discharge gear member 588 (that is, the rotation shaft of the discharge motor 584 is 1). When the step rotation (18 degrees rotation), the payout blade 589 rotates 6.75 degrees), so the payout blade 589 can send out one game ball B every rotation of 120 degrees, and the payout In order to rotate the blade 589 by 120 degrees, it is necessary to rotate the rotary shaft of the dispensing motor 584 17.777... Step rotation (= 120 degrees ÷ 6.75 degrees). Therefore, in the present embodiment, the number of step driving to the payout motor 584 corresponding to the delivery of one game ball by the payout blade 589 is set as the 18 step rotation which is an integer in which the decimal part is rounded up. By rotating 589 by more than 120 degrees (actually, 121.5 degrees rotation (= 18 step rotation x 6.75 degrees)), the rotational position of the payout wing 589 to the position where the next game ball B is received It is possible to rotate.

  Although the payout wing 589 can pay out three game balls B every one rotation (360 degrees rotation), there are also cases where only one ball pays out the game balls B. Since the blade rotation detection sensor 590 may erroneously detect the rotational position of the payout blade 589 due to, etc., the processing of setting the origin of the rotational position of the payout blade 589 should be performed each time one game ball B is dispensed. Is preferred. In the present embodiment, as described above, the number of step driving to the payout motor 584 corresponding to the delivery of one game ball by the payout blade 589 is 18 step rotation which is an integer in which the decimal part is rounded up. The payout wing 589 is rotated over 120 degrees (in fact, it is 121.5 degrees rotation (= 18 step rotation x 6.75 degrees)), and each time one game ball B is paid out, the payout is made. A process of setting the origin of the rotational position of the blade 589 is performed to enhance the accuracy of the rotational position of the dispensing blade 589.

  Further, since the number of step driving to the payout motor 584 corresponding to the delivery of the game ball B of one ball by the payout blade 589 is not an integer as described above, every time one ball is paid out Even if the error is accumulated, the rotation angle of the dispensing blade 589 is detected by detecting a plurality of detection pieces 588b of the dispensing gear member 588 provided coaxially with the rotation shaft of the dispensing blade 589, thereby making the gaming ball one ball The accumulated error can be reset each time the money is paid out. As a result, even if an error occurs every time the game ball is paid out due to the influence of the tobacco dust or the like, the accumulated error can be reliably reset every time the game ball is paid out It can be done. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for an error to occur in the rotational position of the payout blade 589 that receives and sends the gaming ball.

  Further, since the number of step driving to the payout motor 584 corresponding to the delivery of the game ball B of one ball by the payout wing 589 is not an integer as described above, every time one ball is paid out for the game ball The positioning position is different every time. As a result, the contact position between the game ball and the payout blade 589 is different each time, whereby the adhesion position of dust and dirt can be dispersed. Of course, if the reduction ratio of the rotation transmission member that causes such a positioning error is set, although the error is accumulated, the rotation angle of the payout blade 589 is The detection is performed by a plurality of detection pieces 588b of the delivery gear member 588 shown in FIG. 105, which are provided coaxially with the rotation axis of the delivery blade 589, and reset when the accumulated error accumulates to some extent. Thereby, the accuracy of the number of game balls to be paid out is secured. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1, the rotation position of the ball feeding rotary unit which receives and sends the game ball is changed each time the game ball is paid out, and the positions where dust and / or dust adheres are dispersed to the dust or the like. It is possible to have a strong dispensing device 580. As described above, the dispensing device 580 has one dispensing passage 580a. For this reason, when the payout speed of the game ball is made the same as compared with the payout device having the payout blades in the two payout passages, the payout blades 589 of the payout device 580 having the single payout passage 580a in the present embodiment. Needs to rotate twice as fast. Then, the payout wings 589 of the payout device 580 having the single payout path 580a in the embodiment collide with the gaming balls and the payout wings 589 compared to the payout devices having the payout wings in the two payout paths. Since the number of times is doubled, there is a high probability that tobacco dust and dirt adhere to the discharge blade 589.

  In the present embodiment, when the rotating shaft of the dispensing motor 584 is rotated 54 steps, as described above, since the discharging blade 589 exceeds one rotation, 54 rotations of the rotating shaft of the discharging motor 584 are performed one rotation of the discharging blade 589. If control is performed to set and manage as a set, an angular difference of 4.5 degrees with respect to one rotation of the discharge blade 589 is produced each time the rotary shaft of the discharge motor 584 rotates 54 steps, for example, 80 sets In this case, the angle difference is finally stacked up to 360 degrees (= 4.5 degrees × 80 sets), and the number of balls to pay out the game balls B is increased by three.

  As described above, the delivery gear member 588 is provided with three outwardly extending flat detection pieces 588b at intervals of an angle of 120 degrees in the circumferential direction. Specifically, three 120 degree areas including the 60 degree area where the detection piece 588b is formed and the 60 degree area where the detection piece 588b is not formed are arranged along the circumferential direction. . As described above, the detection piece 588 b is detected by the blade rotation detection sensor 590, and a detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590 is input to the payout control substrate 633.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the payout control substrate 633 is based on the detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590 so that the above-mentioned angular difference does not occur, the rotational position of the payout blade 589 rotates integrally with the payout gear member The game ball B is a single ball by setting a 120 degree area having a 60 degree area where the detection piece 588b is formed and a 60 degree area where the detection piece 588b is not formed. It can be managed as an operation to pay out one by one.

  Specifically, first, in the region of 120 degrees in the circumferential direction of the delivery gear member 588, the region of 60 degrees where the detection piece 588b is formed blocks the optical axis of the blade rotation detection sensor 590. Because it is in the state, 9 steps rotation of the rotation shaft of the payout motor 584 (corresponding to 60.75 degrees (= 6.75 degrees x 9 steps) rotation of the discharge blade 589 integrally rotating with the discharge gear member 588) as a light shielding range. The 60-degree region where the detection piece 588b is not formed is managed as 9 o'clock of the rotation shaft of the payout motor 584 as a light receiving range because the detection piece 588b does not block the optical axis of the blade rotation detection sensor 590. (It corresponds to 60.75 degrees (= 6.75 degrees × 9 steps) rotation of the dispensing blade 589 integrally rotating with the dispensing gear member 588).

  That is, in the present embodiment, the 120-degree region in the circumferential direction of the delivery gear member 588 is detected with nine steps of rotation of the rotation shaft of the dispensing motor 584 with the 60-degree region where the detection piece 588 b is formed as the light blocking range. It is managed by 18 step rotation which united the 9 step rotation of the rotating shaft of the payout motor 584 with the 60 degree area where the piece 588b is not formed as the light receiving range, against the payout of one ball of the game ball B It is performed by rotating the rotating shaft of the dispensing motor 584 18 steps.

  When the rotation shaft of the payout motor 584 rotates nine steps, the discharge blade 589, which rotates integrally with the discharge gear member 588, rotates 60.75 degrees (= 6.75 degrees x 9 steps), so the light shielding range is 60 degrees. Since the rotation shaft of the dispensing motor 584 can rotate a little larger than the light receiving range of 60 degrees, a 60 degree area (light shielding range) where the detection piece 588 b is formed, A 60-degree region (light receiving range) in which the detection piece 588b is not formed can be reliably determined.

  Here, a method of setting the origin of the delivery blade 589 which rotates integrally with the delivery gear member 588 will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 107 (a), the payout control board 633 has a state in which the detection piece 588b of the payout gear member 588 has shifted the optical axis of the blade rotation detection sensor 590 from the blocking state to the non-blocking state (“first edge Detection position) is set as the point A. At this point A, movement of the gaming ball B in the payout passage 580a to the downstream side of the payout blade 589 is restricted by the blade 589a of the payout blade 589.

  As shown in FIG. 107B, the payout control board 633 sets the rotational position of the payout blade 589 obtained by rotating the rotary shaft of the payout motor 584 five steps from the point A as the origin. At this origin, only one game ball B in the payout passage 580a is housed in the ball housing portion 589b of the payout blade 589. In this state, the center (center of gravity) of the game ball B accommodated in the ball accommodating portion 589 b of the payout blade 589 and the rotation center axis of the payout blade 589 are arranged on the same vertical line.

  The payout control board 633 sets the rotational position of the dispensing blade 589 obtained by rotating the rotational shaft of the dispensing motor 584 four steps from the origin as a point B. At this point B, the detection piece 588b of the delivery gear member 588 is in a state where the optical axis of the blade rotation detection sensor 590 is changed from the non-blocking state to the blocking state (referred to as "second edge detection state"). In a region where the rotational position of the discharge blade 589, which rotates integrally with the discharge gear member 588, from point A to the origin and then point B, as shown in FIG. 107 (d), the light receiving range (that is, the discharge gear described above) Of the 120 degree region in the circumferential direction of the member 588, a 60 degree region where the detection piece 588b is not formed is obtained.

  The payout control board 633 sets the rotational position of the payout blade 589 obtained by rotating the rotary shaft of the payout motor 584 nine steps from the point B as the above-mentioned A point. At this time, the gaming ball B accommodated in the ball accommodating portion 589 b of the payout blade 589 is moved to the downstream side of the payout blade 589 in the payout passage 580 a at the origin. In a region where the rotational position of the discharge blade 589, which rotates integrally with the discharge gear member 588, from point B to point A, as shown in FIG. 107 (d), the light shielding range (that is, the discharge gear member 588 described above). In the area of 120 degrees in the circumferential direction, the area of 60 degrees in which the detection piece 588 b is formed).

  Here, the control of the dispensing device 580 by the dispensing control substrate 633 will be briefly described. The payout control board 633 executes the payout control side power-on process at the time of power on of the pachinko machine 1 and at the time of power recovery at the time of power recovery after a power failure . The payout control board 633 repeatedly executes the steady process when the initialization setting process and the interrupt start setting are performed in the process on power-on at the payout control side. The payout control board 633 generates an interrupt every 2 milliseconds (ms) after setting the interrupt start, and executes the payout control side 2 ms interrupt process. The payout control board 633 repeatedly performs various processing such as payout motor control processing, history creation processing, origin setting processing and the like in the payout control side 2 ms interrupt processing.

  The payout control board 633 excites the payout motor 584 by 2-2 phase excitation having a pulse width of 4 ms by repeatedly executing the payout motor control process. The payout control board 633 repeatedly executes the history creation processing to check the presence or absence of the input of the detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590 every 2 ms. The payout control board 633 performs switching of the payout motor 584 by 2-2 phase excitation every 4 ms, that is, based on the detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590 confirmed respectively this time and last time. The result of checking whether the detection axis 588 b is in the blocking state or in the non-blocking state is one of the least significant bits of the history information having a width of 8 bits. After bit shift toward the bit one by one, when the detection result of the blade rotation detection sensor 590 cuts off the optical axis of the blade rotation detection sensor 590, the value 0 is set to the least significant bit. On the other hand, when the detection result of the blade rotation detection sensor 590 is in the state in which the detection piece 588b does not block the optical axis of the blade rotation detection sensor 590, When the result of the check is different from that of the current (for example, one of the result of the present and the previous check is when the detection piece 588 b is blocking the optical axis of the blade rotation detection sensor 590, and the other is the blade rotation detection sensor When the detection piece 588b is in a non-blocking state) of the optical axis 590), the value 1 is set to the least significant bit.

  As described above, the payout control board 633 updates and creates history information having an 8-bit width every 4 ms of switching the payout motor 584 by the 2-2 phase excitation in the history creation processing. The payout control board 633 executes an origin setting process of setting the rotational position of the dispensing blade 589 as the origin based on the history information updated and created every 4 ms. As described above, the payout control board 633 repeatedly executes the payout motor control process to rotate the rotary shaft of the payout motor 584 by 5 steps from the state where the rotational position of the payout blade 589 is located at the point A. Since the rotational position of the discharge blade 589 is the origin, the optical axis of the blade rotation detection sensor 590 is positioned in the 60 degree area where the detection piece 588b described above is not formed, and the optical axis of the blade rotation detection sensor 590 It will be in the state which 588b does not interrupt.

  Then, in the information from the most significant bit to the least significant bit stored in the history information having an 8-bit width, the detection piece 588 b is a blade rotation detection sensor 590 immediately before the rotational position of the dispensing blade 589 is positioned at point A. 00000001B ("B" indicates that it is bit information. The same applies hereinafter.) Is set because it becomes a state (first edge detection state) in which the optical axis of is shifted from the blocking state to the non-blocking state. . Then, when the rotational position of the dispensing blade 589 advances from the point A to the origin, 00111111B is set to the information from the most significant bit to the least significant bit stored and held in the history information having an 8-bit width. In the origin setting process, the payout control board 633 performs a first mask process on the history information with a first determination value of 11110000 B, thereby extracting data from 8 times before to 5 times before from history information as an operation result. Later (here, the calculation result becomes 00110000 B by the first mask process), and the second judgment process of 00010000 B is further subjected to the second mask process to the extracted data, thereby obtaining the data five times before the history information. The data is taken out as the operation result (here, the operation result is 00010000 by the second mask process) If the value is 0, it is determined that the current rotational position of the dispensing blade 589 is not at the origin, and the current rotational position of the dispensing blade 589 is not set as the origin. It is determined that the current rotational position of the blade 589 is at the origin, and the current rotational position of the dispensing blade 589 is set as the origin.

  When the payout control board 633 sets the rotational position of the payout blade 589 as the origin in the origin setting process, the rotational axis of the payout motor 584 is rotated by 5 steps from the state where the rotational position of the payout blade 589 is at the origin. Then, the rotational position of the dispensing blade 589 is B point, and the rotational shaft of the dispensing motor 584 is rotated by 9 steps from the state where the rotational position of the dispensing blade 589 is located at the B point The present process is terminated as it is in a total of 13 step rotations in which the rotational position of the discharge blade 589 is again set to the A point. That is, in the present embodiment, when the payout control board 633 sets the rotational position of the payout blade 589 as the origin in the origin setting process, the time until the rotational shaft of the payout motor 584 rotates 13 steps in total has elapsed. A home position detection prohibiting time for prohibiting the home position setting for the delivery blade 589 is provided.

  The payout control board 633 switches the excitation of the payout motor 584 by 2-2 phase excitation every 4 ms by executing the payout motor control process. As shown in FIG. 107, the payout control board 633 rotates the rotary shaft of the payout motor 584 by 5 steps from the state where the rotational position of the payout blade 589 is located at the point A to make the rotational position of the payout blade 589 the origin. The time for setting is 20 ms (= 4 ms × 5 steps rotation), and the rotational position of the dispensing motor 584 is rotated by 5 steps from the state where the rotational position of the dispensing blade 589 is located at the origin. The time for setting the point is 16 ms (= 4 ms × 4 step rotation), and the rotation axis of the payout motor 584 is rotated by 9 steps from the state where the rotational position of the dispensing blade 589 is located at the point B The time to again set the rotational position of the discharge blade 589, which becomes the light receiving range again, to the point A, is 36 ms (= 4 ms × 9 steps rotation). As described above, the payout of one game ball B is performed by the 18-step rotation of the rotation shaft of the payout motor 584. Therefore, the time taken for the game ball B to pay one is the payout By performing 18 steps of rotation of the rotation shaft of the motor 584, 72 ms (= 4 ms × 18 steps of rotation) is obtained.

  Incidentally, conventionally, a gaming machine has been proposed that includes a payout device for dispensing the game balls according to the amount of rotation of the payout rotating body by receiving the game balls and driving the game balls by driving the payout motor (e.g. Open 2004-041261 (paragraphs [0052] and FIG. 4)). In the gaming machine of this document, the rotation time of one step of the payout motor is set to 18 mS, and the payout motor is set to rotate 30 degrees by the output of data drive data for four steps to pay out one game ball. ing. In a pachinko machine installed in a pachinko parlor, it is impossible to avoid that the tobacco dust or the like attached to the gaming balls adheres to the inside of the payout device. In addition, since the dispensation device is not disassembled and cleaned, there is a demand for a dispensation device that is strong against cigarette dust, dust, and the like. By the way, in the gaming machine of this reference, the payout motor is set to rotate 30 degrees by the driving of 4 steps of the payout motor to pay out one game ball, so accurate operation can be expected. It can be seen that the contact position between the ball and the payout rotary body is the same each time. For this reason, there is a problem that the position where the cigarette dust and the dust adhere is also fixed and it is easy to be deposited.

[4-7-2 c. Ball clogging prevention and ball falling prevention]
Next, ball clogging prevention and ball falling prevention will be described with reference to FIG. Here, ball clogging prevention at the time of ball removal will be described first, and subsequently, ball falling prevention by a non-energized state of the payout motor 584 will be described.

  As described above, the ball extraction lever 593 can turn the ball extraction movable piece 592 to the outside of the ball extraction passage 580b by positioning the ball extraction lever 593 at the rising end, and the ball extraction passage 580b can be opened. It can be done. When ball removal is performed, the ball removal lever 593 is raised to bring the ball removal movable piece 592 into a rotatable state. At this time, in a state where the rotational position of the dispensing blade 589 is stopped at the origin, as shown in FIG. 108 (a), a part of the inner wall forming the dispensing passage 580a from the ball accommodating portion 589b of the dispensing blade 589. Is a predetermined distance dimension, and a total of four gaming balls B are parked up to the rib-like ball clogging prevention portion 581 r protruding toward the ball removal passage 580 b. As this predetermined distance dimension, the center (center of gravity) position of the gaming ball B retained on the upper surface of the ball jam prevention portion 581 r is on the right side from the left end side of the ball jam prevention portion 581 r and downstream (in other words, the discharge blade 589 is present) (The downstream side of the delivery passage 580a). Thus, a rib-like ball clogging prevention portion in which a part of the inner wall of the passage forming the dispensing passage 580a has a predetermined distance from the ball accommodating portion 589b of the dispensing blade 589 and protrudes toward the ball removing passage 580b. When a plurality of game balls B are parked in the payout passage 580a until 581r, a part of the last game ball B to be parked is pushed out toward the ball evacuation path 580b in the ball jam prevention portion 581r. That is, as the predetermined distance dimension, the gaming ball B (that is, the last game ball B) is held on the upper surface of the ball clogging preventing portion 581r, and is formed to constitute the side wall of the ball pulling passage 580b. The game ball B flowing down along the main body side guide wall 581a and the back lid side guide wall 582a as mentioned above collides with the game ball B (that is, the last game ball B) parked on the upper surface of the ball jam prevention portion 581r Even in this case, it has a length capable of flowing down to the ball removal passage 580b. In this manner, a portion of the gaming ball B (that is, the last gaming ball B) on the upper surface of the clogging prevention portion 581r stays in a state of protruding toward the ball pulling passage 580b (in other words, clogging prevention) A part of the game ball B staying on the upper surface of the section 581r is restricted by the length that one ball of game ball B can flow down as the width of the ball removal passage 580b) It can be done.

  Further, as described above, the ball clogging prevention portion 581 r has the upper surface thereof and the inner wall surface of the passage forming the dispensing passage 580 a formed in the same plane, and is a downward slope to the right in a rear view.

  That is, in the case where the game ball B (that is, the last game ball B) is parked on the upper surface of the ball jam prevention portion 581r, the game ball B flowing down from the upstream of the payout path 580a However, even if it collides with the game ball B (that is, the last game ball B) staying on the upper surface of the ball jam prevention unit 581 r, the upper surface of the ball jam prevention unit 581 r is a downward sloping surface in rear view The center (center of gravity) position of the gaming ball B (that is, the last gaming ball B) staying on the upper surface of the clogging prevention portion 581 r is located on the right side and downstream of the left end side of the clogging prevention portion 581 r Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game ball B (that is, the last game ball B) staying on the upper surface of the ball clogging prevention unit 581 r from being pushed by the collision and flowing down toward the ball extraction passage 580 b. Be able to Going on. Thus, it is possible to prevent the game ball B flowing down from the upstream of the payout passage 580a from being clogged in the vicinity of the left end of the ball jam prevention portion 581r.

  As a result, the game ball B (that is, the last game ball B) staying on the upper surface of the ball jam prevention unit 581 r is a ball removal path (a main ball guide wall 581 a and a rear lid side guide wall 582 a along the ball extraction passage 580 b The flow path of the game ball B on the flow path to the side is restricted to the width where one game ball B can flow down as the width of the ball extraction passage 580b as shown by the dashed dotted line in FIG. 108 (a). This can prevent ball clogging. Therefore, ball clogging at the time of ball removal can be reliably prevented. In the present embodiment, although the width of the ball extraction passage 580b varies depending on the rotational position of the discharge blade 589, the width is set so as to be from 12 mm to 14 mm. It is set to 13 mm in the state where the position is stopped at the origin. Incidentally, ball clogging easily occurs at a place where the width of each passage is narrowed from a place larger than twice the diameter (11 mm) of the gaming ball to a little smaller than twice the diameter of the gaming ball (for example 21 mm).

  Next, ball fall prevention by the non-energized state of the payout motor 584 will be described. In the state where the rotational position of the payout blade 589 is stopped at the origin, as shown in FIG. 108 (a), only one game ball B in the payout passage 580a is housed in the ball housing portion 589b of the payout blade 589. As a result, the game ball B is in a state of being held in the payout passage 580a in a state in which the subsequent game balls B are in contact with the game balls B by beading. In this state, as described above, the center (center of gravity) of the gaming ball B housed in the ball housing portion 589 b of the payout blade 589 and the rotation center axis of the payout blade 589 are arranged on the same vertical line. Further, as described above, the dispensing passage 580a obliquely extends downward from the upper end by about 1/3 of the total height so as to move gradually leftward as it goes downward from the upstream end, and slightly rightward from there After being bent diagonally downward, it bends at about 1/3 of the left and right width and extends downward approximately vertically to the center (rotation axis) of the discharge blade 589.

  Therefore, the center (center of gravity) position of the gaming ball B in contact with the gaming ball B housed in the ball housing portion 589 b of the payout wing 589 is the center of the gaming ball B housed in the ball housing portion 589 b of the payout wing 589 It will be shifted slightly to the left compared with the center of gravity position, and it will follow the game ball B housed in the ball housing portion 589b of the payout blade 589 in a state where the rotational position of the payout blade 589 is stopped at the origin. A rightward force (i.e., a force rotating clockwise) acts on the central axis of rotation of the payout blade 589 due to the ball pressure of the game ball B due to its own weight.

  In such a state, when the dispensing motor 584 is de-energized, it naturally rotates clockwise with respect to the rotation center axis of the dispensing blade 589, and is accommodated in the ball accommodating portion 589b of the dispensing blade 589. The gaming ball B will flow down (sent out) to the downstream side of the payout path 580a, and ball drop will occur.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, even when the dispensing motor 584 is de-energized, the rotating shaft of the dispensing motor 584 is of the dispensing blade 589 even if it naturally rotates clockwise with respect to the rotation center axis of the dispensing blade 589. The shape of the dispensing passage 580a on the right side of the dispensing blade 589 is formed in the rear view so as to be able to be stopped by six steps of rotation from the origin.

  Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 108 (b) and (c), when the dispensing motor 584 is de-energized, the rotating shaft of the dispensing motor 584 is rotated by six steps from the origin of the dispensing blade 589 and stopped. In the above, the game ball B in contact with the game ball B housed in the ball housing portion 589b of the payout blade 589 abuts on the side wall of the payout passage 580a and the outer periphery of the blade piece 589a having the arc shape of the payout blade 589 Of the faces, the ball accommodating portion 589b is closer to the gaming ball B is accommodated (in other words, the ball accommodating portion 589b accommodating the gaming ball B, and the ball accommodating portion 589b and the following ball accommodating balls B are not accommodated) Of the outer peripheral surface of the wing piece 589a connecting the portion 589b, the point S2 which is in contact with the ball housing portion 589b side closer to the side containing the gaming ball B from the center of the outer peripheral surface) It is formed the shape of sea urchin dispensing passage 580a. As a result, a ball pressure can be generated to press the outer peripheral surface of the blade piece 589a of the dispensing blade 589, and the rotation shaft of the dispensing motor 584 can be rotated six steps from the origin of the dispensing blade 589 and stopped. Therefore, it is possible to reliably prevent the ball coming off due to the non-energized state of the payout motor 584.

  When the dispensing control board 633 starts controlling the dispensing motor 584 in a state where the rotating shaft of the dispensing motor 584 rotates 6 steps from the origin of the dispensing blade 589 and is stopped, it rotates 6 steps from the origin of the dispensing blade 589 Of the light shielding range (9 steps) beyond point B shown in FIG. 107 (d), where it has advanced by 4 steps from the origin and has advanced by 2 steps. However, if the rotary shaft of the payout motor 584 rotates 13 steps (shown in FIG. 107 (d), the remaining 7 steps of rotation + 5 steps of rotation from point A to proceed to rotate 2 steps out of 9 steps) The game ball B stored in the ball storage portion 589b of the discharge blade 589 flows downstream (is sent out) to the downstream side of the It is adapted to be reliably detected by the detection sensor 591. Therefore, even in the state where the rotary shaft of the payout motor 584 is shifted from the origin of the payout blade 589 (in a six-step rotation) and stopped, an excessive number of balls for which the gaming ball B is dispensed is not generated.

  Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, the payout control board 633 is a pressing operation of the ball lending button 224 of the ball lending operation unit 220 in the plate unit 200 or a payout command from the main control board of the gaming board 5 or the like. Accordingly, the payout motor 584 of the payout device 580 is controlled to pay out the instructed number of gaming balls B to the player side (the upper tray 201 or the lower tray 202). At the time of power recovery at the time of power recovery after the power recovery after (including a momentary power failure), the motor for controlling the dispensing motor 584 is not operated to return the rotational position of the dispensing blade 589 to the origin. ing. As described above, this causes the gaming ball B to generate an excessive number of balls to be paid out in a state where the rotary shaft of the payout motor 584 is shifted from the origin of the payout blade 589 and rotated (six steps to advance). To prevent that.

  In the embodiment described above, the discharge blade 589 is provided with a plurality of blade pieces 589a having a circular arc shape extending outward in a flat plate shape at an angular interval of 120 degrees in the circumferential direction May be provided at intervals of 90 degrees in the circumferential direction. FIG. 109 is a modified example of the dispensing device, and is a cut away rear cross-sectional view of the dispensing device provided with a dispensing blade 589 provided with four blade pieces 589a having a circular arc shape and provided with a radio wave sensor. FIG. 109 is a rear sectional view of the dispensing unit corresponding to FIG. 105 described above, cut at the center in the front-rear direction of the dispensing blade, and is denoted by the same reference numeral as FIG. In the case where the discharge blade 589 is provided with four blade pieces 589a having an arc shape, although not shown in FIG. 109, the above-described discharge gear member 588 is a flat detection piece having an arc shape extending outward. The four 588b are provided at intervals of 90 degrees in the circumferential direction, and the 90 degree region in the circumferential direction of the delivery gear member 588 is taken as the light shielding range at the 45 degree region where the detection piece 588b is formed. It is managed by 18 step rotation which united 9 step rotation of the rotating shaft of the dispensing motor 584 and 9 step rotation of the rotating shaft of the dispensing motor 584 with the region of 45 degrees where the detection piece 588b is not formed as a light receiving range. Thus, the reduction ratio n is selected, and the rotary shaft of the payout motor 584 rotates by 18 steps with respect to the payout of one game ball B. In other words, when the rotation shaft of the payout motor 584 rotates 18 steps, the drive gear 585, the first transmission gear 586, the second transmission so that the discharge blade 589 integrally rotating with the discharge gear member 588 can rotate 90 degrees. By selecting the number of teeth of the gear 587 and the delivery gear 588a of the delivery gear member 588, the reduction ratio n can be determined.

  Furthermore, in the embodiment described above, the payout device 580 is provided with the payout detection sensor 591 attached at the downstream end of the payout passage 580a by the payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear cover 582 to detect the gaming ball B. However, a radio wave sensor for detecting radio waves may be provided in the vicinity of the payout detection sensor 591. The payout detection sensor 591 uses a non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switch to detect passage of the game ball B, but the game ball B actually passes when it is affected by radio waves. Nevertheless, it is possible for the game ball B to appear to be in a non-passing state due to a malfunction. In this case, the payout control board 633 to which the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591 is input determines that the payout of the game ball B is not completed based on the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591 and the payout motor By performing control to rotate the rotary shaft of 584 excessively, a large amount of gaming balls B will be paid out. In order to detect a fraudulent act (referred to as "radio wave goto") of acquiring the game ball B illegally as described above, as shown in FIG. 109, the radio wave sensor 594 is disposed near the top of the payout detection sensor 591 Can be provided and configured. When a detection signal from the radio wave sensor 594 is input to the payout control board 633, the payout control board 633 determines that an abnormal radio wave is irradiated based on the detection signal from the radio wave sensor 594, The emergency stop of the rotary shaft of the payout motor 584 is performed, and the radio wave goto notification command to that effect is transmitted to the main control board 1310X. At this time, the payout control board 633 may be configured to output a radio wave broadcast notification signal to the hall computer via the external terminal board 558. When the main control board 1310 X receives an 8-bit radio wave broadcast notification command from the payout control substrate 633, the radio wave goto alarm command is set from the 8-bit width to the 16 bit width and the radio wave goto warning sound is set to the maximum volume. The radio wave goto is set by setting various LEDs in a warning notification light emission mode (for example, a light emission mode blinking in red) while flowing from various speakers (vibration speaker 354, top center speaker 462, top side speaker 464, body frame speaker 622 etc.) It is shaped to the content that can be notified, and is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. When the peripheral control board 1510 receives a radio wave broadcast notification command having a width of 16 bits, the effect display device 1600 displays a large message "an error has occurred." To control various LEDs to a warning notification light emission mode Do.

  In place of the radio wave sensor 594, a contact-type ball passage sensor 594 'may be used, which is a contact-type ON / OFF mechanical switch. A detection signal from the contact ball passage sensor 594 'is input to the payout control substrate 633, and the payout control substrate 633 generates a detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591 and a detection signal from the contact ball passage sensor 594'. Based on this, when the number of balls from which the game balls B have been paid out does not match, it can be configured that it can be determined that some fraud has been made. When the payout control board 633 determines that some injustice has been made, the rotary control shaft of the payout motor 584 is urgently stopped and, at the same time, a goto notification command to that effect is transmitted to the main control board 1310X. At this time, the payout control board 633 may be configured to output a go notification signal to the hall computer via the external terminal board 558. When the main control board 1310 X receives an 8-bit wide Got notification command from the payout control board 633, the main control board 1310 X sets the Goto alert sound to the maximum volume by changing the 8-to 16-bit width of the Goto notification command. While flowing, various LEDs are set to a warning notification light emission mode (for example, a light emission mode blinking in red) to be shaped as content that can notify a goto and transmitted to the peripheral control substrate 1510. When the peripheral control board 1510 receives a Goto notification command having a width of 16 bits, the peripheral control board 1510 displays a large message "abnormality has occurred" on the effect display device 1600, and controls various LEDs to a warning notification light emission mode. .

  Further, in the embodiment described above, the payout motor 584 is a stepping motor, but may be a DC motor. In this case, when the DC motor is driven in a step manner, the rotation shaft is stepwise rotated at an angle of 18 degrees as a predetermined angle. That is, the DC motor rotates its rotation axis by 18 degrees in one step rotation.

  Furthermore, in the embodiment described above, the rotation shaft of the dispensing motor 584 is configured via the drive gear 585, the first transmission gear 586, the second transmission gear 587, and the dispensing gear 588a of the dispensing gear member 588, which constitute the rotation transmitting member. The rotation shaft of the payout motor 584 is rotated at a low speed, and the rotation transmission member (a plurality of gears (for example, the first transmission gear 586 ′, Alternatively, the speed may be increased and the discharge blade 589 may be rotated via the second transmission gear 587 'and the discharge gear 588a') of the discharge gear member 588. In this way, since the speed increasing ratio of the rotation transmission member is determined in advance so that the number of step driving to the payout motor 584 corresponding to the delivery of one game ball by the payout blade 589 is not an integer, The positioning position is different every time one ball is taken out. As a result, the contact position between the game ball and the payout blade 589 is different each time, whereby the adhesion position of dust and dirt can be dispersed. Of course, if the speed increase ratio of the above-mentioned rotation transmitting member is set to cause such positioning error, although the error is accumulated, the error of the game ball is accumulated each time one ball is paid out The rotational angle is detected by a plurality of detection pieces 588b (light shielding pieces) of the delivery gear member 588 provided coaxially with the rotation axis of the delivery blade 589, and is reset when the accumulated error accumulates to some extent. Thereby, the accuracy of the number of game balls to be paid out is secured. Therefore, even in the pachinko machine 1 in which the speed increasing ratio of the rotation transmitting member is determined in advance, the rotational position of the payout blade 589 for receiving and sending the gaming ball is changed every time the gaming ball is paid out. By dispersing the position where the dust adheres, it is possible to have a dispensing device 580 that is strong against dust, dirt and the like.

[4-7-3. Upper full tank path unit]
The upper full tank path unit 600 in the dispensing unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 103 and 104 and the like. The upper full tank path unit 600 is attached from the rear to the lower side of the dispensing device 580 at the lower rear surface of the back plate left portion 551e of the dispensing base 551 of the dispensing base unit 550. The upper full tank path unit 600 is to be emitted downward from the payout device 580 and guide the gaming ball B to the lower full tank path unit 610. The upper full tank path unit 600 is formed in a square shape extending in the vertical direction in a front view.

  The upper full tank path unit 600 is a box-like upper full tank base 601 attached to the dispensing base 551 and opened at the rear side, and a box shape attached to the rear side of the upper full tank base 601 and the front side open. And a dispenser pressing member 603 rotatably mounted near the upper end of the top full-tank cover 602 and capable of pressing the dispenser 580 upward. The upper full tank base 601 protrudes rightward from the right side in a front view, and includes a back cover attachment portion 601 a for attaching a back cover.

  In addition, the upper full tank path unit 600 is an upper discharge that opens upward near the left end in the front view on the upper surface and extends downward along the left side to a position about 2/3 the height from the lower side. It is in communication with the ball receiving passage 600a and the upper discharging ball receiving passage 600a and extends about 3/4 of the full width to the right in front view and extends downward from the bottom to about 1/6 of the full height An upper ball storage passage 600b, an upper normal discharge passage 600c extending downward from the left side in front view from the center in the left-right direction of the upper ball storage passage 600b and opening downward at the lower surface, and an upper normal discharge passage 600c An upper full tank delivery passage 600d extending downward from the front right side from the center in the left-right direction of the ball storage passage 600b and opening downward at the lower surface, and the vicinity of the right end in the front view on the upper surface And a, and upper ball 抜通 passage 600e that opens downward in the lower surface near the right end after extending substantially vertically downwards and opens upwardly (see Figure 111).

  On the lower surface of the upper full tank passage unit 600, the upper normal discharge passage 600c, the upper full discharge passage 600d, and the upper ball extraction passage 600e are sequentially opened downward from the left in front view. The upper full ball passage unit 600 is assembled to the dispensing unit 560, and the upstream end of the upper dispensing ball receiving passage 600a is opened immediately below the downstream end of the dispensing passage 580a in the dispensing device 580. The upstream end of the passage 600e is opened immediately below the downstream end of the ball removal passage 580b in the dispensing device 580. As a result, the gaming ball B released (disbursed) from the dispensing passage 580a of the dispensing device 580 passes through the upper dispensing ball receiving passage 600a and the upper ball storage passage 600b to form the upper normal dispensing passage 600c or the upper full dispensing passage 600d. It is discharged downward from any of the The gaming ball B discharged downward from the ball removal passage 580b of the dispensing device 580 is discharged downward through the upper ball removal passage 600e.

[4-7-4. Lower full tank path unit]
The lower full tank path unit 610 in the dispensing unit 560 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 103 and 104 and the like. The lower full tank path unit 610 is mounted on the bottom plate 551g of the dispensing base 551 of the dispensing base unit 550, and is attached to the lower part of the upper full ball channel unit 600. The lower full tank path unit 610 is for guiding the game ball B discharged downward from the upper full tank path unit 600 to the door frame 3 side or to the substrate unit 620 side. The lower full-tan ball passage unit 610 extends in the front-rear direction so that the front end side is lower, and the rear end extends upward.

  The lower full tank passage unit 610 includes a lower normal discharge passage 610a, a lower full discharge passage 610b, and a lower ball extraction passage 610c, and extends in the front-rear direction and is open upward. And a lower full tank cover 612 attached to the upper side of the lower full tank base 611, and rotatably mounted around an axis extending forward and backward at the front end of the lower full tank base 611, the lower normal discharge passage 610a and A discharge passage opening / closing door 613 which can open and close the downstream end opening of the lower full tank discharge passage 610b, and a discharge passage opening / closing door 613 in a direction to close the downstream end opening of the lower normal discharge passage 610a and the lower full tank discharge passage 610b And a closing spring 614 which is biased.

  In the lower full tank passage unit 610, the lower normal discharge passage 610a, the lower full tank discharge passage 610b, and the lower ball extraction passage 610c are arranged in order from the left in front view on the upper surface of the portion extending upward at the rear end. In the state, each upstream end is open upward. The lower normal discharge passage 610 a and the lower full discharge passage 610 b extend forward in a side-by-side manner, and open forward at the front end of the lower full ball passage unit 610. The lower full tank delivery passage 610b extends forward slightly lower than the lower normal delivery passage 610a. The lower ball removal passage 610c extends forward along the right side surface of the lower full discharge passage 610b in a front view, and opens rightward in the longitudinal direction.

  The discharge passage opening / closing door 613 is rotatably mounted at a position between the front end openings of the lower normal discharge passage 610a and the lower full discharge passage 610b. The discharge passage opening / closing door 613 is urged clockwise as viewed from the front by a closing spring 614, and in the normal state, the front end openings (downstream end) of the lower normal discharge passage 610a and the lower full discharge passage 610b. Opening is closed. The dispensing passage opening / closing door 613 is provided with an operating protrusion 613 a protruding forward. The actuating projection 613a is formed in a short arc shape centering on the rotation center of the dispensing passage opening / closing door 613 in a front view, and as the front end face approaches the end in the counterclockwise direction It is inclined to project forward. When the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the actuating projection 613 a is formed to abut on the door opening / closing contact portion 150 f of the wafer cover unit 150 in the door frame 3.

  In the lower full tank unit 610, the lower normal discharge passage 610a, the lower full discharge passage 610b, and the lower ball extraction passage 610c, which are opened upward at the upper end of the rear portion, are assembled to the upper It is located immediately below the downstream end of the upper normal discharge passage 600c, the upper full discharge passage 600d, and the upper ball removal passage 600e of the tongue passage unit 600. Thereby, the gaming ball B discharged downward from the upper normal payout passage 600c flows through the lower normal payout passage 610a, and the gaming ball B discharged downward from the upper full payout passage 600d is the lower full payout passage 610b. , And the game balls B discharged downward from the upper ball-opening passage 600e flow in the lower ball-opening passage 610c.

  Further, when the lower full-tank passage unit 610 is assembled in the pachinko machine 1, the front ends (downstream ends) of the lower normal delivery passage 610 a and the lower full delivery passage 610 b pass through the fal cover unit 150 in the door frame 3. It is opened immediately after the ball passage 150a and the full tank receptacle 150b. Further, the downstream end of the lower ball removal passage 610 c is opened to face the ball removal guiding portion 627 opened to the left in the base unit 620 b of the substrate unit 620.

  In the lower full tank path unit 610, in the normal state (the state where the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4), the actuating projection 613a of the dispensing passage opening / closing door 613 abuts on the door opening / closing of the fal cover unit 150 By being in contact with the portion 150f, the plate is pivoted in the counterclockwise direction in front view against the biasing force of the closing spring 614. Thus, the openings at the downstream ends of the lower normal discharge passage 610a and the lower full discharge passage 610b are opened, and are communicated with the through ball passage 150a and the full ball receiving hole 150b of the far cover unit 150. It is in the state.

  On the other hand, when the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4, the actuating projection 613 a of the dispensing passage opening / closing door 613 is separated from the door opening / closing contact portion 150 f of the fall cover unit 150. Is turned clockwise in a front view by the biasing force of the closing spring 614, and the openings at the downstream ends of the lower normal discharge passage 610a and the lower full discharge passage 610b are closed. In this state, the gaming balls B in the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full payout passage 610b can not move forward from the respective front end openings. Thereby, even if the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4, the game ball B does not spill from the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full payout passage 610b.

[4-7-5. Flow of gaming balls in the payout unit]
Subsequently, the flow of the game balls B in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. The dispensing unit 560 is attached to the rear surface of the dispensing base 551 in a state of being assembled to the main body frame 4. In a normal state, the ball pulling lever 593 of the dispensing device 580 is located at the lowering end, and the ball pulling passage 580 b branched from the discharging passage 580 a is closed at the branch portion. Further, in the lower full tank path unit 610, the dispensing passage opening / closing door 613 is in the open state.

  A predetermined number of ball tanks 552, which are open upwards, are detected from the island facilities of the game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed, for example, based on detection of ball breakage by the ball breakage detection sensor 574 of the ball guidance unit 570. Game balls B are supplied. The gaming balls B supplied and stored in the ball tank 552 are sent into the dispensing passage 580a of the dispensing device 580 through the guiding passage 570a of the ball guiding unit 570 in a state of being aligned by the tank rail 553. In a state in which the payout motor 584 is not rotating, the gaming ball B can not move (flow downward) downstream of the payout blade 589, and a plurality of gaming balls B stagnate upstream of the payout blade 589 It becomes.

  Then, the gaming ball B in the guiding passage 570a of the ball guiding unit 570 presses the movable piece member 573, and the ball breakage detection sensor 574 detects the movable piece member 573. Thus, it can be seen that the gaming ball B is stored in the passage from at least the movable piece member 573 to the payout blade 589.

  In this state, when the dispensing blade 589 is rotated in the clockwise direction by the dispensing motor 584, the gaming ball B accommodated in the ball accommodating portion 589b moves in the clockwise direction as viewed from the rear, and the dispensing blade in the dispensing passage 580a It is released downstream of 589. Then, the gaming balls B discharged from the dispensing blade 589 (the ball accommodating portion 589 b) are sent to the upper dispensing ball receiving passage 600 a of the upper full ball passage unit 600 after being detected by the dispensing detection sensor 591.

  The gaming ball B sent to the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a of the upper full ball passing unit 600 is disposed immediately below the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a through the upper ball storage passage 600b in a normal state. It flows down to the upper normal discharge passage 600c. Then, the gaming ball B which has flowed down to the upper normal payout passage 600 c passes through the lower normal payout passage 610 a of the lower full ball passage unit 610 and the through ball passage 150 a of the far cover unit 150 of the door frame 3. It is discharged into the upper plate 201 from the upper plate-ball supply port 211 a of the plate unit base 211 in the case of FIG.

  When many game balls B are paid out from the payout device 580 and the inside of the upper plate 201 becomes full with the game balls B, the game balls B can not be released forward from the upper ball feed opening 211a, so the payout device When the game ball B paid out from 580 comes to stay in the lower normal discharge passage 610a of the lower full tank passage unit 610 and the game ball B is further discharged, the lower normal discharge passage 610a and the upstream side It will also stay in the upper normal discharge passage 600c of the communicating upper full ball passage unit 600. Then, when the gaming ball B is further dispensed in a state where the inside of the upper normal payout passage 600c is full of the gaming balls B, the upper normal ball storage passage 600b communicated on the upstream side of the upper normal payout passage 600c is stored. The gaming ball B starts to stagnate, and the gaming ball B begins to flow down to the upper full payout path 600d side adjacent to the upper normal payout path 600c.

  Then, the gaming ball B that has flowed down to the upper full discharge passage 600 d passes through the lower full discharge passage 610 b of the lower full ball passage unit 610 and fills the full ball receptacle 150 b in the far cover unit 150 of the door frame 3. Received by Thereafter, the gaming balls B received in the full tank receptacle 150b are discharged into the lower tray 202 through the storage passage 150e, the ball outlet 150d, and the lower tray supply port 211c of the tray unit base 211. As a result, when the game balls B are further paid out in a state where the upper plate 201 is full of the game balls B, the game balls B can be automatically paid out to the lower plate 202.

  In addition, when the lower plate 202 is full of the game balls B and it becomes impossible to release the game balls B forward from the lower plate ball supply port 211c, when the game balls B are further paid out, the lower plate The gaming ball B is retained and stored in the storage passage 150e of the far cover unit 150 on the upstream side of the ball supply port 211c. Then, when a certain number of gaming balls B are stored in the storage passage 150e, the movable piece 153 is moved and detected by the full tank detection sensor 154, and the upper tray 201 and the lower tray 202 are full with gaming balls B (( The player is informed that the container is full, and the payout motor 584 of the payout device 580 is temporarily stopped until the full tank detection sensor 154 is not detected.

  When discharging the gaming ball B stored in the ball tank 552 from the pachinko machine 1 at the time of maintenance or replacement of the pachinko machine 1, the ball pulling lever 593 of the payout device 580 is moved upward from the position of the descent end Slide it to the position of the rising end. Thereafter, the lower end side of the ball removal movable piece 592 is pushed by the game ball B, and is rotated in the clockwise direction as viewed from the rear, and the ball removal movable piece 592 is the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a , And is pushed out of the ball removal passage 580b. As a result, the game ball B can enter the ball removal passage 580b branched from the payout passage 580a, and the upstream game ball B is discharged downward through the ball removal passage 580b.

  At this time, in the region of the ball extraction movable piece 592, the game ball B flowing down contacts the main body side guide wall 581 a and the rear lid side guide wall 582 a more strongly than the ball extraction movable piece 592. Is less likely to break.

  The gaming ball B discharged downward from the ball removal passage 580b of the dispensing device 580 passes through the upper ball removal passage 600e of the upper full ball passage unit 600 and the lower ball removal passage 610c of the lower full ball passage unit 610. After being discharged from the downstream end opening of the lower ball removal passage 610c to the ball removal guiding portion 627 of the substrate unit 620, the ball ball receiving portion 628 and the ball discharge port 629 pass through the rear outside of the pachinko machine 1 Discharged to the island facilities side of

[4-8. Substrate unit]
The substrate unit 620 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 112 to 116 and the like. FIG. 112 (a) is a perspective view of the substrate unit of the main body frame as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the substrate unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 113 is a perspective view of the substrate unit as viewed from the bottom rear. FIG. 114 is an exploded perspective view of the substrate unit disassembled into main components and viewed from the front, and FIG. 115 is an exploded perspective view of the substrate units disassembled into main components and viewed from the rear. FIG. 116 is an enlarged side cross-sectional view showing the lower part of the pachinko machine cut at the center in the left-right direction. The substrate unit 620 is attached to the lower portion of the rear surface of the main body frame base unit 500.

  The base unit 620 is a main unit frame so as to cover a part of the speaker unit 620a and the speaker unit 620a attached to the lower side than the game board placement portion 501c on the rear surface of the main unit frame base 501 in the main unit frame base unit 500. A base unit 620b attached to the rear surface of the base 501, a power supply unit 620c attached to the rear side of the base unit 620b, a payout control unit 620d attached to the rear side of the power unit 620c, and a payout control unit 620d. And an interface unit 620e attached to the rear surface of the speaker unit 620a so as to cover a part from the rear.

  The speaker unit 620a is directed forward in the vicinity of the front end of the speaker cover 621 mounted on the rear surface of the main body frame base unit 500 below the gaming board placement portion 501c on the rear surface of the main body frame base And a container-like speaker box 623 mounted on the rear side of the speaker cover 621 so as to cover the rear side of the body frame speaker 622 and opened forward. .

  The speaker cover 621 extends in the left-right direction, and has a circular speaker attachment portion 621a formed of a plurality of slits extending in the front-rear direction near the left end in front view and extending in the vertical direction, and a front surface of the speaker attachment portion 621a A space front recess 621b recessed so as to bulge forward from the rear on the right side and a space protruding downward from the lower surface of the space front recess 621b and extending in the lateral direction and directed diagonally backward And an open connection portion 621c.

  The main body frame speaker 622 is attached to the speaker attachment portion 621a of the speaker cover 621 from the rear side toward the front. The connection portion 621 c of the speaker cover 621 is inclined at an angle of 45 degrees so that the lower end coincides with the upper end of the connection cylindrical portion 43 a of the rear curtain plate member 43 in the outer frame lower assembly 40 of the outer frame 2 . The main frame speaker 622 is a cone-shaped speaker that mainly outputs bass.

  The speaker box 623 is formed in the shape of a container opened forward, and the rear side of the main body frame speaker 622 protrudes the most greatly, and is stepped backward in a step-like manner toward the right in front view. It is formed so that the protrusion of. As a result, a space on the rear side to the right of the center in the front view of the speaker box 623 can be sufficiently secured, and the base unit 620 b, the power supply unit 620 c, and the like can be disposed. The speaker box 623 is formed to cover (close) the entire rear surface of the speaker cover 621 excluding the connection portion 621 c.

  The speaker unit 620 a forms a part of an enclosure 624 that encloses a sound output rearward from the main body frame speaker 622 by the speaker cover 621 and the speaker box 623. The enclosure 624 has the space front concave portion 621b which bulges forward in the front view right of the speaker mounting portion 621a in the speaker cover 621. Therefore, the enclosure 624 protrudes rearward as the speaker box 623 goes to the right The space on the right side of the main body frame speaker 622 is secured sufficiently wide even if it is formed in a step shape so as to reduce the amount.

  In the speaker unit 620 a, when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the connection portion 621 c of the speaker cover 621 is connected to the connection cylindrical portion 43 a so as to sandwich the seal member 48. And the inner space 40a of the outer plate 2 communicate with each other. Therefore, a large space enclosure 624 can be formed by the speaker cover 621, the speaker box 623, the front plate 42 and the rear plate 43 on the rear side of the main frame speaker 622, and the rear of the main frame speaker 622 The sound that has been output can be output (radiated) forward from the opening 42 a of the curtain front member 42.

  More specifically, as described above, in the speaker unit 620a, the space (a part of the enclosure 624) behind the main body frame speaker 622 is extended to the right in front view with a relatively large depth, and the connection portion 621c and Since the communication is made with the outer frame lower assembly 40 through the connection tube portion 43a, the outer frame lower assembly 40 is not particularly attenuated in the sound outputted from the main frame speaker 622 to the rear. The sound can be transmitted to the side, and the transmitted low frequency band can be resonated and amplified by passing the two port members 47 and can be emitted forward from the opening 42 a of the curtain front member 42.

  At this time, the sound radiated forward from the opening 42a of the curtain plate front member 42 is radiated in a phase-reversed state, and therefore, it is outputted from the front of the main frame speaker 622 to be a dish unit The sound radiated from the speaker port 211b of 200 is resonated so as to be amplified, and even if the aperture of the main body frame speaker 622 is small, it is possible to output a large sound in which heavy bass sounds.

  That is, in the present embodiment, the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 is of a bass reflex type, so that the player can hear a deep bass. Thus, a sound emitted from the front surface of the main body frame speaker 622 and radiated from the speaker port 211 b of the dish unit 200 and a sound emitted from the rear surface of the main body frame speaker 622 and radiated from the grill member 46 of the outer frame 2 Allows the player to hear a sound with rich bass.

  In the speaker unit 620a, a through hole 621d penetrating in the front-rear direction is formed in the speaker cover 621 at a position between the lower portion of the speaker mounting portion 621a and the space front recess 621b. A through cylinder 623a which extends in a cylindrical shape and communicates with the through hole 621d is formed. In the assembled state of the speaker unit 620 a, the through hole 621 d and the through cylinder 623 a communicate with each other, and become independent of the enclosure 624. The connection cable 503 is inserted into the through hole 621d and the through cylinder 623a.

  The base unit 620 b of the board unit 620 is attached to the front base 625 attached to the rear surface of the main frame base 501 so as to cover a part of the speaker box 623 from the rear, and to the rear side of the front base 625. And a rear base 626 to which the 620 c is attached.

  Further, the base unit 620b is formed in cooperation with the front base 625 and the rear base 626, and receives the game ball B released from the lower ball extraction passage 610c of the lower full-tank passage unit 610 and is viewed from the front. A ball withdrawal guiding portion 627 guiding rightward and a discharge ball receiving portion receiving the gaming ball B which is opened upward on the right side in a front view on the downstream side of the ball withdrawal guiding portion 627 and which is discharged downward from the game board 5 628, and a ball outlet 629 for discharging the gaming ball B which has passed through the ball extraction guiding portion 627 and the discharging ball receiver 628 downward.

  The upstream end of the ball extraction guiding portion 627 is opened leftward in the upper part of the left side surface in a front view, and the downstream end is opened on the left end side of the discharge ball receiving portion 628. The ball extraction guiding portion 627 faces the lower end of the lower full ball passage unit 610 so that the opening at the upstream end matches the downstream end opening of the lower ball extraction passage 610c of the lower full ball passage unit 610 The game ball B released from the ball removal passage 610c can be received and guided to the discharge ball receiving portion 628.

  The discharge ball receiving portion 628 is opened upward and extends in the left and right direction. The bottom surface of the discharge ball receiving portion 628 is continuous with the bottom surface of the ball extraction guiding portion 627 at the left end in a front view, and is inclined so as to become lower toward the right.

  The base unit 620b guides the game balls B removed from the ball tank 552 and the game balls B discharged from the game board 5 to the right in a front view by the ball withdrawal guiding portion 627 and the discharge ball receiving portion 628, Since the sheet is discharged downward from the discharge port 629, the space on the left side of the center in the left-right direction can be easily secured widely in front view. As a result, the space of the enclosure 624 of the speaker unit 620a can be enlarged, and the player can hear sounds with richer bass than conventional pachinko machines.

  The power supply unit 620c of the substrate unit 620 includes a power supply substrate 630 attached to the rear side of the rear base 626 of the base unit 620b, and a power supply substrate cover attached to the rear base 626 to cover the rear side of the power supply substrate 630. And 631. The power supply substrate cover 631 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin so that the power supply substrate 630 can be viewed through the power supply substrate cover 631 without removing the power supply substrate cover 631 from the rear base 626. There is. There is a transformer (not shown) in the island facility of the game hall, and the commercial power supply voltage of AC 100 volts (AC 100 V) is stepped down to the power supply voltage for gaming machines of AC 24 volts (AC 24 V). AC 24 V that is stepped down in the island facility of the game hall is supplied to the power supply substrate 630 via a power supply cord (not shown). The power supply substrate 630 prepares various power supplies (DC +35 V, DC +12 V, DC +5 V, etc.) from AC 24 V supplied from the island facility of the game hall, and supplies the various substrates. Also, although the power supply substrate 630 must originally be supplied with a 24 V AC power supply voltage for a gaming machine, there is a possibility that a 100 V AC commercial power supply voltage may be supplied and broken due to an incorrect connection of a power cord (not shown). Therefore, in the present embodiment, the power supply unit 620c can be replaced using a plus driver, which is a general tool (note that a fastener may be used without using a general tool such as a plus driver). It can also be configured to be operated by hand and removed.

  The dispensing control unit 620d includes a box-like dispensing control substrate box 632 detachably mounted on the rear side of the power supply substrate cover 631 in the power supply unit 620c, and a dispensing control substrate 633 housed in the dispensing control substrate box 632 (see FIG. And 116). The payout control board 633 controls the payout motor 584 of the payout device 580 according to the pressing operation of the ball lending button 224 of the ball lending operation unit 220 in the plate unit 200 or the payout command from the main control board of the gaming board 5 or the like. Then, the game balls B of the instructed number are to be paid out to the player side (upper tray 201 or lower tray 202).

  The delivery control board box 632 is composed of a cover (not shown) and a base (not shown). The cover body and the base body are made of polycarbonate resin and are molded to be transparent. A payout control board 633 can be accommodated in an internal space formed by the cover body and the base body. By forming the cover body and the base body transparently by using a polycarbonate resin, the state of the front surface side or the back surface side of the payout control substrate 633 (whether or not the illegal modification is performed, or the illegal IC is mounted Can be confirmed from the outside of the delivery control board box 632). In addition, the dispensing control substrate box 632 is provided with a plurality of sealing mechanisms corresponding to the cover body and the base body respectively, and when one dispensing mechanism is used to close the dispensing control substrate box 632, the dispensing is performed next. In order to open the control substrate box 632, it is necessary to destroy the sealing mechanism, and it is possible to leave a trace of opening and closing of the dispensing control substrate box 632. Therefore, by looking at the trace of the opening and closing, it is possible to detect the improper opening and closing of the dispensing control board box 632 and the deterrence against the fraudulent act on the dispensing control board box 632 is enhanced.

  The interface unit 620 e covers the substrate base 634 attached to the rear side of the speaker box 623 in the speaker unit 620 a, the interface substrate 635 attached to the rear surface of the substrate base 634, and the rear side of the interface substrate 635. And an interface substrate cover 636 attached to the substrate base 634.

  The substrate base 634 is attached to the rearmost portion of the rear of the main body frame speaker 622 on the rear surface of the speaker box 623. The interface board 635 is connected to an end of one (the body frame 4 side) of the connection cable 503. The interface substrate 635 is connected to a power supply substrate 630, a payout control substrate 633, a main control substrate, a peripheral control substrate, and the like, and is connected to a CR unit installed outside the pachinko machine 1. The interface substrate cover 636 extends to the right in a front view more than the substrate base 634 (interface substrate 635) so as to cover a part of the dispensing control unit 620d.

[4-9. Back cover]
The back cover 640 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 92 to 98. The back cover 640 covers the rear side of the game board 5 inserted and attached from the front into the game board insertion slot 501 b of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500. The back cover 640 is rotatably attached to the rear end of the rear extension of the rear extension 501 j of the main body frame base 501 on the right side in a front view, and the left side is a payout base 551. And the back cover mounting portion 601 a of the upper full ball passage unit 600.

  The back cover 640 is formed in such a shape that the right side in a front view right side of the flat plate extending vertically and horizontally is bent forward, and an abutting portion 640 a which is lowered one step forward on the upper side is formed. When assembled in the frame 4, the rear surface is formed to be substantially flush with the rear surface of the back plate upper portion 551d of the dispensing base 551 (the rear surface of the ridge portion 551da formed on the above-described back plate upper portion 551d) There is. Further, when the back cover 640 is assembled to the main body frame 4, the front surface of the contact portion 640 a is in contact with the rear surface of the back plate upper portion 551 d of the dispensing base 551. , And is covered by a ridge portion 551da which is formed to protrude from the back plate upper portion 551d.

  The back cover 640 is formed with a plurality of slits 641 penetrating vertically and longitudinally, except for the contact portion 640a. In the present embodiment, the back cover 640 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin, and can visually recognize the inside of the main body frame 4 from the rear side of the pachinko machine 1.

[4-10. Locking unit]
The locking unit 650 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIG. FIG. 117 (a) is a perspective view of the locking unit of the main body frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. The locking unit 650 is attached to the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame 4 and locks between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 and between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2.

  The locking unit 650 is attached to the right side surface of the rear extension portion 501j of the main body frame base 501 and extends vertically, and a plurality of lockable units with the door frame 3 projecting forward from the unit base 651. A door frame wedge 652, a plurality of outer frame wedges 653 projecting backward from the unit base 651 and capable of engaging with the outer frame 2, and forward projecting from the lower end of the front end of the unit base 651 And a transmission cylinder 654 for moving the hook 652 or the outer frame hook 653 in the vertical direction.

  In addition, the locking unit 650 biases the door frame collar 652 downward and the outer frame collar 653 upward as compared to the lock spring 655 and the transmission cylinder 654 at the front end of the unit base 651. And an outer frame unlocking lever 656 for moving the outer frame collar 653 downward by protruding forward from the upper position and sliding it downward.

  When the locking unit 650 is assembled to the main body frame 4, the plurality (three) of door frame ridges 652, the transmission cylinder 654, and the outer frame unlocking lever 656 move forward of the front surface of the main frame base 501. It protrudes. The transmission cylinder 654 protrudes forward through the cylinder insertion opening 501f of the main body frame base 501, and closes the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4, whereby the front end rotates the cylinder lock 130 of the door frame 3. The transmission member 133 is engaged, and rotation of the key inserted into the keyhole 132 is transmitted and rotated.

  In the locking unit 650, a plurality of (three) door frame wedges 652 are locked to the hook members 116 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 in the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3, and a plurality of (two) The frame collar 653 is locked to the upper hooking member 24 and the lower hooking member 25 of the outer frame right assembly 20 in the outer frame 2.

  The locking unit 650, when assembled in the pachinko machine 1, inserts a key corresponding to the key hole 132 of the cylinder lock 130, and when rotated in a counterclockwise direction in a front view, a plurality of transmission cylinders 654 The door frame wedge 652 moves upward, and the door frame 3 is unlocked with respect to the main body frame 4. On the other hand, when the key is rotated clockwise as viewed from the front, the plurality of outer frame collars 653 move downward via the transmission cylinder 654, and the main body frame 4 is unlocked with respect to the outer frame 2. In the state where the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4, when the outer frame unlocking lever 656 is slid downward, the plurality of outer frame wedges 653 move downward, and the main body frame relative to the outer frame 2 4 is unlocked. Thus, locking between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 and between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2 can be unlocked.

  When locking between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 or between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2, the tip end sides of the door frame ridge 652 and the outer frame ridge 653 are inclined so as to be thin. Therefore, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4 or the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the door frame ridge 652 and the outer frame ridge 653 are the hooking member 116 and the upper hooking member After moving downward and upward so as to get over the lower hooking member 24 and the lower hooking member 25, the locking state is achieved by the biasing force of the lock spring 655.

[4-11. Detailed configuration at the top of the main frame]
Next, the detailed configuration of the upper portion of the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 118 to 125. Fig. 118 (a) is a plan view of the main body frame, and (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line B-B in (a). FIG. 119 is an enlarged view showing the upper portion of the main body frame in a rear perspective view. FIG. 120 (a) is a perspective view seen from the front upper side in a state in which a tank rail etc. is assembled to a ball tank, and (b) is a perspective view seen from the front lower side. FIG. 121 is an exploded perspective view of FIG. 120 (a) as viewed from the front. FIG. 122 is an explanatory view showing a region in the upper portion of the main body frame in which the game balls overflowing from the ball tank circulate. FIG. 123 is an explanatory view showing the flow of gaming balls overflowing from the ball tank in the upper portion of the main body frame. FIG. 124 is an explanatory view showing the flow of the gaming ball to the bypass passage in the upper part of the main body frame. FIG. 125 is an enlarged view showing the vicinity of the tank rail in a perspective view in which the main body frame is viewed from behind the hinge side.

  As described above, the main body frame 4 is insertable into the outer frame 2 by the main frame upper hinge member 510 and the main frame lower hinge assembly 520, and the rear portion can be inserted into the outer frame 2 frame. A frame-shaped main frame base 501 rotatably mounted and capable of supporting the outer periphery of the game board 5, and an inverted L-shaped attached along the front view upper side and the left side on the rear side of the main frame base 501 A dispensing base 551 and a ball tank 552 attached to the dispensing base 551 and opened upward in a box shape (container form) extending to the left and right, attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 and opened upward The tank rail 553 extending to the left in the form of a groove, the first rail cover 554 attached to a part of the upper end of the tank rail 553, and the first rail cover 554 A second rail cover 555 attached to the upper end of the rail 553; a ball straightening member 556 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553 at a position between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555; A ball stopper 557 attached to the downstream end of the lens 553 and a payout device 580 mounted on the downstream side of the tank rail 553 on the rear side of the payout base 551 and for dispensing the gaming ball B to the player And.

  The ball tank 552 is formed into a rectangular shape having a plan view shape extending in the left-right direction, and is inclined from the front side and the rear side of the bottom wall 552a which is inclined so that the left side is low in front view. It has a front wall 552b and a rear wall 552c extending upward, and a left wall 552d and a right wall 552e extending upward from the left and right sides of the bottom wall 552a, respectively, and is formed like a container whose upper side is open. It is done. In the ball tank 552, game balls B supplied from island facilities such as a game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed are stored.

  Further, the ball tank 552 has an overflow portion 552f which is notched from above in the front wall 552b and is formed lower than the remaining outer peripheral upper end edge. The overflow portion 552 f is about 3⁄4 the length of the front wall 552 b in the left-right direction from the end side of the left wall 552 d to the end of the opposite side (right wall 552 e side) in the front wall 552 b. It is formed over the ridge.

  The tank rail 553 communicates with the inside of the ball tank 552 at the right end side (upstream side) in front view, and the downstream side extends to one side (left side) in the left-right direction so as to be away from the ball tank 552 . The tank rail 553 extends from near the upstream to the downstream end at the bottom portion, and has a bowl-shaped main guiding portion 553a in which only one game ball B can be distributed in the width direction orthogonal to the flow direction of the game ball B Have. The main guiding portion 553a is inclined to be lower toward the left in front view. Further, the main guiding portion 553a extends leftward from the right end to a position approximately 1/10 of the total length in the left-right direction in parallel to an axis extending in the left-right direction from the right end to the left in plan view It has a crank shape that extends diagonally from the right end to about 4/10 of the total length in the left-right direction and moves parallel to the axis extending from the right end to the left end so as to move backward toward the end .

  In the main guiding portion 553a, the tank rail 553 has a portion extending parallel to an axis extending in the left-right direction from the left end to the right, extending to the upper end with the same width, and the first rail at the upper end of this portion With the cover 554, the second rail cover 555, and the ball straightening member 556 attached, the upper side is closed. In addition, the tank rail 553 is formed so that the height of the flow path through which the gaming ball B circulates becomes lower toward the downstream end (left end) at the portion where the upper side is closed, and the gaming ball B at the downstream end Is formed at a height allowing only one flow (a height slightly higher than the outer diameter of the game ball B).

  Further, the tank rail 553 has a predetermined length in the left-right direction (in this embodiment, about the bottom surface of the main guiding portion 553a in a bowl shape and the rear wall of the main guiding portion 553a in front view) Three rectangular cutouts 553aa each having a length of 30 mm are formed at a predetermined interval (about 10 mm in the present embodiment). Approximately 7 mm obtained by adding a thickness (about 2.5 mm in the present embodiment) to the bottom of the main guiding portion 553a from the back wall of the main guiding portion 553a to the bottom surface of the main guiding portion 553a by the rectangular notch 553aa A rectangular hole having a length of about 30 mm in the left-right direction is formed, and the thickness of the bottom plate of the bottom of the main guiding portion 553a from the bottom of the main guiding portion 553a (in this embodiment) A rectangular hole having a height of about 7 mm and a length of about 30 mm in the left-right direction is formed by adding about 2.5 mm), and these rectangular holes are formed in communication with each other.

  The game balls B flowing from the ball tank 552 to the tank rail 553 are dropped by peeling metal powder from the game balls B due to wear such as the game balls B colliding with each other or rubbing against each other. For this reason, when the metal powder generated by the wear of the gaming ball B is in a state of adhering to the main induction portion 553a, the flow of the gaming ball B in the downstream direction is impeded, and the gaming ball B is smoothly directed toward the downstream side. It becomes difficult to supply the game ball B, and the payout of the game ball B by the payout device 580 is stopped.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, a plurality of notched portions 553aa are formed in the main guiding portion 553a, and metal powder generated due to the wear of the gaming ball B can be removed from the main guiding portion 553a. Thereby, for example, metal powder generated by wear of the game ball B can be removed from the main induction portion 553a by naturally falling from the main induction portion 553a to the outside through the notch portion 553aa. Due to the vibration of the gaming ball B rolling on the main guiding portion 553a, metal powder produced by the wear of the gaming ball B adhering to the main guiding portion 553a falls from the main guiding portion 553a to the outside through the notch portion 553aa The metal powder can be removed from the main induction portion 553a, and a cotton swab is inserted into the notch portion 553aa by a staff member such as a game hall clerk, resulting from wear of the game ball B adhering to the main induction portion 553a. The metal powder can be removed from the main induction portion 553a by removing the metal powder.

  In addition, the tank rail 553 extends from the upstream end to the part where the upper side is closed above the main guiding portion 553a, and the plurality of gaming balls B are mainly arranged in the width direction orthogonal to the distribution direction A bulging portion 553b which is bulging wider than the width of the guiding portion 553a and narrows in the width direction from the upstream end toward the downstream side so as to match the width of the main guiding portion 553a There is. The plurality of gaming balls B spread in the width direction on the upstream side can be aligned by the bulging portion 553b such that the width direction becomes the width of one game ball B as it goes to the downstream side. Further, the bulging portion 553b is formed so that the width direction becomes narrower as it goes from the upper end side to the main guiding portion 553a below. Because of this, the tank rail 553 can align the plurality of gaming balls B circulating in the bulging portion 553b such that the width direction becomes one line as it goes downstream and downward.

  The bulging portion 553b of the tank rail 553 has a center of curvature disposed on the inner side, and is formed in a three-dimensionally curved shape. In the bulging portion 553b, the center of the curved curvature is disposed above the main guiding portion 553a, so in the tank rail 553, the boundary between the main guiding portion 553a and the bulging portion 553b is slightly Chamfered corners are formed. Further, the bulging portion 553b is formed such that the curvature thereof is larger on the downstream side than on the upstream side. Because of this, in the gaming ball B that circulates the three-dimensionally curved bulging portion 553b, the direction in which the reaction force from the bulging portion 553b side acts is in accordance with the position of the bulging portion 553b that contacts. It will change in various directions, and can suppress generation | occurrence | production of a ball | bowl on the inside of the bulging part 553b. More specifically, when the bulging portion 553b is formed to have a constant extending shape, a reaction force always acts on the gaming ball B circulating in the bulging portion 553b from the inner surface of the bulging portion 553b in a constant direction. Because it becomes difficult to disperse the reaction force, it is difficult for the game ball B to escape by always pressing the internal game ball B in a fixed direction, and it becomes easy to generate a ball clog (ball seam). On the other hand, since the bulging portion 553b has a three-dimensional curved surface, the direction of the reaction force acting from the inner surface of the bulging portion 553b becomes different depending on the position of the game ball B, so the inside is circulated By dispersing the pressed directions of the plurality of game balls B, the pressed game balls B can be easily escaped, and it is possible to make it difficult to generate a ball clog (ball game).

  The tank rail 553 is formed of a transparent material, and is configured to be able to visually recognize the inside from the outside. As a result, even if a ball clog (ball seam) occurs in the tank rail 553, the state of the game ball B in the tank rail 553 can be viewed from the outside, so a ball clogged location can be identified quickly. can do. Therefore, since clogging in the tank rail 553 can be eliminated quickly, interruption of the game due to the occurrence of clogging can be shortened as much as possible, and the player's interest in the game due to interruption of the game can be reduced. The decrease can be suppressed. In addition, since the tank rail 553 is transparent, it is possible to visually recognize the rear side (back unit 3000) of the game board 5 attached to the main frame 4 through the tank rail 553 from behind. When movement problems occur in various effect units etc., with the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4, the status of the drive motor, transmission mechanism such as gear or belt, etc. can be checked, and the phase described above The same effect as that of the use effect can be achieved.

  The body frame 4 is provided on the front side of the ball tank 552, extends in the front-rear direction, and the same side (left side in front view) as the downstream side of the tank rail 553 in the left and right direction is outside the left wall 552d of the ball tank 552. In order to return to the ball tank 552 the gaming ball B which extends to the left (left) and overflows from the ball tank 552, the rear end side is inclined so that the front end side is at the same height as the overflow portion 552f It extends rearward from the outside of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 at the rear end of the overflow surface portion 501m and the rear end of the overflow surface portion 501m to the upper side of the bulging portion 553b of the tank rail 553 which is open at the upper side And the side (left side) away from the ball tank 552 in the left-right direction is low, and the overflow surface from the ball tank 552 is A bypass passage 552g to induce some of the game balls B full of 501m, and a.

  Further, the main body frame 4 is provided on the opposite side to the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 out of both the left and right sides of the bypass passage 552g, and the space in the left and right direction is wider than the outer diameter of the gaming ball Provided at a position lower than the overflow surface portion 501m on the side opposite to the detour passage 552g with the discharge portion 551j whose height is lower than the portion of the tank rail 553 opened at the upper side than the upper portion is open Covers the upper side of an external terminal board 558 having a plurality of wire connection terminals 558a which can be connected with electric wiring from the rear, and a plurality of the wire connection terminals 558a (external terminal board 558) And a terminal cover 551k extending horizontally at a position higher than 501 m.

  The overflow surface portion 501m is formed on the main body frame base 501. The overflowing surface portion 501m is a flat plate from the upper side of the rear surface of the base main body 501a formed in a rectangular shape with a front view shape extending vertically to the rear from a position low by 2 to 4 times the outer diameter of the gaming ball B It is extended to The overflow surface portion 501m has a length in the left-right direction that is about 1/3 of the length in the left-right direction of the main body frame base 501, and the left end in front view is from the left end of the main body frame base 501. It is located to the right of 1/3 of the total length in the left-right direction. The overflow surface portion 501m is formed such that the height from the front end to the rear end is about 1/2 the height of the outer diameter of the gaming ball B. In this overflow surface portion 501m, in a state in which the main body frame 4 is closed to the outer frame 2, a gap having a distance of about twice the outer diameter of the game ball B is formed between it and the outer frame upper member 30. .

  The main body frame base 501 is disposed on the left and right sides of the overflow surface portion 501m, and has flat left and right step portions 501n and 501o that extend substantially horizontally at the same height as the front end of the overflow surface portion 501m; The upper end of the left step 501n and the right step 501o is higher than the left step 501n and the right step 501o in the left and right direction, and the upper end extends in the front and back direction in a band plate shape. And a plurality of ribs 501p arranged at intervals smaller than the diameter. The left step portion 501 n is formed to be shorter in the left-right direction than the length in the front-rear direction. Further, the left step portion 501 n is inclined with respect to the horizontal surface so that the rear end right corner is slightly lower in front view. The right step portion 501o is formed to be longer in the left-right direction than the length in the front-rear direction. Further, the right step portion 501o is inclined with respect to the horizontal surface so that the rear end left corner is slightly lower in a front view.

  The plurality of ribs 501p of the main frame base 501 are formed higher than the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k, and the lower surface of the outer frame upper member 30 of the outer frame 2 when the main frame 4 is closed to the outer frame 2. A gap between the two is formed at a height that is narrower than the outer diameter of the game ball B.

  When the main body frame base 501 is assembled to the main body frame 4, the right end of the overflow surface portion 501m coincides with the right end of the overflow portion 552f of the ball tank 552 in a front view, and the overflow surface portion 501m The left end of the left step coincides with the left end of the bypass passage 552g in the left-right direction, and the right end of the right step 501o coincides with the right wall 552e of the ball tank 552 in the left-right direction.

  The bypass passage 552 g is integrally formed with the ball tank 552. In the following, the container-like region surrounded by the bottom wall 552a, the front wall 552b, the rear wall 552c, the left wall 552d, and the right wall 552e is also simply referred to as a ball tank 552. The bypass passage 552g extends in a flat plate shape from the outside of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 to the left from the outside, and is a passage surface 552h inclined such that the front end has the same height as the overflow portion 552f and the rear end is lower. And a ridge portion extending upward from the end opposite to the left side wall 552 d in the passage surface 552 h to the same height as the left side wall 552 d. The rear end side of the passage surface 552h of the bypass passage 552g extends rearward to the same position as the rear wall 552c of the ball tank 552 in the front view, and the left end side (the collar 552i side) of the rear end side It extends diagonally to move forward as it goes from the to the right end side. The passage surface 552h of the bypass passage 552g may have a horizontal inclination.

  The detour passage 552g is assembled in the main body frame 4 so that the rear end is along the front end side of the portion extending obliquely with respect to the left and right direction in the tank rail 553 extending in a crank shape in the left and right direction. It extends. That is, the rear end of the bypass passage 552g extends obliquely with respect to the left-right direction. As a result, the gaming ball B guided to the rear by the bypass passage 552 g changes from the rear end, which is oblique, so that the flow direction is perpendicular to the oblique rear end. The obliquely extending rear end of the bypass passage 552 g extends substantially parallel to the obliquely extending portion of the tank rail 553 (the flow direction of the game ball B in the tank rail 553). Therefore, the game ball B is released from the rear end of the detour passage 552g in a direction substantially perpendicular to the flow direction (width direction) of the tank rail 553. The game ball B from can be received. In addition, since game balls B are supplied from the bypass passage 552 g into the tank rail 553 in a direction (perpendicular direction) substantially perpendicular to the distribution direction of the game balls B, the tank rail by the game balls B from the bypass passage 552 g It is possible to make it difficult to cause ball clogging in 553.

  The detour passage 552 g extends obliquely with respect to the left and right direction so that the rear end moves rearward as the downstream side of the tank rail 553 is reached, so the game ball B moves from the detour passage 552 g to the tank rail 553 side. At the time of discharge, the obliquely extending rear end allows the gaming ball B to be discharged to the upstream side which is wider than the downstream side where the width of the tank rail 553 is narrowed, and the width It is possible to suppress the generation of the ball seam in the tank rail 553 by releasing it to the wide area of

  Further, in the tank rail 553, a portion for guiding the gaming ball B by the bypass passage 552g corresponds to the rear of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 and the outside of the rear side 552c in a front view. In this part, the gaming ball B which has descended from the inside of the ball tank 552 below the guide surface 552 j of the ball tank 552 (the ceiling side of the opening 552 k) is distributed. Because of this, the height of the plurality of gaming balls B stacked in the vertical direction is the height of the ceiling of the opening 552 k (the wall of the tank rail 553 in the portion behind the detour passage 552 g in the tank rail 553 Never exceed height). Therefore, on the downstream side of the ball tank 552 in the tank rail 553, that is, on the rear end side of the bypass passage 552g, a space (vacant) where game balls B can be stacked upward can be secured. Thus, the game balls B induced to the rear side can be reliably received by the tank rails 553, and the game balls B will not spill backward from the tank rails 553.

  The ball tank 552 is a flat plate extending in the inner side surrounded by the front wall 552b, the rear wall 552c, and the left side wall 552d so as to be lower from a position slightly lower than the overflow portion 552f in the left side wall 552d. The guide surface portion 552 j of The guide surface portion 552 j extends from the front wall 552 b to the rear wall 552 c in the front-rear direction. Further, the guide surface portion 552 j has a right end side from the left end of the front wall 552 b to about 1/3 of the total length of the front wall 552 b in the left and right direction in front view After being obliquely extended to about 1/9 of the total length from the front wall 552b to about one half of the total length in the front-rear direction of the left wall 552d, it extends parallel to the left wall 552d to the vicinity of the rear wall 552c, From there, it is formed in parallel to the rear wall 552c, extending from the left end of the rear wall 552c to about 1/3 of the total length in the left-right direction of the rear wall 552c with a constant width in the front-rear direction.

  The ball tank 552 is a straight line connecting the right end side of the guide surface portion 552j formed in the above-described shape in plan view and the end on the front wall 552b side and the end on the rear wall 552c side of the right end side. The enclosed region has an opening 552k formed to penetrate vertically. Further, the ball tank 552 is a flat flange extending in the lateral direction outward and in the vertical direction on the same plane as the front wall 552b on the front end side of the right side wall 552e and the front end side of the flange portion 552i of the bypass passage 552g. It has a portion 551l. The ball tank 552 has the upper end edge of the front wall 552b excluding the overflow portion 552f and the upper end edges of the two flange portions 552l have the height of the left end wall 552d or the upper end edge of the rear wall 552c (body frame base 501 Of the left step portion 501 n and the right step portion 501 o).

  When the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 553 are assembled to each other, the upstream end (right end in front view) of the tank rail 553 is connected to the opening 552 k of the ball tank 552. Further, the obliquely extending portion of the tank rail 553 extending in the left-right direction in a crank shape in plan view and the portion extending straight in the left-right direction on the left side are positioned behind the ball tank 552 )doing. The rear end side of the bypass passage 552g on the left side of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 is located at the front end of the obliquely extending portion of the tank rail 553 extending in the left-right direction in a crank shape.

  The discharge unit 551 j is formed on the top surface of the payout base 551. The discharge portion 551 j is in the ball tank 552 so as to be lowered stepwise backward from the height lower than the bypass passage 552 g to the same height as the bottom wall 552 a of the ball tank 552 when assembled in the main frame 4 A position where the top of the tank rail 553 is higher leftward along the tank rail 553 than the upper end of the tank rail 553 (the center of the second rail cover 555 in the left-right direction) It extends to the near side and then extends backward.

  The external terminal board 558 is attached to the rear surface with the plurality of wire connection terminals 558a aligned in the left-right direction. The electric wire connection terminal 558a is a one-touch terminal which can hold the tip of the electric wiring by opening the holding portion by the operation of the lever. The external terminal plate 558 is disposed in front of a portion where the upper side of the tank rail 553 is closed by the first rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555, and the ball rectifying member 556 in an assembled state in the main body frame 4. . A terminal cover 551k that covers the upper side of the external terminal plate 558 (a plurality of wire connection terminals 558a) is formed on the top surface of the dispensing base 551. The upper surface of the terminal cover 551k is formed at substantially the same height as the upper end of the flange portion 552l of the ball tank 552.

  Next, the operation and effect of the upper portion of the main body frame 4 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described. First, in the overflow surface portion 501m, the left step portion 501n, the right step portion 501o, and the bypass passage 552g, as shown by white arrows in FIG. The left step 501 n is inclined so that the rear right corner is lower, and the right step 501 o is lower so that the rear left corner is lower. Further, the bottom wall 552a of the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 553 (main guiding portion 553a) are inclined such that the left end side is lower in front view. Further, the guide surface portion 552 j of the ball tank 552 is inclined so that the right end side in the opposite direction to the bottom wall 552 a is lower.

  Then, when the amount of gaming balls B stored in the ball tank 552 is increased by being supplied from the island facility, first, the overflowing portion 552 f having the lowest height among the outer peripheral upper end edges is exceeded It can be made to flow out to the outside (forward) of the ball tank 552, and the game ball B overflowing from the ball tank 552 can be released to the overflow surface portion 501m and made to flow out from the ball tank 552 to the forward overflow surface portion 501m. The game ball B can be returned to the inside of the ball tank 552 by the inclination of the overflow surface portion 501m (see FIG. 123). Therefore, since it is possible to prevent an increase in the number of game balls B in the ball tank 552, it is possible to suppress that the game balls B strongly push each other in the ball tank 552 (increase in ball pressure). It is possible to prevent the occurrence of clogging (so-called, ball seam) due to engagement between the game balls B in the ball tank 552.

  Further, since the bypass passage 552g is provided, as shown in FIG. 124, the game ball B overflowing from the ball tank 552 to the overflow surface portion 501m can be sent to the tank rail 553 via the bypass passage 552g. As a result, it is possible to prevent the back pressure from acting strongly on the game ball B in the ball tank 552 by the game ball B accumulated in the overflow surface portion 501m, and clogging of the game ball B in the ball tank 552 Can be prevented. In addition, since the game ball B can be sent to the tank rail 553 through the bypass passage 552g, the game ball B overflowing from the ball tank 552 or the overflow surface portion 501m may spill out on the outside (rear side) of the main body frame 4. It can be prevented. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of such a problem that the game ball B spilled to the outside of the main body frame 4 is caught between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 and the main body frame 4 can not be opened or closed.

  Further, a part of the game ball B overflowing from the ball tank 552 to the overflow surface portion 501m can be guided to the downstream side of the tank rail 553 by the detour passage 552g and along the left side away from the ball tank 552 Since the game ball B can be sent to the tank rail 553 from a certain position, the flow (pressure) by the game ball B sent to the tank rail 553 by the bypass passage 552 g can be directed to the downstream side of the tank rail 553 It is possible to prevent the game balls B from being clogged by suppressing the game balls B from strongly pushing each other in the tank rail 553.

  Further, at the outer peripheral upper end edge of the ball tank 552, since the height of the upper end edge other than the overflow portion 552f is made higher than the overflow portion 552f, the ball between the ball tank 552 and the bypass passage 552g The upper end edge of the left side wall 552d on one side in the left-right direction of the tank 552 is higher than the overflow portion 552f, that is, the rear end of the overflow surface portion 501m. Thus, the game ball B flowing from the overflow surface portion 501m to the bypass passage 552g after overflowing from the ball tank 552 over the overflow portion 552f to the overflow surface portion 501m is the left side of one side of the ball tank 552 By being blocked by the wall 552d, it is possible to prevent the return from the bypass passage 552g to the ball tank 552 side, and the gaming ball B on the bypass passage 552g side presses the gaming ball B in the ball tank 552 to hold the ball It is possible to prevent clogging of the game balls B in the tank 552.

  Furthermore, as described above, the upper end edge of the left side wall 552d between the ball tank 552 and the bypass passage 552g is from the rear end of the overflow surface portion 501m (the passage surface 552h on which the gaming ball B rolls on the bypass passage 552g) Since the height is also high, it is possible to prevent the game ball B from overflowing from the ball tank 552 to the bypass passage 552g without passing through the overflow surface portion 501m. Thereby, since it is possible to prevent the inflow of gaming balls B from the side (ball tank 552) to the bypass passage 552g, the flow of the gaming balls B in the bypass passage 552g is behind the overflow surface portion 501m on the front end side The flow in a fixed direction toward the tank rail 553 on the end side can be made, and the pressure of the gaming ball B guided from the bypass passage 552 g to the tank rail 553 can be made in a fixed direction. Therefore, in the tank rail 553, the directions of the pressure applied to the gaming balls B are separated, so that it is possible to prevent the gaming balls B from pushing and biting each other, and the clogging of the gaming balls B is generated. It can be prevented.

  Further, since the bottom of the tank rail 553 is provided with the main guiding portion 553a extending to the downstream end, the gaming balls B in the tank rail 553 reach the main guiding portion 553a, so that they are aligned in the left-right direction. Since the game balls B in the tank rail 553 can be aligned since they are lined up, the game balls B can be reliably guided to the payout device 580 on the downstream side. In addition, since a wide bulging portion 553b in which a plurality of game balls B can be arranged is provided at a portion of the tank rail 553 which is open at the upper side, the game released from the rear end of the bypass passage 552g The ball B can be reliably received, and the above-described effects can be reliably achieved.

  Further, the bulging portion 553b of the tank rail 553 is extended from the upstream end to a portion where the upper side is closed, and the width direction is narrowed from the upstream end toward the downstream side, and the width of the main guiding portion 553a Since the change is made to coincide with each other, the plurality of gaming balls B can be aligned in a row in the width direction as they go downstream in the bulging portion 553b. Further, the upper part of the tank rail 553 is closed so that the height of the channel through which the gaming ball B circulates becomes lower toward the downstream end, so the upstream side (ball tank 552 side) The number of steps in the height direction is reduced by circulating the plurality of gaming balls B stacked in multiple steps in the height direction in the lower direction through the portion of the tank rail 553 which is closed on the upper side, thereby reducing the number of steps in the height direction Can be aligned to Therefore, the plurality of gaming balls B can be guided to the downstream side (the payout device 580 side) in a state of being aligned in one row by the tank rail 553.

  Furthermore, since the overflow surface portion 501m and the detour passage 552g are provided, it is possible to store a certain number of gaming balls B in them, and the tank rail 553 is provided with the bulged portion 553b Thus, since the volume in the tank rail 553 can be increased, more gaming balls B can be stored together with the ball tank 552.

  Further, an external terminal plate 558 provided with a plurality of wire connection terminals 558a to which electric wiring is connected on the opposite side to the ball tank 552 with the bypass passage 552g and the discharge portion 551j interposed therebetween, and a plurality of wire connection terminals 558a ( Since the terminal cover 551k covering the upper side of the external terminal board 558) is provided, the wire connection terminal 558a and the terminal cover 551k can be separated from the ball tank 552 to which the game ball B is supplied from the island facility Therefore, even if the game ball B supplied from the island facility bounces or vigorously supplies in the ball tank 552 or the overflow surface portion 501m, it can be made difficult to reach (abut) the wire connection terminal 558a etc. There is no occurrence of a short circuit or an electrical wiring disconnection due to the contact of the game ball B.

  The game ball B supplied from the island facility to the ball tank 552 is the ball tank 552 since the plurality of wire connection terminals 558a are directed backward and the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k is made higher than the overflow surface portion 501m. Also, it is difficult to get on the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k even if it bounces on the overflow surface portion 501m, and it is difficult to drop from the rear side even if the game ball B gets on the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k It is possible to easily avoid the occurrence of such problems.

  Further, the gaming ball B returned from the overflow surface portion 501m to the guiding surface portion 552j of the ball tank 552 is sent to the upstream side (rightward in FIG. 123) of the ball tank 552 by the inclination of the guiding surface portion 552j. As a result, the game ball B on the guide surface 552 j can be prevented from pressing in the downstream direction against the game ball B in the ball tank 552, and clogging of the game ball B occurs in the ball tank 552. Can be prevented.

  In addition, the game ball B supplied to the ball tank 552 from the island facility bounces on the ball tank 552 and the overflow surface portion 501m, and rides on the left step portion 501n and the right step portion 501o on the left and right sides of the overflow surface portion 501m. Also, as shown in FIG. 123, it is possible to guide the gaming ball B to the overflowing surface portion 501m and the detour passage 552g by the inclination thereof, and the trouble occurs because the gaming ball B spills outside the main body frame 4. Can be prevented.

  In addition, when the game ball B circulates from the ball tank 552 to the tank rail 553 side, the game ball B is configured to pass below the guide surface portion 552j. The amount (height) of B can be regulated so as not to be higher than the lower surface of the guide surface 552 j. Therefore, on the downstream side of the ball tank 552 (guide surface portion 552j) in the tank rail 553, that is, on the rear end side of the bypass passage 552g, it is possible to secure a space (vacant) where game balls B can be stacked upward. The gaming ball B induced by the bypass passage 552 g can be reliably received.

  Furthermore, since the plurality of wire connection terminals 558a and the terminal cover 551k are disposed in front of the portion of the tank rail 553 closed on the upper side, even if the game ball B falls backward from the terminal cover 551k, The game ball B is not received by the tank rail 553, and the game ball B can be prevented from affecting the game ball B in the tank rail 553 to cause a problem.

  The ball tank 552 is molded of a conductive resin, while the tank rail 553 and the peripheral control board box of the peripheral control unit 1500 described later are molded of a nonconductive resin. In this embodiment, when the tank rail 553 and the peripheral control board box are charged, the same polarity is obtained. Therefore, the metal powder of the game ball B attached to the tank rail 553 is the peripheral control board box of the same polarity. It is repelled so that it can not be drawn to the peripheral control board box.

  In the embodiment described above, a plurality of notched portions 553aa are formed in the main guiding portion 553a of the tank rail 553 so that metal powder generated by the wear of the game ball B can be removed from the main guiding portion 553a. Although it has been described above, one notch, hole or groove may be formed in the same manner as the notch 553aa with respect to the ball passage along which the game ball B rolls. Specifically, in the ball guiding unit 570 having one guiding passage 570a for guiding the gaming ball B from the tank rail 553 in a meandering manner shown in FIG. 111, the metal of the gaming ball B in the guiding passage 570a A notch, hole or groove through which powder can be removed from the induction passage 570a can be formed on the back surface of the induction unit base 571 of the induction unit 570 shown in FIG. Below the ball guiding unit 570, as shown in FIG. 111, a dispensing device 580, a substrate unit 620, etc. are disposed, and the dispensing device 580 has a substrate etc. on which the blade rotation detection sensor 590 is mounted. The substrate unit 620 includes the power supply substrate 630, the payout control substrate 633, the interface substrate 635, etc. shown in FIG. 112, and various substrates are arranged. Therefore, when forming a notch, a hole or a groove on the rear surface of the induction unit base 571, the game ball falling through the notch, the hole or the groove formed on the rear surface of the induction unit base 571 It is necessary to prevent the metal powder of B from adhering to various substrates disposed below the induction unit 570. Therefore, a wedge-shaped member can be formed to project rearward along the upper side of the dispensing device rear lid 582 of the dispensing device 580 shown in FIG. And the position of various substrates such as the substrate on which the blade rotation detection sensor 590 in the dispensing device 580 is mounted, or both can be adopted. Can also be configured. Further, along the upper side of the power supply substrate cover 631 of the power supply substrate 630, the delivery control substrate box 632 of the delivery control substrate 633, the interface substrate cover 636 of the interface substrate 635 shown in FIG. The position of the notched portion, hole or groove formed on the rear surface of the induction unit base 571 can be formed to protrude, and the power supply substrate cover 631, the dispensing control substrate box 632, and the interface substrate cover 636. The position of and can be configured to shift, or both can be adopted and configured. Note that the ventilation holes are not formed on the side walls of the power supply substrate cover 631 of the power supply substrate 630 shown in FIG. 112, the delivery control substrate box 632 of the delivery control substrate 633, and the cover substrate side wall provided on the interface substrate cover 636 of the interface substrate 635. Also, the metal powder of the game ball B can be prevented from adhering to various substrates. In the main control board 1310X disposed below the peripheral control board box 1505, the main control unit 1300 having the main control board 1310X is disposed at a position where the peripheral control board box 1505 is overhanging, or the main control unit By arranging a bowl-shaped member corresponding to 1300 or forming a ventilation hole in the cover side wall provided on the upper side of the main control unit 1300, it is possible to prevent the metal powder of the game ball B from adhering.

[4-12. Configuration of metal powder measures]
Next, an electrical trouble (short circuit caused by the metal powder of the game ball B that has dropped from the main induction portion 553a to the outside through the plurality of notched portions 553aa formed in the bowl-shaped main induction portion 553a of the tank rail 553 (short circuit The configuration of the metal powder countermeasure capable of avoiding the) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 126 is an enlarged view of a part of a cross-sectional view cut along the line C-C in FIG. 118 (a), and is a schematic view of the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure. In FIG. 126, the outline of the game board 5 is indicated by a solid line, and only the portion of the game board 5 necessary for the description is shown as a cross-sectional view.

  When metal powder (foreign substance) of the game ball B falling from the notched portion 553aa formed in a plurality of bowl-shaped main induction portions 553a of the tank rail 553 adheres to the peripheral control unit 1500 disposed below the tank rail 553, An electrical trouble occurs to cause a problem in the peripheral control unit 1500 or a malfunction. For example, the peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500 is provided with an IC such as a peripheral control IC, a ROM, an SDRAM, etc. described later, and the peripheral data ROM substrate described later is provided with an IC such as a peripheral data ROM. As the pin spacing of these ICs becomes smaller, the pin spacing of various connectors and special connectors provided on the peripheral control board 1510 becomes narrower, and the number of connectors on the peripheral control board 1510 increases, and the spacing between the various connectors becomes narrower. Since the distance between the connector and the special connector is also narrow, it is necessary to take measures against the electrical trouble caused by the foreign matter dropped from the tank rail.

  First, as shown in FIG. 126, a plurality of notched portions 553aa formed in the bowl-shaped main guiding portion 553a of the tank rail 553 is the rear side of the gaming panel 1100 of the gaming board 5 (the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 It shifts toward the back compared with the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface (in the present embodiment, about half the diameter of the gaming ball B It is arranged by the distance dimension of.

  As described above, the cross-sectional shape of the top plate portion 551a of the dispensing base 551 in which the tank rail 553 is disposed goes from the front side to the rear side of the top plate portion 551a (from the front to the rear of the top plate portion 551a It is formed in the shape of a step which bent downward in a plurality according to the direction. A back plate upper portion 551d extends downward from the rear side of the top plate 551a to the same position as the lower side of the right side plate 551c. When the tank rail 553 is attached to the top plate portion 551a, the top plate portion 551a bent below the tank rail 553 is disposed, and the rear surface of the tank rail 553 and the rear surface of the back plate upper portion 551d are substantially coplanar. It is supposed to be deployed. Further, when the back cover 640 is assembled to the main body frame 4, as described above, the contact is such that the front surface of the contact portion 640 a formed on the back cover 640 is in surface contact with the rear surface of the back plate upper portion 551 d of the dispensing base 551. The contact portion is covered by a convex portion 551da which is formed to project rearward on the rear surface of the back plate upper portion 551d.

  Thereby, the metal powder of the game ball B dropped to the outside from the main guiding portion 553a through the notch portion 553aa is received and attached at the top plate portion 551a or received and attached at the convex portion 551da. It can be done. Furthermore, the contacting portion where the front surface of the contact portion 640a formed on the back cover 640 and the rear surface of the back plate upper portion 551d of the dispensing base 551 are in contact with each other protrudes backward on the rear surface of the back plate upper portion 551d. Because it is covered by the formed convex portion 551da, the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 is from the portion where the metal powder of the game ball B dropped to the outside from the main induction portion 553a via the notch portion 553aa abuts. Of the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of the rear unit 3000 (the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear face of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000) and the base body 1502 It has become.

  Thus, the top plate portion 551a of the payout base 551 and the back plate upper portion 551d are the metal of the game ball B that has dropped from the main guiding portion 553a to the outside through the plurality of notch portions 553aa formed in the main guiding portion 553a The powder is prevented from falling toward the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 (the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000). It acts as a whistle that can be done. Therefore, the electrical trouble by the metal powder of the game ball B from the tank rail 553 can be prevented.

  Further, in the present embodiment, a plurality of notched portions 553aa formed in the bowl-shaped main guiding portion 553a of the tank rail 553 and the rear side of the gaming panel 1100 of the gaming board 5 (on the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000) The cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached is misaligned (in the present embodiment, displaced by a distance dimension of about half the diameter of the gaming ball B) Trouble (that is, the peripheral control unit 1500 is not disposed immediately below the notch 553aa), the electric trouble due to the metal powder of the game ball B from the tank rail 553 Is effective in preventing metal powder.

  Further, a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover body 1501 are provided on the rear surface of the cover body 1501 (cover flat plate described later), whereas the upper side, left side, and the side of the cover body 1501 (cover flat plate described later) are provided. The metal powder of the game ball B adheres to the upper side wall of the cover body 1501 (cover side wall formed on the upper side of the cover flat plate described later) because it is not provided on each side wall of the cover provided on the lower side and the right side. However, it is possible to make it difficult to intrude into the inside of the cover 1501.

  Further, the cover 1501 in the peripheral control unit 1500 is formed at the center side with a later described fan attachment recess having a square shape for attaching the air cooling fan FAN and a plurality of concentric circles on the bottom of the fan attachment recess. A plurality of arc-shaped slit holes, which will be described later, are formed along the respective lines. Further, along the lower side of the cover body 1501, seven connector holes provided at the peripheral control substrate 1510 attached to the inner side of the cover body 1501, and seven connector holes at positions corresponding to the volume control switches, Volume control holes are respectively formed, and two connector holes are respectively formed at positions corresponding to two connectors provided on a liquid crystal output substrate described later. In the state where the peripheral control substrate 1510 is attached to the inside of the cover 1501, gaps are formed between the seven connectors provided on the peripheral control substrate 1510 and the seven connector holes formed in the cover 1501. While seven connectors provided on the peripheral control substrate 1510 are exposed from seven connector holes, gaps are formed between the volume adjustment switch provided on the peripheral control substrate 1510 and the volume adjustment hole formed on the cover 1501, The volume control switch provided on the peripheral control board 1510 is exposed from the volume control hole. Further, in a state where a liquid crystal output substrate to be described later is attached to the inside of the cover 1501, a gap is formed between the two connectors provided on the liquid crystal output substrate and the two connector holes formed in the cover 1501; The two connectors provided on the liquid crystal output substrate are respectively exposed from these two connector holes.

  When the wing of the air-cooling fan attached to the peripheral control unit 1500 rotates, the air in the inner space of the cover 1501 is expelled to the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 through the wing by this rotation, thereby performing peripheral control. A plurality of air from the outside of the unit 1500, through the ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover 1501, and the ventilation holes 1540az formed in the shield plate 1540 accommodated in the space between the cover 1501 and the base 1502. , The gap formed in the seven connectors provided on the peripheral control substrate 1510 and the seven connector holes formed on the cover 1501, the volume adjustment switch provided on the peripheral control substrate 1510, and the cover Volume adjustment holes formed in the body 1501 During and through the two connectors provided on the liquid crystal driving board, and two connector hole formed in the cover body 1501, a gap) formed, so that the capturing.

  The total area of the plurality of arc-shaped slit holes formed on the bottom of the fan attachment recess of the cover 1501 (total area) is the area of the vent 1501az formed on the cover 1501 and the above Clearance (seven connectors provided on peripheral control board 1510 and seven connector holes formed on cover 1501; gaps formed on peripheral control board 1510; volume control switch provided on peripheral control board 1510; and formed on cover 1501 Than a volume adjustment hole, a gap formed in the liquid crystal output substrate, and an area in two connectors provided in the liquid crystal output substrate and a gap formed in two connector holes formed in the cover 1501) It is getting smaller. Therefore, when the wing of the air cooling fan attached to the peripheral control unit 1500 rotates, air in the inner space of the cover 1501 is expelled to the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 through the wing by this rotation. A plurality of vents 1501az formed in the cover 1501 from the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500, and a plurality of vents 1540az formed in the shield plate 1540 accommodated in the space between the cover 1501 and the base 1502. The flow velocity of the air flowing into each of the vent holes 1501az formed in the cover body 1501 can be reduced to a small value when taking in. As a result, it is possible to prevent heavy powder called metal powder of the game ball B from invading the inner space of the cover 1501 through the vent holes 1501az under the influence of the flow of air.

  Incidentally, when the wing of the air cooling fan FAN of the peripheral control unit 1500 rotates, the air outside the peripheral control unit 1500 is sucked toward the inner space of the cover 1501 through the wing by this rotation. Because the flow velocity of the air by the rotation of the wing of the wing increases, the probability that the heavy powder of metal powder of the game ball B is sucked toward the inner space of the cover 1501 under the influence of the flow of air increases and sucks An electrical trouble (short circuit) caused by metal powder causes defects (faults) in the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 attached to the inside of the cover 1501 and various electronic components provided on various substrates such as the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. Become.

  Therefore, in order to prevent such an electrical trouble (short circuit), by forming a protrusion along the upper side of the cover 1501 in the peripheral control unit 1500, the heavy powder called metal powder of the game ball B is air cooled. The game ball can be configured to have a function as a weir to prevent it from being sucked into the fan FAN, and by forming a protrusion along the upper side of the fan attachment recess formed in the cover body 1501, the gaming ball It can be configured to have a function as a weir that prevents heavy powder called metal powder of B from being drawn into the air cooling fan FAN, and the distance dimension (thickness) in the depth direction of the air cooling fan FAN is a thin type Is selected (that is, the distance dimension (thickness) in the depth direction of the air-cooling fan FAN compared to the distance dimension in the depth direction of the FAN mounting recess When the air-cooling fan FAN is accommodated in the fan attachment recess formed in the cover 1501 by selecting one having a short distance dimension), the inner wall of the FAN attachment recess allows the heavy powder called metal powder of the game ball B to be the air-cooling fan It can be configured to have a function as a weir that prevents it from being sucked into the FAN. A detailed description of the configuration of the peripheral control unit 1500 will be described later.

  Next, another configuration of the present invention in which a countermeasure against metal powder can be taken such that an electrical trouble caused by the metal powder of gaming ball B can be avoided (hereinafter referred to as “metal powder countermeasure according to second to fifth embodiments Will be described with reference to FIGS. 127 to 130). FIG. 127 shows the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the second embodiment, and is a schematic view of the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the second embodiment. FIG. 128 shows the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the third embodiment, and is a schematic view of the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the third embodiment. FIG. 129 shows the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the fourth embodiment, and is a schematic view of the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 130 shows the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the fifth embodiment, and is a schematic view of the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the fifth embodiment. 127 to 130, members having the same functions as those of the embodiment shown in FIG. 126 (hereinafter referred to as "the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the first embodiment") have the same reference numerals. The outline of the game board 5 is indicated by a solid line, and only the portion of the game board 5 necessary for the explanation is shown as a cross-sectional view.

[Comparison between the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the first embodiment and the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the second embodiment]
In the metal powder countermeasure configuration according to the first embodiment, the cross-sectional shape of the top plate portion 551a where the tank rail 553 is disposed is directed from the front side to the rear side of the top plate portion 551a as described above ( The top plate 551a is in the form of a plurality of stairs bent downward from the front to the rear), and the back plate upper portion 551d extends downward from the rear side of the top plate 551a to the same position as the lower side of the right side plate 551c. When the tank rail 553 is attached to the top plate portion 551a, as described above, the top plate portion 551a bent below the tank rail 553 is disposed, and the back surface of the tank rail 553 and the back plate upper portion 551d The rear surface is arranged on substantially the same plane.

  On the other hand, in the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the second embodiment, as shown in FIG. 127, the cross-sectional shape of the top plate portion 551a where the tank rail 553 is disposed is the front of the top plate portion 551a. The back plate upper portion 551d in the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the first embodiment is formed in a step shape bent downward in a plurality according to going from the side to the rear side (from the front to the rear of the top plate portion 551a). Is not provided at all, and the rear side of the bent top plate 551a is parallel to the front wall of the bowl-like main guiding portion 553a formed on the top plate 551a and is directed upward from the bottom of the main guiding portion 553a. It is formed to have a predetermined distance dimension (in the present embodiment, a distance dimension about one half of the diameter of the gaming ball B). That is, the end face of the bent top plate 551a is disposed above the bottom of the main guiding portion 553a. When the tank rail 553 is attached to the top plate portion 551a and the gaming board 5 is attached to the pachinko machine 1, the upper wall 3010a of the back box 3010 in the back unit 3000 is disposed below the tank rail 553, The rear surface of the tank rail 553 and the rear surface 3010 d of the back box 3010 in the rear unit 3000 are arranged on substantially the same plane. The rear surface 3010 d of the back box 3010 in the back unit 3000 disposed substantially on the same plane as the tank rail 553 is branched from the portion to which the effect display device 1600 is attached and extended rearward.

  Further, in the metal powder countermeasure configuration according to the first embodiment, in the state where the back cover 640 is assembled to the main body frame 4, the front surface of the contact portion 640 a formed on the back cover 640 is the dispensing base 551 as described above. Is in contact with the back surface of the back plate upper portion 551d of the back plate, and the abutted portion is covered by a convex portion 551da formed to project rearward on the back surface of the back plate upper portion 551d. ing.

  On the other hand, in the metal powder countermeasure configuration according to the second embodiment, the front surface of the contact portion 640a formed on the back cover 640 in the state where the back cover 640 is assembled to the main frame 4 is the rear surface 3010d of the back box 3010 The contact recess 3010da is in contact with the mounting recess 3010da, and the contacting portion is covered by the upper wall formed by the mounting recess 3010da.

  As described above, in the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the first embodiment, when the tank rail 553 is attached to the top plate portion 551a, the top plate portion 551a bent below the tank rail 553 is disposed, and the tank rail While the rear surface of the rear panel 553 and the rear surface of the back plate upper portion 551d are disposed on substantially the same plane, the tank rail 553 is attached to the top panel 551a in the metal powder countermeasure configuration according to the second embodiment. The upper wall 3010a of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 is disposed below the tank rail 553 while the gaming board 5 is attached to the pachinko machine 1, and the back box of the back surface of the tank rail 553 and the back unit 3000. The difference is that rear surface 3010d of 3010 is disposed substantially on the same plane. Further, in the metal powder countermeasure configuration according to the first embodiment, the front surface of the contact portion 640 a formed on the back cover 640 in the state where the back cover 640 is assembled to the main frame 4 is the back plate upper portion 551 d of the dispensing base 551. While in a state of being in contact with the rear surface and in a state of being in contact, the abutted portion is covered by a convex portion 551da formed to project rearward on the rear surface of the back plate upper portion 551d, In the metal powder countermeasure configuration according to the second embodiment, the mounting recess is formed on the rear surface 3010 d of the back box 3010 in the front surface of the contact portion 640 a formed on the back cover 640 when the back cover 640 is assembled to the main frame 4. In the state of being in contact with the surface 3010 da, the abutted portion is covered by the upper wall formed by the mounting recess 3010 da. It is different at the point.

  Also in the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the second embodiment, the same function and effect as the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the first embodiment can be achieved. That is, the metal powder of gaming balls B that has dropped from the main guiding portion 553a to the outside through the plurality of notch portions 553aa formed in the main guiding portion 553a is received at the upper wall 3010a of the back box 3010 in the back unit 3000. It can be attached. Further, the contacting portion where the front surface of the contact portion 640a formed on the back cover 640 and the mounting recess 3010da formed on the rear surface 3010d of the back box 3010 are in contact with each other is the upper wall formed by the mounting recess 3010da Because it is covered, the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 (back unit 3000) from the portion where the metal powder of the game ball B dropped to the outside from the main induction portion 553a via the notch 553aa abuts It can not be dropped toward the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010).

  Thus, the upper wall 3010a of the back box 3010 and the back surface 3010d of the back box 3010 in the back unit 3000 fall from the main guiding portion 553a to the outside through the plurality of notch portions 553aa formed in the main guiding portion 553a. Towards the peripheral control unit 1500 where the metal powder of the game ball B is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 (the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000) It functions as a weir that can prevent it from falling. Therefore, the electrical trouble by the metal powder of the game ball B from the tank rail 553 can be prevented.

  In the metal powder countermeasure configuration according to the second embodiment, the metal powder of the game ball B dropped to the outside from the main induction portion 553a through the notch 553aa is on the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 ( It can not fall toward the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. For this reason, in the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500, it is desirable to provide a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az formed on the upper side of the cover body 1501 (cover flat plate described later) in order to improve the cooling effect.

[Comparison between the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the first embodiment and the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the third embodiment]
In the metal powder countermeasure configuration according to the first embodiment, the cross-sectional shape of the top plate portion 551a where the tank rail 553 is disposed is directed from the front side to the rear side of the top plate portion 551a as described above ( The top plate 551a is in the form of a plurality of stairs bent downward from the front to the rear), and the back plate upper portion 551d extends downward from the rear side of the top plate 551a to the same position as the lower side of the right side plate 551c. When the tank rail 553 is attached to the top plate portion 551a, as described above, the top plate portion 551a bent below the tank rail 553 is disposed, and the back surface of the tank rail 553 and the back plate upper portion 551d The rear surface is arranged on substantially the same plane.

  On the other hand, in the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the third embodiment, as shown in FIG. 128, the cross-sectional shape of the top plate portion 551a on which the tank rail 553 is disposed is the front of the top plate portion 551a. The back plate upper portion 551d in the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the first embodiment is formed in a step shape bent downward in a plurality according to going from the side to the rear side (from the front to the rear of the top plate portion 551a). Is not provided at all. When the tank rail 553 is attached to the top plate portion 551a, the top plate portion 551a bent below the tank rail 553 is disposed, and the end surface of the bent top plate portion 551a is closer to the back surface of the tank rail 553 The main guiding portion 553a is disposed so as to protrude below the notch portion 553aa formed in the main guiding portion 553a.

  Further, in the metal powder countermeasure configuration according to the first embodiment, in the state where the back cover 640 is assembled to the main body frame 4, the front surface of the contact portion 640 a formed on the back cover 640 is the dispensing base 551 as described above. Is in contact with the back surface of the back plate upper portion 551d of the back plate, and the abutted portion is covered by a convex portion 551da formed to project rearward on the back surface of the back plate upper portion 551d. ing.

  On the other hand, in the metal powder countermeasure configuration according to the third embodiment, the front surface of the contact portion 640 a formed on the back cover 640 in the state where the back cover 640 is assembled to the main frame 4 is below the tank rail 553. And in contact with the end face of the bent top plate portion 551a disposed on the upper surface, and the upper surface of the bent top plate portion 551a disposed below the tank rail 553 and the upper surface of the contact portion 640a. And are arranged in the same plane.

  As described above, in the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the first embodiment, when the tank rail 553 is attached to the top plate portion 551a, the top plate portion 551a bent below the tank rail 553 is disposed, and the tank rail When the tank rail 553 is attached to the top plate portion 551a in the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the third embodiment while the rear surface of the rear panel 553 and the rear surface of the back plate upper portion 551d are arranged substantially on the same surface. The top plate portion 551a bent below the tank rail 553 is disposed, and the rear surface of the tank rail 553 and the end face of the bent top plate portion 551a disposed below the tank rail 553 are substantially coplanar. It differs in that it is placed in Further, in the metal powder countermeasure configuration according to the first embodiment, the front surface of the contact portion 640 a formed on the back cover 640 in the state where the back cover 640 is assembled to the main frame 4 is the back plate upper portion 551 d of the dispensing base 551. While in a state of being in contact with the rear surface and in a state of being in contact, the abutted portion is covered by a convex portion 551da formed to project rearward on the rear surface of the back plate upper portion 551d, In the metal powder countermeasure configuration according to the third embodiment, the front surface of the contact portion 640 a formed on the back cover 640 in a state where the back cover 640 is assembled to the main body frame 4 is bent below the tank rail 553 The contact portion 6 is in contact with the end surface of the top plate portion 551a and in contact with the upper surface of the bent top plate portion 551a disposed below the tank rail 553. And the upper surface of 0a are different in that they are arranged on the same plane.

  Also in the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the third embodiment, the same function and effect as the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the first embodiment can be achieved. That is, the metal powder of gaming balls B that has dropped from the main guiding portion 553a to the outside through the plurality of notch portions 553aa formed in the main guiding portion 553a is a bent top plate portion 551a disposed below the tank rail 553. The upper surface of the contact portion 640 a of the back cover 640 can be received and attached. Furthermore, the contact portion where the front surface of the contact portion 640a formed on the back cover 640 and the end surface of the bent top plate portion 551a disposed below the tank rail 553 are in contact with each other. As a result, the gap is not formed, so from the portion where the metal powder of the game ball B dropped from the main induction portion 553a to the outside through the notch portion 553aa comes in contact with the game panel of the game board 5 The cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of the 1100 (the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000) and the base body 1502 can not fall It is supposed to be.

  As described above, the bent top plate 551a disposed below the tank rail 553 is the game ball B that has dropped from the main guiding portion 553a to the outside through the plurality of notch portions 553aa formed in the main guiding portion 553a The metal powder falls toward the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 (the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000). It acts as a trap that can be prevented. Therefore, the electrical trouble by the metal powder of the game ball B from the tank rail 553 can be prevented.

  The contact portion where the front surface of the contact portion 640a formed on the back cover 640 and the end surface of the bent top plate portion 551a disposed below the tank rail 553 are in contact with each other. Therefore, the gap is not formed, but the contact portion 640a formed on the back cover 640 is in close contact with the bottom of the bent top plate 551a disposed below the tank rail 553. In the back cover 640, the bent top plate 551a disposed below the tank rail 553 is in close contact with the bottom of the contact portion 640a formed on the back cover 640. There is no gap formed between the contact portion 640 a and the bent top plate 551 a disposed below the tank rail 553. The rear side of the gaming panel 1100 of the game board 5 (the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000) from the portion where the metal powder of the gaming ball B dropped to the outside from the main induction portion 553a through the notch portion 553aa It can not be dropped toward the cover 1501 and the base 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface).

  Further, in the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the third embodiment, the metal powder of the game ball B dropped to the outside from the main induction portion 553a through the notch portion 553aa is on the back side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 ( It can not fall toward the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. For this reason, in the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500, it is desirable to provide a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az formed on the upper side of the cover body 1501 (cover flat plate described later) in order to improve the cooling effect.

[Comparison between the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the first embodiment and the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the fourth embodiment]
In the metal powder countermeasure configuration according to the first embodiment, the cross-sectional shape of the top plate portion 551a where the tank rail 553 is disposed is directed from the front side to the rear side of the top plate portion 551a as described above ( The top plate 551a is in the form of a plurality of stairs bent downward from the front to the rear), and the back plate upper portion 551d extends downward from the rear side of the top plate 551a to the same position as the lower side of the right side plate 551c. When the tank rail 553 is attached to the top plate portion 551a, as described above, the top plate portion 551a bent below the tank rail 553 is disposed, and the back surface of the tank rail 553 and the back plate upper portion 551d The rear surface is arranged on substantially the same plane.

  On the other hand, in the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the fourth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 129, the cross-sectional shape in the front-rear direction of the top plate portion 551a where the tank rail 553 is disposed is in front of the top plate portion 551a. The back plate upper portion 551d in the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the first embodiment is formed in a step shape bent downward in a plurality according to going from the side to the rear side (from the front to the rear of the top plate portion 551a). Is not provided at all. When the tank rail 553 is attached to the top plate portion 551a, the top plate portion 551a bent downward of the tank rail 553 is disposed, and the end surface of the bent top plate portion 551a extends rearward from the rear surface of the tank rail 553 It is arranged to protrude by a predetermined distance dimension (in the present embodiment, a distance dimension of about one third of the diameter of the gaming ball B).

  Further, in the metal powder countermeasure configuration according to the first embodiment, in the state where the back cover 640 is assembled to the main body frame 4, the front surface of the contact portion 640 a formed on the back cover 640 is the dispensing base 551 as described above. Is in contact with the back surface of the back plate upper portion 551d of the back plate, and the abutted portion is covered by a convex portion 551da formed to project rearward on the back surface of the back plate upper portion 551d. ing.

  On the other hand, in the metal powder countermeasure configuration according to the fourth embodiment, the front surface of the contact portion 640 a formed on the back cover 640 in the state where the back cover 640 is assembled to the main body frame 4 is below the tank rail 553. The rear surface of the bent top plate portion 551 a disposed in contact is in contact with a convex portion 551 ab which is formed to project downward and is in contact with the tank rail 553. It is covered by the rear surface of the bent top plate portion 551a disposed below.

  As described above, in the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the first embodiment, when the tank rail 553 is attached to the top plate portion 551a, the top plate portion 551a bent below the tank rail 553 is disposed, and the tank rail When the tank rail 553 is attached to the top plate portion 551a in the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the fourth embodiment, the rear surface of the rear panel 553 and the rear surface of the back plate upper portion 551d are arranged substantially on the same surface. The top plate portion 551a bent below the tank rail 553 is disposed, and the end surface of the bent top plate portion 551a is disposed so as to slightly protrude rearward as compared with the rear surface of the tank rail 553. Is different. Further, in the metal powder countermeasure configuration according to the first embodiment, the front surface of the contact portion 640 a formed on the back cover 640 in the state where the back cover 640 is assembled to the main frame 4 is the back plate upper portion 551 d of the dispensing base 551. While in a state of being in contact with the rear surface and in a state of being in contact, the abutted portion is covered by a convex portion 551da formed to project rearward on the rear surface of the back plate upper portion 551d, In the metal powder countermeasure configuration according to the fourth embodiment, the front surface of the contact portion 640 a formed on the back cover 640 in a state where the back cover 640 is assembled to the main body frame 4 is disposed below the tank rail 553. The back surface of the top plate portion 551a is in a state of being in contact with a convex portion 551ab that is formed so as to project downward and is in a state of being in contact with the convex portion 551ab. Disposed below the tank rails 553, it is different in that covered by the rear surface of the bent top plate 551a.

  Also in the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the fourth embodiment, the same function and effect as the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the first embodiment can be achieved. That is, the metal powder of the game ball B dropped to the outside from the main guiding portion 553a through the plurality of notch portions 553aa formed in the main guiding portion 553a is disposed below the tank rail 553 and is a bent top plate portion It can be received and attached at 551a. Further, a front surface of the contact portion 640 a formed on the back cover 640 and a convex portion 551 ab disposed downward of the tank rail 553 and projecting downward on the rear surface of the bent top plate portion 551 a, Since the abutted portion where the surface contacts is in contact is covered by the rear surface of the bent top plate 551a disposed below the tank rail 553, it falls from the main guiding portion 553a to the outside through the notch portion 553aa. Attached to the back side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 (the back side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the back surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000) from the portion where the metal powder of the played game ball B abuts It can not be dropped toward the cover 1501 and the base 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500.

  As described above, the bent top plate 551a disposed below the tank rail 553 is a game ball B that has dropped from the main guiding portion 553a to the outside through the plurality of notch portions 553aa formed in the main guiding portion 553a. Metal powder falling toward the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 (the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000) Functions as a pot that can prevent the ball and also functions as a receptacle for metal powder of the game ball B. Therefore, the electrical trouble by the metal powder of the game ball B from the tank rail 553 can be prevented.

  In the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the fourth embodiment, the bent top plate portion 551a that functions as a weir disposed below the tank rail 553 is a separate member (another structural component) and the top plate portion 551a. It can also be configured to attach to

  When the top plate portion 551a is a separate member (another structural component), it may be removable or may be moved from the mounting position back to the mounting position for the purpose of removing the attached metal powder. In this case, by setting the top plate 551a to a different color from the members around it, the mechanism part that can be moved from the detachable position or attached position back to the attached position can be clarified and the ease of the work of removing the adhered metal powder is improved Let

  Further, in the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the fourth embodiment, the metal powder of the game ball B dropped to the outside from the main induction portion 553a through the notch portion 553aa is on the back side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 ( It can not fall toward the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. For this reason, in the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500, it is desirable to provide a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az formed on the upper side of the cover body 1501 (cover flat plate described later) in order to improve the cooling effect.

[Comparison between the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the first embodiment and the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the fifth embodiment]
In the metal powder countermeasure configuration according to the first embodiment, the cross-sectional shape of the top plate portion 551a where the tank rail 553 is disposed is directed from the front side to the rear side of the top plate portion 551a as described above ( The top plate 551a is formed in the shape of a plurality of stairs bent downward from the front to the rear), and the back plate upper portion 551d extends downward from the rear side of the top plate 551a to the same position as the lower side of the right side plate 551c. When the tank rail 553 is attached to the top plate portion 551a, the top plate portion 551a bent below the tank rail 553 is disposed as described above, and the back surface of the tank rail 553 and the back surface of the back plate upper portion 551d And are arranged substantially on the same plane.

  On the other hand, in the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the fifth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 130, the cross-sectional shape in the front-rear direction of the top plate portion 551a where the tank rail 553 is disposed is in front of the top plate portion 551a. The back plate upper portion 551d in the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the first embodiment is formed in a step shape bent downward in a plurality according to going from the side to the rear side (from the front to the rear of the top plate portion 551a). Is not provided at all, and the rear side of the bent top plate 551a is parallel to the front wall of the bowl-shaped main guiding portion 553a formed on the top plate 551a, and is directed downward from the bottom of the main guiding portion 553a. It is formed to have a predetermined distance dimension (in the present embodiment, a distance dimension about one half of the diameter of the gaming ball B). That is, the end face of the bent top plate 551a is arranged to project downward as compared with the bottom of the main guiding portion 553a.

  Further, in the metal powder countermeasure configuration according to the first embodiment, in the state where the back cover 640 is assembled to the main body frame 4, the front surface of the contact portion 640 a formed on the back cover 640 is the dispensing base 551 as described above. Is in contact with the back surface of the back plate upper portion 551d of the back plate, and the abutted portion is covered by a convex portion 551da formed to project rearward on the back surface of the back plate upper portion 551d. ing.

  On the other hand, in the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the fifth embodiment, the contact portion formed by the upper side of the back cover 640 being largely bent forward when the back cover 640 is assembled to the main body frame 4 The front surface of the 640 a is disposed parallel to the front wall of the bowl-shaped main guiding portion 553 a and is in surface contact with the rear surface of the top plate 551 a which is disposed to project downward compared to the bottom portion of the main guiding portion 553 a. It is in a state of contact.

  Further, in the metal powder countermeasure configuration according to the first embodiment, in the state where the back cover 640 is assembled to the main body frame 4, the front surface of the contact portion 640 a formed on the back cover 640 is the dispensing base 551 as described above. Is in contact with the back surface of the back plate upper portion 551d of the back plate, and the abutted portion is covered by a convex portion 551da formed to project rearward on the back surface of the back plate upper portion 551d. ing.

  On the other hand, in the metal powder countermeasure configuration according to the fifth embodiment, the front surface of the contact portion 640a formed on the back cover 640 in the state where the back cover 640 is assembled to the main body frame 4 While being in contact with the rear surface of the top plate 551a disposed parallel to the front wall of the portion 553a and projecting downward as compared to the bottom of the main guiding portion 553a, The portions in contact with the main guiding portion 553a are disposed largely out in front of the notched portions 553aa formed in the main guiding portion 553a.

  As described above, in the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the first embodiment, when the tank rail 553 is attached to the top plate portion 551a, the top plate portion 551a bent below the tank rail 553 is disposed, and the tank rail When the tank rail 553 is attached to the top plate portion 551a in the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the fifth embodiment, while the rear surface of the rear panel 553 and the rear surface of the back plate upper portion 551d are arranged substantially on the same surface. Abutment where the bent top plate portion 551a is not disposed below the tank rail 553 and the upper side of the back cover 640 is largely bent toward the front in a state where the back cover 640 is assembled to the main frame 4 The difference is that the portion 640a is disposed. Further, in the metal powder countermeasure configuration according to the first embodiment, the front surface of the contact portion 640 a formed on the back cover 640 in the state where the back cover 640 is assembled to the main frame 4 is the back plate upper portion 551 d of the dispensing base 551. While in a state of being in contact with the rear surface and in a state of being in contact, the abutted portion is covered by a convex portion 551da formed to project rearward on the rear surface of the back plate upper portion 551d, In the metal powder countermeasure configuration according to the fifth embodiment, the front surface of the contact portion 640a formed on the back cover 640 in a state where the back cover 640 is assembled to the main body frame 4 is the front wall of the main guide portion 553a having a hook shape. It is in a state of being in contact with the rear surface of top plate 551a which is disposed in parallel and which protrudes downward as compared to the bottom of main guiding portion 553a, and this abuts Min, is different in that it is arranged largely shifted forward from notches 553aa which is plurally formed to the main guiding part 553a.

  Also in the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the fifth embodiment, the same function and effect as the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the first embodiment can be achieved. That is, the metal powder of gaming balls B dropped from the main guiding portion 553a to the outside through the plurality of notch portions 553aa formed in the main guiding portion 553a is the upper side of the back cover 640 disposed below the tank rail 553. It can be received and attached on the upper surface of the contact portion 640a which is formed by being largely bent toward the front side. Furthermore, it is disposed parallel to the front surface of the contact portion 640a formed on the back cover 640 and the front wall of the bowl-shaped main guiding portion 553a and is disposed so as to project downward compared to the bottom portion of the main guiding portion 553a. Since the abutted portion where the rear surface of the top plate portion 551a comes in surface contact is disposed largely in front of the notches 553aa formed in the main guiding portion 553a and also abuts, the gap Is not formed. Therefore, the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 (the back box of the back unit 3000) from the portion where the metal powder of the game ball B dropped to the outside from the main induction portion 553a via the notch portion 553aa abuts It can not be dropped toward the cover 1501 and the base 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the 3010).

  As described above, the contact portion 640a formed by largely bending the upper side of the back cover 640 forward from the main guiding portion 553a to the outside through the plurality of notch portions 553aa formed in the main guiding portion 553a. To the peripheral control unit 1500 where the metal powder of the dropped game ball B is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 (the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000) As well as functioning as a basket that can be prevented from falling toward the head, it also functions as a receptacle for metal powder of the gaming ball B. Therefore, the electrical trouble by the metal powder of the game ball B from the tank rail 553 can be prevented.

  In the metal powder countermeasure configuration according to the fifth embodiment, the metal powder of gaming balls B that has dropped from the main induction portion 553a to the outside through the notch portion 553aa is on the rear side of the gaming panel 1100 of the gaming board 5 ( It can not fall toward the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. For this reason, in the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500, it is desirable to provide a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az formed on the upper side of the cover body 1501 (cover flat plate described later) in order to improve the cooling effect.

  Incidentally, conventionally, a gaming machine provided with a tank rail for guiding gaming balls from a ball tank to the downstream side has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-215440 (FIG. 2)). The tank rail was provided with a hole for discharging the foreign matter generated by the game ball. However, if foreign matter dropped from a hole provided in the tank rail adheres to the control board disposed below the tank rail, an electrical trouble occurs to cause a problem in the control board or cause a malfunction etc. It had become. In recent control boards, the increase in the number of control targets reduces the connector pin spacing, and the increase in the number of connectors reduces the connector spacing and further reduces the IC pin spacing. Therefore, it is necessary to take measures against electrical problems caused by foreign matter dropped from the tank rail.

[5. Overall configuration of the game board]
The entire configuration of the game board 5 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 131 to 141. FIG. 131 is a front view of a game board in a pachinko machine, and FIGS. 132 to 139 are enlarged front views of main parts of the game board. FIG. 140 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled into main components and viewed from the front, and FIG. 141 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled into main components and viewed from the rear; Is a schematic view of the function display unit attached to the upper left corner of the front component outside the game area, FIG. 143 is a perspective view of the game board viewed from the back, and FIG. 144A is from the function display unit on the main control board FIG. 16 is a schematic explanatory view of the routing of the wiring of FIG.

  The game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 has a game area 5a in which the game ball B is hit when the player operates the handle 182 of the handle unit 180. In this game area 5a, there is a first game area 5a1 in which a game ball shot by a predetermined force (in the case where the amount of operation of the handle 182 by the player is small) can flow down and a specific shot stronger than the predetermined force. The second game area 5a2 to which the game ball fired by the force (in the case of a large amount of launch force of a strength to jump over the first game area 5a1 / large operation amount of the handle 182 by the player) can flow It can be divided into a downstream third gaming area 5a3 where the gaming area 5a2 and the first gaming area 5a1 merge.

  In the left half of the first gaming area 5a1 of the gaming area 5a and the downstream side of the third gaming area 5a3 connected to the downstream side thereof, a predetermined benefit (for example, a predetermined number of gaming balls B) is given to the player by accepting the gaming ball B A plurality of general winning openings 2001 for awarding payouts) are provided, and the second game area 5a2 and the right half of the third game area 5a3 connected to the downstream side thereof receive the game ball B for the player. For the player by detecting the passage of the general winning opening 2001, the second starting opening 2004, the big winning opening 2005 and the gaming ball B to which a predetermined benefit (for example, payout of a predetermined number of gaming balls B) is given. There is provided a gate portion 2003 for applying a predetermined benefit (for example, opening and closing pieces 850 of the second start port 2004 for a predetermined period of time to be changeable for winning) and the center of the third game area 5a3 To Specific privilege to the player by receiving the game ball B (e.g., payout, etc. of a predetermined number of game balls B.) Is first start hole 2002 to grant is provided.

  And further, as a unique receiving port that can receive the game ball B in the second game area 5a2, it is possible to receive the game ball B while collecting the game ball B and not giving a profit to the player. One receiving port 2006 is provided. In the second game area 5a2, the general winning opening 2001 and the second start opening 2004, which receive the game ball B and give the player a predetermined benefit, are second in favor of the first receiving port 2006. Also known as a reception. This second receptacle may be relatively advantageous over the first receptacle 2006, so that the setting of the first receptacle 2006 does not provide any gaming balls for entering balls. For example, it may be of such a degree that one game ball is given by ball entry. In addition, if the setting of the first receiving port 2006 is to give one gaming ball to entering the ball, two or more gaming balls may be given by entering the ball.

  In addition, the game area 5a is preceded by the game ball B fired with a specific strong firing force entering the second game area 5a2 by connecting the first game area 5a1 and the second game area 5a2 upward. It has the communication passage part 5a4 which can pass through.

  The game board 5 is attached to the front component 1000 that divides the outer periphery of the game area 5a and has an outer shape in a substantially square shape in a front view, and the back of the front component 1000 and divides the rear end of the game area 5a. And a plate-shaped game panel 1100. A plurality of obstacle nails 2007 in contact with the game balls B are implanted in a predetermined gauge arrangement in a part of the front surface of the game panel 1100 which is to be in the game area 5a.

  In addition, the game board 5 is attached to the substrate holder 1200 attached to the lower rear side of the game panel 1100 and to the rear face of the substrate holder 1200, and the game is performed by hitting the game ball B into the game area 5a. And a main control unit 1300 having a main control board 1310X (see FIG. 151) for controlling the contents.

  Furthermore, the game board 5 displays a game situation based on a control signal from the main control board 1310X, and a function display unit 1400 visually attached to the player in the lower left corner of the front component 1000, and a game panel It is attached to the peripheral control unit 1500 disposed on the rear side of the 1100, the effect display device 1600 disposed on the center of the game area 5a in front view and capable of displaying a predetermined effect image, and the front of the game panel 1100. A front unit 2000 and a back unit 3000 attached to the back of the game panel 1100 are provided. Further, the effect display device 1600 is attached to the rear surface of the back unit 3000, and the peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear surface of the effect display device 1600.

  The outer periphery of the game panel 1100 is formed slightly larger than the inner periphery of the frame-shaped front component member 1000, and the outer periphery of the transparent flat base panel 1110 and the base panel 1110 is held. And a frame-like panel holder 1120 to which the back unit 3000 is attached on the rear surface.

  The front unit 2000 is mounted at the center of the third game area 5a3 of the game area 5a in the left-right direction and has a first start port 2002 and one general winning port 2001, and a first game unit 1100 A side unit 2200 attached along the inner rail 1002 near the middle area between the area 5a1 and the third game area 5a3 and having two general winning openings 2001, and the second game area 5a2 and the third game area Attacker unit 2400 attached near the middle area of the main part and having a large winning opening 2005, one general winning opening 2001 (second receiving opening), second starting opening 2004 (second receiving opening), gate section It has 2003 and the 1st entrance 2006, and the front view approximately the center of the game area 5a is slightly above (the 1st game area 5a1, the 2nd game area 5a2, and the 3rd game area 5a3 A frame-shaped center member 2500 attached to state) surrounded three sides of the both lateral and bottom, and a.

  The back unit 3000 is attached to the back surface of the panel holder 1120 and has a box shape open at the front and is attached to the back box 3010 having a square opening 3010 a 2 in the back wall and the back surface of the back box 3010 A lock mechanism 3020 for removably attaching the display device 1600, a drive substrate unit 1700 attached below the opening 3010a2 on the rear surface of the back box 3010, and a plurality of the drive substrate units 1700 attached in the back box 3010 The back effect unit 3100 is provided.

  The drive board unit 1700 includes a panel relay board 1710 for relaying the connection between the main control board 1310X (see FIG. 151) and various sensors and switches provided on the game board 5, and a peripheral control board 1510 included in the peripheral control unit 1500. A panel drive substrate 1720 for driving various decoration substrates and various electric drive sources (various motors and various solenoids) according to a command from the drive, and a drive substrate box 1730 accommodating the panel relay substrate 1710 and the panel drive substrate 1720; Is equipped.

[5-1. Front component]
The front component 1000 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 131 to 141. The front component 1000 has a substantially square outer shape in a front view, an inner shape penetrating in a substantially circular shape in the front-rear direction, and the outer periphery of the game area 5a is divided by the inner shape of the inner shape. The front component 1000 is an outer rail 1001 which extends in an arc shape along the circumferential direction clockwise from the lower end on the left side to the left side in front view and extends to the upper right oblique side passing through the upper end in the left and right direction in front view; The inner rail 1002 disposed inside the front component 1000 substantially along the outer rail 1001 and extending in an arc shape from the center lower portion in the front view left-right direction to the upper left diagonal upper part And an out guiding portion 1003 which is formed at the lowest position of the region 5a and is inclined to be lower toward the rear.

  Further, the front component 1000 includes a lower right rail 1004 and a lower right rail 1004 which are linearly inclined such that the right end is slightly higher from the right end in front view of the out guiding portion 1003 to the vicinity of the right side of the front component 1000. Of the right rail 1005 which extends from the right end of the front component member 1000 to the lower side of the upper end of the outer rail 1001 and whose upper portion is curved inward of the front component member 1000; An abutment portion 1006 such as rubber provided at the intersection of the end with respect to the striking direction and the upper end of the right rail 1005.

  Also, the front component 1000 is pivotally supported at the upper end of the inner rail 1002 and has a closed position and a front view clock extending upward from the upper end of the inner rail 1002 so as to close the space with the outer rail 1001. A backflow preventing member (not shown) which is pivotable in the direction of rotation to be pivotable only between the open position where it and the outer rail 1001 are open and to return to the closed position side. It has 1007.

  Furthermore, the front component member 1000 includes an out ball opening 1008 that penetrates forward and backward at the rear end of the out guiding portion 1003 at the center lower portion in the front view left and right direction in the frame. The gaming ball B induced to the rear by the out guiding portion 1003 is discharged to the rear of the front component 1000 (game panel 1100) through the out ball outlet 1008.

  In addition, the front component 1000 includes an outer portion of the outer rail 1001 and an inner portion of the inner rail 1002 which extends substantially perpendicularly from the lower end, a lower portion of the out guiding portion 1003 and the lower right rail 1004, and an outer portion of the right rail 1005. At each portion, a security concave portion 1009 recessed rearward from the front end is provided. When the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the rear projection 172 of the door frame 3 protruding to the rear of the security cover 170 is It will be in the inserted state. Thus, the space between the crime prevention cover 170 and the game board 5 (the front component 1000) is intricately bent by the rear projection 172 of the crime prevention cover 170 and the crime prevention recess 1009 of the front component 1000. Even if an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire is made to enter the game area 5a from below the front of the board 5 between the crime prevention cover 170 and the front component 1000, it will be blocked by the rear projection 172 and the crime prevention recess 1009. , And can prevent unauthorized tools from entering the gaming area 5a.

  Further, the front component 1000 includes a notch 1010 which is cut upward from the lower end at the lower left corner in a front view. The notch portion 1010 matches the notch portion 1122 of the panel holder 1120 in the game panel 1100, and when the game board 5 is attached to the main frame 4, the notch portion 1010 and the notch portion 1122 are penetrated to lower the full ball. The front end openings of the lower normal dispensing passage 610a and the lower full dispensing passage 610b of the path unit 610 are adapted to face forward.

5-2. Game panel]
The gaming panel 1100 in the gaming board 5 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 131 to 141. The game panel 1100 is attached to the rear surface of the front component 1000, and the front unit 2000 and the rear unit 3000 are attached. The game panel 1100 holds the outer periphery of a flat base plate 1110 which is formed slightly larger than the inner periphery of the frame-shaped front component 1000 and made of a transparent synthetic resin, and the outer periphery of the base panel 1110. And a frame-like panel holder 1120 attached to the rear side of the front component 1000 and to which the back unit 3000 is attached on the rear surface.

  The base panel 1110 of the game panel 1100 is formed of a synthetic resin plate such as acrylic resin, polycarbonate resin, polyarylate resin, methacrylic resin or the like, or an inorganic plate such as glass or metal. The thickness of the base panel 1110 is thinner than that of the panel holder 1120, and the minimum necessary thickness (8 to 10 mm) can be sufficiently maintained even if an obstacle nail is planted on the front or the front unit 2000 is attached. It is assumed. In the present embodiment, the base panel 1110 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin plate.

  The base panel plate 1110 is provided with a decorative pattern formed by a plurality of linear grooves on the rear surface. The decoration pattern of this embodiment includes a plurality of horizontal lines extending horizontally at constant intervals, a plurality of upper right oblique lines rotated 60 degrees counterclockwise at the same intervals as the plurality of horizontal lines, horizontal lines and upper right oblique lines And a plurality of upper left diagonal lines rotated clockwise by 60 degrees at the same interval as a plurality of horizontal lines. In other words, the decoration pattern is a geometric pattern in which a plurality of contours of an equilateral triangle formed by horizontal lines, upper right oblique lines and upper left oblique lines are arranged in a fixed pattern. This decoration pattern, when assembled on the game board 5, includes two equilateral triangle contours on the left and right sides of the first starting opening 2002, and three equilateral triangle contours near the upper end of the inner rail 1002. Inside each, there is further provided a pattern consisting of outlines of two equilateral triangles of different sizes.

  The decorative pattern has a V-shaped cross section. In this decoration pattern 1150, a plurality of panel decoration LEDs for emitting light toward the peripheral surface of the base panel board 1110 mounted on the panel decoration substrate should be viewed from the front player side even when not emitting light And decorate the game area 5a. In addition, when the base panel board 1110 causes the panel decoration LED of the panel decoration board to emit light and light is made to enter the inside of the base panel board 1110, the base panel board 1110 is formed in a geometric pattern consisting of a plurality of equilateral triangle outlines. The decoration pattern can be made to emit light.

  The decorative pattern of the base panel plate 1110 includes a radiation portion for mainly reflecting the light emitted to the inside from the peripheral surface of the base panel plate 1110 forward, and the light emitted to the inside from the peripheral surface of the base panel plate 1110 to the front And a radiation guiding section for guiding light along a line while reflecting light. The radiation guide portion is configured to satisfy at least one of a deep groove and a longer circumferential length in a cross section as compared with the radiation portion. The radiation light guide portion is formed to connect (or intersect) a plurality of radiation portions, and diffusely reflects the light emitted from the peripheral surface of the base panel plate 1110 to the inside in the base panel plate 1110. The light can be guided in the direction in which the grooves extend. That is, the radiation light guide portion plays a role of guiding light from one of the plurality of radiation portions connected to itself to the other, whereby the arrangement portion and the number of the panel decoration LED are limited. In this way, the photosensitivity (proportion of the amount of light emitted (reflected) forward) of the entire decorative pattern of the base panel plate 1110 is enhanced. Specifically, the radiation light guide is a radiation which is disposed outside the range of the normal light guiding region from the panel decoration LED 1130a of the upper left panel decoration substrate 1131 described later and the panel decoration LED of the lower left panel decoration substrate The light is directed to the part to cause its emission part to emit light, and the photosensitivity of the entire decoration pattern is enhanced.

  By this, more light is made to reach the radiation light guide portion with respect to the radiation portion of the decoration pattern formed in the portion where the light from the panel decoration LED is difficult to reach (the portion outside the normal light guide region). Thus, the radiation portion can be illuminated and decorated with a sufficient amount of light. Therefore, when the panel decoration LED of the panel decoration substrate is made to emit light, the light incident on the inside of the base panel plate 1110 is reflected forward from the radiation portion and the radiation light guide portion, and a geometry formed of a plurality of equilateral triangle outlines The decorative pattern formed in the design of the design can be lighted and decorated with uniform brightness over substantially the whole.

  The base panel 1110 is at the lowest position in the game area 5a, and is formed at a position corresponding to the out ball opening 1008 of the front component member 1000. The out recess 1111 is recessed upward from the lower end. Further, in the base panel 1110, a plurality of through holes 1112 penetrating in the front and back direction for attaching the front unit 2000 are formed.

  The panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100 has a size including the base panel 1110 and a substantially square outer shape, and is formed thicker (about 20 mm in the present embodiment) than the base panel 1110. The panel holder 1120 is formed of a synthetic resin (for example, a thermoplastic synthetic resin). The panel holder 1120 is a through hole 1121 which detachably holds the base panel 1110 and which is recessed from the front side toward the rear side, and which penetrates in the front-rear direction with an inside having a size substantially equal to the game area 5a. Is equipped.

  Further, the panel holder 1120 is provided with a notch portion 1122 which is cut upward from the lower end at the lower left corner in a front view. The notch portion 1122 is formed to coincide with the notch portion 1010 of the front component 1000, and when the game board 5 is attached to the main frame 4, it penetrates through the notch portion 1010 and the notch portion 1122. The front end openings of the lower normal discharge passage 610a and the lower full discharge passage 610b of the lower full-tank passage unit 610 are made to face forward.

[5-3. Substrate holder]
The substrate holder 1200 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 140 and 141. The substrate holder 1200 is formed in a horizontally long box shape whose upper and front sides are open, and the bottom surface is inclined so as to be lower toward the center in the left-right direction. The substrate holder 1200 has a discharge portion 1201 which is notched rearward from the front end at the center in the left-right direction on the bottom surface. The substrate holder 1200 covers the lower part of the back unit 3000 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 from the lower side and the rear side in the assembled state to the game board 5 and A main control board box 1320 is attached.

  With the substrate holder 1200 assembled to the pachinko machine 1, the discharge portion 1201 is positioned directly above the discharge ball receiving portion 628 of the base unit 620 b in the substrate unit 620 of the main body frame 4. Thus, the game ball B discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1100 through the out ball opening 1008 and the game ball B discharged downward from the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 can all be received, It can be made to discharge from the discharge part 1201 formed on the bottom to the lower discharge ball receiving part 628.

5-4. Main control unit]
The main control unit 1300 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 140, 141, 143 and 144A to 144K. Main control unit 1300 is removably attached to the rear surface of substrate holder 1200. The main control unit 1300 is provided with a main control unit 1310 having a main control MPU 1310a for controlling the progress of the game, and a main control board box 1320 which is a housing body for accommodating the main control unit 1310 and attached to the substrate holder 1200. There is.

[5-4-1. Main control board box]
The main control board box 1320 is composed of a cover body 1301 and a base body 1302. The cover body 1301 and the base body 1302 are made of polycarbonate and are molded of a transparent synthetic resin. The main control unit 1310 can be accommodated in an internal space 1320 s formed by overlapping the cover body 1301 with the base body 1302. Since the cover body 1301 and the base body 1302 are molded transparently by a synthetic resin (polycarbonate), the state of the front side and the back side of the main control portion 1310 (whether or not illegal modification is performed, or fraud Whether or not the IC chip is mounted can be confirmed from the outside of the main control board box 1320. Further, the main control board box 1320 is provided with a plurality of sealing mechanisms 1320z so as to correspond to the cover body 1301 and the base body 1302, respectively, and when the main control board box 1320 is closed using one sealing mechanism 1320z, Next, in order to open the main control board box 1320, it is necessary to destroy the one sealing mechanism 1320z, and it is possible to leave a trace of opening and closing of the main control board box 1320. Therefore, by looking at the trace of the opening and closing remaining in the sealing mechanism 1320z, it is possible to discover the improper opening and closing of the main control board box 1320, and the deterrence against the fraudulent act on the main control unit 1310 is enhanced.

5-4-2. Main control unit]
The main control unit 1310 controls a main control board 1310X (see FIG. 151) for controlling the progress of the game and the payout of the game ball B, etc., and the distribution probability to the winning probability of the lottery and the area advantageous to the player. And a setting change board 1310Y (see FIG. 151) capable of setting game settings relating to etc. to any of a plurality of setting values. The main control unit 1310 may combine the main control board 1310X and the setting change board 1310Y into one board.

5-4-2-1. Main control board]
The main control board 1310X of the main control unit 1310 is connected to the interface board 635, the peripheral control board 1510, and the setting change board 1310Y. Further, the main control board 1310X includes a function display unit 1400, a gate sensor 2401, a second start port sensor 2402, a special winning port sensor 2403, a first inlet sensor 2406, a start port solenoid 2404, an attacker solenoid 2405, and a general winning port sensor. 3001, a first starting opening sensor 3002, a magnetic sensor 3003, an out port left sensor 1008a, and an out port right sensor 1008b.

[5-4-2-2. Setting change board]
The setting change board 1310 Y of the main control unit 1310 is a setting switch 1311 a capable of switching the setting value of the pachinko machine 1 and confirming the setting value, a setting switching button 1311 b capable of selecting and changing the setting value, And a setting change permission lamp 1311 c indicating a state in which switching of the setting value of the pachinko machine 1 is permitted. The connector SMCN of the setting change substrate 1310Y is connected to the connector MSCN of the main control substrate 1310X (connecting between the substrates) (a connector between the connector SMCN of the setting change substrate 1310Y and the connector MSCN of the main control substrate 1310X is a harness Via an electrical connection). By this connector connection (inter-board connection), the signal from the setting switch 1311 a and the signal from the setting switching button 1311 b are electrically connected to the main control substrate 1310 X. In the setting change substrate 1310Y, the distance dimension in the vertical direction of the right side and the left side is substantially the same as the distance dimension in the vertical direction of the right side and the left side of the main control substrate 1310X, and the distance dimension in the lateral direction is the left and right of the main control substrate 1310X. The center line passing through the middle points of the right and left sides of the main control board 1310X and the center line passing through the middle points of the right and left sides of the setting change board 1310Y are shorter than the distance dimension in the direction It agrees.

  The connector SMCN of the setting change substrate 1310Y is disposed on the center line along the right side of the setting change substrate 1310Y at the center of the distance dimension in the vertical direction, and the connector MSCN of the main control substrate 1310X is mainly Along the left side of the control board 1310X, a position that is the center of the distance dimension in the vertical direction is disposed on the center line. A setting switch 1311a having a setting key cylinder inserted with the setting key K1 below the center line of the setting change board 1310Y and arranged to be turned is disposed, and has a pressing operation portion 1311p above the center line of the setting change board 1310Y. A setting change permission lamp that can emit light in a single color (for example, red) on the center line of the setting change substrate 1310Y and at the upper left of the setting switch 1311a (lower left of the setting switching button 1311b) 1311 c is arranged. A setting indicator 1310 g consisting of a 7-segment LED display unit with a decimal point (so-called dot attached) is disposed above the center line of the main control board 1310 X and near the connector MSCN, and the center line of the main control board 1310 X A base monitor 1310 h configured by arranging six line segments of 7-segment LED displays (pointed in a line) from the center toward the right side from the center to the right side is arranged closer to the center of the lower side of the main control board 1310 X. A RAM clear switch 1310 f having a pressing operation unit similar to the pressing operation unit 1311 p of the setting switching button 1311 b is disposed.

  In this embodiment, a position where the setting key K1 is ready to be inserted into the insertion port formed in the setting key cylinder of the setting switch 1311a (for example, a position where the longitudinal direction of the insertion port having a rectangular shape extends in the vertical direction) The setting switch 1311a is turned off as an initial position. When the setting key cylinder is in the initial position, the setting key K1 can be inserted into the insertion slot, and the setting key K1 can be removed from the insertion slot. In the present embodiment, even if the main frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 while the setting key K1 is inserted into the insertion slot, it is arranged in a row opposite to the island facility of the game hall. The distance dimension of the setting switch 1311a in the depth direction is adopted so that the member of the pachinko machine (or the member of the island facility of the game hall) and the setting key K1 do not interfere with each other and are not damaged.

  The setting switch 1311a can be set to the setting key ON by turning the setting key cylinder clockwise 60 degrees from the initial position and turning the first ON, and the signal of the setting key ON changes the setting. The signal is input from the substrate 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control substrate 1310X. Further, the setting key cylinder can be turned 60 degrees counterclockwise from the initial position and turned on by the second ON so that the setting switch 1311a can be set to the determination key ON, and the signal of the determination key ON is The setting change board 1310Y is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X. In addition, the setting key cylinder is counterclockwise to return the setting switch 1311a from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key is turned on to the initial position which is the original position (that is, the rotating position of the setting key cylinder that turns off the setting switch 1311a). The setting switch 1311a can be turned OFF by being turned 60 degrees toward the direction and turned OFF, and the initial position, which is the original position, from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key 1311a is turned ON. (Ie, the setting key cylinder is turned clockwise by 60 degrees so as to return the setting switch 1311a to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder), and the setting switch 1311a is turned OFF by being turned OFF. it can. The OFF signal is input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X. In this embodiment, two functions completely different from the setting key ON function and the determination key ON function can be realized by only the single setting switch 1311 a depending on the direction in which the setting key is turned. The operation of setting the setting key ON and the operation of setting the determination key ON can be collectively performed only by the single switch 1311 a.

  An opening formed in the cover 1301 of the main control board box 1320 corresponding to the base front of the setting key cylinder of the setting switch 1311a, the pressing operation unit 1311p of the setting switching button 1311b, and the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f Although exposed to the outside through 1301h, the opening 1301h corresponding to the front of the base of the setting key cylinder of the setting switch 1311a, the pressing operation portion 1311p of the setting switching button 1311b, and the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f. Of the cover 1301 corresponding to the openings 1301 h of the cover 1301 so that foreign matter such as a wire can not intrude through the “gap” formed on the substrate 1310 Y and the main control substrate 13 10 X. Switch 1311 And a setting switch button 1311b and a RAM clear switch 1310f, a foreign matter intrusion preventing portion 1301v (for example, fitting of the cylindrical members 1301c shown in FIG. 144H) for preventing the intrusion of foreign matter such as a wire is molded respectively. . Although the setting display 1310g and the base monitor 1310h are accommodated in the internal space 1320s formed by the cover 1301 and the base 1302 and can not be touched at all, the cover 1301 is molded to be transparent as described above. Therefore, it is possible to visually recognize the setting value displayed by the setting display 1310g and the number of balls displayed by the base monitor 1310h through the cover body 1301.

  In order to prevent unauthorized alteration, the wiring pattern to which the signal of the setting key ON of the setting switch 1311a is transmitted, the wiring pattern to which the signal of the determination key ON of the setting switch 1311a is transmitted, and the OFF of the setting switch 1311a Are formed so as not to be close to each other (separate from each other) in the setting change substrate 1310Y as a lead-out of the wiring pattern through which the signal of the above is transmitted and the wiring pattern through which the signal from the setting switching button 1311b is transmitted. At the same time, the connection to the terminal of the connector SMCN of the setting change substrate 1310Y (the terminal of the connector MSCN of the main control substrate 1310X) is also formed separately, and various signals from the setting switch 1311a are transmitted also in the main control substrate 1310X. Wiring pattern (that is, the setting key O of the setting switch 1311a Of the setting switch 1311a, and a wiring pattern of transmitting the OFF signal of the setting switch 1311a) and a signal from the setting switching button 1311b. In addition, the wiring with the wiring pattern to be formed is formed so as not to approach each other (separately from each other), and the wiring with the wiring pattern to which the signal from the RAM clear switch 1310 f is transmitted is also not approached as each other. It is formed (spaced apart).

5-4-2-3. Setting switch, setting switching button, setting display]
The setting switch 1311a, the setting switching button 1311b, and the setting display 1 will be briefly described. Here, first, the case of changing the setting value of the game setting will be briefly described, and the case of performing confirmation display of the current setting value will be briefly described. In addition, since the setting key K1 is an important one that can be used to confirm the current setting value set in addition to changing the setting value, two or three persons including the game hall manager have It is owned only by a limited number of people.

  When changing the setting of the set value, the outer frame 2 is restored when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on or when power is restored at the time of power recovery after a power failure (including a momentary power failure due to a momentary power failure). The main frame 4 is opened, and the setting key K1 is inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is turned clockwise by 60 degrees to perform the first ON operation. Thus, it is necessary to establish a "predetermined setting value change permission condition" that the setting switch 1311a is turned on. That is, those who actually change the setting of the setting work first open the body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 and then turn off the power of the pachinko machine 1 with the power switch 630a and then the setting switch 1311a. The setting key K1 is inserted into the setting key cylinder insertion port, the setting key K1 is turned clockwise by 60 degrees, and the first ON operation is performed to turn on the setting switch 1311a, and then again The power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on by the power switch 630a.

  Therefore, a person who performs setting change of setting values first performs work of opening the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2, and then turns off the power of the pachinko machine 1 by the power switch 630a of FIG. The setting key K1 is inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder, the setting key K1 is turned clockwise by 60 degrees, and the first ON operation is performed to set the setting switch 1311a to the setting key ON. Subsequently, the power switch 630a is operated to power on the pachinko machine 1. Thereby, the signal of the setting key ON is input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X. The main control MPU 1310 a sets the current setting value stored in the specific area of the built-in RAM (setting value 1 to setting value 6 at the time when the setting key cylinder of the setting switch 1311 a is first turned on) The set value is displayed on the setting indicator 1310g, and the setting change permission lamp 1311c is switched from the light-off state to the light-on state.

  Next, when the pressing operation unit 1311p of the setting switching button 1311b is pressed, a detection signal from the setting switching button 1311b of the setting change board 1310Y is input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X. Every time the person who performs setting change of the setting value presses the pressing operation unit of the setting switching button 1311b, the main control MPU 1310a starts from the current setting value based on the detection signal from the setting switching button 1311b of the setting changing board 1310Y. When the value is increased by one and reaches the set value 6, which is the maximum value, the control returns to the set value 1, which is the initial value, and is increased again by 1 and performs control to display the set value on the setting indicator 1310g.

  Next, to determine the setting value, turn the setting key cylinder counterclockwise 120 degrees (that is, from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting switch 1311 a is turned on) To return to the initial position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turns off the setting switch 1311a), turn it 60 degrees counterclockwise and turn it OFF, and then turn 60 degrees counterclockwise. The setting switch 1311a is turned on by the second ON operation (operation). The signal of the determination key ON is input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X. As a result, the main control MPU 1310a stores the setting value determined by changing the setting in a specific area of the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a.

  Next, the setting key cylinder is turned clockwise so as to return the setting switch 1311a to the original position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns off the setting switch 1311a) from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder The setting switch 1311 a is turned off by rotating it 60 degrees and turning it off. This setting key OFF signal is input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X. Thereby, the main control MPU 1310a switches the setting display 1310g to the non-display state, and turns off the setting change permission lamp 1311c.

  Next, the setting key K1 is removed from the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting switch 1311a, the body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, and the setting change setting work is completed.

  In addition, when the confirmation display of the set value currently set is performed, the power is restored when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on or after a power failure (including a momentary power failure due to a momentary power failure). In the case, the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2, and the setting key K1 is inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise. By performing the first ON operation, it is necessary to satisfy the "predetermined setting value display permission condition" that the setting switch 1311a is turned on. That is, a person who performs confirmation display of the set value that is currently set is first confirmed after the state in which the pachinko machine 1 is powered on (the state in which the power has recovered due to a power failure or momentary power failure). Do the work of opening the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2, and then insert the setting key K1 into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting switch 1311a and turn it clockwise by 60 degrees By turning on the setting switch 1311 a, the setting key 1311 is turned on.

  Therefore, the person who confirms the current setting value first confirms the state where the pachinko machine 1 is powered on (the state in which the power is restored due to a power failure or a momentary power failure). Open the main body frame 4 and then insert the setting key K1 into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting switch 1311a and turn it clockwise by 60 degrees to perform the first ON operation. The setting switch 1311a is turned on for the setting key. The signal of the setting key ON is input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X. The main control MPU 1310 a sets the current setting value stored in the specific area of the built-in RAM (setting value 1 to setting value 6 at the time when the setting key cylinder of the setting switch 1311 a is first turned on) The set value is displayed on the setting display 1310g. At this time, the state in which the setting change permission lamp 1311c is turned off is maintained, and even if the person who confirms the setting value presses the pressing operation portion 1311p of the setting switching button 1311b, the setting value corresponds to this pressing operation. There is no change at all, and the contents displayed on the setting display 1310g are also not changed.

  Then, when the confirmation of the currently set setting value is completed, from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting switch 1311a is turned on to the original position (that is, from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder which turns off the setting switch 1311a) To return, turn it 60 degrees counterclockwise and turn it off. This setting key OFF signal is input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X, and the state of the setting value by the setting display 1310g disappears.

  Finally, remove the setting key K1 from the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting switch 1311a, close the body frame 4 to the outer frame 2, and complete the confirmation display of the currently set setting value. Do.

  In addition, as described above, the preset value change permission condition set in advance is at the time of power restoration at the time of power on of the pachinko machine 1 or at the time of power recovery at the time of power failure after power failure (including momentary power failure generating momentary power failure). The main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2, and the setting key K1 is inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise. While the setting key ON operation needs to be performed by performing the first ON operation, the preset setting value display permission condition is, as described above, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on or a power failure (Including momentary power failure due to a momentary power failure.) After power recovery after power recovery, the main unit frame 4 is opened to the outer frame 2, and the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting switch 1311a. Set to K1 is inserted, it is necessary to set the key cylinder is set key ON operation by the first ON operation is 60 degrees rotation operation toward the clockwise direction. As described above, the predetermined setting change permission condition and the predetermined setting display permission condition are determined by opening the body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 and inserting the setting key cylinder of the setting switch 1311a. There is a common requirement in that the setting key K1 is inserted, the setting key cylinder is turned clockwise by 60 degrees, and the setting key is turned ON by the first ON operation. While "set at power recovery" is a requirement of the set value change permission condition, the preset set value display permission condition is different in that "after power recovery" is set as a requirement.

  Here, to explain the setting value of the game setting, “setting value” refers to the probability for lottery determination whether it is a big hit or not, and the probability for lottery determination whether it is a small hit or not, from the time of probability variation It is possible to change the probability for making a lottery determination when shifting to the normal time (collectively referred to as “probability of winning a lottery”), the distribution rate to an area which is advantageous for the player, etc. The probability (degree of advantage) that is advantageous to the player (that is, the number of game balls that can be acquired by the player can be increased) is set in advance. In the present embodiment, set value 1, set value 2, set value 3, set value 4, set value 5 and set value 6 are prepared in advance as set values of a plurality of levels, and set value 1 to set value 6 The probability (advancing degree) to be advantageous to the player is set in advance. The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X uses various tables used in various lottery determinations associated with setting values (for example, a big hit determination table defining the ratio of a big hit determination value indicating that a big hit has been won, a big hit symbol A big hit symbol determination table in which the percentage of the determination value of the determination is defined, a small hit determination table in which the percentage of the small hit determination value indicating that the small hit is won is defined, the percentage of the determination value of the small hit symbol determination is defined Small hit symbol decision table, a normal transition decision table etc. where the ratio of the judgment value of transition decision from definite variation to normal time is specified) or used at various distribution rates associated with setting value Various tables (for example, a distribution table that specifies distribution time, a block that manages driving of an electric drive source such as a motor and a solenoid, etc.) are selected. To or. The various determination values are allocated to the various tables used in the various lottery determinations associated with the set values at a predetermined ratio. The various tables used in the various lottery determinations are set so that at least a part of the values are different from each other, and the various tables used in the various distribution rates are set so that at least a part of the values differ from each other In some cases, the values may differ based on the relationship between the table corresponding to the block managing the drive of one electrical drive source and the table corresponding to the block managing the drive of the other electrical drive source. Some are set to. In addition, although six setting values (integers) ranging from setting value 1 to setting value 6 were used as the setting values described above, they may be in a range smaller than this, or in many ranges. It may be one. For example, four setting values (integers) ranging from setting value 1 to setting value 4 may be used, or eight setting values (integers) ranging from setting value 1 to setting value 8 may be used.

  As described above, the setting display 1310 g displays the set value, and the main control MPU 1310 a checks the contents of the RAM built in itself when the power returns, and determines whether or not there is an abnormality. If it is determined that there is an abnormality, and if the main control side power-off process has not ended normally when the power is shut off, the contents stored in the RAM built in itself are abnormal (or trusted) And an error display telling that effect. In the present embodiment, the main control MPU 1310a displays the letter E on the setting display 1310g as an error display.

  Next, to briefly explain the base monitor 1310h, the base monitor 1310h is collected by the out port 1008 provided in the game area 5a defined in the game board 5 among the game balls fired in the game area 5a. The number of game balls is displayed. Of the game balls fired in the game area 5a, the game balls collected by the out port 1008 are detected by any one of the out port left sensor 1008a and the out port right sensor 1008b, and this detection signal is detected by the panel The data is input to the main control MPU 1310 a via the relay board 1710.

  The main control MPU 1310a counts the number of gaming balls collected by the out port 1008, stores the counting result (total number) in a specific area of the built-in RAM, and displays it on the base monitor 1310h. It has become.

  In the embodiment described above, the setting switch 1311a is returned from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key is turned on to the initial position which is the original position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turns off the setting switch 1311a). The setting switch 1311a can be set as the determination key ON by performing the second ON operation by rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise toward the counterclockwise direction and further performing the 60 deg rotation operation counterclockwise). The signal of the decision key ON is input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X. The setting key is the setting key which turns on the setting switch 1311a from the initial position of the setting switch 1311a. A setting switch that can be operated to rotate only within the range up to the rotational position of the cylinder It may be used as the switch 1311a '. In this case, the setting switch 1311 a ′ is turned counterclockwise from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key is turned on to the initial position which is the original position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turns off the setting switch 1311 a) The setting switch 1311a 'can be turned on by pressing the setting switch 1311a' by turning it by 60 degrees and turning it off, and a signal of the decision key ON is input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X. (The mode of the setting switch 1311a ′ may be described as “modification (1) of determination key”).

In the embodiment described above, the setting switch 1311a is returned from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key is turned on to the initial position which is the original position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder which turns off the setting switch 1311a). The setting switch 1311a can be set as the determination key ON by performing the second ON operation by rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise toward the counterclockwise direction and further performing the 60 deg rotation operation counterclockwise). The signal of the determination key ON is input from the setting change substrate 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control substrate 1310X. However, although not shown, the pressing operation unit is set on the setting change substrate 1310Y. A decision key button may be provided. In this case, the pressing operation unit of the decision key button is exposed to the outside through the opening formed in the cover 1301 of the main control board box 1320 corresponding to the decision key button, and the pressing operation unit of the decision key button The foreign matter intrusion prevention of the setting switching button 1311 b so that foreign matter such as a wire can be intruded from the “gap” formed in the opening corresponding to this to change the setting change substrate 1310 Y and the main control substrate 1310 X A foreign matter intrusion prevention unit similar to the unit 1301v is provided.
When the pressing operation unit of the determination key button is pressed, this operation signal is input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X. The main control MPU 1310a can determine that the decision key is ON when the pressing operation unit of the decision key button is pressed based on the detection signal from the decision key button, while the pressing operation unit of the decision key button is When the pressing operation is not performed, it can be determined that the determination key is not ON.

  The position where the decision key button is arranged on the setting change board 1310Y may be near the setting switch 1311a or near the setting switching button 1311b. On the cover body 1301 of the main control board box 1320, a sticker on which the name of each button is printed is attached to the decision key button and the setting switching button 1311b so that the decision key button and the setting switching button 1311b are not confused. (The name of each button may be molded on the cover instead of this seal). Also, in order not to confuse the decision key button and the setting switching button 1311b, a button with a cover (for pressing the pressing operation section) which covers any one pressing operation section of the decision key button and the setting switching button 1311b. The cover may need to be opened), or the color of the pressing unit may be different, or the shape of the outer shape of the enter key button and the setting switching button 1311 b or pressing operation The shape of the part may be different, or another type of switch not having the pressing operation part may be adopted as the determination key button. Other types of switches that do not have a pressing operation unit as the determination key button include, for example, various types such as a toggle switch having a lever, a slide switch having a slide unit, a rotary switch having a rotation operation unit, a rocker switch, and a touch switch. Switch can be mentioned. When the setting change board 1310Y is provided with the determination key button and the setting switching button 1311b, the wiring pattern to the determination key button and the wiring pattern to the setting switching button 1311b are routed in order to prevent unauthorized alteration. And the connection to the terminal of the connector SMCN of the setting change substrate 1310Y (the terminal of the connector MSCN of the main control substrate 1310X) is also separated. In the main control board 1310X as well, the wiring pattern to which the detection signal from the determination key button is transmitted and the wiring pattern to which the detection signal from the setting switching button 1311b is transmitted do not approach each other ( They are formed apart from one another. In addition, when the determination key button is provided on the setting change board 1310Y, setting can be performed only in the range from the initial position of the setting switch 1311a to the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key 1311a is turned on. The switch 1311a ′ may be used (a mode of the determination key button (a mode of the setting switch 1311a ′ may be included) may be described as “modification of determination key (2)”).

  In the embodiment described above, the setting switch 1311a is returned from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key is turned on to the initial position which is the original position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder which turns off the setting switch 1311a). The setting switch 1311a can be set as the determination key ON by performing the second ON operation by rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise toward the counterclockwise direction and further performing the 60 deg rotation operation counterclockwise). The signal of the determination key ON is input from the setting change substrate 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control substrate 1310X. Instead, the palm or finger of the handle unit 180 touches the handle 182 of the handle unit 180. Detection signal from the handle touch sensor 192 for detecting whether or not the player is The detection signal from the one-shot button operation sensor 194, which detects whether or not to forcibly stop the launch of the game ball B by the, is branched in the payout control substrate 633, and the main control substrate 1310X is branched via the payout control substrate 633. The presence or absence of the determination key ON may be determined based on these detection signals that are input to the main control MPU 1310a. In this case, the main control MPU 1310a can determine that the determination key is ON when the palm or finger is touching the handle 182 based on the detection signal from the handle touch sensor 192, while the palm or finger is on the handle 182 When it is not touched, it can be determined that the decision key is not ON, and / or when the launch of the game ball B is forcibly stopped based on the detection signal from the one-shot button operation sensor 194, the decision key is ON. While it can be determined that there is, when it is not forcibly stopped the launch of the game ball B it can be determined that the determination key is not ON (a mode of the handle touch sensor (even including a mode of a one-shot button operation sensor May be described as “modification of decision key (3)”.

  In the embodiment described above, the setting switch 1311a is returned from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key is turned on to the initial position which is the original position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder which turns off the setting switch 1311a). The setting switch 1311a can be set as the determination key ON by performing the second ON operation by rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise toward the counterclockwise direction and further performing the 60 deg rotation operation counterclockwise). The signal of the determination key ON is input from the setting change substrate 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control substrate 1310X. Instead, however, the signal is provided to the emission control unit 633b of the payout control substrate 633 described later. A firing reference pulse is branched from the firing timing control circuit at the dispensing control substrate 633 to be a dispensing control base. 633 through, is input to the main control MPU1310a of the main control board 1310X, may determine whether the determination key ON on the basis of these firing reference pulses. The firing reference pulse is a reference pulse which allows 100 game balls B to be launched toward the game area 5a per minute, and is generated based on a clock signal from the oscillation circuit. In this case, the main control MPU 1310a can determine that the determination key is ON when the emission reference pulse from the payout control board 633 is input, but determines that the determination key is not ON when the emission reference pulse is not input. (The aspect of the emission reference pulse may be described as “modification of decision key (4)”).

  In the embodiment described above, the setting switch 1311a is returned from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key is turned on to the initial position which is the original position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder which turns off the setting switch 1311a). The setting switch 1311a can be set as the determination key ON by performing the second ON operation by rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise toward the counterclockwise direction and further performing the 60 deg rotation operation counterclockwise). Although the signal of the determination key ON is input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X, it is possible to detect the action of the player sitting on the other side of the pachinko machine 1 A distance measuring sensor is provided on the game board 5, and a detection signal from the distance measuring sensor is transmitted to the peripheral control substrate 15 via the relay substrate. When it is input to 0, the detection signal from the distance measuring sensor is branched at the relay substrate and input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control substrate 1310X via the relay substrate, and the determination key is determined based on the detection signal The presence or absence of ON may be determined. In the distance measuring sensor, the light emitted from the light emitting portion passes through the transparent glass plate 162 of the glass unit 160 in the door frame 3, and is reflected to the player's arm or hand within a predetermined distance dimension. The reflected light passes through the transparent glass plate 162 again and is received by the light receiving unit, whereby the action of the player can be detected. In this case, when the detection signal from the distance measuring sensor is input through the relay board, the main control MPU 1310a determines the presence or absence of the operation based on the detection signal, and when it is determined that the operation is present, the determination key is ON. While it can be determined that there is an operation, when it is determined that there is no operation, it can be determined that the determination key is not ON (an aspect of the distance measurement sensor may be described as "modification 5 of determination key") .

  Further, in the embodiment described above, the setting key cylinder can be turned 60 degrees clockwise from the initial position and turned on by the first ON so that the setting switch 1311a can be set to the setting key ON. The signal of the setting key ON is input from the setting change substrate 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control substrate 1310X, and the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees counterclockwise from the initial position to perform the second ON operation. Thus, the setting switch 1311a can be set as the determination key ON, and the signal of the determination key ON is input from the setting change substrate 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control substrate 1310X, and the setting switch 1311a is set the setting key ON. Initial position which is the original position from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder It is possible to turn off the setting switch 1311a by rotating the setting key cylinder counterclockwise 60 degrees and turning it off so as to return the rotation of the setting key cylinder to turn the switch 1311a off. The setting key cylinder is turned clockwise so that the setting switch 1311a is returned from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the determination key is turned on to the initial position which is the original position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turns off the setting switch 1311a). The setting switch 1311a can be turned OFF by being turned 60 degrees toward the head and turned OFF, and a signal of this OFF can be input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X. Setting key ON, decision key ON, and Information to tell OFF, as serial information, a serial output circuit capable of serially outputting to the outside, may be provided to set the switch 1311a. Thereby, security can be improved with respect to the signal from the setting switch 1311a. The setting switch 1311 a provided with the serial output circuit is provided on the setting change substrate 1310 Y, but may be provided on the main control substrate 1310 X or on the payout control substrate 633 instead. When serial information serially output from the serial output circuit is input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X, the main control MPU 1310a selects the setting key ON, the determination key ON, and the like from received serial information. It is possible to determine which one is to be transmitted among OFF (the mode of the setting switch 1311a having a serial circuit may be described as "modification (6) of determination key").

  Further, in the embodiment described above, the setting key cylinder can be turned 60 degrees clockwise from the initial position and turned on by the first ON so that the setting switch 1311a can be set to the setting key ON. The signal of the setting key ON is input from the setting change substrate 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control substrate 1310X, and the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees counterclockwise from the initial position to perform the second ON operation. Thus, the setting switch 1311a can be set as the determination key ON, and the signal of the determination key ON is input from the setting change substrate 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control substrate 1310X, and the setting switch 1311a is set the setting key ON. Initial position which is the original position from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder It is possible to turn off the setting switch 1311a by rotating the setting key cylinder counterclockwise 60 degrees and turning it off so as to return the rotation of the setting key cylinder to turn the switch 1311a off. The setting key cylinder is turned clockwise so that the setting switch 1311a is returned from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the determination key is turned on to the initial position which is the original position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turns off the setting switch 1311a). The setting switch 1311a can be turned OFF by being turned 60 degrees toward the head and turned OFF, and a signal of this OFF can be input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X. Setting key ON, decision key ON, and Information to tell OFF, as a pulse signal, a pulse output circuit which can output to the outside, may be provided to set the switch 1311a. Thereby, security can be improved with respect to the signal from the setting switch 1311a. The setting switch 1311 a provided with this pulse output circuit is provided on the setting change substrate 1310 Y, but may be provided on the main control substrate 1310 X or on the payout control substrate 633 instead. For example, the pulse width of the pulse signal output from the pulse output circuit is set to 1 ms in the case of information for transmitting the setting key ON, and the pulse width is set in 3 ms in the information for transmitting the determination key ON. And the pulse width is set to 5 ms in the case of information to convey OFF. When the pulse signal output from this pulse output circuit is input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X, the main control MPU 1310a starts the setting key ON from the input pulse signal, the determination key ON, It is possible to determine which of the two and OFF the information is to be transmitted (a mode of the setting switch 1311a having a pulse output circuit may be described as "modification (7) of determination key").

  Further, in the embodiment described above, the setting key cylinder can be turned 60 degrees clockwise from the initial position and turned on by the first ON so that the setting switch 1311a can be set to the setting key ON. The signal of the setting key ON is input from the setting change substrate 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control substrate 1310X, and the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees counterclockwise from the initial position to perform the second ON operation. Thus, the setting switch 1311a can be set as the determination key ON, and the signal of the determination key ON is input from the setting change substrate 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control substrate 1310X, and the setting switch 1311a is set the setting key ON. Initial position which is the original position from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder It is possible to turn off the setting switch 1311a by rotating the setting key cylinder counterclockwise 60 degrees and turning it off so as to return the rotation of the setting key cylinder to turn the switch 1311a off. The setting key cylinder is turned clockwise so that the setting switch 1311a is returned from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the determination key is turned on to the initial position which is the original position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turns off the setting switch 1311a). The setting switch 1311a can be turned OFF by being turned 60 degrees toward the head and turned OFF, and a signal of this OFF can be input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X. The voltage level of the signal of the setting key ON The voltage level of the determination key ON signal and the voltage level of the OFF signal are set to an intermediate potential (for example, 2 V to 3 V out of zero V to 5 V) between the substrates ranging from the setting change substrate 1310Y to the main control substrate 1310X. A comparator circuit is provided on the main control board 1310X using the potentials up to), and the comparison result by the comparator circuit is input to the main control MPU 1310a, whereby the main control MPU 1310a turns ON / OFF the signal of the setting key ON, and the determination key It is also possible to determine ON / OFF of the ON signal and ON / OFF of the OFF signal. Thereby, security can be improved with respect to the signal from the setting switch 1311 a (an aspect of the setting switch using the intermediate potential may be described as “modification (8) of determination key”).

  In the embodiment described above, the setting switch 1311a is returned from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key is turned on to the initial position which is the original position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder which turns off the setting switch 1311a). The setting switch 1311a can be set as the determination key ON by performing the second ON operation by rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise toward the counterclockwise direction and further performing the 60 deg rotation operation counterclockwise). The signal of the determination key ON is input from the setting change substrate 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control substrate 1310X. However, instead of this, the determination key button having a pressing operation portion on the payout control substrate 633 May be provided. In this case, the pressing operation unit of the decision key button is exposed through the opening formed in the cover of the payout control board box 632 corresponding to the decision key button, and corresponds to the pressing operation unit of the decision key button And a structure in which the wire intrusion preventing portion is molded to the cover body with respect to the opening so that the dispensing control substrate 633 can not be modified by intrusion of a wire or the like from the “gap” formed in the opening. Become. When the pressing operation unit of the determination key button is pressed, this operation signal is input from the payout control board 633 to the main control MPU 1310 a of the main control board 1310 X. The main control MPU 1310a can determine that the decision key is ON when the pressing operation unit of the decision key button is pressed based on the detection signal from the decision key button, while the pressing operation unit of the decision key button is When the pressing operation is not performed, it can be determined that the determination key is not ON.

  The position where the enter key button is arranged on the payout control substrate 633 may be in the vicinity of an error release switch 633d having a pressing operation unit described later. The cover of the dispensing control board 633 has a sticker with the name of each button printed on the position corresponding to each of the decision key button and the error clearing switch 633d so that the decision key button and the error clearing switch 633d are not confused. It is stuck (in place of this seal, the name of each button may be molded on the cover). Also, in order to prevent confusion between the decision key button and the error release switch 633d, a button with a cover that covers any one of the press operation portion of the decision key button and the error release switch 633d (for pressing the pressing operation portion The cover may need to be opened) or a different color of the pressing part may be adopted, or the shape of the outline of the decision key button and the error release switch 633d or the pressing operation The shape of the part may be different, or another type of switch not having the pressing operation part may be adopted as the determination key button. Other types of switches that do not have a pressing operation unit as the determination key button include, for example, various types such as a toggle switch having a lever, a slide switch having a slide unit, a rotary switch having a rotation operation unit, a rocker switch, and a touch switch. Switch can be mentioned. In addition, when the determination control button 633 and the error release switch 633d are provided on the payout control board 633, in order to prevent unauthorized alteration, the wiring pattern of the determination key button and the wiring pattern of the error release switch 633d are routed. Are formed so as not to be close to each other (detached from each other) in the payout control board 633, and connections to terminals of the connector of the payout control board 633 (terminals of the connector of the main control board 1310X) are also spaced apart Also in the main control board 1310X, the wiring pattern to which the detection signal from the determination key button is transmitted and the wiring pattern to which the detection signal from the error release switch 633d is transmitted do not approach each other (the mutual Spaced apart). In addition, when the determination key button is provided on the payout control board 633, setting can be performed only in the range from the initial position of the setting switch 1311a to the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key 1311a is turned on. The switch 1311a ′ may be used (a mode of the determination key button (a mode of the setting switch 1311a ′ may be included) may be described as “modification of the determination key (9)”).

  In the embodiment described above, the setting switch 1311a is returned from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key is turned on to the initial position which is the original position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder which turns off the setting switch 1311a). The setting switch 1311a can be set as the determination key ON by performing the second ON operation by rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise toward the counterclockwise direction and further performing the 60 deg rotation operation counterclockwise). The signal of the determination key ON is input from the setting change substrate 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control substrate 1310X. However, instead of this, an error release switch having a pressing operation portion on the payout control substrate 633. The signal from 633 d is branched at the payout control board 633 and is delivered via the payout control board 633. Is input to the main control MPU1310a control board 1310X, may determine whether the determination key ON on the basis of this signal. As described above, the error release switch 633d is for releasing the error displayed on the error LED indicator 633c, and after power recovery, the system of the pachinko machine 1 is completely started (power supplies of various control boards When the time input processing is completed and interrupt processing is performed) and no error occurs as the state of the pachinko machine 1, there is no operation at all on the pressing operation portion of the error release switch 633d. Therefore, the main control MPU 1310a can determine that the determination key is ON when the pressing operation portion of the error release switch 633d is operated based on the signal from the error release switch 633d, while the main control MPU 1310a can determine from the error release switch 633d. It can be determined based on the signal that the determination key is not ON when the pressing operation portion of the error release switch 633d is not operated. Thereby, security can be improved with respect to the presence or absence of the decision key (an aspect of the error release switch may be described as “modification of decision key (10)”).

  In the embodiment described above, the setting switch 1311a is returned from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key is turned on to the initial position which is the original position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder which turns off the setting switch 1311a). The setting switch 1311a can be set as the determination key ON by performing the second ON operation by rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise toward the counterclockwise direction and further performing the 60 deg rotation operation counterclockwise). The signal of the determination key ON is input from the setting change substrate 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control substrate 1310X. However, instead of this, an error release switch having a pressing operation portion on the payout control substrate 633. Payout control in which the payout control MPU 633aa of the payout control board 633 described later the logic of the signal from 633d Monitors and creates commands in the port input process at power-on process, and sends the command created in the command transmission process of payout control section power-on process described later to the main control board 1310X and receives this command The main control MPU 1310a of the control board 1310X may determine the presence / absence of the determination key ON. As described above, the error release switch 633d is for releasing the error displayed on the error LED indicator 633c, and after power recovery, the system of the pachinko machine 1 is completely started (power supplies of various control boards When the time input processing is completed and interrupt processing is performed) and no error occurs as the state of the pachinko machine 1, there is no operation at all on the pressing operation portion of the error release switch 633d. Therefore, in the frame command reception process in the main control timer interrupt process described later, the main control MPU 1310a determines that the payout control MPU 633aa determines that the pressing operation unit is operated based on the signal from the error release switch 633d. When the command to transmit is received, it can be determined that the determination key is ON, while the payout control MPU 633aa determines that the pressing operation unit is not operated based on the signal from the error release switch 633d, and transmits a command to that effect. When it is determined that the decision key is not ON. Thereby, security can be improved with respect to the presence / absence of the decision key (an error release switch mode 2 may be described as “variation example of decision key (11)”).

  In the embodiment described above, the RAM clear switch 1310 f is provided on the main control board 1310 X, and the initial position (that is, the setting switch 1311 a) is the original position from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key 1311 a is turned on. Turn it 60 degrees counterclockwise to return to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder to be turned OFF, and turn it back 60 degrees counterclockwise) and turn on the second ON) Thus, the setting switch 1311a can be set to the determination key ON, and the signal of the determination key ON is input from the setting change substrate 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control substrate 1310X, but instead of this, The RAM clear switch 1310 f is provided on the payout control board 633 to An operation signal from the switch 1310 f is input to the payout control MPU 633 aa of the payout control board 633 and is branched at the payout control board 633 and input to the main control MPU 1310 a of the main control board 1310 X via the payout control board 633 The presence or absence of the determination key ON may be determined based on the operation signal input from the control MPU 1310a. As described later, the RAM clear switch 1310 f operates the pressing operation unit at the time of power recovery (precisely, when powering on the pachinko machine 1 while pressing the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310 f ), When performing setting change capable of changing and determining the setting value (when the main control MPU 1310 a performs setting change processing described later), the main control MPU 1310 a is configured in a predetermined area of RAM (RAM Clear all the areas except for the specific area. Therefore, the power on of the pachinko machine 1 is performed while the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310 f is pressed to always clear the predetermined area of the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310 a itself, the RAM clear switch 1310 f The main control MPU 1310a uses the decision key ON when the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f is pressed based on the operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f provided on the payout control board 633. On the basis of the operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310 f provided on the payout control board 633, it is determined that the determination key is not ON when the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310 f is not pressed. At That. Thus, security can be improved with respect to the presence or absence of the decision key ON.

  The pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310 f provided on the payout control substrate 633 is exposed through the opening formed in the cover of the payout control substrate box 632 corresponding to the RAM clear switch 1310 f, and the pressing operation of the RAM clear switch 1310 f Foreign matter intrusion prevention similar to the foreign matter intrusion prevention portion 1301 v so that the dispensing control substrate 633 can not be modified by invading a wire or the like from the “gap” formed in the portion and the corresponding opening portion. The part is formed.

  The position where the RAM clear switch 1310 f is disposed on the payout control substrate 633 may be in the vicinity of an error release switch 633 d having a pressing operation unit described later. On the cover of the payout control board 633, the names of the buttons are printed at positions corresponding to the RAM clear switch 1310f and the error release switch 633d, respectively, so that the RAM clear switch 1310f and the error release switch 633d are not confused. A seal is attached (the name of each button may be molded on the cover instead of the seal). Also, to prevent confusion between the RAM clear switch 1310 f and the error release switch 633 d, a button with a cover (press operation on the press operation unit) that covers either one of the RAM clear switch 1310 f and the error release switch 633 d In order to do this, it is necessary to open the cover) or to use a different pressing operation unit color, or the shape of the external shape of the RAM clear switch 1310 f and the error release switch 633 d. Alternatively, one having a different shape of the pressing portion may be employed, or another type of switch not having the pressing portion may be employed as the RAM clear switch 1310 f. For example, a toggle switch having a lever, a slide switch having a slide portion, a rotary switch having a rotational operation portion, a rotary switch, a rocker switch, a touch switch, etc., as the RAM clear switch 1310 f. Various switches can be mentioned. When the RAM clear switch 1310f and the error release switch 633d are provided on the payout control board 633, the wiring pattern to the RAM clear switch 1310f and the wiring pattern to the error release switch 633d are provided in order to prevent unauthorized alteration. And the connection to the terminal of the connector of the payout control board 633 (the terminal of the connector of the main control board 1310 X) is also separated Also in the main control board 1310X, the wiring pattern to which the operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f is transmitted and the wiring pattern to which the detection signal from the error release switch 633d is transmitted do not approach each other. It is formed (spaced apart). When the RAM clear switch 1310f is provided on the payout control board 633, only the range from the initial position of the setting switch 1311a to the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key 1311a is turned on can be turned. The setting switch 1311a ′ may be used (a mode of the RAM clear switch (a mode of the setting switch 1311a ′ may be included) may be described as “modification of decision key (12)”).

  In the embodiment described above, the RAM clear switch 1310 f is provided on the main control board 1310 X, and the initial position (that is, the setting switch 1311 a) is the original position from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key 1311 a is turned on. Turn it 60 degrees counterclockwise to return to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder to be turned OFF, and turn it back 60 degrees counterclockwise) and turn on the second ON) Thus, the setting switch 1311a can be set to the determination key ON, and the signal of the determination key ON is input from the setting change substrate 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control substrate 1310X, but instead of this, The RAM clear switch 1310 f is provided on the payout control board 633 to The logic of the operation signal from the switch 1310 f is monitored in the port input process of the payout control unit power-on process described later and the payout control MPU 633 aa of the payout control board 633 described later creates a command, and the payout control unit power-on process described later The command created in the command transmission process may be transmitted to the main control board 1310X, and the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X having received this command may determine the presence / absence of the determination key ON. As described later, the RAM clear switch 1310 f operates the pressing operation unit at the time of power recovery (precisely, when powering on the pachinko machine 1 while pressing the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310 f ), When performing setting change capable of changing and determining the setting value (when the main control MPU 1310 a performs setting change processing described later), the main control MPU 1310 a is configured in a predetermined area of RAM (RAM Clear all the areas except for the specific area. Therefore, the power on of the pachinko machine 1 is performed while the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310 f is pressed to always clear the predetermined area of the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310 a itself, the RAM clear switch 1310 f The main control MPU 1310a can be used as the determination key, and the main control MPU 1310a can be used as the RAM clear switch 1310f based on the operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f provided on the payout control board 633 in the frame command reception process in the main control timer interrupt process described later When it is determined that the payout control MPU 633aa determines that the pressing operation unit is operated and the command to convey the effect is received, it can be determined that the enter key is ON, while the RAM clear switch 1310f provided on the payout control board 633 It can be determined not determined key ON when receiving a command to communicate that fact to determine RAM clear switch 1310f depressing operation portion is unmanipulated the payout control MPU633aa of based on et operation signal. Thereby, the security can be improved with respect to the presence or absence of the determination key ON (Aspect 2 of the RAM clear switch (may include the aspect of the setting switch 1311 a ′)) “Modified example of the determination key (13)” And may be written).

  In the embodiment described above, the out-port left sensor 1008a and the out-port right sensor 1008b are input to the main control board 1310X via the panel relay board 1710, and the setting key 1311a is turned on by the setting key. Turn it 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it back to the initial position which is the original position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder which turns off the setting switch 1311a) The setting switch 1311a can be made to be the determination key ON by performing a second ON operation by rotating it by 60 degrees, and the signal of the determination key ON can be sent from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X. It was supposed to be input, but instead, the out-port left sensor 10 8a and an out-port right sensor 1008b are input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X via (via) the payout control board 633, and an out-port left sensor 1008a to which the main control MPU 1310a is input, and an out-port The presence or absence of the determination key ON may be determined based on the detection signal from the right sensor 1008b. As described above, the game balls emitted to the game area 5a partitioned in the game board 5 are collected by the out port 1008 provided in the game area 5a. As described above, the gaming ball collected by the out-port 1008 is detected by one of the out-port left sensor 1008 a and the out-port right sensor 1008 b. Therefore, the main control MPU 1310a is a case where the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4 based on the detection signal from the door frame open switch 4a, and the out-port left sensor 1008a and the out-port Based on a detection signal from any one of the right sensors 1008b, it can be determined that the decision key is ON when the out port 1008 has recovered the game ball, while the door frame 3 is against the main body frame 4 When it is not open (that is, it is closed) and / or when the out port 1008 has not collected the game ball based on the detection signals of the out port left sensor 1008 a and the out port right sensor 1008 b. It can be determined that the decision key is not ON. In this case, the setting switch 1311 a ′ may be operated to rotate only in the range from the initial position to the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key 1311 is turned on from the initial position The mode of the setting switch 1311 a ′ may be included.) May be described as “modification of determination key (14)”. In this case, a person who changes the setting of the setting value needs to open the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 and send the game ball B to the out port 1008 in order to set the decision key ON.

  In the embodiment described above, the out-port left sensor 1008a and the out-port right sensor 1008b are input to the main control board 1310X via the panel relay board 1710, and the setting key 1311a is turned on by the setting key. Turn it 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it back to the initial position which is the original position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder which turns off the setting switch 1311a) The setting switch 1311a can be made to be the determination key ON by performing a second ON operation by rotating it by 60 degrees, and the signal of the determination key ON can be sent from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X. It was supposed to be input, but instead, the out-port left sensor 10 8a and the logic of the detection signal from the out-port right sensor 1008b are monitored in the port input process of the payout control unit power-on process described later by the payout control MPU 633aa of the payout control board 633 to create a command, and payout control described later The command created in the command transmission process of the part power on process may be transmitted to the main control board 1310X, and the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X having received this command may determine the presence / absence of the determination key ON. As described above, the game balls emitted to the game area 5a partitioned in the game board 5 are collected by the out port 1008 provided in the game area 5a. As described above, the gaming ball collected by the out-port 1008 is detected by one of the out-port left sensor 1008 a and the out-port right sensor 1008 b. Therefore, the main control MPU 1310a collects the game ball by the out port 1008 based on the detection signals from the out port left sensor 1008a and the out port right sensor 1008b in the frame command reception process in the main control timer interrupt process described later. When it is determined that the payout control MPU 633aa determines and the command to convey that is received, it can be determined that the decision key is ON, but the payout control MPU 633aa determines that the gaming ball has not been collected by the out port 1008, and When the command to notify that is received, it can be determined that the decision key is not ON. In this case, the setting switch 1311a 'may be configured to rotate only in a range from the initial position to the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key 1311 is turned on from the initial position (aspect 2 of the out port switch) (A mode of the setting switch 1311 a ′ may be included.) May be described as “modification of determination key (15)”. In this case, a person who changes the setting of the setting value needs to open the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 and send the game ball B to the out port 1008 in order to set the decision key ON.

  In the embodiment described above, the setting switch 1311a is returned from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key is turned on to the initial position which is the original position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder which turns off the setting switch 1311a). The setting switch 1311a can be set as the determination key ON by performing the second ON operation by rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise toward the counterclockwise direction and further performing the 60 deg rotation operation counterclockwise). The signal of the determination key ON is input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X, but instead, the full tank detection sensor 154, the ball cut detection sensor 574, or A detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591 is input to the payout control MPU 633 aa of the payout control board 633. Both are branched in the payout control substrate 633 and input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control substrate 1310X via the payout control substrate 633, and the main control MPU 1310a determines the presence / absence of the determination key ON based on these detection signals. Good, the logic of the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154, the ball out detection sensor 574, or the payout detection sensor 591 in the port input process of the payout control processing when the payout control MPU 633aa of the payout control board 633 described later The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X which has monitored and created a command and transmitted the command created in the command transmission process of the delivery control processing at the time of payout control processing described later to the main control board 1310X and received this command The presence or absence of ON may be determined. In this case, the setting switch 1311 a ′ may be operated to rotate only in the range from the initial position to the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key 1311 is turned on from the initial position The aspect of the switch 1311 a ′ may be included.) May be described as “modification of decision key (16)”.

  In the embodiment described above, the setting switch 1311a is returned from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key is turned on to the initial position which is the original position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder which turns off the setting switch 1311a). The setting switch 1311a can be set as the determination key ON by performing the second ON operation by rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise toward the counterclockwise direction and further performing the 60 deg rotation operation counterclockwise). The signal of the determination key ON is input from the setting change substrate 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control substrate 1310X. Instead of this, the main control MPU 1310a detects the detection from the main body frame open switch 4b. When the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 based on the signal, it is determined that the determination key is ON. While it is possible, it can be determined not determined key ON when the state that the main body frame 4 is opened to the outer frame 2 is maintained. In this case, the setting switch 1311 a ′ may be operated to rotate only within a range extending from the initial position to the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key 1311 is turned on from the initial position (A mode of the setting switch 1311 a ′ may be included.) May be described as “modification of determination key (17)”. In this case, a person who changes the setting of the set value needs to close the main frame 4 to the outer frame 2 in order to set the decision key to ON. It is necessary to open the main body frame 4 again, remove the setting key K1 from the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting switch 1311a, and close the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 again.

  In the embodiment described above, the setting switch 1311a is returned from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key is turned on to the initial position which is the original position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder which turns off the setting switch 1311a). The setting switch 1311a can be set as the determination key ON by performing the second ON operation by rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise toward the counterclockwise direction and further performing the 60 deg rotation operation counterclockwise). The signal of the determination key ON is input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X. Instead of this, the main control MPU 1310a detects the door frame opening switch 4a. When the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4 based on the signal, it is determined that the determination key is ON DOO while can, it can be determined not determined key ON when the state that the door frame 3 is closed relative to the body frame 4 is maintained. In this case, the setting switch 1311 a ′ may be operated to rotate only in the range from the initial position to the rotational position of the setting key cylinder whose setting key is turned on from the initial position (a mode of the door frame opening switch (A mode of the setting switch 1311 a ′ may be included.) May be described as “modification of determination key (17)”. In this case, the person who changes the setting of the set value needs to open the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4 in order to set the determination key ON. It is necessary to close the door frame 3 again, remove the setting key from the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting switch 1311 a, and close the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2.

  In the embodiment described above, the initial position, which is the original position from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key 1311a provided on the setting change board 1310Y is turned on (that is, the rotation of the setting key cylinder that turns off the setting switch 1311a) To return to the position) turn it 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF, and then turn it counterclockwise 60 degrees) to turn on the second ON key to confirm the setting switch 1311 a The signal of the determination key ON can be turned ON, and the signal of the determination key ON is input from the setting change substrate 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control substrate 1310X, but the setting switch 1311a is provided on the main control substrate 1310X (The mode of the setting switch is described as “modification of decision key (18)”. There is a case to be).

  In the embodiment described above, the initial position, which is the original position from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key 1311a provided on the setting change board 1310Y is turned on (that is, the rotation of the setting key cylinder that turns off the setting switch 1311a) To return to the position) turn it 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF, and then turn it counterclockwise 60 degrees) to turn on the second ON key to confirm the setting switch 1311 a The signal of the determination key ON can be set to ON, and the setting change substrate 1310Y is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control substrate 1310X. The setting switch 1311a is provided on the main control substrate 1310X. , The setting key 1311 a is turned on by the setting key, the number of times of the setting key cylinder The setting switch 1311a can be turned OFF by being turned from the position to the initial position and turned OFF, and the signal of this OFF can be input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X, thereby the main control MPU 1310a. When the OFF signal is input, it can be determined that the decision key is ON, but when the OFF signal is not input, it can be determined that the decision key is not ON. In this case, the setting switch 1311a ′ may be configured to be able to turn only the range from the initial position to the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key 1311 is turned on from the initial position The mode of the setting switch 1311 a ′ may be included.) May be described as “modification of decision key (19)”.

  In the embodiment described above, the setting switch 1311a is returned from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key is turned on to the initial position which is the original position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder which turns off the setting switch 1311a). The setting switch 1311a can be set as the determination key ON by performing the second ON operation by rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise toward the counterclockwise direction and further performing the 60 deg rotation operation counterclockwise). The signal of the determination key ON is input from the setting change substrate 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control substrate 1310X. However, instead of this, the determination key button having the pressing operation unit on the main control substrate 1310X May be provided. In this case, the pressing operation unit of the decision key button is exposed through the opening formed in the cover 1301 of the main control board box 1320 corresponding to the decision key button, and the pressing operation unit of the decision key button Between the portion corresponding to the opening of the cover 1301 and the pressing operation portion so that the main control board 1310X can not be modified by invading a wire or the like from the “gap” formed in the corresponding opening. The same foreign matter intrusion prevention part as the foreign matter intrusion prevention part 1301v (see FIG. 144H) is formed. When the pressing operation unit of the determination key button is pressed, this operation signal is input to the main control MPU 1310 a of the main control board 1310 X. The main control MPU 1310a can determine that the decision key is ON when the pressing operation unit of the decision key button is pressed based on the detection signal from the decision key button, while the pressing operation unit of the decision key button is When the pressing operation is not performed, it can be determined that the determination key is not ON.

  The position where the decision key button is arranged on the main control board 1310X may be in the vicinity of the RAM clear switch 1310f. The cover of the main control board box 1320 is a sticker on which the names of the respective buttons are printed at positions corresponding to the determination key button and the RAM clear switch 1310 f so that the determination key button and the RAM clear switch 1310 f are not confused. (The name of each button may be molded on the cover instead of this seal). Also, in order to prevent confusion between the enter key button and the RAM clear switch 1310 f, a button with a cover that covers the press operation part of either the enter key button and the RAM clear switch 1310 f (for pressing the press operation portion The cover may need to be opened), or the color of the pressing portion may be different, or the shape of the outer shape of the enter key button and the RAM clear switch 1310 f or the pressing operation The shape of the part may be different, or another type of switch not having the pressing operation part may be adopted as the determination key button. Other types of switches that do not have a pressing operation unit as the determination key button include, for example, various types such as a toggle switch having a lever, a slide switch having a slide unit, a rotary switch having a rotation operation unit, a rocker switch, and a touch switch. Switch can be mentioned. When the determination key button and the RAM clear switch 1310 f are provided on the main control board 1310 X, the wiring pattern to the determination key button and the wiring pattern to the RAM clear switch 13 10 f are routed in order to prevent unauthorized alteration. The main control boards 1310X are formed so as not to be close to each other (spaced apart from each other). In addition, when the determination key button is provided on the main control board 1310X, setting can be performed only in the range from the initial position of the setting switch 1311a to the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key 1311a is turned on. The switch 1311a ′ may be used (a mode 2 of the determination key button (a mode of the setting switch 1311a ′ may be included) may be described as “modification of determination key (20)”).

  In the embodiment described above, the setting switch 1311a is returned from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key is turned on to the initial position which is the original position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder which turns off the setting switch 1311a). The setting switch 1311a can be set as the determination key ON by performing the second ON operation by rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise toward the counterclockwise direction and further performing the 60 deg rotation operation counterclockwise). The signal of the determination key ON is input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X. Instead of this, the main control MPU 1310a is input from the RAM clear switch 1310f. The presence or absence of the enter key may be determined based on the operation signal. As described later, the RAM clear switch 1310 f operates the pressing operation unit at the time of power recovery (precisely, when powering on the pachinko machine 1 while pressing the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310 f ), When performing setting change capable of changing and determining the setting value (when the main control MPU 1310 a performs setting change processing described later), the main control MPU 1310 a is configured in a predetermined area of RAM (RAM Clear all the areas except for the specific area. Therefore, the power on of the pachinko machine 1 is performed while the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310 f is pressed to always clear the predetermined area of the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310 a itself, the RAM clear switch 1310 f The main control MPU 1310a determines that the determination key is ON when the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f is pressed based on the operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f. It is possible to determine that the determination key is not ON when the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310 f is not pressed based on the operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310 f provided on the payout control substrate 633. Thus, security can be improved with respect to the presence or absence of the decision key ON. In this case, the setting switch 1311a 'may be configured to be able to rotate only in the range from the initial position to the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key 1311 is turned on from the initial position (aspect 3 of the RAM clear switch) (A mode of the setting switch 1311 a ′ may be included.) May be described as “modification of determination key (21)”. The period during which the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310 f is pressed is limited to the time when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, and the operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310 f is of the payout control board 633 as described later. Since it is input to the payout control MPU 633 aa, when the RAM clear switch 1310 f also functions as an error release switch 633 d described later, the error clear switch 633 d is not necessary for the payout control board 633.

  In the embodiment described above, the setting switch 1311a is returned from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key is turned on to the initial position which is the original position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder which turns off the setting switch 1311a). The setting switch 1311a can be set as the determination key ON by performing the second ON operation by rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise toward the counterclockwise direction and further performing the 60 deg rotation operation counterclockwise). The signal of the determination key ON is input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X. However, instead of this, the gate sensor of the gate portion 2003 provided on the game board 5 2401, various sensors of various winning openings (for example, second starting opening sensor 2402, large winning opening sensor 2403 The main control MPU 1310a receives detection signals from the first inlet sensor 2406, the general winning opening sensor 3001, the first start port sensor 3002), the out port left sensor 1008a of the out port 1008, and the out port right sensor 1008b. The presence or absence of the determination key ON may be determined based on the detection signal. In this case, the setting switch 1311 a ′ may be operated to rotate only in the range from the initial position to the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key 1311 is turned on from the initial position. The mode of the setting switch 1311 a ′ may be included.) May be described as “modification of determination key (22)”. In this case, a person who changes the setting of the set value opens the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4 to send the game ball B to the gate unit 2003 to set the decision key ON, and performs various winnings. It is necessary to send the game ball B to the mouth and send the game ball B to the out port 1008.

  In the embodiment described above, the setting switch 1311a is returned from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key is turned on to the initial position which is the original position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder which turns off the setting switch 1311a). The setting switch 1311a can be set as the determination key ON by performing the second ON operation by rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise toward the counterclockwise direction and further performing the 60 deg rotation operation counterclockwise). The signal of the determination key ON is input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X. Instead of this, the main control MPU 1310a is a stepping motor, a DC motor, a solenoid, etc. Drive control of the electrical drive source to control the operation of the movable body (character), an optical sensor When the original position or the operating position of the movable body (character object) is determined based on the detection signal from the photo sensor, distance measuring sensor, etc.), the main control MPU 1310a determines based on the detection signal from the optical sensor The presence or absence of the key ON may be determined. In this case, the setting switch 1311 a ′ may be operated to rotate only in the range from the initial position to the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key 1311 is turned on from the initial position. The mode (which may include the mode of the setting switch 1311 a ′) may be described as “modification of determination key (23)”. In this case, the person who performs the setting change of the setting value opens the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4 in order to set the decision key ON, and the optical sensor indicates the original position of the movable body (characters) It is necessary to move the movable body (object) so as to detect the movement position and the like.

  In the embodiment described above, the setting switch 1311a is returned from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key is turned on to the initial position which is the original position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder which turns off the setting switch 1311a). The setting switch 1311a can be set as the determination key ON by performing the second ON operation by rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise toward the counterclockwise direction and further performing the 60 deg rotation operation counterclockwise). The signal of the determination key ON is input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X. However, instead of this, a magnetic sensor for detecting illegal magnetism in the game area 5a The main control MPU 1310a to which the detection signal from 3003 is input is a detection signal from the magnetic sensor 3003 It may determine the presence or absence of a decision key ON based. In this case, the setting switch 1311 a ′ may be operated to rotate only within a range from the initial position to the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key is turned on from the initial position The aspect of the switch 1311 a ′ may be included.) May be described as “modification of decision key (24)”. In this case, the person who changes the setting of the setting value needs to bring the magnet closer to the front of the game board 5 from the front of the pachinko machine 1 in order to set the decision key ON.

  In the embodiment described above, the setting switch 1311a is returned from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key is turned on to the initial position which is the original position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder which turns off the setting switch 1311a). The setting switch 1311a can be set as the determination key ON by performing the second ON operation by rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise toward the counterclockwise direction and further performing the 60 deg rotation operation counterclockwise). The signal of the determination key ON is input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X. Instead, the pachinko machine 1 is shaken or beaten by pachinko machines. Change the course of the game ball flowing down the game area 5a which is divided into the game board 5 by applying vibration to the machine 1 to change the game In the case where the game board 5 is provided with a vibration sensor for detecting fraudulent actions to be made to enter various prize winning openings and gate portions (gates) provided in 5, the main control MPU 1310a performs fraudulent action based on a detection signal from the vibration sensor While determining the presence or absence, the presence or absence of the determination key ON may be determined based on a detection signal from the vibration sensor. In this case, the setting switch 1311 a ′ may be configured to be able to turn only the range from the initial position to the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key 1311 is turned on from the initial position The aspect of the switch 1311 a ′ may be included.) May be described as “modification of decision key (25)”. In this case, a person who changes the setting of the setting value needs to shake or strike the pachinko machine 1 in order to set the decision key ON.

  In the embodiment described above, the setting switch 1311a is returned from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key is turned on to the initial position which is the original position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder which turns off the setting switch 1311a). The setting switch 1311a can be set as the determination key ON by performing the second ON operation by rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise toward the counterclockwise direction and further performing the 60 deg rotation operation counterclockwise). The signal of the determination key ON is input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X. However, instead of this, the pachinko machine 1 is irradiated with radio waves and the game board 5 is Malfunctioning of the various sensors of the various winning opening provided and the various sensors provided in the payout device 580 causes the game ball B to be illegally captured. When the radio wave sensor for detecting fraudulent activity is provided in the game board 5 or the payout device 580, the main control MPU 1310a determines the presence or absence of fraudulent activity based on the detection signal from the radio wave sensor, and the detection signal from the radio wave sensor The presence or absence of the determination key ON may be determined based on In this case, the setting switch 1311 a ′ may be operated to rotate only in the range from the initial position to the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key is turned on from the initial position The aspect of the switch 1311 a ′ may be included.) May be described as “modification of the determination key (26)”. In this case, the person who changes the setting of the setting value needs to irradiate the radio wave to the pachinko machine 1 in order to set the decision key ON.

  In the embodiment described above, the setting switch 1311a is returned from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key is turned on to the initial position which is the original position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder which turns off the setting switch 1311a). The setting switch 1311a can be set as the determination key ON by performing the second ON operation by rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise toward the counterclockwise direction and further performing the 60 deg rotation operation counterclockwise). The signal of the determination key ON is input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X, but instead, the pressing operation of the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation button unit 360 is performed. Detection signal from the pressure detection sensor 381 which detects the rotation operation unit of the effect operation button unit 360 Detection signals from the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 for detecting the rotation direction of the 02 are input to the peripheral control board 1510, and are branched at the peripheral control board 1510 to be main control board 1310X The main control MPU 1310 a may be input to the control MPU 1310 a and may determine the presence / absence of the determination key ON based on these detection signals. In this case, the setting switch 1311a 'may be configured to rotate only within a range from the initial position to the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key 1311 is turned on from the initial position (aspect of operation button unit (A mode of the setting switch 1311 a ′ may be included.) May be described as “modification of determination key (27)”.

  Further, in the embodiment described above, the main control board 1310 X and the setting change board 1310 Y are accommodated in the internal space 1320 s of the main control board box 1320 configured by the cover body 1301 and the base body 1302. 1310Y may be accommodated in a separate setting change substrate box and arranged around or adjacent to the main control substrate box 1320. In the main control board box 1320, the cover body 1301 and the base body 1302 are crimped by a one-way screw or the like of the crimped portion 1303. The caulking unit 1303 is a sealing mechanism, and includes a plurality of caulking units. The main control board box 1320 can be closed by caulking the cover body 1301 and the base body 1302 with a one-way screw or the like of the caulking portion 1303 using one sealing mechanism, and then, the main control board box 1320 is opened. It is necessary to destroy the sealing mechanism. That is, the cover body 1301 can not be removed from the base body 1302 unless the sealing mechanism is broken. Such a structure of the main control board box 1320 can also be applied to the structure of the setting change board box. In this case, although the front surface of the setting key cylinder of the setting switch 1311a and the pressing operation portion of the determination key button are exposed through the opening formed in the cover of the main control board box 1320 corresponding thereto, The setting change board 1310 Y can not be modified by intrusion of a wire or the like from the “gap” formed in the front face of the setting key cylinder of the setting switch 1311 a and the pressing operation portion of the determination key button and the corresponding opening. In addition, a foreign matter intrusion prevention part similar to the foreign matter intrusion prevention part 1301v (see FIG. 144H) is formed between the portion corresponding to the opening of the cover body and the pressing operation part. In addition, unlike the structure of the main control board box 1320 described above as the structure of the setting change board box, when the cover body is configured to be able to be opened or closed from the base body, with respect to the base body, A setting change substrate cover body opening / closing switch capable of detecting the opening of the cover body may be provided. In this case, a detection signal from the setting change substrate cover body opening / closing switch may be directly input to the main control substrate 1310X, or (indirect) input to the main control substrate 1310X through the setting change substrate 1310Y. It may be configured to be Based on the detection signal from the setting change board cover body opening / closing switch, the case where the cover body is opened from the base body can be included in the above-described predetermined setting value change permission condition described above (setting change board box The aspect of may be described as "modification of decision key (28)".

  In the embodiment described above, the connector SMCN of the setting change substrate 1310Y is connected to the terminal of the connector MSCN of the main control substrate 1310X, and the setting key of the setting switch 1311a is used to prevent unauthorized modification. The wiring pattern through which the signal of ON is transmitted, the wiring pattern through which the signal of the determination key ON of the setting switch 1311a is transmitted, the wiring pattern through which the signal of OFF the setting switch 1311a is transmitted, and the signal from the setting switching button 1311b Are formed so as not to approach each other (separate from each other) in the setting change substrate 1310Y as a lead-out of the wiring pattern to be transmitted, and the terminals of the connector SMCN of the setting change substrate 1310Y (the main control substrate 1310X The connections to the terminals of connector MSCN) are also formed separately Also in the main control board 1310X, the wiring pattern through which various signals from the setting switch 1311a are transmitted (that is, the wiring pattern through which the signal of the setting key ON of the setting switch 1311a is transmitted, the signal of the determination key ON of the setting switch 1311a is transmitted And the wiring pattern for transmitting the signal from the setting switch button 1311b and the wiring pattern for transmitting the signal from the setting switching button 1311b not to approach each other (spaced apart from each other) The wiring pattern on which the setting key ON signal of the setting switch 1311a is transmitted, and the wiring pattern on which the determination key ON signal of the setting switch 1311a is transmitted. Is different from the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1310Y. The other connector provided on the main control substrate 1310X separately from the connector MSCN of the main control substrate 1310X may be connector-connected (inter-board connection) via another connector provided on the setting change substrate 1310Y. The other connector provided on the setting change substrate 1310Y and the other connector provided on the main control substrate 1310X may be electrically connected via the harness (determination of the wiring pattern routing mode It may be described as “Modification (29)” of

  In addition, among the above-described modification examples (1) to (29) of the determination key, an aspect appropriately selected and combined may be adopted (a form of the selection combination of the modification is referred to as “modification example of determination key (30) It may be described as ").

  Also, with the above-mentioned set value, in addition to the probability for lottery determination whether it is a big hit or not, and the probability for lottery determination whether it is a small hit or not, to make lottery determination when transitioning from definite variation time to normal time Probability of changing the distribution rate to the area which is advantageous for the player, etc., which is advantageous for the player (that is, to increase the number of game balls that the player can acquire) The probability (the degree of advantage) is set in advance. In the present embodiment, as the set values, set value 1, set value 2, set value 3, set value 4, set value 5, and set value 6 are prepared in advance, and from set value 1 to set value 6 The probability (degree of advantage) to be advantageous to the player is set in advance. By the way, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, although there are a plurality of setting values ranging from the setting value 1 to the setting value 6, there is a probability (advantagement degree) that the player is advantageous to other pachinko machines. Some have a single preset value set. That is, as in the case of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the probability (advantagement degree) to be advantageous to the player exists in advance as a plurality of set values, which is advantageous to the player There is a probability (advantagement degree) of a gaming specification in which only a single set value exists in advance and the setting change is not required at all. However, if the hardware configuration of the main control board 1310X is changed in design according to such game specifications and the hardware configuration of the setting change board 1310Y is changed in design or not used, the main control board 1310X and the setting change board 1310Y Is dependent on the game specification, it has a main control board 1310X and a setting change board 1310Y having similar or different hardware configurations according to the game specification. Therefore, there is a demand for a main control board 1310X and a setting change board 1310Y which can be used in common without depending on the game specification, that is, without changing the design of the hardware configuration.

  For example, in a game specification in which there is only a single set value and there is no need to change the setting at all (probability degree) that the advantage (advantagement degree) to be advantageous to the player is required Because there is no need to use it as a device, it is necessary to cope with the design change by the software that assigns the following contents: set value 1, set value 2, set value 3, set value 4, set value 5, and set value 6 as follows. Can.

  For example, after the main control MPU 1310a clears a predetermined area (an area excluding the specific area in the entire area of the RAM) of the RAM incorporated therein, a plurality of actual machine check operation patterns can be set (after the RAM is cleared) The start method of the pachinko machine 1 can be used as a set value). In this case, the main control MPU 1310a controls the operation of the movable body (characters) to be controlled, the lighting of the light emitter such as a lamp or LED, etc. Actual operation confirmation pattern 1 is assigned to specify operation of object, lighting of light emitter), and actual operation confirmation pattern 2 to specify "operation of movable body (character)" is assigned as setting value 2 The actual machine confirmation operation pattern 3 for designating “lighting of the light emitter” is assigned as the value 3 and “detailed operation of the movable body (character), movement over the entire operation area, other as the setting value 4 An actual machine check operation pattern 4 for specifying an operation such as an interference check with a structure or another movable body (character), an operation sequence with another movable body (character), etc.) is assigned. Light emitter 1 port unit (main control MP A real machine confirmation operation pattern 5 is assigned that specifies "lighting of the light emitter in a predetermined output port unit of 1310a (that is, every one output port)", and a real machine confirmation specifying "no operation" as the setting value 6 The operation pattern 6 is assigned (a mode of change setting of the actual machine confirmation operation after clearing the RAM may be described as "modification (1) according to common hardware configuration"). The main control MPU 1310 a repeatedly performs main control side timer interrupt processing to be described later, and performs operation of a movable body (feature) and lighting of a light emitter such as a lamp or an LED, by repeatedly performing an actual device check operation after clearing the RAM. The peripheral control board 1510 that receives the setting change command from the main control MPU 1310a is a movable body that is to be controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 with the content (actual machine check operation pattern) according to the setting value included in the setting change command. The operation of (characters) and the lighting of the light emitter can be performed. By changing the setting of the actual machine confirmation operation after clearing the RAM, it is possible to have variations in the starting method of the pachinko machine 1 after clearing the RAM.

  In addition, for example, it is possible to use as a set value which can set a plurality of times from the end of the fluctuation of the symbol to the demonstration (demonstration effect to be performed in the player waiting state). In this case, time setting pattern 1 specifying "10 seconds" is assigned as setting value 1, time setting pattern 2 specifying "15 seconds" as setting value 2 is allocated, and "20 seconds setting as setting value 3 Time setting pattern 3 for designating "is assigned, time setting pattern 4 for designating" 25 seconds "as setting value 4 is assigned, and time setting pattern 5 for designating" 30 seconds "as setting value 5 is assigned, The time setting pattern 6 for designating "35 seconds" is assigned as the setting value 6 (A mode of the change setting of the time in which the player is in the waiting state after the fluctuation of the symbol is finished. It may be described as "). The peripheral control board 1510 that receives the setting change command from the main control MPU 1310a can start the demonstration in a time (time setting pattern) according to the setting value included in the setting change command. By changing the setting of the time in which the player is in the waiting state after the end of the fluctuation of the symbol, the time from the end of the fluctuation of the symbol to the demonstration can be varied.

  Further, for example, it is possible to use as a set value which can set a plurality of contents of a demonstration (demonstration effect to be performed in a player waiting state) performed after the end of the fluctuation of the symbol. In this case, a demonstration effect setting pattern 1 for assigning "comical effect" as the setting value 1 is assigned, and a demonstration effect setting pattern for specifying "comical effect, operation effect of the movable body (character)" as the setting value 2 2 is assigned, demo effect setting pattern 3 which designates “serious effect” as setting value 3 is assigned, and demonstration effect setting pattern which designates “serial effect, operation effect of movable body (character)” as setting value 4 4 is assigned, demonstration effect setting pattern 5 which designates “contemporary drama-like effect” as setting value 5 is assigned, and “democratic direction effect, movable object (character)” is designated as setting value 6 demonstration effect setting Pattern 6 is assigned (a mode of change setting of contents of demonstration effect may be described as “modification (3) according to common hardware configuration”). The peripheral control board 1510 that receives the setting change command from the main control MPU 1310a can perform a demonstration with a demonstration effect (demonstration effect setting pattern) according to the setting value included in the setting change command. By changing the setting of the contents of the demonstration effect, the contents of the demonstration effect to be performed after the end of the fluctuation of the symbol can have variations.

  Also, for example, it can be used as a set value capable of setting a plurality of default sound volumes adjusted by the slide type sound volume adjustment switch 1510d provided on the peripheral control substrate 1510. By sliding the volume adjustment switch 1510d, the volume can be increased or decreased from the default volume. In this case, volume setting pattern 1 specifying "volume 1" is assigned as setting value 1, volume setting pattern 2 specifying "volume 2" as setting value 2, and "volume 3" setting value 3. "Volume setting pattern 3 specifying" is assigned, volume setting pattern 4 specifying "volume 4" as setting value 4 is assigned, and volume setting pattern 5 specifying "volume 5" as setting value 5 is assigned, A volume setting pattern 6 specifying "volume 6" is assigned as the setting value 6 (a mode of change setting of default volume may be described as "modification (4) according to common hardware configuration"). The volume is set to increase from the setting value 1 to the setting value 6. In the peripheral control board 1510 that receives the setting change command from the main control MPU 1310a, the default sound volume is set at the volume (volume setting pattern) according to the setting value included in the setting change command. In addition, the default volume of "volume 1" assigned to setting value 1 is moved in the direction to decrease the volume of the slide type volume adjustment switch 1510d (is moved in the opposite direction to the direction to increase the volume) When movement to the end is completed and adjusted to the minimum side volume, the sound may be muted, or it may be a volume that can recognize a sound when it stops at the front of the pachinko machine. In addition, the default volume of “volume 6” assigned to setting value 6 is moved in the direction of increasing the volume of the slide type volume adjustment switch 1510d (is moved in the opposite direction of the direction of decreasing the volume) When the movement to the end is completed and adjusted to the maximum side volume, the maximum volume may be set, or the volume may be set to a predetermined ratio (for example, 85%) of the maximum volume. According to this aspect of changing and setting the default volume, the default volume adjusted by the slide type volume adjustment switch 1510d provided on the peripheral control substrate 1510 can have variations.

  Also, for example, it can be used as a set value that can set a plurality of volume of error notification sound in error notification such as various problems, goths and errors. The various error notification sounds can not be adjusted by the operation of the slide type volume adjustment switch 1510 d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 (that is, not depended on), and pachinko by which the error notification sound is emitted by setting the maximum volume Although it is easy for a clerk or the like in the game hall to notice the machine, the player who is playing a game with another pachinko machine may feel uncomfortable. Then, what can adjust the volume of various error alarm | sounds is also calculated | required. In this case, the error notification volume setting pattern 1 specifying "error notification volume 1" is assigned as the setting value 1, and the error notification volume setting pattern 2 specifying "error notification volume 2" as the setting value 2 is assigned. Error notification volume setting pattern 3 specifying "error notification volume 3" as setting value 3 is assigned, error notification volume setting pattern 4 specifying "volume 4" as setting value 4 is assigning, "setting value 5" Error notification volume setting pattern 5 specifying error notification volume 5 is assigned, and error notification volume setting pattern 6 specifying "error notification volume 6 (maximum volume)" is assigned as setting value 6 (volume of error notification tone The aspect of the change setting of may be described as “modification (5) according to common hardware configuration”. It should be noted that the setting value 6 (maximum sound volume) from the setting value 1 (a sound volume that does not become muffled and can detect the error notification sound when stopped at the front of the pachinko machine that emits the error notification sound) The volume of the error notification sound is set to increase toward the volume at which the error notification sound can be sufficiently recognized even if several meters away from the pachinko machine that emits the error notification sound. The peripheral control board 1510 that receives the setting change command from the main control MPU 1310 a performs control to emit an error notification sound at the volume of the error notification sound (error notification volume setting pattern) corresponding to the setting value included in the setting change command. By changing the setting of the volume of the error alerting sound, it is possible to give variation to the volume of the error alerting sound in the error alerting.

  Also, for example, it can be used as a set value that can set a plurality of default luminances of light emitters such as lamps and LEDs. The luminance can be increased or decreased from the default luminance with respect to the light emitter to be controlled by the main control MPU 1310 a. In this case, default brightness setting pattern 1 specifying "brightness 1" is assigned as setting value 1, default brightness setting pattern 2 specifying "brightness 2" as setting value 2 is assigned, and setting value 3 " Default luminance setting pattern 3 specifying "brightness 3" is assigned, default brightness setting pattern 4 specifying "brightness 4" is assigned as setting value 4, and default brightness setting pattern specifying "brightness 5" as setting value 5 5 is assigned, and a default brightness setting pattern 6 for designating "brightness 6" is assigned as setting value 6 (a case where the change setting mode of default brightness is described as "modification example (6) by common hardware configuration" is there). The main control MPU 1310a adjusts the brightness of the light emitter by repeating the main control timer interrupt process described later, changing the setting of the default brightness, and performs lighting, blinking, and gradation points of the light emitter. The peripheral control board 1510 that receives the setting change command from the main control MPU 1310a is a target to be controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 based on the default luminance (default luminance setting pattern) corresponding to the setting value included in the setting change command. The brightness of the light emitter can be adjusted to perform lighting, blinking, gradation points and the like of the light emitter. By changing the setting of the contents of the default brightness, it is possible to give variations to the default brightness of the light emitter such as a lamp or an LED.

  In addition, for example, it can be used as a set value that can set a plurality of luminances of light emitters such as lamps and LEDs in notification of errors such as various defects, gotos and errors. An error notification luminance setting pattern 1 specifying “error notification luminance 1” as the setting value 1 is assigned to the lamp controlled by the main control MPU 1310 a, and “error notification luminance 2” is set as the setting value 2 The error notification luminance setting pattern 2 to be specified is assigned, and the error notification luminance setting pattern 3 specifying "error notification luminance 3" is allocated as the setting value 3, and the error notification specifying "error notification luminance 4" as the setting value 4 Brightness setting pattern 4 is assigned, error notification brightness setting pattern 5 specifying “error notification brightness 5” is assigned as setting value 5, and error notification specifying “error notification brightness 6 (maximum brightness)” as setting value 6 The luminance setting pattern 6 is assigned (a manner of changing and setting the luminance of the light emitter in the error notification It may be described as E A modification of the configuration (7) "). It should be noted that the setting value 1 (the luminance of the lamp is low but the lamp's luminance is low, and when it stops at the front of the pachinko machine it is possible to recognize an error notification) to the setting value 6 (maximum luminance) The brightness is set to be high. The main control MPU 1310a adjusts the brightness of the light emitter by repeatedly performing change control of the light emitter brightness in error notification and the main control side timer interrupt process to be described later to adjust the lighting, blinking, and gradation points of the light emitter. Do. The peripheral control board 1510 receiving the setting change command from the main control MPU 1310 a is a target controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 based on the error notification luminance (error notification luminance setting pattern) corresponding to the setting value included in the setting change command. By adjusting the luminance of the light emitter, it is possible to perform lighting, blinking, gradation points and the like of the light emitter. By changing the luminance setting of the light emitter in the error notification, variations can be given to the luminance of the light emitter such as a lamp or an LED in the error notification.

  Further, with respect to various setting values assigned to the above-described variations (1) to (7) according to the common hardware configuration, predetermined setting value display permission conditions established in the setting value confirmation display process described later performed by the main control MPU 1310a are satisfied. The setting indicator 1310g is displayed when the power is turned on. However, the setting indicator 1310g may always be displayed from the time the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on to the time the power is shut off (setting value display Mode may be described as "modification (8) due to common hardware configuration".

  In addition, any one of the above-described modifications (1) to (8) according to the common hardware configuration may be appropriately selected and adopted to the above-described modification (30) of the determination key.

  Further, the above-described predetermined setting value change permission condition is an outer frame at the time of power recovery at the time of power on of the pachinko machine 1 or at the time of power recovery at the time of power recovery after a power failure (including an instantaneous power failure occurs momentarily). The main body frame 4 is opened with respect to No. 2, and the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is turned 60 degrees clockwise to turn the first ON. It is necessary for the setting key ON to be operated by being operated. When power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1 while pressing the pressing portion of the RAM clear switch 1310 f, the main control MPU 1310 a performs a specific processing of the entire area of the main control built-in RAM in the main control side power on processing described later. Clear the game, and then proceed with the game by setting the interrupt permission. Further, when the predetermined setting value change permission condition described above is satisfied at power recovery of the pachinko machine 1, the main control MPU 1310a performs the setting change process in the main control side power-on process to be described later and It clears except a specific area among all the areas, and then proceeds to play a game by performing interrupt permission setting and the like. That is, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on while pressing the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310 f, if the above-described predetermined setting change permission condition is satisfied when the pachinko machine 1 is restored, In any case, the main control MPU 1310a clears the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area out of all areas in the main control side power-on process, which will be described later, and then proceeds to play the game by performing interrupt permission setting etc. It will be. Therefore, the outer frame at the time of power recovery at the time of power recovery at power on of pachinko machine 1 or at power recovery after a power failure (including the momentary power failure due to a momentary power failure) as the predetermined setting value change permission condition described above. The main body frame 4 is opened with respect to No. 2, and the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is turned 60 degrees clockwise to turn the first ON. In addition to the setting key being operated by being operated, the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310 f may be pressed (described as “a modification of the preset setting change permission condition”. There is a case).

  In addition, the above-described predetermined setting value display permission condition is an outer frame after power recovery from power recovery when power is turned on for pachinko machine 1 or after a power failure (including a momentary power failure due to a momentary power failure). The main body frame 4 is opened with respect to No. 2, and the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is turned 60 degrees clockwise to turn the first ON. It is necessary for the setting key ON to be operated by being operated. When the predetermined set value display permission condition is satisfied, main control MPU 1310 a sets and displays the current set value set in the set value confirmation display process performed as one process of the main control timer interrupt process described later. Display on the display 1310g. Further, as described above, the RAM clear switch 1310 f needs to be pressed by the pressing operation unit when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, and the period of pressing operation is limited. Therefore, the outer frame at the time of power recovery at the time of power recovery at power on of pachinko machine 1 or at power recovery after a power failure (including the momentary power failure due to a momentary power failure) as the predetermined setting value display permission condition described above. The main body frame 4 is opened with respect to No. 2, and the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is turned 60 degrees clockwise to turn the first ON. In addition to the setting key being operated by being operated, the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310 f may not be pressed (described as “a modification of the preset setting display permission condition” May) In this case, main control MPU 1310a does not perform the set value confirmation display process as one process of the main control timer interrupt process described later when the modification of the predetermined set value display permission condition is satisfied. In the process at the time of insertion, the game is progressed by performing the initial setting and activation setting of the built-in WDT, and then performing the interruption permission setting and the like. Since the main control MPU 1310a does not yet perform the interrupt permission setting when performing the set value confirmation display processing when the modification of the predetermined set value display permission condition is established, the main control timer interrupt processing is performed. The setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting switch 1311 a and a detection signal from the body frame opening switch 4 b for detecting the opening of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2. The setting switch 1311a is turned on by turning the setting switch 1311a on by setting the setting switch 1311a to be turned on by turning the first switch by turning 60 degrees clockwise from the position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turns off the setting switch 1311a). Input signal of main control built-in RAM as input information to be described later by reading the signal of setting key ON from 1311a Not stored in the area 憶領. Therefore, main control MPU 1310a opens the main body frame for detecting the release of main body frame 4 with respect to outer frame 2 when the modification of the predetermined set value display permission condition is established and the set value confirmation display process is performed. The detection signal from the switch 4b and the signal of the setting key ON from the setting switch 1311a are read.

  By adopting both the modification of the predetermined setting change permission condition described above and the modification of the predetermined setting value display permission condition described above, the power is turned on when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on or a power failure occurs. During power recovery after power recovery, the main unit frame 4 is opened to the outer frame 2 and the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting switch 1311a. The pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310 f is pressed on the premise that the setting key is turned on by setting the setting key cylinder to be turned 60 degrees clockwise and turned on by the first ON. When the main control MPU 1310a performs setting change processing in main control side power-on processing to be described later, the main control MPU 1310a excludes a specific area out of the entire area of the main control internal RAM. The game is progressed by clearing and then performing interrupt permission setting, etc., but when the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310 f is not pressed, the main control MPU 1310 a turns on the main control side power source described later. In the hour process, the set value confirmation display process is performed, and then, the game is advanced by performing the interrupt permission setting and the like. By adopting this mode, when the main control MPU 1310a starts the progress of the game, the setting value confirmation display process is not performed even once. That is, when the main control MPU 1310a starts the progress of the game by performing the interrupt permission setting or the like, the main control MPU 1310a never displays the current set value being set on the setting indicator 1310g. The main control MPU 1310a counts the number of balls of the game balls collected by the out port 1008 provided in the game area 5a formed in the game board 5 in the ball number counting process of the main control side power-on process described later. In the port output process of the main control side power-on process to be described later, the number of balls of the gaming balls output to the base monitor 1310 h and collected by the out port 1008 is displayed on the base monitor 1310 h. Therefore, the current setting value set by the setting display 1310g may be displayed on the above-mentioned base monitor 1310h (may be described as "a modification of the method of using the base monitor") . As a result, the main control MPU 1310a displays the current setting value set in the period from the power recovery to the start of the progress of the game by performing the interrupt permission setting etc. using the base monitor 1310h. As the game progress can be started by performing interrupt permission setting after power recovery, the number of gaming balls collected by the out port 1008 can be displayed, so the setting indicator 1310 g It is not necessary to provide it, which can contribute to cost reduction.

  In addition, any one of the modification of the predetermined setting change permission condition described above, the modification of the predetermined setting value display permission condition described above, and the modification of the method of using the base monitor described above will be appropriately made. It may be selected and adopted in the modification (30) of the determination key described above.

  In addition, any one of the modification of the predetermined setting change permission condition described above, the modification of the predetermined setting value display permission condition described above, and the modification of the method of using the base monitor described above will be appropriately made. You may select and employ | adopt to the modification (1)-(8) by the common hardware structure mentioned above.

  Incidentally, conventionally, in the game area of the game board, a plurality of nails are implanted, and there is provided a socket through which game balls fired by the launcher can enter. When a game ball flowing down the game area enters the receiving slot, a game machine is proposed in which a game state advantageous to the player is generated when the game is won by the lottery means with a predetermined probability (for example, (Paragraph [0029], paragraph [0033], and FIG. 2)). In such a gaming machine, since the course of the gaming ball flowing down the gaming area changes according to the posture of the nail, it is possible to enjoy the change in the movement of the flowing gaming ball. However, since only a player who can understand the posture of the nail can select a platform rich in change in movement of the gaming ball flowing down from the plurality of gaming machines installed in the gaming hall, the width of the game The person who could expand was limited.

  Also, conventionally, there has been proposed a gaming machine capable of advancing a game by allowing the main control board to interrupt the timer in the main process and executing the timer interrupt process when the power is turned on (for example, for example) JP-A-2013-252306 (FIGS. 2 and 4)). However, in the gaming machine described in this document, when the power is turned on, various processes are progressed along the flow of the main processing, so that various processes from the time of power on to the time when timer interruption is permitted are performed. Since it is the same, it was not possible to select the activation method of the gaming machine in the gaming hall.

  Also, conventionally, there has been proposed a gaming machine capable of advancing a game by allowing the main control board to interrupt the timer in the main process and executing the timer interrupt process when the power is turned on (for example, for example) JP-A-2013-252306 (FIGS. 2 and 4)). However, in the gaming machine described in this document, when a clerk such as a clerk in the game hall initializes the RAM and erases the contents, it is necessary to operate the RAM clear switch. The erasing method was limited to one.

[5-4-3. Security structure of game setting]
As described above, the pachinko machine 1 of the present invention is provided with game settings relating to the player's profit as setting values of multiple stages, and the setting values are set switch 1311 a, setting switching button 1311 b, setting indicator 1310 g, etc. In the change operation means of the above, it is possible to change, and a crime prevention structure for preventing unauthorized change of the setting value of such a game setting is provided. Below, the example of the crime prevention structure is explained.

5-4-3-1. Security structure of change operation means (1)]
The first crime prevention structure (1) for preventing the unauthorized operation of the change operation means is, as described above for the embodiments of FIGS. The operation unit is configured of a setting switch 1311a (having a key insertion unit on the surface portion of the tip) which is turned on by the setting key K1. Thereby, the change of the setting value of the game setting by the change operation means can be performed only to a specific person including the store manager of the game hall having the setting key K1.

  The change operation means is for changing the set value, and in the embodiment, it comprises a power switch 630a, a setting switch 1311a, a setting switching button 1311b, and a setting indicator 1310g, among which the setting switch 1311a A specific operation unit provided in the control unit 1310 to control the start of setting change, and a separate operation unit provided with a setting switching button 1311 b on the main control unit 1310 to perform setting operations other than the setting change start. . Then, no crime prevention measures other than the foreign matter intrusion preventing unit 1301v for preventing the intrusion of foreign matter such as a wire are taken to this separate operation unit, and accordingly an input operation from the outside (a pressing operation of the setting switching button 1311b Although the pressing operation of the portion 1311p is possible for anyone other than a specific person, the "predetermined setting value change permission condition" is satisfied that the setting key 1311a which is the specific operation portion is turned on by the setting key K1. There is almost no problem with crime prevention because the input in the non-operation state is invalid for control.

  The setting switch 1311a, which is a specific operation unit of the change operation means, has its axis directed in the direction orthogonal to the substrate surface of the main control unit 1310 as shown in the figure, and its tip is the outer surface of the cover 1301. There is a possibility that the protrusion may be disturbed depending on the depth of the island facilities of the game hall, and may also be disturbed even during storage.

  In such a case, as shown by imaginary lines in FIGS. 144A and B, the axis line of the change operation means (for example, the setting switch 1311a having a key insertion portion) operated by the setting key K1 is used as the substrate of the main control portion 1310 It is possible to set the orientation substantially parallel to the surface, and make the tip surface (key insertion surface) face the side of the main control board box 1320. Specifically, the key operation unit is changed to the substrate surface of the main control unit 1310 so that the key insertion unit protrudes from the front end (hinge unit side) of the substrate surface of the main control unit 1310 (as it protrudes from the substrate end). And a semicircular notch formed in the base body 1302 of the main control board box 1320 which is a container so as to be disposed in a direction substantially parallel to the above and fit into the setting switch 1311a, and a main control board It can be illustrated that the projecting portion of the change operation means is accommodated in a state in which the key insertion portion is exposed to the outside by both the notch formed in the cover body 1301 of the box 1320. When the key insertion portion is projected from the left end in front view of the substrate surface of the main control portion 1310, the surface portion provided with the key insertion portion may be substantially the same surface as the side portion of the main control board box 1320. The surface on which the insertion portion is provided may be made to project beyond the side surface of the main control board box 1320.

  This makes it possible to substantially eliminate or reduce the protrusion of the change operation means on the rear side (the rear side of the pachinko machine 1) of the main control board box 1320. In addition, when arranging the substrate of the main control unit 1310 on the base body 1302 or the cover body 1301 of the main control substrate box 1320, the key insertion portion protruding from the substrate end is accommodated in the notch portion. The positioning (alignment) of the substrate of the control unit 1310 can be facilitated, and the burden on the assembly operation of the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced.

5-4-3-2. Security structure of change operation means (2)]
The second crime prevention structure (2) for preventing the unauthorized operation of the change operation means is, as shown in FIGS. 144D to 144I, a change suppressing means 1312 for covering at least a part of the change operation means; And first state holding means (hereinafter, also referred to as a lock portion) 1313 for locking (holding) the change suppressing means 1312.

  The change operation means of the crime prevention structure (2) includes the power switch 630a, the setting switch 1311a, the setting switching button 1311b, and the setting display 1310g as in the case of the crime prevention structure (1). The change operation means being provided is the setting switch 1311a (hereinafter also referred to as "specific operation unit 1311a") except for the power switch 630a provided in the power supply unit 620c, and the setting switching button 1311b (hereinafter referred to as "another operation Section 1311 b ′ ′) and a setting indicator 1310 g for displaying the setting value. In this crime prevention structure (2), the setting switch 1311a which is a specific operation unit and the setting switching button 1311b which is a separate operation unit are both small operating rod switches that can be turned on and off by pressing the pressing operation unit 1311p. The vehicle itself does not have a crime prevention structure other than the foreign matter intrusion prevention unit 1301 v that prevents the intrusion of foreign matter such as a wire.

The change suppressing means 1312 of the crime prevention structure (2) covers at least a part of the changing operation means in order to make the changing operation of the game setting difficult, and the specific configuration will be described later. Change to a first state that makes it difficult to change the game settings by covering the part, and a second state that exposes the change operation means that was covered in the first state and allows the change operation of the game settings obtain.
Here, at least a part of the change operation means means that one of the plurality of elements may be involved in the change operation essential for the game setting, as well as the case where the change operation means includes a plurality of elements. Do. It also means that one element of the change operation means may have some gaps if the change operation of the game setting is difficult even if the element is not completely covered. That is, the concept of covering at least a part of the change operation means includes both the above-described numerical and the above-described qualitative.

  The lock portion (first state holding means) 1313 of the crime prevention structure (2) locks (holds) the change suppressing means 1312 in the first state and specifies the lock (hold), although the specific configuration will be described later. The change control unit 1312 switches the change from the first state to the second state and the change from the second state to the first state.

5-4-3-2-1. Change suppression means and lock part (first state holding means)]
Specific change prevention means 1312 of the crime prevention structure (2) and the lock part (first state holding means) 1313 will be described with reference to FIGS. 144D to 144I.
First, the change suppressing means 1312 (D) in FIG. 144D has a flat plate shape that covers approximately one half of the outer surface of the cover body 1301 of the main control board box 1320 (that is, a part of the container). The specific operation unit 1311a (setting switch 1311a), the separate operation unit 1311b (setting switching button 1311b), and the RAM clear switch 1310f can be collectively covered. The change suppressing means 1312 can be pivoted in the form of a one-sided door by pivotally attaching one end side to the bearing portion 1301a of the cover 1301, and as shown by the solid line in FIG. 144D, the specific operation portion 1311a. In the first state, which makes it difficult to change the game setting, etc., and the second state, which exposes the specific operation unit 1311a etc. and enables the game setting change operation, as shown by an imaginary line in the figure. And can change (turn).

On the other hand, the lock portion (first state holding means) 1313 (D) in FIG. 144D is a cylinder lock 1313 a integrally provided on the free end side of the change suppressing means 1312 (D), and a rotary lock of the cylinder lock 1313 a. The first state change suppressing means 1312 (D) and the cover body 1301 are engaged by engaging the lock member 1313 c provided at the tip of the shaft 1313 b with the lock receiving member 1301 b protrudingly provided on the cover body 1301 of the main control board box 1320. And lock the change suppressing means 1312 (D) in the first state.
Further, the lock portion (first state holding means) 1313 (D) rotates the rotary lock shaft 1313 b of the cylinder lock 1313 a using the unlocking key K 2, and thus the lock receiving member 1301 b of the cover body 1301 The lock (holding) of the first state of the change suppressing means 1312 (D) is released by the specific release operation of removing 1313 c to enable the change to the second state, and the second state is changed to the first state. The changed change suppressing means 1312 (D) can be locked (held) by the unlocking key K2.

  Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 provided with the crime prevention structure (2) of the change suppressing means 1312 (D) and the lock unit (first state holding means) 1313 (D) in FIG. Since the change can be made only to a specific person with the unlocking key K2, even if the change operation means itself has a crime prevention structure for changing the game setting, there is almost no problem with crime prevention as in the case of the crime prevention structure (1) .

  Note that the change suppressing means 1312 (D) is made of synthetic resin having transparency (for example, transparency), and covering the change operating means in the first state does not prevent the visibility of the change operating means. Moreover, when the change suppressing means 1312 (D) is in the first state and covers the cover body 1301, each of the cover body 1301 and the change suppressing means 1312 (D) has a management number and a predetermined explanation An information display unit 1314 describing a sentence is provided. As a result, it is possible to easily find replacement of the cover body 1301 and the change suppressing means 1312 (D) performed for the purpose of concealment of fraud (aggregation of parts with good states), and further, changing operation means, particularly the specific operation unit Visual confirmation of unauthorized work on the 1311a can be easily performed.

  Further, although the change suppressing means 1312 (D) has a size and shape that covers a part of the cover body 1301, for example, the change suppressing means 1312 (D) can be sized and shaped so as to cover the main control unit 1300 in its entirety. In addition to the formation, the bearing portion 1301a and the lock receiving member 1301b of the lock portion (first state holding means) 1313 (D) may be provided on the fixing member (for example, the substrate holder 1200) on the main body frame 4 side. By doing so, the security of the entire main control unit 1300 can be enhanced.

  In addition, the security performance of the change suppressing means 1312 (D) is temporarily locked by setting the rotation center (bearing portion 1301 a) on the free end side of the main body frame 4 as shown in FIG. 144D. Holding means) Even if the 1313 (D) is destroyed, further crime prevention is possible. That is, as shown by an imaginary line in the figure, the change suppressing means 1312 (D) is in the form of a screen in an open state, and a wall near the left side of the change operating means (specific operation unit 1311 a, separate operation unit 1311 b) Change control means 1312 (D) in which an action of illegally performing a change operation on the change operation means from the free end side of the main body frame 4 is opened. It is possible to block by itself. That is, by providing the rotation center of the change suppressing means 1312 (D) on the free end side of the main body frame 4 in this manner, it is possible to protect the change operating means in the first state. Can prevent unauthorized change operations on the change operation means. In addition, in order to receive such an effect as much as possible, the change suppressing means 1312 (D) in FIG. 144D has a length (distance which protrudes toward the rear of the pachinko machine 1 from the bearing portion 1301a when the state is opened. Is set to be longer than the length (distance) from the bearing portion 1301a to the place where the change operation means (specific operation portion 1311a, separate operation portion 1311b) is disposed, and the change suppression means 1312 in an open state ( The change operation means (the specific operation unit 1311a and the other operation unit 1311b) are arranged to be closest to the right of D). In addition, the location where the change operation means (specific operation unit 1311a, separate operation unit 1311b) is disposed is positioned close to the center of the vertical length of the change suppression means 1312 (D), and the change operation means (specific operation unit 1311a, separate operation While making access from the upper part and the lower part of part 1311b difficult, and rotation of change control means 1312 (D) is made to stop (fixed) in the state where it stood upright. In addition, although crime prevention performance can be improved by having a part of each of these structures, it is preferable to satisfy all these most preferably.

  Alternatively, the change suppressing means 1312 (D) may be reduced to cover only the specific operation unit 1311 a, and the other operation unit 1311 b may not cover in any of the first state and the second state. In this way, by narrowing down the protection targets of the change operation means consisting of multiple elements (specific operation part and separate operation part) to those with high security importance, the low security importance is released to the outside. This can improve the workability of setting change.

  In addition, the axis line of the change operation means described in the crime prevention structure (1) is set in a direction substantially parallel to the substrate surface of the main control unit 1310, and the tip of the change operation means is exposed to the side surface of the container. The technical idea of the invention is also applicable to the cylinder lock 1313a of the lock portion (first state holding means) 1313 (D).

Next, the change suppressing means 1312 (E) in FIG. 144E is substantially the same as the change suppressing means 1312 (D) in FIG. 144D, and thus the detailed description will be omitted.
On the other hand, the lock portion (first state holding means) 1313 (E) of FIG. 144E is provided on the side of the cover body 1301 with the perforated lock receiving member 1315 integrally provided on the free end side of the change suppressing means 1312 (E). A padlock 1313d is formed by connecting the protruding lock receiving member 1316 with the U-shaped lock member 1313c, and by engaging both the light receiving lock receiving members 1315 and 1316 with the lock member 1313c, The change suppressing means 1312 (E) in one state is coupled with the cover body 1301 to lock (hold) the change suppressing means 1312 (E) in the first state.
In addition, the lock portion (first state holding means) 1313 (E) changes the lock member 1313 c of the padlock 1313 d in the unlocking direction using the unlocking key K 2, and as such the perforation of the change suppressing means 1312 (E) The lock (holding) in the first state of the change suppressing means 1312 (E) is released by a specific release operation of removing the lock member 1313 c from the lock receiving member 1315 and the apertured lock receiving member 1316 of the cover body 1301. It is possible to change (change) the second state from the second state to the first state and lock (hold) the change suppressing means 1312 (E) with the padlock 1313 d.

  The lock portion (first state holding means) 1313 (E) uses a well-known padlock 1313 d, and therefore is detached from both the change suppressing means 1312 (E) and the cover body 1301 in the unlocked state. . Therefore, the lock portion (first state holding means) (E) is separated from the cover body 1301 (accommodating body) in the unlocked state by being connected to the cover body 1301 by the wire-like or chain-like support 1313, for example. It is supposed not to. As a result, there is no risk of the lock portion (first state holding means) 1313 (E) falling into the island facility in the unlocked state, and the lock portion (first state holding means) 1313 (E) removed. Forget the place where you put it, and eliminate the waste of time searching for it in the lock phase.

  Next, the change suppressing means 1312 (F) in FIGS. 144F to H is pivotable by pivotally attaching a portion corresponding to the main part of the fan in a substantially horizontal fan shape to the cover body 1301 of the main control board box 1320. It can be changed to the first state covering the specific operation unit 1311a of the change operation means as shown in FIG. 144F and the second state to expose the specific operation unit 1311a to the outside as shown in FIG. 144H. Further, the change suppressing unit 1312 (F) does not cover the separate operation unit 1311 b when it is in the first state with respect to the specific operation unit 1311 a, and when it changes to the second state with respect to the specific operation unit 1311 a The operation unit 1311 b is covered. By selectively covering the specific operation unit 1311 a and the separate operation unit 1311 b with the change suppressing unit 1312 (F) as described above, an erroneous operation in which the specific operation unit 1311 a and the separate operation unit 1311 b are simultaneously operated hardly occurs.

  Note that the change suppressing means 1312 (F) is always urged in the direction of covering the separate operation portion 1311 b by a winding spring (not shown) provided at the swing center, and a lock portion (first state holding means) 1313 (described later). When the lock (hold) in the first state by F) is released, the elasticity of the winding spring changes the state to the second state. By urging the change suppressing means 1312 (F) toward the second state in this manner, there is no possibility that the change suppressing means 1312 (F) is stopped at a halfway position, and the operability is improved. The biasing direction of the change suppressing means 1312 (F) may be either the first state or the second state, but preferably the changing suppressing means 1312 (F) may be biased toward the second state. When the lock (hold) is released, the special operation unit 1311a is automatically exposed to the outside, so that the procedure of the change operation can be easily understood.

The lock portion (first state holding means) 1313 (F) of FIGS. 144F to 144H includes a mount portion 1301 d protruding from the cover body 1301, a cylinder lock 1313 a fixed to the mount portion 1301 d, and the lock A change restraining means comprises a cam 1313e attached to the tip of a rotary lock shaft 1313b of a cylinder lock 1313a, and the peripheral surface (cam surface) of the cam 1313e is in sliding contact with the upper side surface of the change restraining means 1312 (F) 1312 is pushed down against the bias of the winding spring and locked (held) in the first state in which the specific operation portion 1311a is covered.
Further, the lock portion (first state holding means) 1313 (F) rotates the rotary lock shaft 1313b of the cylinder lock 1313a using the unlocking key K2 and changes the circumferential shape of the cam 1313e by the rotation lock shaft 1313b. The lock (holding) of the first state of the change suppressing means 1312 (F) is released by the specific release operation of releasing the lock (holding) of 1312 (F), and the change to the second state is enabled (embodiment Since the change suppressing means 1312 (F) is biased in the direction toward the second state by a winding spring (not shown), when the lock (holding) in the first state is released, it slides on the circumferential surface of the cam 1313e. It is possible to lock (hold) the change suppressing means 1312 (F) which has been changed from the second state to the first state automatically while being in contact with the second state). .

  When it is necessary to operate the separate operation unit 1311 b when the change suppressing unit 1312 (F) is in the second state and covers the separate operation unit 1311 b in the setting value change operation, the change suppression unit A finger may be put on the operation projecting piece 1312 m protrudingly provided in 1312 (F) or the like to be manually depressed to expose the separate operation portion 1311 b.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 1 provided with the crime prevention structure (2) of the change suppressing means 1312 (F) and the lock part (first state holding means) 1313 (F) of FIGS. Since the change of the setting value of the game setting can be performed only to a specific person having the unlocking key K2, the change operation means itself does not have the crime prevention structure for the change of the game setting, like the crime prevention structure (1) There is almost no problem with the above.

  Next, the change suppressing means 1312 (I) of FIG. 144I is in a form in which the portion corresponding to the setting change substrate 1310 X of the cover body 1301 of the main control substrate box 1320 is separated and made independent. By engaging the key type hinge portion 1312b with the key type hinge portion 1302a formed on one side of the base body 1302, the base body 1302 is rotatable relative to the base body 1302 and provided on the setting change substrate 1310Y. The first state in which the specific operation unit 1311a and the separate operation unit 1311b are collectively covered, and the second state in which the specific operation unit 1311a and the separate operation unit 1311b are exposed to allow a change operation can be changed. The cover 1301 corresponding to the main control board 1310X is rotatably attached to a partition wall 1302b which is raised from the base body 1302 between the setting change board 1310Y and the main control board 1310X.

The lock portion (first state holding means) 1313 (I) of FIG. 144I is a dial lock 1313f provided on the edge on the cover body 1301 side of the change suppressing means 1312 (I), and the advancing / retracting locking shaft of the dial lock 1313f. By engaging the tip end of 1313 g with the lock stem 1301 f provided at the edge of the cover body 1301, the change suppressing means 1312 (I) of the first state and the cover body 1301 are coupled to change the means 1312 ( I) lock (hold) in the first state.
Further, the lock unit (first state holding means) 1313 (I) rotates the plurality of dials of the dial lock 1313 f as the unlocking number to retract the advancing and retracting lock shaft 1313 g, and thus the lock shaft of the cover body 1301. The lock (holding) of the first state of the change suppressing means 1312 (I) is released by the specific release operation of releasing the lock shaft 1313 g from the through 1301 f to enable the change to the second state, and the second state Can be locked (held) with the dial lock 1313f.

Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 provided with the crime prevention structure (2) of the change suppressing means 1312 (I) and the lock part (first state holding means) 1313 (I) of FIG. Since the change can be made only to a specific person who knows the unlock number of the dial lock 1313f, even if the change operation means itself has the crime prevention structure for changing the game setting, the same problem as the crime prevention structure (1) There is almost no Although the first state holding means 1313 exemplified in the crime prevention structure (2) adopts a relatively high crime prevention performance such as a cylinder lock 1313 a, a padlock 1313 d, a dial lock 1313 f, the crime prevention performance is temporarily lower than these. Any configuration may be used as long as the configuration is such that the change suppressing unit 1312 held in the first state can be released by a specific release operation.
Further, since the change suppressing means 1312 (I) in FIG. 144I is independent of the cover body 1301, even if it becomes necessary to replace the cover body 1301, the change suppressing means 1312 (I) can be reused as it is. is there. Further, when the change suppressing means 1312 (I) is connected to the hinge portion side of the cover body 1301, the cover body 1301 can be turned only in the second state where the change suppressing means 1312 (I) is turned. Therefore, even if an unauthorized person destroys the sealing mechanism 1320z of the cover body 1301, unauthorized work can not be performed unless a specific operation of the change suppressing means 1312 (I), that is, the unlocking number of the dial lock 1313f is known. Therefore, the tampering prevention function of the cover 1301 can be improved by the change suppressing means 1312 (I).

5-4-3-3. Security structure of change operation means (3)]
In the third crime prevention structure (3) for preventing unauthorized operation of the change operation means, the crime prevention structure (2) exposes the change operation means to the outside with the change suppression means 1312 in the second state, and the state While the change operation means is operated directly, the change suppression means 1312 is provided at a position covering the change operation means on the side of the container (main control board box 1320) and the change operation of the change operation means is performed by itself. While making it difficult, the change control means 1312 is made to substitute for the operation of the change operation means.
That is, as shown in FIG. 144J, the change suppressing means 1312 (J) of the crime prevention structure (3) is on the side of the cover body 1301 which is a containing body, and may be a specific operation unit 1311a (another operation unit 1311b). A cylinder lock 1313a fixedly provided at a position to be covered, that is, a position in a first state covering the opening 1301h for exposing the specific operation portion 1311a, is provided directly from the outside with respect to the specific operation portion 1311a. Make the change operation difficult.
Further, the change suppressing means 1312 (J) presses the rotation of the end face cam 1313i fixed to the rotary lock shaft 1313b of the cylinder lock 1313a so as to be able to mediate switch input by a specific operation from the outside. A linear motion of the moving element 1313h, that is, a motion conversion mechanism that allows movement for switch input is provided.
Then, when a specific operation of inserting the unlocking key K2 into the change suppressing means 1312 (J) and rotating the rotary lock shaft 1313b of the cylinder lock 1313a is performed, the specific operation unit 1311a is performed by the above operation of the motion conversion mechanism. Direct change operation from the outside to the outside is substituted by the pressing operation slider 1313 h of the change suppressing means 1312 (J), in other words, the direct change operation from the outside to the specific operation unit 1311 a is the change suppressing means This operation is performed via the pressing operation slider 1313 h of 1312 (J).

According to the change suppressing means 1312 (J), the change suppressing means is fixedly provided at a position where the change operation of the game setting from the outside by the change operating means covers the change operating means with respect to the cover body 1301 side. Because it is in a difficult state, there is almost no risk that the game settings will be tampered with.
On the other hand, in the case where the game setting is regularly changed by the change operation means, an operation such as inserting an external lock key K2 from the outside and twisting is performed as a specific operation from outside with respect to the change suppressing means 1312 (J) By the operation to the change suppressing means 1312 (J), a direct change operation to the change operation means is substituted (intermediate execution), and the game setting can be changed.
Then, after the change of the game setting is completed, by terminating the specific operation on the change suppressing means 1312 (J), it is possible to return the external direct change operation to the change operation means to a difficult state.

The change suppressing means 1312 (J) may be, for example, the dial lock 1313 f of the change suppressing means 1312 (I) or the advancing and retracting lock shaft 1313 g other than the case where the rotary lock shaft 1313 b of the cylinder lock 1313 a is rotated by the unlocking key K2. Of the specific operation unit 1311a and the axial line of the pressing operation unit 1311p of the specific operation unit 1311a, and with the respective dials of the dial lock 1313f aligned with the unlocking number, the specific operation unit 1311a The pressing operation unit 1311 p may be capable of pressing.
In addition, as shown in FIG. 144K, a shutter plate 1319 covering the separate operation portion 1311b is integrally protruded on the end face cam 1313i of the change suppressing means 1312 (J), and the end face cam 1313i is rotated by a specific operation. The shutter plate 1319 may also be rotated to expose the separate operation unit 1311 b. Thus, it is possible not only to prevent unauthorized operation of the separate operation unit 1311b but also to prevent dust from entering the internal space 1320s of the main control board box 1320.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 1 provided with the crime prevention structure (3) of the change suppressing means 1312 (J) of FIG. 144J and FIG. 144K has the unlocking key K2 for changing the setting value of the game setting by the change operation means Or, since it can only be performed by a specific person who knows the unlocking number, etc., even if the change operation means itself is not provided with the crime prevention structure for changing the game setting, the same problem in crime prevention as the crime prevention structure (1) There is almost nothing.

  In addition, the axis line of the change operation means described in the crime prevention structure (1) is set in a direction substantially parallel to the substrate surface of the main control unit 1310, and the tip of the change operation means is exposed to the side surface of the container. The technical idea of the invention is also applicable to the cylinder lock 1313 a of the change suppressing means 1312 (J) or the like.

5-4-3-4. Technical thought about crime prevention structure]
The crime prevention structure of the above-described game setting corresponds to an embodiment of solutions 1 to 8 for the background art described below.
[Background technology]

  Conventionally, in the game area of the game board, there is provided a socket on which a plurality of nails are implanted and a game ball can enter. Then, when the game ball fired by the launcher strikes a nail and changes the course and flows down the game area and enters a specific receiving port (for example, the start winning entry port), a lottery is performed due to the establishment of a predetermined condition A gaming machine has been proposed in which a gaming state advantageous to the player occurs when the result of the lottery is a hit (for example, JP-A-2008-012194). In such a gaming machine, the posture of the nail changes the course of the gaming ball flowing down the gaming area, and the probability of entering a specific receiving hole also changes, so the player checks the state of the nail It was common to select a gaming machine.

However, the difference in the posture of the nail is subtle, and only a small number of players can select an advantageous game machine from among a plurality of machines installed in the game hall, so that the game benefits are obtained. There is a problem that some people who can do it are unevenly distributed, and there is a problem that the profit of the game hall is harmed by some professional players if you change the view.
In order to solve such a problem, there is also developed a system in which the probability of winning a lottery can be changed to any of a plurality of stages, but if so, the probability of winning may be determined by some players or There is a possibility that an employee on the game hall side concurring with these may unfairly change, and an effective measure for preventing such an injustice has been desired.

(Solution 1)
It is a gaming machine that draws a lottery when a predetermined condition is established, and gives a player a predetermined profit when the result of the lottery is a hit,
A main control unit provided on the back side of the gaming machine and having a main control MPU for controlling the progress of the game;
A change operation means provided in the main control unit and capable of changing the game setting relating to the winning probability of the lottery to any of a plurality of stages;
The first state in which at least a part of the change operation means is covered to make it difficult to change the game setting, and the change operation means covered in the first state is exposed to change the game setting Change inhibiting means, which can be changed to a second state to enable;
A game machine comprising: first state holding means for holding the change suppressing means in the first state and releasing the holding by a specific release operation.

According to this gaming machine, the change operation of the game setting by the change operation means is in a difficult state by the change suppressing means held (locked) in the first state, so the game setting is illegally changed. There is almost nothing.
On the other hand, when the administrator etc. regularly performs the change operation of the game setting by the change operation means, for example, the holding (lock) of the first state holding means is released and changed as a specific release operation. The control means is changed to the second state, whereby the change operation means exposed to the outside is operated to change the game setting.
Then, after the change of the game setting is completed, the change suppressing means can be returned to the first state to hold (lock) the first state holding means, so that the change operation of the game setting can be returned to a difficult state. .
In order to solve the same problem, it is possible to directly attach a key switch that can be turned on and off with a dedicated key as a change operation means to the substrate of the main control unit, but the current main control unit is limited. Since electronic components are arranged at high density in the space, if the key switch is directly attached to the main control unit, a drastic change of the substrate configuration is required. On the other hand, in the gaming machine of solution means 1, since the change operation means is blocked from the incorrect setting change by the combination of the change suppression means and the first state holding means, the change operation means is formed by a small operation rod switch. Is possible, thus eliminating the need for major changes in the main controller board configuration.

(Solution 2)
The gaming machine of the solution means 1 is
A container for housing the main control unit;
And an opening provided in the container for communicating the change operation means of the main control unit accommodated in the container to the outside,
Furthermore, a foreign matter intrusion prevention part may be provided between the container and the change operation means for preventing foreign matter from invading from the opening.
By doing so, it is possible to prevent a fraudulent act of infiltrating a foreign object such as a wire from the opening and performing an unauthorized work on the main control unit.

(Solution 3)
Further, in the gaming machine of the above solution means 1 or 2,
The change operation unit includes a specific operation unit that controls start of setting change and another operation unit that performs other setting operations.
The change suppressing means may cover the specific operation unit so as to be changeable between the first state and the second state, but not cover the other operation unit.
In this way, by narrowing the protection targets of the change operation means consisting of a plurality of elements to those with high importance in security, the degree of freedom in design, such as downsizing of the shape of the change suppression means and reduction of the movable range accordingly Therefore, a higher degree of fraud protection is possible, and by opening things of low security importance to the outside, the workability of setting change can be improved.

(Solution 4)
Further, in the gaming machine of the above solution means 1 or 2,
The change operation unit includes a specific operation unit that controls start of setting change and another operation unit that performs other setting operations.
The change suppressing means can change the first operation state and the second state with respect to the specific operation unit, and can cover the different operation unit when the second operation state is changed with respect to the specific operation unit. The first state holding means may be biased toward either the first state or the second state in a state where the holding (locking) by the first state holding means is released.
In such a gaming machine, the specific operation unit and the separate operation unit are alternatively covered by the change suppressing means, so that an erroneous operation in which the specific operation unit and the different operation unit are simultaneously operated hardly occurs. Further, by urging the change suppressing means toward either the first state or the second state, there is no possibility that the change suppressing means is stopped at a halfway position, and the operability is improved. Preferably, when the change suppressing means is biased toward the second state, the special operation unit is automatically exposed to the outside when the holding (locking) of the first state of the change suppressing means is released. It is easy to understand the procedure of change operation.

(Solution 5)
Further, in the gaming machine according to any one of the solving means 1 to 4 above,
The first state holding means may connect the change suppressing means in the first state and the container with a lock member to lock the change suppressing means in the first state.
This makes it possible to lock the change suppressing means easily and reliably in the first state.

(Solution 6)
Further, in the gaming machine of the solution means 5,
The first state holding means may be connected to the container by a support so as not to be separated from the container in the unlocked state.
By doing so, the first state holding means is not detached from the container even in the unlocked state, so there is no risk of dropping the first state holding means into the island facility, and the first state holding means removed is placed. It is possible to eliminate the time waste of forgetting a place and searching for it at the lock stage.

(Solution means 7)
Further, the gaming machine according to any one of the solving means 1 to 6 is
A container for housing the main control unit;
The change suppressing means covers a part or all of the container when in the first state,
The container and the change suppressing means are each provided with an information display unit having transparency and describing a management number and a predetermined explanation.
Furthermore, each information display unit may be provided at a position that does not overlap each other when the change suppressing unit is in the first state and does not interfere with the visibility of the specific operation unit.
By doing so, it is possible to easily find replacement of containers or change suppressing means performed for the purpose of concealment of fraud (aggregation of parts in good condition), and further, visual confirmation of fraudulent work on a specific operation unit Easy to do.

(Solution 8)
The above solutions 1 to 7 make the change suppressing means be in the second state and expose the change operating means to the outside, and directly operate the change operating means in that state, but the change suppressing means is the change operation on the container side The change control means may be provided at a position to cover the means to make the change operation of the change operation means difficult, while the change suppressing means may substitute the operation of the change operation means.
That is, the gaming machine of the solution means 8 draws a lottery when the predetermined condition is established, and gives a predetermined profit to the player when the result of the lottery is a hit,
A main control unit provided on the back side of the gaming machine and having a main control MPU for controlling the progress of the game;
A container for housing the main control unit;
A change operation means provided in the main control unit and capable of changing the game setting relating to the winning probability of the lottery to any of a plurality of stages;
And a change suppressing unit provided on the side of the container and covering the change operation unit, which makes it difficult for an external direct change operation to the change operation unit.
The change suppressing means is operable by a specific operation from the outside,
When the specific operation is performed on the change suppressing unit, the change suppressing unit operates to substitute a direct change operation on the change operating unit.

According to this gaming machine, since the change operation of the game setting from the outside by the change operation means is in a difficult state by the change suppressing means fixedly provided at the position covering the change operation means on the container side. There is almost no risk that the game settings will be tampered with.
On the other hand, when the administrator etc. regularly change the game setting by the change operation means, for example, an operation of inserting an external lock key from the outside and twisting is performed as a specific operation from the outside to the change suppression means And, by the operation to the change control means, the direct change operation to the change operation means is substituted, and the change of the game setting becomes possible.
And, after the change of the game setting is completed, by terminating the specific operation on the change suppressing means, it is possible to return the external direct change operation to the change operation means to a difficult state.
In this solution means 8 as well, since the change operation means is blocked from fraudulently by the change suppression means provided on the container side, the change operation means can be formed by a small operation rod switch, and hence the main control unit There is no need to make major changes in the board configuration of

[5-5. Function Display Unit]
The function display unit 1400 in the game board 5 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 131 and 142 to 144A. Here, first, the function display unit 1400 attached to the lower left corner of the front component 1000 outside the game area 5a will be described, and then, the function display attached to the upper left corner of the front component 1000 outside the game area 5a The unit 1400 will be described.

[5-5-1. When attached to the lower left corner of the front component outside the game area]
As shown in FIG. 131, the function display unit 1400 is attached to the lower left corner of the front component 1000 outside the gaming area 5a. The function display unit 1400 can be viewed from the front (the player side) through the door window 101 a of the door frame 3 in a state of being assembled in the pachinko machine 1. The function display unit 1400 displays a gaming state (playing status), a result of a regular lottery, a special lottery result, and the like by using a plurality of LEDs based on a control signal from the main control board 1310X.

  The function display unit 1400 displays, as shown in an enlarged manner in FIG. 131, a state indicator 1401 consisting of three LEDs for displaying the game state, and an ordinary lottery result selected by passing the game ball B against the gate portion 2003. A normal symbol display 1402 consisting of two LEDs and a normal storage indicator 1403 consisting of two LEDs for displaying the number of reservations for the passage of the game ball B to the gate portion 2003.

  In addition, the function display unit 1400 has a first special symbol display 1404 consisting of eight LEDs for displaying the first special lottery result drawn by receiving the game ball B to the first starting port 2002, and the first starting port Second special lottery number drawn by the reception of the game ball B to the second start port 2004, the first special hold number indicator 1405 consisting of two LEDs to display the number of reservations pertaining to the reception of the game ball B to 2002 A second special symbol display 1406 consisting of eight LEDs for displaying the result, and a second special hold number indicator 1407 consisting of two LEDs for displaying the number of reservations pertaining to the reception of the game ball B to the second start port 2004 And have.

  Furthermore, the function display unit 1400 is a round consisting of five LEDs that display the number of repetitions (number of rounds) of the opening and closing pattern of the big winning opening 2005 when the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result is "big hit" or the like. A display 1408 is provided.

  The function display unit 1400 can display the number of holdings, a symbol, and the like by appropriately turning on, off, and blinking the provided LEDs.

[5-5-2. When attached to the upper left corner of the front component outside the game area]
The function display unit 1400 is attached to the upper left corner of the front component 1000 outside the gaming area 5a, as shown in FIG. The arrangement of the various displays of the function display unit 1400 is obtained by rotating the arrangement of the various displays of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. 131 by 90 degrees clockwise, and the functions of the various displays are also shown in FIG. The functions are the same as those of the various displays of the function display unit 1400.

  Here, as a noise countermeasure when the function display unit 1400 is attached to the upper left corner of the front component 1000 outside the gaming area 5a, particularly, the function display unit 1400 and the main control board 1310X are electrically connected to A plurality of wires (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as “wires”) for transferring control signals from the control substrate 1310X to the function display unit 1400 will be described in detail.

  As shown in FIGS. 143 and 144A, the wiring FCBL electrically connected through the connection connector 1400a provided on the back surface side of the function display unit 1400 is from the upper right corner of the game board 5 to the back surface of the back box 3010. When it is drawn up to the upper side, it is bent downward of the rear surface of the back box 3010 and collected together by the wiring processing pieces 3011 formed in plural in the vertical direction along the right side of the rear surface of the back box 3010. Along the right side of the main control board box 1320 of the main control unit 1300 which is bent before reaching the upper side of the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200 attached to the lower side of the rear side of the 1100 or is attached directly to the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200 It is drawn down toward the bottom.

  Then, when the wiring FCBL is routed to the lower side of the main control board box 1320, it is bent toward the left side of the main control board box 1320, and along the lower side of the main control board box 1320, the function display unit connector MFCN After being drawn down to the lower side, they are electrically connected to the function display unit connector MFCN.

  Thus, the wiring FCBL for electrically connecting the function display unit 1400 and the main control board 1310X has a long wiring length, and in particular, the rear surface of the game panel 1100 from the upper right corner of the game board 5, and the back box The wiring FCBL routed to the upper side of the rear surface of the back 3010 is bent downward of the rear surface of the back box 3010 and is formed by a plurality of wiring processing pieces 3011 formed vertically along the right side of the rear surface of the back box 3010 The bottom of the main control board box 1320 is routed along the right side of the main control board box 1320, which is the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200 attached to the bottom rear of the game panel 1100. As described above, the area in which the wiring FCBL is routed is the front of the payout unit 560 attached to the payout base unit 550 in the main frame 4 shown in FIG. 97 when the gaming board 5 is attached to the pachinko machine 1 Will be placed in

  The game panel 1100 includes a panel decoration substrate on which a plurality of panel decoration LEDs for emitting light toward the peripheral surface of the base panel plate 1110 are mounted, and a substrate cover for attaching the panel decoration substrate to the panel holder 1120; In the case where the panel decoration substrate is provided, the panel decoration substrate includes an upper left panel decoration substrate 1131 disposed at the upper left corner of the panel holder 1120 in front view and a lower left panel decoration substrate disposed at the lower left corner Configured The substrate cover includes an upper left substrate cover for attaching the upper left panel decoration substrate 1131 to the panel holder 1120 and a lower left substrate cover for attaching the lower left panel decoration substrate to the panel holder 1120.

  At the rear of the function display unit 1400, an upper left panel decoration substrate 1131 is disposed. When the wire UPCBL, which is a connection cable electrically connected via the connection connector 1131a provided on the back surface side of the upper left panel decoration substrate 1131, is bent to the upper rear surface of the game panel 1100, the wire UPCBL on the front surface of the back box 3010 When it is bent toward the rear surface of the back box 3010 at the upper side and is drawn around to the upper side of the rear surface of the back box 3010 in a state of proximity (or contact) with the wiring FCBL described above, the lower side of the rear surface of the back box 3010 Are respectively bent by a plurality of wiring processing pieces 3011 formed in the vertical direction along the right side of the rear surface of the back box 3010, and pulled up to the upper side of the driving substrate unit 1700 below the peripheral control unit 1500. It will be turned. Then, the wiring UPCBL is bent below the peripheral control unit 1500 toward the left side at the upper side of the drive substrate unit 1700 and separated along the upper side of the drive substrate unit 1700 apart from the path of the wiring FCBL described above. After being drawn and drawn up to the upper side of the predetermined connector of the panel drive substrate 1720 in the drive substrate unit 1700, it is electrically connected to the predetermined connector.

  As such, the wiring UPCBL electrically connecting the upper left panel decorative substrate 1131 disposed behind the function display unit 1400 and the panel drive substrate 1720 has a longer wiring length, and in particular, the upper right of the game board 5 The wiring FCBL routed from the corner to the back surface of the game panel 1100 and to the upper side of the back surface of the back box 3010 is bent downward of the back surface of the back box 3010 and A plurality of wiring processing pieces 3011 formed in a plurality of directions are gathered together and routed to the upper side of the drive substrate unit 1700 below the peripheral control unit 1500. The area in which the wiring UPCBL is drawn is attached to the payout base unit 550 of the main body frame 4 shown in FIG. 97 when the gaming board 5 is attached to the pachinko machine 1 like the above-mentioned wiring FCBL. It will be arrange | positioned ahead of the payout unit 560 being carried out.

  As described above, the payout unit 560 includes the ball guiding unit 570 having one guiding path for guiding the gaming balls B from the tank rail 553 in a serpentine manner, and the one guiding path of the ball guiding unit 570. A payout device 580 for paying out the induced gaming balls B one by one based on an instruction from the payout control substrate 633, and an upper full ball path unit 600 for guiding the gaming balls B having passed through the payout devices 580 downward; And a lower full ball path unit 610 for guiding the game ball B having passed through the upper full ball path unit 600 to the door frame 3 side or the board unit 620 side.

  In addition, as described above, the game ball B is polished at the island facility of the game hall, rubs against each other in the circulation between the island facility and the pachinko machine 1, and is charged and electrostatically discharged to cause electromagnetic wave noise. Release. For this reason, static electricity is likely to be accumulated in the area where the ball tank 552 capable of retaining the game ball B and the payout unit 560 are attached and in the periphery thereof.

  The main control board 1310 X is a microprocessor that incorporates a ROM for storing various processing programs and various commands, a RAM for temporarily storing data, etc., although its detailed description will be described later. See FIG. 151). The main control MPU 1310a incorporates a circuit that is forcibly reset by hardware when it is affected by electrical noise (hereinafter referred to as "internal reset circuit"), and such internal reset is described. The forced reset by the circuit has a mechanism that can not be controlled and invalidated by the user program. Therefore, when the main reset MPU 1310a is subjected to a forced reset by the built-in reset circuit, the main control MPU 1310a is reset without executing the main control side power-off process described later, and executes the main control side power-on process described later. It will be done. In this case, since the main control side power-off process is not executed, a check sum (sum value) error of the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310 a always occurs as described later, so it is built in the main control MPU 1310 a The contents of the RAM are completely erased (cleared). That is, when the forcible reset is performed by the built-in reset circuit, the RAM clear is executed when the main control MPU 1310 a is activated again.

  Also, in the present embodiment, a ZIP (Zigzag Inline Package) type is adopted as a package of the main control MPU 1310a, and when the main control MPU 1310a is mounted on the mounting surface of the main control substrate 1310X, various pins of the main control MPU 1310a It protrudes from the soldering surface (surface opposite to the mounting surface) of the main control board 1310X. That is, various pins of the main control MPU 1310 a are in a state of projecting toward the bottom plate of the main control board box 1320.

  As described above, static electricity is likely to be accumulated in the area where the ball tank 552 and the dispensing unit 560 are attached and the periphery thereof, and therefore, when electromagnetic wave noise is released by electrostatic discharge, it is disposed in front of the dispensing unit 560. There is a possibility of intruding into the wiring FCBL which electrically connects the unit 1400 and the main control board 1310 X, and electrically connects the upper left panel decorative board 1131 disposed behind the function display unit 1400 and the peripheral control board 1510 May intrude into the wiring UPCBL. As a result, the electromagnetic wave noise intruding into the wiring FCBL may pop out and intrude into the wiring UPCBL, and conversely, the electromagnetic wave noise intruding into the wiring UPCBL may pop out and intrudes into the wiring FCBL.

  For example, the wiring FCBL for electrically connecting the function display unit 1400 and the main control board 1310 X is temporarily formed in the wiring space formed between the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200 and the bottom plate of the main control board box 1320 It is drawn on a straight line from a predetermined position on the right side of the control board box 1320 toward the left side of the main control board box 1320 (eg, from the upper side of the main control board box 1320 to the right side of the main control board box 1320). Where it has a quarter length, it is bent toward the left side of the main control board box 1320 so as to be parallel to the upper side or the lower side of the main control board box 1320), the center from the lower side of the main control board 1310 X to the left side The main control board box 132 at a stage passing over the function display unit connector MFCN arranged closer to the main control board When it is bent toward the lower side and pulled out from the lower side of the main control board box 1320 and then electrically connected to the function display unit connector MFCN, the electromagnetic wave noise intrudes into the line FCBL, the line FCBL Is routed in the wiring space formed between the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200 and the bottom plate of the main control substrate box 1320, the front of the main control substrate 1310X (that is, corresponding to the mounting position of the main control MPU 1310a) When passing through the area in front of the bottom plate of the main control board box 1320, the electromagnetic wave noise intrudes into various pins of the main control MPU 1310a projecting toward the bottom plate of the main control board box 1320 via the wiring FCBL The main control MPU 1310a is strongly controlled by its own built-in reset circuit under the influence of the Reset and there is a consuming fear.

  If the wiring accommodation groove is formed on the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200 instead of in the wiring space formed between the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200 and the bottom plate of the main control substrate box 1320, the wiring FCBL is The function display is received after being drawn along the wiring receiving groove, not the wiring space formed between the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200 and the bottom plate of the main control substrate box 1320, and drawn from the lower side of the main control substrate box 1320. Electrically connected to unit connector MFCN. Also in this case, when electromagnetic wave noise intrudes into the wiring FCBL, as described above, when the wiring FCBL is accommodated and drawn along the wiring receiving groove formed on the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200, the main control MPU 1310a When passing through the area in front of the main control board 1310X (that is, in front of the bottom plate of the main control board box 1320) corresponding to the mounting position, electromagnetic noise is transmitted to the bottom board of the main control board box 1320 via the wiring FCBL. Intruding into various pins of the main control MPU 1310a protruding toward the main control MPU 1310a, there is a possibility that the main control MPU 1310a may be forcibly reset by its own built-in reset circuit under the influence of the electromagnetic wave noise.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, as a positional relationship between the mounting position of the function display unit connector MFCN to which the wiring FCBL is electrically connected and the mounting position of the main control MPU 1310a, the function display unit connector MFCN is used as a main control board The main control MPU 1310a is disposed above the center line passing through the middle points of the right and left sides of the main control board 1310X, as well as being disposed closer to the left side from the center of the lower side of 1310X. That is, in the present embodiment, the function display unit connector MFCN is disposed below the center line passing the middle point of the main control MPU 1310a between the right side and the left side of the main control board 1310X. By arranging the main control MPU 1310a above the line, the function display unit connector MFCN and the main control MPU 1310a are arranged to be separated at the main control board 1310X.

  As a result, the main control MPU 1310a can be disposed apart from the function display unit connector MFCN to which the wiring FCBL is electrically connected. Therefore, the electromagnetic wave noise intruding into the wiring FCBL corresponds to the function display unit connector MFCN and the main control It is possible to prevent the pins of the main control MPU 1310a protruding toward the bottom plate of the main control board box 1320 from invading through the space separating the MPU 1310a from the main control board 1310X. Therefore, main control MPU 1310 a can be protected from wiring FCBL to which electromagnetic wave noise can enter.

  Also, by arranging main control MPU 1310 a away from function display unit connector MFCN to which wiring FCBL is electrically connected, main control MPU 1310 a is not affected even if electromagnetic noise enters the wiring FCBL. In the space where the main control board 1310X or the function display unit connector MFCN and the main control MPU 1310a are separated from each other on the main control board 1310X, electromagnetic noises entering through the wiring FCBL can be attenuated. ing. Also in this point, the main control MPU 1310a can be protected from the wiring FCBL to which electromagnetic wave noise can intrude.

  In the present embodiment, the main control MPU 1310a is disposed such that the package right side is separated from the right side of the main control board 1310X by at least a predetermined distance dimension (hereinafter referred to as "first wire separation distance dimension"). ing. This is because the line FCBL electrically connecting the function display unit 1400 and the main control board 1310X is drawn downward along the right side of the main control board box 1320, so the electromagnetic wave that has entered the line FCBL This is to prevent noise from intruding into various pins of the main control MPU 1310 a protruding toward the bottom plate of the main control board box 1320 through the space having the first wiring separation distance dimension from the wiring FCBL.

  Further, as described above, the wiring FCBL electrically connecting the function display unit 1400 and the main control substrate 1310X is in the wiring space formed between the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200 and the bottom plate of the main control substrate box 1320. On the right side of the main control board box 1320 of the main control unit 1300 attached to the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200 without being drawn around (or accommodated along the wiring accommodation groove formed on the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200) When it is drawn downward along it, it is bent toward the left side of the main control board box 1320 and is drawn along the lower side of the main control board box 1320 to the lower side of the function display unit connector MFCN. , And the main control board box 13 is electrically connected to the function display unit connector MFCN. The distance between the line FCBL drawn along the lower side of 0 and the various pins of the main control MPU 1310 a protruding toward the bottom plate of the main control board box 1320 (hereinafter referred to as “second wiring separation distance dimension” ) Can be secured large. The second wiring separation distance dimension is larger than the first wiring separation distance dimension. Thereby, the electromagnetic wave noise which has entered the wiring FCBL penetrates various pins of the main control MPU 1310 a projecting toward the bottom plate of the main control substrate box 1320 through the space having the second wiring distance from the wiring FCBL. Can be prevented. Also in this point, the main control MPU 1310a can be protected from the wiring FCBL to which electromagnetic wave noise can intrude.

  In the present embodiment, the function display unit 1400 and the main control substrate 1310X are directly electrically connected by the wiring FCBL, but the function display unit 1400 and the main control substrate 1310X are electrically connected via the panel relay substrate 1710. It can also be configured to connect in a straight line. In this case, it is preferable to provide the panel relay substrate 1710 with an element capable of reducing or removing the electromagnetic wave noise that has entered the above-described wiring FCBL (that is, a plurality of control signals transmitted from the main control substrate 1310X to the function display unit 1400). It is preferable to provide an element capable of reducing or removing the electromagnetic wave noise with respect to the wiring FCBL. Thereby, it is possible to make the main control MPU 1310 a not affect the electromagnetic wave noise intruding through the wiring FCBL. Therefore, main control MPU 1310 a can be protected from wiring FCBL to which electromagnetic wave noise can enter.

  A resistor, a filter circuit, etc. can be mentioned as such an element. It is known from the observation result of the waveform of the electromagnetic wave noise that the waveform width of the electromagnetic wave noise falls within about 2 microseconds (μs), and the filter circuit is a signal having a waveform width larger than such a waveform width. It is designed to pass through.

  In addition to resistances, filter circuits, etc., examples of such elements include EMC countermeasure parts (coils, beads, capacitors, etc.). They are inserted so as to be respectively connected in series, and when using a capacitor, they are inserted so as to be electrically connected in parallel to a plurality of wirings FCBL. If a steeper attenuation characteristic is required, a circuit formed by combining a coil and a capacitor may be inserted into each of the plurality of wirings FCBL, or the bead and the capacitor may be inserted. A circuit formed by combining these may be inserted.

  Further, the panel relay substrate 1710 detects the game ball B received by the gate sensor 2401 for detecting the game ball B passing through the gate section 2003 provided on the game board 5 and the special winning opening 2005 provided for the game board 5. Large winning opening sensor 2403, a general winning opening sensor 3001 for detecting the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 provided on the game board 5, detection of magnetism acting in the vicinity of the first starting opening 2002 provided for the game board 5 Two wires from various sensors such as the magnetic sensor 3003 are electrically connected and aggregated. That is, in addition to the two wires from the various sensors, the panel relay substrate 1710 is electrically connected to the wires FCBL from the function display unit 1400 and aggregated. Note that two wires from the first starting opening sensor 3002 for detecting the gaming ball B received in the first starting opening 2002 and a second starting opening for detecting the gaming ball B received in the second starting opening 2004 The two wires from the sensor 2402 are electrically connected directly to the respective predetermined connectors of the main control substrate 1310X without the intervention of the panel relay substrate 1710, respectively.

  The panel relay substrate 1710 is electrically connected to the main control substrate 1310 X via the connection connector 1710 a, in addition to the two wires from the various sensors, the wiring FCBL from the function display unit 1400. Therefore, when the function display unit 1400 and the main control board 1310X are electrically connected via the panel relay board 1710, the electromagnetic wave noise which has entered the wiring FCBL in the panel relay board 1710 is reduced or By providing elements that can be removed (that is, by providing elements capable of reducing or removing electromagnetic noise to a plurality of wirings FCBL transmitting control signals from main control substrate 1310X to function display unit 1400) And electromagnetic wave noise from the various sensors to the two wires can be prevented.

  As described above, the wire UPCBL electrically connecting the upper left panel decoration substrate 1131 and the panel drive substrate 1720 disposed behind the function display unit 1400 has a longer wire length, and in particular, the game board The wiring UPCBL routed from the upper right corner of 5 to the back surface of the game panel 1100 and the upper edge of the back surface of the back box 3010 is bent downward of the back surface of the back box 3010 and on the right side of the back surface of the back box 3010 The wiring UPCBL is drawn in this manner because the wiring processing pieces 3011 formed in the vertical direction along the upper and lower sides are respectively gathered up and drawn under the peripheral control unit 1500 and to the upper side of the drive substrate unit 1700. As in the case of the above-described wiring FCBL, electromagnetic wave noise may intrude into the area where the noise is generated. As described above, the wiring UPCBL is bent toward the left side at the upper side of the drive substrate unit 1700 below the peripheral control unit 1500 and is routed along the upper side of the drive substrate unit 1700, and the drive substrate unit After being routed to the upper side of the predetermined connector of the panel drive substrate 1720 in 1700, since it is electrically connected to the predetermined connector, the influence of electromagnetic wave noise due to the wiring UPCBL affects the peripheral control substrate 1510 in the peripheral control unit 1500. There is a fear.

  Specifically, the lower side of peripheral control unit 1500 will be described in detail later, but connectors CN2 to CN7 (see FIG. 148) provided on peripheral control substrate 1510 and connectors provided on liquid crystal output substrate 1530 CN8 and CN9 are arranged (see FIG. 148). Corresponding various wires are electrically connected to such connectors CN2 to CN9. For this reason, the various wires electrically connected to the connectors CN2 to CN9 and the wiring UPCBL are arranged to cross or contact each other (arrangement arrangement), the electromagnetic wave noise intruding into the wiring UPCBL jumps out and is transmitted to the connectors CN2 to CN9. When entering into various electrically connected wires, disturbance occurs in the effect image drawn on the effect display device 1600, for example, under the influence of the electromagnetic wave noise intruding into the wire UPCBL (for example, a pattern such as a black screen) Turbulence will occur).

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, although not shown, various wires electrically connected to the connectors CN2 to CN9 are separated along the lower side of the peripheral control unit 1500 to be separated from the upper side of the drive substrate unit 1700. There is. As a result, the wiring UPCBL drawn around along the upper side of the drive substrate unit 1700 does not cross (or cross over) various wirings electrically connected to the connectors CN2 to CN9. Specifically, the wires UPCBL drawn along the upper side of the drive substrate unit 1700 do not contact in parallel with various wires electrically connected to the connectors CN2 to CN9, and the connectors CN2 to CN9 are electrically connected. Do not make contact with some of the various wires connected to In the present embodiment, in order to prevent the main control MPU 1310a from being forcibly reset by the above-described internal reset circuit, various wirings electrically connected to the main control substrate 1310X intersect or contact the wiring UPCBL. It is arranged not to.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the wiring UPCBL routed below the peripheral control unit 1500 and along the upper side of the drive substrate unit 1700 and the peripheral control IC of the peripheral control substrate 1510 accommodated in the peripheral control unit 1500 The peripheral control IC 1510a is disposed above the center line passing through the middle points of the right side and the left side of the peripheral control 1510 as a positional relationship with the mounting position of the peripheral control IC 1510a described later (FIG. 151). That is, in this embodiment, the peripheral control IC 1510a is arranged above the center line passing through the middle points of the right and left sides of the peripheral control board 1510, whereby the wiring UPCBL and the peripheral control IC 1510a are arranged. It is arranged to separate.

  Thus, peripheral control IC 1510 a of peripheral control board 1510 accommodated in peripheral control unit 1500 is separated from wiring UPCBL drawn under the peripheral control unit 1500 and along the upper side of drive substrate unit 1700. Therefore, the electromagnetic wave noise that has entered the wiring UPCBL is accommodated in the peripheral control unit 1500 via the space separating the wiring UPCBL and the peripheral control IC 1510a and is mounted on the peripheral control board 1510. It is possible to prevent intrusion into various pins. Therefore, peripheral control IC 1510a can be protected from wiring UPCBL to which electromagnetic wave noise can enter.

  In addition, the peripheral control IC 1510 a of the peripheral control board 1510 accommodated in the peripheral control unit 1500 is disposed apart from the wiring UPCBL drawn under the peripheral control unit 1500 and along the upper side of the drive substrate unit 1700. Thus, even if electromagnetic noise penetrates into the wiring UPCBL, the peripheral control IC 1510a is not affected by the wiring UPCBL on the peripheral control substrate 1510 or in a space separating the wiring UPCBL from the peripheral control IC 1510a. Electromagnetic wave noise can be attenuated. Also in this point, the peripheral control IC 1510a can be protected from the wiring UPCBL to which electromagnetic wave noise can penetrate.

  Further, the substrates of the peripheral control substrate 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500 and the substrate of the panel drive substrate 1720 of the drive substrate unit 1700 are electrically connected via a wire not shown, and this wire and wire UPCBL intersect or contact The electromagnetic wave noise intruding through the wiring UPCBL is attenuated in the panel drive substrate 1720, and the peripheral control substrate 1510 is processed from the panel drive substrate 1720 through the wiring. It becomes extremely difficult to intrude to the peripheral control board 1510 without the influence of electromagnetic wave noise. Also in this point, the peripheral control IC 1510a can be protected from the wiring UPCBL to which electromagnetic wave noise can penetrate.

  Although the panel drive substrate 1720 attenuates the electromagnetic wave noise entering through the wiring UPCBL by the ground (solid earth), it is preferable to further provide an element capable of reducing or removing the electromagnetic wave noise (that is, It is preferable to respectively provide an element capable of reducing or removing electromagnetic noise to a plurality of wires UPCBL transmitting control signals from the panel drive substrate 1720 to the upper left panel decorative substrate 1131 disposed behind the function display unit 1400) . Thus, electromagnetic wave noise intruding through the wiring UPCBL can be reliably attenuated or removed in the panel drive substrate 1720. Therefore, peripheral control IC 1510a can be protected from wiring UPCBL to which electromagnetic wave noise can enter.

  A resistor, a filter circuit, etc. can be mentioned as such an element. It is known from the observation result of the waveform of the electromagnetic wave noise that the waveform width of the electromagnetic wave noise falls within about 2 microseconds (μs), and the filter circuit is a signal having a waveform width larger than such a waveform width. It is designed to pass through.

  In addition to resistors, filter circuits, etc., examples of such elements include EMC countermeasure parts (coils, beads, capacitors, etc.), and when using coils or beads, electrical connection is made to a plurality of wires UPCBL. They are inserted so as to be connected in series with each other, and when using a capacitor, they are inserted so as to be electrically connected in parallel to a plurality of wires UPCBL. If a steeper attenuation characteristic is required, a circuit formed by combining a coil and a capacitor may be inserted into each of the plurality of wires UPCBL, or a bead and a capacitor may be inserted. A circuit formed by combining these may be inserted.

  In the embodiment described above, wiring UPCBL electrically connects the upper left panel decorative substrate 1131 and the peripheral control substrate 1510, and the substrate between the peripheral control substrate 1510 and the panel drive substrate 1720 is electrically connected. Among the wires (not shown), the wire UPCBL is configured to pass near the ball supply means (near at least one of the ball tank 552, the ball guiding unit 570, and the dispensing device 580). Then, among the wires forming the transmission path between the upper left panel decoration substrate 1131 and the peripheral control substrate 1510, the wiring UPCBL does not include the upper left panel decoration substrate 1131 and controls various decoration substrates 184, 273, etc etc on the door frame side. It is disposed so as not to cross or contact with a wiring which forms a transmission path with the substrate 1510. Therefore, such a configuration can also be adopted for various wirings electrically connected to the main control board 1310X. For example, among various wires electrically connected to the main control substrate 1310X, a wire passing under an environment strongly affected by electromagnetic noise and a wire other than the wire are arranged so as not to intersect or contact with each other. Thus, it is possible to prevent the main control MPU 1310a (main control board 1310X) that can be operated by the high frequency circuit of the crystal oscillator from being forcibly reset by the built-in reset circuit described above. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a malfunction due to the influence of electromagnetic wave noise.

  Further, in the embodiment described above, a wire electrically connecting the upper left panel decorative substrate 1131 and the peripheral control substrate 1510 (a transmission path for electrically connecting the upper left panel decorative substrate 1131 and the peripheral control substrate 1510 is formed (The wiring UPCBL) and the wiring (not shown) for electrically connecting between the peripheral control substrate 1510 and the panel drive substrate 1720 as the wiring), but the connection connector provided on the back surface side of the upper left panel decoration substrate 1131 The wiring UPCBL ′, which is a connection cable electrically connected via the 1131 a, may be routed so as to be electrically connected directly to the peripheral control substrate 1510. In this case, the wiring UPCBL 'is a wiring forming another transmission path electrically connected to the peripheral control substrate 1510 (various decorative substrates 184 on the door frame side as other rendering means except the upper left panel decorative substrate 1131, It is arranged not to intersect or contact with the wiring forming the transmission path between the H. 273, etc etc. and the peripheral control board 1510. Thus, the wiring forming the transmission path between the upper left panel decorative substrate 1131 and the peripheral control substrate 1510, that is, the direct connection between the peripheral control substrate 1510 and the connection connector 1131a provided on the back surface side of the upper left panel decorative substrate 1131 Wiring that forms another transmission path electrically connected to the peripheral control board 1510 by popping out electromagnetic wave noise that has entered the wiring UPCBL '(the transmission path between the other rendering means and the control means excluding the specific rendering means It is possible to prevent intrusion into various wirings electrically connected to connectors CN2 to CN9 (see FIG. 148) of peripheral control unit 1500, which are wirings to be formed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a malfunction due to the influence of electromagnetic wave noise.

  Furthermore, in the embodiment described above, the wiring FCBL electrically connected through the unshown connector provided on the back surface side of the function display unit 1400 is from the upper right corner of the game board 5 to the back surface of the game panel 1100 and the back When it is drawn to the upper side of the rear surface of the box 3010, it is bent downward of the rear surface of the back box 3010, and a plurality of wiring processing pieces 3011 are formed in the vertical direction along the right side of the rear surface of the back box 3010 Although being praised, when it is routed from the upper right corner of the game board 5 to the rear surface of the game panel 1100 and the upper side of the rear surface of the back box 3010, it is bent from the upper side to the left side. By the wiring processing piece which is bent again toward the lower side of the rear surface of the back box 3010 on the left side and is formed in the vertical direction along the left side of the rear surface of the back box 3010 The left side of the main control board box 1320 of the main control unit 1300 which is bent and attached to the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200 by being bent before reaching the upper side of the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200 assembled and attached to the lower rear side of the gaming panel 1100 When being pulled downward along the side, it is bent toward the right side of the main control board box 1320 and is routed along the lower side of the main control board box 1320 to the lower side of the function display unit connector MFCN. After that, they may be electrically connected to the function display unit connector MFCN.

  In this way, the distance dimension between the line FCBL and the left side of the package of the main control MPU 1310a can be made larger than the above-described first line separation distance dimension, so the electromagnetic wave noise intruding into the line FCBL corresponds to this line FCBL. It is possible to prevent the pins of the main control MPU 1310a protruding toward the bottom plate of the main control board box 1320 from entering through the space having the distance from the package to the left side of the package of the main control MPU 1310a. Because, in a state where the game board 5 is attached to the pachinko machine 1, as shown in FIG. 97 and FIG. 98, below the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 553 attached to the payout base unit 550 in the main body frame 4. By being disposed, static electricity is likely to be accumulated in the area where the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 553 are attached and the periphery thereof, and when electromagnetic wave noise is released by electrostatic discharge, the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 553 are This is because there is a possibility of intruding into the wiring FCBL which is disposed below and which electrically connects the function display unit 1400 and the main control substrate 1310X.

  When adopting such an aspect and electrically connecting the function display unit 1400 and the main control board 1310 X via the panel relay board 1710, the panel relay board 1710 is described above. It is preferable to provide an element capable of reducing or removing electromagnetic wave noise intruding into the wiring FCBL. Thereby, it is possible to make the main control MPU 1310 a not affect the electromagnetic wave noise intruding through the wiring FCBL. Therefore, main control MPU 1310 a can be protected from wiring FCBL to which electromagnetic wave noise can enter.

  A resistor, a filter circuit, etc. can be mentioned as such an element. It is known from the observation result of the waveform of the electromagnetic wave noise that the waveform width of the electromagnetic wave noise falls within about 2 microseconds (μs) as described above, and the filter circuit is larger than such a waveform width. It is designed to pass a signal having a waveform width.

  In addition to resistances, filter circuits, etc., as mentioned above, EMC countermeasure parts (coils, beads, capacitors, etc.) can also be mentioned as such elements, and in the case of using coils or beads, a plurality of wirings It is inserted so as to be electrically connected in series to FCBL, and when using a capacitor, it is inserted so as to be electrically connected in parallel to a plurality of interconnections FCBL. If a steeper attenuation characteristic is required, a circuit formed by combining a coil and a capacitor may be inserted into each of the plurality of wirings FCBL, or the bead and the capacitor may be inserted. A circuit formed by combining these may be inserted.

  Further, in the embodiment described above, the wiring FCBL electrically connected through the unshown connector provided on the back surface side of the function display unit 1400 is from the upper right corner of the game board 5 to the back surface of the game panel 1100 and then to the back. When it is drawn to the upper side of the rear surface of the box 3010, it is bent downward of the rear surface of the back box 3010, and a plurality of wiring processing pieces 3011 are formed vertically along the right side of the rear surface of the back box 3010 The lines FCBL collected respectively by the line processing piece 3011 are bent toward the left side on the lower side of the peripheral control unit 1500 and drawn around along the lower side of the peripheral control unit 1500. Assembled by the lower wiring processing piece provided on the left side of the back surface of the back box 3010 and attached to the back lower portion of the game panel 1100 If it is bent downward before reaching the upper edge of the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200 being taken and is drawn downward along the left side of the main control substrate box 1320 of the main control unit 1300 attached to the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200 , After being bent toward the right side of the main control board box 1320 and routed to the lower side of the function display unit connector MFCN along the lower side of the main control board box 1320, electrically to the function display unit connector MFCN When connected, the electromagnetic wave noise that has entered the wiring FCBL may affect the peripheral control unit 1500.

  Specifically, on the lower side of peripheral control unit 1500, connectors CN2 to CN7 (see FIG. 148) provided on peripheral control substrate 1510 and connectors CN8 and CN9 provided on liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are arranged. Corresponding various wires are electrically connected to such connectors CN2 to CN9. For this reason, when various wirings electrically connected to the connectors CN2 to CN9 and the wirings FCBL cross or contact (cross over), electromagnetic noises invading the wirings FCBL are electrically transmitted to the connectors CN2 to CN9. When it penetrates into the various wiring connected to, the disturbance of the effect image drawn on the effect display device 1600 occurs, for example, under the influence of the electromagnetic wave noise intruding on the wiring FCBL (for example, the disturbance of the symbol such as black screen) Occurs).

  Therefore, various lines electrically connected to connectors CN2 to CN9 cross line FCBL or line FCBL so that line FCBL is not drawn along lower side (lower side of peripheral control unit 1500) of peripheral control unit 1500. It is preferable to configure so as not to be in contact arrangement (arrangement arrangement). For example, an illustration provided on the back surface side of the function display unit 1400 as a routing method of the wiring FCBL that does not become an arrangement (arrangement arrangement) where various wirings electrically connected to the connectors CN2 to CN9 and the wiring FCBL do not intersect or contact Wiring FCBL electrically connected through the non-connecting connector is bent from the upper side to the left side when it is routed from the upper right corner of the game board 5 to the rear face of the game panel 1100 and the upper side of the rear face of the back box 3010, At the left side of the rear surface of the back box 3010, it is bent again toward the lower side of the rear surface of the back box 3010, and gathered together by wiring processing pieces formed in the vertical direction along the left side of the rear surface of the back box 3010 The substrate is bent before reaching the upper side of the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200 attached to the lower rear side of the panel 1100. When the main control board box 1320 attached to the rear surface of the main control unit 1300 is drawn downward along the left side of the main control board box 1320, the main control board box 1320 is bent toward the right side, and the main control board box 1320 After being drawn around the lower side of the function display unit connector MFCN along the lower side, the circuit board may be electrically connected to the function display unit connector MFCN.

  By doing this, the distance dimension between the line FCBL and the left side of the package of the main control MPU 1310a can be made larger than the above-mentioned first line separation distance dimension, so the electromagnetic wave noise that has entered the line FCBL It is possible to prevent intrusion into various pins of the main control MPU 1310a projecting toward the bottom plate of the main control board box 1320 through a space having a distance dimension from the wiring FCBL to the package left side of the main control MPU 1310a. Because, in a state where the game board 5 is attached to the pachinko machine 1, as shown in FIG. 97 and FIG. 98, below the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 553 attached to the payout base unit 550 in the main body frame 4. By being disposed, static electricity is likely to be accumulated in the area where the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 553 are attached and the periphery thereof, and when electromagnetic wave noise is released by electrostatic discharge, the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 553 are This is because there is a possibility of intruding into the wiring FCBL which is disposed below and which electrically connects the function display unit 1400 and the main control substrate 1310X.

  When adopting such an aspect and electrically connecting the function display unit 1400 and the main control board 1310 X via the panel relay board 1710, the panel relay board 1710 is described above. It is preferable to provide an element capable of reducing or removing electromagnetic wave noise intruding into the wiring FCBL. Thereby, it is possible to make the main control MPU 1310 a not affect the electromagnetic wave noise intruding through the wiring FCBL. Therefore, main control MPU 1310 a can be protected from wiring FCBL to which electromagnetic wave noise can enter.

  A resistor, a filter circuit, etc. can be mentioned as such an element. It is known from the observation result of the waveform of the electromagnetic wave noise that the waveform width of the electromagnetic wave noise falls within about 2 microseconds (μs) as described above, and the filter circuit is larger than such a waveform width. It is designed to pass a signal having a waveform width.

  In addition to resistances, filter circuits, etc., as mentioned above, EMC countermeasure parts (coils, beads, capacitors, etc.) can also be mentioned as such elements, and in the case of using coils or beads, a plurality of wirings It is inserted so as to be electrically connected in series to FCBL, and when using a capacitor, it is inserted so as to be electrically connected in parallel to a plurality of interconnections FCBL. If a steeper attenuation characteristic is required, a circuit formed by combining a coil and a capacitor may be inserted into each of the plurality of wirings FCBL, or the bead and the capacitor may be inserted. A circuit formed by combining these may be inserted.

  Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, the function display unit connector MFCN is disposed below the center line passing through the middle points of the right and left sides of the main control board 1310X. While the main control MPU 1310a is disposed in the above, the positional relationship is reversed, and the main control MPU 1310a is disposed below the center line, while the function display unit connector MFCN is disposed above the center line. Alternatively, the function display unit connector MFCN and the main control MPU 1310a may be disposed apart from each other on the main control board 1310X. Even with this configuration, the main control MPU 1310a can be disposed apart from the function display unit connector MFCN to which the wiring FCBL is electrically connected. Therefore, the electromagnetic wave noise intruding into the wiring FCBL is for the function display unit It is possible to prevent the pins of the main control MPU 1310a projecting toward the bottom plate of the main control board box 1320 from entering the various pins of the main control board box 1320 via the space separating the connector MFCN and the main control MPU 1310a from each other in the main control board 1310X. Therefore, main control MPU 1310 a can be protected from wiring FCBL to which electromagnetic wave noise can enter.

  Further, in the embodiment described above, the wiring FCBL electrically connected through the unshown connector provided on the back surface side of the function display unit 1400 is from the upper right corner of the game board 5 to the back surface of the game panel 1100 and then to the back. When it is drawn to the upper side of the rear surface of the box 3010, it is bent downward of the rear surface of the back box 3010, and a plurality of wiring processing pieces 3011 are formed in the vertical direction along the right side of the rear surface of the back box 3010 The right side of the main control board box 1320 of the main control unit 1300 which is bent and attached to the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200 by being bent before reaching the upper side of the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200 attached to the lower rear side of the gaming panel 1100. Were drawn down along the. As described above, the area in which the wiring FCBL is routed is the front of the payout unit 560 attached to the payout base unit 550 in the main frame 4 shown in FIG. 97 when the gaming board 5 is attached to the pachinko machine 1 Was placed in As described above, the payout unit 560 has a ball guiding unit 570 having one guiding path for guiding the gaming ball B from the tank rail 553 in a serpentine manner, and one guiding path of the ball guiding unit 570. A payout device 580 for paying out the gaming balls B induced by the player one by one on the basis of an instruction from the payout control substrate 633, and an upper full-ball path unit 600 for guiding the gaming balls B having passed through the payout device 580 downward. And a lower full ball path unit 610 for guiding the game ball B having passed through the upper full ball path unit 600 to the door frame 3 side or the board unit 620 side. In other words, the area in which the wiring FCBL is routed in this way is in front of the ball guiding unit 570, the payout device 580, and the lower full ball path unit 610 when the gaming board 5 is attached to the pachinko machine 1. It was arranged. Therefore, in the case where the main control MPU 1310a can be protected from the wiring FCBL to which electromagnetic wave noise can penetrate, the ball tank 552, the ball guiding unit 570, and the dispensing device 580 besides the routing of the wiring FCBL. Are not routed around the wiring space formed between the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200 and the bottom plate of the main control substrate box 1320 through at least one vicinity of (or formed on the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200) After being drawn to the lower side of the function display unit connector MFCN along the lower side of the main control board box 1320 so as not to be accommodated and drawn around the wiring accommodation groove, electricity to the function display unit connector MFCN May be connected.

  Furthermore, in the embodiment described above, the function display unit 1400 is attached to the upper left corner of the front component 1000 outside the gaming area 5a, but in this area, instead of the function display unit 1400, a plurality of full color LEDs A decorative substrate to be mounted may be attached. A plurality of wires (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as “wires”) electrically connected via a connector (not shown) provided on the back side of the decorative substrate may be referred to, for example, with reference to FIG. To explain it, when it is routed from the upper right corner of the game board 5 to the back surface of the game panel 1100 and the upper edge of the back surface of the back box 3010, it is bent downward of the back surface of the back box 3010. The connectors of the corresponding peripheral control unit 1500 (peripheral control board 1510) are gathered together by the wiring processing pieces 3011 formed in plural in the vertical direction along the right side and bent toward the left side below the peripheral control unit 1500 Or the wiring method of electrically connecting to this connector after being drawn to the lower side of the game board, or When it is routed from the upper corner to the rear surface of the game panel 1100 and to the upper side of the rear surface of the back box 3010, it is bent from the upper side to the left side, and below the rear surface of the rear box 3010 at the left side of the rear surface of the back box 3010 It is bent again toward the right side, collected by the wiring processing pieces 3011 formed in plural in the vertical direction along the left side of the rear surface of the back box 3010 and bent toward the right side below the peripheral control unit 1500 After being drawn to the lower side of the connector of the peripheral control unit 1500 (peripheral control board 1510), the wiring method of electrically connecting to this connector can be mentioned.

  In the area where the wiring is drawn by such a wiring drawing method, the payout base attached to the payout base unit 550 in the main body frame 4 shown in FIG. 97 when the gaming board 5 is attached to the pachinko machine 1 As it is disposed in front of the unit 560 or in the vicinity (below) of the ball tank 552, as described above, there is a possibility that electromagnetic noise may intrude into the wiring.

  Therefore, while the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 in the peripheral control unit 1500 is arranged below the central line passing through the middle points of the right side and the left side of the peripheral control board 1510, By arranging the peripheral control IC 1510 a on the upper side, the connector and the peripheral control IC 1510 a are arranged to be separated on the peripheral control board 1510. Thus, the peripheral control IC 1510a can be disposed apart from the connector of the peripheral control board 1510 to which the wiring is electrically connected. Therefore, the electromagnetic wave noise that has entered the wiring causes the connector and the peripheral control IC 1510a to be peripheral control board Intruding into various pins of the peripheral control IC 1510 a can be prevented via the space separated at 1510. Therefore, peripheral control IC 1510a can be protected from the wiring which electromagnetic wave noise can penetrate.

  Also, by arranging the peripheral control IC 1510a away from the connector of the peripheral control board 1510 to which the wiring is electrically connected, the peripheral control IC 1510a is not affected even if electromagnetic noise enters the wiring, the peripheral control IC 1510a In the space where the connector of the peripheral control substrate 1510 and the peripheral control IC 1510 a are separated from each other on the control substrate 1510 or in the peripheral control substrate 1510, it is possible to attenuate the electromagnetic wave noise intruding through the wiring. Also in this point, the peripheral control IC 1510a can be protected from the wiring to which electromagnetic wave noise can penetrate.

  Although the decorative substrate and the peripheral control substrate 1510 in the peripheral control unit 1500 are directly electrically connected by wiring, the decorative substrate and the peripheral control substrate 1510 in the peripheral control unit 1500 are electrically connected via the panel relay substrate 1710. It can also be configured to connect in a straight line. In this case, it is preferable to provide the panel relay substrate 1710 with an element capable of reducing or removing the electromagnetic wave noise that has entered the above-described wiring (that is, to a plurality of wirings for transmitting control signals from the peripheral control substrate 1510 to the decoration substrate). It is preferable to provide an element capable of reducing or removing electromagnetic noise, respectively. Thus, it is possible to prevent the influence of the electromagnetic wave noise intruding through the wiring on the peripheral control IC 1510 a of the peripheral control substrate 1510. Therefore, peripheral control IC 1510a can be protected from the wiring which electromagnetic wave noise can penetrate.

  A resistor, a filter circuit, etc. can be mentioned as such an element. It is known from the observation result of the waveform of the electromagnetic wave noise that the waveform width of the electromagnetic wave noise falls within about 2 microseconds (μs), and the filter circuit is a signal having a waveform width larger than such a waveform width. It is designed to pass through.

  In addition to resistors, filter circuits, etc., examples of such elements include EMC countermeasure parts (coils, beads, capacitors, etc.). In the case where capacitors are used, they are inserted so as to be electrically connected in parallel to a plurality of wires. If a steeper attenuation characteristic is required, a circuit formed by combining a coil and a capacitor may be inserted into a plurality of wires, respectively, or the bead and the capacitor may be Circuits configured in combination may be inserted respectively.

  In the embodiment described above, the upper left panel decoration substrate 1131 is disposed behind the function display unit 1400, and the wiring UPCBL electrically connected via the connection connector 1131a provided on the back surface side of the upper left panel decoration substrate 1131 Is bent toward the back side of the back surface of the game box 1100, it is bent toward the back side of the back box 3010 at the upper side of the front side of the back box 3010, and is brought close (or in contact) with the wiring FCBL described above. When it is drawn to the upper side of the rear surface of the box 3010, it is bent downward of the rear surface of the back box 3010, and a plurality of wiring processing pieces 3011 are formed in the vertical direction along the right side of the rear surface of the back box 3010 Although being praised, it is routed from the upper right corner of the game board 5 to the back surface of the game panel 1100 and the upper edge of the back surface of the back box 3010. And the upper side to the left side, and the lower side of the back surface of the back box 3010 is bent again at the left side of the back surface of the back box 3010, and a plurality of them are vertically extended along the left side of the back surface When the wiring processing pieces to be formed are respectively gathered and drawn under the peripheral control unit 1500 to the upper side of the drive substrate unit 1700, the upper side of the drive substrate unit 1700 is bent toward the right side to drive substrate unit After being drawn around along the upper side of the 1700 and drawn up to the upper side of the predetermined connector of the panel drive substrate 1720 in the drive substrate unit 1700, it may be electrically connected to the predetermined connector. In this case, although not shown, various wirings electrically connected to connectors CN2 to CN9 (see FIG. 148) of peripheral control unit 1500 are drawn along the lower side of peripheral control unit 1500 to drive the drive substrate. Separate from the top edge of the unit 1700. As a result, the wiring FCBL routed along the upper side of the drive substrate unit 1700 does not cross (or cross over) the various wirings electrically connected to the connectors CN2 to CN9. With this configuration, peripheral control of peripheral control board 1510 housed in wiring UPCBL routed under peripheral control unit 1500 and along the upper side of drive substrate unit 1700 and peripheral control unit 1510. As a positional relationship between the mounting position of the IC 1510a (see FIG. 151), the peripheral control IC 1510a can be disposed above the center line passing through the middle points of the right and left sides of the peripheral control 1510. That is, by arranging the peripheral control IC 1510 a above the center line passing through the middle points of the peripheral control IC 1510 a and the middle points of the right and left sides of the peripheral control substrate 1510, the wiring UPCBL and the peripheral control IC 1510 a are separated can do. Thus, peripheral control IC 1510 a of peripheral control board 1510 accommodated in peripheral control unit 1500 is separated from wiring UPCBL drawn under the peripheral control unit 1500 and along the upper side of drive substrate unit 1700. Therefore, the electromagnetic wave noise that has entered the wiring UPCBL is accommodated in the peripheral control unit 1500 via the space separating the wiring UPCBL and the peripheral control IC 1510a and is mounted on the peripheral control board 1510. It is possible to prevent intrusion into various pins. Therefore, peripheral control IC 1510a can be protected from wiring UPCBL to which electromagnetic wave noise can enter.

  By the way, conventionally, a gaming machine has been proposed in which a display device (display unit) for performing a common view variation display game, a special view variation display game, a display of a gaming state, etc. Open 2016-154676 gazette (paragraph [0014], paragraph [0070], Drawing 2, and Drawing 21)). The display device (display unit) is display-controlled by the CPU (game control microprocessor) of the game control device. By the way, when electromagnetic wave noise intrudes into the wire electrically connecting the display device (display unit) and the game control device (game control means), the CPU (game control microprocessor) of the game control device is connected via this wire. There was a risk of affecting.

[5-6. Peripheral control unit]
The peripheral control unit 1500 in the game board 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. The peripheral control unit 1500 is mounted on the rear side of the effect display device 1600 mounted on the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the rear unit 3000. The peripheral control unit 1500 includes a peripheral control board box 1520 housing a peripheral control board 1510 (see FIG. 151) and the like for controlling effects to be presented to the player based on control signals from the main control board 1310X. There is. Although not shown, the peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control unit 1511 for controlling light emission effects, sound effects, movable effects, and the like, and an effect display control unit 1512 for controlling effect images. ing.

  The peripheral control substrate 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500 is connected to the main control substrate 1310X, the rendering operation unit 300, various decoration substrates on the door frame 3 side, other substrates (a peripheral data ROM substrate to be described later, a liquid crystal output substrate) and the like. ing. The configuration of peripheral control unit 1500 will be described later.

[5-7. Effect display device]
The effect display device 1600 in the game board 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 131 to FIG. The effect display device 1600 is disposed at the center of the game area 5a in a front view, and is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 via the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. The effect display device 1600 is detachably attached to the rear surface substantially at the center of the rear wall of the back box. The effect display device 1600 can visually recognize from the front side (the player side) through the inside of the frame-shaped center member 2500 in a state where the game board 5 is assembled. The effect display device 1600 is a 12-inch full-color liquid crystal display device using a white LED as a backlight. The effect display device is connected to the peripheral control board 1510, and can display a predetermined still image or a moving image.

  The effect display device 1600 includes two left fixed pieces 1601 protruding outward from the left side surface in front view, and a right fixed piece 1602 protruding outward from the right side surface in front view. The effect display device 1600 has two fixed grooves 3010 c opened on the left inner peripheral surface in a front view in a frame-like liquid crystal mounting portion 3010 b of the back box 3010 described later, with the liquid crystal screen directed forward. After inserting the two left fixing pieces 1601 obliquely from the rear of the back box 3010, the right fixing piece 1602 side is moved forward, the right fixing piece 1602 is inserted into the opening of the locking mechanism 3020, and the locking mechanism 3020 is It is attached to the back box 3010 by sliding downward.

[5-8. Table unit]
The front unit 2000 in the game board 5 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIG. 131 to FIG. The front unit 2000 is attached to the base panel 1110 of the game panel 1100 from the front, the front end protrudes forward more than the front surface of the base panel 1110, and a part of the rear end penetrates the through hole 1112 It projects rearward than the rear surface of the panel 1110.

  As described above, the front unit 2000 is mounted at the center in the left-right direction in the third gaming area 5a3 of the gaming area 5a and has the first starting opening 2002 and one general winning opening 2001. And a side unit 2200 mounted along the inner rail 1002 near the middle area between the first game area 5a1 and the third game area 5a3 and having two general winning openings 2001, and the second game area 5a2 And an attacker unit 2400 attached near the middle area of the third game area and having a large winning opening 2005, one general winning opening 2001 (second receiving port), a gate section 2003, a second starting opening 2004 (Second receiver), has a disadvantageous first receiver 2006 and is slightly above the center of the game area 5a in front view (the first game area 5a1 and the second game area 5a2 A table-like rendering unit 2600 provided with a frame-shaped center member 2500 attached to the third game area 5a3 and in a state of being enclosed on both sides and the lower three sides) and further attached to the center member 2500 Have.

5-8. Center member]
The center member 2500 of the front unit 2000 includes a gate sensor 2401 that detects the game ball B that has passed through the gate unit 2003, a second start port sensor 2402 that detects the game ball B received by the second start port 2004, and The first receiving port sensor 2406 for detecting the gaming ball B received in the first receiving port 2006, and the attacker unit 2400 detects the gaming ball B received for the special winning port 2005. 2403 (also referred to as a count sensor) (see FIG. 126). Further, the center member 2500 is provided with a start opening solenoid 2404 for opening and closing the second start opening 2004 in accordance with the normal lottery result selected by passage of the game ball B of the gate unit 2003. There is provided an attacker solenoid 2405 for opening and closing the special winning opening 2005 in accordance with the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result selected by receiving the game ball B into the starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004.

  The center member 2500 is disposed above the starting opening unit 2100 and the side unit 2200 in the game area 5a and slightly above the center of the front view, and is mounted on the front surface of the base panel 1110 of the game panel 1100. It is attached via 830. The center member 2500 is formed in a frame shape, and can visually recognize from the front the effect display device 1600 disposed behind the game panel 1100 and various effect units provided in the back unit 3000 through the frame. .

  The frame-shaped center member 2500 has a surrounding frame 832 projecting forward than the front surface of the base panel 1110 of the game panel 1100 around the lower side, and is driven into the game area 5a by the surrounding frame 832 The game ball B can not enter into the frame.

  The center member 2500 has a warp entrance 2501 in which the game balls B in the first game area 5a1 can be opened and a game ball B entering the warp entrance 2501 on the outer peripheral surface of the enclosure frame 832 on the left side in front view. A warp outlet 2502 which can be released and opened in a frame, and a stage shelf 2503 which can be released to the third game area 5a3 after rolling the gaming ball B released from the warp outlet 2502 in the left-right direction; Have.

  The stage shelf 2503 of the center member 2500 has a curved shape in which the center side in the left-right direction is recessed and corresponds to a position directly above the first starting opening 2002 of the starting opening unit 2100, that is, the center member 2500 is a game panel 1100 (base panel 1110 In the state of being attached to the above, the substantially central position in the left-right direction is formed in a wave shape so as to be slightly higher than the left and right sides. The stage shelf 2503 is configured such that a portion (apex) slightly higher than the left and right sides in the center in the left-right direction and a lowermost portion (valleys) in the left and right sides are lower toward the front. The game balls B can be discharged to the third game area 5a3 from these portions.

  In the state where the center member 2500 is assembled to the game board 5, a raised part (top part) of the center in the left-right direction of the stage shelf 2503 is located directly above the first starting opening 2002 of the starting opening unit 2100. Thus, when the gaming ball B is released from the center of the stage shelf 2503, it is accepted by the first starting opening 2002 with extremely high probability.

  The center member 2500 has an area forming portion 2504 located on the front side of the second game area 5a2 protruding to the right in a front view, and has the area forming portion 2504 in the order from the top in FIG. , A gate section 2003, a first receiving port 2006, a general winning port 2001 (a second receiving port), and a second start port 2004 (a second receiving port) with an opening and closing piece 850 are provided in the second game area 5a2. It is mounted from the front in the formed mounting opening. Also, in the area forming unit 2504, a nail with obstacle 2007 is implanted in the base panel 1110 as in the first game area 5a1. In the present embodiment, the center member 2500 and the region forming portion 2504 are integrally provided, but as another form, the center member 2500 and the region forming portion 2504 are separately provided. May be Further, when the area of the second game area 5a2 is a small area, a ball flow lower surface portion and an obstacle projection are formed in the area forming portion 2504, and the area forming portion 2504 is equivalent to the second game area 5a2 described above. It may have a function.

  The center member 2500 is assembled between the game board 5 and between the upper surface of the enclosure frame 832 (specifically, the upper surface on the right side from the approximate center in the horizontal direction) and the outer rail 1001 surrounding the upper side of the game area 5a. A gap (a gap having a width equal to one game ball, which is 13 mm in the present embodiment) slightly larger than the outer diameter (11 mm in the present embodiment) of the game ball B is attached. This gap is the communication passage 5a4 connecting the first gaming area 5a1 and the second gaming area 5a2 described above at the upper side.

  The connecting passage portion 5a4 of the embodiment shown in FIG. 131 is a stopper provided at the intersection of the outer rail 1001 and the right rail 1005 described above from the tapered corner portion 832b of the stepped portion 832a at the center of the upper surface of the enclosure frame 832 A transverse passage portion extending in the left-right direction up to 1006 and a vertical passage portion extending downstream in the downstream direction of the transverse passage portion are provided. The lateral passage portion is a substantially linear clearance and extends substantially tangential to the apex of the arc along the outer rail 1001 drawn by the launched gaming ball B. Therefore, whether or not the game ball B fired with a specific strong launch force (a launch force of a strength which exceeds the first game area 5a1) rides on the upper surface of the tapered corner portion 832b of the step portion 832a of the enclosure 832 or It can be rolled by contact with the inner surface of the outer rail 1001 by centrifugal force to move to the back of the lateral passage portion (near the inlet of the longitudinal passage portion).

  As shown in FIG. 132, which is an enlarged view of the main part of FIG. 131, the vertical passage portion of the communication passage portion 5a4 is a vertical hook-like discharge that opens the opening 848aH directly below the stopper 1006 and communicates downward. A partition having a predetermined width between the section 848a and the vertical hook-like discharge section 848b which opens an opening 848bH on the near side of the game ball B by approximately one game ball from the discharge section 848a in the hitting direction of the game ball B It is provided in the form divided by the part 848e. The partition 848e plays a role of dividing the opening 848aH and the opening 848bH, and the top (uppermost surface) of the partition 848e is inclined so as to allow the game ball to flow down to the right. The partition 848e has a reinforcing member (reinforcing resin 848e1) formed to have a predetermined width in the left-right direction in consideration of the game ball collision, and a housing 848e2 for housing the reinforcing member. . Further, from the peripheral wall forming the housing portion 848e2 to the lower side, left and right partition walls 848e3 for dividing the discharge portion 848a and the discharge portion 848b in the left and right direction are formed, and the game ball B flowing down the discharge portion 848a The game ball B flowing down the 848b is prevented from being mixed in the middle of the flowing down. Also, in the embodiment of FIG. 132, the top (uppermost surface) of the partition 848e between the opening 848bH and the opening 848aH is virtually the bottom of the communication passage 5a4 (the upper surface of the enclosure 832 of the center member 2500). It is formed in the height which becomes substantially flush with the extension line at the time of extending to. As a result, of the gaming balls B fired with a specific strong firing force (a firing force of strength exceeding the first game area 5a1), the bottom surface of the communication passage portion 5a4 is at a speed not to jump over the partition 848e. The game ball B which rolls comes into the opening 848bH in front of the partition 848e. Further, among the gaming balls B fired with a specific strong firing force (shooting force with a strength to jump over the first game area 5a1), the top of the partition 848e is crossed with the centrifugal force while remaining in contact with the inner surface of the outer rail 1001. The game ball B (the game ball B that has passed the top of the partition 848e in a floating state from the bottom of the communication passage 5a4) collides with the stopper 1006 and enters the opening 848aH. The plurality of discharge parts 848a and 848b are arranged side by side with the top of the second game area 5a2, that is, the places 5a2a and 5a2b (the exit part of the communication passage 5a4, or the second place to enter the second game area 5a2). It is connected in the state which makes the entrance part of the game area 5a2 different. As described above, in this embodiment, although having the game property of firing the game ball B with a specific strong launch force (a launch force of a strength which exceeds the first game area 5a1), By taking into consideration the strength of the steering wheel adjustment within the range, the game ball after jumping over the first game area 5a1 has new game characteristics in which the whereabouts of the game balls are diversified.

  As described above, in the second game area 5a2, the general winning opening 2001 (second receiving port), the second start opening 2004 (second receiving opening) that accepts or passes the game ball B and gives a predetermined privilege to the player. The second receiving port), the gate section 2003, etc., and the first receiving port 2006 (in the embodiment, the incoming ball = out) in which the handling (results from entering the ball) from the second receiving port is disadvantageously set. The probability of entering the ball is appropriately set by the type of the exit of the communication passage 5a4 and the arrangement of the obstacle nails 2007.

  For example, in the example of FIG. 132, the gaming ball B that enters (drops) the second game area 5a2 from the location 5a2a corresponding to the opening 848aH of the release part 848a directly below the abutment 1006 through the communication passage 5a4 is It is set so that the ball entering probability to enter the first receiving port 2006 is larger than the probability of entering to the second port and passing through the gate unit 2003.

  On the other hand, the game ball B entering the second game area 5a2 from the location 5a2b corresponding to the opening 848bH of the next discharge part 848b has a relatively low probability of entering the first reception slot 2006 and is relatively small at the second reception slot The probability of entering the ball and the probability of passing through the gate portion 2003 are set to be large.

  Therefore, when hitting the second game area 5a2, the player collides with the stopping portion 1006 to aim at the discharge portion 848b leading to the left route that is easy to enter the second receiving port and hard to enter the first receiving port 2006. The batting force adjustment of the handle 182 is carefully performed so that the gaming ball B is fired with the force that the gaming ball B can roll on the bottom of the communication passage portion 5a4 at a speed that does not jump over the partition 848e.

  In addition, the release parts 848a and 848b are provided with deceleration means such as obstacle ridges 849 and bent parts 849s in the middle of the flow path, and the game ball B passes through either release part 848a or 848b by this deceleration means. Time for the player to recognize whether the This is because which release part 848a, 848b the game ball B passes through greatly affects the player's profit. The speed reduction means in the middle of the flow path is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and the obstacle ridges 849 may be provided in both of the release portions 848a and 848b, or the bending portions 849s may be provided in both of the release portions 848a and 848b Alternatively, a transparent cover having a width sufficient to cover the front of both of the discharge portions 848a and 848b may be provided, and the rear side of the transparent cover may be provided with an obstacle ridge. Good.

  In addition, the effect display device 1600 is enlarged so that the image of the effect display device 1600 is also displayed at a position corresponding to the back side of the release portions 848a and 848b, and the passage surface of the release portions 848a and 848b is formed transparently. The image of the effect display device 1600 may be visible through the transparent passage surface, and the emission units 848a and 848b may be decorated with the image of the effect display device 1600. For example, in the game state where it is necessary to use the second game area 5a2 (for example, a short time game state, etc.), a specific image (for example, a flame image) is displayed behind the discharge part 848b. Alternatively, the player may be notified that the release unit 848 b is advantageous.

  In addition, prior to the start of the gaming state (for example, a short time gaming state, etc.) where it is necessary to use the second gaming area 5a2, an announcement to inform the player in advance that the ejection portion 848b is advantageous over the ejection portion 848a Display an image (for example, a message image of “Aim for the left passage and hit right!”, Etc.) in a predetermined display area, or “Aim to hit here right at the back of the discharge part 848b The message image of “T!” May be displayed, and a more detailed “right-handed” explanatory effect may be executed so as to prevent the player from being confused at the start of the short time state.

  Furthermore, in these cases, preferably, for each of the openings 848aH and 848bH of the release parts 848a and 848b, for example, an effect sensor (discharge type detection means) for detecting the game ball B is provided. Depending on which of 848a and 848b, predetermined notification may be performed using sound or image display or light emission of a light emitter provided in the emitting portions 848a and 848b. For example, each effect sensor counts the number of gaming balls that have passed through the release portion 848a and the number of gaming balls that have passed through the release portion 848b, and the notification type (notification pattern) according to the status of those count values. Can be illustrated. Specifically, when the count value of the number of gaming balls passed through the release portion 848a in the time saving game state reaches a predetermined number (for example, 10), a voice notification of "do your best!" Or a specific image display a, "Congratulations to" to perform all or part of the light emission in the specific light emission pattern a, or when the count value of the number of gaming balls passed through the release part 848b in the time-saving game state reaches a predetermined number (for example, ten) It can be exemplified that all or a part of the light notification in the specific light emission pattern b and the specific image display b and the sound notification with “!” Can be performed. In addition, when the count value of the number of gaming balls which has continuously passed only the releasing portion 848a without passing the releasing portion 848b and the gaming ball has reached a predetermined number (for example, three), "with caution!" A game where all or a part of light emission in a specific image display c and a specific light emission pattern c is performed or the game ball does not pass through the release part 848a continuously through only the release part 848b When the count value of the number of balls reaches a predetermined number (for example, three), all or a part of the light emission in the specific information display d and the specific light emission pattern d and sound notification of "Good! Good!" It is possible to give an example of this, which makes it possible to give the player more satisfaction and a sense of accomplishment.

  FIGS. 133 to 139 show other forms of the communication passage portion 5a4 or the release portions 848a and 848b or the second game area 5a2.

  In the example shown in FIG. 133, the width in the height direction of the communication passage 5a4 is expanded to approximately two game balls, and using this height, the partition between the opening 848bH and the opening 848aH The top of the portion 848 e is slightly higher than the bottom surface of the communication passage portion 5 a 4 (the upper surface of the enclosure frame 832 of the center member 2500). Thus, the game ball B rolling on the bottom of the communication passage 5a4 strikes the left side of the top of the partition 848e and enters the opening 848bH, so that the game ball B can be further divided by the handle adjustment to the release 848a. It can be easy.

Further, since the width in the height direction of the communication passage portion 5a4 is wide and the height of the shot game ball B can be seen at first glance, it can be predicted at an early stage which discharge portion 848a, 848b is to be inserted. Therefore, the adjustment of the launch force can be performed in a short time.
Further, even if a "twist strike" to say the secret of firing a plurality of game balls B together is performed, as shown in FIG. 133, if a plurality of game balls move vertically, the lower The game balls B hit the partition portion 848e and flow to the discharge portion 848b, and the upper game balls B jump over the partition portion 848e and flow to the discharge portion 848a, so that damage due to "twist strike" or the like is less likely to occur.

  By the way, in the embodiment as shown in FIG. 133, as described above, the game ball B struck is repeatedly collided with the dividing portion 848e, and the game ball B hit against the stop portion 1006 also collides. For example, it is preferable to provide reinforcement such as molding of a rib or an insert of a metal plate which can withstand the impact of Further, since the gaming balls B contact repeatedly, it is preferable to cover the surface of the partition 848e with a material having wear resistance such as a metal plate, for example.

  Moreover, what is shown in FIG. 134 is an embodiment in which a branching portion 848c is extended on the upstream side of the reinforcing resin 848e1 differently from FIGS. 132 and 133. Specifically, in FIG. 134, an upper and lower partition extending in the left and right direction separating the passages so that a plurality of ball passages are formed in the up and down direction on the upstream side of the plurality of discharge portions 848a and 848b in the communication passage portion 5a4. A branch portion 848c having a wall 848c1 is provided, and the first ball passage 5a4a of the plurality of ball passages formed by the branch portion 848c is a discharge portion 848a of the plurality of discharge portions 848a and 848b. The second ball passage 5a4b of the plurality of ball passages communicating with the 1 discharge portion) and formed by the branch portion 848c is in communication with the discharge portion 848b (second discharge portion) of the plurality of discharge portions 848a and 848b Configured to

  The branch portion 848c is provided with a metal buffer pin 848d at its tip, and the buffer pin 848d receives the impact of the game ball B to prevent the branch portion 848c from being damaged. Of course, the buffer pin 848d may not be provided if the end of the upper and lower partition wall 848c1 of the branch portion 848c is covered and reinforced with a metal cover or the like.

  Also in this case, the player adjusts the launch force of the game ball B with the handle 182 to aim at either the first ball passage 5a 4a or the second ball passage 5a 4 b, but the first ball is in a stage where the batting force is strong Since it is necessary to strike the passage 5a 4a and the second ball passage 5a 4b separately, the degree of difficulty in adjusting the handle 182 is high, and the difference in technique by the player is easily reflected. Therefore, the sense of accomplishment and satisfaction when the intended result is obtained is increased.

  In the example shown in FIG. 134, a space is formed on the left side of the accommodating portion 848e2 of the reinforcing resin 848e1. In this space, the reinforcing resin 848e1 is inserted, or the reinforcing resin 848e1 is formed. The strength may be further improved by mounting another reinforcing member different from the above. In addition, in consideration of the appearance when this space portion is enlarged, the surface side of the reinforcing resin or reinforcing member mounted in the space portion may be given a predetermined decoration, or the reinforcing resin or reinforcing material. Instead of a member, some effect device (for example, a fourth symbol display device or a sub liquid crystal) may be provided to have both effects of the reinforcing surface and the effect surface.

  135 (a) and 135 (b), a drop port 5a4c connecting the first ball passage 5a4a and the second ball passage 5a4b is provided in a part of the branch portion 848c of the communication passage portion 5a4 in FIG. A part of the gaming balls flowing through the one ball passage 5a 4a is dropped into the second ball passage 5a 4b and can be dropped from the second discharge portion 848b to a specific place 5a 2b of the second game area 5a2. In this case, a variation of the adjustment of the handle 182 which separates the discharge parts 848a and 848b (for example, as shown in FIG. 135 (b), the game ball B is hit against the buffer pin 848d of the branch part 848c to change the traveling direction upward, Since the game ball B is hit against the outer rail 1001 and bounced back into the drop opening 5a 4c), the interest of the game also increases.

  The one shown in FIG. 136 is the one shown in FIG. 134 in which the tip of the bifurcated portion 848c is set in the vicinity of the step 832a of the enclosure frame 832 of the center member 2500, whereby the tip of the bifurcated portion 848c is hit. Since the gaming ball B is likely to be bounced back to the first gaming area 5a1, the difficulty in striking the first ball passages 5a4a and 5a4b is further improved. Incidentally, in the examples of FIGS. 134 and 135 (a) and 135 (b), since the rebounding space 832c is provided between the tip of the branching portion 848c and the stepped portion 832a of the enclosure frame 832 of the center member 2500, Most of the game balls B that hit back against the portion 848c enter the second ball passage 5a 4b while rolling on the upper surface of the enclosure 832.

  The ones shown in FIGS. 137 and 138 are examples in which the discharge portions 848a and 848b in FIG. 132 are elongated and the second game area 5a2 is shortened in the vertical direction. In this case, they pass through the discharge portions 848a and 848b. Since the residence time of the game ball B can be extended, there is an effect that the visibility of the game ball B passing through the release portions 848a and 848b can be enhanced.

  Also, the examples shown in FIGS. 137 and 138 are examples in which the risk of entering the first receiving port 2006 is increased by arranging the first receiving port 2006 above and below the gate section 2003, and by doing so, the gate section Since the thrill to target 2003 can be enhanced, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be increased.

  As described above, in the example shown in FIGS. 131 to 138, there is a profit / disadvantage profit difference between the subsequent falling paths between the places 5a2a and 5a2b entering the second game area 5a2, and thus the always advantageous place 5a2b I tried to aim, but different types of profits were provided in the subsequent falling path by the entering places 5a2a, 5a2b, and according to the gaming state, one of the places 5a2a, 5a2b was appropriately selected and aimed May be

  That is, in the example of FIG. 139, the game ball B entering from the place 5a2a corresponding to the opening 848aH of the release part 848a immediately below the abutment 1006 through the communication passage part 5a4 enters the first reception port 2006 Is set to have a possibility of passing through the gate portion 2003 although it is larger than the probability of entering the second receiving port.

  On the other hand, the gaming ball B entering from the location 5a2b corresponding to the opening 848bH of the next discharge part 848b has a very small entering probability into the first receiving port 2006 and a large entering probability into the second receiving port It is set to.

  Therefore, when hitting the second game area 5a2, the player aims to strike the gate section 2003 and collides with the blocking section 1006 even if the risk of entering the first receiving port 2006 according to the game state, and so the discharge section Aiming at 848a, for example, in the case of a big hit, it is difficult to enter the first receiving port 2006, and it is easy to enter the second receiving port, and aim at the discharge portion 848b that easily reaches the large winning port 2005 with low risk. Force adjustment will be performed.

  Although not shown, the center member 2500 described above is, for example, a part corresponding to the second game area 5a2 of the center member 2500 and a part other than that, for each part common to different models and for each model The portions to be changed may be divided into a plurality (at least two) and the blocks may be combined to form one center member 2500. By doing so, it is possible to mass-produce a part common to each model, so it is possible to suppress the cost of the center member 2500.

  In addition, the member between the discharge portion 848a and the discharge portion 848b may be movable, and when a specific condition is satisfied, the distance between the opening 848aH or 848bH of one of the discharge portions 848a or 848b may be expanded.

  In addition, the inner surface of the communication passage 5a4 may be provided with decelerating means such as obstacle ridges 849 provided on the release portions 848a and 848b so that entry to the release portion 848b is technically facilitated.

  In front unit 2000, gaming ball B accepted in general winning opening 2001 is sent to back unit 3000 on the rear side of gaming panel 1100 and detected by general winning opening sensor 3001, and then to lower substrate holder 1200. Exhausted.

  In addition, the game ball B received in the first start opening 2002 is sent to the back unit 3000 on the rear side of the game panel 1100 and detected by the first start opening sensor 3002, and then discharged to the lower substrate holder 1200. Be done.

  In addition, the game ball B received in the second start port 2004 is sent to the rear side of the game panel 1100 after being detected by the second start port sensor 2402 and discharged to the lower substrate holder 1200. The game ball B accepted by the big winning opening 2005 is detected by the big winning opening sensor 2403, and then sent to the rear side of the gaming panel 1100 and discharged to the lower substrate holder 1200. After being detected by the first inlet sensor 2406, the gaming ball B received in the first inlet 2006 is sent to the rear side of the gaming panel 1100 and discharged to the lower substrate holder 1200.

  In addition, the first starting port sensor 3002 is a first starting port sensor main side (hereinafter, referred to as "first starting port sensor main side 3002a") and a first starting port sensor secondary side (hereinafter, "first starting port sensor And the first start port sensor main side 3002a and the first start port sensor second side 3002b are at least erroneously detected preventing distance (in this embodiment, 14 mm). It has a large distance dimension compared to the diameter (11 mm) of the gaming ball) and is disposed apart from each other in the vertical direction. Since the first start port sensor main side 3002a and the first start port sensor secondary side 3002b use the same non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switch, the first start port sensor main side 3002a and the first start port When the sensor slave side 3002b is disposed in a state where the erroneous detection prevention distance dimension or less, the gaming ball B passing through the first starting opening sensor main side 3002a is combined with the first starting opening sensor main side 3002a to the first starting opening It may be detected by the sensor slave side 3002b, and the gaming ball B passing through the first start port sensor slave side 3002b is detected by the first start port sensor slave side 3002b together with the first start port sensor main side 3002a. It is because there is a case.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the first starting opening sensor main side 3002a and the first starting opening sensor slave side 3002b are spaced apart by a dimensional distance (in the present embodiment, 43 mm) larger than the erroneous detection preventing distance dimension. Thus, when the first starting opening sensor main side 3002a detects the game ball B passing through the first starting opening sensor main side 3002a, the electrical influence of the detection affects the first starting opening sensor secondary side 3002b. By the physical structure that the first starting opening sensor slave 3002b erroneously detects even though the game ball B is not yet passing through the first starting opening sensor slave 3002b. Can be prevented, and when the first start-up sensor slave 3002b detects the game ball B passing through the first start-port sensor slave 3002b, The first starting opening sensor main side 3002a is affected by the electric effect of knowledge, so that the first starting opening sensor main side 3002a is in the state of having already passed the first starting opening A physical structure can prevent the mouth sensor main side 3002a from detecting erroneously. Thus, the gaming ball B received in the first starting opening 2002 is first detected by the first starting opening sensor main side 3002a by passing through the first starting opening sensor main side 3002a, and the first starting opening sensor After passing through the side 3002 b, the substrate 300 is discharged to the lower substrate holder 1200 after being detected by the first start port sensor side 3002 b.

  In the present embodiment, the first start-up sensor 3002 configured by two sensors (double sensors) of the first start-up sensor main side 3002 a and the first start-up sensor secondary side 3002 b performs the first start-up. The game ball B received by the mouth 2002 can be detected reliably. In addition, an irregular ball (a game ball or a ball approximately equal in diameter or a synthetic resin ball approximately equal in diameter) to which a flexible cord-like operation line (a thread, a piano wire, a wire or a linear member such as a catheter) is attached. A detailed description of the injustice detecting process capable of detecting and notifying by the first starting opening sensor 3002 configured by two sensors (double sensors) will be described in detail the injustice by the radio wave irradiation using the).

[5-8-2. Table production unit]
Although the table effect unit 2600 is not shown in detail, according to the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result drawn by the reception of the game ball B to the first start opening 2002 and the second start opening 2004. A plurality of effect decoration bodies that move or emit light are provided, and it is possible to perform a movable effect or a light emission effect. The table effect unit 2600 can perform light emission effects, movable effects, etc., using a plurality of effect decoration bodies as appropriate, and can present the player with effects of various patterns by combining them as appropriate. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to get bored, to entertain the player by various effects, and to suppress a decrease in the player's interest in the game.

  The front effect unit 2600 is attached to the center member 2500 so as to close the inside of the frame-shaped center member 2500. The table effect unit 2600 is attached to the rear side of the center member 2500, and is decorated by emitting light by causing a light to enter from a transparent flat light guide plate closing the frame of the center member 2500 and the upper surface of the light guide plate. And a plurality of LEDs for the second pattern to be lighted and decorated by causing light to be incident from the right side surface of the light guide plate. And a plurality of diffusion lenses disposed between the right side surface of the light guide plate and the plurality of LEDs for the second pattern and diffusing light from the plurality of LEDs for the second pattern. And. The plurality of LEDs for the first pattern and the plurality of LEDs for the second pattern are full color LEDs.

  The light guide plate has a first pattern formed of an uneven number of upper reflecting portions for reflecting only light from the upper side forward, and an uneven number of right portions for reflecting only the light from the right side forward. And a second pattern formed by the reflective portion. That is, the table effect unit 2600 can cause the first pattern to emit light when the LED of the first pattern decorative substrate is emitted, and the second pattern emits light when the second pattern decorative substrate emits light. It can be displayed.

  In the light guide plate, the asperities of the innumerable upper reflecting portions forming the first pattern and the innumerable right reflecting portions forming the second pattern are finely formed, and the decoration for the first image is formed. In a state in which the plurality of LEDs for the first pattern of the substrate and the plurality of LEDs for the second pattern of the decorative substrate for the second pattern are not lighted, they appear transparent and are disposed on the rear side of the back unit 3000 It is possible to visually recognize various decoration bodies, effect images and the like displayed on the effect display device 1600 in a good state.

  The plurality of upper reflecting portions forming the first pattern and the right reflecting portion forming the second pattern are a plurality of LEDs for the first pattern and a plurality of the second patterns respectively corresponding to each other. It has a flat surface extending at right angles to the straight line connected to the LED and inclined at 45 degrees with respect to the rear surface of the light guide plate. The upper reflection portion and the right reflection portion are recessed in a pentroof triangle. The upper reflecting portion and the right reflecting portion are substantially parallel to the vertical line on the front surface of the light guide plate, with light incident from the corresponding plurality of LEDs for the first pattern and the plurality of LEDs for the second pattern. Reflect in the direction. On the other hand, light incident from the plurality of LEDs for the first pattern and the plurality of LEDs for the second pattern that do not correspond to each other is reflected in a direction inclined with respect to the vertical line on the front surface of the light guide plate. Therefore, only the light from the plurality of LEDs for the corresponding first pattern and the plurality of LEDs for the second pattern can be made to reach the eyes of the player positioned in front of the light guide plate.

  The plurality of LEDs for the first pattern mounted on the lower surface of the first pattern decorative substrate are arranged in a line in the left-right direction, and the first LEDa, the second LEDb, the third LEDc, and the fourth It is divided into four groups of LEDd. The first LEDa, the second LEDb, the third LEDc, and the fourth LEDd are arranged so as to make two rounds each by a predetermined number (here, three) from the left.

  The first pattern is a pattern constituted by a plurality of equilateral triangles bounded by extension lines of a horizontal line, an upper right oblique line, and an upper left oblique line forming the decoration pattern. The first pattern is a pattern of six large triangles of approximately the same size as an equilateral triangle formed by gathering the contours of one equilateral triangle in the ornamental pattern, and the outline of one equilateral triangle in the ornamental pattern It is composed of a plurality of small triangles of a size that fits. The patterns of the six large triangles are arranged in a circle around the center of the game area 5a so as to be entirely hexagonal, and a plurality of small triangles are arranged to surround the patterns of the six large triangles. It is arranged.

  The pattern of the large triangle of the first pattern is such that a plurality of equilateral triangles of different sizes are superimposed such that the sizes become smaller in order while being eccentric to the vertex side closer to the center of the game area 5a. It is formed in the pattern. The small triangle pattern of the first pattern is formed in a pattern in which the outlines of the equilateral triangle are arranged concentrically.

  The first pattern includes a first pattern portion including a plurality of upper reflecting portions corresponding to the first LEDa, and a second pattern portion including a plurality of upper reflecting portions corresponding to the second LEDb, and It is comprised from the 3rd pattern part comprised by the several top reflection part corresponding to 3 LEDc, and the 4th picture part comprised by the several top reflection part corresponding to 4th LEDd.

  The first pattern, the second pattern, the third pattern, the fourth pattern, and so on are large triangular patterns in which a plurality of equilateral triangles with different sizes in the first pattern are overlapped in order to decrease in size. The part, the first pattern part, the second pattern part, and the third pattern part are superimposed on the center side of the game area 5a in an overlapping manner. In addition, the small triangle pattern consisting of the contours of a plurality of equilateral triangles in the first pattern has a first pattern portion, a second pattern portion, a third pattern portion, a fourth pattern portion, and so on in order of decreasing size. Are arranged concentrically in the order of.

  The second pattern is a pattern having a guide (message) to the player consisting of the characters “CHANCE!”.

  Next, the light emission effect by the table effect unit 2600 will be briefly described. When the first LEDa of the decorative substrate for the first pattern is made to emit light, the light incident in the light guide plate is reflected to the front by the first pattern portion, and the remaining second pattern portion, third pattern portion, fourth pattern Since the part and the second pattern are reflected to other than the front, only the first part looks bright to the player sitting on the front of the pachinko machine 1. In addition, when the second LEDb of the decorative substrate for the first pattern is made to emit light, the light incident in the light guide plate is reflected to the front in the second image portion, and the remaining first image portion, the third image portion, the second Since the four-pattern portion and the second pattern are reflected to other than the front, only the second-pattern portion looks bright to the player sitting on the front of the pachinko machine 1.

  In addition, when the third LEDc of the decorative substrate for the first pattern is made to emit light, the light incident in the light guide plate is reflected to the front by the third image portion, and the remaining first image portion, the second image portion, the second Since the four symbol parts and the second symbol part are reflected to other than the front, only the third symbol part is seen to shine from the player sitting on the front of the pachinko machine 1. Furthermore, when the fourth LED d of the first design decorative substrate is made to emit light, the light incident in the light guide plate is reflected to the front in the fourth design section, and the remaining first design section, second design section, second Since the three symbol parts and the second symbol are reflected to other than the front, only the fourth symbol part appears to be emitted from the player sitting on the front of the pachinko machine 1.

  And in the first pattern, in the part of the pattern of the large triangle, the first pattern section, the second pattern section, the third pattern section, the fourth pattern section, the first pattern section, the second pattern section, the third pattern section, Is superimposed on the center side of the game area 5a, and in the small triangle pattern, the first pattern, the second pattern, the third pattern, and the fourth pattern are concentrically arranged in this order. The first picture part, the second picture part, the third picture part, and the first picture part, the second picture part, the third picture part, when the light is emitted in the order of the first LEDa, the second LEDb, the third LEDc and the fourth LEDd. It will light-emit in order of a 4th pattern part, and it can perform light-emitting production like animation with a motion which moves toward the center from the outside.

  On the other hand, when the fourth LEDd, the third LEDc, the second LEDb, and the first LEDa are made to emit light in this order, the fourth pattern, the third pattern, the second pattern and the first pattern are emitted in order A light-emitting effect such as animation with movement moving from the center side to the outside can be performed.

  Furthermore, when the first LEDa, the second LEDb, the third LEDc, and the fourth LEDd are caused to emit light in different colors, respectively, the first pattern, the second pattern, the third pattern, and the fourth pattern are different colors. Can emit light.

  In addition, when the plurality of LEDs for the second pattern of the second pattern decorative substrate are made to emit light, the light incident in the light guide plate is reflected to the front with the second pattern, and the remaining first pattern portion, Since the second pattern, the third pattern, and the fourth pattern are reflected to other than the front, only the second pattern appears to be emitted from the player sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1. Therefore, the plurality of LEDs for the second pattern can emit the second pattern including the characters "CHANCE!".

  Thus, according to the table effect unit 2600, a plurality of (three or more) different patterns (a first pattern portion, a second pattern portion, a third pattern portion, a fourth pattern portion) by a single light guide plate It is not necessary to provide a plurality of light guide plates for each pattern in order to cause an animation display or the like, and the thickness in the front-rear direction can be made as thin as possible. Therefore, since a large space can be easily secured behind the light guide plate, other effect units can be arranged in the space, and the appeal to the player can be enhanced, and the player can be It can be entertained, and a decrease in interest for the game can be suppressed.

  In addition, since the semitransparent first pattern floats up in front of the back unit 3000 and the effect display device 1600 by the light guide plate, it is possible to show the light emission decoration moving like an animation, so light emission using the conventional light guide plate It is possible to give a strong impact to players who are familiar with the production, as well as to surprise and entertain players and to make them think that something good may have happened. It is possible to suppress a decrease in interest by increasing the player's expectation for the game.

  Furthermore, in the first pattern and the second pattern, the inside and the outside of the frame of the center member 2500 are continuous by using the pattern associated with the decoration pattern 1150 formed on the base panel board 1110 in the game panel 1100. It is possible to show the player a decoration with a sense of unity, and the appearance in the game area 5a can be improved.

  In addition, since only the player sitting on the front of the pachinko machine 1 can favorably view the light emission display of the first pattern and the second pattern by the light guide plate, from the other players who are separated from the front, This makes it hard to see the light emission display of the first pattern and the second pattern, and makes it difficult for other players to notice that the effect using the light guide plate is being performed, and the other players pay attention It is possible to prevent the player from playing and to play the game without hesitation to other players, and to enjoy the game and to suppress the decrease in interest.

[5-9. Back unit]
The back unit 3000 in the game board 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 131 to FIG. The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 in the game panel 1100, and the effect display device 1600 and the peripheral control unit 1500 are attached to the rear side. The back unit 3000 has a general winning opening sensor 3001 that detects gaming balls B received in the general winning openings 2001 of the front unit 2000, and a first starting opening sensor that detects gaming balls B received in the first starting opening 2002. And a magnetic sensor 3003 for detecting magnetism acting on the vicinity of the first start port 2002 (see FIG. 151).

  The back unit 3000 is attached to the back surface of the panel holder 1120 and has a box shape open at the front and is attached to the back box 3010 having a square opening 3010 a 2 in the back wall and the back surface of the back box 3010 A lock mechanism 3020 for removably attaching the display device 1600, a drive substrate unit 1700 attached below the opening 3010a2 on the back surface of the back box 3010, and a back effect attached inside the back box 3010 And a unit 3100.

  The back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 has a box shape open at the front, an opening 3010 a 2 which is squarely penetrated to the back wall, and a flat frame which protrudes backward from the peripheral edge of the opening 30 10 a 2. Liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b, two fixing grooves 3010c which are recessed outward from the inside of the frame in the rear view right side in the liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b and into which the left fixed piece 1601 of the effect display device 1600 is inserted And a notch 3010d to which a lock mechanism 3020 is attached from the rear end to the rear wall of the back box 3010 at the center in the vertical direction of the left side in a rear view of the portion 3010b.

  The opening 3010 a 2 of the back box 3010 is formed slightly smaller than the display screen of the effect display device 1600. In addition, the liquid crystal mounting portion 3010 b is formed in a size in which the effect display device 1600 can be fitted into the frame. In the back box 3010, the lock mechanism 3020 is slidably mounted vertically on the left side of the rear surface of the cutout 3010d in the rear surface.

  In addition, the back box 3010 includes a flat fixing piece 3010 e extending outward from the front end. The fixed piece portion 3010 e is attached to the panel holder 1120 with the front surface in contact with the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100. In the back box 3010, bosses, mounting holes and the like for attaching the back effect unit 3100 and the like are formed at appropriate positions.

  Back effect unit 3100 moves or emits light according to the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result drawn by the reception of game ball B to first start port 2002 or second start port 2004. A plurality of effect decoration bodies are provided, and movable effects and light emission effects can be performed. The back effect unit 3100 is capable of performing a light emission effect, a movable effect, etc., using a plurality of effect decoration bodies as appropriate, and presenting a variety of pattern effects to the player by appropriately combining them. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to get bored, to entertain the player by various effects, and to suppress a decrease in the player's interest in the game.

  Here, an example of the effect decoration capable of performing the movable effect and the light emission effect will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 145 is a schematic perspective view of the internal structure of the effect decoration. A rear upper left movable decorative body 3310 which is a stage decoration body is attached to the left side of the opening 3010 a 2 in the back box 3010.

  The back upper left movable decorative body 3310 is formed in a triangular pyramid shape with the tip directed to the right, and can be moved in the left-right direction or in the up-down direction by a drive motor (not shown) via a mechanism (not shown) It can be done. In the upper left movable decorative body 3310, the outer shape in a front view is formed in an equilateral triangle. The triangular pyramid shaped back left upper movable decorative body 3310 is inclined such that the tip is positioned forward with respect to the left and right direction.

  The back upper left movable decorative body 3310 is rotatably mounted on the right side surface of the trapezoidal base decorative portion 3311 whose shape in front view narrows to the right and the base decorative portion 3311, and the tip is directed to the right Attached to the interior of the base decorative part 3311, a triangular pyramid-shaped front decorative part 3312, a back left upper rotational drive motor attached to the inside of the base decorative part 3311 and rotating the front decorative part 3312 The back upper left base decoration substrate for emitting decoration of the base decoration part 3311 and the back upper left one stage for emitting decoration of the front decoration part 3312 attached to the right side of the base decoration part 3311 And a decorative substrate 3311a. The base decorative portion 3311 and the front decorative portion 3312 are formed to have a light transmitting property.

  The back upper left base decorative substrate is mounted with a plurality of full color LEDs (not shown) for emitting light toward the inner wall of the base decorative portion 3311 to which it is attached. In the upper left front end decorative substrate 3311 a, a plurality of full color LEDs 3311 aa (in the present embodiment, eight full color LEDs 3311 aa (1) to 3311 aa (8)) for emitting light toward the left side of the previous decorative portion 3312 are mounted. ing.

  The rotation of the output shaft (rotational shaft) of the upper left rotational drive motor is performed on the main gear (not shown) fixed to the output shaft (rotational shaft) of the rear upper left rotational drive motor and the rotational shaft of the front stage decorative portion 3312 The front stage decoration portion 3312 is rotated through a back left upper rotation transmission mechanism (not shown) engaged with a slave gear (not shown) attached and fixed. A magnet 3312a having a small cylindrical shape is disposed and fixed in the vicinity of the rotation axis of the front stage decorative portion 3312 on the left side surface of the front stage decorative portion 3312 facing the right side surface of the base stage decorative portion 3311. Specifically, the magnet 3312a is in the vicinity of the rotation axis of the front stage decorative portion 3312 and on the left side of the front stage decorative portion 3312 so that the axial center is parallel to the rotation axis of the front stage decorative portion 3312 It is disposed in the inner space of the front step decorative portion 3312 so that the left surface thereof does not protrude toward the right side surface of the base step decorative portion 3311 from the left side surface of the front step decorative portion 3312. It is fixed. The magnet 3312a is disposed in the vicinity of the rotation axis of the front stage decoration portion 3312. However, the rotation axis of the front stage decoration portion 3312 resonates due to the rotation of the front stage decoration portion 3312 by the back upper left rotation drive motor. It does not occur.

  Since the magnet 3312a is fixed in the vicinity of the rotation axis of the front stage decoration portion 3312, the rotation of the output shaft (rotation axis) of the back upper left rotation drive motor is the front end via the above-mentioned back upper left rotation transmission mechanism. When it is transmitted to the rotation axis of the decorative portion 3312 and the preceding decorative portion 3312 starts to rotate, the locus becomes a circular path.

  Therefore, in the back upper left first stage decorative substrate 3311a, a Hall element, and a position corresponding to one position on this circular orbit (opposite to the magnetically charged surface of the magnet 3312a having a small cylindrical shape), and A back upper left magnetic pole change detection circuit 3311 ab is implemented which is configured from a peripheral circuit and can detect a change in magnetic pole. The back upper left magnetic pole change detection circuit 3311 ab is a circuit used to specify the rotational position of the previous stage decorative portion 3312 by setting the original position by detecting the magnetism of the magnet 3312 a fixed to the previous stage decorative portion 3312. And its detailed description will be described later. In addition, as an original position (standby position) of the rotational position of the front stage decorative portion 3312, for example, the apexes of the triangles of the base stage decorative portion 3311 and the front stage decorative portion 3312 coincide with each other to form one triangular pyramid. The state which is forming can be mentioned.

  In addition, in embodiment mentioned above, although the shape of the plain view of back upper left movable decorative body 3310 was shown as what was made an equilateral triangle, it does not limit to this, For example, a "quadrilateral", a "hexagon", It may be "an octagon", "fan", "star", etc.

  Further, in the embodiment described above, the movable upper body is a movable body by using a small electronic component (magnetic sensor) such as the back upper left magnetic pole change detection circuit 3311 ab as a sensor for detecting the standby position (original position) of the previous stage decorative portion 3312 Adopted as a sensor to detect the stand-by position (original position) of a certain front decoration part 3312 and detect the magnetism of the magnet 3312 of the front decoration 3312 to specify the rotational position of the front decoration 3312 and then stand by position Although the (original position) is set, it can also be used as a sensor for detecting the approach of the magnet by the magnet goto. This is because a small electronic component (magnetic sensor) called the back left upper magnetic pole change detection circuit 3311 ab intermittently operates in the magnet 3312 of the previous stage decoration 3312 while the previous stage decoration 3312 is continuously rotated. The magnetism should be detected, but in the case where the magnetism is continuously detected, it is possible to detect an approach of an incorrect magnet as a magnet goto.

  Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, the various drive motors provided in the various effect units are stepping motors, but motors (servo motors) provided with rotation detectors such as encoders may be used. In this case, the rotation angle of the output shaft (rotational shaft) of the servomotor is detected by the rotation detector, and the drive pulse is controlled by feedback control. Thereby, the output shaft (rotational shaft) of the servomotor can be set to a predetermined rotational speed.

  In the embodiment described above, the game balls supplied from the ball tank 552, the ball guidance unit 570, and the payout device 580, which are ball supply means, are paid out to the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200. The game ball received in the general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the second starting opening 2004, the first receiving opening 2006, and the large winning opening 2005 which are provided in the game area 5a divided into 5 and And a ball collection device having a collection port for collecting the game balls collected in the out port 1008 provided in the game area 5a partitioned and formed on the game board 5, and the game collected by the ball collection device The ball launcher 5 is provided with a ball transport device for transporting the balls toward the ball launcher 540 and without supplying the game balls to the upper tray 201 of the tray unit 200. 0, forming a circulation path of gaming balls by the gaming area 5a divided into the gaming board 5, a ball collecting device, and a ball conveying device, and constituting a closed circulation of a predetermined number of gaming balls Can also be done.

[6. Configuration of Peripheral Control Unit]
Next, peripheral control unit 1500 arranged on the rear side (rear side of effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of back box 3010 of back unit 3000) provided on game board 5 shown in FIG. The entire configuration of the image forming apparatus will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 146 is a front exploded perspective view of the peripheral control unit, FIG. 147 is a rear exploded perspective view of the peripheral control unit, FIG. 148 is a front view of the peripheral control unit, and FIG. 149 is an X-X line in FIG. And FIG. 150 is a view on arrow A in FIG. Here, the back side of the pachinko machine 1 will be described as the front side of the peripheral control unit 1500.

  The peripheral control unit 1500, as shown in FIGS. 146 and 147, has a transparent cover 1501 which is open at the rear and has a box shape longer in the left-right direction compared to the vertical direction, and main control for controlling the progress of the game. Peripheral control board 1510 capable of controlling the progression of effects based on a command from main control board 1310 X of unit 1300, peripheral data ROM board 1520 electrically connected to peripheral control board 1510, and peripheral control board 1510 And a metal shield plate 1540 capable of reducing (suppressing) electromagnetic wave noise entering the peripheral control substrate 1510, peripheral control substrate 1510, peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and liquid crystal output substrate 1530. , Conductively attached (adhered) to a predetermined place on a metal shield plate 1540 An elastic member 1545, and a transparent base 1502 closing the opening of the cover member 1501, a. By mounting various substrates such as peripheral control substrate 1510, peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and liquid crystal output substrate 1530 together with metallic shield plate 1540 in the inner space of cover body 1501, shield plate 1540 is mounted. The peripheral control substrate box 1505 (sealing substrate box) is constituted by the cover 1501 and the base 1502 by being sandwiched by the cover 1501 and various substrates and closing the opening of the cover 1501 by the base 1502.

[6-1. Cover body]
Peripheral data that can store various control information (peripheral data) to be controlled by peripheral control board 1510 in addition to peripheral control board 1510 on various boards mounted in the internal space of cover body 1501 There are a ROM substrate 1520 and a liquid crystal output substrate 1530 capable of outputting drawing data for drawing an image on the effect display device 1600. When the cover 1501 is viewed from the back, the peripheral control board 1510 has a horizontally long rectangular shape having an area of about two thirds, and is disposed on the left side of the cover 1501. In the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 has a square shape in the remaining about one third of the remaining area when the cover 1501 is viewed from the back, and the upper right of the cover 1501 is While being disposed on the side, the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is disposed on the lower right side of the cover 1501 having a square shape that is two turns larger than the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520.

  The substrates between the peripheral control substrate 1510 and the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 are electrically connected by an inter-substrate connector described later, and the inter-substrate connectors described later between the peripheral control substrate 1510 and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are electrically connected Connected. As a result, the ground (GND) line of peripheral control substrate 1510, the ground (GND) line of peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the ground (GND) line of liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are electrically connected, and the same ground (GND). The ground (GND) lines of the peripheral control substrate 1510, peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are the ground (GND) line of the power supply substrate 630 and the electrical of the substrate unit 620 of the main frame 4 shown in FIG. Connected.

  The cover 1501 is made of non-conductive resin, is molded transparent, and viewed from the front, covers the upper side, the left side, the lower side, and the right side of the horizontally long rectangular cover plate 1501a (plate thickness: 2 mm) The side walls 1501 b to 1501 e are formed in the shape of a box having an opening by protruding toward the rear (the front side of the pachinko machine 1).

  The cover flat plate 1501a is attached at a position corresponding to the peripheral control IC 1510a provided on the peripheral control substrate 1510 which is on the center slightly upper right side of the cover flat plate 1501a and which is mounted on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. The fan mounting recess 1501 aa having a square shape is formed so as to protrude toward the opening side of the cover body 1501. A plurality of arc-shaped slit holes 1501 aaa are formed on the bottom surface of the fan attachment recess 1501 aa along a plurality of concentric circles whose centers are in the top, bottom, left, and right directions of the bottom surface. Further, at the four corners of the bottom surface of the fan attachment recess 1501 aa, a cylindrical predetermined shape is inserted through the through holes th1 to th4 at positions corresponding to the through holes th1 to th4 formed at the four corners of the air cooling fan FAN having a square shape. Guide projections 1501 aab 1 to 150 1 aab 4 having a height (a distance dimension shorter than the distance dimension in the depth direction of the air cooling fan FAN) are formed to protrude toward the opposite side to the opening side of the cover 1501. By forming the slit holes 1501 aaa in the shape of a circular arc, it is possible to prevent an unfair act of illegally taking out various electronic components and the like included in the peripheral control substrate 1510 from the peripheral control substrate 1510.

  Further, in the cover flat plate 1501a, a pair of mounting holes 1501aac1 and aac2 are formed diagonally in the vicinity of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa. When the air-cooling fan FAN is pushed into and attached to the fan attachment recess 1501 aa, the front-side surface of the air-cooling fan FAN and the front-side surface of the cover flat plate 1501 a of the cover 1501 are arranged on the same plane. ing. In this state, a metal seat-backed nabe screw (a screw having a shape in which the pan head and the flat washer are integrated) not shown is screwed into the pair of mounting holes 1501aac1 and aac2 from the front to the rear of the cover plate 1501a. As a result, the air-cooling fan FAN pops out of the fan attachment recess 1501 aa by the flat washer, which is the seat portion of the seat-in-place nabe screw, coming into contact with the front of the air-cooling fan FAN and the front of the cover flat plate 1501 a Can be prevented.

  When peripheral control board 1510 is fixed on the back side of cover flat plate 1501a, a gap having a predetermined distance dimension between the front surface of peripheral control IC 1510a (the surface on which the product number and model is printed) and the rear surface of FAN attachment recess 1501aa In this embodiment, 2.3 mm) is formed.

  The cover flat plate 1501a communicates with the fan attachment recess 1501aa and is located at a position higher than the bottom surface of the fan attachment recess 1501aa (the distance from the front of the cover plate 1501a to the bottom dimension of the fan attachment recess 1501aa is shorter In the position where the wiring extraction recess 1501 ab is formed to project toward the opening of the cover 1501. When the air cooling fan FAN is attached and fixed to the fan attachment recess 1501 aa, a plurality of wires from the air cooling fan FAN can be drawn out from the wire drawing recess 1501 ab.

  The cover flat plate 1501a has a position corresponding to the connectors CN1 to CN7 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the volume adjustment switch 1510d attached to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a along the lower side as viewed from the front. The connector recess 1501 ac is a fan attachment recess 1501 aa as two closed, substantially horizontally elongated rectangular regions (more precisely, convex regions with the volume adjustment switch 1510 d and the connector CN 1 at the top and the connectors CN 2 to CN 7 at the bottom) The cover body 1501 is formed to project toward the opening side of the cover body 1501 at a lower position (a position having a long distance dimension compared to the distance dimension from the front of the cover flat plate 1501a to the bottom surface of the fan attachment recess 1501aa) compared to the bottom surface There is. Connector holes 1501 ac1 to 1501 ac7 and volume control holes 1501 ac8 are formed on the bottom of the connector recess 1501 ac at positions corresponding to the connectors CN1 to CN7 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the volume control switch 1510 d. The bottom surface of the connector recess 1501 ac generally occupies the lower right area when the cover plate 1501 a is viewed from the front. Therefore, as a measure for insufficient strength and warping of the cover body 1501 (cover flat plate 1501a) caused by an increase in the area of the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ac, connector holes 1501ac1 to 1501ac7 and volume control are provided on the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ac. Two reinforcing ribs 1510 aci 1 and 1510 aci 2 which are long in the vertical direction and which do not interfere with the holes 1501 ac 8 are formed to project forward at predetermined intervals.

  When the peripheral control board 1510 is fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the connectors CN1 to CN7 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the volume control switch 1510d are connector holes 1501ac1 to 1501ac7 formed in the bottom of the connector recess 1501ac, And the volume adjustment holes 1501 ac 8 are exposed. At this time, when plugs corresponding to the connectors CN1 to CN7 are inserted, the mounting height is lower than the distance from the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ac to the surface of the cover flat plate 1501a. That is, when viewed from the bottom of the connector recess 1501ac, even if the plug corresponding to the connectors CN1 to CN7 is inserted, the plug is hidden by the projecting wall of the cover flat 1501a above the bottom of the connector recess 1501ac. It can not project from the surface of the cover flat plate 1501a. The volume control switch 1510d is lower than the height of the connectors CN1 to CN7 and can not protrude from the surface of the cover flat plate 1501a. Thereby, dust attached to the cover side wall 1501b provided on the upper side of the cover flat plate 1501a, powder having some metallicity or the like adheres to the connectors CN1 to CN7 and the volume control switch 1510d even if they fall from the cover side wall 1501b. Can be prevented.

  The cover flat plate 1501a has one closed rectangular area whose position corresponds to that of the connectors CN8 and CN9 provided on the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 attached to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a along the lower side as viewed from the front. The opening of the cover body 1501 at a position where the connector recess 1501ad is lower than the bottom surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa (a position having a long distance dimension compared to the distance dimension from the front of the cover plate 1501a to the bottom surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa) The bottom of the connector recess 1501ad and the bottom of the connector recess 1501ac are disposed on the same plane. Connector holes 1501 ac 9 and 150 1 ac 10 are respectively formed at positions corresponding to the connectors CN 8 and CN 9 provided on the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 on the bottom surface of the connector recess 150 1 ad.

  When the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the connectors CN8 and CN9 provided on the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are exposed from the connector holes 1501ac9 and 1501ac10 formed on the bottom of the connector recess 1501ad. . At this time, when plugs corresponding to the connectors CN8 and CN9 are inserted, the mounting height is lower than the distance from the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ac to the surface of the cover flat plate 1501a. That is, when viewed from the bottom of the connector recess 1501 ac, even if the plug corresponding to the connectors CN 8 and CN 9 is inserted, the plug is hidden by the projecting wall of the cover plate 1501 a on the upper side of the bottom of the connector recess 150 1 ac. It can not project from the surface of the cover flat plate 1501a. Thereby, even if dust attached to the cover side wall 1501b provided on the upper side of the cover flat plate 1501a, powder having some metallicity, etc. falls from the cover side wall 1501b, adhesion to the connectors CN8 and CN9 can be prevented. It is supposed to be.

  Further, as seen from the front of the cover flat plate 1501a, a wire lead-out opening 1501ae is formed along the left side of the cover flat plate 1501a at a position corresponding to the CN 10 provided on the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. A mounting recess 1501 af for communicating with the wiring lead-out opening 1501 ae and for mounting the wiring cover body 1503 having a horizontally long rectangular shape capable of closing the wiring lead-out opening 1501 ae compared to the bottom surface of the above-mentioned FAN mounting concave 1501 aa It is formed to protrude toward the opening of the cover 1501 at a high position (a position having a distance dimension shorter than the distance dimension from the front of the cover flat plate 1501a to the bottom surface of the FAN attachment recess 1501aa). The mounting recess 1501 af has a cylindrical shape which is inserted into the through hole 1503 a at a position corresponding to the through hole 1503 a formed in the wiring cover 1503 (a distance shorter than the distance in the depth direction of the wiring cover 1503) And a protrusion 1501 afa having a dimension) is formed to protrude toward the opposite side to the opening side of the cover 1501, and at a position corresponding to the through holes 1503 b 1, 1503 b 2 formed in the wiring cover 150 3, mounting holes 1501 afb 1 , 1501 afb 2 are respectively formed.

  When the wiring cover 1503 is fitted in the mounting recess 1501 af, the front surface of the wiring cover 1503 and the front surface of the cover flat 1501 a of the cover 1501 are arranged on the same plane. ing. In this state, metal nabe screws (not shown) are inserted into through holes 1503b1 and 1503b2 formed in wiring cover 1503, and screwed from the front to the rear of wiring cover 1503 into mounting holes 1501afb1 and 1501afb2, respectively. The wiring cover 1503 can be fixed to the mounting recess 1501 af.

  When the wiring cover 1503 is fixed to the mounting recess 1501 af, the wiring lead-out opening 1501 ae is closed and a plurality of wirings connected to the connector CN 10 provided on the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 (for transmitting drawing data to the effect display device 1600 The wiring cover body 1503 can function as a cover that protects the plurality of wiring lines of (1) from being touched. The wiring cover 1503 is made of non-conductive resin and is molded to be transparent.

  When the cover body 1501 is viewed from the front, plate-shaped guide portions 1501 ca and 1501 cb are formed in the vicinity of the opening side of the cover body 1501 of the cover side wall 1501 c on the left side and having a predetermined distance between the centers. In addition, a hinge hook 1501 cc disposed above the guide 1501 ca and projecting outward, and a hinge hook 1501 cd disposed below the guide 1501 cb and projecting outward are respectively formed. A chamfer is formed on the rear surface side of the left end of the guide portions 1501 ca and 1501 cb. On the other hand, L-shaped flanges 1501 cca and 1501 cda are formed on the front side of the left ends of the hinge hooks 1501 cc and 1501 cd. In addition, a cover-side sealing portion 1501ea that protrudes outward is formed at the center of the cover body 1501 of the right cover side wall 1501e.

  The cover flat plate 1501a corresponds to the four through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control substrate 1510 when viewed from the rear surface so that the peripheral control substrate 1510 is disposed on the left side of the rear surface of the cover 1501. At the positions, four mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 are formed to protrude from the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a toward the opening side of the cover body 1501. Around the four through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control substrate 1510, copper foil for soldering (so-called "land") 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 having a circular shape on the surface side of the peripheral control substrate 1510, and peripheral control A copper foil for soldering (so-called "land") 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 having a circular shape is formed on the back surface side of the substrate 1510, and the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 and 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 are peripheral control boards, respectively. A wiring pattern is formed on the peripheral control substrate 1510 so as to be electrically connected to the ground (GND) line 1510.

  When the peripheral control board 1510 is attached to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, a through hole 1540c1a formed on an L-shaped attachment piece 1540c1 of a metal shield plate 1540 described later is formed on the back side of the cover flat 1501a. The through holes 1540c2a formed in the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c2 of the shield plate 1540, which will be described later, are aligned with the mounting boss holes 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. Arrange as. Of the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control substrate 1510, the through holes 1510r1 and 1510r4 are formed into the L-shaped through holes 1540c1a formed in the L-shaped attachment piece 1540c1 of the shield plate 1540 and the L shape of the shield plate 1540. The through holes 1540c2a formed in the mounting piece 1540c1 and the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 and 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a are arranged to match the through holes 1510r2 and 1510r3 formed in the peripheral control substrate 1510. The mounting boss holes 1501ag2 and 1501ag3 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a are arranged to match. A peripheral control board 1510 can be fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a by inserting a metal nabe screw (not shown) into the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 and screwing it toward the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4. As a result, the L-shaped attachment pieces 1540c1 and 1540c2 of the metal shield plate 1540 are held by the cover 1501 and the peripheral control board 1510. In this state, of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 formed on the surface side of the peripheral control substrate 1510, the lands 1510rf1 and 1510rf4 and the back surfaces of the L-shaped attachment pieces 1540c1 and 1540c2 of the shield plate 1540 made of metal respectively correspond to each other. The lands 1510 rf 2, 1510 rf 3 and the mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of the mounting boss holes 150 1 ag 2, 150 1 a 3 3 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 150 1 a are in contact with each other. Further, the lands 1510 rb 1 to 1510 rb 4 formed on the back surface side of the peripheral control substrate 15 10 and the seat surface of the metal flat screw are in contact with each other. Further, the shaft (screw portion) of the metal nabe screw is screwed into the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a.

  As a result, the L-shaped attachment pieces 1540c1 and 1540c2 of the metal shield plate 1540 are electrically connected to the lands 1510rf1 and 1510rf4 formed on the peripheral control substrate 1510, respectively, whereby the metal shield plate is formed. 1540 is connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510. As described above, the ground (GND) line of the peripheral control substrate 1510 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 and the ground (GND) line of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. Therefore, the shield plate 1540 made of metal is connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510, whereby the ground (GND) of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the liquid crystal output board are obtained. It will be connected to the ground (GND) of 1530. Also, as described above, the ground (GND) lines of the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the power supply substrate 630 in the substrate unit 620 of the main frame 4. Since the metal shield plate 1540 is connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral control substrate 1510, the metal shield plate 1540 is connected to the ground (GND) line of the power supply substrate 630.

  When the peripheral control board 1510 is fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501 a, the head of the metal nabe screw inserted and screwed into the through holes 1510 r 1 to 1510 r 4 is an opening of the cover side wall 1501 b to 1501 e It is arranged inside the end face of the side (that is, it does not protrude outside the end face on the opening side of the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e).

  Cover flat plate 1501a corresponds to four through holes 1520r1 to 1520r4 formed in peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 as viewed from the rear surface so that peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 is disposed on the upper right side of the back surface of cover body 1501. At a position where the pair of mounting boss holes 1501ah1 and 1501ah2 and the pair of mounting boss protrusions 1501ai1 and 1501ai2 are formed in a diagonal shape, they are projected from the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a toward the opening side of the cover 1501 It is done. Around the four through holes 1520r1 to 1520r4 formed in the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, copper foil for soldering (so-called "land") 1520rf1 to 1520rf4 having a circular shape on the surface side of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, A copper foil for soldering (so-called "land") 1520rb1 to 1520rb4 having a circular shape is formed on the back surface side of peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and these lands 1520rf1 to 1520rf4 and 1520rb1 to 1520rb4 are respectively formed A wiring pattern is formed on peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 so as to be electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of peripheral data ROM substrate 1520.

  When the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 is attached to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, through holes 1540b1a formed in an L-shaped attachment piece 1540b1 of the metal shield plate 1540 described later are formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. It arrange | positions so that it may correspond to mounting boss hole 1501ah2. Then, the through holes 1520r1 and 1520r3 formed in the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 are inserted into the mounting boss protrusions 1501ai1 and 1501ai2 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. Then, a metal nabe screw (not shown) is inserted into through holes 1520r2 and 1520r4 formed in peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 and screwed toward attachment boss holes 1501ah1 and 1501ah2 formed on the back side of cover flat plate 1501a. The peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 can be fixed to the back side of the cover plate 1501a. As a result, the L-shaped attachment piece 1540 b 1 of the metal shield plate 1540 is held by the cover 1501 and the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520. In this state, among the lands 1520rf1 to 1520rf4 formed on the surface side of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, the land 1520rf4 and the back surface of the L-shaped attachment piece 1540b1 of the metal shield plate 1540 are in contact with each other. The mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of the mounting boss protrusions 1501ai1 and 1501ai2 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a and the mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of the mounting boss holes 1501ah1 contact the lands 1520rf1 to 1520rf3, respectively. It will be in the state of contact. In addition, lands 1520 rb 1 to 1520 rb 4 formed on the back surface side of peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 and a seat surface of a metal nabe screw are in contact with each other. Further, the shaft (screw portion) of the metal nabe screw is screwed into the mounting boss holes 1501ah1 and 1501ah2 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a.

  As a result, the L-shaped mounting piece 1540b1 of the shield plate 1540 made of metal is electrically connected to the land 1520rf4 formed on the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 so that the shield plate 1540 made of metal becomes peripheral data. It is connected to the ground (GND) of the ROM substrate 1520. As described above, the ground (GND) line of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the peripheral control substrate 1510 and the ground (GND) line of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. Because the metal shield plate 1540 is connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, the ground (GND) of the peripheral control substrate 1510 and the liquid crystal output substrate It will be connected to the ground (GND) of 1530. Also, as described above, the ground (GND) lines of the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the power supply substrate 630 in the substrate unit 620 of the main frame 4. Since the metal shield plate 1540 is connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, the metal shield plate 1540 is connected to the ground (GND) line of the power supply substrate 630.

  When peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 is fixed on the back side of cover flat plate 1501a, the head of the metal nabe screw inserted and screwed into through holes 1520r2 and 1520r4 is the one of cover side walls 1501b to 1501e of cover body 1501. It is disposed on the inner side of the end face on the opening side (that is, not to protrude outside the end face on the opening side of cover side walls 1501b to 1501e), and on the back side of peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 and the back side of cover flat 1501a. The back surface of the peripheral control substrate 1510 to be fixed is arranged on the same plane.

  The cover flat plate 1501 a corresponds to four through holes 1530 r 1 to 1530 r 4 formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 as viewed from the rear surface so that the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is disposed on the lower right side of the back surface of the cover 1501. At the positions, the pair of mounting boss holes 1501am1 and 1501am2 and the pair of mounting boss protrusions 1501an1 and 1501an2 are formed in a diagonal shape by being projected from the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a toward the opening side of the cover 1501 ing. Around the four through holes 1530r1 to 1530r4 formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, a copper foil for soldering (so-called "land") 1530rf1 to 1530rf4 having a circular shape on the surface side of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, and a liquid crystal output A copper foil for soldering (so-called "land") 1530rb1 to 1530rb4 having a circular shape is formed on the back surface side of the substrate 1530, and the lands 1530rf1 to 1530rf4 and 1530rb1 to 15530rb4 are respectively liquid crystal output substrates A wiring pattern is formed on the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 so as to be electrically connected to the ground (GND) line 1530.

  When attaching the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, a through hole 1540b2a formed on an L-shaped attachment piece 1540b2 of a metal shield plate 1540 described later is formed on the back side of the cover flat 1501a It arrange | positions so that it may correspond to boss hole 1501am1. Then, the through holes 1530r2 and 1530r4 formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are inserted into the mounting boss protrusions 1501an1 and 1501an2 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. Then, a metal nabe screw (not shown) is inserted into the through holes 1530r1 and 1530r3 formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 and screwed toward the mounting boss holes 1501am1 and 1501am2 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. The output substrate 1530 can be fixed to the back side of the cover plate 1501a. As a result, the L-shaped attachment piece 1540b2 of the metal shield plate 1540 is held between the cover 1501 and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. In this state, among the lands 1530rf1 to 1530rf4 formed on the front surface side of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, the land 1530rf1 and the back surface of the L-shaped attachment piece 1540b2 of the metal shield plate 1540 are in contact with each other. In addition, the lands 1530 rf 2 to 15 30 rf 4 and the mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of the mounting boss protrusions 1501 n 1 and 150 1 n 2 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat 1501 a and the mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of the mounting boss holes 1501 am 2 respectively abut In this state, the lands 1530 rb 1 to 1530 r b formed on the back surface side of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 abut on the seat surface of the metal nabe screw, respectively. Furthermore, the shaft (screw portion) of the metal nabe screw is screwed into the mounting boss holes 1501am1 and 1501am2 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a.

  As a result, the L-shaped mounting piece 1540b2 of the metal shield plate 1540 is electrically connected to the land 1530rf1 formed on the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 so that the metal shield plate 1540 is a liquid crystal output substrate. It will be connected to the ground (GND) of 1530. As described above, the ground (GND) line of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the peripheral control substrate 1510 and the ground (GND) line of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520. Therefore, the shield plate 1540 made of metal is connected to the ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, whereby the ground (GND) of the peripheral control substrate 1510 and the peripheral data ROM substrate are obtained. It will be connected to the ground (GND) of 1520. Also, as described above, the ground (GND) lines of the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the power supply substrate 630 in the substrate unit 620 of the main frame 4. Since the metal shield plate 1540 is connected to the ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, the metal shield plate 1540 is connected to the ground (GND) line of the power supply substrate 630.

  When the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the head of the metal nabe screw inserted and screwed into the through holes 1530r1 and 1530r3 is the opening of the cover side wall 1501b to 1501e of the cover 1501. It is disposed inside the end face of the side (that is, not to protrude outside the end face on the opening side of the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e), and is fixed to the back side of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 and the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. The rear surface of the peripheral control substrate 1510 and the rear surface of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 fixed on the rear surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a are arranged on the same plane.

  Various substrates such as peripheral control substrate 1510, peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are attached together with metallic shield plate 1540 at predetermined positions on the back side of cover plate 1501a, so that shield plate 1540 is covered by cover 1501. In the state of being sandwiched and fixed by the and various substrates, a gap having the above-described predetermined distance dimension between the surface of the peripheral control IC 1510a (the surface on which the product number and model is printed) and the rear surface of the FAN attachment recess 1501aa (In this embodiment, 2.3 mm) is formed.

  In the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501, ventilation holes 1501az having a plurality of circular shapes are respectively formed on the right side, the lower right side, the lower left side, and the left side of the fan attachment recess 1501aa. When the wing portion of the air-cooling fan attached to the fan attachment recess 1501 aa rotates, peripheral control is performed by causing air in the inner space of the cover 1501 to be expelled to the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 via the wing by this rotation. By taking in air from the outside of the unit 1500 through the vent holes 1501az, the inner space of the cover 1501 (especially, the peripheral control IC 1510a) can be air cooled. These ventilation holes 1501az are formed to have a diameter of 3 mm, a horizontal pitch width of 6.5 mm, and a vertical pitch width of 6.0 mm to 6.5 mm.

  When peripheral control substrate 1510 is fixed to the back side of cover flat plate 1501 a, seven connectors CN 1 to CN 7 provided on peripheral control substrate 15 10 and seven connector holes 150 1 ac 1 to 150 1 ac 7 formed on cover body 150 1. A space is formed, and a space is formed between the volume control switch 1510 d provided on the peripheral control substrate 1510 and the volume control hole 1501 ac8 formed on the cover 1501. In addition, when the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501 a, the two connectors CN 8 and CN 9 provided on the liquid crystal output substrate 15 30 and the two connector holes 150 1 ac 9 and 150 1 ac 10 formed in the cover 1501. A gap is formed. Therefore, when the wing portion of the air-cooling fan attached to the fan attachment recess 1501aa rotates, air in the inner space of the cover 1501 is expelled to the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 through the wing by this rotation. The air is taken in from the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 through the vent holes 1501az described above, and the above-described gaps (seven connectors CN1 to CN7 provided on the peripheral control substrate 1510 and seven formed on the cover body 1501 The gaps formed in the connector holes 1501ac1 to 1501ac7, the gaps formed in the volume control switch 1510d provided on the peripheral control substrate 1510, the volume control holes 1501ac8 formed on the cover 1501, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 Two connectors CN8 equipped And CN9, via the two connector hole 1501ac9,1501ac10 formed in the cover body 1501, a gap) formed, so that the capturing.

  The sum (total area) of the areas of the plurality of arc-shaped slit holes 1501 aaa formed on the bottom surface of the fan attachment recess 1501 aa is the area of the ventilation holes 1501 az formed in the cover flat plate 1501 a of the cover 1501 The above-described gap (the volume formed by the seven connectors CN1 to CN7 provided on the peripheral control substrate 1510 and the seven connector holes 1501ac1 to 1501ac7 formed on the cover 1501 and the volume control switch 1510d provided on the peripheral control substrate 1510 And a gap formed in the volume adjustment hole 1501ac8 formed in the cover 1501, and two connectors CN8 and CN9 provided on the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, and two connector holes 1501ac9 and 1501ac1 formed in the cover 1501. If is smaller than that the area of the gap) to be formed, it was added to the. Therefore, when the wing portion of the air-cooling fan attached to the fan attachment recess 1501aa rotates, air in the inner space of the cover 1501 is expelled to the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 through the wing by this rotation. A plurality of air from the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500, a plurality of vent holes 1501az formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501, and a plurality of shield plates 1540 accommodated in the space between the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502. When the air is taken in through the ventilation holes 1540az, the flow velocity of the air flowing into each of the ventilation holes 1501az formed in a plurality of the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 can be suppressed small.

6-2. Base body]
The base body 1502 for closing the opening of the cover body 1501 is made of non-conductive resin and is molded transparent, and viewed from the front, on the upper side, the left side, the lower side and the right side of the horizontally long rectangular base plate 1502a The base side walls 1502b to 1502e are formed in a box shape having an opening by protruding toward the front (the back side of the pachinko machine 1). The size of the opening formed by the base side walls 1502 b to 1502 e of the base body 1502 is formed to be somewhat larger than the size of the opening formed by the cover side walls 1501 b to 1501 e of the cover body 1501. Thus, in a state in which the opening of the cover 1501 is closed by the base 1502 by covering the cover 1501 with the base 1502, the cover side 1501 b1 501 e of the cover 1501 is provided on the inside of the base side 1502 b-1502 e of the base 1502. And fit in (surface contact).

  The base flat plate 1502a has predetermined intervals along the lower side as viewed from the front, and wires for these connectors CN2 to CN7 are located at positions not interfering with the connectors CN2 to CN7 provided on the peripheral control substrate 1510. Elongated in the vertical direction long and thin break prevention rib parts 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 are formed to prevent the peripheral control board 1510 from being warped and the electrical wiring pattern formed on the peripheral control board 1510 being broken by the force when inserting the connector for connection And a force for inserting a connector for connecting a wire to the connector CN1 at a position not interfering with the connector CN1 and the volume adjustment switch 1510d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 or a force for operating the volume adjustment switch 1510d Causes the peripheral control board 1510 to warp and the peripheral control board 15 Electrical wiring pattern formed on the zero elongated disconnection preventing rib portion 1502aa4 in the lateral direction to prevent the breakage is formed.

  In addition, the base flat plate 1502a is an L-shaped circuit at a position corresponding to an L-shaped circuit connection piece 1540d which is formed on a right side when viewed from the front and which is formed by bending a metal shield plate 1540 described later. A rectangular through hole 1502ab long in the vertical direction is formed, which is a shape slightly larger than the rear surface shape of the connection piece 1540d.

  When the base body 1502 is viewed from the front, in the vicinity of the opening side of the base body 1502 of the base side wall 1502c on the left side, an engaging portion 1502ca projecting outward is formed. In the engaging portion 1502ca, guide receiving portions 1502caa and 1502cab are provided at positions corresponding to the plate-like guiding portions 1501ca and 1501cb formed on the cover 1501, and hinge hooking portions 1501cc and 1501cd formed on the cover The hinge receiving portions 1502 cac and 1502 cad are respectively formed at corresponding positions. The hinge receiving portions 1502 cac and 1502 cad are formed with U-shaped groove-shaped sack portions 1502 cae and 1502 caf.

  While inserting the plate-like guide portions 1501ca and 1501cb formed on the cover body 1501 described above into the guide receiving portions 1502caa and 1502cab, the U-shaped groove shaped bag portions 1502cae and 1502caf of the hinge receiving portions 1502cac and 1502cad are described above. The L-shaped hooks 1501 cca and 1501 cda of the hinge hooks 1501 cc and 1501 cd formed on the cover body 1501 are inserted. Then, in a state in which the L-shaped flanges 1501 cca and 1501 cda of the hinge hooks 1501 cc and 1501 cd formed on the cover body 1501 are in contact with the U-shaped groove shaped bags 1502 cae and 1502 caf of the hinge receiving parts 1502 cac and 1502 cad. By turning the hook receiving portion 1502cac, 1502cad of the U-shaped groove-shaped bag portion 1502cae, 1502caf, the hook portion 1501cc, 1501cd formed on the cover 1501 is hooked with the L-shaped collar portion 1501cca, 1501cda. It can be engaged.

  Further, at the center of the base side wall 1502e on the right side, a base-side sealing portion 1502ea projecting outward is formed at a position corresponding to the cover-side sealing portion 1501ea formed on the cover body 1501. Further, through holes 1502eb1 and 1502eb2 for attaching the peripheral control unit 1500 to the game panel 1100 provided on the game board 5 are respectively formed on the upper side and the lower side of the base side wall 1502e on the right side.

6-3. Shield plate]
A metal shield plate 1540 capable of reducing (suppressing) electromagnetic wave noise entering the peripheral control substrate 1510, peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is a horizontally long rectangular shield as viewed from the front. L-shaped attachment pieces 1540b1 and 1540b2 bent backward by a predetermined distance dimension (12 mm from the back surface of the shield flat plate 1540a in the present embodiment) on the upper center side and lower center side of the left side of the flat plate 1540a (plate thickness: 1.2 mm) Are formed respectively.

  Further, the metal shield plate 1540 has a predetermined distance dimension (in the present embodiment) on the upper side and lower side of the horizontally long rectangular shield plate 1540a (plate thickness: 1.2 mm) as viewed from the front. L-shaped attachment pieces 1540c1 and 1540c2 bent backward only 12 mm from the back surface of the shield flat plate 1540a are respectively formed, and at the center of the horizontally long rectangular shield flat plate 1540a (plate thickness: 1.2 mm) An L-shaped circuit connection piece 1540d is formed between the L-shaped attachment pieces 1540c1 and 1540c2 and bent backward by a predetermined distance dimension (in the present embodiment, 25 mm from the back surface of the shield plate 1540a). A conductive elastic member 1545 is attached (bonded) to the back surface of the L-shaped circuit connection piece 1540d from the upper end to the lower end.

  The shield plate 1540a is formed with a notch around the periphery thereof so as not to interfere with the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e, and substantially at a position corresponding to the fan attachment recess 1501aa of the cover plate 1501a and the wiring extraction recess 1501ab. A square opening 1540 aa is formed. Thereby, various substrates such as the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are attached together with the metallic shield plate 1540 at predetermined positions on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. In a state in which the cover 1501 and various substrates hold and fix, the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e of the cover 1501 do not respectively interfere with the outer periphery of the shield flat 1540a, and the fan attachment concave 1501aa of the cover flat 1501a and The wiring lead-out concave portion 1501ab is inserted without being in contact with the opening 1540aa of the shield plate 1540a.

  The metal shield plate 1540 is formed by bending so that the back surfaces of the L-shaped attachment pieces 1540b1 and 1540b2 and the back surfaces of the L-shaped attachment pieces 1540c1 and 1540c2 are disposed in the same plane. The back surfaces of the L-shaped attachment pieces 1540 b 1, 1540 b 2, 1540 c 1, and 1540 c 2 and the front surface of the shield flat plate 1540 a are formed to be parallel to each other. In the present embodiment, the distance from the surface of the shield plate 1540a to the back surface of the L-shaped attachment pieces 1540b1, 1540b2, 1540c1, and 1540c2 is 13.2 mm.

  Through holes 1540b1a and 1540b2a are respectively formed in the L-shaped attachment pieces 1540b1 and 1540b2 at positions corresponding to the attachment boss holes 1501ah2 and 1501am1 formed on the back surface of the cover 1501 described above. As described above, mounting boss hole 1501ah2 is projected from the back surface of cover flat plate 1501a toward the opening of cover body 1501 at a position corresponding to four through holes 1520r1 to 1520r4 formed in peripheral data ROM substrate 1520. It is a mounting boss hole of one of the pair of mounting boss protrusions 1501 ai 1, 1501 ai 2 formed. As described above, the mounting boss holes 1501am1 are projected from the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a toward the opening side of the cover 1501 at positions corresponding to the four through holes 1530r1 to 1530r4 formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. It is a mounting boss hole of one of the pair of mounting boss holes 1501am1 and 1501am2 formed.

  Through holes 1540c1a and 1540c2a are respectively formed in the L-shaped attachment pieces 1540c1 and 1540c2 at positions corresponding to the attachment boss holes 1501ag1 and 1501ag4 formed on the back surface of the cover 1501 described above. As described above, these mounting boss holes 1501ag1 and 1501ag4 are directed from the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a to the opening side of the cover 1501 at positions corresponding to the four through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control substrate 1510 It is two mounting boss holes among four mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed to be protruded.

  Various substrates such as peripheral control substrate 1510, peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are attached together with metallic shield plate 1540 at predetermined positions on the back side of cover plate 1501a, so that shield plate 1540 is covered by cover 1501. In the state of being sandwiched and fixed by the and various substrates, the distance dimension (the actual implementation) of a predetermined height between the surface of the various substrates (the surface facing the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a) and the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a In the embodiment, a space having 14.8 mm) is formed, and the metal shield plate 1540 is disposed in the space to form two spaces.

  These two spaces are a distance dimension of a first predetermined height between the front surface (surface facing the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a) of various substrates and the back surface of the shield flat surface 1540a of the metal shield plate 1540 described later. A second space 1505a (see FIG. 149) (in the present embodiment, 12 mm) and a second space between the surface of the shield plate 1540a of the metal shield plate 1540 and the back surface of the cover plate 1501a, which will be described later. And a second space 1505 b (see FIG. 149) having a distance dimension of the predetermined height (1.6 mm in the present embodiment).

  In the first space 1505a, various electronic components and the like included in the peripheral control board 1510 (peripheral control IC 1510a, control ROM 1510b described later, SDRAM 1510c described later, real time clock IC not shown, backup power supply 1510e described later, power generation circuit not shown, Resistors (not shown), capacitors (not shown), LEDs ML1 to ML4 to be described later, special connectors SCN1 and SCN2 to be described later, various electronic components etc. provided on peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 (peripheral data ROM 1520a to be described later, resistor not shown, capacitor not shown, While a special connector SCN3 or the like to be described later and various electronic components etc. (not shown, a capacitor not shown, a special connector SCN4 to be described later) provided in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are accommodated. The second space 1505b, various electronic parts and the like is not at all accommodated. This is because it is possible to take measures against electromagnetic noise by housing various electronic components and the like that are easily affected by electromagnetic noise in the first space 1505a, and various electronic components that generate heat in the second space 1505b. The reason is that heat generated from various electronic components and the like in the first space 1505a is efficiently transmitted to the second space 1505b through the metal shield plate 1540 by not housing the first space 1505a. That is, in addition to the function of reducing (suppressing) electromagnetic wave noise, the metal shield plate 1540 also has a function as a heat sink.

  In the shield flat plate 1540 a of the shield plate 1540, ventilation holes 1540 az of the same shape are formed at positions corresponding to the plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501 az formed in the cover flat plate 1501 a of the cover 1501. That is, similar to the ventilation holes 1501az, these ventilation holes 1540az are formed to have a diameter of 3 mm, a horizontal pitch width of 6.5 mm, and a vertical pitch width of 6.0 mm to 6.5 mm. There is. When the wing of the air-cooling fan attached to the fan attachment recess 1501 aa of the cover 1501 rotates, the air in the inner space of the cover 1501 is expelled to the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 through the wing by this rotation. Thus, the air is taken in from the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 through the ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover 1501 and the ventilation holes 1540az formed in the shield flat 1540a of the shield plate 1540. The first space 1505a (in particular, the peripheral control IC 1510a) of the inner space of the body 1501 can be air cooled, and the metal shield plate 1540 can be air cooled.

6-4. Conductive elastic member]
The conductive elastic member 1545 attached (adhered) to the back surface of the L-shaped circuit connection piece 1540d of the metal shield plate 1540 is a conductive member having a cushioning property (elasticity), and a conductive covering portion 1545a, It is composed of a foam 1545b having a rectangular shape as a core material covered by the conductive covering portion 1545a, and a conductive pressure-sensitive adhesive tape 1545c stuck to the conductive covering portion 1545a. Examples of the covering portion 1545a include a polyester woven fabric in which a metal coating of copper and nickel is formed, a polyimide film in which a conductive layer of copper and nickel is formed, and the like. As a foam 1545b, for example, a polyurethane foam having heat resistance can be mentioned. As the conductive adhesive tape 1545c, for example, a conductive double-sided adhesive tape in which an acrylic adhesive is used can be mentioned. The surface of the conductive adhesive tape 1545c is protected by peel paper until it is used, and peels off the peel paper when the conductive coating portion 1545a is attached (bonded) to another member.

  The conductive elastic member 1545 has a rectangular shape with a width of 5 mm and a height of 3 mm, and the conductive adhesive tape 1545c has a width with a width of 2 mm and a height of 0.035 mm. have.

6-5. Various connectors]
The peripheral control board 1510 mounted in the internal space of the cover 1501 includes a CPU, a RAM, a VDP, a VRAM, a sound source, a serial ATA controller (Advanced Technology Attachment, hereinafter referred to as "SATA controller"), and various I / I. Perform various programs and effects that can control peripheral control IC 1510a where O interface etc. are accumulated on one semiconductor chip, and progress of game effects and demonstrations (demonstration effect to be performed while waiting for players) Various control information (peripheral data) stored in the control ROM 1510 b for storing various schedule data to be prescribed and the peripheral data ROM 1520 a provided on the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 can be transferred and stored. DRAM (Synchronous Dynamic
A random access memory (SD) 1510c consisting of 1510c1 and 1510c2, a slide type volume control switch 1510d that can adjust the volume, and a backup power supply that can supply power even when the power is shut off to a real time clock IC (not shown) A power supply generation circuit (not shown) for generating various power supply voltages and various connectors CN1 to CN7 are provided. The peripheral control IC 1510a, the ROM 1510b, the SDRAM 1510c, and the peripheral data ROM 1520a, which are provided on the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, have various IC connectors and the various connectors CN1 provided on the peripheral control substrate 1510. The pin spacing between ~ CN7 and special connectors SCN1 and SCN2 is narrowed, and the number of connectors on peripheral control board 1510 is increased, so the spacing between connectors CN1 to CN7 is narrowed, and the spacing between connector CN7 and special connector SCN2 is also narrowed. ing.

  The control ROM 1510 b provided in the peripheral control board 1510 has a storage capacity of 128 Mbits, and the SDRAMs 1510 c 1 and 1510 c2 provided in the peripheral control board 1510 each have a storage capacity of 2 Gbits. The peripheral data ROM 1520a provided in the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 has a storage capacity of 62 Gbits.

  As various I / O interfaces of the peripheral control board 1510, there are various serial I / O, various parallel I / O, and the like. Various serial I / Os include SPI (Serial Peripheral Interface) communication, UART (Universal Asynchronous Receiver Transmitter) communication, I2C (Inter-Integrated Circuit) communication, and the like.

  In this embodiment, UART communication is employed as a communication method for receiving a command from the main control board 1310X (communicate via the connector CN5), various boards provided on the game board 5 side, various boards provided on the door frame side There is also a communication method in which SPI communication or I2C communication is adopted as a communication method for transmitting control data to the above (communication is performed via the corresponding connector among the connector CN3, the connector CN6, and the connector CN7).

  In this embodiment, for example, using SPI communication or I2C communication, an electric drive source provided on the game board 5 (for example, various motors provided in various effect units, and communicating via the connector CN6 or the connector CN7) And an electric drive source (for example, the operation ring drive motor 342 and the operation button elevation drive motor 367 provided in the effect operation unit 300) provided on the door frame 3 side, and communicate via the connector CN3. Drive data to drive control IC for driving, and various sensors provided on the game board 5 side (for example, various detection sensors provided for various effect units, and communicate via the connector CN6) Signals from the vehicle are received as detection data, and various sensors provided on the door frame 3 side (for example, various detection sensors provided in the rendering operation unit 300) , And the and receives signals from communicating through the connector CN3.) As the detection data. In the present embodiment, the transfer rate by SPI communication is set to 250 kpbs, and the transfer rate by I2C communication is set to 1 kbps.

  As various parallel I / O, there is GPIO (General Purpose Input / Output, General Purpose IO). In the present embodiment, a signal from the air cooling fan FAN that transmits the rotation state of the air cooling fan FAN provided in the peripheral control unit 1500 of the game board 5 is input to GPIO (via the connector CN1) or The signals from various sensors that check the operation of the control target and the origin position are not input to GPIO (via connector CN6) or the control signal for the control target (not shown) provided on the game board 5 side from GPIO (connector CN6 And outputs a signal from the GPIO to the LEDML4 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 for notifying that the peripheral control IC 1510a is operating. Moreover, in the present embodiment, GPIO is used to function as serial communication. For example, in predetermined interrupt processing (for example, interrupt processing that occurs every 16 milliseconds (ms)), while generating a clock signal from GPIO, based on this clock signal, output data one bit at a time from GPIO It can produce serial data. By using such GPIOs to function as serial communication, for example, a plurality of LEDs provided on the game board 5 side in predetermined interrupt processing (for example, interrupt processing that occurs every 16 milliseconds (ms)) Light emission data can be output as a plurality of game board side serial systems to (communicated via connector CN1), and communicated via a plurality of LEDs (connector CN6) provided on the door frame 3 side. Light emission data can be transmitted by a plurality of door frame side serial systems.

  In the present embodiment, for example, GPIO is assigned to the connector CN1 and SPI communication and I2C communication are assigned to the connector CN3 (that is, the connector CN3 is assigned as a connector in which SPI communication and I2C communication coexist) The connector CN5 is assigned to UART communication, the connector CN6 is assigned to SPI communication and GPIO (that is, the connector CN6 is assigned as a SPI communication and GPIO co-resident connector), and the connector CN7 is assigned to SPI communication Is assigned.

  The SATA controller of the peripheral control IC 1510a can establish communication conforming to the SATA standard with the peripheral data ROM 1520a provided on the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and realizes a high transfer speed of 2 Gbps (corresponding to 3 Gbps). The SATA controller of the peripheral control IC 1510a transfers various control information (peripheral data) from the peripheral data ROM 1520a provided on the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 at high speed to the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a according to an instruction of the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a. , And can be transferred to the SDRAMs 1510 c 1 and 1510 c 2 at high speed.

  The SDRAMs 1510 c 1 and 1510 c 2 are DDR3 SDRAMs (Double Data Rate 3 Synchronous Dynamic Random Access Memory), and can realize high-speed data communication speed. In the SDRAMs 1510 c 1 and 1510 c 2, various control information (peripheral data) from the peripheral data ROM 1520 a provided on the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 is transferred at high speed by the SATA controller of the peripheral control IC 1510 a.

  Peripheral control substrate 1510 further includes special connector SCN1 for connecting peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 with the substrate, and special connector SCN2 for connecting liquid crystal output substrate 1530 with the substrate. Peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 is equipped with special connector SCN 3 for connecting peripheral control substrate 1510 to the substrate. The liquid crystal output substrate 1530 includes a peripheral control substrate 1510 and a special connector SCN 4 for connecting the substrates.

  The peripheral control board 1510 outputs drawing data of an image to be drawn on a display device such as an effect display device from the special connector SCN2 in a system of a plurality of types of video signals. Examples of the plurality of types of video signal types include RGB type, LVDS type, MIPI (Mobile Industry Processor Interface) type, eDP (Embedded Display Port) type, clockless type, and the like. In the system, four systems (four systems in total) of one system of RGB system, two systems of LVDS system (first LVDS system, second LVDS system), and MIPI system are adopted. Further, in the present embodiment, one of the two LVDS system systems (for example, the first LVDS system system) is adopted as a system of the video signal input to the effect display device 1600. ing. In addition, instead of the MIPI method, for example, an eDP method is adopted, and a peripheral control board is one system of RGB methods, two systems of LVDS methods (first LVDS method, second LVDS method), and one system of eDP methods. 1510 can also be created.

  The peripheral control board 1510 further includes an LED ML1 near the control ROM 1510b, an LED ML2 near the SDRAM 1510 c, an LED ML3 near the special connector SCN1, and an LED ML4 near the special connector SCN2. As described later, the peripheral control substrate 1510 is directly supplied with various voltages (DC + 35 V, DC + 12 V, and DC + 5 V) from the power supply substrate 630 of the substrate unit 620. The LED ML1 confirms (monitors) the state in which the direct current +5 V is supplied, and the lighting state is maintained in the state in which the direct current +5 V is supplied. The LED ML2 confirms (monitors) a state in which +12 V DC is supplied, and the lighting state is maintained in a state in which +12 V DC is supplied. The LED ML3 confirms (monitors) the state in which the direct current +35 V is supplied, and the lighting state is maintained in the state in which the direct current +35 V is supplied. The LED ML4 confirms (monitors) the operation of the peripheral control IC 1510a, and the lighting state is maintained while the peripheral control IC 1510a is in operation.

  Various substrates such as peripheral control substrate 1510, peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are attached together with metallic shield plate 1540 at predetermined positions on the back side of cover plate 1501a, so that shield plate 1540 is covered by cover 1501. In the state of being sandwiched and fixed by the and various substrates, as described above, a predetermined height is provided between the front surface of the various substrates (surface facing the back surface of cover flat plate 1501a) and the back surface of cover flat 1501a. A space having a distance dimension (14.8 mm in this embodiment) is formed, and a metal shield plate 1540 is disposed in the space to form a two space. As described above, these two spaces have a first predetermined height between the front surface of the various substrates (surface facing the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a) and the back surface of the shield flat surface 1540a of the metal shield plate 1540. Between the first space 1505a (see FIG. 149) having a distance dimension of 12 mm (in the present embodiment) and the front surface of the shield flat 1540a of the metal shield plate 1540 and the back surface of the cover flat 1501a. And a second space 1505 b (see FIG. 149) having a distance dimension of two predetermined heights (1.6 mm in the present embodiment).

  In the first space 1505a, as described above, various electronic components and the like provided in the peripheral control substrate 1510, various electronic components and the like provided in the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and various electronic components and the like provided in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are accommodated. ing. The inside of the first space 1505 a formed in this manner can be brightly illuminated by lighting up the LEDs ML 1 to LED ML 4 provided on the surface of the peripheral control substrate 15 10.

  The special connectors SCN1 and SCN2 provided on the peripheral control substrate 1510, the special connector SCN3 provided on the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the special connector SCN4 provided on the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are provided on the peripheral control substrate 1510 in that they have a floating mechanism. The structure is completely different from the connectors CN1 to CN7 and the connectors CN8 to CN10 provided on the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. These connectors CN1 to CN10 are sockets, respectively, and by inserting and pushing the plug of the corresponding connector in the direction perpendicular to the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530, the socket and the plug are fitted. The sockets of the connectors CN1 to CN10 have a structure in which there is no amount of movement of the peripheral control substrate 1510 and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 in the vertical direction when viewed from the front when fitting.

  The special connectors SCN1 and SCN2 provided in the peripheral control substrate 1510 are plugs, and the special connector SCN3 provided in the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 and the special connector SCN4 provided in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are sockets.

  By inserting and pushing the socket of the special connector SCN3 provided on the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 into the plug of the special connector SCN1 provided on the peripheral control substrate 1510, the socket and the plug are fitted. When the socket of the special connector SCN3 provided on the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 is fitted, when the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 (peripheral control substrate 1510) is viewed from the front, the socket is in the front-rear direction (back and front of the pachinko machine 1) The floating mechanism is provided to be able to absorb an error in the front and back direction that occurs when pushing in by moving a predetermined distance range toward the direction. The socket of the special connector SCN 3 provided on peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 is peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 in a state where peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 is attached and fixed at a predetermined position on the back surface of cover flat 1501 a of cover 1501. The front surface (upper surface) of the socket of the special connector SCN 3 is not in contact with the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501 a of the cover 1501 even if the peripheral control substrate 1510 is moved forward as viewed from the front A gap is formed between the front surface (upper surface) of the socket of the special connector SCN 3 and the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501 a of the cover 1501.

  The socket of the special connector SCN4 provided on the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is inserted into the plug of the special connector SCN2 provided on the peripheral control substrate 1510 and pushed in, whereby the socket and the plug are fitted. When the special connector SCN 4 provided in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is fitted, when the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 (peripheral control substrate 1510) is viewed from the front, the socket is in the front-back direction (directions between the back and front of the pachinko machine 1) A floating mechanism is provided to be able to absorb an error in the front and back direction that occurs when pushing in by moving a predetermined distance range toward the. The socket of the special connector SCN4 provided on the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is a liquid crystal output substrate 1530 (peripheral control in a state where the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is attached and fixed to a predetermined position on the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover 1501. Even if the substrate 1510 is moved forward as viewed from the front, the front surface (upper surface) of the socket of the special connector SCN 4 does not contact the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501 a of the cover 1501 even if it moves the maximum A gap is formed between the front surface (upper surface) of the socket of the connector SCN 4 and the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501 a of the cover 1501.

  Here, the reason why the special connector SCN3 is adopted for the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 and the special connector SCN4 is adopted for the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 will be briefly described. The peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 is provided with a peripheral data ROM 1520a that can store various control information (peripheral data) that is to be controlled by the peripheral control substrate 1510. As various control information (peripheral data), background images for drawing various effect images on the effect display device 1600, character images, image data such as symbol images, various decoration boards provided in the door frame 3 and the game board 5 To the light emission data (lighting, gradation, blinking, extinguishing, etc.) of the various LEDs mounted in plural, sound data such as music, voice, warning sound, notification sound, door frame 3 and game board 5 The drive data etc. can be mentioned for carrying out drive control of the various movable performance bodies provided.

  The peripheral data ROM 1520a is a NAND flash (nonvolatile) memory, is cheaper than a NOR flash (nonvolatile) memory, has a large capacity, and can write various data at high speed. The peripheral data ROM 1520a has a low operating voltage, can reduce power consumption, and can realize a high transfer rate by communication conforming to the SATA standard.

  As described above, adopting a NAND flash (nonvolatile) memory as the peripheral data ROM 1520a realizes cost reduction and contributes to suppression of power consumption, and reading of various data stored at a high transfer rate. it can. However, although the peripheral data ROM 1520a can suppress power consumption due to its low operating voltage, it is susceptible to noise due to its low operating voltage. In addition, it is necessary to transmit various data stored in peripheral data ROM 1520 a from peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 to peripheral control substrate 1510 accurately and surely. Therefore, in the present embodiment, a configuration in which the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 and the peripheral control substrate 1510 are electrically connected to each other through the wiring (harness) is not employed, and the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 and the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 are not connected. By adopting a configuration in which the control substrate 1510 is electrically connected to the inter-substrate connector, the influence of noise intruding into the inter-substrate transmission path is reduced.

  The mounting procedure of various substrates in the internal space of cover 1501 will be described later, but peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 inserts the socket of special connector SCN3 provided in itself into the plug of special connector SCN1 provided in peripheral control substrate 1510. Since it is necessary to fix the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 together with the peripheral control substrate 1510 on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a after being pressed in, the socket of the special connector SCN3 provided with the above-mentioned floating mechanism is adopted. Thus, a plurality of connection terminals are formed in the plug and the socket by absorbing an error in the front-rear direction which occurs when the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 is fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a together with the peripheral control substrate 1510. To prevent damage to the surroundings The transmission path between the substrate and the control substrate 1510 and the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 can be can be reliably formed.

  Further, as described above, since the cover 1501 is made of non-conductive resin, the cover flat 1501 a of the cover 1501 may be warped after molding although it is within the design dimension distance tolerance. Even in such a case, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 is fixed together with the peripheral control substrate 1510 on the back surface side of the curved cover plate 1501a by adopting the socket of the special connector SCN3 provided with the floating mechanism described above. By absorbing the errors in the front and back direction that occur during operation, damage to the plurality of connection terminals formed in the plug and the socket is prevented, and a transmission path between the peripheral control substrate 1510 and the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 is obtained. It can be formed reliably.

  The liquid crystal output substrate 1530 outputs the rendering data of the image to be rendered on the effect display device 1600 transmitted from the peripheral control substrate 1510 from the connector CN10, thereby advancing the effect on the effect display device 1600 (for example, for the player An image telling that a big hit gaming state occurs that is advantageous compared to the normal state, an image telling that a big hit gaming state does not occur, a big hit gaming state occurs compared to the normal state although a big hit gaming state does not occur It is an important substrate which draws an image etc. which conveys that it is approaching as an image. Therefore, drawing data of an image drawn on the effect display device 1600 from the peripheral control substrate 1510 needs to be transmitted to the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 accurately and surely. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 and the peripheral control substrate are not electrically connected via the wiring (harness) between the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 and the peripheral control substrate 1510. By adopting a configuration in which the connector 1510 is electrically connected to the inter-substrate connector, the influence of noise entering the inter-substrate transmission path is reduced.

  The mounting procedure of various substrates in the inner space of the cover 1501 will be described later, but the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 inserts the socket of the special connector SCN4 provided in itself into the plug of the special connector SCN2 provided in the peripheral control substrate 1510 Since it is necessary to fix peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 and liquid crystal output substrate 1530 together with peripheral control substrate 1510 on the back side of cover flat plate 1501a after pressing, the socket of special connector SCN4 provided with the above-mentioned floating mechanism is adopted. Accordingly, by absorbing an error in the front-rear direction which occurs when the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a together with the peripheral control substrate 1510, a plurality of connection terminals are formed in the plug and the socket. Peripheral control board to prevent damage The transmission path between the substrate 510 and the liquid crystal driving substrate 1530 can be can be reliably formed.

  Further, as described above, since the cover 1501 is made of non-conductive resin, the cover flat 1501 a of the cover 1501 may be warped after molding although it is within the design dimension distance tolerance. Even in such a case, by adopting the socket of the special connector SCN4 provided with the above-described floating mechanism, the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is fixed to the back side of the warped cover flat plate 1501a together with the peripheral control substrate 1510. By absorbing the errors in the front and back direction that occur in the process, damage to the multiple connection terminals formed in the plug and the socket can be prevented, and the transmission path between the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 can be assured. It can be formed.

  When peripheral control board 1510, peripheral data ROM board 1520, and liquid crystal output board 1530 are fixed on the back side of cover plate 1501a, as described above, the back of peripheral control board 1510 and peripheral data ROM board 1520 are fixed. Since the back surface and the back surface of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are arranged on the same plane, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are arranged on the surface of the peripheral control substrate 1510. As compared to the case of three-dimensional arrangement, the distance dimension in the front-rear direction (that is, the depth direction) of the peripheral control unit 1500 can be reduced, so, for example, a large effect unit (operating a movable effect body on the game board 5) Drive source and drive mechanism, and various sensors for detecting the home position and working position) It can contribute to ensuring the depth direction of the distance dimension of fit.

6-6. Method of assembling peripheral control unit]
Here, a method of assembling the peripheral control unit 1500 will be described. First, the socket of the special connector SCN3 provided in the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 is inserted into the plug of the special connector SCN1 provided in the peripheral control substrate 1510 and pushed. Subsequently, the socket of the special connector SCN4 provided on the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is inserted into the plug of the special connector SCN2 provided on the peripheral control substrate 1510 and pushed.

  Subsequently, in order to attach the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, through holes 1540c1a formed in the L-shaped attachment piece 1540c1 of the metal shield plate 1540. And the through hole 1540c2a formed in the L-shaped attachment piece 1540c2 of the shield plate 1540 made of metal and the back surface of the cover plate 1501a. The mounting bosses are formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a so that the through holes 1540b1a formed in the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540b1 of the metal shield plate 1540 are arranged to match the mounting boss holes 1501ag4 formed on the side. Arranged to match the hole 1501ah2 and made of metal A through hole 1540b2a formed in an L-shaped mounting piece 1540b2 of the shield plate 1540 are arranged to fit the mounting boss hole 1501am1 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a.

  Subsequently, through holes 1520r1 and 1520r3 formed in peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 are inserted into attachment boss protrusions 1501ai1 and 1501ai2 formed on the back surface side of cover flat plate 1501a, and through holes formed in liquid crystal output substrate 1530 The holes 1530r2 and 1530r4 are inserted into the mounting boss protrusions 1501an1 and 1501an2 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. Thus, through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in peripheral control substrate 1510 are arranged corresponding to mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface of cover flat plate 1501a, and are formed on peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 The holes 1520r2 and 1520r4 correspond to the mounting boss holes 1501ah1 and 1501ah2 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and the through holes 1530r1 and 1530r3 formed on the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are on the back side of the cover flat 1501a. The mounting boss holes 1501am1 and 1501am2 formed in the above are arranged corresponding to each other.

  Subsequently, a metal nabe screw (not shown) is inserted into through holes 1520r2 and 1520r4 formed in peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 and screwed toward attachment boss holes 1501ah1 and 1501ah2 formed on the back side of cover flat plate 1501a. Fix peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 on the back side of cover plate 1501a, insert a metal nabe screw (not shown) into through holes 1530r1 and 1530r3 formed in liquid crystal output substrate 1530 to form on the back side of cover plate 1501a. The liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a by screwing toward the mounting boss holes 1501am1 and 1501am2. As a result, the L-shaped mounting piece 1540b1 of the metal shield plate 1540 is held by the cover 1501 and the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the L-shaped mounting piece 1540b2 of the metal shield plate 1540 is It will be in the state clamped by the cover body 1501 and the liquid-crystal output board | substrate 1530. FIG.

  Subsequently, the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control substrate 1510 are arranged corresponding to the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. If necessary, the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control substrate 1510 are finely adjusted and arranged so as to match the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and the through holes are formed. The peripheral control substrate 1510 is fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a by inserting a metal nabe screw (not shown) into the holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 and screwing it toward the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4. As a result, the L-shaped attachment pieces 1540c1 and 1540c2 of the metal shield plate 1540 are held by the cover 1501 and the peripheral control board 1510. In other words, various substrates such as peripheral control substrate 1510, peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are attached together with metallic shield plate 1540 at predetermined positions on the back side of cover plate 1501a. It will be in the state clamped by the body 1501 and various board | substrates, and being fixed.

  As described above, among the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, and the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral control substrate 1510 is finally fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a.

  The peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 is inserted into the mounting boss protrusions 1501 ai 1 1501 a 2 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 150 1 a to restrict movement in the vertical and horizontal directions, and the liquid crystal output substrate 15 30 is of the cover flat plate 150 1 a. While the movement in the vertical and horizontal directions is restrained by being inserted into the mounting boss protrusions 1501an1 and 1501an2 formed on the back surface side, the peripheral control board 1510 has mounting bosses for restricting the vertical and horizontal directions The protrusion is not formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. This is achieved by fixing the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 to the back side of the cover plate 1501a by restraining the upper, lower, left, and right directions, and measuring dimensional errors due to such restraints. When fixed to the back surface side of 1501a, it is absorbed by respective dimensional tolerances in through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in peripheral control substrate 1510 and mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of cover flat plate 1501a. It can be done.

  Subsequently, in a state where the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, and the peripheral control substrate 1510 are fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the plate-like guide portions 1501ca and 1501cb formed on the cover 1501 are The L-shaped flanges 1501 cca and 1501 cda of the hinge hooks 1501 cc and 1501 cd formed on the cover body 1501 are inserted into the guide receiving portions 1502 caa and 1502 cab formed on the engaging portion 1502 ca of the base body 1502. The hinge receiving portions 1502 cac of the engaging portions 1502 ca 1502 and the U-shaped groove shaped bags 1502 cae of the 1502 cad are inserted into the bag portions 1502 cae 1502 caf.

  Subsequently, a state in which the L-shaped flanges 1501 cca and 1501 cda of the hinge hooks 1501 cc and 1501 cd formed on the cover body 1501 abut the U-shaped groove shaped bags 1502 cae and 1502 caf of the hinge receiving parts 1502 cac and 1502 cad The L-shaped circuit connection piece 1540d of the metal shield plate 1540 passes through the through hole 1502ab of the base body 1502 and covers the base body 1502 as it is. When the body 1501 is covered, the L-shaped circuit connection piece 1540d protrudes from the back surface of the base body 1502, and a metal anchor rivet (not shown) is inserted into the cover side sealing portion 1501ea formed on the cover body 1501. Insert a metal one-way screw Screwed toward the base side sealing section 1502ea formed on the base member 1502 Te. When the metal one-way screw is screwed in, the front end surface of the metal anchor rivet spreads outward at the base side sealing portion 1502ea, thereby forming the cover side sealing portion 1501ea formed on the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502 The base-side sealing unit 1502ea is sealed.

  In such a sealed state, the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e of the cover body 1501 are fitted into and inscribed in (surface contact with) the base side walls 1502b to 1502e of the base body 1502. Further, in the state sealed in this manner, the L-shaped circuit connection piece 1540d of the metal shield plate 1540 protrudes from the back surface of the base body 1502, and the L-shaped circuit connection piece 1540d from the back surface of the base body 1502. The distance dimension (protrusion length) extending to the back surface of the lens is 6.8 mm.

  In order to release such a sealed state, the cover side sealing portion 1501ea formed on the cover body 1501 must be broken by a tool. Therefore, by looking at the trace of the opening and closing, it is possible to detect the improper opening and closing of the peripheral control board box 1505 composed of the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502, and deterrent against the fraudulent act on the peripheral control board box 1505 Is elevated.

  Subsequently, the air cooling fan FAN is pushed into the fan attachment recess 1501 aa formed in the cover flat plate 1501 a of the cover body 1501, and a plurality of wires from the air cooling fan FAN are formed from the wire drawing out recess 1501 ab formed in the cover flat plate 1501 a of the cover 1501. From the front of the cover flat plate 1501a to the rear, a metal seat-backed nabe screw (a screw having a shape in which a pan head and a flat washer are integrated) not shown is screwed into the mounting holes 1501aac1 and aac2, respectively.

  Subsequently, a plurality of wires (harnesses) to the effect display device 1600 are connected to the connector CN 10 of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 through the wire lead-out opening 1501 ae formed in the cover flat plate 1501 a of the cover 1501. The connector of (1) is inserted and attached, and the wiring cover body 1503 is fitted in the mounting recess 1501 af formed in the cover flat plate 1501 a of the cover body 1501. A metal cover screw (not shown) is inserted in the through holes 1503b1 and 1503b2 formed in the wiring cover 1503 and screwed from the front to the rear of the wiring cover 1503 in the mounting holes 1501afb1 and 1501afb2, respectively. The 1503 is fixed to the mounting recess 1501 af. Thus, the plurality of wires can be covered by the wire cover 1503 and can not be touched.

  Subsequently, the peel paper of the conductive adhesive tape 1545c of the conductive elastic member 1545 is peeled off, and the conductive elastic member is formed on the back surface of the L-shaped circuit connection piece 1540d of the shield plate 1540 made of metal protruding from the back surface of the base body 1502. Attach (adhere) 1545 adhesive tape 1545c.

  In the case where the peripheral control unit 1500 assembled in this manner is attached to the mounting portion formed on the back side of the transparent synthetic resin box that accommodates the effect display device 1600 and is behind the gaming panel 1100 provided on the game board 5 The peripheral control unit 1500 is viewed from the front, and the left side of the peripheral control unit 1500 (the side of the engaging portion 1502ca formed on the base 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500) is the back side of the transparent synthetic resin box. And insert a metal nabe screw (not shown) into the through holes 1502eb1 and 1502eb2 formed in the base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500 to insert it into the mounting groove forming the mounting portion formed in the transparent synthetic resin box It fixes by screwing toward the attachment hole which comprises the attachment part formed in the back surface side of.

  As described above, the effect display device 1600 is composed of a frame-like metal frame, a metal back cover that covers the entire rear surface of the metal frame, and a transparent synthetic resin box. A liquid crystal panel, a backlight, a drive circuit and the like are accommodated in a frame-like metal frame. The entire rear surface of the frame-like metal frame is closed and fixed by a metal back cover, and is accommodated in a transparent synthetic resin box. Further, as described above, the effect display device 1600 is controlled by the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of the effect display device 1600 and electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the peripheral control substrate 1510 etc. accommodated in the peripheral control unit 1500. Are connected to the same ground (GND). When the peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the mounting portion formed on the back surface side of the transparent synthetic resin box of the effect display device 1600, the L-shaped circuit connection piece of the metal shield plate 1540 protruding from the back surface of the base body 1502 The metal back cover of the effect display device 1600 is hit via the conductive elastic member 1545 through a through hole (not shown) formed on the back side of the transparent synthetic resin box 1540d as shown in FIG. 150. It will be in the state of contact. At this time, the conductive elastic member 1545 is pushed in and collapsed in the height direction (in the present embodiment, the height of the conductive elastic member 1545 is crushed by 1 mm to 1.5 mm), thereby causing dimensional deviation due to dimensional tolerance or assembly error. Can be absorbed by the conductive elastic member 1545. Thereby, the peripheral control board housed in peripheral control unit 1500 is brought into a state where the metal shield plate 1540 of peripheral control unit 1500 and the metal back cover of effect display device 1600 are electrically connected securely. It can be electrically connected to a ground (GND) line such as 1510 and can be made the same ground (GND), so that a strong environment against electromagnetic wave noise is constructed for the peripheral control unit 1500 and its surroundings. Can.

  In the attachment procedure of various substrates in the inner space of the cover 1501 among the assembling methods described above, for example, the through hole 1540c1a formed in the L-shaped attachment piece 1540c1 of the shield plate 1540 made of metal is The through hole 1540c2a formed in the L-shaped attachment piece 1540c2 of the shield plate 1540 made of metal is disposed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. A mounting boss hole 1501ah2 is formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. The through hole 1540b1a is formed on the L-shaped mounting piece 1540b1 of the metal shield plate 1540. Of the metal shield plate 1540 A through hole 1540b2a formed in shape attachment pieces 1540B2, arranged to fit the mounting boss hole 1501am1 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a.

  Subsequently, peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 is arranged at the above-described predetermined position on the back surface side of cover flat plate 1501 a of peripheral control substrate 1510 (peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 is disposed on the upper right side of cover 1501 when cover 1501 is viewed from the back The liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is fixed to the above-described predetermined position on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a of the peripheral control substrate 1510 (the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is a cover when the cover 1501 is viewed from the back And the socket of the special connector SCN3 provided on the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 is inserted into the plug of the special connector SCN1 provided on the peripheral control substrate 1510 and pushed in. The source of the special connector SCN4 provided on the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 Is inserted into the plug of the special connector SCN2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and pushed in, and the peripheral control board 1510 is in the above-described predetermined position (the peripheral control board 1510 sees the cover 1501 from the back and It can also be fixed to the left side). Also in the attachment procedure of such various substrates, by adopting the sockets of the special connectors SCN 3 and SCN 4 provided with the above-mentioned floating mechanism, by absorbing an error in the front and back direction that occurs when pushing in, the plug and socket Thus, it is possible to reliably form the transmission paths between the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 and the peripheral control substrate 1510 by preventing damage to the plurality of connection terminals formed in the plurality, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 and the peripheral A transmission path between the control substrate 1510 and the substrate can be reliably formed.

  By the way, there are a plurality of types of gaming boards mounted on pachinko machines having different gaming specifications. In this embodiment, various substrates such as the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 can be divided into three and mounted on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover 1501. The peripheral control board 1510 is a board that can be commonly used independently of the gaming specifications of the gaming board mounted on the pachinko machine, and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is used for each gaming specification of the gaming board in the peripheral data ROM 1520a. The peripheral data corresponding to is stored as a substrate depending on the gaming specification of the gaming board, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is a substrate dependent on the method of the video signal input to the effect display device 1600.

  Thus, the peripheral control board 1510 is a board which is not dependent on the game specification of the game board and is not a board of the video signal input to the effect display device 1600, and becomes a common board. Can be reused (used over). In addition, peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 having peripheral data ROM 1520a storing peripheral data corresponding to each game specification of the game board and peripheral control board 1510 are electrically connected by the above-described inter-board connector. Therefore, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 can be easily replaced according to the game specification of the game board.

  For example, as described above, there are a plurality of types of methods such as the RGB method, the LVDS method, the MIPI method, the eDP method, and the clockless method as the methods of the video signal input to the display device such as the effect display device. The liquid crystal output substrate 1530 and the peripheral control substrate 1510 corresponding to the plurality of types of systems are electrically connected by the inter-substrate connector described above. That is, the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 can be easily exchanged according to the method of the video signal input to the effect display device 1600. In the present embodiment, as described above, one of the LVDS system systems (for example, the first LVDS system system) of the two LVDS system systems is used as the system of the video signal input to the effect display device 1600. Therefore, the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 according to the method (LVDS method) of the video signal input to the effect display device 1600 is electrically connected to the peripheral control substrate 1510 by the inter-substrate connector described above.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 are transparently molded as a non-conductive resin, and are formed in the inner space of the cover body 1501. Various substrates such as a peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 and a liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are attached at predetermined positions together with a metal shield plate 1540, whereby the shield plate 1540 is held and fixed by the cover 1501 and various substrates. Then, a metal shield plate 1540 is configured to be connected to the ground (GND) of various substrates. Also, as described above, the ground (GND) lines of the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the power supply substrate 630 in the substrate unit 620 of the main frame 4. Connected. For this reason, the electromagnetic wave noise intruding from the cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 is guided to the circuit ground (the grounds (GNDs of various substrates) via the metal shield plate 1540 and removed. It is possible to As a result, it is not necessary to provide each of the various substrates (including the power supply substrate 630) with a dedicated filter for removing such electromagnetic wave noise, which contributes to the cost reduction of the various substrates (including the power supply substrate 630). Can.

  Here, the arrangement of the plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover 1501 and the plurality of circular ventilation holes 1540az formed in the shield flat plate 1540a of the metal shield plate 1540. And the arrangement of As described above, the vent holes 1501az and 1540az having the plurality of circular shapes can also cool the inner space of the cover body 1501 and also have a function capable of confirming the presence or absence of a fraud.

  Specifically, when peripheral control unit 1500 is assembled as described above, as shown in FIG. 148, ventilation holes 1501az and 1540az having a plurality of circular shapes disposed on the right side of FAN mounting recess 1501aa are peripheral control boards. The part number and model (or management number) printed on the surface of the control ROM 1510 b provided in 1510, the state of the IC pins of the control ROM 1510 b, and the contents silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510 (for example, the IC direction, part number , Pin numbers etc.), that is, the surface of the control ROM 1510 b, the state of the IC pins, and the contents silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510 are checked from multiple angles. Distributed in such a way that the area is larger than the shape of the control ROM 1510 b. It is. Thereby, in addition to the correspondence between the control ROM 1510 b and the content silk-printed on the peripheral control substrate 1510, modification of the control ROM 1510 b can be confirmed through the ventilation holes 1501 az and 1540 az having a plurality of circular shapes. . Further, since the LED ML1 disposed in the vicinity of the control ROM 1510b is designed to maintain the lighting state in the state where the direct current +5 V is supplied from the power supply substrate 630 of the substrate unit 620, the direct current +5 V is originally supplied Improves the visibility of the surface of the control ROM 1510b and the state of the IC pins by additionally having the function as a spotlight that illuminates the control ROM 1510b, although it has the function of confirming (monitoring) the current state. This can contribute to the improvement of the visibility of the above and the improvement of the visibility of the content silk-printed on the peripheral control substrate 1510.

  Further, the plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az and 1540az arranged on the left side of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa can check the connection state of the inter-board connector between the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520. A region larger than the shape of the inter-substrate connector (the shape formed by the special connector SCN1 provided on peripheral control substrate 1510 and the special connector SCN3 on peripheral data ROM substrate 1520), and further provided on peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 The part number and model (or management number) printed on the surface of the peripheral data ROM 1520a, the state of the IC pins of the peripheral data ROM 1520a, and the contents silk-printed on the peripheral control substrate 1510 and the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 (for example , Connector pin count, IC Orientation, part number, pin number etc.), that is, it is silk-printed on the surface of peripheral data ROM 1520a, the state of IC pins, and peripheral control substrate 1510 and peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, respectively. The contents are distributed and arranged so as to be large areas where it is possible to confirm substantially from multiple angles. Thus, the correspondence between the special connector SCN1 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the contents silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510, the contents silk-printed on the special connector SCN3 provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 In addition to the correspondence with the above, the modification of the peripheral data ROM 1520a provided on the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, the modification of the inter-board connector by the special connector SCN1 provided on the peripheral control substrate 1510 and the special connector SCN3 provided on the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 are It can confirm via the ventilation hole 1501az which has several circular shape. Also, since the LED ML3 disposed in the vicinity of the special connector SCN1 is designed to maintain the lighting state in the state where the direct current +35 V is supplied from the power supply substrate 630 of the substrate unit 620, the direct current +35 V is originally Although it has a function to confirm (monitor) the supplied state, as a spotlight that illuminates the inter-board connector brightly by the special connector SCN1 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN3 on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 By further having the following functions, the visibility of the surface of the peripheral data ROM 1520a is improved, the visibility of the state of the IC pins is improved, and the contents of the peripheral control substrate 1510 and the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 silk-printed respectively Improved the visibility of the peripheral control board 1510 And it is capable to contribute to the improvement of the visibility of the substrate between the connector according to the the special connector SCN1 and peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 special connectors provided in SCN3 obtaining.

  In addition, the plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az and 1540az disposed on the lower left side of the fan attachment recess 1501aa can check the connection state of the inter-substrate connector between the peripheral control substrate 1510 and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. And a region larger than the shape of the inter-substrate connector (the shape formed by the special connector SCN2 provided on the peripheral control substrate 1510 and the special connector SCN4 on the liquid crystal output substrate 1530), and further, the peripheral control substrate 1510 and the liquid crystal output substrate In order to be able to visually recognize the contents (for example, the number of pins of the connector, the orientation of the IC, the part number, the pin number, etc.) silk-printed on each of 1530 and 1530, respectively, they are distributed. Thereby, the correspondence between the special connector SCN2 provided on the peripheral control substrate 1510 and the content silk-printed on the peripheral control substrate 1510, the special connector SCN4 provided on the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, and the content silk-printed on the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 In addition to the correspondence, the modification of the inter-substrate connector by the special connector SCN2 provided on the peripheral control substrate 1510 and the special connector SCN4 provided on the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is confirmed through the vent holes 1501az and 1540az having a plurality of circular shapes. can do. Also, since the LED ML4 arranged in the vicinity of the special connector SCN2 is designed to maintain the lighting state while the peripheral control IC 1510a is in operation, the operation of the peripheral control IC 1510a is basically checked (monitored) Although it has a function, it has a function as a spotlight that illuminates the inter-substrate connector with the special connector SCN2 and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 provided on the peripheral control substrate 1510 as a bright light. The improvement of the visibility of the content silk-printed on the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 and the improvement of the visibility of the inter-substrate connector by the special connector SCN2 provided in the peripheral control substrate 1510 and the special connector SCN4 provided in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 Can contribute to It has become the jar.

  In addition, a plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az and 1540az arranged on the lower right side of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa are the part numbers and models printed on the surface of the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 provided in the peripheral control board 1510, and the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c1, In order to be able to visually recognize the state of the IC pins 1510c2 and the contents (for example, the orientation of the IC, part numbers, pin numbers, etc.) silk-printed on the peripheral control substrate 1510, that is, the surface of the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 To be larger than the shapes of the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 so that the state of the IC pins and the contents printed on the peripheral control substrate 1510 can be checked from multiple angles. It is arranged. Thus, in addition to the correspondence between the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 and the contents printed on the peripheral control substrate 1510, the modifications of the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 are confirmed through the ventilation holes 1501az and 1540az having a plurality of circular shapes. Can. Further, since the LEDML2 disposed in the vicinity of the SDRAM 1510c configured from the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 is configured to maintain the lighting state in a state where +12 V DC is supplied from the power supply substrate 630 of the substrate unit 620, Although it originally has a function to confirm (monitor) the state where DC +12 V is supplied, it also has a function as a spotlight that illuminates the SDRAM 1510 c brightly, so that the surface of the SDRAM 1510 c (that is, SDRAM 1510 c1, 1510 c2) This can contribute to the improvement of the visibility of the above, the improvement of the visibility of the state of the IC pins, and the improvement of the visibility of the contents silk-printed on the peripheral control substrate 1510.

  Further, among a plurality of blades constituting the wing portion of the air cooling fan FAN, a gap between the blade and the blade (specifically, a gap between the blade and the blade by rotating the wing portion of the air cooling fan FAN by an examiner) The part number of the peripheral control IC 1510 a provided on the peripheral control board 1510 can be confirmed from the above. Thereby, it can be confirmed via the ventilation holes 1501az having a plurality of circular shapes whether or not an illegal substrate is disposed around the peripheral control IC 1510a.

  In the present embodiment, as the LEDs ML1 to LEDML4 included in the peripheral control substrate 1510, which are surface-mounted and have a wide angle of about 120 degrees, a type of weak directivity is adopted. It is also suitable for use as lighting. Various substrates such as peripheral control substrate 1510, peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are attached together with metallic shield plate 1540 at predetermined positions on the back side of cover plate 1501a, so that shield plate 1540 is covered by cover 1501. In the state of being sandwiched and fixed by the and various substrates, as described above, a predetermined height is provided between the front surface of the various substrates (surface facing the back surface of cover flat plate 1501a) and the back surface of cover flat 1501a. A space having a distance dimension (14.8 mm in this embodiment) is formed, and a metal shield plate 1540 is disposed in the space to form a two space. As described above, these two spaces have a first predetermined height between the front surface of the various substrates (surface facing the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a) and the back surface of the shield flat surface 1540a of the metal shield plate 1540. Between the first space 1505a (see FIG. 149) having a distance dimension of 12 mm (in the present embodiment) and the front surface of the shield flat 1540a of the metal shield plate 1540 and the back surface of the cover flat 1501a. And a second space 1505 b (see FIG. 149) having a distance dimension of two predetermined heights (1.6 mm in the present embodiment). In the first space 1505a, as described above, various electronic components and the like provided in the peripheral control substrate 1510, various electronic components and the like provided in the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and various electronic components and the like provided in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are accommodated. ing. The inside of the first space 1505a formed in this manner can be brightly illuminated by lighting up the LEDs ML1 to LEDML4 provided on the surface of the peripheral control substrate 1510 that is also suitable for use as illumination.

  In addition, since shield plate 1540 is made of metal, it has a luster, and the area of the back surface of shield flat plate 1540 a of shield plate 1540 made of metal facing the light emitting surfaces of LEDML1 to LEDML4 provided on peripheral control substrate 1510 respectively. The light emitting diode also has a function as a reflecting portion capable of reflecting the light emitted from the LED ML1 to the LED ML4 and directing the light back to the peripheral control substrate 1510 with respect to the periphery thereof. These reflective portions may be configured to further apply a colored paint having gloss.

  Further, near the gaming board 5 to which the peripheral control unit 1500 is attached, as shown in FIG. 4, a ball tank 552 and a tank rail 553 are disposed above the gaming board 5 and the payout is made to the side of the gaming board 5 Since the unit 560 is disposed, the gaming balls rub against each other in the ball path configured by these units, and are charged and electrostatically discharged to become a noise source. For this reason, in the vicinity of the game board 5 where the ball path is formed, there is an environment affected by the electromagnetic wave noise due to the electrostatic discharge from the game ball. The pachinko machines 1 are arranged in a row opposite to the island facilities of the game hall. Thus, the surroundings of the game board 5 are in an environment which is extremely susceptible to electromagnetic noise. Therefore, in the present embodiment, as described above, the cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 are transparently molded as a nonconductive resin, and are formed in the inner space of the cover body 1501. Then, various substrates such as the peripheral control substrate 1510, peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are attached at predetermined positions together with the metal shield plate 1540, and the shield plate 1540 is held between the cover 1501 and various substrates. By adopting the structure described above, a configuration is adopted in which the metal shield plate 1540 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) of various substrates. Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, the ground (GND) lines of the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are the grounds of the power supply substrate 630 in the substrate unit 620 of the main frame 4. By electrically connecting to the (GND) line, the same ground (GND) was adopted.

  Thus, the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the back side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 (the back side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the back surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000) Lead and remove electromagnetic wave noise that has entered from body 1502 to the ground (GND) of various substrates such as peripheral control substrate 1510, peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and liquid crystal output substrate 1530 via metal shield plate 1540. Can. In other words, the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 (the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000) The electromagnetic wave noise intruding from the body 1502 can be guided to the circuit ground (the ground (GND) of various substrates) via the metal shield plate 1540 and removed.

  In the vicinity of the game board 5 to which the peripheral control unit 1500 is attached, a ball tank 552 and a tank rail 553 are disposed above the game board 5 as shown in FIG. In the state where the peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear side (the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000), the special connector SCN1 and peripheral data provided on the peripheral control board 1510 An inter-board connector with a special connector SCN3 provided on a ROM board 1520, an inter-board connector with a special connector SCN2 provided on a peripheral control board 1510 and a special connector SCN4 provided on a liquid crystal output board 1530 To be placed away from the tank rail 553 by It has become possible way. As described above, since the tank rail 553 can drop the metal powder of the game ball B to the outside through the plurality of notch portions 553aa formed in the main guiding portion 553a, the substrate described above By arranging the space connector apart from the tank rail 553, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of an electrical trouble due to the metal powder of the gaming ball B in the space between the above-mentioned connectors.

  Also, an inter-board connector by special connector SCN1 provided in peripheral control board 1510 and special connector SCN3 provided in peripheral data ROM board 1520, special connector SCN2 provided in peripheral control board 1510, and special connector SCN4 provided in liquid crystal output board 1530 A state where the peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear side of the gaming panel 1100 of the gaming board 5 (the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000) In the above, as shown in FIG. 148, since the arrangement can be made long in the vertical direction, it is possible to minimize the area to which dust, powder having some metallic property or the like adheres. In the case where the above-described inter-board connector is disposed long in the left-right direction, the area to which dust, powder having some metallicity or the like adheres is extremely increased. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 148, the connectors CN1 to CN7 provided on the peripheral control substrate 1510 and the connectors CN8 and CN9 provided on the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are long in the left-right direction, and dust and some metal As described above, when viewed from the bottom of the connector recess 1501ac, the connector has a projecting wall whose upper side of the bottom of the connector recess 1501ac is a cover plate 1501a. Even if a plug corresponding to CN1 to CN9 is inserted, the plug is hidden and can not protrude from the surface of the cover flat plate 1501a. Therefore, the cover side wall 1501b provided on the upper side of the cover flat plate 1501a Dust attached to the metal, powder with some metallicity, etc. It is dropped from, so that it can be prevented from adhering to the connector CN1～CN9. As described above, the direction in which the above-described inter-board connector is arranged, and the direction in which the connectors CN1 to CN9 are arranged, so that dust, powder having some metallic property or the like can be prevented from adhering to each electric terminal. Is selected.

  In the embodiment described above, the peripheral control board 1510 is provided with the plugs of the special connectors SCN1 and SCN2, the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is provided with the socket for the special connector SCN3, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 is provided with the socket for the special connector SCN4. However, it may be arranged to be able to visually recognize the direction in which information and signals flow. In such a case, the side that transmits information and signals may be a plug (or socket), and the side that receives information and signals may be a socket (or plug). For example, in the above-described embodiment, various control information (peripheral data) stored in peripheral data ROM 1520a included in peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 is transferred from peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 to peripheral control substrate 1510, so peripheral data The ROM substrate 1520 is on the transmission side, and the peripheral control substrate 1510 is on the reception side. In such a case, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 is provided with a special connector (or a special connector serving as a socket) which corresponds to a plug, and in response to this, when the peripheral control substrate 1510 becomes a socket, a special connector (or a plug and Special connector) can be provided. Further, in the above-described embodiment, the peripheral control substrate 1510 outputs the plurality of video signal systems to the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, so the peripheral control substrate 1510 is on the transmission side and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is on the reception side. In such a case, the peripheral control board 1510 is provided with a special connector (or a special connector serving as a socket), and correspondingly, when the liquid crystal output board 1530 is a socket, the special connector (or plug) is produced. Special connector) can be provided.

  Further, in the embodiment described above, the cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 are made of a nonconductive resin and molded to be transparent, but the conductive material containing carbon in polycarbonate It may be molded in opaque black as a resin, or it may be molded in translucent color if the cover 1501, the base 1502, and the wiring cover 1503 are made of conductive resin. It may be done. Even in this configuration, since the cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 are made of conductive resin, the peripheral control substrate described above on the back side of the cover body 1501 (cover flat plate 1501a) The various substrates such as the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are fixed to the ground (GND) of the various substrates as described above by fixing them with metal nabe screws, respectively. be able to. Thus, noise that has entered from the cover 1501, the base 1502, and the wiring cover 1503 can be made to flow to the grounds (GND) of various substrates to remove the noise.

  Furthermore, in the embodiment described above, various substrates such as the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are attached together with the metal shield plate 1540 at predetermined positions on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. In a state in which shield plate 1540 is sandwiched and fixed between cover body 1501 and various substrates by this, a predetermined distance is provided between the front surface of each substrate (surface facing the back surface of cover flat 1501a) and the back surface of cover flat 1501a. A space having a height dimension (14.8 mm in the present embodiment) is formed, and a metal shield plate 1540 is disposed in the space to form two spaces. Space is the surface of the various substrates (the surface facing the back side of the cover plate 1501a) and the metal shield plate A first space 1505a having a first predetermined height distance dimension (12 mm in this embodiment) between the back surface of the shield flat plate 1540a of 540 and a surface of the shield flat plate 1540a of the shield plate 1540 made of metal A second space 1505 b having a distance dimension of a second predetermined height (1.6 mm in this embodiment) with the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501 a. In other words, the distance dimension of the first predetermined height is formed larger than the distance dimension of the second predetermined height. In the case of arranging a large effect unit (electrical drive source and drive mechanism capable of operating the movable effect body, and various sensors for detecting the home position and the operating position) on the game board 5, and in the depth direction When there is a margin in the distance dimension, the distance dimension of the first predetermined height and the distance dimension of the second predetermined height may be configured as the distance dimension of the same predetermined height, or the second The distance dimension of the predetermined height may be configured to be larger than the distance dimension of the first predetermined height. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to take measures against electromagnetic wave noise by housing various electronic components and the like that are easily affected by electromagnetic wave noise in the first space 1505a, and heat in the second space 1505b. The heat generated from the various electronic components and the like in the first space 1505a can be efficiently transmitted to the second space 1505b through the metal shield plate 1540 by not containing the various electronic components and the like emitting the light.

  Further, in the embodiment described above, the product number printed on the surface of the control ROM 1510b provided on the peripheral control substrate 1510 by forming a plurality of circular ventilation holes 1540az in the shield plate 1540d made of metal. And the type (or management number), the state of the IC pins of the control ROM 1510b, and the contents printed on the peripheral control board 1510 (for example, the orientation of the IC, part numbers, pin numbers, etc.) can be viewed. Also, the part numbers and models printed on the surface of the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510, the states of the IC pins of the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2, and the contents silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510 (for example, the orientation of the IC, Part numbers, pin numbers etc.) can be visually recognized, and peripheral data ROM The part number and model (or management number) printed on the surface of the peripheral data ROM 1520a provided on the board 1520, the state of the IC pins of the peripheral data ROM 1520a, and the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 are silk printed respectively Content (for example, the number of pins of the connector, the orientation of the IC, the part number, the pin number, etc.) can be visually recognized, but the metal corresponding to the control ROM 1510b, SDRAM 1510c1, 1510c2, peripheral data ROM 1520a A rectangular opening may be provided at the position of the shield plate 1540d. In addition to the control ROM 1510b, the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2, and the peripheral data ROM 1520a, a rectangular opening may be provided at the position of the shield plate 1540d made of metal so that the surroundings can also be viewed. . Also, the shape of the inter-board connector (special connector SCN 1 provided on peripheral control board 1510 and peripheral data ROM board 1520 can be checked so that the connection state of the inter-board connector between peripheral control board 1510 and peripheral data ROM board 1520 can be confirmed. It is also possible to provide a rectangular opening at the position of the shield plate 1540d made of metal corresponding to a region larger than the shape formed by the special connector SCN3), or the peripheral control substrate 1510 and the liquid crystal output substrate From the shape of the inter-board connector (the shape formed by the special connector SCN2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN4 on the liquid crystal output board 1530) so that the connection state of the inter-board connector with 1530 can be confirmed. The position of the metal shield plate 1540d corresponding to the large area It may be configured to provide a rectangular opening in.

  Furthermore, in the embodiment described above, a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az are formed in the cover flat plate 1510a of the cover body 1501, but cover side walls 1501b to 1501b provided on the upper side, left side, lower side, and right side of the cover flat side A plurality of ventilating holes 1501az may be formed in any one or a combination thereof except for the cover side wall 1501b provided on the upper side among 1501e. For example, a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az may be formed only in the cover side wall 1501c provided on the left side, or a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az may be formed only in the cover side wall 1501d provided on the lower side. A plurality of ventilation holes 1501az may be formed only in 1501e, or a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az may be respectively formed by combining a plurality of cover side walls 1501c to 1501e provided on the cover flat plate 1510a and the left side, lower side and right side respectively. . Even with this configuration, foreign matter (for example, metal powder produced by abrasion of gaming ball B) falls toward the inside of peripheral control board box 1505 via ventilation hole 1501az. It can be prevented from intruding. As a result, it is possible to prevent an electrical trouble caused by foreign matter dropped onto various substrates of the peripheral control substrate box 1505. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the electrical trouble due to the foreign matter dropped from the tank rail 553. As a reason not to form the vent holes 1501az in the cover side wall 1501b provided on the upper side, temporarily, if the vent holes 1501az are formed on the cover side wall 1501b provided on the upper side, the peripheral control board box 1505 is formed via the vent holes 1501az. The foreign substance (for example, metal powder produced by the abrasion of the gaming ball B) generated by the gaming ball B falls into and enters the inside of the inside of the peripheral control board box 1505, and the electric substance by the foreign substance dropped onto various substrates It is because the probability that a problem will occur is high.

  In the embodiment described above, a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az are formed in the cover flat plate 1510a of the cover body 1501, but cover side walls 1501b to 1501b provided on the upper side, left side, lower side and right side of the cover flat side of the cover body 1501 A plurality of ventilation holes 1501az may be formed in the cover side walls 1501c to 1501e provided on the left side, the lower side, and the right side, respectively, except for the cover side wall 1501b provided on the upper side among 1501e. In this case, forming a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az in the cover side walls 1501c to 1501e provided respectively on the left side, the lower side, and the right side can contribute to suppressing the temperature rise of the peripheral control board box 1505. As a reason for not forming the ventilation holes 1501az in the cover side wall 1501b provided on the upper side, temporarily forming the ventilation holes 1501az in the cover side wall 1501b provided on the upper side as described above, through the ventilation holes 1501az A foreign substance (for example, metal powder produced by wear of the game ball B) falling toward the inside of the peripheral control board box 1505 falls and enters, thereby dropping the peripheral control board box 1505 to various substrates This is because the possibility of electrical troubles caused by foreign matter is high.

  Incidentally, conventionally, a gaming machine is provided with an effect control board and the like on which a ROM for storing image data such as symbols, various background images, characters, characters, etc. is stored, a CPU for controlling display devices for displaying various images, etc. It is proposed (for example, Unexamined-Japanese-Patent No. 2016-116667 (FIG. 2)). By the way, there are a plurality of types of video signal systems input to the display device. For this reason, in the gaming machine described in this document, it is necessary to manufacture by modifying the effect control substrate according to the video signal input to the display device, and it is difficult to suppress the cost of the effect control substrate there were.

  Also, conventionally, a ROM for storing image data such as symbols, various background images, characters, characters, etc., an effect control board (effect control means), etc. on which a CPU for controlling display devices for displaying various images is mounted A game machine having the following is proposed (e.g., JP-A-2016-116667 (FIG. 2)). By the way, the game balls supplied to the game machine from the island facilities of the game hall have static electricity as the game balls rub against each other when circulating the island facilities of the game hall and the game machine, so the game ball is a game ball It is necessary to take measures for electromagnetic wave noise due to electrostatic discharge from the

[7. Control configuration]
Next, a control configuration for performing various controls of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 151 is a block diagram schematically showing a control configuration of the pachinko machine. The main control configuration of the pachinko machine 1 is composed of a main control board 1310X and peripheral control board 1510 attached to the game board 5, and a payout control board 633 attached to the main frame 4, and each control is shared It is done. The main control board 1310X can control the game operation (progress of the game). The peripheral control board 1510 can control the progression of effects based on various commands from the peripheral control unit 1511 that controls various effects in the game based on commands from the main control substrate 1310X, and various commands from the peripheral control unit 1511 It is a thing. The payout control board 633 includes a payout control unit 633a for controlling the payout and the like of the gaming ball B, and a firing control unit 633b for controlling the firing of the gaming ball B by the rotation operation of the handle 182.

7-1. Main control board]
The main control board 1310X, which can control the progress of the game, controls the power-on process executed when the power is turned on and a main control program that controls the game operation executed after a predetermined time has elapsed from the time the power is turned on. Etc. and a main control MPU 1310a, which is a microprocessor containing a ROM for storing various commands and a RAM for temporarily storing data, and a main control input circuit 1310b to which detection signals from various sensors are input. And a main control output circuit 1310 c for outputting various signals to an external substrate etc., a main control solenoid drive circuit 1310 d for driving various solenoids, and monitoring of a sign of a power failure or an instantaneous interruption of a predetermined voltage. It is stored in the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e and the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a. Collected by the RAM clear switch 1310 f for completely erasing information, the setting display 1310 g for displaying set values and displaying errors, and the out port 1008 provided in the game area 5 a defined in the game board 5 And a base monitor 1310 h for displaying the number of game balls. The main control MPU 1310 a operates with a high frequency circuit of a crystal oscillator (not shown) provided on the main control substrate 1310 X.

  In addition to the built-in RAM (hereinafter referred to as “main control built-in RAM”) and the built-in ROM (hereinafter referred to as “main control built-in ROM”), the main control MPU 1310 a In addition, a watchdog timer (hereinafter referred to as “main control built-in WDT”) for monitoring the operation (system) and a function for preventing fraud are incorporated.

  In addition, the main control MPU 1310a incorporates a non-volatile RAM. In this non-volatile RAM, a unique ID code to which a unique code (a code that exists only one in the world) for identifying an individual is attached by a maker who manufactured the main control MPU 4100a is stored in advance. Since this once assigned ID code is stored in the non-volatile RAM, it can not be rewritten even using an external device. The main control MPU 4100a can extract an ID code from a non-volatile RAM and can refer to it.

  The main control MPU 1310a also incorporates a circuit that is forcibly reset by hardware when it is affected by electrical noise (hereinafter referred to as "built-in reset circuit"). The built-in reset circuit monitors the contents of a predetermined register of the main control MPU 1310a, and forcibly forces the main control MPU 1310a to be affected by electrical noise when the register changes to inconsistent contents. It is a circuit to reset. Such forced reset by the built-in reset circuit can not be disabled by control by the user program. Therefore, when the main reset MPU 1310a is subjected to a forced reset by the built-in reset circuit, the main control MPU 1310a is reset without executing the main control side power-off process described later, and executes the main control side power-on process described later. It will be done. In this case, since the main control side power-off process is not executed, a check sum (sum value) error of the main control internal RAM always occurs as described later, so the contents of the main control internal RAM are completely erased ( It will be cleared). Even if the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the built-in reset circuit, the built-in reset circuit of the main control MPU 1310a does not output a reset signal to the payout control board 633. Only the MPU 1310a) is restarted, and the payout control board 633 is maintained in the activated state.

  In addition, the main control MPU 1310a is a hardware random number circuit (hereinafter referred to as “the main control built-in hardware that updates the jackpot determination random number for use in determining whether to generate the jackpot gaming state among various random numbers related to gaming It is described as “random number circuit”. The main control built-in hard random number circuit generates a random number within a predetermined numerical range (in the present embodiment, a numerical range of a value of 0 to a value of 535 as a minimum and a value of 65535 as a minimum is preset) The circuit is configured such that a predetermined value as the value is not fixed (that is, the initial value is not fixed), and a different value is set each time the main control MPU 1310 a is reset. Specifically, when the main control MPU 1310a is reset, the main control built-in hard random number circuit first uses a clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a with the one value in a predetermined numerical range as an initial value Based on a clock signal output from a crystal oscillator (not shown) provided separately from the control MPU 1310a, other values within a predetermined numerical range are extracted at high speed one after another without overlapping, and within a predetermined numerical range Once all the values in the above have been extracted, one value within the predetermined numerical range is extracted again, and the other values within the predetermined numerical range are determined at high speed based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a. Extract values one after another without overlapping. The main control built-in hard random number circuit repeatedly performs such high-speed lottery, and the main control MPU 1310a obtains a value extracted from the main control built-in hard random number circuit at the time of obtaining a value from the main control built-in hard random number circuit It is supposed to be set as.

  The main control input circuit 1310 b is not provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting information to which detection signals from various sensors are respectively input to its various input terminals, and has no reset function. Therefore, the main control input circuit 1310 b is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a main control system reset (not shown) is not input. That is, when the main control input circuit 1310b does not reset the information based on the detection signals from the various sensors input to the various input terminals by the main control system reset, the various signals based on the information are output from the various output terminals. It is configured as a circuit to be output.

  The main control output circuit 1310 c is configured as an open collector output type in which the emitter terminal is grounded to the ground (GND), and various signals for outputting various signals to an external substrate or the like are input to the various input terminals. A main control output circuit with a reset function having a reset function provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting the stored information, and a reset function-free main control output circuit not having a reset function not provided with a reset terminal; It consists of The main control output circuit with reset function is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a main control system reset (not shown) is input. That is, the main control output circuit with reset function is a signal based on the information for outputting various signals input to the various input terminals to an external substrate etc. by the main control system reset. Is configured as a circuit that is not output at all from its various output terminals. On the other hand, the main control output circuit without reset function is configured as a circuit to which the system reset signal from the main control system reset (not shown) is not input. In other words, the main control output circuit without reset function does not reset the information for outputting various signals input to its various input terminals to an external board etc. by the main control system reset, so that the signal based on the information is It is comprised as a circuit output from the various output terminals.

  The first starting opening sensor 3002 (the first starting opening sensor main side 3002a and the first starting opening sensor trailing side 3002b described above, which detects the game ball B received in the first starting opening 2002), the second starting opening 2004 The second starting opening sensor 2402 which detects the game ball B which is accepted to the general winning opening sensor 3001 which detects the game ball B which is accepted to the general winning a prize opening 2001, the gate which detects the game ball B which has passed the gate part 2003 A sensor 2401, a first receiving sensor 2406 for detecting the game ball B received at the first receiving port 2006, a large winning opening sensor 2403 for detecting the game ball B received at the large winning opening 2005, in the game area 5a Collected by the magnetic sensor 3003 for detecting illegal magnetism, and the out port 1008 provided in the game area 5a formed in the game board 5 Detection signals from the out-port left sensor 1008 a and the out-port right sensor 1008 b for detecting the technical ball B by one side are input terminals of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310 a through the main control input circuit 1310 b. Has been entered.

  The detection signals from the setting key 1311a and the setting switching button 1311b provided on the setting change board 1310Y are input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a through the main control input circuit 1310b.

  Further, the detection signal from the door frame opening switch 4a and the detection signal from the main body frame opening switch 4b are via the payout control board 633 (through, that is, the payout control input circuit 633ab described later, and the payout control When the signal is input to the main control board 1310X without passing through the output circuit 633ac, it is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a through the main control input circuit 1310b.

  The detection signals from the first starting opening sensor 3002 and the second starting opening sensor 2402 are directly input to the main control board 1310 X without passing through the other substrate, that is, the main control input circuit 1310 b It is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a. On the other hand, respective detection signals from the general winning opening sensor 3001, the gate sensor 2401, the first receiving sensor 2406, the special winning opening sensor 2403, the magnetic sensor 3003, the out port left sensor 1008a, and the out port right sensor 1008b. Is input to the main control board 1310X indirectly via the panel relay board 1710, and is input to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b.

  The main control MPU 1310 a outputs a drive signal to the main control output circuit with reset function 1310 ca from the output terminal of the predetermined output port based on these detection signals, thereby the main control solenoid from the main control output circuit with reset function. By outputting a control signal to drive circuit 1310d, drive signals are output from main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d to start port solenoid 2404, and to each attachment solenoid 2405 via panel relay board 1710, that is, indirectly. Or by outputting a drive signal from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control output circuit with reset function, from the main control output circuit with reset function to the status indicator 1401 of the function display unit 1400, ordinary symbol indicator 1402 , Normal hold indicator 1403, the second Drive signals to special symbol display 1404, first special hold number indicator 1405, second special symbol display 1406, second special hold number indicator 1407, round indicator 1408 via other boards Output, that is, directly.

  Further, main control MPU 1310 a sets the main control output circuit with a reset function by outputting a drive signal to the main control output circuit with a reset function 1310 ca from the output terminal of the predetermined output port based on these detection signals. A drive signal is output to the setting change permission lamp 1311 c of the change substrate 1310 Y.

  Further, the main control MPU 1310 a outputs various information (game information) regarding the game to the main control output circuit with a reset function from the output terminal of the predetermined output port, whereby a payout control board 633 is outputted from the main control output circuit with a reset function. The main control with reset function is output by outputting various information (gaming information) about the game to the player, or outputting a signal (power failure clear signal) from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control output circuit with reset function. A signal (power failure clear signal) is output from the output circuit to the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e, or a discharge is transmitted from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to notify the main control output circuit with reset function that the game ball B is to be released. By outputting the permission signal, the main control output circuit with the reset function sends the game to the payout control board 633. And it outputs a firing permission signal to convey that to allow the firing of B. The logic of the release permission signal that indicates that this release is allowed is set to the release permission logic when releasing the release, while the release suspension logic (release non-release permission logic) which reverses the release enable logic when not releasing the release. Set to In addition, the logic of the release permission signal is an initial value (default), and after the pachinko machine 1 is powered on (after power recovery), the release permission signal setting process in the main control timer interrupt process described later is started The hardware is configured by hardware including a main control output circuit with a reset function so as to be set to the firing stop logic (fire non-permitting logic) obtained by inverting the firing permission logic.

  In the present embodiment, the first starting opening sensor 3002 (first starting opening sensor main side 3002a and first starting opening sensor slave side 3002b), second starting opening sensor 2402, gate sensor 2401, large winning opening sensor A non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switch is used for 2403, the out-port left sensor 1008a and the out-port right sensor 1008b, whereas the general winning opening sensor 3001 has a contact type ON / OFF operation. The mechanical switch of the formula is used. This is because the game ball B frequently enters the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening 2004 and frequently passes through the gate portion 2003, so the first starting opening sensor 3002 and the second starting opening sensor 2402 The detection of the game ball B by the gate sensor 2401 also frequently occurs. Therefore, as the first start opening sensor 3002, the second start opening sensor 2402, and the gate sensor 2401, proximity switches with high durability and long life are used.

  In addition, when an advantageous gaming state ("big hit" game, etc.) that is advantageous to the player occurs, the big winning opening 2005 is opened and the gaming ball B enters frequently, so the gaming ball by the big winning opening sensor 2403 Detection of B also occurs frequently. Therefore, also for the special winning opening sensor 2403, a proximity switch with high durability and long life is used. Further, since the game balls B fired in the game area 5a are collected in large quantities by the out port 1008 provided in the game area 5a partitioned in the game board 5, the detection of the game ball B by the out port left sensor 1008a The detection of the game ball B by the out-port right sensor 1008 b also frequently occurs. Therefore, a proximity switch with high durability and a long life is used also for the out-port left sensor 1008 a and the out-port right sensor 1008 b. On the other hand, detection by the general winning opening sensor 3001 and the first receiving sensor 2406 does not frequently occur in the general winning opening 2001 and the first receiving sensor 2406 in which the gaming ball B does not enter frequently. Therefore, a mechanical switch whose life is shorter than that of the proximity switch is used for the general winning opening sensor 3001 and the first receiving sensor 2406. In addition, regardless of the fact that the game ball B does not frequently enter the general winning opening 2001 or the first receiving sensor 2406, a proximity switch with high durability and a long life may be used.

  Also, the main control MPU 1310a transmits various commands relating to the payout to the main control output circuit without reset function as serial data from the output terminal of the predetermined serial output port, thereby a payout control board 633 from the main control output circuit without reset function. Sends various commands as serial data. The payout control board 633 outputs a signal (payout ACK signal) to that effect to the main control board 1310X when normal reception of various commands from the main control board 1310X is completed as serial data. This signal (payment ACK signal) is input to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310 a through the main control input circuit 1310 b.

  The main control MPU 11310a receives various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 633 as serial data by the main control input circuit 1310b, thereby inputting the predetermined serial input port from the main control input circuit 1310b. The terminal receives various commands as serial data. When the main control MPU 1310 a completes the normal reception of various commands from the payout control board 633 as serial data, the main control output with a reset function is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port (a main payment ACK signal) to that effect. The signal is output to the circuit, and a signal (main payment ACK signal) is output from the main control output circuit with reset function to the payout control board 633.

  Further, the main control MPU 1310a transmits various commands relating to control of game effects and various commands relating to the state of the pachinko machine 1 as serial data from the output terminal of the predetermined serial output port to the main control output circuit without reset function. No reset function The main control output circuit transmits various commands as serial data to the peripheral control board 1510.

  Various voltages (DC + 35 V, DC + 12 V, and DC + 5 V) from the power supply substrate 630 of the substrate unit 620 are supplied to the main control substrate 1310 X via the payout control substrate 633. The power supply substrate 630 for supplying various voltages to the main control substrate 1310X is an electric double layer capacitor (hereinafter simply referred to as a "capacitor") as a backup power supply for supplying power to the main control substrate 1310X for a predetermined time even when the power is shut off. Describe) BC0 (see FIG. 160 etc.). The main control MPU 1310 can store various information in the main control built-in RAM in the power-off process even when the power is shut off by the capacitor BC0. The various information stored in a predetermined area of the main control built-in RAM (the area excluding the specific area in the entire area of the main control built-in RAM) is the RAM clear switch of the main control board 1310X within a predetermined period from when the power is turned on. When 1310 f is operated, an operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the RAM clear switch 1310 f is input to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310 a via the main control input circuit 1310 b, and triggered by this. The main control built-in RAM is completely erased (cleared) by the control MPU 1310a. The operation signal (RAM clear signal) is output to the main control output circuit without reset function, and is also output from the main control output circuit without reset function to the payout control board 633.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 1310 e is supplied with DC +12 V and DC +35 V from the power supply substrate 630, and monitors the DC +12 V and DC +35 V for signs of power failure or short interruption. The power failure monitoring circuit 1310 e outputs a power failure notification signal to the main control MPU 1310 a as a power failure notification when detecting a DC +12 V and DC +35 V power failure or an indication of a momentary power failure. The input terminal of the predetermined control port of the payout control MPU 633aa through the payout control input circuit 633ab of the main control board 1310X (output through the main control output 1310c) and being input to the input terminal. Is input to Further, the power failure notice signal is input to the peripheral control board 1510 via the main control board 1310X. The blackout notice signal may be input to a board or the like on which the door frame 3 is mounted.

  In the present embodiment, the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e is applied to two power supply lines: a power supply line (+12 V power supply line) to which DC +12 V is supplied and a power supply line (+35 V power supply line) to which DC +35 V is supplied. Monitoring the voltage more accurately than in the case of monitoring the voltage applied to one of the +12 V power supply line or the +35 V power supply line by monitoring the voltage more precisely It is possible to

7-2. Disbursement control board]
In addition to the payout control of the gaming ball B, the payout control board 633 which performs the firing control of the gaming ball B, the ball feeding control, etc. performs the firing control by the payout control portion 633a which performs various control regarding the payout and the firing solenoid 542 The ball control unit 633b performs ball feed control by the ball feed solenoid 145, an error LED display 633c for displaying the state of the pachinko machine 1, and for canceling an error displayed on the error LED display 633c. And an error release switch 633d having a pressing operation unit.

7-2-1. Payout control section]
The payout control unit 633a, which performs various controls on the payout on the payout control board 633, controls the processing at the time of power on when the power is turned on and the payout operation of gaming media executed after a predetermined time has elapsed from the time of power on. A payout control MPU 633 aa, which is a microprocessor incorporating various processing programs including a payout control program to be controlled and ROMs storing various commands and RAM temporarily storing data, and detection signals from various sensors related to payout are input A payout control input circuit 633ab, a payout control output circuit 633ac for outputting various signals to an external substrate or the like, and a payout motor drive circuit 633ad for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 584 of the payout device 580; Is equipped.

  The payout control MPU 633 aa has its built-in RAM (hereinafter referred to as “payment control built-in RAM”), its built-in ROM (hereinafter referred to as “payment control built-in ROM”), its operation (hereinafter referred to as “payment control built-in ROM”). A watchdog timer (hereinafter referred to as “payment control built-in WDT”) for monitoring the system) and a function for preventing fraud are also incorporated.

  The payout control input circuit 633ab is not provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting information input to detection signals from various sensors at its various input terminals, and does not have a reset function. For this reason, the payout control input circuit 633ab is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a payout control system reset (not shown) is not input. That is, since the information based on the detection signals from the various sensors input to the various input terminals is not reset by the payout control system reset, the various signals based on the information are output from the various output terminals. It is configured as a circuit to be output.

  The payout control output circuit 633 ac is configured as an open collector output type in which the emitter terminal is grounded to the ground (GND), and various signals for outputting various signals to an external substrate or the like are input to the various input terminals. A reset function dispensing control output circuit having a reset function provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting the stored information, and a reset function non-dispense control output circuit not having a reset terminal and not having a reset function; It consists of The payout control output circuit with a reset function is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a payout control system reset (not shown) is input. That is, the payout control output circuit with reset function is a signal based on the information for outputting various signals input to the various input terminals to an external substrate etc. by being reset by the payout control system reset. Is configured as a circuit that is not output at all from its various output terminals. On the other hand, the non-resetting function dispensing control output circuit 4120 cb is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a non-illustrated dispensing control system reset is not input. That is, since the information for outputting the various signals input to the various input terminals to the external substrate etc. is not reset by the payment control system reset, the signal based on the information does not have to be reset. It is comprised as a circuit output from the various output terminals.

  A detection signal from the full detection sensor 154 of the false cover unit 150, a detection signal from the ball breakage detection sensor 574 of the ball guidance unit 570, a detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590 of the payout device 580, a payout detection of the payout device 580 The detection signal from the sensor 591, the power failure notification signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310 e of the main control board 1310 X, and the error release signal from the error release switch 633 d are input to a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 633 aa via the payout control input circuit 633 ab. Input to the

  Further, as described above, the detection signal from the door frame opening switch 4a for detecting the opening of the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 is via the payout control board 633 (via, that is, the payout control input circuit 633ab, Then, they are input to the main control board 1310X without passing through the payout control output circuit 633ac). Further, as described above, a detection signal from the main body frame open switch 4b for detecting the opening of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 is input to the main control board 1310X via (via) the payout control board 633. ing.

  Further, various commands relating to the payout from the main control board 1310X are received by the serial data method at the input terminal of the serial input port of the payout control MPU 633aa via the payout control input circuit 633ab. Further, the operation signal (detection signal) of the RAM clear switch 1310 f from the main control board 1310 X is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 633 aa via the payout control input circuit 633 ab.

  When the payout control MPU 633 aa completes the normal reception of various commands from the main control board 1310 X as serial data, the payout control signal with a reset function is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to notify that effect (payer ACK signal) By outputting to the circuit, a signal (payout ACK signal) is output from the payout control output circuit with reset function to the main control board 1310X.

  Further, the payout control MPU 633 aa transmits various commands for indicating the state of the pachinko machine 1 as serial data to the payout control output circuit without reset function from the output terminal of the serial output port, whereby the payout control output without reset function is output. Various commands are transmitted as serial data from the circuit to the main control board 1310X. When normal reception of various commands from the payout control substrate 633 is completed as serial data, the main control substrate 1310 X outputs a signal (main payout ACK signal) to that effect to the payout control substrate 633. This signal (main payment ACK signal) is input to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 633 aa via the payout control input circuit 633 ab.

  Further, the payout control MPU 633 aa is driven from the payout control output circuit with the reset function by outputting a drive signal for driving the payout motor 584 to the payout control output circuit with the reset function from the output terminal of the predetermined output port. A signal is output to the payout motor drive circuit 633ad, and a drive signal is output from the payout motor drive circuit 633ad to the payout motor 584, or the state of the pachinko machine 1 is output to the error LED indicator 633c from the output terminal of the predetermined output port. By outputting the drive signal for displaying to the payout control output circuit with reset function, the drive signal is output from the payout control output circuit with reset function to the error LED indicator 633c.

  The error LED indicator 633d is a segment indicator, and displays the state of the pachinko machine 1 by displaying alphanumeric characters, figures, and the like. The contents displayed and notified by the error LED display 633d include the following. For example, when the figure "-" is displayed, it indicates that "normal" is displayed, and when the number "0" is displayed, it indicates that "connection abnormality" (specifically, the main control board 1310X Informing that there is an abnormality in the electrical connection between the board with the payout control board 633, and when the number “1” is displayed, it indicates “ball out” (specifically, the ball is cut off) Informing that there is no gaming ball B in the guiding passage 570a of the ball guiding unit 570 based on the detection signal from the detection sensor 574, and when the number "2" is displayed, it indicates "ball gummy" (specifically Specifically, based on the detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590, the payout blade 589 and the gaming ball B are engaged to notify that the payout blade 589 is difficult to rotate), and the numeral "3" is displayed. When it is running Informs that the error is "" (specifically, the payout detection sensor 591 indicates that a malfunction has occurred based on the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591), and when the number "5" is displayed, "retry" It reports that it is an error (specifically, it indicates that the number of retries for the payout operation has reached the preset upper limit) and that it is "full" when the number "6" is displayed. Specifically, based on the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154, the game ball B in which the lower plate 202 is stored reports that it is full, and when the number "7" is displayed, "CR Notifies that it is “not connected” (ie, indicates that the electrical connection has been disconnected anywhere from the dispensing control board 633 to the CR unit installed outside the pachinko machine 1), and the numeral “9” If it is displayed Informing that it is "in stock (there is a prize ball stock (unpaid))" (specifically, it is indicated that the number of balls of the game ball B not yet paid out has reached a predetermined number of balls) ing.

  Further, the payout control MPU 633 aa outputs the number of balls of the game ball B actually paid out as a winning ball to the payout control output circuit with the reset function from the output terminal of the predetermined output port, thereby providing the payout control with the reset function. The number of balls of the gaming ball actually paid out as a winning ball or the like is output from the output circuit to the external terminal board 558 through a resistor (not shown).

  Further, the payout control board 633 outputs various information (game information) about the game from the main control board 1310X to the external terminal board 558 through a resistor (not shown). The external terminal board 558 is provided with a plurality of photocouplers (not shown) (including an infrared LED and a photo IC built-in), and the game arcade (hall) is provided via the plurality of photocouplers. The ball number etc. of the game ball B and various information (game information, an error content or an error relating to the payout operation of the game ball) are transmitted to the hall computer installed on the). The external terminal board 558 and the hall computer are electrically insulated by a plurality of photocouplers, and an abnormal voltage is applied to the hall computer via the external terminal board 558 of the pachinko machine 1 to cause a hole. The main control board 1310X which can advance the game from the hall computer via the external terminal board 558 of the pachinko machine 1 is controlled so that the computer does not malfunction or break down, and the payout etc. An abnormal voltage is applied to the payout control board 633 which can be processed and the peripheral control board 1510 which can control the progression of the effect, thereby causing malfunction or failure. The hole computer determines the number of balls of the game ball B actually paid out as a winning ball by the pachinko machine 1, the game information of the pachinko machine 1, etc., the payout information of the game ball B by the payout operation of the pachinko machine 1 (so-called , Ball exit information) and the player's game.

  The ball lending request signal of the game ball B from the ball lending button 224 and the return request signal of the prepaid card from the return button 225 are input to the CR unit installed outside the pachinko machine 1 . The CR unit transmits a signal designating the number of balls of the gaming ball B to be lent according to the ball lending request signal to the payout control board 633 in a serial method, and this signal is sent out via the CR unit input / output circuit (not shown) Input is made to the input terminal of a predetermined input port. In addition, the CR unit updates the remaining degree of the prepaid card inserted according to the number of the lent gaming balls B, and outputs a display signal of the remaining degree to the ball lending operation unit 220, and this signal is the ball It is input and displayed on the ball lending display unit of the lending operation unit 220.

  Note that various voltages (DC + 35 V, DC + 12 V, and DC + 5 V) from the power supply substrate 630 of the substrate unit 620 are directly supplied to the payout control substrate 633. The power supply substrate 630 for supplying various voltages to the payout control substrate 633 is, as described above, a capacitor BC0 (see FIG. 160 etc.) as a backup power supply for supplying power to the main control substrate 1310X for a predetermined time even when the power is shut off. See). Due to the capacitor BC0, the payout control MPU 633aa can store various information in the payout control built-in RAM (payout storage unit) in the power-off process even when the power is shut off in addition to the main control MPU 1310a. As various information stored in the payout control built-in RAM, when the RAM clear switch 1310 f of the main control board 1310 X is operated within a predetermined period after power on, the operation signal (RAM clear signal) is a payout control input circuit It is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 633 aa via 633 ab, and triggered by this, the payout control MPU 633 aa is completely erased (cleared) from the payout control internal RAM.

7-2-2. Launch control unit]
The launch control unit 633 b performs launch control by the launch solenoid 542 and ball feed control by the ball feed solenoid 145. Although not illustrated in detail, the emission control unit 633b is based on an emission control input circuit to which detection signals from various sensors related to emission are input, an oscillation circuit that outputs a clock signal at fixed time intervals, and the clock signal. A firing reference control circuit for outputting a firing reference pulse for launching the game ball B toward the gaming area 5a; a firing solenoid drive circuit for outputting a drive signal to the firing solenoid 542 based on the firing reference pulse; And a ball feed solenoid drive circuit for outputting a drive signal to the ball feed solenoid 145 based on the pulse. The firing timing control circuit generates a firing reference pulse and outputs it to the firing solenoid drive circuit so that 100 gaming balls B per minute are shot toward the gaming area 5a based on the clock signal from the oscillation circuit. And generating a ball-sending reference pulse by multiplying the firing reference pulse by a predetermined number and outputting the generated pulse to the ball-feeding solenoid drive circuit.

  In relation to the handle unit 180, a detection signal from the handle touch sensor 192 for detecting whether or not the palm or finger touches the handle 182, and whether or not the launch of the game ball B is forcibly stopped by the intention of the player The detection signal from the one-shot button operation sensor 194 that detects the signal is input to the emission control circuit after being input to the emission control input circuit. Further, when the CR unit and the CR unit connection terminal plate are electrically connected, the CR connection signal is input to the emission control input circuit and input to the emission timing control circuit. A release permission signal from the main control board 1310X for notifying the release of the game ball B is input to the release control circuit after being input to the release control input circuit. A signal from a handle rotation detection sensor 189 that electrically adjusts the strength of striking the gaming ball B toward the gaming area 5a in accordance with the rotational position of the handle 182 is input to the firing solenoid drive circuit.

  The firing timing control circuit satisfies firing condition 1 that a palm or finger is touching the handle 182 based on a detection signal from the handle touch sensor 192, and based on the CR connection signal, the CR unit and the CR unit connection terminal board Is electrically connected, and the firing condition 3 that the firing of the gaming ball B is permitted based on the firing permission signal from the main control board 1310 X is not satisfied, the gaming ball B For example, the launch solenoid drive circuit can not launch the game ball B without outputting a drive signal to the launch solenoid 542, because the launch reference pulse for launching the game area 5a is not output.

  In this firing solenoid drive circuit, based on the signal from the handle rotation detection sensor 189, the drive current for shooting the game ball B toward the game area 5a with the launch strength corresponding to the rotation position of the handle 182, the firing reference pulse In response to the input, it outputs to the firing solenoid 542. On the other hand, the ball feeding solenoid drive circuit is a game ball stored in the upper tray 201 of the tray unit 200 by outputting a constant current to the ball feeding solenoid 145 in response to the input of the ball feeding reference pulse. When one ball is received in the ball feeding unit 140 and the input of the ball sending reference pulse is finished, the game ball B received by stopping the output of the constant current to the ball launching device 540 side send. Thus, while the drive current output from the launch solenoid drive circuit to the launch solenoid 542 is variably controlled, the drive current output from the ball feed solenoid drive circuit to the ball feed solenoid 145 is constant. It is controlled.

  In the present embodiment, although the discharge control unit 633 b that performs the launch control by the launch solenoid 542 and the ball feed control by the ball feed solenoid 145 is provided in the payout control substrate 633, the power control substrate 633 is provided It may be configured. In this case, the emission permission signal from the main control board 1310X may be configured to be directly input to the power supply board 630, or may be input to the power supply board 630 via the payout control board 633, May be input to the power supply substrate 630 via a relay substrate.

7-3. Peripheral control board]
As described above, the peripheral control board 1510 controls the progression of effects based on various commands from the main control board 1310X, and includes a CPU, RAM, VDP, VRAM, sound source, SATA controller, and various I / Os. A peripheral control IC 1510a whose interface and the like are integrated on one semiconductor chip, a control ROM 1510b which stores various programs and various schedule data which prescribes progression of effects in advance, Control information (peripheral data) can be transferred and stored, an SDRAM 1510c composed of SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2, a slide-type volume adjustment switch 1510d capable of adjusting the volume, and a not-shown real And it includes a backup power supply 1510e which can also supply power to the time clock IC during power failure, and a power supply generating circuit (not shown) to create various supply voltages, and peripheral control input circuit (not shown), the. Examples of various I / O interfaces include various serial I / O ports and various parallel I / O ports.

  The CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a stores various control information (peripheral data stored in the peripheral data ROM 1520a provided in the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 as one processing of initial setting processing at the time of power on (including the case of recovery from power failure). Control to transfer data) to the SDRAMs 1510 c 1 and 1510 c 2. Between the peripheral data ROM 1520a and the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 provided in the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, as described above, the transfer rate of 2 Gbps is provided, so the control information stored in the peripheral data ROM 1520a is sent to the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2. It is transferred at high speed. As control information (peripheral data), as described above, the background image for drawing various effect images on the effect display device 1600, character images, image data such as symbol images, etc., the door frame 3 and the game board 5 are provided. Light emission data defining the light emission mode (lighting, gradation, blinking, extinguishing, etc.) of various LEDs mounted on various decoration boards, sound data such as music, voice, warning sound, notification sound, door frame 3 or game It is drive data or the like for driving and controlling various movable effect bodies provided on the board 5.

  The CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510 a uses the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510 a to temporarily store information or delete the information associated with processing. Further, when the CPU of peripheral control IC 1510a completes startup of its own system, it reads out various control information (peripheral data) transferred to SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 based on various commands from main control board 1310X and proceeds with rendering .

  Further, when the CPU of peripheral control IC 1510a completes startup of its own system and receives various commands from main control board 1310X, it reads and reads various schedule data stored in control ROM 1510b based on these various commands. According to the schedule data, various control information (peripheral data) transferred to the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 are read, and control is performed to draw an image on the effect display device 1600, or the light emission mode of various LEDs matched to various effects is obtained. As described above, various effects are advanced by performing control or performing control such that sounds such as music and sound effects flow according to various effects.

  The VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a reads image data from the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 based on an instruction from the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a and generates drawing data for drawing an image on the effect display device 1600 on the VRAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a Then, control to output to the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is performed. The drawing data is transmitted to the effect display device 1600 via the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, and various images are drawn on the effect display device 1600. When the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a becomes ready to receive screen data defining the configuration of the screen, it outputs a V blank signal to the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a to convey that effect.

  The sound source of the peripheral control IC 1510a is a vibration speaker provided on the door frame 3, the main body frame 4 or the like by reading, generating and outputting sound data from the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 based on an instruction from the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a. Control is performed such that sounds such as music and sound effects according to various effects flow from the top center speaker 462, the top side speaker 464, the body frame speaker 622 of the body frame 4, and the like. When the slide type volume control switch 1510d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 is operated, this volume control operation signal is input to various parallel I / O ports of the peripheral control IC 1510a via the peripheral control input circuit. The sound source of the peripheral control IC 1510a can adjust the volume according to the input volume adjustment operation signal based on an instruction from the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a, and the top center speaker 462 on the door frame 3 side, the top side speaker Outputs audio signals (for example, 2ch stereo signal, 4ch stereo signal, 2.1ch surround signal, 4.1ch surround signal, etc.) to 464 and the body frame speaker 622 for low frequency of the body frame 4 By doing this, it is possible to provide a more realistic sound effect (sound presentation) than ever before.

  When the CPU of peripheral control IC 1510a completes startup of its own system and receives various commands from main control board 1310X, it reads out various schedule data stored in control ROM 1510b based on these various commands, and reads out the schedule data From the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2, game board side light emission data for outputting lighting signals, blinking signals or gradation lighting signals to full color LEDs or single color LEDs provided on each decoration board of the game board 5 along the Read out and send to various decoration boards of the game board 5 from various serial I / O ports via the panel drive board 1720 as a command or drive to various drive motors provided in various effect units provided on the game board 5 SDRA drive data for outputting signals Read out from 1510c1 and 1510c2 and transmit to the panel drive board 1720 from various serial I / O ports as commands, or drive to the operation ring drive motor 342 and the operation button elevation drive motor 367 etc. provided in the door frame 3 Door side drive data for outputting a signal, and a door side for outputting a lighting signal, blinking signal or gradation lighting signal to a full color LED or a single color LED provided on each decoration substrate of the door frame 3 Door side drive light emission data composed of light emission data is read out from the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 and transmitted as commands to the door frame 3 from various serial I / O ports. The panel drive board 1720 is provided on the game board 5 based on the received game board drive data (that is, command) when the game board drive data from the peripheral control board 1510 (peripheral control IC 1510a) is received. A drive motor control circuit (not shown) capable of outputting drive signals to various drive motors provided in various effect units is provided.

  Detection signals from various detection sensors for detecting the position (standby position (original position), combined position) provided to various effect units of the back unit 3000 provided on the game board 5 are the panel drive board 1720, and It is input to various parallel I / O ports of the peripheral control IC 1510 a through the peripheral control input circuit. Further, a detection signal from the pressure detection sensor 381 of the effect operation unit 300 provided in the door frame 3, a detection signal from the elevation detection sensor 382, a detection signal from the first rotation detection sensor 347, and a second rotation detection sensor 348 The detection signal from is received by the various serial I / O ports of the peripheral control IC 1510a through the peripheral control input circuit. In addition, a signal from the air cooling fan FAN that conveys the rotation state of the air cooling fan FAN provided in the peripheral control unit 1500 of the game board 5 is input to various parallel I / O ports of the peripheral control IC 1510a via the peripheral control input circuit. .

  Various voltages (DC +35 V, DC +12 V, and DC +5 V) from the power supply substrate 630 of the substrate unit 620 are directly supplied to the peripheral control substrate 1510. Among the various voltages from the power supply substrate 630, the power supply generation circuit (not shown) provided in the peripheral control substrate 1510 has a plurality of control voltages corresponding to various electronic components provided in the peripheral control substrate 1510 from one voltage (for example, DC +12 V). The type is created and supplied.

  The peripheral control IC 1510a is provided with an external WDT (watch dock timer) (not shown), and the peripheral control IC 1510a diagnoses whether or not its own system is runaway using the external WDT.

7-4. Panel drive board]
Here, the panel drive substrate 1720 which is a subordinate substrate of the peripheral control substrate 1510 will be briefly described. Here, the relationship between the game board 5 and each decoration substrate will be described, and subsequently, the relationship between the various rendering units and the various drive motors and the relationship between the various detection sensors will be described.

7-4-1. Relationship with each decoration board of the game board]
As described above, the peripheral control IC 1510 a of the peripheral control board 1510 outputs a lighting signal, a blinking signal or a gradation lighting signal to a full color LED or a single color LED provided on each decoration board of the game board 5. The game board side light emission data is read from the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 and transmitted as commands from the various serial I / O ports to the decoration boards of the game board 5 via the panel drive board 1720. Each decoration board of the game board 5 is provided with one or more LED constant current drive circuits capable of supplying a predetermined constant current to the LEDs.

  A first design decorative substrate on which a plurality of LEDs for the first design to be lit and decorated by emitting light from the upper surface of the light guide plate in the front effect unit 2600 is mounted as each decorative substrate of the game board 5, for example And a second design decoration substrate on which a plurality of LEDs for the second design are mounted to emit light and decorated by causing light to be incident from the right side surface of the light guide plate in the front effect unit 2600.

  Also, as each decoration substrate of the game board 5, for example, a plurality of panel decoration LEDs 1130a disposed at the upper left corner of the front view of the panel holder 1120 and emitting light toward the peripheral surface of the base panel 1110 are mounted An upper left panel decoration substrate 1131 and a lower left panel decoration substrate on which a plurality of panel decoration LEDs disposed at the lower left corner of the front surface of the panel holder 1120 and emitting light toward the peripheral surface of the base panel 1110 are mounted; There is.

  In addition, as each decoration substrate of game board 5, for example, a plurality of full color LEDs 3311 aa for emitting light and decorating a front stage decorative portion 3312 of a back upper left movable decorative body 3310 in a back effect unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 There is a decorative substrate 3311a and the like.

7-3-1 b. Relationship with various drive motors of various rendering units]
As described above, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 reads game board side drive data for outputting drive signals to various drive motors provided in various effect units provided on the game board 5 from the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2. The command is transmitted from the various serial I / O ports to the panel drive board 1720 as a command. As described above, when the panel drive board 1720 receives the game board drive data from the peripheral control board 1510 (peripheral control IC 1510a) by the drive motor control circuit (not shown), the drive motor control circuit (not shown) receives the game A drive signal is output to various drive motors provided in various effect units provided on the game board 5 based on the board side drive data (that is, a command).

  Examples of various drive motors provided in various effect units include a back left upper rotation drive motor that rotates the front stage decoration portion 3312 of the back left upper movable decorative body 3310.

[7-3-1 c. Relationship with various detection sensors]
As described above, detection signals from various detection sensors for detecting the positions (standby positions (original positions), combined positions) provided in various effect units of the back unit 3000 provided on the game board 5 are panel driven as described above. The signals are input to various parallel I / O ports of the peripheral control IC 1510 a through the substrate 1720 and the peripheral control input circuit of the peripheral control IC 1510 a in the peripheral control substrate 1510.

  As various detection sensors for detecting positions (standby positions (original positions), combined positions) provided in various rendering units, for example, a standby position (original position) of the rotational position of the front stage decorative portion 3312 of the back upper left movable decorative body There is a magnetic back left upper pole change detection circuit 3311 ab or the like which is mounted on the back left upper first stage decorative substrate 3311 a which detects the position).

  The standby position (original position) of the front stage decorative portion 3312 of the back upper left movable decorative body 3310 is based on a detection signal from the magnetic back left upper pole change detection circuit 3311 ab mounted on the back upper left front end decorative substrate 3311 a. It is set by the peripheral control IC 1510a.

[8. Ground wire system]
The frame earth substrate 559 shown in FIG. 102 is capable of temporarily collecting electromagnetic wave noise generated at various places and grounding it to the island facility of the game hall (earth ground). Here, a system of the ground wire by the frame ground substrate 559 will be described with reference to FIG. 152 is a view showing the configuration of the frame ground substrate 559, FIG. 152 (a) is a side view of the frame ground substrate 559, and FIG. 152 (b) is a mounting surface of the frame ground substrate 559. c) is a circuit diagram of the frame ground substrate 559, and FIG. 152 (d) is a table showing a description of each ground terminal provided on the frame ground substrate 559. As shown in FIG. 152 (a), the frame ground board 559 has its mounting surface facing downward (that is, in a state where the connector insertion ports of the ground terminals ECN1 to ECN5 are directed downward). It is accommodated and attached to the inside of board | substrate accommodating part 551aa formed in the top-plate part 551a of the delivery base 551 shown to FIG. 102 (b).

  As shown in FIG. 152 (b), the frame ground substrate 559 has ground terminals ECN1, ECN5, ECN4, ECN2 arranged in line from the right to the left along the upper side, and the center of the left side A lower ground terminal ECN3 is disposed. To briefly describe the ground terminals ECN1 to ECN5, as shown in FIG. 152 (d), the ground terminal ECN1 is provided on the interface substrate 635 in the substrate unit 620 of the main body frame 4 shown in FIG. The connection terminal and the interface ground wire are electrically connected via the ground terminal ECN2. The ground terminal ECN2 is electrically connected via the ground connection terminal at the island facility of the game hall and the island equipment ground wire as an island facility ground. The earth terminal ECN3 is illustrated as a ball tank ground in the ball tank 552 shown in FIG. 102 (b) (specifically, on the outside of the side wall of the ball tank 552 near the substrate accommodation portion 551aa). The ball tank ground wire is attached with one end by a metal screw that does not The other end of the ground wire is electrically connected, and the earth terminal ECN 4 is a metal body frame reinforcing frame 530 in the body frame base unit 500 of the body frame 4 shown in FIG. 97 as the body frame metal ground. (Specifically, one end of the main frame metal ground wire is attached to the upper side of the main frame reinforcement frame 530 by a metal screw not shown, and the other end of the main frame metal ground wire is electrically connected. The ground terminal ECN5 is electrically connected to the ground connection terminal provided on the power supply substrate 630 of the substrate unit 620 of the main body frame 4 shown in FIG. 114 as a power supply ground via the power supply ground wire.

  As shown in FIG. 152 (c), the circuit of the frame earth substrate 559 is such that the earth terminal ECN3 as a ball tank earth is electrically connected to one end of the resistor ER1, and the other end of the resistor ER1 is a power ground. The ground terminal ECN5, the ground terminal ECN2 as the island equipment ground, and the ground terminal ECN1 as the interface ground are electrically connected, and the ground terminal ECN4 as the body frame metal ground is electrically connected to one end of the resistor ER2. The other end of the resistor ER2 is electrically connected to a ground terminal ECN5 as a power ground, a ground terminal ECN2 as an island facility ground, and a ground terminal ECN1 as an interface ground. That is, the other end of the resistor ER1 and the other end of the resistor ER2 are electrically connected. In the present embodiment, 510 ohms (Ω) and 2 watts (W) are employed as the resistors ER1 and ER2.

  Electromagnetic wave noise flowing to the earth terminal ECN1 as interface ground is led to the earth ground of the island equipment of the game hall via the earth terminal ECN2 as the island equipment earth and the island equipment earth wire, and removed as a ball tank earth The electromagnetic wave noise flowing to the earth terminal ECN3 is led to the earth ground of the island equipment of the game hall and removed through the earth terminal ECN2 as the island equipment earth and the island equipment earth wire, and the earth terminal ECN4 as the body frame metal earth The electromagnetic wave noise flowing to the ground is removed to the earth ground of the island equipment of the game hall via the earth terminal ECN2 as the island equipment earth and the island equipment earth wire, and the electromagnetic wave noise flowing to the earth terminal ECN5 as the power earth is , Via the earth terminal ECN2 as the island equipment ground, the island equipment earth wire It is guided to the earth ground of the island capital of the gaming hall is adapted to be removed.

  As shown in FIG. 98, a ball tank 552, a dispensing unit 560, and the like are attached to the dispensing base unit 550 in the main body frame 4. The ball tank 552 is supplied with the game ball B from the island facility of the game hall, and the game ball B is supplied from the ball tank 552 to the payout unit 560. The game balls B are polished at the island facility of the game hall, rub against each other in the circulation between the island facility and the pachinko machine 1, and are charged and electrostatically discharged to release electromagnetic wave noise. For this reason, static electricity is likely to be accumulated in the area where the ball tank 552 capable of retaining the game ball B and the payout unit 560 are attached and in the periphery thereof.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the frame ground substrate 559 is disposed in the vicinity of the ball tank 552 and the dispensing unit 560 where static electricity tends to collect, and as a result of the static electricity easily accumulating, the ball tank 552 and the payout are strongly affected by electromagnetic noise. In the frame ground board 559, a ground terminal ECN3 as a ball tank ground, and a main frame metal, as opposed to the metal main frame reinforcing frame 530 in the main frame base unit 500 of the main body frame 4 in the vicinity of the unit 560. Electromagnetic wave noise is gradually flowed and attenuated through the resistors ER1 and ER2 as the earth terminal ECN4 as the ground to suppress instantaneous discharge of high voltage, and the island equipment from the earth terminal ECN2 as the island equipment earth It can be led to the earth ground of the island equipment of the game hall through the earth wire That. In other words, the electromagnetic wave noise that has entered from the ball tank 552 and the dispensing unit 560 where static electricity is easily accumulated is from the frame ground substrate 559 via the ball tank 552 and the metal body frame reinforcing frame 530 as a frame ground of a frame ground. By guiding to the earth ground of the island facility of the game hall, the electromagnetic wave noise that has entered from the ball tank 552 and the payout unit 560 can be flowed to the earth ground of the island facility of the game hall and removed.

  In the present embodiment, among the ground terminals ECN1 to ECN5, the ground terminal ECN3 as the ball tank ground and the ground terminal ECN4 as the main frame metal ground are strongly affected by the electromagnetic wave noise as described above. As it corresponds to (the surroundings), a large-sized ground terminal is adopted, and the ground terminal ECN2 as the island facility ground is, as described above, the electromagnetic wave noise flowing into the frame ground board 559 into the game hall A large-sized earth terminal is adopted because it leads to the earth ground of the island equipment and removes it. Ground terminals ECN2 to ECN4 adopting this large-sized ground terminal are square with a cross-sectional shape of one side of 1.14 mm, rated current: 7A (when using AC · DC, AWG # 18), rated voltage: It has a general specification of 250 V (AC / DC) and applicable wire range: AWG # 22 to # 18, and its height is 13.4 mm as shown in FIG. 152 (a) (earth terminals ECN2 to When the housing corresponding to ECN 4 is inserted, the mounting height becomes 18.6 mm).

  On the other hand, the electromagnetic wave noise flowing into the ground terminal ECN1 as the interface ground and the ground terminal ECN5 as the power ground is smaller than the above-described ground terminals ECN2 to ECN4 and the current is smaller. For the earth terminals ECN1 and ECN5, small earth terminals are adopted. Earth terminals ECN1 and ECN5 adopting this small ground terminal are square with a cross-sectional shape of 0.64 mm on each side, rated current: 3 A (when using AC · DC, AWG # 22), rated voltage: It has a general specification of 250 V (AC / DC) and applicable wire range: AWG # 30 to # 22, and its height is 7 mm as shown in FIG. 152 (a) (ground terminals ECN1 and ECN5 The mounting height is 9.8 mm when the corresponding housing is inserted).

  In the present embodiment, respective ground wires (island equipment ground wire, ball tank ground wire, body frame ground wire) electrically connected to the ground terminals ECN2 to ECN4 are electrically connected to the ground terminals ECN1 and ECN5. Since the current due to electromagnetic wave noise is large compared to the respective ground wires (interface ground wire, power ground wire), the respective ground wires (island equipment ground wire, ball tank) electrically connected to the ground terminals ECN2 to ECN4 The thickness of the ground wire and the body frame ground wire is thicker than the thickness of each of the ground wires (interface ground wire and power ground wire) electrically connected to the ground terminals ECN1 and ECN5. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 152 (a), 1.6 mm is employed as the thickness of the frame ground substrate 559.

  As described above, since the electromagnetic wave noise generated in various places can be collected on the frame earth substrate 559 temporarily and then guided from the frame earth substrate 559 to the earth ground of the island facility of the game hall and removed, the frame The ground substrate 559 has a function of exerting a static elimination function.

  In addition, it is configured so that electromagnetic noises generated at various places can be collected on the frame ground substrate 559 temporarily and led from the frame ground substrate 559 to the ground of the island facility of the game hall and removed. The ground wire (wiring) from the ball tank 552 arranged on the upper side is routed around the power supply substrate 630 arranged on the lower side of the pachinko machine 1 to temporarily collect electromagnetic noises on the power As compared with the configuration in which the lead is removed to the earth ground, the wiring of the earth wire (wiring) is extremely easy.

  Further, since the external terminal plate 558 and the frame ground substrate 559 can be disposed in the substrate accommodation portion 551aa of the dispensing base 551 in a state where they are close to each other, a plurality of electric wire connections provided on the external terminal plate 558 Terminals 558a (a plurality of external terminals (in this embodiment, ten external terminals XCN1 to XCN10 arranged in a line from the left to the right when viewed from the rear side from the dispensing base unit 550)) And electrically connecting the hall computer provided in the game hall with a wire, a ground terminal ECN2 as an island facility ground in the frame ground board 559, and a ground connection terminal provided in the island facility in the game hall , Electrically connected with the island equipment ground wire (wiring), and can be performed as a series of work Because, it is possible to contribute to improvement in workability.

  Further, since the frame ground substrate 559 can be disposed in the substrate accommodation portion 551aa of the payout base 551, the ground terminal ECN2 as the island facility ground of the frame ground substrate 559 and the island facility of the game hall Various control boards (for example, the main control board 1310 X of the main control unit 1300 which controls the progress of the game, etc.) provided on the game board 5 with island facility earth wires (wirings) electrically connecting the provided ground connection terminals. Peripheral control board 1510 which can control the progress of the peripheral control board, peripheral data ROM board 1520 electrically connected to peripheral control board 1510, liquid crystal output board 1530, and the like). It is possible to eliminate the adverse effect on electronic parts (including connectors) provided in

  Also, by arranging the frame ground substrate 559 near the ball tank 552 and the dispensing unit 560 where static electricity is easily accumulated, the body tank 4 is in the vicinity of the ball tank 552 and the dispensing unit 560 strongly affected by electromagnetic noise. In the frame ground board 559, the ground terminal ECN3 as a ball tank ground and the ground terminal ECN4 as a main body frame metal ground in the frame ground board 559, respectively. Reduce the length of the ground wire (ball tank ground wire, main frame metal ground wire) to be connected electrically by guiding the electromagnetic wave noise from the frame ground board 559 to the earth ground of the island facility of the game hall be able to.

  Also, by arranging the frame ground board 559 near the ball tank 552 and the dispensing unit 560 where static electricity is easily accumulated, the ball tank 552 where static electricity is easily accumulated and the frame ground board 559 which exerts a diselectrifying action are electrically connected The length of the ball tank ground wire (wiring) is the length of the main frame metal ground wire (wiring) for electrically connecting the metal main frame reinforcing frame 530 and the frame ground substrate 559 which exerts the charge removing function, and the power source An interface electrically connecting a length of a power supply ground wire (wiring) electrically connecting the substrate 630 and the frame ground substrate 559 which exerts a static elimination function, and an interface electrically connecting the interface substrate 635 and a frame ground substrate 559 It can be configured to be shortest as compared with the length of the ground wire (wiring).

  Also, by arranging the frame ground substrate 559 near the ball tank 552 and the dispensing unit 560 where static electricity is easily accumulated, the body tank 4 is in the vicinity of the ball tank 552 and the dispensing unit 560 strongly affected by electromagnetic noise. In the frame ground board 559, the ground terminal ECN3 as the ball tank ground and the ground terminal ECN4 as the main body frame metal ground are used for the metal frame main frame reinforcing frame 530 in the main body frame base unit 500. Although a large current flows, it is reduced by the resistors ER1 and ER2 of the frame ground substrate 559, and the operation of the power supply substrate 630 is not affected, and the ground terminal ECN2 as an island facility ground of the frame ground substrate 559 Lead to the earth ground of the island facility of the game hall through the earth wire and remove it It is possible.

  Incidentally, conventionally, in order to easily supply 24 V AC power of the CR unit, each ground is once concentrated on the power supply board arranged on the CR unit side at the bottom of the main frame, and connected to the earth ground of the island facility via the power supply board. Has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-120593 (paragraph [0335], FIG. 84, FIG. 85)). Since the power supply substrate is generally heavy, it is often disposed below in the gaming machine. Therefore, in order to collect the ground on the power supply substrate, it is necessary to route the ground wire from the ball tank or the ball device on the upper side of the gaming machine to the lower power supply substrate. By routing the earth wire in this manner, electromagnetic noise may be transmitted to various control boards existing along the way and have an unexpected effect. In addition, since the ground wire is concentrated on the power supply board, if any problem occurs in the power supply board, the earth may be affected, or the current may flow to the ground line, which may affect the operation of the power supply board. there were. In addition, when the ground taking place of the island facility is located above the gaming machine, etc., it may be complicated because it is necessary to extend and connect the earth wires collected by the power supply board from the lower side to the upper side again.

[9. Conductor floated to the earth]
Next, members provided on the game board as treatment of a conductor floating on the ground will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 153 is a schematic view of the handling of the conductor floating on the ground provided to various effect units provided on the game board.

  In the vicinity of the game board 5, as described above, the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 553 are disposed above the game board 5, and the payout unit 560 is disposed to the side of the game board 5. The game balls rub against each other in the traveling ball path, and are charged and electrostatically discharged to become a noise source. For this reason, in the vicinity of the game board 5 where the ball path is formed, there is an environment affected by the electromagnetic wave noise due to the electrostatic discharge from the game ball. The pachinko machines 1 are arranged in a row opposite to the island facilities of the game hall. Thus, the surroundings of the game board 5 are in an environment which is extremely susceptible to electromagnetic noise.

  On the game board 5, various effect units are provided in the back unit 3000. The various rendering units include structures used to improve rigidity, mechanical parts of drive mechanisms, electrical parts (including the housing of electric parts), conductive plating applied to decorative structures, and A plurality of conductors such as a structure (including a decorative structure) molded by a conductive resin are used. In addition, the game board 5 is provided with various substrates, and these various substrates and various effect units are arranged close to each other. In addition, these conductors affect the electric circuit in the case of electrostatic discharge depending on the size of their surface area. In the case where the surface area of the conductor is small, the amount of charge storage is small and the influence of the electrostatic discharge on the electric circuit can be ignored, and it is not necessary to remove the electromagnetic wave noise due to the electrostatic discharge. On the other hand, if the surface area of the conductor is large, the amount of accumulated charge is large and the influence on the electric circuit by electrostatic discharge can not be ignored, and it is necessary to safely remove the electromagnetic wave noise by electrostatic discharge. .

  When these conductors float above the ground, the game board 5 is in an environment very susceptible to the influence of the above-mentioned electromagnetic wave noise, and therefore, electrostatic induction occurs in the conductor under the influence of the electromagnetic wave noise. Then, when electrostatic discharge is caused from the conductor floating on the ground, various substrates provided on the game board 5 may be damaged.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, among the plurality of conductors in the various rendering units provided in the back unit 3000 of the game board 5, at least electrostatic discharge will affect various boards provided in the game board 5, causing malfunction. We adopted a configuration that does not float on the ground for those that may or may be damaged.

9-1. Example of treatment of conductor of production unit (Part 1)]
Among the various rendering units, one rendering unit is provided with a metal reinforcing plate (not shown) so as to cover the back surface side to increase its rigidity, and of both ends in the left-right direction of the reinforcing plate, One mounted near the drive motor 3151 is attached to a metal slide rail 3151 ns which can slide in the vertical direction by a predetermined distance, and the other not arranged near the drive motor 3151 is a metal not shown A sliding portion (not shown) may be formed of a conductive resin (not shown) which slides along the cylindrical bar (moves while sliding the surface of the metal cylindrical bar along the longitudinal direction of the cylindrical bar). It may be molded of non-conductive resin).

  In this embodiment, among the plurality of conductors provided in the various rendering units, at least electrostatic discharge may affect various substrates provided on the game board 5 and may cause malfunction or damage. It is selected as an object that does not float with respect to the ground, whereas the surface area of a single conductor increases as compared to the surface area of a predetermined surface, and is in a state in which each is electrically connected in a fixed manner. And For example, a metal reinforcing plate and a metal slide rail 3151 ns are attached, brought into structural contact, and electrically connected in a conductive state.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 153A, a metal slide rail 3151 ns of a metal back slide arm 3150 ns movable in the vertical direction disposed in the vicinity of the drive motor 3151 and having a predetermined distance dimension. The first conductor potential fluctuation preventing wire 3151 nc is a housing and a mounting hole 3151 n closer to the slide rail 3151 ns out of the pair of mounting holes 3151 n and 3151 f provided in the metal housing of the drive motor 3151 In addition to the electrical connection, the mounting hole 3151f far from the slide rail 3151ns and the panel drive substrate 1720 are electrically connected via the second conductor potential fluctuation preventing wiring 3151fc.

  Wiring terminals are crimped to both ends of the first conductor potential fluctuation preventing wiring 3151 nc, and the wiring terminals at one end thereof are screwed and fixed to the metal casing of the slide rail 3151 ns, and the wiring at the other end Terminals are screwed into and fixed to mounting holes 3151 n provided in the metal casing of the drive motor 3151. At this time, the metal housing of the drive motor 3151 forming the mounting hole 3151 n is fixed to the effect unit.

  The second conductor potential fluctuation preventing wiring 3151fc has a wiring terminal crimped to one end thereof, a connector provided on the other end, and a mounting hole 3151f formed on the metal housing of the drive motor 3151 on the wiring terminal thereof. , And the other end of the connector is inserted into and fixed to the corresponding connector of the panel drive board 1720. At this time, the metal housing of the drive motor 3151 forming the mounting hole 3151 f is fixed to the effect unit. When the second conductor potential fluctuation preventing wiring 3151 fc is electrically connected to the panel drive substrate 1720, the second conductor potential fluctuation preventing wiring 3151 fc is electrically connected to the ground (GND) via the resistor Rs0. The ground (GND) line of the panel drive substrate 1720 is a ground of various substrates such as a power supply substrate 630, a main control substrate 1310X, a peripheral control substrate 1510, a peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, a liquid crystal output substrate 1530, various relay substrates, and various decorative substrates. It is electrically connected to the (GND) line.

  A plurality of electrical wires (harnesses) for driving the drive motor 3151 are inserted into corresponding connectors in the panel drive board 1720 different from the connector in which the connector of the second conductor potential fluctuation preventing wire 3151 fc is provided.

  As described above, among the plurality of conductors provided in the various rendering units, at least electrostatic discharge may affect various substrates provided on the game board 5 and may cause malfunction or damage. As a thing, when the surface area of a single conductor becomes larger than a predetermined surface area, each is structurally brought into contact, fixed and conducted, for example, a metal reinforcing plate and a metal slide rail These conductors are electrically connected by connecting them in a structural contact with the 3151 ns, and these conductors are connected to the first conductor potential fluctuation preventing wiring 3151 nc, the metal casing of the drive motor 3151, the second conductor It is electrically connected to the ground (GND) through the potential fluctuation preventing wiring 3151fc and the resistor Rs0 of the panel driving substrate 1720.

  As a result, among the plurality of conductors provided in the various rendering units, at least if electrostatic discharge is caused, the various substrates provided on the game board 5 may be affected and may malfunction, or may be damaged. As compared with the surface area of a single conductor increases as compared with the predetermined surface area, since these conductors are configured not to float from the ground, temporarily, electromagnetic wave noise intrudes into these conductors. Also, the electromagnetic wave noise that has entered can be safely removed by being guided to the circuit ground (the grounds (GND) of various substrates) via the resistor Rs0 of the panel drive substrate 1720. Therefore, it is possible to prevent malfunction or damage of various substrates provided on the game board 5 due to electrostatic discharge (electromagnetic wave noise).

  In addition, as described above, even if electromagnetic wave noise intrudes into these conductors, the electric circuit portion on various substrates provided in the game board 5 is not affected by malfunction or failure, etc. Can be removed safely, so that the pachinko machine 1 can continue its normal operation, as well as the impact due to electrostatic discharge, the disappearance of the occurrence of the big hit gaming state, and the generation state of the positive variation It is possible to prevent the player's discomfort such as disappearance.

9-2. Example of treatment for conductor of production unit (Part 2)]
In each of the other rendering units, one of the rendering units is disposed in the vicinity of the drive motor 3151 among both ends in the vertical direction of the moving arm base, and a metal slide which can slide in the lateral direction by a predetermined distance dimension Slide movement along a metal cylindrical bar (not shown), which is attached to the rail 3151 ns and not arranged in the vicinity of the drive motor 3151 (the surface of the metal cylindrical bar is slid along the longitudinal direction of the cylindrical bar A sliding portion (not shown) (which may be molded of a conductive resin or may be molded of a nonconductive resin) is attached.

  In this embodiment, among the plurality of conductors provided in the various rendering units, at least electrostatic discharge may affect various substrates provided on the game board 5 and may cause malfunction or damage. The target is selected as a target that does not float on the ground, as opposed to a target whose surface area of a single conductor becomes larger than a predetermined surface area. For example, metal slide rail 3151 ns.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 153 (b), a metallic slide rail 3151 ns of metal casing which can slide by a predetermined distance dimension in the lateral direction disposed in the vicinity of the drive motor 3151; Of the pair of mounting holes 3151 n and 3151 f provided in the metal casing of the motor 3151, the mounting hole 3151 n (3452 n) closer to the slide rail 3151 ns is electrically connected via the first conductor potential fluctuation preventing wiring 3151 nc And the relay substrate 3151a provided in the rendering unit is electrically connected via the second conductor potential fluctuation preventing wiring 3151fc.

  Wiring terminals are crimped to both ends of the first conductor potential fluctuation preventing wiring 3151 nc, and the wiring terminals at one end thereof are screwed and fixed to the metal casing of the slide rail 3151 ns, and the wiring at the other end Terminals are screwed into and fixed to mounting holes 3151 n provided in the metal casing of the drive motor 3151. At this time, the metal housing of the drive motor 3151 forming the mounting hole 3151 n is fixed to the effect unit.

  The second conductor potential fluctuation preventing wiring 3151fc has a wiring terminal crimped to one end thereof, a connector provided on the other end, and a mounting hole 3151f formed on the metal housing of the drive motor 3151 on the wiring terminal thereof. The other end of the connector is inserted into and fixed to the corresponding connector in the relay board 3151a provided in the rendering unit. At this time, the metal housing of the drive motor 3151 forming the mounting hole 3151 f is fixed to the effect unit. The second conductor potential fluctuation preventing wiring 3151fc is electrically connected to the ground (GND) through the resistor Rs2 when it is electrically connected to the relay substrate 3151a provided in the rendering unit. The ground (GND) line of the relay substrate 3151a provided in the rendering unit is a panel drive substrate 1720, a power supply substrate 630, a main control substrate 1310X, a peripheral control substrate 1510, a peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, a liquid crystal output substrate 1530, various relay substrates, It is electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of various substrates such as various decorative substrates.

  A plurality of electrical wires (harnesses) for driving the drive motor 3151 are provided with connectors, and corresponding connectors in the relay board 3151a provided in a rendering unit different from the connector into which the connector of the second conductor potential fluctuation preventing wire 3151fc is inserted Be inserted. The relay substrate 3151 a provided in the rendering unit is electrically connected to the panel drive substrate 1720 via an electrical wiring (harness). The electrical wiring (harness) is provided with connectors at both ends, and is inserted into and fixed to a corresponding connector in the panel drive board 1720.

  As described above, among the plurality of conductors provided in the various rendering units, at least electrostatic discharge may affect various substrates provided on the game board 5 and may cause malfunction or damage. As compared with the case where the surface area of a single conductor becomes larger than the predetermined surface area, for example, the metal slide rail 3151 ns of the conductor of the first conductor potential fluctuation preventing wiring 3151 nc, the metal housing of the drive motor 3151 It is electrically connected to the ground (GND) via the body, the second conductor potential fluctuation preventing wiring 3151fc, and the resistor Rs2 of the relay substrate 3151a provided in the rendering unit.

  As a result, among the plurality of conductors provided in the various rendering units, at least if electrostatic discharge is caused, the various substrates provided on the game board 5 may be affected and may malfunction, or may be damaged. As compared with the surface area of a single conductor increases as compared with the predetermined surface area, since these conductors are configured not to float from the ground, temporarily, electromagnetic wave noise intrudes into these conductors. Also, the electromagnetic wave noise that has entered can be safely removed by being guided to the circuit ground (the ground (GND) of various substrates) via the resistor Rs2 of the relay substrate 3151a provided in the rendering unit. Therefore, it is possible to prevent malfunction or damage of various substrates provided on the game board 5 due to electrostatic discharge (electromagnetic wave noise).

  In addition, as described above, even if electromagnetic wave noise intrudes into these conductors, the electric circuit portion on various substrates provided in the game board 5 is not affected by malfunction or failure, etc. Can be removed safely, so that the pachinko machine 1 can continue its normal operation, as well as the impact due to electrostatic discharge, the disappearance of the occurrence of the big hit gaming state, and the generation state of the positive variation It is possible to prevent the player's discomfort such as disappearance.

  As described above, the electromagnetic wave noise generated at each place in the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 is temporarily collected on the frame ground substrate 559 and led from the frame ground substrate 559 to the earth ground of the island facility of the game hall and removed. The frame ground substrate 559 has a function of exerting a static elimination function. That is, there is formed a path for safely removing the electromagnetic wave noise generated at various places in the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 to the ground of the island facility of the game hall. On the other hand, among the plurality of conductors in the various rendering units provided on the back unit 3000 of the game board 5, at least electrostatic discharge may affect various boards provided on the game board 5 and cause malfunction. It can be safely removed by guiding it to the circuit ground (ground of various substrates (GND)) so that it does not float on the ground with respect to something that may be present or may be damaged. That is, among the plurality of conductors in the various rendering units provided in the back unit 3000 of the game board 5, at least electrostatic discharge may affect various boards provided on the game board 5 and cause malfunction. A path is formed in which electromagnetic wave noise can be led to the circuit ground (ground of various substrates (GND)) and safely removed from those which may be damaged or damaged. In this way, independent paths for safely removing electromagnetic wave noise are formed in the door frame 3 or the main body frame 4 and the game board 5, respectively, and they are not influenced mutually. Therefore, also in this point, it is possible to prevent a malfunction or damage due to electrostatic discharge (electromagnetic wave noise).

  The conductor, as described above, affects the electric circuit in the case of electrostatic discharge depending on the size of the surface area. In addition, the conductor changes the ease of electrostatic discharge depending on the distance from the electrical circuit. Therefore, in the present embodiment, taking into consideration the size of the surface area of the conductor and the distance dimension between the conductor and the electric circuit, the electromagnetic wave noise of the plurality of conductors is guided to the earth ground of the island facility of the game hall for safety The conductor that needs to be removed is individually selected (it is individually distinguished whether it is the conductor dropped to the earth ground) and the electromagnetic wave noise is conducted to the circuit ground (the ground (GND of various substrates)) Individually select conductors that need to be safely removed.

  In the embodiment described above, among the plurality of conductors in the various rendering units provided in the back unit 3000 of the game board 5, at least when electrostatically discharged, it affects various boards provided on the game board 5 and is erroneous For those which may operate or which may cause damage, the surface area of a single conductor increases as compared to the predetermined surface area, and each is structurally brought into contact and fixed, for example, for example, A conductive plate made of metal and a slide rail 3151 ns made of metal are mounted, brought into structural contact and electrically connected, and in the conductive state, these conductors are the first conductor potential fluctuation preventing wire 3151 nc, driving The metal housing of the motor 3151, the second conductor potential fluctuation preventing wiring 3151 fc, and the resistance Rs 0 of the panel driving substrate 1720 It is a path electrically connected to the land (GND), but instead of the metal housing of the drive motor 3151, a metal screw is provided, and this is performed via this metal screw alone Alternatively, a lug plate (a metal lug terminal is fixed to the insulating substrate) may be provided, and may be performed via the lug plate. That is, these conductors are connected to ground (GND) through the first conductor potential fluctuation preventing wiring 3151nc, metal screw (or lug plate), the second conductor potential fluctuation preventing wiring 3151fc, and the resistance Rs0 of the panel drive substrate 1720. It may be a path electrically connected to the A plurality of conductors in various effect units provided in the back unit 3000 of the game board 5 can be configured in the same manner.

  Furthermore, in the embodiment described above, the conductor of the metal slide rail 3151 ns is electrically connected to the metal casing of the drive motor 3151 via the first conductor potential fluctuation preventing wire 3151 nc. , Metal slide rail 3151 ns conductor and other conductive members (for example, structures used to improve rigidity, mechanical parts of drive mechanism, electrical parts (including housing of electric parts), decoration Conductive plating applied to the structure of the above, and one conductor among a plurality of conductors such as a structure (including a structure for decoration) molded by a conductive resin and the other crossover wiring May be electrically connected. That is, it may be configured to be electrically connected by two or more stages of crossover wirings. In this case, a plurality of conductors may be electrically connected to each other by means of crossover wires, or a plurality of conductors may be connected in series and in parallel by crossover wires, respectively, and a metal screw is provided. Relays for electrically connecting one conductor to another conductor may be performed via the metal screw alone, or the lug plate (the metal lug terminal may be used as an insulating substrate). (The one fixed to the rear) may be provided via this lug plate. It is preferable that the plurality of crossover wires be configured to be short in length.

[10. Power supply board]
Next, the power supply substrate 630 provided in the power supply unit 620 c of the substrate unit 620 shown in FIG. 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. 154 to 159. FIG. 154 is a circuit diagram for explaining the outline of the circuit configuration of the power supply board, FIG. 155 is a partially enlarged perspective view of the power supply board, FIG. 156 is a view on arrow B in FIG. Fig. 158 shows silk printing of electronic parts printed on the mounting surface of the power supply substrate (part 2), and Fig. 159 shows discontinued electronic parts. It is a perspective view explaining an outline of. Here, first, the circuit configuration of the power supply substrate will be described, and subsequently, a method of identifying electronic components of the same shape, confirmation of fuse blowout, capacity of capacitors, and measures for discontinuing production of electronic components will be described.

  As described above, there is a transformer (not shown) in the island facility of the game hall, and the commercial power supply voltage of AC 100 V is stepped down to the power supply voltage of the gaming machine AC 24 V. When the plug of the power cord (not shown) is inserted into the AC 24 V power outlet which is the power supply voltage for the gaming machine of the island facility of the game hall, AC 24 V is supplied to the power supply substrate 630. The power supply substrate 630 creates various power supplies (DC +35 V, DC +12 V, DC +5 V, etc.) from AC 24 V supplied from the island facility of the game hall and supplies them from the power substrate 630 to each board in the pachinko machine 1 doing.

10-1. Circuit configuration of power supply board]
As shown in FIG. 154, the power supply substrate 630 includes a power switch 630a, a noise countermeasure circuit 630b, a rectifier circuit 630c, a power factor correction circuit 630d, a smoothing circuit 630e, a power generation circuit 630f, a power destruction circuit 630g, and a backup power supply. The circuit 630h is mainly configured.

  AC 24 V from the island facility of the game hall is supplied to the power supply line connector DCN1 via a power supply cord (not shown). When AC 24 V from the island facility of the game hall is supplied to the power supply line connector DCN1 via a power supply line (not shown), the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 (in the present embodiment, a transparent glass tube of 5 mm in diameter and 20 mm in length) (The support terminals at both ends are made of metal), and input to the input side terminals 3 and 1 of the power switch 630 a via the type B fusing specified by the Electrical Appliances and Materials Safety Act). Specifically, the line 24 of AC 24 V (hereinafter referred to as “AC 24 V 1” (may be described as “L side”) is input to the input side terminal 3 of the power switch 630 a, and the power switch An AC 24 V line 2 (hereinafter referred to as “AC 24 V 2” (sometimes referred to as “N side”)) is input to the input side terminal 1 of 630 a. The output terminals 4 and 2 of the power switch 630a are input to the noise reduction circuit 630b.

  When a staff member of a game hall or the like turns on the power switch 630a, the input terminal 3 and the output terminal 4 are electrically connected, and the AC 24V1 goes to various circuits of the power supply substrate 630 through the noise reduction circuit 630b. At the same time as the supply start, the input terminal 1 and the output terminal 2 are electrically connected, and the AC 24V2 is supplied to various circuits of the power supply substrate 630 through the noise reduction circuit 630b. As a result, the power of the pachinko machine 1 can be turned on by the ON operation of the power switch 630a. On the other hand, when a staff member of a game hall or the like turns off the power switch 630a, the input side terminal 3 and the output side terminal 4 are electrically disconnected from each other, and the AC 24V1 becomes to the various circuits of the power supply board 630. While the supply is cut off, the input terminal 1 and the output terminal 2 are electrically disconnected, and the supply of 24V AC to various circuits of the power supply substrate 630 is cut off. As a result, the power of the pachinko machine 1 can be shut off by the OFF operation of the power switch 630a.

  In the state where the power switch of the pachinko machine installed in the game hall is turned ON, the attendant of the game hall clerk etc. turns ON the breaker of the game hall to set up the pachinko machine in the game hall. The power may be turned on all at once, and by turning off the breaker of the game hall, the power shutoff of the pachinko machines installed in the game hall may be performed all at once.

[10-1-1. Noise suppression circuit]
The noise reduction circuit 630b includes a common mode noise reduction circuit CMC, which is a circuit for common mode noise reduction, a normal mode noise reduction circuit NMC, which is a circuit for normal mode noise reduction, and a choke coil L1. The side terminals 4 and 2 are input to the common mode noise reduction circuit CMC, the normal mode noise reduction circuit NMC, and the choke coil L1.

  The common mode noise countermeasure circuit CMC is composed of capacitors C1 and C2 and varistors ZNR1 and ZNR2. The capacitors C1 and C2 have the same capacitance and remove common mode noise. On the other hand, the varistors ZNR1 and ZNR2 are surge absorbing elements (surge absorbers), and their varistor voltages are the same. The varistors ZNR1 and ZNR2 remove noise that could not be reduced by the capacitors C1 and C2.

  One end of capacitor C1 is electrically connected to AC24V1 via power switch 630a, the other end of capacitor C1 is electrically connected to one end of capacitor C2, and the other end of capacitor C2 is AC24V2 via power switch 630a It is electrically connected. Further, one end of varistor ZNR1 is electrically connected to AC 24 V1 via power switch 630a, the other end of varistor ZNR1 is electrically connected to one end of varistor ZNR2, and the other end of varistor ZNR2 is via power switch 630a. It is electrically connected to AC24V2. The other end of the capacitor C1, the one end of the capacitor C2, the other end of the varistor ZNR1, and one end of the varistor ZNR1 are electrically connected and input to the ground connection terminal DCN5 as a frame ground FG2. The ground connection terminal DCN5 is electrically connected to the ground terminal ECN5 of the frame ground substrate 559 shown in FIG. 152 via a power supply ground wire (not shown).

  The normal mode noise reduction circuit NMC is composed of a capacitor C3 and a varistor ZNR3. The capacitor C3 is for removing normal mode noise generated in AC24V1 and AC24V2. The varistor ZNR3 is a surge absorbing element (surge absorber) and removes noise that can not be removed by the capacitor C3.

  One end of the capacitor C3 is electrically connected to AC24V1 through the power switch 630a, and the other end of the capacitor C3 is electrically connected to AC24V2 through the power switch 630a. Further, one end of the varistor ZNR3 is electrically connected to the AC 24V1 through the power switch 630a, and the other end of the varistor ZNR3 is electrically connected to the AC 24V2 through the power switch 630a.

  AC 24 V 1 output from the output side terminal 4 of the power switch 630 a is input to the choke coil L 1 through the common mode noise reduction circuit CMC and the normal mode noise reduction circuit NMC and is input to the power supply line connector DCN 2 as AC 24 VA, AC 24 V 2 output from the output side terminal 2 of the power switch 630 a is input to the choke coil L 1 through the common mode noise reduction circuit CMC and the normal mode noise reduction circuit NMC and is input to the power supply line connector DCN 2 as AC 24 V . The choke coil L1 is a component for preventing common mode noise of 24 V AC and 24 V AC, and prevents noise interference. The power supply line connector DCN2 is installed outside the pachinko machine 1 via a power supply line for an interface board not shown, an interface board 635 of the board unit 620 shown in FIG. 115, and a power supply line for a CR unit not shown. The unit is electrically connected to a non-CR unit and supplies AC 24 VA and AC 24 V to the not-shown CR unit.

  AC 24 V 1 and AC 24 V 2 whose common mode noise has been reduced by the choke coil L 1 are input to the rectifier circuit 630 c.

[10-1-2. Rectifier circuit]
The rectifier circuit 630c is composed of an N-channel field effect transistor (hereinafter referred to as "FET") Q1 and Q2 and a peripheral circuit 630ca. The peripheral circuit 630ca is a peripheral circuit of the FETs Q1 and Q2, and mainly includes a plurality of electronic components such as a resistor, a diode, and a zener diode.

  The AC 24V1 whose common mode noise has been reduced by the choke coil L1 is input to the anode terminal 1 and the anode terminal 3 of the Schottky barrier diode D1, and is also input to the gate terminal of the FET Q1 via the peripheral circuit 630ca. The signal is directly input to the drain terminal of the FET Q2 without passing through the peripheral circuit 630ca. AC 24 V 2 whose common mode noise is reduced by the choke coil L 1 is input to the anode terminal 1 and the anode terminal 3 of the Schottky barrier diode D 2, and is also input to the gate terminal of the FET Q 2 via the peripheral circuit 630 ca. The signal is directly input to the drain terminal of the FET Q1 without passing through the peripheral circuit 630ca. The source terminals of the FETs Q1 and Q2 are input to the CAI terminal of the power supply generation circuit 630f.

  AC24V1 and AC24V2 whose common mode noise has been reduced by the choke coil L1 are rectified to DC by switching by the FETs Q1 and Q2 and the peripheral circuit 630ca, and the cathode terminal 2 of the Schottky barrier diode D1 and the cathode terminal of the Schottky barrier diode D2 And 2 respectively. The package types of the FET Q1, FET Q2, Schottky barrier diode D1 and Schottky barrier diode D2 are so-called TO-220F, which are the same type and fixed to the radiation fin HS1 (see FIG. 155). ing. The heat dissipating fins HS1 are soldered to and fixed to the power supply substrate 630 and are thereby grounded to the ground (GND) of the power supply substrate 630.

  As described above, AC 24 V 1 and AC 24 V 2 whose common mode noise has been reduced by the choke coil L 1 are input to the anode terminals of the diodes D 5 and D 6 in addition to the rectifier circuit 630 c, and cathode terminals of the diodes D 5 and D 6. Are respectively output to the AC-DET terminal of the power supply generation circuit 630f.

  The rectified direct current output from the cathode terminals 2 of the Schottky barrier diodes D1 and D2 is input to the power factor correction circuit 630d via the choke coil L2.

[10-1-3. Power factor improvement circuit]
The power factor correction circuit 630 d includes an N-channel field effect transistor (hereinafter referred to as “FET”) Q 3 and Q 4 and a peripheral circuit 630 da. The peripheral circuit 630da is a peripheral circuit of the FETs Q3 and Q4, and mainly includes a plurality of electronic components such as a resistor, a diode, and an inductor.

  The direct current whose common mode noise is reduced by the choke coil L2 is input to the anode terminal 1 and the anode terminal 3 of the Schottky barrier diodes D9 and D10, respectively, and the drain terminals of the FETs Q3 and Q4 are directly output without passing through the peripheral circuit 630da. Are input to The gate terminals of the power factor improvement circuit from the PFC-GATE terminal of the power supply generation circuit are input to the gate terminals of the FETs Q3 and Q4 via the peripheral circuit 630da. The source terminals and drain terminals of the FETs Q3 and Q4 are grounded to the ground (GND) of the power supply substrate 630 via the peripheral circuit 630da.

  The direct current whose common mode noise has been reduced by the choke coil L2 is switched by the FETs Q3 and Q4 and the peripheral circuit 630da to suppress the generation of harmonics and improve the power factor, and the cathode terminals 2 of the Schottky barrier diodes D9 and D10 Each is output from. The package types of FETs Q3 and Q4 and Schottky barrier diodes D9 and D10 are the same as the package types of FETs Q1 and Q2 and Schottky barrier diodes D1 and D2 (TO-220F described above) It is fixed to the fin HS2 (see FIG. 155). The heat dissipating fins HS2 are connected to the ground (GND) of the power supply substrate 630 by being soldered and fixed to the power supply substrate 630.

  The direct current whose power factor has been improved by the power factor correction circuit 630d is input to the smoothing circuit 630e.

[10-1-4. Smoothing circuit]
The smoothing circuit 630e is composed of a plurality of electrolytic capacitors (not shown). The negative terminal of each of the plurality of electrolytic capacitors is grounded to the ground (GND) of the power supply substrate 630, and the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor receives a direct current whose power factor is improved by the power factor improvement circuit 630d. Smoothing circuit 630e smoothes (smoothens) the pulse current from direct current whose power factor is improved by power factor correction circuit 630d and outputs it to the PFC-OUT terminal of power supply generation circuit 630f, as well as fuse FUSE3 (this embodiment). In form, it is the same shape as fuse FUSE1 and FUSE2, diameter: 5mm, length: through transparent glass tube (support terminals of both ends are metal made, B class melting specified by the Electrical Appliances and Materials Safety Act) Then, the power supply substrate 630 is supplied to each substrate inside the pachinko machine 1 as direct current + 35V. The power supply line supplied via the fuse FUSE 3 is a +35 V power supply line of each substrate in the pachinko machine 1.

[10-1-5. Power supply creation circuit]
When the direct current from the smoothing circuit 630e is input to the PFC-OU terminal, the power supply generation circuit 630f generates DC +12 V and DC +5 V from the input DC. The power supply generation circuit 630f outputs the generated DC +12 V from the +12 V terminal and supplies it from the power supply substrate 630 to each board inside the pachinko machine 1, and outputs the generated DC +5 V from the +5 V terminal to output pachinko machine from the power substrate 630 1 Supply to each substrate inside. The power supply line supplied from the +12 V terminal of the power supply generation circuit 630f becomes the +12 V power supply line of each substrate in the pachinko machine 1, and the power supply line supplied from the +5 V terminal of the power supply generation circuit 630f is +5 V of each substrate in the pachinko machine 1 It becomes a power supply line.

  The power supply generation circuit 630f controls switching of the FETs Q3 and Q4 in the power factor correction circuit 630d and the peripheral circuit 630da by performing control to output a gate signal for power factor correction from the PFC-GATE terminal to the power factor correction circuit 630d. To suppress the generation of harmonics.

  In the power supply generation circuit 630 f, AC 24 V 1 and AC 24 V 2 whose common mode noise has been reduced by the choke coil L 1 are input to the AC-DET terminal through the diodes D 5 and D 6. The power supply generation circuit 630f monitors the voltage input to the AC-DET terminal, and determines whether to output a gate signal for the power supply destruction circuit from the FUSE-GATE terminal to the power supply destruction circuit 630g.

  The plug of the power cord (not shown) is not plugged into the AC 24V power outlet that is the power supply voltage for the gaming machines on the island facilities of the game hall, and erroneously into the AC 100V power outlet that is a commercial power supply voltage higher than AC 24V that is the power supply voltage for gaming machines. When inserted, a power supply voltage higher than +35 V DC is input from the smoothing circuit 630e to the PFC-OUT terminal of the power generation circuit 630f.

  The power supply generation circuit 630 f has a value at which the magnitude of the power supply voltage is predetermined based on the power supply voltage in which the common mode noise is reduced by the choke coil L 1 input to the AC-DET terminal (threshold: present embodiment) Then, when the voltage reaches approximately 50 V), it is possible to output the gate signal for the power supply destruction circuit to the power supply destruction circuit 630g.

  When the power supply generation circuit 630f outputs a gate signal for the power supply destruction circuit 630g to the power supply destruction circuit 630g, the power supply destruction circuit 630g self-destructs and enters the short mode. When the power supply destruction circuit 630g is in the short mode, when the power supply switch 630a is turned on, the current passing through the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 is supplied via the noise reduction circuit 630b, the rectifier circuit 630c and the power supply destruction circuit 630g. By rapidly flowing toward the CGND terminal of the formation circuit 630f, a large current flows through the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2, and one or both of the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 are melted.

  The GND terminal of the power supply generation circuit 630 f is grounded to the ground (GND) of the power supply substrate 630. The ground (GND) of the power supply substrate 630 to which the GND terminal of the power supply generation circuit 630f is grounded is the ground (GND) line of each substrate inside the pachinko machine 1.

[10-1-6. Power supply destruction circuit]
The power supply breakdown circuit 630g is composed of an N-channel field effect transistor (hereinafter referred to as "FET") Q5, resistors R25 and R24, and a capacitor C22. The drain terminal of the FET Q5 is electrically connected to the cathode terminal 2 of the Schottky barrier diodes D1 and D2. The gate terminal of the FET Q5 is electrically connected to one end of the resistor 25, and the other end of the resistor R25 is electrically connected to the FUSE-GATE terminal of the power supply generation circuit 630f. The source terminal of the FET Q5 is electrically connected to one end of the resistor R24, electrically connected to one end of the capacitor C22, and electrically connected to the CGND terminal of the power supply generation circuit 630f. The other end of the resistor R24 and the other end of the capacitor C22 have one end electrically connected to the other end opposite to the resistor R25 electrically connected to the gate terminal of the FET Q5. In addition to the other end of the resistor R25, the other end of the resistor R24 and the other end of the capacitor C22 are electrically connected to the FUSE-GATE terminal of the.

  In the power supply destruction circuit 630g, when the gate signal for the power supply destruction circuit is input from the FUSE-GATE terminal of the power supply generation circuit 630f to the gate terminal of the FET Q5 via the resistor R25, the FET Q5 operates to drain to source terminals of the FET Q5. As a large current flows toward it (the drain terminal and the source terminal of FET Q5 become an overcurrent), the FET Q5 is destroyed, and the short mode state in which the drain terminal and the source terminal of FET Q5 conduct is maintained. Be done. The FET Q5 is the same as the package type of the FETs Q1, Q2, Q3, Q4 and the Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9, D10 (TO-220F described above), but the FET Q1 is Unlike Q1, Q2, Q3 and Q4 and Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9 and D10, they are disposed at positions not in contact with the radiation fins HS1 and HS2. Specifically, the FET Q5 is disposed between the radiation fins HS1 and HS2 and is not fixed at all to the radiation fins HS1 and HS2 (see FIGS. 155 and 156). This is intended to absorb and cool the heat through the radiation fins HS1 and HS2 so that the FETs Q1, Q2, Q3 and Q4 and the Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9 and D10 are not broken by heat generation. In contrast to this, FET Q5 is short-circuited by heat generation when FET Q5 operates and a large current flows from the drain terminal to the source terminal of FET Q5 (the drain and source terminals of FET Q5 become an overcurrent) It is to contribute to being destroyed in time.

  That is, the plug of the power cord is not plugged into the AC 24V power outlet for the gaming machine of the island equipment of the game hall, and erroneously into the AC 100V power outlet for the commercial power source voltage higher than AC 24V for the gaming machine. When inserted, power supply generation circuit 630 f sets the value of the power supply voltage to a predetermined value based on the power supply voltage of which common mode noise is reduced by choke coil L 1 input to the AC-DET terminal. In this embodiment, when the voltage reaches approximately 50 V.), the gate signal for the power supply breakdown circuit is output to the power supply breakdown circuit 630g to control the FET Q5 to be self-destructed. As a result, the short mode state in which the drain terminal and the source terminal of FET Q5 are conducted is maintained, and the source terminal of FET Q5 is electrically connected to the CGND terminal of the power generation circuit 630f. When the ON operation is performed, the current passing through the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 is supplied with the noise reduction circuit 630b, the rectification circuit 630c, and the FET Q5 in the short mode in the power supply destruction circuit 630g. By rapidly flowing toward the CGND terminal, a large current flows through the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 and one or both of the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 are melted, only the power supply substrate 630 is broken, and the plug of the power cord is commercial Power supply voltage A Even inserted incorrectly into a power outlet of 100 V, so that the can be reliably prevented that the pachinko machine 1 within each substrate except the power substrate 630 is broken.

  In addition, the plug of the power cord is not plugged into the AC 24V power outlet that is the power supply voltage for the gaming machines on the island facilities of the game hall, and mistakenly into the AC 100V power outlet that is a commercial power supply voltage higher than AC 24V that is the power supply voltage for gaming machines. When it is inserted and the FET Q5 of the power supply destruction circuit 630g is destroyed, replace the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 with ones that are not fused, and connect the plug of the power cord to AC24V that is the power supply voltage of the gaming machine island facility Even if it is plugged into the power supply outlet, the FET Q5 of the power supply destruction circuit 630g is already broken and the short mode is maintained, so the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2, the power supply switch 630a, the noise reduction circuit 630b, and the rectifier circuit 630c , And in the power destruction circuit 630g When a large current flows toward the CGND terminal of the power supply generation circuit 630f through the FET Q5 in the short mode, a large current flows in the replaced fuse FUSE1 and FUSE2, and one of the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 or Both will melt again. In other words, if you do not replace the power supply substrate 630 where the FETQ5 of the power supply destruction circuit 630g is already destroyed with a normal power supply substrate 630 where the FETQ5 of the power supply destruction circuit 630g is not broken, the plug of the power cord is the island facility of the game hall Even if it is plugged into the AC 24V power supply outlet, which is the power supply voltage for gaming machines, it is impossible to start playing a game.

[10-1-7. Backup power circuit]
The backup power supply circuit 630h includes a Schottky barrier diode D20 and a capacitor BC0. The Schottky barrier diode D20 has a low forward voltage drop and a high switching speed. The anode terminal of Schottky barrier diode D20 is electrically connected to the power supply line (that is, +5 V power supply line) supplied from the +5 V terminal of power supply generation circuit 630f, and the cathode terminal of Schottky barrier diode D20 is a capacitor BC0. It is electrically connected to the positive (+) terminal. The negative (-) terminal of the capacitor BC0 is grounded to the ground (GND). A main power source serving as a backup power supply line from the cathode terminal of Schottky barrier diode D20 to the positive (+) terminal of capacitor BC0 to the main control built-in RAM of main control MPU 1310a provided on main control substrate 1310X shown in FIG. A circuit is formed to have a wiring pattern for taking out VBB and a payment VBB serving as a backup power supply line to the payout control built-in RAM of the payout control MPU 633aa provided in the payout control portion 633a of the payout control substrate 633 shown in FIG. There is.

  That is, the negative (-) terminal of the capacitor BC0 is grounded to the ground (GND). Main VBB serving as a backup power supply line from the cathode terminal of Schottky barrier diode D20 to the positive (+) terminal of capacitor BC0 to the main control built-in RAM of main control MPU 1310a provided on main control substrate 1310X The circuit is divided into two systems: a payment VBB serving as a backup power supply line to a payout control built-in RAM of the payout control MPU 633aa provided in the payout control portion 633a of the substrate 633.

  When the pachinko machine 1 is powered on or a power failure or momentary interruption occurs to restore the power, the power supply line (that is, +5 V power supply line) supplied from the +5 V terminal of the power generation circuit 630f is a Schottky barrier diode D20. The voltage is supplied to the capacitor BC0 via the capacitor to charge the capacitor BC0, and is also supplied to the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU 1310a provided on the main control board 1310X as the main VBB to hold various information stored in the main control built-in RAM Then, the information is supplied to the payout control internal RAM of the payout control MPU 633aa provided in the payout control portion 633a of the payout control board 633 as the payout VBB and holds various information stored in the payout control internal RAM.

  On the other hand, the pachinko machine 1 is powered off (including the case where the pachinko machines installed in the game hall are shut off at the same time by turning off the breaker of the game hall), a power failure or a momentary stoppage occurs. If this happens, +5 V DC from the power supply line (that is, the +5 V power supply line) supplied from the +5 V terminal of the power supply generation circuit 630 f is not supplied to the capacitor BC0. In response to this, the capacitor BC0 starts discharging. While this discharge is prevented from being supplied to the power supply line (that is, the +5 V power supply line) supplied from the +5 V terminal of the power supply generation circuit 630f by the Schottky barrier diode D20, the discharge is provided in the main control board 1310X as the main VBB. Supplied to the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU 1310a to hold various information stored in the main control built-in RAM, and supplied to the payout control built-in RAM of the payout control MPU 633aa provided in the payout control unit 633a of the payout control board 633 as the payout VBB. And holds various information stored in the payout control built-in RAM.

  That is, the pachinko machine 1 is shut off (including the case where the pachinko machines installed in the game hall are shut off at the same time by turning off the breaker of the game hall), a power failure or momentary stoppage occurs. Then, even if DC +5 V by the power supply line (that is, +5 V power supply line) supplied from the +5 V terminal of the power supply generation circuit 630f is not supplied to the capacitor BC0, the main control board 1310X serves as the main VBB by the discharge of the capacitor BC0. A variety of information stored in the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU 1310a is stored, and stored as a payout VBB in the payout control built-in RAM of the payout control MPU 633aa provided in the payout control unit 633a of the payout control board 633. Information is stored.

10-2. Method of identifying electronic components having the same shape]
Next, a method of identifying an electronic component having the same shape and mounted on the power supply substrate 630 will be described. As described above, the electronic components having the same shape mounted on the power supply substrate 630 include the FETs Q1 and Q2 and the Schottky barrier diodes D1 and D2 of the rectifier circuit 630c and the FETs Q3 and Q4 and the Schottky of the power factor improvement circuit 630d. The package types in the barrier diodes D9 and D10 and the FET Q5 of the power supply destruction circuit 630g are the same type (TO-220F), and the shapes of the fuses FUSE1, FUSE2 and FUSE3 are also the same shape (diameter: 5 mm, length Length: 20 mm transparent glass tube (support terminals at both ends are made of metal)).

  Although FETs Q1, Q2, Q3, Q4, Q5 and Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9, D10 are completely different types of electronic components, FETs Q1, Q2, Q3, Q4 and Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9 and D10 are electronic components that can not be destroyed, and FET Q5 is the only electronic component that can be destroyed. Therefore, in the present embodiment, as the electronic components having the same shape mounted on the power supply substrate 630, electrons which are the only one of the FETs Q1, Q2, Q3, Q4, Q5 and the Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9, D10 are broken. In order to facilitate identification of the components, silk printing printed on the mounting surface of the power supply substrate 630 is adopted which has features different from those of the other.

  Specifically, for FETs Q1, Q2, Q3, Q4 and Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9, D10, which are electronic components not to be destroyed, a white outline is shown as shown in FIG. Lines and thick white lines indicating the direction in which the electronic components are arranged, as silk printing, for Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9, D10, for silk printing TSL K 1 to 4 and FETs Q1, Q 2, Q 3 and Q 4 The TSLKs 5 to 8 are printed on the mounting surface of the power supply substrate 630. White thick lines are fixed to the radiation fins HS1 and HS2. In FIG. 155, FETs Q1, Q2, Q3 and Q4 and Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9 and D10 need to be arranged adjacent to each other in order to fix them to radiation fins HS1 and HS2. HS2 is printed on the mounting surface of the power supply substrate 630 so as to be in an arrangement in which the silk printing of the white outline and the white thick line part of the silk printing TSLK1 to 8 are arranged.

  On the other hand, for FET Q5, which is the only electronic component to be destroyed, as shown in FIG. 157 (b), white outlines and white hatched lines arranged at equal intervals within the outlines are shown. Silk printing TSLK9 is printed on the mounting surface of the power supply substrate 630 as silk printing, and ad1 and a thick white line indicating the direction in which the electronic component is arranged. That is, the white diagonal line ad1 is represented as a characteristic pattern.

  Thus, even if the FETs Q1, Q2, Q3, Q4, and Q5 and the Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9, and D10 have the same shape, silk printing is performed on the mounting surface of the power supply substrate 630. Of the TSLKs 1 to 9, by visually observing the white hatched ad1 represented as a characteristic pattern, an electronic component of the different types of electronic components having the same shape is focused on compared with other electronic components. It is possible to identify whether it is an electronic component to be. Thus, it is possible to very easily identify which electronic component is the only one to be destroyed among different types of electronic components having the same shape.

  In addition, when the person in charge of the service center of the manufacturer of the pachinko machine 1 instructs FETQ 5 to a clerk in the game hall by telephone, a silk-printed TSLK 9 having a white hatched ad 1 represented as a characteristic pattern By instructing to search for a person in charge at the game hall, the person in charge at the game hall can grasp the position of the FET Q 5 properly, so it is easy to communicate between the person in charge at the service center and the person in charge at the game hall. Become.

  Thereby, when the person in charge of the service center of the manufacturer of the pachinko machine 1 instructs FETQ 5 by telephone to the clerk of the game hall or the like, the clerk of the game hall or the like is as instructed by the person in charge of the service center. Of the plurality of electronic components mounted on the power supply substrate 630, the target FET Q5 can be identified. Therefore, among the plurality of electronic components, the FET Q5 to be noted can be identified from the other electronic components FETQ1, Q2, Q3, Q4 and the Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9, D10.

  The FETs Q1, Q2, Q3, Q4, Q5 and the Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9, D10, as described above, are completely different electronic parts, while the fuses FUSE1, FUSE2, FUSE3 are identical. Although it is a kind of electronic component, AC100V is a commercial power supply voltage higher than AC24V which is a power supply voltage for game machines, because the plug of the power cord is not plugged into the AC24V power supply outlet which is a power supply voltage for game machines in the game hall If it is accidentally inserted into the power supply outlet, as described above, the FET Q5 of the power supply destruction circuit 630g is self-destructed to maintain the short mode, and a large current flows through the fuse FUSE1 and FUSE2 to cause one or both of the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 Will melt. That is, as a trace that the plug of the power cord is mistakenly inserted into the AC 100 V power outlet, which is a commercial power supply voltage, one or both of the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 are destroyed after the fuses FUSE1, FUSE2 and FUSE3. There is. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the electronic component having the same shape mounted on the power supply substrate 630 is printed on the mounting surface of the power supply substrate 630 so that the electronic component to be destroyed among the fuses FUSE1, FUSE2 and FUSE3 can be easily identified. The adopted silk printing has features different from other ones.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 158 (a), the fuse FUSE3, which is an electronic component that is not broken even if the plug of the power cord is accidentally inserted into the AC 100 V power outlet that is a commercial power supply voltage, is white. The silk-screened FSLK 1 is printed on the mounting surface of the power supply substrate 630 as silk-screened outlines.

  On the other hand, fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2, which are electronic components that are accidentally destroyed as a trace that the plug of the power supply cord is accidentally plugged into the AC 100 V power outlet, which is a commercial power supply voltage, are shown in FIG. As described above, the silk-printed FSLKs 2 and 3 are printed on the mounting surface of the power supply substrate 630 as silk printing, with the white outline and the area ad2 in which the inside of the outline is solidly coated in white. That is, the area ad2 solidly painted in white is represented as a characteristic pattern. Although both ends of the fuses FUSE1, FUSE2 and FUSE3 are soldered to the power supply substrate 630 with a support bracket (not shown) respectively, they are solidly painted in white in the region between the inside of the white outline and the periphery of the support The area ad2 can be viewed visually, and the area ad2 which is the inside area of the white outline and which is transparent to the transparent glass tube excluding the ends of the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 and which is solidly coated in white is transparent It is possible to be reliably observed through a transparent glass tube.

  Thus, even if the fuses FUSE1, FUSE2, and FUSE3 are electronic components having the same shape, the white color represented as a characteristic pattern among the silk-printed FSLKs 1 to 3 printed on the mounting surface of the power supply substrate 630 By visually observing the solidly coated area ad2, among electronic components of the same type having the same shape, it is possible to identify which electronic component is an electronic component to be watched in comparison with other electronic components It has become. As a result, it is extremely easy to determine which electronic component of the same type of electronic components having the same shape is an electronic component showing a trace that the plug of the power cord is mistakenly inserted into the AC 100 V power outlet which is the commercial power supply voltage. Can be identified.

  In addition, when the person in charge of the service center of the manufacturer of the pachinko machine 1 instructs the staff of the game hall clerk or the like to use the fuse FUSE 1 or FUSE 2, the area painted solid white is displayed as a characteristic pattern By instructing to search silk printing FSLK 2 and 3 having ad 2, it is possible for a clerk of a game hall clerk or the like to accurately grasp the positions of fuses FUSE 1 and FUSE 2. It becomes easy to communicate with the clerks and other staff.

  Thus, when the person in charge of the service center of the manufacturer of pachinko machine 1 instructs Hughes FUSE 1 and FUSE 2 by phone to the staff of the staff in the game hall, the staff of the staff in the game hall is Among the plurality of electronic components mounted on the power supply substrate 630, it is possible to specify the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 to be noted, as instructed by the above. Therefore, the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 to be noticed among the plurality of electronic components can be identified from the fuse FUSE3 which is another electronic component.

10-3. Confirmation of melting of fuse]
Next, confirmation of melting of the fuses FUSE1, FUSE2 and FUSE3 of the same type and mounted on the power supply substrate 630 will be described. As described above, the fuses FUSE1, FUSE2 and FUSE3 are transparent glass tubes (support terminals of both ends are made of metal), and when melted, the fuse wires accommodated in the transparent glass tube are disconnected and the transparent glass tube is disconnected Soot adheres to the inside of Among the fuses FUSE1, FUSE2 and FUSE3, as described above, the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 are electronic components capable of showing a trace that the plug of the power cord is mistakenly inserted into the AC 100 V power outlet which is a commercial power supply voltage. If the plug of the power cord is accidentally plugged into a 100 V AC power outlet that is a commercial power supply voltage, it will melt. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the silk-printed FSLKs 2 and 3 described above are printed on the mounting surface of the power supply substrate 630 as silk printing on the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 so that the fused fuse lines can be easily confirmed. As described above, the silk-printed FSLKs 2 and 3 correspond to the transparent glass tubes except for the fuse FUSE 1 and FUSE 2 except that the white solid area ad 2 is expressed as a characteristic pattern. By visually observing the area ad2 solidly coated in white through a transparent glass tube, it is possible to easily confirm the presence or absence of a break in the fuse line accommodated in the transparent glass tube of the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2.

  As a result, a staff of a game hall clerk or a worker who installs the pachinko machine 1 (replaces the game board 5) operates the plug of the power cord for supplying the pachinko machine 1 with the power supply voltage. When power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1 by turning on the power switch 630a of the power supply substrate 630 by plugging in the AC 100 V power outlet, which is not a commercial power supply voltage, accidentally, the fuse FUSE1, FUSE2 Among them, the fuse wire stored in one or both of the transparent glass tubes is broken, and the soot adheres to the inside of the transparent glass tube, so a staff member such as a game clerk or a worker etc. Even if the plug is plugged into a power outlet, the power can not be turned on, so it may not be the initial failure. " Wiring errors), it is so that it can not (can not excuse) to cheat.

  On the other hand, as described above, silk printing FSLK1 is printed on the mounting surface of the power supply substrate 630 as silk printing for the fuse FUSE3. In the present embodiment, green is employed as the resist of the power supply substrate 630. Further, in the present embodiment, a green resist is solidly coated on the area of the mounting surface of the power supply substrate 630 corresponding to the silk-printed FSLK1 for the fuse FUSE3. The wiring pattern is not laid out at all in the area of the solid-painted green resist corresponding to the transparent glass tube of the fuse FUSE3 (that is, the solid-painted green resist corresponding to the transparent glass tube of the fuse FUSE3) Since the wiring pattern is formed so as to avoid the area of (1), no wiring pattern is formed at all in this area). This is a fuse wire accommodated in the transparent glass tube of the fuse FUSE 3 by visually observing the area of the solid green resist corresponding to the transparent glass tube of the fuse FUSE 3 through the transparent glass tube The visibility of the state is improved, and the presence or absence of disconnection of the fuse line can be confirmed.

  Also, in the area of the solid green resist corresponding to the transparent glass tube of the fuse FUSE3, the fuse FUSE3 is transparent as in the case where the wiring pattern is not laid out even when all the wiring patterns are laid out. The visibility of the fuse wire housed in the transparent glass tube of the fuse FUSE 3 by visually observing the area of the solid green resist corresponding to the transparent glass tube through the transparent glass tube Thus, it is possible to easily check the presence or absence of the disconnection of the fuse line.

  As described above, the power supply line connector DCN2 of the power supply board 630 is provided via the interface board power supply line (not shown), the interface board 635 of the board unit 620 shown in FIG. 115, and the CR unit power supply line (not shown). It is electrically connected to a CR unit (not shown) installed outside the pachinko machine 1 and supplies AC 24 VA and AC 24 V to the CR unit (not shown). In other words, in addition to the function as means for relaying various signals, the interface board 635 also has a function as means for supplying power to the CR unit (not shown). The interface substrate 635 is a fuse FUSE (in the present embodiment, a transparent glass tube having a diameter of 5 mm and a length of 20 mm (the support terminals at both ends are made of metal), Class B melting specified by the Electrical Appliances and Materials Safety Act) The silkscreen shown in FIG. 158 (a) for the fuse FUSE3 of the power supply substrate 630 described above is printed on its mounting surface. A green resist is solidly coated on the area of the mounting surface of the interface substrate 635 corresponding to silk printing for the fuse FUSE (not shown). The wiring pattern is not laid out at all in the area of the solid glass coated with the transparent glass tube of the fuse FUSE not shown (that is, the solid glass corresponding to the transparent glass tube of the fuse FUSE not shown) No wiring pattern is formed at all in this area because the wiring pattern is formed so as to avoid the green resist area). This is accommodated in the transparent glass tube of the fuse FUSE by visually observing the transparent glass tube of the fuse FUSE not shown and the area of the solid green resist corresponding to the transparent glass tube. By improving the visibility of the state of the fuse line, it is possible to confirm the presence or absence of a break in the fuse line. The fuse FUSE (not shown) provided on the interface substrate 635 can be configured to be provided on one of AC 24 VA and AC 24 V supplied from the power supply line connector DCN 2 of the power supply substrate 630, and configured to be provided on both of them. It can also be done.

  Also, in the area of the solid green resist corresponding to the transparent glass tube of the fuse FUSE not shown, it is not shown as in the case where the wiring pattern is not laid out even if all the wiring patterns are laid out. The fuse FUSE transparent glass tube and the corresponding solid-painted green resist area are visually observed through the transparent glass tube to show the state of the fuse wire accommodated in the fuse FUSE transparent glass tube By improving the visibility, it is possible to easily check the presence or absence of a break in the fuse line.

10-4. Capacitor capacity]
Next, the capacitance of the capacitor BC0 will be described. As described above, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on or a power failure or momentary interruption occurs to return the power to the capacitor BC0, the power supply line supplied from the +5 V terminal of the power generation circuit 630f (that is, +5 V power supply) The pachinko machine 1 is cut off while the pachinko machine 1 is powered off (a break in the game hall) while charging can be performed by supplying +5 V DC to the capacitor BC0 via the Schottky barrier diode D20. Power off of pachinko machines installed in the game hall at the same time by performing the OFF operation)), when a power failure or momentary stoppage occurs, the power supplied from the +5 V terminal of the power generation circuit 630 f Discharge in response to the fact that +5 V DC by the line (that is, the +5 V power supply line) is not supplied to the capacitor BC0. To start.

  The pachinko machine 1 is powered off due to the discharge of the capacitor BC0 (including the case where the pachinko machines installed in the game hall are simultaneously shut off by turning off the breaker of the gaming hall), a power failure or the like. In the state where a momentary power failure occurs, various information stored in the main control internal RAM is maintained by supplying a backup power supply as the main VBB to the main control internal RAM of the main control MPU 1310a provided on the main control board 1310X. At the same time, various information stored in the payout control built-in RAM is held by supplying the backup power as the payment VBB to the payout control built-in RAM of the payout control MPU 633aa provided in the payout control unit 633a of the payout control board 633 It is supposed to be.

  When the operation of the game hall is finished, the clerks of the game hall and the like turn off the breaker of the game hall to simultaneously shut off the power of the pachinko machines installed in the game hall. Then, when starting the next sales (usually, the power switch of the pachinko machine installed in the game hall remains in the ON state). The clerk of the game hall clerk etc. breaks the game hall By turning ON the power of the pachinko machine installed in the game hall is turned on at the same time. At this time, if the capacity of capacitor BC0 is small, discharging of capacitor BC0 is completed during the period from the end of the game hall business to the start of the next business, and thus the main control board 1310X is equipped with the main Various information of the payout control built-in RAM of the payout control MPU 633aa provided in the main control built-in RAM of the control MPU 1310a and the payout control unit 633a of the payout control board 633 can not be held. As a result, when the salesperson or other clerk of the game hall turns on the breaker of the game hall at the start of sales, if the power on of the pachinko machine installed in the game hall is simultaneously turned on, the RAM clear switch Regardless of whether the main control board is operated or not, the main control MPU included in the main control board determines the checksum (sum value) error of the main control built-in RAM in power-on processing and erases the contents of the main control built-in RAM completely Since all pachinko machines simultaneously execute the RAM clear notification to notify that they have been cleared, the RAM clear notification sound flowing from the speakers of all the pachinko machines will be sounded in the game hall. In this case, in all the pachinko machines, the payout control MPU provided on the payout control board determines a checksum (sum value) error of the payout control built-in RAM in the power-on process, and the contents of the payout control built-in RAM are completely Erase (clear).

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the capacity of the capacitor BC0 is selected so as not to execute the RAM clear notification even when the sales of the gaming hall is ended and the next sales is started. Specifically, to the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU 1310a provided on the main control board 1310X as the main VBB for about 3 days (about 72 hours) after the end of the game hall business as the capacity of the capacitor BC0 While being able to supply and hold various information stored in the main control built-in RAM, it is supplied to the payout control built-in RAM of the payout control MPU 633aa provided in the payout control portion 633a of the payout control board 633 as a payout VBB and built-in payout control A storage capacity capable of holding various information stored in the RAM is selected. The selection of this capacity is made by the payout control built-in RAM of the payout control MPU 633 aa provided in the payout control portion 633 a of the payout control substrate 633 and the power consumption of the main VBB supplied to the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU 1310 a included in the main control substrate 1310 X Compared with the power consumption of the paid VBB supplied to the, it is also taken into consideration that it may be about 10 times larger. The power consumption of the control voltage (DC +5 V) supplied to the main control MPU 1310 a included in the main control board 1310 X is the control voltage (DC +5 V) supplied to the payout control MPU 633 aa included in the payout control unit 633 a of the payout control board 633 Compared to the power consumption of

10-5. Discontinuation of manufacturing electronic parts]
Next, the measures for discontinuing production will be described. First, with regard to a board treated as a main board such as a power supply board, a main control board, a payout control board, etc. due to various circumstances of the pachinko machine 1, lead type electronic components are mounted on the mounting surface which is the front side. It is necessary to solder on the side that is the soldering surface. However, although lead type electronic components are important among manufacturers that manufacture game machines such as pachinko machines, slots, and fusion game machines, other general electric machine manufacturers are able to reduce the size of the surface mount type ( The so-called SMD type is used. For this reason, the production number of lead type electronic components may be reduced due to a decrease in the number. Even if the lead type electronic components obtained from one electronic component manufacturer are discontinued and they are searched for substitutes, there is a high probability that other electronic component manufacturers will also be discontinued. Therefore, it becomes difficult to mount the lead-type electronic component on the substrate to be treated as the main substrate in the end.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, it is possible to mount a lead-typed electronic component that can be configured as an electronic component of a lead type as an electronic component of a lead type on a mounting surface of a substrate treated as a main substrate . Here, the Schottky barrier diode D20 of the backup power supply circuit 630h of the power supply substrate 630 will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 159 (a), Schottky barrier diode D20 has positions corresponding to anode side D20ca and cathode side D20cb serving as terminals of SMD type Schottky barrier diode D20b on the surface (mounting surface) of substrate D20a. The land patterns D20da and D20db for SMD are formed, and the land patterns D20fa and D20fb for leads are formed at positions where the one ends of the leads D20ea and D20eb corresponding to the SMD land patterns D20da and D20db are arranged, and the land patterns D20da for SMD , D20db and wiring patterns D20ga, D20gb for electrically connecting the lead land patterns D20fa, D20fb are formed.

  The SMD land patterns D20da and D20db formed on the surface (mounting surface) of the substrate D20a are arranged and soldered so as to correspond to the anode side D20ca and cathode side D20cb, which are terminals of the Schottky barrier diode D20b of SMD type. The anode side D20ca and the cathode side D20cb are soldered to the SMD land patterns D20da and D20db, and one ends of the leads D20ea and D20eb are respectively soldered to the lead land patterns D20fa and D20fb. Then, the entire surface (mounting surface) and the back surface of the substrate D20a are molded by being covered with an epoxy resin to form an electronic component body D20h covering one end of the SMD type Schottky barrier diode D20b and the leads D20ea and D20eb. The Schottky barrier diode D20 can be configured as a lead-typed electronic component in which two leads D20ea and D20eb protrude from the electronic component body D20h. As shown in FIG. 159 (b), a symbol D20ha indicating the forward direction of the Schottky barrier diode D20 is printed on the front surface and / or the back surface of the electronic component body D20h. Further, although not shown, the manufacturing company name and the product number (number listed in the catalog) of the Schottky barrier diode D20 are also printed on the front surface and / or the back surface of the electronic component body D20h.

  As described above, since SMD type electronic components can be configured as lead type electronic components, even if production is discontinued due to a decrease in the number of lead type electronic components being manufactured, it is generally difficult to obtain It can respond using the electronic component of SMD type which an electric machine maker uses.

  Although the Schottky barrier diode D20 has been described in the above-described embodiment, the present invention can also be applied to an SMD type capacitor, an SMD type resistor, an SMD type coil, or the like. Alternatively, the same SMD type electronic components may be arranged in a line in an array to form a lead-typed electronic component.

  Next, measures are taken against the commercial power supply voltage when the plug of the power cord for supplying the AC power from the island facility of the game hall to the pachinko machine 1 is accidentally inserted into the commercial power supply voltage (AC 100 V) power outlet Another configuration of the present invention (hereinafter, referred to as “a configuration of the commercial power supply voltage countermeasure according to the second embodiment”) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 160 shows the configuration of the commercial power supply voltage countermeasure according to the second embodiment. In FIG. 160, members having the same functions as the embodiment shown in FIG. 154 (hereinafter referred to as “the configuration of the commercial power supply voltage countermeasure according to the first embodiment”) are given the same reference numerals. expressed.

[Comparison between the configuration of the commercial power supply voltage countermeasure according to the first embodiment and the configuration of the commercial power supply voltage countermeasure according to the second embodiment]
In the configuration of the commercial power supply voltage countermeasure according to the first embodiment, the power supply breakdown circuit 630g is composed of the FET Q5, the resistors R25 and R24, and the capacitor C22 as described above, and power is destroyed from the FUSE-GATE terminal of the power generation circuit 630f. When the circuit gate signal is input to the gate terminal of the FET Q5 through the resistor R25, the FET Q5 operates to flow a large current from the drain terminal to the source terminal of the FET Q5 (the drain terminal and the source terminal of the FET Q5 are excessive The FET Q5 is destroyed by becoming a current, and the short mode state in which the drain terminal and the source terminal of the FET Q5 are conducted is maintained.

  Further, in the configuration of the commercial power supply voltage countermeasure according to the first embodiment, as described above, the noise countermeasure circuit 630b is a circuit for common mode noise countermeasure, CMC, and a circuit for normal mode noise countermeasure. The output side terminals 4 and 2 of the power switch 630a are input to the common mode noise reduction circuit CMC, the normal mode noise reduction circuit NMC, and the choke coil L1. There is.

  Further, in the configuration of the commercial power supply voltage countermeasure according to the first embodiment, AC 24 V 1 and AC 24 V 2 whose common mode noise has been reduced by the choke coil L 1 are input to the rectifier circuit 630 c as described above. The signal is input to the anode terminal of D6, is output from the cathode terminals of the diodes D5 and D6, and is input to the AC-DET terminal of the power generation circuit 630f.

  Further, in the configuration of the commercial power supply voltage countermeasure according to the first embodiment, as described above, when supplied to the power supply line connector DCN1 via the power supply cord (not shown), the fuse FUSE1 , And FUSE 2 are input to the input terminals 3 and 1 of the power switch 630 a. For the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2, as described above, the white outline and the area ad2 in which the inside of the outline is solidly coated in white are silk-printed, and the silk-printed FSLKs 2 and 3 mount the power supply substrate 630 It is printed on the surface. That is, the area ad2 solidly painted in white is represented as a characteristic pattern. Although both ends of the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 are soldered to the power supply substrate 630, as described above, support brackets (not shown) are respectively white, in the region between the inside area of the white outline and the periphery of the support brackets. The solid-painted area ad2 can be visually recognized, and the solid-white coated area corresponding to the transparent glass tube except the both ends of the fuse FUSE1 and FUSE2 is the inner area of the white outline. It is designed to be able to reliably see ad2 through a transparent glass tube.

  On the other hand, in the configuration of the commercial power supply voltage countermeasure according to the second embodiment, as shown in FIG. 160, AC 24 V from the island facility of the game hall is supplied to the power supply line connector DCN1 via the power supply cord not shown. Then, the L side (AC 24 V 1) is input to the input side terminal 3 of the power switch 630 a through the fuse FUSE 1, and the N side (AC 24 V 2) is directly input to the input side terminal 1 of the power switch 630 a Be done. For fuse FUSE 1, as described above, silk-printed FSLK 2 is printed on the mounting surface of power supply substrate 630 as silk printing, with a white outline and an area ad 2 in which the inside of the outline is solidly coated in white. ing. That is, the area ad2 solidly painted in white is represented as a characteristic pattern. Although both ends of the fuse FUSE 1 are soldered to the power supply substrate 630 as described above, support brackets (not shown) are solidly coated in white in the area inside the white outline and around the support brackets. The area ad2 can be viewed visually, and the area ad2 which is the area inside the white outline and which is transparent to the transparent glass tube except for the ends of the fuse FUSE1 and is solidly coated in white is transparent It can be reliably viewed through a glass tube.

  Further, in the configuration of the commercial power supply voltage countermeasure according to the second embodiment, the fuse 24 in the configuration of the commercial power supply voltage countermeasure according to the first embodiment omits the fuse 24 from the island facility of the game hall. To explain this briefly, in the configuration of the commercial power supply voltage countermeasure according to the first embodiment, AC 24 V from the island facility of the game hall has fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 both power cords (L side (AC 24 V1) and N side ( Although it had been input to AC24V2), no problem occurred even if one side (N side (AC24V2)) was omitted according to a test conducted by the applicant. Thus, in the configuration of the commercial power supply voltage countermeasure according to the second embodiment, as shown in FIG. 160, one side (N side (AC 24 V 2)) of AC 24 V from the island facility of the game hall is input side terminal 1 of power switch 630 a. The cost reduction is realized by inputting into as it is.

  Further, in the configuration of the commercial power supply voltage countermeasure according to the second embodiment, the same one as the power switch 630a in the configuration of the commercial power supply voltage countermeasure according to the first embodiment is employed. This will be briefly described because, with regard to the power switch 630a, it is necessary to reliably turn on / off both the L side and the N side of the AC 24V from the island facility of the game hall. Thus, the power switch 630a in the configuration of the commercial power supply voltage countermeasure according to the second embodiment is the same as the power supply switch 630a in the configuration of the commercial power supply voltage countermeasure according to the first embodiment. Both the L side and the N side can be disconnected / connected simultaneously.

  Further, in the configuration of the commercial power supply voltage countermeasure according to the second embodiment, as shown in FIG. 160, the N side (AC 24 V 2) of AC 24 V from the island facility of the game hall and the input side terminal 1 of the power switch 630 a It is electrically connected to one of the micro gap type arresters AL1. The other end of the micro gap type arrester AL1 is electrically connected to the frame ground FG2 of the ground connection terminal DCN5. When a high voltage (referred to as “surge voltage”) enters the AC 24 V from the facility in the game hall due to lightning strike, the micro gap type arrester AL1 surges the surge voltage to the frame ground FG2 of the ground connection terminal DCN5. The surge voltage is limited by flowing as a current to prevent the surge voltage from being applied to the power switch 630a, or the high voltage (surge voltage) temporarily generated by turning on / off the power switch 630a as the ground connection terminal DCN5. By flowing a surge current to the frame ground FG2, the surge voltage is limited to prevent the surge voltage from being applied to the power switch 630a. In addition, when installing the pachinko machine 1 in the game hall, the micro gap type arrester AL1 causes the worker to pass, and the earth terminal ECN2 (island equipment earth) of the frame earth substrate 559 shown in FIG. 102 (b). When you forgot to electrically connect with the ground connection terminal on the island facility of the game hall via the island facility ground wire, as a security, the electromagnetic noise is from the island facility of the game hall on the N side of AC24V (AC24V2 The noise immunity can be enhanced by leading to and removing.

  Further, in the configuration of the commercial power supply voltage countermeasure according to the second embodiment, a common mode noise countermeasure circuit CMC which is a circuit for common mode noise countermeasure, a normal mode noise countermeasure circuit NMC which is a circuit for normal mode noise countermeasure, a choke coil In addition to L1, a surge absorber SA1 constituting a power supply destruction circuit 630g ', the output side terminals 4 and 2 of the power supply switch 630a are a common mode noise reduction circuit CMC, a normal mode noise reduction circuit NMC, and a power supply destruction circuit 630 g 'and input to the choke coil L1. The surge absorber SA1 constituting the power supply destruction circuit 630g ′ has a faster reaction speed than the varistors ZNR1 and ZNR2 of the common mode noise countermeasure circuit CMC and the varistor ZNR3 of the normal mode noise countermeasure circuit NMC (for example, as the surge absorber SA1 Silicon surge absorber can be mentioned, one end of which is electrically connected to the L side of AC 24 V (AC 24 V 1) via power switch 630 a, and the other end is the N side of AC 24 V via power switch 630 a The circuit is electrically connected to AC 24 V 2), and when a circuit voltage exceeding the rated voltage (breakdown voltage) is input, a large current flows to be broken and short circuited to be a short mode.

  Although a varistor may be used as the surge absorber SA1, a silicon surge absorber (also called a semiconductor varistor, VRD or the like) is used here. The silicon surge absorber can absorb a surge voltage having a sharp rise compared to a normal varistor, and utilizes the avalanche (electron avalanche) effect of a silicon pn junction. This silicon surge absorber is characterized by very quick response to a surge, very excellent control voltage characteristics, and very small leakage current. Since the surge absorber SA1 is an alternating current circuit, a bidirectional type may be used, and the rated voltage (breakdown voltage) may be selected to be 47 V, which is about twice the input voltage.

  Further, in the configuration of the commercial power supply voltage countermeasure according to the second embodiment, the cathode terminals 2 of the Schottky barrier diodes D1 and D2 of the rectification circuit 630c are electrically connected to the second (COM) terminal of the relay RL1. , And is electrically connected to one end of the thermistor TH1. The other end of the thermistor TH1 is electrically connected to the third (NO) terminal of the relay RL1, and is electrically connected to one end of the choke coil L2. The other end of the choke coil L2 is electrically connected to the power factor correction circuit 630d. The four terminals of the relay RL1 are grounded to the ground (GND), and the first terminal of the relay RL1 is electrically connected to a relay drive circuit 630i described later. As a result, both ends of the thermistor TH1 are electrically connected between the terminals of the second (COM) terminal and the third terminal of the relay RL1 (that is, between the contacts). Thermistor TH1 is of a type in which the resistance value decreases when the temperature rises. As its characteristic, assuming that the vertical axis is the allowable capacitor capacity and the horizontal axis is the AC voltage, the value of the AC voltage increases as the value increases. It has a curve in which the value of the allowable capacitor capacity is reduced, and one which is not broken even if AC 100 V which is a commercial power supply voltage is applied is selected.

  The direct current whose power factor has been improved by the power factor correction circuit 630d is input to the smoothing circuit 630e, and is input to the power supply generation circuit 630f and also to the relay drive circuit 630i. When the direct current from smoothing circuit 630e is input, relay drive circuit 630 creates an operating voltage (+24 V) capable of operating the coil of relay RL1 and supplies it to the first terminal of relay RL1.

  The rectified direct current output from the cathode terminals 2 of the Schottky barrier diodes D1 and D2 of the rectification circuit 630c is not supplied by the relay drive circuit 630i when the power switch 630a is turned on (relay drive circuit The relay RL1 can not be turned ON (in other words, the relay RL1 remains OFF) because the coil of the relay RL1 is not operating because the power supply at +24 V from the 630i is insufficient. , Without passing through the relay RL1 while the second (COM) terminal and the third terminal of the relay RL1 are in a non-conductive state, they are input to the power factor correction circuit 630d through the thermistor TH1 and the choke coil L2. Ru. As a result, the rectified direct current output from the cathode terminals 2 of the Schottky barrier diodes D1 and D2 of the rectification circuit 630c flows toward only the thermistor TH1, and when this direct current starts to flow to the thermistor TH1, the resistance value Is high, and a weak current flows to the subsequent load of the thermistor TH1, but when the temperature of the thermistor TH1 gradually increases due to the current flowing to the thermistor TH1, the resistance value of the thermistor TH1 decreases accordingly. Send a strong current to the load.

  On the other hand, when the power switch 630a is turned on and the power from the relay drive circuit 630i switches power from the inoperative state of the coil of the relay RL1 (by power supply by +24 V from the relay drive circuit 630i), the relay RL1 is activated. To turn on the 2nd (COM) terminal and 3rd terminal of the relay RL1 by turning ON, and the rectified direct current output from the cathode terminals 2 of the Schottky barrier diodes D1 and D2 of the rectification circuit 630c is In addition to the thermistor TH1, the current is divided between the terminals of the 2nd (COM) terminal and the 3rd terminal of the relay RL1 (that is, between the contacts) and passed respectively, and input to the power factor correction circuit 630d via the choke coil L2. Be done. Thereby, the rectified direct current output from the cathode terminals 2 of the Schottky barrier diodes D1 and D2 of the rectification circuit 630c is between the terminals of the second (COM) terminal and the third terminal of the relay RL1 (that is, between the contacts). ) Reduces the current to the thermistor TH1 to lower the temperature of the thermistor TH1, and the resistance of the thermistor TH1 increases accordingly, and the second (COM) terminal and the third terminal of the relay RL1 The current passing between the terminals of (ie, between the contacts) will increase.

  As described above, the thermistor TH1 is of a type in which the resistance value decreases as the temperature rises, and the rectified DC outputted from the cathode terminals 2 of the Schottky barrier diodes D1 and D2 of the rectifier circuit 630c is a thermistor When the current flows to TH1, the temperature of the thermistor TH1 rises and the resistance value decreases, and the current to the subsequent load of the thermistor TH1 becomes strong. In other words, the current flowing to the choke coil L2 is limited until the temperature of the thermistor TH1 rises. When this function is used, the plug of the power cord is not plugged into the AC 24V power outlet that is the gaming machine power supply voltage of the island facility of the game hall, and AC 100V power that is a commercial power supply voltage higher than 24V that is the gaming machine power supply voltage. If it is accidentally inserted into the outlet, the circuit voltage applied to the surge absorber SA1 greatly exceeds the rated voltage (breakdown voltage) by the time the temperature of the thermistor TH1 rises, and a large current flows in the surge absorber SA1. The absorber SA1 can be broken to be in the short mode.

  In such a state, when the power switch 630a is turned ON, a large current flows in the fuse FUSE1 through the surge absorber SA1 in the short mode state in the noise reduction circuit 630b, and the fuse FUSE1 It will melt. In addition, since fuse FUSE1 is melted and cut in a state where surge absorber SA1 is in the short mode, a large current does not continue to flow in surge absorber SA1, and the elements of surge absorber SA1 are scattered to cause surge absorber SA1 to It can be prevented from being broken in the open mode. As a result, only the power supply substrate 630 is destroyed, and each substrate inside the pachinko machine 1 except the power supply substrate 630 is destroyed even if the plug of the power supply cord is accidentally inserted into the AC 100 V power outlet which is a commercial power supply voltage. Can be reliably prevented.

  In the configuration of the commercial power supply voltage countermeasure according to the second embodiment, an AC-DET terminal for monitoring the power supply voltage in which the common mode noise is reduced by the choke coil L1 in the configuration of the commercial power supply voltage countermeasure according to the first embodiment. Since it is not necessary to provide a FUSE-GATE terminal for outputting a gate signal for a power supply destruction circuit and a CGND terminal for supplying a large current to the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2, the circuit configuration is not complicated.

  In addition, the plug of the power cord is not plugged into the AC 24V power outlet that is the power supply voltage for the gaming machines on the island facilities of the game hall, and erroneously into the AC 100V power outlet that is a commercial power supply voltage higher than AC 24V that is the power supply voltage for gaming machines. In the state where the surge absorber SA1 which is inserted and which constitutes the power supply destruction circuit 630g 'is broken, the fuse FUSE1 is replaced with one which is not melted and the power cord plug is supplied to the power supply voltage for the gaming machine of the island facility of the game hall Even if it is plugged into a 24V AC power outlet, the surge absorber SA1 that constitutes the power supply destruction circuit 630g 'has already been destroyed and the short mode is maintained, so the fuse replaced via the surge absorber SA1 A large current flows to FUSE1 and fuse FUSE1 So that the blown. That is, unless the power supply substrate 630 in which the surge absorber SA1 constituting the power supply destruction circuit 630g 'is already destroyed is replaced with a normal power supply substrate 630 in which the surge absorber SA1 constituting the power supply destruction circuit 630g' is not destroyed. Even if the plug of the power supply cord is plugged into the AC 24 V power supply outlet which is the power supply voltage for the gaming machine of the island facility of the game hall, the game can not be started.

  In the embodiment described above, the power switch 630a, the noise reduction circuit 630b, the rectification circuit 630c, the power factor improvement circuit 630d, the smoothing circuit 630e, the power generation circuit 630f, and the power destruction circuit 630g are provided on one power supply substrate 630. Although various electronic components and the like are provided, they can be configured to be provided separately on two substrates. For example, the power supply substrate 630 includes the first power supply substrate 630A and the second power supply substrate 630B, and the first power supply substrate 630A and the second power supply substrate 630B are provided in the power supply unit 620c of the substrate unit 620 shown in FIG. It can also be configured. In this case, the circuit of the first power supply substrate 630A mainly includes the power supply line connectors DCN1 and DCN2, the ground connection terminal DCN5, the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2, the power supply switch 630a, the noise reduction circuit 630b, and the wiring connector A shown in FIG. The circuits of the second power supply substrate 630B are the diodes D5 and D6, the rectifier circuits 630c, the power factor correction circuit 630d, the smoothing circuit 630e, the power generation circuit 630f, the power destruction circuit 630g, and the choke coil L2 shown in FIG. , Fuse FUSE 3 and wiring connector B mainly. The wiring connector A of the first power supply substrate 630A and the wiring connector B of the second power supply substrate 630B are electrically connected via the power supply wiring. AC24V1 and AC24V2 output from the output side terminals 4 and 2 of the power switch 630a in the first power supply substrate 630A are connected to the second power supply substrate 630B via the noise reduction circuit 630b, the wiring connector A, and the power supply wiring. When input to the connector B, in addition to being input to the rectifier circuit 630c, it is also input to the anode terminals of the diodes D5 and D6, is output from the cathode terminals of the diodes D5 and D6, and is input to the power generation circuit 630f. It will be. Note that various DC voltages, such as +35 V, +12 V and +5 V DC, created on the second power supply substrate 630B are supplied from the second power supply substrate 630B to each substrate inside the pachinko machine 1 except the first power supply substrate 630A. Ru.

  Also, the power supply substrate 630 shown in FIG. 160 can be divided into two substrates of a first power supply substrate 630A and a second power supply substrate 630B. In this case, the circuit of the first power supply substrate 630A includes the power supply line connectors DCN1 and DCN2, the ground connection terminal DCN5, the fuse FUSE1, the microgap arrester AL1, the power supply switch 630a, the noise reduction circuit 630b, and the circuit shown in FIG. The circuit of the second power supply substrate 630B is mainly composed of the connector A, and the circuit of the second power supply substrate 630B includes a rectifier circuit 630c, a power factor correction circuit 630d, a smoothing circuit 630e, a power generation circuit 630f, a relay drive circuit 630i, a relay RL1 shown in FIG. The thermistor TH1, the choke coil L2, the fuse FUSE3, and the wiring connector B are mainly configured. The wiring connector A of the first power supply substrate 630A and the wiring connector B of the second power supply substrate 630B are electrically connected via the power supply wiring. AC24V1 and AC24V2 output from the output side terminals 4 and 2 of the power switch 630a in the first power supply substrate 630A are connected to the second power supply substrate 630B via the noise reduction circuit 630b, the wiring connector A, and the power supply wiring. Input to connector B. Note that various DC voltages, such as +35 V, +12 V and +5 V DC, created on the second power supply substrate 630B are supplied from the second power supply substrate 630B to each substrate inside the pachinko machine 1 except the first power supply substrate 630A. Ru.

  Furthermore, in the embodiment described above, drive power supply lines (for example, +35 V power supply line from the power supply substrate 630 or +12 V power supply line from the power supply substrate 630) to various drive motors provided in various effect units of the game board 5 are variously A fuse (a chip fuse) may be used on a substrate (for example, panel drive substrate 1720 shown in FIG. 153 (a) and relay substrate 3151a shown in FIG. 153 (b)) to which the wiring from the drive motor is directly connected. Or a resettable fuse may be provided, or a power supply substrate 630 supplied as a drive power supply line (for example, +35 V power supply line from the power supply substrate 630 or from the power supply substrate 630) Fuses (may be chip fuses) or reset It may be provided polyswitches as Fuses.

  Incidentally, conventionally, there has been proposed a gaming machine provided with power supply means capable of creating various power supplies necessary for the gaming apparatus based on an external power supply supplied from outside the gaming machine (e.g., JP-A-2014-008221) Gazette (Fig. 2) By the way, when the person in charge of the service center of the manufacturer of the game machine directs a particular part of the power supply means to a staff member such as a salesperson in the game hall by telephone, There is a problem that it is difficult to identify a component to be noted among a plurality of components mounted on the power supply means.

  Also, conventionally, a gaming machine provided with power supply means for creating various power supplies based on the power supply from the game island facility and supplying the substrates to the substrate has been proposed (for example, JP-A-2014-083337 (paragraph [0038] )). The game island facility converts the commercial alternating current power supply (AC 100 V) into an AC power supply (AC 24 V) for gaming machines obtained by reducing the voltage. However, if the power cord for supplying the power from the island facility to the gaming machine is plugged into the power outlet of the commercial AC power supply instead of the power outlet of the AC power supply for the gaming machine, the commercial AC power will be from the AC power supply for the gaming machine Because of the high voltage, there is a possibility that the abnormal power supply is output from the power supply means and the various substrates in the gaming machine are destroyed.

[11. Circuit of main control board, circuit of payout control board]
Next, circuits of the main control board 1310X and the payout control board 633 shown in FIG. 151 will be briefly described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 161 is a schematic circuit diagram showing the circuit of the main control board, FIG. 162 is a schematic circuit diagram showing the circuit of the payout control board, and FIG. 163 is a perspective view for explaining the outline of wiring to the board treated as the main board. FIG. First, the power supply and input signal in the circuit of the main control board 1310X will be described, and the power supply and input signal in the circuit of the payout control board 633, and wiring to the board treated as the main board will be described.

[11. Power supply and input signal in main control board circuit]
Among the power supplies in the circuit of the main control board 1310X, the control power supply of the main control MPU 1310a is supplied with DC +5 V from the power supply generation circuit 630f (630f ') of the power supply board 630. The supplied backup power is supplied from the backup power supply circuit 630h of the power supply substrate 630 as the main VBB.

  As shown in FIG. 161, the DC +5 V from the power supply generation circuit 630 f (630 f ′) of the power supply substrate 630 is first input to the main control filter circuit 1310 h. The main control filter circuit 1310 h mainly includes a main control three-terminal filter MIC0. The main control three-terminal filter MIC0 is a T-type filter circuit and is excellent in attenuation characteristics magnetically shielded by ferrite. The main control three-terminal filter MIC0 is applied with DC +5 V from the power generation circuit 630f (630f ') of the power supply substrate 630 at its first terminal, and its second terminal is electrically connected to the ground (GND) From the third terminal, DC +5 V from which the noise component is removed is output. The direct current +5 V applied to the first terminal is rippled by first being electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC0 whose one end is electrically connected to the ground (GND). ) Is removed and smoothed.

  The DC +5 V output from the third terminal has one end electrically connected to the ground (GND), and the other end of the capacitor MC1 and the electrolytic capacitor MC2 (in the present embodiment, electrostatic capacity: 470 microfarads (μF)) And by being electrically connected to each other, ripples are further removed and smoothed. The smoothed direct current +5 V is applied to the VDD terminal which is a power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310 a. It should be noted that, when a momentary interruption occurs and the power from the game hall is cut off at the VDD terminal which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, the charge stored in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 is generated after the momentary interruption occurs. It is adapted to be applied as direct current +5 V for a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms).

  The VDD terminal of the main control MPU 1310a is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC3 whose one end is electrically connected to the ground (GND), and the DC +5 V applied to the VDD terminal is further smoothed by removing ripples. ing. The VSS terminal which is a ground terminal of the main control MPU 1310 a is electrically connected to the ground (GND).

  The VBB terminal which is a power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU 1310a is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC4 whose one end is electrically connected to the ground (GND), and via the resistor MR0 And the positive terminal of the capacitor BC0 of the backup power supply circuit 630h of the power supply substrate 630. Thereby, the main VBB from the backup power supply circuit 630h of the power supply substrate 630 is applied to the power supply terminal VBB of the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU 1310a via the resistor MR0.

  Among the input signals in the circuit of the main control board 1310 X, for example, a detection signal from the gate sensor 2401, a detection signal from the general winning opening sensor 3001, a detection signal from the special winning opening sensor 2403, and a first reception sensor 2406 The detection signal, the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 3003, the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the RAM clear switch 1310f, the detection signal from the out-port left sensor 1008a, the detection signal from the out-port right sensor 1008b, etc. The detection signal from the first start port sensor 3002 and the detection signal from the second start port sensor 2402 which are respectively input to the main control input circuit 1310 b through the substrate 1710 are directly transmitted without passing through the panel relay board 1710. , The main control input circuit 1310b, respectively, the door frame open switch 4 The detection signal from the main frame opening switch 4b is detected via the payout control board 633 (through, that is, without passing through the payout control input circuit 633ab and the payout control output circuit 633ac). The signal from the setting switch 1311 a and the signal from the setting switching button 1311 b are respectively input to the main control input circuit 1310 b from the setting change board 1310 Y.

  A detection signal from the gate sensor 2401, a detection signal from the general winning opening sensor 3001, a detection signal from the first starting opening sensor 3002, a detection signal from the second starting opening sensor 2402, a detection signal from the special winning opening sensor 2403, The detection signal from the first inlet sensor 2406 and the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 3003 are respectively input to input terminals PA0 to PA6 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b. The input port PA is constituted by 8 bits, and the input terminal PA7 is an idle terminal. The input terminal PA7 which is a vacant terminal is electrically connected to the ground (GND) as vacant terminal processing.

  Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, the first starting opening sensor 3002 is configured of two sensors (double sensors) of the first starting opening sensor main side 3002a and the first starting opening sensor slave side 3002b. There is. While the detection signal from the first starting opening sensor main side 3002a is electrically connected to the main control board 1310X (that is, it is directly electrically connected), the first starting opening sensor The detection signal from the slave side 3002 b is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 X via the panel relay board 1710 (that is, it is electrically connected indirectly). The detection signal from the first starting opening sensor main side 3002a is inputted to the input terminal PA2 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a through the main control input circuit 1310b, and the detection signal from the first starting opening sensor slave side 3002b Is input to the input terminal PB2 of the input port PB of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b.

  The operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the RAM clear switch 1310 f is input to the input terminal PB 0 of the input port PB of the main control MPU 1310 a through the main control input circuit 1310 b. Like the input port PA, the input port PB is configured by 8 bits. Although a power failure notification signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310 e is not shown, it is input to the input terminal PB1 of the input port PB, and detection signals from other sensors are input to the input port PB via the main control input circuit 1310 b. Similar to the input terminal PA7 of the input port PA, input terminals that are respectively input to predetermined input terminals and become vacant terminals are electrically connected to the ground (GND) as vacant terminal processing.

  In addition, a detection signal from the door frame opening switch 4a, a detection signal from the main frame opening switch 4b, a detection signal from the out-port left sensor 1008a, a detection signal from the out-port right sensor 1008b, a signal from the setting switch 1311a, Although not shown, signals from the setting switching button 1311 b are respectively input to predetermined input terminals of predetermined input ports of the main control MPU 1310 a through the main control input circuit 1310 b.

11-2. Power supply and input signal in the circuit of the payout control board]
Among the power supplies in the circuit of the payout control board 633, the control power of the payout control MPU 633aa is supplied with DC +5 V from the power generation circuit 630f (630f ') of the power board 630 and The supplied backup power is supplied from the backup power supply circuit 630h of the power supply substrate 630 as a payment VBB.

  As shown in FIG. 162, the direct current +5 V from the power supply generation circuit 630f (630f ') of the power supply substrate 630 is first input to the payout control filter circuit 633h. The payout control filter circuit 633h mainly includes a payout control three-terminal filter PIC0. This payout control three-terminal filter PIC0 is a T-type filter circuit and is excellent in attenuation characteristics magnetically shielded by ferrite. In the payout control three-terminal filter PIC0, DC +5 V from the power generation circuit 630f (630f ') of the power supply substrate 630 is applied to its first terminal, and its second terminal is electrically connected to the ground (GND), From the third terminal, DC +5 V from which the noise component is removed is output. The direct current +5 V applied to the first terminal is rippled by first being electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC0 whose one end is electrically connected to the ground (GND). ) Is removed and smoothed.

  The DC +5 V output from the third terminal has one end electrically connected to the ground (GND), and the other end of the capacitor PC1 and the electrolytic capacitor PC2 (in the present embodiment, electrostatic capacity: 180 microfarads (μF)) And by being electrically connected to each other, ripples are further removed and smoothed. The smoothed direct current +5 V is applied to the VDD terminal which is a power supply terminal of the payout control MPU 633 aa. It should be noted that when a momentary interruption occurs and the power supply from the game hall is cut off at the VDD terminal which is the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU 633 aa, the charge stored in the electrolytic capacitor PC2 is generated after the momentary interruption occurs. It is adapted to be applied as direct current +5 V for a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms). The power consumption of the control voltage (DC +5 V) supplied to the main control MPU 1310 a included in the main control board 1310 X is the control voltage (DC +5 V) supplied to the payout control MPU 633 aa included in the payout control unit 633 a of the payout control board 633 The capacitance of the electrolytic capacitor MC2 of the main control substrate 1310X (in the present embodiment, the capacitance: 470 μF) is the capacitance of the electrolytic capacitor PC2 of the payout control substrate 633. In terms of form, a larger one is selected as compared to capacitance: 180 microfarads (μF). As a result, the main control substrate 1310X and the payout control substrate 633 are exposed to the electrolytic capacitor MC2 of the main control substrate 1310X and the electrolytic capacitor PC2 of the payout control substrate 633 when a momentary interruption occurs and the power supply from the gaming hall is cut off. The charged charges are respectively applied as direct current +5 V over a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms) after occurrence of the momentary power failure.

  The VDD terminal of the payout control MPU 633 aa is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC3 whose one end is electrically connected to the ground (GND), and the DC +5 V applied to the VDD terminal is further smoothed by removing ripples. ing. The VSS terminal which is a ground terminal of the payout control MPU 633 aa is electrically connected to the ground (GND).

  The VBB terminal, which is a power supply terminal of the dispensing control built-in RAM of the dispensing control MPU 633 aa, is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC4 whose one end is electrically connected to the ground (GND), and via the resistor PR0 And the positive terminal of the capacitor BC0 of the backup power supply circuit 630h of the power supply substrate 630. As a result, the payout VBB from the backup power supply circuit 630h of the power supply substrate 630 is applied to the VBB terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the payout control built-in RAM of the payout control MPU 633aa, via the resistor PR0.

  Among input signals in the circuit of the payout control board 633, for example, a detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154, a detection signal from the off-ball detection sensor 194, a detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590, and a payout detection sensor 591 The detection signal and the RAM clear signal from the main control board 1310X are input to the payout control input circuit 633ab.

  Detection signal from full tank detection sensor 154, detection signal from ball breakage detection sensor 194, detection signal from blade rotation detection sensor 590, detection signal from payout detection sensor 591, RAM clear signal from main control board 1310X, error The error release signals from the release switch 633d are input to the input terminals PA0 to PA5 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 633aa through the payout control input circuits 633ab. The input port PA is constituted by 8 bits, and the input terminals PA6 and PA7 are empty terminals. The input terminals PA6 and PA7, which are vacant terminals, are electrically connected to the ground (GND) as vacant terminal processing.

  Although the power failure notification signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310X is not shown but is inputted to the input terminal PB0 of the input port PB via the payout control input circuit 633ab, detection signals from other sensors are The input terminals that are respectively input to predetermined input terminals of the input port PB via the payout control input circuit 633 ab and become empty terminals are ground as empty terminal processing in the same manner as the input terminals PA6 and PA7 of the input port PA. Electrically connected to GND).

11-3. Wiring to the board treated as the main board]
As a substrate treated as a main substrate, a power supply substrate 630, a main control substrate 1310X, a payout control substrate 633, and the like can be given. If the wiring to the substrate treated as the main substrate is tampered with illegally, the behavior of the substrate treated as the main substrate is anxious, the gaming balls are paid out in large quantities as prize balls, and the illegal gaming balls are fraudulent Since there is a possibility that an actor may obtain the wiring, it is necessary to detect the modified wiring at an early stage when the wiring to each of these substrates is tampered with.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, as for the wiring to the power supply substrate 630, as shown in FIG. 163 (a), the connector SHG (not shown, but for the connector SHG, the name of the manufacturing company and the product number In the covering portion of each wiring connected to), the manufacturing company name and the product number of the wiring (numbers listed in the catalog) are repeatedly printed as fraudulent identifiers. Specifically, for example, the connector SHG is a connector having a total of 22 pins from the first pin to the 22nd pin, and the manufacturer's name: XXX, as the fraudulent identifier SLAB in the covering portion of the wiring SCBL1 in the first pin. And part number: ABC123 (number listed in the catalog) is repeatedly printed, and on the second pin, the manufacturer's name: XXX, and part number: ABC123 (number listed in the catalog) as the illegal identifier SLAB in the cover of the wiring SCBL2 Is repeatedly printed. The length of the wiring to the power supply substrate 630 is at least the covering of the wiring so that the manufacturing company name: XXX and the product number: ABC123 (number listed in the catalog) can be confirmed as the illegal identifier SLAB in the covering of the wiring. The illegal identifier SLAB has a length twice printed twice.

  The covering portion of the wiring SCBL1 connected to the first pin is white, a color (for example, black) which is easy to visually recognize the color of the covering portion. ABC123 (the number published in the catalog) is repeatedly printed, and the covering portion of the wires SCBL2 to SCBL22 connected to the other pins may be another color (for example, red or gray) different from white, (Eg, red, yellow, blue, green, orange, pink, gray, black, etc.), or a color that is easily visible to the color of the covering (eg, single color or multiple colors) Manufacturing name: XXX and part number: ABC123 (numbers listed in the catalog) are repeatedly printed as the illegal identifier SLAB.

  As for wiring to the main control board 1310X, as shown in FIG. 163 (b), the connector MHG (not shown, but connected to the manufacturer name and product number (number listed in the catalog) for the connector MHG) is connected In the covering portion of each wiring, the manufacturing company name and the product number of the wiring (numbers listed in the catalog) are repeatedly printed as fraudulent identifiers. Specifically, for example, the connector MHG is a connector having a total of 30 pins from the first pin to the 30th pin, and the manufacturer's name: YYYYY, as the fraudulent identifier MLAB in the covering portion of the wiring MCBL1 for the first pin. And part number: DEFXYZ-1 (number listed in the catalog) is repeatedly printed, and on the second pin, the manufacturer's name: YYYYY, and part number: DEFXYZ-1 (listed in the catalog as illegal identifier MLAB in the cover of wiring MCBL2 Number is printed repeatedly. The length of the wiring to the main control board 1310X should be at least the wiring so that the manufacturer's name: YYYYY and the product number: DEFXYZ-1 (number listed in the catalog) can be confirmed as the fraudulent identifier MLAB in the wire covering section. The fraudulent identifier MLAB has a length twice printed repeatedly in the covering portion of.

  The cover of the wiring MCBL1 connected to the first pin is white, has a color (for example, black) that is easily visible with respect to the color of the cover, and as a fraudulent identifier MLAB, manufacturing company name: YYYYY, and part number: Covers of the wirings MCBL2 to MCBL30, which are repeatedly printed by DEFXYZ-1 (numbers listed in the catalog) and connected to other pins, may be another color (for example, red or gray) different from white, Or a plurality of colors (eg, red, yellow, blue, green, orange, pink, gray, black, etc.), or colors readily visible to the color of the covering (eg, single color or plural colors) The manufacturer name: YYYYY, and the product number: DEFXYZ-1 (number listed in the catalog) are repeatedly printed as the fraudulent identifier MLAB.

  As for wiring to the payout control board 633, as shown in FIG. 163 (b), the connector HHG (not shown, but connected to the manufacturing company name and product number (number listed in the catalog) for the connector HHG) is connected In the covering portion of each wiring, the manufacturing company name and the product number of the wiring (numbers listed in the catalog) are repeatedly printed as fraudulent identifiers. Specifically, for example, the connector HHG is a connector having a total of 30 pins from the first pin to the 30th pin, and the first pin has a covering portion of the wiring HCBL1 as a fraudulent identifier HLAB as a manufacturer identifier: YYYYY, And part number: DEFXYZ-1 (number listed in the catalog) is repeatedly printed, and on the second pin, the manufacturer's name: YYYYY, and part number: DEFXYZ-1 (listed in the catalog, as the illegal identifier HLAB in the cover of the wiring HCBL2 Number is printed repeatedly. The length of the wiring to the delivery control substrate 633 is at least the wiring so that the manufacturer's name: YYYYY and the product number: DEFXYZ-1 (number listed in the catalog) can be confirmed as the illegal identifier HLAB in the covering portion of the wiring. The illegal identifier HLAB has a length twice printed repeatedly in the covering portion of.

  The covering portion of the wiring HCBL1 connected to the first pin is white, a color (for example, black) which is easy to visually recognize the color of the covering portion, and the manufacturing company name: YYYYY as the illegal identifier HLAB, and the product number: Covers of the wires HCBL2 to HCBL30, which are repeatedly printed by DEFXYZ-1 (numbers listed in the catalog) and connected to other pins, may be another color (for example, red or gray) different from white, Or a plurality of colors (eg, red, yellow, blue, green, orange, pink, gray, black, etc.), or colors readily visible to the color of the covering (eg, single color or plural colors) The manufacturer's name: YYYYY, and the product number: DEFXYZ-1 (number listed in the catalog) are repeatedly printed as the illegal identifier HLAB.

  Thus, even if the wiring to the substrate treated as the main substrate is tampered with, the manufacturer name and product number (number listed in the catalog) are repeatedly printed on the connector and the wiring connected to the connector. As such, it can contribute to early detection of the modified wiring. In addition, as wiring to the board | substrate handled as a main board | substrate, even if it publishes in a catalog, wiring which is hard to obtain is preferable.

  In the present embodiment, two from the first start opening sensor main side 3002 a constituting the first start opening sensor 3002 for detecting the game ball B received by the first start opening 2002 provided in the game board 5. The main control board via a connector (not shown) and the two wires from the second start port sensor 2402 for detecting the game ball B received in the second start port 2004 provided in the game board 5 It is electrically connected directly to the 1310X. On the other hand, the game board 5 is provided on the first start port sensor slave side 3002 b constituting the first start port sensor 3002 that detects the game ball B received in the first start port 2002 provided on the game board 5. Gate sensor 2401 for detecting the game ball B that has passed through the gate unit 2003, Large winning opening sensor 2403 for detecting the game ball B received at the large winning opening 2005 provided on the game board 5, General winning provided for the game board 5 A general winning hole sensor 3001 for detecting the game ball B received by the mouth 2001, a first reception sensor 2406 for detecting the game ball B received by the first reception hole 2006 provided on the game board 5, and the game board 5 Two wires from various sensors such as a magnetic sensor 3003 for detecting the magnetism acting on the vicinity of the first start port 2002 to be provided are connected via the respective connectors. While being aggregated are electrically connected in Le relay board 1710 via one connector, it is electrically connected to the main control board 1310X.

  For this reason, the two wires from the first start hole sensor main side 3002a constituting the first start hole sensor 3002 and the two wires from the second start hole sensor 2402 are erroneously sent to the main control board 1310X. It may be connected electrically. Therefore, in the present embodiment, as the color of the cover of the two wires from the first starting opening sensor 3002, one is yellow and the other is pink, and the cover of each wire is a wire as an illegal identifier. The manufacturer's name and part number (number listed in the catalog) are printed repeatedly. As the color of the cover of the two wires from the second start port sensor 2402, one is white and the other is black, and in the cover of each wire, the manufacturer name and part number of the wire as a fraudulent identifier (catalog The numbers listed in are printed repeatedly. This allows the manufacturer to distinguish between the two wires from the first start port sensor 3002 and the two wires from the second start port sensor 2402 at the manufacturer. In the gaming hall, a clerk such as a salesperson in the gaming hall identifies the two wires from the first starting opening sensor 3002 and the two wires from the second starting opening sensor 2402, respectively. It can be done.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the connector having the 2.5 mm pitch as a connector for electrically connecting the two wires from the first starting opening sensor main side 3002 a constituting the first starting opening sensor 3002 to the main control board 1310 X Is selected, and a connector having a 2.0 mm pitch is selected as a connector for electrically connecting the two wires from the second start port sensor 2402 to the main control board 1310X. As a result, the two wires from the first start hole sensor main side 3002 a constituting the first start hole sensor 3002 and the two wires from the second start hole sensor 2402 correspond to itself. Since the physical structure can be made such that electrical connection can be made, at the manufacturer, the worker of the line is required to make the first starting opening sensor main side that constitutes the first starting opening sensor 3002 in the manufacturing process. While being able to reliably prevent a work error (wiring mistake of insertion mistake) such as miswiring between two wires from the 3002a and two wires from the second starting opening sensor 2402, in the game hall, When a clerk in the game hall or the like checks the presence or absence of fraud, the first starting opening sensor 3002 in the case where the wiring is temporarily disconnected and restored due to maintenance. Work mistake (wire mistake called insertion mistake) of miswiring of two wires from the first starting opening sensor main side 3002a which constitutes and two wires from the second starting hole sensor 2402 is surely prevented. be able to.

  In the present embodiment described above, the game board 5 is provided with a plurality of general winning openings 2001, but these general winning openings 2001 may be divided into a plurality of groups individually or in a plurality of general winning opening sensors. It can also be configured to use In this case, connectors having the same shape are selected as the connectors for electrically connecting two wires from the general winning opening sensor to the panel relay substrate 1710. Although there are a plurality of general winning openings 2001, regardless of which general winning opening 2001 a game ball enters, only a predetermined number of gaming balls are paid out as a winning ball along with the entering ball, It is because it does not contribute to the progress of the game and the change of the effect. In addition, even in the case of adopting a configuration in which the two wires from the general winning opening sensor are electrically connected directly to the main control substrate 1310X without the intervention of the panel relay substrate 1710, the general winning opening sensor The same shape connector is selected as the connector for electrically connecting the two wires of the above to the main control board 1310X. This is, as described above, although there are a plurality of general winning openings 2001, regardless of which general winning opening 2001 the game ball enters the ball, a predetermined number of gaming balls are paid out as a winning ball along with the entering the ball. It is because it does not contribute to the progress of the game and the change of the effect.

  In the embodiment described above, the game ball B received by the second start port 2004 is sent to the rear side of the game panel 1100 after being detected by the second start port sensor 2402, and the lower substrate holder 1200 The second start port sensor main side 2402a and the second start port sensor slave side 2402b are separated by at least an erroneous detection preventing distance dimension, as in the case of the first start port sensor 3002. It may consist of two sensors (double sensors). If it carries out like this, the 2nd starting opening sensor 2402 comprised from two sensors (double sensor) of the 2nd starting opening sensor main side 2402a and the 2nd starting opening sensor slave side 2402b similarly to the 1st starting opening sensor 3002 By adopting this, it is possible to reliably detect the gaming ball B received by the second start port 2004. In addition, an irregular ball (a game ball or a ball approximately equal in diameter or a synthetic resin ball approximately equal in diameter) to which a flexible cord-like operation line (a thread, a piano wire, a wire or a linear member such as a catheter) is attached. An employee such as a salesclerk of the game hall can get radio wave irradiation got at an early stage by reliably detecting and notifying the fraudulent action by radio wave irradiation using) in the fraud detection process in the main control timer interrupt process described later. It can contribute to being able to discover.

  In this case, the game ball B received in the second start opening 2004 is first detected by the second start opening sensor main side 2402a by passing through the second start opening sensor main side 2402a, and the second start opening sensor second side After passing through 2402b, it is discharged to the lower substrate holder 1200 after being detected by the second start port sensor slave side 2402b. In addition, while the detection signal from the second start port sensor main side 2402a is electrically connected to the main control board 1310X (that is, directly connected electrically), the second start The detection signal from the mouth sensor slave side 2402 b is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 X via the panel relay board 1710 (that is, it is electrically connected indirectly). The detection signal from the second start port sensor main side 2402a is input to the input terminal PA3 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a through the main control input circuit 1310b, and the detection signal from the second start port sensor slave side 2402b Is input to the input terminal PB3 of the input port PB of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b.

  The panel relay substrate 1710 detects the game ball B received by the first start opening 2002 provided in the game board 5 as described above, in addition to the detection signal from the second start opening sensor slave side 2402b. A first start opening sensor slave 3002 b constituting one start opening sensor 3002, a gate sensor 2401 for detecting the game ball B which has passed through the gate portion 2003 provided on the game board 5, and a large winning opening 2005 provided on the game board 5 Large winning opening sensor 2403 for detecting the received gaming ball B, General winning opening sensor 3001 for detecting the gaming ball B received on the general winning opening 2001 provided on the game board 5, First reception provided for the gaming board 5 The first reception sensor 2406 for detecting the game ball B received at the entrance 2006, and the magnetism acting on the vicinity of the first start opening 2002 provided on the game board 5 is detected. The two wires from the various sensors such as the magnetic sensor 3003 are electrically connected and integrated through the respective connectors, and are electrically connected to the main control substrate 1310X through the single connector. ing.

  Further, the detection signal from the first start port sensor slave 3002b and the detection signal from the second start port sensor slave 2402b are electrically connected to the main control board 1310X via the same panel relay board 1710. ing. Therefore, a connector having a 2.5 mm pitch is selected as a connector for electrically connecting the two wires from the first start port sensor secondary 3002b to the panel relay substrate 1710, and the second start port sensor secondary is selected. A connector having a 2.0 mm pitch is selected as a connector for electrically connecting two wires from the side 2402 b to the panel relay substrate 1710. Thus, the two wires from the first start-up sensor slave 3002b and the two wires from the second start-up sensor slave 2402b may be electrically connected to each other. In the manufacturer, the worker of the line can use two wires from the first starting opening sensor slave 3002b and the second starting opening sensor slave in the manufacturing process. While making it possible to reliably prevent a work error (wiring mistake of insertion mistake) such as miswiring of two wires from the 2402b, in the gaming hall, a clerk such as a salesperson in the gaming hall is aware of the presence or absence of fraud In the case of confirmation, when the wiring is temporarily removed for maintenance and returned to the original state, two wires from the first start-up sensor slave 3002b and the second start-opening sensor slave 2402b Two and wiring al, miswiring that operational error (wiring that insert mistakes) can be reliably prevented.

  Furthermore, in the embodiment described above, the game board 5 is provided with a plurality of general winning openings 2001. However, these general winning openings 2001 may be separately configured to use general winning opening sensors. it can. In this case, the shape of the connector for electrically connecting the two wires from the general winning opening sensor to the panel relay substrate 1710 may be selected as different ones. For example, when contributing to the progress of the game and the change in presentation accompanying the entry into each general winning opening 2001, the shapes of the connectors of the respective two wires from each general winning opening sensor 3001 are made different. May be In this way, it is possible to provide a physical structure in which each of the two wires from each of the general winning hole sensors 3001 can be electrically connected to the corresponding one, so that the manufacturer In the manufacturing process, the worker of the line can surely prevent the operation mistake (the wiring mistake of the insertion mistake) of the miswiring of the respective two wires from each general winning opening sensor 3001 and at the game hall When a clerk of a game hall or the like checks the presence or absence of an illegality, in the case where the wiring is temporarily removed for maintenance and returned to the original state, each of the two wires from each general winning opening sensor 3001 is erroneous It is possible to reliably prevent the work error of wiring (wiring error of insertion mistake). In the case of adopting a configuration in which the respective two lines from each general winning opening sensor 3001 are electrically connected directly to the main control board 1310X without the intervention of the panel relay board 1710, the shape of the connector Different ones are selected. As described above, this can be a physical structure in which each of the two wires from each of the general winning opening sensors 3001 can be electrically connected to the corresponding one. In the manufacturer, the worker of the line can surely prevent the operation mistake (the wiring mistake of the insertion mistake) of the miswiring of the respective two wires from each general winning hole sensor 3001 in the manufacturing process. In the game hall, when a clerk in the game hall or the like checks the presence or absence of the fraud, in the case where the wiring is temporarily removed for maintenance and returned to the original state, two each from the general winning opening sensor 3001 It is possible to reliably prevent a work error (a wiring error such as an insertion error) such as a wiring error of the wiring.

  In the above-described embodiment, the game ball B which has passed through the gate unit 2003 is detected by the gate sensor 2401, but like the first starting opening sensor 3002, the gate sensor main side 2401 a and the gate sensor slave side 2401 b May be arranged from at least the false detection distance dimension and two sensors (double sensors). In this case, as in the case of the first starting opening sensor 3002, the gate unit 2003 is configured by adopting the gate sensor 2401 configured of two sensors (double sensors) of the gate sensor main side 2401a and the gate sensor secondary side 2401b. The game ball B which has passed through can be detected with certainty. In addition, an irregular ball (a game ball or a ball approximately equal in diameter or a synthetic resin ball approximately equal in diameter) to which a flexible cord-like operation line (a thread, a piano wire, a wire or a linear member such as a catheter) is attached. An employee such as a salesclerk of the game hall can get radio wave irradiation got at an early stage by reliably detecting and notifying the fraudulent action by radio wave irradiation using) in the fraud detection process in the main control timer interrupt process described later. It can contribute to being able to discover.

  In this case, the gaming ball B which has passed through the gate portion 2003 is first detected by the gate sensor main side 2401a by passing through the gate sensor main side 2401a, and is detected by the gate sensor slave side 2401b by passing through the gate sensor second side 2401b. It will be done. Further, detection signals from the gate sensor main side 2401a and the gate sensor slave side 2401b are electrically connected to the main control board 1310X via the panel relay board 1710 (that is, they are electrically connected indirectly). Has been The detection signal from the gate sensor main side 2401a is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a through the main control input circuit 1310b, and the detection signal from the gate sensor slave side 2401b is the main control input circuit 1310b Are input to the input terminal PC0 of the input port PC (this input port is composed of 8 bits) of the main control MPU 1310a.

  Furthermore, the detection signal from the gate sensor main side 2401 a and the detection signal from the gate sensor secondary side 2401 b are electrically connected to the main control board 1310 X via the same panel relay board 1710. Therefore, a connector having a 2.5 mm pitch is selected as a connector for electrically connecting two wires from the gate sensor main side 2401a to the panel relay substrate 1710, and two wires from the gate sensor slave side 2401b are selected. A connector having a pitch of 2.0 mm is selected as a connector for electrically connecting the wiring of FIG. As a result, the two wires from the gate sensor main side 2401 a and the two wires from the gate sensor slave side 2401 b can be electrically connected to each other corresponding to itself. Therefore, in the manufacturing process, the manufacturer of the line in the manufacturing process may make two wires from the gate sensor main side 2401 a and two wires from the gate sensor secondary side 2401 b erroneous. While being able to prevent work mistake (wiring mistake of insertion mistake) of being able to be prevented surely, in the game hall, clerks such as a salesclerk of the game hall temporarily remove wiring by maintenance when checking the presence or absence of fraud When returning to the original state, the two wires from the gate sensor main side 2401a and the two wires from the gate sensor slave side 2401b are incorrect. Work that line Miss (wiring that inserted mistakes) can be reliably prevented.

  Furthermore, in the embodiment described above, it has a 2.5 mm pitch as a connector for electrically connecting the two wires from the first start port sensor main side 3002a that constitutes the first start port sensor 3002 to the main control board 1310X. Is selected, and one with a 2.0 mm pitch is selected as a connector for electrically connecting the two wires from the second start port sensor 2402 to the main control board 1310X. The four wires combining the two wires from the first start-up sensor main side 3002a constituting the mouth sensor 3002 and the two wires from the second start-up sensor 2402 are configured as one connector. One connector composed of the four wires may be electrically connected to the main control board 1310X. In this case, a connector for electrically connecting the two wires from the first start port sensor main side 3002 a of the first start port sensor 3002 to the main control board 1310 X, and 2 from the second start port sensor 2402 The manufacturer can have a physical structure in which the connector for electrically connecting the main wiring to the main control board 1310X and the connector for electrically connecting the main control board 1310X do not exist separately but have one connector consisting of four wiring. In the manufacturing process, the worker of the line produces two wires from the first start hole sensor main side 3002 a that constitutes the first start hole sensor 3002 and two wires from the second start hole sensor 2402. In addition to being able to reliably prevent a work error (misconnection error such as insertion error) such as miswiring in the game hall, in the game hall, a clerk such as a salesperson in the game hall is found to have an illegality In the case of confirmation, when the wiring is temporarily removed for maintenance and returned to the original state, two wires from the first starting opening sensor main side 3002 a constituting the first starting opening sensor 3002 and the second starting opening sensor 2402 Thus, it is possible to reliably prevent a work error (a wiring error called an insertion error) such as a miswiring of the two wires from.

  Furthermore, the game ball B accepted in the second start port 2004 adopting this mode is sent to the rear side of the game panel 1100 after being detected by the second start port sensor 2402, and the lower substrate holder 1200 The second start port sensor main side 2402a and the second start port sensor slave side 2402b are separated by at least an erroneous detection preventing distance dimension, as in the case of the first start port sensor 3002. It may consist of two sensors (double sensors). If it carries out like this, the 2nd starting opening sensor 2402 comprised from two sensors (double sensor) of the 2nd starting opening sensor main side 2402a and the 2nd starting opening sensor slave side 2402b similarly to the 1st starting opening sensor 3002 By adopting this, it is possible to reliably detect the gaming ball B received by the second start port 2004. In addition, an irregular ball (a game ball or a ball approximately equal in diameter or a synthetic resin ball approximately equal in diameter) to which a flexible cord-like operation line (a thread, a piano wire, a wire or a linear member such as a catheter) is attached. An employee such as a salesclerk of the game hall can get radio wave irradiation got at an early stage by reliably detecting and notifying the fraudulent action by radio wave irradiation using) in the fraud detection process in the main control timer interrupt process described later. It can contribute to being able to discover.

  In this case, the game ball B received in the second start opening 2004 is first detected by the second start opening sensor main side 2402a by passing through the second start opening sensor main side 2402a, and the second start opening sensor second side After passing through 2402b, it is discharged to the lower substrate holder 1200 after being detected by the second start port sensor slave side 2402b. In addition, two wires from the first start hole sensor main side 3002 a constituting the first start hole sensor 3002 and two wires from the second start hole sensor main side 2402 a constituting the second start hole sensor 2402 And four wires in combination are configured as one connector, and one connector composed of the four wires is electrically connected to the main control board 1310X. While the detection signal from the second starting opening sensor main side 2402a is electrically connected to the main control board 1310X (that is, directly connected electrically), the second starting opening sensor The detection signal from the slave side 2402 b is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 X via the panel relay board 1710 (that is, it is electrically connected indirectly). The detection signal from the second start port sensor main side 2402a is input to the input terminal PA3 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a through the main control input circuit 1310b, and the detection signal from the second start port sensor slave side 2402b Is input to the input terminal PB3 of the input port PB of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b.

  The panel relay substrate 1710 detects the game ball B received by the first start opening 2002 provided in the game board 5 as described above, in addition to the detection signal from the second start opening sensor slave side 2402b. A first start opening sensor slave 3002 b constituting one start opening sensor 3002, a gate sensor 2401 for detecting the game ball B which has passed through the gate portion 2003 provided on the game board 5, and a large winning opening 2005 provided on the game board 5 Large winning opening sensor 2403 for detecting the received gaming ball B, General winning opening sensor 3001 for detecting the gaming ball B received on the general winning opening 2001 provided on the game board 5, First reception provided for the gaming board 5 The first reception sensor 2406 for detecting the game ball B received at the entrance 2006, and the magnetism acting on the vicinity of the first start opening 2002 provided on the game board 5 is detected. The two wires from the various sensors such as the magnetic sensor 3003 are electrically connected and integrated through the respective connectors, and are electrically connected to the main control substrate 1310X through the single connector. ing.

  Furthermore, this aspect is adopted, and the detection signal from the first start port sensor slave 3002b and the detection signal from the second start port sensor slave 2402b are transmitted through the same panel relay board 1710 to the main control board 1310X. To the first start-up sensor side 3002b and the second connection from the second start-up sensor side 2402b. It may be configured as one connector and configured such that one connector composed of the four wires is electrically connected to the panel relay substrate 1710. In this way, a connector for electrically connecting the two wires from the first start port sensor slave side 3002 b of the first start port sensor 3002 to the panel relay substrate 1710 and the second start port sensor 2402 are configured. A connector that electrically connects two wires from the second start port sensor slave side 2402b to the panel relay substrate 1710 is physically separated into a single connector composed of four wires. In the manufacturing process, the line operator can use two wires from the first start port sensor slave 3002b and two lines from the second start port sensor slave 2402b in the manufacturing process. It is possible to reliably prevent work errors (wiring errors such as insertion errors) such as miswiring in the wiring of a book, and in the game hall, the clerks of the game hall, etc. In the case of confirming the presence or absence of a fraud, in the case of removing the wiring temporarily by maintenance and returning it to the original state, the two wires from the first starting opening sensor secondary 3002b and the second starting opening sensor secondary 2402b It is possible to reliably prevent a work mistake (a wiring mistake called insertion mistake), such as a miswiring, of the two wires.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, a plurality of general winning openings 2001 are provided on the game board 5, but the general winning openings 2001 may be configured to be separately used and to use general winning opening sensors. it can. In this case, it can also be configured as one connector (single connector) as a connector for electrically connecting the two wires from the general winning opening sensor to the panel relay substrate 1710. For example, in the case of contributing to the progress of the game and the change in presentation with the entrance to each general winning opening 2001, the wiring obtained by combining the respective two wirings from each general winning opening sensor 3001 into one is 1 It may be configured as one connector (single connector), and one connector composed of the wires combined into one may be electrically connected to the panel relay substrate 1710. In this way, it is possible to provide a physical structure in which a single connector composed of wires obtained by combining the two wires from each of the general winning hole sensors 3001 into separate ones is not formed. In the manufacturer, the worker of the line can surely prevent the operation mistake (the wiring mistake of the insertion mistake) of the miswiring of the respective two wires from each general winning hole sensor 3001 in the manufacturing process. At the same time, in the game hall, when a clerk or the like in the game hall checks the presence or absence of a fraud, when the wiring is temporarily removed for maintenance and returned to its original state, each two of the general winning opening sensor 3001 It is possible to reliably prevent a work mistake (a wiring mistake of a misinsertion) such as a miswiring of a book wiring. It should be noted that the main control board is configured directly as one connector (one connector) configured as one connector and one connector composed of the one connector does not intervene through the panel relay board 1710. A configuration electrically connected to the 1310X can also be adopted. Even if configured in this manner, as described above, the physical properties of the two wires from each of the general winning opening sensor 3001 as a single connector composed of wires combined into one without being separate In the manufacturing process, the line worker can make an operation mistake of miswiring of the respective two wires from each general winning hole sensor 3001 (the wiring mistake of the insertion mistake). ) Can be reliably prevented, and in the gaming hall, when a clerk of the gaming hall or the like checks the presence or absence of fraud, each wiring is temporarily removed for maintenance, and each general is It is possible to reliably prevent a work error (wiring mistake of insertion mistake) of miswiring of each of the two wires from the winning opening sensor 3001.

  Incidentally, conventionally, there have been proposed game machines provided with various ball entrances in an advantageous area of a game board, and provided with sensors (detection means) for detecting passage of game balls in each ball entrance ( For example, JP-A-2016-154676 (paragraphs [0014] to [0016], FIGS. 2 to 4)). However, if the wiring from the detection means passing through the ball entrance similar to that of the application is erroneously connected electrically, there is no problem in terms of electrical specifications, so damage is avoided but the detection signal of the ball entrance is erroneously received And affect the progress of the game. However, there is a problem that, in particular, there is a possibility that the wrong connection may not immediately be noticed in some cases because the application is particularly similar.

[12. Each decoration board provided in the door frame]
Next, each decorative substrate provided in the door frame 3 shown in FIG. 91 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. FIG. 164 is a block diagram for explaining the electrical connection of each decorative substrate provided in the door frame, FIG. 165 is a block diagram showing an example of a decorative substrate provided with one LED constant current drive circuit, and FIG. FIG. 167 is a block diagram showing an example of a decoration substrate provided with two constant current drive circuits, FIG. 167 is a schematic diagram of an arrangement method of LED constant current drive circuits, and FIG. It is the enlarged view seen. Here, the electrical connection between each decoration substrate and the frame door sub relay substrate provided in the door frame 3 will be described, the outline of the LED constant current drive circuit, the decoration substrate including the LED constant current drive circuit, and the LED constant current An arrangement method of the drive circuit will be described.

  First, as described above, the door frame 3 encloses the outer periphery of the door window 101a as described above, the dish upper left decoration 271, the dish upper right decoration 276, the dish upper center decoration 312a, the door frame left side decoration 404, the side The in-window decoration 410b of the in-window decoration member 412, the door frame right side decoration 419, and the door frame top decoration 453 are disposed, and the dish upper left decoration 271, the dish upper right decoration 276, and the dish The dish lower left decoration 281, the dish lower right decoration 286 and the dish center lower decoration 312 b are disposed below the upper center decoration 312 a.

  Behind the upper left decorative body 271, the upper left decorative substrate 273 formed in a strip shape extending in the left and right direction along the upper left decorative body 271 is disposed, and a plurality of the upper left decorative substrates 273 are mounted The light emitting decoration is performed by the full color LEDs (six in this embodiment). Behind the upper right decoration 276, a plurality of upper right decoration boards 278 formed in the shape of an elongated strip extending left and right along the upper right decoration 276 are disposed and mounted in plurality on the upper right decoration boards 278. The light emitting decoration is performed by the full color LEDs (five in the present embodiment). The dish center upper decoration body 314a is disposed behind the dish center upper decoration board 314 which is formed in an elongated strip shape having a semicircular arc shape along the dish center upper decoration body 312a, and the dish center upper decoration board A plurality of full color LEDs (10 in the present embodiment) mounted on a plurality of LEDs 314 are used to emit light.

  The left side upper decoration substrate 402a and the left side lower decoration substrate 402b are formed in the shape of an elongated strip extending upward and downward along the door frame left side decoration 404 at the rear thereof. A full-color LED (in the present embodiment, the left side upper decorative substrate 402a is disposed on the left side upper decorative substrate 402a and the left side lower decorative substrate 402b). 5) and 10 on the lower left side decoration substrate 402b). A plurality of side window inner decoration portions 410b are arranged in a row in the vertical direction of the side window inner decoration members 412, and formed in the back thereof in the form of an elongated strip extending vertically along the side window inner decoration members 412. The in-window decorative portion decoration substrate 413 is disposed, and light emission decoration is performed by full-color LEDs (12 in the present embodiment) mounted in plurality on the in-window decorative portion decoration substrate 413. The door frame right side decorative body 419 is formed in the shape of an elongated strip extending in the upper and lower direction along the door frame right side decorative body 419 behind the right side upper decorative substrate 418a and the right side lower decorative substrate 418b. A full-color LED (in this embodiment, the right side upper decorative substrate 418a is disposed on the right side upper decorative substrate 418a and the right side lower decorative substrate 418b). 4) and 10 on the lower right side decoration substrate 418b).

  Behind the door frame top decorative body 453, a door frame top central decorative substrate 455 formed in an elongated strip shape extending left and right along the central portion of the door frame top decorative body 453 is disposed. A door frame top left decorative substrate 456 formed in an elongated strip shape extending right and left along the left side portion of the top decorative body 453 is disposed, and extends left and right along the right side portion of the door frame top decorative body 453 A door frame top right decorative substrate 457 formed in a long narrow strip shape is disposed, and a plurality of the door frame top central decorative substrate 455, a door frame top left decorative substrate 456, and a door frame top right decorative substrate 457 are mounted. Light emitting decoration by full color LEDs (in the present embodiment, 11 in the door frame top central decoration substrate 455, 7 in the door frame top left decoration substrate 456, 6 in the door frame top right decoration substrate 457) It is.

  On the back of the lower left decorative body 281, a lower left decorative substrate 283 formed in the shape of an elongated strip extending along the lower left decorative body 281 is disposed, and a plurality of the lower left decorative substrates 283 are mounted The light emitting decoration is performed by the full color LEDs (six in this embodiment). The dish lower right decoration 286 is disposed behind the dish lower right decoration substrate 288 which is formed in the shape of an elongated strip extending along the dish lower right decoration 286. The light emitting decoration is performed by a plurality of full color LEDs (six in this embodiment) mounted on a plurality of light emitting diodes. The dish center lower decoration body 312b is disposed behind the dish center lower decoration board 316 which is formed in an elongated strip shape having a semicircular arc shape along the dish center lower decoration body 312b. A plurality of full color LEDs (10 in the present embodiment) mounted on a plurality of LEDs 316 are used to emit light.

  In addition, the effect operation unit 300 shown in FIG. 69 provided in the plate unit 200 in the door frame 3 is provided with the effect operation ring decoration substrate 352 formed in such a form that the ring is divided in the front and back as described above The rendering operation ring decoration substrate 352 is a front decoration substrate 352a formed in an elongated strip shape having a semicircular arc shape on the front side, and a rear decoration substrate 352b formed in an elongated strip plate having a semicircular arc shape on the rear side. , Is composed of. A plurality of rotary operation units 302 of the rendering operation unit 300 shown in FIG. 69 are full color LEDs (nine in the present embodiment) mounted on the front decoration substrate 352a and a plurality of full color LEDs mounted on the rear decoration substrate 352b. In the present embodiment, the light emission decoration is performed by 9).

  Thus, each decorative substrate provided in the door frame 3 is formed in an elongated strip shape. Thus, by increasing the distance dimension in the vertical and horizontal directions of the game board 5, a plurality of movable bodies, decorative members, display devices and the like can be provided on the game board 5 shown in FIG. A body or a large display device can also be provided.

12-1. Electrical connection between each decoration board and frame door sub relay board]
Top left decoration board 273, dish top right decoration board 278, dish top center decoration board 314, left side top decoration board 402a, left side bottom decoration board 402b, side arranged in various decorations and decoration parts provided in the door frame 3. Interior decoration in the window decoration board 413, right side upper decoration board 418a, right side lower decoration board 418b, door frame top center decoration board 455, door frame top left decoration board 456, door frame top right decoration board 457, dish lower left decoration board The door frame side decoration substrate such as 283, dish lower right decoration board 288, dish center lower decoration board 316, front decoration board 352 a, and back decoration board 352 b, and door frame base unit 100 of door frame 3 shown in FIG. An electrical connection with the provided door frame sub relay board 105 will be briefly described with reference to FIG.

  The door frame sub relay board 105 provided in the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 is provided with the peripheral control IC 1510 a provided in the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. 146 via the interface board 635 provided in the main body frame 4 shown in FIG. The light emission data SDAT1 and the clock signal SCLK1 which are the door frame side first serial system and the light emission data SDAT2 and the clock signal SCLK2 which is the door frame side second serial system which are serially output from There is. In addition, door frame sub relay substrate 105 is electrically connected to the +12 V power supply line of power supply substrate 630 shown in FIG. 154 through interface substrate 635 and receives +12 V DC, and the ground of power supply substrate 630 ( It is electrically connected to the GND) line and grounded to the ground (GND).

[12-1-1. Door frame side first serial system]
The door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), DC +12 V, and ground (GND) input to the door frame sub relay substrate 105 are relays of the tray unit 200 shown in FIG. While being input to the substrate 214, it is also input to the handle decoration substrate 184 of the handle unit 180 shown in FIG.

  The door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), DC +12 V, and ground (GND) input to the dish unit relay board 214 are the dish lower left decoration board 283, the dish lower right decoration board 288, 70 and the operation unit relay board 392 of the effect operation unit 300 shown in FIG.

  The door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), DC +12 V, and ground (GND) input to the lower left decoration substrate 283 are input to the upper left decoration substrate 273. That is, the dish lower left decorative substrate 283 becomes a bridge board that transmits the door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), DC +12 V, and ground (GND) to the dish upper left decorative substrate 273. The decorative substrate 283 and the plate upper left decorative substrate 273 are electrically connected in a beaded manner. Illustration where door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), DC +12 V, and ground (GND) from the dish unit relay board 214 are input to the dish lower left decoration board 283 which becomes the bridge board Not shown for outputting the door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), DC +12 V, and ground (GND) to the dish upper left decorative substrate 273, respectively. An output connector is provided. On the other hand, the plate upper left decorative substrate 283 is connected to the plate lower left decorative substrate 283 electrically (in other words, it is the latter stage of the plate lower left decorative substrate 283 and becomes the final stage). Only the input connector (not shown) to which the door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), DC +12 V, and ground (GND) to be output respectively from the non-output connectors are provided .

  The door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), DC +12 V, and ground (GND), which are input to the lower right decoration substrate 288, are input to the upper right decoration substrate 278. That is, the dish lower right decorative substrate 288 is a bridge board that transmits the door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), DC +12 V, and ground (GND) to the dish upper right decorative substrate 278. The lower right decorative substrate 288 and the plate upper right decorative substrate 278 are electrically connected in a beaded manner. The door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), DC +12 V, and ground (GND) from the dish unit relay substrate 214 are input to the plate lower right decoration substrate 288 serving as a bridge substrate. An input connector (not shown) is provided, as well as an illustration for outputting the door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), DC +12 V, and ground (GND) to the dish upper right decoration substrate 278 An output connector is provided. On the other hand, the plate upper right decoration substrate 278 electrically connected with the plate lower right decoration substrate 288 (that is, the final stage of the plate lower right decoration substrate 288) is the plate lower right decoration substrate Only the input connector (not shown) to which the door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), direct current +12 V, and ground (GND) to be output respectively from the output connectors (not shown) of 288 ing.

  The door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), DC +12 V, and ground (GND) input to the operation part relay board 392 of the rendering operation unit 300 are the dish center upper decoration board 314, the dish The lower central decorative substrate 316 and the front decorative substrate 352 a of the effect operation ring decorative substrate 352 are respectively input.

  The door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), DC +12 V, and ground (GND) input to the front decoration substrate 352a are input to the rear decoration substrate 352b. That is, the front decoration substrate 352a is a bridge substrate that transmits the door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), DC +12 V, and ground (GND) to the rear decoration substrate 352b. And the rear decorative substrate 352b are electrically connected in a beaded manner. The door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), direct current +12 V, and ground (GND) from the operation unit relay substrate 392 of the rendering operation unit 300 are provided on the front decoration substrate 352a which is a bridge substrate. An input connector (not shown) for input is provided and for outputting the door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), DC +12 V, and ground (GND) to the rear decoration substrate 352b. An output connector (not shown) is provided. On the other hand, an output connector (not shown) for the front decoration substrate 352a is connected to the rear decoration substrate 352b electrically connected with the front decoration substrate 352a (that is, the rear stage of the front decoration substrate 352a and the final stage). Only the input connector (not shown) to which the door frame side first serial system (the light emission data SDAT1 and the clock signal SCLK1), the direct current +12 V, and the ground (GND) to be output respectively are input is provided.

  Here, for example, a brief description of the lower left decoration board 283 to which the door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), DC +12 V, and ground (GND) from the dish unit relay board 214 are input Then, the lower left decoration substrate 283 includes an LED constant current drive circuit 283a, a heat dispersion circuit 283c, and six full color LEDs sdLED1 to sdLED6. The LED constant current drive circuit 283a is a sink (suction) type constant current drive circuit 283x capable of supplying a constant current to sdLED1 to sdLED6, and a maximum current setting capable of setting the maximum current of the current flowing to sdLED1 to sdLED6 And the circuit 283 y. The constant current drive circuit 283x performs control to supply a constant current to the sdLED1 to sdLED6 based on the door frame side first serial system (the light emission data SDAT1 and the clock signal SCLK1) from the dish unit relay substrate 214. As described above, since the constant current drive circuit 283 x is a sink (suction) type, it generates heat by absorbing the constant current flowing to the sdLED 1 to sdLED 6. Therefore, the heat distribution of the constant current drive circuit 283x can be dispersed by receiving a part of the heat generation of the constant current drive circuit 283x by the heat dispersion circuit 283c.

  Also, for example, a brief description will be given of the upper left decorative substrate 273 to which the door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), DC +12 V, and ground (GND) are input from the lower left decorative substrate 283. The upper left decoration substrate 273 includes an LED constant current drive circuit 273a, a heat dispersion circuit 273c, and six full color LEDs suLED1 to suLED6. The LED constant current drive circuit 273a is the same circuit as the LED constant current drive circuit 283a of the dish lower left decorative substrate 283 and is of sink (suction) type constant current drive circuit 273x capable of supplying a constant current to suLED1 to suLED6. , And a maximum current setting circuit 273y capable of setting the maximum current of the current flowing through the suLED1 to suLED6. The constant current drive circuit 273x performs control to supply a constant current to the suLED1 to suLED6 based on the door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1) from the lower left decoration substrate 283. As described above, since the constant current drive circuit 273x is a sink (suction) type, it generates heat by absorbing the constant current flowing through the suLED1 to suLED6. Therefore, heat generation of the constant current drive circuit 273x can be dispersed by receiving a part of heat generation of the constant current drive circuit 273x by the heat dispersion circuit 273c.

[12-1-2. Door frame side second serial system]
The door frame side second serial system (light emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2), DC +12 V, and ground (GND) input to the door frame sub relay board 105 are the lower left decoration of the door frame left side decoration board 402 While being input to the substrate 402b, the in-side window decoration portion decoration substrate 413, the right-side lower decoration substrate 418b of the door frame right side decoration substrate 418, and the door frame top relay substrate 467 of the door frame top unit 450 shown in FIG. Each has been entered.

  The direct current +12 V and the ground (GND) input to the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b of the door frame left side decorative substrate 402 are input to the upper left decorative substrate 402a of the door frame left side decorative substrate 402. The door frame side second serial system (light emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2), DC +12 V, and ground (GND) input to the door frame top relay substrate 467 of the door frame top unit 450 are the door frame top right decoration substrate 457 has been entered.

  The door frame side second serial system (light emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2), DC +12 V, and ground (GND) input to the door frame top right decorative substrate 457 are input to the door frame top central decorative substrate 455, respectively. ing. That is, the door frame top right decorative substrate 457 is a bridge substrate that transmits the door frame side second serial system (light emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2), DC +12 V, and ground (GND) to the door frame top central decorative substrate 455 Thus, the door frame top right decorative substrate 457 and the door frame top central decorative substrate 455 are electrically connected in a bead. The door frame side second serial system (light emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2), DC +12 V, and ground from the door frame top relay substrate 467 of the door frame top unit 450 on the door frame top right decorative substrate 457 serving as a bridge substrate An input connector (not shown) to which (GND) is input is provided, and a door frame side second serial system (light emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2), DC +12 V, and ground (GND) are provided at the top center of the door frame An output connector (not shown) for outputting each to the decorative substrate 455 is provided. In addition, the door frame top central decorative substrate 455, which is electrically connected with the door frame top right decorative substrate 457 (that is, follows the door frame top right decorative substrate 457), is an illustration of the door frame top right decorative substrate 457. A door frame side second serial system (light emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2), DC +12 V, and ground (GND) output respectively from output connectors not provided are provided, and input connectors (not shown) are provided. An output connector (not shown) for outputting the door frame side second serial system (light emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2), DC +12 V, and ground (GND) to the door frame top left decoration substrate 456 is provided. .

  The door frame side second serial system (light emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2), DC +12 V, and ground (GND) input to the door frame top central decorative substrate 455 are input to the door frame top left decorative substrate 456, respectively. ing. That is, the door frame top central decorative substrate 455 is a bridge substrate that transmits the door frame side second serial system (light emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2), DC +12 V, and ground (GND) to the door frame top left decorative substrate 456. Thus, the door frame top central decorative substrate 455 and the door frame top left decorative substrate 456 are electrically connected in a bead. On the other hand, the door frame top left decorative substrate 456 which is electrically connected in a row with the door frame top central decorative substrate 455 (that is, the final stage of the door frame top central decorative substrate 455) Door frame side second serial system (light emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2), DC +12 V, and ground (GND) output respectively from the output connector (not shown) of the frame top central decoration substrate 455 (not shown) Only connectors are provided.

  Here, for example, of the door frame left side decoration substrate 402 to which the door frame side second serial system (light emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2), DC +12 V, and ground (GND) from the door frame sub relay substrate 105 are input. Briefly describing the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b, the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b includes two LED constant current drive circuits 402ba and 402bb, a heat distribution circuit 402bc, and ten full color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10. .

  The LED constant current drive circuit 402 ba is the same circuit as the LED constant current drive circuit 283 a of the dish lower left decorative substrate 283 and the LED constant current drive circuit 273 a of the dish upper left decorative substrate 273 and supplies a constant current to hdLED1 to hdLED8 And a maximum current setting circuit 402bay capable of setting the maximum current of the current flowing through the hdLED1 to hdLED8. The constant current drive circuit 402bax supplies a constant current to eight full color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED8 based on the door frame side second serial system (light emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2) from the door frame sub relay substrate 105. Take control.

  The LED constant current drive circuit 402bb is the same circuit as the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba, the LED constant current drive circuit 283a of the dish lower left decoration substrate 283, and the LED constant current drive circuit 273a of the dish upper left decoration substrate 273, hdLED9, A sink (suction) type constant current drive circuit 402bbx capable of supplying a constant current to hLED1 and huLED1 to huLED5 which are five full color LEDs mounted on the left side upper decoration substrate 402a, hdLED9, hdLED10, and left The maximum current setting circuit 402 bby is capable of setting the maximum current of the current flowing to the huLED 1 to huLED 5 of the side upper decorative substrate 402 a. The constant current drive circuit 402bbx is a substrate (left side lower decoration substrate 402b) on which the constant current drive circuit 402bbx is mounted based on the door frame side second serial system (light emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2) from the door frame sub relay substrate 105. The constant current is controlled to flow to the hLED1 9, the hdLED 10, and the huLED 1 to huLED 5 of the decoration substrate 402 a on the left side.

  As described above, the constant current drive circuit 402bax of the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba is a sink (suction) type, so it generates heat by absorbing the constant current flowing in the huLED1 to huLED8. Since the constant current drive circuit 402bbx of the LED constant current drive circuit 402bb is a sink (suction) type as described above, the constant current drive circuit 402bb generates heat by absorbing the constant current flowing through the hdLED 9, hdLED 10, and huLED1 to huLED5. Therefore, heat generation of the constant current drive circuit 402bax can be dispersed by receiving a part of heat generation of the constant current drive circuit 402bax by the heat dispersion circuit 402bc. Further, part of the heat generation of the constant current drive circuit 402bbx can be dispersed by the heat dispersion circuit 402bc and the heat dispersion circuit 402ac of the left upper side decoration substrate 402a. ing.

  As described above, a part of the heat generation of the constant current drive circuit 402bax can disperse the heat generation of the constant current drive circuit 402bax only by the heat dispersion circuit 402bc of the substrate (the lower left decoration substrate 402b) on which it is mounted. On the other hand, part of heat generation of the constant current drive circuit 402bbx becomes a subsequent substrate in addition to the heat dispersion circuit 402bc of the substrate (the lower left decoration substrate 402b) on which it is mounted Heat generation of the constant current drive circuit 402bbx can be dispersed by the heat distribution circuit 402ac of the left upper side decoration substrate 402a.

  The constant current drive circuit 402bbx is configured to supply a constant current to huLED1 to huLED5 mounted on the left side upper decoration substrate 402a which will be a subsequent substrate across the substrate (left side lower decoration substrate 402b) on which it is mounted It is done. For this reason, the work of electrically connecting the substrates of the left side lower decoration substrate 402 b and the left side upper decoration substrate 402 a is necessarily involved. The worker performing this work is that the finger is the connector of the left side lower decoration substrate 402b, the connector of the left side upper decoration substrate 402a, the heat dispersion circuit 402bc of the left side lower decoration substrate 402b, or the heat of the left side upper decoration substrate 402a. In order to touch the distributed circuit 402ac, it is necessary to prevent damage due to static electricity on the lower left side decoration substrate 402b and the left side upper decoration substrate 402a. Therefore, the heat dispersion circuit 402bc of the left side lower decoration substrate 402b and the heat dispersion circuit 402ac of the left side upper decoration substrate 402a have the function of dispersing the heat generation of the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx, as well as electrostatics. It also has a function that can prevent damage to electronic components due to

  As described above, the left upper side decoration substrate 402 a receives the direct current +12 V from the left side lower decoration substrate 402 b and the ground (GND), and is fixed to five full color LEDs, huLED1 to huLED5. Lines through which current flows are input respectively. As described above, the left upper side decoration substrate 402a includes the heat dispersion circuit 402ac in addition to the five full color LEDs huLED1 to huLED5. As described above, the heat dispersion circuit 402 ac has a function capable of preventing damage to electronic components due to static electricity, in addition to the function of dispersing the heat generation of the constant current drive circuit 402 bbx.

[12-1-3. Light emission data]
Here, the light emission data SDAT1 and SDAT2 serially output from the peripheral control IC 1510a included in the peripheral control substrate 1510 will be briefly described. The light emission data SDAT1 and SDAT2 are data for specifying a light emission mode, and ID information and the floor It is composed of key information. The ID information is information indicating which of the LED constant current drive circuits among the LED constant current drive circuits provided on each decoration substrate of the door frame 3 is to be designated. The gradation information is information indicating which one of the gradation degree 0 (zero) to the gradation degree 127 is to be designated.

12-2. Outline of LED constant current drive circuit]
Next, the outline of the LED constant current drive circuit will be described in detail with reference to FIG. In the present embodiment, since the LED constant current drive circuits provided on the respective decoration substrates of the door frame 3 are the same circuit, the LED constant current drive circuit 283a provided on the lower left decoration substrate 283 will be described here. As described above, the LED constant current drive circuit 283a sets a sink (suction) type constant current drive circuit 283x capable of supplying a constant current to the sdLED1 to sdLED6 and a maximum current of the current to be supplied to the sdLED1 to sdLED6. And a maximum current setting circuit 283 y capable of

[12-2-1. Constant current drive circuit]
The constant current drive circuit has 24 output channels, and can output current for each channel. In the present embodiment, an output channel LR is configured for an LED element emitting red (R), an LED element emitting green (G), and an LED element emitting blue (B), which constitute one full-color LED. , LG and LB are individually controlled to use three output channels. That is, in the present embodiment, the light emission mode is controlled by individually controlling the output channels LR1 to LR8, LG1 to LG8, LB1 to LB8 for up to eight full color LEDs with one constant current drive circuit. It is possible to

  The constant current drive circuit 283x includes a linear power supply 283xa, a reset unit 283xb, a data line buffer 283xc, a clock line buffer 283xd, an address setting unit 283xe, an oscillator 283xf, a logic processing unit 283xg, a PWM unit 283xh, and a constant current drive unit 283xi. Mainly composed.

[12-2-1a. Linear power supply]
The linear power supply 283xa is a circuit capable of creating and supplying an internal power supply Vreg (DC +5 V in this embodiment) used in the constant current drive circuit 283x when DC +12 V from the +12 V power supply line is input. The internal power supply Vreg created by the linear power supply 283xa includes a reset unit 283xb, a data line buffer 283xc, a clock line buffer 283xd, an address setting unit 283xe, an oscillator 283xf, a logic processing unit 283xg, a PWM unit 283xh, and a constant current drive unit. 283xb, a data line buffer 283xc, a clock line buffer 283xd, an address setting unit 283xe, an oscillator 283xf, a logic processing unit 283xg, a PWM unit 283xh, and a constant current driving unit 283x. Is able to operate.

  Constant current drive circuit 283x is not electrically connected to the +5 V power supply line of power supply substrate 630 shown in FIG. There is. This is because if the +5 V power supply line from the power supply substrate 630 is used, this +5 V power supply line will be routed around the electrical wiring, so the length of the +5 V power supply line supplying DC +5 V becomes longer and noise is generated. It becomes easy to invade. Then, when the external noise is transmitted to the +5 V power supply line and the DC +5 V is input to the constant current drive circuit 283x, the external noise may cause the flickering of the LED. Therefore, in the present embodiment, by making the +5 V power supply line from the power supply substrate 630 unnecessary for the constant current drive circuit 283 x, the noise resistance of the +12 V power supply line is extremely high compared to the +5 V power supply line. In the linear power supply 283xa, a configuration is adopted in which DC +5 V is uniquely generated as the internal power supply Vreg.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, external noise is transmitted to the internal power supply Vreg by using the constant current drive circuit 283x only in the constant current drive circuit 283x without outputting the internal power supply Vreg from the constant current drive circuit 283x to another substrate. Since this can be made difficult, the internal power supply Vreg can be stabilized. Thereby, by stabilizing the internal power supply Vreg, it is possible to contribute to the prevention of flickering of the sdLED1 to sdLED6 which are full color LEDs due to the external noise. Therefore, it can be made strong against extraneous noise. Further, the input electrical wiring for the +5 V power supply line and the external transmission electrical wiring are not required, which can contribute to the miniaturization of the connector.

[12-2-1 b. Reset section]
The reset unit 283xb generates an internal reset signal RST based on the internal power supply Vreg from the linear power supply 283xa, outputs it to the constant current drive circuit 283x, initializes the constant current drive circuit 283x, and operates the constant current drive circuit 283x. It is a so-called power on reset circuit that can be started. The internal reset signal RST output from the reset unit 283xb is input to the data line buffer 283xc, the clock line buffer 283xd, the address setting unit 283xe, the oscillator 283xf, the logic processing unit 283xg, the PWM unit 283xh, and the constant current drive unit 283xi Then, the data line buffer 283xc, the clock line buffer 283xd, the address setting unit 283xe, the oscillator 283xf, the logic processing unit 283xg, the PWM unit 283xh, and the constant current drive unit 283xi are initialized to generate the data line buffer 283xc, The clock line buffer 283xd, the address setting unit 283xe, the oscillator 283xf, the logic processing unit 283xg, the PWM unit 283xh, and the constant current drive unit 283xi start operation.

  For example, the constant current drive circuit 283 x does not receive a reset signal from the peripheral control substrate 1510 shown in FIG. 146, and independently generates a reset signal as the internal reset signal RST and utilizes it in the constant current drive circuit 283 x. There is. For example, when using a line for transmitting a reset signal from the peripheral control board 1510 (hereinafter referred to as “reset signal transmission line”), the reset signal transmission line may be routed around electric wiring. Therefore, the length of the reset signal transmission line for transmitting the reset signal is increased, and noise is likely to intrude. Then, when the external noise is transmitted to the reset signal transmission line and the reset signal is input to the constant current drive circuit 283x, the constant current drive circuit 283x may be reset due to the influence of the external noise to turn off the LED. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the reset signal transmission line is not required for the constant current drive circuit 283x, and the reset unit 283xb of the constant current drive circuit 283x independently generates a reset signal as the internal reset signal RST. did.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the reset signal is not input from the external substrate, and the constant current drive circuit 283x does not output the internal reset signal RST from the constant current drive circuit 283x to another substrate, but only in the constant current drive circuit 283x. Since external noise can be made difficult to be transmitted to the internal reset signal RST by utilizing it, the internal reset signal RST can be stabilized. As a result, the internal reset signal RST is stabilized (that is, the initialization of the constant current drive circuit 283x is stabilized), so that the constant current drive circuit 283x due to external noise is not reset, and the output channels LR1 to LR8, This can contribute to the prevention of unexpected turning off and flickering of the LED elements constituting the full color LED corresponding to LG1 to LG8 and LB1 to LB8. Therefore, it can be made strong against extraneous noise. In addition, the need for the input electrical wiring for the reset signal transmission line and the external transmission electrical wiring is eliminated, which can contribute to the miniaturization of the connector.

[12-2-1 c. buffer]
The data line buffer 283 x c is a line (hereinafter referred to as “data line”) for transmitting serial data from outside of the constant current drive circuit 283 x (here, light emission data SDAT 1 of the first serial frame on the door frame side). Serial data is input from the circuit, and the waveform of the signal for transmitting the serial data is shaped, and can be output to the logic processing unit 283xg and the outside of the constant current drive circuit 283x. The clock line buffer 283xd is a line for transmitting a clock signal (here, clock signal SCLK1 of the door frame side first serial system) from the outside of the constant current drive circuit 283x (hereinafter referred to as "clock line"). The clock signal is input from the circuit, and the waveform of the clock signal can be shaped and output to the logic processing unit 283xg and the outside of the constant current drive circuit 283x.

  The data line and the clock line are transmitted across a plurality of boards and relay boards as described above. For this reason, the lengths of the data line and the clock line are both increased, so that noise can easily enter. Therefore, in the present embodiment, by providing the data line buffer 283xc and the clock line buffer 283xd in the constant current drive circuit 283x, noise that has entered the data line or clock line immediately before being input to the constant current drive circuit 283x. Are arranged in the data line buffer 283xc and the clock line buffer 283xd so as not to be transmitted to the logic processing unit 283xg and the subsequent substrate.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, even when the lengths of the data line and the clock line are both increased, the data line and the clock line can be formed that are resistant to noise. Thus, signal transmission resistant to noise can be realized. Therefore, it can be made strong against extraneous noise.

[12-2-1 d. Address setting section]
The address setting unit 283xe sets 64 kinds of addresses as an ID (ID capable of identifying an individual) of the constant current drive circuit 283x by three ID resistances (not shown) based on the internal power supply Vreg from the linear power supply 283xa. It can be done.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the ID capable of identifying the individual of the constant current drive circuit 283x is preset by the address setting unit 283xe by the hardware configuration of three ID resistors (not shown). It is not necessary to receive data from software and set it appropriately.

[12-2-1 e. Oscillator, logic processing unit]
The logic processing unit 283xg receives serial data from the outside of the constant current drive circuit 283x shaped in the data line buffer 283xc (here, light emission data SDAT1 of the first serial frame on the door frame side) and the clock line buffer 283xd. A clock signal from the outside of the shaped constant current drive circuit 283x (here, the clock signal SCLK1 of the door frame side first serial system) is input. The logic processing unit 283xg includes its own ID in the ID information of the serial data (light emission data SDAT1 of the first serial frame on the door frame side) based on the address that is its own ID set by the address setting unit 283xe. At this time, control is performed such that the gradation information in the output channel is set in the PWM unit 283xh based on the signal (control clock signal) from the oscillator 283xf so that the gradation information is taken from the serial data and becomes the taken-in gradation information. If the ID information of the serial data (light emission data SDAT1 on the door frame side first serial system) does not include its own ID, the gradation information in this serial data is not fetched and is set in the PWM unit 283xh. Control to maintain the current contents of the

[12-2-1 f. PWM section]
The PWM unit 283xh can control the brightness (gradation) of the LED in each output channel in a total of 128 steps from gradation 0 (zero) to gradation 127 from light off to lighting (maximum luminance) The gradation control is performed by one PWM gradation control unit (not shown) for one output channel. That is, the PWM unit 283xh is provided with PWM gradation control units 1 to 24 corresponding to the output channels LR1 to LR8, LG1 to LG8, LB1 to LB8 individually (that is, 24 PWM gradation control units). ing. When the gradations are set, the PWM gradation control unit 1 to the PWM gradation control unit 24 control the constant current driving unit 283 xi so that the current having the set gradations flows.

[12-2-1 g. Constant current driver]
The constant current drive unit 283 xi is a constant not shown for one output channel so as to have the gradation set in the PWM gradation control unit 1 to the PWM gradation control unit 24 provided in the PWM unit 283 xh described above. A constant current is supplied to the LED elements constituting the full color LED by the current driver. That is, the constant current driving unit 283 xi includes the constant current driver 1 to the constant current driver 24 individually (that is, 24 constant current drivers) corresponding to the PWM gradation control unit 1 to the PWM gradation control unit 24.

  In the constant current driver 1 to the constant current driver 8, one end of a resistor Rr for setting the maximum current to be supplied to the LED element emitting red (R) constituting the full color LED in eight output channels from output channels LR1 to LR8 It is electrically connected and the other end of the resistor Rr is grounded to the ground (GND). In the constant current driver 9 to the constant current driver 16, one end of a resistor Rg for setting the maximum current to be supplied to the green (G) emitting LED element constituting the full color LED in eight output channels from the output channels LG1 to LG8 It is electrically connected and the other end of the resistor Rg is grounded to the ground (GND). In the constant current driver 17 to the constant current driver 24, one end of a resistor Rb for setting the maximum current to be supplied to the blue (B) emitting LED element constituting the full color LED in eight output channels from output channels LB1 to LB8 It is electrically connected and the other end of the resistor Rb is grounded to the ground (GND).

  The anode terminal of the red (R) LED element, the anode terminal of the green (G) LED element, and the blue (B) LED element which constitute a full color LED respectively corresponding to the constant current driver 1 to the constant current driver 24 The anode terminal is electrically connected to the +12 V power supply line and receives +12 V DC.

  The cathode terminals of the red (R) LED elements constituting the full color LED corresponding to the constant current driver 1 to the constant current driver 8 respectively correspond to the output channels LR1 to LR8 (that is, the constant current driver) 1 to constant current driver 8) electrically connected to each other, and capable of absorbing constant current flowing to a red (R) LED element constituting a full color LED to the side of constant current driver 1 to constant current driver 8 It has become. The cathode terminals of the green (g) LED elements constituting the full color LED corresponding to the constant current driver 9 to the constant current driver 16 respectively correspond to the output channels LG1 to LG8 (that is, the constant current drivers) It is electrically connected to 9 to constant current driver 16), and constant current flowing to the green (G) LED elements constituting the full color LED can be absorbed to the constant current driver 9 to constant current driver 16 side, respectively. ing. The cathode terminals of the blue (B) LED elements constituting the full color LED corresponding to the constant current driver 17 to the constant current driver 24 respectively correspond to the output channels LB1 to LB8 (that is, the constant current drivers) It is electrically connected to the constant current driver 24), and can sink the constant current flowing to the blue (B) LED elements constituting the full color LED into the constant current driver 17 to the constant current driver 24 respectively. ing.

  The constant current driver 1 to the constant current driver 8 respectively absorb constant current flowing to the red (R) LED elements constituting the full color LED set individually, thereby constituting the red (R) LED element constituting the full color LED Can emit light. The constant current driver 9 to the constant current driver 16 absorb the constant current flowing to the green (G) LED elements configuring the full color LED set individually, thereby absorbing the constant current flowing through the full color LED. Can emit light. The constant current driver 17 to the constant current driver 24 absorb the constant current flowing to the blue (B) LED elements configuring the full color LED set individually, thereby absorbing the constant current flowing through the full color LED. Can emit light.

  As described above, since the LED constant current drive circuit can perform dimming lighting by emitting 24 LED elements, that is, eight full color LEDs, with the individually set constant current, such dimming lighting is possible. Thus, it is possible to perform turn-off, lighting by one gradation, blinking by one gradation, and the like.

12-2-2. Maximum current setting circuit]
The maximum current setting circuit includes the resistor Rr for setting the maximum current to be supplied to the red (R) emitting LED elements constituting the full color LED in the eight output channels of the output channels LR1 to LR8 described above, and the output channels LG1 to LG1. Configure a full-color LED in eight output channels up to output channels LB1 to LB8, and set a resistance Rg to set the maximum current to flow to the green (G) emitting LED elements that constitute a full-color LED in eight output channels up to LG8 It is comprised from resistance Rb which sets the largest electric current sent through to the LED element which light-emits blue (B).

  As described above, one end of the resistor Rr is electrically connected to the constant current driver 1 to the constant current driver 8 provided in the constant current driver 283 xi, and the other end of the resistor Rr is grounded to the ground (GND) There is. As described above, one end of the resistor Rg is electrically connected to the constant current driver 9 to the constant current driver 16 provided in the constant current driver 283 xi, and the other end of the resistor Rg is grounded to the ground (GND) There is. As described above, one end of the resistor Rb is electrically connected to the constant current driver 17 to the constant current driver 24 provided in the constant current driver 283 xi, and the other end of the resistor Rb is grounded to the ground (GND) There is.

12-3. Decorative substrate provided with LED constant current drive circuit]
Next, the decoration substrate provided with the LED constant current drive circuit will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 165 and FIG. Here, a decoration board provided with one LED constant current drive circuit will be described, and a decoration board provided with two LED constant current drive circuits will be described. In addition, the LED constant current drive circuit mentioned above with which each decoration board of door frame 3 is provided is constituted as the same circuit. Therefore, for convenience of explanation, the output channels LR1 to LR8, LG1 to LG8, and LB1 to LB8 described above are denoted by the same reference numerals in FIGS.

[12-3-1. Decorative substrate provided with one LED constant current drive circuit]
First, as a decoration substrate provided with one LED constant current drive circuit, for example, as shown in FIG. 165, the dish lower left decoration substrate 283 is an LED constant current drive circuit 283a, six full color LEDs sdLED1 to sdLED6, thermal A distributed circuit 283c is provided.

  The door frame sub relay board 105 provided in the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 is serially output from the peripheral control IC 1510 a provided in the peripheral control board 1510 via the interface board 635 provided in the main body frame 4 as described above. The light emission data SDAT1 and the clock signal SCLK1 which are the door frame side first serial system are input. Further, as described above, the door frame sub relay substrate 105 is electrically connected to the +12 V power supply line of the power supply substrate 630 via the interface substrate 635 and receives +12 V DC, and the ground of the power supply substrate 630 ( It is electrically connected to the GND) line and grounded to the ground (GND).

  As described above, the lower left decoration board 283 for the lower left frame of the door frame secondary relay substrate 105 (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), DC +12 V, and ground (GND) It is input via the tray unit relay board 214. The direct current +12 V is input to the LED constant current drive circuit 283a and constitutes the full color LEDs sdLED1 to sdLED6, the anode terminal of the red (R) LED element, the anode terminal of the green (G) LED element, They are also input to the anode terminals of the blue (B) LED elements.

  The cathode terminals of the red (R) LED elements constituting the sdLED1 to sdLED6 which are full color LEDs are connected to the output channels LR1 to LR6 of the LED constant current drive circuit 283a via the heat dispersion resistances sdRr1 to sdRr6 It is electrically connected to the driver 1 to the constant current driver 6). The cathode terminals of the green (G) LED elements constituting the sdLED1 to sdLED6 which are full color LEDs are connected to the output channels LG1 to LG6 of the LED constant current drive circuit 283a via the heat dispersion resistances sdRg1 to sdRg6 (the The driver 9 to the constant current driver 14) are electrically connected. The cathode terminals of the blue (B) LED elements constituting the sdLED1 to sdLED6, which are full color LEDs, are connected to the output channels LB1 to LB6 of the LED constant current drive circuit 283a via the heat dispersion resistances sdRb1 to sdRb6 It is electrically connected to the driver 17 to the constant current driver 22). The output channels LR7, LR8, LG7, LG8, LB7, LB8 of the LED constant current drive circuit 283a are not connected.

  When the ID information of the light emission data SDAT1 includes its own ID based on the door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), the LED constant current drive circuit 283a starts from the light emission data SDAT1. Gradation information is captured, and sdLED1 to sdLED6 which are full color LEDs are individually controlled to perform dimming control so as to be the captured gradation information.

  As described above, since the LED constant current drive circuit 283a is a sink (suction) type, the LED constant current drive circuit 283a generates heat by absorbing a constant current flowing through the sdLED1 to sdLED6. Therefore, heat dissipation resistors sdRr1 to sdRr6, sdRg1 to sdRg6, sdRb1 to sdRb6, which constitute the heat dispersion circuit 283c, are responsible for part of the heat generation of the LED constant current drive circuit 283a (more precisely, the constant current drive circuit 283x) Thus, the heat generation of the LED constant current drive circuit 283a (precisely, constant current drive circuit 283x) can be dispersed.

  In addition, the door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1) from the door frame sub relay board 105 is a dish upper left decoration via the LED constant current drive circuit 283a (the constant current drive circuit 283x described above) While being input to the substrate 273, DC +12 V and ground (GND) are input to the upper left decoration substrate 273 via the lower left decoration substrate 283. As a result, the noise that has entered the data line or clock line immediately before being input to the LED constant current drive circuit 283a (the above-described constant current drive circuit 283x) is not transmitted to the dish upper left decoration substrate 273 which is the subsequent substrate. The waveform can be shaped in the LED constant current drive circuit 283a (in the data line buffer 283xc and the clock line buffer 283xd provided in the above-described constant current drive circuit 283x).

  The direct current +12 V is input to the LED constant current drive circuit 273a and constitutes the full-color LEDs suLED1 to suLED6, the anode terminal of the red (R) LED element, the anode terminal of the green (G) LED element, They are also input to the anode terminals of the blue (B) LED elements.

  The cathode terminals of the red (R) LED elements constituting the full-color LEDs suLED1 to suLED6 are connected to the output channels LR1 to LR6 of the LED constant current drive circuit 273a via the heat dispersion resistances suRr1 to suRr6 (the constant currents described above It is electrically connected to the driver 1 to the constant current driver 6). The cathode terminals of the green (G) LED elements constituting the full-color LEDs suLED1 to suLED6 are connected to the output channels LG1 to LG6 of the LED constant current drive circuit 273a via the heat dispersion resistances suRg1 to suRg6 (the constant currents described above The driver 9 to the constant current driver 14) are electrically connected. The cathode terminals of the blue (B) LED elements constituting the full-color LEDs suLED1 to suLED6 are connected to the output channels LB1 to LB6 of the LED constant current drive circuit 273a via the heat dispersion resistances suRb1 to suRb6, respectively It is electrically connected to the driver 17 to the constant current driver 22). The output channels LR7, LR8, LG7, LG8, LB7, LB8 of the LED constant current drive circuit 273a are not connected.

  When the ID information of the light emission data SDAT1 includes its own ID based on the door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), the LED constant current drive circuit 273a starts from the light emission data SDAT1. Gradation information is captured, and the full-color LEDs suLED1 to suLED6 are individually controlled to perform dimming control so as to be the captured gradation information.

  As described above, since the LED constant current drive circuit 273a is of the sink (suction) type, the LED constant current drive circuit 273a generates heat by absorbing the constant current flowing through the suLED1 to suLED6. Therefore, heat dissipation resistors suRr1 to suRr6, suRg1 to suRg6, and suRb1 to suRb6, which constitute the heat distribution circuit 273c, are responsible for part of the heat generation of the LED constant current drive circuit 273a (more precisely, the constant current drive circuit 273x). Thus, the heat generation of the LED constant current drive circuit 273a (precisely, the constant current drive circuit 273x) can be dispersed.

  In addition to the dish lower left decoration board 283 and the dish upper left decoration board 273, the dish lower right decoration board 288, the dish upper right decoration board 278, and the door frame top left decoration board 456 as a decoration board provided with one LED constant current drive circuit. , And a door frame top right decoration substrate 457.

12-3-2. Decorative substrate provided with two LED constant current drive circuits]
Next, as a decoration substrate provided with two LED constant current drive circuits, for example, as shown in FIG. 166, the left side lower decoration substrate 402b is an LED constant current drive circuit 402ba, 402bb, hdLED1 that is ten full color LEDs ~ HdLED 10, a heat distribution circuit 402bc is provided.

  The door frame sub relay board 105 provided in the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 is serially output from the peripheral control IC 1510 a provided in the peripheral control board 1510 via the interface board 635 provided in the main body frame 4 as described above. The light emission data SDAT2 and the clock signal SCLK2 which are the door frame side second serial system are input. Further, as described above, the door frame sub relay substrate 105 is electrically connected to the +12 V power supply line of the power supply substrate 630 via the interface substrate 635 and receives +12 V DC, and the ground of the power supply substrate 630 ( It is electrically connected to the GND) line and grounded to the ground (GND).

  As described above, the left side lower decoration substrate 402b receives the door frame side second serial system (light emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2), DC +12 V, and ground (GND) from the door frame sub relay substrate 105. There is. The direct current +12 V is input to the LED constant current drive circuits 402ba and 402bb and constitutes the full color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10, the anode terminal of the red (R) LED element and the anode terminal of the green (G) LED element , And blue (B) are also input to the anode terminals of the LED elements, respectively.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, the light emission mode is controlled by individually controlling the output channels LR1 to LR8, LG1 to LG8, and LB1 to LB8 for up to eight full color LEDs with one constant current drive circuit. It can be controlled. Therefore, of the ten full color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10, the light emission aspect is controlled by the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba for the eight full color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED8, and the remaining two full color LEDs are controlled. The light emission mode of the full color LEDs hdLED 9 and hdLED 10 is controlled by the LED constant current drive circuit 402bb. In addition, the LED constant current drive circuit 402bb is five full color LEDs mounted on the left side upper decoration substrate 402a to be a subsequent substrate, straddling the substrate (that is, the lower left side decoration substrate 402b) on which the LED constant current drive circuit 402bb is mounted. The light emission aspect of huLED1-huLED5 is controlled.

  The cathode terminals of the red (R) LED elements constituting the full color LEDs hdLED1 to sdLED8 are the full color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED8 among the 10 full color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 respectively The full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED8 are electrically connected to the output channels LR1 to LR8 (the constant current driver 1 to constant current driver 8 described above) of the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba through the heat dispersion resistors hdRr1 to hdRr8. The cathode terminals of the green (G) LED elements to be configured are output channels LG1 to LG8 (the constant current driver 9 to the constant current driver 16 described above) of the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba through the heat dispersion resistors hdRg1 to hdRg8, respectively. And electricity The cathode terminals of the blue (B) LED elements that are connected to the full color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED8 are connected to the output channels LB1 to LB8 of the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba via the heat dispersion resistors hdRb1 to hdRb8, respectively. It is electrically connected to the above-described constant current driver 17 to constant current driver 24).

  Among the 10 full color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10, the cathode terminals of the red (R) LED elements constituting the full color LEDs hdLED9 and sdLED10 for the two full color LEDs hdLED9 and hdLED10 are respectively The full-color LEDs hdLED9 and hdLED10 are electrically connected to the output channels LR1 and LR2 (the constant current driver 1 and the constant current driver 2 described above) of the LED constant current drive circuit 402bb via the heat dispersion resistors hdRr9 and hdRr10. The cathode terminals of the green (G) LED elements to be configured are connected to the output channels LG1 and LG2 of the LED constant current drive circuit 402bb via the heat dispersion resistors hdRg9 and hdRg10 (the constant current driver 9 and the constant current driver 1 described above). Cathode terminals of the blue (B) LED elements that are electrically connected to each other and that constitute the full color LEDs hdLED 9 and hdLED 10 are output channels of the LED constant current drive circuit 402bb via heat dissipating resistors hdRb 9 and hdRb 10, respectively. It is electrically connected to LB1 and LB2 (the constant current driver 17 and the constant current driver 18 described above).

  In addition, red LEDs (huLED1 to huLED5, which are full-color LEDs) are configured for huLED1 to huLED5, which are five full-color LEDs mounted on the left-side upper decoration substrate 402a that is a subsequent substrate to the left-side lower decoration substrate 402b. The cathode terminals of the LED element R) are LED constant current drive circuits 402bb via heat dispersion resistances huRr1b to huRr5b in the upper left side decoration substrate 402a and heat distribution resistances huRr1a to huRr5a in the lower left side decoration substrate 402b, respectively. The cathode terminals of the green (G) LED elements that are electrically connected to the output channels LR3 to LR7 (the constant current driver 3 to the constant current driver 7 described above) and that constitute the full-color LEDs huLED Decoration on the left side The output channels LG3 to LG7 of the LED constant current drive circuit 402bb (the constant current drivers 11 to constant current described above are connected via the heat dispersion resistances huRg1b to huRg5b on the plate 402a and the heat dispersion resistances huRg1a to huRg5a on the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b. The cathode terminals of the blue (B) LED elements electrically connected to the driver 15) and constituting the full-color LEDs huLED1 to huLED5 are the heat dispersion resistance huRb1b to huRb5b on the left side upper decoration substrate 402a, and the left side, respectively. It is electrically connected to the output channels LB3 to LB7 (the constant current driver 19 to the constant current driver 23 described above) of the LED constant current drive circuit 402bb via the heat dispersion resistances huRb1a to huRb5a in the lower side decorative substrate 402b. To have. The output channels LR8, LG8 and LB8 of the LED constant current drive circuit 402bb are not connected.

  When the ID information of the light emission data SDAT2 includes its own ID based on the door frame side second serial system (light emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2), the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba starts from the light emission data SDAT2 Gradation information is controlled, and eight full color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED8 among the ten full color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 are individually controlled so as to become the acquired gradation information, and dimming is performed. .

  The LED constant current drive circuit 402bb is a door frame side second serial system (light emission data) input via the data line buffer 402baxc and clock line buffer 402baxd in the constant current drive circuit 402bax constituting the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba. When the ID information of the light emission data SDAT2 includes its own ID based on the SDAT2 and the clock signal SCLK2, the gradation information is taken in from the light emission data SDAT2, and the acquired gradation information is obtained. The remaining two full color LEDs hdLED9 and hdLED10 among the full color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 are individually controlled to perform dimming and the left side to be a subsequent substrate of the lower left lower decoration substrate 402b Upper decoration board 40 Is the five independent control huLED1~huLED5 a full-color LED of and turned dimming implemented in a.

  As described above, since the LED constant current drive circuit 402 ba is a sink (suction) type, it generates heat by absorbing a constant current flowing to eight hdLED 1 to hdLED 8 among the 10 full color LEDs hdLED 1 to hdLED 10 Do. Therefore, heat dissipation resistors hdRr1 to hdRr8, hdRg1 to hdRg8, hdRb1 to hdRb8, which constitute the heat dispersion circuit 402bc, are responsible for part of the heat generation of the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba (more precisely, the constant current drive circuit 402bax) Thus, the heat generation of the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba (precisely, the constant current drive circuit 402bax) can be dispersed.

  As described above, since the LED constant current drive circuit 402bb is a sink (suction) type, it sinks constant current flowing to two hdLEDs 9 and hdLEDs 10 out of 10 full color LEDs hdLED 1 to hdLED 10, and Heat is generated by absorbing a constant current flowing to huLED1 to huLED5 which are five full color LEDs mounted on the left upper side decoration substrate 402a which is a substrate subsequent to the lower side decoration substrate 402b. Therefore, part of the heat generation of the LED constant current drive circuit 402bb (precisely, the constant current drive circuit 402bbx) for two hdLEDs 9 and hdLEDs 10 among the 10 full color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10, The heat dispersive circuit 402bc is composed of five elements mounted on the left side upper decoration substrate 402a which is a heat dispersion resistance hdRr9, hdRr10, hdRg9, hdRg10, hdRb9, hdRb10 and is a subsequent substrate of the left side lower decoration substrate 402b. For the full-color LEDs huLED1 to huLED5, the heat dispersion resistors huRr1a to hudRr5a, huRg1a to huRg5a, huRb1a to huRb5a, and the left side on the left side, which constitute the heat dispersion circuit 402bc in the lower left decoration substrate 402b The heat dispersion resistances huRr1b to hudRr5b, huRg1b to huRg5b, and huRb1b to huRb5b, which constitute the heat dispersion circuit 402ac in the decoration substrate 402a, enable the LED constant current drive circuit 402bb (precisely, the constant current drive circuit 402bbx) It is possible to disperse the heat.

  Further, as described above, the heat dispersion circuit 402bc of the left side lower decoration substrate 402b and the heat dispersion circuit 402ac of the left side upper decoration substrate 402a are the LED constant current drive circuit 402bb (precisely, the constant current drive circuit 402bbx) In addition to the function of being able to disperse the heat generation of the above, it also has a function of preventing damage to electronic components due to static electricity.

  In addition to the lower left side decorative substrate 402b as the decorative substrate provided with two LED constant current drive circuits, the upper central dish decoration substrate 314, the lower central dish decoration substrate 316, the in-side window decorative portion decoration substrate 413, the right side There is a lower decorative substrate 418 b and a door frame top central decorative substrate 455.

  In addition to the decoration board 402a on the left side, there is a decoration board 418a on the right side as a decoration board which is not provided with the LED constant current drive circuit at all.

12-4. Arrangement method of LED constant current drive circuit]
Next, a method of arranging the LED constant current drive circuit will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 167 and 168. In the present embodiment, as described above, the LED constant current drive circuit provided on each decoration substrate of the door frame 3 is the same circuit. Here, the constant current drive circuit that constitutes the LED constant current drive circuit will be described as an electronic component integrated on one semiconductor chip. Surface mount type (SMD, height: 0.9 mm) having a square planar shape (horizontal length: 6.0 mm, vertical length: 6.0 mm) as the type of IC package of the constant current drive circuit And so-called VQFN. Among the four end sides of the constant current drive circuit, one end side is the input side, and the remaining three end sides are the output side 1 to the output side 3, respectively. Note that in FIG. 168, various electronic components are omitted and part of the silk printing is omitted for easy viewing of the drawing.

  As described above, each decoration substrate of the door frame 3 in the present embodiment is formed in the shape of an elongated strip and includes one LED constant current drive circuit and two LED constant current drive circuits. There is. Since the arrangement method of the LED constant current drive circuit in each decoration substrate of the door frame 3 is almost the same, here, the left side formed in an elongated strip shape extending in the upper and lower direction provided with two LED constant current drive circuits The lower decorative substrate 402b and the dish upper center decorative substrate 314 formed in the shape of an elongated strip having a semicircular arc shape will be described.

[12-4-1. Left side lower decoration board]
As shown in FIG. 167 (a), the lower left lower decoration substrate 402b is provided with LED constant current drive circuits 402ba and 402bb, and 10 full color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 and the like. The ten full color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 are mounted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left decoration substrate 402b on the front side of the pachinko machine 1, whereas the LED constant current drive circuits 402ba and 402bb , It is mounted on the LED non-mounting surface 402 by of the lower left side decoration substrate 402 b on the back side of the pachinko machine 1. A connector LDUCN for connecting the left side upper decoration substrate 402a and the electrical wiring is mounted on the upper end side of the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decoration substrate 402b, and the LED non-mounting of the left side lower decoration substrate 402b A connector LDLCN for connecting the door frame sub relay board 105 and the electrical wiring is mounted on the lower end side of the surface 402by.

  A white resist is uniformly coated on the LED mounting surface 402bx and the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b. In the present embodiment, a white resist solidly coated on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decoration substrate 402b has a reflectance toward the front (that is, the front side of the pachinko machine 1) by light emission of the full color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10. Can be raised.

  On the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower side lower decorative substrate 402b, a part number corresponding to the full color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 and a region indicating the position where the full color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 are arranged are completely printed as silk printing It has not been. In addition, on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b, the substrate management number of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b is not formed as a blank character by a white resist.

  This is because the reflectance on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b by the light emission of the full color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 is reduced by the full color LED and the area indicating the position where the full color LED is arranged. To prevent that. Therefore, it can prevent that the reflectance in LED mounting surface 402bx of lower left side decoration board 402b by light emission of full color LED hdLED1-hdLED10 falls.

  In addition, although the door frame left side decoration 404 shown in FIG. 91A provided in the door frame 3 is formed to have a milky white color as described above, the game is seated in front of the pachinko machine 1 When the person moves the head (face), the line of sight changes according to the direction of the head (face), temporarily, the player visually recognizes the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decoration substrate 402b provided in the door frame left side decoration 404 Even if it is possible, in the first place, on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left lower decoration substrate 402b, the full color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 and corresponding part numbers, and the full color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 are arranged Since the area indicating the position is not printed at all as silk printing, a full color L having no relation to the game at all for the player D and corresponding part numbers, and a region indicating where to place the full color LED are prevented from being viewed by the player. Therefore, a number identifying the full color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 (that is, part numbers corresponding to the full color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10) and auxiliary lines indicating the mounting positions of the full color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 (that is, full color LEDs It is possible to make it difficult for the player to visually recognize a certain hdLED1 to hdLED10).

  In addition, on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b, the part number corresponding to the connector LDLCN and the area indicating the position where the connector LDLCN is disposed are not printed at all as silk printing. This prevents the player from visually recognizing the area indicating the position where the connector LDLCN and the part number corresponding to the connector LDLCN have no relation to the game at all.

  In addition, the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left lower decoration substrate 402b is solidly coated with a white resist. The hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs, are made of resin of white (the color recognized to be the same color as white), and the connector LDUCN has a white housing (also called natural color, white (natural color) Color) It is made of resin recognized as the same color. That is, the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b is an electronic component having a package of the same color (color recognized as the same color) as a white resist covered (solidly coated) on the entire surface. A full color LED, hdLED1 to hdLED10, and a connector LDUCN having a white resist and a housing of the same color (color recognized as the same color) covered entirely (solidly coated) are mounted. Thus, in the present embodiment, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors (not shown) that do not have white color and connectors that do not have white color are completely mounted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left decoration substrate 402b. Not. In other words, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that do not have white color, and connectors that do not have white color have a decrease in reflectance on the LED mounting surface due to the light emission of the full color LED. Not implemented at all.

  In addition, on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b, the substrate management number of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b is a wiring that is a copper foil in a layer without foil (that is, a layer on which a wiring pattern is formed (copper plane) It is formed as a blank character formed by removing the copper foil around it by making a letter with a pattern, and the blank character is formed by a white resist solidly coated on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decoration substrate 402b. It is covered. The wiring pattern for forming the foil-removed characters is formed so as to be electrically insulated from the electronic component. In addition, the board management number of the lower left side decoration substrate 402b is replaced by the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decoration substrate 402b, and foil-removed characters (that is, the wiring pattern) on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decoration substrate 402b. In a layer (copper plane) in which a character is formed by forming a character with a wiring pattern which is a copper foil, and may be formed as a cutout character formed by removing the copper foil around it. Make a letter with the wiring pattern which is a copper foil in the layer (Copper plane) on which the foil mounting pattern (that is, the wiring pattern is formed) on the LED mounting surface 402bx and the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left side decoration substrate 402b It may be formed as a drawn character formed by pulling out the copper foil, respectively. Further, the LED mounting surface 402bx and the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b are formed as a solid ground as described later. For this reason, the board management number of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b is formed by forming a character with a wiring pattern which is a copper foil in a foil-removed character (that is, a layer (copper plane) on which a wiring pattern is formed) Not formed as a stamped character formed on the LED mounting surface 402bx or a solid ground of the LED non-mounting surface 402by, it is formed as a stamped character on one or both surfaces It may be

  On the other hand, the constant current drive circuit 402bax constituting the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba, the resistances Rr, Rb and Rg of the maximum current setting circuit 402bay, and various dispersions on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left decoration substrate 402b. Areas showing positions where electronic components such as resistors are arranged are printed as silk printing by yellow solid lines (or black solid lines), and part numbers corresponding to electronic parts are printed as silk printing in the vicinity of these areas. They are printed in yellow (or black) respectively. Specifically, for example, the area indicating the position where the constant current drive circuit 402bax is arranged is a yellow solid line (or a black solid line) LSLKa (see FIG. 168 (a)) for silk printing, and the left side lower decoration substrate The IC1 (see FIG. 168 (a)), which is a part number corresponding to the constant current drive circuit 402bax, is printed on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of 402b and is in the vicinity of the region LSLKa and above. As a yellow solid line (or a black solid line) is printed on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left side decoration substrate 402b. Then, a region indicating the position where the resistors Rr, Rb, Rg of the maximum current setting circuit 402bay are arranged is a yellow solid line (or a black solid line) LSLKb, LSLKc, LSLKd (see FIG. 168 (a)). Are printed on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b, and in the vicinity of these regions LSLKb, LSLKc, and LSLKd and to the right, the resistors Rr, Rb, and Rg of the maximum current setting circuit 402bay. And the corresponding part numbers R1, R2 and R3 (see FIG. 168 (a)) are printed as yellow (or black) as silk printing on the LED non-mounting surface 402 by of the lower left side decorative substrate 402 b. There is.

  In addition, in the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left lower decoration substrate 402b, a region corresponding to hdLED1 to hdLED10 which is a full color LED mounted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left lower lower decoration substrate 402b (Or, black dashed lines) LSLK1 to LSLK10 (only full-color LEDs hdLED4 and hdLED5 respectively correspond to dashed-dotted lines LSLK4 and LSLK5 corresponding to each other are shown in FIG. 168 (a)) and printed in these areas Part numbers corresponding to hdLED1 to hdLED10 which are full color LEDs in the vicinity of LSLK1 to LSLK10 and corresponding to the upper or lower part (FIG. 168 (a) are LED4, LED4 which are part numbers corresponding to hdLED4 and hdLED5 which are full color LEDs Only expressed respectively.) Are respectively printed in yellow (or black) as silk printing.

  In addition, on the LED non-mounting surface 402 by of the lower left side decorative substrate 402 b, a yellow dashed line (not shown) indicating a region where the connector LDLCN mounted on the LED mounting surface 402 bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402 b is arranged While printed with (or black dashed line), the part number corresponding to the connector LDLCN is printed in yellow (or black) not shown as silk printing in the vicinity of this area.

  Also, the resistors and capacitors mounted on the LED non-mounting surface 402 by of the lower left side decoration substrate 402 b do not have white color, and the constant current drive circuit 402 bax (402 bbx) integrated on one semiconductor chip is The package is made of a black resin, and the connector LDLCN is made of a resin whose housing has a color of black, brown or blue. As described above, electronic components such as a resistor, a capacitor, and an IC that do not have white color, and a connector that does not have white color have a reduced reflectance due to the light emission of a full color LED. Has been implemented.

  Furthermore, on the LED non-mounting surface 402 by of the left side lower decoration substrate 402 b, lighting inspection is individually performed on hdLED1 to hdLED 10 which are full color LEDs mounted on the LED mounting surface 402 bx of the left side lower decoration substrate 402 b (for example, The LED elements that emit red (R), the LED elements that emit green (G), and the LED elements that emit blue (B) that constitute one full-color LED A plurality of check pins (not shown) can be formed as test pads (or through holes) connected to the wiring pattern, and part numbers corresponding to each of the plurality of check pins are not illustrated as silk printing in the vicinity of the plurality of check pins. It is printed in yellow (or black). The plurality of check pins are not coated with a white resist. As a result, when a worker performing an inspection brings a probe (not shown) into contact with the check pin, the probe (not shown) and the check pin are electrically connected to be in a conductive state, and various inspections can be performed. Note that among the plurality of check pins, there are some that can confirm the contents of serial data to the constant current drive circuit 402bax and the constant current drive circuit 402bbx.

  In the embodiment, an electronic component such as a resistor and a capacitor which does not have a white color that reduces the reflectance on the LED mounting surface due to the light emission of a full color LED, and a connector which does not have a white color Since the reflectance on the mounting surface is lowered, it was not mounted at all on the LED mounting surface, but among the LED mounting surfaces due to the light emission of the full color LED, the area corresponding to the member disposed forward is the LED mounting surface If it is difficult to contribute to the reflectance in the above, electronic components such as a resistor and a capacitor not having white and a connector not having white may be arranged in the region. In this case, an area indicating the position where an electronic component or connector is to be arranged is printed as a silk-screened yellow dotted line (or a black dotted line) not shown on the LED non-mounting surface. Parts and connectors and corresponding part numbers are printed in yellow (or black) not shown as silk printing.

  The LED mounting surface 402bx and the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b are formed as a so-called solid ground in which a region excluding land patterns and wiring patterns of electronic components and connectors is grounded to ground (GND). The solid ground formed on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decoration substrate 402b and the solid ground formed on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decoration substrate 402b are electrically connected by a plurality of through holes not shown. There is.

  As described above, since the left side lower decorative substrate 402b is formed in the shape of an elongated strip extending vertically, when viewed from the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, the left side lower decorative substrate 402b is The width dimension from the left end side 402beg1 to the right end side 402beg2 is only about 1.78 times the width dimension from the left end side to the right end side of the land pattern of the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx. Therefore, when the end sides of the land patterns of the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx are arranged parallel to the left end side 402beg1 and the right end side 402beg2 of the lower left side decoration substrate 402b, the lands of the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx Since the distance between the edge of the pattern and the left edge 402beg1 or the right edge 402beg2 of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b becomes extremely short, let's take out the wiring pattern from each lead pad of the land pattern arranged on the edge Even in this case, since the pattern width of the wiring pattern and the distance between adjacent wiring patterns are limited by the minimum distance dimension, it becomes difficult to pull out all the wiring patterns from each lead pad of the land patterns arranged at the end .

  Therefore, in this embodiment, the end sides of the land patterns of the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx are arranged to be inclined 45 degrees with respect to the left end side 402beg1 and the right end side 402beg2 of the lower left decoration substrate 402b. Adopted the configuration.

  In the present embodiment, by adopting such an arrangement, the lower end side of the right of the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx is input when viewed from the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left side decoration substrate 402b. By arranging the terminal on the input side closer to the left end side 402beg1 of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b so as to become the terminal on the side, the terminal frame on the door frame side second serial system (light emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2 shown in FIG. ), DC (+12 V), ground (GND), resistances Rr and Rg of maximum current setting circuits 402bay and 402bby are input, and the lower left end, upper left end and upper right end are mainly output terminal 1 to output side. The output terminals 1 to 3 are connected to the output channels LR1 to LR8 and LG1 shown in FIG. LG8, LB1~LB8, and door frame side second serial line (emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2) to output the like. The terminal 1 on the output side has a terminal to which the resistance Rb of the maximum current setting circuit 402bay and 402bby is input, and the output 2 and the output 3 have a terminal to which a ground (GND) is input. There is.

  Further, by adopting such an arrangement, two ends of the land pattern of the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx are inclined 45 degrees with respect to the left end side 402beg1 of the lower left side decoration substrate 402b. While being able to arrange as a state, it is possible to arrange so that the remaining two end sides are inclined 45 degrees with respect to the right end side 402beg2 of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b. Thus, from each lead pad of the land pattern arranged on the four sides of the land pattern of the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx, the pattern width of the wiring pattern and the distance between adjacent wiring patterns are restricted by the minimum distance dimension. You can even pull out all the wiring patterns. Therefore, in the left side lower decoration substrate 402b formed in an elongated strip shape extending vertically, it is possible to secure an area where the wiring (wiring pattern) is drawn out from the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx.

  Further, by adopting such an arrangement, among the eight full color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED8, there are four full color LEDs consisting of group 1 consisting of four full color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED4 and four full color LEDs Since the constant current drive circuit 402bax can be disposed between the group 2 composed of hdLED5 to hdLED8, the length of the wiring pattern from the constant current drive circuit 402bax to the groups 1 and 2 can be extended. Can be formed evenly. As a result, it is possible to prevent the length of routing the wiring pattern to the group 1 and the group 2 from being lengthened or shortened in any one of the group 1 and the group 2, and therefore, the art It is possible to increase the efficiency of the arrangement and routing of the wiring pattern in the work.

  In addition, by adopting such an arrangement, the constant current drive circuit 402bax can be reduced by using the hdLED 6 which is the full-color LED (Fig. 167 (a)) in the vertical direction on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left decoration substrate 402b. The constant current drive circuit 402bbx can be disposed closer to the lower side compared to the disposed portion), and the central portion in the vertical direction of the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left decoration substrate 402b (FIG. 167 (a) (The part where the hdLED 6 which is the full color LED is arranged) is located closer to the upper side, and can be arranged above the hdLED 8 which is the full color LED configured in group 2 whose light emission is controlled by the constant current drive circuit 402bax . Thus, it is possible to secure an area for routing the wiring pattern from the constant current drive circuit 402bax to the eight full color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED8 in the lower left side decoration substrate 402b, and from the constant current drive circuit 402bbx The area for wiring the wiring pattern to the full color LEDs huLED1 to huLED5 provided on the two left full color LEDs hdLED9, hdLED10 and the five left upper side decoration substrates 402a shown in FIG. It can be secured at 402b.

  In the present embodiment, in addition to the resistors Rr, Rg, Rb of the maximum current setting circuits 402bay, 402bby, capacitors not shown are soldered to the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left decoration substrate 402b. The resistors Rr, Rg, Rb and capacitors not shown are surface mount type (SMD) having a rectangular planar shape, and so-called EIA type 0805 (designated 2012, horizontal length: 2.0 mm, vertical length Length: 1.25 mm). That is, the sizes of the resistors Rr, Rg, Rb and capacitors not shown are compared with the sizes (horizontal length: 6.0 mm, vertical length: 6.0 mm) of the constant current drive circuits 402bax, 402bbx. Very small. Therefore, the resistors Rr, Rg, Rb and capacitors not shown are different from the constant current drive circuits 402bax, 402bbx, and one end of the resistors Rr, Rg, Rb in the longitudinal direction is the left end side of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b Capacitors arranged in parallel with 402beg1 and right end side 402beg2 and not shown are such that one end side in the longitudinal direction is perpendicular to left end side 402beg1 and right end side 402beg2 of lower left side decorative substrate 402b It is arranged as. In other words, each end of the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx arranged with the end of the land pattern inclined 45 degrees with respect to the left end side 402beg1 and the right end side 402beg2 of the lower left side decoration substrate 402b and the resistance They are respectively disposed on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left side decoration substrate 402b so that Rr, Rg, Rb and one end side in the longitudinal direction of the capacitor (not shown) are not parallel to each other.

  In addition, as described above, in the arrangement method of the LED constant current drive circuit on each decoration substrate of the door frame 3, the end side of the land pattern of the constant current drive circuit is 45 to the left end side and the right end side of the decoration substrate. The door frame top central decorative substrate 455, the door frame top left decorative substrate 456, and the door frame top right decorative substrate 457 of the door frame top decorative body 453 are substantially identical although they are arranged as inclined. Unlike the other decoration substrates of Frame 3, the door frame top center decoration substrate 455, the door frame top left decoration substrate 456, and the door frame top right decoration substrate 457 are disposed on the door frame top decoration 453 of the decoration substrate Since the width dimension from the upper end side to the lower end side is large, the end side of the land pattern of the constant current drive circuit can be obtained by using the door frame top central decoration substrate 455, the door frame top left decoration substrate 456, and the door frame top It is arranged so as to be parallel to the upper side and lower side of the right decorative substrate 457. That is, in the present embodiment, the end of the land pattern of the constant current drive circuit is parallel to the end of the decoration substrate, and the end of the land pattern of the constant current drive circuit is not parallel to the end of the decoration substrate. There is a mixture of In the present embodiment, the door frame top central decorative substrate 455 is provided with the other central decorative substrate on which five full color LEDs (not shown) are mounted, in addition to the eleven full color LEDs (not shown). Two LED constant current drive circuits (first LED constant current drive circuit (first constant current drive circuit, first maximum current setting circuit), second LED constant current drive circuit (second constant current drive circuit, In the second maximum current setting circuit)), an LED constant current drive circuit (here, a second LED constant current drive circuit (second constant current drive circuit, second maximum current setting circuit))) Two heat dispersion circuits (the first constant current drive circuit is a first heat dispersion circuit (heat dispersion resistance), the second constant current drive circuit is a second heat dispersion circuit (heat dispersion resistance)) Control the light emission directly through the The left decorative substrate 456 is provided with one LED constant current drive circuit (not shown) (not shown) with the other left decorative substrate on which one full color LED not shown is mounted in addition to the seven full color LEDs with which it is provided. The light emission control is directly controlled via one heat dispersion circuit (heat dispersion resistance) provided for itself (not shown) by the current drive circuit and the maximum current setting circuit, and the door frame top right decoration substrate 457 has six full color LEDs provided for itself. In addition to the above, another right decoration substrate on which two full color LEDs (not shown) are mounted is provided with itself by one LED constant current drive circuit (constant current drive circuit, maximum current setting circuit) not shown. Direct light emission control is performed via one heat dispersion circuit (heat dispersion resistance). The other central decorative substrate is formed in an elongated strip shape extending left and right along the central portion of the door frame top decorative body 453, and the other left decorative substrate is a left side portion of the door frame top decorative body 453. The other right decoration substrate is formed in the shape of an elongated strip extending leftward and rightward along the right side portion of the door frame top decorative body 453. It is necessary to provide heat dissipating circuits (heat dissipating resistors) on each of the other central decorative substrates, the other left decorative substrates, and the other right decorative substrates. As described above, the heat dispersion circuit (here, the second heat dispersion circuit (heat dispersion resistance)) provided on the door frame top central decoration substrate 455 itself and the heat dispersion circuit of the other central decoration substrate are the door frame top In addition to the function of being able to disperse the heat generation of the second LED constant current drive circuit (precisely, the second constant current drive circuit) provided on the central decorative substrate 455 itself, it prevents damage to electronic parts due to static electricity It also has features that can be done. Further, as described above, the heat dispersion circuit provided on the door frame top left decoration substrate 456 itself and the heat dispersion circuit of the other left decoration substrate are the LED constant current drive circuits provided on the door frame top left decoration substrate 456 In addition to the function of dispersing the heat generation of the constant current drive circuit, the function of preventing damage to the electronic component due to static electricity is also included. Further, as described above, the heat dispersion circuit provided on the door frame top right decoration substrate 457 itself and the heat dispersion circuit of the other right decoration substrate are the LED constant current drive circuits provided on the door frame top right decoration substrate 457 (correctly In addition to the function of dispersing the heat generation of the constant current drive circuit, the function of preventing damage to the electronic component due to static electricity is also included.

  Also, ten full color LEDs are arranged with the end sides of the land patterns of the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx inclined 45 degrees with respect to the left end side 402beg1 and the right end side 402beg2 of the lower left side decoration substrate 402b. The hdLED1 to hdLED10 are viewed from the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left lower decoration substrate 402b and closer to the right end 402beg2 of the lower left lower decoration substrate 402b and along the vertical direction of the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left lower decoration substrate 402b. And the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx are closer to the left end side 402beg1 of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b when viewed from the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b. L of left side lower decoration board 402b Adopting a configuration of placing the D non-mounting surface 402By. As described above, the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx are sink (suction) types, and generate heat by absorbing a constant current flowing to each LED element. For this reason, even in the left-side lower decoration substrate 402b formed in an elongated strip shape extending vertically, by separating the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx and the 10 full color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10, The heat generated by the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx can be made less susceptible to the 10 full color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10.

  Also, by arranging the end sides of the land patterns of the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx to be inclined 45 degrees with respect to the left end side 402beg1 and the right end side 402beg2 of the lower left side decoration substrate 402b, the constant current drive circuit The end of the land pattern of 402bax and 402bbx is disposed parallel to the left and right sides of the decoration substrate (that is, the door frame top central decoration substrate 455 of the door frame top decoration 453, the door frame top left decoration Compared to the substrate 456 and the door frame top right decoration substrate 457), the one which arranges the end side of the land pattern of the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx nonparallel to the left end side and the right end side of the decoration substrate is the decoration substrate The width dimension from the left end side to the right end side of can be further shortened. This can contribute to increasing the distance dimension in the left-right direction of the game board 5.

12-4-2. Dish center top decoration board]
The dish center upper decoration substrate 314 includes LED constant current drive circuits 314a and 314b, ten full color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10, and the like, as shown in FIG. 167 (b). While ten full color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 are mounted on the LED mounting surface 314x of the upper center plate decorative plate 314 on the upper side of the rendering operation unit 300, the LED constant current drive circuit 314a , 314 b are mounted on the LED non-mounting surface 314 y of the upper center dish decoration substrate 314 on the upward direction of the rendering operation unit 300. When the dish center upper decoration substrate 314 shown in FIG. 167 (b) is turned 90 degrees to the left and viewed (that is, the dish center upper decoration substrate 314 is actually arranged along the dish center upper decoration body 312a. Connector HCN is mounted on the right side along the upper edge 314eg1 of the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish upper center decorative substrate 314, for connecting the operation part relay substrate 392 and the electrical wiring.

  A white resist is uniformly coated on the LED mounting surface 314x and the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the upper center decoration substrate 314. In this embodiment, a white resist solidly coated on the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish upper center decorative substrate 314 causes the full color LED hLED1 to hLED10 to emit light forward (that is, the upper side of the rendering operation unit 300). It is possible to increase the reflectance of the

  On the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decoration substrate 314, the part numbers corresponding to the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10, and the area indicating the position where the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 are arranged are completely printed as silk printing It has not been. In addition, the substrate management number of the upper center dish decoration board 314 is not formed on the LED mounting surface 314x of the upper dish base decoration board 314 as a white letter with a white resist.

  This is because the reflectance of the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 at the LED mounting surface 314x of the upper center decoration substrate 314 decreases due to the full color LED and the area indicating the position where the full color LED is arranged. To prevent that. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the reflectance of the LED mounting surface 314x of the upper center dish decorative substrate 314 from being lowered by the light emission of the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10.

  Moreover, although the dish center upper decoration 312a of the unit front cover 312 shown in FIG. 91A provided on the door frame 3 is formed to be milky white having translucency as described above, the front of the pachinko machine 1 is When the player sitting on the head moves the head (face), the line of sight changes according to the direction of the head (face), temporarily, the dish center upper decoration board 314 provided on the dish center upper decoration body 312a of the unit front cover 312 Even when the player can visually recognize the mounting surface 314x, the LED mounting surface 314x of the upper center dish decoration substrate 314 originally has a part number corresponding to hLED1 to hLED10, which are full color LEDs, and a full color LED The area indicating the position where the hLED1 to hLED10 are arranged is not printed at all as silk printing. Full color LED with the corresponding part number, and a region indicating where to place the full color LED are prevented from being viewed by the player without a. Therefore, a number specifying the full color LED hLED1 to hLED10 (that is, a part number corresponding to the full color LED hLED1 to hLED10) or an auxiliary line indicating the mounting position of the full color LED hLED1 to hLED10 (that is, full color LED It is possible to make it difficult for the player to visually recognize the area where the certain hLED1 to hLED10 are arranged.

  A part number corresponding to the connector HCN and a region indicating the position where the connector HCN is to be arranged are not printed at all on the LED mounting surface 314x of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314 as silk printing. This prevents the player from visually recognizing the area indicating the connector HCN and the part number corresponding to the player and the position where the connector HCN is to be arranged, which has no relation to the game at all.

  In addition, the whole of the LED mounting surface 314x of the plate center upper decoration substrate 314 is covered with a white resist. The hLED1 to hLED10, which are full color LEDs, are made of resin of white (the color recognized as the same color as white), and the connector HCN has a white housing (also called natural color, white (natural color) Color) It is made of resin recognized as the same color. That is, the LED mounting surface 314x of the upper center decoration substrate 314 is an electronic component having a package of the same color (color recognized as the same color) as the white resist covered (solidly coated) on the whole. A full color LED hLED1 to hLED10 and a connector HCN having a white resist covered with the whole (solid color) and a housing of the same color (color recognized as the same color) are mounted. Thus, in the present embodiment, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors (not shown) that do not have white color and connectors that do not have white color are completely mounted on the LED mounting surface 314 x of the decoration board 314 on the upper center of the dish. Not. In other words, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that do not have white color, and connectors that do not have white color have a decrease in reflectance on the LED mounting surface due to the light emission of the full color LED. Not implemented at all.

  In addition, on the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decoration board 314, the board management number of the dish upper center decoration board 314 is a wire with a foil-free character (that is, copper foil in a layer (copper plane) on which a wiring pattern is formed) The character is formed in a pattern and is formed as a blank character formed by removing the copper foil around it, and the white font is solidly coated on the LED mounting surface 314x of the decoration substrate 314 on the upper center of the dish It is covered. The wiring pattern for forming the foil-removed characters is formed so as to be electrically insulated from the electronic component. In addition, the board management number of the dish center upper decoration board 314 is replaced by the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decoration board 314, and the foil-free character (that is, the wiring pattern) In a layer (copper plane) in which a character is formed by a wiring pattern which is a copper foil, and may be formed as a cut-out character formed by removing the copper foil around it. Make a letter with a wiring pattern which is a copper foil in the layer (copper plane) on which a foil pattern is formed (that is, a layer on which a wiring pattern is formed) on the LED mounting surface 314x and the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the dish upper center decorative substrate 314 It may be formed as a drawn character formed by pulling out the copper foil, respectively. In addition, the LED mounting surface 314x and the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the dish center upper decoration substrate 314 are formed as a solid ground, as described later. For this reason, the board management number of the decoration base 314 on the upper center of the plate is made by forming a character with a wiring pattern which is a copper foil in a foil-removed character (that is, a layer (copper plane) on which a wiring pattern is formed) Not formed on the LED mounting surface 314x or on the LED non-mounting surface 314y on one or both sides. It may be

  On the other hand, the constant current drive circuit 314 ax constituting the LED constant current drive circuit 314 a, the resistances Rr, Rb, Rg of the maximum current setting circuit 314 ay, and various dispersions Regions showing positions where electronic components such as resistors are arranged are printed as silk lines with yellow solid lines (or black solid lines) not shown, and the component numbers corresponding to the electronic components are silk near these areas. They are printed in yellow (or black) not shown for printing.

  Further, on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the dish center upper decoration substrate 314, a region corresponding to hLED1 to hLED10 which is full color LEDs mounted on the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decoration substrate 314 is not illustrated as silk printing. The yellow dots (or the part numbers corresponding to hLED1 to hLED10, which are full color LEDs, are not shown as silk printing in the vicinity of these areas HSLK1 to HSLK10) , Black) are printed respectively.

  In addition, on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314, a yellow dashed line (not shown) indicating a position where the connector HCN mounted on the LED mounting surface 314x of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314 is disposed as silk printing. While printed with (or black dashed line), a part number corresponding to the connector HCN is printed in the vicinity of this area in yellow (or black) not shown as silk printing.

  Also, the resistors, capacitors, etc. mounted on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the dish center upper decoration substrate 314 do not have white color, and the constant current drive circuit 314ax (314bx) integrated on one semiconductor chip is The package is made of black resin. As described above, electronic components such as a resistor, a capacitor, and an IC that do not have white color are mounted on the LED non-mounting surface because the reflectance due to the light emission of the full color LED decreases.

  Furthermore, the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the dish center upper decoration substrate 314 is individually subjected to lighting inspection on hLED1 to hLED10 which are full color LEDs mounted on the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decoration substrate 314 (for example, The LED elements that emit red (R), the LED elements that emit green (G), and the LED elements that emit blue (B) that constitute one full-color LED A plurality of check pins (not shown) can be formed as test pads (or through holes) connected to the wiring pattern, and part numbers corresponding to each of the plurality of check pins are not illustrated as silk printing in the vicinity of the plurality of check pins. It is printed in yellow (or black). The plurality of check pins are not coated with a white resist. As a result, when a worker performing an inspection brings a probe (not shown) into contact with the check pin, the probe (not shown) and the check pin are electrically connected to be in a conductive state, and various inspections can be performed. There are also a plurality of check pins that can confirm the contents of serial data to the constant current drive circuit 314ax and the constant current drive circuit 314bx.

  The LED mounting surface 314x and the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the dish center upper decoration substrate 314 are formed as a so-called solid ground in which a region other than land patterns and wiring patterns of electronic parts and connectors is grounded to ground (GND). The solid ground formed on the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decoration substrate 314 and the solid ground formed on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the dish center upper decoration substrate 314 are electrically connected by a plurality of through holes not shown. There is.

  In the present embodiment, electronic components such as a resistor and a capacitor that do not have a white color that reduces the reflectance on the LED mounting surface due to the light emission of a full color LED and a connector that does not have a white color Although the LED mounting surface is not mounted at all because the reflectance on the LED mounting surface is lowered, the area corresponding to the member disposed forward in the LED mounting surface due to the light emission of the full color LED is the LED mounting If it is difficult to contribute to the reflectance on the surface, electronic components such as a resistor and a capacitor not having white and a connector not having white may be disposed in the region. In this case, an area indicating the position where an electronic component or connector is to be arranged is printed as a silk-screened yellow dotted line (or a black dotted line) not shown on the LED non-mounting surface. Parts and connectors and corresponding part numbers are printed in yellow (or black) not shown as silk printing.

  Since the dish center upper decoration substrate 314 is formed in a slender strip shape having a semicircular arc shape as described above, the dish center upper decoration substrate 314 shown in FIG. 167 (b) is rotated 90 degrees to the left When viewed (that is, in a state where the dish center upper decoration substrate 314 is actually disposed along the dish center upper decoration 312a), the upper end side 314eg1 to the lower end side 314eg2 of the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decoration substrate 314 The width dimension to the maximum is only about 1.78 times the width dimension from the left end side to the right end side of the land pattern of the constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx. Therefore, when the end sides of the land patterns of the constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx are arranged parallel to the upper end side 314eg1 and the lower end side 314eg2 of the upper center decoration substrate 314, the lands of the constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx are arranged. Since the distance between the edge of the pattern and the upper edge 314eg1 or the lower edge 314eg2 of the upper center decoration board 314 becomes extremely short, let's draw the wiring pattern from each lead pad of the land pattern arranged on the edge Even in this case, since the pattern width of the wiring pattern and the distance between adjacent wiring patterns are limited by the minimum distance dimension, it becomes difficult to pull out all the wiring patterns from each lead pad of the land patterns arranged at the end .

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the end sides of the land patterns of the constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx are arranged to be inclined 45 degrees with respect to the upper end side 314eg1 and the lower end side 314eg2 of the upper center dish decoration substrate 314. Adopted the configuration.

  In this embodiment, by adopting such an arrangement, the left lower end side of the four ends of the constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx is an input as viewed from the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the upper center decoration plate 314. The terminal on the input side is arranged on the door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1) shown in FIG. ), DC (+12 V), ground (GND), resistances Rr and Rg of maximum current setting circuits 314ay and 314by are input, and the upper left end side, upper right end side and lower right end side are mainly output terminal 1 to output side And the terminals of the output side 1 to the terminals of the output side 3 are the output channels LR1 to LR8, LG1 to LG8, LB1 to LB8, and The door frame side first serial line (emission data SDAT1, clock signals SCLK1) to output the like. The terminal 1 on the output side has terminals to which the resistors Rb of the maximum current setting circuits 314 ay and 314 by are input, and the output 2 and the output side 3 have terminals to which the ground (GND) is input. There is.

  Further, by adopting such an arrangement, two ends of the land pattern of the constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx are inclined 45 degrees with respect to the upper end side 314eg1 of the upper center decoration substrate 314. While being able to arrange as a state, it is possible to arrange as the state which inclined the remaining 2 edge sides 45 degree vis-a-vis lower edge side 314eg2 of the plate center upper decoration baseplate 314. Thus, from the lead pads of the land patterns arranged on the four sides of the land patterns of the constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx, the pattern width of the wiring pattern and the distance between adjacent wiring patterns are restricted by the minimum distance dimension. You can even pull out all the wiring patterns. Therefore, it is possible to secure an area in which the wiring (wiring pattern) is drawn out from the constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx in the dish upper center decoration substrate 314 formed in a thin strip shape having a semicircular arc shape.

  In addition, by adopting such an arrangement, among the eight full color LEDs hLED1 to hLED8, the group 1 including four full color LEDs hLED1 to hLED4 and four full color LEDs Since the constant current drive circuit 314ax can be disposed between the group 2 composed of hLED5 to hLED8, the length of the wiring pattern from the constant current drive circuit 314ax to the groups 1 and 2 can be extended. Can be formed evenly. As a result, it is possible to prevent the length of routing the wiring pattern to the group 1 and the group 2 from being lengthened or shortened in any one of the group 1 and the group 2, and therefore, the art It is possible to increase the efficiency of the arrangement and routing of the wiring pattern in the work.

  Further, by adopting such an arrangement, when the dish center upper decoration substrate 314 shown in FIG. 167 (b) is viewed rotated 90 degrees to the left (in other words, the dish center upper decoration substrate 314 is on the dish center The constant current drive circuit 314 ax is a full-color LED in a semicircular arc central portion (FIG. 167 (b)) in the LED non-mounting surface 314 y of the upper center dish decoration substrate 314. While the constant current drive circuit 314bx can be disposed on the right side as compared with the portion where the hLED 6 is disposed, the semicircular arc central portion on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the upper center dish decorative substrate 314 (FIG. Group which is controlled to emit light by the constant current drive circuit 314 It can be arranged on the left of hLED8 a full-color LED configured to 2. Thus, it is possible to secure an area for drawing wiring patterns from the constant current drive circuit 314ax to the eight full color LEDs hLED1 to hLED8 in the upper center decoration plate 314 of the plate, and from the constant current drive circuit 314bx It is possible to secure on the dish upper center decorative substrate 314 a region for drawing a wiring pattern to the two full color LEDs hLED 9 and hLED 10.

  In the present embodiment, in addition to the resistors Rr, Rg and Rb of the maximum current setting circuits 314ay and 314by, capacitors (not shown) are soldered to the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the upper center dish decoration substrate 314. The resistors Rr, Rg, Rb and capacitors not shown are surface mount type (SMD) having a rectangular planar shape, and so-called EIA type 0805 (designated 2012, horizontal length: 2.0 mm, vertical length Length: 1.25 mm). That is, the sizes of the resistors Rr, Rg, Rb and the capacitors not shown are compared with the sizes (horizontal length: 6.0 mm, vertical length: 6.0 mm) of the constant current drive circuits 314ax, 314bx. Very small. Therefore, the resistors Rr, Rg, Rb and capacitors not shown are different from the constant current drive circuits 314ax, 314bx, and one end of the resistors Rr, Rg, Rb in the longitudinal direction is the upper edge side of the upper center decoration board 314 The capacitor is disposed parallel to 314eg1 and the lower end side 314eg2. One end side in the longitudinal direction of the capacitor not shown is perpendicular to the upper end side 314eg1 and the lower end side 314eg2 of the upper center decoration substrate 314. It is arranged as. In other words, each end of the constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx arranged with the end of the land pattern inclined 45 degrees with respect to the upper end side 314eg1 and the lower end side 314eg2 of the dish upper center decorative substrate 314 and the resistance They are disposed on the LED non-mounting surface 314 y of the upper center dish decorative substrate 314 so that Rr, Rg, Rb and one longitudinal end of the capacitor (not shown) are not parallel to each other.

  Further, the end sides of the land patterns of the constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx are arranged to be inclined 45 degrees with respect to the upper end side 314eg1 and the lower end side 314eg2 of the upper center dish decoration substrate 314, and ten full color LEDs HLED1 to hLED10 as viewed from the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish upper center decoration substrate 314 toward the lower end side 314eg2 of the dish upper center decoration substrate 314 and in a semicircular arc shape of the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish upper center decoration substrate 314 The constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx are closer to the upper edge 314eg1 of the upper center decoration substrate 314 when viewed from the LED mounting surface 314x of the upper upper decoration substrate 314 while being arranged with a predetermined distance along the side. A configuration is adopted in which the LED is mounted on the LED non-mounting surface 314 y of the upper center decoration board 314 of the dish. The constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx are of the sink type as described above, similarly to the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b, by absorbing constant current flowing in each LED element. Heat up. For this reason, also in the upper central decoration substrate 314 formed in a strip-like shape having a semicircular arc shape, the constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx and the ten full color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 are separated from each other. The heat generated by the constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx can be made less susceptible to the 10 full color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10.

  In addition, the end sides of the land patterns of the constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx are arranged to be inclined 45 degrees with respect to the upper end side 314eg1 and the lower end side 314eg2 of the upper center decoration plate 314, the constant current drive circuit The end of the land pattern of 314ax and 314bx is disposed parallel to the left and right sides of the decoration substrate (that is, the door frame top central decoration substrate 455 of the door frame top decoration 453, the door frame top left decoration Compared to the substrate 456 and the door frame top right decoration substrate 457), the one where the end sides of the land patterns of the constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx are arranged nonparallel to the left end side and the right end side of the decoration substrate is the decoration substrate The width dimension from the left end side to the right end side of can be further shortened. This can contribute to increasing the distance dimension in the left-right direction and the distance dimension in the front-rear direction of the rendering operation unit 300, so that the large-scale rendering operation unit 300 can be provided in the door frame 3, and the rendering operation unit A light emission effect can be performed by 300.

12-4-3. Genus pad on the bottom of IC package of constant current drive circuit]
The types of IC packages of constant current drive circuits that are the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx of the left side lower decoration substrate 402b and the constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx of the upper center plate decoration substrate 314 are flat as described above. It is a surface mounting type having a square shape and is a so-called VQFN. Here, an IC package of the constant current drive circuit 402bax of the lower left lower decoration substrate 402b will be described with reference to FIG.

  The metal pad FP is exposed at the central portion of the bottom surface of the IC package of the constant current drive circuit 402bax, and a so-called exposed pad (hereinafter referred to as "EPad") is formed. The IC package can be soldered to a substrate to enhance heat dissipation and bonding.

  The land pattern of the constant current drive circuit 402bax is provided with a square-shaped land pattern EP for EPad in addition to each lead pad. The land pattern EP for EPad is electrically connected to the solid ground of the LED non-mounting surface 402 by of the lower left side decoration substrate 402 b. Nine thermal vias TV are arranged in a formation grid form in the area of the land pattern EP for ePad. By these thermal vias TV, the land pattern EP for EPad and the solid ground formed on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left-side decoration substrate 402b are electrically connected. Therefore, the wiring pattern from each lead pad can not be drawn out in the region of the land pattern EP for EPad.

  As described above, the constant current drive circuit 402bax is a sink type, and generates heat by absorbing a constant current flowing through each LED element. That is, the heat generation of the constant current drive circuit 402bax is generated from the EPad to the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left decoration substrate 402b and the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left decoration substrate 402b through the land pattern EP for EPad. By diffusing, it is possible to dissipate heat all over the lower left side decoration substrate 402b.

  A brief description will be given of the relationship between the land pattern EP for EPad and the nine thermal vias TV. The junction region where the EPad (metal pad FP) of the constant current drive circuit is soldered to the land pattern EP for EPad is constant current. The number and diameter of the thermal vias TV are selected so as to be 50% or more with respect to the EPad (metal pad FP) of the drive circuit. As a result, the junction area where the EPad (metal pad FP) of the constant current drive circuit and the land pattern EP for EPad are soldered does not become too large and generation of voids is prevented, and this junction area becomes too small and stable. It is possible to obtain a good bonding strength. Although the land pattern EP for EPad can be divided into a grid and formed, also in this case, as described above, the constant current drive circuit as described above in order to prevent the occurrence of the void and obtain the stable bonding strength. It is necessary to make the junction region where the EPad (metal pad FP) is soldered to the land pattern EP for EPad 50% or more with respect to the EPad (metal pad FP) of the constant current drive circuit.

  Further, in contrast to the case where the end sides of the land patterns of the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx are arranged parallel to the left end side 402beg1 and the right end side 402beg2 of the lower left side decoration substrate 402b, the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx When the end of the land pattern is arranged to be inclined 45 degrees with respect to the left end side 402beg1 and the right end side 402beg2 of the lower left side decoration substrate 402b, the heat dissipation effect to the heat generation of the constant current drive circuit 402bax is high. Become. When arranging the end sides of the land patterns of the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx so as to be parallel to the left end side 402beg1 and the right end side 402beg2 of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b, the land pattern EP for EPad is similarly left When arranging the end sides of the land patterns of the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx so as to be arranged in parallel with the left end side 402beg1 and the right end side 402beg2 of the lower side decorative substrate 402b and inclined 45 degrees. The land pattern EP for EPad is also arranged in a state of being inclined 45 degrees. When the land pattern EP edge for EPad is disposed parallel to the left edge 402beg1 and the right edge 402beg2 of the lower left decoration substrate 402b, the land pattern EP edge for EPad and lower left decoration substrate 402b The fact that the distance dimension between the left end side 402beg1 or the right end side 402beg2 of is shorter and the distance dimension to the end of the substrate is shorter means that the room for heat dissipation on the substrate is smaller. . On the other hand, the left end side 402beg1 of the left side lower decoration substrate 402b in the case where the end pattern of the land pattern EP for EPad is arranged to be inclined 45 degrees with respect to the left end side 402beg1 and the right end side 402beg2 of the lower left side decoration substrate 402b. Alternatively, the distance between the right end side 402beg2 and the top end of the land pattern EP for EPad is a portion where the distance between the top and the substrate edge becomes short, but the two sides in contact with the vertex are not parallel to the substrate edge. Since the room for heat radiation on the substrate is wide, it can be said that the heat radiation effect is high as compared with the case where the edge pattern of the land pattern EP for EPad is parallel to the substrate edge.

  As described above, each decoration substrate of the door frame 3 in the present embodiment is formed in the shape of an elongated strip and includes one LED constant current drive circuit and two LED constant current drive circuits. In the present embodiment, as described above, as described above, the left-side lower decoration substrate 402b formed in an elongated strip shape extending vertically and including two LED constant current drive circuits, and a semicircle An LED according to the light emission from the full color LED is described according to the plate center upper decoration substrate 314 formed in the shape of an elongated strip having an arc shape, the full color LED and the corresponding part number, and the area showing the position of the full color LED It is possible to prevent the reflectance on the mounting surface from being lowered, and for the player, the part number corresponding to the full color LED which has no relationship with the game at all And a region indicating where to place a full-color LED has been described in detail that it is taken measures such reflectance decrease that can be prevented from being viewed by the player. Here, another configuration of the present invention in which measures such as a decrease in reflectance are taken (hereinafter referred to as “a configuration of a measure such as a decrease in reflectance according to the second to fourth embodiments”) will be described with reference to FIG. This will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 169 shows the configuration of measures to reduce reflectance etc. according to the second embodiment, and FIG. 170 shows the configuration of measures to reduce reflectance etc. according to the third embodiment, and FIG. 170 is an enlarged view seen from the LED non-mounting surface in the D ′ ′ portion of FIG. 170, FIG. 172 is a configuration of measures such as a reflectance decrease according to the fourth embodiment, and FIG. It is the enlarged view seen from the LED non-mounting surface in a part. In addition, in FIG. 169 thru | or FIG. 173, with respect to what plays the same function as embodiment (Hereafter, it is described as the structure of measures, such as reflectance fall which concerns on 1st Embodiment.) Shown in FIG. The same symbol is attached and shown. Further, in FIG. 171, various electronic components are omitted and part of the silk printing is omitted, for easy viewing of the drawing. In FIG. 173, various electronic components are omitted for the sake of easy viewing of the drawing.

[Comparison of the configuration of the countermeasure such as reflectance reduction according to the first embodiment and the configuration of the countermeasure such as reflectance reduction according to the second embodiment]
In the configuration of measures against the reflectance decrease and the like according to the first embodiment, as described above, the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b includes the part numbers corresponding to the full color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 and the full color An area indicating positions where the LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 are arranged is not printed at all as silk printing. Then, on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left side decoration substrate 402b, as described above, the constant current drive circuit 402bax constituting the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba, the resistances Rr, Rb, Rg of the maximum current setting circuit 402bay, Areas showing positions where electronic components such as various distributed resistances are arranged are printed as silk lines by yellow solid lines (or black solid lines), and part numbers corresponding to electronic parts are silk near these areas. They are respectively printed in yellow (or black) as printing. In addition, as described above, the area corresponding to hdLED1 to hdLED10 which is a full color LED mounted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b is silk on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b. While printed as yellow dotted lines (or black dashed lines) for printing, part numbers corresponding to hdLED1 to hdLED10 that are full color LEDs are printed in yellow (or black) as silk printing in the vicinity of these areas It is done.

  Further, in the configuration of the countermeasure against the reflectance reduction and the like according to the first embodiment, as described above, the LED mounting surface 314x of the upper center decoration plate 314 of the plate is a full color LED hLED1 to hLED10 and corresponding component numbers And a region indicating the positions where the hLEDs 1 to hLEDs 10, which are full-color LEDs, are to be arranged, are not printed at all as silk printing. Then, on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the dish center upper decoration substrate 314, as described above, the resistors Rr, Rb and Rg of the constant current drive circuit 314ax constituting the LED constant current drive circuit 314a and the maximum current setting circuit 314ay. Areas indicating positions where electronic components such as various distributed resistances are arranged are printed as silk lines with yellow solid lines (or solid black lines) not shown, and part numbers corresponding to the electronic parts in the vicinity of these areas Are printed in yellow (or black) not shown as silk printing. Further, as described above, the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the dish center upper decoration substrate 314 has a region corresponding to hLED1 to hLED10 which is full color LEDs mounted on the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decoration substrate 314 The part numbers corresponding to hLED1 to hLED10 which are full color LEDs are printed as silk printing in the vicinity of these areas HSLK1 to HSLK10 while being printed by yellow dashed and dotted lines (or black dashed lines) HSLK1 to HSLK10 not shown for printing. They are respectively printed in yellow (or black) not shown.

  On the other hand, in the configuration of measures against the reflectance reduction and the like according to the second embodiment, as shown in FIG. 169 (a), the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b is a full color LED hdLED1. The part number corresponding to the ~ hdLED 10 and the region indicating the position where the hdLED 1 to hdLED 10 which is the full color LED is arranged are printed as silk printing. Specifically, areas indicating the positions where the full color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 are arranged are printed as silk printing on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decoration substrate 402b with yellow solid lines LSLK1 to LSLK10 as silk printing and The LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b is yellow as silk printing, in the vicinity of the regions LSLK1 to LSLK10 and in the left or upper part the LED1 to LED10 corresponding to the part numbers corresponding to hdLED1 to hdLED10. Each is printed.

  In addition, on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower side lower decorative substrate 402b, a region indicating the position where the connector LDLCN is to be disposed is printed as a yellow solid line not shown as silk printing and corresponds to the connector LDLCN in the vicinity of this region Part numbers are printed in yellow, not shown, as silk printing.

  In addition, the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left lower decoration substrate 402b is solidly coated with a white resist. The hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs, are made of resin of white (the color recognized to be the same color as white), and the connector LDUCN has a white housing (also called natural color, white (natural color) Color) It is made of resin recognized as the same color. That is, the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b is an electronic component having a package of the same color (color recognized as the same color) as a white resist covered (solidly coated) on the entire surface. A full color LED, hdLED1 to hdLED10, and a connector LDUCN having a white resist and a housing of the same color (color recognized as the same color) covered entirely (solidly coated) are mounted. Thus, in the second embodiment, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors (not shown) not having white color and connectors not having white color are completely mounted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decoration substrate 402b. It has not been. In other words, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that do not have white color, and connectors that do not have white color have a decrease in reflectance on the LED mounting surface due to the light emission of the full color LED. Not implemented at all.

  In addition, on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decoration substrate 402b, lighting inspection is individually performed on hdLED1 to hdLED10 which are full color LEDs mounted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decoration substrate 402b (for example LED elements that emit red (R) light, LED elements that emit green light (G), and LED elements that emit blue light (B) that constitute two full-color LEDs) A plurality of check pins (not shown) are formed as test pads (or through holes) connected to the wiring pattern, and yellow parts (not shown) corresponding to the plurality of check pins are shown as silk printing in the vicinity of the plurality of check pins. It is printed with. The plurality of check pins are not coated with a white resist. As a result, when a worker performing an inspection brings a probe (not shown) into contact with the check pin, the probe (not shown) and the check pin are electrically connected to be in a conductive state, and various inspections can be performed. Note that among the plurality of check pins, there are some that can confirm the contents of serial data to the constant current drive circuit 402bax and the constant current drive circuit 402bbx.

  On the other hand, on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left side decoration substrate 402b, as shown in FIG. 171, the constant current drive circuit 402bax constituting the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba and the resistors Rr, Rb, of the maximum current setting circuit 402bay. Regions indicating positions where electronic components such as Rg and various distributed resistances are arranged are printed as silk lines by yellow solid lines (or black solid lines), and part numbers corresponding to the electronic components in the vicinity of these areas Are each printed in yellow (or black) as silk printing. Specifically, for example, the area indicating the position where the constant current drive circuit 402bax is arranged is a yellow solid line (or a black solid line) LSLKa (see FIG. 171A) as silk printing and the left side lower decoration substrate While printed on the LED non-mounting surface 402b of 402b, IC1 (see FIG. 171 (a)), which is a part number corresponding to the constant current drive circuit 402bax, is silkscreen printed near the region LSLKa and above. As a yellow solid line (or a black solid line) is printed on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left side decoration substrate 402b. Then, a region indicating the position where the resistors Rr, Rb, Rg of the maximum current setting circuit 402bay are arranged is a yellow solid line (or a black solid line) LSLKb, LSLKc, LSLKd (see FIG. 171A) as silk printing. Are printed on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b, and in the vicinity of these regions LSLKb, LSLKc, and LSLKd and to the right, the resistors Rr, Rb, and Rg of the maximum current setting circuit 402bay. And the corresponding part numbers R1, R2 and R3 (see FIG. 171 (a)) are printed as yellow (or black) as silk printing on the LED non-mounting surface 402 by of the lower left side decorative substrate 402 b. There is.

  Also, the resistors and capacitors mounted on the LED non-mounting surface 402 by of the lower left side decoration substrate 402 b do not have white color, and the constant current drive circuit 402 bax (402 bbx) integrated on one semiconductor chip is The package is made of a black resin, and the connector LDLCN is made of a resin whose housing has a color of black, brown or blue. As described above, electronic components such as a resistor, a capacitor, and an IC that do not have white color, and a connector that does not have white color have a reduced reflectance due to the light emission of a full color LED. Has been implemented.

  Also in the configuration of measures for lowering the reflectance and the like according to the second embodiment, a white resist is solidly coated on the LED mounting surface 402bx and the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b. Thus, the white resist solidly coated on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decoration substrate 402b enhances the reflectance toward the front (that is, the front side of the pachinko machine 1) by the light emission of the full color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10. It can be done.

  Further, in the configuration of measures against the reflectance reduction and the like according to the second embodiment, as shown in FIG. 169 (b), on the LED mounting surface 314x of the decoration substrate 314 on the upper center of the plate, hLED1 to hLED10 which are full color LEDs The corresponding part numbers and the regions indicating the positions where the full color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 are arranged are printed as silk printing. Specifically, areas indicating the positions where the full color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 are arranged are printed as silk printing on the LED mounting surface 314x of the decoration substrate 314 on the upper center of the dish with solid yellow lines HSLK1 to HSLK10 as yellow and In the vicinity of the areas HSLK1 to HSLK10, the LED1 to LED10 corresponding to the full color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 and the corresponding part numbers are printed on the LED mounting surface 314x of the upper center plate 314 for silk printing as silk printing. It is done.

  In addition, while the area which shows the position which arranges connector HCN is printed as a yellow solid line which is not illustrated as silk printing on LED mounting surface 314x of plate center upper decoration board 314, it corresponds with connector HCN near this area Part numbers are printed in yellow, not shown, as silk printing.

  In addition, the whole of the LED mounting surface 314x of the plate center upper decoration substrate 314 is covered with a white resist. The hLED1 to hLED10, which are full color LEDs, are made of resin of white (the color recognized as the same color as white), and the connector HCN has a white housing (also called natural color, white (natural color) Color) It is made of resin recognized as the same color. That is, the LED mounting surface 314x of the upper center decoration substrate 314 is an electronic component having a package of the same color (color recognized as the same color) as the white resist covered (solidly coated) on the whole. A full color LED hLED1 to hLED10 and a connector HCN having a white resist covered with the whole (solid color) and a housing of the same color (color recognized as the same color) are mounted. Thus, in the second embodiment, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors (not shown) that do not have white color and connectors that do not have white color are completely mounted on the LED mounting surface 314 x of the upper center decoration plate 314 of the dish It has not been. In other words, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that do not have white color, and connectors that do not have white color have a decrease in reflectance on the LED mounting surface due to the light emission of the full color LED. Not implemented at all.

  In addition, on the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decoration substrate 314, lighting inspection is individually performed on hLED1 to hLED10 which are full color LEDs mounted on the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decoration substrate 314 (for example, 1 LED elements that emit red (R) light, LED elements that emit green light (G), and LED elements that emit blue light (B) that constitute two full-color LEDs) A plurality of check pins (not shown) are formed as test pads (or through holes) connected to the wiring pattern, and yellow parts (not shown) corresponding to the plurality of check pins are shown as silk printing in the vicinity of the plurality of check pins. It is printed with. The plurality of check pins are not coated with a white resist. As a result, when a worker performing an inspection brings a probe (not shown) into contact with the check pin, the probe (not shown) and the check pin are electrically connected to be in a conductive state, and various inspections can be performed. There are also a plurality of check pins that can confirm the contents of serial data to the constant current drive circuit 314ax and the constant current drive circuit 314bx.

  On the other hand, on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the dish center upper decoration substrate 314, the constant current drive circuit 314ax constituting the LED constant current drive circuit 314a, the resistances Rr, Rb and Rg of the maximum current setting circuit 314ay, various distributed resistances, etc. Areas indicating positions where electronic components are to be arranged are printed as silk lines by yellow solid lines (or black solid lines) not shown, and part numbers corresponding to electronic parts are indicated as silk print in the vicinity of these areas. Not printed in yellow (or black) respectively.

  In the second embodiment, the resistors, capacitors, etc. mounted on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the dish upper center decorative substrate 314 do not have white color, and the constant current drive circuit 314ax (also integrated on one semiconductor chip). 314bx) is made of black resin in its package. As described above, electronic components such as a resistor, a capacitor, and an IC that do not have white color are mounted on the LED non-mounting surface because the reflectance due to the light emission of the full color LED decreases.

  Also in the configuration of measures to reduce the reflectance and the like according to the second embodiment, the LED mounting surface 314x and the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the upper center dish decoration substrate 314 are coated with a white resist. As a result, the white resist solidly coated on the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish upper center decoration substrate 314 causes the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 to emit light forward (that is, the upper side of the rendering operation unit 300) It is possible to increase the rate.

  As described above, in the configuration of measures against the reflectance reduction and the like according to the first embodiment, the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b includes the part numbers corresponding to the full color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 and the full color LEDs HdLED1 to hddLED10 are not printed at all as silk printing, and the LED mounting surface 314x of the upper center plate 314 of the dish is a full color LED corresponding to hLED1 to hLED10 While the number and the area indicating the position where the hLED1 to hLED10, which are full color LEDs, are arranged are not printed at all as silk printing, in the configuration of measures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the second embodiment, the left The LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower side decoration board 402b -The part numbers (yellow letters and numbers) corresponding to hdLED1 to hdLED10 which are LEDs and the area (yellow solid line) indicating the position where hdLED1 to hdLED10 which are full color LEDs are arranged are printed as silk printing respectively The LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decoration substrate 314 includes full color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 and corresponding part numbers (yellow letters and numbers) and full color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10. It is different in that the area (yellow solid line) indicating the position to be arranged is printed as silk printing.

  The reflectance to the front (that is, the front side of the pachinko machine 1) by light emission of the full color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 can be enhanced by the white resist solidly coated on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b. It is supposed to be. In addition, the white resist coated solidly on the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decoration substrate 314 allows the reflectance toward the front (that is, the side facing upward of the rendering operation unit 300) by the light emission of the full color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10. Can be raised. For this reason, when the area indicating the full color LED and the corresponding part number and the position where the full color LED is to be disposed is printed in black as silk printing, the LED by light emission of the full color LED by silk printing printed in black. The reflectance on the mounting surface is reduced, which causes a problem that the light emission of the full color LED is not efficiently used. In addition, various decorative bodies provided in the door frame 3 (for example, the upper left decorative body 271, the lower left decorative body 281, the upper right decorative body 276, the lower right decorative body 286, and the unit front cover 312 shown in FIG. The upper center plate decoration 312a and the lower plate center decoration 312b, the door frame left side decoration 404, the side window inner decoration member 412, the door frame right side decoration 419, the door frame top decoration 453) are described above Because the player sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1 moves the head (face) to change the line of sight depending on the direction of the head (face), although the light-colored milky white is formed, the door frame 3 In some cases, the player can visually recognize the LED mounting surfaces of the various decorative substrates provided in the various decorative bodies provided in the above. Then, there arises a problem that the player visually recognizes the full color LED and the corresponding part number having no relation to the game at all, and the area indicating the position where the full color LED is to be arranged.

  Therefore, in the configuration of measures against reflectance reduction and the like according to the second embodiment, silk printing is performed on a region indicating a full color LED and a corresponding part number having no relation with a game for the player and a position where the full color LED is arranged. Unlike black, by printing in bright yellow color, on the white resist formed on the LED mounting surface, an auxiliary line indicating the mounting position of the full color LED (that is, an area indicating the position where the full color LED is to be disposed) ) Or it may be difficult to find a number that identifies a full color LED (ie, a full color LED and the corresponding part number).

  Further, in the configuration of measures against the reflectance decrease and the like according to the second embodiment, the area indicating the full color LED and the corresponding part number and the position indicating the position for the full color LED is silk printing different from black and bright yellow By printing with the above, it is possible to prevent the reflectance of the LED mounting surface from being lowered due to the light emission of the full color LED.

  Also in the configuration of the countermeasure such as the reflectance reduction according to the second embodiment, the same operation and effect as the configuration of the countermeasure such as the reflectance reduction according to the first embodiment can be achieved. That is, it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the full color LED identification number (that is, the part number corresponding to the full color LED) and the auxiliary line indicating the full color LED mounting position (that is, the area indicating the position where the full color LED is arranged). While being able to do, it can prevent that the reflectance in the LED mounting surface by light emission of a full color LED falls.

  In addition, in the configuration of measures for reducing the reflectance and the like according to the second embodiment, the auxiliary line indicating the mounting position of the full color LED (that is, the area indicating the position where the full color LED is disposed is When printing in yellow), the polarity mark of the full color LED may be added to indicate the mounting direction of the full color LED.

  Further, in the second embodiment, electronic components such as a resistor and a capacitor which do not have a white color and a connector which does not have a white color which decreases the reflectance on the LED mounting surface due to the light emission of a full color LED Because the reflectance on the LED mounting surface due to the LED is reduced, it was not mounted at all on the LED mounting surface, but in the LED mounting surface due to the light emission of the full color LED, the region corresponding to the member placed forward is the LED If it is difficult to contribute to the reflectance on the mounting surface, electronic components such as a resistor and a capacitor having no white color and a connector having no white color may be disposed in the region. In this case, on the LED mounting surface, a region indicating the position where the electronic component and the connector are arranged is printed as a yellow solid line (not shown) as silk printing, and a part number corresponding to the electronic component and the connector in the vicinity of this region Is printed in yellow not shown as silk printing.

[Comparison of the configuration of the countermeasure such as reflectance reduction according to the first embodiment and the configuration of the countermeasure such as reflectance reduction according to the third embodiment]
In the configuration of measures against the reflectance decrease and the like according to the first embodiment, as described above, the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b includes the part numbers corresponding to the full color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 and the full color An area indicating positions where the LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 are arranged is not printed at all as silk printing. Then, on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left side decoration substrate 402b, as described above, the constant current drive circuit 402bax constituting the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba, the resistances Rr, Rb, Rg of the maximum current setting circuit 402bay, Areas showing positions where electronic components such as various distributed resistances are arranged are printed as silk lines by yellow solid lines (or black solid lines), and part numbers corresponding to electronic parts are silk near these areas. They are respectively printed in yellow (or black) as printing. In addition, as described above, the area corresponding to hdLED1 to hdLED10 which is a full color LED mounted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b is silk on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b. While printed as yellow dotted lines (or black dashed lines) for printing, part numbers corresponding to hdLED1 to hdLED10 that are full color LEDs are printed in yellow (or black) as silk printing in the vicinity of these areas It is done.

  Further, in the configuration of the countermeasure against the reflectance reduction and the like according to the first embodiment, as described above, the LED mounting surface 314x of the upper center decoration plate 314 of the plate is a full color LED hLED1 to hLED10 and corresponding component numbers And a region indicating the positions where the hLEDs 1 to hLEDs 10, which are full-color LEDs, are to be arranged, are not printed at all as silk printing. Then, on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the dish center upper decoration substrate 314, as described above, the resistors Rr, Rb and Rg of the constant current drive circuit 314ax constituting the LED constant current drive circuit 314a and the maximum current setting circuit 314ay. Areas indicating positions where electronic components such as various distributed resistances are arranged are printed as silk lines with yellow solid lines (or solid black lines) not shown, and part numbers corresponding to the electronic parts in the vicinity of these areas Are printed in yellow (or black) not shown as silk printing. Further, as described above, the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the dish center upper decoration substrate 314 has a region corresponding to hLED1 to hLED10 which is full color LEDs mounted on the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decoration substrate 314 The part numbers corresponding to hLED1 to hLED10 which are full color LEDs are printed as silk printing in the vicinity of these areas HSLK1 to HSLK10 while being printed by yellow dashed and dotted lines (or black dashed lines) HSLK1 to HSLK10 not shown for printing. They are respectively printed in yellow (or black) not shown.

  On the other hand, in the configuration of measures against the reflectance decrease and the like according to the third embodiment, as shown in FIG. 170 (a), the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decoration substrate 402b is a full color LED hdLED1. The part number corresponding to ~ hd LED 10 is a foil-cut character (that is, a cut-out character formed by making a character with a wiring pattern which is a copper foil in a layer (copper plane) on which a wiring pattern is formed In FIG. 170 (c), only the foil-free characters 7 are shown as part numbers corresponding to the full color LED hdLED 7)), and an area showing the positions where the full color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED 10 are arranged is shown. Foil removal area excluding each terminal not shown and wiring pattern not shown (ie, wiring pattern is formed In (Copper plane), except for each terminal and the wiring pattern, in the area formed by removing the copper foil (FIG. 170 (c), only the foil removal area LSLK7 is shown as an area corresponding to hdLED 7 which is a full color LED). ), And the foil-removing area and the foil-removing character are respectively covered with a white resist which is solidly coated on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b. Specifically, regions indicating positions where the full color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 are arranged are formed as the foil removal regions LSLK1 to LSLK10 respectively on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b, and these foil removal LED1 to LED10 which are part numbers corresponding to hdLED1 to hdLED10 which are full color LEDs in the vicinity of the regions LSLK1 to LSLK10 and are formed on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b on the left or above The white resist that is solidly coated on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b covers the foil removal area and the foil removal character. The wiring pattern for forming the foil-removed characters is formed so as to be electrically insulated from the electronic component.

  In the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b, an area indicating the position where the connector LDLCN is to be disposed is a foil removing area (that is, a wiring pattern is not shown) except each terminal not shown and the wiring pattern not shown. Layer (copper plane), except for each terminal and wiring pattern, is formed as an area formed by removing the copper foil, and a foil whose part number corresponding to the connector LDLCN is not shown in the vicinity of this area It is formed as a blank character (that is, a blank character formed by making a character with a wiring pattern which is a copper foil in a layer (copper plane) in which a wiring pattern is formed and pulling out a copper foil around it).

  In addition, the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left lower decoration substrate 402b is solidly coated with a white resist. The hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs, are made of resin of white (the color recognized to be the same color as white), and the connector LDUCN has a white housing (also called natural color, white (natural color) Color) It is made of resin recognized as the same color. That is, the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b is an electronic component having a package of the same color (color recognized as the same color) as a white resist covered (solidly coated) on the entire surface. A full color LED, hdLED1 to hdLED10, and a connector LDUCN having a white resist and a housing of the same color (color recognized as the same color) covered entirely (solidly coated) are mounted. Thus, in the third embodiment, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors (not shown) not having white color and connectors not having white color are completely mounted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decoration substrate 402b. It has not been. In other words, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that do not have white color, and connectors that do not have white color have a decrease in reflectance on the LED mounting surface due to the light emission of the full color LED. Not implemented at all.

  In addition, on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decoration substrate 402b, lighting inspection is individually performed on hdLED1 to hdLED10 which are full color LEDs mounted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decoration substrate 402b (for example, 1 LED elements that emit red (R) light, LED elements that emit green light (G), and LED elements that emit blue light (B) that constitute two full-color LEDs) A plurality of check pins not shown are formed as test pads (or through holes) connected to the wiring pattern, and delineated letters (the part numbers corresponding to the respective check pins are not shown in the vicinity of the plurality of check pins) That is, in the layer (copper plane) in which the wiring pattern is formed, It is formed as a cutout characters) formed by far the copper foil around make. The plurality of check pins are not coated with a white resist. As a result, when a worker performing an inspection brings a probe (not shown) into contact with the check pin, the probe (not shown) and the check pin are electrically connected to be in a conductive state, and various inspections can be performed. Note that among the plurality of check pins, there are some that can confirm the contents of serial data to the constant current drive circuit 402bax and the constant current drive circuit 402bbx.

  On the other hand, on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left side decoration substrate 402b, as shown in FIG. 171, the constant current drive circuit 402bax constituting the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba and the resistors Rr, Rb, of the maximum current setting circuit 402bay. Regions indicating positions where electronic components such as Rg and various distributed resistances are arranged are printed as silk lines by yellow solid lines (or black solid lines), and part numbers corresponding to the electronic components in the vicinity of these areas Are each printed in yellow (or black) as silk printing. Specifically, for example, the area indicating the position where the constant current drive circuit 402bax is arranged is a yellow solid line (or a black solid line) LSLKa (see FIG. 171A) as silk printing and the left side lower decoration substrate While printed on the LED non-mounting surface 402b of 402b, IC1 (see FIG. 171 (a)), which is a part number corresponding to the constant current drive circuit 402bax, is silkscreen printed near the region LSLKa and above. As a yellow solid line (or a black solid line) is printed on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left side decoration substrate 402b. Then, a region indicating the position where the resistors Rr, Rb, Rg of the maximum current setting circuit 402bay are arranged is a yellow solid line (or a black solid line) LSLKb, LSLKc, LSLKd (see FIG. 171A) as silk printing. Are printed on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b, and in the vicinity of these regions LSLKb, LSLKc, and LSLKd and to the right, the resistors Rr, Rb, and Rg of the maximum current setting circuit 402bay. And the corresponding part numbers R1, R2 and R3 (see FIG. 171 (a)) are printed as yellow (or black) as silk printing on the LED non-mounting surface 402 by of the lower left side decorative substrate 402 b. There is.

  Also, the resistors and capacitors mounted on the LED non-mounting surface 402 by of the lower left side decoration substrate 402 b do not have white color, and the constant current drive circuit 402 bax (402 bbx) integrated on one semiconductor chip is The package is made of a black resin, and the connector LDLCN is made of a resin whose housing has a color of black, brown or blue. As described above, electronic components such as a resistor, a capacitor, and an IC that do not have white color, and a connector that does not have white color have a reduced reflectance due to the light emission of a full color LED. Has been implemented.

  Also in the configuration of measures for lowering the reflectance and the like according to the third embodiment, a white resist is solidly coated on the LED mounting surface 402bx and the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b. Thus, the white resist solidly coated on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decoration substrate 402b enhances the reflectance toward the front (that is, the front side of the pachinko machine 1) by the light emission of the full color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10. It can be done.

  Further, in the configuration of measures against reflectance reduction and the like according to the third embodiment, as shown in FIG. 170 (b), on the LED mounting surface 314x of the decoration substrate 314 on the upper center of the plate, hLED1 to hLED10 which are full color LEDs The corresponding part number is formed as a foil-free character (ie, a character formed by making a character with a wiring pattern which is a copper foil in a layer (copper plane) on which a wiring pattern is formed and removing the copper foil around it) And the terminals showing the positions where the full color LEDs hLED1 to hLED 10 are arranged are not shown, and the terminals (not shown) except the wiring pattern not shown (i.e., in the layer (copper plane) on which the wiring pattern is formed) And the wiring pattern, except for the area formed by removing the copper foil, and the L WHITE resists areafill to D mounting surface 314x and its foil vent area and the foil outline characters are covered respectively. Specifically, areas indicating the positions at which hLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs, are arranged are formed as the foil removal areas HSLK1 to HSLK10 respectively on the LED mounting surface 314x of the upper center dish decorative substrate 314, and these foil removal areas LED1 to LED10 corresponding to the full color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 in the vicinity of the areas HSLK1 to HSLK10 and formed on the LED mounting surface 314x of the upper center decoration board 314 as cut-out characters, The white resist coated on the LED mounting surface 314x of the center upper decorative substrate 314 covers the defoliated area and the deoxidized character. The wiring pattern for forming the foil-removed characters is formed so as to be electrically insulated from the electronic component.

  Note that on the LED mounting surface 314x of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314, a region indicating the position where the connector HCN is to be disposed is not shown foil forming regions (that is, wiring patterns are formed excluding the terminals and wiring patterns not shown). Layer (copper plane), except for each terminal and wiring pattern, is formed as an area formed by removing the copper foil), and the part number corresponding to the connector HCN is not shown in the vicinity of this area. It is formed as a blank character (that is, a blank character formed by making a character with a wiring pattern which is a copper foil in a layer (copper plane) on which a wiring pattern is formed and pulling out a copper foil around it.

  In addition, the whole of the LED mounting surface 314x of the plate center upper decoration substrate 314 is covered with a white resist. The hLED1 to hLED10, which are full color LEDs, are made of resin of white (the color recognized as the same color as white), and the connector HCN has a white housing (also called natural color, white (natural color) Color) It is made of resin recognized as the same color. That is, the LED mounting surface 314x of the upper center decoration substrate 314 is an electronic component having a package of the same color (color recognized as the same color) as the white resist covered (solidly coated) on the whole. A full color LED hLED1 to hLED10 and a connector HCN having a white resist covered with the whole (solid color) and a housing of the same color (color recognized as the same color) are mounted. Thus, in the third embodiment, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors (not shown) that do not have white color and connectors that do not have white color are completely mounted on the LED mounting surface 314 x of the upper center decoration plate 314 of the dish It has not been. In other words, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that do not have white color, and connectors that do not have white color have a decrease in reflectance on the LED mounting surface due to the light emission of the full color LED. Not implemented at all.

  In addition, on the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decoration substrate 314, lighting inspection is individually performed on hLED1 to hLED10 which are full color LEDs mounted on the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decoration substrate 314 (for example, 1 LED elements that emit red (R) light, LED elements that emit green light (G), and LED elements that emit blue light (B) that constitute two full-color LEDs) A plurality of check pins not shown are formed as test pads (or through holes) connected to the wiring pattern, and delineated letters (the part numbers corresponding to the respective check pins are not shown in the vicinity of the plurality of check pins) That is, in the layer (copper plane) in which the wiring pattern is formed, characters are made with the wiring pattern which is copper foil, and the periphery thereof It is formed as a cutout characters) formed by far the copper foil. The plurality of check pins are not coated with a white resist. As a result, when a worker performing an inspection brings a probe (not shown) into contact with the check pin, the probe (not shown) and the check pin are electrically connected to be in a conductive state, and various inspections can be performed. There are also a plurality of check pins that can confirm the contents of serial data to the constant current drive circuit 314ax and the constant current drive circuit 314bx.

  On the other hand, on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the dish center upper decoration substrate 314, the constant current drive circuit 314ax constituting the LED constant current drive circuit 314a, the resistances Rr, Rb and Rg of the maximum current setting circuit 314ay, various distributed resistances, etc. Areas indicating positions where electronic components are to be arranged are printed as silk lines by yellow solid lines (or black solid lines) not shown, and part numbers corresponding to electronic parts are indicated as silk print in the vicinity of these areas. Not printed in yellow (or black) respectively.

  In the third embodiment, the resistors, capacitors, etc. mounted on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the dish upper center decorative substrate 314 do not have white color, and the constant current drive circuit 314ax (also integrated on one semiconductor chip). 314bx) is made of black resin in its package. As described above, electronic components such as a resistor, a capacitor, and an IC that do not have white color are mounted on the LED non-mounting surface because the reflectance due to the light emission of the full color LED decreases.

  Also in the configuration of measures to reduce the reflectance and the like according to the third embodiment, the LED mounting surface 314x and the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the upper center dish decoration substrate 314 are coated with a white resist. As a result, the white resist solidly coated on the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish upper center decoration substrate 314 causes the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 to emit light forward (that is, the upper side of the rendering operation unit 300) It is possible to increase the rate.

  As described above, in the configuration of measures against the reflectance reduction and the like according to the first embodiment, the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b includes the part numbers corresponding to the full color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 and the full color LEDs HdLED1 to hddLED10 are not printed at all as silk printing, and the LED mounting surface 314x of the upper center plate 314 of the dish is a full color LED corresponding to hLED1 to hLED10 While the number and the area indicating the position where the hLED1 to hLED10 being the full color LEDs are arranged are not printed at all as silk printing, in the configuration of measures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the third embodiment, the left The LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower side decoration board 402b The LED is hedLED1 to hdLED10, and the part number corresponding to it is a foiled character (that is, a layer (copper plane) on which a wiring pattern is formed) is made by forming a character with a wiring pattern which is a copper foil The region which indicates the position where the hdLED 1 to hdLED 10 which is a full color LED is arranged is formed as a blank character to be removed, and each foil not shown is a foil removed region except the terminals not shown and the wiring pattern not shown (Copper plane) is a white resist which is formed as an area formed by removing a copper foil except for each terminal and a wiring pattern, and applied to the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b. Cover the foiled area and the foiled character, respectively, On the LED mounting surface 314x of the plate 314, the part numbers corresponding to the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 are foil-removed characters (that is, the wiring pattern is a copper foil in the layer on which the wiring pattern is formed (copper plane) The area which shows the position where hLED1 to hLED10 which are full color LEDs are arranged is shown as a blank character formed by pulling out the copper foil around it and is not a foil cutting area except each terminal and wiring pattern not shown. (In other words, in the layer in which the wiring pattern is formed (copper plane), it is formed as an area formed by removing the copper foil except each terminal and the wiring pattern) The white resist that is solidly coated on the surface 314x has its foiled area and its foiled character respectively It differs in that it is covered.

  The reflectance to the front (that is, the front side of the pachinko machine 1) by light emission of the full color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 can be enhanced by the white resist solidly coated on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b. It is supposed to be. In addition, the white resist coated solidly on the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decoration substrate 314 allows the reflectance toward the front (that is, the side facing upward of the rendering operation unit 300) by the light emission of the full color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10. Can be raised. For this reason, when the area indicating the full color LED and the corresponding part number and the position where the full color LED is to be disposed is printed in black as silk printing, the LED by light emission of the full color LED by silk printing printed in black. The reflectance on the mounting surface is reduced, which causes a problem that the light emission of the full color LED is not efficiently used. In addition, various decorative bodies provided in the door frame 3 (for example, the upper left decorative body 271, the lower left decorative body 281, the upper right decorative body 276, the lower right decorative body 286, and the unit front cover 312 shown in FIG. The upper center plate decoration 312a and the lower plate center decoration 312b, the door frame left side decoration 404, the side window inner decoration member 412, the door frame right side decoration 419, the door frame top decoration 453) are described above Because the player sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1 moves the head (face) to change the line of sight depending on the direction of the head (face), although the light-colored milky white is formed, the door frame 3 In some cases, the player can visually recognize the LED mounting surfaces of the various decorative substrates provided in the various decorative bodies provided in the above. Then, there arises a problem that the player visually recognizes the full color LED and the corresponding part number having no relation to the game at all, and the area indicating the position where the full color LED is to be arranged.

  Therefore, in the configuration of measures against reflectance reduction and the like according to the third embodiment, a part number corresponding to a full color LED having no relation to a game at all for the player is formed as a foil-free character, and for the player at all A full color LED is formed by forming a region indicating the position where a full color LED is not related as a foil removal region and covering the foil removal characters and the foil removal region with a white resist solidly coated on the LED mounting surface. An LED wiring pattern, a foil removal area indicating the mounting position of the full color LED (that is, an area indicating the position where the full color LED is disposed), and a number identifying the full color LED (that is, a part number corresponding to the full color LED); Is made of copper foil to make the same color, and white formed on the LED mounting surface By covering with a mist, a foil removal area (that is, an area indicating the position where the full color LED is to be arranged) indicating the mounting position of the full color LED can be found out or a number identifying the full color LED (that is, the part number corresponding to the full color LED) ) Can be difficult to find out.

  Further, in the configuration of measures against reflectance reduction and the like according to the third embodiment, a part number corresponding to a full color LED having no relation to a game at all for the player is formed as a foil-free character, and for the player at all A full color LED is formed by forming a region indicating the position where a full color LED is not related as a foil removal region and covering the foil removal characters and the foil removal region with a white resist solidly coated on the LED mounting surface. It can prevent that the reflectance in the LED mounting surface by light emission of LED falls.

  Also in the configuration of the countermeasure such as the reflectance reduction according to the third embodiment, the same operation and effect as the configuration of the countermeasure such as the reflectance reduction according to the first embodiment can be achieved. In other words, it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the full color LED identification number (that is, the part number corresponding to the full color LED) and the foil removing area that indicates the mounting position of the full color LED (that is, the area indicating the position where the full color LED is arranged). While being able to do, it can prevent that the reflectance in the LED mounting surface by light emission of a full color LED falls.

  Further, in the configuration of measures against the reflectance reduction and the like according to the third embodiment, since the process of silk printing can be omitted for the LED mounting surface, the substrate by reducing the plate cost of silk printing and the number of manufacturing processes of the substrate The manufacturing cost can be reduced.

  In addition, in the structure of the countermeasure against the reflectance fall etc. which concern on 3rd Embodiment, in the foil removal area | region (In other words, when forming the area | region which shows the position which arranges full color LED as a foil removal area | region) which shows the mounting position of full color LED. The polarity mark of the full color LED may be added to indicate the mounting direction of the full color LED.

  Further, in the third embodiment, electronic components such as a resistor and a capacitor that do not have a white color and a connector that does not have a white color in which the reflectance on the LED mounting surface decreases due to the light emission of a full color LED Because the reflectance on the LED mounting surface due to the LED is reduced, it was not mounted at all on the LED mounting surface, but in the LED mounting surface due to the light emission of the full color LED, the region corresponding to the member placed forward is the LED If it is difficult to contribute to the reflectance on the mounting surface, electronic components such as a resistor and a capacitor having no white color and a connector having no white color may be disposed in the region. In this case, on the LED mounting surface, the area indicating the position where the electronic component and the connector are arranged is not shown, except for the terminals not shown and the wiring pattern not shown (i.e. the layer on which the wiring pattern is formed (copper plane) ), Except for each terminal and wiring pattern, is formed as an area formed by pulling out the copper foil), and an open part (not shown) corresponding to the electronic part or connector is not shown in the vicinity of this area. That is, in the layer (copper plane) in which the wiring pattern is formed, characters are formed with the wiring pattern which is copper foil, and they are formed as blank characters formed by removing the copper foil around the characters.

[Comparison of the configuration of the countermeasure such as reflectance reduction according to the first embodiment and the configuration of the countermeasure such as reflectance reduction according to the fourth embodiment]
In the configuration of measures against the reflectance decrease and the like according to the first embodiment, as described above, the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b includes the part numbers corresponding to the full color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 and the full color An area indicating positions where the LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 are arranged is not printed at all as silk printing. Then, on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left side decoration substrate 402b, as described above, the constant current drive circuit 402bax constituting the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba, the resistances Rr, Rb, Rg of the maximum current setting circuit 402bay, Areas showing positions where electronic components such as various distributed resistances are arranged are printed as silk lines by yellow solid lines (or black solid lines), and part numbers corresponding to electronic parts are silk near these areas. They are respectively printed in yellow (or black) as printing. In addition, as described above, the area corresponding to hdLED1 to hdLED10 which is a full color LED mounted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b is silk on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b. While printed as yellow dotted lines (or black dashed lines) for printing, part numbers corresponding to hdLED1 to hdLED10 that are full color LEDs are printed in yellow (or black) as silk printing in the vicinity of these areas It is done.

  Further, in the configuration of the countermeasure against the reflectance reduction and the like according to the first embodiment, as described above, the LED mounting surface 314x of the upper center decoration plate 314 of the plate is a full color LED hLED1 to hLED10 and corresponding component numbers And a region indicating the positions where the hLEDs 1 to hLEDs 10, which are full-color LEDs, are to be arranged, are not printed at all as silk printing. Then, on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the dish center upper decoration substrate 314, as described above, the resistors Rr, Rb and Rg of the constant current drive circuit 314ax constituting the LED constant current drive circuit 314a and the maximum current setting circuit 314ay. Areas indicating positions where electronic components such as various distributed resistances are arranged are printed as silk lines with yellow solid lines (or solid black lines) not shown, and part numbers corresponding to the electronic parts in the vicinity of these areas Are printed in yellow (or black) not shown as silk printing. Further, as described above, the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the dish center upper decoration substrate 314 has a region corresponding to hLED1 to hLED10 which is full color LEDs mounted on the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decoration substrate 314 The part numbers corresponding to hLED1 to hLED10 which are full color LEDs are printed as silk printing in the vicinity of these areas HSLK1 to HSLK10 while being printed by yellow dashed and dotted lines (or black dashed lines) HSLK1 to HSLK10 not shown for printing. They are respectively printed in yellow (or black) not shown.

  On the other hand, in the configuration of measures against the reflectance reduction and the like according to the fourth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 172 (a), the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b is a full color LED hdLED1. A white resist-removed character (FIG. 172 (c) using a white resist with a double-painted part number corresponding to hdLED 10 is shown only as a part number corresponding to hdLED 7, which is a full-color LED). White resist removed area (FIG. 172 (c)), the area showing the position where the full color LED hdLED1 to hdLED10 is to be arranged is twice as shown in FIG. And only the white resist removed area LSLK7 is shown as the corresponding area. It has been made. Specifically, first, the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b is the first of the twice-coated white resist, and the entire LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b is made of a white resist. The white resist is covered (in other words, the white LED is mounted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left-side decoration substrate 402b as the first of the twice-painted white resist). Then, the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decoration substrate 402b is a second area of the double-painted white resist, showing an area (position of a predetermined pin number) indicating a position where the full color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 are arranged. As shown in FIG. 172 (c), the white resist removal region LSLK7 includes the fifth pin of the hdLED7, which is a full color LED, as the region corresponding to the hdLED7, which is a full color LED. Notches are formed at the positions corresponding to the indicated notch marks) are masked as white resist extraction areas LSLK1 to LSLK10, and left near these white resist extraction areas LSLK1 to LSLK10 and left Or hdLED1 to hd which are full color LEDs on the top In a state where the ED10 with a corresponding part numbers LED1~LED10 is masked as a white resist outline characters, the whole of the LED mounting surface 402bx on the left side under the decorative substrate 402b is covered with a white resist. As a result, although two layers of white resist are formed on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b, the whole is covered with the first layer of white resist, and the second layer of white is formed. By covering the entire area except for the area masked by the resist, the area masked by the area is recessed as a recess, and the area indicating the position where the full color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 are arranged is white resist removed area LSLK1 to LSLK10. While being formed, LED1 to LED10, which are part numbers corresponding to hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full color LEDs, are formed as white resist-extracted characters.

  In the fourth embodiment, the transmittance of the first white resist and the transmittance of the second white resist on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b are the same. Since the first layer white resist and the second layer white resist are used, light and shade are generated, and the second layer white resist passes through the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left decoration substrate 402b. When the base (the copper foil portion and the area excluding the copper foil portion, the same applies hereinafter), the white resist of the first layer looks pale. That is, when the base of the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left decoration substrate 402b is seen through the second layer white resist, it is possible to identify white resist-extracted characters in the first layer white resist. ing.

  In addition, while the area | region which shows the position which arrange | positions connector LDLCN is formed as a white resist extraction area which is not shown in figure in LED mounting surface 402bx of lower side decoration board 402b, components corresponding to connector LDLCN in the vicinity of this area The number is formed as a white resist-free character not shown. In the fourth embodiment, as described above, the transmittance of the first-layer white resist and the transmittance of the second-layer white resist are the same. When the layer of white resist and the second layer of white resist become dark and light passes through the second layer of white resist, the background of the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left-side lower decorative substrate 402b is the first layer. The white resist of the eyes will look pale. As a result, when looking at the base of the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left-side decorative substrate 402b through the second layer white resist, it is possible to identify the white resist extraction region in the first layer white resist. It has become.

  In addition, since a white resist is applied twice on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b, the white resist-extracted characters and the white resist-extracted area in the first layer white resist, and the second The refractive index of light of the white resist of the layer changes. Thus, when looking at the base of the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left decoration substrate 402b through the second layer white resist, the white resist-extracted characters and the white resist-extracted area in the first layer white resist are identified. It can be done.

  In addition, the entire LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decoration substrate 402b is covered with a white resist. The hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs, are made of resin of white (the color recognized to be the same color as white), and the connector LDUCN has a white housing (also called natural color, white (natural color) Color) It is made of resin recognized as the same color. That is, the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b is an electronic component having a package of the same color (color recognized as the same color) as a white resist covered (solidly coated) on the entire surface. A full color LED, hdLED1 to hdLED10, and a connector LDUCN having a white resist and a housing of the same color (color recognized as the same color) covered entirely (solidly coated) are mounted. Thus, in the fourth embodiment, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors (not shown) not having white color and connectors not having white color are completely mounted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decoration substrate 402b. It has not been. In other words, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that do not have white color, and connectors that do not have white color have a decrease in reflectance on the LED mounting surface due to the light emission of the full color LED. Not implemented at all.

  In addition, on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decoration substrate 402b, lighting inspection is individually performed on hdLED1 to hdLED10 which are full color LEDs mounted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decoration substrate 402b (for example, 1 LED elements that emit red (R) light, LED elements that emit green light (G), and LED elements that emit blue light (B) that constitute two full-color LEDs) A plurality of check pins (not shown) are formed as test pads (or through holes) connected to the wiring pattern, and white resist-extracted characters whose part numbers corresponding to the plurality of check pins are not shown in the vicinity of the plurality of check pins. It is formed as. The plurality of check pins are not coated with a white resist. As a result, when a worker performing an inspection brings a probe (not shown) into contact with the check pin, the probe (not shown) and the check pin are electrically connected to be in a conductive state, and various inspections can be performed. Note that among the plurality of check pins, there are some that can confirm the contents of serial data to the constant current drive circuit 402bax and the constant current drive circuit 402bbx.

  On the other hand, on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left side decoration substrate 402b, as shown in FIG. 173, the constant current drive circuit 402bax constituting the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba and the resistors Rr, Rb, of the maximum current setting circuit 402bay. An area indicating positions where electronic components such as Rg and various distributed resistors not shown are arranged is formed as a white resist extraction area using a twice-coated white resist like the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b. And the part numbers corresponding to the electronic parts are formed in the vicinity of these areas as white resist-extracted characters using twice-painted white resist like the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b. . Specifically, first, the LED non-mounting surface 402 by of the lower left side decorative substrate 402 b is the first of the twice-painted white resist, and the entire LED non-mounting surface 402 by of the lower left side decorative substrate 402 b is white. The resist is covered (in other words, the white resist is solidly applied to the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left-side decoration substrate 402b as the first of the twice-painted white resists). Then, the LED non-mounting surface 402 by of the lower left side decoration substrate 402 b is, for example, a region (position of a predetermined pin number) indicating a position where the constant current drive circuit 402 bax is to be disposed An area (notched portion) for instructing the white light resist extraction area LSLKa as a area corresponding to the constant current drive circuit 402bax shown in Fig. 173 includes the first and third pins of the constant current drive circuit 402bax. A notch is formed at a position corresponding to the notch mark instructing placement) is masked as a white resist removed area LSLKa, and a constant current is formed in the vicinity of and above the white resist removed area LSLKa. The part number corresponding to the drive circuit 402bax IC1 (see FIG. 173A) is a white resist. In a state that is masked as can characters, the whole of the LED non-mounting surface 402by the left under the decorative substrate 402b is covered with a white resist. Thereby, although the white resist of 2 layers is formed similarly to the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left decoration substrate 402b on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left decoration substrate 402b, the first layer The entire area is covered by the white resist and the entire area except the area masked by the second layer white resist, whereby the masked area is recessed as a recess and corresponds to the constant current drive circuit 402bax. The white resist removed area LSLKa is formed as the area to be formed, and the IC1 which is the part number corresponding to the constant current drive circuit 402bax is formed as the white resist removed character.

  Note that the LED non-mounting surface 402 by of the left side lower decoration substrate 402 b is a white resist whose area where the electronic components such as resistances Rr, Rb and Rg of the maximum current setting circuit 402 bay are arranged is shown. White resist-removed characters R1, R2, and the like corresponding to the resistors Rr, Rb, and Rg mounted on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower-side lower decorative substrate 402b are formed as a removal region. A part number corresponding to an electronic component such as various distributed resistors such as various resistors and capacitors (not shown) is formed as a white resist blank character (not shown). Further, the LED non-mounting surface 402 by of the lower left side decoration substrate 402 b is formed as an unshown white resist-extracted area in which an area indicating the position for arranging the connector LDLCN is not shown. In the vicinity of this area, the part number corresponding to the connector LDLCN is It is formed as a white resist removing character not shown.

  In the fourth embodiment, the transmittance of the first white resist and the transmittance of the second white resist on the LED non-mounting surface 402 by of the lower left side decorative substrate 402 b are the same. In the first layer white resist and the second layer white resist, light and shade are generated, and the second layer white resist passes through the LED non-mounting surface of the lower left decoration substrate 402b. When the base of 402 by (the copper foil portion and the area excluding the copper foil portion, the same applies to the following), the white resist of the first layer looks pale. Thus, when looking at the base of the LED non-mounting surface 402 by of the lower left side decoration substrate 402 b through the second layer white resist, it is possible to identify white resist-extracted characters formed in the first layer white resist. In addition, it is possible to identify the white resist removed area.

  In addition, since the white resist is applied twice on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left side decoration substrate 402b, the white resist-extracted characters and the white resist-extracted area in the first layer white resist, and The refractive index of light of the second layer of white resist changes. As a result, when looking at the base of the LED non-mounting surface 402 by of the lower left side decoration substrate 402 b through the second layer white resist, the white resist removed characters and the white resist removed region in the first layer white resist are identified. It can be done.

  Also, the resistors and capacitors mounted on the LED non-mounting surface 402 by of the lower left side decoration substrate 402 b do not have white color, and the constant current drive circuit 402 bax (402 bbx) integrated on one semiconductor chip is The package is made of a black resin, and the connector LDLCN is made of a resin whose housing has a color of black, brown or blue. As described above, electronic components such as a resistor, a capacitor, and an IC that do not have white color, and a connector that does not have white color have a reduced reflectance due to the light emission of a full color LED. Has been implemented.

  Also in the configuration of measures for lowering the reflectance and the like according to the fourth embodiment, a white resist is solidly coated on the LED mounting surface 402bx and the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left decoration substrate 402b. Thus, the white resist solidly coated on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decoration substrate 402b enhances the reflectance toward the front (that is, the front side of the pachinko machine 1) by the light emission of the full color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10. It can be done.

  Further, in the configuration of measures against reflectance reduction and the like according to the fourth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 172 (b), on the LED mounting surface 314x of the decoration substrate 314 on the upper center of the plate, hLED1 to hLED10 which are full color LEDs The corresponding part number is formed as a white resist-extracted character using double-painted white resist, and the area indicating the position for arranging hLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs, uses double-painted white resist It is formed as a white resist removal area. Specifically, first, the LED mounting surface 314x of the upper center dish decoration substrate 314 is the first of the twice-painted white resists, and the entire LED mounting surface 314x of the upper dish center upper decoration substrate 314 is a white resist The white resist is covered (that is, the LED mounting surface 314x of the upper center dish decoration substrate 314 is solidly coated as the first of the twice-painted white resists). Then, the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decoration substrate 314 is a second area of the double-painted white resist, indicating an area where the full color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 are to be arranged (arrangement of predetermined pin numbers) For example, the white resist removal region HSLK 7 as a region corresponding to the full-color LED hLED 7 includes a cut-out mark for instructing the arrangement of the fifth pin of the full-color LED hLED 7 HLED1 which is a full-color LED in the vicinity of these white resist removed areas HSLK1 to HSLK10 while being masked as white resist removed areas HSLK1 to HSLK10) in which notches are formed at corresponding positions. LED which is the part number corresponding to ~ hLED 10 ~LED10 is in a state of being masked as white resist outline characters, the whole of the LED mounting surface 314x of the disc center on the decorative substrate 314 is covered by a white resist. As a result, although two layers of white resist are formed on the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314, the whole is covered with the first layer of white resist, and the second layer of white resist is formed. By covering the entire area except for the area masked by the resist, the area masked by the area is recessed as a recess, and the area indicating the position where the full color LED hLED1 to hLED10 is arranged is white resist removed area HSLK1 to HSLK10 While being formed, LED1 to LED10, which are part numbers corresponding to hLED1 to hLED10, which are full color LEDs, are formed as white resist-extracted characters.

  In the fourth embodiment, the transmittance of the first layer white resist and the transmittance of the second layer white resist on the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish upper center decorative substrate 314 are the same. Since the first layer white resist and the second layer white resist are used, the second layer white resist passes through the second layer white resist to form the LED mounting surface 314x of the decoration substrate 314 on the upper center of the dish. Looking at the substrate, the white resist of the first layer looks pale. In other words, when looking at the base of the LED mounting surface 314x of the upper center dish decoration substrate 314 through the second layer white resist, it becomes possible to identify white resist-extracted characters in the first layer white resist. ing.

  In addition, a region indicating the position where the connector HCN is to be disposed is formed on the LED mounting surface 314x of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314 as a white resist removal region (not shown), and a component corresponding to the connector HCN in the vicinity of this region The number is formed as a white resist-free character not shown. In the fourth embodiment, as described above, the transmittance of the first-layer white resist and the transmittance of the second-layer white resist are the same. When the layer of white resist and the second layer of white resist become dark and light passes through the second layer of white resist, the ground of the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative substrate 314 on the upper center of the plate is observed. The white resist of the eyes will look pale. This makes it possible to identify the white resist-extracted area in the first layer white resist when looking at the base of the LED mounting surface 314x of the upper center dish decoration substrate 314 through the second layer white resist. It has become.

  In addition, since a white resist is applied twice on the LED mounting surface 314x of the upper center decoration substrate 314, the white resist-extracted characters and the white resist-extracted area in the first layer white resist, and the second resist The refractive index of light of the white resist of the layer changes. As a result, when looking at the base of the LED mounting surface 314x of the upper center dish decoration substrate 314 through the second layer white resist, the white resist removed characters and the white resist removed area in the first layer white resist are identified. It can be done.

  In addition, the whole of the LED mounting surface 314x of the plate center upper decoration substrate 314 is covered with a white resist. The hLED1 to hLED10, which are full color LEDs, are made of resin of white (the color recognized as the same color as white), and the connector HCN has a white housing (also called natural color, white (natural color) Color) It is made of resin recognized as the same color. That is, the LED mounting surface 314x of the upper center decoration substrate 314 is an electronic component having a package of the same color (color recognized as the same color) as the white resist covered (solidly coated) on the whole. A full color LED hLED1 to hLED10 and a connector HCN having a white resist covered with the whole (solid color) and a housing of the same color (color recognized as the same color) are mounted. Thus, in the fourth embodiment, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors (not shown) that do not have white color and connectors that do not have white color are completely mounted on the LED mounting surface 314 x of the upper center decoration plate 314 of the dish It has not been. In other words, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that do not have white color, and connectors that do not have white color have a decrease in reflectance on the LED mounting surface due to the light emission of the full color LED. Not implemented at all.

  In addition, on the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decoration substrate 314, lighting inspection is individually performed on hLED1 to hLED10 which are full color LEDs mounted on the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decoration substrate 314 (for example, 1 LED elements that emit red (R) light, LED elements that emit green light (G), and LED elements that emit blue light (B) that constitute two full-color LEDs) A plurality of check pins (not shown) are formed as test pads (or through holes) connected to the wiring pattern, and white resist-extracted characters whose part numbers corresponding to the plurality of check pins are not shown in the vicinity of the plurality of check pins. It is formed as. The plurality of check pins are not coated with a white resist. As a result, when a worker performing an inspection brings a probe (not shown) into contact with the check pin, the probe (not shown) and the check pin are electrically connected to be in a conductive state, and various inspections can be performed. There are also a plurality of check pins that can confirm the contents of serial data to the constant current drive circuit 314ax and the constant current drive circuit 314bx.

  On the other hand, the constant current drive circuit 314 ax constituting the LED constant current drive circuit 314 a, the resistors Rr, Rb and Rg of the maximum current setting circuit 314 ay, and various distributed resistors not shown And the like are formed as a white resist-extracted area using a twice-painted white resist as in the case of the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative substrate 314 on the upper center of the plate An electronic component and a part number corresponding to the electronic component are formed in the vicinity as a white resist-extracted character using a twice-painted white resist as in the case of the LED mounting surface 314x of the upper center dish decoration substrate 314.

  In the fourth embodiment, the transmittance of the first layer white resist and the transmittance of the second layer white resist on the LED non-mounting surface 314 y of the dish upper center decorative substrate 314 are the same. In the first layer white resist and the second layer white resist, shading occurs, and the second layer white resist passes through the second layer white resist and the LED non-mounting surface of the decoration substrate 314 on the upper center of the dish Looking at the base of 314y, the white resist of the first layer will look pale. Thus, when looking at the base of the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the upper center dish decoration substrate 314 through the second layer white resist, it is possible to identify white resist-extracted characters formed in the first layer white resist. In addition, it is possible to identify the white resist removed area.

  In addition, since the white resist is applied twice on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the upper center decoration substrate 314, the white resist-extracted characters and the white resist-extracted area in the first layer white resist, and The refractive index of light of the second layer of white resist changes. As a result, when looking at the base of the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the upper center dish decoration substrate 314 through the second layer white resist, the white resist removed characters and the white resist removed region in the first layer white resist are identified. It can be done.

  Also, the resistors, capacitors, etc. mounted on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the dish center upper decoration substrate 314 do not have white color, and the constant current drive circuit 314ax (314bx) integrated on one semiconductor chip is The package is made of black resin. As described above, electronic components such as a resistor and a capacitor that do not have white color are mounted on the LED non-mounting surface because the reflectance due to the light emission of the full color LED decreases.

  Also in the configuration of the countermeasure for lowering the reflectance and the like according to the fourth embodiment, a white resist is solidly coated on the LED mounting surface 314x and the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the upper center dish decoration substrate 314. As a result, the white resist solidly coated on the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish upper center decoration substrate 314 causes the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 to emit light forward (that is, the upper side of the rendering operation unit 300) It is possible to increase the rate.

  As described above, in the configuration of measures against the reflectance reduction and the like according to the first embodiment, the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b includes the part numbers corresponding to the full color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 and the full color LEDs HdLED1 to hddLED10 are not printed at all as silk printing, and the LED mounting surface 314x of the upper center plate 314 of the dish is a full color LED corresponding to hLED1 to hLED10 While the number and the area indicating the position where the hLED1 to hLED10, which are full color LEDs, are arranged are not printed at all as silk printing, in the configuration of measures such as reflectance reduction according to the fourth embodiment, the left The LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower side decoration board 402b While the LED is formed as a white-resist-free character using a white resist that has the part number corresponding to hdLED1 to hdLED10 that is an LED, the area indicating the position where hdLED1 to hdLED10 that is a full color LED is arranged is twice It is formed as a white resist removal area using a coated white resist, and the LED mounting surface 314x of the upper center dish decoration board 314 has a part number twice corresponding to the full color LED hLED1 to hLED10. An area showing the positions where the full color LEDs hLED1 to hLED 10 are arranged is formed as a white resist-extracted area using double-coated white resist while being formed as a white resist-extracted character using the white resist of Difference in that .

  The reflectance to the front (that is, the front side of the pachinko machine 1) by light emission of the full color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 can be enhanced by the white resist solidly coated on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b. It is supposed to be. In addition, the white resist coated solidly on the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decoration substrate 314 allows the reflectance toward the front (that is, the side facing upward of the rendering operation unit 300) by the light emission of the full color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10. Can be raised. For this reason, when the area indicating the full color LED and the corresponding part number and the position where the full color LED is to be disposed is printed in black as silk printing, the LED by light emission of the full color LED by silk printing printed in black. The reflectance on the mounting surface is reduced, which causes a problem that the light emission of the full color LED is not efficiently used. In addition, various decorative bodies provided in the door frame 3 (for example, the upper left decorative body 271, the lower left decorative body 281, the upper right decorative body 276, the lower right decorative body 286, and the unit front cover 312 shown in FIG. The upper center plate decoration 312a and the lower plate center decoration 312b, the door frame left side decoration 404, the side window inner decoration member 412, the door frame right side decoration 419, the door frame top decoration 453) are described above Because the player sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1 moves the head (face) to change the line of sight depending on the direction of the head (face), although the light-colored milky white is formed, the door frame 3 In some cases, the player can visually recognize the LED mounting surfaces of the various decorative substrates provided in the various decorative bodies provided in the above. Then, there arises a problem that the player visually recognizes the full color LED and the corresponding part number having no relation to the game at all, and the area indicating the position where the full color LED is to be arranged.

  Therefore, in the configuration of measures against reflectance reduction and the like according to the fourth embodiment, a white resist-removed character using a white resist twice coated with a part number corresponding to a full color LED having no relation to a game at all for the player The full color LED mounting position is formed by forming an area indicating the position where the full color LED is to be arranged for the player and having nothing to do with the game as a white resist extraction area using twice coated white resist. Making it difficult to find out the white resist removal area (ie, the area that indicates the position where the full color LED is to be placed) indicating the symbol or the number identifying the full color LED (ie, the part number corresponding to the full color LED) Can.

  Further, in the configuration of measures against reflectance reduction and the like according to the fourth embodiment, a white resist-removed character using a white resist twice coated with a part number corresponding to a full color LED having no relation to a game at all for the player The light emitting area of the full color LED is formed by forming the area showing the position for arranging the full color LED having nothing to do with the game for the player as a white resist removing area using the twice coated white resist. It is possible to prevent a decrease in reflectance on the LED mounting surface.

  Also in the configuration of the countermeasure such as the reflectance decrease according to the fourth embodiment, the same operation and effect as the configuration of the countermeasure such as the reflectance decrease according to the first embodiment can be achieved. In other words, a white resist removal area using a white resist that indicates the full color LED identification number (that is, the part number corresponding to the full color LED) and the full color LED mounting position (that is, the position where the full color LED is disposed) Can be made difficult for the player to visually recognize, and a decrease in reflectance on the LED mounting surface due to the light emission of the full color LED can be prevented.

  Further, in the configuration of measures against the reflectance reduction and the like according to the fourth embodiment, since the process of silk printing can be omitted for the LED mounting surface and the LED non-mounting surface, respectively, the plate cost of silk printing and production of the substrate The reduction of the number of processes can contribute to lowering the substrate manufacturing cost.

  In the fourth embodiment, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that do not have a white color that reduces the reflectance on the LED mounting surface due to the light emission of a full color LED, and a connector that does not have a white color Because the reflectance on the LED mounting surface due to the LED is reduced, it was not mounted at all on the LED mounting surface, but in the LED mounting surface due to the light emission of the full color LED, the region corresponding to the member placed forward is the LED If it is difficult to contribute to the reflectance on the mounting surface, electronic components such as a resistor and a capacitor having no white color and a connector having no white color may be disposed in the region. In this case, an area indicating positions where electronic components such as resistors and capacitors (not shown) mounted on the LED mounting surface are arranged is formed as each terminal (not shown) and a white resist extraction area (not shown). In addition, part numbers corresponding to electronic components and connectors such as resistors and capacitors (not shown) mounted on the LED mounting surface are formed as white resist-extracted characters (not shown).

  In the fourth embodiment, although two layers of white resist are formed on the LED mounting surface and the LED non-mounting surface of the decoration substrate, the whole is covered with the first layer white resist, and By covering the entire area except for the area masked by the second layer white resist, the area masked is recessed as a recess, and the area indicating the position where the full color LED and the connector are arranged is formed as a white resist extraction area And the part number corresponding to the full color LED and the connector is formed as the white resist-extracted character, but the white resist-extracted area and the white resist-extracted character may be formed using other methods. . For example, after solidly coating a white resist one or more times on the LED mounting surface and the LED non-mounting surface of the decorative substrate, a region indicating the position where the full color LED or connector is to be disposed before the white resist dries. Forming a white resist-extracted area by pressing the plate, and forming a white resist-extracted character by pressing a plate showing the part number corresponding to a full color LED or connector, an LED mounting surface of a decorative substrate, A white resist is applied on the LED non-mounting surface once or multiple times, and then the white resist is dried, and then the area showing the position where a full color LED or a connector is to be disposed is set as a white resist removed area Part number corresponding to a full color LED or connector And a method of forming as outline characters.

  In the embodiment described above, the arrangement method of the LED constant current drive circuit on each decoration substrate of the door frame 3 is almost the same, and as shown in FIG. 168, the edge of the land pattern of the constant current drive circuit 402bax A configuration in which the left end side 402beg1 and the right end side 402beg2 of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b are arranged to be inclined 45 degrees, and a predetermined number of full color LEDs are divided into a group 1 and a group 2 Although the configuration in which the constant current drive circuit 402bax is disposed between the group 1 and the group 2 is adopted, the present invention can also be applied to an elongated plate-like decorative substrate provided in the game board 5. Examples of the elongated plate-like decorative substrate provided on the game board 5 include, for example, decorative substrates provided on various effect units of the game board 5.

  In the embodiment described above, the LED constant current drive circuit in each decoration substrate of the door frame 3 is controlled to emit light by supplying constant current to eight full color LEDs, but the invention is not limited to full color LEDs, and white It may be a single color LED such as red, green, yellow, orange, blue and green. A single color LED can also be used. In this case, light emission control of a maximum of 24 single color LEDs can be performed by one LED constant current drive circuit.

  Furthermore, although DC +12 V from the power supply substrate 630 is input to the cathode terminal of the LED element provided on each decorative substrate of the door frame 3 in the embodiment described above, the constant current drive circuit of the LED constant current drive circuit The internal power supply Vreg (DC +5 V) created by the provided linear power supply (linear power supply 283xa provided in the constant current drive circuit 283x of the LED constant current drive circuit 283a shown in FIG. It may be used as a voltage of For example, among the output channels LR1 to LR8, LG1 to LG8, and LB1 to LB8 of the constant current drive circuit described above, a maximum of one single-color LED (for example, When the LED except red LED is electrically connected, the internal power supply Vreg (DC +5 V) created by the linear power supply is input to the anode terminal of the single color LED, and the single color LED The cathode terminal is configured to be electrically connected to one output channel via the heat dispersion resistor of the above-described heat dispersion resistor circuit. In addition, among the output channels LR1 to LR8, LG1 to LG8, and LB1 to LB8 of the above-described constant current drive circuit, a maximum of two single-color LEDs (for example, When the red LED is electrically connected in series, the internal power supply Vreg (DC + 5 V) created by the linear power supply is input to the anode terminal of the first stage LED, and the cathode terminal of the last stage LED is connected It can be configured to be electrically connected to one output channel through the heat dispersion resistance of the above-described heat dispersion resistance circuit. The decorative substrate configured in this manner can be applied not only to the door frame 3 but also to a decorative substrate provided to the game board 5.

  Further, in the embodiment described above, DC +12 V from the power supply substrate 630 is input to the cathode terminal of the LED element provided on each decoration substrate of the door frame 3, and the output channels LR1 to LR8 and LG1 of the constant current drive circuit The cathode terminal of the LED element constituting one full color LED is connected electrically to one output channel among the LG8 and the LB1 to LB8 through the heat dispersion resistance of the above-described heat dispersion resistance circuit. However, multiple full color LEDs may be electrically connected in series to one output channel. In this case, the number of full color LEDs is two to three. When it is necessary to further increase the number of full color LEDs for one output channel, DC +35 V from the power supply substrate 630 is used as a voltage for lighting the LED instead of +12 V DC from the power supply substrate 630. You may The decorative substrate configured in this manner can be applied not only to the door frame 3 but also to a decorative substrate provided to the game board 5.

  Furthermore, in the embodiment described above, the door frame top central decorative substrate 455, the door frame top left decorative substrate 456, and the door frame top right decorative substrate 457 of the door frame top decorative body 453 are the door frame top central decorative substrate 455, the door In the state where the frame top left decorative substrate 456 and the door frame top right decorative substrate 457 are disposed on the door frame top decorative body 453, the width dimension from the upper end side to the lower end side of the decorative substrate is large. The edges of the land pattern are arranged parallel to the upper and lower sides of the door frame top central decorative substrate 455, the door frame top left decorative substrate 456, and the door frame top right decorative substrate 457, but the door About any one decoration board among the frame top center decoration board 455, the door frame top left decoration board 456, and the door frame top right decoration board 457, any 2 decoration boards The end side of the land pattern of the constant current driving circuit, may be arranged so as to be non-parallel to the upper side and lower side of the decorative substrate. Then, the door frame top right decoration substrate 457 directly controls the light emission by the LED constant current drive circuit provided for itself, in addition to the full color LED provided for itself, another right decoration substrate on which two full color LEDs are mounted. The door frame top left decorative substrate 456 may be directly provided by the LED constant current drive circuit provided with itself, for example, the other left decorative substrate on which one full color LED is mounted in addition to the full color LED provided with itself. The light emission may be controlled.

  In the embodiment described above, the LED mounting surface 402bx and the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, the LED mounting surface 314x of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314 and the LED non-mounting surface 314y The LED mounting surface and the LED non-mounting surface of the various decorative substrates provided for each decorative body to be used are solidly coated with a white resist, but may be printed by white silk printing instead. In this case, after printing the whole of the LED mounting surface and the LED non-mounting surface of various decorative substrates by white silk printing, the full color LED, the corresponding part number for the full color LED, and the area showing the position of the full color LED are silk printing It will be printed in yellow (or black) respectively.

  Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, various decoration substrates provided in each decoration provided on the door frame 3 such as the LED non-mounting surface 402 by of the lower left side decoration substrate 402 b and the LED non-mounting surface 314 y of the upper center dish decoration substrate 314 In the LED non-mounting surface, the area corresponding to the full color LED mounted on the LED mounting surface of various decorative substrates is printed as silk printing with yellow dotted line (or black dotted line), but the full color LED mounting position (In other words, when printing the area where the full color LED is to be arranged with silk chain printing, using yellow dotted line (or black dotted line)), add the polarity mark of the full color LED It may be configured to specify the implementation orientation.

  Incidentally, conventionally, there has been proposed a gaming machine provided with various substrates which can be supplied from a power supply from a power supply substrate and can control electric decoration (for example, JP-A-2016-192989 (FIG. 8)). By the way, inside the gaming machine, lines for transmitting power to various boards and lines for transmitting control signals are drawn, and the length of the lines becomes longer, which may cause various boards to be affected by external noise and malfunction. was there.

  Also, conventionally, a gaming machine provided with a front frame configured to cover a window that opens the gaming board with a transparent protective plate at the front and back is proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2016-192989 (paragraph [0014] , And Figure 1)). By the way, by enlarging the game area formed on the game board, the thickness of the left and right sides in the front frame is reduced, and the decorative substrate housed in the left and right sides is also in the form of a band plate. Further, by providing the display device and the movable body on the game board, the area occupied by the display device and the movable body in the game board becomes large, and the decorative substrate provided on the game board also becomes like a band plate. However, when the light emission control means for controlling the light emission means is provided on the strip-like decorative substrate, there is a problem that it is difficult to secure the area for drawing out the wiring to the light emission means from the light emission control means.

  Also, conventionally, a game machine has been proposed which is provided with a movable combination device which is arranged to stand by below the front of the display screen of the effect display device and which operates at the time of effect (for example, JP-A-2015-058064) Publication (paragraphs [0040], FIG. 4, FIG. 8, and FIG. 9)). A decoration substrate on which light emitting means facing the back surface of the light emitting portion (lens) on the design surface is mounted is mounted in the movable part device. However, for the player, there is a possibility that the player may visually recognize the number specifying the light emitting means mounted on the decorative substrate having no relation to the game at all, the auxiliary line indicating the mounting position of the light emitting means, etc.

  Also, conventionally, a gaming machine has been proposed in which a decorative substrate on which light emitting means is mounted is attached (for example, JP-A-2016-154676 (paragraph [0019], FIG. 5)). The player is provided with an effect having a variation using the light emission effect by such light emitting means. However, when the light emitted from the light emitting means is reflected by the mounting surface of the decorative substrate, the reflectance is lowered due to the number specifying the light emitting means mounted on the decorative substrate and the auxiliary line indicating the mounting position of the light emitting means It was difficult to make the substrate a bright light emitting surface.

[13. Each decoration board to prepare for the game board]
Next, among the decorative substrates included in the game board 5, particularly, the decorative substrate on which the magnetic type pole change detection circuit is mounted will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 174 is a block diagram showing an example of a decorative substrate provided with a magnetic type pole change detection circuit and the like.

  First, among the decorative substrates included in the game board 5, as the decorative substrate on which the magnetic type pole change detection circuit is mounted, as described above, the front stage decorative portion of the back upper left movable decorative body 3310 of the back unit 3000 There is a back upper left first stage decorative substrate 3311 a or the like on which a magnetic back left upper pole change detection circuit 3311 ab for detecting a standby position (original position) of a rotational position 3312 is mounted.

  The light emission data PSDAT1 which is a door frame side serial system serially output from the peripheral control IC 1510a provided on the peripheral control substrate 1510 via the panel drive substrate 1720 is input with the clock signal PSCLK1 via the panel drive substrate 1720 via the panel drive substrate 1720. ing. Also, the back upper left first stage decorative substrate 3311 a is electrically connected to the +12 V power supply line of the peripheral control substrate 1510 through the panel drive substrate 1720 and receives +12 V DC, and the ground (GND of the peripheral control substrate 1510 ) Electrically connected to the line. The back upper left first stage decorative substrate 3311a may be configured to be electrically connected directly to the +12 V power supply line of the power supply substrate 630 shown in FIG. It may be configured to be electrically connected directly to the ground (GND) line.

  The back upper left first stage decorative substrate 3311 a includes a back left upper pole change detection circuit 3311 ab, an LED constant current drive circuit 3311 ac, a heat dispersion circuit 3311 ad, and eight full color LEDs 3311 aa (1) to 3311 aa (8).

  The back upper left magnetic pole change detection circuit 3311ab can detect a change in magnetic pole, and mainly includes a linear power supply 3311aba, a Hall element 3311abb, an amplification circuit 3311abc, a Schmitt circuit 3311abd, an output current limiting circuit 3311abe, and an FET 3311abf. It is configured as an open drain output.

  The linear power supply 3311 aba is a circuit for generating and supplying an internal power supply to which DC +12 V from the +12 V power supply line is input and used in the back upper left magnetic pole change detection circuit 3311 ab. The internal power supply is supplied to the Hall element 3311abb, the amplifier circuit 3311abc, and the Schmitt circuit 3311abd so as to operate. The source terminals of the linear power supply 3311aba, the amplifier circuit 3311abc, the Schmitt circuit 3311abd, and the FET 3311abf are grounded to the ground (GND) line.

  The Hall element 3311 abb can detect the strength of the magnetic flux density, and outputs an analog signal whose voltage changes according to the strength of the magnetic flux density to the amplifier circuit 3311 abc. The amplification circuit 3311 abc amplifies the analog signal from the Hall element 3311 abb and outputs the amplified signal to the Schmitt circuit 3311 abd. The Schmitt circuit 3311 abd arranges the waveform of the signal amplified by the amplification circuit 3311 abc and outputs it to the gate terminal of the FET 3311 abf which is the final stage. The FET 3311abf outputs the logic of the detection signal ULORG from its drain terminal in response to the signal from the Schmitt circuit 3311abd input to its gate terminal. Since the FET 3311abf is used as an open drain output, the drain current to the drain terminal of the FET 3311abf is limited by the output current limiting circuit 3311abe.

  The back left upper magnetic pole change detection circuit 3311ab switches the logic of the detection signal ULORG from HI to LOW when the magnet approaches the Hall element 3311abb and the magnetic flux density in the perpendicular direction to the plane of the Hall element 3311abb becomes larger than the operating point (Bop) When the magnet moves away from the surface of the Hall element 3311 abb and the magnetic flux density becomes smaller than the return point (Brp), the logic of the detection signal ULORG is switched from LOW to HI.

  Incidentally, the back upper left magnetic pole change detection circuit 3311ab is arranged such that its Hall element 3311abb is located just below the track of the small cylindrical magnet 3312a in the vicinity of the rotation axis of the previous stage decoration portion 3312 shown in FIG. It is done.

  In the present embodiment, the back upper left magnetic pole change detection circuit 3311ab is a small electronic component integrated on one semiconductor chip, and the type of the IC package has a rectangular planar shape (horizontal length: 2 Surface mount type (SMD, height: 1.1 mm) having a length of 1.6 mm and a so-called SOT. Since the back upper left magnetic pole change detection circuit 3311ab is a small electronic component, the back upper left first stage decorative substrate 3311a of the previous stage decoration portion 3312 attached to the right side surface of the base stage decoration portion 3311 shown in FIG. The distance dimension (the distance dimension (the In this embodiment, it has about 1.5 mm.) Can be made small.

  Further, since the back upper left movable decorative body 3310 is a small movable decorative body, for example, it is disposed as a sensor for detecting the front stage decorative portion 3312 which is a movable body using a large-sized optical sensor such as a photo coupler. It is structurally difficult to do.

  So, in this embodiment, it is employ | adopted as a sensor which detects the standby position (original position) of front step decoration part 3312 which is a movable body by using back upper left magnetic pole change detection circuit 3311ab. Although this magnetic sensor has a large variation in detection as compared to the above-described optical sensor, in the present embodiment, the standby position (original position) of the front stage decorative portion 3312 which is a movable body has variations. Even if there is a gap, this gap is small, and the probability of giving a sense of discomfort to the player is low.

  As described above, since the back upper left movable decorative body 3310 moves in the left and right direction, moves in the upper and lower direction, and the front stage decorative portion 3312 rotates, the operation of the back upper left movable decorative body 3310 In particular, light from various light emission sources (a plurality of light emission sources) provided on the game board 5 may be incident from multiple directions on the LED mounting surface of the back upper left magnetic pole change detection circuit 3311ab.

  Therefore, when the above-described optical sensor is mounted on the LED mounting surface of the back upper left magnetic pole change detection circuit 3311ab, light from various light emission sources (a plurality of light emission sources) provided on the game board 5 is disturbance light ( There is a risk of false detection due to light pollution.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the above-described magnetic sensor is employed also for this reason. Therefore, it is possible to prevent erroneous detection of the standby position (original position) of the preceding decoration portion 3312 by the light emitted from various light emission sources (plural light emission sources) provided in the game board 5.

  In the present embodiment, the optical sensors provided in the various effect units described above are such that light from various light sources (plural light sources) provided on the game board 5 is blocked by other members (or disturbance light) (Because it is weakened to the extent that it does not become (light pollution)), there is no risk of false detection due to the light.

  The LED constant current drive circuit 3311 ac is the same circuit as the LED constant current drive circuit 283 a of the dish lower left decorative substrate 283 shown in FIG. 165 and supplies a constant current to the full color LEDs 3311 aa (1) to 3311 aa (8) And a maximum current setting circuit 3311 ac capable of setting the maximum current of the current flowing to full-color LEDs 3311 aa (1) to 3311 aa (8). It is configured. The constant current drive circuit 3311 ac is the same circuit as the constant current drive circuit 283 x in the LED constant current drive circuit 283 a of the lower left decoration board 283 shown in FIG. 165, and the game board serial system from the peripheral control board 1510 Based on the data PSDAT1 and the clock signal PSCLK1, the constant current is controlled to flow to the full color LEDs 3311aa (1) to 3311aa (8). As described above, since the constant current drive circuit 3311 ac is a sink (suction) type, the constant current drive circuit 3311 ac generates heat by absorbing the constant current flowing to the full color LEDs 3311 aa (1) to 3311 aa (8). Therefore, the heat distribution of the constant current drive circuit 3311 ac can be dispersed by receiving a part of the heat generation of the constant current drive circuit 3311 ac by the heat distribution circuit 3311 ad. The heat dispersion circuit 3311 ad is the same circuit as the heat dispersion circuit 283 c in the LED constant current drive circuit 283 a of the lower left decoration substrate 283 shown in FIG.

  The light emission data PSDAT1 serially output from the peripheral control IC 1510a included in the peripheral control substrate 1510 has the same configuration as the light emission data SDAT1 and SDAT2 serially output from the peripheral control IC 1510a included in the peripheral control substrate 1510 described above. The light emission data PSDAT1 is data for specifying a light emission mode, and is composed of ID information and gradation information. The ID information is information indicating which of the LED constant current drive circuits among the LED constant current drive circuits provided on each decoration board of the game board 5 is to be designated. The gradation information is information indicating which one of the gradation degree 0 (zero) to the gradation degree 127 is to be designated.

  Since the LED constant current drive circuit 3311 ac is the same circuit as the LED constant current drive circuit 283 a of the lower left decoration substrate 283 shown in FIG. 165 as described above, the detailed description thereof is omitted here.

  In addition, while the back left upper first stage decorative substrate 3311 a has eight full color LEDs 3311 aa (1) to 3311 aa (8), and a back left upper magnetic pole change detection circuit 3311 ab, etc. mounted on its LED mounting surface The LED constant current drive circuit 3311 ac and the like are mounted on the LED non-mounting surface. The back upper left first stage decorative substrate 3311a has the above-described configuration of measures such as reflectance reduction according to the first embodiment, the configuration of measures such as reflectance reduction according to the second embodiment, and reflectance according to the third embodiment. One of the configurations of the countermeasure for the reduction and the like and the configuration of the countermeasure for the decrease in reflectance according to the fourth embodiment can be adopted.

  In the embodiment described above, the back left upper base decorative substrate is mounted with a plurality of full-color LEDs (not shown) for emitting light toward the inner wall of the base decorative portion 3311 to which itself is attached. 3311a had mounted a plurality of full color LEDs 3311 aa that radiates light toward the left surface side of the previous stage decoration portion 3312, but made a plurality of full color LEDs mounted on the back upper left base decoration substrate a side view type A plurality of full color LEDs 3311 aa mounted on the back upper left first stage decorative substrate 3311 a may be selected along with selection, and a plurality of full color LEDs mounted on the back upper left basic decorative substrate may be side selected A plurality of full color LEs mounted on the back upper left first stage decorative board 3311a while selecting the view type The top view type of 3311 aa may be selected, and a plurality of full color LEDs mounted on the back upper left base decorative board may be selected on the top view type and mounted on the back upper left front decorative board 3311 a A plurality of full color LEDs 3311 aa to be selected may be selected as the top view type, and a plurality of full color LEDs mounted on the back upper left basic decorative substrate may be selected as the top view type A plurality of full color LEDs 3311 aa mounted on the decorative substrate 3311 a may be selected as a side view type.

  Incidentally, conventionally, a gaming machine in which the rendering operation of a display device or a decoration device provided on a game board is controlled by a presentation control device (control means) has been proposed (for example, JP-A-2016-154676 (paragraph Figure 3 and Figure 22)). By the way, in the game board, there is an environment under strong influence of electromagnetic wave noise, and in the structure of the game board, the environment under the influence of electromagnetic wave noise among various wirings connected with the effect control device (control means) When electromagnetic wave noise intrudes into another wiring through the drawn wiring, there is a possibility that the effect control device (control means) may malfunction due to the influence of the electromagnetic wave noise from the other wiring.

  Also, conventionally, a gaming machine provided with a movable body on a gaming board has been proposed (for example, JP-A-2016-154676 (paragraphs [0067], FIG. 18 and FIG. 19)). The movable body has a detection piece projecting, and the position of the movable body is specified by detecting the detection piece by an optical detection switch provided separately from the movable body. By the way, when the movable body is provided with an optical detection switch to detect a specific position of the movable body, the light is generated by the light emitted from a plurality of light emitters provided on the game board while the movable body is in operation. It becomes disturbance light and is incident on the optical detection switch, which may cause erroneous detection.

[14. Brightness setting of indirect light and direct light]
The base panel plate 1110 and the light guide plate in the surface rendering unit 2600 are a plurality of LEDs arranged in a line from the end face (a plurality of panel decoration LEDs 1130 a for emitting light toward the peripheral surface of the base panel plate 1110, A plurality of LEDs for the first pattern that are lighted and decorated by causing light to be incident from the upper surface of the light guide plate 2601 and a plurality of LEDs for the second pattern that are lighted and decorated by causing light to be incident from the right side of the light guide plate Hereinafter, the light of “LED used as indirect light” is doubled in.) And the indirect light is irradiated from the inner surface of the light guide plate.

  In the game board 5, various LEDs provided in the door frame side various units such as the effect operation unit 300, the door frame left side unit 400, the door frame right side unit 410, and the door frame top unit 450 etc. provided in the door frame 3 of FIG. The various LEDs that are included and other LEDs that are not used for the light guide plate (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "LEDs used as direct light") are irradiated as direct light. Therefore, when the luminance of the LED used as the indirect light and the luminance of the LED used as the direct light are the same, the indirect light by the light guide plate becomes darker than the direct light. The player wants to adjust to dark when the current luminance of the various LEDs provided on the game board 5 and the door frame 3 is too bright, and to adjust it brightly if it is not too dark.

  By the way, various LEDs are mounted on various decoration boards provided on the game board side and various decoration boards provided on the door frame side, and one or more LED constant current drive circuits are mounted. As described above, this LED constant current drive circuit controls the brightness (gradation) of the LED in a total of 128 steps from gradation 0 (zero) to gradation 127 from light off to lighting (maximum luminance) It is something that can be done.

  Further, as described above, the light emission data SDAT1 and SDAT2 serially output from the peripheral control IC 1510a included in the peripheral control substrate 1510 are data for specifying a light emission mode, and are composed of ID information and gradation information. There is. The ID information is information indicating which of the LED constant current drive circuits among the LED constant current drive circuits provided on each decoration substrate of the door frame 3 is to be designated. The gradation information is information indicating which one of the gradation degree 0 (zero) to the gradation degree 127 is to be designated.

  Further, as described above, the light emission data PSDAT1 serially output from the peripheral control IC 1510a included in the peripheral control substrate 1510 has the same configuration as the light emission data SDAT1 and SDAT2 serially output from the peripheral control IC 1510a included in the peripheral control substrate 1510 The light emission data PSDAT1 is data for specifying a light emission mode, and is composed of ID information and gradation information. The ID information is information indicating which of the LED constant current drive circuits among the LED constant current drive circuits provided on each decoration board of the game board 5 is to be designated. The gradation information is information indicating which one of the gradation degree 0 (zero) to the gradation degree 127 is to be designated.

  The gradation designated by the gradation information described above is performed by the display control unit monitoring processing in the peripheral control unit steady processing and the lamp pallet setting processing in the received command analysis processing in the peripheral control unit power on processing described later performed by the peripheral control IC 1510a. It is set. In the lamp pallet setting process, the luminance of the LED used as direct light and the luminance of the LED used as indirect light are determined based on the lamp pallet setting table including the designated luminance value, the normal pallet value, and the special pallet value. ,, Respectively. The peripheral control IC 1510a analyzes various commands from the main control board 1310X, reads out (extracts) the light emission mode generation schedule data from the control ROM 1510b based on the analyzed various commands, and executes the lamp pallet setting process. Then, the gradation information described above can be updated and set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a, and during a demonstration (demonstration effect to be performed in the player waiting state) or in progress For example, within a predetermined period of a specific effect, the lamp palette setting process can be executed to update the gradation information set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a.

  Here, the luminance designation values, the normal pallet values, and the special pallet values that constitute the lamp pallet setting table will be briefly described. The designated luminance value may be set to one designated luminance value within a range of 32 steps ranging from the zeroth designated luminance value which is the minimum luminance (turned off) to the 31st designated luminance value which is the maximum luminance. It is possible values, and a normal pallet value and a special pallet value which will be described later in correspondence with the 0th (zero) luminance designated value to the 31st luminance designated value are respectively set in advance. The player (or a clerk of a game hall clerk or the like) operates the operation effect operation unit 301 (rotation operation unit 302, pressing operation unit 303) which can be operated, and the 31st brightness from the first brightness designated value to the maximum brightness One designated brightness value can be set up to the designated value.

  For example, a player (or a clerk of a game hall clerk or the like) is the case where the rotation operation unit 302 is rotated clockwise, and the current brightness is temporarily set to the minimum brightness (turns off). When the first luminance designation value at which the luminance is higher than the value is set, a predetermined equation (for example, linear) is set from the first luminance designation value toward the 31st luminance designation value which is the maximum luminance. While changing the brightness of the LED used as indirect light and the brightness of the LED used as direct light along the tone curve or spline curve tone curve, the rotation operation unit 302 is reversed In the case of rotating clockwise, when the current brightness is set to the maximum brightness, a predetermined equation (for example, the first brightness specified value) from the 31st brightness specified value which is the maximum brightness is set. Linear tone curve, or along the spline curve tone curve), and the LED used as an indirect light luminance changes to low, and brightness of the LED to be used as a direct light. When the player (or a clerk of a game hall clerk or the like) rotationally operates the rotation operation unit 302 to select a desired brightness and press the pressing operation unit 303, the selected desired brightness is determined. In the present embodiment, it is prepared in advance that the player (or a clerk of a game hall clerk or the like) can set the luminance while a demonstration (demonstration effect in a player waiting state) or a presentation is in progress. At this time, the player (or a clerk at a game hall or the like) can set the desired luminance by operating the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303. In addition, when a player (or a clerk at a game hall or the like) operates the rotation operation unit 302 at a predetermined position of the display area of the effect display device 1600 while a demonstration or effect is in progress, the first designated luminance value A bar-like indicator indicating the position up to the designated luminance value 31 is displayed to visually indicate as an image how much the desired luminance of the player (or a clerk at a game hall or the like) is. It can be done. Further, in the present embodiment, a fourteenth designated luminance value is set as an initial value (default).

  The normal pallet value is set as the gradation information described above for the luminance of various LEDs mounted on various decorative substrates provided on the game board side irradiated as direct light and on various decorative substrates provided on the door frame side. is there. For the normal pallet values, one of 17 steps in 5% steps from the minimum pallet value (20%) which is the minimum value to the maximum pallet value (100%) which is the maximum value is selected, and the luminance described above A mathematical expression (for example, a linear tone curve) in which a pallet value corresponding to one luminance designation is predetermined in a range of 32 steps ranging from the 0th (zero) luminance designation value to the 31st luminance designation value which is a designated value Or spline curve-like tone curve).

  The minimum pallet value (20%) is the maximum pallet value corresponding to one luminance specification among the 32 levels ranging from the 0th (zero) luminance specification value to the 31st luminance specification value which are the luminance specification values described above It is a value of 20% with respect to (100%), and the other pallet values are similarly the 0th (zero) luminance designation value which is the luminance designation value described above (%) described in parentheses Of the 32 levels ranging up to the 31st luminance designation value, this is the value for the maximum pallet value (100%) corresponding to one luminance designation.

  In the present embodiment, the maximum pallet value (100%) is selected in advance for the various decoration substrates provided on the game board side irradiated as direct light and the various decoration substrates provided on the door frame side. Among various decoration boards provided on the game board side, which are set as the gradation information described above and which are irradiated as direct light, a pallet (not shown) for a specific decoration board (an LED that feels dazzling to the player) The value (50%) is selected in advance and set as the gradation information described above.

  The special pallet value is set as the above-mentioned gradation information as to the luminance of various LEDs mounted on various decoration substrates used for a light guide plate irradiated as indirect light. Unlike the normal pallet value, the special pallet value is present in only one step, and is one of 32 steps ranging from the 0 (zero) luminance designation value to the 31st luminance designation value which are the luminance designation values described above. The palette value corresponding to the luminance designation is set as the gradation information described above along a predetermined equation (for example, a linear tone curve or a spline curved tone curve).

  If the luminance of the LED used as the indirect light is the same as the luminance of the LED used as the direct light as described above, the indirect light from the light guide plate becomes darker than the direct light. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the luminance of the LED used as the indirect light is set using the special pallet value instead of the normal pallet value set for the luminance of the LED used as the direct light. To visually recognize the state in which the light guide plate is emitting light by indirect light, the first luminance designation value at which the luminance is higher than the 0th (zero) luminance designation value which is the minimum luminance (turned off). As the lowest possible luminance, the normal pallet value is set to a value substantially equal to the eighteenth luminance designation value in the case where the pallet value is set to the maximum pallet value (100%), and the range from the first luminance designation value to the 31st luminance designation value One of the designated luminance values and the corresponding pallet value are set along a predetermined equation (for example, a linear tone curve or a spline curved tone curve).

  As described above, in the lamp pallet setting process, the luminance of the LED used as direct light and the LED used as indirect light based on the lamp pallet setting table including the designated luminance value, the normal pallet value, and the special pallet value The player (or a clerk of a game hall clerk or the like) operates the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 with respect to the brightness of the LED used as direct light when setting the brightness of each of The player (or a clerk of a game hall clerk or the like) operates the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit with respect to the luminance of the LED used as the indirect light while being set along the normal pallet value corresponding to the designated value The designated luminance value and the corresponding special palette value are set according to the operation 303. Thereby, when the brightness of the LED used as direct light is felt to be dazzling, and the player operates the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 in order to reduce the brightness, the direct light is used as the light. Set the luminance of the LED to be used to the lowest luminance (that is, the first luminance designation value at which the luminance is at a stage where the luminance is higher next to the 0th (zero) luminance designation value for minimum luminance (turn off)) The brightness of the LED used as indirect light is also set to the lowest brightness (that is, the first brightness specification value at which the brightness is higher than the 0th (zero) brightness specification value at which the minimum Also, the luminance of the LED used as indirect light is normally set to a value substantially equal to the 18th luminance designation value in the case where the pallet value is set to the maximum pallet value (100%). Because, the light guide plate lowest luminance can visually recognize the state in which the emission by indirect light is set.

  In addition, the programmer who designs the light emission mode individually sets the brightness of the various decoration substrates provided on the game board side and the various decoration substrates provided on the door frame side separately from the LEDs used as direct light. Even if it does not set, the flow of the effect by the light emission aspect of the various LEDs mounted on the various decoration substrates provided on the game board side and the various decoration substrates provided on the door frame side by setting the light emission aspect according to the flow of the effect After setting the palette value to a small palette value (for example, 50%) usually for a particular decoration substrate that is too dazzled (or a slightly darker luminance can exhibit more rendering effects), By setting the normal pallet value to the maximum pallet value (100%) for the decorative substrate, the balance of the overall light emission aspect can be changed very easily. That is, the player (or a clerk in the game hall or the like) operates the operation effect operation unit 301 (the rotation operation unit 302, the pressing operation unit 303) which can be operated to obtain the maximum brightness from the first brightness designated value 31st Even if one luminance designation value ranging up to the luminance designation value is set, a small pallet value (for example, 50%) corresponding to one luminance designation value is set for a specific decoration substrate. For the other decorative substrates, one luminance specification value and the corresponding maximum pallet value (100%) are set respectively, so that the relationship between the light emission modes set mutually (bright or dark) It is possible to adjust the brightness extremely easily without breaking the relationship.

  Furthermore, although the indirect light by the light guide plate is difficult to adjust the luminance as compared to the direct light, it is different from the normal pallet value for the LED used as the indirect light (that is, a special pallet value different from the ordinary pallet value) The brightness can be set by the Thus, the luminance of the LED used as indirect light is controlled by the special pallet value, and the luminance of the LED used as direct light is normally managed by the pallet value, so the LED used as indirect light And the brightness of the LED used as direct light can be easily adjusted.

  Incidentally, conventionally, a gaming machine has been proposed in which a light emitting means is provided on a rendering member provided on a game board and light emission decoration can be performed using light of the light emitting means as direct light (e.g. (Paragraphs [0021], FIG. 2 and FIG. 5)). However, when the light of the light emitting means provided in the effect member is used as indirect light, the light used in the indirect light is darker than in the case where the light of the light emitting means provided in the effect member is used as direct light. There has been a problem that it is difficult to adjust the brightness of the means and the light emitting means used as direct light.

[15. Game content]
The game contents of the above-described pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 131 and 132. In the pachinko machine 1 described above, the player rotates the handle 182 of the handle unit 180 disposed at the lower right front corner of the front face of the door frame 3 to input the striking force adjustment, whereby the upper tray 201 of the tray unit 200 is input. The stored game ball B is driven into the upper part in the game area 5a through the discharge passage portion 1012 by the discharge rail 544 and the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 in the game board 5, and the game by the game ball B is It is started. The game ball B thrown into the upper part in the game area 5a is either the first game area 5a1 which is the left side of the center member 2500 or the right side of the center member 2500 through the communication passage 5a4 depending on the hitting strength. Any one of the second game areas 5a2 is made to flow down. In addition, the hitting strength of the game ball B can be adjusted by the amount of rotation of the handle 182, and can be hit more strongly as it is rotated in the clockwise direction, and a maximum of 100 game balls B in one minute continuously. That is, the game ball B can be hit at intervals of 0.6 seconds.

  In the first to third gaming areas 5a1, 5a2 and 5a3 of the gaming area 5a, a plurality of obstacle nails 2007 are implanted in the front of the gaming panel 1100 (base panel 1110) with a predetermined gauge arrangement at appropriate positions, While the game ball B is in contact with the obstacle nail 2007, the flow-down speed of the game ball B is suppressed, and various movements are imparted to the game ball B. Further, in the game area 5a, in addition to the obstacle nail 2007, a windmill 2008 which is rotated by the contact of the game ball B is provided at a suitable position.

[15-1. Driving into the first game area]
The game ball B is fired at a predetermined firing force to the upper portion of the center member 2500 (the firing force of the strength in which the game ball B jumps over the upper end of the inner rail 1002 and does not reach the communication passage 5a4). By rolling leftward from the step portion 832a of the enclosure frame 832, it flows from the first game area 5a1 to the third game area 5a3 while being in contact with the plurality of obstacle nails 2007. Then, when the gaming balls B flowing down the first gaming area 5a1 enter the warp entrance 2501 opened on the outer peripheral surface of the enclosure frame 832 of the center member 2500, the warpage 2502 is supplied to the stage shelf 2503.

  The game balls B supplied to the stage shelf 2503 roll on the stage shelf 2503 and move back and forth, and either from the top in the middle in the left-right direction or from the valleys on both the left and right sides of the top It is released forward. When the gaming ball B is released into the third gaming area 5a3 from the central top of the stage shelf 2503, the top is positioned immediately above the first starting opening 2002, so the first starting opening 2002 with high probability Be accepted by When the game ball B is received in the first starting opening 2002, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls B are paid out to the upper tray 201 from the payout device 580 through the main control board 1310X and the payout control board 633. Be done.

  When the gaming balls B rolling on the stage shelf 2503 are discharged from the left and right valleys of the top portion into the third gaming area 5a 3, they flow down toward the starting opening unit 2100. The game balls B released from the stage shelf 2503 of the center member 2500 into the third game area 5a3 may be received by the first starting opening 2002, the general winning opening 2001, and the like.

  Also, when the game ball B flowing down the first game area 5a1 does not enter the warp entrance 2501, it is moved to the center side in the left-right direction by the side unit 2200, and the general winning opening 2001 of the side unit 2200 or the starting opening It may be accepted by the first starting port 2002 of the unit 2100, the general winning port 2001, and the like. Then, when the game ball B is received in the general winning opening 2001, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls B are paid out to the upper tray 201 from the payout device 580 through the main control board 1310X and the payout control board 633. Be done.

[15-2. Winning to the first opening, lottery of special lottery results]
In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the gaming ball B is received in the first starting opening 2002 (the second starting opening 2004 is also the same), an advantageous gaming state (for example, “ A lottery of special lottery results is generated to generate "big hit", "medium hit", "small hit", "per probability change (certain variation)", "per time reduction (short) time", and a special lottery that has been drawn The result is suggested to the player over a predetermined time (for example, 0.1 to 360 seconds, also referred to as a special fluctuation time) Note that a special lottery is drawn because the game ball B is received in the first starting opening 2002. As a result, "loss", "small hit", "2R big hit", "5R big hit", "15R big hit", "per probability change (probability change) per", "time reduction (time reduction) per", "probability change per time short per hit "," There is no chance to change time, "etc. .

  If the special lottery result (first special lottery result and second special lottery result) drawn by the reception of the game ball B to the first starting opening 2002 is a special lottery result that generates an advantageous gaming state, After the lapse of time, the special winning opening 2005 can receive the game ball B in a predetermined opening / closing pattern. In order to enter the game ball B into the big winning opening 2005, it is necessary to hit the game ball B into the second game area 5a2, and therefore, in this stage, hit the second game area 5a2 (so-called "right-handed") ) Are guided by voice announcements or images etc. In this embodiment, it is referred to, for example, “right-handed left route” or “right-handed right route” as to which of the emitting parts 848a, 848b should be aimed at. You will be specifically guided. This is because the ball entry probability to the first receiving port 2006 and the second receiving port differs depending on from which release portion 848a, 848b the game ball B is released to the second game area 5a2. In addition, the driving to the second game area 5a2 will be described later.

  When the game ball B is received in the big winning hole 2005 when the big winning hole 2005 is open, a predetermined number (for example, 10 or 13) from the payout device 580 by the main control substrate 1310X and the payout control substrate 633 Game balls B are paid out to the upper tray 201. Therefore, when the large winning opening 2005 can receive the gaming ball B, by causing the large winning opening 2005 to receive the gaming ball B, many gaming balls B can be paid out, and the player can be entertained. it can.

  When the special lottery result is "small hit", the big winning opening 2005 becomes an open state where it can receive the game ball B for a predetermined short time (for example, between 0.2 seconds and 0.6 seconds). The opening and closing pattern to be closed from is repeated several times (for example, twice). On the other hand, if the special lottery result is "big hit", a predetermined time (for example, about 30 seconds) elapses after the big winning opening 2005 becomes open capable of receiving the game ball B, or to the big winning opening 2005 Opening / closing pattern (one opening / closing pattern is referred to as one round) which makes the game ball B in an unacceptable closed state when any condition of reception of a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls B is satisfied. Are repeated a predetermined number of times (predetermined number of rounds). For example, "2R big hit" is repeated for two rounds, "5R big hit" for 5 rounds, and "15R big hit" for 15 rounds to generate an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player.

  In the "big hit", after the end of the big hit game, change the probability that "special hit" such as "big hit" will be drawn ("perhaps"), or change the display time of the effect image that suggests the special lottery result There is a hit that you do ("time hit").

  In this embodiment, the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening 2002 are until the special drawing result drawn from the start of the special drawing is suggested by the reception of the game ball B to the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening 2004. Since the suggestion of the special lottery result can not be started when the game ball B is accepted in the second starting port 2004, the start of the suggestion of the special lottery result is suspended until the suggestion of the special lottery result drawn earlier is completed. Be done. The number of pending special lottery results pending is limited to four for each of the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening 2004, and for more than that, the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening Even if the game ball B is accepted in 2004, the special lottery result is discarded without being suspended. Thereby, the increase in the burden on the game hall side is suppressed by the accumulation of the suspension.

  The suggestion of the special lottery result is performed by the function display unit 1400 and the effect display device 1600. The function display unit 1400 is directly controlled by the main control board 1310X to suggest a special lottery result. The suggestion of the special lottery result in the function display unit 1400 causes the plurality of LEDs to blink for a predetermined time by repeatedly turning on and off, and thereafter suggests the special lottery result by the combination of the lit LEDs.

  On the other hand, in the effect display device 1600, based on the control signal from the main control board 1310X, it is indirectly controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 and suggestion of a special lottery result is performed as an effect image. The effect image that suggests the special lottery result in the effect display device 1600 is a pattern row in which each pattern row is fluctuated and variably displayed in a state where three pattern rows consisting of a plurality of patterns are displayed side by side in the horizontal direction. Is sequentially displayed, and each pattern row is stopped and displayed so that the patterns of the three pattern rows displayed in the stop pattern become a combination corresponding to the special lottery result. If the special lottery result is other than "losing", after the three pattern rows are stopped and the respective symbols are stopped and displayed, a finalized image indicating the special lottery result is displayed on the effect display device 1600, and the lottery is made. An advantageous gaming state (for example, a small hit game, a big hit game, etc.) corresponding to the special lottery result is generated.

  In addition, the time which suggests the special lottery result in the function display unit 1400 (flashing time of LED (variation time)) and the time which suggests the special lottery result in the effect display device 1600 (the pattern row fluctuates and the finalized image is The time until it is displayed is different, and the function display unit 1400 is set to a longer time.

  In addition to the display of the effect image for suggesting the special lottery result by the effect display device 1600, the effect operation in the effect operation unit 300 in the door frame 3 in the periphery control board 1510 according to the drawn special lottery result. It is possible to perform a player participation type effect for operating the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 of the unit 301. In the player participation type effect, the rotation operation unit 302 can be rotated or vibrated by the operation ring drive motor 342, the rotation operation can be assisted, or the rotation operation can be inhibited. The pressing operation unit 303 can be raised and made conspicuous by 367, and the player participation type effect can be enjoyed by the operation of the effect operation unit 301.

  In addition, in the peripheral control board 1510, a light emission effect is provided by appropriately using each decoration board provided in the door frame 3, each decoration board provided in the game board 5, the front effect unit 2600, the back effect unit 3100, etc. It is possible to perform movable effects and the like, and it is possible to entertain the player also by various effects, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's interest in the game.

  Furthermore, in the player control type player operating the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 on the peripheral control substrate 1510, when the operation to be operated by the player is mistaken or not performed, the correct operation is performed. Inform the player of that. Specifically, for example, when the pressing operation on the center pressing operation unit 303a is requested, the outer periphery pressing operation unit 303b is pressed or the rotation operation unit 302 is rotated, the vibration speaker 354 vibrates or the like. The effect display device 1600 displays that effect.

[15-3. Driving into the second game area (right-handed)]
The game ball B fired with a specific launch force (a launch force of strength exceeding the first game area 5a1) to the upper part of the center member 2500 is a tapered corner of the step portion 832a of the enclosure 832 It rides on the upper surface at the back of the portion 832b or rolls in contact with the inner surface of the outer rail 1001 by centrifugal force and moves to the back of the communication passage 5a4. When the game ball B rides on the upper surface behind the tapered corner portion 832b of the step portion 832a of the enclosure frame 832, it rolls on the upper surface of the enclosure frame 832 of the center member 2500 and enters the opening 848bH of the release portion 848b Or, even if the game ball B rolling while contacting the inner surface of the outer rail 1001 is stalled and dropped in front of the opening 848bH of the release portion 848b, the release portion rolls over the upper surface of the enclosure 832 of the center member 2500 as it is It enters the opening 848bH of 848b. As shown in FIG. 132, the gaming ball B that has entered the opening 848bH of the discharge part 848b is discharged down the inside of the discharge part 848b to the left portion 5a2b of the second game area 5a2. The game ball B released to the left portion 5a 2b has a small ball entry probability to enter the first receiving port 2006 as described above, and a probability of entering the second port or passing through the gate portion 2003 is increased. It is set as such, and winning in the big winning opening 2005 is also relatively easy.

  On the other hand, most of the gaming balls B that have rolled while coming into contact with the inner surface of the outer rail 1001 by centrifugal force and collide with the stoppers 1006 enter the openings 848aH of the discharger 848a. As shown in FIG. 132, the game ball B that has entered the opening 848aH of the discharge part 848a is discharged down the inside of the discharge part 848a to the right place 5a2a of the second game area 5a2. As described above, the gaming ball B released to the right portion 5a2a has a probability of entering the first receiving port 2006 greater than the probability of entering the second receiving port or passing through the gate portion 2003. It is set and can enter the first inlet 2006 early and can be treated in the same way as the out ball.

  Therefore, in the gauge configuration shown in FIGS. 131 and 132, the handle 182 is adjusted to be slightly weaker than the strongest level so that the game ball B tries to enter the release portion 848b from the communication passage portion 5a4, and so the second game area 5a2 It is possible to efficiently and safely reach the big winning opening 2005 through the left portion 5a2b of.

  It should be noted that, when the game ball B that has been hit to the right passes through the gate section 2003, a normal lottery is performed on the main control board 1310X, and the second lottery opening is closed when the lottery result is “normal hit”. The state of 2004 is open for a predetermined time (for example, 0.3 to 10 seconds), and the game ball B can be received in the second start port 2004. Then, when the game ball B is received in the second start port 2004, a predetermined number (for example, four) of game balls B from the payout device 580 via the main control board 1310 X and the payout control board 633 are placed on the upper tray 201. Be paid out.

  In this embodiment, in the normal lottery performed by the game ball B passing through the gate portion 2003, a certain amount of time is set from the start of the normal lottery to the suggestion of the normal lottery result (for example, 0. 0. 01 to 60 seconds, also commonly referred to as fluctuation time). The suggestion of the normal lottery result is displayed on the function display unit 1400 of the game board 5. The second start port 2004 normally opens after the fluctuation time has elapsed. As the normal fluctuation time is shorter, the game ball B which has drawn the “normal hit” in the gate section 2003 is accepted by the second start port 2004.

  If the game ball B passes through the gate unit 2003 during the period after the game ball B passes through the gate unit 2003 and the normal lottery result is suggested, the suggestion of the normal lottery result can not be started, The start of the suggestion of the normal lottery result is held until the suggestion of the previous ordinary lottery result is finished. In addition, the number of reserved normal lottery results has an upper limit of up to four, and more than that, even if the game ball B passes through the gate portion 2003, it is discarded without being suspended. Thereby, the increase in the burden on the game hall side is suppressed by the accumulation of the suspension.

[16. Various control processing of main control board]
Next, various control processes performed by the main control board 1310X shown in FIG. 151 according to the progress of the game of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 175 is a flow chart showing an example of the main control side power on process, FIG. 176 is a flow chart showing the continuation of the main control side power on process of FIG. 175, and FIG. FIG. 178 is a flowchart showing an example of the setting change process, FIG. 179 is a flowchart showing an example of the setting value confirmation display process, and FIG. 180 is a flowchart showing an example of the error display process. First, various random numbers used for game control will be described, and then the operation of the initial value update type counter, main control side power on processing, main control side timer interrupt processing, setting change processing, setting value confirmation display processing, error The display process will be described.

[16-1. Various random numbers]
As random numbers used for game control, a big hit judgment random number for use in deciding whether or not to generate a big hit gaming state, and whether or not reach is generated when a big hit gaming state is not generated A random number for reach determination for use in determination, and a variable display for use in determining a variable display pattern of a special symbol variably displayed by the first special symbol display 1404 and the second special symbol display 1406 of the function display unit 1400 A random number for pattern and a big hit random number for use in determining a big hit symbol derived and displayed by the first special symbol display 1404 and the second special symbol display 1406 of the function display unit 1400 when generating a big hit gaming state And the random number for determining the initial value of the jackpot symbol for use in determining the initial value of the random number for this jackpot symbol, the small hit game state A random number for a small hit symbol for use in determining a small hit symbol derived and displayed by the first special symbol display 1404 and the second special symbol display 1406 of the function display unit 1400 when making the display live, this small hit random number A random number for determining an initial value for small hitting symbols, etc., to be used for determining an initial value of is prepared. Also, in addition to these random numbers, a random number per standard symbol determination used for determining whether to open or close the movable piece that allows the second starting port 2004 to receive the gaming ball, and this standard symbol per round determination The random number for determining the initial value per normal symbol for use in determining the initial value of the random number for random and the random number for determining the variation display pattern of the normal symbol variably displayed on the normal symbol display 1402 of the function display unit 1400 A random number etc. for the normal symbol variation display pattern is prepared.

  Among various random numbers used for such game control, while the jackpot determination random number is updated by hardware, other various random numbers are updated by software.

  For example, the jackpot determination random number is directly updated by hardware by a main control built-in hard random number circuit built in the main control MPU 1310a. When the main control MPU 1310 a is reset, the main control built-in hard random number circuit makes high speed presetting based on a clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310 a, using one value in a predetermined numerical range as an initial value. After extracting other values within the defined numerical range one after another and extracting all the values within the predetermined numerical range, one value within the predetermined numerical range is extracted again, and the main control Based on the clock signal input to the MPU 1310a, other values within a predetermined numerical range are extracted one after another at high speed. The main control built-in hard random number circuit repeatedly performs such high-speed lottery, and the main control MPU 1310a obtains a value extracted from the main control built-in hard random number circuit at the time of obtaining a value from the main control built-in hard random number circuit It is supposed to be set as.

  On the other hand, the counter for updating the random number per pattern normally is updated within a predetermined fixed numerical range from the minimum value to the maximum value, and the range from the minimum value to the maximum value will be described later Each time the main control timer interrupt process is performed, the value is incremented by one to count up. The counter counts up from the random value for determining the initial value per symbol normally to the maximum value, and then counts up from the minimum value toward the random number for determining the initial value per symbol for normal. When the counter finishes counting up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the random number per symbol normal determination, the random number for determining the initial value per normal symbol is updated. Such a method of updating the counter is called "initial value update type counter". The random number for determining the initial value per normal symbol can be obtained by executing the initial value lottery processing which randomly selects one value from the fixed numerical range of the counter for updating the random number for determining normal per symbol normally. .

  In the present embodiment, the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU 1310a shown in FIG. 14 in the processing when the main control side power supply is turned on when the RAM clear switch 1310f of the main control board 1310X is turned on The value (sum value) of the checksum obtained by calculating the sum of the various information stored in the unit as a numerical value and the value of the checksum stored in the main control side power-off process (during power-off) When the main control built-in RAM is cleared except for a specific area, such as when it does not match (Sum value), the main control MPU 1310a has a built-in random number for determining the initial value per normal symbol. Fixed number range of the counter which extracts the ID code from the non-volatile RAM and updates the random number for determination per normal pattern based on the extracted ID code Et always performs initial value derivation process of deriving the same fixed value, a fixed value this derivation has a mechanism to be set. That is, the random number for determining the initial value per symbol normally is designed to always overwrite and update the same fixed value derived based on the ID code by execution of the initial value derivation process. As described above, the value set for the random number for determining the initial value per symbol normally is derived using the ID code, and the non-volatile RAM incorporated in the main control MPU 1310 a by the manufacturer that manufactured the main control MPU 1310 a The first security measure that the ID code can not be rewritten even if the external device is stored if the ID code is stored in the ID code, and the initial value derivation process when clearing except the specific area among all the areas of the main control internal RAM A second security measure that derives the same fixed value based on the ID code by execution and a two-step security measure by the second security measure are prevented from being analyzed.

  Here, an advantage will be described in which the ID code is taken out from the non-volatile RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a, and this taken out ID code is used as a random number for determining the initial value per ordinary symbol. For example, a person who intends to illegally acquire a game ball to be paid out as a prize ball somehow acquires the game board 5 and disassembles it, and an ID code stored in advance in a non-volatile RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a Even if it is acquired illegally and the timing when the value of the counter for updating the random number per symbol normal determination and the judgment value per regular symbol coincide can be grasped, the ID code is unique for identifying the individual Since the code is attached, it is completely different from the ID code stored in advance in the non-volatile RAM built in the main control MPU 1310 a ′ provided in the other game board 5 ′. That is, in the other game boards 5 ′, the timing at which the value of the counter for updating the random number per normal symbol judgment and the normal symbol per-coincidence value match is completely different from that of the acquired game board 5. In other words, the ID code obtained by disassembling and analyzing the obtained game board 5 was completely disassembled and analyzed because it is completely useless in other game boards 5 ', that is, other pachinko machines 1'. Even if a momentary stop is generated at predetermined intervals obtained and the gaming ball is allowed to pass through the gate section 2003 of the gate unit 2300 at the predetermined intervals, the movable piece is opened and closed to the second starting opening 2004 Can not generate a gaming state that can be accepted.

[16-2. Main control side power on process]
First, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the main control MPU 1310 a is configured to set a stack pointer at a predetermined address as a default. This stack pointer indicates, for example, an address stacked on the stack to temporarily store the contents of the storage element (register) in use, or the return address of this routine when the subroutine is ended and returned to this routine. It indicates the address stacked on the stack for temporary storage, and the stack pointer advances each time the stack is stacked.

  Under control of the main control MPU 1310a, as shown in FIG. 175 and FIG. 176, processing at the time of main control side power on is performed. When the main control side power-on process is started, the main control MPU 1310a sets the RAM access permission (step S10). By setting the RAM access permission, the main control built-in RAM can be updated.

  Following step S10, the main control MPU 1310a performs a power failure clear process (step S12). In the power failure clear process, a wait timer process is performed to determine whether a power failure notice signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310 e is input. The voltage does not rise immediately between the time the power is turned on and the predetermined voltage. On the other hand, when a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs (a phenomenon in which the supply of power is suspended), the voltage drops and becomes smaller than the power failure warning voltage, a power failure notification signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e as a power failure notification. Similarly, when the voltage becomes lower than the power failure notification voltage during the period from the power-on to the predetermined voltage, a power failure notification signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310 e. Therefore, the wait timer process is a process for waiting until the voltage becomes higher than the power failure warning voltage and becomes stable after the power is turned on. In the present embodiment, 200 milliseconds (ms) is set as the waiting time (wait timer). It is done.

  Following step S12, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether or not the RAM clear switch 1310f is operated (step S14). In this determination, the main control MPU 1310a determines that the RAM clear is to be performed when the logic of the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the RAM clear switch 1310f is HI, and determines that the RAM clear switch 1310f is not operated. When the logic of the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the RAM clear switch 1310 f is LOW, it is determined that the RAM clear is to be performed, and it is determined that the RAM clear switch 1310 f is operated. In addition, since it is a very short time within the period from the start of the main control side power-on process which is this routine to the determination in step S14, actually, the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f is pressed. The operator turns on the power of the pachinko machine 1 while pressing the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310 f.

  When the main control MPU 1310a determines that the RAM clear switch 1310f is operated in the determination of step S14, it sets the value 1 to the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG (step S16A). On the other hand, when determining in step S14 that the main control MPU 1310a determines that the RAM clear switch 1310f is not operated, the main control MPU 1310a sets the value 0 to the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG (step S16B). That is, the main control MPU 1310a is in a state capable of executing the RAM clear process of initializing the RAM (that is, the main control built-in RAM) built in the main control MPU 1310a for a predetermined time after power-on. The RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG described above is stored in a predetermined area of the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU 1310a (an area excluding the specific area among all areas of the main control built-in RAM). It is a flag indicating whether or not various information including game information related to a game such as a prize ball, and other information (for example, information indicating the value of the main prize ball number information output determination counter, etc.) is deleted. The value is set to 1 when erasing the image, and to 0 when not erasing the various information. The value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG set in step S16A and step S16B is stored in a general purpose storage element (general purpose register) of the main control MPU 1310a.

  Subsequently to step S16A or step S16B, it is determined whether there is an opening operation of the body frame 4 and an ON operation of the setting key (step S18). In this determination, the main control MPU 1310a inserts the setting key into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting switch 1311a and a detection signal from the body frame opening switch 4b for detecting the opening of the body frame 4 to the outer frame 2. The setting switch 1311a is set by the first ON operation when the setting key cylinder is turned 60 degrees clockwise from the initial position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turns off the setting switch 1311a). The key is turned on, and this is performed based on the signal of the setting key ON from the setting switch 1311a. The main control MPU 1310a determines that the main body frame 4 is open with respect to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal from the main body frame open switch 4b, and the setting switch 1311a is turned on by the setting key ON signal. While it is determined that the predetermined set value change permission condition is established based on the determination that the main frame 4 is not opened to the outer frame 2 by the detection signal from the main frame opening switch 4b By determining and / or determining that the setting switch 1311a is not turned on by the signal of the setting key ON, it is determined that a predetermined setting value change permission condition is not satisfied.

  If it is determined in step S18 that the main control MPU 1310a determines that the predetermined setting value change permission condition is satisfied, the main control MPU 1310a sets the value 1 to the setting change permission flag CS-FLG (step S20A). On the other hand, when it is determined in step S18 that the main control MPU 1310a does not satisfy the predetermined setting value change permission condition, the main control MPU 1310a sets the value 0 to the setting change permission flag CS-FLG (step S20B). The setting change permission flag CS-FLG is the current setting value (setting key cylinder of the setting switch 1311a) stored in a predetermined area of the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU 1310a (a setting value exclusive area in a specific area described later). It is a flag indicating whether or not to permit the setting change of the setting value 1 to the setting value 6 at the time when the first ON operation is performed, and the setting change of the setting value The value is set to 1 when permitting, and to 0 when not permitted to change settings of the set value. The value of the setting change permission flag CS-FLG set in step S20A and step S20B is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU 1310a.

  Following step S20A or step S20B, the main control MPU 1310a performs wait time standby processing (step S22). In this wait time waiting process, the system for performing the drawing control of the peripheral control board 1510 is waiting for activation (booting). In the present embodiment, 2.5 seconds (s) is set as a standby time (boot timer) until boot. The peripheral control board 1510 can receive various commands from the main control board 1310 X (main control MPU 1310 a) when the main control MPU 1310 a completes the wait time waiting process. The payout control board 633 completes the boot process in a short time as compared with the peripheral control board 1510 when the main control MPU 1310a completes the wait processing of the wait time, so the payout control board 633 is a main control board 1310 X Can receive various commands from).

  Following step S22, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether or not a power failure notice signal is input (step S24). As described above, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is shut off or a power failure or momentary stop occurs, a power failure notification signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e as a power failure notification when the voltage becomes lower than the power failure notification voltage. The determination in step S24 is performed based on the power failure advance signal. If it is determined in step S24 that the main control MPU 1310a determines that there is an input of the power failure advance signal, the main control MPU 1310 returns to the determination of step S24 again and repeats the determination of step S24 as long as the power failure notification signal continues to be input. A detailed description of the point that the determination of step S24 is performed subsequent to the wait time waiting process of step S22 will be described later.

  In the determination of step S24, when the main control MPU 1310a determines that there is no input of the power failure advance signal, the main control MPU 1310 determines whether the setting change permission flag CS-FLG has a value 0 (step S25). The setting change permission flag CS-FLG is set to a value 1 when permitting setting change of the setting value, and to a value 0 when not permitting changing the setting of the setting value.

  In the determination of step S25, the main control MPU 1310a determines that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG has a value of 0 when the setting change permission flag CS-FLG has a value of 0, ie, does not permit setting change of the setting value. It is determined (step S26). As described above, the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set to a value 1 when erasing various information, and a value 0 when not erasing various information. In the determination of step S26, when the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG has a value of 0, that is, when it is determined that the various information is not erased, the main control MPU 1310 calculates a checksum (step S28). This checksum is to calculate the sum of various information stored in the main control built-in RAM as a numerical value.

  Subsequent to step S28, the main control MPU 1310a calculates the value of the calculated checksum (sum value) with the value (sum value) of the checksum stored in the main control-side power failure process (during power failure) described later. It is determined whether there is a match (step S30). If the main control MPU 1310a determines in step S30 that they match, it determines whether the backup flag BK-FLG has a value of 1 (step S32). This backup flag BK-FLG stores game backup information such as various information, checksum value (sum value) and backup flag BK-FLG value in main control internal RAM in main control side power off processing described later It is a flag indicating whether or not it has been set, and is set to a value 1 when the main control side power-off process has ended normally, and a value 0 when the main control side power-off process has not ended normally. In the inspection step of the manufacturing line of the main control board 1310X, the calculation of the checksum in step S28 and the determination in step S30 when the power of the main control board 1310X is first turned on after manufacturing for inspection. Detailed explanation about, is mentioned below.

  If the main control MPU 1310a determines that the checksum values (sum values) do not match in the determination of step S30, or if the main control MPU 1310a determines that the backup flag BK-FLG is not the value 1 in the determination of step S32. When (the value is 0), that is, when it is determined that the main control side power-off process has not ended normally, error display processing is performed (step S33), and an infinite loop is entered. By this infinite loop, the state in which the error display process is finished is maintained, and the game can not be progressed at all, and the pachinko machine 1 is turned off and turned on again. In this error display process, the detailed description will be described later, but if it is determined that there is an abnormality in the contents of the main control built-in RAM, or if the main control side power-off process has not ended normally when the power is shut off If it is determined, it is determined that the content stored in the main control built-in RAM is abnormal (or it can not be relied upon), and an error display notifying that effect is performed. In the present embodiment, the main control MPU 1310a displays the letter E on the setting display 1310g as an error display.

  The pachinko machine 1 is powered off, the main frame 4 is opened to the outer frame 2, and the setting key cylinder is at the initial position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder for turning off the setting switch 1311a) By turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1 after turning it 60 degrees toward the direction and performing the first ON operation, the main control side power on process, which is the present routine, is started again. The main control MPU 1310a determines that the main body frame 4 is open with respect to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal from the main body frame open switch 4b in the determination of step S18 described above, and sets using the setting key ON signal By determining that the switch 1311a is turned on with the setting key, it is determined that the predetermined setting change permission condition is satisfied, and the value of the setting change permission flag CS-FLG is set to 1 in step S20A described above. In order to set, it is determined that the setting change permission flag CS-FLG has the value 1 in the determination of step S25 described above, that is, it is determined that setting change of the setting value is permitted, and setting change processing of step S37 described later Subsequently, in the process of step S38 described later, the specific area is excluded from the entire area of the main control built-in RAM. To release the RAM error by clearing has become possible to proceed a game (hereinafter referred to as "first RAM error release method").

  As a method different from the first RAM error canceling method, the power of the pachinko machine 1 is shut off, and the pachinko machine 1 is turned on while pressing the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310 f. The main control side power-on process, which is a routine, is started. The main control MPU 1310a determines that the RAM clear switch 1310f is operated in the determination in step S14 described above, and sets the value 1 to the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG in step S16A described above. In the determination of step S26, it is determined that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG has the value 1, that is, it is determined that various information is to be erased, and in the process of step S38 described later It is possible to cancel the RAM error and proceed with the game by clearing and removing (hereinafter referred to as "the second RAM error canceling method").

  Thus, in the present embodiment, when the main control MPU 1310a determines that the checksum values (sum values) do not match in the determination of step S30, or in the determination of step S32, the main control MPU 1310a If the backup flag BK-FLG is not 1 (value 0), that is, if it is determined that the main control side power-off process has not ended normally, an error display is performed in step S33 and the main control built-in RAM is displayed. When it is reported that there is an abnormality (or something that can not be trusted) in the contents stored in, two cancellation methods of the first RAM error cancellation method and the second RAM error cancellation method Can be done by As a result, when it is not necessary to change the setting of the setting value at all, it is possible to release the RAM error by performing the second RAM error canceling method by the RAM clear switch 1310 f.

  On the other hand, in the determination of step S32, when the backup flag BK-FLG has the value 1, that is, when it is determined that the main control side power-off process has ended normally, the main control MPU 1310a incorporates the main control as a power recovery time. A work area of the RAM is set (step S34). In this setting, power recovery information is read from a ROM (that is, main control built-in ROM) built in the main control MPU 1310a, and this power recovery time information is set in a work area of the main control built-in RAM. As a result, various information is read from the game backup information, and various commands corresponding to the various information are stored in a predetermined storage area of the main control built-in RAM. In addition, the main control MPU 1310a proceeds with the game based on the setting value stored in the setting value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM. Note that “power recovery” refers to the state where the power is turned on after the power is shut off, as well as the state where the power is restored after a power failure or a momentary interruption, illegal means (for example, a fraudster is in the hem of an arm) Also includes a state in which the main control MPU 1310 a itself is reset after the main control substrate 1310 X is irradiated with a high frequency from the hidden high frequency output device), and then restored.

  Following step S34, the main control MPU 1310a sets the backup flag BK-FLG to the value 0 (step S36). As a result, since various information, checksum values (sum values), etc. are changed by performing various processes thereafter, the main control side power-off process described later is normally ended and the backup flag BK- If the value 1 is not set in FLG, as will be described later, the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is cleared except for the specific area.

  On the other hand, in the determination of step S25, when the setting change permission flag CS-FLG is not 0 (is the value 1), that is, when setting change of the set value is permitted, the main control MPU 1310a performs the setting change process. Perform (step S37). In this setting change processing, although the detailed description will be described later, the pressing operation portion of the setting switching button 1311 b of the setting changing substrate 1310 Y is pressed based on the detection signal from the setting switching button 1311 b of the setting changing substrate 1310 Y Every time the setting value is changed and displayed on the setting display 1310g, the setting key cylinder of the setting switch 1311a is turned on from the first ON operation to the second ON operation, and the signal of the determination key ON from the setting switch 1311a On the basis of the above, the changed setting value is determined and stored in a predetermined area of the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a.

  When the main control MPU 1310a determines that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is not 0 (is 1) in the processing of step S37 or the determination of step S26, that is, when it is determined to delete various information, the main control internal RAM The specific area is cleared out of the entire area (step S38). Here, the main control MPU 1310a performs this by writing a value 0 to a predetermined area of the main control internal RAM (an area excluding the specific area among all the areas of the main control internal RAM). In this embodiment, the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG does not have a value of 0 (is a value of 1), that is, in addition to when it is determined to delete various information, the setting control process is always completed. The specific area of the entire area is cleared (a predetermined area of the main control internal RAM (an area excluding the specific area of the entire area of the main control internal RAM)) is cleared. Here, the "specific area" refers to an area dedicated to the setting value in which the setting value is stored, and counting of the number of balls collected by the out port 1008 provided in the game area 5a partitioned on the game board 5 And an area dedicated to out-of-sphere counting in which results (total number) are stored. The set value dedicated area stores a set value to be changed in setting change processing to be described later, and the out ball count dedicated area is a ball of game balls collected by the out port 1008 counted in a ball count processing to be described later. The count result (total number) of the number is stored.

  The main control MPU 1310a may read and set a predetermined value from the main control built-in ROM as an initial value. Also, when the logic of the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the RAM clear switch 1310 f instructs the RAM clear, the main control MPU 1310 a instructs to clear the various information, when the sum values do not match, or the main control side When the power-off process is not normally completed, the unique ID code stored in advance in the non-volatile RAM of the main control MPU 1310a is taken out, and the random symbol determination per normal symbol is updated based on the taken out ID code. The initial value derivation process is always performed to derive the same fixed value from the fixed numerical value range of the counter, and this fixed value is used to determine the initial value of the above-mentioned standard symbol determination random number for the initial pattern. Set to a decision random number.

  Following step S38, the main control MPU 1310a sets a work area of the main control built-in RAM as an initial setting (step S40). This setting is performed by reading out the initial information from the main control built-in ROM and setting the initial information in the work area of the main control built-in RAM. As a result, the game backup information is initialized, and the value of the main prize ball number information output determination counter is set (set) to the initial value of 0, for example. In addition, the main control MPU 1310a proceeds with the game based on the setting value stored in the setting value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM.

  Following step S36 or step S40, the main control MPU 1310a performs initial value setting and start setting of the main control built-in WDT (step S41). Here, a watchdog timer control register (hereinafter referred to as “the watchdog timer control register” which is incorporated in the main control MPU 1310 a to set an initial value to the main control built-in WDT which monitors whether the operation (system) of the main control MPU 1310 a is operating normally. The timer setting value is set in the WDT control register to start the main control built-in WDT and start timing until the main control MPU 1310 a is reset. When the main control built-in WDT is started, the clocking by the main control built-in WDT is started, and the watchdog timer clear register built in the main control MPU 1310a is started until the timed time reaches the time set by the timer set value. Hereinafter, when the timer clear setting value is not set in “WDT clear register”, the main control MPU 1310 a is forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT. On the other hand, when the main control built-in WDT is started and clocking is started, if the timer clear setting value is set in the WDT clear register before this clocked time reaches the time set by the timer setting value, The timing by the main control built-in WDT is cleared, and the timing is started again. As described above, the operation (system) of the main control MPU 1310a operates normally by repeatedly performing the process of clearing the time measurement by the main control built-in WDT until the time set by the timer setting value is reached and starting the time measurement again. Can be monitored.

  Following step S41, the main control MPU 1310a performs interrupt initialization (step S42). This setting is to set an interrupt cycle when the main control side timer interrupt process to be described later is performed. In this embodiment, it is set to 4 milliseconds (ms).

  Following step S42, the main control MPU 1310a performs serial communication initialization (step S44). Here, various serial input / output ports (for example, serial input / output ports (reception channel and transmission channel for the payout control board 633) and serial input / output ports for the peripheral control board 1510 (reception channel and transmission channel) incorporated in the main control MPU 1310a. In the transmission serial port prescaler corresponding to (1), setting of the communication speed and setting of presence / absence of parity etc. are performed, and in the transmission serial port control register, setting of initialization of the transmission circuit and setting of transmission permission are made.

  Following step S44, the main control MPU 1310a performs test signal output port initialization setting (step S46). Here, in the testing organization of the gaming machine, the test signal output port (not shown) for outputting various inspection information is initialized (set to OFF data output) etc. when the power is turned on.

  Following step S46, the main control MPU 1310a performs start setting of the main control built-in hard random number circuit (step S48). Here, among the various random numbers related to the game, the hard random number control register built in the main control MPU 1310 a for updating by the hardware the jackpot determination random number used for determining whether to generate the big hit gaming state The setting for latching and acquiring the random number is performed, and the activation of the main control built-in hard random number circuit is set in the hard random number setting register. When the main control built-in hard random number circuit is activated by these settings, other values within a predetermined numerical range are extracted one after another without overlapping at high speed based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a. Once all the values within the numerical range have been extracted, one value within the predetermined numerical range is extracted again, and the numerical range predetermined at high speed based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a. Extract one after another without duplicating other values inside. When the main control MPU 1310a acquires a random number (random number value) from the main control internal hard random number circuit, it outputs a latch signal to the main control internal hard random number circuit, and when the latch signal is input The random number (random number value) extracted by the random number circuit is acquired from a hard random number latch register built in the main control MPU 1310 a. The main control MPU 1310a sets the acquired random number value as a jackpot determination random number.

  Following step S48, the main control MPU 1310a performs reservation setting of a command to be transmitted when the power is turned on (step S50). Here, the power is turned on to indicate that the power is turned on (power recovery) based on the power recovery time information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34. The power-on state command, the power-on main control return destination command, and the power-on main prize ball number information output judgment counter notification command are created to be transmitted information as the transmission information storage area of the main control internal RAM Remember to In the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, various kinds of information are read from the game backup information and various commands corresponding to the various information are stored in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34. is there. In such a case, first, after the transmission of various commands according to the game information among various information is completed, the power on state command, the power on main control return destination command, and the power on main prize ball number information The output determination counter notification command is transmitted. These commands are transmitted in the main control timer interrupt process described later. A detailed description of the point at which reservation setting of the command to be transmitted when the power is turned on in step S50 will be described later.

  Following step S50, the main control MPU 1310a performs interrupt permission setting (step S52). As a result of this setting, a main control timer interrupt process to be described later is repeatedly performed at an interrupt cycle set in step S42, that is, every 4 ms.

  Following step S52, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether or not a power failure notice signal is input (step S54). When shutting down the power supply of pachinko machine 1 or when a power failure or momentary stoppage occurs, a power failure notification signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e to the main control MPU 1310a as a power failure notification when the voltage falls below the power failure notification voltage. Be done. The determination in step S54 is performed based on the power failure advance signal.

  In the determination of step S54, when the main control MPU 1310a determines that there is no input of the power failure notification signal, the main control MPU 1310 performs non-coincidence random number update processing (step S56). In this non-coincidence random number update process, the random number for reach determination, the random number for variation display pattern, the random number for big hit symbol initial value determination, the random number for small hit symbol initial value determination, etc. are updated. As described above, in the non-coincidence random number update process, the software updates random numbers that are not related to the collision judgment (big hit judgment). In addition, the random number for determining a normal symbol, the random number for determining an initial value for determining a normal symbol, the random number for determining a normal symbol variation pattern, and the like described above are also updated by the non-falling random number updating process.

  After step S56, the main control MPU 1310a returns to step S54 again, determines whether or not there is an input of the power failure notification signal, and if there is no input of the power failure notification signal, the non-falling random number update process is performed in step S56. The steps S54 to S56 are repeated. The process of steps S54 to S56 is referred to as "main control side main process".

  On the other hand, when determining in step S54 that the main control MPU 1310a determines that there has been an input of the power failure advance signal, the main control MPU 1310 performs interrupt prohibition setting (step S58). By this setting, the main control side timer interrupt process described later is not performed, the writing to the main control built-in RAM is prevented, and the rewriting of various information including the game information and other information described above is protected.

  Following step S58, the main control MPU 1310a starts outputting a power failure clear signal (step S60). Here, the same processing as the processing for starting output of the power failure clear signal in the power failure clear processing of step S12 is performed.

  Following step S60, the main control MPU 1310a stops, for example, the drive signals outputted to the various displays of the function display unit 1400, the start port solenoid 2404, the adder solenoid 2405, the base monitor 1310h and the like (step S62).

  Following step S62, the main control MPU 1310a calculates a checksum and stores the calculated value (step S64). This checksum is calculated by regarding the gaming information in the work area of the main control built-in RAM as a numerical value, excluding the storage area of the checksum value (sum value) and the backup flag BK-FLG described above.

  Following step S64, the main control MPU 1310a sets the backup flag BK-FLG to the value 1 (step S66). This completes the storage of game backup information.

  Following step S66, the main control MPU 1310a performs setting of RAM access prohibition (step S68). Since the main control internal RAM can not be accessed by the setting of the RAM access prohibition, updating of the contents of the main control internal RAM can be prevented.

  Following step S68, an infinite loop is entered. In this infinite loop, the timer clear set value is set in the WDT clear register built in the main control MPU 1310a with respect to the main control built-in WDT activated in step S41, and the time measurement by the main control built-in WDT is cleared and clocking starts again. As a result, the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT. Thereafter, the main control MPU 1310 a performs the main control side power-on process again. The process of step S58 to step S68 and the infinite loop are referred to as "main control side power-off process".

  As described above, when the main control MPU 1310 a is affected by electrical noise, the main control MPU 1310 a is forcibly reset by the built-in reset circuit. In this case, the main control MPU 1310a can not perform the determination of step S54 and can not perform the main control side power-off process. Therefore, when the main control MPU 1310a is subjected to a forced reset by the built-in reset circuit, the main control MPU 1310a is reset without executing the main control side power-off process, and executes the main control side power-on process again. . That is, since the main control side power-off process is not executed, the value (sum value) of the checksum in the main control-side power-off process based on immediately before the forced reset by the built-in reset circuit is not stored. When the power is shut off, the value (sum value) of the checksum stored when the main control side power-off process is executed, and the checksum calculated in step S28 when forced reset is performed by the built-in reset circuit and restarted The value (sum value) can not match, and a check sum (sum value) error occurs in the main control internal RAM without exception, and a specific area is excluded from the entire area of the main control internal RAM in the process of step S38. It will be completely erased (cleared).

  The pachinko machine 1 (main control MPU 1310a) is reset when a power failure or an instantaneous power failure occurs, and the main control side power-on process is performed when the power is restored thereafter.

  In step S30, it is checked whether the game backup information stored in the main control built-in RAM is normal or not, and in step S32, whether or not the main control side power-off process is ended normally. Is examining. As described above, by double checking the game backup information stored in the main control built-in RAM, it is checked whether the game backup information is stored by fraud or not.

  When the setting change permission flag CS-FLG is not 0 (value 1) in the determination of step S25, that is, when setting change of the set value is permitted, the setting change process of step S37 is performed. In the process of step S38, the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is completely erased (cleared) except for a specific area, and in the determination of step S26, the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is not 0 (value 1). When it is determined that the various information is to be erased, the process of step S38 erases (clears) completely except for the specific area out of the entire area of the main control built-in RAM. As described above, when the pressing operation unit is operated at the time of power recovery (precisely, when turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1 while pressing the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310 f), the setting value is changed and decided When the setting change that can be performed is performed (when the main control MPU 1310a performs the setting change process), the main control MPU 1310a always clears the predetermined area of the main control built-in RAM. This is, for example, when the operation of the game hall is finished when the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310 f is pressed, the pachinko machine 1 is in an advantageous state for the player (for example, probability fluctuation (probability fluctuation) If it is a hit, etc.), it is necessary to delete (clear) the above-mentioned game backup information by the start of the next business, so a clerk of a game hall clerk or the like should use RAM clear switch 1310f. It is necessary to turn on the power of the pachinko machine 1 while pressing the pressing operation unit of In addition, in the case where the setting value is determined to be changed, when the setting changing process is performed (even when the current setting value is maintained as a result, it is obtained by the setting value before the setting changing process is performed). It is necessary to erase (clear) game backup information including various information such as game information etc. from the main control built-in RAM As described above, the setting key is currently set in addition to the change of the setting value. Since it is an important key that allows confirmation of setting values, etc., possession of only a limited person, including the store manager of the game hall, is permitted and limited to 2 to 3. In this embodiment, the setting values Even if the change is not determined, that is, even if there is no setting key possessed by only a limited specific person, the clerk of the game hall clerk or the like needs to erase (clear) the game backup information. Clear switch 13 By performing the power-on of the pachinko machine 1 while the pressing portion is pressed in 0f, thereby making it possible to erase from the main control chip RAM game backup information (clear).

  Here, the point which performs determination of the presence or absence of the power failure alerting | reporting signal of step S24 following the wait time waiting | standby process of step S22 is demonstrated. First, with regard to the problem in the case where there is no determination of the presence or absence of the power failure notification signal in step S24, that is, after the wait time standby processing in step S22, the value of the RAM clear flag in step S26 is determined and the subsequent processing is advanced. Explain the problems in

  As described above, when a power failure or momentary stoppage occurs in the VDD terminal which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a and the power supply from the island facility of the game hall is cut off, the electrolytic capacitor MC2 shown in FIG. The charged charge is applied as direct current +5 V for about 7 milliseconds (ms) after occurrence of a power failure or a momentary stop. That is, even if the power from the island facility of the game hall is shut off due to a momentary power failure or a power failure, the island charged with the hardware of the electrolytic capacitor MC2 is applied as direct current +5 V to make the island of the game hall The main control side power-off process can be completed within a period of about 7 ms after the power supply from the facility is shut off. This is because when a player is playing a game, that is, while performing a main control side main process or a main control side timer interrupt process to be described later, a power failure or momentary stoppage occurs and an island facility of the game hall The main control side power-off process can be reliably completed when the power supply from the above is shut off.

  However, as an extremely rare phenomenon, in the wait time standby process of step S22 at the time of power recovery, the standby time until the system performing drawing control of the peripheral control board 1510 starts up (boots) (boot timer: in this embodiment) 2.5 seconds has been set), and if an instantaneous power failure or power failure occurs immediately before the standby time is reached, the hardware called electrolytic capacitor MC2 is connected to the VDD terminal which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a. Charge is charged as DC +5 V, but within a period of about 7 ms, interrupt initialization is performed in step S42, and then interrupt permission setting is performed in step S52. Even if the timer interrupt processing is performed and the contents of the main control internal RAM are updated, the main control side power It may become impossible to complete when processing main control side power-off during the process. For this reason, based on the contents of the main control built-in RAM, the value at which the checksum is calculated is not stored, and the main control side power-on process is started again at power recovery.

  Then, the main control side power-on process is started at the time of the current power recovery, and the wait time standby process at step S22 is completed without an instantaneous power failure or power failure, and then the main control built-in RAM is processed at step S28. If the value obtained by calculating the checksum based on the contents of and the value stored in the main control built-in RAM just before the momentary power failure or power failure occur in step S30, the checksum values should match. Instead, in step S38, all areas of the main control built-in RAM are cleared except for the specific area. In other words, the RAM clear switch 1310 f is operated by a staff such as a game hall at the time of power recovery, and it is forcibly stored in the main control built-in RAM even if there is no intention indication by a staff such as a game hall staff called RAM clear. There is a problem that the above-mentioned game backup information will be erased (cleared).

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, immediately after the wait time standby process of step S22, a process of determining whether or not a power failure advance signal is input is provided as step S24, and when the power failure advance signal is input, Returning to the determination of step S24 again, the determination of step S24 is repeatedly performed as long as the input of the power failure notification signal continues. Thus, the game can not be progressed. Although the value is set to the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG in step S16A or step S16B before performing the wait time waiting process of step S22, the value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is, as described above, mainly As stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the control MPU 1310a, the content (game information) of the main control built-in RAM is not changed at all even if the setting of RAM access permission is made in step S10.

  Thus, immediately after the wait time standby process of step S22, a process of determining whether or not the power failure notice signal is input is provided as step S24, and when the power failure notice signal is input (that is, step If it is determined by the determination in step S24 that the power to the pachinko machine 1 is shut off after waiting in the wait time standby process of S22), the process returns to the determination of step S24 again, as long as the power failure notification signal continues to be input, By repeatedly performing the determination of step S24, the game can not be progressed, and various information including game information and other information (for example, information indicating the value of the main prize ball number information output determination counter, etc.) Can be prevented from being updated, and no change occurs in the calculation result of the checksum. Thereby, when the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X is restarted, the main control MPU 1310a determines that the calculation result of the checksum in step S28 matches the calculated and stored value of the checksum in step S64. Therefore, the game information immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure, which is stored and held in the main control built-in RAM, is not initialized. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game information from being initialized immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure occurs at the time of power recovery.

  Further, immediately after the wait time standby process of step S22, a process of determining whether or not a power failure advance signal is input is provided as step S24, and when a power failure advance signal is not input (that is, step S22 When the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X is proceeding with the game, if it is determined by the determination in step S24 that the power to the pachinko machine 1 is not cut off after waiting in the wait time waiting process, pachinko machine Even if the power supply to 1 is shut off, the power supply from the electrolytic capacitor MC2 to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, causes the game to be played according to the progress of this game and other information Back-up for storing various information including information indicating the value of the information output determination counter) Since the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X can complete the main control side power-off process composed of the processes of step S58 to step S68 and the infinite loop, which are the loop processes, the main control MPU 1310a When the main control MPU 1310 a is restarted, the calculation result of the checksum in step S 28 coincides with the calculation result of the checksum in the backup processing (that is, the calculated and stored value of the checksum in step S 64). Since it is determined that the game information is present, the game information immediately before the momentary power failure or the power failure stored and held in the main control built-in RAM is not initialized. That is, the main control board 1310X can be activated by being restored to the game information immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure occurs.

  Further, immediately after the wait time waiting process of step S22, when it is determined in step S24 that a power failure notice signal is input, the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT, and the contents of the main control built-in RAM It is possible to start the main control side power-off process again without updating the key at all, but immediately after the wait time standby process of step S22, when it is determined in step S24 that the power failure notice signal is not input The main control side power-off process can be reliably completed within the "temporary power failure securing period" of about 7 ms by the hardware. That is, in the present embodiment, when the main control side power-on process is performed at the time of power recovery, a momentary power failure or power failure occurs and the power from the island facility of the game hall is cut off. The charge stored in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 is applied to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the MPU 1310a, as direct current +5 V for a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms) after a power failure or a momentary stoppage occurs. In the case where the main control side power-off process can not be completed within the “instant interruption or power supply securing period” of approximately 7 ms by the hardware of the electrolytic capacitor MC2, immediately after the wait time standby process of step S22. In step S24, it is determined whether or not the power failure notification signal is input. If the power failure notification signal is input, the determination in step S24 is performed. Returning again, as long as the remain input power failure warning signal, by repeating the determination of the step S24, so as not be able to perform the progress of a game in.

  Since the progress of the game can not be performed by such software, the step after the step S24 (specifically, the interruption initialization is performed in the step S42, and thereafter, the interruption permission is made in the step S52) Content of main control built-in RAM (game information and other information (for example, main prize ball number information output judgment) by blocking the progress to the control flow of setting and starting the main control side timer interrupt processing to be described later A mechanism was adopted in which it is possible to prevent various information (including information indicating the value of the counter value) from being updated. In this way, when a power failure or momentary stoppage occurs and the power supply from the island facility of the game hall is cut off, the contents of the main control built-in RAM (game information and other information (for example, main prize ball number information output determination To ensure that the main control side power-off process is completed and the contents of the main control built-in RAM (game information, and so on) By dividing the information into two parts, a part to be covered by hardware so that other information (for example, various information including information indicating the value of the main prize ball number information output determination counter, etc.) is not changed at all , The contents of the main control built-in RAM (gaming information and various information including other information (for example, information indicating the value of the main prize ball number information output determination counter, etc.)) are surely prevented from being changed So that the can.

  Next, the point will be described where reservation setting of a command to be transmitted when the power is turned on is performed in step S50. In step S50, as described above, based on the power recovery time information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34, the power is turned on (power recovery) To communicate, create a power on state command classified as power on, a power on main control return destination command, and a power on main notification ball number information output judgment counter notification command and send it as main information with built-in main control It is stored in the transmission information storage area of the RAM. The power-on main control return destination command is mainly composed of information instructing the driving state of the start port solenoid 2404 and information instructing the driving state of the attacker solenoid 2405. Here, first, the problem in the case where the power-on main control return destination command does not include the information for instructing the driving state of the start port solenoid 2404 and the information for instructing the driving state of the attacker solenoid 2405, that is, A problem will be described in the case where reservation setting of a command to be transmitted when power is turned on at the time of power on at the time of power on is not performed in step S50.

  For example, when the peripheral control board 1510 controls the display of the big hit gaming state screen (for example, a big hit gaming effect screen) in the display area of the effect display device 1600, the main control board 1310X drives the attacker solenoid 2405. When a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs when the special winning opening 2005 is opened by the opening / closing member and the power is restored after that, the main control board 1310 X performs main control in setting the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34 Based on the power recovery time information set in the work area of the built-in RAM, the game state immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure occurs is restored to start driving the attacker solenoid 2405, and the special winning opening 2005 opens and closes. It will shift to the state open from the state closed by the member.

  However, when a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs, the peripheral control substrate 1510 receives various commands from the main control substrate 1310X and recovers at the time of power recovery, so a momentary power failure or power failure occurs. Thereafter, when the power is restored, the peripheral control board 1510 can be restored based on the probability and the time saving state instructed by the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310X at the time of power recovery. However, when the main control board 1310X generates a big hit gaming state as a gaming state, a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs, and then when the power is restored, the peripheral control board 1510 receives the main power control board 1310X at the time of power recovery. Even if the screen can be displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 according to the probability and the time saving state based on the probability and the time saving state instructed by the power-on state command received from the big hit gaming state I can not show at all which round of. That is, for example, a game winning ball 1 enters a large winning opening 2005 and is detected by the large winning opening sensor 2403, and the large winning opening 1 count display command for conveying the number of gaming balls entering the large winning opening 2005 is a main control board Even if 1310X transmits to peripheral control board 1510 and peripheral control board 1510 receives, peripheral control board 1510 produces the ball number of the game ball that entered the big winning opening 2005 on the screen according to the probability and the time saving state. Although it can be displayed in the display area of the display device 1600, it can not be displayed at all which round of the jackpot gaming state (that is, how many rounds it is).

  In such a situation, when the main control board 1310 X finishes, for example, 4 rounds of the big hit gaming state (the fourth round), the driving of the attachment solenoid 2405 is stopped and the big winning opening 2005 is opened by the opening and closing member From the main control board 1310 X to the peripheral winning control board 1510 from the main control board 1310 X a large winning opening 1 closing display command instructing to shift to the closed state (that is, start closing the round between the big winning port 2005 of the attacker unit 2100). When the main control board 1310X starts the 5 round (5th round) of the big hit gaming state, it starts to drive the attachment solenoid 2405 and opens the state where the big winning opening 2005 is closed by the opening / closing member. To shift to the state of being To send a special winning opening open the fifth display command instructing the open start) of the command from the main control board 1310X to the peripheral control board 1510. Accordingly, the peripheral control board 1510 switches the screen of the start of the 5 rounds of the big hit gaming state from the screen according to the probability and the time saving state described above, and displays the screen in the display area of the effect display device 1600.

  In addition, for example, the game state where the game ball can be accepted to the second start port 2004 becomes a game state that informs the player that the game state is advantageous (for example, the player that the movable piece is open The main control board 1310 X drives the start port solenoid 2404 to open the movable piece and causes the second start port to open when the peripheral control board 1510 displays and controls the screen to be transmitted to the display area of the effect display device 1600. When a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs when the status 2004 is open, and then the power is restored, the main control board 1310X sets the work area of the main control internal RAM in step S34. Based on the power recovery time information set in the work area, the game state is restored to the game state immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure, thereby starting the driving of the starting opening solenoid 2404 and moving the movable piece And thus the transition to the state for closing the second start hole 2004 by closing operation.

  However, when a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs, the peripheral control substrate 1510 receives various commands from the main control substrate 1310X and recovers at the time of power recovery, so a momentary power failure or power failure occurs. Thereafter, when the power is restored, the peripheral control board 1510 can be restored based on the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310X at the time of power recovery. However, when the main control board 1310X is in the gaming state and the gaming ball is in the gaming state in which the gaming ball can be received to the second start port 2004 and the gaming state advantageous to the player is generated, a momentary stop or power failure occurs. When the power is restored after that, the peripheral control board 1510 displays the screen according to the probability and the time saving state based on the probability and the time saving state instructed by the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310X at the time of power recovery. Even if it is possible to display in the display area of the effect display device 1600 and return, it is a gaming state where the gaming ball can be accepted to the second start port 2004 and a gaming state advantageous to the player is realized. The peripheral control board 1510 can not display the screen to be transmitted on the display area of the effect display device 1600 at all. Therefore, the player sitting on the front of the pachinko machine is surprised that a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs, and the gaming ball receives the second starting port 2004 immediately before the momentary power failure or a power failure occurs at the time of power recovery. In some cases, it may be forgotten that it is a possible gaming state, and in such a case, the gaming state is restored to the second starting port 2004 as a gaming state at the time of power recovery. In spite of that, the screen for instructing a game in the display area of the effect display device 1600 at the time of power recovery (that is, the screen for instructing a game of entering a game ball into the second starting port 2004) is not displayed. There was also a problem that the player would not understand what kind of game they played.

  As described above, in the two examples described above, there has been a problem that the gaming state immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure can not be promptly returned after power recovery. In other words, the player sitting on the front of the pachinko machine misunderstands that the system of the pachinko machine appears to be in a frozen state, a so-called frozen state, and breaks down when a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs. There was a problem that.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the main control board 1310 X is powered on (including power recovery as well as power recovery, power failure occurs due to power failure or momentary power failure), the power on status command In order to transmit the power on main control return destination command to the peripheral control board 1510, the power on state command classified as power on in step S50, the power on main control return destination command, and the power on A main notification ball number information output judgment counter notification command is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. These commands are transmitted in the main control timer interrupt process described later.

  Thus, for example, in the above-described example, in the fourth round of the jackpot gaming state, the peripheral control board 1510 is based on the power-on state command and the power-on main control return destination command received from the main control board 1310X. When a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs, and then the power is restored, the main control board 1310X starts being driven by the attachment solenoid 2405 as a return destination of the main control board 1310, and the big winning opening 2005 is released from being closed by the opening / closing member. The peripheral control board 1510 can notify the peripheral control board 1510 that it should shift to the state, so the peripheral control board 1510 is a screen specifying that it is the fourth round of the big hit gaming state (that is, a screen showing how many rounds it is) Can not be displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600, but it is a jackpot gaming state and A screen to start driving the 2405 to indicate that the big winning opening 2005 is open by the opening and closing member (for example, "It is a big hit. The big winning opening is open. Enter the game ball in the big winning opening The game of “Please play the game so that the ball is played.” Is displayed on the display area of the effect display device 1600) to the player and the player who sits on the front of the pachinko machine has a big winning opening 2005 Can be instructed to enter a game ball into the game ball, and, for example, in the above-described example, the game state becomes an acceptable game state in which the game ball can be received to the second starting port 2004 and a game state advantageous to the player In this state, when a momentary power failure or power failure occurs, and then the power is restored, the start port solenoid 2404 starts driving to open the movable piece as the return destination of the main control board 1310X. Make a screen to indicate that the second start opening 2004 has been opened (for example, "The movable piece is open. Please play the game so that the game ball enters the second start opening ) Is displayed on the display area of the effect display device 1600 by the peripheral control board 1510 displaying a message of “.” To the player, and the player sitting on the front of the pachinko machine returns to the second starting port 2004 after power recovery. Can be instructed to enter a game.

  As a result, when a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs and the power is restored after that, the return destination of the peripheral control board 1510 can be finely instructed on the main control board 1310 X side. Therefore, the game state immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure can be promptly returned after power recovery. In other words, the player sitting on the front of the pachinko machine misunderstands that the system of the pachinko machine appears to be in a frozen state, a so-called frozen state, and breaks down when a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs. Can be prevented.

  Next, in the main control board inspection step, which is an inspection step of a manufacturing line of the main control board 1310X, when the main control board 1310X is first powered on after being manufactured for inspection, the checksum of step S28 The calculation and the determination of step S30 will be described. In the main control board inspection step, when the main control board 1310X is first powered on after being manufactured for inspection, a main composed of the processing of step S58 to step S68 which is the backup processing described above and an infinite loop Since the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X is not executing the control side power-off process at one time, even if the checksum based on the contents of the main control built-in RAM is calculated in step S28, In the comparison determination, there is no possibility that the values of the checksums will match, and it is always cleared except for a specific area out of the entire area of the main control built-in RAM in step S38.

  As a result, when the reservation setting of the command to be sent at the time of power on is performed in step S50, the power on state command classified as power on, power on main control return destination command, and power on main prize ball number information By creating an output judgment counter notification command and storing it as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control internal RAM, the power on status command, power on main control return destination command, and power on main prize ball Only three commands, ie, the number information output judgment counter notification command, are stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control internal RAM. Then, in the main control side timer interrupt process described later, these commands are first sent a power on status command, then a power on primary control return destination command is sent, and then the power on main notification ball number An information output determination counter notification command is to be transmitted. Using this, in the main control board inspection process, when the main control board 1310X is first powered on after being manufactured for inspection, the power on state command is given from the main control board 1310X as the first command. It will be sent to the inspection device of the main control board inspection process.

  By the way, in the power-on state command, the RAM clear switch 1310 f is operated when the power is turned on (in addition to power-on, it also includes power-on recovery due to power failure or momentary power failure). Information to instruct that when performing RAM clear and the above mentioned at power on (In addition to power on, it also includes power recovery when power failure occurs due to power failure or momentary power failure). Information indicating which state (probability and time saving state) to recover from among the low probability time saving state, high probability time saving state, low probability non-time saving state, and high probability non-time saving state, and model code of pachinko machine And information to be shown. Here, the problem in the case where the power-on state command does not include the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine will be described.

  When creating a so-called max type, middle type, sweet digital type as pachinko machine 1 (precisely, the main control board 1310X), the model code of the pachinko machine is for which copyright of the work, In addition to the game specification that the game specification is continued until the next big hit game state occurs when the game specification (for example, probability fluctuation occurs, the number of times of fluctuation of the special symbol is limited (for example, 30 times or 70 times) It is possible to specify whether it is a game specification (so-called ST machine etc.) or the like) in which probability fluctuations occur in the state of

  In the manufacturing line of the maker who manufactures the pachinko machine 1, when manufacturing the main control substrate 1310X, there are cases where the main control substrate 1310X for the copyright of a plurality of types of works coexist. Then, the worker of the production line is the master of the copyright of any work among the copyrights of a plurality of kinds of works (for example, the copyright of works such as movie A, movie B, drama C, movie D, cartoon E, and cartoon F). In order to manufacture the control board 1310X, it is not clear that the main control board 1310X is flowing to the manufacturing line, or the main control board for one copyright (for example, the copyright of the work of movie D) among copyrights of multiple types of works Although the main control board 1310X is flowing to the manufacturing line to manufacture 1310X, the main control board 1310X is used to manufacture the main control board 1310X for another copyright (for example, the copyright of the work of cartoon F) There are also misconceptions and misconceptions that flow to the manufacturing line.

  For this reason, when manufacturing the main control board 1310X in the manufacturing line of the maker that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, if the main control board 1310X for the copyright of a plurality of types of works is mixed, the worker of the manufacturing line It is not possible to confirm to which work copyright the manufactured main control board 1310X belongs, and which model type (max type, middle type, sweet digital type, etc.) for the same work copyright It is also impossible to confirm whether it is a type, and what game specifications (a game specification or a ST machine in which, when probability fluctuations occur, the state is continued until a next big hit gaming state occurs).

  Thereby, when manufacturing main control substrate 1310X in a manufacturing line of a manufacturer who manufactures pachinko machine 1, when main control substrate 1310X for copyrights of plural types of works is mixed, main control substrate for copyrights of plural types of works It will be sent to the game board assembly line for attaching the main control board 1310X to the game board 5 while 1310X is mixed. For this reason, a worker of the game board assembly line may attach the main control board 1310X, which does not correspond to the game board 5 to the copyright of the work, to the game board 5. As a result, there is a problem that the production efficiency of the game board 5 is reduced.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the main control board 1310X is powered on (including power recovery due to power failure due to power failure or momentary power failure, in addition to power on), the model code of the pachinko machine To transmit to the peripheral control board 1510 the power-on state command including the information indicating the power-on state in step S50, the power-on state command divided into the power-on, the power-on main control return destination command, and the power-on A main notification ball number information output judgment counter notification command is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. These commands are transmitted in the main control timer interrupt process described later.

  As a result, the operator of the manufacturing line of the manufacturer who manufactures the pachinko machine 1 turns on the main control board 1310 X in the main control board inspection step which is the inspection step of the manufacturing line, and the inspection apparatus becomes the main control board 1310 X Based on the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine that is included in the power-on state command received from the device, that is, the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine is configured. And the sweet digital type, the serial code for specifying which type, the copyright code for specifying the copyright of the work, and the game specification (for example, when probability fluctuation occurs, the next big hit game state is In addition to the game specification that the state is continued until it occurs, the probability change in the state that the number of times of the change of the special symbol is limited By looking at detailed model information displayed on the inspection monitor based on the game specification code for specifying the game specification (ST machine etc.) that It is possible to determine whether it is a product, and also to which model type (max type, middle type, or sweet digital type, which type) the copyright of the same work, and what kind of game It is also possible to determine whether it is a specification (a game specification or ST machine in which when probability change occurs, the state is continued until a next big hit gaming state occurs).

  As a result, when manufacturing the main control board 1310X in the manufacturing line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, even if the main control board 1310X for the copyright of multiple types of works coexists, the main control board inspection process of the manufacturing line The operator can visually distinguish the main control board 1310X for the copyright of the work by being able to accurately determine the model type of the main control board 1310X, the copyright of the work, and the game specifications by visually observing the inspection monitor. It can be sent to the game board assembly line. Then, the operator of the game board assembly line can securely attach the main control board 1310X corresponding to the game board 5 for the copyright of the work to the game board 5, and the main control board not compatible with the game board 5 for the copyright of the work It is possible to prevent a decrease in production efficiency of the game board 5 caused by an operation of attaching the 1310X to the game board 5. Therefore, it can contribute to the improvement of the production efficiency of the game board 5.

16-3. Main control timer interrupt processing]
Next, the main control timer interrupt process will be described. The main control timer interrupt process is repeatedly performed every interrupt cycle (4 ms in the present embodiment) set in the main control power-on process shown in FIGS.

  When the main control timer interrupt process is started, the main control MPU 1310a switches the register bank as shown in FIG. 177 (step S100). The general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU 1310a has two register banks including a first register bank and a second register bank. The first register bank is used in the main control main process in the main control side power-on process described above, while the second register bank is used in the main control timer interrupt process which is this routine. In step S100, in order to use the second register bank in the main control side timer interrupt process which is this routine, the first register bank used in the main control main process in the main control side power on process is selected from the first register bank Switch the register bank to the register tank of. In the present embodiment, when the main control timer interrupt process, which is this routine, is started, the process of saving each register to the stack is not necessary.

  Following step S100, the main control MPU 1310a performs timer subtraction processing (step S102). In this timer subtraction process, for example, the first special symbol display 1404 and the second special symbol display 1406 of the function display unit 1400 are lighted in accordance with the special symbol to be described later and the variable display pattern determined in the special electric character control process. In addition to the time when the normal symbol display 1402 of the function display unit 1400 lights up in accordance with the normal symbol and the normal symbol variation display pattern determined by the normal symbol and normal motor combination control processing described later, the main control board 1310X (main control MPU 1310a) The time such as the ACK signal input judgment time set as the judgment condition when judging whether or not the payer ACK signal notifying that the payout control board 633 has normally received the various commands transmitted by is judged as the judgment condition Manage. Specifically, when the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display pattern or the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern is 5 seconds, the timer interruption period is set to 4 ms, so the fluctuation time is subtracted by 4 ms each time this timer subtraction processing is performed. When the subtraction result becomes 0, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display pattern or the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern is accurately measured. It should be noted that, for those whose subtraction result has become the value 0, further subtraction is not performed in the timer subtraction process even if the next main routine is performed.

  In the present embodiment, the ACK signal input determination time is set to 100 ms. Each time the timer subtraction processing is performed, the ACK signal input determination time is reduced by 4 ms, and when the subtraction result becomes 0, the ACK signal input determination time is accurately counted. The various times and the ACK signal input determination time are stored as time management information in the time management information storage area of the main control built-in RAM.

  Following step S102, the main control MPU 1310a performs switch input processing (step S104). In this switch input process, various signals input to input terminals of various input ports of the main control MPU 1310a are read and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Specifically, for example, the main control MPU 1310 a detects a detection signal from the gate sensor 2401, a detection signal from the general winning opening sensor 3001, and a detection from the first starting opening sensor main side 3002 a constituting the first starting opening sensor 3002. Signal, detection signal from the first starting opening sensor slave side 3002 b constituting the first starting opening sensor 3002, detection signal from the second starting opening sensor 2402, detection signal from the special winning opening sensor 2403, first receiving sensor Detection signal from 2406, detection signal from magnetic sensor 3003, operation signal from RAM clear switch 1310f (RAM clear signal), detection signal from door frame opening switch 4a, detection signal from main frame opening switch 4b, setting switch A signal from 1311a, a signal from setting switching button 1311b, out-port left sensor 100 a payout ACK from the payout control board 633 which indicates that the payout control board 633 has normally received the detection signal from “a”, the detection signal from the out-port right sensor 1008 b, and the prize ball command transmitted in the prize ball control processing described later. The signals are read and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the main control internal RAM. Also, when the detection signal from the first starting opening sensor 3002 and the detection signal from the second starting opening sensor 2402 are read respectively, the starting opening winning command divided into the other corresponding to this is used as the transmission information in the main control built-in RAM. It stores in the transmission information storage area. That is, when there is a detection signal from the detection signal from the first starting opening sensor 3002, the corresponding starting opening winning command is stored as the transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, and the second start When there is a detection signal from the mouth sensor 2402, the corresponding starting mouth winning command is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM.

  In the present embodiment, when the switch input process is started in the state (including the case where the vacant terminal process is performed) being input to all the input terminals of the various input ports of the main control MPU 1310a. First, each reading is performed as a first reading, and after a predetermined time (for example, 10 μs) has elapsed, reading is performed again as a second reading. Then, the result of the second reading is compared with the result of the first reading. Among the comparison results, it is determined whether there is one that is the same result. If the result is not the same, the result is further read again as the third time, and the result of the third read is compared with the result of the second read. Among the comparison results, it is determined again whether or not there is the same result. If the result is not the same, it is read again as the fourth time, and the result of the fourth read is compared with the result of the third read. Among the comparison results, it is determined again whether or not there is the same result. The same result is treated as having no game ball entered or ignoring the input.

  As described above, in the switch input process, the states (including those subjected to the idle terminal process) input to all the input terminals of the various input ports of the main control MPU 1310a are repeated from the first time to the third time. Therefore, false reading due to the influence of chattering or noise can be avoided by performing two readings, ie, two readings to compare and two readings comparing to the second to fourth times. The detection signal from the gate sensor 2401, the detection signal from the general winning opening sensor 3001, the detection signal from the first starting opening sensor main side 3002a constituting the first starting opening sensor 3002, the first A detection signal from the first starting opening sensor slave side 3002 b constituting the starting opening sensor 3002, a detection signal from the second starting opening sensor 2402, a winning prize opening set A detection signal from the sensor 2403, a detection signal from the first receiving sensor 2406, a detection signal from the magnetic sensor 3003, an operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the RAM clear switch 1310f, a detection signal from the door frame open switch 4a; Detection signal from the main frame opening switch 4b, signal from the setting switch 1311a, signal from the setting switching button 1311b, detection signal from the out-port left sensor 1008a, detection signal from the out-port right sensor 1008b, prize sphere control described later It is possible to improve the reliability of the payer ACK signal from the payout control board 633 which indicates that the payout control board 633 has normally received the winning balls command transmitted in the process.

  Following step S104, the main control MPU 1310a performs an input terminal failure monitoring process (step S105). In this input terminal malfunction monitoring processing, among the input terminals of the various input ports of the main control MPU 1310a, the status of the terminal subjected to idle terminal processing is performed based on the information acquired in the switch input processing of step S104. Specifically, for example, since the input terminal PA7 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a is grounded to the ground (GND) as free terminal processing, the logic state is always LOW. Therefore, in the input terminal failure monitoring process, the information acquired in the switch input process in step S104 is whether the logical state of the input terminal subjected to the vacant terminal process among the input terminals of various input ports is LOW or not. Do based on When the main control MPU 1310a determines that the logic state of the input terminal subjected to the free terminal processing is not LOW, it is classified into a notification display notifying that a fault is occurring in the peripheral circuit of the main control MPU 1310a. The trouble command is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM.

  Subsequent to step S105, the main control MPU 1310a performs a true random number update process (step S106). In this success random number update process, the above-mentioned random number for big hit symbols and the random number for small hit symbols are updated. Moreover, in addition to these random numbers, random numbers for jackpot symbol initial value determination updated in the non-incident random number update process of step S56 in the main control side power-on process (main control side main process) shown in FIG. And the random number for the initial value decision for small hitting design is renewed. The random number for determining the initial value for the big hit symbol and the random number for determining the initial value for the small hit symbol are further improved in the main control side main processing and the main control side timer interrupt processing by being updated in randomness. . On the other hand, since the big hit symbol random number and the small hit symbol random number are random numbers involved in the hit determination (big hit determination), each counter counts up only when the hit random number update processing is performed. In addition, the random number per normal symbol determination described above and the random number per normal symbol determination initial value determination random number are also updated by this success random number update processing.

  For example, as described above, the counter for updating the random number per pattern determination is an initial value updating type counter, and is updated within a predetermined fixed numerical range from the minimum value to the maximum value, and this minimum value Is incremented by one each time the main control timer interrupt process is performed. The symbol is counted up from the random number for determining the initial value for determining the normal pattern to the maximum value, and then it is counted up from the minimum value toward the random number for determining the initial value for determining the normal pattern. When the counter has counted up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the random number per symbol normal determination, the random number for big hit determination is updated by this success random number update process. The random number for determining the initial value per normal symbol can be obtained by executing the initial value lottery processing which randomly selects one value from the fixed numerical range of the counter for updating the random number for determining normal per symbol normally. .

  In this embodiment, the big hit symbol initial value determining random number and the small hit symbol initial value determining random number are not displayed in step S56 in the main control side power-on process (main control side main process) shown in FIG. 176. Although updating is performed in the current random number update processing and the main control side timer interrupt processing that is the main routine in step S106 in the main control side timer interrupt processing, the processing time of the present routine is uneven every time the interrupt timer is generated. If the number of executions of the non-match random number update process in step S56 becomes random by repeatedly executing the main control side main process within the remaining time until the generation of the interrupt timer, the random number for determining the initial value of the jackpot symbol And as a mechanism to update the random number for the initial value determination for small hit symbols only in the non-falling random number update process in step S56. .

  Following step S106, the main control MPU 1310a performs ball number counting processing (step S107). In this ball counting process, input information is read from the above-described input information storage area, and a detection signal from the out-port left sensor 1008a is input based on the input information, and a game area 5a is sectioned in the game board 5 When the out-port left sensor 1008a detects a game ball collected by the out-port 1008 provided in the, the value of the collected-ball counter that counts the number of balls of the game ball recovered by the out-port 1008 is 1 In addition to performing (incrementing) calculation, the detection signal from the out-port right sensor 1008 b is input, and the game ball collected by the out-port 1008 provided in the game area 5 a formed in the game board 5 is out-out When the right sensor 1008 b detects it, it counts the number of balls of the game balls collected by the out port 1008. The value of the recovered ball counter adds the value 1 (increments) performs computation. That is, in the ball number counting process, when the out-port left sensor 1008 a detects the gaming ball recovered by the out-port 1008 and the out-port right sensor 1008 b detects the gaming ball recovered by the out-port 1008 The value of 2 is added to the value of the recovery ball counter. The main control MPU 1310a sets the value of the collection ball counter, which is the calculation result, as the counting result (total number) of the number of gaming balls collected by the out port 1008, to the out ball counting dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM. While storing, the output of the lighting signal displayed on the base monitor 1310 h is set, and stored in the output information storage area as output information. Further, the main control MPU 1310a creates a ball collection command to notify that effect when the value of the collection ball counter is divisible by 10, that is, whenever the number of gaming balls collected at the out port 1008 reaches 10 balls. And stores it as transmission information in the output information storage area. When the main control MPU 1310a reaches the maximum value (in the present embodiment, the value 65535) of the value of the recovery ball counter which is the calculation result, and further increments (increments) the value of the recovery ball counter by the value 1, the recovery ball The value of the counter overflows to a value of 0, and an operation of adding from this value of 0 is performed.

  Following step S107, the main control MPU 1310a performs a winning ball control process (step S108). In this prize ball control process, input information is read from the above-described input information storage area, and a prize ball command for paying out gaming balls is created based on the input information, or a main control board 1310 X and a payout control board 633. Create a self-check command to check the connection between boards. Then, the created prize ball command and the self check command are transmitted to the payout control board 633 as the main payment serial data. For example, when one game ball enters the big winning opening 2005, a prize ball command to pay out 15 balls as a prize ball is created, and the number of game balls scheduled to be paid out as a prize ball reaches 10 balls Therefore, the output of the main prize ball number information output signal is set to convey that effect, and stored as output information in the output information storage area, and the prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control board 633, or this prize ball When a dispenser ACK signal notifying that the dispensing control board 633 has received the command normally is not input within a predetermined time, a self-check command for confirming the connection state between the main control board 1310 X and the dispensing control board 633 It is created and sent to the payout control board 633 or the like.

  In the prize ball control process of step S108, the input information is read from the above-described input information storage area, and the number of gaming balls to be paid out as the prize balls reaches 10 on the basis of the input information. In this case, a main prize ball number information output command, which is classified as other to convey that effect, is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area. The main prize ball number information output command is created based on the value of the main prize ball number information output determination counter. The value of the main prize ball number information output determination counter reads out the input information from the input information storage area described above, and based on the input information, the general winning opening 2001 provided on the game board 5, that is, the first starting opening 2002 Based on the game balls entered in the various winning openings (hereinafter referred to as "various winning openings provided on the game board 5") such as the second starting opening 2004 and the large winning opening 2005 etc. It counts the number of game balls scheduled to be played, and is stored and updated in the prize ball schedule information storage area of the main control built-in RAM in the prize ball control processing of step S108. In the prize ball control process of step S108, the value of the main prize ball number information output determining counter stored in the prize ball schedule information storage area of the main control built-in RAM is read, and the read main prize ball number information output determining counter The input information is read out from the above-mentioned input information storage area, and the number of balls of the game ball scheduled to be paid out as a prize ball is added to the value of. When it is over (ie, when the number of game balls scheduled to be paid out as winning balls has reached 10 balls), a main prize ball number information output command is created to convey that effect, and as transmission information The value indicating the number of balls exceeded as well as the value stored in the output information storage area is used as the value of the main prize ball number information output determination counter, the prize ball scheduled information storage area of the main control built-in RAM described above It is adapted to store update.

  Following step S108, the main control MPU 1310a performs frame command reception processing (step S110). The payout control board 633 transmits various 1-byte (8-bit) commands (for example, a frame state 1 command, an error cancellation navi command, and a frame state 2 command) divided into state displays. In the frame command reception process, when various commands are normally received as the payee serial data, information for conveying the fact to the payout control board 633 is stored in the output information storage area of the main control internal RAM as output information. In addition, the main control MPU 1310 a shapes the command normally received as the payer serial data into a 2-byte (16-bit) command (various commands (frame state 1 command, error cancellation navi command divided into status display, And frame status 2 command)), and stored as the transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above.

  Subsequent to step S110, the main control MPU 1310a performs a fraud detection process (step S112). In this fraudulent action detection process, the abnormal state regarding the winning balls is confirmed. For example, the input information is read from the above-described input information storage area, the logic of the detection signal from the first start port sensor main side 3002a is compared with the logic of the detection signal from the first start port sensor slave side 3002b. In the case where the logic is different, an incorrect ball (a game ball or a metal ball of almost the same diameter as that of the game ball or almost the same as that of the game ball or the like) It is judged that fraudulent action (hereinafter referred to as "radio wave irradiation got") by radio wave irradiation using synthetic resin spheres of a diameter is performed, and the value of the radio wave irradiation got counter is incremented by 1 (increment) Do. The value of the radio wave got counter is incremented each time it is determined that radio wave irradiation got is performed in the injustice detection process, is included in the game backup information, and is cleared when the RAM is cleared. The value 0 (zero) is set as the value. When the value of the radio wave irradiation lot counter reaches the upper limit value (in the present embodiment, the value 250 is set as the upper limit value based on 4 ms which is an interrupt cycle in which the cheating detection process is performed on the main control side timer interrupt process). And a radio wave irradiation goto notification command divided into a notification display that tells that radio wave irradiation goto is being performed, and stores it as the transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above.

  Here, the radio wave irradiation goto will be briefly described as follows. A ball with a flexible string (a wire, a piano wire, a wire or a linear member such as a catheter or the like) attached (a game ball or a metal of about the same diameter) The ball or synthetic resin ball of approximately the same diameter is driven into the game area 5a from the upper plate 201 via the ball feeding unit 140 by the ball launching device 540, and enters the first starting opening 2002 and the first starting Radio wave irradiation is performed in a state where the gaming ball is stopped in an area (a ball passing detection area of the first starting opening sensor) for detecting the gaming ball passing through the mouth sensor. Thereby, when radio wave irradiation is performed (that is, when radio wave irradiation is turned on) in a state where the game ball is stopped in the ball passage detection area of the first starting opening sensor, the logic of the detection signal from the first starting opening sensor is It becomes a logic that it does not detect the game ball, but it becomes a logic that the logic of the detection signal from the first starting opening sensor detects the game ball when the radio wave irradiation is not performed (that is, when the radio wave irradiation is turned off) . That is, the ball passing detection of the first starting opening sensor is repeated by repeatedly turning on or off the electric wave irradiation in the state where the gaming ball is stopped in the ball passing detection area of the first starting opening sensor. A signal indicating that a plurality of gaming balls have passed through the area can be created in a pseudo manner and output from the first starting opening sensor to the main control board 4100.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, in order to be able to discover such radio wave irradiation goto, a dimension larger than the erroneous detection preventing distance dimension between the first starting opening sensor main side 3002a and the first starting opening sensor slave side 3002b. They were spaced apart by a distance (43 mm in this embodiment). Thereby, temporarily, an irregular ball attached with a flexible string-like operation line is driven from the upper plate 201 through the ball feeding unit 140 into the game area 5a by the ball launching device 540 and intrudes into the first starting opening 2002 The game ball passing through the first starting opening sensor main side 3002a (the ball passing detection area of the first starting opening sensor main side 3002a) or the game ball passing through the first starting opening sensor secondary side 3002b Even if the parked state can be formed in the area (the ball passing detection area of the first start port sensor slave side 3002b) that detects the The logic of the detection signal from the first starting opening sensor main side 3002a and the logic of the detection signal from the first starting opening sensor main side 3002b are necessarily different by repeating turning off and on. When the value of the radio wave irradiation got counter reaches the upper limit value, it generates a radio wave irradiation goth notification command that is divided into a notification display that tells that radio wave irradiation got is being performed, and it is used as transmission information. It can be stored in the transmission information storage area. In this embodiment, it is possible to contribute to the fact that a clerk such as a salesclerk of a game hall can find radio wave irradiation got at an early stage by reliably detecting and reporting radio wave irradiation goto by such a mechanism. It is supposed to be.

  Further, in the fraudulent activity detection process in step S112, the input information is read from the above-described input information storage area, and when the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 3003 is input, fraudulent activity using a magnet (hereinafter referred to as "magnetism") It is determined that the value is 1) and the value of the magnet Goto counter is incremented (incremented). The value of the magnet got counter is incremented each time it is determined that radio wave irradiation got is performed in the injustice detecting process, is included in the game backup information, and is cleared when the RAM is cleared. The value 0 (zero) is set as the value. When the value of the magnet got counter reaches the upper limit (in the present embodiment, the value 250 is set as the upper limit based on 4 ms which is an interrupt cycle in which the cheating detection process is performed on the main control side timer interrupt process). A magnet magnet notification command divided into a notification display notifying that radio wave irradiation sound is being generated is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above. In this embodiment, it is possible to contribute to the fact that a clerk such as a salesclerk of the game hall can discover the magnet got at an early stage by reliably detecting and reporting the magnet goto by such a mechanism. It has become.

  Further, in the injustice detecting process in step S112, for example, when the input information is read from the above-described input information storage area and the detection signal from the big winning opening sensor 2403 is input when it is not the big hit gaming state (big winning opening When a game ball enters a ball in 2005), etc., for a special winning opening abnormal winning occurrence, create a winning abnormality display command classified as notification display as an abnormal state, and store it in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area as transmission information .

  In the fraud detection process in step S112, when radio wave irradiation goto and / or magnet goth are detected, the value 1 is set to the fraud detection flag FD-FLG as detection of fraud, while radio wave radiation goto and magnet When the got is not detected, the value of the cheating detection flag FD-FLG is set to 0 as no cheating detection. The fraudulent action detection flag FD-FLG is included in the game backup information, and when the RAM is cleared, the value 0 (zero) is set as an initial value. Also, when the occurrence of the special winning opening abnormal prize occurrence is detected, the value of 1 may be set to the injustice detection flag FD-FLG as the detection of the injustice.

  Following step S112, the main control MPU 1310a performs a firing permission signal setting process (step S113). In the launch permission signal setting process, the logic of a launch permission signal is transmitted that transmits a permission to the launch control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 to launch the game ball B. Specifically, the main control MPU 1310a determines that the fraud detection flag FD-FLG has a value 0, that is, it has not detected a fraud based on the value of the fraud detection flag FD-FLG described above. When the firing permission logic is set to the firing permission logic as the logic of the firing permission signal and stored as the output information in the above-described output information storage area, the fraud detection flag FD-FLG is not 0 (value 1), that is, fraud When it is determined that the detection of the fire is permitted, the fire permission logic is set to the fire stop logic (fire non-permission logic) inverted as the logic of the fire permission signal, and is stored as the output information in the output information storage area described above. The main control MPU 1310a reads input information from the input information storage area described above, and based on the input information, the detection signal from the door frame opening switch 4a is input and the door frame 3 is opened to the main body frame 4 If the door frame opening switch 4a detects that the door is open, a detection signal from the body frame opening switch 4b is input, and the body frame opening switch 4b detects that the body frame 4 is open with respect to the outer frame 2 In this case, the firing permission logic is inverted to the firing stop logic (fire non-permitting logic) as the logic of the firing permission signal, and is stored as the output information in the output information storage area described above. The logic of the firing permission signal is, as an initial value (default), the firing permission signal setting process of step S113 in the main control side timer interrupt process which is this routine after the pachinko machine 1 is powered on (after power recovery) The hardware is configured by hardware including a main control output circuit with a reset function so as to be set to the firing stop logic (fire non-permitting logic) which reverses the firing permission logic until it is started.

  Following step S113, the main control MPU 1310a performs a special symbol and special electric combination product control process (step S114). In this special symbol and special motorized product control process, the latch signal is output to the main control built-in hard random number circuit, and the random number (random number value) extracted by the main control built-in hard random number circuit when the latch signal is input is It acquires from the hard random number latch register built in the control MPU 1310a, and sets the acquired random number value as a jackpot determination random number. Then, it is determined whether or not the jackpot determination random number (that is, the random number value acquired from the hard random number latch register incorporated in the main control MPU 1310a) matches the jackpot determination value stored in advance in the main control internal ROM. (Determining whether or not to generate a big hit gaming state (referred to as "special lottery".)), Or take out the value of the counter for updating the big hit symbol random number, determine the probability variation hit stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM It is determined whether or not it matches the value (determination of whether or not to generate a probability fluctuation). When the main control MPU 1310a does not generate a big hit gaming state, its detailed description is omitted, but the random number value acquired from the hard random number latch register built in the main control MPU 1310a and the main control built-in ROM in advance. It is determined whether or not the stored small hit determination value matches (determines whether or not to generate the small hit gaming state), and when they match, the small hit gaming state is generated while the match is made. When it is not, it is determined whether or not the small hit game state is not accompanied by the reach, and it is determined that the reach is accompanied by the reach or not by the reach.

  Here, “probability fluctuation” means that the probability of hitting a jackpot changes to a high probability (probability variation) set higher than that at normal time (low probability). In the present embodiment, values 32668 to 32767 are set as the range of the big hit determination value (big hit determination range) with low probability and are read from the normal determination table, while value 31768 with the high probability 32767 is set and read out from the probability variation judgment table. As described above, in the special symbol and special motorized product control process in step S114, the jackpot determination random number (that is, the random number value acquired from the hard random number latch register built in the main control MPU 1310a) and the main control built-in ROM When it is determined whether or not the stored big hit determination value matches, a big hit determination random number (that is, a random number value acquired from a hard random number latch register built in the main control MPU 1310a) is included in the big hit determination range Do it depending on whether it is

  When these determination results (lottery results) are from the first starting opening sensor 3002, various commands related to special figure 1 tuning effect are created, while the determination results (lottery results) are the second starting opening sensor 2402 If it is based on the special figure 2 create various commands related to the tuning effect, store it as transmission information in the transmission information storage area, and determine the variation display pattern of the special symbol based on the above-mentioned random number for variation display pattern And the first special symbol display 1404 or the second special symbol display 1404 of the function display unit 1400 to light the first special symbol display 1404 or the second special symbol display 1406 of the function display unit 1400 according to the determined variation display pattern of the special symbol (2) Set the output of the lighting signal to the special symbol display 1406 and store it as the output information in the above-mentioned output information storage area That. In addition, according to the game state to be generated, for example, when it becomes a big hit game state, various commands (big hit opening command, big winning opening 1 open N-th display command, big winning opening 1 closed display command, large win) A winning opening 1 count display command, a big hit ending command, and a big hit symbol display command) are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area, or, for example, of the drive signal to the attacker solenoid 2405 to open and close the opening / closing member When the output is set and stored as output information in the output information storage area, or when the number of times that the special winning opening 2005 changes from the closed state to the open state is two times, the round display 1408 of the function display unit 1400 Point to 2 round indicator lamp to light 2 round indicator lamp Set the output of the signal and store it in the output information storage area as output information, or when the round is 15 times, to the 15-round display lamp to light up the 15-round display lamp of the round display 1408 of the function display unit 1400 The output of the lighting signal to the status display 1401 of the function display unit 1400 so as to set the output of the lighting signal and store it in the output information storage area as output information or to light the presence or absence of occurrence of probability fluctuation in a predetermined color Are set and stored in the output information storage area as output information.

  Subsequent to step S114, the main control MPU 1310a performs a normal symbol and normal electric combination control process (step S116). In this ordinary symbol and ordinary motor combination control process, input information is read out from the above-described input information storage area, and gate winning processing is performed based on the input information. In this gate winning process, it is determined from the input information whether or not a detection signal from the gate sensor 2401 is input to the input terminal of the input port. Based on the determination result, when the detection signal is input to the input terminal of the input port, the value of the counter etc. for updating the above-mentioned random number per normal symbol determination is extracted and the gate of the main control internal RAM is extracted as gate information. Store in the information storage area.

  In this gate information storage area, the 0th to third partitions (four partitions) are provided, and gate information is stored in the order of the 0th partition, the first partition, the second partition, and the third partition. It is supposed to be. For example, when the gate information is stored in the 0th section to the 2nd section of the gate information storage, when the detection signal from the gate sensor 2401 is input to the input terminal of the input port, the gate information is stored in the 3rd gate information storage Store in compartments.

  The gate information stored in the zeroth section of the gate information storage is set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM. When this gate information is set, the gate information of the first section of the gate information storage is gated to the 0th section of the gate information storage, the gate information of the second section of the gate information storage is gated to the first section of the gate information storage, The gate information of the third section of the information storage is shifted to the second section of the gate information storage, and the third section of the gate information storage becomes an empty area. For example, when gate information is stored in the first to second sections of the gate information storage, the gate information of the first section of the gate information storage is stored in the zeroth section of the gate information storage. The gate information of the two partitions is shifted to the first partition of the gate information storage, and the second partition of the gate information storage and the third partition of the gate information storage become vacant areas. Here, when the gate information is stored in the first to third sections of the gate information storage, the normal hold indicator 1403 of the function display unit 1400 is turned on by setting the total number of the stored gate information as the hold ball, The output of the lighting signal of the normal hold indicator 1403 of the function display unit 1400 is set based on the gate information described above, and is stored as the output information in the output information storage area described above.

  Following the gate winning process, the gate information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM is read out, and the value of the random symbol determination per normal symbol is taken out from the read gate information and stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM. It is determined whether or not it matches the normal symbol hit determination value (referred to as a "normal lottery"). Whether to open and close the movable piece or not is determined based on the determination result (lottery result from the normal lottery). When the opening and closing operation is performed in this determination, the movable piece is in the open state, and the game ball can be accepted to the second start port 2004, and the game state becomes advantageous to the player. The variation display pattern of the normal symbol corresponding to this determination is determined based on the random number for the normal symbol variation display pattern described above, and various commands classified into a common figure synchronization effect relationship are created, and the transmission information storage described above as transmission information Set the output of the lighting signal to the normal symbol display 1402 of the function display unit 1400 so as to light the normal symbol display 1402 of the function display unit 1400 according to the determined variation display pattern of the normal symbol while storing in the area. It is stored in the above-mentioned output information storage area as output information.

  Also, for example, when the value of the random number for determining the normal symbol taken out matches the determination value for the normal symbol stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM, various commands relating to the ordinary electric part production are created and transmitted. While storing in the transmission information storage area as information and setting the output of the drive signal to the start port solenoid 2404 so as to open and close the movable piece, it is stored in the above-mentioned output information storage area as output information, If the value of the random number per symbol judgment does not match the normal symbol judgment value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM, the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern is determined based on the above-mentioned random symbol display pattern random number pattern , While creating various commands classified in relation to a common figure tuning effect, and storing them as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above, The output of the lighting signal to the normal symbol display 1402 of the function display unit 1400 is set to light the normal symbol display 1402 of the function display unit 1400 according to the determined normal symbol fluctuation display pattern, and the output information described above as the output information Store in storage area.

  Following step S116, the main control MPU 1310a performs a setting value confirmation display process (step S117). In this set value confirmation display process, the detailed description will be described later, but the input information is read from the above-described input information storage area, and opening of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 is detected based on this input information. The setting key is inserted in the detection signal from the body frame opening switch 4b and the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is in the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns off the setting switch 1311a) The setting switch 1311a is turned on by turning the first ON by turning 60 degrees clockwise from the second position, and the setting key is turned on from the setting switch 1311a. Is determined to be open, and the setting switch 1311a is set with the setting key O by the signal of the setting key ON. While it is determined that the predetermined set value display permission condition is established based on the determination that the main frame 4 is open, the main frame 4 is open with respect to the outer frame 2 by the detection signal from the main frame opening switch 4b. If it is determined that the setting switch 1311a is not turned on by the signal of the setting key ON, it is determined that the predetermined setting value display permission condition is not satisfied. In the setting value confirmation display process, a lighting signal for displaying the setting value stored in the setting value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM on the setting display 1310g when the setting value display permitting condition is satisfied. Is set and stored in the output information storage area as output information, and when the set value display permission condition is satisfied, the process is terminated as it is, and the process returns to the present routine.

  Following step S117, the main control MPU 1310a performs port output processing (step S118). In this port output process, output information is read from the output information storage area described above from the output terminals of various output ports of the main control MPU 1310a, and various signals are output based on the output information. The main control MPU 1310a, for example, outputs a main payment ACK signal to the payout control substrate 633 when reception of various commands from the payout control substrate 633 is normally completed from an output terminal of a predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1310a based on output information. Output a drive signal to an attacker solenoid 2405 that opens and closes the opening and closing member of the big winning opening 2005 when it is in a big hit gaming state, and outputs a drive signal to a start opening solenoid 2404 that opens and closes a movable piece Besides, 15 round big hit information output signal, 2 round big hit information output signal, probability variation in progress information output signal, special symbol display information output signal, normal symbol display information output signal, time short information output signal, starting opening winning Various information (gaming information) signals relating to the game such as information output signals to the payout control board 633 Force, or a release permission signal set in the release permission logic or the release suspension logic (release non-permission logic) is output to the payout control board 633, or the counting result of the number of gaming balls collected by the out port 1008 Outputs a display signal to the base monitor 1310h for displaying the total number), or outputs a lighting signal for displaying the setting value stored in the setting value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM on the setting display 1310g. To

  Following step S118, the main control MPU 1310a performs peripheral control board command transmission processing (step S120). In this peripheral control board command transmission process, the transmission information is read from the transmission information storage area described above, and this transmission information is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 as main cycle serial data. In this transmission information, various commands created in the main control side timer interrupt processing which is this routine, various commands classified in special figure 1 tuning effect related, various commands classified in special figure 2 synchronous effect related, big hit related Various commands (for example, a special winning opening 1 count display command corresponding to a special winning opening count command based on a detection signal from the special winning opening sensor 2403 when a game ball entering the special winning opening 2005 is detected) , Various commands classified as power on, various commands classified as related to common drawing tuning effect, various commands classified as related to regular electric circuit production, various commands classified as notification display, various types classified as status display Command, various commands classified as test related, and various commands classified as others (for example, the main control board 1310 X is provided on the game board 5 The main prize ball number information output signal is used as the main prize ball number information every time the number of game balls scheduled to be paid out as a prize ball reaches 10 balls based on the game balls entered into various winning openings, external The main prize ball number information output command and the like instructing to transmit to the hall computer via the terminal plate 558, and various commands classified into the specific history (for example, the number of balls of the game balls collected at the out port 1008) There is a problem (or can not be relied on) stored in the main control built-in RAM, a ball recovery command to notify that every 10 balls are reached, a setting change command to notify that the setting value has been changed, or An error display command to inform that effect, and a setting key to confirm that a setting value stored in a setting value dedicated area to be described later in a specific area of the main control built-in RAM is to be confirmed. ON operation command, etc.) are stored. In the main cycle serial data, one packet is configured into 3 bytes. Specifically, the main cycle serial data has a status indicating the type of command having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), a mode indicating a variation of effects having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), and a status And a sum value obtained by calculating the sum of the modes as numerical values, and this sum value is created at the time of transmission.

  In this peripheral control board command transmission processing, the various commands are configured as main cycle serial data, and are transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value. As described above, the charge stored in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 is applied as DC +5 V to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, in the event of a power failure or a momentary power failure. The main transmission serial transmission port incorporated in the main control MPU 1310a must at least transfer the command set in the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register by the serial management unit and complete transmission as main transmission serial data from the transmission shift register It is possible to When power is turned on to pachinko machine 1 or when power is restored due to a power failure or momentary interruption after power on, transmission is performed when the power is turned on in step S50 in the main control power-on process shown in FIG. 176. The power on state command divided into power on, power on main control return destination command, and power on main prize ball number information output judgment counter in order to convey that power recovery is performed in the reservation setting of the command to be executed A notification command is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Therefore, as the main cycle serial data, the power-on state command is configured in the order of status, mode, and sum value. Send to peripheral control board 1510 and then configure the power-on main control return destination command, status, mode, and sum value Transmitted to peripheral control board 1510 in order, subsequently constitutes the power-on main prize ball number information output determining counter notification command, and transmits status, mode, and a peripheral control board 1510 in the order of thumb value. In the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, various information is read from the game backup information in setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34 in the main control side power-on process. Various commands may be stored. In such a case, first, after the transmission of various commands according to the game information among various information is completed, the power on state command, the power on main control return destination command, and the power on main prize ball number information The output determination counter notification command is transmitted.

  In addition, when the number of game balls collected at the out port 1008 reaches 10 balls and transmits a ball collection command to that effect to the peripheral control board 1510, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a in the peripheral control board 1510 receives The ball collection information stored in the built-in RAM of the real time clock IC (not shown) (ie, the counted value (that is, the out-port 1008) is counted by counting the number of balls of the gaming ball recovered in the out-port 1008 Information in which the total number of game balls collected is associated with the updated date and time) is updated. In addition, when the operating time of the game hall ends and the pachinko machine 1 is powered off without receiving the ball collection command, the value finally counted (that is, the game ball collected at the out port 1008) as a result The sphere collection information in which the total number of spheres is associated with the updated date and time is stored and held in a built-in RAM of a real time clock IC (not shown). When power is turned on when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on when starting to operate the gaming hall, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a in the peripheral control board 1510 transmits the ball collection information stored and held in the built-in RAM of the real time clock IC not shown. The ball collection information is created again from the day when it was started, and the ball collection information is stored and held as ball collection history information in a built-in RAM of a real time clock IC (not shown). Note that the counted value stored as sphere collection information in the built-in RAM of the real time clock IC (not shown) may use the value counted from the value 0 (zero) on that day, or the value 0 (zero) on that day Both the counted value and the sum of the counted values may be used.

  Following step S120, the main control MPU 1310a clears the main control built-in WDT (step S122), and ends this routine. Clearing of the main control built-in WDT in step S122 is performed by setting a timer clear set value in a WDT clear register built in the main control MPU 1310a. This clears the timing by the main control built-in WDT. Then, the timing by the main control built-in WDT is started again, so that the main control MPU 1310a is not forcedly reset by the main control built-in WDT.

  As mentioned above, when the main control board 1310X is in the progress of the game, the above-mentioned backup for storing the game information by the progress of the game before the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off The process can be executed and completed, and at the time of power recovery, the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is shut off based on the game information on which the backup process has been executed as a return destination of the progress of the game by the main control board 1310X. When the power is turned on, the main control return destination command is output to the peripheral control board 1510 to indicate the drive state of the start port solenoid 2404 and the attacker solenoid 2405 which are electric drive sources by the port output process of step S118 in this routine. It can be done. In other words, main control board 1310X uses the main control built-in RAM in step S34 in the same process shown in FIG. 175 in the reservation setting of the command sent when the power is turned on in step S50 in the main control side power on process shown in FIG. The power-on state command divided into power-on to indicate that power has been turned on (power-return) based on the power-on time information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM in setting the work area. The main control return destination command at power on and the main notification ball number information output judgment counter notification command at power on are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, and step S120 in this routine. In peripheral control board command transmission processing, configure power on state command as main cycle serial data Transmit to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value, and then transmit to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value to configure the power-on main control return destination command. Subsequently, when the power is turned on, the counter notification command for determining the main prize ball number information output determination is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value.

  Therefore, the peripheral control board 1510 is a display area of the effect display device 1600 as the return destination of the progress of the game by the main control board 1310X at the time of power recovery based on the power-on main control return destination command from the main control board 1310X. Can be displayed on the screen. By this, when the player is playing a game, a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs, and then when the power is restored, the gaming state immediately before the momentary power loss or power failure is restored promptly after power recovery. In addition, since the return destination of the progress of the game by the main control board 1310X can be displayed and notified in the display area of the effect display device 1600, the state of the system of the pachinko machine 1 is in a frozen state, a so-called frozen state It is possible to prevent the player from being mistaken for being seen and broken down. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being misunderstood by returning to the gaming state immediately before a momentary power failure or a power failure, and returning promptly after power recovery.

  In addition, in the main control board inspection step which is an inspection step of the manufacturing line of the main control board 1310X, when the power of the main control board 1310X is first turned on after being manufactured for inspection, as described above, FIG. In the step S38 in the main control side power-on process shown, it is always cleared except for the specific area in the entire area of the main control built-in RAM. Thus, in the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted at the time of power on in step S50 in the same process shown in FIG. 176, the power on state command classified as power on when the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted at the power on is performed. When the power is turned on, the main control return destination command at power on and the counter notification command for determining the main prize ball number information output judgment at power on are created and stored in the transmission information storage area of the main control internal RAM as transmission information. A state in which only three commands, status command, power-on main control return destination command, and power-on main prize ball number information output judgment counter notification command are stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control internal RAM In the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in this routine, As the peripheral serial data, configure the power-on state command, send to the inspection device of the main control board inspection process in the order of status, mode, and sum value, and then configure the power-on main control return destination command, The status, mode, and sum value are sent to the inspection device of the main control board inspection process in this order, and then, when the power is turned on, the main notification ball number information output judgment counter notification command is configured. Status, mode, and sum value Transmit to the inspection device of the main control board inspection process in order. The inspection apparatus of the main control board inspection process constructs information showing the model code of the pachinko machine based on the information showing the model code of the pachinko machine included in the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310X. The above-mentioned series code for identifying which of the max type, middle type, and sweet digital type that indicates the model type, the copyright code for identifying the copyright of the work, and the game specification (For example, in addition to the game specification that the state is continued until the next big hit gaming state occurs when the probability change occurs, the game specification that the probability change occurs in the state where the number of times of the special symbol change is limited Machine) and display detailed model information on the inspection monitor of the main control board inspection process based on the game specification code for specifying It has become the jar.

16-4. Setting change process]
Next, setting change processing will be described. This setting change process is a process performed in step S37 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG.

  When the setting change process is started, as shown in FIG. 178, the main control MPU 1310a acquires the current installation value (step S200). Here, the main control MPU 1310a acquires the setting value stored in the setting value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM. When the setting value is acquired, it may be read or taken out, but when the setting value is taken out, the taken out setting value is set in a predetermined area.

  Following step S200, the main control MPU 1310a calculates a checksum (step S202). This checksum is used to calculate the sum of various information stored in the main control internal RAM as numerical values, and the checksum performed in step S28 in the main control side power on process shown in FIG. 175. Is the same process as the calculation of.

  Subsequent to step S202, the main control MPU 1310a stores the calculated checksum value (sum value) in the main control power-off process (power-off) in the main control power-on process shown in FIG. 176. It is determined whether or not it matches the value of the checksum (sum value) (step S204). If the main control MPU 1310a determines in step S204 that they match, it determines whether the backup flag BK-FLG has a value 1 (step S206). The determination in step S204 and the determination in step S206 are the same as the determination in step S30 and the determination in step S32 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. As described above, the backup flag BK-FLG includes the main control built-in processing in the main control side power-off process to be described later, including game backup information such as various information, checksum value (sum value) and backup flag BK-FLG value. It is a flag indicating whether the data is stored and held in RAM, and is set to 1 when the main control power-off process has ended normally, and to 0 when the main control power-off process has not ended normally. Be done.

  When the main control MPU 1310a determines that the checksum values (sum values) do not match in the determination in step S204, or in the determination in step S206, the main control MPU 1310a does not have the backup flag BK-FLG at the value 1 When (the value is 0), that is, when it is determined that the main control side power-off process has not ended normally, it is determined whether the set value acquired in step S200 is within the normal range (step S208) . Here, the “normal range” is a value to which the setting value can be changed. In the present embodiment, the setting value 1, the setting value 2, the setting value 3, the setting value 4, the setting value 5, and the setting The values up to 6 are preset. If the flowchart proceeds to the determination in step S208, it is determined that the contents of the main control internal RAM have an abnormality, or if it is determined that the main control side power-off process has not ended normally upon power-off. Because of this, the content stored in the main control built-in RAM is abnormal (or can not be trusted). Therefore, in the determination of step S208, the main control MPU 1310a sets the setting value stored in the setting value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM, which is acquired in step S200, to a normal range. It is determined whether the value is any of the above, and if it is determined that it is within the normal range, the set value is used as it is.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in step S208 that the main control MPU 1310a does not fall within the normal range, the main control MPU 1310a sets the setting value 1 which is an initial value to the setting value acquired in step S200 (step S210). In the determination in step S208, any one of setting values 1 to 6 in which the setting value stored in the setting value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM acquired in step S200 is a normal range. Although it is determined whether or not it is a value, the main control MPU 1310a determines that the values (sum values) of the checksums do not match in the determination of step S204 without performing the determination of step S208. If the backup flag BK-FLG is not 1 (the value is 0), that is, the main control MPU 1310a determines that the main control side power-off process has not ended normally. At the same time, the process proceeds to step S210, and setting value 1, which is an initial value, is set to the setting value acquired in step S200. It may be.

  In the determination of step S206, the main control MPU 1310a determines that the backup flag BK-FLG has a value of 1, that is, determines that the main control side power-off process has ended normally, or in the determination of step S208, the main control When the MPU 1310a determines that it is within the normal range, or following step S210, the main control MPU 1310a outputs a lighting signal to the setting change permission lamp 1311c to turn on the setting change permission lamp 1311c (step S212).

  Following step S212, the main control MPU 1310a outputs a lighting signal for displaying the setting value on the setting indicator 1310g to the setting indicator 1310g and displays the setting value on the setting indicator 1310g (step S214). .

  Subsequent to step S214, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether the setting switching button 1311b is operated (step S216). In this determination, the detection signal from the setting switching button 1311 b is read, and it is determined whether the detection signal from the setting switching button 1311 b is input. The main control MPU 1310a determines that the setting switching button 1311b is operated when the detection signal from the setting switching button 1311b is input, while the setting switching button when the detection signal from the setting switching button 1311b is not input. It is determined that 1311 b has not been operated.

  When the main control MPU 1310a determines that the setting switching button 1311b is operated in the determination of step S216, the main control MPU 1310 performs calculation to add (increment) the value 1 to the set value (step S218). At this time, when acquiring the set value in step S200, if the set value stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM is taken out and set in the predetermined area, this predetermined area The value 1 is added (incremented) to the set value set in.

  Following step S218, the main control MPU 1310a outputs a lighting signal for displaying the setting value updated in step S216 on the setting indicator 1310g to the setting indicator 1310g, and updates the setting value for the setting indicator 1310g. Is displayed (step S220).

  Subsequent to step S220 or in the determination of step S216, when the main control MPU 1310a determines that the setting switching button 1311b is not operated, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether or not the determination key is operated (step S222). In this determination, the main control MPU 1310a inserts the setting key into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting switch 1311a, and proceeds from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key 1311a is turned on toward the setting key cylinder counterclockwise Is turned 120 degrees (that is, from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting switch 1311a is turned on to the initial position which is the original position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turns off the setting switch 1311a) The setting switch 1311a is turned on by turning on the second ON) by turning 60 degrees counterclockwise toward the counterclockwise direction and turning OFF counterclockwise and then turning 60 degrees counterclockwise). And based on the signal of the determination key ON from the setting switch 1311a When it is determined that the determination key ON signal from the setting switch 1311a is input, it is determined that the determination key is operated, while when the determination key ON signal from the setting switch 1311a is not input, the determination key is operated. It is determined that there is not.

  When it is determined in step S222 that the main control MPU 1310a determines that the determination key is not operated, the process returns to the determination of step S216 again, and determines whether the setting switching button 1311b is operated. When it is determined in step S216 that the main control MPU 1310a determines that the setting switching button 1311b is operated, the processing of step S218 and step S220 is performed again, the determination of step S222 is performed, and the determination key is operated. When it is not determined, the process returns to the determination of step S216 again, and when the setting switching button 1311b is operated until the determination key is operated, the setting value is incremented by one each time it is operated, and the setting display is displayed. If the setting switching button 1311b is not operated, the setting switching button 1311b is operated immediately before and the updated setting value is displayed on the setting display 1310g. In addition, until it is determined that the decision key is operated in the determination of step S222, even if a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs and the power is restored, the setting value updated immediately before the power failure or the momentary power failure occurs is main control Because the setting value dedicated area in the specific area of the built-in RAM is not stored, the setting value stored in the setting value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM is not changed.

  On the other hand, when determining in step S222 that the main control MPU 1310a determines that the determination key is operated, it stores the updated setting value in the setting value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control internal RAM (step S224). At this time, when acquiring the set value in step S200, if the set value stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM is taken out and set in the predetermined area, this predetermined area Since the setting value set in is updated, the updated setting value is returned to the setting value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM. After completion of the process in step S224, even if a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs and the power is restored, the updated set value when the determination key is operated before the power failure or momentary power failure occurs is the main control internal RAM Are stored in the setting value dedicated area in the specific area of.

  Subsequent to step S224, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether or not there is an OFF operation of the setting key (step S226). In this determination, the main control MPU 1310a inserts the setting key into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting switch 1311a and sets the setting switch 1311a to the initial position from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder (that is, the setting switch 1311a) When the setting key cylinder is turned 60 degrees clockwise and turned off so as to return to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder to be turned OFF, the setting switch 1311a is turned OFF and the signal of OFF from the setting switch 1311a On the basis of the setting switch 1311a, it is determined that the setting key has been turned OFF. When the setting switch 1311a has not been inputted, the setting key is turned OFF. It judges that it is not.

  If it is determined in step S226 that the setting key has not been turned off, the main control MPU 1310 returns to the determination in step S226 again, and repeats the determination in step S226 until the setting key is turned off.

  On the other hand, when determining in step S226 that the main control MPU 1310a determines that the setting key has been turned OFF, the main control MPU 1310a stops the output of the lighting signal for displaying the updated setting value on the setting indicator 1310g to the setting indicator 1310g. Then, the updated setting value is not displayed on the setting display 1310g (step S228).

  Following step S228, the main control MPU 1310a stops the lighting signal to the setting change permission lamp 1311c and turns off the setting change permission lamp 1311c (step S230).

  Following step S230, the main control MPU 1310a sets the value 0 to the setting change permission flag CS-FLG (step S232). As described above, the setting change permission flag CS-FLG is the current setting value stored in the setting value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM (the setting key cylinder of the setting switch 1311a is the first ON operation) Is a flag indicating whether or not to permit the setting change of the setting value 1 to the setting value 6 at the time when the setting is allowed, and is a value when permitting the setting change of the setting value to be performed 1. When the setting change of the setting value is not permitted, the value is set to 0, respectively. In the process of step S232, setting the value of the setting change allowance flag CS-FLG to 0 makes it impossible to change the setting of the setting value thereafter.

  Following step S232, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether the set value stored in step S224 is within the normal range (step S233). The “normal range” is the same as in the determination of step S208, and as described above, in the present embodiment, setting value 1, setting value 2, setting value 3, setting value 4, setting value 5, and setting The values up to 6 are preset. In the determination of step S233, the main control MPU 1310a corrects the setting value stored in the setting value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM in step S224 in order to reconfirm whether the setting value is abnormal. It is determined whether the value is one of the set value 1 to the set value 6 which is a range, and when it is determined that the range is a normal range, the set value is used as it is.

  If it is determined in step S233 that the main control MPU 1310a determines that the range is the normal range, the main control MPU 1310a performs serial communication initialization (step S234), and subsequently creates a setting change command to set transmission information (step S236). Subsequently, peripheral control board transmission command transmission processing for transmitting the transmission information (setting change command) set in step S236 to the peripheral control board 1510 as main cycle serial data is performed (step S238), and this routine is ended. The serial communication initial setting in step S234 is the same process as the serial communication initial setting in step S44 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. 176, and the peripheral control board transmission command transmission process in step S238 is the same as FIG. This process is the same as the peripheral control board transmission command transmission process of step S120 in the main control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. Here, in the serial communication initial setting in step S234, the transmission information (setting change command) set in step S236 in the peripheral control board transmission command transmission processing in step S238 is performed prior to the serial communication initial setting in step S44. Although it is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 as peripheral serial data, this is prioritized before the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted when the power is turned on in step S50 in the main control side power on processing shown in FIG. 176. To notify the peripheral control board 1510 that a setting value has been changed by a setting change command. The setting change command is a command for conveying the setting value whose setting has been changed and the completion of storing the setting value. When receiving the setting change command, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a in the peripheral control board 1510 updates the setting value history information (information in which the setting value is associated with the date and time) stored and held in the built-in RAM of the real time clock IC not shown. Do.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in step S233 that the main control MPU 1310a does not fall within the normal range, the main control MPU 1310 performs an error display process (step S240), and enters an infinite loop. By this infinite loop, the state in which the error display process is finished is maintained, and the game can not be progressed at all, and the pachinko machine 1 is turned off and turned on again. In this error display process, the detailed description will be described later, but if it is determined that there is an abnormality in the contents of the main control built-in RAM, or if the main control side power-off process has not ended normally when the power is shut off If it is determined, it is determined that the content stored in the main control built-in RAM is abnormal (or it can not be relied upon), and an error display notifying that effect is performed. In the present embodiment, the main control MPU 1310a displays the letter E on the setting display 1310g as an error display.

16-5. Set value confirmation display process]
Next, the setting value confirmation display process will be described. The set value confirmation display process is a process performed in step S117 in the main control timer interrupt process shown in FIG.

  When the setting value confirmation display process is started, as shown in FIG. 179, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether the confirmation display flag DCS-FLG has a value 0 (step S350). The confirmation display flag DCS-FLG is a flag for confirming the set value stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM, and when the set value is confirmed and displayed, the value 1 is set Each value is set to 0 when the value is not displayed.

  In the determination of step S350, when the confirmation display flag DCS-FLG is 0, that is, when the set value is not displayed for confirmation, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether the main frame 4 is opened and the setting key is turned ON. It is determined (step S352). In this determination, the main control MPU 1310 a reads out the input information from the above-described input information storage area, and based on the input information, detects from the main body frame open switch 4 b for detecting the opening of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2. The setting key is inserted into the signal and the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise from the initial position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turns off the setting switch 1311a) The setting switch 1311a is turned on by turning operation and the first ON operation, and the main frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2 by the signal of the setting key ON from the setting switch 1311a. Determines that the setting switch 1311a is turned on by the signal of the setting key ON. By doing this, it is determined that the predetermined set value display permission condition is established, but it is determined that the main body frame 4 is not open with respect to the outer frame 2 by the detection signal from the main body frame open switch 4b, And / or by determining that the setting switch 1311a is not turned on by the signal of the setting key ON, it is determined that a predetermined setting value display permission condition is not satisfied.

  In the determination of step S352, when the main control MPU 1310a determines that the predetermined set value display permission condition is not satisfied, the main routine is ended as it is, while the predetermined set value display permission condition is satisfied. If it is determined that the setting value is to be confirmed, the value 1 is set to the confirmation display flag DCS-FLG (step S354), and then the current installation value is acquired (step S356). Here, the main control MPU 1310a acquires the setting value stored in the setting value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM.

  Subsequent to step S356, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether the set value acquired in step S356 is within the normal range (step S357). The “normal range” is the same as the determination in step S208 in the setting change process of FIG. 178 and the determination in step S233, and as described above, in the present embodiment, setting value 1, setting value 2, setting The values up to value 3, set value 4, set value 5 and set value 6 are preset. In the determination of step S357, the main control MPU 1310a re-confirms whether the setting value is not an abnormal value, the setting value acquired in step S356 (that is, the setting value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM). It is determined whether or not the setting value stored in is in any of the setting values 1 to 6 that is in the normal range, and when it is determined that it is in the normal range, the setting value is used as it is Do.

  When determining in step S357 that the main control MPU 1310a determines that the range is the normal range, the main control MPU 1310a outputs a lighting signal for displaying the setting value acquired in step S356 on the setting indicator 1310g to the setting indicator 1310g. The set value is displayed for 1310 g (step S 358).

  Following step S360, the main control MPU 1310a creates an ON operation command of the setting key, stores it as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control internal RAM, and sets the ON operation command of the setting key (step S360). ), End this routine. This setting key ON operation command is transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in the main control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. The setting key ON operation command indicates that the setting value confirmation display process which is this routine has been started (that is, the setting value stored in the setting value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM is confirmed) It is a command to convey.

  When the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a in the peripheral control board 1510 receives the ON operation command of the setting key, the ON operation history information of the setting key stored and held in the built-in RAM of the real time clock IC (not shown) Information that associates the effect with the date and time).

  In addition, when the peripheral control IC 1510 a of the peripheral control board 1510 receives the ON operation command of the setting key, the ball recovery history information, the setting value history information, the error display history information, and the ON operation history information of the setting key described above. The predetermined specific history information display permission condition of being able to display specific history information such as is established. The CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510 a in the peripheral control board 1510 operates a rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 and a pressing operation of the pressing operation unit 303 by a person who confirms the specific history information in a state where the predetermined specific history information display permission condition holds. By performing the above, control is performed to switch from the image that has been displayed so far to the specific history information display image for selecting and displaying the specific history information and to display it in the display area of the effect display device 1600.

  On the other hand, in the determination of step S350, when the confirmation display flag DCS-FLG is not 0 (the value is 1), that is, when the set value is confirmed and displayed, whether or not there is an OFF operation of the setting key It is determined whether or not it is (step S362). In this determination, the main control MPU 1310a reads the input information from the input information storage area described above, and based on the input information, the setting key is inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting switch 1311a, and the setting switch 1311a is determined. The setting key cylinder is turned clockwise by 60 degrees so as to return from the rotational position of the keyed setting key cylinder to the initial position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turns off the setting switch 1311a) By operating the setting switch 1311a is turned off, it is performed by the signal of OFF from the setting switch 1311a, and when the signal of OFF is inputted from the setting switch 1311a, it is judged that the setting key is turned off, while the setting switch 1311a OFF signal from It determines that the setting key when not been a force not being OFF operation.

  When it is determined in step S362 that the main control MPU 1310a determines that the setting key is not turned off, the main routine is ended as it is, while when it is determined that the setting key is turned off, the setting value is not confirmed. The value 0 is set in the confirmation display flag DCS-FLG (step S364), and then the output of the lighting signal for displaying the setting value acquired in step S356 on the setting indicator 1310g is stopped. Setting display 1310g does not display the acquired setting value (step S366), and then creates a setting key OFF operation command and stores it as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control internal RAM. , Set the setting key OFF operation command (step S368), and this routine To the end. The OFF operation command of the setting key is transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in the main control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. The OFF operation command of the setting key indicates that the setting value confirmation display process which is this routine has been completed (that is, confirmation of completion of confirmation of the setting value stored in the setting value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM) Is a command to convey

  When the CPU of the periphery control IC 1510a in the periphery control board 1510 receives the setting key OFF operation command, the above-described predetermined specific history information display permission condition is not satisfied. At this time, when the CPU of the periphery control IC 1510a in the periphery control board 1510 is performing control to display the above-described specific history information display image in the display area of the effect display device 1600, immediately before switching to the specific history information display image Control is performed to switch to the image displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 and restore the original image.

  On the other hand, when determining in step S357 that the main control MPU 1310a determines that the range is not within the normal range, the main control MPU 1310 performs interrupt non-permission setting (step S370). By this setting, the main control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 177, which has been repeatedly performed every 4 ms, is stopped.

  Following step S370, the main control MPU 1310a performs an error display process (step S372), and then enters an infinite loop in which the main control built-in WDT is continuously cleared (step S374). This infinite loop will continue to clear the main control built-in WDT. This can not be stopped once the main control built-in WDT is started, so by continuing to clear the main control built-in WDT, the main Setting the timer clear setting value in the WDT clear register built into the control MPU 1310a clears the clocking by the main control built-in WDT, and restarts the clocking by the main control built-in WDT, thereby the main control by the main control built-in WDT. The MPU 1310a is not forced to be reset. In addition, this infinite loop keeps the state in which the error display process is finished, and the game can not be progressed at all, and the pachinko machine 1 is turned off and turned on again. In this error display process, the detailed description will be described later, but if it is determined that there is an abnormality in the contents of the main control built-in RAM, or if the main control side power-off process has not ended normally when the power is shut off If it is determined, it is determined that the content stored in the main control built-in RAM is abnormal (or it can not be relied upon), and an error display notifying that effect is performed. In the present embodiment, the main control MPU 1310a displays the letter E on the setting display 1310g as an error display.

[16-6. Error display process]
Next, error display processing will be described. This error display process is the process performed in step S33 in the main control side power on process shown in FIG. 175, and the process performed in step S37 in the main control side power on process shown in FIG. Process in step S240 in the setting change process shown in FIG. 17, and is a process performed in step S372 in the setting value confirmation display process shown in FIG.

  When the error display process is started, the main control MPU 1310a stops the emission permission signal as shown in FIG. 180 (step S400). The release permission signal, as described above, informs the release control portion 633b of the payout control board 633 that the release of the game ball B is permitted, and when the logic thereof is set to the release permission logic, the release is generated. Can be signaled that the firing is to be stopped (disallowed) if the logic is set to the firing stop logic (firing non-permission logic) which reverses the firing permission logic. .

  One process performed in step S33 in the main control side power on process shown in FIG. 175, or one process performed in step S37 in the main control side power on process shown in FIG. 175. Specifically, when started as (the process performed in step S240 in the setting change process shown in FIG. 178), main control MPU 1310a causes the interrupt of step S52 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. Since the permission setting can not be performed, the main control side timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 177 can not be performed, and the release permission signal setting process of step S113 in the same process can not be performed. Since the release permission signal is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1310a to the release control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 via the main control output circuit with reset function, the reset function is provided at power recovery. The main control output circuit is reset, and its logic is the fire stop logic (fire non-permit logic) which is the reverse of the fire enable logic.

  Therefore, the process performed in step S33 in the main control side power on process shown in FIG. 175 or the process performed in step S37 in the main control side power on process shown in FIG. When started as one process (specifically, the process performed in step S240 in the setting change process shown in FIG. 178), main control MPU 1310a performs an error display that is the present routine after power recovery in step S400. Even after the processing is started, the logic of the firing permission signal is set to the firing stop logic (firing non-permission logic) to reliably prevent the game ball B from being fired, and its predetermined output port Output to the discharge control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 through the main control output circuit with reset function from the output terminal of That.

  When the error display process, which is this routine, is started as the process performed in step S372 in the setting value confirmation display process shown in FIG. 179, the main control MPU 1310a performs the process of step S357 in the setting value confirmation display process shown in FIG. It is determined in the determination that there is an abnormality in the contents of the main control built-in RAM. Although the main control MPU 1310a has already performed the interrupt permission setting of step S52 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. 176, it has already been shown in FIG. 179 before the error display process which is this routine is started. Since the interrupt non-permission setting is performed in step S370 in the set value confirmation display process, when the error display process which is this routine is ended, the main control side shown in FIG. The timer interrupt process can not be performed, and the firing permission signal setting process of step S113 in the same process can not be performed.

  Therefore, when the error display process, which is the present routine, is started as the process performed in step S372 in the setting value confirmation display process shown in FIG. 179, the main control MPU 1310a determines that the contents of the main control internal RAM are abnormal in step S400. In order to prevent the game ball B from being fired under certain conditions, the logic of the firing permission signal is set to the firing stop logic (fire non-permitting logic) and reset from the output terminal of the predetermined output port The signal is output to the emission control unit 633 b of the payout control substrate 633 via the function-added main control output circuit.

  Following step S400, a lighting signal for displaying the alphabet E on the setting display 1310g as an error display is output to the setting display 1310g, and an error is displayed on the setting display 1310g (step S402).

  Following step S402, the main control MPU 1310a displays an error on the function display unit 1400 (step S404). In step S404, a lighting signal for lighting all of the various displays of the function display unit 1400 is output to the function display unit 1400, and an error is displayed on the function display unit 1400.

  Following step S404, the main control MPU 1310a performs serial communication initialization (step S406), and subsequently creates an error display command to set transmission information (step S408), and subsequently sets it in step S406. A peripheral control board transmission command transmission process of transmitting transmission information (error display command) as main cycle serial data to the peripheral control board 1510 is performed (step S410), and this routine is ended.

  The serial communication initial setting of step S406 is the same as the serial communication initial setting of step S234 in the setting change process shown in FIG. 178 and the serial communication initial setting of step S44 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. The peripheral control board transmission command transmission process of step S410 is the peripheral control board transmission command transmission process of step S238 in the setting change process shown in FIG. 178 and the main control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. This process is the same as the peripheral control board transmission command transmission process of step S120. The process performed in step S33 in the main control side power on process shown in FIG. 175, and the process performed in step S37 in the main control side power on process shown in FIG. When it is started and ended as the process performed in step S240 in the setting change process shown in FIG. 179 and the process performed in step S372 in the set value confirmation display process shown in FIG. 179, as described above, the infinite loop is entered. By this infinite loop, the state in which the error display process has ended is maintained, and the game can not be progressed at all.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the serial communication initial setting of step S406 is performed, and the transmission information (error display command) set in step S408 in the peripheral control board transmission command transmission processing of step S410 is used as the peripheral serial data as the peripheral data. It is sent to 1510.

  The error display command is a command that indicates that the content stored in the main control built-in RAM is abnormal (or something that can not be trusted). When the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510 a in the peripheral control board 1510 receives an error display command, error display history information (information in which the error display command is associated with the received date and time) is stored in the built-in RAM of the real time clock IC (not shown). Update).

  Further, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510 a in the peripheral control board 1510 receives an error display command, “RAM error has occurred in the blue background image in the display area of the effect display device 1600 as a RAM error notification. Along with performing control to display a message image with white characters such as "Please call me.", A slide method is provided for the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. 147 with the announcement "RAM error has occurred. Please call a clerk." Of the various speakers (vibration speaker 354, top center speaker 462, top side speaker 464, and main body), not depending on the volume adjusted by the operation of the volume adjustment switch 1510d, but forced to reach the maximum volume. Control is made to flow from the frame speaker 622 or the like. The process of performing the RAM error notification by the error display command is the process with the highest priority, and when the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510 a in the peripheral control board 1510 receives an error display command after receiving a command notifying another error, the RAM Error notification is given top priority.

[17. Various control processing of payout control board]
Next, various control processes performed by the payout control board 633 shown in FIG. 151 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 181 is a flowchart showing an example of the processing when the payout control unit is turned on, and FIG. 182 is a flowchart showing the continuation of the processing when the payout control unit is turned on shown in FIG. FIG. 184 is a flowchart showing the continuation of the power-on process, and FIG. 184 is a flowchart showing an example of a payout control unit timer interrupt process. First, the payout control unit power-on processing will be described, and then, the payout control unit timer interrupt processing will be described.

[17-1. Processing when the dispensing control unit is turned on]
First, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, under the control of the payout control MPU 633aa of the payout control portion 633a of the payout control board 633, as shown in FIGS. . When the payout control unit power-on process is started, the payout control MPU 633aa sets an interrupt mode (step S500). This interrupt mode is to set the priority of the interrupt of the payout control MPU 633aa. In the present embodiment, a payout control unit timer interrupt process described later is set to the highest priority, and when an interrupt of the payout control unit timer interrupt process occurs, the process is preferentially performed.

  Following step S500, the payout control MPU 633aa performs input / output setting (input / output setting of I / O) (step S502). In this I / O input / output setting, various input ports and various output ports of the payout control MPU 633 aa are set.

  Subsequent to step S502, the payout control MPU 633aa performs wait timer process 1 (step S506), and determines whether a power failure advance signal is input (step S508). The voltage does not rise immediately between the time the power is turned on and the predetermined voltage. On the other hand, when a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs (a phenomenon in which the supply of power is suspended), if the voltage drops and becomes smaller than the power failure warning voltage, a power failure notification signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310X as a power failure notification. Ru. Similarly, when the voltage becomes lower than the power failure warning voltage during the period from the power-on to the predetermined voltage, a power failure notification signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310X. Therefore, wait timer process 1 in step S506 is a process for waiting until the voltage becomes larger than the power failure notice voltage and becomes stable after power on. In the present embodiment, 200 milliseconds (wait timer) is used as a waiting time (wait timer). ms) is set. The determination in step S508 is performed based on the power failure notification signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310X.

  Subsequent to step S508, the payout control MPU 633aa determines whether or not the RAM clear switch 1310f of the main control board 1310X is operated (step S512). This determination does not instruct to perform the RAM clear when the logic of the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the RAM clear switch 1310 f is HI based on the logic of the operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310 f While it is determined that the RAM clear switch 1310 f is not operated, it is determined that the RAM clear is instructed when the logic of the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the RAM clear switch 1310 f is LOW. Then, it is determined that the RAM clear switch 1310 f is operated.

  If it is determined in step S512 that the payout control MPU 633aa determines that the RAM clear switch 1310f is operated, the payout control MPU 633aa sets the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG to the value 1 (step S514). That is, the payout control MPU 633 aa can execute the RAM clear process for initializing the RAM (that is, the payout control internal RAM) built in the payout control MPU 4120 a for a predetermined time after the power is turned on.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in step S512 that the payout control MPU 633aa does not operate the RAM clear switch 1310f, the payout control MPU 633aa sets the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG to the value 0 (step S516). The payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is stored in the payout control built-in RAM of the payout control MPU 633 aa, for example, various flags, various information stored in various information storage areas, and the like (for example, prize ball information storage area The logic state of the PRDY signal stored in the prize ball stock number PBS, the real ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, the mismatch counter INCC, etc., and the CR communication information storage area is set. This flag is a flag indicating whether or not the payout information related to the payout of the PRDY signal output setting information etc. is to be erased, and is set to a value 1 when the payout information is erased and a value 0 when the payout information is not erased. The payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG set in step S514 and step S516 is stored in a general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the payout control MPU 633aa.

  Following step S514 or step S516, the payout control MPU 633aa performs setting for permitting access to the payout control internal RAM (step S518). By this setting, the payout control built-in RAM can be accessed, and for example, writing (storage) or reading of the payout information can be performed.

  Subsequent to step S518, the payout control MPU 633aa sets the stack pointer (step S520). The stack pointer indicates, for example, an address stacked on the stack to temporarily store the contents of a storage element (register) in use, or temporarily returns the return address of this routine when the subroutine is ended and the process returns to this routine. It indicates the address stacked on the stack for storage, and the stack pointer advances each time the stack is stacked. In step S520, an initial address is set in the stack pointer, and the contents of the register, the return address, etc. are stacked on the stack from this initial address. Then, the stack pointer returns to the initial address by sequentially reading from the stack stacked last to the stack stacked first.

  Following step S520, the payout control MPU 633aa determines whether the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG has a value of 0 (step S522). As described above, the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is set to a value 1 when the payout information is erased, and to a value 0 when the payout information is not erased.

  In the determination of step S522, when the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is 0, that is, when it is determined that the payout information is not erased, the payout control MPU 633aa calculates a checksum (step S524). This checksum is to calculate the total by regarding the payout information stored in the payout control built-in RAM as a numerical value.

  Subsequent to step S524, the payout control MPU 633aa determines whether or not the calculated checksum value matches the checksum value stored in the payout control unit power-off processing (power-off) described later. (Step S526). When it is determined in step S526 that the payout control MPU 633aa matches, it is determined whether the payout backup flag HBK-FLG is equal to 1 (step S528). The payout backup flag HBK-FLG is a flag indicating whether or not payout backup information such as the payout information and the checksum value is stored and held in the payout control internal RAM in the payout control unit power-off process described later. The value is set to 1 when the control unit power-off process is ended normally, and to 0 when the payout control unit power-off process is not ended normally.

  When it is determined in step S528 that the payout control MPU 633aa that the payout backup flag HBK-FLG has a value of 1, that is, when it is determined that the payout control unit power-off process has ended normally, The work area of is set (step S530). In this setting, in addition to the value 0 being set to the payout backup flag HBK-FLG, recovery information is read from the ROM built in the payout control MPU 633 aa (that is, the ROM for payout control) and at the time of this power recovery. Information is set in the work area of the payout control built-in RAM. Thus, the above-described payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM, various flags, various information stored in various information storage areas, and the like (for example, an award stored in the prize ball information storage area) PRDY signal output setting information in which the logic state of the PRDY signal is set, which is stored in the ball stock number PBS, real ball count PB, drive command number DRV, mismatch counter INCC, etc. and CR communication information storage area Information to be used for various processes is set based on the payout information related to the payout of the inconsistency counter reset determination time etc. stored in the time management information storage area. Note that “power recovery” includes the state where power is turned on after the power is shut off, as well as the state where power is restored after a power failure or momentary power failure.

  On the other hand, in the determination of step S522, the payout control MPU 633aa determines that the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is not 0 (is the value 1), that is, when it is determined to clear the payout information, or in the determination of step S526. When the payout control MPU 633 aa determines that the checksum values do not match, or when the payout control MPU 633 aa determines that the payout backup flag HBK-FLG is not 1 in the determination of step S 528 (value 0), that is, If it is determined that the processing at the time of power-off of the payout control unit is not normally ended, the entire area of the payout control internal RAM is cleared (step S532). As a result, the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM is cleared.

  Following step S532, the payout control MPU 633aa sets a work area of the payout control internal RAM as an initial setting (step S534). In this setting, initial information is read out from the dispensing control built-in ROM, and this initial information is set in the working area of the dispensing control built-in RAM.

  Subsequent to step S530 or step S534, the payout control MPU 633aa performs interrupt initialization (step S536). This setting is to set an interrupt cycle when a payout control unit timer interrupt process described later is performed. In this embodiment, it is set to 2 ms.

  Subsequent to step S536, the payout control MPU 633aa performs interrupt permission setting (step S538). With this setting, the payout control unit timer interrupt process is repeatedly performed at the interrupt cycle set in step S536, that is, every 2 ms.

  Following step S538, the payout control MPU 633aa sets the value A to the watchdog timer clear register HWCL (step S539). The value A, the value B and the value C are sequentially set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL to clear the watchdog timer.

  Following step S539, the payout control MPU 633aa determines whether or not a power failure notice signal is input (step S540). When shutting down the power supply of pachinko machine 1 or when a power failure or momentary stoppage occurs, as described above, when the voltage becomes lower than the power failure warning voltage, a power failure warning signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310X It is input. The determination in step S540 is performed based on the power failure advance signal.

  In the determination of step S540, when the payout control MPU 633aa determines that there is no input of the power failure advance signal, it determines whether or not the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG has a value 1 (step S542). The 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is a flag that counts 2 ms in the payout control unit timer interrupt processing that is processed every 2 ms, which will be described later. When 2 ms has elapsed, the value 1 and 2 ms have not elapsed. It is set.

  In the determination of step S 542, when the payout control MPU 633 aa determines that the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is 0, that is, when 2 ms has not elapsed, the process returns to step S 540, and the payout control MPU 633 aa receives a power failure notification signal. It is judged whether it is done or not.

  On the other hand, in the determination of step S542, when the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is the value 1, that is, when it is determined that 2 ms has elapsed, the payout control MPU 633aa sets the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG to the value 0 (step S544). ).

  Following step S544, the payout control MPU 633aa sets the value B to the watchdog timer clear register HWCL (step S546). At this time, the value B is set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL following the value A set in step S539.

  Following step S546, the payout control MPU 633aa performs port output processing (step S548). In this port output process, various information is read from the output information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM, and various signals are output from the output terminals of various output ports of the payout control MPU 633aa based on the various information. In the output information storage area, for example, payer ACK information that indicates that various commands related to the payout from the main control board 1310X (a prize ball command and a self check command) are normally received, and drive control to the payout motor 584 is performed. Various information such as drive information, ball number information on the number of balls for which the payout motor 584 actually paid out the game balls, and LED display information to be displayed on the error LED display 633c are stored, and payout is made based on this output information. When various commands related to the payout from the main control board 1310X are normally received from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the control MPU 633aa, the payout ACK signal is output to the main control board 1310X or the drive signal is output to the payout motor 584 Or the number of balls for which the payout motor 584 actually paid out the game balls is used as the ball number information output signal. Te and outputs to the external terminal board 558 (in this embodiment, and outputs the winning balls count information output signal to the external terminal board 558 each payout motor 584 is actually paid out ten game balls.

  Specifically, a counter for judging the number-of-balls information output judgment for judging whether or not to output the number-of-balls information is provided. The ball number of the game balls paid out is counted based on the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591 in the port input process of step S550 described later, and the ball number of the game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 584. It is stored and updated in the prize ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM by a process (program) (not shown) for monitoring.

  In a process (program) (not shown) for monitoring the number of balls of the gaming balls actually paid out by the payout motor 584, the prize ball number information output determination counter stored in the prize ball information storage area of the payout control internal RAM. Based on the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591 in the port input process of step S550 described later, the value of the ball number of the gaming balls actually paid out by the payout motor 584 is added to the value and stored and updated.

  In the port output process of step S548, the value of the prize ball number information output determination counter is read from the prize ball information storage area, and when the value of the read prize ball number information output determination counter exceeds the value 10 ( That is, when the number of balls of the game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 584 reaches 10 balls, a prize ball number information output signal is output to the external terminal board 558 (in this case, the number of balls exceeded) The value is stored and updated in the award ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM described above as the value of the award ball number information output determination counter), and the display signal is output to the error LED indicator 633c.

  Subsequent to step S548, the payout control MPU 633aa performs port input processing (step S550). In this port input process, various signals input to the input terminals of the various input ports of the payout control MPU 633aa are read and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the payout control internal RAM. For example, an operation signal (RAM clear signal) of the RAM clear switch 1310 f, a detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590, a detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591, a detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154, and a BRQ signal from the CR unit. , BRDY signal and CR connection signal, and a main payment ACK signal from the main control board 1310 X for notifying that the main control board 1310 X has normally received various commands transmitted in the command transmission processing described later, and the like as input information Store in the input information storage area.

  Subsequent to step S550, the payout control MPU 633aa performs a timer update process (step S552). In this timer update process, when it is determined whether or not the ball arm state is generated by the discharge blade 589 to which the rotation of the rotation shaft of the motor 584 is transmitted, the ball arm judgment time set as the judgment condition, The skip determination time set when the fixed position determination of the payout blade 589 is not performed, the lower plate 202 is set as the determination condition when determining whether or not the game balls stored in the full is full When it is determined whether or not the number of gaming balls taken into the guidance passage 570a of the ball guidance unit 570 is greater than or equal to a predetermined number based on the detection signal from the ball breakage detection sensor 574 that is full. Besides performing time management such as the out-of-ball judgment time set as the judgment condition, the number of balls of the game ball paid out by being received by the ball accommodating portion 589 b of the distraction blade 589 It is determined whether or not to reset the inconsistency counter INCC for monitoring whether or not the payout of the game ball which is inconsistent due to the mismatch between the number of balls detected by the payout detection sensor 591 is repeated. At this time, time management of the inconsistency counter reset judgment time set as the judgment condition is performed. For example, since the timer interruption period is set to 2 ms when the ball set determination time is set to 5005 ms, the ball set determination time is reduced by 2 ms each time this timer update processing is performed, and the subtraction result is a value By becoming 0, it is measuring the ball gambling judgment time correctly. These various determination times are stored as time management information in the time management information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM.

  Subsequent to step S552, the payout control MPU 633aa performs a CR communication process (step S554). In this CR communication process, the input information is read out from the above-described input information storage area, and based on this input information, whether various signals (BRQ signal, BRDY signal and CR connection signal) from the CR unit are input or not judge. The payout control MPU 633aa exchanges various signals with the CR unit based on various signals from the CR unit. In the process of setting the work area of the payout control internal RAM in step S530, as described above, various flags which are payout backup information stored in the payout control internal RAM, and various information stored in the various information storage area (For example, the number of ball stock PBS, the number of real ball count PB, the number of drive command DRV, the number of misaligned counters INCC, etc. stored in the prize ball information storage area, and the PRDY stored in the CR communication information storage area Information to be used for various processes is set based on the payout information on the payout of the PRDY signal output setting information etc. in which the logic state of the signal is set.

  By this process, for example, even if there is a momentary power failure or power failure, values such as the number of ball stock PBS, actual ball count PB, number of drive commands DRV, inconsistency counter INCC, etc. at power recovery are stored as payout backup information. The values can be restored to values such as the winning ball stock number PBS, the real ball count PB, the driving command number DRV, the mismatch counter INCC, etc. immediately before the instantaneous stop or power failure. Thereby, even when the payout operation of the gaming ball by the payout device 580 is being executed, even if the payout operation can not be continued due to a momentary stop or power failure, the payout operation can be continued at the time of power recovery. Since it is possible, the game balls can be paid out to the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202 without excess or deficiency. In other words, while the payout control MPU 633 aa is exchanging various signals with the CR unit in the CR communication processing, the payout control MPU 633 aa causes a momentary power loss or a power failure while paying out the gaming ball to the upper plate 201 or the lower plate 202 Even if the exchange of various signals is interrupted and it is not possible to continue the payout of the game balls, the number of ball stock number PBS, real ball count PB, number of drive commands DRV, mismatch counter INCC, etc. The value is restored to a value such as a prize ball stock number PBS, a real ball count PB, a drive command number DRV, an inconsistency counter INCC, etc. immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure, stored as payout backup information. The exchange of various signals between the pachinko machine 1 (delivery control MPU 633 aa) and the CR unit just before stopping or power failure is restored. It is possible to continue from, so that it is possible to continue to payout of game balls.

  As described above, the exchange of various signals between the pachinko machine 1 (the payout control MPU 633 aa) and the CR unit is restored to the state immediately before the momentary stop or stop upon power recovery even if the momentary stop or stop occurs. The various signals by the pachinko machine 1 (the payout control MPU 633 aa) and the CR unit do not change due to the influence of a momentary stop or stop. Therefore, the reliability of exchange of various signals by the pachinko machine 1 (the payout control MPU 633 aa) and the CR unit can be enhanced.

  Also, various information stored in the CR communication information storage area is included in the payout backup information. In the CR communication process, when the power returns, the PRDY signal output setting information is read out from the CR communication information storage area stored in the payout control internal RAM, which is set in the process for setting the work area of the payout control internal RAM in step S530. For example, when the read PRDY signal output setting information is set to the logic state of the PRDY signal which indicates that the payout operation for paying out the rental ball is impossible, for example, the payout control of the PRDY signal is performed. Output to the CR unit from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the MPU 633aa. Then, for example, in the retry operation monitoring process performed as one process of the main operation setting process, the value of the inconsistency counter INCC of the award ball information storage area stored in the payout control internal RAM, which is included in the payout backup information. It is determined whether the value of the mismatch counter INCC is smaller than the mismatch threshold INCTH based on and if the value of the mismatch counter INCC is not smaller than the mismatch threshold INCTH, the retry operation operates abnormally. If it is determined that the payout operation of the gaming ball by the payout device 580 is abnormal, that is, the retry error flag RTERR-FLG is set to a value of 1, and in the payout ball game operation determination setting process, As setting of the error status to CR unit, for example, when not communicating with CR unit The logic state of the PRDY signal informing of dispensing operation is not possible (LOW) is set to PRDY signal output setting information stored in the CR communication information storage area for exiting.

  Thus, in the CR communication process, the logic state of the PRDY signal is read out from the CR communication information storage area at the next timer interrupt after power recovery, and the PRDY signal is an output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 633 aa. Output to the CR unit. Thus, for example, immediately before the momentary stop, if the payout operation of the gaming ball by the payout device 580 is in an abnormal state, since the state is restored at the time of power recovery, it is extremely early after power recovery. At the stage, a PRDY signal can be output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 633 aa to the CR unit, and a payout device 580 can be delivered to the CR unit. Can be informed that the game ball payout operation by the player is in an abnormal state. As a result, it is possible to prevent the output of BRDY, which is a useless ball rental request signal from the CR unit, at an extremely early stage after power recovery.

  Also, in the CR communication process, in the port input process of step S550, the CR connection signal is read out from the input information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM, and the logic is HI based on this CR connection signal, that is, pachinko machine When the power is turned on and the payout control board 633 and the CR unit are electrically connected, PRDY is used to indicate that the payout operation for paying out the rental balls is possible. While the logic state of the signal is HI and is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 633aa to the CR unit, the logic is LOW, that is, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on. When the dispensing control board 633 and the CR unit are not electrically connected, the dispensing operation for dispensing the rental balls is impossible. To convey the fact is outputted from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the dispensing control MPU633aa to CR unit logic state of the PRDY signal as LOW. The state of the logic of the EXS signal that indicates that one dispensing operation has been started or ended is stored in the CR communication information storage area of the dispensing control internal RAM as EXS signal output setting information, and A CR connection signal that indicates whether or not the CR unit is electrically connected is stored in the state information storage area as CR connection information.

  Following step S554, the payout control MPU 633aa performs full tank and out-of-balls check processing (step S556). In this full tank and out-of-ball check process, the input information is read from the above-described input information storage area, and based on this input information, the gaming ball in which the lower tray 202 is stored by the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 The number of gaming balls taken into the guiding passage 570a of the above-mentioned ball guiding unit 570 is determined by the detection signal from the ball breakage detecting sensor 574 or more by the detection signal from the ball breakage detecting sensor 574 or more. It is determined whether or not the For example, the determination as to whether or not the lower plate 202 is full with the gaming balls stored therein uses the timer interrupt cycle 2 ms to check from the full detection sensor 154 in the current full / full out check process. When the detection signal is ON, and the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is OFF in the previous (2 ms ago) full tank and out-of-ball check process, that is, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 turns from OFF to ON When transition is made, counting of the full tank determination time described above is started in the timer update process of step S552. Then, when the full tank determination time becomes 0 in the timer update process, that is, when the full tank determination time is reached, whether the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is ON in the full tank and out-of-ball check process It is determined whether or not. In this determination, when the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is ON, the lower plate 202 stores the full game information in the above-described state information storage area, which indicates that the game ball is full and it is full. Do. On the other hand, when the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is OFF, full information is transmitted to the state information storage area to indicate that the lower tray 202 is not full with gaming balls stored therein.

  It is also determined whether the number of gaming balls taken into the guiding passage 570a of the ball guiding unit 570 is equal to or more than a predetermined number using the timer interrupt cycle 2 ms to check whether the current tank is full or not. When the detection signal from the ball breakage switch is ON, and when the detection signal from the ball breakage switch is OFF in the previous (2 ms before) full tank and ball breakage check processing, that is, the detection signal from the ball breakage detection sensor 574 is When transitioning from OFF to ON, clocking of the ball out determination time described above in the timer update process of step S552 is started. Then, when the ball out determination time has become 0 in the timer update process, that is, when the ball out determination time has come, whether the detection signal from the ball out detection sensor 574 is ON in this full tank and out of ball check process It is determined whether or not. In this determination, when the detection signal from the ball breakage detection sensor 574 is ON, it is determined that the number of gaming balls taken into the guidance passage 570a of the ball guidance unit 570 is greater than or equal to a predetermined number. When information is stored in the state information storage area while the detection signal from the ball breakage detection sensor 574 is OFF, it is assumed that the number of gaming balls taken into the guidance passage 570a of the ball guidance unit 570 is not more than the predetermined number. The out-of-ball information to that effect is stored in the state information storage area.

  Subsequent to step S556, the payout control MPU 633aa performs command reception processing (step S558). In this command reception process, various commands related to the payout from the main control board 1310X (a prize ball command and a self check command) are received. When the various commands are normally received, the payer ACK information to that effect is stored in the output information storage area described above. On the other hand, when various commands can not be received normally, a connection error is transmitted that indicates that the connection between the main control substrate 1310X and the payout control substrate 633 is abnormal (the various command signals are abnormal). Information is stored in the state information storage area described above.

  Subsequent to step S558, the payout control MPU 633aa performs command analysis processing (step S560). In this command analysis process, the command received in step S558 is analyzed, and the analyzed command is stored as reception command information in the reception command information storage area of the payout control internal RAM.

  Subsequent to step S560, the payout control MPU 633aa performs main operation setting processing (step S562). In this main operation setting process, operations such as winning balls, lending balls, dropping balls, and ball gloves are set, determination of retry operation is performed, and the number of unpaid balls (number of winning balls stock) is monitored. .

  Subsequent to step S562, the payout control MPU 633aa performs an LED display data creation process (step S564). In this LED display data creation process, various information is read out from the above-mentioned state information storage area, and display data to be displayed on the error LED indicator 633c of the payout control board 633 is created and output information storage area mentioned above as LED display information. Remember. For example, the above-mentioned ball out information is read out from the state information storage area, and based on this ball out information, when the number of balls of the game ball taken into the guiding passage 570a of the ball guiding unit 570 is not more than a predetermined number, Display data (in the present embodiment, display value 1 (number “1”)) is created and LED display information is stored in the output information storage area.

  Subsequent to step S564, the payout control MPU 633aa performs command transmission processing (step S566). In this command transmission process, various information is read from the above-mentioned state information storage area, and various commands (frame state 1 command, error cancellation navi command and frame state 2 command) to be classified into the state display based on the various information are created. Then, it transmits to the main control board 1310X. For example, when the out-of-ball information is read out from the state information storage area, the frame state 1 is obtained when the number of balls of the gaming ball taken into the guidance passage 570a of the ball guidance unit 570 is not more than a predetermined number. A command is created and transmitted to the main control board 1310X.

  Following step S566, the payout control MPU 633aa sets the value C to the watchdog timer clear register HWCL (step S568). The value C is set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL in step S568, so that the value C is set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL following the value B set in step S546. As a result, the value A, the value B and the value C are sequentially set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL, and the watchdog timer is cleared.

  Following step S568, the payout control MPU 633aa returns the process to step S539 again, sets the value A in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL, and determines in step S540 whether or not the power failure notification signal is input. If there is no signal input, it is determined in step S542 whether or not the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG has a value of 1, and when this 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG has a value of 1, that is, 2 ms has elapsed, step S544. At step S546, the value B is set to the watchdog timer clear register HWCL at step S546, port output processing is performed at step S548, and port input processing is performed at step S550, and step S552. Perform timer update processing, and step S5 At step S556, the CR communication process is performed. At step S556, the full tank and ball out check process is performed. At step S558, the command reception process is performed. At step S560, the command analysis process is performed. The LED display data creation process is performed in S564, the command transmission process is performed in step S566, the value C is set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL in step S568, and steps S539 to S568 are repeated. The process of steps S539 to S568 is referred to as "payout control unit main process".

  The processing content of the payout control unit main processing varies in accordance with the progress of the game by the main control board 1310X. For this reason, the time required for the processing of the payout control MPU 633aa will vary. Therefore, in the port output process of step S548, the payout control MPU 633aa preferentially outputs, to the main control board 1310X, a payment acknowledgment signal indicating that various commands related to the payout from the main control board 1310X have been normally received. There is. As a result, the payout control MPU 633 aa secures the processing time so that other fluctuating processing can be sufficiently performed.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in step S540 that the payout control MPU 633aa determines that there has been an input of a power failure advance signal, the payout control MPU 633aa performs interrupt prohibition setting (step S570). With this setting, a payout control unit timer interrupt process to be described later is not performed, the writing to the payout control internal RAM is prevented, and the rewriting of the payout information described above is protected.

  Following step S570, the payout control MPU 633aa stops the output of the drive signal to the payout motor 584 (step S574). Thereby, the payout of the game ball is stopped.

  Following step S 574, the payout control MPU 633 aa performs setting for clearing the watchdog timer (step S 576). This clear setting is performed by sequentially setting the value A, the value B and the value C in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL as described above.

  Following step S576, the payout control MPU 633aa calculates a checksum and stores the calculated value (step S578). This checksum is calculated by regarding the payout information of the work area of the payout control built-in RAM as a numerical value, excluding the storage area of the value of the checksum and the value of the payout backup flag HBK-FLG calculated in step S524.

  Following step S578, the payout control MPU 633aa sets the payout backup flag HBK-FLG to the value 1 (step S580). This completes the storage of the payout backup information.

  Following step S 580, the payout control MPU 633 aa prohibits access to the payout control internal RAM (step S 582). By this setting, access to the payout control internal RAM is inhibited and writing and reading can not be performed, and the payout backup information stored in the payout control internal RAM is protected.

  Following step S 582, the payout control MPU 633 aa enters an infinite loop. In this infinite loop, since the value A, the value B and the value C are not sequentially set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL, the watchdog timer is not cleared. For this reason, the payout control MPU 633 aa is reset, and then the payout control unit power-on process is performed again. The process of step S570 to step S582 and the infinite loop are referred to as "payout control unit power-off process".

  The pachinko machine 1 (the payout control MPU 633 aa) is reset when a power failure occurs or when it is momentarily stopped, and the payout control unit is turned on when the power is restored thereafter.

  In step S526, it is checked whether the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM is normal or not, and in step S528, whether or not the processing upon power-off of the payout control unit has been normally completed. Is examining. As described above, by checking the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM in duplicate, it is checked whether or not the payout backup information is stored due to fraud.

[17-2. Disbursement control unit timer interrupt processing]
Next, the payout control unit timer interrupt processing will be described. The payout control unit timer interrupt process is repeatedly performed every interrupt cycle (2 ms in the present embodiment) set in the payout control unit power-on process shown in FIGS.

  When the payout control unit timer interrupt process is started, the payout control MPU 633aa sets the timer interrupt to be inhibited and switches (saves) the register as shown in FIG. 184 (step S590). Here, the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) used in the above-described payout control unit main processing is switched to the auxiliary register. By using this auxiliary register in the dispensing control unit timer interrupt processing, the value of the general purpose register is not overwritten. This prevents the destruction of the contents of the general purpose register used in the payout control unit main processing.

  Following step S590, the payout control MPU 633aa sets the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG to the value 1 (step S592). This 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is a flag that counts 2 ms every time 2 ms of this payout control unit timer interrupt processing is performed, that is, a value of 0 when 1 ms or 2 ms has not elapsed when 2 ms has elapsed. Each is set.

  Subsequent to step S592, the payout control MPU 633aa switches (returns) the register (step S594). This return is switched from the auxiliary register used in the dispensing control unit timer interrupt processing to the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register). By using this general-purpose register in the payout control unit main processing, the value of the auxiliary register is not overwritten. This prevents the destruction of the contents of the auxiliary register used in the dispensing control unit timer interrupt processing.

  Following step S594, the payout control MPU 633aa sets the interrupt permission (step S596), and ends this routine.

[18. Various control processing of peripheral control board]
Next, various processes of the peripheral control board 1510 for receiving various commands from the main control board 1310X (main control MPU 1310a) shown in FIG. 151 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 185 is a flowchart showing an example of peripheral control unit power-on processing, FIG. 186 is a flowchart showing an example of peripheral control unit V blank interrupt processing, and FIG. 187 is an example of peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing FIG. 188 is a flowchart showing an example of peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing, and FIG. 189 is a flowchart showing an example of peripheral control unit power failure notice signal interruption processing. First, peripheral control unit power on processing will be described, and then peripheral control unit V blank interrupt processing, peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing, peripheral control unit power failure notification signal interrupt processing will be described. . In the present embodiment, the peripheral control unit blackout notification signal interrupt processing is set highest as the priority of the interrupt processing, and then the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing, and peripheral control unit It is set in order of V blank interrupt processing.

  As described above, in the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510, the CPU, the RAM, the VDP, the VRAM, the sound source, the SATA controller, various I / O interfaces and the like are integrated on one semiconductor chip.

[18-1. Peripheral control unit power-on process]
First, peripheral control unit power-on processing will be described with reference to FIG. When the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, under the control of the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510, as shown in FIG. When the power-on process of the peripheral control unit is started, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a performs an initial setting process (step S1000). In this initial setting process, a process of initializing the peripheral control IC 1510a itself, a process of determining a hot start / cold start, a process of setting a wait timer after reset, a process of transferring various control information (peripheral data), etc. I do. The CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a first performs processing for initializing the peripheral control IC 1510a itself, but the time taken for the processing for initializing the peripheral control IC 1510a is on the order of microseconds (μs), and the peripheral control IC 1510a is extremely short. Can be initialized. As a result, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a enters a state in which the interrupt permission is set, for example, a command related to control of a game effect, which is output from the main control board 1310X in peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing described later. It will be in the state which can receive various commands, such as a command regarding the state of pachinko machine 1, or.

  Subsequent to step S1000, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a performs current time information acquisition processing (step S1002). In this current time information acquisition process, calendar information for specifying a date and time information for specifying hour / minute / second are acquired from a built-in RAM of a real time clock IC (not shown), and the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a Set calendar information and current time information.

  In this embodiment, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a acquires calendar information and time information from the built-in RAM of the real time clock IC only once at the time of power on. In addition, after the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a performs this current time information acquisition processing, a clear signal is output to the external WDT (not shown) so that the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a is not reset.

  Following step S1002, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a sets the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG to the value 0 (step S1004). The V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag for determining whether or not peripheral control unit steady processing to be described later is to be performed, and has a value of 1 when peripheral control unit steady processing is executed, and peripheral control unit steady processing The value is set to 0 when not executing. The V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is input from the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510 a from the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510 a to indicate that the screen data (information defining the configuration of the screen) from the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510 a can be received. A value of 1 is set in peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing to be executed, which will be described later, which is triggered by the event. In step S1004, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is initialized once by setting the value 0 to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG. Further, after setting the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG to 0, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a outputs a clear signal to the external WDT so that the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a is not reset.

  Subsequent to step S1004, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a determines whether the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value 1 (step S1006). If the CPU of peripheral control IC 1510a determines that V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is not 1 (is 0), the process returns to step S1006 again to determine whether V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1 It is repeatedly determined whether or not. By repeating such a determination, it will be in the state which waits until peripheral control part steady processing is performed. After the CPU of peripheral control IC 1510a determines whether or not V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value 1, it outputs a clear signal to external WDT so that the CPU of peripheral control IC 1510a is not reset. ing.

  In the determination of step S1006, when the CPU of peripheral control IC 1510a determines that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value 1, that is, it is determined that peripheral control unit steady processing is to be performed, the steady processing in progress flag SP-FLG is first set. The value 1 is set (step S1008). The steady process in progress flag SP-FLG is set to a value 1 when the peripheral control unit steady process is being executed, and a value 0 when the peripheral control unit steady process is completed.

  Subsequent to step S1008, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a performs 1 ms interrupt timer activation processing (step S1010). In this 1 ms interrupt timer activation process, the 1 ms interrupt timer for executing peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing to be described later is activated, and the number of times the 1 ms interrupt timer is activated and peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is executed. The value 1 is set to the 1 ms timer interrupt execution number STN for counting and the initialization of the 1 ms timer interrupt execution number STN is also performed. The 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is updated by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process.

  Subsequent to step S1010, the CPU of the periphery control IC 1510a performs a rendering operation unit monitoring process (step S1014). In this effect operation unit monitoring process, in the effect operation unit information acquisition process in peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process described later, the first rotation detection sensor 347, the second rotation detection sensor 348, and the press detection provided in the effect operation unit 300 Based on detection signals from various detection sensors (hereinafter, referred to as “various sensors provided in the rendering operation unit 300”) such as the sensor 381, the elevation detection sensor 382, etc., the rotation (rotation direction) of the rotation operation unit 302 and Various information (for example, rotation (rotation direction) history information of the rotation operation unit 302 created based on detection signals from various sensors provided in the rendering operation unit 300, and pressing operation of the pressing operation unit 303 and the like) Based on the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a in which the operation history information of the unit 303, etc.) is set. Monitors operation whether the rotational direction and the pushing operation section 303 of the rotary operation unit 302, appropriately determined whether to reflect the status of the operation of the rotation direction and the pushing operation section 303 of the rotary operation unit 302 to the game effects.

  Note that the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a also performs lamp pallet setting processing as one processing of the rendering operation unit monitoring processing. In the lamp pallet setting process, the luminance of the LED used as direct light and the luminance of the LED used as indirect light based on the lamp pallet setting table configured from the above-described designated luminance value, normal pallet value, and special pallet value And, respectively. During the demonstration (demonstrating demonstration in a player waiting state) and effects, the lamp pallet setting process is executed, and the player (or a clerk of a game hall clerk or the like) operates the effect operation unit 301 (rotation operation) When one luminance designation value ranging from the first luminance designation value to the 31st luminance designation value which is the maximum luminance is set by operating the portion 302 and the pressing operation portion 303), the set luminance The gradation information set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a can be updated so as to be a designated value.

  Following step S1014, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a performs display data output processing (step S1016). In this display data output process, the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a reads image data from the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 based on an instruction from the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a and generates it on the VRAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a. The drawing data for one screen (one frame) is output to the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. Thus, various screens (images) are drawn (displayed) on the effect display device 1600. In the display data output process, when drawing is performed that exceeds the drawing capability of the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a, outputting of the generated drawing data of one screen (one frame) is canceled. There is. Although this can prevent a delay in the processing time, so-called dropouts may occur, but the vibration speaker 354, the top center speaker 462, the top side speaker 464, and the main frame by sound data output processing described later. From the various speakers such as the speaker 622 (hereinafter referred to as "various speakers"), it is possible to give priority to effects by music or sound effects adapted to various effects. Further, in this display data output process, the door frame 3 is selected according to the light emission data indicated by the pointer out of the light emission data arranged in time series constituting the light emission mode generation schedule data set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a. It outputs to various decoration boards provided and various decoration boards (including panel drive board 1720) provided in game board 5.

  Following step S1016, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a performs sound data output processing (step S1018). In this sound data output process, in the sound data creation process described later, the sound source of the peripheral control IC 1510a reads the sound data from the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 based on an instruction from the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a and sets the output channels to various speakers Output. As a result, sounds such as music and sound effects that match various effects flow from various speakers.

  Subsequent to step S1018, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a performs scheduler update processing (step S1020). In this scheduler update process, various schedule data set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a are updated. For example, in the scheduler update process, in order to instruct which screen data is to be output to the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510 a from the head screen data among the screen data arranged in time series that configures screen generation schedule data To update the pointer.

  In addition, in the scheduler update process, a pointer is used to indicate which light emission data is to be output starting from the light emission data at the top among the light emission data arranged in time series that configures the light emission mode generation schedule data. Update.

  Also, in the scheduler update process, the sound at the top of the sound command data instructing sound data such as music and sound effects and sound data of notification sounds and notification sounds arranged in time series that make up the sound generation schedule data The pointer is updated in order to instruct which sound command data is to be output from the command data to the sound source of the peripheral control IC 1510a.

  Also, in the scheduler update processing, among drive data of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in time series that make up the electric drive source schedule data, it is assumed that the drive data of the first one is output target Update the pointer to indicate what to do. Drive data of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in time series constituting the electric drive source schedule data is peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt which is repeatedly executed each time 1 ms timer interrupt described later is generated. Updated with motor and solenoid drive processing in processing. In the motor and solenoid drive processing that is repeatedly executed each time the 1 ms timer interrupt occurs, the electric drive source such as the motor and solenoid is driven according to the drive data indicated by the pointer, and the next drive defined in time series is performed. It updates pointers to data, and updates pointers every time it executes its own processing. That is, since the drive data instructed by the pointer updated in the motor and solenoid drive processing is forcibly updated in the scheduler update process, the pointer is originally instructed for some reason in the motor and solenoid drive processing. Even when other driving data is designated from the driving data to be designated, the data is forcibly updated so as to designate the driving data to be originally designated in the scheduler updating process.

  Subsequent to step S1020, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a performs a received command analysis process (step S1022). In this reception command analysis process, various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310X are received in the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process described later, and the various commands received are analyzed. Various commands from the main control board 1310X are received by peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing and stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a. In this reception command analysis processing, they are stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a Analyze the various commands The CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a reads out screen generation schedule data, light emission mode generation schedule data, sound generation schedule data, electrical drive source schedule data, etc. from the control ROM 1510b based on the analyzed various commands ( Extract) and set in the RAM of peripheral control IC 1510a.

  Note that the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a also performs lamp pallet setting processing as one processing of the received command analysis processing. In the lamp pallet setting process, the luminance of the LED used as direct light and the luminance of the LED used as indirect light based on the lamp pallet setting table configured from the above-described designated luminance value, normal pallet value, and special pallet value And, respectively. The peripheral control IC 1510a analyzes various commands from the main control board 1310X, reads out (extracts) the light emission mode generation schedule data from the control ROM 1510b based on the analyzed various commands, and executes the lamp pallet setting process. And the player (or a clerk of a game hall clerk or the like) operates the rendering operation unit 301 (the rotation operation unit 302, the pressing operation unit 303) to obtain the above-mentioned first brightness designated value to the maximum brightness. When one luminance designation value ranging up to 31 luminance designation values is set, the gradation information described above can be updated and set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a so as to become the set luminance designation value. It is supposed to be.

  In addition, the CPU of peripheral control IC 1510a, the command from the main control board 1310X received in this peripheral control unit command interrupt processing, for example, the starting opening winning command for instructing the start of starting opening winning effect, a normal symbol of Normal symbol memory command for identifying the number of reservations (0 to 4), symbol tuning effect start command for instructing the start of symbol tuning effect, symbol memory command which is output when the number of start suspension changes, a special winning opening Whether or not it is a large winning opening 1 count display command output each time a game ball is accepted in 2005 is analyzed, and it is recognized which gaming state is currently.

  Various commands from the main control board 1310X are received by peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing and stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a. In received command analysis processing, they are stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a. Analyze various commands. The various commands include various commands classified into special figure 1 tuning effects, various commands classified into special figure 2 tuning effects, various commands classified into big hit relation, various commands classified into power on, Figure: Various commands classified into a related to tuning effect, Various commands classified into a regular electronic production related, Various commands classified into a notification display, Various commands classified into a status display, Various commands classified into a test related, There are various commands which are classified into others, and various commands which are classified into specific history.

  Note that the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a analyzes various commands stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a in this received command analysis process, and when the various commands classified into the specific history are included, they are not shown. The specific history information is updated in the built-in RAM of the real time clock IC. Specifically, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a analyzes various commands stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a in this received command analysis process, and the number of gaming balls collected at the out port 1008 is 10 balls. Every time it reaches, when the ball collection command is sent to notify that effect, the above-mentioned ball collection information is updated and the ball collection history information is stored in the built-in RAM of the real time clock IC (not shown). When the setting change command to notify the effect is included, the setting value history information described above is updated and stored in the built-in RAM of the real time clock IC (not shown) or the content stored in the main control built-in RAM is abnormal ( Or when an error display command to notify that it can not be trusted) is included. A setting key to update error display history information and store it in the built-in RAM of the real time clock IC (not shown) or to confirm the set value stored in the set value dedicated area described later in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM. When the ON operation command of is included, the ON operation history information of the setting key described above is updated and stored in the built-in RAM of the real time clock IC (not shown).

  Further, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a analyzes various commands stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a in the received command analysis processing, and when the ON operation command of the setting key is included, the ball collection history described above A predetermined specific history information display permission condition for allowing display permission of specific history information such as information, setting value history information, error display history information, and ON operation history information of a setting key is satisfied. In the state where the predetermined specific history information display permission condition is satisfied, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a performs a rotation operation and a pressing operation of the rotation operation unit 302 by a person who confirms the specific history information in the rendering operation unit monitoring process of step S1014. It is monitored whether or not the pressing operation of the section 303 is performed, and when it is operated, the image displayed so far is switched to the specific history information display image for selecting and displaying the specific history information, and the effect display device The screen generation schedule data to be displayed in the display area 1600 is read out (extracted) from the control ROM 1510 b and set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510 a. The peripheral control IC 1510a analyzes various commands stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a in this received command analysis process, and when the setting key OFF operation command is included, the specific history information display image is displayed If it is displayed in the display area of the device 1600, the screen generation schedule data of the image displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 immediately before switching to the specific history information display image is switched back to the original.

  Further, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a analyzes various commands stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a in the received command analysis processing, and when an error display command is included, the display area of the effect display device 1600 is displayed. The screen generation schedule data for displaying the message image of the white character "Error has occurred" in the blue background image is read out (extracted) from the control ROM 1510b and set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a. Then, an announcement that "an error has occurred" is set to the maximum volume, and sound generation schedule data for streaming from various speakers is read out (extracted) from the control ROM 1510b and set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a.

  Subsequent to step S1022, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a performs a warning process (step S1024). In this warning process, when the commands analyzed in the received command analysis process in step S1022 include various commands classified as notification display, they are set to an abnormality display mode for executing various abnormality notifications. The screen generation schedule data, the light emission mode generation schedule data, the sound generation schedule data, the electrical drive source schedule data and the like are read out (extracted) from the control ROM 1510 b and set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510 a. In the warning process, when a plurality of abnormalities occur simultaneously, the abnormality notification is performed from the highest priority registered in advance to the abnormality notification, and the abnormality is automatically resolved to another abnormality notification that has been resolved. It is supposed to By this, it is possible to simultaneously monitor a plurality of abnormalities without losing information that one abnormality has occurred after another abnormality has occurred and before the other is resolved. Can.

  Following step S1024, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a performs an RCT acquisition information update process (step S1026). In this RTC acquisition information update process, the calendar information and time information acquired in the current time information acquisition process of step S1002 and stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a are updated. By this RCT acquisition information update process, hour, minute, and second which are time information stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a are updated, and calendar information stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a based on the updated time information The date is updated.

  Following step S1026, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a performs display data creation processing (step S1030). In this display data creation process, the pointer is updated in the scheduler update process of step S1020, and the screen data indicated by the pointer is displayed from the control ROM 1510b among the screen data arranged in time series that constitutes the screen generation schedule data. It reads out (extracts) and outputs it to VDP of peripheral control IC 1510a.

  When screen data is input from the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a, the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a reads image data from the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 based on the input screen data and draws (displays) it on the effect display device 1600. Drawing data for one screen (one frame) is generated in the built-in VRAM.

  Subsequent to step S1030, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a performs a sound data creation process (step S1032). In this sound data creation process, among the sound command data arranged in time series that the pointer is updated in the scheduler update process of step S1020 and that is the sound generation schedule data, the sound command data indicated by the pointer is It reads out (extracts) from the control ROM 1510 b and sets it in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510 a. When sound command data is input from the CPU of peripheral control IC 1510a, the sound source of peripheral control IC 1510a reads the sound data from SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 and performs sound data such as music and sound effects according to the track numbers defined in the sound command data. In addition, set the output channel to be used according to the output channel number.

  In the sound data creation process, each time the sound data creation process is performed (that is, each time the peripheral control unit steady process is performed), the volume adjustment switch 1510d is selected based on the volume adjustment operation signal from the volume adjustment switch 1510d. The slide position is specified. The CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a controls the sound source of the peripheral control IC 1510a so that the volume corresponds to the slide position of the volume adjustment switch 1510d, and is set in this sound data creation processing in the sound data output processing of step S1018. Output sound data from the output channel to various speakers. As a result, sounds such as music and sound effects are made to flow from various speakers according to various effects.

  In addition, the notification sound and the notification sound flow without being totally dependent on the volume adjustment based on the slide operation of the volume adjustment switch 1510d, and the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a is surrounded by the program from the mute to the maximum volume. The sound source of the control IC 1510a can be controlled and adjusted. The volume adjusted by this program is designed to be able to smoothly change from mute to maximum volume. For example, even if an attendant such as a store clerk in the game hall slides the volume adjustment switch 1510d to set the volume small, the pachinko machine 1 reduces the effect sound such as music and sound effects flowing from the various speakers. The notification sound set to the large volume (in the present embodiment, the maximum volume) can be made to flow when the problem occurs in the above or when the player is performing a wrongdoing. Therefore, even if the volume of the effect sound is reduced, it is possible to prevent the notification sound from making it difficult for a clerk such as a salesperson in the game hall to notice the occurrence of a malfunction or the player's fraudulent act. Also, based on the current volume set by volume adjustment based on the slide operation of the volume adjustment switch 1510d, the volume of the advertisement sound is reduced to prevent it from interfering with music or sound effects. There is a possibility that the screen (image) developed in the effect display device 1600 may be rendered more powerful as the sound volume is increased to add music and sound effects, or the game state may be shifted to the player's advantageous gaming state. It can also be announced that it is expensive.

  Subsequent to step S1032, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a performs backup processing (step S1034). In this backup processing, the contents stored in the RAM of peripheral control IC 1510a are copied and backed up to the backup area for steady processing provided in the RAM of peripheral control IC 1510a, and the contents stored in SDRAM 1510c1 and 1510c2 are stored in SDRAM 1510c1 and SDRAM 1510c1, Copy to the regular process backup area provided in 1510 c 2 and back it up.

  Following step S1034, the CPU of peripheral control IC 1510a performs WDT clear processing (step S1036). In this WDT clear processing, a clear signal is output to the external WDT so that the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510 a is not reset.

  Following step S1036, the CPU of peripheral control IC 1510a sets the flag SP-FLG to 0 during steady processing as completion of peripheral control unit steady processing (step S1038), and returns to step S1004 again to detect the V blank signal The flag VB-FLG is initialized by setting the value 0, and the determination in step S1006 is repeated until the value V is set to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG in peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing described later. That is, in step S1006, the process waits until the value 1 is set to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG, and when it is determined in step S1006 that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is the value 1, steps S1008 to S1008 The process of S1038 is performed, and the process returns to step S1004 again. As described above, when it is determined in step S1006 that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has the value 1, the processing of steps S1008 to S1038 is performed. The process of steps S1008 to S1038 is referred to as "peripheral control unit steady process".

  In this peripheral control unit steady processing, first, the peripheral control unit steady processing is being executed in step S1008, starting from setting the value 1 to the flag SP-FLG during steady processing, and in step S1010 the 1 ms interrupt timer activation processing , And step S1036 and finally, in step S1038, when the value in the steady process in progress flag SP-FLG is set to 0 as the completion of the execution of the peripheral control unit steady process, the process is completed. Become. The peripheral control unit steady processing is executed when the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value 1 in step S1006. As described above, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG indicates that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG can receive screen data from the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510 a from the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510 a to the peripheral control IC 1510 a. A value of 1 is set in peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing, which will be described later, which is executed in response to input to the CPU. In the present embodiment, the frame frequency of the effect display device 1600 (the number of screen updates per second) is set to approximately 30 fps as described above, so the interval at which the V blank signal is input is approximately 33 It is 3 ms (= 1000 ms ÷ 30 fps). That is, the peripheral control unit steady processing is repeatedly performed about every 33.3 ms.

[18-2. Peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing]
Next, peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing that is executed when a V blank signal is transmitted from the VDP of peripheral control IC 1510 a to indicate that it is ready to receive screen data from the CPU of peripheral control IC 1510 a. Will be explained. When the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing is started, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a determines whether the steady processing in progress flag SP-FLG has a value 0, as shown in FIG. 186 (step S1045). As described above, the steady process in progress flag SP-FLG has a value 1 when the peripheral control unit steady process in steps S1008 to S1038 in the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. 185 is being executed. When execution of the process is completed, they are set to 0 respectively.

  In the determination of step S1045, when the steady process in progress flag SP-FLG is not 0 (is a value 1), that is, when it is determined that the peripheral control unit steady process is being executed, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a does not change End the routine On the other hand, in the determination of step S1045, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a determines that the stationary processing in progress flag SP-FLG has the value 0, that is, determines that the peripheral control unit stationary processing has been completed. -Set the value 1 to FLG (step S1050) and end this routine. As described above, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag for determining whether or not peripheral control unit steady processing is to be performed, and the value 1 when peripheral control unit steady processing is executed, peripheral control When the partial steady process is not performed, the value is set to 0, respectively.

  In this embodiment, it is determined in step S1045 whether or not the steady process in progress flag SP-FLG has a value of 0, that is, whether or not the peripheral control unit steady process has been completed, and the peripheral control unit steady process is executed. When it is completed, the value 1 is set to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG in step S1050, but this is because the V blank signal is input when the peripheral control unit steady processing is being performed. When the value 1 is set to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG, the peripheral control unit steady process currently being executed is assumed as the peripheral control unit steady process is executed in the determination of step S1006 in the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. Since the process is forcibly canceled midway and the peripheral control unit steady process is started from the beginning, the peripheral control unit in FIG. The peripheral control unit, which is this routine, indicates that peripheral control unit steady processing is being executed by setting the value in the steady processing in progress flag SP-FLG to 1 in step S1008 in the source activation process (peripheral control unit steady processing). In addition to V blank signal interrupt processing, in step S1038 in peripheral control unit power-on processing (peripheral control unit steady processing) in FIG. 185, peripheral control unit steady processing is performed by setting the value in the steady processing flag SP-FLG to 0. In the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing which is the present routine, the stationary processing in-progress flag SP-FLG is determined by the determination in step S1045 in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing which is the present routine. It is determined whether the value is 0, that is, whether or not the peripheral control unit steady processing has been completed. To have. In other words, the peripheral control unit steady processing can not be completed by the time the V blank signal is input and the next V blank signal is input.

  Thereby, in the peripheral control unit steady processing this time, when the processing can not be completed in about 33.3 ms and the processing is dropped, the determination in step S1006 in the processing at power on of the peripheral control unit in FIG. It stands by until the V blank signal of is input. That is, the time for executing the current peripheral control unit steady processing which has been dropped is about 66.6 ms. Normally, peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing described later, which is repeatedly executed each time 1 ms interrupt timer is generated by activation of 1 ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in peripheral control unit power-on processing (peripheral control unit steady processing) of FIG. Is executed only 32 times for one peripheral control unit steady process, but if there is a current peripheral control unit steady process that has been dropped, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is 64 times It is supposed to be executed only 32 times. That is, even when the peripheral control unit steady processing is processed, the consistency between the advancing state of the effect by the peripheral control steady processing and the advancing state by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing which is timer interrupt control is It does not collapse. Therefore, even when the peripheral control unit steady processing is dropped, the progressing state of the effect can be reliably aligned.

[18-3. Peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing]
Next, peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing which is repeatedly executed each time 1 ms interrupt timer is generated by activation of 1 ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in peripheral control unit steady processing of peripheral control unit power-on processing of FIG. 185 will be described. . When this peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is started, the CPU of peripheral control IC 1510 a determines whether or not the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is smaller than 33, as shown in FIG. 187 (step S1100). As described above, this 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN starts the 1 ms interrupt timer in the 1 ms interrupt timer activation process of step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on process in FIG. It is a counter that counts the number of times a certain peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process has been executed. In the present embodiment, the frame frequency of the effect display device 1600 (the number of screen updates per second) is set to approximately 30 fps as described above, so the interval at which the V blank signal is input is approximately 33 It is 3 ms (= 1000 ms ÷ 30 fps). That is, since the peripheral control unit steady processing is repeatedly executed about every 33.3 ms, after the 1 ms interrupt timer is started in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady processing, the next peripheral control unit steady processing is performed. The peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed only 32 times before the execution of. Specifically, when the 1 ms interrupt timer is activated in step S1010 in peripheral control unit steady processing, the first 1 ms timer interrupt is generated first, the second,..., And the 32nd 1 ms timer interrupt sequentially It will occur.

  In the determination of step S1100, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a determines that the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is started when the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is not smaller than 33 times, that is, the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt occurs. If it is determined, this routine ends. If the occurrence of the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next occurrence of the V blank signal, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is the peripheral control unit V as the priority of the interrupt processing in this embodiment. Although set higher than the blank interrupt processing, the start of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing due to the thirty-third 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. In other words, in the present embodiment, since the V blank signal is a signal that controls the entire system of the peripheral control board 1510, the occurrence of the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next occurrence of the V blank signal. In order to execute the peripheral control unit V blank interrupt processing, the start of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing due to the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. Then, after the 1 ms interrupt timer is activated again in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady processing due to the generation of the V blank signal, peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is newly started by the generation of the first 1 ms timer interrupt. ing.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in step S1100 that the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a determines that the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is smaller than 33 times, the value 1 is added to the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN (increment; step S1102). By adding the value 1 to the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN, the 1 ms interrupt timer is started in the 1 ms interrupt timer start process of step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. The number of times the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, which is this routine, is executed increases by one.

  Following step S1102, motor and solenoid driving processing is performed (step S1104). In this motor and solenoid drive processing, among the drive data of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in time series that make up the electric drive source schedule data set in the RAM of peripheral control IC 1510a, the pointer indicates Drive an electric drive source such as a motor or a solenoid, update the pointer to the next drive data defined in time series, and update the pointer each time this motor and solenoid drive processing is executed Do. Thereby, an electric drive source such as a motor or a solenoid managed by the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a (for example, an electric drive source provided in the door frame 3 or an electric drive source provided in various effect units provided in the game board 5) ) Are driven according to electrical drive source schedule data.

  Subsequent to step S1104, the CPU of the periphery control IC 1510a performs movable body information acquisition processing (step S1106). In this movable body information acquisition process, it is determined whether or not detection signals from various sensors provided in various effect units provided on the game board 5 are input to determine history information of detection signals from various sensors (for example, the original Position history information, movable position history information, etc. are created and set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a. The CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a sets original positions (standby positions) of various movable bodies provided in various rendering units provided on the game board 5 based on history information of detection signals from various sensors set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a By grasping the movable position by setting or acquiring the movable position.

  Subsequent to step S1106, the CPU of the periphery control IC 1510a performs rendering operation unit information acquisition processing (step S1108). In this rendering operation unit information acquisition process, history information of detection signals from various sensors is determined by determining whether detection signals from various sensors provided in the rendering operation unit 300 are input (for example, a rotation operation unit The rotation (rotation direction) history information 302, the operation history information of the pressing operation unit 303, etc.) are created and set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a. The rotation direction of the rotation operation unit 302 and the presence or absence of the operation of the pressing operation unit 303 can be acquired from history information of detection signals from various sensors set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a.

  Following step S1108, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a performs backup processing (step S1110), and ends this routine. In this backup processing, the contents stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a are copied and backed up to the backup area for 1 ms timer interrupt processing provided in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a, and the contents stored in the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 are stored. The data is copied and backed up to a backup area for 1 ms timer interrupt processing provided in the SDRAMs 1510 c 1 and 1510 c 2. In this embodiment, the 1 ms timer interrupt processing backup area provided in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510 a and the steady processing backup area provided in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510 a are set to different areas, and the SDRAM 1510 c 1 , And 1510 c 2 are set in different areas from the backup area for 1 ms timer interrupt processing provided in 1510 c 2 and the backup area for steady processing provided in the SDRAMs 15 10 c 1 and 15 10 c 2.

  As described above, in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, various processes relating to the effect of step S1104 to step S1108 are executed as progress of effect within a period of 1 ms. On the other hand, in the peripheral control unit steady processing in the peripheral control unit power-on processing of FIG. 185, various processing relating to the effects of step S1014 to step S1032 is executed as progress of the effect within a period of about 33.3 ms. There is. In peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, when 1 ms timer interrupt execution number STN is not smaller than value 33 in step S1100, that is, the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt occurs and peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is started Since this routine is ended as it is, even if the occurrence of the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next occurrence of the V blank signal, the peripheral control unit by the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt The start of the 1 ms timer interrupt processing is forcibly canceled, and after the 1 ms interrupt timer is started again in step S1010 in peripheral control unit steady processing due to the generation of the V blank signal, peripheral control by the generation of the first 1 ms timer interrupt Division 1 ms timer It is adapted to start the actual processing. That is, the consistency between the progress state of the effect by the peripheral control unit steady process and the progress state of the effect by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process which is timer interrupt control does not break. Therefore, the progressing state of the effect can be reliably aligned.

  Further, as described above, the interval at which the V blank signal is output changes somewhat depending on the liquid crystal size of the effect display device 1600, and the V blank signal is also produced in the manufacturing lot of the peripheral control board 1510 on which the peripheral control IC 1510a is mounted. The output interval may change slightly. In the present embodiment, since the V blank signal is a signal that controls the entire system of the peripheral control board 1510, if the occurrence of the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next occurrence of the V blank signal, the peripheral control is performed. In order to execute the section V blank interrupt processing, the start of the peripheral control section 1 ms timer interrupt processing by the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. That is, in the present embodiment, even if the interval at which the V blank signal is output changes a little, the start of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing by the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. It is possible to absorb a time lag due to a slight change in the interval at which the V blank signal is output.

[18-4. Peripheral control command reception interrupt processing]
Next, peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing for receiving various commands from the main control board 1310X will be described. The CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a starts transmission of various commands from the main control board 1310X as serial data, and as a trigger, the main peripheral serial data is 1 byte (8 bits) at the serial I / O port of the peripheral control IC 1510a The information in (1) is taken into the receiving buffer, and when the taking-in is completed, an interrupt is generated triggered by this and the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing is performed. In the main cycle serial data, one packet is composed of 3 bytes, the status is assigned as the first byte, the mode is assigned as the second byte, and the status and mode are regarded as numerical values as the third byte and the total The calculated sum value is assigned.

  When the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing is started, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a determines whether the 1 byte reception period timer has timed out, as shown in FIG. 188 (step S1200). The one-byte reception period timer is used to set a period in which one byte (eight bits) of information can be received among the main cycle serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310X.

  When it is determined in step S1200 that the 1-byte reception period timer has not timed out, that is, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a has 1 byte (8 bits) of information on the main cycle serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310X. When it is determined that it is within the time that can be received, 1 byte of information received from the reception buffer of the serial I / O port of peripheral control IC 1510a is fetched (step S1202), and the value 1 is added to the reception counter SRXC (incremented) Step S1204). The reception counter SRXC is a counter that indicates the number of times of extraction from the reception buffer, and has a value of 1 when the status of the first byte of the main cycle serial data is extracted from the reception buffer, and a mode of the second byte of the main cycle serial data. When the data is taken out from the reception buffer, the value 2 is obtained, and when the sum value which is the third byte of the main cycle serial data is taken out from the reception buffer, the value becomes 3. The reception counter SRXC is set to an initial value 0 at power on or the like.

  Following step S1204, it is determined whether the reception counter SRXC has a value of 3, that is, whether the sum value which is the third byte of the main cycle serial data has been extracted from the reception buffer (step S1206). In this determination, following the status, which is the first byte of the main cycle serial data, the mode, which is the second byte of the main cycle serial data, and the sum value, which is the third byte of the main cycle serial data, from the reception buffer It is determined whether or not it has been taken out.

  In the determination of step S1206, the CPU of peripheral control IC 1510a determines that the reception counter SRXC does not have the value 3, that is, the mode which is still the second byte of main cycle serial data following the status which is the first byte of main cycle serial data. If it is determined that the sum value which is the third byte of the main cycle serial data is not taken out from the reception buffer in order, the 1 byte reception period timer is set (step S1208), and this routine is ended. By setting the 1-byte reception period timer in step S1208, a period in which the mode which is the second byte of the main cycle serial data or the sum value which is the third byte of the main cycle serial data can be received is set.

  On the other hand, in the determination of step S1206, the CPU of peripheral control IC 1510a sets the reception counter SRXC to the value 3, that is, the second byte of the main cycle serial data following the status of the first byte of the main cycle serial data. If it is determined that a sum value, which is a third mode of the main cycle serial data, is taken out from the reception buffer in a certain mode and the main cycle serial data, the initial value 0 is set to the reception counter SRXC (step S1210), and the sum value is calculated (step S1212). In this calculation, the status which is the first byte of the main cycle serial data and the mode which is the second byte of the main cycle serial data, which have already been extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202, are regarded as numerical values and their sum (sum value Calculate).

  Following step S1212, it is determined whether the sum value which is the third byte of the main cycle serial data already extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202 matches the sum value calculated in step S1212 (step S1214). The sum value which is the third byte of the main cycle serial data already taken out from the reception buffer in step S1202 is the sum value allocated as the third byte of the main cycle serial data of the main cycle serial data from the main control board 1310X. Therefore, it should match the sum value calculated in step S1212. However, the pachinko machine 1 is supplied with gaming balls from the island facility of the game hall, and when the gaming balls rub against each other and are charged, they are electrostatically discharged and generate noise, so the pachinko machine 1 is affected by noise It is under the environment of accepting files.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, on the peripheral control board 1510 side, the status allocated as the first byte of the received main cycle serial data and the mode allocated as the second byte of the main cycle serial data are regarded as numerical values. Whether the calculated sum value matches the sum value allocated as the third byte of the main cycle serial data in the main cycle serial data from the main control board 1310 X? It is judged whether or not. As a result, the CPU of peripheral control IC 1510 a determines whether the main peripheral serial data has been changed to main peripheral serial data different from normal due to the influence of noise between the main control substrate 1310 X and peripheral control substrate 1510. It can be determined.

  In the determination of step S1214, the CPU of peripheral control IC 1510a matches the sum value, which is the third byte of the main cycle serial data already extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202, with the sum value calculated in step S1212. If it is determined, the received status allocated as the first byte of the main cycle serial data and the mode allocated as the second byte of the main cycle serial data are stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a (step S1216). ), End this routine.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in step S1200 that the CPU of peripheral control IC 1510a does not time out the 1 byte reception period timer, that is, 1 byte (8 bits) of the main cycle serial data transmitted from main control board 1310X. When it is determined that the period for which information can be received is exceeded, or in the determination of step S1214, the CPU of peripheral control IC 1510a determines the sum value which is the third byte of the main cycle serial data already extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202. If it is determined that the sum value calculated in step S1212 and the sum value calculated in step S1212 do not match, this routine ends.

[18-5. Peripheral control unit blackout notice signal interrupt processing]
Next, peripheral control unit power failure notification signal interrupt processing which is executed when the power failure notification signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310 e of the main control substrate 1310 X is input from the main control substrate 1310 X will be described. When this peripheral control unit blackout notification signal interrupt process is started, the CPU of peripheral control IC 1510a first starts a 2 microsecond timer as shown in FIG. 189 (step S1300), and a blackout notification signal is input or not. It is determined (step S1302). If it is determined in step S1302 that the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a determines that the power failure notification signal is not input, the routine ends as it is.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1302 that the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a has input a power failure advance signal, it determines whether 2 microseconds have elapsed (step S1304). In this determination, it is determined whether or not the timer activated in step S1300 has passed 2 microseconds. If it is determined in step S1304 that the CPU of peripheral control IC 1510a does not pass 2 macro seconds, the process returns to step S1302 to determine whether or not a power failure notification signal is input, and the power failure notification signal is not input When it is determined, while this routine is ended as it is, when it is determined that a power failure advance signal is input, it is determined again in step S1304 whether or not 2 microseconds have elapsed. That is, in the determination of step S1304, it is determined whether or not the power failure notification signal continues to be input for 2 microseconds after the peripheral control unit power failure notification signal interrupt processing which is the present routine is started.

  If it is determined in step S1304 that the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a continues to input the power failure notification signal for 2 microseconds after the peripheral control unit power failure notification signal interrupt processing which is this routine is started, the power saving processing is performed. The operation is performed (step S1306). In this power saving process, the power consumption of the entire system of the pachinko machine 1 is achieved by sequentially executing the turning off of the backlight of the effect display device 1600, the turning off of the motors and solenoids provided on the game board 5, the turning off of various LEDs, etc. By restraining, even if the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, the stable operation is ensured only for a period of 20 milliseconds which is a time during which the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a can operate.

  Following step S1306, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a performs command reception standby processing (step S1308). In this command reception standby process, assuming that there are various commands being transmitted by the main control board 1310X, the peripheral control IC 1510a can receive the command being transmitted at least for a period of at least 17 milliseconds. It is supposed to wait. When the command is received, the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing described above is started, and the received command is stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a.

  Following step S1308, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a performs command backup processing (step S1310). In the backup processing of this command, the command stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a is copied and backed up to a steady processing backup area provided in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a.

  Following step S1310, the CPU of peripheral control IC 1510a determines whether or not a power failure advance signal is input (step S1312). If it is determined in step S1312 that the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a has received a power failure advance signal, the CPU performs WDT clear processing (step S1314). In this WDT clear processing, a clear signal is output to the external WDT to prevent the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510 a from being reset.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1312 that the CPU of peripheral control IC 1510a determines that the power failure notification signal is not input, or following step S1314, the process returns to step S1312 again, and whether or not the power failure notification signal is input. Determine if That is, it will be judged infinitely whether the power failure notice signal is input. By continuing determination in this manner, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a can not output a clear signal to the external WDT when it is determined in step S1312 that the power failure notification signal is not input. When the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a is reset, while the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a determines that the power failure notice signal is input in the determination of step S1312, the WDT clear processing is performed in step S1314 to select the peripheral control IC 1510a. The CPU does not reset. When the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510 a is reset, the power-on processing of the peripheral control unit shown in FIG. 185 is started again.

  As described above, when the power failure notification signal continues to be input in the infinite loop in the determination in step S1312, the CPU of peripheral control IC 1510a is reset immediately before the power failure state occurs by executing the WDT clear process in step S1314. It is supposed not to catch it. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1312 that the input of the power failure notice signal is not continued and released in the infinite loop, the WDT clear process is not executed, and the output of the clear signal to the external WDT is interrupted. It has become. As a result, the peripheral control unit blackout notification signal interrupt processing, which is the main routine, is erroneously started due to noise and the noise is generated beyond the period of 2 microseconds and the determination in step S1302 is passed even if the step is passed. If it is determined in S1312 that the input of the power failure notice signal is not continued and canceled in the infinite loop, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a is reset because the WDT clear processing in step S1314 is not executed. It is possible to cope with such noise by automatically resetting and returning.

[19. Technical means, effects, etc.]
In addition, as described below, the background art which makes Unexamined-Japanese-Patent No. 2012-29741 a prior patent document, and many technical means with respect to a solution subject are included in the said form.

[Background technology]
A game machine such as a pachinko machine has a game board having a game area in which a game is played, and a door frame having a door window closing the front side of the game board and making the game area visible from the front. The game player can enjoy the game by playing in the game area viewed through the door window.

  As a game machine of this type, a bulging portion provided with a storage tray for storing game media for playing a game and bulging forward from below the door window in the front of the door frame; And a decorative body attached to the upper surface is proposed (for example, prior patent documents). According to the technique of this prior patent document, the appearance of the upper surface of the bulging portion can be improved by the decorative body.

  However, in the technique of the prior patent document, since the decorative body is provided on the upper surface of the bulging portion, the decorative body is hard to see when looking at the gaming machine from the front or side, so the decoration in the entire gaming machine The decorative effect by the body was weak and the appeal to the player was insufficient. In addition, when the player places his hand on the upper surface of the bulging portion or places his hand on the storage plate, a part of the decoration is hidden by the player's hand, for example, causing the decoration to emit light. At the same time, the player hardly notices the light emission decoration, and some players may feel lost because they did not notice the light emission decoration and may decrease the interest in the game.

[Solution issue]
In view of the above situation, the present invention provides a gaming machine having high appeal to a player and capable of suppressing a decrease in interest for the player's game by light emission decoration.

[Technical means to solve the problem]
Means 1: In the gaming machine,
"A game board having a game area where a game is played,
A main unit frame which detachably holds the game board from the front,
A door frame base having a door window that closes the front side of the main body frame so as to be able to be opened and closed and allows the game area to be viewed from the front;
A bulging portion provided with a storage tray that bulges forward from a portion below the door window on the front surface of the door frame base, and can store game media for playing a game in the game area ,
The bulging portion is attached, and the front end is forward of the front end of the storage plate, from the front of the door frame base to the front to a distance of 1/3 to 2/3 with respect to the full width of the door frame base. With a protruding decoration,
And a decorative body light emitting means for emitting and decorating the decorative body in accordance with a game state which is changed by playing a game in the game area.

  Here, as the "game", "gaming media is targeted for a specific receiving slot where a special lottery for generating an advantageous gaming state in which the player is advantageous is performed, and game media to a specific receiving port are When a special lottery result in which an advantageous gaming state occurs due to acceptance is drawn, a specific receiving slot for paying out a predetermined number of gaming media is opened by receiving the gaming media, so that the game media is targeted for a specific receiving slot. "A game to be thrown in", "a game in which a game medium is hit by aiming at a receptacle to which a benefit including a payout of game medium is given", "a plurality of symbols each provided with a plurality of patterns after the game medium is inserted. After rotating the torso, there is a game in which the rotation of each torso is stopped so as to be a combination of symbols to which a benefit including a payout of game media is given. Examples of the above-mentioned "game media" include "ball-shaped ones (game balls)", "disk-like ones (medals)" and the like.

  In addition, as the “playing area” in which a game is played, “a game medium is inserted by the operation of the player, and there are a plurality of receptacles to which a benefit including a payout of the game medium is given according to the reception of the game medium. Each of a plurality of symbols is provided, and each of them is rotated by the player's start operation triggered by the insertion of the game medium, and the combination of the symbols stopped by the player's stop operation is provided. In accordance with this, there may be mentioned an area where a plurality of turning bodies are provided to which a privilege including payout of game media is provided.

  In addition, as the "main frame", "one that can be opened and closed (hinge-rotatable) attached to the frame-like outer frame attached to the island facility of the game hall where the game machine is installed", "the game machine is Those directly attached to the island facilities of the game hall to be installed, "those provided with a payout device for playing game media for playing a game", and the like can be mentioned.

  Furthermore, as the "bulging portion", in addition to the storage tray, "one having an operation unit operated by a player to play a game", and "a storage tray storing a game medium for playing a game" Those equipped with "," those equipped with an effect operation unit that allows the player's operation to be accepted when the player participation type effect is executed "," Lotus operation unit that lends a game medium for playing a game And the like.

  In addition, examples of the "storage tray" include "a plurality of which are vertically spaced apart and provided", "a which is provided only one", and the like.

  Further, as the "decorative body", "a thing imitating a predetermined item along the concept of a gaming machine", "a thing imitating a predetermined character along the concept of a gaming machine", "a thing along a concept of a gaming machine Imitating a predetermined scene, and the like. The reason why the distance from the front of the door frame base to the front end of the decoration is within 1/3 to 2/3 of the full width of the door frame base is that the distance is shorter than 1/3 of the full width. The amount of forward protrusion is the same as that of a conventional gaming machine, and the appeal to the player can not be sufficiently enhanced. If the distance is longer than 2/3 of the full width, the decorative body protrudes too much forward. Therefore, there is a possibility that it becomes a hindrance to the player and it becomes difficult to be selected as a gaming machine to play a game.

  In addition, as "according to the game state", "game to the entrance (for example, general winning opening, starting opening, big winning opening, prize winning opening, V winning opening, etc.) arranged in the game area" "In response to the reception of the medium", "in response to the game medium circulating in the game area having passed a specific area (eg, gate, warp passage, stage shelf, etc.)", "arranged in the game area According to the special lottery result drawn by the reception of gaming media to the reception opening (for example, starting opening), the drawing by the reception of gaming media to the reception opening (for example, starting opening) disposed in the gaming area Depending on the type of effect (for example, reach effect, big hit effect, lost effect, etc.) for suggesting a special lottery result that has been made, "a plurality of symbols each provided with a plurality of symbols triggered by the insertion of gaming media According to the rotation of the torso of the "game media" In response to the insertion of a plurality of rotating bodies each provided with a plurality of symbols, and then sequentially stopped, depending on the combination of the symbols of the stopped rotating body "," game media to be driven into the game area "In accordance with the amount of impact of", "in accordance with the length of the impact media blank inserted into the game area", and the like.

  In addition, as “decorative body light emitting means”, “full color LED”, “single color LED”, “high brightness LED”, “organic EL”, “incandescent bulb”, “neon bulb”, “cold cathode tube”, etc. It can be mentioned.

  According to the configuration of the means 1, it is possible to open and close the front side of the main frame, the main frame which holds the gaming board having the gaming area where the game is played, the gaming board detachably from the front, and the gaming machine. The door frame base has a door window that allows the player to see the game area from the front, and the front side of the door frame base bulges forward from a portion below the door window, A bulging portion provided with a storage tray capable of storing game media for playing a game in the area, and a bulging portion are attached, and are further forward than the front end of the storage tray and from the front of the door frame base A decorative body whose front end protrudes to a distance of 1/3 to 2/3 with respect to the full width of the door frame base, and a light emitting decoration according to a gaming state which is changed by playing the decorative body in the game area And a decorative body light emitting means.

  As a result, a bulging portion provided with a storage tray capable of storing game media bulges forward at a portion below the door window on the front surface of the door frame base that closes the main body frame so as to open and close. The bulging portion is provided with a decoration whose length is 1/3 to 2/3 of the entire width of the door frame base and whose front end protrudes forward from the front surface of the door frame base. Thereby, when the game machine is attached to the island facility of the game hall, the decoration body protrudes forward to a large extent below the door window where the inside of the game area can be viewed, making the decoration body more visible than other game machines. While being able to strongly attract the interest of the player, it is possible to enhance the appeal to the player and to make it easy to select this gaming machine as the gaming machine to be played. In addition, since the front end of the decorative body is projected forward largely below the door frame, the decorative body can be moved forward from the front end of the storage plate, and the length in the left-right direction of the decorative body is greater than that in the prior art. It can be long. Therefore, even if the player places his hand on the upper surface of the bulging portion or puts his hand on the storage tray, the portion concealed by the player's hand can be reduced with respect to the entire decoration. When the light emitting decoration is performed by the decorative body light emitting means, the player can be made to notice the light emitting decoration of the decorative body easily, and the player is prevented from feeling lost and the decrease in interest for the game is suppressed. It can be done.

  In addition, since the decorative body is greatly projected forward below the door window, the front end of the decorative body approaches the player as closely as possible when the player is seated in front of the gaming machine. Therefore, when the decorative body is made to emit light and decorated by the decorative body light emitting means according to the game state, the light illuminates the player from below, and the light emission decoration of the decorative body directs the player's gaze toward the decorative body By making the line of sight of the player point toward the lower decorative body, it is possible to keep the inside of the game area provided ahead from the field of view of the player and make it difficult to view the inside of the game area. . Therefore, in the game area, for example, when the scene of the effect image changes, when the movable body moves, when the variable winning opening (second starting opening, big winning opening, prize winning opening, etc.) opens and closes. At the time of, etc., by making the decorative body emit light by the decorative body light emitting means, the player is made to pay attention to the decorative body located below the game area, and then, when the player returns the gaze to the game area By changing the effect image and the movable body, it is possible to surprise the player and give a strong impact, and it is possible to entertain the player and at the same time something good for the player may be made. It is possible to make the user think that there is no such thing, and it is possible to make the expectation for the game higher and suppress the decrease in interest.

  Furthermore, as described above, it is possible to cause the player to be surprised by changing the effects in the game area by making the light emission decoration of the decoration body be noticed according to the game state, so that the decoration body The light emission decoration can indicate to the player the arrival of a chance (for example, the occurrence of an advantageous gaming state ("big hit game") in which the player is advantageous). As a result, it is possible to give a premium feeling to the light emission decoration of the decorative body, so it is possible to make the player excited and thrilled depending on whether or not the decorative body emits light and decorates, making the player enjoyable and entertaining The decrease can be suppressed.

  Further, since the decorative body is greatly projected forward, when the player tries to look at the entire decorative body, the player looks away from the gaming machine, so that the entire gaming machine including the game area can be easily viewed. As a result, it is possible to make the player feel as if it were put on one tempo, and it is possible to relax the player and to suppress the decrease in interest.

  The decorative body may be smoothly curved and projected forward. As a result, since the decorative body projecting largely to the front is curved smoothly, there is no risk of damaging the player even if it comes in contact with the player. Therefore, since the player can recognize that the decoration is not dangerous which may cause injury just by looking at the decoration, it is possible to select this gaming machine safely as a gaming machine to play a game. It is possible to enjoy the game in this gaming machine and to suppress the decline in interest.

  Moreover, it is desirable to attach a decoration to the left-right direction center of a bulging part. This makes it possible to highlight the presence of the decorative body and strongly attract the interest of the player, and to make it easy to select this gaming machine as a gaming machine that raises the appeal to the player and plays. In addition, when the decorative body projecting forward is attached to the center in the left-right direction, it is easy for the player's hands to extend forward, so that the operation unit (handle) for driving the game medium into the game area It is possible to facilitate the operation, the handling of gaming media stored in the storage tray, and the like, and it is possible to make it difficult for the player to be stressed and to suppress the decrease in interest.

  Further, the decorative body may be provided with a first decorative portion extending in a semicircular ring shape so as to bulge outward in a semicircular arc cross-sectional shape. As a result, since the first decorative portion of the decorative body has a form in which half of the cylindrical tube-shaped donut protrudes forward, it is possible to give the player a smooth and soft impression, and thus the game The player can be made to play the game in a calm mood, and the player can be devoted to the game to suppress the decrease in interest, and it is difficult for the player to get hurt even if the player makes contact at first glance It can be made to recognize that it is safe, and by lowering the player's reassurance, it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest for the game. In addition, when the decorative body is provided with the first semi-doughlet-shaped decorative portion, if the whole of the first decorative portion is light-emitting and decorated by the decorative body light-emitting means according to the game state, like an annular fluorescent lamp Light emission decoration can be shown to the player, and the interest of the player can be attracted strongly, and when making the light emission decoration, for example, when making the light emission decoration so that the light flows from one side, Since the player can show the light-emitting effect that the light is moving and rotating, it can surprise the player and make him think that something good may be done, thereby increasing the expectation for the game. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest.

  Furthermore, when the decorative body is provided with the first doughnut-shaped first decoration, it is disposed below the first decoration so that the front end is positioned behind the first decoration, and a cross section of a semicircular arc shape A second decorative portion extending in a semicircular shape so as to bulge outward in shape may be further provided. This makes it possible for the player to show the player a decoration in which half donuts are vertically arranged in the first decorative portion and the second decorative portion, and the appearance of the bulging portion provided with the storage plate is improved. Because the tip of the second decorative portion is located behind the tip of the first decorative portion, the second decorative portion can emphasize the sense of perspective and make the decorative body appear larger, so that the player can It can be a highly appealing gaming machine that is strongly attracted to Further, in this case, since the semi-doughnut-shaped first decorative portion and the second decorative portion are disposed at the upper and lower sides, light emission is performed such that the light is rotated by appropriately emitting and decorating each by the decorative body light emitting means It is possible to show the player an effect such as an effect or a light effect such that the light moves up and down, and to entertain the player, and also to show the player various light effects such as bored player It can be made difficult to suppress the decline in interest.

  Further, a rendering operation unit may be provided behind the front end of the upper surface of the decorative body, in which the player's operation can be received according to the game state. Thereby, when the operation of the effect operation unit becomes acceptable according to the gaming state (when the player participation type effect is executed), the player operates the effect operation unit, thereby the player participation type The presentation can be enjoyed, and a decrease in interest for the player's game can be suppressed. At this time, by making the decorative body emit light and decorate by the decorative body light emitting means, it is possible to attract the player's interest to the decorative body on which the rendering operation portion is attached. When the participatory effect is executed, the decoration of the decorative body can be made to emit light and the player's interest can be directed to the decorative body (rendering operation unit) to urge the operation of the effect operation unit, and the player can perform the decorative operation By operating the unit, the player participation type effect can be enjoyed and the decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  Further, when the effect operation unit is attached behind the front end of the upper surface of the decoration, the decoration can prevent the player's body part, clothes, etc. from contacting the effect operation unit. Therefore, the erroneous operation of the effect operation unit can be reduced, and the player participation type effect for operating the effect operation unit can be surely enjoyed to suppress the decrease in interest.

  Furthermore, when the effect operation unit is attached to the upper surface of the decorative body projecting largely to the front, the effect operation unit looks large and can give a strong impact to the player, and the main game as a gaming machine to play a game Game can be made easy to select, and the expectation for the player participation type effect operating the effect operation unit can be enhanced, and the player participation type effect is executed at an early stage (for example, game media It is possible to urge the hitting operation of (the game ball), the rotation start of the rotating body by the insertion of the game medium (medal), and the like, and the player can be entertained to suppress the decrease in interest for the game.

  In addition, when the effect operation unit is provided behind the front end of the upper surface of the decorative body, the effect operation unit includes an annular rotation operation unit capable of rotating operation by the player, and the inside of the ring of the rotation operation unit In the above, it is desirable that the player has a pressing operation unit that can be pressed and operated. As a result, since the rotation operation unit capable of rotational operation as the effect operation unit and the pressing operation unit capable of pressing operation are provided, in the player participation type effect in which the operation of the effect operation unit can be received, It is possible to make the player operate the game by appropriately combining the key and the pressing operation, and it is possible to respond to effects requiring more complicated input (operation of the player), so a more diverse player participation type effect is played The player can be presented to the player, the player can be entertained, the player can be made less likely to get bored, and the decrease in interest for the game can be suppressed. Further, in this case, since the decorative body having the rotation operation unit and the pressing operation unit mounted on the upper surface can be lighted and decorated by the decorative body light emitting means, when the player participation type effect is performed, the decorative body is displayed. By making the light emission decoration, the player's interest can be directed to the decorative body (the effect operation unit such as the rotation operation unit or the pressing operation unit) to urge the operation of the effect operation unit, and the player operates the effect operation unit By doing this, it is possible to enjoy the player participation type effect and to suppress the decrease in interest. At this time, it is possible to prompt the player to rotate the rotary operation unit or to press the pressing operation unit according to the light emission mode of the decorative body. The operation unit can be operated accurately, and player-participation type presentation can be enjoyed to suppress the decrease in interest.

  Furthermore, as described above, when the annular rotary operation unit and the pressing operation unit disposed in the ring of the rotary operation unit are provided as the rendering operation unit on the upper surface of the decorative body, the pressing operation is performed. Even if it is possible to move the unit between the retracted position which protrudes slightly above the upper surface of the rotary operation unit and the projected position which protrudes above the retracted position depending on the game state. good. As a result, when the pressing operation unit is moved to the projecting position according to the gaming state, the pressing operation unit is in a state of projecting upward than the rotation operation unit, so that the upper surface of the decorative body is large along with the rotation operation unit. Because it looks like it bulges upward, it can make the surroundings of the decoration look large and give a strong impact to the player, making the decoration stand out and raising the appeal of the player over other gaming machines While the pressing operation unit protrudes upward largely, the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the pressing operation unit, and the expectation for the operation of the pressing operation unit is enhanced to suppress the decrease in interest It can be done.

  In addition, when the pressing operation unit in the ring of the rotation operation unit attached to the upper surface of the decoration is movable between the retracted position and the projecting position, the player operates the pressing operation unit at the projecting position. A cylindrical center which is disposed in the cylinder of the cylindrical outer periphery pressing operation portion and the outer periphery pressing operation portion capable of pressing operation, and the player can perform pressing operation even at any position of the retracted position and the projecting position. You may make it comprise with a press operation part. Thus, on the upper surface of the decorative body projecting largely to the front, the outer peripheral pressing operation portion and the rotational operating portion are concentrically arranged centering on the central pressing operation portion, so that the visual impact can be enhanced. While making it possible to attract the player's interest strongly, it is possible to increase the player's sense of expectation for the player participation type effect to operate each operation unit, and to suppress the decline of the player's interest Can. Also, in this case, by making the decorative body emit light and decoration, the player's interest is strongly attracted to the decorative body, that is, the rotation operation portion, the outer peripheral pressure operation portion, and the central pressure operation portion to promote their operation. The player participation type effect can be enjoyed to suppress the decrease in interest.

  Furthermore, when the effect operation unit is provided on the upper surface of the decorative body, it is desirable to include operation unit light emitting means for emitting and decorating the effect operation unit according to the game state. Accordingly, since the effect operation unit can be lighted and decorated by the operation unit light emitting means according to the gaming state, by simultaneously executing the light emission decoration of the effect operation unit and the light emission decoration of the decoration by the decoration light emitting means The light emitting decoration of the whole of the bulging part which is bulging forward under the door window can be made to emit light, and the bulging part can be made to stand out to attract the player's interest strongly, and the whole is a light emitting decoration. By doing this, it is possible to make the player think that there is something good, to increase the sense of expectation for the game and to suppress the decrease in interest. Also, in this case, by making the effect operation unit emit light and decorate by the operation unit light emitting means, the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the effect operation unit, so the player participation type effect which operates the effect operation unit is When executed, it is possible to direct the player's interest to the effect operation unit and prompt operation by causing the effect operation unit to emit light and decorate, and by causing the player to operate the effect operation unit, the player participation type effect Can be used to curb the decline in

  Further, the front surface of the door frame base may be further provided with a peripheral decoration continuous with the decorative body attached to the bulging portion and extending so as to surround the outer periphery of the door frame. Thus, the entire outer periphery of the game area can be decorated, and the appearance of the gaming machine can be improved to increase the appeal of the player. Further, in this case, it is desirable to provide a peripheral decoration light emitting means for making the peripheral decoration light-emitting and decoration, and making the decorative body of the bulging portion and the peripheral decoration emit light and decorate the outer periphery of the game area. Therefore, the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the game area, and the player can enjoy the game in the game area to suppress the decrease in interest.

  Further, an effect display means capable of displaying an effect image may be provided at the center of the game area in front view. Thus, in addition to the game performed in the game area, the player can be entertained also by the effect image displayed on the effect display means, and a decrease in the player's interest can be suppressed. In addition, during the display of the effect image by the effect display means, when switching the effect image, it is difficult to notice the switching of the effect image by causing the decoration body to emit light to direct the player's gaze to the decoration body below the game area. can do. Then, when the player turns his eyes to the effect display means after the effect image is switched, it can be surprised that the effect image is changing, and the effect image can be entertained more, and the effect will be produced for some time. By switching the image, the player can be made to think that something is good, and the expectation of the game can be enhanced to suppress the decrease in interest.

Means 2: In the configuration of means 1,
"The decoration is
It is characterized by being smoothly curved and projecting forward.

  According to the configuration of the means 2, the decorative body is smoothly curved to project forward.

  As a result, since the decorative body projecting largely to the front is curved smoothly, there is no risk of damaging the player even if it comes in contact with the player. Therefore, since the player can recognize that the decoration is not dangerous which may cause injury just by looking at the decoration, it is possible to select this gaming machine safely as a gaming machine to play a game. It is possible to enjoy the game in this gaming machine and to suppress the decline in interest.

Means 3: In the structure of means 1 or 2,
"The decoration is
It is characterized in that it is attached to the center of the bulging portion in the left-right direction.

  According to the configuration of the means 3, the decorative body is attached to the center in the lateral direction of the bulging portion.

  As a result, since the decorative body projecting forward largely is attached to the center in the lateral direction of the bulging portion, the presence of the decorative body can be highlighted and the player's interest can be strongly attracted, which appeals to the player. It is possible to make it easy to select the present gaming machine as a gaming machine that increases the power to play a game. In addition, since the decorative body projecting forward is attached to the center in the left-right direction, it is possible to easily extend the player's hands forward, so the operation unit (handle) for driving the game medium into the game area ), Handling of gaming media stored in the storage tray, and the like can be facilitated, and it is possible to make it difficult for the player to be stressed and to suppress the decrease in interest.

Means 4: In any one of the means 1 to the means 3,
"The decoration is
It is characterized in that it has a first decorative portion extending in a semicircular ring shape so as to bulge outward in a semicircular arc shaped cross-sectional shape.

  According to the configuration of the means 4, the decorative body is provided with the first decorative portion extending in a semicircular ring shape so as to bulge outward in a semicircular arc cross-sectional shape.

  As a result, the first decorative portion of the decorative body extends in a semicircular shape so that the cross section of the semicircular arc shape bulges outward, so that the half of the cylindrical tube donut protrudes forward. This makes it possible to give the player a smooth and soft impression, and to allow the player to play the game in a calm mood, so as to concentrate the player on the game. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest, and at the same time the player can recognize that it is a safe thing that does not easily get injured even if it is touched at first glance, making reassurance of the player entertaining the game Can be suppressed.

  Further, as described above, since the first decorative portion is in the shape of a half donut, when the entire first decorative portion is decorated by the decorative body light emitting means according to the game state, light emission such as annular fluorescent light The decoration can be shown to the player, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted. When the light emission decoration is performed, for example, when the light emission decoration is performed so that the light flows from one side, the light emission effect can be shown to the player as the light moves and rotates inside the donut, so the player can It is possible to be surprised to think that there is something good and to increase the sense of expectation for the game and suppress the decline in interest.

Means 5: In the configuration of means 4,
"The decoration is
The front end is disposed below the first decorative portion so as to be positioned rearward of the first decorative portion, and extends in a semicircular ring shape so as to bulge outward in a semicircular arc cross-sectional shape It is characterized by further having "the 2nd decoration part."

  According to the configuration of the means 5, the decorative body is disposed below the first decorative portion so that the front end is positioned rearward of the first decorative portion, and bulges outward in a semicircular arc cross-sectional shape The second decorative portion extending in a semicircular shape is further provided.

  This makes it possible for the player to show the player a decoration in which half donuts are vertically arranged in the first decorative portion and the second decorative portion, and the appearance of the bulging portion provided with the storage plate is improved. Because the tip of the second decorative portion is located behind the tip of the first decorative portion, the second decorative portion can emphasize the sense of perspective and make the decorative body appear larger, so that the player can It can be a highly appealing gaming machine that is strongly attracted to

  In addition, since the semi-doughnut-shaped first decorative portion and the second decorative portion are disposed at the upper and lower sides, the light emitting effect such as rotating light by appropriately emitting and decorating each by the decorative body light emitting means, It is possible to show the player the luminous effect that the light moves up and down, to entertain the player, and to show the various luminous effects to the player, making it difficult for the player to get bored. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest.

Means 6: In any one of the means 1 to 5,
"It further comprises a rendering operation unit which is attached behind the front end of the upper surface of the decorative body and can accept the player's operation according to the game state". Do.

  Here, as the “rendering operation unit”, “rotational operation unit capable of rotating operation”, “press operation unit capable of pressing operation”, “touch operation unit enabling touch operation”, “slide operation unit capable of sliding operation” , “A stick operation unit capable of a stick operation”, “a combined operation unit capable of a rotation operation and a pressing operation”, and the like. In addition, the “rendering operation unit” may be in contact with the upper surface of the decorative body, or may be protruded from the upper surface of the decorative body.

  According to the configuration of the means 6, the gaming machine further includes a rendering operation unit attached behind the front end of the upper surface of the decorative body and capable of accepting the operation of the player according to the gaming state. is there.

  Thereby, since the effect operation unit is provided on the upper surface of the decorative body, the player can receive the operation of the effect operation unit according to the game state (when the player participation type effect is executed). By operating the effect operation unit, the player participation type effect can be enjoyed, and a decrease in interest for the player's game can be suppressed. At this time, by making the decorative body emit light and decorate by the decorative body light emitting means, it is possible to attract the player's interest to the decorative body on which the rendering operation portion is attached. When the participatory effect is executed, the decoration of the decorative body can be made to emit light and the player's interest can be directed to the decorative body (rendering operation unit) to urge the operation of the effect operation unit, and the player can perform the decorative operation By operating the unit, the player participation type effect can be enjoyed and the decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  Further, since the effect operation unit is attached to the rear of the front end of the decorative body, the decorative object can prevent part of the player's body, clothes, etc. from coming into contact with the effect operation unit. The erroneous operation of the effect operation unit can be reduced, and the player participation type effect for operating the effect operation unit can be surely enjoyed to suppress the decrease in interest.

  Furthermore, since the effect operation unit is attached to the upper surface of the decorative body projecting largely to the front, the effect operation unit can be seen large and a strong impact can be given to the player, and this gaming machine is selected as the gaming machine to play While making it easy to increase the player participation type effect operating the effect operation unit, the player's participation type effect is performed at an early stage so that the player progresses the game (for example, the game medium And the like) can be promoted, and the player can be entertained to suppress a drop in interest for the game.

  In addition, since the decorative body decorates the outside of the effect operation portion since the effect operation portion is provided behind the front end of the upper surface of the decorative body, the appearance of the effect operation portion can be improved. The effect operation unit can be made to stand out, and the gaming machine can be made to attract the player's attention strongly.

Means 7: In the structure of means 6,
"The effect operation unit
An annular rotary operation unit that can be operated by the player;
And a pressing operation unit capable of pressing operation by the player in the ring of the rotation operation unit.

  Here, as the "rotation operation unit", "a device which can be rotated by driving a motor other than the player's rotation operation", "a device which can be rotated only by the player's rotation operation", and the like can be mentioned.

  In addition, as the “pressing operation unit”, “a cylindrical outer peripheral pressing operation unit along the inner periphery of the rotation operating unit and a cylindrical central pressing operation unit provided in the outer peripheral pressing operation unit” “One cylindrical one”, “one having a cross key or an arrow key”, and the like. Furthermore, examples of the “pressing operation unit” include “one that can be advanced and retracted in the vertical direction between the retracted position and the protruding position”, and “one that is not movable in the vertical direction”.

  According to the configuration of the means 7, the effect operation unit may be provided with an annular rotation operation unit which can be operated by the player and a pressing operation unit which can be operated by the player in the ring of the rotation operation unit. It is

  As a result, since the rotation operation unit capable of rotational operation as the effect operation unit and the pressing operation unit capable of pressing operation are provided, in the player participation type effect in which the operation of the effect operation unit can be received, It is possible to make the player operate the game by appropriately combining the key and the pressing operation, and it is possible to respond to effects requiring more complicated input (operation of the player), so a more diverse player participation type effect is played The player can be presented to the player, the player can be entertained, the player can be made less likely to get bored, and the decrease in interest for the game can be suppressed.

  Further, since the decorative body having the rotation operation unit and the pressing operation unit mounted on the upper surface can be lighted and decorated by the decoration light emitting means, the decoration is lighted and decorated when the player participation type effect is performed. Thus, the player's interest can be directed to the decorative body (rendering operation unit such as the rotation operation unit or the pressing operation unit) to urge the operation of the rendering operation unit, and the player can operate the rendering operation unit. A player participation type effect can be enjoyed to suppress a decrease in interest. At this time, it is possible to prompt the player to rotate the rotary operation unit or to press the pressing operation unit according to the light emission mode of the decorative body. The operation unit can be operated accurately, and player-participation type presentation can be enjoyed to suppress the decrease in interest.

  In addition, it is desirable to make the diameter of a rotation operation part larger than the distance of the front-back direction of a storage tray. As a result, since the front end side of the rotation operation portion is projected to the front more than the storage plate, the rotation operation portion can be made significantly conspicuous, and the interest of the player can be strongly attracted, and at first glance It can be recognized that it is different from the other gaming machines, and this gaming machine can be easily selected as a gaming machine to be played. In addition, when the diameter of the rotation operation unit is increased, it can be immediately recognized to the player that the rotation operation unit is for rotation operation, and when the player participation type effect is executed, the game is played It is possible to make it easy for the player to participate in the effect, to increase the sense of expectation for the execution of the player participation type effect, and to suppress the decrease in the player's interest. In addition, when the diameter (outer diameter) of the annular rotation operation portion is increased, the inner diameter of the rotation operation portion can be increased to enlarge the pressing operation portion in the ring. Therefore, the pressing operation of the pressing operation portion is performed. This can be facilitated, and the depression operation of the depression operation unit can be enjoyed to suppress the decrease in interest.

Means 8: In the configuration of means 7,
"The pressing operation unit
According to the gaming state, it is movable between a retracted position projecting slightly above the upper surface of the rotary operation unit and a projecting position projecting above the retracted position. It is characterized by being.

  Here, as the "pressing operation unit" which can be moved between the retracted position and the projecting position, "one that can move to the retracted position when the player performs a pressing operation at the projecting position", "a player at the projecting position Even if it is operated by pressing, it can not be moved to the retracted position, etc., and the like.

  According to the configuration of the means 8, between the retracted position where the pressing operation part protrudes slightly above the upper surface of the rotation operating part according to the game state, and the projecting position where it protrudes above the retracted position , Is made movable.

  As a result, when the pressing operation unit is moved to the projecting position according to the gaming state, the pressing operation unit is in a state of projecting upward than the rotation operation unit, so that the upper surface of the decorative body is large along with the rotation operation unit. Because it looks like it bulges upward, it can make the surroundings of the decoration look large and give a strong impact to the player, making the decoration stand out and raising the appeal of the player over other gaming machines In addition to the above, the pressing operation unit is greatly protruded upward, so that the player's interest can be strongly attracted by the pressing operation unit, and the expectation for the operation of the pressing operation unit can be enhanced to suppress the decrease in interest be able to.

  Further, since the pressing operation unit is movable between the retracted position and the projecting position, the player's interest can be directed to the rotation operating unit at the retracted position, and the player's interest at the projecting position. Since it is possible to direct to the pressing operation unit, by moving the pressing operation unit according to the content of the player participation type effect to be executed, it is possible to urge the operation unit to be operated by the player. It is possible to make the player operate the rotation operation unit and the pressing operation unit properly to enjoy the player participation type effect.

Means 9: In the configuration of means 8,
"The pressing operation unit
A cylindrical outer periphery pressing operation unit which allows the player to perform pressing operation at the projection position;
And a cylindrical center pressing operation portion which is disposed in the cylinder of the outer circumference pressing operation portion and which the player can press and operate at any position of the retracted position and the projecting position. It is characterized by

  According to the configuration of the means 9, the pressing operation unit is disposed in the cylinder of the cylindrical outer periphery pressing operation unit and the outer periphery pressing operation unit, which allows the player to perform pressing operation when the projection position is And a cylindrical center pressing operation portion which can be pressed by the player at any position.

  Thus, on the upper surface of the decorative body projecting largely to the front, the outer peripheral pressing operation portion and the rotational operating portion are concentrically arranged centering on the central pressing operation portion, so that the visual impact can be enhanced. While making it possible to attract the player's interest strongly, it is possible to increase the player's sense of expectation for the player participation type effect to operate each operation unit, and to suppress the decline of the player's interest Can. In addition, by making the decorative body emit light and decoration, the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the decorative body, that is, the rotation operation unit, the outer peripheral pressing operation unit, and the central pressing operation unit, thereby promoting their operation. A player participation type effect can be enjoyed to suppress a decrease in interest.

  In addition, when the pressing operation unit inside the rotation operation unit is at the retracted position, the central pressing operation unit, the outer periphery pressing operation unit, and the rotation operation unit have the same height, and the rotation operation unit and the center pressing operation When the pressing operation unit is moved from the retracted position to the projecting position, the central pressing operation unit and the outer circumferential pressing operation unit project upward from the rotational operation unit, and the central pressing operation unit, The outer periphery pressing operation unit and the rotation operation unit can be operated. Therefore, according to the contents of the player participation type effect, the player can properly use the operation unit which can be operated, and it is possible to cope with more various effects, and to make the player enjoy various operations. It is possible to prevent the player from getting bored and suppress the decrease in interest.

  Furthermore, in the state where the pressing operation unit is moved to the projecting position, the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical outer periphery pressing operation unit can be seen, so that it is possible for the player to illusion that the outer periphery pressing operation unit can be rotated. it can. As a result, when the player participation type effect for operating the rotation operation unit or the pressing operation unit is executed, the outer periphery pressing operation unit does not rotate even if the illusionary player tries to rotate the outer periphery pressing operation unit, so It is possible to impress the person, to give tension to the flow of presentation and to entertain the player.

Means 10: in any one of the means 6 to the means 9,
It is characterized in that "an operation unit light emitting means for emitting and decorating the effect operation unit according to the game state is further provided."

  Here, the "full-color LED", "monochrome LED", "high brightness LED", "organic EL", "incandescent bulb", "neon bulb", "cold cathode tube" etc Can be mentioned.

  According to the configuration of the means 10, the gaming machine is further provided with operation unit light emitting means for emitting and decorating the effect operation unit according to the game state.

  Accordingly, since the effect operation unit can be lighted and decorated by the operation unit light emitting means according to the gaming state, by simultaneously executing the light emission decoration of the effect operation unit and the light emission decoration of the decoration by the decoration light emitting means The light emitting decoration of the whole of the bulging part which is bulging forward under the door window can be made to emit light, and the bulging part can be made to stand out to attract the player's interest strongly, and the whole is a light emitting decoration. By doing this, it is possible to make the player think that there is something good, to increase the sense of expectation for the game and to suppress the decrease in interest.

  In addition, by making the effect operation unit emit light and decorate by the operation unit light emitting means, the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the effect operation unit, so that the player participation type effect for operating the effect operation unit is executed. At the same time, by emitting and decorating the effect operation unit, the player's interest can be directed to the effect operation unit and the operation can be urged, and by operating the effect operation unit, the player can enjoy the player participation type effect It is possible to suppress the decline in interest.

Means 11: In a gaming machine
"A game board having a game area where a game is played,
A main unit frame which detachably holds the game board from the front,
A door frame base having a door window that closes the front side of the main body frame so as to be able to be opened and closed and allows the game area to be viewed from the front;
A bulging portion provided with a storage tray that bulges forward from a portion below the door window on the front surface of the door frame base, and can store game media for playing a game in the game area ,
The door frame is attached at the center in the left-right direction of the bulging portion and extends in a semicircular ring so as to bulge outward in a semicircular arc shaped cross-sectional shape, and the front end is forward of the front end of the storage plate The first decorative portion projecting forward from the front surface of the base to a distance of 1/3 to 2/3 with respect to the full width of the door frame base, and the front end are positioned behind the first decorative portion. A decorative body provided with a second decorative portion disposed below the first decorative portion and extending in a semicircular ring shape so as to bulge outward in a semicircular arc cross-sectional shape;
Decorative body light emitting means for emitting and decorating the decorative body according to a game state which is changed by playing a game in the game area;
The upper surface of the upper surface of the decorative body is attached to the rear of the front end of the upper surface of the decorative body, and the player can rotate the annular rotary operation unit, and the upper surface of the rotary operation unit A cylinder which is movable between a retracted position projecting slightly upward and a projecting position projecting upward from the retracted position, the cylinder being operable by the player at the projecting position. It consists of a cylindrical outer pressing operation unit and a cylindrical central pressing operation unit which can be pressed by the player at any position of the retracted position and the projecting position, which is disposed in the cylinder of the outer circumferential pressing operation unit. A presentation operation unit that includes a pressing operation unit, and the operation of the player can be accepted according to the gaming state;
And an operation unit emitting means for emitting and decorating the effect operation unit in accordance with the game state.

  According to the configuration of the means 11, the gaming machine can open and close the front side of the main body frame, the main body frame holding the gaming board having the game area where the game is played, the game board detachably from the front, and the front side The door frame base has a door window that allows the player to see the game area from the front, and the front side of the door frame base bulges forward from a portion below the door window, A bulging portion provided with a storage tray capable of storing game media for playing a game in the area and a center of the bulging portion in the lateral direction of the bulging portion are bulging outward in a semicircular arc cross-sectional shape Extending forwardly from the front of the door frame base to a distance of 1/3 to 2/3 of the entire width of the door frame base in front of the front end of the storage plate. One decoration, and the first decoration so that the front end is located behind the first decoration And a decoration body having a second decoration portion extending in a semicircular shape so as to bulge outward in a semicircular arc-shaped cross-sectional shape, and the decoration body is played in the game area A decorative body light emitting means for emitting light according to a game state which is changed by being performed, an annular rotation operation unit attached behind a front end of an upper surface of the decoration body and capable of rotating operation by a player, and rotation operation In the ring of the unit, it is possible to move between a retracted position which protrudes slightly above the upper surface of the rotary operation unit and a projected position which protrudes above the retracted position depending on the game state. The cylindrical outer periphery pressing operation portion which allows the player to perform pressing operation at the protruding position, and the cylinder can be pressed and operated at any position of the retracted position and the projecting position, which are disposed in the cylinder of the outer periphery pressing operation portion Column-like central pressing operation part And an operation unit light emitting means for emitting and decorating the effect operation unit according to the game state. It is

  As a result, a bulging portion provided with a storage tray capable of storing game media bulges forward at a portion below the door window on the front surface of the door frame base that closes the main body frame so as to open and close. And a decoration having a 1/3 to 2/3 length with respect to the full width of the door frame base and having a front end projecting forward from the front of the door frame base in the bulging portion, The center pressing operation unit, the outer periphery pressing operation unit, and the rotation operation unit are arranged concentrically on the upper surface of the lens. Thereby, when the gaming machine is attached to the island facility of the gaming hall, the decorative body to which the rendering operation unit is attached on the upper surface is largely projected forward, below the door window where the inside of the gaming area can be viewed. The decorative body can be made more prominent than other gaming machines, and it is possible to attract the player's interest strongly, and it is possible to enhance the appeal for the player, and to select this gaming machine as the gaming machine to be played It can be made easy. In addition, since the front end of the decorative body is projected forward largely below the door frame, the decorative body can be moved forward from the front end of the storage plate, and the length in the left-right direction of the decorative body is greater than that in the prior art. It can be long. Therefore, even if the player places his hand on the upper surface of the bulging portion or puts his hand on the storage tray, the portion concealed by the player's hand can be reduced with respect to the entire decoration. When the light emitting decoration is performed by the decorative body light emitting means, the player can be made to notice the light emitting decoration of the decorative body easily, and the player is prevented from feeling lost and the decrease in interest for the game is suppressed. It can be done.

  In addition, since the decorative body is greatly projected forward below the door window, the front end of the decorative body approaches the player as closely as possible when the player is seated in front of the gaming machine. Therefore, depending on the game state, if the decorative body is made to emit light and decorated by the decorative body light emitting means or the effect operation portion is made to emit light and decorated by the operation portion light emitting means, the light will illuminate the player from below. A player's line of sight can be directed to the lower part of the decorative body or effect operation unit by the decorative body or the light emission decoration of the effect operation section, and the game provided in the front by turning the line of sight of the player downward The inside of the area can be kept away from the player's view to make it difficult for the player to visually recognize the inside of the game area. Therefore, in the game area, for example, when the scene of the effect image changes, when the movable body moves, when the variable winning opening (second starting opening, big winning opening, prize winning opening, etc.) opens and closes. At the time of, etc., the decoration body or the effect operation unit is made to emit light to make the player face the lower part of the game area, and then, when the player returns the line of sight to the game area, the effect image or the movable body The fact that they are changing can surprise the player and give a strong impact, and can entertain the player and make the player think that something is good. It is possible to increase the sense of expectation for the game and suppress the decline in interest.

  Furthermore, as described above, it is possible to cause the player to be surprised by changing the effects in the game area by making the light emission decoration of the decoration body be noticed according to the game state, so that the decoration body The light emission decoration can indicate to the player the arrival of a chance (for example, the occurrence of an advantageous gaming state ("big hit game") in which the player is advantageous). As a result, it is possible to give a premium feeling to the light emission decoration of the decorative body, so it is possible to make the player excited and thrilled depending on whether or not the decorative body emits light and decorates, making the player enjoyable and entertaining The decrease can be suppressed.

  Further, since the decorative body is greatly projected forward, when the player tries to look at the entire decorative body, the player looks away from the gaming machine, so that the entire gaming machine including the game area can be easily viewed. As a result, it is possible to make the player feel as if it were put on one tempo, and it is possible to relax the player and to suppress the decrease in interest.

  In addition, since the decorative body projecting forward largely is attached to the center in the lateral direction of the bulging portion, the presence of the decorative body can be highlighted and the player's interest can be strongly attracted, which appeals to the player. Can be made easy to select this gaming machine as a gaming machine to play a game. In addition, since the decorative body projecting forward is attached to the center in the left-right direction, it is possible to easily extend the player's hands forward, so the operation unit (handle) for driving the game medium into the game area ), Handling of gaming media stored in the storage tray, and the like can be facilitated, and it is possible to make it difficult for the player to be stressed and to suppress the decrease in interest.

  Furthermore, the first decorative portion and the second decorative portion disposed above and below the decorative body have a semicircular arc-shaped cross section extending in a semicircular shape so as to bulge outward, so that the cylinder Since half of the tube-shaped donuts project forward, it is possible to give the player a smooth and soft impression, and make the player play the game in a calm mood. As a result, it is possible to make the player concentrate on the game and suppress the decline in interest, and to recognize that it is a safe one that is unlikely to cause injury even if the player makes contact at first glance, By reassuring the player, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest for the game.

  In addition, the light emitting decoration of the decorative body and the effect operation unit attached to the upper surface of the decorative body can simultaneously light emitting decorate the entire bulging portion that is bulging forward of the lower part of the door window. Therefore, the bulging portion can be made to stand out to attract the player's attention strongly, and the whole light emitting decoration can make the player think that there may be something good for him and the game The player's interest can be directed to the rendering operation unit to prompt the operation, and by causing the player to operate the rendering operation unit, the player participation type effect can be enjoyed and the decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  Further, as described above, since the first decorative portion and the second decorative portion are formed in a semi-doughlet shape, when the entire decorative portion is made to emit light by the decorative body light emitting means according to the game state A light emitting decoration such as annular fluorescent light can be shown to the player, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted. When the light emission decoration is performed, for example, when the light emission decoration is performed so that the light flows from one side, the light emission effect can be shown to the player as the light moves and rotates inside the donut, so the player can The direction in which the light of the first decorative part or the second decorative part is rotating can be made to surprise the user to think that something is good, and the rotary operation unit attached to the upper surface of the decorative body The player can be urged to rotate in the same direction as that of the player. Alternatively, by alternately emitting and decorating the first decorative portion and the second decorative portion disposed one above the other, it is possible to show the player such a luminous effect that light moves up and down, and The moving light can prompt the player to perform the pressing operation on the outer periphery pressing operation unit and the center pressing operation unit. Therefore, by making the first decorative portion and the second decorative portion emit light and decorate appropriately, it is possible to urge the player to rotate the rotary operation portion or to press the pressing operation portion, so that the player can On the other hand, the rotation operation unit or the pressing operation unit can be accurately operated, and the player participation type effect can be enjoyed to suppress the decrease in interest.

  Furthermore, on the upper surface of the decorative body projecting largely to the front, the peripheral pressing operation unit and the rotational operation unit are arranged concentrically around the central pressing operation unit, so that visual impact can be enhanced. The player's interest can be strongly attracted, and the player's sense of expectation for the player participation type operation for operating each operation unit can be enhanced, thereby suppressing the decline in the player's interest it can.

  In addition, when the pressing operation unit inside the rotation operation unit is at the retracted position, the central pressing operation unit, the outer periphery pressing operation unit, and the rotation operation unit have the same height, and the rotation operation unit and the center pressing operation When the pressing operation unit is moved from the retracted position to the projecting position, the central pressing operation unit and the outer circumferential pressing operation unit project upward from the rotational operation unit, and the central pressing operation unit, The outer periphery pressing operation unit and the rotation operation unit can be operated. Therefore, according to the contents of the player participation type effect, the player can properly use the operation unit which can be operated, and it is possible to cope with more various effects, and to make the player enjoy various operations. It is possible to prevent the player from getting bored and suppress the decrease in interest.

  Further, in the state where the pressing operation unit is moved to the projecting position, the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical outer periphery pressing operation unit can be seen, so that it is possible for the player to illusion that the outer periphery pressing operation unit can be rotated. it can. As a result, when the player participation type effect for operating the rotation operation unit or the pressing operation unit is executed, the outer periphery pressing operation unit does not rotate even if the illusionary player tries to rotate the outer periphery pressing operation unit, so It is possible to impress the person, to give tension to the flow of presentation and to entertain the player.

Means 12: in any one of the means 1 to the means 11,
The gaming machine is
A plurality of receptacles arranged in the gaming area and capable of receiving gaming media;
The pachinko machine according to the present invention is a pachinko machine including a payout device for dispensing a predetermined number of gaming media in response to the reception of gaming media to the receiving port.

  Here, as the "receiving port", "a general winning opening that is always open in the gaming area", "an opening that is always open in the gaming area, and an advantageous gaming state in which the player has an advantage by receiving the game medium. In the game area, the start winning opening (starting opening) where the special lottery whether or not to generate a game is performed, and the fact that the game medium is received in a specific entrance (chucker) in the game area Regular lottery that is selected by game media passing through a specific area (gate, through chucker, etc.) in the game area Depending on the result, the game medium is a variable winning opening (a variable start opening, a prize winning opening, etc.) that can accept game media, and a "specified area (eg, gate, chucker, etc.) in the game area" Through Depending on the result of the normal lottery that is drawn by doing, it is possible to receive the game media, the variable start winning where special lottery whether or not to generate the advantageous game state where the player becomes advantageous by acceptance of the game media is done "A variable start-up opening", "V-prize-out opening for generating an advantageous gaming state in which the player is advantageous when the game medium received in the prize-winning opening is distributed and accepted by the allocating means", As an advantageous gaming state in which the player is advantageous, there are a special winning opening and a winning feature winning opening which can be opened and closed in a predetermined pattern to receive game media.

  In addition, as the "pachinko machine", "lottery means for performing a special lottery for generating an advantageous gaming state in which the player is advantageous by the reception of the game medium to the start opening, and a special lottery result drawn by the lottery means The special symbol is displayed in a variable manner after being displayed in a stopped manner, and the special lottery result display means for drawing the special lottery result by drawing by the combination of the special symbols displayed for the stop and the special lottery result display means One that includes advantageous gaming state generating means for causing an advantageous gaming state to be generated by opening and closing the special winning opening in a predetermined pattern when the special lottery result to be generated is displayed ("so-called digipachi machine") The distribution means for distributing the game media received in the mouth and the game medium distributed by the distribution means are opened and closed in a predetermined pattern when the game medium is received by the V prize opening A game provided with an advantageous gaming state generation means for generating an advantageous gaming state in which the player is advantageous (a so-called honeymoon machine), "having a large winning opening and a prize winning opening, gaming media to the starting opening The special prize opening or the prize winning opening is opened and closed in a predetermined pattern according to the special lottery result drawn by the acceptance of the prize winning opening when the gaming medium accepted in the prize winning opening is distributed to the V prize opening Or, those equipped with advantageous gaming state generation means (so-called, multi-function device) etc. which generate an advantageous gaming state which makes the player advantageous by opening and closing the special winning opening in a predetermined pattern.

  According to the configuration of the means 12, the gaming machine has a game area into which game media are inserted by the operation of the player, a plurality of receptacles arranged in the game area and capable of receiving the game media, and a game to the receiver A pachinko machine provided with a payout device for dispensing a predetermined number of gaming media in accordance with the reception of the media. As a result, in the pachinko machine, it is possible to achieve the operation and effect of any of the means described above.

  It is desirable that the light emission decoration of the decoration by the decoration light emitting means is executed by receiving the game medium inserted in the game area by the receiving port. As a result, when a game medium is received into the receiver, a predetermined number of game media is paid out, and the decorative body is illuminated and decorated, so that the player can enjoy the game medium to aim at the receiver by entertaining the player. As a result, it is possible to make it easy for the player to continue, and to suppress the decrease in interest for the player's game.

  In addition, a special lottery for generating an advantageous gaming state in which the player is advantageous due to the reception of the game medium to the starting opening is presented to the player when suggesting the lottery special lottery result to the player. As one of the effects to be performed, the decorative body may be made to emit light and decorated by the decorative body light emitting means. As a result, since the decorative body emits light and decorates, it is possible to give the player a strong impact and enjoyment by the above-described function and effect, the player can obtain the special lottery result for the player. It can be thought that an advantageous gaming state to be advantageous occurs (for example, a "big hit"), and a sense of expectation for the occurrence of the advantageous gaming state can be enhanced to suppress a decrease in interest. In addition, as described above, since it is possible to show the player a movable effect with a higher effect effect by making the decoration of the decorative body luminous, it is possible to show the player the special lottery result which has been drawn (for example, It can be suitably used for reach effect), and the player can be entertained to suppress the decrease in interest.

Means 13: in any one of the means 1 to the means 11,
The gaming machine is
Multiple torso, each with multiple symbols,
A start operation unit for rotating the plurality of the torso bodies by the player's operation after the game medium is inserted;
A plurality of stop operation units for stopping the rotation of the plurality of the torso respectively;
A slot machine comprising: a payout device for dispensing a predetermined number of gaming media according to a combination of stop symbols by all the rotating bodies stopped by the player operating a plurality of the stop operation units. It is characterized by

  Here, as the "slot machine", "the number of effective lines to determine the combination of stop symbols changes according to the number of game media (medals) used in one game", "a plurality of times of the trunk The internal lottery is executed with the start of the rotation, and the player gives a benefit according to the combination of the stop symbols and the lottery result of the internal lottery, "the effective line for determining the combination of the stop symbols is fixed And the like. In addition, as "Privileges", "Big Bonus (BB)", "Regular Bonus (RB)", "Cherry Rush Bonus (CRB)", "Replay", "Long Replay Time (LRT)", "Assist Time ( AT), etc.

  According to the configuration of the means 13, the start operation unit for rotating the plurality of torso by the player operating the gaming machine, the plurality of torso each having the plurality of symbols and the game medium being inserted. And a plurality of stop operation units for stopping the rotation of the plurality of turning bodies, and a combination of stop symbols by all the turning bodies stopped by the player operating the plurality of stop operation units. A slot machine including a payout device for dispensing a predetermined number of game media. As a result, in the pachislot machine, it is possible to achieve the operation and effect of any of the means described above.

  In addition, the light emission decoration of the decoration by the decoration light emission means is when the combination of symbols stopped rotating except for one on the effective line satisfies the combination of winning combinations (so-called reach) Alternatively, as one of the effects to be presented to the player, a plurality of decoration bodies by the drive means may be rotated. As a result, the decorative body is lighted and decorated, so that the player's interest can be strongly attracted and the operation of the stop operation unit can be enjoyed so as to be a winning combination. In addition, when the lottery result of the internal lottery is a winning combination, the decoration may be made to emit light and decorate, and since the decoration is made to emit light and decorate, a strong impact can be given to the player. If it is stopped by the combination of specific symbols, it can be considered that the advantageous gaming state in which the player is advantageous occurs (for example, “BB”), and the expectation for the occurrence of the advantageous gaming state is increased. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest. Further, as described above, by making the decorative body emit light and decorate, it is possible to show the player a movable effect with a higher effect effect, so it is preferable for the effect for suggesting the player the drawn internal lottery. It can be used to entertain the player and suppress the decrease in interest.

Means 14: in any one of the means 1 to the means 11,
The gaming machine is
It is characterized by being a fusion machine combining a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine.

  Here, the “fusion machine” in which a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine are fused is a series of symbols consisting of a plurality of symbols according to the operation of the start operation unit (for example, operation lever) after inserting a plurality of game media. Is displayed in a fluctuating manner, and then, the fluctuation of the symbol row is stopped according to the operation of the stop operation unit (for example, stop button), the game medium is paid out according to the combination of the stop symbol, , Advantageous game state) is given. In addition, when the stop operation unit is not operated even after the predetermined time has elapsed, the variation display of the symbol row may be stopped in response to the predetermined time having elapsed.

  According to the configuration of the means 14, the gaming machine is a fusion machine combining a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine. Thereby, in the compound machine which united the pachinko machine and the pachislot machine, the operation effect of any of the means mentioned above can be produced.

  In addition, the light emission decoration of the decoration by the decoration light emission means is when the combination of symbols stopped rotating except for one on the effective line satisfies the combination of winning combinations (so-called reach) As one of the effects to be presented to the player, the decorative body may be made to emit light and decorate the decorative body by the decorative body light emitting means, and the decorative result is made to emit light and decorate when the lottery result of the internal lottery is a winning combination. The same effects as those described above can be achieved.

[effect]
As described above, according to the above-mentioned technical means, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having high appeal to a player and capable of suppressing a decrease in interest for the player's game by the light emission decoration.

[Relationship between the above form and the above technical means]
The plate unit 200 of the door frame 3 in the present embodiment has the bulging portion of the present invention, the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202 in the present embodiment have the storage plate of the present invention, and the effect operation unit cover unit in the effect operation unit 300 of the present embodiment The unit lower cover 311 and the unit front cover 312 of the present invention 310 correspond to the decoration of the present invention, and the upper center dish decoration 312a of the unit front cover 312 in the present embodiment corresponds to the first decoration of the present invention. The lower dish center lower decoration body 312b is the second decoration portion of the present invention, and the upper dish center upper decoration substrate 314 and the lower dish center lower decoration substrate 316 in the present embodiment are the decoration body light emitting means of the present invention, The substrate 352, the center button decoration substrate 376 and the outer periphery button decoration substrate 377 correspond to the operation unit light emitting means of the present invention, respectively.

[Characteristic effects of this embodiment]
As described above, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the gaming ball B is provided on the lower side of the door window 101a in the front of the door frame base 101 in the door frame 3 closing the main body frame 4 openably. The plate unit 200 including the storable upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202 is expanded forward, and the plate unit 200 has a front end having a length of about 1/2 the entire width of the door frame base 101. A center pressing operation portion 303a, which is provided concentrically on the top surface of the rendering operation portion cover unit 310, and a periphery pressing operation portion, provided with the rendering operation portion cover unit 310 projecting forward from the front surface of the door frame base 101 303 b and a rotation operation unit 302. Thereby, when the pachinko machine 1 is attached to the island facility of the game hall, the effect operation unit cover unit 310 to which the effect operation unit 301 is attached on the upper surface below the door window 101a where the inside of the game area 5a can be viewed visually Since the plate unit 200 (rendering operation unit cover unit 310) can be made more conspicuous than the other pachinko machines 1 because it projects largely forward, it can attract the player's interest strongly and appeal to the player The power can be enhanced, and the pachinko machine 1 can be easily selected as a pachinko machine to be played. In addition, since the front end of the effect operation unit cover unit 310 (the unit front cover 312) is largely protruded to the front below the door frame 3, the effect operation unit cover unit 310 should be moved forward from the front end of the upper tray 201. The length of the effect operation unit cover unit 310 in the left-right direction can be made longer than in the prior art. Therefore, even if the player places his hand on the upper surface of the plate unit 200 or puts his hand on the upper plate 201, the portion covered by the player's hand is reduced with respect to the entire effect operation unit cover unit 310. Therefore, when the presentation operation unit cover unit 310 (unit front cover 312) is illuminated and decorated by the dish center upper decoration substrate 314 and the dish center lower decoration substrate 316, the light emission decoration of the unit front cover 312 for the player It is possible to make it easy for the player to notice that the player feels lost, and to suppress the decrease in interest for the game.

  In addition, since the effect operation unit cover unit 310 is largely protruded to the front below the door window 101a, when the player is seated in front of the pachinko machine 1, the unit front cover 312 in the effect operation unit cover unit 310. Since the front end of the unit is as close as possible to the player, the unit front cover 312 can be lighted and decorated by the upper center dish decoration substrate 314 and lower dish center lower decoration substrate 316 according to the game state. When the decoration operation unit 301 is lighted and decorated by the ring decoration substrate 352, the center button decoration substrate 376, and the outer circumference button decoration substrate 377, the light illuminates the player from the lower side, and the unit front cover 312 and the effect operation unit 301. Of the player's eyes toward the unit front cover 312 and the effect operation unit 301 below It is possible to, by directing the line of sight of the player downwards, can be difficult away within the game area 5a provided in the front from the player's field of vision, it is visible within the game area 5a. Therefore, in the game area 5a, for example, when the scene of the effect image by the effect display device 1600 changes, when the movable body moves, when the second start opening 2004 or the big winning opening 2005 opens and closes, etc. By making the unit front cover 312 and the effect operation unit 301 emit light and decoration, the player is directed to the lower side of the game area 5a, and then when the player returns the line of sight to the inside of the game area 5a By changing the body etc., it is possible to surprise the player and give a strong impact, and it is possible to entertain the player and to make the player think that something good may be done It is possible to increase the sense of expectation for the game and to suppress the decrease in interest.

  Furthermore, as described above, it is possible to cause the player to be surprised by changing the effects in the game area 5a by making the unit front cover 312 pay attention by emitting light depending on the game state. The light emission decoration of the unit front cover 312 can indicate to the player the arrival of a chance (for example, the occurrence of an advantageous gaming state ("big hit game") in which the player is advantageous). As a result, since a premium feeling can be given to the light emission decoration of the unit front cover 312, the player can be excited and excited depending on whether or not the unit front cover 312 is light emission decoration, and the player is enjoyed It is possible to suppress the decline in interest.

  In addition, since the unit front cover 312 is greatly projected forward, when the player tries to look at the entire unit front cover 312, he / she looks away from the pachinko machine 1, and thus the entire gaming machine including the game area Becomes easy to see. As a result, it is possible to make the player feel as if it were put on one tempo, and it is possible to relax the player and to suppress the decrease in interest.

  In addition, since the effect operation unit cover unit 310 projecting largely forward is attached to the center of the plate unit 200 in the left-right direction, the presence of the effect operation unit cover unit 310 is highlighted to attract the player's interest strongly. Thus, the pachinko machine 1 can be made easy to select as a pachinko machine to increase the appeal of the player and play a game. Further, since the effect operation unit cover unit 310 projecting forward is attached to the center in the left-right direction, the player's hands can be easily extended forward, so the game ball B is thrown into the game area 5a. It is possible to facilitate the operation of the handle 182 and the handling of the game balls B stored in the upper plate 201, and it is possible to make it difficult for the player to give stress and to suppress the decrease in interest.

  Furthermore, the upper center dish decoration 312a and lower dish center lower decoration body 312b arranged above and below the unit front cover 312 of the effect operation unit cover unit 310 have a semicircular arc-shaped cross section that bulges outward. Since it is configured to extend in a semi-circular shape, it is possible to give a player a smooth and soft impression because a half of a cylindrical tube-shaped donut protrudes forward. The player can be made to play the game in a calm mood, and the player can be devoted to the game to suppress the decrease in interest, and it is difficult for the player to get hurt even if the player makes contact at first glance It can be made to recognize that it is safe, and by lowering the player's reassurance, it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest for the game.

  Further, by simultaneously emitting and decorating the effect operation unit cover unit 310 and the effect operation unit 301 projecting from the upper surface of the effect operation unit cover unit 310, the plate unit 200 bulged forward to the lower side of the door window 101a. The light emitting decoration of the whole can be made to make the dish unit 200 stand out to attract the player's interest strongly, and the whole light emitting decoration may not be good for the player While being able to make it seem like, it is possible to direct the player's interest to the rendering operation unit 301 and to urge the operation, and by letting the player operate the rendering operation unit 301, the player participation type effect is enjoyed to entertain Can be suppressed.

  Further, as described above, since the dish center upper decoration body 312a and the dish center lower decoration body 312b have a semi-doughlet shape, the dish center upper decoration board 314 and the dish center lower decoration board 316 make the dish center upper according to the gaming state. Luminescent decoration of the whole of the decoration body 312a and the lower center dish decoration 312b makes it possible to show the player a light emitting decoration such as a circular fluorescent light, which can strongly attract the player's interest. When the light emission decoration is performed, for example, when the light emission decoration is performed so that the light flows from one side, the light emission effect can be shown to the player as the light moves and rotates inside the donut, so the player can The rotary operation unit 302 attached to the upper surface of the presentation operation unit cover unit 310 can be surprised to be thought to be something good, and the dish center upper decoration body 312a and the dish center lower decoration body The player can be urged to rotate the light 312 b in the same direction as the light rotates. Alternatively, it is possible to show the player such a light emission effect that the light moves up and down by alternately emitting and decorating the dish center upper decoration 312a and the dish center lower decoration 312b arranged at the top and bottom. At the same time, the light moving up and down can urge the player to press the outer periphery pressing unit 303b or the center pressing unit 303a. Accordingly, the player is urged to rotate the rotary operation unit 302 or urged to press the pressing operation unit 303 by appropriately emitting light and decorating the dish upper center decoration 312a and the dish lower center decoration 312b. As a result, the player can be made to operate the rotation operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303 exactly, and the player participation type effect can be enjoyed and the decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed on the island facility of the game hall, it extends forward from the side (outside the right side) of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 of the door frame 3. Side window in which three side window interior decoration portions 410b cylindrically extending in the front-rear direction of the side window interior decoration member 412 are spaced apart in the vertical direction on the flat door frame right side unit 410. Since the LEDs of the in-window decoration portion decoration substrate 413 for emitting and decorating the plurality of in-window decoration portions 410b are turned off in the normal state, the three side windows in the side window 410a are formed. It is possible to visually recognize the inside of the game area 5a from the side of the present pachinko machine 1 (end of the island facility) through the decorative portion 410b. Therefore, even if the player who is searching for the pachinko machine 1 (the game board 5) as a pachinko machine to play a game does not move to the front of the pachinko machine 1 along the island facilities, the pachinko machine 1 is simplified. In the pachinko machine 1 according to the present invention, it is possible to enhance the sense of expectation for the game in the pachinko machine 1 and to suppress the decrease in interest. Thereafter, when the player is seated in front of the pachinko machine 1, the player can view the inside of the game area 5a of the game board 5 and the function display unit 1400 and the effect display device 1600 well through the door window 101a of the door frame 3. The player can play the game in the game area 5a, can enjoy the game for the player, and can know the current game state by the function display unit 1400 and the effect display device 1600.

  At this time, in the door frame 3 to which the side on the left side of the main body frame 4 is attached so as to be hinge rotatable by the door frame upper hinge pin 122 and the door frame lower hinge pin 126, Since the door frame right side unit 410 extends forward from the right outside far from the axis of the hinge, even if the side window 410a passes through the door frame right side unit 410, the other including the side window interior decoration 410b The part of the game can block the line of sight of the players located in the vicinity, so that the entire game area 5a can be seen and seen from other players, as viewed from other players. By making it hard to receive the feeling, it is possible to make the other player play the game without hesitation. Then, when the game progresses in the gaming area 5a and the gaming state is changed to a predetermined gaming state, the three side window interior decoration portions 410b are caused to emit light by the LEDs of the side window interior decoration portion decoration substrate 413, and the light is made to the side windows. The dazzling inside of 410 a changes the visibility through the side window 410 a. At this time, since the three side window inner decoration portions 410b are cylindrical, light can be emitted in a band shape and radially, making the side window inner decoration portion 410b dazzling so that it is difficult to visually recognize the opposite side from the interval The light emission of the side window inner decoration 410b allows the player's line of sight to be directed to the side window inner decoration 410b, and the interest in the opposite side through the side window 410a is diminished and the side window It is possible to reduce the visibility through the 410a, and to make it difficult for the other player such as the next player to look in the game area 5a or the function display unit 1400 and the effect display device 1600.

  More specifically, as the gaming state, for example, at the time of the gaming state (scene) which suggests the arrival of a chance for the player to take advantage, the three side window interior decoration 410b is made to emit light, and the side by the glare Reduce the visibility through the window 410a. This makes it difficult for another player such as the next player to recognize that a chance has arrived in the pachinko machine 1 through the side window 410a, so the other player pays attention to the pachinko machine 1 If you pay attention, you may feel uncomfortable because other players are concerned about it and you can not concentrate on the game, or you may feel lost because of the induction of mistakes. Can be prevented, and it is possible to make the game enjoyable and suppress the decline in interest. Therefore, since it is possible to prevent the other player from looking into the game area 5a through the side window 410a at the game state such as the arrival of a chance, the player can concentrate on the game, and the game can be played. It is possible to make it more entertaining and suppress the decline in interest.

  Further, since the three in-window decorative portions 410b extending in the front-rear direction are arranged at intervals in the up-down direction in the side window 410a, the angle at which the side window 410a is viewed from the side changes. Also, since the three side window inner decoration 410b does not appear to overlap, when the side window inner decoration 410b is not emitting light, the opposite side passes through between the three side window inner decoration 410b in the side window 410a. A player looking for this pachinko machine 1 (this game board 5) as a pachinko machine that can visually recognize (within the game area 5a) and moves to the front of the pachinko machine 1 along the island facilities This pachinko machine 1 can be easily found without having to.

  In addition, since the three side window inner decoration portions 410b are arranged at intervals in the vertical direction, when the side window inner decoration portion 410b emits light, a portion at the same height in the game area 5a Can be made less visible to other players through the side window 410a, so that depending on the game state, the specific side window inner decoration portion 410b of the three side window inner decoration portions 410b emits light, It is possible to make it difficult to visually recognize a specific area (part) in the height direction in the game area 5a, and it is possible to make it difficult for other players to know the arrival of a chance or the like. Therefore, since it is possible to prevent the other player from looking into the game area 5a through the side window 410a at the game state such as the arrival of a chance, the player can concentrate on the game, and the game can be played. It is possible to make it more entertaining and suppress the decline in interest.

  Furthermore, since the door frame right side unit 410 extending long forward is provided with the side window 410a penetrating to the left and right, the three side window interior decoration portions 410b are extinguished, and the side window 410a is In the state where the passing visibility is secured, the inside of the game area 5a can be viewed from the side of the pachinko machine 1 through the side window 410a, so even if it does not move to the front of the pachinko machine 1, the island facility From the end of the game area 5a, it can be made easy to find out that an injustice has been made in the game area 5a, and the burden on the game hall side can be reduced.

  Further, of the left and right outer sides of the door window 101a of the door frame 3, the door frame right side unit 410 is extended forward from the right outer side farther from the left side attached to the main frame 4 so as to be hinge rotatable. Therefore, the door frame 3 can be opened 90 degrees or more with respect to the main body frame 4. Therefore, when the door frame 3 is opened and work such as maintenance or replacement of the game board 5 is performed, the door frame 3 can be made less likely to be in the way by opening the door frame 3 widely, preventing the deterioration of workability. can do.

  In addition, since the three side window interior decoration portions 410b are made to emit light in accordance with the gaming state, there is a possibility (the so-called, "big hit" game) that the player becomes advantageous (for example, "big hit" game) Depending on the expected value), the in-side window decorative portion 410b may be made to emit light or be turned off. In detail, for example, during the execution of the reach effect, the reach development effect, etc., when the expectation value is low, by making the side window interior decoration portion 410b emit light to make it difficult for another player to see, an advantageous gaming state occurs. When it does not do (when it is "losing"), it can be avoided that it becomes an awkward atmosphere with other players, and can suppress the fall of the interest to a player's game. Alternatively, when the expectation value is high, the advantageous game state occurs even if it is easy to be scolded by other players by not emitting light or turning off the decoration part 410b in the side window ("big hit" occurs) ), And it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest without becoming an awkward atmosphere, and to make the atmosphere that other players are cheering up, and to increase the interest of the player in the game It can make the game more entertaining.

  Furthermore, since the three side window interior decoration portions 410b are arranged at intervals in the vertical direction, the possibility of occurrence of an advantageous gaming state (for example, a "big hit" game) in which the player is advantageous (so-called, Depending on the expected value), the three side window interior decoration 410b may be made to emit light in order (for example, from bottom to top, top to bottom, center to top and bottom, etc.) or three side window interior decoration 410b The specific side window interior decoration 410b may be made to emit light. In detail, for example, during the execution of the reach production, the reach development production, etc., the higher the expectation value, the more the three side window interior decoration portions 410b emit light in order from the bottom or in order from the top; Thus, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to look out from the player, to suggest an expected value, to increase the player's expectation for the game and to suppress the decrease in interest.

  The light emission modes of the three side window inner decoration parts 410b as described above are, in addition to light emission (lighting) and extinguishing, differences in blinking patterns and light emitting colors, changes in light emitting color (for example, cold blue to hot Change of feeling to red, change of blue yellow red to imitate traffic signal, etc., or change of brightness (brightness), etc. may be used, and the same operation effect as the above can be exhibited. The decorativeness of the door frame 3 can be further enhanced by the three side window interior decoration portions 410b, and the pachinko machine 1 with high appeal that can strongly attract the player's attention can be obtained.

  From such a thing, conversely, during execution of reach production, reach development production, etc., it is advantageous game state for the player due to the presence or absence of light emission of the three side window interior decoration 410b and the light emission mode such as the light emission pattern. Since it is possible to indicate the degree of possibility (expected value) of occurrence of the character, the player is excited depending on what kind of light emission mode the three side window interior decoration portions 410b emit light during the execution of the effect. It is possible to make the player feel excited, and to make the player's sense of expectation higher, thereby suppressing the decrease in interest.

  Further, the three side window interior decorative portions 410b may be made to be able to emit light or turn off arbitrarily by the operation of the effect operation unit 301 of the effect operation unit 300 provided in the door frame 3. . Thereby, for example, when the possibility (so-called, expected value) of occurrence of an advantageous gaming state (for example, a "big hit" game) in which the player is advantageous (a so-called expectation value) is low, at the time of reach effect or reach effect, etc. By operating the unit 301 to make the side window interior decoration unit 410b emit light, it is possible to prevent the other player from being overlooked by another player, so that no advantageous gaming state occurs (in the case of "losing") In addition, it is possible to avoid an awkward atmosphere due to being seen by other players, and to suppress a drop in interest for the player's game. Alternatively, when the possibility (expected value) for the occurrence of the advantageous gaming state is high (or when a hot effect is being executed), the effect operation unit 301 is operated to prevent the side window interior decoration portion 410b from emitting light. (Or, by turning off the decoration in the side window 410b), even if it is scolded from another player, the occurrence of the advantageous gaming state does not become an awkward atmosphere and a drop in interest is While being able to suppress, it can be made into the atmosphere which other players are cheering up, and it is possible to make the player's interest in the game more enjoyable and make the game more enjoyable.

  In addition, the timing at which the three side window inner decorative portions 410b emit light, the light emission mode, and the like may be set by the operation of the effect operation unit 301. In this way, in the default state set in advance, the player-specific timing that the player does not want to see from other players is not set, and some players may feel uncomfortable because they are scolded by the player and the interest for the game is entertained. Although there is a risk that the game can be customized according to the player's preferences by the operation of the rendering operation unit 301, the above-described effects can be reliably achieved, and the player's interest in the game can be enjoyed. The decrease can be suppressed.

  Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the dispensing device 580 of the dispensing unit 560 in the main body frame 4, the ball pulling lever 593 is lowered (locked) to make the ball pulling movable piece 592 unrotatable and the ball pulling passage. In the state where the 580b is closed (the first state), the game ball B which has flowed down the dispensing passage 580a from the upstream can not be circulated to the ball pulling passage 580b by the ball pulling movable piece 592. It will be circulated to the downstream side of the dispensing passage 580a and can be sent to the dispensing blade 589 through the dispensing passage 580a. On the other hand, when the ball extraction lever 593 is raised (the lock is released) to make the ball extraction movable piece 592 rotatable (second state), the gaming ball B which has flowed down the payout passage 580a from the upstream is the payout passage It will flow to the ball extraction passage 580b beyond the ball extraction movable piece 592 without flowing to the downstream side of the 580a, and may be discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 which is the island facility side via the ball extraction passage 580b. it can. Further, since the discharge blade 589 is provided on the downstream side of the discharge passage 580a, in the normal state, the ball extraction movable piece 592 is in a non-rotatable state (first state) by the ball extraction lever 593. On the upstream side of the payout blade 589, the gaming balls B are held in a continuous state as in a beaded connection.

  When the payout blade 589 is rotationally driven in this normal state, the gaming ball B on the upstream side of the payout blade 589 flows to the downstream side, and the gaming ball B is induced to the payout blade 589 by the ball extraction movable piece 592. Since the game ball B on the upstream side of the payout wing 589 is relatively slow since the game sphere B is paid out one by one in the payout wing 589 while being sent to the payout wing 589, Since the force acting on the ball removal movable piece 592 due to contact is relatively weak, and the opposite side of the part of the ball removal movable piece 592 to be in contact with the game ball B is near the center of the ball removal passage 580 b There is no possibility that the ball extraction passage 580b is pinched between the wall surface of the ball extraction passage 580b and the gaming ball B, and the ball extraction movable piece 592 is not broken. From this, it is possible to reduce the breakage of the ball extraction movable piece 592 during the game, so that it is possible to prevent the game from being interrupted due to the breakage of the ball extraction movable piece 592 and giving the player an unpleasant feeling. It is possible to suppress the decrease in interest for the player's game.

  On the other hand, when discharging the game ball B from the payout passage 580a when replacing or maintaining the pachinko machine 1 (or the game board 5), the ball pulling lever 593 can be raised to turn the ball pulling movable piece 592 In the state (the second state), the gaming ball B, which is in a state like a string connection on the upstream side of the ball extraction movable piece 592 flows over the ball extraction movable piece 592 to the ball extraction passage 580 b side Become. At this time, since the ball removal passage 580b extends straight from the upstream side of the discharge passage 580a, the gaming ball B that has flowed down from the upstream of the discharge passage 580a flows straight down to the ball removal passage 580b. At the same time, since the downstream side of the ball removal passage 580b communicates with the island equipment side, there is nothing like the payout wing 589 for suppressing the flow of the gaming ball B, so the gaming ball B is from the payout passage 580a side. It will flow down too early. As described above, in the state where the ball extraction movable piece 592 is rotatable, the gaming ball B flows down at a high speed in the ball extraction passage 580b, so the ball extraction movable piece 592 protruding into the ball extraction passage 580b. The game ball B comes into contact with the lower end side of the ball vigorously, but the ball extraction movable piece 592 passes between the main body side guide wall 581a of the dispenser main body 581 and the rear lid side guide wall 582a of the dispenser rear lid 582 Since the ball pullout movable piece 592 is moved to the outside of the ball pullout passage 580b by the contact force since it can move to the outer side than the inner surface of the ball pullout passage 580b, the ball pullout movable piece 592 is The game ball B is not pinched between the wall surface of the removal passage 580b and the game ball B, and a strong force can be prevented from acting on the ball extraction movable piece 592. Piece 59 Deterioration and breakage of the durability can be suppressed. From such a thing, since it is possible to make the ball removal movable piece 592 hard to break, more gaming balls B can be discharged faster to the island equipment side on the downstream side of the ball removal passage 580b. It is possible to suppress an increase in time required for replacement or maintenance of the machine 1, and to reduce the burden on the game hall side.

  In addition, when the ball extraction movable piece 592 is rotatable, the ball extraction passage 580b passes between the main-body-side guide wall 581a and the rear lid-side guide wall 582a at intervals where the ball extraction movable piece 592 is narrower than the gaming ball B. In order to move to the outside of the ball removal passage 580b, the game ball B is in contact with the ball removal movable piece 592 projecting into the ball removal passage 580b so that the ball removal movable piece 592 has a main body side guide wall 581a and a rear lid side guide wall 582a. Even when the game ball B is moved to the side between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a together with the ball extraction movable piece 592 when moving outward through the space, Only the game ball B can prevent outward movement by the space between the narrow main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a. Then, the movement of the gaming ball B to the outside is blocked between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a, so that the gaming ball B is separated from the ball pulling movable piece 592, and the ball thereafter Since the movement of the pullout movable piece 592 is due to an inertial force, a strong force does not act on the ball pullout movable piece 592, and the ball pullout movable piece 592 can be made hard to break and the main body side guide The gaming ball B does not protrude to the outside of the ball removal passage 580b from between the wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a, and the gaming ball B can be reliably circulated to the downstream side of the ball removal passage 580b.

  Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the frame-shaped outer frame 2 attached to the island facility of the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed can be opened and closed around the axis extending vertically on the left side. The main body frame 4 attached to the main frame 4 is closed so as to close the inside of the frame of the outer frame 2, and the door frame upper hinge pin 122 and the door frame lower hinge pin 126 (axial center) with respect to the main body frame 4 In the state where the door frame 3 attached so as to be openable / closable (hinge-rotatable) is closed, the front surface of the main body frame 4 and the rear surface of the door frame 3 face each other and extend in parallel Connection that connects the payout control board 633 on the frame 4 side, the main control board 1310 X, the peripheral control board 1510, etc. with the ball feeding unit 140 on the door frame 3 side, the handle unit 180, the rendering operation unit 300 etc. cave A portion 503 of the main frame 4 extends from the portion of the main frame 4 on the front surface of the main frame base 501 away from the axial center of the cable attachment recess 501h to the axial center and is mounted in the cable attachment recess 501h. After being held by the guiding body 502a of the connecting cable guiding member 502 extending in parallel with the front face and the rear face of the door frame 3, it further extends near the axial center, and then folded back and extends in a direction away from the axial center 3 is held by the cable holder 103a of the speaker duct 103 at a position closer to the axial center than the tip of the connection cable guide member 502, and then connected to the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 on the door frame 3 side. It is done.

  Then, when the door frame 3 closing (closing) the front side of the main body frame 4 is hingedly rotated about the axis on the left side so as to open from the main body frame 4, the rear surface of the door frame 3 is the main body Since the portion of the connecting cable 503 extending from the door frame 3 moves forward so as to be away from the main body frame 4 from being separated from the front surface of the frame 4, the folded connecting cable 503 is deformed to open. The connecting cable guiding member 502 is rotated (rotated) about the mounting shaft 502 c away from the axial center so that the connecting cable guiding member 502 is inclined with respect to the front surface of the main body frame 4 with the deformation of the connecting cable 503. Thus, when the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4, the tip end side close to the axial center of the connection cable guiding member 502 projects into the space between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3. The connection cable 503 guided by the member 502 passes near the axis, and the connection cable guide member 502 and the connection cable 503 are less likely to be in the way.

  In other words, since the connecting cable guiding member 502 extends the distal end portion from the rotatably mounted attachment shaft 502c to the axial center side, the proximal end portion of the guiding member is used like a conventional pachinko machine. As compared with the case of extending in a direction away from the shaft core, the folded portion of the connection cable 503 guided by the connection cable guiding member 502 is the hinge pin 122 and the door frame on the door frame of the door frame 3 opening and closing. The position close to the lower hinge pin 126 can be made a position where the folded portion of the connection cable 503 is less likely to be an obstacle.

  On the other hand, when closing the door frame 3 which is open to the main body frame 4, the rear surface of the door frame 3 moves so as to approach the front surface of the main body frame 4. Moves in the reverse direction to the above, and the connection cable 503 is held (guided) by the connection cable guide member 502, so that the door frame 3 is not pinched between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3. It can be closed. Therefore, at the time of maintenance such as opening and closing the door frame 3, the connection cable guide member 502 and the connection cable 503 do not interfere with the maintenance, and the maintenance can be performed smoothly and interrupted for maintenance It is possible to reduce the increase in interruption time of the playing game, and to suppress the decrease in the interest for the player's playing the game.

  Further, the connection cable 503 extending from the tip of the connection cable guiding member 502 to the axial center side is folded back and extends in the direction away from the axial core at a position closer to the axial core than the tip of the connection cable guiding member 502 Since the cable holder 103a holds it on the door frame 3 side, the rotation angle of the connection cable guiding member 502 with respect to the front surface of the main body frame 4 (cable attachment recess 501h) is a circle passing through the cable holder 103a around the axial center. The tangent line passing through the center of the attachment shaft 502c of the connecting cable guiding member 502 is equal to or less than the angle crossing the rear surface of the door frame 3, so the extending longitudinal axis of the connecting cable guiding member 502 is the door frame 3 It is possible not to make an angle close to a right angle with respect to the rear face of. Further, on the side of the door frame 3, the folded connection cable 503 is held by the cable holder 103 a at a position closer to the axial center than the tip of the connection cable guide member 502. When closing 3, the tip end side of the connection cable guide member 502 can be pulled toward the axial center side by the connection cable 503 held by the cable holder 103 a.

  From these things, when closing the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4, the connection cable guide member 502 can be rotated so as to return to the original state, the door frame 3 does not close, or the connection cable guide It is possible to prevent the occurrence of a defect in which the connection cable 503 is broken due to the end of the member 502 being in contact with the door frame 3. Therefore, the connection cable guiding member 502 and the connection cable 503 do not disturb the maintenance work when a defect occurs such that the door frame 3 must be opened and closed for maintenance while playing the game. This can be smoothly performed, and the increase in the interruption time of the game can be reduced to suppress the decrease in the interest of the player in the game.

  Further, since the connecting cable 503 guided by the connecting cable guiding member 502 is folded 180 degrees when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the connecting cable 503 is folded at the folded part. You can put on a bribe. Thus, when the door frame 3 is opened, the force for closing the connection cable 503 is acted upon by the fold when the 180-folded portion of the connection cable 503 is changed to open. Therefore, when the door frame 3 is closed, it is possible to prevent the connecting cable 503 (connection cable guiding member 502) from moving in the opening direction by its fold, and the connecting cable 503 (connection cable guiding member 502) It can be guided in the closing direction, and the door frame 3 can be smoothly closed.

  Further, in the door frame 3 opposite to the main body frame 4 to which the connecting cable guide member 502 is attached, a position closer to the axial center than the tip of the connecting cable guide member 502 when closed (axial center than the cable holder 103a (A position closer to the center of the speaker duct 103 than the cable holder 103a in the speaker duct 103), which can press the connection cable 503 toward the main frame 4 to which the connection cable guide member 502 is attached. A portion projecting backward on the side). As a result, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the pressing portion abuts on the connection cable 503 to press the distal end side of the connection cable guiding member 502 opened via the connection cable 503 in the closing direction. Therefore, the connection cable guiding member 502 can be smoothly closed along with the movement of the door frame 3 in the closing direction, and the door frame 3 can be reliably closed. In addition, a tangent line passing through the rotation center of the connection cable guiding member 502 and touching a circle passing through the pressing portion centering on the central axis (axial center) of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 and the door frame lower hinge pin 126 The crossing angle is configured to be 45 degrees or less. Thus, the maximum opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 that rotates (opens and closes) with the opening and closing of the door frame 3 can be 45 degrees or less. Therefore, when the door frame 3 is closed, the connection cable guide member It is possible to reliably rotate 502 in the closing direction, and the same function and effect as described above can be obtained.

  Furthermore, since the frame pieces 502b are respectively provided on the two long sides of the guide main body 502a in the connection cable guide member 502, the rigidity of the flat guide main body 502a is increased and it becomes difficult to bend. As a result, the connecting cable 503 can be guided in the longitudinal direction by the pair of frame pieces 502b, and the pachinko machine 1 having the above-described effects can be reliably embodied.

  Further, as described above, since the rigidity of the connection cable guide member 502 is enhanced, the connection cable guide member 502 is bent and distorted even when the connection cable 503 is a heavy connection cable 503 made of many electric wires. Therefore, the connecting cable guiding member 502 can be reliably rotated about the mounting shaft 502c, and the connecting cable 503 can be guided in a good state, and more electric wires can be guided. Since this becomes possible, the electrical connection between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 can be concentrated in one place, and the configuration of the pachinko machine 1 can be simplified.

  Further, in a state in which the connection cable 503 is put between the pair of frame pieces 502b in the guide main body 502a of the connection cable guide member 502, the connection cable 503 is connected to the connection cable 503 through the binding band 504 through the through holes 502d on both sides. Since the connection cable 503 can be held on the connection cable guide member 502 by winding the cable guide member 502 together with the binding band 504, the operation for holding the connection cable 503 on the connection cable guide member 502 is easily performed. be able to. Further, by holding the connection cable 503 by the binding band 504 through the through hole 502 d of the connection cable guiding member 502, the binding band 504 can be prevented from being detached from the guiding member 502. The connection cable 503 can be reliably held, and when the connection cable 503 is released from the connection cable guide member 502, the connection cable 503 is pinched between the main frame 4 and the door frame 3 when the door frame 3 is closed. Can be avoided, and the above-described effects can be reliably achieved.

  Furthermore, the space on the rear side of the main body frame speaker 622 of the speaker unit 620a attached to the main body frame 4 is a lower portion of the outer frame constituting the lower side of the outer frame 2 via the connection portion 621c and the connection cylindrical portion 43a. Since the space between the port member 47 and the connection cylinder 43a in the assembly 40 (the inner space 40a of the curtain plate) is communicated, the space in the speaker unit 620a and the space on the outer frame 2 side cause the main frame speaker Since the volume of the enclosure 624 of 622 can be secured sufficiently, a deep bass can be output from the main body frame speaker 622, and the sound of the bass can be used to entertain the player and suppress a drop in interest for the game. Can. Therefore, by providing the cable attachment recess 501 h for attaching the connection cable guide member 502 to the main body frame 4, even if the volume in the speaker unit 620 a decreases, it is possible to output the sound of deep bass from the main frame speaker 622 Since it is possible, the main body frame 4 can be provided with the cable attachment recess 501 h recessed rearward at the lower side of the main body frame speaker 622, and the connection cable guide member 502 having the above-described effects can be attached to the main body frame 4 side. In addition, since the connection cable guide member 502 holding a part of the connection cable 503 is attached to the inside of the cable attachment recess 501 h recessed backward in the main body frame 4, the door frame 3 is attached to the main body frame 4. When closed, the connection cable guide member 502 is accommodated in the cable attachment recess 501h, so that the protrusion from the front surface of the main body frame 4 can be suppressed as much as possible, and the interference with the rear surface of the door frame 3 is prevented. It is possible to prevent the door frame 3 from being closed reliably.

  Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 are closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the main body frame of the main body frame 4 through the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 of the door frame 3. The game area 5a of the game board 5 held in the game board insertion slot 501b of the base 501 can be viewed from the front (player side), and the lower side of the outer frame 2 is configured below the door window 101a. The front end of the port member 47 is open near the right end portion in the longitudinal direction (left and right direction) of the front surface of the front curtain plate member 42 of the outer frame lower assembly 40 and the port member at the lower front of the door frame 3 The speaker port 211 b of the dish base unit 210 is opened near the left end opposite to the left and right direction 47. And, the speaker opening 211 b communicates with the front side of the main body frame speaker 622 attached below the gaming board insertion port 501 b of the main body frame 4 and a speaker unit 620 a covering the rear side of the main body frame speaker 622 The internal space of the (speaker cover 621 and the speaker box 623) communicates with the inside of the port member 47 via the connection portion 621c of the speaker cover 621 and the connection cylindrical portion 43a of the rear curtain plate member 43. In this state, when the main body frame speaker 622 attached to the speaker unit 620 a is driven, the sound such as voice, music, and sound effect output forward from the main body frame speaker 622 is the speaker attachment portion of the speaker cover 621 The light is emitted to the player through the speaker opening 621 a and the speaker opening 211 b of the door frame 3. On the other hand, the sound output rearward from the main frame speaker 622 passes through the connecting portion 621c and the connecting cylindrical portion 43a to the inside of the curtain inner space 40a constituted by the curtain front member 42 and the curtain rear member 43. And is emitted from the port member 47 to the front player side. At this time, since the space (enclosure 624) on the rear side of the main body frame speaker 622 is constituted by the inner space of the speaker unit 620a and the inner space 40a of the lower frame lower assembly 40, The volume can be made as large as possible, and a sound with an extension in the low range from the body frame speaker 622 can be output. Further, since the connection cylindrical portion 43a of the rear curtain plate member 43 in the outer frame 2 is opened toward the center side (upper side) in the frame, the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 in the enclosure 624 (speaker unit 620a Since the width in the depth direction (longitudinal direction) at the connection portion with) can be made larger than in the prior art, the width in the front and rear direction of the connection cylindrical portion 43a and the connection portion 621c is increased, and the inside of the speaker unit 620a The attenuation of the sound from the space to the side of the inner space 40a of the outer frame 2 can be reduced as much as possible. Furthermore, on the outer frame 2 side, since the port member 47 has a cylindrical shape, Helmholtz resonance occurs in the port member 47, so that it is possible to amplify the bass range and to invert the phase. 47 can output a sound with amplified bass. Since the sound output forward from the main frame speaker 622 and the sound output forward from the port member 47 interfere with each other in front of the pachinko machine 1 and are synthesized, the volume becomes larger. The player can hear richer bass sounds, and the player can enjoy sounds such as voice, music, and sound effects to suppress a decrease in interest.

  Further, as described above, since the phase of the sound output backward from the main body frame speaker 622 in the port member 47 is inverted and radiated forward (a so-called bass reflex type speaker is configured), the main body When the sound output forward from the frame speaker 622 and the sound output forward from the port member 47 overlap, the phases of each other are the same, so the amplitude of the sound wave increases and the volume of the sound increases. Compared to the case of using a passive radiator, the output of sound can be enhanced with a simple configuration.

  Furthermore, since the speaker unit 620a and the outer frame lower assembly 40 are disposed below the game board insertion slot 501b in which the game board 5 is held, the upper and lower dimensions thereof can be enlarged. The volume of the enclosure 624 can be increased. In detail, generally, when the player is seated in front of the pachinko machine 1, the position (height) of the player's eyes is positioned above the center of the pachinko machine 1 in the vertical direction. Therefore, the center of the game area 5a in which the game is played is located above the center of the pachinko machine 1. From this, since the space is relatively easy to secure in the lower part of the pachinko machine 1, it is lower than the game board insertion slot 501b in the outer frame lower assembly 40 and the main body frame 4 constituting the lower side of the outer frame 2. Since the upper and lower dimensions of the side can be made relatively large, the volume of the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 can be increased by enlarging the upper and lower dimensions of the outer frame lower assembly 40 and the speaker unit 620a. As well as being able to output sounds richer in bass, it is possible to make the player enjoy the sound and to control the decline in interest for the game.

  Further, since the connecting cylindrical portion 43a and the connecting portion 621c are inclined with respect to the front-rear direction, the connecting portion 621c abuts on the connecting cylindrical portion 43a only by closing the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2. It can be connected, and the same operation and effect as described above can be exhibited, and since the sliding resistance does not occur between the connection cylindrical portion 43a and the connection portion 621c, the opening and closing operation of the main body frame 4 becomes heavy Therefore, it is possible to suppress the decrease in workability at the time of maintenance and the like.

  Furthermore, since the sealing member 48 seals between the connection cylindrical portion 43a and the connection portion 621c, sound leakage in the enclosure 624 can be prevented between the connection cylindrical portion 43a and the connection portion 621c. A pachinko machine 1 can be provided that reliably exerts the above-described effects.

  In addition, since a part of the volume of the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 can be secured in the outer frame lower assembly 40 of the outer frame 2, the speaker unit 620a can be made smaller, so the game board is relatively relative. The large insertion slot 501b can be provided to provide a wider gaming board 5 of the gaming area 5a, and the wider gaming area 5a can further entertain the player, and the wide gaming area 5a can be provided through the door window 101a of the door frame 3. This pachinko machine 1 can be made to stand out by making it visible, and the pachinko machine 1 can be made highly appealing to the player.

  Furthermore, in the lower part of the pachinko machine 1, the port member 47 is disposed in the vicinity of the right end in the horizontal direction, and the speaker attachment portion 621a of the speaker unit 620a, that is, the main frame speaker 622 is disposed in the vicinity of the opposite left end. Because the main frame speaker 622 and the port member 47 are separated in the left-right direction, the sound output forward from the main frame speaker 622 and the sound output forward from the port member 47 are outer frames. 2 (Pachinko machine 1) will interfere with each other at a position spaced forward to some extent, and the sound can be amplified in the vicinity of the player sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1, as described above You can hear the sound of rich bass.

  Further, as described above, the sound output forward from the main body frame speaker 622 and the port member 47 is interfered and amplified in the vicinity of the player, and therefore, it is possible to prevent the other pachinko machine 1 from being separated. The player will receive an unamplified sound. As a result, when a sound is output that suggests the arrival of a chance, the player playing a game with this pachinko machine 1 can increase the sense of expectation for the game by hearing a sound that is loud and rich in bass. It can be done. On the other hand, since it becomes difficult for the player playing a game with another pachinko machine to hear the sound from this pachinko machine 1, it is difficult to make it possible to recognize that the arrival of a chance etc. is suggested in this pachinko machine 1 It is possible to reduce the chances of the other player from looking into the pachinko machine 1, and by peeping in, the player playing the game with the pachinko machine 1 feels uncomfortable and reduces interest. Can be suppressed.

  Further, since the position of the connection cylindrical portion 43a of the outer frame 2 is at the center in the longitudinal direction (left and right direction) of the outer frame lower assembly 40, the speaker unit 620a on the main body frame 4 side connected to the connection cylindrical portion 43a Since the position of the connection portion 621c is at the center in the left-right direction, the length of the speaker unit 620a in the left-right direction can be from the vicinity of the left end where the speaker attachment portion 621a is formed to the center A space can be secured on the opposite side to the speaker unit 620a with the center at 4 in FIG. Therefore, in the body frame 4, another member is disposed in a space secured on the opposite side to the speaker unit 620 a with the center in the left-right direction, or the other members are enlarged so as to extend to the space. Therefore, the player can be differentiated from other pachinko machines by other members, and the pachinko machine 1 can be strongly attracted to the player's attention.

  Further, as described above, since a space can be secured on the opposite side to the speaker unit 620a with the center in the left and right direction of the lower side of the outer frame 2 interposed, the gaming ball B is discharged to that space. A base unit 620b having a ball extraction guiding portion 627 for the ball and a discharge ball receiving portion 628, and a ball emitting device 540 for driving the game ball B into the game area 5a of the game board 5 attached to the main frame , A power supply substrate 630 for controlling the power supply in the pachinko machine 1, a payout control board 633 for controlling the payout of gaming medium balls, etc. can be disposed, and the pachinko machine 1 can be provided with these components reliably .

  Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the center pressing operation portion 303a protruding upward from the upper surface of the plate unit 200 bulging forward and downward of the gaming area 5a of the gaming board 5 where the game is played An annular outer circumferential pressing portion 303b surrounding the outer circumference of the central pressing portion 303a and an annular outer circumferential pressing portion 303b having a diameter larger than the distance in the front-rear direction of the upper tray 201; Since the upper surface 302 is inclined in such a manner that the front end side of the upper surface is lower, the head of the player whose upper surface of the rotary operation portion 302 and the pressure operation portion 303 is seated in front of the pachinko machine 1 (Face) turns to a certain direction, and the whole volume of the center pressing operation unit 303a, the outer periphery pressing operation unit 303b, and the rotation operation unit 302 can be easily viewed, and the three concentrically arranged The player can show the player a large operation unit (the pressing operation unit 303 and the rotation operation unit 302), and can give a strong impact to the player, and the operation unit provided in the conventional pachinko machine It can be recognized at first glance that the operation unit is provided in a clearly different form, and it is possible to differentiate the present pachinko machine 1 from other pachinko machines and make the player's interest strongly attracted it can. In addition, since the central pressing operation unit 303a, the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b, and the rotary operating unit 302 are noticeable, the game in which the central pressing operating unit 303a, the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b, and the rotary operating unit 302 are operated for the player It is possible to increase the sense of expectation for the player participation type effect, and to advance the game to the game state where the player participation type effect is executed (here, many game balls B are driven into the game area 5a Can be made easy to participate in the effect when the player participation type effect is executed, and the player participation type effect can be enjoyed and the decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  In addition, depending on the game state, the central push operation unit 303a and the outer peripheral push operation unit 303b are slightly projected from the upper surface of the rotary operation unit 302 by the elevation mechanism including the operation button elevation drive motor 367 etc. And the projecting position (upward position) projecting upward from the retracted position, and when in the retracted position, the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b is pressed by the locking portion 371c of the elevation cam member 371. In the disabled state, the central pressing operation unit 303a and the outer periphery pressing operation unit 303b are in the retracted position, so that the player can clearly recognize that the pressing operation of the outer periphery pressing operation unit 303b can not be received. Since the center pressing operation unit 303a can be reliably pressed and operated, the player participation type effect is enjoyed and the interest is reduced. It is possible to control.

  Furthermore, in the state of the retracted position, since the outer periphery pressing portion 303b is incapable of pressing, there is an outer periphery pressing portion 303b which does not move between the central pressing portion 303a and the rotation operating portion 302. Therefore, the erroneous operation such as pressing the center pressing operation unit 303a to the run of the rotation operation unit 302 or rotating the rotation operation unit 302 to the run of the center pressing operation unit 303a is performed. Can be made hard to occur, and player participation type effects can be surely enjoyed to suppress the decrease in interest.

  Then, the central pressing operation portion 303a and the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b are largely projected upward on the upper surface of the pan unit 200 by moving to the projecting position, so that the central pressing operating portion 303a and the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b can be made conspicuous, and a strong impact can be given to the player, and a premium feeling can be given to pressing operations of the center pressing operation unit 303a and the outer periphery pressing operation unit 303b, which may be good It is possible to make the expectation for the game to be heightened as if it is Therefore, it is possible to make it easy to participate in the player participation type effect for pressing the outer periphery pressing operation unit 303b and the center pressing operation unit 303a, and it is possible to enjoy the player participation type effect and to suppress the decrease in interest.

  In the state of this projecting position, the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b can be newly pressed, and the central pressing operation unit 303a, the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b, and the rotation operation unit 302 are arranged concentrically, for example, When pressing the central pressing unit 303a, the peripheral pressing unit 303b is pressed, or both the central pressing unit 303a and the peripheral pressing unit 303b are pressed, or When pressing the peripheral pressing unit 303b, the central pressing unit 303a may be pressed, or both the central pressing unit 303a and the peripheral pressing unit 303b may be pressed, or the rotation may be performed. When the operation unit 302 is rotated or the rotation operation unit 302 must be rotated, the outer circumferential pressing operation is performed. Or accidentally pushes the section 303b, and an outer peripheral pressing portion 303b and the central pressing portion 303a can be induced to or accidentally pressed. As a result, when the player performs the pressing operation or the rotating operation, the pressing operation or the rotating operation can be performed while keeping the pressing operation unit 303 to be pressed and the rotation operation unit 302 to be rotated operated in mind. A sense of tension can be given to the press operation and the rotation operation, which can make it difficult for the player to get bored, and can enjoy the player participation type effect for performing the press operation and the rotation operation. It is possible to suppress the decrease in interest for the player's game.

  In addition, the player is provided with notification means such as the vibration speaker 354 and the effect display device 1600, and in the player participation type effect, the player performs the center pressing operation in the state of the projecting position where the pressing operation of the outer periphery pressing operation unit 303b is possible. If only the outer peripheral pressing portion 303b is pressed by mistake when pressing the portion 303a, the notification means indicates that the central pressing portion 303a is pressed and the pressing operation is performed again to perform pressing. It is possible to reliably press the center pressing operation unit 303a which should be performed, to allow the player to enjoy the player participation type effect, and since the mistake of the pressing operation is corrected, the player loses by making a mistake It is possible to prevent the user from feeling and to enjoy the player participation type effect to suppress the decrease in interest.

  In addition, when it is assumed that the player is performing the pressing operation on the center pressing operation unit 303a correctly, the reaction (change) of the player participation type effect despite the pressing operation on the center pressing operation unit 303a. However, if the central pressing operation unit 303a is broken, the player may feel illusion and reduce interest. On the other hand, as described above, since the notification means notifies the mistake of the pressing operation, it is possible to correct the player's guess, and the player is made to participate by correctly pressing the central pressing operation unit 303a. You can enjoy the type effect.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the upper tray 201 and the lower tray 202 for storing the gaming balls B for performing the forward bulging in front of and below the gaming area 5a of the gaming board 5 where the gaming is performed In the plate unit 200, the outer peripheral side surface, the upper surface, and the inner peripheral side surface are exposed to the outside, and an annular rotary operation unit 302 rotatable around an axis extending up and down; While the pressing operation unit 303 including the central pressing operation unit 303a and the outer periphery pressing operation unit 303b is disposed, the rotation operation unit 302 is selected according to the gaming state which is changed by playing a game in the gaming area 5a. The player participation type effect of rotating operation or pressing operation of the pressing operation unit 303 is executed by the periphery control board 1510. Then, when the player participation type effect is executed, the player appropriately rotates the rotation operation unit 302 in the appropriate direction or presses the pressing operation unit 303, according to the rotation operation or the pressing operation. Since the effect is changed, the player can participate in the effect, and the player can be entertained to suppress the decrease in interest. When rotating the rotation operation unit 302, the player touches and operates any of the outer peripheral side surface, the upper surface, and the inner peripheral side surface exposed to the outside, and the rotation center of the rotation operation unit 302 is the most Since it is possible to touch the distant position and perform the rotation operation, the rotation operation unit 302 can be rotated with a relatively small force, and the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 can be easily performed. In addition, when the player touches the outer peripheral side surface of the rotary operation unit 302 to perform the rotary operation, the player can easily rotate the rotary operation unit 302 at a high speed by operating the player to rub the outer peripheral side surface in one direction. it can. Therefore, even when a player participation type effect that requires high-speed rotation to the rotation operation unit 302 is executed, as described above, the rotation operation unit 302 can be rotated at a high speed. On the other hand, the effect can be enjoyed, and a decrease in interest for the player's game can be suppressed.

  In addition, since the rotation operation unit 302 can be rotated with a relatively small (light) force, it is possible to make the player less likely to fatigue prematurely even if the rotation operation unit 302 is frequently rotated. The player participation type effect of rotating the operation unit 302 can be continued and enjoyed, and a decrease in interest for the player's game can be suppressed. Further, as described above, since the rotation operation unit 302 can be rotated quickly or rotated with a light force, various player's rotation operations can be requested in the player participation type effect, It becomes possible to request different rotation operations in each, and it is possible to present more various and various player participation type effects to the player, making it difficult for the player to get bored and suppressing the decrease in interest. Can.

  Furthermore, the outer peripheral side of the operation cover (constituted by the ring outer upper cover 335, the ring outer lower cover 336, and the ring inner cover 337), which the player touches and rotates, is rotatably attached to the tray unit 200. The disc unit 200 does not get in the way even if it rotates so as to rub the outer peripheral side surface because it protrudes in an arc shape outward (in the direction opposite to the center of rotation) than the rotating base 332 Since the rotation operation unit 302 can be easily rotated and the outer peripheral side surface of the rotation operation unit 302 is rounded, the rotation operation unit 302 can be rotated even from a direction other than just beside the rotation operation unit 302 (a direction perpendicular to the rotation axis). Since it becomes easy to touch the outer peripheral side, the player operates the rotary operation unit 302 without worrying about the position and direction of the outer peripheral side of the rotary operation unit 302. It can be, it is possible to enhance the operability of the rotation operating part 302. Therefore, since the rotation operation unit 302 can be rotated so as to rub the outer peripheral side surface of the rotation operation unit 302 (operation cover), the rotation operation unit 302 can be rotated at a faster speed in the player participation type effect The player can be entertained to suppress the decrease in interest.

  In addition, since the diameter of the rotation operation unit 302 is increased, rotation operation at a minute rotation angle can be facilitated or rotation operation compared to a rotation operation unit with a small diameter such as a conventional pachinko machine. Since the player's action at the time of the game can be increased, it is possible to make the player feel more that the rotation operation unit 302 is being rotated, and the rotation operation unit in the player participation type effect The rotation operation of 302 can be enjoyed to suppress the decrease in interest.

  Furthermore, since the outer peripheral side surface, the upper surface, and the inner peripheral side surface are exposed to the outside with the rotation operation unit 302 formed in a ring shape, when the player rotates the rotation operation unit 302, the upper surface is Since the user can touch the part according to the player's preference or situation, such as the inner circumferential side or the like, and can perform the rotation operation, the operability of the rotation operation unit 302 can be further enhanced. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest by making the player participation type presentation more enjoyable.

  Further, since the outer peripheral side surface, the upper surface, and the inner peripheral side surface of the rotation operation unit 302 are exposed to the outside so that the player can perform the rotation operation, even if the pressing operation unit 303 is provided in the ring of the rotation operation unit 302 The operation unit 303 does not inhibit the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302, and can rotate the rotation operation unit 302 comfortably, and enjoys both the rotation operation and the pressing operation sufficiently to suppress a decrease in interest It can be done.

  Furthermore, the outer peripheral side surface, the upper surface, and the inner peripheral side surface of the rotation operation unit 302 are exposed to the outside so that the player can perform the rotation operation, and the rotation operation unit 302 can not be grasped by the player. The appearance of the portion 302 can be totally different from that of the steering wheel of an automobile, the control stick of an airplane, or the like. Thus, for example, in the case where the rotation operation unit is in the form of a steering wheel of a car, it is assumed that the player holds the rotation operation portion and operates the moment the player looks at the rotation operation portion. Because only operations such as steering wheel steering can be performed, when a player participation type presentation requiring various rotation operations is executed, a rotation operation different from steering wheel steering can not be performed, and player participation type presentation is performed. There is a risk that the game will not be entertained and the interest in the game may be reduced. However, in this embodiment, the appearance of the rotation operation unit 302 is completely different from the appearance of the steering wheel of an automobile, the control rod of an airplane, etc. It becomes possible to wipe off, the rotation operation unit 302 can be operated according to the desire of the player, and the player participation type effect can be enjoyed to suppress the decrease in interest.

  In addition, since the outer peripheral side surface, the upper surface, etc. of the rotary operation unit 302 are exposed to the outside even when the pressing operation unit 303 is moved to the projecting position, the outer peripheral side surface, the upper surface, etc. of the rotary operation unit 302 is rotated. Therefore, the protruding pressing operation unit 303 does not get in the way, and the rotation operation unit 302 can be comfortably rotated, and the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 is enjoyed to suppress the decrease in interest it can.

  Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the upper tray 201 or the lower tray 202 for storing the gaming balls B for performing the forward bulging in front of and below the gaming area 5a where the gaming is performed on the gaming board 5 The rotary unit includes an annular rotary operation unit 302 whose rotation axis extends vertically, and a central pressing unit 303a and an outer peripheral pressing unit 303b in the ring of the rotational unit 302. The pressing operation unit 303 is disposed, and when the player rotates the rotation operation unit 302, the rotation axis of the rotation operation unit 302 is orthogonal to the rotation axis of the rotation operation unit 302 via the ring gear 332a of the rotation base 332 of the rotation operation unit 302. The transmission detection gear member 345 of the rotational drive unit 340 rotates around an axis, and the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 For detecting the rotation by detecting a known piece 345b, it is possible to detect a rotating operation of the rotary operation unit 302 via the transmission detection gear member 345. Therefore, it is not necessary to provide the detection piece for detecting rotation on the lower side over the entire circumference as in the conventional rotation operation unit. In addition, since the rotation of the rotation operation unit 302 is transmitted to the transmission detection gear member 345 via the ring gear 332a, the portion for transmitting the rotation from the ring gear 332a to the transmission detection gear member 345 (operation ring transmission gear 350 And the meshed portion) may be a part of the entire circumference of the rotation operation unit 302. Therefore, a space can be easily secured below the rotation operation unit 302, and a sufficient number of LEDs are circularly arranged in a row between the rotation operation unit 302 and the transmission detection gear member 345. An operation ring decoration substrate 352 can be arranged. Then, according to the gaming state which is changed by playing the game in the gaming area 5a, and the rotation detection of the rotation operation unit 302 by the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348, the effect operation ring decoration substrate Properly (uniformly) decorate the whole of the ring outer upper cover 335, the ring outer lower cover 336, and the inner ring cover 337 constituting the rotary operation unit 302 by appropriately emitting the plurality of LEDs 352. It is possible to make the rotation operation unit 302 stand out and strongly attract the player's attention.

  Further, since the rotation direction and the rotation speed of the rotation operation unit 302 can be detected by the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 via the transmission detection gear member 345, the rotation direction of the rotation operation unit 302 A plurality of LEDs arranged in a ring shape of the effect operation ring decoration substrate 352 can be sequentially emitted (turned on / off) at the same direction and the same speed. As a result, the rotary operation unit 302 is rotated in a state in which specific portions of the ring outer upper cover 335, the ring outer lower cover 336, and the in-ring cover 337 are light-emitting and decorated. It is possible to illusion that the LED is provided inside the rotation operation unit 302, and the rotation (rotation operation) of the rotation operation unit 302 can be enjoyed to suppress the decrease in interest. Alternatively, when executing the player participation type effect requiring the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 according to the gaming state, the plurality of LEDs arranged in an annular shape of the effect operation ring decoration substrate 352 are rotated By sequentially emitting light in the direction desired to be operated, the player can be urged to perform the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302, and the player participation type effect can be enjoyed and the decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  In addition, the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 detect the rotation direction and rotation speed (rpm) of the rotation operation unit 302, and are arrayed in an annular shape on the effect operation ring decoration substrate 352 The plurality of LEDs can be lighted in order to have the same rotational speed as the rotation operation unit 302. As a result, although the player rotates the rotary operation unit 302, it rotates together with the rotary operation unit 302 in a state where a part of the rotary operation unit 302 emits light. While being able to give a strong impact to the player, and being able to give a premium feeling by the rotation of the rotation operation unit 302 and the light emission decoration, there may be something good for the player It is possible to make the player feel more expectation for the game, and to suppress the decrease in the interest for the player's game.

  Furthermore, since the plurality of LEDs arranged in an annular shape of the effect operation ring decoration substrate 352 can be made to sequentially emit light, and the light emission decoration in which the light rotates in the rotation operation unit 302 can be shown to the player On the other hand, it is possible to immediately recognize that the annular rotation operation unit 302 is for rotating operation, and to make it easy for the player to participate in the effect when the player participation type effect is executed. As a result, it is possible to increase the sense of expectation for the execution of the player participation type effect, and to suppress the decrease in the player's interest.

  Further, the transmission detection gear member 345 is rotatably mounted around an axis orthogonal to the rotation axis of the rotation operation unit 302, and when viewed from the direction perpendicular to the rotation surface of the rotation operation unit 302, the rotation operation The transmission detection gear member 345 is disposed at a position as close as possible to the projection range of the unit 302, and the configuration related to the rotation operation unit 302 in the plate unit 200 (rendering operation unit 300 or rotation drive unit 340) Can be made compact, so that the diameter of the rotation operation unit 302 can be relatively increased, and the rotation operation unit 302 can be made to stand out to attract the player's interest strongly.

  Furthermore, the operation ring drive motor 342 is provided to rotate the rotation operation unit 302 via the transmission detection gear member 345 according to the game state, and as described above, the rotation operation is possible by the effect operation ring decoration substrate 352 Since the operation unit 302 can be rotated by the operation ring drive motor 342 in addition to the rotation operation of the player, the rotation operation unit 302 on the upper surface of the plate unit 200 is rotated according to the game state, By making the decoration possible, it is possible to make the rotary operation unit 302 stand out in front of and below the game area 5a, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the rotary operation unit 302.

  Further, since the rotation of the rotation operation unit 302 can be detected by the transmission detection gear member 345, the first rotation detection sensor 347, and the second rotation detection sensor 348, when the player rotates the rotation operation unit 302, the rotation operation is performed. By rotating the rotation operation unit 302 by the operation ring drive motor 342 in the same direction as the operation unit 302, the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 can be assisted, and the operation feeling of the rotation operation unit 302 can be lightened. . Alternatively, by rotating the rotation operation unit 302 by the operation ring drive motor 342 in the opposite direction to the rotation operation by the player, a load can be given to the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302, and the operation feeling of the rotation operation unit 302 Can be weighted. Furthermore, for the rotation operation by the player, the rotational operation unit 302 is rotated by applying rotational force to the rotation operation unit 302 in the direction in which the rotation is stopped by the operation ring drive motor 342 at every predetermined rotation angle. A click feeling can be given. Further, by rotating the rotational operation unit 302 back and forth within a predetermined angle range by the operation ring drive motor 342, the rotational operation unit 302 can be vibrated. As described above, since various operation feeling can be given to the rotation operation unit 302 by the operation ring drive motor 342, it is possible to correspond to more diverse player participation type effects, so it is possible to play games by various effects. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to get bored, and to suppress the decrease in interest for the player's game.

  Furthermore, since the effect operation ring decoration substrate 352 is provided, when giving the operation feeling of the rotation operation unit 302 by the operation ring drive motor 342, the plurality of LEDs of the effect operation ring decoration substrate 352 are the same as the rotation operation. By sequentially emitting light in the direction or emitting light sequentially in the opposite direction to the rotation operation, the feeling of operation can be supported by the light, so that the player can enjoy the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302. It is possible to suppress the decrease in interest for the game.

  In addition, since the diameter of the rotation operation unit 302 is made larger than the distance in the front-rear direction of the upper plate 201, the space below the rotation operation unit 302 can be easily secured, and a larger number of LEDs are mounted. Since the effect operation ring decoration substrate 352 can be disposed, the rotation operation unit 302 can be decorated more uniformly and brightly, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted.

  Furthermore, the rotation operation unit 302, the outer periphery pressing operation unit 303b, and the center pressing operation unit 303a are lighted and decorated by the effect operation ring decoration substrate 352, the outer periphery button decoration substrate 377, and the center button decoration substrate 376, respectively. Therefore, by making them emit light appropriately, only the rotary operation unit 302 emits light, or only the pressing operation unit 303 emits light, or only the center pressing operation unit 303a emits light, or the outer peripheral pressing operation is performed. Only the part 303 b can be illuminated and decorated, and it is easy to make the player recognize the operation part to be operated, and the player participation type effect can be enjoyed.

  In addition, since the plurality of LEDs are arranged in an annular shape on the outer periphery button decoration substrate 377, it is possible to perform a light emission effect such that the light is circulated by sequentially emitting light, so that the rotation operation unit 302 It is possible to perform an effect in which the effect by the effect operation ring decoration substrate 352 and the effect by the outer periphery button decoration substrate 377 in the outer periphery pressing operation portion 303 b are associated. Specifically, for example, when prompting the player to perform the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302, the LED of the effect operation ring decoration substrate 352 and the LED of the outer circumference button decoration substrate 377 are sequentially emitted. The light is decorated in two rows so that the light rotates. Alternatively, when the player is rotating the rotary operation unit 302, the LED (peripheral pressing operation unit 303b) of the outer peripheral button decoration substrate 377 rotates the light according to the rotation of the rotary operation unit 302, or On the other hand, when it is desired to urge the rotation direction of the rotation operation unit 302 in the reverse direction, the LED of the outer peripheral button decoration substrate 377 performs light emission decoration in which light is rotated in the reverse direction. As described above, since various effects of light emission can be shown to the player, the player can be entertained, and a decrease in interest for the game can be suppressed.

  Furthermore, a presentation operation ring decoration substrate 352, an outer periphery button decoration substrate 377, and a central button decoration substrate 376 for emitting and decorating the rotary operation unit 302, the outer periphery pressing operation unit 303b, and the center pressing operation unit 303a arranged concentrically. Since it is provided, for example, the rotation operation unit 302 is made to emit light from the respective LEDs in the order of the rendering operation ring decoration substrate 352, the outer periphery button decoration substrate 377, and the center button decoration substrate 376, or in the reverse order. It is possible to show an effect of light concentrated to the center pressing operation unit 303a, and an effect of light diffused to the rotation operation unit 302 from the center pressing operation unit 303a. As a result, it is possible to show the player more various light emission decorations, to entertain the player, and to direct the player's attention to the central pressing operation unit 303a or to the rotation operation unit 302. It is possible to promote the operation of the center pressing operation unit 303a and the rotation operation unit 302 to enjoy the player participation type effect.

  Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the game board 5 having the game area 5a in which a game is played can be removably attached to the main body frame 4 from the front, and the front of the main body frame 4 can be opened and closed. While forming the door window 101a which can visually recognize the game area 5a from the front on the door frame base 101 of the door frame 3 which is closed, the glass unit 160 provided with the transparent flat glass plate 162 is a door window 101a. To the door frame 3 (the door frame base 101) so as to close the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202 for storing the game balls B for playing a game under the door window 101a on the front of the door frame base 101 The equipped dish unit 200 is attached.

  Then, on the upper surface of the pan unit 200, a circular annular donut-shaped rotation operating portion 302 whose diameter is larger than the distance in the front-rear direction of the upper pan 201, and a cylindrical shape coaxially arranged in the ring of the rotation operating portion 302. The pressing operation unit 303 including the outer periphery pressing operation unit 303 b and the cylindrical center pressing operation unit 303 a is attached, and a semicircular donut shape similar to the rotation operation unit 302 below the rotation operation unit 302. The two large-diameter tray upper center decoration 312a and the plate center lower decoration 312b are attached up and down at two intervals, and continuous with both ends of the plate center upper decoration 312a and the plate center lower decoration 312b The door frame left side decoration 404 of the door frame left side unit 400 of similar shape, the door frame right side decoration 419 of the door frame right side unit 410, and the door frame Door frame top decorative body 453 of Puyunitto 450 is attached to the outside of Tobiramado 101a of the door frame base 101 so as to surround the outer periphery of the gaming region 5a.

  Therefore, in the plate unit 200, three doughnut-shaped members are vertically arranged by the rotary operation unit 302 and the two upper and lower center ornaments 312a and 312b and the rotary operation unit 302 and the outer peripheral pressing Since the operation unit 303b and the center pressing operation unit 303a are arranged concentrically, the visual impact can be enhanced, and the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 can be made conspicuous and the player can operate. It is possible to make the rotary operation unit 302 and the press operation unit 303 appear large, and to attract the player's interest strongly to the rotation operation unit 302 and the press operation unit 303 in the rendering operation unit 300 on the upper surface of the plate unit 200. The decrease can be suppressed.

  In addition, the rotary operation unit 302, the upper center plate decoration 312a and the lower plate center decoration body 312b have a similar cylindrical shape (tube) in a donut shape like a ring, and are provided below the rotary operation unit 302. A semi-cylindrical door frame left side decoration 404, a door frame right side decoration 419, and a door frame top decoration 453 surround the outer periphery of the game area 5a so as to be continuous with the dish center upper decoration 312a. Therefore, it is possible to show the player a decoration such that the outer periphery of the game area 5a is surrounded by a cylindrical tube, and a sense of unity can be given to the decoration on the front of the pachinko machine 1 The appearance can be improved, and the player's interest can be directed to the inner side (the game area 5a and the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303) surrounded by the cylindrical tube. Determined force can be enhanced, it is possible to easily this pachinko machine 1 is selected let increase the expectation as a pachinko machine for a game on the game in the pachinko machine 1.

  In addition, on the upper surface of the plate unit 200, the doughnut-shaped rotational operation portion 302 is rotatably mounted around an axis extending forward as it goes upward, and the upper surface of the rotational operation portion 302 has the front end side Since the upper surface of the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 faces the direction of the head (face) of the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1, the upper surface of the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 turns. The entire volume of the operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 can be easily viewed, and the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 can be made to look large. Further, as described above, since the entire contents of the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 can be easily understood, the player can easily recognize that the rotation operation unit 302 has a donut shape. Therefore, it is possible to cause the player to immediately recognize that the donut-shaped rotation operation unit 302 performs the rotation operation, so that the player rotates immediately when the player participation type effect is performed. The operation unit 302 can be rotated, and the player participation type effect can be enjoyed by the operation of the rotation operation unit 302 to suppress a decrease in interest.

  In addition, the diameter of the rotation operation portion 302 is made larger than the distance in the front-rear direction of the upper tray 201, and the diameters of the upper center dish decoration 312a and the lower center dish decoration 312b are larger than the rotation operation portion 302. In the plate unit 200 of the pachinko machine 1, the front end sides of the rotary operation unit 302, the plate center upper decoration body 312a and the plate lower center decoration body 312b project more forward than the upper plate 201, and Since the decoration body 312a and the lower center dish decoration 312b decorate the outer periphery of the rotary operation unit 302, the rotary operation section 302, the upper center dish decoration 312a and the lower center dish decoration 312b are made to stand out At the same time, the dish center upper decoration body 312a and the dish center lower decoration body 312b can improve the appearance around the rotation operation unit 302. Therefore, it is possible to make the player recognize that it is the pachinko machine 1 different from other pachinko machines at first glance, and it is possible to attract the player's interest strongly, and to appeal the player. The pachinko machine 1 can be easily selected as a pachinko machine to be played.

  Furthermore, since the rotational operation portion 302 is in a donut shape having an annular cylindrical shape, the upper surface, the outer side surface, the inner side surface, etc. of the rotational operation portion 302 as compared with the flat disk shape. Since it is easy for the finger to be applied, the rotation operation unit 302 can be rotated as desired by the player. Further, since the upper dish center upper decoration body 312a and the lower dish center lower decoration body 312b are formed larger than the rotation operation unit 302, the upper dish center upper decoration body 312a and the lower dish center lower decoration body 312b are larger than the rotation operation section 302. Since it protrudes outward, it is possible to place an arm or put a finger on the upper plate center decoration 312a and the lower plate center decoration 312b, and the player operates the rotary operation unit 302 in a comfortable posture. And the presence of the dish center upper decoration 312a and the dish center lower decoration 312b projecting forward beyond the rotary operation unit 302 allows the player not to approach the rotary operation unit 302 too much. Therefore, it is easy to secure a space in which the arm and fingers for the player to move around the rotation operation unit 302 move, and the operability of the rotation operation unit 302 can be enhanced. Can. As described above, since the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 is easy to perform, it is possible for the player to think of the operation of the rotation operation unit 302 when the player participation type effect is executed, and the player can play the game. It is possible to enjoy the participatory effect and suppress the decline in interest.

  Further, the pressing operation unit 303 composed of the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b and the center pressing operation unit 303a inside the rotation operation unit 302 can be moved between the retracted position (lowering position) and the projecting position (raising position). From the above, when the pressing operation unit 303 is moved to the raised position, the pressing operation unit 303 protrudes upward more than the rotation operation unit 302, so that the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 appear larger. While being able to give a strong impact to the player, it is possible to attract the player's interest strongly, to increase the sense of expectation for the operation of the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303, and to suppress the decline in interest It can be done.

  In addition, when the pressing operation unit 303 is at the lowered position, the donut-shaped rotation operation unit 302 is more easily noticeable than the pressing operation unit 303, so the player's interest is directed to the rotation operation unit 302. While the pressing operation unit 303 is in the raised position, the protruding pressing operation unit 303 is more noticeable than the rotation operation unit 302, so that the player's interest can be directed to the pressing operation unit 303. Therefore, according to the content of the player participation type effect to be executed, the pressing operation unit 303 is moved between the lowered position and the raised position to urge the effect operation unit 301 to be operated by the player. Thus, the player participation type effect can be enjoyed by causing the player to operate the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 properly.

  Furthermore, when the pressing operation unit 303 located inside the rotation operation unit 302 is at the lowered position, the rotation operation unit 302, the outer periphery pressing operation unit 303b, and the center pressing operation unit 303a have the same height, and the rotation operation is performed. When the portion 302 and the central pressing portion 303a become operable and the pressing portion 303 is moved from the lowered position to the raised position, the outer circumferential pressing portion 303b and the central pressing portion 303a protrude upward relative to the rotational portion 302. In this state, the rotation operation unit 302, the outer periphery pressing operation unit 303b, and the center pressing operation unit 303a can be operated. Therefore, according to the contents of the player participation type effect, the player can properly use the effect operation unit 301 which can be operated, and can respond to more various effects and enjoy the player various operations. It is possible to prevent the player from getting bored and to suppress the decrease in interest.

  In addition, the effect operation ring decoration base plate 352, the dish center upper decoration board 314 and the plate center lower decoration board 316, the door frame left side decoration board 402 of the door frame left side unit 400, the door frame right side decoration of the door frame right side unit 410 Since the substrate 418, the door frame top central decoration substrate 455 of the door frame top unit 450, the door frame top left decoration substrate 456, and the door frame top right decoration substrate 457 are provided, the rotation operation unit 302, the dish center upper decoration body 312a The overall appearance of the pachinko machine 1 is improved by emitting light and decorating the lower center plate decoration 312b and the door frame left side decoration 404, the door frame right side decoration 419, and the door frame top decoration 453. Thus, the pachinko machine 1 can be made to attract the player's interest strongly and have high appeal. In addition, the rotation operation unit 302, the dish upper center decoration 312a and the dish lower center decoration 312b, and the door frame left side decoration 404, the door frame right side decoration 419, and the door frame top decoration 453 emit light as appropriate By making the decoration possible, the line of sight of the player can be guided from inside the game area 5a to the effect operation unit 301 (rotation operation unit 302) or from the effect operation unit 301 to the inside of the game area 5a. Depending on the state, the player can operate the effect operation unit 301 or play a game in the game area 5a, making it difficult for the player to get bored and suppressing a decrease in interest.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, the game ball B fired by the ball launching device 540 of FIG. 92 as the launching means is provided as the receiving port provided in the game area 5a. A main control board 1310X shown in FIG. 151 is provided as game control means capable of advancing the game based on entering the ball in the second start port 2004 or the second start port 2004.

  The pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment is provided with a setting switching button 1311b provided on the setting change board 1310Y of the main control unit 1300 of FIG. 144A as selection means, and a setting switch provided on the setting change board 1310Y of the main control unit 1300 of FIG. It is equipped with 1311a. The setting switching button 1311 b selects one of the setting values 1 to 6 as a plurality of setting values advantageous to the player, and detects a detection signal from the setting switching button 1311 b as a selection signal. It can be output to the main control board 1310 X via a wiring pattern or the like through which a signal from the setting switching button 1311 b provided on the setting change board 1310 Y of the main control unit 1300 of FIG. 144A is transmitted as one transmission path. The setting switch 1311a determines the setting value selected by the setting switching button 1311b, and uses the determination key ON signal from the setting switch 1311a as the determination signal as the second transmission path different from the first transmission path. A signal from the setting switch 1311 a provided on the setting change substrate 1310 Y of the unit 1300 can be output to the main control substrate 1310 X via a wiring pattern through which the signal is transmitted. The first transmission path and the second transmission path are spaced apart from each other.

  Specifically, in order to prevent unauthorized alteration, a signal of the setting key ON of the setting switch 1311a is transmitted, and a wiring pattern in which the signal of the determination key ON of the setting switch 1311a is transmitted, and a setting switch 1311a The setting change board 1310Y is formed so as not to be close to each other (separate from each other) as a lead-out of the wiring pattern through which the signal of OFF is transmitted and the wiring pattern through which the signal from the setting switching button 1311b is transmitted. At the same time, the connection to the terminal of the connector SMCN of the setting change substrate 1310Y (the terminal of the connector MSCN of the main control substrate 1310X) is also formed separately, and various signals from the setting switch 1311a are transmitted also in the main control substrate 1310X. Wiring pattern (that is, the setting key of the setting switch 1311a). The wiring pattern through which the signal of ON is transmitted, the wiring pattern through which the signal of the determination key ON of the setting switch 1311a is transmitted, the wiring pattern through which the signal of OFF the setting switch 1311a is transmitted, and the signal from the setting switching button 1311b The wiring with the wiring pattern to be transmitted is also formed so as not to approach each other (separately from each other), and the wiring with the wiring pattern to which the signal from the RAM clear switch 1310 f is transmitted is not as close as each other. (Spaced apart from each other).

  As described above, when one of the plurality of setting values (setting value 1 to setting value 6) which is advantageous to the player is selected and the setting value is determined, the determined setting value is selected. By the progress of the game based on, it is possible to provide the player with a game for each set value. Therefore, the range of the game can be expanded. Further, by disposing the first transmission path and the second transmission path apart from each other, unauthorized alteration can be prevented.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, the game ball B fired by the ball launching device 540 of FIG. 92 as the launching means is provided as the receiving port provided in the game area 5a. The progress of the game can be performed based on entering the ball in 2002 and the second start port 2004.

  The pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment has the power switch 630a of FIG. 7 as a power on means, the setting switching button 1311b provided on the setting change board 1310Y of the main control unit 1300 of FIG. 144A as selection means, and the main control of FIG. The main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU 1310a provided on the substrate 1310X, selection display setting means and setting means, setting switch 1311a provided on the setting change board 1310Y of the main control unit 1300 of FIG. 144A, and display means of the main control unit 1300 of FIG. A setting display 1310g provided in the main control board 1310X is provided. The power switch 630 a can turn on the power of the pachinko machine 1. The setting switching button 1311 b can select any one of setting values 1 to 6 as a plurality of setting information advantageous to the player. The main control built-in RAM can store various information even after the pachinko machine 1 is powered off. The setting switch 1311a is capable of setting selection permission of the setting value by the setting switching button 1311b or display permission of the setting value stored and held in the main control built-in RAM, and also capable of determining the setting value. It is. The setting display 1310g can display setting values.

  When the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on by the power switch 630a after setting permission is set by the setting switch 1311a, the setting value selected by the setting switching button 1311b is displayed on the setting display 1310g and the setting switch is set. It is determined by 1311 a and the determined set value is stored and held in the main control built-in RAM. When the display switch of the setting value is set by the setting switch 1311a after the pachinko machine 1 is powered on by the power switch 630a, the setting value stored and held in the main control internal RAM is displayed on the setting display 1310g. It is supposed to be.

  Specifically, when changing the setting of the setting value, the setting key is inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting switch 1311a before the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, and the setting key cylinder is turned clockwise. The setting switch 1311a is turned on by turning the first switch by turning 60 degrees toward the end. Subsequently, the power switch 630 a is operated to turn on the pachinko machine 1. Thereby, the signal of the setting key ON is input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X. Subsequently, when the pressing operation portion of the setting switching button 1311b is pressed, a detection signal from the setting switching button 1311b of the setting change board 1310Y is input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X. The main control MPU 1310a increments the current setting value by 1 each time the setting control button 1311b is pressed, and the main control MPU 1310a increases the value by 1 each from the current setting value, based on the detection signal from the setting switching button 1311b of the setting change board 1310Y. When the set value 6, which is the value, is reached, the control returns to the set value 1, which is the initial value, and increases again by 1 and performs control to display the set value on the setting display 1310g. Subsequently, when the setting value is determined, the setting key cylinder is turned 120 degrees counterclockwise (that is, the original position from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting switch 1311 a is turned on) To return to the initial position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turns off the setting switch 1311a), it is turned 60 degrees counterclockwise and turned off, and further turned 60 degrees counterclockwise The setting switch 1311a is turned on by the second ON operation (turned). The signal of the determination key ON is input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X. As a result, the main control MPU 1310a stores the setting value determined by changing the setting in a specific area (setting value dedicated area) of the main control built-in RAM.

  When the confirmation display of the currently set setting value is performed, after the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the setting key is inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting switch 1311a, and the setting key is turned clockwise 60 The setting switch 1311 a is turned on by setting the setting switch 1311 a by turning operation to a first ON operation. The signal of the setting key ON is input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X. The main control MPU 1310a sets the current setting value stored in the specific area (setting value dedicated area) of the main control built-in RAM (setting value 1 to setting at the time when the setting key cylinder of the setting switch 1311a is first turned ON) The set value of 6 is displayed on the setting display 1310g.

  As described above, the main control internal RAM stores and holds the setting value determined by selecting any one of the plurality of setting values (setting value 1 to setting value 6) which is advantageous to the player. Since the game is based on the set value, it is possible to provide the player with a game for each set value. Therefore, the range of the game can be expanded. Further, since the set value stored and held in the main control built-in RAM is displayed on the setting display 1310g, the set value stored and held in the main control built-in RAM can be confirmed.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, the game ball B fired by the ball launching device 540 of FIG. 92 as the launching means is provided as the receiving port provided in the game area 5a. A main control board 1310X shown in FIG. 151 is provided as game control means capable of advancing the game based on entering the ball in the second start port 2004 or the second start port 2004.

  The pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment is provided with the power switch 630a of FIG. 7 as a power on means, the setting switching button 1311b provided on the setting change board 1310Y of the main control unit 1300 of FIG. 144A as selection means, selection permission setting means and determination means A setting switch 1311 a is provided in the setting change board 1310 Y of the main control unit 1300 of FIG. 144A. The power switch 630 a can turn on the power of the pachinko machine 1. The setting switching button 1311 b selects any one of the setting values 1 to 6 as a plurality of setting information advantageous to the player and mainly controls the detection signal from the setting switching button 1311 b as a selection signal. It can be output to the substrate 1310X. The setting switch 1311a can output a signal of the setting key ON to the main control board 1310X as a selection permission signal for permitting selection of the setting value by the setting switching button 1311b, and the setting switching button 1311b. It is possible to determine the set value to be selected and output the signal of the determination key ON from the setting switch 1311a to the main control board 1310X as the determination signal.

  The detection signal from the setting switching button 1311b, which is a selection signal, is transmitted to the main control board 1310X via the setting change board 1310Y of the main control unit 1300 of FIG. 144A as another control means provided separately from the main control board 1310X. It is supposed to be input.

  The main control board 1310X has a main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU 1310a provided on the main control board 1310x of FIG. 151 as a storage means, and is determined in advance in the determination of step S18 in the main control side power on process of FIG. A process to set the value 1 to the setting change permission flag CS-FLG in step S20A by determining that the set value change permission condition is satisfied, as a signal invalid control means, a step in the main control side power on process of FIG. A process of setting the value 0 to the setting change permission flag CS-FLG in step S20B, determining that a predetermined setting value change permission condition is not established in the determination of S18, the main control side of FIG. The setting change process of step 37 in the power-on process is included. The main control built-in RAM can store various information even after the pachinko machine 1 is powered off. It is determined that the preset set value change permission condition is established in the determination of step S18 in the main control side power-on process of FIG. 175 which is the signal valid control means, and the set change permission flag CS-FLG is set in step S20A. The process of setting the value 1 can validate the detection signal from the setting switching button 1311b, which is a selection signal, and the determination key ON signal from the setting switch 1311a, which is a determination signal. It is determined that the preset set value change permission condition is not established in the determination of step S18 in the main control side power-on process of FIG. 175 which is the signal invalid control means, and the set change permission flag CS-FLG is set in step S20B. In the process of setting the value 0, the detection signal from the setting switching button 1311b, which is a selection signal, and the signal of the determination key ON from the setting switch 1311a, which is a determination signal, can be invalidated. The setting change process of step 37 in the main control side power on process of FIG. 175 which is the setting change control means is previously determined in the determination of step S18 in the main control side power on process of FIG. It is determined that the setting value change permission condition is satisfied, and the process of setting the value 1 to the setting change permission flag CS-FLG in step S20A is a detection signal from the setting switching button 1311b and the determination signal. The setting value can be stored and held in the main control built-in RAM when the signal of the determination key ON from the setting switch 1311a is validated.

  It is preset that the setting key ON signal, which is a selection permission signal from the setting switch 1311a, can be input before the power on of the pachinko machine 1 is performed by the power switch 630a, and the pachinko machine 1 is set by the power switch 630a. When the power is turned on (specifically, first, the state where the power of the pachinko machine 1 is not turned on (the state where the power of the pachinko machine 1 is shut off) is confirmed. Do the work of opening the frame 4, then insert the setting key into the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting switch 1311a and turn the setting key cylinder clockwise by 60 degrees to perform the first ON operation The setting switch 1311a is turned on by the setting key, and then the power switch 630a is operated to turn on the power of the pachinko machine 1. The signal of the setting key ON which is the selection permission signal from the setting switch 1311a is input, and is determined in advance in the determination of step S18 in the main control side power-on process of FIG. It is determined that the setting value change permission condition is satisfied, and the value of 1 is set to the setting change permission flag CS-FLG in step S20A. The detection signal from the setting switching button 1311b, which is a selection signal, and the determination signal When the signal of the determination key ON from the setting switch 1311a is validated, and the setting value selected by the setting switching button 1311b is determined by the setting switch 1311a, the determined setting value is used as the setting change control means. The main control is performed by the setting change process of step 37 in the main control side power-on process of FIG. It is adapted to be stored and held in the internal RAM. The pachinko machine 1 is preset by the power switch 630a so that the setting key ON signal which is a selection permission signal from the setting switch 1311a can not be input before the pachinko machine 1 is powered on by the power switch 630a. When the power is turned on (specifically, first, the state where the power of the pachinko machine 1 is not turned on (the state where the power of the pachinko machine 1 is shut off) is confirmed. Do the work of opening the frame 4, then insert the setting key into the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting switch 1311a and turn the setting key cylinder clockwise by 60 degrees to perform the first ON operation Of the pachinko machine 1 by operating the power switch 630a without performing the procedure of turning the setting switch 1311a to the setting key ON. The source is turned on.) The signal of the setting key ON which is the selection permission signal from the setting switch 1311a is not input, and the determination of step S18 in the main control side power on processing of FIG. It is determined that the preset setting change permission condition is not satisfied, and the value of the setting change permission flag CS-FLG is set to 0 in step S20B. A signal of the determination key ON from the setting switch 1311a, which is a signal, is invalidated.

  As described above, the main control internal RAM stores and holds the setting value determined by selecting any one of the plurality of setting values (setting value 1 to setting value 6) which is advantageous to the player. Since the game is based on the set value, it is possible to provide the player with a game for each set value. Therefore, the range of the game can be expanded.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, the game ball B fired by the ball launching device 540 of FIG. 92 as the launching means is provided as the receiving port provided in the game area 5a. The game is entered based on the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result drawn by the main control board 1310X of the main control unit 1300 of FIG. Progress can be made.

  The pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment includes a setting switch 1311 a provided on the setting change substrate 1310 Y of the main control unit 1300 of FIG. 144A as a first operation unit and a setting switching button 1311 b provided on the setting change substrate 1310 Y of the main control unit 1300 of FIG. RAM clear switch 1310 f provided on the main control board 1310 X of the main control unit 1300 of FIG. 144A as a second operation unit, main control built-in RAM of main control MPU 1310 a provided on the main control board 1310 X of FIG. As the setting change process of step S37 in the main control side power on process of FIG. 175, the process of step S38 in the main control side power on process of FIG. The setting switch 1311 a and the setting switching button 1311 b can receive a first operation that can change the setting of the setting value. The RAM clear switch 1310 f is separate from the setting switch 1311 a and the setting switching button 1311 b and can receive a second operation that can clear other areas except the specific area of the main control built-in RAM. . The main control built-in RAM can store various information even after the pachinko machine 1 is powered off. The setting change process of step S37 in the main control side power-on process of FIG. 175 can perform control of storing and holding the setting value which is the first information in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM. The process of step S38 in the main control side power-on process of FIG. 175 performs control to erase the game backup information which is the second information stored and held in the other area excluding the specific area of the main control built-in RAM. It is possible.

  When the setting switch 1311a and the setting switching button 1311b receive the first operation in a period in which the first operation can be received, the setting change process of step S37 in the main control side power-on process of FIG. After performing control to store the setting value which is the first information in the area, the process of step S38 in the main control side power-on process of FIG. 175 stores the information in the area other than the specific area of the main control internal RAM. It is possible to perform control to delete the game backup information which is the second information to be played.

  Specifically, when performing the first operation that can change the setting of the setting value, first, before the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the setting key of the setting key cylinder of the setting switch 1311 a is set to the setting key Is inserted, and the setting key cylinder is turned 60 degrees clockwise to perform the first ON operation, whereby the setting switch 1311 a is turned on. Subsequently, the power switch 630 a is operated to turn on the pachinko machine 1. As a result, a signal of setting key ON is input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X (perform step S18 and step S20A in the main control side power on process of FIG. 175). That is, the “period in which the first operation can be received” refers to steps S18 and S20A in the main control side power on process of FIG. 175 after the power switch 630a is operated and the pachinko machine 1 is powered on. It is a period of time until the processing of Subsequently, when the pressing operation portion of the setting switching button 1311b is pressed, a detection signal from the setting switching button 1311b of the setting change board 1310Y is input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X. The main control MPU 1310a increments the current setting value by 1 each time the setting control button 1311b is pressed, and the main control MPU 1310a increases the value by 1 each from the current setting value, based on the detection signal from the setting switching button 1311b of the setting change board 1310Y When the set value 6, which is a value, is reached, the process returns to the set value 1, which is the initial value, increases again by 1 and performs control to display the set value on the setting display 1310g (step S216 in the setting change process of FIG. 178). Repeat the process of S222). Subsequently, in order to determine the setting value, the setting key cylinder is turned counterclockwise 120 degrees (that is, the original position from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting switch 1311 a is turned on) In order to return to the initial position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turns off the setting switch 1311a), it is turned 60 degrees counterclockwise toward the OFF position, and then turned 60 degrees counterclockwise. Setting switch 1311 a is turned on by the second ON operation. The signal of the determination key ON is input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X (the process of step S222 in the setting change process of FIG. 178 is performed). Thereby, the main control MPU 1310a stores the setting value determined by changing the setting in the specific area (setting value dedicated area) of the main control built-in RAM (performs the process of step S224 in the setting change process of FIG. 178). Subsequently, the main control MPU 1310a clears the other areas of the main control built-in RAM except for the specific area (performs the process of step S38 in the main control side power-on process of FIG. 175). Thereby, the main control MPU 1310a writes the value 0 to the other areas of the main control built-in RAM excluding the specific area (game backup information is initialized).

  When the RAM clear switch 1310 f receives the second operation in a period in which the second operation can be received, the setting change process of step S 37 in the main control side power-on process of FIG. The process of step S38 in the main control side power-on process of FIG. 175 is stored and held in another area of the main control built-in RAM other than the specific area without performing control to store and hold the setting value which is information Control can be performed to delete game backup information, which is information.

  Specifically, when performing a second operation that can clear other areas except the specific area of the main control built-in RAM, first, the power switch 630a is operated while the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f is pressed. Is operated to power on the pachinko machine 1. Thus, the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the RAM clear switch 1310 f is input to the main control MPU 1310 a (performs the process of step S 14 and step S 16 A in the process of turning on the main control power in FIG. 175). That is, the “period in which the second operation can be received” refers to steps S14 and S16A in the main control side power on process of FIG. 175 after the power switch 630a is operated and the pachinko machine 1 is powered on. It is a period of time until the processing of Subsequently, the main control MPU 1310a clears the other areas of the main control built-in RAM except for the specific area (performs the process of step S38 in the main control side power-on process of FIG. 175). Thereby, the main control MPU 1310a writes the value 0 to the other areas of the main control built-in RAM excluding the specific area (game backup information is initialized).

  Thus, the game backup information which is the second information stored and held in the other area except the specific area of the main control built-in RAM is accepted by the setting switch 1311 a and the setting switching button 1311 b or by the RAM clear switch 1310 f Since deletion is possible by receiving the second operation, variations can be given to the method of deleting the game backup information, which is the second information by a clerk such as a salesclerk of the game hall. Therefore, variations can be made to the erasing method.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, the game ball B fired by the ball launching device 540 of FIG. 92 as the launching means is provided as the receiving port provided in the game area 5a. The game is entered based on the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result drawn by the main control board 1310X of the main control unit 1300 of FIG. Progress can be made.

  The pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment includes the RAM clear switch 1310 f provided on the main control board 1310 X of the main control unit 1300 of FIG. 144A as operation means, the power switch 630 a of FIG. 7 as power on means, and the main control of FIG. The setting switching button 1311b provided on the setting change board 1310Y of the unit 1300, the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU 1310a provided on the main control board 1310X of FIG. 151 as a storage means, the selection control means of the main control unit 1300 of FIG. Setting switch 1311a provided on the setting change board 1310Y, setting change processing of step S37 in the main control side power on processing of FIG. 175 as information storage control means, step of main control side power on processing of FIG. Process 38, and a main control side timer interrupt process of FIG. 177 as the activation execution control unit. The RAM clear switch 1310 f has a pressing operation unit as an operation unit. The power switch 630 a can turn on the power of the pachinko machine 1. The setting switching button 1311b is any one of setting value 1 to setting value 6 in the change setting mode of the actual machine checking operation after clearing the RAM as a plurality of activation time operation setting information which can be executed at the time of activation of the gaming machine. It is possible to select a set value.

  As described above as a mode of change setting of the actual machine check operation after clearing the RAM (Modified example (1) by the common hardware configuration described above), the movable object (character object) to be controlled by the main control MPU 1310a The actual machine check operation pattern 1 for designating "all operations (operation of movable body (characters), lighting of light emitter)" as the setting value 1 is assigned to the operation, lighting of the light emitter such as a lamp or LED, The actual machine confirmation operation pattern 2 for designating “operation of movable body (character)” as the set value 2 is allocated, and the actual machine confirmation operation pattern 3 for designating “lighting of the light emitter” is allocated as the set value 3 4 as “Detailed movement of movable body (object) (variable movement speed, movement across the operation area, interference check with other structures or other movable bodies (object), other movable body (object Working order with) Operation) 4 is assigned, and the setting value 5 is set to “1 light emitter port unit (lighting of the light emitter according to a predetermined output port unit of the main control MPU 1310 a (that is, every 1 output port)) The actual machine check operation pattern 5 for designating “lighting” is assigned, and the actual machine check operation pattern 6 for designating “no operation” as the setting value 6 is assigned.

  The main control built-in RAM can store various information even after the pachinko machine 1 is powered off. The setting switch 1311a can permit selection of a setting value which is activation operation setting information by the setting switching button 1311b, and can also determine a setting value which is activation operation setting information. . The setting change process of step S37 in the main control side power-on process of FIG. 175 performs control to store and retain the setting value, which is the operation setting information at start-up determined by the setting switch 1311a, in the specific area of the main control internal RAM. It can be done. The process of step S38 in the main control side power-on process of FIG. 175 can perform control to erase information stored and held in the other areas excluding the specific area of the main control built-in RAM. The main control side timer interrupt process of FIG. 177 can perform control of executing the start of the gaming machine based on the set value which is the start time operation setting information stored and held in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM. is there.

  When the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on by the power switch 630a after the setting switch 1311a permits the selection of the setting value which is the startup operation setting information, the startup operation setting selected by the setting switching button 1311b The setting value, which is information, is determined by the setting switch 1311a, and the setting value, which is operation setting information at start-up, is stored in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM by the setting change process of step S37 in the main control side power-on process of FIG. The information held and stored in the other areas except the specific area of the main control internal RAM is erased by the processing at step S38 in the main control side power-on process of FIG. 175 and is stored in the specific area of the main control internal RAM The main control of the pachinko machine 1 shown in FIG. 177 is based on the setting value which is the start-up operation setting information held. It adapted to be executed by the timer interrupt processing.

  Specifically, when changing the setting of the setting value, the setting key is inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting switch 1311a before the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, and the setting key cylinder is turned clockwise. The setting switch 1311a is turned on by turning the first switch by turning 60 degrees toward the end. Subsequently, the power switch 630 a is operated to turn on the pachinko machine 1. As a result, a signal of setting key ON is input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X (perform step S18 and step S20A in the main control side power on process of FIG. 175). Subsequently, when the pressing operation portion of the setting switching button 1311b is pressed, a detection signal from the setting switching button 1311b of the setting change board 1310Y is input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X. The main control MPU 1310a increments the current setting value by 1 each time the setting control button 1311b is pressed, and the main control MPU 1310a increases the value by 1 each from the current setting value, based on the detection signal from the setting switching button 1311b of the setting change board 1310Y When the set value 6, which is a value, is reached, the process returns to the set value 1, which is the initial value, increases again by 1 and performs control to display the set value on the setting display 1310g (step S216 in the setting change process of FIG. 178). Repeat the process of S222). Subsequently, when the setting value is determined, the setting key cylinder is turned 120 degrees counterclockwise (that is, the original position from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting switch 1311 a is turned on) To return to the initial position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turns off the setting switch 1311a), it is turned 60 degrees counterclockwise and turned off, and further turned 60 degrees counterclockwise The setting switch 1311a is turned on by the second ON operation (turned). The signal of the determination key ON is input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X (the process of step S222 in the setting change process of FIG. 178 is performed). Thereby, the main control MPU 1310a stores the setting value determined by changing the setting in the specific area (setting value dedicated area) of the main control built-in RAM (performs the process of step S224 in the setting change process of FIG. 178). Subsequently, the main control MPU 1310a clears the other areas of the main control built-in RAM except for the specific area (performs the process of step S38 in the main control side power-on process of FIG. 175), and In the process at step S40 of the input process, the work area of the main control built-in RAM is set as an initial setting, and the game is advanced based on the set value stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM.

  On the other hand, the setting switch 1311a does not permit the selection of the setting value which is the operation setting information at start-up, and the power switch 630a performs power on of the pachinko machine 1 and operates the RAM clear switch 1310f within a predetermined period. When the unit is operated, the information stored and held in the other areas except for the specific area of the main control internal RAM is erased by the processing at step S38 in the main control side power-on process of FIG. The activation of the pachinko machine 1 is executed by the main control side timer interrupt process of FIG. 177 based on the setting value which is the activation time operation setting information stored and held in the specific area.

  Specifically, the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is not rotated 60 degrees clockwise, and the power switch of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on by the power switch 630a. The main control MPU 1310a starts the processing when the main control side power is turned on in FIG. When the main control side power-on process of FIG. 175 is started, the main control MPU 1310 a performs processing within a predetermined period from the start of the main control side power-on process of FIG. 175 to the process of step S14. It is determined whether or not the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310 f is operated, and when the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310 f is operated, thereafter, in the process of step S 38 of the main control side power on process of FIG. Clear the other area excluding the specific area of the main control built-in RAM, and set the work area of the main control built-in RAM as an initial setting in the processing of step S40 of the main control side power-on process of FIG. The game is advanced based on the set value stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of.

  As described above, the setting value which is the startup operation setting information selected from any one of the setting value 1 to the setting value 6 which is the plurality of startup operation setting information that can be executed when the pachinko machine 1 starts up. Is stored in a specific area of the main control built-in RAM, the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on and the operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310 f is operated within a predetermined period. If the information stored and held in the other area excluding the specific area of the main control internal RAM is erased by the processing of step S38 in the main control side power-on process of FIG. 175, the information is stored in the specific area of the main control internal RAM The pachinko machine 1 can be started based on the setting value which is the start-up operation setting information. Therefore, variations can be made to the activation method.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, the game ball B fired by the ball launching device 540 of FIG. 92 as the launching means is provided as the receiving port provided in the game area 5a. The game is entered based on the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result drawn by the main control board 1310X of the main control unit 1300 of FIG. Progress can be made.

  The pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment includes the RAM clear switch 1310 f provided on the main control board 1310 X of the main control unit 1300 of FIG. 144A as operation means, the power switch 630 a of FIG. 7 as power on means, and the main control of FIG. The setting switching button 1311b provided on the setting change board 1310Y of the unit 1300, the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU 1310a provided on the main control board 1310X of FIG. 151 as a storage means, the selection control means of the main control unit 1300 of FIG. Setting switch 1311a provided on the setting change board 1310Y, setting change processing of step S37 in the main control side power on processing of FIG. 175 as information storage control means, step of main control side power on processing of FIG. 38 and includes processing of. The RAM clear switch 1310 f has a pressing operation unit as an operation unit. The power switch 630 a can turn on the power of the pachinko machine 1. The setting switching button 1311 b can select any one of setting values 1 to 6 as a plurality of setting information advantageous to the player. The main control built-in RAM can store various information even after the pachinko machine 1 is powered off. The setting switch 1311a can permit selection of the setting value by the setting switching button 1311b, and can also determine the setting value. The setting change process of step S37 in the main control side power-on process of FIG. 175 can perform control of storing and holding the setting information determined by the setting switch 1311a in a specific area of the main control built-in RAM. The process of step S38 in the main control side power-on process of FIG. 175 can perform control to erase information stored and held in the other areas excluding the specific area of the main control built-in RAM.

  When the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on by the power switch 630a after setting of the setting value is permitted by the setting switch 1311a, the setting value selected by the setting switching button 1311b is determined by the setting switch 1311a. The set value determined is stored and held in a specific area of the main control internal RAM, and the information stored and held in the other areas excluding the specific area of the main control internal RAM is step S38 in the main control side power-on process of FIG. It is designed to be erased by processing.

  Specifically, when changing the setting of the setting value, the setting key is inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting switch 1311a before the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, and the setting key cylinder is turned clockwise. The setting switch 1311a is turned on by turning the first switch by turning 60 degrees toward the end. Subsequently, the power switch 630 a is operated to turn on the pachinko machine 1. As a result, a signal of setting key ON is input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X (perform step S18 and step S20A in the main control side power on process of FIG. 175). Subsequently, when the pressing operation portion of the setting switching button 1311b is pressed, a detection signal from the setting switching button 1311b of the setting change board 1310Y is input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X. The main control MPU 1310a increments the current setting value by 1 each time the setting control button 1311b is pressed, and the main control MPU 1310a increases the value by 1 each from the current setting value, based on the detection signal from the setting switching button 1311b of the setting change board 1310Y When the set value 6, which is a value, is reached, the process returns to the set value 1, which is the initial value, increases again by 1 and performs control to display the set value on the setting display 1310g (step S216 in the setting change process of FIG. 178). Repeat the process of S222). Subsequently, when the setting value is determined, the setting key cylinder is turned 120 degrees counterclockwise (that is, the original position from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting switch 1311 a is turned on) To return to the initial position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turns off the setting switch 1311a), it is turned 60 degrees counterclockwise and turned off, and further turned 60 degrees counterclockwise The setting switch 1311a is turned on by the second ON operation (turned). The signal of the determination key ON is input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X (the process of step S222 in the setting change process of FIG. 178 is performed). Thereby, the main control MPU 1310a stores the setting value determined by changing the setting in the specific area (setting value dedicated area) of the main control built-in RAM (performs the process of step S224 in the setting change process of FIG. 178). Subsequently, the main control MPU 1310a clears the other areas of the main control built-in RAM except for the specific area (performs the process of step S38 in the main control side power-on process of FIG. 175).

  When the power on of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on by the power switch 630a without setting the setting information being permitted by the setting switch 1311a and the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f is operated within a predetermined period, the main Information stored and held in other areas except for the specific area of the control built-in RAM is erased by the process of step S38 in the main control side power-on process of FIG.

  Specifically, the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is not rotated 60 degrees clockwise, and the power switch of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on by the power switch 630a. The main control MPU 1310a starts the processing when the main control side power is turned on in FIG. When the main control side power-on process of FIG. 175 is started, the main control MPU 1310 a performs processing within a predetermined period from the start of the main control side power-on process of FIG. 175 to the process of step S14. It is determined whether or not the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310 f is operated, and when the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310 f is operated, thereafter, in the process of step S 38 of the main control side power on process of FIG. Clear the other areas excluding the specific area of the main control built-in RAM.

  As described above, the main control internal RAM stores and holds the setting value determined by selecting any one of the plurality of setting values (setting value 1 to setting value 6) which is advantageous to the player. Since the game is based on the set value, it is possible to provide the player with a game for each set value. Therefore, the range of the game can be expanded. After setting switch 1311a permits setting information selection, power switch 630a turns on power of pachinko machine 1, and setting information selected by setting switch button 1311b is determined by setting switch 1311a. Information stored and held in another area of the main control built-in RAM other than the specific area of the main control built-in RAM is stored in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM in step S38 of FIG. The power is turned on by the pachinko machine 1 by the power switch 630a without setting “erasing information with setting change” to be erased by processing and setting information selection is not permitted by the setting switch 1311a, and within a predetermined period On the basis of the operation of the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f, the master The information stored and held in the area other than the specific area of the built-in RAM is erased by the process of step S38 in the main control side power-on process of FIG. It is possible to erase one of the information in the "erasing information".

  As mentioned above, although the suitable form was mentioned and demonstrated about the pachinko machine 1, the said pachinko machine 1 can perform various improvement and the change of a design.

  That is, although the above-mentioned form showed what was applied to pachinko machine 1 as a game machine, it is not limited to this, but is applied to a pachislot machine or a game machine formed by combining a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine Also in this case, the same function and effect as described above can be exhibited.

  Further, in the above embodiment, even when the outer periphery pressing operation portion 303b (peripheral button cover 380) is pressed down to the lowering end with the pressing operation portion 303 moved to the raised position, the pressing of the outer periphery pressing operation portion 303b is detected Although what was not shown was shown, it may not be limited to this, and it may be made to be able to detect press of perimeter press operation part 303b. Thereby, even in the same pressing operation, the central pressing operation portion 303a and the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b are changed to different presentation modes, or when the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b is pressed, the pressing operation of the central pressing operation portion 303a is urged It is possible to perform a variety of player participation type effects, and to entertain the player and suppress a decrease in interest.

  Further, in the above embodiment, in a state in which the pressing operation unit 303 (the center pressing operation unit 303a and the outer periphery pressing operation unit 303b) is moved to the raised position, when the pressing operation unit 303 is pressed, it moves to the lowered position. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the pressing operation unit 303 is pressed in the state of the raised position, the downward movement may be restricted after moving slightly downward from the raised position.

  Furthermore, in the above embodiment, although the rotary operation unit 302 is provided on the upper surface of the plate unit 200 that bulges forward, the present invention is not limited to this, and the rotation operation unit is disposed inside the plate unit. At the same time, the outer peripheral side surface of the rotation operation unit may be exposed to the outside on the front surface of the pan unit. Also in this case, the player can enjoy the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit in the same manner as described above, and it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest for the game.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the main body frame 4 is provided with the speaker unit 620a communicated with the curtain plate internal space 40a (port member 47) via the connection cylindrical portion 43a, but the present invention is limited thereto Instead, the door frame 3 (dish unit 200) may be provided with a speaker unit whose inside communicates with the port member 47, and the same operation and effect as described above can be achieved.

The pachinko machine described so far includes the following technical ideas.
"A game board provided with a game area in which a released game ball can flow down is formed, and as the game area, a first game area in which the released game ball can be flowed down with a predetermined release power, and the predetermined game area In a gaming machine having a second gaming area where a gaming ball launched with a specific launching force stronger than the launching force can flow down,
The game apparatus further comprises a communication passage portion through which the game ball launched with the specific launch force can pass before entering the second game area,
The communication passage section is provided with a plurality of releasing units for releasing the passed game balls to the second game area so that the passed game balls enter different locations into the second game area, and the above-mentioned communication path section A branch separating the passages such that a plurality of ball passages are formed in the vertical direction on the upstream side of the plurality of discharge portions;
A first ball passage of the plurality of ball passages formed by the branch portion communicates with a first discharge portion of the plurality of discharge portions, and the plurality of ball passages formed by the branch portion The second ball passage of the gaming machines is configured to be in communication with the second ejection portion of the plurality of ejection portions. "

  Such a game machine is provided with a plurality of ball passages in the communication passage and a plurality of discharge units communicating with each ball passage, and the entry point to the second game area is different depending on which ball passage passes, and as a result, 2 Falling modes in the game area are different. If the fall mode in the second game area is different, the probability of entering the ball will be different, so the player will be careful to handle the steering wheel, and by capturing the target ball passage in this way, a lot of When a game ball can be obtained, a sufficient sense of accomplishment and a sense of satisfaction can be obtained. Therefore, since the consciousness is concentrated also on firing the game ball toward the second game area, the interest of the game is increased.

In the above-mentioned gaming machine, a drop opening connecting the first ball passage and the second ball passage is provided in a part of the branching portion of the communication passage portion, and a part of the game ball flowing in the first ball passage is the second ball passage. And may be dropped from the second discharge part to a specific part of the second game area.
In this way, in order to aim at the first discharge part connected to the first ball passage, both the direction of emission and the emission force need to be satisfied, so that the steering wheel operation is performed with more careful attention.

[20. Other form 1 of the pachinko machine]
Next, the pachinko machine 1 of the other embodiment 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. In addition, since the pachinko machine 1 of the other embodiment 1 is mainly the gaming board 5 and the handle unit 180 of the pachinko machine 1 described above, the description thereof will be omitted except in principle related to them. Therefore, in FIGS. 190 to 215 and FIGS. 1 to 189, the components given the same reference numerals are, in principle, the components having the same or the same function.

[Game board]
As shown in the exploded perspective view of FIG. 202, the game board 5 of the present other embodiment 1 has a game panel 1100 having a game area 5a on the front, a center member 2500 attached to the game panel 1100, and the game panel 1100. And a rendering unit 814 attached to the rear of the camera.

[Game panel]
As shown in the exploded perspective view of FIG. 202, the game panel 1100 has a base panel 1110 made of opaque veneer, a back side decoration member 817 for applying a decoration 816 for background, a game area 5a and a center member 2500. And a front component 1000 that encloses the

[Base panel]
The base panel 1110 is formed of a plywood as described above, and cells made of synthetic resin to be the first decorative surface 819 are attached to the entire front surface, and the first decorative surface 819 is used for background A decoration 820a (a random arrangement of a boy's face in this other embodiment 1) is printed. Further, a large through hole 1112 for attaching the center member 2500 is formed at a substantially central position on the upper side of the base panel 1110.

[Back side decoration member]
As shown in the perspective view of FIG. 204, the exploded perspective view of FIG. 205, and the sectional views of FIG. 198 and FIG. 199, the back side decoration member 817 for applying the decoration 816 for background is an effect of the effect unit 814 described later. It is disposed on the back surface of the base panel 1110 via the support frame 852 (specifically, it is integrated with the effect support frame 852 because it is screwed to the front of the effect support frame 852). Background decoration 816 (e.g., first decoration surface 819 with decoration 820a) having uniformity with decoration 820a of first decoration surface 819 (including not only appearance uniformity but also idea uniformity) on the front surface A second decorative surface 822 is formed which is connected to complete one character. In the second decorative surface 822, by arranging the plate pieces 822 p of several blocks at different positions in the back and forth direction, the decoration 816 itself is given a stereoscopic effect of perspective.
The back side decorative member 817 is an upper decorative member 817a, a lower decorative member 817b, a right decorative member 817c, and a left decorative member so as to correspond to four sides of the through hole 1112 for attaching the center member 2500 of the base panel 1110. The second decorative surface 822 of the upper decorative member 817a, the lower decorative member 817b, and the right decorative member 817c is disposed to face the inside of the through hole 1112 while the left decorative member 817d is formed. The second decorative surface 822 is disposed to face the back surface of the base panel 1110 as shown in FIG. 198. As described above, the second decorative surface 822 of the left decorative member 817d is disposed opposite to the back surface of the opaque base panel 1110, and thus, although it does not enter the player's view in the normal state, it is shown in FIG. When viewed obliquely, a part can be recognized. Therefore, it is possible to give the player the feeling that the background decoration 816 is extended to the far back of the base panel 1110, so that the three-dimensional effect can be further enhanced.

In the game area 5a surrounded by the front component 1000 of the base panel 1110, as described above, the general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the gate section 2003, the second starting opening 2004, the large winning opening 2005, not shown. A wind turbine, an obstacle nail, etc. which change the falling of the game ball are appropriately provided according to the contents of the game, and an out ball opening 1008 for collecting the out ball is provided at the lowest position.
Note that each of these members is formed of a synthetic resin that is almost transparent, so that the background decoration 820a of the first decorative surface 819 is hardly hidden.

[Front component]
The front component member 1000, as shown in FIG. 203, is an outer rail 1001 that divides the game area 5a from the upper side of the center member 2500, and an area that divides the game area 5a from the side of the center member 2500 and the lower part. The game ball having a frame shape having a rail 1002 and being fired from the firing rail 544 passes through the firing passage portion 1012 between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 to the upper portion of the game area 5a or the upper portion of the center member 2500. You will be guided.
The front component member 1000 is entirely formed of a transparent synthetic resin, and the surface is seen through in a state of being installed on the base panel 1110. On the other hand, as described above, the base panel 1110 of the other embodiment 1 has the decoration 820a for background on the entire front surface, so the front component 1000 is hardly noticeable in the camouflaged state with the decoration 820a for background. It looks as if all of the front face of the base panel 1110 is the large game area 5a. Therefore, as compared with the conventional pachinko machine surrounded by the opaque front component, a visual effect is obtained as if the entire game panel 1100 is expanded to the game area 5a.
In addition, in this other embodiment 1, the decoration 820a for the background inside and outside of the game area 5a is unified in design (in addition to the unification on the appearance, it also includes the unifying unifying idea) and the visual expansion of the game area 5a. However, the decoration 820a for the background of the part corresponding to the game area 5a and the front component 1000 may have a different design without uniformity. In such a case, since the decoration of the front component 1000 can be covered with the printing of the first decorative surface 819, there is no need to decorate the front component 1000 itself, and the cost can be reduced accordingly.

  The game panel 1100 according to the present other embodiment 1 is configured as described above, and for the background, the difference in depth between the first decorative surface 819 on the surface of the game panel 1100 and the second decorative surface 822 on the back of the game panel 1100. Since a three-dimensional effect of perspective is generated in the decorations 816 and 20, a novel game machine can be provided.

[Center member]
The center member 2500 is provided with a mounting flange portion 830 having a contour slightly larger than the contour of the through hole 1112 of the base panel 1110 and a protrusion on the back side of the mounting flange portion 830 so as to be loosely fit in the through hole 1112. It has an inner frame portion 831 and an enclosure frame 832 provided on the front side of the mounting flange portion 830 so as to prevent inflow of gaming balls from the game area 5a, and the whole is a transparent synthetic resin. It is formed of
At the peripheral edge of the mounting flange portion 830 of the center member 2500, an inclined tapered portion 833 is formed to be thinner toward the base panel 1110. In this other embodiment 1, as shown in the enlarged view of FIG. 196, the tapered portion 833 of the portion (for example, the mounting flange portion 830 of the upper half portion of the center member 2500) which can enter at least the player's view in the game The hooking of the mounting flange portion 830 and the base panel 1110 is conventionally set to be shallow so as to hang on the edge of the hole 1112. Thus, the light illuminating the inside of the through hole 1112 changes like a prism through the tapered portion 833 of the mounting flange 830 and leaks to the outside, so the light leaking from the through hole 1112 turns around the center member 2500. Can be easily and effectively decorated.

  In addition, the center member 2500 is a plate having, inside the enclosure frame 832, an effect area 834 facing the drum 854 described later of the effect unit 814 and a decorative surface 835 having a height substantially flush with the game area 5a. Shaped decorative member 836.

[Effective area-light guide plate unit]
In the effect area 834 of the center member 2500, a light guide plate unit 837 is provided to protect and decorate the front surface of the drum unit 855 described later. As shown in FIG. 200, this light guide plate unit 837 has a light guide plate 842 fitted in a frame-like display window 841 including a vertical frame 839 incorporating a light emitting device 838 and a horizontal frame 840. Light is irradiated from the light emitting devices 838 of the horizontal frame 840 to the light guide incident end face of the light guide plate 842 to display a predetermined image.
The light guide plate 842 is fitted in a state where rattle of about several mm (for example, 3 mm) occurs with respect to the display window 841. By doing so, even if thermal expansion of the light guide plate 842 becomes difficult to apply stress, the risk of deformation or breakage of the light guide plate 842 due to thermal stress can be reduced. Further, the light guide plate 842 may be attached in a state in which a part of four sides is fixed with a screw (not shown) or the like and the other side is made movable without restraint for the same purpose.

[Decorative member]
The decorative member 836 of the center member 2500 is a transparent synthetic resin plate protruding from the inside of the surrounding frame 832 of the center member 2500 toward the vertical frame 839 and the horizontal frame 840 of the display window 841 A decorative surface 835 having a height substantially flush with 5a is provided. In this decorative surface 835, as shown in FIG. 201, the decoration 820b for the background provided on the first decorative surface 819 of the base panel 1110 is unified with the decoration 820b. A decoration 843 for the background is drawn, and as shown in FIG. 200, the difference in position and size between the effect area 834 and the through hole 1112 shown by the phantom line in the same figure (marginally Can be filled in a natural way. That is, the background decoration 820 b provided on the first decorative surface 819 bites into the center member 2500 in a natural manner. In addition, although uniformity is intended to be achieved by decoration, the light emitting decorative body may be disposed so as to straddle the outside and the inside of the center member 2500.
Therefore, by adjusting the size of the decoration member 836 according to the size of the effect area 834, it is possible to cope with many types of models with the minimum design change while maintaining the outer shape of the center member 2500.
Note that the decoration 843 drawn on the decoration surface 835 of this other embodiment 1 is drawn with the ink excellent in the light shielding property, and accordingly, the second decoration surface 822 seen through from the non-decorative portion of the transparent decoration member 836. The contrast with the decoration 816 further enhances the three-dimensional effect. In addition, the light blocking property of the decoration 843 has an advantage that light illuminated from the inside of the through hole 1112 can be indirectly lightened as well.
Further, in the other embodiment 1, a decoration decoration lamp 844H is provided on the upper front of the effect support frame 852 described later and above the drum 854 described later, and overlaps with the decoration lamp 844H of the decoration member 836. At the position, a notch 845 for avoiding polymerization is formed. As a result, there is no possibility that the light of the decoration lamp 844H is reflected by the decoration member 836 and it becomes difficult to see, so the definition of the decoration lamp 844H is improved.

[Characters, etc. attached to center member]
As shown in FIG. 193 and FIG. 194, the center member 2500 enters from the game area 5a below the outside of the enclosure 832, a stage shelf 2503 for dropping the game ball into the game area 5a while moving the game ball horizontally. A so-called item consisting of a warp passage 847 for guiding the game ball B to the stage shelf 2503 is integrally provided. As described above, the first starting opening 2002 is disposed immediately below the stage shelf 2503 of the game area 5a, and when the gaming ball falls from the center of the stage shelf 2503, winning can be achieved with high probability.

  In the upper right half of the right outer side of the enclosure frame 832 of the center member 2500, a discharge portion 848 is provided for guiding the game ball, which has jumped over the upper part of itself along the outer rail 1001, to the lower right of the game area 5a. It is done. The release portion 848 has a size substantially equivalent to one game ball, and ridge-shaped obstacle ridges 849 are alternately provided in a substantially equal pitch on the right inner wall and the left inner wall of the passage in a front view. Therefore, the gaming ball having entered the release portion 848 is in contact with the large number of obstacle ridges 849 and meanders, and as if in a state as if it falls while colliding with the obstacle nail in the gaming area 5a, a proper time Then, it is led to the lower right of the game area 5a.

  In addition, a second start-up port 2004 in which the winning opening is opened and closed by the rotation of the open-close piece 850 is provided in the lower right portion on the right outer side of the enclosure frame 832 of the center member 2500. A passage type gate portion 2003 is provided at the middle of the vertical direction 848. The gate portion 2003 is installed in an extending portion 830 a extended in a peninsular shape from the mounting flange portion 830 of the center member 2500, and a rear portion thereof is aligned with the extending portion 830 a of the center member 2500 to form a base panel 1110. In the through hole 1112 of the second embodiment, it is accommodated in a bayonet notch 1112a. As described above, in the extended portion 830a protruding from the mounting flange portion 830 in a peninsular manner, the gate portion 2003 (same for other winning openings) is installed, and a bayonet cut portion 1112a cut into the through hole 1112 The installation space due to the elimination of the mounting flange portion on the side of the center member 2500 as compared with the case of separately installing the gate portion 2003 and the like having the unique mounting flange portion around in the independent form by installing in Can be made compact, and the area of the veneer board of the base panel 1110 of the portion through which the game balls flow can be increased accordingly. It should be noted that the veneer is characterized in that the nailing is easy to drive and adjust, and it is difficult to remove the nail even after long-term use. Therefore, it is preferable to use the veneer as much as possible for the part where the obstacle nail is provided. The game ball in the discharge part 848 is once led to the area of the synthetic resin plate of the center member 2500, but when the game ball is discharged to the outside of the center member 2500, it is discharged to the area of the plywood provided with the obstacle nails. That's what it means.

[Demonstration Unit]
The effect unit 814 is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100, and can display, for example, the result of the lottery related to the big hit started by the detection of the game ball by the first start port 2002 as game information. A frame-like effect support frame 852 supporting the display device 851 and a rear cover 853 attached to the rear surface of the effect support frame 852 to cover the rear surface of the display device 851 are provided.

[Display device]
The display device 851 may be either an image display type using the above-described liquid crystal display device or the like, or a production type capable of displaying the game information based on changes such as mechanical rotation / stop of a movable object. The latter production type is used in 1.
As shown in FIG. 206 to FIG. 210, a concrete production type display device 851 is provided with a plurality of sets of drum units 855 capable of rotating and vertically moving the movable drum 854 in a row (3 in the other embodiment 1) (Set) are arranged side by side, and their upper and lower sides are fixedly connected by a connecting plate 856.

[Drum unit]
Each drum unit 855 is, as shown in the exploded perspective view of FIG. 208, a horizontally oriented cylindrical drum 854, a rotational drive device 857 for rotating the drum 854 in the direction of the arrow, and a rotational drive device 857 for the drum And a lighting member 859 for clarifying the game information by illuminating the drum 854 from the inside.

The drum 854 is formed of a thin sheet made of synthetic resin, and a plurality of characters and designs are displayed on the circumferential surface in a predetermined arrangement.
The rotary drive 857 for rotating the drum 854 is provided with a rim-like ring member 860 fixed to one opening edge of the drum 854 and the center of the drum 854 and gradually expanding in diameter toward the ring member 860. In addition, a frustum-cylindrical central member 861 that opens toward the ring member 860 side, a connecting member 862 that radially connects the ring member 860 and the central member 861, and an electric motor directly connected to the central member 861. The center member 861, the connecting member 862, the ring member 860, and the drum 854 are integrally rotated or stopped by rotating or stopping the drive shaft of the electric motor 863.

  The rotary drive device 857 is provided with an air cooling means for cooling air through the inside of the drum 854. That is, the air-cooling means comprises a sirocco fan-shaped intake blade 864 formed on the peripheral wall of the central member 861 and a propeller fan-shaped exhaust blade 865 formed on the connecting member 862. By rotation in the indicated direction, air is sucked from the opening of the central member 861 and discharged into the space between the outside of the central member 861 and the inside of the drum 854 in the manner of a sirocco fan, and the air guided to this space is further propeller fan The connection member 862 is discharged to the outside of the drum 854 from between the connection member 862 and the connection member 862 in the same manner. As a result, a U-turn-like air flow is generated in which the intake and exhaust are reversely directed inside and outside the central member 861 of the drum 854, so that the inside of the drum 854 is efficiently cooled.

A moving drive 858 for moving the drum 854 together with the rotary drive 857 in the vertical direction can slide the support substrate 866 up and down, and the disc-shaped support substrate 866 supporting the electric motor 863 of the drum unit 855 and the illumination member 859. A guide shaft 867 for supporting the drive shaft, an externally threaded drive shaft 868 standing parallel to the guide shaft 867, upper and lower bearing stands 869 for supporting the drive shaft 868 and the guide shaft 867, and an upper bearing stand And a lift motor 870 for a drive shaft 868 mounted on the top of 869.
Therefore, when the drive shaft 868 is rotated by the lift motor 870, the support substrate 866 is raised or lowered along the spiral of the drive shaft 868, thereby raising the drum 854 together with the rotary drive 857 as shown by the solid line in FIG. Or it descends like the figure imaginary line. The drum 854 is normally stopped at a substantially middle position (hereinafter referred to as "reference position") of the movable range, and all the drums 854 may be moved up and down all at once from this state. May be moved up and down. Further, when the drum 854 is at the highest position or the lowest position, as shown in FIG. 210, a part of the drum 854 is dislocated from the display window 841 and disappears, but even in that case, the part displaying the game information is It is arranged in the frame of the display window 841.

  By the way, although the movement drive device 858 of the other embodiment 1 can move the drum 854 only in the vertical direction, for example, the combination of the drive shaft 868, the guide shaft 867, the bearing stand 869 and the support substrate 866 is another one. The set is additionally rotated so that the drive shaft 868 and the guide shaft 867 become horizontal, and it is incorporated between the original support substrate 866 and the electric motor 863, that is, the two added to the original support substrate 866. Even if the bearing stand 869 is fixed side by side, the drive shaft 868 and the guide shaft 867 are laterally extended, and the electric motor 863 is attached to the new support substrate 866 supported by the sideways drive shaft 868 and the guide shaft 867. Good. By doing so, each drum 854 can be freely moved up and down and back and forth, so the variation of the effect by the drum 854 is greatly directed, and the member that gets in the way in the up and down movement is temporarily avoided by the back and forth movement. Will also be possible.

  Further, the display device 851 according to the present other embodiment 1 is provided with linear illuminations 871a to 871d in a front view longitudinal rod shape between the drums 854 of the plurality of drum units 855. The linear illuminations 871a to 871d are light emitters such as cold cathode tubes, and are formed to be curved in an arc shape (bow shape) toward the front surface (player). The degree of bending of the linear lights 871a and 871d located is set more gently than the degree of bending of the linear lights 871b and 871c provided between the drums 854, and further, toward the front of the linear lights 871b and 871c between the drums 854 Are set so as to come closer to the player than the linear lights 871a and 871d located at both ends of the drum 854. Thereby, a curved three-dimensional effect can be given to the front surface of the drum 854 in a state where the linear illuminations 871a to 871d are turned on.

  The display device 851 is attached from the rear side to the game board 5 by the effect support frame 852 described in detail below, and all the drums 854 in the reference position in a front view within the frame of the display window 841 of the center member 2500 Is supposed to fit. That is, the upper and lower width of the display window 841 is larger than the upper and lower width (diameter of the drum 854) of the drum 854, which is a movable object, and thus a portion showing game information on the front of the stopped drum 854 from the display window 841. (In this case, at least one of the upper and lower contours of the drum 854 can be seen by the player. By thus seeing at least one of the upper and lower contours of the drum 854 from the display window 841, it is possible to give the player a feeling as if the drum 854 exists in the air without any support.

Since the display device 851 is configured as described above, when the game ball B is received in the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004 as described above, the lottery for determining the hit and release on the main control board 1310X The result of the lottery is a combination of the symbols of the drum 854 stopped within the frame of the display window 841 after the rendering operation of a fixed time by mechanical change combining the rotation of the drum 854 and the vertical movement appropriately. Is displayed. And, if the lottery result is a big hit, a benefit is given that a large number of winnings to the big winning opening 2005 becomes easy within the range of predetermined conditions. Of course, the rendering operation of the display device 851 may be anything.
In addition, in this other mode 1, it is better to hit the right at the timing when the large winning in the large winning opening 2005 becomes possible (preferably before the large winning opening 2005 opens), that is, how to hit the game ball strongly Indicate that the level should be struck on the right side of the game area 5a (for example, the display panel 2005p shown in phantom in FIG. 190 is switched from OFF to ON and a character such as "Please strike right" is displayed. Display or give a voice guidance such as “Please hit right.”) A strike instruction means is provided to maximize the player's profit. There is.

[Effective support frame]
The effect support frame 852 has a frame form having an opening-like installation part 872 for mounting the display device 851, and is fixedly attached to the back surface of the base panel 1110 with a screw or the like. In addition to the display device 851, the back side decorative member 817 having the second decorative surface 822 is attached to the effect support frame 852 in a state of surrounding the four sides of the display device 851 as described above. In addition, the decoration support frame 852 is provided with the decorative decoration lamp 844H located on the upper side of the drum 854 above the front surface as described above. A decorative decoration lamp 844L located at By making the upper and lower decoration lamps 844H and 844L blink simultaneously or the like, for example, it is possible to easily recognize an object to be noticed among the plurality of drums 854.

[Rear cover]
The rear cover 853 is attached to the rear surface of the effect support frame 852 to cover the rear surface of the display device 851. As shown in FIG. 209, the rear cover 853 has fans 873 for heat radiation and vents 874 on both sides. Also, vents 874 for heat radiation are provided on the rear surface. In addition, effect illumination 875 for emitting light toward the drum 854 of the display 851 is provided above and below the rear cover 853 so that the outline of the drum 854 is illuminated by the illumination from the rear side. There is. Note that at least the inner surface of the rear cover 853 is dark (specifically, black) in order to enhance the effect of light by the effect illumination 875. The effect light 875 is attached to the outside of the rear cover 853 so that a light emitter 876 such as an LED can be exposed to the inside of the rear cover 853 from there. Further, a half mirror 877 is provided in a portion corresponding to the effect illumination 875 in the rear cover 853 so that the rear surface side of the drum 854 can be seen as a mirror surface when the effect illumination 875 is OFF. As a result, the back side of the drum 854 is also produced gorgeously.

Note that the above-mentioned present other embodiment 1 includes the following technical ideas.
[Technical thought 1]
A game panel having a game area where game balls can flow down;
A gaming machine comprising: a center member having at least an effect area inside an enclosure, attached to a through hole opened in the game panel and capable of preventing the inflow of game balls from the game area;
A gaming machine comprising a decorative member provided with a decorative surface substantially flush with the game area inside the enclosure frame of the center member.

[Technical thought 2]
A display device that displays game information by moving the movable object;
And a display window that makes it possible to recognize the presence of the display device.
A gaming machine in which a player is made to recognize game information by means of the movable body which can be recognized through the display window.
A game machine characterized in that the display window is formed in a state in which at least one of the upper and lower contours of the movable object can be seen from the player, in addition to the portion showing the game information of the movable object.

[Technical thought 3]
A gaming machine provided with a gaming panel having a gaming area in which gaming balls can flow down,
A first decorative surface for providing a background decoration formed on the front of the game panel;
A second decorative surface for providing a background decoration formed at a position recessed from a front surface of the game panel.

[Technical thought 4]
In a gaming machine having an operation medium for game operation on the front of a door frame disposed at a position facing a player.
A game machine characterized in that a hand cover portion capable of enclosing the vicinity of the outer periphery of a player's hand operating the operation medium is provided on the front of the door frame.

[Handle unit]
The handle unit 180 in the door frame 3 of the present other embodiment 1 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. Note that the basic configuration for adjusting the propulsive force of the handle unit 180 is substantially the same as that described in the paragraphs [0247] to [0262] and [Fig. 54], etc. For a description of parts not shown, reference is made to FIG.

  The handle unit 180 is attached to the handle attachment member 102 of the door frame 3 (the door frame base unit 100), and the player manually controls the ball emitting device 540 by manually rotating the game ball B in the upper tray 201. It is to be driven into the game area 5 a of the game board 5.

  The handle unit 180 includes a handle base 181 attached to the cylindrical portion 102 a of the handle attachment member 102 in the door frame base unit 100, a handle 182 serving as an operation medium rotatably attached to the front end of the handle base 181, and a front end side of the handle 182 Cover base 183 attached to handle base 181 so as to cover, handle decoration substrate 184 attached to the front of cover pedestal 183 and having a plurality of LEDs 184 L mounted on the front, and cover the front of handle decoration substrate 184 A handle cap 185 attached to the cover pedestal 183, and a hand cover portion 195 provided on the front of the door frame 3 to surround the outer periphery of the player's hand operating the handle 182.

  Further, the handle unit 180 is rotatably attached by an inner base 186 attached to the front of the handle base 181 on the rear side of the handle 182 and a handle 182 at the front end and rotatably attached by the inner base 186 and the handle base 181 A shaft member 187 having a drive gear portion 187a, a transmission gear 188 (see FIG. 54) engaged with the drive gear portion 187a of the shaft member 187, and a detection shaft 189a integrally rotating with the transmission gear 188 (FIG. 54). And a handle rotation detection sensor 189 (see FIG. 54) held between the handle base 181 and the inner base 186.

  Furthermore, the handle unit 180 is attached at one end to the handle base 181 and at the other end to the handle 182 to return the handle 182 to the initial rotational position (rotation start in the counterclockwise direction in front view). One end side is attached to the inner base 186 and the other end side is attached to the transmission gear 188, and the detection shaft 189a of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 is clockwise in a front view through the transmission gear 188. And an auxiliary spring 191 (see FIG. 54) biased in a direction.

  Further, the handle unit 180 has a handle touch sensor 192 (see FIG. 54) attached to the handle base 181 at the rear of the inner base 186, and the tip end is outward from the left side in front view of the front end outer peripheral surface of the handle base 181. It detects a pressing operation of a single-shot button 193 (see FIG. 54) which protrudes and has a proximal end rotatably attached to an axis extending back and forth to the handle base 181 behind the inner base 186 and pressing the single-shot button 193. And a single-shot button operation sensor 194 (see FIG. 54) attached to the handle base 181.

[Handle base]
The handle base 181 of the handle unit 180 is recessed inward from the outer peripheral surface of a cylindrical base 181 a extending in the longitudinal direction, a cup-shaped front end 181 b provided at the front end of the base 181 a, and a cylindrical base 181 a. And three grooves 181c (see FIG. 54) which extend in the axial direction and are formed at irregular intervals in the circumferential direction. The outer diameter of the base portion 181 a of the handle base 181 is formed to be slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the cylindrical portion 102 a of the handle attachment member 102. Further, the three grooves 181 c are formed at positions corresponding to the three ridges 102 c of the cylindrical portion 102 a of the handle attachment member 102. Therefore, the base portion 181a can be inserted into the cylindrical portion 102a of the handle mounting member 102 in a state in which the three groove portions 181c coincide with the three ridges 102c, and the ridges 102c are respectively inserted in the three groove portions 181c. By being inserted, the handle base 181 can not be rotated relative to the handle attachment member 102.
In addition, a collar-shaped screen member 196 colored in a white-based color is provided around the base portion 181a of the handle base 181 in a state of being fixed to the handle attachment portion 102. The light of the full color LED emitted toward the screen member 196 from the end of the frame right side unit 410 can be reflected almost as it is.

[handle]
The handle 182 is based on a disk having a diameter and a thickness suitable for the player to hold with one hand, and protrudes from the outer peripheral surface to a height equal to or greater than the height at which one finger can pass. Positions substantially point-symmetrical with respect to the rotation center (shaft member 187), that is, four finger hook portions 182g to 182j projecting at equal intervals (90 degrees), and a circle centered on the rotation axis (shaft member 187) Two slits 182e extending in an arc shape and penetrating in the front-rear direction, and an engagement that protrudes rearward from a position on the inner side with respect to the rotation center than the slit 182e and the other end side of the handle return spring 190 is locked And a stop projection 182f (see FIG. 54).

  Further, on the outside of the handle 182, a decorative handle 1820 which is an annular decorative member concentric with the handle 182 is integrally provided via the finger hook portions 182g to 182j. The decorative handle 1820 has a front surface covered with a translucent decorative cover 1821 and an outer peripheral surface covered with a conductive touch cover 1822 serving as a sensing portion of the handle touch sensor 192, and is disposed inside a hollow. By the plurality of light emitting LEDs 1823 and the light emitting LEDs 182L provided in a point shape in front of the finger hook portions 182g to 182j, appropriate full-color effect by light can be performed.

In addition, as an example of the effect of the light by the light emitting LED 182L of the decorative handle 1820, it should be seen that the decorative handle 1820 is visually right-turned by changing the light emission mode of the plurality of light emitting LEDs 182L. It is indicated that the timing is indicated, that is, it is used as the above-mentioned strike instruction means. In addition, it is more dynamic to produce clockwise light flow in the entire door frame 3, preferably using the full-color LEDs of the door frame left side unit 400, the door frame top unit 450, and the door frame right side unit 410 of the door frame 3. Can be instructed to hit the right. For example, full-color LEDs of the door frame left side unit 400, the door frame top unit 450, and the door frame right side unit 410 of the door frame 3 are "lower left → left → upper left → upper left → upper middle → upper middle → upper right → upper right → upper middle → The light is emitted in the order of “lower right” to direct the light to flow clockwise (clockwise), and the light emitting LED 1823 of the decorative handle 1820 emits light clockwise in a form that inherits the flow of light. In particular, when light is emitted from the light emitting LED 1823 closest to the full color LED positioned at the lowermost part of the door frame right side unit 410, a more interlocked (integrated) effect can be obtained. In this case, the user is instructed to hit in the two lighting modes of the door frame 3 and the decoration handle 1820. Therefore, the player is hit without trouble even if a failure occurs in any one of the LEDs. Can be directed.
As described above, as an example of the light effect, the one indicating that it is time to hit the right is shown, but it is needless to say that the invention is not limited to this and can be performed to effects other than the above. . For example, in the case of giving a left-handed instruction from the right-handed state, a series of effects opposite to the light effects in the case of right-handed (for example, decorative LED 1823 on the side of decorative handle 1820 in a counterclockwise direction) After turning the door frame left side unit 400, door frame top unit 450, door frame right side unit 410 full color LED right bottom → right middle → top right → top right → top middle → top left → top left → middle left → It does not perform the effect to light up in the order of lower left, or it is not the instruction of how to hit, for example, when the effect with high expectation to the hit is executed, the effect linked to it is executed, the expectation to the hit To perform the rendering linked to it before the high rendering is performed, and so on. In addition, the interlocking referred to here is, for example, the effect that light flows from the upper side to the lower side of the pachinko machine 1 (full-color LED of the door frame top unit 450) The upper left and the upper right are emitted, then the door frame left side unit 400 and the door frame right side unit 410 are emitted from the top to the bottom and finally the light emitting LED 1823 of the decorative handle 1820 To emit light).
In addition, the light emission timing in the case of using the light emitting LED 182L of the decoration handle 1820 as the strike direction instruction means is, for example, the same as lighting of the display panel 2005p which is another strike direction instruction means, or in the effect display device 1600 (liquid crystal display device). It may be the same as or displayed before or after the right-handed instruction to be displayed, but it is better to do it at least before the large-scale winning of the big winning opening 2005 is possible (before the opening of the big winning opening 2005) , Preferred to protect the interests of the player.

  Moreover, changing a lighting pattern according to the emission intensity of the ball | bowl emitting device 540 is mentioned as an example of the presentation of the light of light emission LED182L provided in front of finger application part 182g-182j in point shape. For example, it is blue if the emission intensity is "weak" and green if the emission intensity is "medium". The general pachinko machine 1 has an advantageous gaming state in which the right-handed state in which the launch intensity is "strong" is a big hit or in the middle of a definite change, so when the launch intensity is "strong", it stimulates excitement psychologically. It is good to light up in red that is considered to work.

In the four finger hooks 182g to 182j, when the handle 182 is in the initial rotation position, the two finger hooks 182g and 182i are both horizontal, and the remaining two finger hooks 182h and 182j are both vertical. The right thumb is naturally engaged below the finger rest 182g located on the left side of the center of rotation when the player holds the handle 182 in a normal grip style. It has become. Therefore, in the other embodiment 1, the finger hook portion 182g is a finger hook portion for normal operation. In the normal grip style, the fingers other than the thumb cover the handle 182 in a state of sandwiching the upper finger hook portion 182h.
On the other hand, although the finger hook portion 182j provided on the circumferential surface below the rotation center of the handle 182 hardly touches any finger in the above-described normal grip style, for example, the handle 182 holding the hand If the finger such as the forefinger is hooked on the finger hook portion 182j by releasing the finger from the finger, the handle 182 can be rotated clockwise in a front view by the irregular operation of moving the finger to the left. In this other embodiment 1, the strike instruction means (display panel 2005p) for instructing that the player should strike the right as described above is provided, and the strike instruction means should strike on the right side of the game area. While the finger hook portion 182j of the handle 182 has a force in the opposite direction to the command (force in the left direction in front view).
In addition, the finger may be put on the finger rests 182h and 182i other than the finger rests 182g and 182j, and the handle 182 may be rotated by a pulling force upward or downward.

[Cover base]
The cover pedestal 183 is formed in a disk shape, and includes a plurality of mounting bosses 183 a that project rearward from the rear surface. The mounting boss 183 a is attached to the front surface of the handle base 181 by penetrating the slit 182 e of the handle 182 from the front. Since the mounting boss 183a of the handle cap 185 penetrates the slit 182e of the handle 182, the mounting boss 183a abuts on the circumferential end of the slit 182e, and the rotation angle of the handle 182 is restricted. In this example, the handle 182 can be rotated within an angle of rotation of about 120 degrees from the initial stop position.

[Handle cap]
The front face of the handle cap 185 bulges forwardly, and the central portion has translucency. Inside the handle cap 185, a lens member which is three-dimensionally formed of a transparent member is provided. The handle cap 185 can effect light by appropriately emitting the LED 184 L on the front surface of the handle decoration substrate 184.

[Handle rotation detection sensor]
The handle rotation detection sensor 189 of the handle unit 180 is a variable resistor, and when the handle 182 is rotated clockwise in a front view, the detection shaft 189 a of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 via the shaft member 187 and the transmission gear 188. Will rotate. The internal resistance of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 changes according to the rotation angle of the detection shaft 189a, and the driving force of the emission solenoid 542 in the ball emission device 540 changes according to the internal resistance of the handle rotation detection sensor 189, The game ball B is driven into the game area 5a with a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 182. In the present other embodiment 1, when the handle 182 is rotated clockwise as viewed from the front, the launch force of the gaming ball is set to be strong.

[Handle touch sensor]
The handle touch sensor 192 detects static electricity acting on the handle unit 180, and the player contacts either the handle 182 or the finger grips 182g to 182j or the touch cover 1822 of the decoration handle 1820 to play a game. Static electricity from the player is detected, and contact of the player with the handle 182 or the like is detected. Then, when the handle touch sensor 192 detects the player's touch, when the handle 182 is turned, the detection of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 is received, and the rotation angle of the handle 182 adjusted (input) by the player The driving of the firing solenoid 542 is controlled with the strength according to the above, and the game ball B can be hit. That is, even if the player tries to hit the game ball B into the game area 5a by rotating the handle 182 in some way without touching the handle 182, the handle touch sensor 192 does not detect the player's contact. Thus, the firing solenoid 542 is not driven, and the game ball B can not be hit. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the player from playing the game by rotating the handle 182 in a method different from the original method, and it is possible to reduce the load (burden) associated with the gaming hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. .

  Also, when the player presses the one-shot button 193 while the player is rotating the handle 182, the one-shot button manipulation sensor 194 detects the operation of the one-shot button 193, and the firing control portion 633b of the payout control board 633 Driving of the firing solenoid 542 is to be stopped. Thus, the firing of the game ball B can be temporarily stopped without returning the rotation operation of the handle 182, and by releasing the pressing operation of the one-shot button 193, the operation before the one-shot button 193 is performed. The game ball B can be re-injected into the game area 5a by the driving strength.

[Handle attachment member]
The handle unit 180 is attached to the handle attachment seat surface 101 b of the door frame base 101 via the handle attachment member 102. The handle mounting seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101 is inclined so that the right end is positioned more rearward than the left end in plan view and faces the outside (the open side). The handle unit 180 to be attached via is also inclined outward in plan view (in other words, its tip is inclined to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 with respect to a line perpendicular to the front of the pachinko machine 1). It is attached and fixed to the door frame 3. As a result, the handle 182 of the handle unit 180 can be easily grasped, and the player can perform the rotation operation without feeling discomfort.

[Hand cover]
A substantially cylindrical hand cover portion 195 surrounding the outer periphery of the player's hand operating the handle 182 is attached to the front surface of the door frame 3 so as to surround the outside of the handle attachment portion 102, as shown in FIG. The front opening 195 h is substantially aligned with the rear surface of the decorative handle 1820, as shown in FIG. The hand cover portion 195 and the decorative handle 1820 have a joint portion by a slidable fitting between a joint ring 1824 projecting on the rear surface of the decorative handle 1820 and an annular slit 195 a opened on the front surface of the hand cover portion 195. It is connected seamlessly.
The hand cover portion 195 can also be provided for the handle 182 not provided with the decorative handle 1820. In this case, the front opening 195h of the hand cover portion 195 is located approximately to the outer peripheral position of the handle 182. The front opening 195 h may be extended and provided with the same decorative means as the decorative handle 1820.

The hand cover portion 195 of the present embodiment 1 is provided with a window opening 195w leading to the outside to a part of the body portion, and the window opening 195w causes moisture or smoke in the hand cover portion 195 or smoke or intention or It prevents the stagnation of the beverage and the like that has flowed in due to negligence, and also prevents fraud by improving the visibility of the inside.
In order to facilitate cleaning of the inside of the hand cover portion 195 and wiping of the inflowing beverage, as shown in FIG. 215, the handle 182 may be detachable. Specifically, engagement / disengagement means 197 formed of a combination of, for example, a claw piece 197a and an elastically deformable reception piece 197b is formed on each of the base portion 181a of the handle base 181 and the screen member 196 fixed to the handle mounting portion 102 side. The handle attachment portion together with the handle base 181 as shown in FIG. 215 is provided by engaging and disengaging the engagement / disengagement means 197 (see solid line in enlarged view in FIG. 215) / disengagement (see phantom line in enlarged view in FIG. 215). It may be removable from the 102 side. By doing this, the handle 182 can be removed from the handle attachment portion 102 and the front opening 195 h of the hand cover portion 195 can be fully opened, thereby facilitating cleaning of the inside, wiping off of spilled beverage, and the like. In addition, preferably, if the release operation of the engagement / disengagement means 197 is performed by a dedicated release member (for example, insertion of a thumbtack-type pin) not shown, there is no fear that the handle 182 will be pulled out by mischief or the like.

As described above, by providing the hand cover portion 195 on the outside of the handle 182, it seems that the player's hand (finger) operating the handle 182 has entered the hand cover portion 195, that is, the pachinko machine 1. This makes it possible to make the player feel more strongly that the pachinko machine 1 is being operated.
In addition, when the air blowing means (not shown) is connected to the hand cover portion 195 and the air is blown, most of the wind escapes from the front opening 195 h of the hand cover portion 195 to the outside, so that the wind is surely applied to the player's hand. Can. Therefore, for example, when the expectation for the big hit is high, or when the expectation for the advantageous hit (perhaps a probability change or a large number of balls) is high, the wind is sent at a predetermined effect (for example, an air cannon). If it is controlled to a good gaming state (for example, during a definite change, during a short time, during a latent confirmation), the wind may be sent at a regular timing such as every 5 seconds, or a predetermined drawing may be made before the drawing. An effect such as sending a wind when winning will be effective. Of course you may always make the wind go.
Although not shown, a speaker (preferably a vibration speaker) for gaming may be provided inside the hand cover portion 195. In such a case, the sound of the speaker comes off from the front opening 195h of the hand cover portion 195, so that the player's hand can effectively feel the vibration of the sound.

The above other embodiment 1 includes the following technical ideas.
[Technical thought 5]
A ball launcher for hitting a game ball into the game area of the game board,
And a handle for adjusting the launch force of the ball launcher by manual rotation.
The handle is
A normal operating finger hook which is provided on the left side of the self rotation center and which can be engaged with the thumb of the hand operating in the normal grip style;
And an irregularly operable finger hook which is provided on the peripheral surface below the rotation center of the handle separately from the finger hook and which can be engaged with at least one finger of the player's hand. A game machine characterized by
In this game machine,
It has a strike instruction means for instructing the player to strike the game ball according to the game situation,
On the other hand, the steering wheel is set so that the launch force becomes stronger by rotation clockwise in a front view,
When it is instructed that the strike instruction means should strike on the right side of the game area, it is possible to respond by an operation of applying a force in the left direction in front view to the finger hook part for the irregular operation of the handle You may

  As mentioned above, although the other form of the pachinko machine was demonstrated, of course, it is also possible to change the said other form suitably. For example, although a pachinko machine has been illustrated as a game machine in the above embodiment, the invention is also applicable to other game machines such as ball ball machines, arrange ball machines, etc. The present invention is also applicable to slot machines that rotate reels.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the electric motor 863 of the rotary drive 857 and the elevation motor 870 of the movement drive 858 are directed in different directions, specifically, the output axis of the electric motor 863 is the same as the rotation axis of the drum 854 While the lift motor 870 is in the other direction such that its output shaft is in the same vertical direction as the drive shaft 868 of the drum unit 855, but the direction of the electric motor 863 and the lift motor 870 Can be the same. However, when the electric motor 863 and the lift motor 870 are set in different directions as in the above embodiment, identification and correspondence of a motor which causes a trouble in either the rotation operation or the lift operation of the drum 854 Is superior in that it can be done quickly.

Moreover, although the opaque base panel 1110 was demonstrated to the example in the said form, it is good also as a transparent synthetic resin base panel 1110. FIG.
Moreover, in the said form, although decoration 816, 820a, 820b, 843 for backgrounds was made into patterns, such as printing, it may be decoration by the light-emitting body by LED etc.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the handle cap 185 is fixed to the handle base 181 and the handle 182 is formed to rotate between the two, but the handle cap 185 is fixed to the handle 182 and rotates integrally with the handle 182. You may get it.

  In the above embodiment, the handle 182, the decorative handle 1820, and the hand cover portion 195 are combined, but even if the decorative handle 1820 is provided on the outside of the handle 182, the rendering effect of making the handle 182 large and noticeable You can enjoy it.

[Other pachinko machine]
Next, another pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. The other pachinko machine 1 is mainly the one in which the number, arrangement, and structure of the handle units 180 are changed with respect to the pachinko machine 1 shown in FIGS. I omit explanation.

  The pachinko machine 1 is, as shown in FIG. 216, a handle unit 180 which is an input medium for gaming on both sides of the forward bulging structure configured of the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200, the rendering operation unit 300 and the like. I have two. In FIG. 216, the right handle unit (hereinafter also referred to as “right handle unit”) 180 (R) is for adjusting the striking strength of the ball launcher 540 as described above. On the other hand, the left handle unit (hereinafter, also referred to as “left handle unit”) 180 (L) is used as an input means for the player participation type effect player described above.

  Each of the handle units 180 (L) and (R) is provided with the operating portion including the handle 182, the decorative handle 1820, and the finger rests 182g to 182j as described above, and the finger is interposed between the handle 182 and the decorative handle 1820 It is what makes it rotate (operation).

  In each handle unit 180 (L), (R), the outer diameter of the decorative handle 1820 around the handle 182 is smaller than the inner diameter of the front opening 195 h of the hand cover portion 195, and the base 181a of the handle base 181 is It is slidably supported by the cylindrical portion 102 a of the handle attachment member 102, so that the entire unit can move linearly in the front-rear direction in the hand cover portion 195. Further, each handle unit 180 (L), (R) is directed toward the player by a spring 4001 of the handle position control means 4000 described later loaded in a compressed state in the cylindrical portion 102a of the handle attachment member 102. It is always energized.

[Right handle unit]
The right handle unit 180 (R) is to adjust the striking force of the ball emitting device 540 by turning the handle 182 as described above, and in the normal state, the decorative handle 1820 has a hand cover portion 195 as shown in FIG. The front opening 195 h is substantially flush with the front opening 195 h (hereinafter referred to as “front position”), and is locked (fixed) by the handle position control means 4000 at this front position.

[Handle position control means of right handle unit]
The handle position control means (hereinafter also referred to as “right handle position control means”) 4000 of the right handle unit 180 (R) has a pivotable lock arm 4004 having a roller 4003 at its tip, and the lock arm 4004 It consists of a solenoid 4005 which is changed to a horizontal lock posture (see solid line in FIG. 221) and a release posture (see phantom line in FIG. 221) in which the roller 4003 side is flipped up.
When the lock arm 4004 is in the horizontal lock position, it lays like a rod between the handle base 181 of the right handle unit 180 (R) and the handle attachment member 102 and lays the right handle unit 180 (R) When locked in the forward position and pulling up the plunger 4006 of the solenoid 4005 from this state to swing the lock arm 4004 to the release position, the roller 4003 is detached from the handle base 181 (the support of the lock arm 4004 is released) The lock of the right handle unit 180 (R) is released, and as shown in FIG. 222, the right handle unit 180 (R) can be linearly moved to the back of the hand cover portion 195 (hereinafter referred to as “rear position”).
The lock arm 4004 is biased by, for example, a torsion coil spring (not shown) from the release attitude to the lock attitude, and accordingly the right handle unit 180 (R) is forwardly moved with the solenoid 4005 turned off. When it returns to the position, it automatically returns to the locked posture.

  The right handle unit 180 (R) may be used as an input unit that appropriately detects the operation of moving the entire unit from the locked state by a sensor and emits an input signal to the player participation type effect (that is, one right In the handle unit 180, an input for hitting the ball launcher 540 and an input for player participation type effect can be made.) In the embodiment, the hitting force of the ball launcher 540 is adjusted by an operation to move the whole unit from the stop state. Use as a second input means.

  Specifically, when the right handle unit 180 (R) is pushed in a state where the lock of the right handle position control means 4000 is released, the striking force of the ball launcher 540 is proportional to the linear movement displacement of the handle. In the form of taking over the previous batting force by the rotation of 182 (in order to eliminate the problem that the batting force temporarily decreases at the point where the operation subject switches), it becomes stronger, and if it is pushed as it is to the rear position It changes to a level and becomes the right strike (see paragraph [1776]), and returns the right handle unit 180 (R) from the rear position to the forward position (relaxing the pressing force on the right handle unit 180 (R) For example, and return to the batting force based on the rotation angle of the handle 182 (usually the batting force at the time of the previous game). There.

  Alternatively, when the right handle unit 180 (R) is pushed in, the control signal of the striking force is sent so that the striking force of the ball launcher 540 becomes a strong level immediately, and the rotation angle of the steering wheel 182 immediately before Change from a striking force based on to a strong level, or when the right handle unit 180 (R) is returned to the forward position, the striking force by the rotation of the steering wheel 182 (usually the striking force just before) is also Good.

  In summary, the right handle unit 180 (R) includes two movable elements which can be displaced in different plane directions, and in the state in which the impact adjustment of the ball launcher 540 is executed by the displacement of one movable element. And adjust the striking force adjustment of the ball launcher 540 by the displacement of the movable element, and return the striking force adjustment by the one movable element when the adjustment of the striking force by the other movable element is completed. There are two movable elements, for example, the rotatably supported handle 182 and the entire handle unit 180 movably supported in a different plane direction, and the ball launcher 540 is rotated by the rotational displacement of the handle 182. Control of the ball launcher 540 by the displacement of the entire handle unit 180 while performing the adjustment of the striking force of When finishing the adjustment of the batting force by the movement displacement of the whole knit 182, it is made to return to the batting force adjustment by the handle 182. As a result, the normal game is performed with the batting force adjustment by one movable element. It is possible to perform a strong striking force required when changing to a special gaming state in a so-called interruption state by the displacement of another movable element, while, when a special gaming state is ended, a batting by the other movable element It is possible to return to the normal gaming state simply and accurately simply by ending the power adjustment.

  The right handle unit 180 (R) is configured as described above, and during normal gaming, as shown in FIG. 221, it is at the front position of the hand cover portion 195, and the right handle position control means 4000 at its front position. It is locked. Therefore, as with the pachinko machine 1 of FIGS. 190 to 215, the handle 182 can be rotated together with the decorative handle 1820 to adjust the striking force of the ball launcher 540.

  On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 1 changes to, for example, a special gaming state due to the progress of the game, the solenoid 4005 of the right handle position control means 4000 is turned on and the lock arm 4004 changes to a release attitude to lift the roller 4003. , The lock of the right handle unit 180 (R) is released. Then, from the above-mentioned strike instruction means of the pachinko machine 1 toward the player, characters such as "Please push the right handle into the back." Are displayed or voices are emitted, and the entire right handle unit 180 (R) is displayed. An instruction is given to prompt for input by moving the When the player receives this and pushes the entire unit as it is against the bias of the spring 4001 to the rear position without changing the grip of the handle 182 in operation, the operation is detected and the hit force is The striking force changes to a strong level continuously as new striking force is added. As a result, when the player is right-handed, the benefit of the special game is provided more to the player.

  Then, when the special game state is finished, simultaneously with that, the solenoid 4005 of the right handle position control means 4000 is turned off by the control of the main control unit 1300, and the player gives "right handle "Please return to the front." An instruction is given by a letter display or voice. When the player releases the force pressing the right handle unit 180 (R) according to the instruction, the right handle unit 180 (R) returns to the forward position by the bias of the spring 4001. Then, the lock arm 4004 changes to a horizontal lock posture by the urging of a torsion coil spring (not shown), and lays like a rod between the handle base 181 of the right handle unit 180 (R) and the handle attachment member 102 to make a right handle Lock unit 180 (R) in the forward position.

  Thereby, the pachinko machine 1 returns to the normal gaming state, but at this time the grip condition (rotation angle) of the handle 182 of the right handle unit 180 (R) is maintained by the player in the state just before the special game start. Therefore, the normal game is resumed with the batting force immediately before changing to the special game state. By the way, in order to adjust the striking force with the operation of one steering wheel, the conventional handle unit needs to search for the optimal striking force again when returning from the right-handed state to the normal gaming state, and the gaming ball is struck in the meantime There is a risk of waste.

[Left handle unit]
The left handle unit 180 (L) is used as an input means for the player of the player participation type effect as described above. The left handle unit 180 (L) is substantially symmetrical with respect to the right handle unit 180 (R) with respect to the vertical axis passing through the approximate center of the door frame 3, but the corresponding handle position The control means 4000 is unique by the cam mechanism.

[Handle position control means (left)]
The handle position control means (hereinafter also referred to as “left handle position control means”) 4000 of the left handle unit 180 (L) is a cam mechanism as described above, and is provided on the base 181 a of the handle base 181 A rotatable follower roller 4007, a long hole 4008 opened in the cylindrical portion 102a of the handle mounting member 102 for passing the follower roller 4007, and a cylindrical cam rotatably fitted on the outside of the cylindrical portion 102a It is roughly comprised from 4009, the cam part 4010 provided in this cylindrical cam 4009, and the motor (not shown) which transmits rotational force to the gear 4011 provided in the edge part of the cylindrical cam 4009.

The cam portion 4010 has a first cam surface 4012 formed in parallel to the end face (rear end face) on the opposite side of the gear 4011 of the cylindrical cam 4009 and an end face (front end face) on the gear 4011 side. It comprises a second cam surface 4013 formed in parallel with the end face at an offset position, and an inclined third cam surface 4014 connecting the second cam surface 4013 and the first cam surface 4012.
As described above, the left handle unit 180 (L) is slidably supported by the cylindrical portion 102a of the handle attachment member 102 and always urged toward the player by the spring 4001 loaded in the cylindrical portion 102a. However, the position is controlled by the engagement of the follower roller 4007 and the cam portion 4010 provided on the left handle unit 180 (L).

That is, the left handle unit 180 (L) is at the rear position with the follower roller 4007 abutting on the first cam surface 4012 of the cam portion 4010 as shown in FIG. 224, and as shown in FIG. The left handle unit 180 (R) is in the forward position with the roller 4007 abutting on the second cam surface 4013 of the cam portion 4010.
Therefore, when the cylindrical cam 4009 is rotated clockwise in FIG. 216 with the left handle unit 180 (L) in the rear position as shown in FIG. 224, the follower roller 4007 is moved from the first cam surface 4012 to the third. Through the inclination of the cam surface 4014, the second cam surface 4013 is reached, and the left handle unit 180 (L) moves integrally with the follower roller 4007 to the forward position as shown in FIG. In addition, since the cam portion 4010 is a space where the rear is opened, and the rear movement of the follower roller 4007 can be freely performed, it is possible to spring the left handle unit 180 (L) in the front position. When pushed against the bias of 4001, it sinks to the rear position in the hand cover portion 195, and when the force is released, it returns to the forward position by the bias of the spring 4001. Therefore, the left handle unit 180 (L) in the forward position can freely move linearly in the forward and backward direction by the player's force adjustment.
When the cylindrical cam 4009 is rotated counterclockwise in FIG. 216 and returned to the original state with the left handle unit 180 (L) in the forward position, the follower roller 4007 moves from the second cam surface 4013 to the third surface. The cam surface 4014 is returned to the first cam surface 4012, and in this state, the left handle unit 180 (L) returns to the rear position as shown in FIG.

  The left handle unit 180 (L) is configured as described above, and is in the rear position in the hand cover portion 195 as shown in FIG. 224 during normal gaming. The left handle unit 180 (L) in the rear position is hidden from the forward bulging structure configured by the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200, the rendering operation unit 300, and the like, and is less noticeable from the player. In addition, since it is surrounded by the hand cover portion 195 and can be suppressed to the minimum, it is difficult to receive an external impact leading to breakage, and further, the risk of injury due to contact is reduced. By the way, at present, a large lever etc. is used as a player's input means for player participation type effects, but if it always protrudes in a position close to the hand or knee of the player, it receives an impact that leads to breakage. In addition, there is a risk that the player may get in touch and get injured.

Then, at a scene where player participation type effects are executed from the progress of the game and the player's input is required, the cylindrical cam 4009 of the left handle position control means 4000 is first rotated under the control of the main control unit 1300, By the rotation of the cam portion 4010 and the urging of the spring 4001, the left handle unit 180 (L) is linearly moved toward the player along with the follower roller 4007 and stopped at the forward position. In this state, the player looks as if the left handle unit 180 (L) appeared, so the handle 182 of the left handle unit 180 (L) from the side of the pachinko machine 1 at the timing at which the player's attention is drawn. Or the pushing operation of the left handle unit 180 (L) is obtained by display, sound or the like. When the player rotates the handle 182 of the left handle unit 180 (L) or presses the left handle unit 180 (L) in response to this, the operation is detected and the effect shifts to the next scene After that, the presentation proceeds further and ends as appropriate.
In the handle unit 180 according to the embodiment, since the periphery of the griped hand is surrounded by the decorative handle 1820, there is no possibility that the finger may come in contact with the hand cover portion 195 even if the rotation or push operation is performed. There is less risk of injury. Thus, the decorative handle 1820, which can be enclosed around the griped hand and rotated or moved together with the hand, can also be substantially referred to as an "outer ring" that can protect the operating finger.

  Next, when the above effect is finished, the cylindrical cam 4009 of the left handle position control means 4000 is reversely rotated, and the cam portion 4010 in contact with the follower roller 4007 passes from the second cam surface 4013 through the third cam surface 4014 It changes to one cam surface 4012. During that time, the follower roller 4007 is pushed backward along the inclination of the third cam surface 4014, so the left handle unit 180 (L) retreats from the forward position against the bias of the spring 4001, and the follower roller When the point 4007 abuts on the first cam surface 4012, the rear position is reached. The cylindrical cam 4009 of the left handle position control means 4000 stops here, and the left handle unit 180 (L) stands by at the rear position until the next effect is performed.

Note that, as is clear from the above description, the left handle unit 180 (L) can perform operation presentation and input substantially equivalent to the presentation operation unit 301.
Therefore, for example, if the left handle unit 180 (L) and the effect operation unit 301 are moved by the same control and the input from both sensors is received, both the left handle unit 180 (L) and the effect operation unit 301 can be used. .
In that case, for example, a player who thinks that the operation to operate the rendering operation unit 301 is large and embarrassing can operate in the minimum movement that is hard to be realized by putting a hand on the left handle unit 180 (L) in advance. Therefore, since the player participation type effect can be added easily, the interest is increased.
In addition, whether the operation unit used in the player participation type effect is the left handle unit 180 (L) or the effect operation unit 301, for example, by providing a selection switch on a part of the forward bulging structure in advance The player may be able to choose.

  As mentioned above, although the other pachinko machine was demonstrated, of course, a pachinko machine is not limited to the above. For example, a handle unit having the same structure as the right handle unit 180 (R) of the embodiment is installed at the installation location of the left handle unit 180 (L), and it can be used as an input means for the player participation type effect player Well, conversely, install the handle unit of the same structure as the left handle unit 180 (L) of the embodiment in the installation place of the right handle unit 180 (R) and adjust the striking force of the ball launcher 540 It may be used as an input means.

Further, although two handle units 180 are provided in the above, one handle unit 180 may be provided.
Further, although the handle unit 180 is provided with the handle 182 in the above, the game input may be performed only by the linear movement operation of the handle unit 180 without providing the handle 182.

  Further, although a pachinko machine has been exemplified as a game machine in the above, the invention is also applicable to other game machines such as ball ball machines and arrange ball machines, and further, a plurality of drums (roll drum or reel using game medals) It is applicable also to the slot machine which rotates). When applied to a slot machine, one or two handle units 180 may be used as input means for player participation type effects.

[Other Embodiment 2-1]
Next, another embodiment 2-1 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS.
In the pachinko machine 1 of the other embodiment 2-1, the door frame top unit 450 provided on the door frame 3 may be provided, for example, on the upper part of the game board 5 instead of the door frame 3 (details will be described) Since the front top unit 4500 is used because it is described later), the other configuration is the same as that described above, and thus the description thereof is omitted.
Further, the configuration of the front top unit 4500 is a modification of that of the above-described door frame top unit 450 as appropriate, and therefore the configuration of the door frame top unit 450 except for those described below as the front top unit 4500. Is true.

  The pachinko machine 1 of the other embodiment 2-1 is the same as the window portion (in the above-described pachinko machine 1, the door window 101 a blocked by the glass plate 162) covering the gaming area 5 a to play a game in a visible state from the front. A hook-shaped front top unit 4500 corresponding to the above-described door frame top unit 450 (see FIGS. 88 to 90) is provided on the upper side of the window portion 1010a.

The front top unit 4500 has, for example, a top formed by integrally forming a top upper cover 452 and a top lower cover 465 in FIG. 89 with a translucent and preferably opaque synthetic resin (for example, a milky white synthetic resin). A main body cover 4520 is provided, and the central speaker box 461 of the door frame top unit 450 and the door frame top bottom plate 454 are eliminated to form a space 4520 S inside.
Further, the top main body cover 4520 is formed on the upper surface thereof with an upward opening 452a communicating with the space 4520S and largely notched from the rear end toward the front, and the opening 452a is aligned with this It is closed by a front top plate 4680 which is an open / close lid of a shape.

The front top plate 4680 is pivotally attached to the top main body cover 4520 by a rotation shaft 4680c provided on the rear end side, and is free in a closed posture (see broken line in FIG. 231) closing the opening 452a. It is pivotable to an upright posture (see FIG. 228), which flips up the end side to open the opening 452a and stand in a visible state from the outside, and further controls a driving means such as a motor (not shown) and the like. By linking with the peripheral control board 1510, it is possible to appropriately switch between the closed attitude and the standing attitude according to the progress of the game or at a predetermined timing determined separately from the progress of the game.
Further, the front top plate 4680 is appropriately decorated (not shown) on the outer surface 4680a facing outward in the closed position, while the inner surface 4680b facing the space 4520S in the closed position is for light reflection performance. It is processed into an excellent screen shape.

  The front top plate 4680 is divided into two at the center of the front top plate 4680 in the left and right as well as in the case of a single panel structure as shown in FIGS. Alternatively, as shown in FIG. 232, a plurality of elements may be connected by a hinge 4680p to form a foldable structure. By using the latter folded structure, the front top plate 4680 can be expanded in a standing posture, and light decoration can be effectively performed for a higher height and for the player. In addition, if the first stage of the folding structure is gated or made transparent so as not to block the rear view, the data display of the island facility (a game provided on the curtain plate above the pachinko machine 1) It is possible not to disturb the operation of the display device showing the progress of the game (the number of occurrences of the big hit game, etc.).

Furthermore, the front top unit 4500 is provided with a lighting base 8000 at the player-side inner edge of the space 4520S, and a bar-like light emitting means 8002 in which a plurality of light emitting LEDs 8001 are arranged side by side in a row It is freely shaft-mounted.
This light emitting means 8002 is also connected to the peripheral control board 1510 as with the front top plate 4680, so that the light irradiation direction and the light emission pattern can be switched appropriately as the game progresses. Specifically, when the front top plate 4680 is in the standing posture, the light emitting means 8002 is directed upward so that light can be emitted to the inner surface 4680 b facing the player, while the closed posture of the front top plate 4680 To the lower side, that is, the bottom of the top main body cover 4520 so as to be able to irradiate light.
In addition, in the other embodiment 2-1, the bottom of the top main body cover 4520 is formed of a translucent and opaque synthetic resin, so that only the light effect by the light emitting means 8002 can be seen by the player. In addition, since the light emitting means 8002 for irradiating the front top plate 4680 with light can be used to produce the light, extra cost is hardly incurred.
The light emitting means 8002 may be an image projection type in which a character or the like is projected on the inner surface 4680b of the front top plate 4680 other than an illumination type in which colored light is irradiated to the inner surface 4680b of the front top plate 4680.

[Other embodiment 2-2]
In the pachinko machine 1 of the other embodiment 2-2, as shown in FIG. 233, the front end side of the front top plate 4680 is pivotally pivotally attached to the top main body cover 4520, and the light emitting means 8002 is the top main body cover 4520. It is provided at the inner edge of the anti-player side of the space 4520S, and the other configuration is the same as that of the other embodiment 2-1. In this case, since the front top plate 4680 needs to transmit the light of the light emitting means 8002 from the inner surface 4680b side (rear side) to the outer surface 4680a side (front side), it has the same translucency as the top main body cover 4520 Preferably, it is formed of an opaque synthetic resin (for example, a milky white synthetic resin).
According to such a structure, since the front top plate 4680 stands up at a position close to the player, it is possible to make the player feel more powerful and to make the outside stand out.

  Since the pachinko machine 1 of the other embodiment 2-1 and 2-2 is configured as described above, during execution of the reach production or the reach development production, etc., or during the result of the lottery regarding the big hit or the execution of the big hit, Light is emitted from the light emitting means 8002 to the front top plate 4680 with the front top plate 4680 rocked or in the standing posture, or the top main body cover is from the light emitting means 8002 with the front top plate 4680 in the closed posture Light can be applied to the bottom of the 4520 to perform various effects.

When the front top plate 4680 (opening / closing lid) of the front top unit 4500 is opened, the heat is dissipated to the upper outside from the opening 452a, so the heat is less likely to build up in the pachinko machine 1. Therefore, for example, with the light emitting means 8002 turned off, the front top plate 4680 is switched at an appropriate interval to open and close the opening 452a, and hit the effect display device 1600 suddenly when several times standing up to display symbols If the effect pattern to be set is set, the opening / closing operation of the front top plate 4680 may be incorporated into a part of the game to increase the player's interest while radiating heat from the opening 452a without the player being noticed it can.
In addition, the front top top board 4680 of the front top unit 4500 opens and closes the opening 452a by switching the closed attitude and the standing attitude in a demonstration manner regardless of the predetermined timing unrelated to the progress of the game, ie, regardless of the progress of the game You may do it.

  In addition, when the pachinko machine 1 is not performing the effect of raising the front top plate 4680, the opening 452a is closed by the front top plate 4680 in the closed position. The air heated in the pachinko machine 1 rises and the front top unit 4500 even when dust, dirt, cigarette dust and the like do not enter the space 4520S, and even when the front top plate 4680 is in the standing posture. Since an air flow is generated that passes from the opening 452a to the upper outside, dust, dirt, dust and the like do not easily enter the space 4520S.

Although the pachinko machine 1 of the other embodiment 2-1 and 2-2 has been described above, the pachinko machine 1 is of course not limited to the other embodiments 2-1 and 2-2. For example, in other forms 2-1 and 2-2, a flip-up type is adopted in which the front end top plate 4680 (opening / closing lid) can open the opening 452a by flipping the free end side around the rotation shaft 4680c. The front top plate 4680 may have a sliding shutter structure.
Further, the front top top plate 4680 of the other embodiment 2-1, 2-2 may be separately provided in one pachinko machine 1 in the front and back.
The front top plate 4680 does not have to be fully open at all times. For example, the front top plate 4680 may be half open, and it is preferable that the opening and closing for the purpose of heat radiation be a mode in which the player is less likely to notice.
Further, in the other forms 2-1 and 2-2, the light emitting means 8002 is formed to be swingable, but the light emitting means 8002 may be further allowed to move up and down so that light may be emitted from a high place of the pachinko machine 1 .

  Further, in the other forms 2-1 and 2-2, the front top unit 4500 is provided in the door frame 3, but instead of the door frame 3, for example, the upper end portion of the game board 5 of FIG. As a mounting portion of the top unit 4500, the front top unit 4500 is attached to the mounting portion, and the game board 5 provided with the front top unit 4500 is attached to the main frame 4, or the game board 5 is shown in FIG. On the other hand, the attachment portion of the front top unit 4500 may be provided on the top of the main body frame 4 and attached thereto. In this case, the door frame 3 is integrally provided with a transparent bulging portion that can cover other than the upper surface of the front top unit 4500 that protrudes forward above the window portion 1010a.

Moreover, in the other forms 2-1 and 2-2, although the part decorated with the light of the front top plate 4680 was made into planar shape, you may make it the solid shape which imitated the character etc., for example. In that case, the light emitting means 8002 can be a video projection type, and the decoration can be more realistically applied to a three-dimensional shape by a projection mapping method. By doing this, the visual difference between the front top plate 4680 in the closed position and the upright position increases, so it is easy to attract the attention of the surroundings when it changes to the upright position. The crime prevention effect against 452a also increases.
Further, in the other forms 2-1 and 2-2, the front top plate 4680 and the light emitting means 8002 are separately formed at the front and rear, but the light emitting means 8002 is incorporated inside the front top plate 4680. May be
In addition, it is possible to irradiate light to the curtain plate of the island facility using the light emitting means 8002 of the other embodiment 2-1, and to perform decoration and effects of the light in a state of jumping out from the pachinko machine 1 in this way.
Moreover, although the pachinko machine was illustrated as a game machine in other forms 2-1 and 2-2, it is applicable also to other game machines, such as a ball game and an arrange ball machine, and also using a game medal. The present invention is also applicable to a slot machine that rotates a plurality of drums (twirlers or reels). In this case, a portion provided with a drum or the like seen from a window covering in a visible state from the front of the gaming machine corresponds to a gaming area for playing a game.

[Embodiment]
Next, the pachinko machine 1 according to the embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. In addition, since the pachinko machine 1 of embodiment is a thing which changed the said pachinko machine 1, the description is abbreviate | omitted except a change point. Therefore, in FIGS. 234 to 265 and the other drawings, components having the same reference numerals are, in principle, components having the same or the same function.

[Game board]
In the gaming board 5 of the embodiment, as shown in the exploded perspective view of FIG. 237, the gaming panel 1100 having the gaming area 5a in which the gaming ball is hit by the player operating the handle 182 of the handle unit 180; It consists of a back box 3010 attached to the back side of the game panel 1100, and a substrate holder 1200 attached to the back lower side of the game panel 1100 so as to surround the lower part of the back box 3010.

[Game panel]
As shown in the exploded perspective view of FIG. 237, the gaming panel 1100 has a base panel 1110 having a predetermined thickness, a front component 1000 that encloses the gaming area 5a, and a group of gaming elements that constitute the gaming entity (details will be described) Will be described later).

[Base panel]
The base panel 1110 according to the embodiment is formed of an opaque plywood and has large and small through holes 1112 corresponding to the gaming element group.
The base panel 1110 may be a transparent synthetic resin plate or an opaque synthetic resin plate, as well as an opaque plywood plate.

[Back box, substrate holder]
As shown in FIG. 237, the back box 3010 is in the form of a box whose front is open, and is attached to cover the rear side of the upper game zone 4823, the lower game zone 4825, and the right game zone 4824 described later. Also, the substrate holder 1200 is attached to cover the lower outside of the back box 3010.
In addition, on the front left side of the base to be the bottom plate of the back box 3010, the general winning opening 4801 in the upper layer gaming zone 4823 and the out guiding portion 1003 in the lower layer gaming zone 4825 (on the left side Back ball member 1110ta for the left game ball bent in multiple directions in the back and forth and left and right direction that can be guided backward toward the downstream side and ejected from the pachinko machine 1 the game ball entered into the out guiding part 1003) etc. It is attached so as not to interfere with the cover 4886. A predetermined height (in the present embodiment, a predetermined height) at a position corresponding to a plurality of retaining holes (not shown) formed on the back bowl member 1110ta for the left game ball on the front left side of the base to be the bottom plate of the back box 3010. , 6 mm) are formed projecting respectively. The back bowl member 1110ta for the left side game ball is brought close to the front left side of the base serving as the bottom plate of the back box 3010 and covered to form the bottom plate of the back box 3010 from a plurality of locking holes formed in the back bowl member 1110ta for the left side game ball Insert screws (not shown) toward the mounting boss holes formed in the front of the base and screw them respectively.
In addition, the electric start winning opening 4871, the first large winning opening 4807, the general winning opening 4801, the V winning opening 4810, and the second large winning in the right hitting game zone 4824 on the front right side of the base which is the bottom plate of the back box 3010. Guide the game ball entered into the out 481 and the out guiding part 1003 shared with the lower layer game zone 4825 (the out guiding part 1003 on the right when viewing the game board 5 in FIG. 234 from the front) backward toward the downstream side A back rod member 1110 tb for the right game ball bent in a plurality of front, rear, left and right directions which can be discharged from the pachinko machine 1 is attached so as not to interfere with the effect back cover 4886. On the front right side of the base to be the bottom plate of the back box 3010, a predetermined number is directed forward to a position corresponding to the plurality of stop holes 1110tba1 to 1110tba5 (five stop holes) formed in the back ball member 1110tb for the right game ball. Mounting boss holes 3010ab1 to 3010ab5 (five mounting boss holes) having a height (in the present embodiment, 6 mm) are respectively formed to protrude. The back hole member 1110 tb for the right side game ball is brought close to the front right side of the base serving as the bottom plate of the back box 3010 and covered with a plurality of back hole members 1110 tb for the right game ball Screws (not shown) are inserted toward the mounting boss holes 3010 ab 1 to 3010 ab 5 formed in the front of the base serving as the bottom plate and screwed respectively.
An upper vibration detection switch 3005 is attached near the upper portion of the left side wall of the back box 3010, and a lower vibration detection switch 3006a is attached near the lower portion of the left side wall of the back box 3010. The upper vibration detection switch 3005 and the lower vibration detection switch 3006 a shake or strike the pachinko machine 1 to vibrate the pachinko machine 1 and flow down the gaming area 5 a defined in the game board 5. It is possible to detect an illegal act of changing the course and entering various winning openings and gates provided on the game board 5, and in particular, the distributing disc provided in the ball swirl type distributing device 4843 in the lower layer game zone 4825. It is possible to detect cheating that applies vibration to the pachinko machine 1 by shaking or striking the pachinko machine 1 so that the gaming ball can enter the ball to the specific receiving port 4855v of 4853. .
Further, a lower vibration detection switch 3006 b is attached to the front of a base which is near the lower part of the right side wall of the back box 3010 and which is a bottom plate of the back box 3010. In a state where the lower vibration detection switch 3006 b is mounted near the lower part of the right side wall of the back box 3010 and attached to the front of the base that is the bottom plate of the back box 3010, the upper and left sides of the lower vibration detection switch 3006 b are in the front, rear, left and right direction A plurality of bent right side game balls are disposed in the vicinity of the back bowl member 1110 tb for the right game ball, but are arranged so as not to interfere with each other. The lower vibration detection switch 3006b, like the upper vibration detection switch 3005 and the lower vibration detection switch 3006a, vibrates or strikes the pachinko machine 1 to partition the pachinko machine 1 and form a section on the game board 5 It is possible to change the course of the game balls flowing down the game area 5a and detect fraudulent actions to be made to enter the various winning openings and gates provided on the game board 5, and in particular, rotation in the right hitting game zone 4824 The pachinko machine 1 vibrates by shaking or striking the pachinko machine 1 so that the game ball can be placed toward the ball receiving recess 4809 formed on the ball receiving member 4808 and entered into the V prize hole 4810 It is something that can detect cheating.
A main control unit having a main control board 1310X (see the block diagram of FIG. 253) for performing various types of game control based on the detection state of the game balls in the game area 5a is attached to the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200. A peripheral control unit having a peripheral control board 1510 for controlling various effects based on control signals from the main control board 1310X is mounted on the rear surface of the back box 3010.
In the top plate portion of the back box 3010, an interference avoidance portion 3010aa penetrating in the box is provided at a position intersecting the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 553, whereby the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 553 There is an effect that it is possible to set the top height of the back box 3010 high by avoiding the interference of the rear box 3010, that is, it is easy to cope with a large rendering device or the like.

[Game elements]
As shown in the front view of FIG. 234 and the block diagram of FIG. 253, the game elements of the embodiment are as follows:
A function display unit 1400 which displays a game situation based on a control signal from the main control board 1310X and is visibly attached to the player in the upper left corner of the front component 1000;
A plurality of obstacle nails 2007 which are implanted in the base panel 1110 and randomly change the falling direction of the game balls;
The windmill 2008 which rotates by the contact of the game ball,
General winning opening 4801 (a control configuration is shown in the block diagram of FIG. 253 <general winning opening sensor 4872>. Below <<>). For the inside, refer to the block diagram in FIG.
The ball can be switched between entering and non-entering balls by a motorized first shutter plate 4802 (starting port solenoid 4873) that slides in the front-rear direction (a game ball falling in the advancing state, entering the ball, falling in the receding state) And let it pass as it is and enter the non-entering ball) electric start hole 4871 <electric start hole sensor 4874>,
A plurality of starting gates 4803 <gate sensor 4875> for starting a lottery on opening and closing of the first shutter plate 4802 of the electric start opening 4871;
An effect-use normal symbol display device 4804 for displaying, for effect, a lottery result of a lottery per common drawing by the start gate 4803,
A normal symbol hold display 4805 for effect that displays the number of holdings corresponding to the normal hold indicator described later for effect,
Similar to the first shutter plate 4802, the motorized second shutter plate 4806 <first large winning opening solenoid 4876> can switch the entering / non-entering ball (open the winning opening in the reverse state to enter the ball, advance state The winning opening is closed and the non-entering) first large winning opening 4807 <first large winning opening sensor 4807a>,
A rotating ball receiving member 4808 VV rotating solenoid 4877〉 provided in the first big winning opening 4807,
V winning opening 4810 <V winning opening sensor 4878> where only game balls placed on the ball receiving recess 4809 of the rotation ball receiving member 4808 can enter;
General winning opening 4801 <general winning opening sensor 4872>, in which gaming balls placed on a tapered circumferential surface inclined downward to the back of the rotation ball receiving member 4808 enter;
The second large winning opening 4812 <second large winning opening sensor 4812a> which can open and close the opening and closing plate 4811 <second large winning opening solenoid 4879> in the opening state to open many game balls in the open state. When,
A fixed start winning opening 4813 <fixed start opening sensor 4880> provided on a vertical center line of the game area 5a for starting a lottery for opening and closing the first big winning opening 4807;
A first display device 4815 formed of a group of display lamps 4814 for effect-displaying various lottery games accompanying entering the fixed start winning opening 4813 or the electric start winning opening 4871;
A group (three in the embodiment) of symbol display members 4816 showing the first step when displaying the results of various lottery games in step-by-step manner with entry to fixed start winning opening 4813 or electric start opening 4871 A second display 4817 formed;
The second (final) when the results of various lottery games provided at the top of the vertical center line of the game area 5a and entering the fixed start winning opening 4813 or the electric start winning opening 4871 are displayed stepwise A third display 4818 indicating the stage);
The fourth symbol display lamp 4819 which complementarily displays the results of various lottery games accompanying entering the fixed start winning opening 4813 or the electric start winning opening 4871;
A special symbol hold display 482 for effect that displays the number of holding balls on a first special hold number indicator or a second special hold number indicator, which will be described later.
Decorative light emitting members 4821 provided appropriately;
An announcement unit 4822 displaying a message image such as "right-handed";
A plurality of out guiding parts 1003 <out ball sensor 4881> for finally collecting the gaming balls on the back of the machine;
A timer segment 4882 for performance by a segment display capable of displaying 5-digit numbers,
By swinging or hitting the pachinko machine 1, vibration is applied to the pachinko machine 1 to change the course of the game balls flowing down the game area 5a defined in the game board 5, and various prizes provided in the game board 5 An upper vibration detection switch 3005 and a lower vibration detection switch 3006a, 3006b for detecting an illegal act to cause the mouth or gate to enter the ball;
It is roughly composed of The details of the necessary game elements will be described later.

  Here, the main control board 1310 X and the peripheral control board 1510 will be briefly described. The fixed start port sensor 4880 and the electric start port sensor 4874 are directly input to the main control board 1310X. Detection signals from fixed start port sensor 4880 and electric start port sensor 4874 input to main control board 1310 X are input to input terminals of predetermined input ports of main control MPU 1310 a through main control input circuit 1310 b. There is. On the other hand, gate sensor 4875, general winning opening sensor 4872, V winning opening sensor 4878, dive sensor 4831, first ball sensor 4870a, second ball sensor 4870b, magnetic sensor 3003, upper vibration detection switch 3005, lower vibration Various sensors such as detection switches 3006 a and 3006 b, out ball sensor 4881, first large winning opening sensor 4807 a, and second large winning opening sensor 4812 a are indirectly input to the main control board 1310 X through the panel relay board 1710. It is done. Detection signals from various sensors input to the main control board 1310X are input to input terminals of predetermined input ports of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b. The sensor directly or indirectly input to the main control substrate 1310X described above can be configured as the double sensor described above as appropriate. The game balls guided backward by the plurality of out guiding parts 1003 (in the present embodiment, three out guiding parts 1003) are discharged to the back of the game panel 1100 through the corresponding out ports 1008, respectively. The game balls collected by these out ports 1008 are detected by an out ball sensor 4881. The out ball sensor 4881 is composed of the above-described out-port left sensor 1008 a and out-port right sensor 1008 b, and is detected by any one of the out-port left sensor 1008 a and out-port right sensor 1008 b. The signal is input to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310 a through the relay substrate 1710. In this embodiment, an out-port left sensor 1008 a and an out-port right sensor 1008 b constituting an out-ball sensor 4881 are associated with one out guiding portion 1003, so three out of three out guiding portions 1003. One out-of-sphere sensor 4881 is associated, and is configured by three out-port left sensors 1008 a and three out-port right sensors 1008 b.

  In the present embodiment, the gaming balls guided to the rear by the plurality of out guiding parts 1003 pass through the corresponding out ports 1008 and are configured by the out port left sensor 1008 a and the out port right sensor 1008 b. Although each is detected by 4881, the out-of-ball sensor 4881 may be configured as an out-port sensor as one sensor.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the gaming balls guided to the rear by the plurality of out guiding parts 1003 pass through the corresponding out ports 1008 and are constituted by the out port left sensor 1008 a and the out port right sensor 1008 b. The game balls, which are respectively detected by the 4881 but guided backward by the plurality of out guiding parts 1003, may be integrated and detected by the out ball sensor 4881 through one out ball port 1008. . In this case, the out-of-sphere sensor 4881 may be configured as an out-port sensor as one sensor, or may be configured as an out-port left sensor and an out-port right sensor as two sensors.

  Each detection signal from the sensor directly or indirectly input to the main control board 1310 X described above is input from the main control MPU 1310 a to the switch processing of step S 104 in the main control timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 177. The various signals input to the input terminal of the port are read and stored as the above-described input information in the input information storage area of the main control built-in RAM.

  Based on these detection signals, the main control MPU 1310 a outputs a drive signal from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control output circuit with reset function, thereby driving the main control solenoid from the main control output circuit with reset function By outputting a control signal to the circuit 1310d, the main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d sends various types of solenoids such as the start opening solenoid 4873, the V rotation solenoid 4877, the first large winning opening solenoid 4876, and the second large winning opening solenoid 4879. Is output via the panel relay board 1710, that is, indirectly, or by outputting a drive signal from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control output circuit with a reset function. Normal control display 480 for effect from main control output circuit Drive signals to various display devices such as normal symbol hold display device 4805 for effect, special symbol hold display device 4820 for effect, etc. and the fourth symbol display lamp 4819 without passing through other substrates, that is, directly Output. Further, the main control MPU 1310 a outputs a drive signal to the main control output circuit with a reset function from the output terminal of the predetermined output port, thereby enabling the various control stepping motor voltage switching circuits described later from the main control output circuit with a reset function. By outputting control signals to various sort stepping motor drive ICs, drive signals to various stepping motors such as the first sort motor 4908, the second sort motor 4909, and the drive motor 4860 via the panel relay board 1710. Output indirectly.

  The drive signals output from the main control board 1310X described above are output in the port output process of step S118 in the main control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 177, and the output information storage area mentioned above by the main control MPU 1310a The output information is read out of the main control MPU 1310a, and various signals are output from the output terminals of the various output ports of the main control MPU 1310a based on the output information.

  The peripheral control unit 1500 can be configured by attaching an air cooling fan FAN. As described above, the peripheral control board 1510 includes the peripheral control IIC 1510 a and the like. Detection signals from various detection sensors and the like provided on the game board 5 are input to various parallel I / O ports of the peripheral control IC 1510 a through the panel drive board 1720 and the peripheral control input circuit.

  The detection signals from the various detection sensors and the like input to the peripheral control board 1510 described above are received by the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a in the movable body information acquisition process of step S1106 in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process shown in FIG. Detection signals from various sensors etc. by reading various signals inputted to input terminals of various parallel I / O ports of peripheral control IC 1510a and judging whether detection signals etc. from various sensors are inputted or not The history information (for example, original position history information, movable position history information, etc.) is created and set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a.

  Also, the CPU of the peripheral control board 1510 reads various data for outputting drive signals to various display devices such as the first display device 4815, the second display device 4817, and the third display device 4818 from the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2. The various commands are transmitted from various serial I / O ports to various substrates provided in various display devices such as the first display device 4815, the second display device 4817, and the third display device 4818 via the panel drive substrate 1720. In addition, the CPU of the peripheral control board 1510 emits game board side light for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal or a gradation lighting signal to a full color LED or a single color LED provided on various decoration boards of the game board 5 Data are read from the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 and transmitted as commands from various serial I / O ports to various decoration boards of the game board 5 through the panel drive board 1720. The CPU of the peripheral control board 1510 reads game board side drive data for outputting drive signals to various drive motors provided on the game board 5 from the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 and drives the panel from various serial I / O ports as a command. Transmit to the substrate 1720.

  Among the drive signals output from the peripheral control substrate 1510 described above, for the various display devices and the various decorative substrates of the game board 5, the display of step S1016 in the processing at power on of the peripheral control unit shown in FIG. The output is executed in the data output process, and the CPU of the peripheral control board 1510 points the pointer among the light emission data arranged in time series constituting the light emission mode generation schedule data set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510 a According to the light emission data, it is outputted to various decoration substrates provided on the door frame 3 and various decoration substrates (including the panel drive substrate 1720) provided on the game board 5. Among the drive signals output from the peripheral control board 1510 described above, the motor and solenoid drive processing of step S1104 in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. The output of the CPU is executed on the peripheral control board 1510, and the CPU of the peripheral control board 1510 drives the drive data of the electrical drive source such as the motor or the solenoid arranged in time series which configures the electrical drive source schedule data set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a. Drive the electric drive source such as a motor or solenoid according to the drive data indicated by the pointer, update the pointer to the next drive data defined in time series, and execute this motor and solenoid drive processing Update the pointer every time.

  Even when the liquid crystal display device is not provided on the game board 5, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a instructs the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a to serve as a dummy, and draws drawing data for drawing an image on the liquid crystal display device. The peripheral shown in FIG. 185 is configured to output a V blank signal to the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510 a when it is generated on the VRAM of the peripheral control IC 1510 a and is ready to receive screen data defining the configuration of the screen. The peripheral control unit steady processing in the control unit power on processing may be executed. Further, when the liquid crystal display device is not provided on the game board 5, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a does not use the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a, and counts the number of times of peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. When the predetermined value (peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is performed 32 times), peripheral control unit steady processing in the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in FIG. 185 may be executed. This determination is performed instead of the determination in step S1006 in the peripheral control unit power-on process shown in FIG. In this case, of the display data output process in step S1016 in the peripheral control unit power-on process shown in FIG. 185, the process related to VDP, the display data creation process in step S1030, and the peripheral control unit V blank interrupt process shown in FIG. Etc. are not executed.

Here, an example of the game content by the above-mentioned game element group will be described.
The function display unit 1400 provided at the upper left of the game board 5 includes, for example, a first special symbol display consisting of eight LEDs and a second special symbol display consisting of another eight LEDs. In the first special symbol indicator and the second special symbol indicator, a lottery game (special symbol variation game) is performed in which the respective special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) are varied and displayed. The first and second special symbols are symbols for drawing out a lottery result indicating the results of the determination (big lottery) of big hit, small hit, and out. And in this embodiment, the said lottery game is the 1st special symbol indicator or the 2nd special symbol indicator. The symbol variation which changes and displays each special symbol (1st special symbol, 2nd special symbol) From the start to the stop is executed as one lottery game. Hereinafter, the lottery game relating to the first special symbol performed in the first special symbol indicator may be referred to as the “first lottery game”, and the lottery game relating to the second special symbol performed in the second special symbol indicator It may be indicated as "second lottery game".

  In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the lottery game is started, which of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is used to perform the winning lottery using any special symbol? Is to be selected. Specifically, based on the game ball entering the fixed start winning opening 4813, the lottery game (first lottery game) relating to the first special symbol to be played in the first special symbol indicator is selected, and the electric motor is selected. Based on the game ball entering the start winning opening 4871, a lottery game (second lottery game) relating to a second special symbol performed by the second special symbol indicator is selected. And, when the winning lottery using the special symbol of the selected side is performed, the symbol which blinks 8 LEDs with the symbol indicator corresponding to the special symbol of the selected side based on the result of the corresponding lottery Control to start fluctuation is performed (main control board 1310X). In the symbol variation started in this way, the big hit symbol (big hit display result) which is the stop mode of the special symbol that can recognize the big hit after maintaining the fluctuating state for only the variation time selected based on the result of the lottery A small hit symbol (small hit display result) which is a stop mode of a special symbol that can recognize a hit, or a slip off pattern (a loose display result) that is a stop mode of a special symbol that can be recognized off By turning on the eight LEDs in the symbol display in a predetermined combination manner (the symbol variation is stopped), the player is either winning the jackpot, winning the small hit, or losing (disengagement) It will be possible to recognize. When the jackpot symbol comes to a stop, the main control board 1310X executes a jackpot game in which a game ball (prize ball) as a prize can be obtained by the player. The big hit game is a game which is continued until the opening and closing plate 4811 of the second big winning opening 4812 is opened and closed 15 times, and many prize balls can be given to the player. Further, when the small hit symbol is stopped in the form, a small hit game in which a player can obtain a winning ball is executed by the main control board 1310X. The small hit game is a game in which the big hit game can be executed by the establishment of the predetermined condition, and the small hit game alone can not obtain prize balls as big as the big hit game.

  Here, the small hit game will be described. In the present embodiment, a plurality of small hit symbols are provided, and a plurality of small hit game execution modes to be subsequently executed according to the type of small hit symbols determined by the symbol lottery performed at the same time as the lottery. It is supposed to be set to any of the modes. Specifically, the small hit game is a game in which the second shutter plate 4806 of the first large winning opening 4807 is operated to make it possible to enter the gaming ball into the first large winning opening 4807, which is executed this time It is set so that the execution mode such as opening / closing pattern of the ball entry opening by the second shutter plate 4806 and the opening time when opening is different depending on which of the small hitting symbols caused by the small hitting game is a plurality of small hitting symbols The possibility of entering the game ball into the first big winning opening 4807 differs depending on this execution mode. That is, the execution mode of the small hit game in which the second shutter plate 4806 is retracted for a relatively long time (for example, 1.5) is the second shutter plate 4806 for a relatively short time (for example, 0.5 seconds). It becomes easier to enter the game ball into the first large winning opening 4807 than the execution mode of the small hit game which backs the.

  Next, in the small hit game, all the game balls entering the first big winning opening 4807 reach the rotating ball receiving member 4808 inside the first large winning opening 4807, and the gaming balls are rotating ball receiving member 4808 When the ball is received by the ball receiving recess 4809, the game ball which is guided to the V prize opening 4810 by the rotation operation of the rotating ball receiving member 4808 and is not received by the ball receiving recess 4809 is of the rotating ball receiving member 4808. Roll down the tapered circumferential surface that inclines backward and enter general winning hole 4801. Then, when the game ball guided to the V winning opening 4810 side by the rotation operation of the rotary ball receiving member 4808 enters the V winning opening 4810 as described above, the opening / closing plate 4811 of the second big winning opening 4812 is used as the benefit. A big hit game to be opened and closed until the maximum number of times of opening and closing is reached is executed.

  Although the first to third display devices 4815, 4817, 4818 will be described later in detail, they are configured with display areas larger than any of the first special symbol display and the second special symbol display, and the big hit, small The game is mainly displayed so that the game is displayed by displaying the result of the hit lottery, ie, the hit and the loose, in a state in which the player is more easily recognized than the special symbol described above. Thus, the player can more easily recognize whether the player has won the jackpot, has won the small hit, or has been dropped (checked) by checking the first to third display devices 4815, 4817, 4818. Will be able to

  Although not shown, the function display unit 1400 has a first special hold number indicator consisting of two LEDs for displaying the number of holdings pertaining to the reception of the game ball to the fixed start winning opening 4813, and the electric start winning combination A second special hold number indicator consisting of two LEDs for displaying the number of reservations pertaining to the acceptance of the game ball to the mouth 4871, and a lottery result per common drawing determined by passage of the game ball to the start gate 4803 A normal symbol display consisting of two LEDs and a normal hold display consisting of two LEDs for displaying the number of holdings related to the passage of the game ball to the start gate 4803 are provided.

  Here, the first special hold number indicator informs the player of the number of hits for the first special symbol held in the unexecuted state (hereinafter also referred to as the first hold memory number). It is a thing. The first reserved memory number is incremented by “1” when the first lottery game is started while “1” is added by the game ball winning in the fixed start winning opening 4813, and is decremented by “1”. Therefore, when the game ball is accepted in fixed start winning opening 4813 within the period during which the first lottery game is being played, the first reserved storage number is further added and the predetermined upper limit number (first upper limit number, In the embodiment, "4" is accumulated.

  In addition, the second special hold number indicator informs the player of the number of hits for the second special symbol held in the unexecuted state (hereinafter also referred to as second hold memory number). It is. The second reserved memory number is incremented by “1” as the second lottery game is started, while “1” is added as the game ball wins at the electrically-driven start winning opening 4871. Therefore, when the game ball is accepted in electrically-driven start winning opening 4871 within the period when the second lottery game is being performed, the second reserved memory number is further added, and the predetermined upper limit number (second upper limit number, In the embodiment, up to "2") is accumulated.

  In addition, in the normal symbol display, when it is determined whether a normal hit or not (lottery per common drawing), a variation in the common symbol is made to change a plurality of types of normal symbols based on the result of the common drawing per lottery. It will be. This normal symbol variation is a stop pattern of a normal symbol that can recognize a normal hit after maintaining the fluctuating state for a selected variation time based on the result of the lottery per common figure (normal hit display result) If the player is stopped in the form that one of the normal deviation pattern (disappointing display result), which is the normal pattern stopping mode that can normally recognize the deviation, appears, the player loses the election whether it is a normal hit (normally It becomes possible to recognize if it has been lost. In addition, when it stops in the form which a normal hit pattern appears, the 1st shutter board 4802 of the electric-powered start winning opening 4871 will advance, and it will be in a state in which ball entering is possible.

  In addition, the normal hold indicator informs the player of the stored number of lottery drawing per common drawing (hereinafter, also referred to as the common drawing reserved memory number) held in the unexecuted state. While the common drawing reserve memory number is added by “1” when the game ball is received by the starting gate 4803 disposed on the game board 5, “1” is subtracted by normal symbol fluctuation being started. Therefore, when the game ball is received by the starting gate 4803 within the period when the normal symbol variation is being performed, the general drawing reserve memory number is further added and the predetermined upper limit number (general drawing upper limit number, in this embodiment) Accumulated up to "4").

  Further, in the present embodiment, the first lottery game and the second lottery game are configured not to be simultaneously executed, and the symbol variation (the first lottery game or the second lottery game) using the special symbol is ended. When both the first pending storage number and the second pending storage number are “1” or more, the second lottery game based on the second pending storage number is preferentially executed. Further, in the present embodiment, it is possible to simultaneously execute symbol variation using the special symbol (first lottery game or second lottery game) and normal symbol variation.

  As mentioned above, although an example of the game contents by the game element group of an embodiment was explained, of course, various variations, such as a big hit, a middle hit, and a small hit, may be added.

[Details of game area and game elements]
The game area 5a of the embodiment arranges the above-described game elements in three game zones so that the interest of the game can be maximized.
That is, the game area 5a is the upper layer game zone 4823 corresponding to the first game area 5a1 of FIG. 131, the right-handed game zone 4824 corresponding to the second game area 5a2 of FIG. 131, and the third game of FIG. It is divided into a lower layer game zone 4825 corresponding to the area 5a3.

[Upper game zone]
The upper game zone 4823 is provided with the above-mentioned obstacle nail 2007 of the game element group, a windmill 2008, a general winning opening 4801, a second display device 4817, and a third display device 4818.
At the lower edge of the upper layer gaming zone 4823, a shelf plate-like boundary rail 4826 is provided between the lower layer gaming zone 4825 to prevent the game balls from falling into the lower layer gaming zone 4825. A dive portion 4827 provided in the middle of 4826 (on the vertical center line of the game area 5a) communicates with the lower layer game zone 4825 in a size corresponding to one game ball. The details of the dive portion 4827 will be described in the section of the lower layer game zone 4825.
Further, the boundary rail 4826 is provided with a slope having a slope which falls in the left-right direction with the jumping portion 4827 at the top, and is provided with out guiding portions 1003 at both ends which have been lowered.

  In the lower corner of the inner rail 1002 side (the left side in FIG. 234, FIG. 235) of the upper game zone 4823, the out guiding portion 1003 of the lower game zone 4825 passes between the inner rail 1002 and the lower game zone 4825. The upper end of the out-bypass 4828 leading to the opening is open, and the game ball overflows out-bypass 4828 even if game balls exceeding the discharge capability temporarily concentrate on the out-induction portion 1003 on the inner rail 1002 side of the boundary rail 4826. Through the lower layer game zone 4825 to the out guiding part 1003. The so-called out ball, which has no possibility of entering the ball, can cause the player to have a negative emotion, and the game can be made comfortable by quickly recovering it and shortening the time for which the player sees. You can

[Second display device]
The second display device 4817 is formed of three circular symbol display members 4816 arranged in a row on the rear side of the boundary rail 4826, and as described above, the lottery for entering the fixed start winning hole 4813 This figure shows the first step in displaying the result in stages, and when going to the display by the third display device 4818, all of the three symbol display members 4816 have "GO" symbols, In the case of ending in the first stage, a symbol “x” is displayed on at least one of the three symbol display members 4816.

  The second display device 4817 is attached to the front surface of the base panel 1110 with the front surface of the symbol display member 4816 covering a part of the through hole 1112 and is a transparent cover plate 4883 integral with the boundary rail 4826. Even if the game ball passes frequently through the front of the symbol display member 4816, the display surface is not damaged. In the embodiment, although not shown, a suitable pattern is formed on the front surface of the cover plate 4883 by printing, sealing or the like, and a pattern related to the pattern on the front surface of the cover plate 4883 behind the cover plate 4883 Are erected at appropriate intervals (preferably within the range of the thickness of the through holes 1112 of the base panel 1110). By doing so, it is possible to give a three-dimensional effect to the game area 5a, such as drawing a pattern of a plant on the front and back decoration plates of the cover plate 4883 to give a visual depth to the background.

[Third display device]
The third display device 4818 is provided at the upper part on the vertical center line of the game area 5a, and displays the result of the lottery accompanying the ball entering the fixed start winning opening 4813 in a stepwise manner as described above. It shows the second (final) stage.
The third display device 4818 is roughly configured of a 7-segment display member 4884 corresponding to a single digit number and a display frame 4885 serving as a mounting base of the display member 4884, and the whole is a penetration of the base panel 1110. It is attached to the effect back cover 4886 covering the rear surface of the hole 1112 so as to be vertically movable, and can be viewed from the front side (the player side) through a frame-shaped center member 2500 which borders the front side of the through hole 1112.

[Display member]
The display member 4884 of the third display device 4818 is, as shown in FIG. 240, a cylindrical segment partition frame 4884a penetrating the front and back direction in which the contours of the individual segments of the 7-segment display A plurality of light emitting elements 4884c are disposed in each frame of the segment partition frame 4884a (including the upper and lower two frames surrounded by 7 segments) while being disposed on the front, and further, the front opening of the segment partition frame 4884a A lens 4884 d is attached to the part. As a result, effective rendering can be performed using the entire portion surrounded by seven segments as well as single digit numbers. The display member 4884 may be an image display such as liquid crystal or organic EL.

Display frame
The display frame 4885 of the third display device 4818 has a substantially hemispherical frame main body 4887 that bulges forward, and an arm that protrudes from both right and left sides of the substantially center of the frame main body 4887 and holds a fist downward. The first movable part (hereinafter, also referred to as an arm-shaped movable part) 4888 having a shape that protrudes in a direction (angle) of about 7:25 on both right and left sides below the frame main body 4887 Display cover part 4890 of colored transparent sunglasses attached to the display frame 4885 so as to cover a part of the display of the second movable part (hereinafter referred to as a foot movable part) 4889 having a foot shape and the display member 4884 The character is in the shape of a spherical bomb-like character that is composed of and is anthropomorphic.

[First movable part (arm-shaped movable part)]
The arm-shaped movable portion 4888 is formed by connecting left and right arm members 4888a which are resin molded products by an arm shaft 4888c having a driven gear 4888b fixed at the center, and the arm shaft 4888c is attached to the inside of the display frame 4885 By rotatably pivoting on the arm support plate 4891, the arm member 4888a can be rotated in both the age and return directions.

[2nd movable part (foot type movable part)]
The foot-shaped movable portion 4889 is a resin molded product as a whole, and left and right foot members 4889a are pivotally mounted so as to be able to roll through an ankle joint shaft 4892 projectingly provided in a display frame 4885 in each joint shaft hole 4889b. Further, by engaging the fan-shaped gears 4889c provided at the end portions of each other, the left and right foot members 4889a swing symmetrically with respect to the longitudinal center line.

[Arm-shaped movable part + Foot-shaped movable part]
The arm-shaped movable portion 4888 and the foot-shaped movable portion 4889 are connected such that their respective motions proceed simultaneously via an elevation slider 4893 supported in a rolling manner within the display frame 4885 so as to be vertically ascendable.
That is, in the arm-shaped movable portion 4888, the driven gear 4888b of the arm shaft 4888c meshes with the rack gear 4894 formed on the elevating slider 4893, while the leg-shaped movable portion 4889 is provided on the upper end of the right foot member 4889a A connecting pin 4895 projecting from the lifting slider 4893 is loosely fitted in the long hole 4889d.
Then, with the arm-shaped movable portion 4888 holding the fist downward and the foot-shaped movable portion 4889 opened in the direction of about 7:25, the lift slider 4893 is at the highest position, and the lift slider 4893 is The raised position is maintained by the self-weight (balance) of the arm-shaped movable portion 4888 and the foot-shaped movable portion 4889. Therefore, when an external force against the weight is applied and the lifting slider 4893 is forcibly pushed straight down, the arm-shaped movable portion 4888 is rotated by the engagement of the driven gear 4888 b and the rack gear 4894 to change the arm 4888 a in the direction of age At the same time, one foot member 4889a having a long hole 4889d is pivoted about the joint shaft hole 4889b by the downward movement of the link-shaped movable portion 4889 of the elevating slider 4893 and meshed with the sector gear 4889c. The other foot member 4889a pivots about the joint shaft hole 4889b, and as a whole, as shown in FIG. 244, the spherical bomb type character raises its fist and bounces both legs in the direction of about 8:20. Change to After that, when the external force applied to the lift slider 4893 is removed, all move in the opposite direction due to the weight of the arm-shaped movable portion 4888 and the foot-shaped movable portion 4889 and return to the original position (posture) of FIG.

[Display cover]
The display cover portion 4890 in a sunglasses shape is fixedly attached to the frame main body 4887 so as to cover a part of the display of the display member 4884 as described above. The color of the display cover portion 4890 is very light, and therefore there is no possibility of interfering with the display of the display member 4884. Note that part of the display on the display member 4884 is made indistinct by making the color of the display cover 4890 darker or opaque, etc., and after the display change stops, the display cover 4890 faces upward, for example, sunglasses. The display of the display member 4884 may be made to completely appear by rotating it or switching it to electrically transparent. By doing so, a part of the display member 4884 is concealed, and for example, the player's expectation is heightened so that it is not first understood whether the display is "0" or "8", and the display of the display member 4884 is performed. The pleasure of the game can be further enhanced by expanding the drop of the result display as the joy is expelled at the moment when the entire game is seen.

[Back cover for production]
The effect back cover 4886 covers the rear surface of the through hole 1112 of the base panel 1110, and as shown in the exploded perspective views of FIGS. 245 and 246, the back cover main body 4896 located forward and its back cover And a lifting device 4897 attached to the rear surface of the main body 4896.

[Back cover body]
The back cover main body 4896 is in the form of an open front box surrounding the rear surface of the through hole 1112 corresponding to the center member 2500, and forms an effect space 4898 communicated with the opening of the center member 2500. The back cover main body 4896 has a curved shape in which the bottom portion descends from the front toward the back as shown in the central longitudinal sectional view of FIG. 240 in order to secure a sufficient vertical width (height) in the back of the rendering space 4898. It has become. Further, on the bottom of the back cover main body 4896, a plurality of ridges 4899 extending in the front-rear direction are formed side by side. Although this fork 4899 is for representing the wave of the sea, for example, even when the employee opens the door frame 3 to deal with the trouble, even if the game ball is dropped to the effect space 4898 by mistake, You can roll it out easily by rolling the game ball on 畝 4899. By the way, if the bottom of the back cover main body 4896 does not have the fore-and-aft direction ridges 4899 (string-like guiding portions for scraping the game ball), the game ball rolls freely in the lateral direction, so it takes time to capture. Note that arranging the weir 4899 in the lateral direction and arranging the grooves in the lateral direction is merely a difference in expression and is substantially equivalent.

[lift device]
The lifting device 4897 vertically moves the third display device 4818 within the effect back cover 4886, and as shown in the exploded perspective views of FIGS. 245 and 246, the rear surface of the rear wall 4896r of the rear cover main body 4896 On the rear surface of the elevating panel 4901 attached to the fixed elevating base 4900 attached to the elevating guide shaft 4918 erected between the elevating base 4900 and the back cover main body 4896. A lifting gear 4903 is engaged with the lifting rack gear 4902 so as to raise and lower the lifting panel 4901.

[Third Display Device and Lifting Device]
The display frame 4885 of the third display device 4818 is integrally joined with the lift panel 4901 of the lift device 4897. Specifically, the connecting rod 4905 provided on the rear surface of the display frame 4885 of the third display device 4818 is screwed to the elevating panel 4901 through the communication port 4896 w opened in the rear wall 4896 r of the back cover main body 4896 It is done. Therefore, the third display device 4818 rises together with the lifting panel 4901 as shown in FIG. 243 when the lifting motor 4904 drives it, and conversely as shown in FIG. 244 when the lifting panel 4901 lowers. Descent with. The lifting device 4897 is provided with a tension spring 4906 for pulling the lifting panel 4901 upward, and the weight of the lifting panel 4901 and the third display device 4818 is supported by tension elasticity to reduce the load on the lifting motor 4904. It is supposed to be.

The lifting device 4897 also functions as means for applying an external force necessary to move the arm-shaped movable portion 4888 and the foot-shaped movable portion 4889 of the third display device 4818.
That is, as shown in the enlarged view of FIG. 245, a key-shaped pressing member 4907 having a squib shape in front is projected forward from the center upper end to the lifting base 4900 which is a fixed element of the lifting device 4897. As shown in the enlarged view of FIG. 240, the lower end of the pressing member 4907 has an appropriate gap on the top of the liftable lift slider 4893 connected to the arm movable portion 4888 and the foot movable portion 4889. It faces in the state where it was provided.
Therefore, when the third display device 4818 is lifted by the lifting device 4897, both the arm-shaped movable portion 4888 and the foot-shaped movable portion 4889 are initially moved until the top of the lifting slider 4893 contacts the lower end of the pressing member 4907. The top of the lift slider 4893 abuts against the lower end of the pressing member 4907 to prevent the lift of the lift slider 4893 from being further lifted, and the third display 4818 continues to rise. Because the lift slider 4893 is forcibly pushed down, as shown in FIG. 244, the spherical bomb type character jumps up with his fists up to his age and jumps his legs in the direction of about 8:20. Change to Thus, the third display 4818 is linked to the ascent by the ascent and descent device 4897 to raise the fist up and at the same time act as if it is jumping up with both feet open.
On the other hand, when the third display device 4818 falls from the raised position of FIG. 244 to the lowered position, the external force applied to the lift slider 4893 is removed by the lowered position, so the arm-shaped movable portion 4888 and the foot-shaped movable portion The lift slider 4893 is relatively lifted by its own weight 4889, and the position and posture of the third display 4818 finally return to the state shown in FIG.

  When the arm-shaped movable portion 4888 and the foot-shaped movable portion 4889 in the stationary state of FIG. 243 are changed to the jump state in FIG. 244, the elevation of the lift slider 4893 in the stationary state and the arm-shaped movable portion 4888 and the foot-shaped movable Since a large force is required to start the swinging of the portion 4889 at the same time, in the embodiment, as described above, slightly between the squib-shaped holding member 4907 on the lifting device 4897 side and the top of the lifting slider 4893 The gap is first provided, and only the lift slider 4893 is lifted first, and the arm-shaped movable portion 4888 and the foot-shaped movable portion 4889 are swung by providing a time difference corresponding to the clearance. As a result, the load applied to the lift motor 4904 of the lift device 4897 can be dispersed and reduced.

  Furthermore, when the third display device 4818 is completely lowered by providing the rack gear 4894 not to the fixed element of the back cover main body 4896 but to the elevation slider 4893, the arm-shaped movable portion 4888 and the leg-shaped movable portion 4889 are raised and lowered by reaction. Because the slider 4893 slightly bounces (in appearance, the arms and feet slightly swing a couple of degrees), the slight motion due to the bounce impresses the motion of the character that tends to be mechanical. be able to.

  In addition, the center member 2500 surrounding the third display device 4818 has a warp entrance 2501 opened on the outer peripheral surface on the left side of the front view so that the game balls in the upper layer game zone 4823 can enter. Warp outlet 2502 which is opened in the frame so as to be able to release gaming ball B which has entered warp inlet 2501, and after rolling the gaming ball released from warp outlet 2502 in the left-right direction, to upper layer gaming zone 4823 A releasable stage shelf 2503 is provided, and a gaming ball falling from the center of the stage shelf 2503 can enter the jumping portion 4827 with a high probability.

[Lower game zone]
In the lower layer game zone 4825, as shown in FIG. 235, FIG. 240, FIG. 241, and FIG. 245 to FIG. 250, the first display device 4815 described above of the game element group, the start gate 4803, and the ordinary symbol display device 4804 The game balls having a fixed start winning opening 4813 and entering the lower layer game zone 4825 from the dive portion 4827 of the upper layer game zone 4823 are divided into a plurality of (three in the embodiment) distribution portions 4829a to 4829c described later. You can either enter the fixed start winning opening 4813, pass through the start gate 4803 and be collected by the out guiding part 1003, or be collected by the out guiding part 1003 without obtaining any benefits. Be

[Peeper]
As shown in the enlarged view of FIG. 240, the dive portion 4827 includes a dive pocket 4830 opened upward at the lower portion of the upper layer game zone 4823, a passing dive sensor 4831 provided in the dive pocket 4830, and a dive pocket The game ball that has entered the 4830 is temporarily rolled to the back of the game panel 1100 and then rolled forward to the front position of the game panel 1100, such as moving the game ball back and forth from front to back and back to front It has a V-shaped front and rear bending passage 4832.

[First distribution unit]
The first distributing portion 4829a of the distributing portions 4829a to 4829c is a ball passage 4834 which intersects the end of the front and rear bending passage 4832 in the left-right direction through the step portion 4833 for approximately one ball, and the step portion A first electric distribution piece 4835 (first distribution motor 4908) that always swings like a wiper provided at 4833, and the gaming ball that has dropped to the step portion 4833 through the front and rear bending passage 4832 becomes the first electric distribution Depending on the swing timing of the piece 4835, the ball passage 4834 can be divided into a right track flowing to the right and a left track flowing to the left. The right track of the ball passage 4834 is directly connected to a third distribution unit 4829c to be described later via the screw passage 4836 which descends in a spiral, while the left track is indirectly connected via the second distribution unit 4829b. It is connected to the third distribution unit 4829c.

  As will be described later, the third distribution unit 4829c is the final stage where entry to the target fixed start winning opening 4813 can be expected, and therefore distribution to the right track directly connected to the third distribution unit 4829c. Is what the player wants. Therefore, the player tries to enter the jumping part 4827 aiming at the timing to be distributed to the right course, but the jumping part 4827 with respect to the first distributing part 4829a has the game ball entered in the diving pocket 4830. Since the first electric distribution piece 4835 is bent in the front-rear direction by the front-rear bending passage 4832 to reach the first electric distribution piece 4835, the change in distance in the front-rear direction is difficult for the player in the front, and the timing is correspondingly It is hard to catch. Therefore, since it becomes difficult to match the ball entering timing of the dive portion 4827 with the movement of the first electric distribution piece 4835, the elements of the game's original luck / unluck can be improved, and the interest of the game can be increased.

[Second distribution unit]
The second distributing portion 4429b connected to the left path of the ball passage 4834 of the first distributing portion 4829a is a shallow, bowl-like recessed circular turning portion 4837 connected to the left end of the ball passage 4834 and the circular turning portion 4837 A plurality of (three in the embodiment) ball drop openings 4838 penetrating in the central area of the game machine, and a front decanter 4839 for receiving game balls falling from the ball drop openings 4838 and guiding them to almost the front position of the game panel 1100. The second electric distribution piece 4840 <second distribution motor 4909> which always swings like a wiper, provided below the front end of the front inclined rod 4839, and the second electric distribution piece 4840 are inclined to the left in FIG. And a left rear passage 4842 communicated when the second electric distribution piece 4840 is erected, and the first distribution portion 4829a Game balls distributed to the left path is further adapted to be distributed to the right rear channel 4841 and the front left channel 4842 by the swinging timing of the second electric distribution piece 4840. The right rear passage 4841 is connected to the third distribution unit 4829 c, and the left front passage 4842 is connected to the start gate 4803.

  Here, although both the first electric distribution piece 4835 of the first distribution part 4829a and the second electric distribution piece 4840 of the second distribution part 4829b always oscillate, both of them oscillate in different cycles. It is set to Specifically, the second electric distribution piece 4840 is set to swing slowly with a cycle of less than 2 times with respect to the first electric distribution piece 4835 so that a shift occurs in the swing timing of the two. It is set. As a result, when the first distribution unit 4829a and the second distribution unit 4829b are synchronized from the first distribution unit 4829a toward the second distribution unit 4829b in synchronization, the distribution direction is generally known, that is, the second distribution unit 4829a It is possible to prevent an adverse effect that the existence value of the distribution unit 4829b is significantly reduced.

[Third distribution unit]
The third distribution unit 4829c is a ball swing type generally referred to as "Kloon" whose center is located below the lower layer game zone 4825 and on the vertical center line of the game area 5a as well as the dive portion 4827. A distribution device 4843 and a distribution base 4844 provided immediately below the distribution device 4843 are provided.

[Distribution device]
The sorting device 4843 includes a ball rolling member 4845 for vigorously rolling the game ball to freewheel, a rotary member 4846 rotatable about a vertical axis passing through the center of the ball rolling member 4845, and the rotary member 4846. , And a driving device 4847 that rotates at a low speed in a predetermined direction in a supporting manner.

[Ball rolling member]
The ball rolling member 4845 has a short cylindrical shape surrounding the outer periphery of the bottom wall portion 4849 having a circular hole 4848 at the center and inclined gently downward toward the center of the circle like a shallow ridge. As shown in FIG. 241, the gaming ball is inserted toward the inner side and substantially tangential direction of the peripheral wall portion 4850 while being provided with the peripheral wall portion 4850 and an annular curved spherical flow path consisting of Obtained input rods 4851a and 4851b are provided at two front and back positions.
The screw passage 4836 connected to the right path of the ball passage 4834 of the first distributing portion 4829a is connected to the front insertion rod 4851a of the ball rolling member 4845, while the rear insertion rod 4851b is connected to the above. The right back passage 4841 of the second distribution part 4829b is connected, and therefore, it is inserted into the ball rolling member 4845 from the front input rod 4851a through the right path and the screw path 4836 from the first distribution part 4829a. The game ball and the game ball inserted from the first distribution unit 4829a to the left track and the right rear passage 4841 of the second distribution unit 4829b from the rear insertion rod 4851b to the ball rolling member 4845 are the peripheral wall portions 4850 It turns clockwise on bottom wall portion 4849 in FIG. In addition, since the game ball which turns is gradually loses the centrifugal force as the speed decreases, it descends little by little to the circular hole 4848 side by the downward inclination of the bottom wall portion 4849.

  The game balls are inserted into the ball rolling member 4845 from the two insertion rods 4851a and 4851b as described above, but in the embodiment, the game is inserted from the insertion rod 4851a connected to the screw passage 4836 having a large head. The ball is faster than the game ball inserted from the insertion rod 4851b, and therefore, depending on the insertion timing, one game ball may collide with the other game ball and develop into an unexpected expansion. As described above, by providing a plurality of insertion rods in one ball rolling member 4845 and inserting game balls at different design speeds (distance and angle of inclination), the chances of gaming are enhanced and the interest is effectively increased. be able to.

  As shown in FIG. 249, the ball rolling member 4845 of the embodiment contacts the lower side than the center of the gaming ball placed on the bottom wall 4849 and guides the gaming ball to a position slightly away from the peripheral wall 4850. A ball guiding portion 4852 to be obtained is provided. The ball guiding portion 4852 has a wedge shape in cross section which inclines downward (about 20 ° with respect to the horizontal line) toward the contact point with the bottom wall 4849 of the gaming ball, as shown in FIG. 250. The bottom wall portion 4849 may be sloped halfway.

[Rotating member]
The rotary member 4846 has a distribution disc 4853 provided at a height slightly smaller than the circular hole 4848 of the ball rolling member 4845 and approximately the same as or slightly lower than the circular hole 4848, and the edge of the distribution disc 4853 A plurality of (four in the embodiment) are provided at positions symmetrical with respect to the center of the hanging cylinder 4854 projecting downward along the center and the center of the distribution disk 4853 (= the center of the bottom wall 4849). In order to make the receiving port 4855 for gaming balls and one of the receiving ports 4855 as the specific receiving port 4855v, the gaming ball that falls and falls from the receiving port 4855 can be covered by the ball outside the drop cylinder portion 4854 The cross feed rod 4856 for transverse feeding, and a partition wall 4857 in the form of a cross in a plan view and a cross shape for separating adjacent ones of all the inlets 4855 including the specified inlet 4855v A bushing 4859 for inserting the shaft 4858, schematically composed.

[Drive]
As shown in FIGS. 247 and 248, the drive unit 4847 includes a drive motor 4860 provided on the lower surface of the distribution base 4844, a drive shaft 4858 projecting upward on the upper surface of the distribution base 4844, and a distribution base. And a gear group 4861 for transmitting the rotation of the drive motor 4860 to the drive shaft 4858 inside the pedestal 4844, and inserting the drive shaft 4858 into the bearing sleeve 4859 of the rotating member 4846 from below to make the rotating member 4846 While rotating the rotary member 4846 in a fixed direction (in the embodiment, in the counterclockwise direction opposite to the turning direction of the game ball in the ball rolling member 4845) at a low speed.

[Distribution base]
The distribution base 4844 is fixedly attached to the lower part of the lower layer game zone 4825, and has a pocket-like fixed start winning opening 4813 on its front surface as shown in the enlarged view of FIG. A winning passage 4862 leading to the fixed start winning opening 4813 is provided, and an out passage 4863 leading to the out guiding part 1003 of the lower layer gaming zone 4825 is formed on both sides of the winning passage 4862 on the front side.
In the upper part of the distribution base 4844, a separation sorting passage 4864 that receives gaming balls that have entered the reception openings 4855 other than the special reception opening 4855v of the rotary member 4846 in the distribution device 4843 and rotates to the release passage 4863; A game sorting passage 4865 which receives the game ball entering the special receiving port 4855v of the member 4846 and guides it to the winning passage 4862 and a game ball which jumps out of the ball rolling member 4845 in the distribution device 4843 and falls to the game hall side A drop collection passage 4866 to be collected is formed.

[Outside sorting passage]
The off-assortment passage 4864 is provided so as to protrude from the upper surface of the distribution base 4644 at a height close to the hanging cylinder portion 4854 of the rotary member 4846 of the distribution device 4843 as shown in FIGS. It is formed of an enclosure 4867 having a substantially U-shape in a plan view and having a curved portion having substantially the same diameter as the member 4846, and enters the receiving port 4855 other than the special receiving port 4855v of the rotating member 4846 It receives the falling game ball and guides it to the release passage 4863.

[Prize Sorting Passage]
The winning / sorting passage 4865 is formed of a corridor 4868 attached to surround the periphery of the rotating member 4846 with respect to the upper surface of the distribution base 4844 as shown in FIGS. It enters into the special receiving port 4855v of the member 4846 and receives the game ball which has been transversely sent out of the drop cylinder 4854 by the transverse feed rod 4856 and guides it to the forward winning passage 4862. As shown in FIG. 249 (a), when the special receiving port 4855v of the rotating member 4846 is positioned above the winning aisle 4862 when the gaming ball enters the special receiving port 4855v, the crossfeed rod 4856 Fall directly onto the winning passage 4862

[Dropping collection passage]
The drop collection passage 4866 comprises the upper surface of the distribution base 4844 inclined downward and the bowl-like stepped portion 4869 provided at the rear of the distribution base 4844, and the ball rolling member 4845 of the distribution device 4843 The game balls jumping out and falling are collected in the bowl-shaped step 4869 and collected together with the out balls etc. to the game hall side.

[Countermeasures for Dotsukigot of Distribution Device]
Dotsukigoto for the ball turning type distribution device, when the game ball turning on the bottom wall approaches the specified receiving port, strongly strikes the front of the pachinko machine and vibrates the pachinko machine by its impact, The trajectory of the game ball is changed from the turning direction to the radial direction by vibration, and the ball is made to enter the targeted specific receiving port.
On the other hand, the ball rolling member 4845 of the sorting apparatus 4843 according to the embodiment is slightly separated from the peripheral wall 4850 by the ball guiding portion 4852 when the gaming ball rolls on the bottom wall 4849 in inertia while receiving the action of centrifugal force. Since the game ball is guided to the position, there is a slight gap as shown in FIG. 249 (a) even when the gaming ball is closest to the peripheral wall 4850.
Therefore, as shown by arrow F in FIG. 249 (b), the player who knocks the dog spins shocks the pachinko machine 1 to vibrate the ball rolling member 4845 in the back and forth direction and strikes the gaming ball with the peripheral wall 4850 Even if the trajectory is to be changed in the radial direction, the movement of the peripheral wall 4850 is not immediately transmitted to the gaming ball because there is a gap between the peripheral wall 4850 and the gaming ball. In addition, the ball guiding portion 4852 in contact with the gaming ball is obliquely hit below the center of the gaming ball and dives into the lower side of the gaming ball due to vibration, as shown by arrow M in FIG. 249 (b). Try to move in a direction different from the direction intended by the fraudster. Therefore, it is possible to substantially make it difficult.

[Others]
In addition, in the lower layer gaming zone 4825, a passage type first ball sensor 4870a for detecting game balls passing through the right course in the ball passage 4834 of the first distribution unit 4829a, and a right back passage 4841 of the second distribution unit 4829b. A passing type second ball sensor 4870b is provided for detecting game balls passing through the first and second ball sensors 4870a and 4870b by detecting the game balls by the first and second ball sensors 4870a and 4870b. You can manage the number of balls that entered 4843. Then, the number of balls in the distribution device 4843 and the number of balls detected by the start gate 4803 through the left front passage 4842 of the second distribution portion 4829 b are summed up and detected by the dive sensor 4831 of the dive portion 4827 By comparing it with the number of balls in the lower layer game zone 4825, it is possible to know the existence of the game balls that can not be released while entering the lower layer game zone 4825, and thereby a warning that some cheating is suspected. Can be issued to the administrator.

  Further, in the embodiment, the flow path from the diving part 4827 to the fixed start winning opening 4813 is long, and the residence time of the game ball is long, so for example, the game ball according to the stored number of hit lottery held in the unexecuted state. It becomes difficult to do so-called stop driving to temporarily stop the launch of Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to effectively prevent the strike that adversely affects the game arcade.

[Right-handed game zone]
The right-handed game zone 4824 includes, in the order of flow of the game balls, the above-mentioned obstacle nail 2007 of the game element group, the start gate 4803, the electric start winning opening 4871, the first big winning opening 4807, and the rotating ball receiving member 4808 , General winning hole 4801 on which gaming balls placed on the tapered circumferential surface inclined downward to the back of rotating ball receiving member 4808 enter, V winning hole 4810, general winning hole 4801, and second large winning hole 4812, And the out guiding unit 1003 shares with the lower layer gaming zone 4825.

  The right-handed game zone 4824 is connected to the upper game zone 4823 at the communication passage 5a4 through which the game balls fired with a specific strong launch force can pass, as in FIGS. In addition, since the detail of this connection passage part 5a4 is the same as the description by FIGS. 131-139 and 194, it is abbreviate | omitted.

Further, the right-handed game zone 4824 is provided with a right-handed ball flow path which goes around the above-mentioned game element group.
This right-handed ball flow path is
An upper free fall area 4910 formed immediately below the exit of the communication passage 5a4 and having a plurality of obstacle nails 2007 and a start gate 4803;
In addition, the first bowl 4911 which opens upward at the lower end of the free fall area 4910 and receives the game ball having passed through the start gate 4803 and the game ball simply passing the side without passing through the start game gate 4803;
The bifurcated area 4912 having the first shutter plate 4802 of the electric start hole 4871 in a direction in which four obstacle nails 2007 are implanted in a corner post shape and is dropped straightly while continuing to the end of the first weir 4911;
A second weir 4913 that opens on the left side in FIG. 234 of the branch area 4912 and bypasses the outside of the electric start hole 4871 in a lateral U shape and joins the flow path of the branch area 4912 in the direction of falling straight;
A third weir 4914 continuous from the second weir 4913 and including the top surface of the first shutter plate 4802 of the first big winning opening 4807 in a part of the flow path;
It is formed between the second large winning opening 4812 and the lower free falling area 4915 having a plurality of obstacle nails 2007 and a general winning opening 4801 located immediately below the exit portion of the third ridge 4914.

In the right-handed game zone 4824, as shown in FIG. 234 and FIG. 251, the above-mentioned right-handed ball channel is formed on the inner surface side of the boundary wall 4916 which divides the upper game zone 4823 and the lower game zone 4825. A lighting board 4917 for effect that is illuminated from the side is provided. The lighting board 4917 is viewed from the player side only by the front end face or the back face of the opaque board depending on its position and direction, and the light of the light emitting LED as a light source is hard to directly enter the view. Glare can be suppressed while brightly illuminating.
Further, in the right-handed game zone 4824, a timer segment 4882 by a segment display capable of displaying a 5-digit number is provided in the vicinity of the end of the third ridge 4914. It is designed to increase the interest of the game by giving notice and so on.

The pachinko machine 1 according to the embodiment has the above-described configuration, and the outline of the game is as described above. However, to supplement the explanation, the player first dives into the upper layer game zone 4823 by driving a game ball Aim for entry to section 4827. Of course, some of them enter the jumping part 4827 as intended, some of them enter the general winning opening 4801, and some of them enter the out guiding part 1003 immediately and end the game.
The first special symbol indicator when the game ball enters the fixed start winning opening 4801 after entering the lower layer game zone 4825 after entering the lower layer game zone 4825 in the upper layer game zone 4823 and entering the lower layer game zone 4825. A lottery game (first lottery game) relating to a first special symbol to be played in the first game is played, and in this first lottery game, stepwise by the first display device 4815, the second display device 4817, and the third display device 4818 It is expected that the big hit game and the small hit game described above are hit by the effect display. That is, based on the progress of the lottery game described above, the display lamp 4814 of the first display device 4815 is turned on sequentially from the bottom to the top to display the start of the lottery with an image as if the fire of the squib burns. Then, the lottery result of the first step is displayed by the contents of three symbols (for example, three "GO" displays are arranged) displayed on the second display device 4817, and finally the final step is performed on the third display device 4818. (Specifically, the display of a single digit number by a large segment display, or the jumping operation of the spherical bomb type character by the display frame 4885, the arm movable portion 4888, and the foot movable portion 4889) The player is made aware of the hit and the release.

In addition, among the game balls launched in the upper layer game zone 4823, part of the game balls that entered the dive part 4827 but did not enter the fixed start winning opening 4801 pass through the second distribution part 4829b. When the game ball passes through the start gate 4803, when the game ball passes through the start gate 4803, the signal is detected by the gate sensor 4875 and the above-described normal symbol lottery regarding the operation of the first shutter plate 4802 is performed.
Then, when the normal symbol lottery is hit (1/10), the first shutter plate 4802 of the right-handed game zone 4824 advances by an amount according to the lottery result, and the ball can be entered into the electric start winning opening 4871 When the time elapses, the first shutter plate 4802 retracts, and entry of the electric start winning opening 4871 becomes impossible.
In addition, the result of the lottery is displayed on the normal symbol display device 4804 for effect (specifically, display of one digit number by the segment display).

  In addition, after the end of the big hit game, the variation time of the normal symbol in the normal symbol lottery is shortened time (for example 1 second) shortened than the variation time (for example 120 seconds) in the normal gaming state Controlled by the main character, and by directly aiming at the start gate 4803 of the right-handed game zone 4824 instead of the diving part 4827, the lottery game (second lottery game) relating to the second special symbol to be It will be possible to proceed with the game. The time saving game state is ended under a predetermined ending condition (for example, 10 times of variable display of a special symbol, etc.) and returned to the normal game state.

  Although the embodiment of the present invention has been described above, the present invention is of course not limited to the above embodiment. For example, although a pachinko machine has been illustrated as a game machine in the embodiment, the invention is also applicable to other game machines such as ball ball machines and arrange ball machines, and further, a plurality of drums The present invention is also applicable to slot machines that rotate reels.

In the embodiment, the game area 5a is formed by three game zones, but may be configured by two game zones or a single game area 5a.
In the embodiment, the ball rolling member 4845 has been described as a part of the distribution device 4843. However, the ball rolling member 4845 rolls the gaming ball in a visible state from the player in the gaming area 5a. The thing is not limited to the distribution device 4843.

Incidentally, conventionally, a pachinko machine, which is an example of a gaming machine, is provided with a game area surrounded by rails and covered with a window in the front of the game board, and a player plays a game ball above the game area. When the game ball is thrown into a specific receptacle or the like in the process of flowing down, a predetermined number of game balls are provided (released) to the player as a prize of the ball entry, while they enter the specific receptacle. The game ball which did not ball is collected to the game place side through the out ball mouth.
By the way, in some players, a strong external force (specifically, hitting or strongly pulling a ball plate, etc.) is applied to the pachinko machine to vibrate the whole, and the trajectory of the gaming ball is forced by the vibration. There are those who change to enter a specific entrance, and thus try to obtain a prize illegally (hereinafter, such fraudulent acts are simply referred to as "dotkigot").
For example, as a part of a pachinko machine which is susceptible to the damage of the above-mentioned dodgie goto, there is a ball swing type distribution device generally referred to as "clone".
This distribution device is provided with a ball flow path comprising a bottom wall gently inclined toward the center of a circle like a shallow ridge and a peripheral wall surrounding the outer periphery of the bottom wall, and the ball flow A ball rolling member configured to turn on the bottom wall portion while applying a centrifugal force toward the peripheral wall portion by inserting a game ball toward the inside of the peripheral wall portion and in a direction substantially tangential to the path, and the bottom wall A plurality of (for example, 2 to 4) game ball sockets provided at positions symmetrical with respect to the center of the unit, and one of the game reception slots, are provided with a privilege for entering balls. The game ball, which is inserted into the ball channel of the ball rolling member and initially swirls along the peripheral wall by centrifugal force, gradually loses its momentum and is centered on the bottom wall. It gradually descends to the side, and it is possible to play into which of the receiving ports including the specific receiving port finally enter the ball. It is an element.
The dossier for this ball turning type distribution device applies an external force by hitting the front of the pachinko machine strongly by, for example, hitting the front of the pachinko machine at a timing when the gaming ball turning on the bottom wall approaches the specified receiving port. The pachinko machine is vibrated, and the vibration causes the trajectory of the gaming ball to change from the turning direction to the radial direction to enter the target specified receiving port.
Therefore, as a conventional measure against such a problem, as described in, for example, a document (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2008-229209), a vibration sensor is installed in a pachinko machine, and the vibration detected by the vibration sensor causes the vibration. It is determined that the game arcade side takes necessary measures based on the determination result.
The conventional vibration sensor for dodukigoto only estimates that dokkigoto has been performed by detecting abnormal vibration of the pachinko machine, and even if the ball enters the specified receiving port immediately after the abnormal vibration, it enters the ball It was difficult to prove the causal relationship between the vibration and the anomalous vibration, and it was not possible to prevent the actual damage caused by Dokkigot.

[Attachment method of vibration detection switch and back stick member for game ball]
On the front left side of the base to be the bottom plate of the back box 3010, as described above, the back rod member 1110ta for the left game ball is attached, and in the vicinity of the top of the left side wall of the back box 3010, the top The vibration detection switch 3005 is attached, and the lower vibration detection switch 3006 a is attached near the lower portion of the left side wall of the back box 3010 as described above. In addition, as described above, the back bowl member 1110tb for the right game ball is attached to the front right side of the base which is the bottom plate of the back box 3010, and the lower vibration detection switch 3006b is It is attached. The back hole member 1110 ta for the left side game ball and the back side member 1110 tb for the right side game ball are respectively formed with the stop holes, and the front face of the base which is the bottom plate of the back box 3010 corresponds to these stop holes. Mounting boss holes having a predetermined height (in the present embodiment, 6 mm) are formed in the front position. Here, the back rod member 1110 tb for the right side game ball will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 252 is a cross-sectional view in which the back box is partially bent in the left-right direction along the vertical direction to be cut, and is a schematic view (a) showing how to attach the vibration detection switch and the back stick member for gaming balls. , And its modification (b). In FIG. 252, the back bowl member 1110tb for the right side game ball enters the electric start winning opening 4871, the first large winning opening 4807, the general winning opening 4801, the V winning opening 4810, and the second large winning opening 4812 etc. The eyebrow portion for guiding the game ball to the rear and downstream side is omitted from the view of the drawing.

  In the back bowl member 1110 tb for the right gaming ball, fixing holes 1110 tba1 to 1110 tba5 (five locking holes) for attaching the back bowl member 1110 tb for the right gaming ball to the front right side of the base serving as the bottom plate of the back box 3010, As shown in FIG. 252 (a), it is not formed at all except the area where the lower vibration detection switch 3006b is attached. Specifically, the stop holes 1110tba1, 1110tba2 and 1110tba3 are arranged at equal intervals in the vertical direction, and the stop hole 1110tba3 and the stop holes 1110tba4 and 1110tba5 are in the vertical direction of the lower vibration detection switch 3006b. Are spaced apart from one another by approximately the same vertical distance from the center point of

  On the front right side of the base to be the bottom plate of the back box 3010, a predetermined number is directed forward to a position corresponding to the plurality of stop holes 1110tba1 to 1110tba5 (five stop holes) formed in the back ball member 1110tb for the right game ball. Since mounting boss holes 3010ab1 to 3010ab5 (five mounting boss holes) having a height (in the present embodiment, 6 mm) are respectively formed to project, mounting boss holes 3010ab1, 3010ab2 and 3010ab3 have a distance dimension in the vertical direction, etc. The mounting boss holes 3010ab3 and the mounting boss holes 3010ab4 and 3010ab5 are spaced apart from each other by substantially the same vertical distance from the vertical center point of the lower vibration detection switch 3006b. ing.

  Thus, in the state where the back rod member 1110 tb for the right side game ball is attached to the front surface of the base serving as the bottom plate of the back box 3010, the above-described predetermined height formed on the front surface of the base serving as the bottom plate of the back box 3010 Between the back surface of the back rod member 1110 tb for the right gaming ball and the front surface of the base which is the bottom plate of the back box 3010 by the mounting boss holes 3010 ab1 to 3010 ab 5 (five mounting boss holes) having 6 mm in this embodiment. A space of a predetermined height (6 mm in this embodiment) is formed in Thus, in a state where the lower vibration detection switch 3006 b is mounted near the lower portion of the right side wall of the back box 3010 and attached to the front of the base serving as the bottom plate of the back box 3010, the upper and left sides of the lower vibration detection switch 3006 b are back and forth Even though the game ball is disposed in the vicinity of the back bowl member 1110tb for the right game ball bent in the left and right direction, the game ball passing through the ball guide path BS formed on the back bowl member 1110tb for the right game ball is the ball guide path BS The vibration that occurs when it collides with the induction wall of can be escaped using this space, so to the front of the base that will be the bottom plate of the back box 3010 via the back of the back bowl member 1110 tb for the right game ball It can contribute to preventing transmission. Thereby, the vibration generated when the gaming ball passing through the ball guiding path BS formed on the back ball member 1110 tb for the right-hand gaming ball collides with the guiding wall of the ball guiding path BS can escape using the above-mentioned space Since the transmission can be made difficult to be transmitted to the lower vibration detection switch 3006b, erroneous detection of the lower vibration detection switch 3006b due to this vibration can be prevented.

  Further, among the plurality of retaining holes 1110tba1 to 1110tba5 (five retaining holes) formed in the back ball member 1110tb for the right-side gaming ball, the retaining holes 1110tba1, 1110tba2 and 1110tba3 are vertically spaced at equal intervals. As well as being disposed, the retaining hole 1110tba3 and the retaining holes 1110tba4 and 1110tba5 are disposed apart from the center point of the lower vibration detection switch 3006b in the vertical direction by substantially the same vertical distance dimension. Then, among the mounting boss holes 3010ab1 to 3010ab5 (five mounting boss holes) formed on the front surface of the base serving as the bottom plate of the back box 3010 to correspond to the locking holes 1110tba1 to 1110tba5 (five locking holes), The mounting boss holes 3010 ab 1, 3010 ab 2, and 3010 ab 3 are spaced apart at equal distance in the vertical direction, and the mounting boss hole 3010 ab 3 and the mounting boss holes 3010 ab 4 and 3010 ab 5 are the centers of the lower vibration detection switch 3006 b in the vertical direction. The points are spaced apart by substantially the same vertical distance dimension. Thus, five retaining holes are formed in the back bowl member 1110 tb for the right game ball, and the back box 3010, with the attachment surface between the back bowl member 1110 tb for the right game ball and the front surface of the base serving as the bottom plate of the back box 3010 The ball guiding path BS formed in the back rod member 1110tb for the right side game ball by limiting the area to a sufficiently small size by limiting to five mounting boss holes formed in the front surface of the base to be the bottom plate It can contribute to preventing the vibration generated when the passing gaming ball collides with the guiding wall of the ball guiding path BS from being transmitted to the front of the base which is the bottom plate of the back box 3010 through the mounting surface. Also in this respect, it is difficult for the vibration generated when the gaming ball passing through the ball guiding path BS formed on the back ball member 1110tb for the right-hand game ball collides with the guiding wall of the ball guiding path BS to the lower vibration detection switch 3006b As a result, false detection of the lower vibration detection switch 3006 b due to this vibration can be prevented.

  In addition, the five lock holes formed in the back rod member 1110 tb for the right game ball, and the mounting surface of the back ball member 1110 tb for the right game ball and the front surface of the base serving as the bottom plate of the back box 3010 The game ball passing through the ball guide path BS formed in the back rod member 1110tb for the right side game ball is limited to the five attachment boss holes formed on the front surface of the base serving as the bottom plate. The vibration path that occurs when the guide wall collides can be limited to the mounting surface.

  In order to be able to exhibit such an effect, a stop hole is formed in each of the back game members 1110ta for the left side game ball, and a plurality of these stop holes are formed in the front of the base which is the bottom plate of the back box 3010 At the corresponding positions, mounting boss holes having a predetermined height (in the present embodiment, 6 mm) are respectively formed forward.

  In addition, the vibration generated when the gaming ball passing through the ball guiding path BS formed on the back ball member 1110 tb for the right-hand game ball collides with the guiding wall of the ball guiding path BS is the front face of the base serving as the bottom plate of the back box 3010 As a configuration that can be prevented from being transmitted to the back ball member 1110tb for the right side game ball, the notch portion having a larger distance dimension compared to the distance dimension of the lower vibration detection switch 3006b, the lower vibration detection switch It can also be configured to be formed on the back side of the back bowl member 1110 tb for the right side game ball at a position corresponding to 3006 b. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 252 (b), the back ball member 1110tb for the right side game ball has a lower notch portion 1110tbb having a larger distance dimension than the distance dimension of the lower vibration detection switch 3006b. It is formed on the back surface side of the back ball member 1110 tb for the right side game ball at a position corresponding to the vibration detection switch 3006 b. The difference from FIGS. 252 (a) and 252 (b) is that the mounting boss holes 3010ab1 to 3010ab5 in FIG. 252 (a) have a predetermined height (6 mm in this embodiment) toward the front and protrude from the back. The mounting boss holes 3010ab1 to 3010ab5 in FIG. 252 (b) have a predetermined height (6 mm in this embodiment) in the rear, while they are formed on the front surface of the base which is the bottom plate of the box 3010. The point is that it is formed on the back surface of the base that is to be the bottom plate of the back box 3010, and the back rod member 1110tb for the right side game ball in FIG. 252 (a) is on the front surface of the base that is to be the bottom plate of the back box 3010. Mounting boss holes 3010 ab1 to 3010 ab1 having the above-described predetermined height (in the present embodiment, 6 mm) formed on the front surface of the base which is the bottom plate of the back box 3010 in the mounted state A space of a predetermined height (6 mm in this embodiment) between the back surface of the back rod member 1110 tb for the right gaming ball and the front surface of the base serving as the bottom plate of the back box 3010 by 010ab5 (five mounting boss holes) In the state in which the back stick member 1110tb for the right side game ball in FIG. 252 (b) is attached to the front of the base which is the bottom plate of the back box 3010 while FIG. Notches 1110tbb (the mounting boss holes 3010ab1 to 3010ab5 have a predetermined height (6 mm in the present embodiment, 6 mm in this embodiment) in which the back of the back and the front of the base that is the bottom plate of the back box 3010 are formed in the back hook member 1110tb for the right game ball It has the same height as), and is in point contact with the surface. Thereby, the vibration generated when the game ball passing through the ball guiding path BS formed on the back ball member 1110 tb for the right game ball collides with the guiding wall of the ball guiding path BS is applied to the back ball member 1110 tb for the right game ball Since it can be made difficult to be transmitted to the lower vibration detection switch 3006b by being able to escape using the space of the formed notched portion 1110tbb, erroneous detection of the lower vibration detection switch 3006b due to this vibration can be prevented. Such a notch 1110tbb formed on the back bowl member 1110tb for the right side game ball may be formed on the back bowl member 1110ta for the left game ball.

[Angle position of D cut surface formed on rotation shaft of stepping motor]
Next, with the rotation shaft of the first distribution stepping motor 4908 which swings the first electric distribution piece 4835 in a wiper-like manner (wiper-like which always reciprocates between the position of the left mechanical end and the right mechanical end) The second electric distribution piece 4840 is always in the form of a wiper (a wiper that constantly reciprocates between the position of the mechanical end on the left and the position of the mechanical end (hereinafter referred to as "vertically inverted")). The angular position of the D-cut surface formed on each of the rotating shafts of the swing second distributing stepping motor 4909 will be described. FIG. 254 is a diagram showing a D-cut angular position formed on the rotation shaft of the first and second distribution stepping motors. Here, since the arrangement method of the angular position of the D cut surface formed on the rotation shaft of the first and second distribution stepping motors 4908 and 4909 is the same, the rotation shafts of the first and second distribution stepping motors 4908 and 4909 In the description of the arrangement method of the angular position of the D-cut surface formed in FIG. 10, the code relating to the second distribution stepping motor 4909 is shown in parentheses following the code relating to the first distribution stepping motor 4908.

  The first and second distribution stepping motors 4908 and 4909 are unipolar stepping motors having phases of φ1, φ2, / φ1 and / φ2, and the rotary shaft is press-fitted to the rotor. The first and second distribution stepping motors 4908 and 4909 will be described in detail later, but the rotation shaft is press-fitted to the rotor so that the rotational position of the rotation shaft is determined according to the number of steps from the reference excitation phase. ing. That is, in the present embodiment, the position of the rotation shaft can be substantially grasped without providing a rotation angle sensor such as a rotary encoder for accurately measuring the angle of the rotation shaft.

  As shown in FIG. 254 (a), mounting holes 4908b (4909b) are formed in the left and right sides of the rotation shaft 4908a (4909a) of the first distributing stepping motor 4908 (4909). The left mounting hole 4908b (4909b), the rotary shaft 4908a (4909a), and the right mounting hole 4908b (4909b) are disposed on the same straight line, and become the horizontal center line of the first distribution stepping motor 4908 (4909). ing. A straight line passing through the rotation axis 4908a (4909a) perpendicularly intersects with the horizontal centerline, and the vertical centerline of the first distribution stepping motor 4908 (4909). The diameter of the rotation shaft 4908a (4909a) is 4 mm (φ4).

  The D-cut surface is formed in advance on the rotation shaft 4908a (4909a) of the first distribution stepping motor 4908 (4909), and in the state where φ1 and φ2 set as the reference excitation phase are excited (ON), It is pressed into the rotor so that the cut surface is rotated counterclockwise by 10 ° (tolerance ± 3 °) from the horizontal center line. As a result, in the first distribution stepping motor 4908 (4909), when φ1 and φ2 set to the reference excitation phase are excited (ON), the angle of the D cut surface formed on the rotary shaft 4908a (4909a) is horizontal. The D-cut angular position is an absolute position at a position rotated counterclockwise by 10 ° (tolerance ± 3 °) from the center line of the direction.

  The first electric distribution piece 4835 in the first distribution portion 4829 a swings like a wiper that always reciprocates between the position of the left mechanical end and the position of the right mechanical end. When the first electric distribution piece 4835 swings and reaches the position of the mechanical end on the left side, the ball passage 4834 is distributed to the right path flowing to the right toward the front of the ball passage 4834 via the screw passage 4836 which descends in a spiral. While the first electric distribution piece 4835 swings and reaches the position of the mechanical end on the right side while being connected to the distribution portion 4829c, the ball passage 4834 is distributed to the left path flowing to the left toward the front, and the second It is connected to the distribution unit 4829b of In the present embodiment, with the first electric distribution piece 4835 positioned at the mechanical end on the left side, the angle of the D cut surface formed on the rotation shaft 4908a is 10 ° counterclockwise from the horizontal center line (tolerance ± It is designed in advance to have a position rotated by 3 °) and a D-cut angular position. In the first distribution stepping motor 4908, when φ1 and φ2 set to the reference excitation phase are excited (ON), the rotational position of the first electric distribution piece 4835 swinging like a wiper is the mechanical end on the left side. Or the position of the mechanical end on the right. A detailed description of this point will be given later.

  The second electric distribution piece 4845 in the second distribution part 4829b connected to the left path of the ball passage 4834 of the first distribution part 4829a always reciprocates between the position of the left mechanical end and the position of the vertically inverted mechanical end. Swing like a moving wiper. When the second motor distribution piece 4840 swings and reaches the position of the mechanical end vertically inverted, the second motor distribution piece 4840 is connected to the start gate 4803 via the left hand passage 4842. Swings and reaches the position of the mechanical end on the left, it is connected to the third distribution unit 4829 c via the right rear passage 4841. In the present embodiment, the angle of the D-cut surface formed on the rotation shaft 4909a is 10 ° counterclockwise from the horizontal center line in a state where the second electric distribution piece 4840 is at the position of the mechanical end on the left. It is designed in advance to have a position rotated by 3 °) and a D-cut angular position. In the second distribution stepping motor 4909, when φ1 and φ2 set to the reference excitation phase are excited (ON), the rotational position of the second motorized distribution piece 4840 swinging like a wiper is the mechanical end on the left side. Or the position of the mechanical end which is inverted in the vertical direction. A detailed description of this point will be given later.

  As described above, the third distribution unit 4829c is the final stage where ball entry into the target fixed start winning opening 4813 can be expected, and the first electric distribution piece 4835 swings to the position of the left mechanical end. When it reaches it, it is distributed to the right track that flows to the right toward the front of the ball passage 4834 and is connected to the third distribution unit 4829c via the screw passage 4836 that descends spirally, so the third distribution The distribution to the right course directly connected to the section 4829c is what the player desires, and is distribution to an area which is advantageous for the player. In addition, when the second electric distribution piece 4845 in the second distribution part 4829b connected to the left path of the ball passage 4834 of the first distribution part 4829a swings and reaches the position of the mechanical end on the left side, Since the third distribution unit 4829c is connected to the third distribution unit 4829c, the distribution to be connected to the third distribution unit 4829c is desired by the player and is advantageous for the player. It becomes distribution.

  On the other hand, when the first electric distribution piece 4835 swings and reaches the position of the mechanical end on the right side, it is distributed to the left track flowing to the left toward the front of the ball passage 4834 and connected to the second distribution portion 4829b. Although the second distribution unit 4829b can obtain an opportunity for distribution to be connected to the third distribution unit 4829c, the right route directly connected to the third distribution unit 4829c described above and In comparison, the connection to the third distribution unit 4829c is mediated by the distribution by the second distribution unit 4829b, and the area in which the probability of being connected to the third distribution unit 4829c decreases is advantageous to the player. It is hard to say that it is the distribution to. In addition, when the second electric distribution piece 4840 swings and reaches the position of the mechanical end vertically inverted, the second electric distribution piece 4840 is connected to the start gate 4803 via the passage 4842 between the left hand. The distribution unit 4829c is not connected at all to the area which is advantageous for the player.

  The connector 4908c (4909c) of the first distribution stepping motor 4908 (4909) is provided at a position rotated clockwise by 135 ° (tolerance ± 3 °) from the horizontal center line, as shown in FIG. 254 (b). As shown, / φ 2 is assigned to the first pin, / φ 1 is assigned to the second pin, φ 2 C (common) is assigned to the third pin, φ 1 C (common) is assigned to the fourth pin, and The pin is assigned φ2 and the sixth pin is assigned φ1. Various voltages (operation voltage to be described later, stop voltage to be described later) are applied to φ2C (common) allocated to the third pin, and / φ2 allocated to the first pin or φ2 allocated to the fifth pin A current flows. Various voltages (operation voltage to be described later, stop voltage to be described later) are applied to φ1C (common) allocated to the fourth pin, and / φ1 allocated to the second pin or φ1 allocated to the sixth pin A current flows.

  The first distribution stepping motor 4908 (4909) switches between the operating voltage and the stopping voltage according to the rotation state of the rotary shaft 4908a (4909a) as excitation to φ1, φ2, / φ1, / φ2. It is done.

  As described above, in the first distribution stepping motor 4908 (4909), when φ1 and φ2 set to the reference excitation phase are excited (ON), the angle of the D cut surface formed on the rotation shaft 4908a (4909a) is The D-cut angular position is a position rotated counterclockwise by 10 ° (tolerance ± 3 °) from the horizontal center line. In this embodiment, eight combinations of excitation of each phase of φ1, φ2, / φ1, / φ2 of the first distribution stepping motor 4908 (4909) described later (each phase of φ1, φ2, / φ1, / φ2 (Exclude all non-excitation ones) so that the rotational position (except the position of each mechanical end) of the rotary shaft 4908a (4909a) can be determined by the combination of excitation of each of the eight phases. It has become.

  Thus, the combination of excitation of each phase of φ1, φ2, / φ1, / φ2 of the first distribution stepping motor 4908 (4909) and the rotational position of the rotary shaft 4908a (4909a) (except for the position of each mechanical end). A sensor is provided so that the first electric distribution piece 4835 is at the position of the mechanical end on the left side, for example, when the correspondence relationship between and is not formed at all, and the rotation of the first distribution stepping motor 4908 The shaft 4908a is rotated to push the first electric distribution piece 4835 to the position of the mechanical end on the left side, and when it is detected by the sensor, the excitation phase of the first distribution stepping motor 4908 and the first electric distribution There is a disadvantage that it is necessary to grasp the correspondence with the position of the mechanical end on the left side of the A sensor is provided so that the distribution piece 4840 is detected at the left mechanical end position, and the rotation shaft 4909a of the second distribution stepping motor 4909 is rotated to move the second electric distribution piece 4840 to the left mechanical end position. The drawback is that it is necessary to grasp the correspondence relationship between the excitation phase of the second distribution stepping motor 4909 and the position of the mechanical end on the left side of the second electric distribution piece 4840 when it is detected by the sensor by performing a moving push operation. There is.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as described above, the first distribution stepping motor 4908 (4909) rotates the rotational shaft 4908a (4909a) when the φ1 and φ2 set to the reference excitation phase are excited (ON). The angle of the D-cut surface formed in) is structurally determined so as to be a position rotated counterclockwise by 10 ° (tolerance ± 3 °) from the horizontal center line and to be the D-cut angular position, and further A combination of eight excitations to φ1, φ2, / φ1 and / φ2 of the first distribution stepping motor 4908 (4909), and the rotational position (excluding the position of each mechanical end) of the rotational shaft 4908a (4909a), Of the first distribution stepping motor 4908 (4909) and the first electric distribution without performing the above-described pressing operation at all. 4835 and (. Excluding the position of each mechanical end) rotation position of the (4840), and is capable of determining.

  In addition to the time of power-on, at the time of power recovery when power is restored due to a power failure or momentary stop, the first distribution stepping motor 4908 (4909) is controlled by the first excitation to rotate the first electric distribution piece 4835 (4840) Even if the position is different from the assumed rotational position, the next excitation may control the first distribution stepping motor 4908 (4909) to match the rotational position of the first electric distribution piece 4835 (4840) with the intended rotational position. Since it can be done, recovery can be performed easily. This can be applied to the case where the first distribution stepping motor 4908 (4909) is out of step by the current excitation, and the first excitation is controlled by the next excitation to control the first electric distribution Since the rotational position of the piece 4835 (4840) can be adjusted to the intended rotational position, recovery of the step out of the first distribution stepping motor 4908 (4909) can be easily performed.

  Here, in the present embodiment, as an electric drive source that always swings the first electric distribution piece 4835 in a wiper shape (a wiper shape that always reciprocates between the position of the mechanical end on the left and the position of the mechanical end on the right). An electric drive that uses a stepping motor and always swings the second electric distribution piece 4840 into a wiper shape (a wiper shape that always reciprocates between the position of the mechanical end on the left and the position of the mechanical end that is vertically inverted). The reason for adopting a stepping motor as a source will be briefly described.

  The first electric distribution piece 4835 and the second electric distribution piece 4840 distribute the gaming balls according to the distribution ratio, and the accuracy is required. For this reason, if a solenoid is adopted as the electric drive source, a difference occurs between the plunger movement speed when the excitation drive of the solenoid is started and the plunger movement speed due to the restoring force of the spring when the excitation drive of the solenoid is stopped. . In addition, the plunger movement speed is not always constant because the plunger returns due to the restoring force of the spring, and the plunger movement speed due to the variation of the spring also differs depending on the solenoid. Further, as described above, since the first electric distribution piece 4835 and the second electric distribution piece 4840 always swing like a wiper, when the solenoid is adopted as the electric drive source, the solenoid is not durable. There is a secular deterioration of the spring, and it is difficult to continue the distribution operation by the first electric distribution piece 4835 and the second electric distribution piece 4840 according to the distribution ratio set at the time of design. As described above, when a solenoid is used as the electric drive source, it is difficult to accurately control the distribution operation by the first electric distribution piece 4835 and the second electric distribution piece 4840, and the distribution operation is finely controlled. It is difficult.

  So, in this embodiment, it is durable, there is little aging degradation, the variation in the performance between individuals is small, it is possible to control the distribution operation accurately, and it is possible to control the distribution operation finely. As a source, a first distribution stepping motor 4908 which is a stepping motor is adopted for the first electric distribution piece 4835, and a second distribution stepping motor 4909 which is a stepping motor is adopted for the second electric distribution piece 4840.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, the first distribution stepping motor 4908 (4909) is formed on the rotation shaft 4908a (4909a) when φ1 and φ2 set to the reference excitation phase are excited (ON). The angle of the D-cut surface to be cut is structurally determined such that it becomes a D-cut angular position at a position rotated counterclockwise by 10 ° (tolerance ± 3 °) from the horizontal center line, and the first Correspondence between 8 combinations of excitation to φ1, φ2, / φ1, / φ2 of the distribution stepping motor 4908 (4909) and the rotational position (excluding the position of each mechanical end) of the rotary shaft 4908a (4909a). Therefore, the excitation phase of the first distributing stepping motor 4908 (4909) and the first electric distribution piece 483 are performed without performing the above-described pressing operation at all. Although it was a mechanism that can determine the rotational position (excluding the position of each mechanical end) of (4840), such a mechanism is another rendering device provided with a movable body operated by a stepping motor. It can be used for Such other effect devices may be provided on the game board 5 or the door frame 3. When the other rendering device is controlled by the main control board 1310X, the stepping motor for operating the movable body is driven and controlled by the main control board 1310X, and when the other rendering device is controlled by the peripheral control board 1510, the movable A stepper motor that operates the body is driven and controlled by the peripheral control board 1510.

  Incidentally, conventionally, there has been proposed a gaming machine which effects by driving a movable effect body (movable body) on a front surface of a liquid crystal display which displays various images according to various effects by driving a drive motor (stepping motor) ( For example, Unexamined-Japanese-Patent No. 2008-012194 (Paragraph [0039], Paragraph [0045]-Paragraph [0051], FIGS. 2-4)). A photo sensor is disposed at the original position of the movable effect body (movable body), and it is understood that the movable effect body (movable body) exists at the original position by being detected by the photo sensor. It has become. However, in the gaming machine described in this document, since the original position of the movable effect body (movable body) is specified based on the detection signal from the photosensor, at the time of power recovery (when the power is turned on) In addition, when the original position of the movable effect body (movable body) can not be specified in the power recovery including power failure and momentary stop), the excitation phase to the drive motor (stepping motor) and the movable body effect There is a problem that the position of (movable body) can not be specified.

[Voltage switching circuit]
Next, according to the rotation state of the rotation shaft 4908a (4909a) of the first distribution stepping motor 4908 (4909), the operation voltage and the stop voltage are mutually excited as excitation to φ1, φ2, / φ1, / φ2. The voltage switching circuit which can be switched to FIG. 255 is a circuit diagram of a voltage switching circuit.

  The first distribution stepping motor 4908 always swings the first electric distribution piece 4835 in a wiper shape, and the second distribution stepping motor 4909 always swings the second electric distribution piece 4840 in a wiper shape. , It is necessary to always drive the second distribution stepping motor 4908, 4909. However, when the first and second distribution stepping motors 4908 and 4909 are constantly driven, the first and second distribution stepping motors 4908 and 4909 generate excessive heat, which causes problems with the first and second distribution stepping motors 4908 and 4909. And failure may occur. Therefore, it is necessary to suppress heat generation even when the first and second distribution stepping motors 4908 and 4909 are constantly driven.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the first and second distribution stepping motors 4908 and 4909 are driven to swing the first and second electric distribution pieces 4835 and 4840 in the form of a wiper, the operation voltage is used. On the other hand, when the first and second distribution stepping motors 4908 and 4909 are driven to stop the first and second electric distribution pieces 4835 and 4840, the voltage switching circuit is controlled to use the stopping voltage. Is realized.

  First, as shown in FIG. 255, the main control board 1310X can switch between the operating voltage and the stopping voltage as voltages applied to the first and second distributing stepping motors 4908 and 4909, respectively. A 2-way stepping motor voltage switching circuit 1310m, 1310p, and a 1st and 2nd step stepping motor drive ICs 1310n and 1310q capable of driving the 1st and 2nd step stepping motors 4908 4909 are provided.

  Here, since the first and second distribution stepping motor voltage switching circuits 1310 m and 1310 p have the same circuit configuration, and the first and second distribution stepping motor drive ICs 1310 n and 1310 q have the same circuit configuration, In the description of the second distribution stepping motor voltage switching circuit 1310m and 1310p, and in the description of the first and second distribution stepping motor drive ICs 1310n and 1310q, the code related to the second distribution stepping motor 4909 following the code related to the first distribution stepping motor 4908 In parentheses.

  The first split stepping motor voltage switching circuit 1310m (1310p) mainly includes a transistor MTR50 (MTR60), a field effect transistor (FET) MF50 (MF60), a diode M50 (M60), and a poly switch MPS50 (MPS60) as a resettable fuse. It is done. The base terminal of the transistor MTR50 (MTR60) is electrically connected to one end of the resistor MR50 (MR60) and electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR51 (MR61) whose one end is electrically connected to the ground (GND). It is connected to the. The other end of the resistor MR50 (MR60) is not shown as a line for transmitting a signal of voltage switching 1. D-type flip flop for first electric distribution piece voltage switching (a second electric motor not shown for transmitting a signal of voltage switching 2 It is electrically connected to the output terminal of the split-piece voltage switching D-type flip-flop). The input terminal of the first electric distribution split voltage switching D-type flip flop (second electric distribution split voltage switching D type flip flop) is an output of the first electromotive distribution split voltage switching of a predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1310a. It is electrically connected to the terminal (the second motor-driven split voltage switching output terminal).

  The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR50 (MTR60) is electrically connected to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor MTR50 (MTR60) is electrically connected to the gate terminal G of the field effect transistor MF50 (MF60) via the resistor MR52. It is connected to the. The gate terminal G of the field effect transistor MF50 (MF60) is electrically connected to the source terminal S of the field effect transistor MF50 (MF60) via the resistor MR53 (MR63). The source terminal S of the field effect transistor MF50 (MF60) is electrically connected to the +12 V power supply line. The drain terminal D of the field effect transistor MF50 (MF60) is electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the diode MD50 (MD60) which is a rectifying diode, and also electrically connected to one end of the poly switch MPS50 (MPS60) . The anode terminal of the diode MD50 (MD60) is electrically connected to the +5 V power supply line. The other end of the poly switch MPS 50 (MPS 60) is electrically connected to the anode terminals of the Zener diodes MD 51 and MD 52 (MD 61 and MD 62) respectively, and +12 V − for supplying power to the first split stepping motor 4908 (4909). It is electrically connected to the terminal of the connector 1310z (see FIG. 256) as a power supply line of U (+12 V-D).

  In the first distribution stepping motor drive IC 1310 n (1310 q), four chips of an NPN Darlington transistor and four diodes of a chip are incorporated as one package. Of the four elements of the NPN Darlington transistor, the base terminal 1 of the first NPN Darlington transistor is electrically connected to one end of the resistor MR54 (MR64), and the base terminal 5 of the second NPN Darlington transistor is The base terminal 8 of the third NPN Darlington transistor is electrically connected to one end of the resistor MR55 (MR65), and the base of the fourth NPN Darlington transistor is electrically connected to one end of the resistor MR56 (MR66). The terminal 12 is electrically connected to one end of the resistor MR57 (MR67).

  The collector terminal 2 of the first NPN Darlington transistor is electrically connected to the terminal of the connector 1310z (see FIG. 256) as a Uφ1 line (Dφ1 line) through which a current for exciting φ1 of the first distributing stepping motor 4908 (4909) flows. Collector terminal 4 of the second NPN Darlington transistor is connected as a U / φ1 line (D / φ1 line) through which a current for exciting / φ1 of the first split stepping motor 4908 (4909) flows. And the collector terminal 9 of the third NPN Darlington transistor is connected to the Uφ2 line (Dφ2 line) through which the current for exciting φ2 of the first split stepping motor 4908 (4909) flows. Connector 1310z (see Figure 256) And the collector terminal 11 of the fourth NPN Darlington transistor is connected to the U / φ2 line (D / φ2 line) through which the current for exciting / φ2 of the first split stepping motor 4908 (4909) flows. And the terminals of the connector 1310z (see FIG. 256).

  The other end of resistor MR54 (MR64), one end of which is electrically connected to base terminal 1 of the first NPN Darlington transistor, instructs start or stop of excitation of φ1 of first distribution stepping motor 4908. Electrically connected to the output terminal of the φ1 D type flip flop (not shown) of the first distribution stepping motor 4908 (not shown) and the D1 type flip flop of the second distribution stepping motor 4909 not shown. There is. The input terminal of the φ1 D-type flip flop of the first distribution stepping motor 4908 (the D1 type flip-flop of φ1 for the second distribution stepping motor 4909) is a first distribution stepping motor 4908 It is electrically connected to the output terminal for φ1 (the output terminal for φ1 of the second distribution stepping motor 4909).

  The other end of resistor MR55 (MR65), one end of which is electrically connected to base terminal 5 of the second NPN Darlington transistor, instructs start or stop of excitation for / φ1 of first split stepping motor 4908 Electrically with the output terminal of the first distributing stepping motor 4908 (not shown) / D4 type flip-flop (not-shown second distributed stepping motor 4909 / D1 type flip-flop not shown) as a line for transmitting the signal PD5). It is connected. An input terminal of a / φ1 D-type flip-flop of the first distribution stepping motor 4908 (a second allocation stepping motor 4909 // φ1 D-type flip-flop) is a first distribution stepping motor of a predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1310a. It is electrically connected to the 4908's / φ1 output terminal (the / φ1 output terminal of the second distribution stepping motor 4909).

  The other end of the resistor MR56 (MR66), one end of which is electrically connected to the base terminal 8 of the third NPN Darlington transistor, instructs start or stop of the excitation to φ2 of the first split stepping motor 4908 Electrically connected to the output terminal of the φ2 D-type flip-flop (not shown) of the first distribution stepping motor 4908 (not shown) and the D-type flip-flop of the second distribution stepping motor 4909 (not shown) There is. The input terminal of the φ2 D-type flip flop of this first distribution stepping motor 4908 (the D2 type flip-flop for φ2 of the second distribution stepping motor 4909) is a first distribution stepping motor 4908 of a predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1310a. It is electrically connected to the output terminal for φ2 (the output terminal for φ2 of the second distribution stepping motor 4909).

  The other end of resistor MR57 (MR67), one end of which is electrically connected to the base terminal 12 of the fourth NPN Darlington transistor, instructs start and stop of excitation for / φ2 of first split stepping motor 4908 (PD3 ( Electrically with the output terminal of the first distributing stepping motor 4908 (not shown) and / φ2 D type flip-flop (the second distributing stepping motor 4909 / φ2 D type flip flop not shown) as a line for transmitting the signal PD7) It is connected. An input terminal of a / φ2 D-type flip-flop (a second distribution stepping motor 4909 // φ2-D type flip-flop) of the first distributing stepping motor 4908 is a first distributing stepping motor of a predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1310a. It is electrically connected to the 4908 output terminal for / φ2 (the output terminal for / φ2 of the second distribution stepping motor 4909).

  The emitter terminal of the first NPN Darlington transistor and the emitter terminal of the second NPN Darlington transistor are electrically connected to the emitter terminal 6 of the first split stepping motor drive IC 1310 n (1310 q) inside the package. The emitter terminal 6 of the first distribution stepping motor drive IC 1310 n (1310 q) is electrically connected to the ground (GND).

  The emitter terminal of the third NPN Darlington transistor and the emitter terminal of the fourth NPN Darlington transistor are electrically connected to the emitter terminal 7 of the first split stepping motor drive IC 1310 n (1310 q) inside the package. The emitter terminal 7 of the first distribution stepping motor drive IC 1310 n (1310 q) is electrically connected to the ground (GND).

  The first split stepping motor drive IC 1310 n (1310 q) incorporates four diodes, and the first and second diodes form a pair and are disposed in the package, and the third and fourth diodes are paired. It becomes arranged in the package.

  The anode terminal of the first diode is electrically connected to the collector terminal 2 of the first NPN Darlington transistor inside the package, and the anode terminal of the second diode is the collector terminal 4 of the second NPN Darlington transistor. And the cathode terminal of the first diode and the cathode terminal of the second diode are electrically connected to the cathode terminal 3 of the first split stepping motor drive IC 1310 n (1310 q) in the package. It is done. The cathode terminal 3 of the first distribution stepping motor drive IC 1310 n (1310 q) is electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the zener diode MD 51 (MD 61).

  The anode terminal of the third diode is electrically connected to the collector terminal 9 of the third NPN Darlington transistor inside the package, and the anode terminal of the fourth diode is the collector terminal 11 of the fourth NPN Darlington transistor. And the cathode terminal of the third diode and the cathode terminal of the fourth diode are electrically connected to the cathode terminal 10 of the first split stepping motor drive IC 1310 n (1310 q) inside the package. It is done. The cathode terminal 10 of the first distribution stepping motor drive IC 1310 n (1310 q) is electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the zener diode MD 52 (MD 62).

  The first to fourth diodes convert the back electromotive force generated when the excitation to φ 1, φ 2, / φ 1, / φ 2 of the first distributing stepping motor 4908 (4909) is stopped and converts it into heat and removes it Thus, the first to fourth NPN Darlington transistors are protected.

  The power supply line of +12 V-U (+12 V-D) for supplying power to the first distribution stepping motor 4908 (4909) is the first distribution stepping motor via the terminal of the connector 1310z (see FIG. 256) and the wiring not shown. It is electrically connected to φ2C (common) of the third pin of the connector 4908c (4909c) of 4908 (4909) and φ1C (common) of the fourth pin. The U.phi.1 line (D.phi.1 line) through which current for exciting .phi.1 of the first distribution stepping motor 4908 (4909) flows is passed through the terminal of the connector 1310z (see FIG. It is electrically connected to φ1 of the sixth pin of the connector 4908c (4909c) of 4909). The U / φ1 line (D / φ1 line) through which the current exciting the / φ1 of the first distribution stepping motor 4908 (4909) flows is the first via the terminal of the connector 1310z (see FIG. 256) and the wiring not shown. It is electrically connected to / φ1 of the second pin of the connector 4908c (4909c) of the distributing stepping motor 4908 (4909). The Uφ2 line (Dφ2 line) through which the current for exciting φ2 of the first distribution stepping motor 4908 (4909) flows passes through the terminal of the connector 1310z (see FIG. 256) and the wiring not shown in the drawing. It is electrically connected to φ2 of the fifth pin of the connector 4908c (4909c) of 4909). The U / φ2 line (D / φ2 line) through which the current exciting the / φ2 of the first distribution stepping motor 4908 (4909) flows is the first via the terminal of the connector 1310z (see FIG. 256) and the wiring not shown. It is electrically connected to / φ2 of the first pin of the connector 4908c (4909c) of the distributing stepping motor 4908 (4909).

  PD0 to PD3 for instructing start or stop of excitation for φ1, / φ1, φ2, and / φ2 of the first distribution stepping motor 4908, and excitation for φ1, / φ1, φ2, and / φ2 of the second distribution stepping motor 4909 When the oscillation drive data PD0 to PD7, which are 8-bit information including PD4 to PD7 instructing start and stop of the output, are output from the main control MPU 1310a, the corresponding D type flip flop described above, and each resistance Are input to the base terminals 1, 5, 8, 12 of the first distribution stepping motor drive IC 1310 n and the base terminals 1, 5, 8, 12 of the second distribution stepping motor drive IC 1310 q. The first distribution stepping motor drive IC 1310 n (1310 q) is operated by the first distribution stepping motor voltage switching circuit 1310 m (1310 p) according to the rocking drive data PD0 to PD3 (PD4 to PD7) from the main control MPU 1310 a. At the voltage switched to the stop voltage, a current is applied which excites φ1, / φ1, φ2, and / φ2 of the first split stepping motor 4908 (4909).

  Here, the operation of the first distribution stepping motor voltage switching circuit 1310m (1310p) will be briefly described. When the logic of the voltage switching 1 (voltage switching 2) signal from the main control MPU 1310a is output as the operating voltage logic The transistor MTR50 (MTR60) is turned off, and the voltage of the power supply line of +12 V-U (+12 V-D) for supplying power to the first distribution stepping motor 4908 (4909) is pulled up to +12 V by the field effect transistor MF50 (MF60). As a result, +12 V is supplied as a power supply line of +12 V-U (+12 V-D) through the poly switch MPS 50 (MPS 60) as an operation voltage to the first distribution stepping motor 4908 (4909). Note that the power supply line of +12 V-U (+12 V-D) is not supplied to the +5 power supply line via the diode MD50 (MD60).

  On the other hand, when the logic of the signal of voltage switching 1 (voltage switching 2) from the main control MPU 1310a is output as the stop voltage logic obtained by inverting the logic of the operating voltage logic, the transistor MTR50 (MTR60) is turned ON. The power supply line voltage of +12 V-U (+12 V-D) for supplying power to the first split stepping motor 4908 (4909) by blocking +12 V by the field effect transistor MF50 (MF60) is the diode MD50 (MD60) Is pulled up to the +5 V side via the supply voltage, and +5 V is supplied as a power supply line of +12 V-U (+12 V-D) via the poly switch MPS 50 (MPS 60) as a stop voltage to the first distribution stepping motor 4908 (4909) Be done.

  Here, the difference between the temperature rise due to the power consumption of the operating voltage and the power consumption of the stopping voltage will be briefly described. The power consumption W can be calculated by Ohm's law: voltage V × voltage V ÷ resistance R. The power consumption Wo at +12 V which is the operating voltage is 144 / resistance R, and the power consumption Ws at +5 V which is the stopping voltage is 25 / resistance R. Then, the power consumption Wo at +12 V, which is the operating voltage, is five times or more (5.76 = 144/25) compared to the power consumption Ws at +5 V, which is the stopping voltage. It becomes. The same applies to the first distribution stepping motor drive IC 1310 n (1310 q).

  That is, even if the temperature rise is a problem in the single (continuous) drive at +12 V which is the operation voltage, the temperature rise can be suppressed to about 1⁄5 or less by the drive at +5 V which is the stop voltage.

  The package of the first distribution stepping motor drive IC 1310 n (1310 q) generates heat by the first to fourth NPN Darlington transistors that excite φ1, φ2, / φ1, / φ2 of the first distribution stepping motor 4908 (4909), Heat generated by the first to fourth diodes that convert the back electromotive force from φ1, φ2, / φ1, / φ2 of the first split stepping motor 4908 (4909) into heat is absorbed, and the absorbed heat is released to the outside air It escapes to (around the first distribution stepping motor drive IC 1310 n (1310 q)). Since the island facilities of the game hall are arranged in a row with other pachinko machines in reverse, the heat generated from the power supply board of the pachinko machine, various control boards, etc. raises the temperature in the island facilities of the game hall.

  Therefore, even if the package of the first split stepping motor drive IC 1310 n (1310 q) absorbs the heat generated by the first to fourth NPN Darlington transistors and the first to fourth diodes, the first split stepping motor is driven. Since the efficiency of dissipating the absorbed heat to the outside air decreases when the temperature of the outside air is high around the IC 1310 n (13 10 q), heat is stored in the package of the first distribution stepping motor drive IC 1310 n (13 10 q) It will be. Then, when the temperature of the package of the first distribution stepping motor drive IC 1310 n (1310 q) rises and the junction temperature of the first to fourth NPN Darlington transistors rises to the junction temperature, the first to fourth NPN Darlington transistors The transistor may break down.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the first distributing stepping motor 4908 (4909) is driven to rotate the rotation shaft 4908a (4909a) in CW (clockwise) or CCW (counterclockwise), the first By continuously exciting the distribution stepping motor 4908 (4909) to φ1, φ2, / φ1, / φ2 respectively as continuously as possible, the first distribution stepping motor 4908 (4909) to φ1, φ2, / φ1, / φ2 The number of times the excitation is stopped is reduced, and the back electromotive force generated when the excitation to φ 1, φ 2, / φ 1, / φ 2 of the first split stepping motor 4908 (4909) is stopped is determined by the first to fourth back electromotive force The number of times of conversion to heat by the diode can be reduced. As a result, the heat generation by the first to fourth diodes can be suppressed to a small level, which can contribute to the reduction of the temperature rise of the package of the first distribution stepping motor drive IC 1310 n (1310 q). Therefore, failure of the first to fourth NPN Darlington transistors due to heat can be prevented.

  In the present embodiment, a field effect transistor (FET) MF50 (MF60) which is a semiconductor is used for the first distribution stepping motor voltage switching circuit 1310m (1310p) without using a relay. This is because a time lag occurs in the relay and the variation in performance between individuals is large, so it is difficult to control the distribution operation accurately.

Incidentally, conventionally, a game machine has been proposed in which a movable effect is driven by a drive motor (stepping motor) on the front of a liquid crystal display that displays various images in accordance with various effects (eg, JP-A 2008-012194 (paragraph [0039], paragraph [0045] to paragraph [0049], FIG. 2, FIG. 3)). By the way, in the gaming machine described in this document, the drive motor (stepping motor) is excited to cause the movable effect body to produce the effect when the movable effect body is activated by the drive motor (stepping motor) and stopped at the effect position. Since it is necessary not to move from the position, there is a problem that the drive motor (stepping motor) generates excessive heat when excitation to the drive motor (stepping motor) is always performed.
[Poly switch]

  Here, a poly switch will be described as a resettable fuse. FIG. 256 is a schematic view showing the arrangement of poly switches.

  The operating voltage or the stopping voltage is supplied to the first distribution stepping motor 4908 (4909) as a power supply line of +12 V-U (+12 V-D) through the poly switch MPS 50 (MPS 60). In the poly switch MPS 50 (MPS 60), in the relation between element resistance and element temperature, the resistance value increases rapidly from a specific temperature and the main body generates heat, and the heat lowers the conductivity by this heat to interrupt the current. When cooled, the conductivity returns and returns. When this is used, the current flowing to the first distributing stepping motor 4908 (4909) which is a load is limited to thereby make the first distributing stepping motor 4908 (4909) which is a load. ) Can be protected. A fuse can be mentioned as one that limits the current to the load. Although this fuse can cut off the current flowing to the load by melting when an overcurrent flows, it is necessary to replace the fuse itself with a new one.

  However, it is necessary to prevent a person who acquires an illegal gaming ball by illegally changing an important main control board 1310X for controlling the progress of the game, such as the pachinko machine 1. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 256, main control board 1310 X is accommodated in main control board box 1320 configured of transparent cover body 1301 and transparent base body 1302, and cover body 1301 and base body 1302. And are crimped by a one-way screw or the like of the crimped portion 1303. The caulking unit 1303 is a sealing mechanism, and includes a plurality of caulking units. The main control board box 1320 can be closed by caulking the cover body 1301 and the base body 1302 with a one-way screw or the like of the caulking portion 1303 using one sealing mechanism, and then, the main control board box 1320 is opened. It is necessary to destroy the sealing mechanism. That is, the cover body 1301 can not be removed from the base body 1302 unless the sealing mechanism is broken. Then, a fuse is mounted on the main control substrate 1310X, and if the fuse is blown, the crimped portion 1303 must be broken. However, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed in the game hall, the caulking portion 1303 of the main control board box 1320 provided in the pachinko machine 1 can not be broken, so the fuse can not be replaced and the game is played. It can not be done.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, as in the case of the fuse, a poly switch is adopted as an element for limiting the overcurrent. Thus, when an overcurrent flows in the poly switch, the identification of the poly switch can limit the current flowing to the load to protect the load. That is, unlike a fuse, the poly switch itself due to an overcurrent is not destroyed and does not need to be replaced at all, and the first distribution stepping motor 4908 (4909) which is a load can be protected, and the caulking portion 1303 needs to be destroyed. There is no

  In the poly switch MPS 50 (MPS 60), the main body has a rectangular parallelepiped shape, and is a lead linear shape in which two leads project downward from the bottom surface. In the poly switch MPS 50 (MPS 60), as described above, in the relation between the element resistance and the element temperature, the resistance value rapidly increases from the specific temperature and the main body generates heat, and the heat decreases the conductivity to cause the current It shuts off, and when the body cools, the conductivity returns and returns. Therefore, the thickness of the main body of the poly switch MPS 50 (MPS 60) is obtained by arranging the two leads of the poly switch MPS 50 (MPS 60) in the vertical direction in order to efficiently cool the heat of the poly switch MPS 50 (MPS 60). The surface which becomes smaller can be made vertical, which facilitates the convection of the heat generated by the main body of the poly switch MPS 50 (MPS 60) upward.

  Further, since a large current flows in the poly switch MPS 50 (MPS 60), the terminal for supplying power to the first distribution stepping motor 4908 (4909), each phase (φ1, / φ1 of the power supply first distribution stepping motor 4908 (4909) , .Phi.2, /.phi.2) are arranged in the vicinity of a connector 1310z having terminals and the like. This can contribute to reducing the influence of noise due to the current to the first distribution stepping motor 4908 (4909) with respect to other electronic components mounted on the main control board 1310X.

  In addition, since the poly switch MPS 50 (MPS 60) can limit the current flowing to the first distribution stepping motor 4908 (4909), it can protect the first distribution stepping motor 4908 (4909) from overheating.

  In this embodiment, a poly switch MPS 50 is provided exclusively for the first distribution stepping motor 4908 in the first distribution stepping motor voltage switching circuit 1310 m of the main control board 1310 X, and a poly switch MPS 50 is provided for the second distribution stepping motor 4909. The poly switch MPS 60 is dedicated to one second distributed stepping motor voltage switching circuit 1310 p of the main control board 1310 X, but instead, the collector terminals 2 of the first and second distributed stepping motor drive ICs 1310 n and 1310 q Even if one poly switch is provided between 4 and 9 and 11 and the corresponding terminals of the connectors 4908 c and 4909 c of the first and second split stepping motors 4908 and 4909 respectively, only one poly switch may be provided. Good.

  Further, in the present embodiment, a poly switch MPS 50 is provided exclusively for the first distribution stepping motor 4908 in the first distribution stepping motor voltage switching circuit 1310 m of the main control board 1310 X, and a second distribution stepping motor 4909 is provided. The poly switch MPS 60 is exclusively provided for the second split stepping motor voltage switching circuit 1310 p of the main control board 1310 X, but instead is supplied to the first and second split stepping motor voltage switching circuits 1310 m and 1310 p respectively. The common poly switches may be dedicatedly provided for each of the motor power supplies of +12 V and +5 V, or supplied to the first and second split stepping motor voltage switching circuits 1310 m and 1310 p. With + 12V Common poly switch only for motor power may be configured to provide one dedicated.

  Also, for example, in the case of driving another stepping motor together with the first distribution stepping motor 4908 (the first distribution stepping motor 4908 is driven by the first distribution stepping motor drive IC 1310 n and the other stepping motor is the other stepping motor drive IC In the case of driving by (1), the motor power supplied to the other stepping motor together with the first distributing stepping motor 4908 can be switched by the first distributing stepping motor voltage switching circuit 1310 m. In this case, the common poly switch for the first distribution stepping motor 4908 and the other stepping motor is the poly switch MPS 50, and the motor power of +12 V or +5 V is other stepping with the first distribution stepping motor 4908 through this poly switch MPS 50 Each is supplied to the motor.

  Moreover, in the present embodiment, unipolar stepping motors are used as the first and second distribution stepping motors 4908 and 4909, but instead, bipolar stepping motors may be used. In this case, one poly switch is dedicated to each terminal to which motor power of +12 V and +5 V is supplied to the bipolar stepping motor.

Further, in the present embodiment, the poly switch employed as the resettable fuse is a PPTC (Polymer Positive Temperature) such as a polymer-based PTC (abbreviation of Positive Temperature Coefficient) thermistor.
The same effect as the poly switch described above can be obtained by adopting a ceramic PTC (abbreviation of positive temperature coefficient) element or a bimetal as a resettable fuse, although the element is an element of Coefficient.

  Incidentally, conventionally, the game control board (control board) is housed in the housing member (cover body) in the base member (base body), and the base box and the housing member are fixed by the caulking portion (sticking means). There has been proposed a gaming machine provided (for example, JP-A-2010-234125 (paragraph [0017], paragraph [0027], FIG. 7)). By the way, in the gaming machine described in this document, when a fuse is provided on the game control board (control board) accommodated in the board box as a countermeasure against the overcurrent, the fuse is blown and the base member (base body) is accommodated. There is a problem that the fuse can not be replaced and the game control board (control board) can not be used because the member (cover body) is fixed by the caulking portion (fixing means).

[Drive management block of first and second distributed stepping motors]
Next, drive management blocks of the first and second distribution stepping motors 4908 and 4909 will be described. FIG. 257 is a table for explaining the drive management block of the first distribution stepping motor 4908, and FIG. 258 is a table for explaining the drive management block of the second distribution stepping motor 4909.

  With set value 1, set value 2, set value 3, set value 4, set value 5 and set value 6, the table corresponding to the block that manages the drive of the first distribution stepping motor 4908 and the second distribution stepping motor 4909 The values are set to be different based on the relationship with the table corresponding to the block managing the drive of the electric drive source, and the first electric distribution piece 4835 and the second electric distribution piece 4840 which are disadvantageous for the player And stop time are set in advance so as to be different. This is because, in the case where the stop times of the first electric distribution piece 4835 and the second electric distribution piece 4840 which are advantageous for the player are set to be different, the probability is obtained by changing the time which is advantageous for the player a little. This is because it changes significantly.

  In the drive management block of the first distribution stepping motor 4908, for setting value 1, setting value 2, setting value 3, setting value 4, setting value 5, and setting value 6, setting value 1, setting value 2, and setting The excitation time of the value 3 is mutually changed, and in the drive management block of the second distribution stepping motor 4909, the excitation times of the set value 4, the set value 5 and the set value 6 are mutually changed. This is performed by separately performing the first and second distribution stepping motors 4908 and 4909 in which the excitation time is changed, which one of the first electric distribution piece 4835 and the second electric distribution piece 4840 is changed to It is because it can be made hard to be detected by the player.

  Here, among the setting value 1, setting value 2, setting value 3, setting value 4, setting value 5, and setting value 6, the drive management block which is previously set to setting value 1 will be described. The drive management blocks of the first and second distribution stepping motors 4908 and 4909 are stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM of the main control MPU 1310 a of the main control board 1310 X. In the port output process of step S118 in the main control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 177 repeatedly performed every 4 milliseconds (ms), main control MPU 1310a follows the drive management block to execute the first and second distribution stepping motors 4908, As driving control of 4909, rocking drive data PD0 to PD7 are output to first and second distribution stepping motor drive ICs 1310n and 1310q, and voltage switching control of first and second distribution stepping motors 4908 and 4909 is performed first and second The signals of voltage switching 1 and 2 whose logic is set are output to the 2-way stepping motor voltage switching circuits 1310 m and 1310 p.

  As described above, the first and second distribution stepping motors 4908 and 4909 have D-cut surfaces formed on the rotary shafts 4908 a and 4909 a when φ1 and φ2 set to the reference excitation phase are excited (ON). The D-cut angular position is obtained by rotating the angle counterclockwise by 10 ° (tolerance ± 3 °) from the horizontal center line. In this embodiment, eight combinations of excitation of each phase of φ1, φ2, / φ1 and / φ2 of the first and second distribution stepping motors 4908 and 4909 described later (each of φ1, φ2, / φ1 and / φ2) There exist the cases where all the phases are not excited), and the rotational position of the rotary shafts 4908a and 4909a can be determined by the combination of the excitation of each of the eight phases.

  In this embodiment, eight combinations of the excitation of each phase of φ1, φ2, / φ1 and / φ2 of the first and second distribution stepping motors 4908 and 4909 include combination 1: φ1 and φ2 excitation (ON), Combination 2: only φ2 excitation (ON), combination 3: φ2, / φ1 excitation (ON), combination 4: only / φ1 excitation (ON), combination 5: / φ1, / φ2 excitation (ON), combination 7 :: Only φ2 is excited (ON), and combination 8: / φ2, φ1 excitation (ON) exists.

  In this embodiment, the rotational directions and rotational positions of the rotational shafts 4908a and 4909a are defined as a drive management block formed of eight combinations of excitation of each phase, and according to this drive management block, the main control board 1310X is provided. PD0 to PD3 instructing main unit MPU 1310a to start and stop excitation of φ1, / φ1, φ2, and / φ2 of first distribution stepping motor 4908, and φ1, / φ1, φ2 and second distribution stepping motor 4909 Of swing drive data PD0 to PD7 which are 8-bit information including PD4 to PD7 instructing start / stop of excitation for / φ2, PD0 to PD3 are output to the first distribution stepping motor drive IC 1310 n Pair PD4 to PD7 with the second distribution stepping motor drive IC 1310q. Output. At this time, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X sets and outputs the logic of the signal of voltage switching 1 to the first distribution stepping motor voltage switching circuit 1310m according to the drive management block, and the second distribution stepping motor voltage By setting and outputting the logic of the signal of voltage switching 2 to the switching circuit 1310 p, φ 1, / φ 1, φ 2, and of the first distribution stepping motor 4908 with the operation voltage or the voltage switched to the stopping voltage. A current exciting L / φ2 is supplied to rotate the rotation shaft 4908a of the first distribution stepping motor 4908 clockwise, counterclockwise, or stop the rotation, and φ1 of the second distribution stepping motor 4909 , / Φ 1, φ 2, and / φ 2 by passing a current to excite the second split stepping motor The rotation shaft 4909a of 4909 is rotated clockwise, counterclockwise, or stopped. As a result, the first distribution stepping motor 4908 swings the first electric distribution piece 4835 and always shakes like a wiper (a wiper that always reciprocates between the position of the mechanical end on the left side and the position of the mechanical end on the right). While moving, the second distribution stepping motor 4909 swings the second electric distribution piece 4840 and always wipers (a wiper that always reciprocates between the position of the left mechanical end and the position of the vertically inverted mechanical end) Swing to the

[Drive management block of first distribution stepping motor]
As shown in FIG. 257, the drive management block of the first distribution stepping motor 4908 includes the management number (No.) of the drive management block, the rotation direction, the number of steps, the pulse width (milliseconds (ms)), and the excitation time (millimeters) Seconds (ms), excitation mode, voltage (V), and excitation phase designation. As the management number, No. 1 to No. It is regulated up to 20.

  Control No. 1 for rotation direction: stop, step number: none ("-" symbol in the figure), pulse width (ms): none ("-" symbol in the figure), excitation time (ms): 12, excitation mode: 2 Phase, voltage (V): +12 (operating voltage, described as “12” in the figure, the same applies hereinafter) Excitation phase designation: φ1, φ2 (in the figure, the phase to be excited is “o” symbol, the same applies hereinafter) It is prescribed. Control No. When the first distribution stepping motor 4908 is driven according to 1, the first electric distribution piece 4835 reaches the position of the mechanical end on the right side, and is distributed to the left path flowing to the left toward the front of the ball passage 4834 to perform the second distribution It is connected to the unit 4829b.

  Note that, as described above, the angles of the D-cut surface formed on the rotation shaft 4908a are made counterclockwise from the horizontal center line by exciting (ON) φ1 and φ2 set to the reference excitation phase. It becomes a position rotated by 10 ° (tolerance ± 3 °) and becomes a D-cut angular position. In the present embodiment, with the first electric distribution piece 4835 positioned at the mechanical end on the left side, the angle of the D cut surface formed on the rotation shaft 4908a is 10 ° counterclockwise from the horizontal center line (tolerance ± It is designed in advance to have a position rotated by 3 °) and a D-cut angular position.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, it is possible to determine the excitation phase of the first distribution stepping motor 4908 and the rotational position (excluding the position of each mechanical end) of the first electric distribution piece 4835. Therefore, when the first motor distribution piece 4835 rotates toward the position of the mechanical end on the left side, the φ1 and φ2 set in the reference excitation phase are excited (ON), thereby the first motor distribution piece When the first motor distribution piece 4835 rotates toward the position of the mechanical end on the right side while 4835 is at the position of the mechanical end on the left side, φ1 and φ2 set in the reference excitation phase are excited (ON) As a result, the first electric distribution piece 4835 becomes the position of the mechanical end on the right side.

  Control No. Direction of rotation: 2 CW (clockwise), number of steps: 1, pulse width (ms): 4, excitation time (ms): 4, excitation mode: 1 phase, voltage (V): +12 (operating voltage And excitation phase designation: φ2 is specified. Control No. When the first distribution stepping motor 4908 is driven according to 2, the rotation position of the rotation axis 4908a of the first distribution stepping motor 4908 is CW (clockwise) by one step, and the rotation of the rotation axis 4908a is a gear mechanism (FIG. 240) (See FIGS. 247 and 248) to the first electric distribution piece 4835, and the first electric distribution piece 4835 moves from the position of the mechanical end on the right to the position of the mechanical end on the left by an angle equivalent to one step ( In other words, CCW (counterclockwise) rotates. Control No. No. 1 to management number No. If it progresses to 2, the excitation mode of 1st distribution stepping motor 4908 switches from 2 phases to 1 phase.

  Control No. 3, rotation direction: CW (clockwise), number of steps: 1, pulse width (ms): 4, excitation time (ms): 4, excitation mode: 2 phases, voltage (V): +12 (operating voltage And excitation phase designation: φ2, / φ1 are specified. Control No. When the first distribution stepping motor 4908 is driven according to 3, the rotation position of the rotation axis 4908a of the first distribution stepping motor 4908 is CW (clockwise) by one step, and the rotation of the rotation axis 4908a is a gear mechanism (FIG. 240) (See FIGS. 247 and 248) to the first motor-driven distribution piece 4835. It rotates from the position of the first electric distribution piece 4835 rotated by 2 toward the position of the mechanical end on the left by an angle corresponding to one step (that is, CCW (counterclockwise)). Control No. 2 to the management number No. If it progresses to 3, the excitation mode of 1st distribution stepping motor 4908 will switch from 1 phase to 2 phases.

  Control No. Direction of rotation: CW: clockwise (CW), step number: 1, pulse width (ms): 4, excitation time (ms): 4, excitation mode: 1 phase, voltage (V): +12 (operating voltage And excitation phase designation: / φ1 is specified. Control No. When the first distribution stepping motor 4908 is driven according to 4, the rotation position of the rotation axis 4908a of the first distribution stepping motor 4908 is CW (clockwise) by one step, and the rotation of the rotation axis 4908a is a gear mechanism (FIG. 240) (See FIGS. 247 and 248) to the first motor-driven distribution piece 4835. It rotates toward the position of the mechanical end on the left (that is, CCW (counterclockwise)) by an angle corresponding to one step from the position of the first electric distribution piece 4835 rotated by 3. Control No. 3 to the management number No. When the process proceeds to 4, the excitation mode of the first distribution stepping motor 4908 switches from two phases to one phase.

  Control No. 5, the rotational direction: CW (clockwise), number of steps: 1, pulse width (ms): 4, excitation time (ms): 0 (zero), excitation mode: two phases, voltage (V): +12 ( Operating voltage), excitation phase designation: / φ1, / φ2 are specified. Control No. When the first distribution stepping motor 4908 is driven according to 5, the rotation axis 4908a of the first distribution stepping motor 4908 is at a rotational position CW (clockwise) by one step, and the rotation of the rotation axis 4908a is a gear mechanism (FIG. 240) (See FIGS. 247 and 248) to the first motor-driven distribution piece 4835. It rotates from the position of the first electric distribution piece 4835 rotated by 4 toward the position of the mechanical end on the left side by an angle corresponding to one step (that is, CCW (counterclockwise)). Control No. The position of the first electromotive distribution piece 4835 rotated by 5 is at a middle position in the range from the position of the left mechanical end to the position of the right mechanical end, and the first electromotive distribution piece 4835 is vertically inverted. It will be in the state of Control No. 4 to the management number No. If it progresses to 5, the excitation mode of 1st distribution stepping motor 4908 will switch from 1 phase to 2 phases.

  Control No. In 5, the excitation time (ms): 0 (zero) is specified. This is because, when the first electric distribution piece 4835 rotates to the position of the mechanical end on the left side, the first electric distribution piece 4835 is vertically inverted because the inertia of the first electric distribution piece 4835 is small. Immediately before, by weakening the torque of the first distribution stepping motor 4908, the control number No. 1 is obtained. This is to prevent the first electric distribution piece 4835 from rotating further than the position defined by the numeral 5, and to ensure the followability.

  Specifically, when the first motor-driven distribution piece 4835 rotates toward the position of the mechanical end on the left side by measurement with a high-speed camera, management number No. Before the first distribution stepping motor 4908 is driven in accordance with the conditions defined in 9, the first electric distribution piece 4835 reaches the position of the mechanical end on the left side, and the control number and the first electric distribution piece 4835 are obtained. We confirmed the fact that the correspondence with the rotational position of was broken. Therefore, immediately before the first electric distribution piece 4835 is vertically inverted, that is, with the control number No. By defining the excitation time (ms): 0 (zero) in 5 and weakening the torque of the first distribution stepping motor 4908, the correspondence between the control number and the rotational position of the first electric distribution piece 4835 is prevented from being broken. I figured out that I could do it.

  Control No. 6, rotation direction: CW (clockwise), number of steps: 1, pulse width (ms): 4, excitation time (ms): 4, excitation mode: 1 phase, voltage (V): +12 (operating voltage And excitation phase designation: / φ2 is specified. Control No. When the first distribution stepping motor 4908 is driven according to 6, the rotation axis 4908a of the first distribution stepping motor 4908 is at a rotational position CW (clockwise) by one step, and the rotation of the rotation axis 4908a is a gear mechanism (FIG. 240) (See FIGS. 247 and 248) to the first motor-driven distribution piece 4835. It rotates from the position of the first electromotive distribution piece 4835 rotated by 5 toward the position of the mechanical end on the left side by an angle corresponding to one step (that is, CCW (counterclockwise)). Control No. No. 5 to management number No. When the process proceeds to 6, the excitation mode of the first distribution stepping motor 4908 is switched from the two phase to the one phase.

  Control No. 7, rotation direction: CW (clockwise), number of steps: 1, pulse width (ms): 4, excitation time (ms): 4, excitation mode: 2 phases, voltage (V): +12 (operating voltage , Excitation phase designation: / φ2, φ1 are specified. Control No. When the first distribution stepping motor 4908 is driven according to 7, the rotation position of the rotation axis 4908a of the first distribution stepping motor 4908 is CW (clockwise) by one step, and the rotation of the rotation axis 4908a is a gear mechanism (FIG. 240) (See FIGS. 247 and 248) to the first motor-driven distribution piece 4835. 6 from the position of the first electric distribution piece 4835 rotated by 6 toward the position of the mechanical end on the left side by an angle corresponding to one step (that is, CCW (counterclockwise)). Control No. 6 to the management number No. When the process proceeds to 7, the excitation mode of the first distribution stepping motor 4908 is switched from one phase to two phases.

  Control No. 8, rotation direction: CW (clockwise), number of steps: 1, pulse width (ms): 4, excitation time (ms): 4, excitation mode: 1 phase, voltage (V): +12 (operating voltage And excitation phase designation: φ1 is specified. Control No. When the first distribution stepping motor 4908 is driven according to 8, the rotation position of the rotation axis 4908a of the first distribution stepping motor 4908 is CW (clockwise) by one step, and the rotation of the rotation axis 4908a is a gear mechanism (FIG. 240) (See FIGS. 247 and 248) to the first motor-driven distribution piece 4835. 7 from the position of the first motor-driven distribution piece 4835 rotated by 7 toward the position of the mechanical end on the left side by an angle corresponding to one step (that is, CCW (counterclockwise)). Control No. 7 to No. If it progresses to 8, the excitation mode of 1st distribution stepping motor 4908 will switch from 2 phases to 1 phase.

  Control No. 9, rotation direction: CW (clockwise), number of steps: 1, pulse width (ms): 4, excitation time (ms): 4, excitation mode: 2 phases, voltage (V): +12 (operating voltage And excitation phase designations: φ1 and φ2 are specified. Control No. When the first distribution stepping motor 4908 is driven according to 9, the rotation position of the rotation axis 4908a of the first distribution stepping motor 4908 is CW (clockwise) by one step, and the rotation of the rotation axis 4908a is a gear mechanism (FIG. 240) (See FIGS. 247 and 248) to the first motor-driven distribution piece 4835. It rotates toward the position of the mechanical end on the left side (that is, CCW (counterclockwise)) by an angle corresponding to one step from the position of the first electric distribution piece 4835 rotated by 8. As a result, the first electric distribution piece 4835 reaches the position of the mechanical end on the left side, and is distributed to the right path flowing to the right toward the front of the ball passage 4834, and is distributed thirdly via the screw passage 4836 which descends spirally. It is connected to the unit 4829c. Control No. 8 to No. When the process proceeds to 9, the excitation mode of the first distribution stepping motor 4908 is switched from one phase to two phases.

  When φ1 and φ2 set to the reference excitation phase are excited (ON), as described above, the angle of the D cut surface formed on the rotation shaft 4908a is 10 ° counterclockwise from the horizontal center line It becomes a position rotated by (a tolerance of ± 3 °) and becomes a D-cut angular position. In the present embodiment, with the first electric distribution piece 4835 positioned at the mechanical end on the left side, the angle of the D cut surface formed on the rotation shaft 4908a is 10 ° counterclockwise from the horizontal center line (tolerance ± It is designed in advance to have a position rotated by 3 °) and a D-cut angular position.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, it is possible to determine the excitation phase of the first distribution stepping motor 4908 and the rotational position (excluding the position of each mechanical end) of the first electric distribution piece 4835. Therefore, when the first motor distribution piece 4835 rotates toward the position of the mechanical end on the left side, the φ1 and φ2 set in the reference excitation phase are excited (ON), thereby the first motor distribution piece When the first motor distribution piece 4835 rotates toward the position of the mechanical end on the right side while 4835 is at the position of the mechanical end on the left side, φ1 and φ2 set in the reference excitation phase are excited (ON) As a result, the first electric distribution piece 4835 becomes the position of the mechanical end on the right side. Control No. 8 to No. By moving to 9, the first electric distribution piece 4835 is at the position of the mechanical end on the left side, and the angle of the D cut surface formed on the rotating shaft 4908a is 10 ° counterclockwise from the horizontal center line (tolerance ± 3 ° And the D-cut angular position.

  Control No. 10: direction of rotation: stop, number of steps: none, pulse width (ms): none, excitation time (ms): 8, excitation mode: 2 phases, voltage (V): +12 (voltage for operation), excitation phase Designation: φ1, φ2 are defined. Control No. When the first distribution stepping motor 4908 is driven in accordance with No. 10, the control number No. 10 is transmitted. The position of the first electric distribution piece 4835 rotated by 9 is maintained. As a result, the first electric distribution piece 4835 reaches the position of the mechanical end on the left and is maintained in the stopped state, and is distributed to the right track flowing to the right toward the front of the ball passage 4834 and spirally descends the screw passage 4836 The state of being connected to the third distribution unit 4829c is maintained. Control No. 9 to the management number No. If it progresses to 10, the excitation mode of 1st distribution stepping motor 4908 will be continued, and it will be maintained by 2 phases.

  Control No. 11, rotation direction: CCW (counterclockwise), number of steps: 1, pulse width (ms): 4, excitation time (ms): 4, excitation mode: 1 phase, voltage (V): +12 (for operation Voltage), excitation phase designation: φ1 is specified. Control No. When the first distribution stepping motor 4908 is driven according to 11, the rotation position of the rotation axis 4908a of the first distribution stepping motor 4908 is CCW (counterclockwise) by one step, and the rotation of the rotation axis 4908a is a gear mechanism (FIG. , FIG. 247 and FIG. 248) to the first motor-driven distribution piece 4835. From the position of the mechanical end on the left side which is the position of the first electric distribution piece 4835 rotated by 10 (management number No. 9) toward the position on the mechanical end on the right side by an angle equivalent to one step (that is, CW (clockwise) )Rotate. Control No. The position of the first electric distribution piece 4835 rotated by 11 is the same as the control number No. The position of the first electric distribution piece 4835 rotated by 8 is obtained. Control No. 10 to the management number No. When the process proceeds to 11, the excitation mode of the first distribution stepping motor 4908 is switched from the two phase to the one phase.

  Control No. 12, direction of rotation: CCW (counterclockwise), number of steps: 1, pulse width (ms): 4, excitation time (ms): 4, excitation mode: 2 phases, voltage (V): +12 (for operation Voltage), excitation phase designation: / φ2, φ1 are specified. Control No. When the first distribution stepping motor 4908 is driven according to 12, the rotation position of the rotation axis 4908a of the first distribution stepping motor 4908 is CCW (counterclockwise) by one step, and the rotation of the rotation axis 4908a is a gear mechanism (FIG. , FIG. 247 and FIG. 248) to the first motor-driven distribution piece 4835. It rotates toward the position of the mechanical end on the right side (that is, CW (clockwise)) by an angle corresponding to one step from the position of the first motor-driven distribution piece 4835 rotated by 11. Control No. The position of the first electric distribution piece 4835 rotated by 12 is the same as the control number No. The position of the first electric distribution piece 4835 rotated by 7 is obtained. Control No. No. 11 to management number No. When the process proceeds to 12, the excitation mode of the first distribution stepping motor 4908 is switched from one phase to two phases.

  Control No. 13, rotation direction: CCW (counterclockwise), number of steps: 1, pulse width (ms): 4, excitation time (ms): 4, excitation mode: 1 phase, voltage (V): +12 (for operation Voltage), excitation phase designation: / φ2 is specified. Control No. When the first distribution stepping motor 4908 is driven according to 13, the rotation position of the rotation axis 4908a of the first distribution stepping motor 4908 is CCW (counterclockwise) by one step, and the rotation of the rotation axis 4908a is a gear mechanism (FIG. 240). , FIG. 247 and FIG. 248) to the first motor-driven distribution piece 4835. It rotates toward the position of the mechanical end on the right side (that is, CW (clockwise)) by an angle corresponding to one step from the position of the first motor-driven distribution piece 4835 rotated by 12. Control No. The position of the first electric distribution piece 4835 rotated by 13 is the same as that of the control number No. The position of the first electric distribution piece 4835 rotated by 6 is obtained. Control No. 12 to the management number No. If it progresses to 13, the excitation mode of 1st distribution stepping motor 4908 will switch from 2 phases to 1 phase.

  Control No. 14: Direction of rotation: CCW (counterclockwise), number of steps: 1, pulse width (ms): 4, excitation time (ms): 0 (zero), excitation mode: 2 phases, voltage (V): +12 (Operating voltage), excitation phase designation: / φ1, / φ2 are specified. Control No. When the first distribution stepping motor 4908 is driven according to 14, the rotation position of the rotation axis 4908a of the first distribution stepping motor 4908 is CCW (counterclockwise) by one step, and the rotation of the rotation axis 4908a is a gear mechanism (FIG. 240). , FIG. 247 and FIG. 248) to the first motor-driven distribution piece 4835. It rotates toward the position of the mechanical end on the right side (that is, CW (clockwise)) by an angle corresponding to one step from the position of the first electromotive distribution piece 4835 rotated by 13. Control No. The position of the first electric distribution piece 4835 rotated by 14 is the same as that of the control number No. The first electric distribution piece 4835 is vertically inverted with the position of the first electric distribution piece 4835 rotated by 5 at the middle of the range from the position of the right mechanical end to the position of the left mechanical end. It will be in the state of Control No. 13 to the management number No. At 14, the excitation mode of the first distribution stepping motor 4908 switches from one phase to two phases.

  Control No. In 14, an excitation time (ms): 0 (zero) is specified. This is because the first electric distribution piece 4835 is vertically inverted because the inertia of the first electric distribution piece 4835 is small when the first electric distribution piece 4835 rotates toward the position of the mechanical end on the right side. Immediately before, the first electric distribution piece 4835 has a management number No. No. 4 by weakening the torque of the first distribution stepping motor 4908. It is for preventing further rotation from the position which 14 prescribes, and is for ensuring a flattery nature.

  Specifically, when the first motor-driven distribution piece 4835 rotates toward the position of the mechanical end on the right side by measurement with a high-speed camera, management number No. Before the first distribution stepping motor 4908 is driven according to the condition defined in 18, the first electric distribution piece 4835 has reached the position of the mechanical end on the right side, and the control number and the first electric distribution piece 4835 are obtained. We confirmed the fact that the correspondence with the rotational position of was broken. Therefore, immediately before the first electric distribution piece 4835 is vertically inverted, that is, with the control number No. By defining the excitation time (ms): 0 (zero) at 14 and weakening the torque of the first distribution stepping motor 4908, the correspondence between the control number and the rotational position of the first electric distribution piece 4835 is prevented from being broken. I figured out that I could do it.

  Control No. Direction of rotation: CCW (counterclockwise), number of steps: 1, pulse width (ms): 4, excitation time (ms): 4, excitation mode: 1 phase, voltage (V): +12 (for operation Voltage), excitation phase designation: / φ1 is specified. Control No. When the first distribution stepping motor 4908 is driven according to 15, the rotation position of the rotation axis 4908a of the first distribution stepping motor 4908 is CCW (counterclockwise) by one step, and the rotation of the rotation axis 4908a is a gear mechanism (FIG. , FIG. 247 and FIG. 248) to the first motor-driven distribution piece 4835. It rotates from the position of the first electromotive distribution piece 4835 rotated by 14 toward the position of the mechanical end on the right side by an angle corresponding to one step (that is, CW (clockwise)). Control No. The position of the first electric distribution piece 4835 rotated by 15 is the same as the control number No. The position of the first electric distribution piece 4835 rotated by 4 is obtained. Control No. No. 14 to management number No. If it progresses to 15, the excitation mode of 1st distribution stepping motor 4908 will switch from 2 phases to 1 phase.

  Control No. Direction of rotation: CCW (counterclockwise), step number: 1, pulse width (ms): 4, excitation time (ms): 4, excitation mode: 2 phases, voltage (V): +12 (for operation Voltage) and excitation phase designation: φ2, / φ1 are specified. Control No. When the first distribution stepping motor 4908 is driven according to 16, the rotation position of the rotation axis 4908a of the first distribution stepping motor 4908 is CCW (counterclockwise) by one step, and the rotation of the rotation axis 4908a is a gear mechanism (FIG. 240). , FIG. 247 and FIG. 248) to the first motor-driven distribution piece 4835. From the position of the first electric distribution piece 4835 rotated by 15, it rotates toward the position of the mechanical end on the right side by an angle corresponding to one step (that is, CW (clockwise)). Control No. The position of the first electric distribution piece 4835 rotated by 16 is the same as the control number No. The position of the first electric distribution piece 4835 rotated by 3 is obtained. Control No. No. 15 to management number No. If it progresses to 16, the excitation mode of 1st distribution stepping motor 4908 will switch from 1 phase to 2 phases.

  Control No. Direction of rotation: CCW (counterclockwise), step number: 1, pulse width (ms): 4, excitation time (ms): 4, excitation mode: 1 phase, voltage (V): +12 (for operation Voltage), excitation phase designation: φ2 is specified. Control No. When the first distribution stepping motor 4908 is driven according to 17, the rotation position of the rotation axis 4908a of the first distribution stepping motor 4908 is CCW (counterclockwise) by one step, and the rotation of the rotation axis 4908a is a gear mechanism (FIG. 240). , FIG. 247 and FIG. 248) to the first motor-driven distribution piece 4835. From the position of the first motor-driven distribution piece 4835 rotated by 16, it rotates toward the position of the mechanical end on the right side by an angle corresponding to one step (that is, CW (clockwise)). Control No. The position of the first electric distribution piece 4835 rotated by 17 is the same as that of the control number No. The position of the first electric distribution piece 4835 rotated by 2 is obtained. Control No. No. 16 to management number No. If it progresses to 17, the excitation mode of 1st distribution stepping motor 4908 will switch from 2 phases to 1 phase.

  Control No. Direction of rotation: CCW (counterclockwise), number of steps: 1, pulse width (ms): 4, excitation time (ms): 4, excitation mode: 2 phases, voltage (V): +12 (for operation Voltage), excitation phase designation: φ1, φ2 are specified. Control No. When the first distribution stepping motor 4908 is driven according to the rotation of the first distribution stepping motor 4908, the rotation position of the rotation axis 4908a of the first distribution stepping motor 4908 is CCW (counterclockwise) by one step, and the rotation of the rotation axis 4908a is a gear mechanism (FIG. , FIG. 247 and FIG. 248) to the first motor-driven distribution piece 4835. The position of the first electric distribution piece 4835 rotated by 17 is rotated toward the position of the mechanical end on the right side by an angle corresponding to one step (that is, CW (clockwise)). Control No. The position of the first electric distribution piece 4835 rotated by 18 is the same as the control number No. The position of the first electric distribution piece 4835 rotated by 1 is obtained. As a result, the first electric distribution piece 4835 reaches the position of the mechanical end on the right side, is distributed to the left track that flows to the left toward the front of the ball passage 4834, and is connected to the second distribution portion 4829b. Control No. No. 17 to No. If it progresses to 18, the excitation mode of 1st distribution stepping motor 4908 will switch from 1 phase to 2 phases.

  When φ1 and φ2 set to the reference excitation phase are excited (ON), as described above, the angle of the D cut surface formed on the rotation shaft 4908a is 10 ° counterclockwise from the horizontal center line It becomes a position rotated by (a tolerance of ± 3 °) and becomes a D-cut angular position. In the present embodiment, with the first electric distribution piece 4835 positioned at the mechanical end on the left side, the angle of the D cut surface formed on the rotation shaft 4908a is 10 ° counterclockwise from the horizontal center line (tolerance ± It is designed in advance to have a position rotated by 3 °) and a D-cut angular position.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, it is possible to determine the excitation phase of the first distribution stepping motor 4908 and the rotational position (excluding the position of each mechanical end) of the first electric distribution piece 4835. Therefore, when the first motor distribution piece 4835 rotates toward the position of the mechanical end on the left side, the φ1 and φ2 set in the reference excitation phase are excited (ON), thereby the first motor distribution piece When the first motor distribution piece 4835 rotates toward the position of the mechanical end on the right side while 4835 is at the position of the mechanical end on the left side, φ1 and φ2 set in the reference excitation phase are excited (ON) As a result, the first electric distribution piece 4835 becomes the position of the mechanical end on the right side. Control No. No. 17 to No. By moving to # 18, the first motorized distribution piece 4835 becomes the position of the mechanical end on the right side, and the control number No. The position of the first electric distribution piece 4835 rotated by 1 is obtained.

  Control No. Direction of rotation: 19 Stop: Number of steps: None Pulse width (ms): None Excitation time (ms): 12, Excitation mode: 2 phases Voltage (V): +12 (voltage for operation) Excitation phase Designation: φ1, φ2 are defined. Control No. When the first distribution stepping motor 4908 is driven in accordance with the No. The position of the first motorized distribution piece 4835 rotated by 18 is maintained. As a result, the first electric distribution piece 4835 is maintained at the position of the mechanical end on the right and kept stopped, and is distributed to the left track flowing to the left toward the front of the ball passage 4834 and connected to the second distribution portion 4829b. State is maintained. Control No. No. 18 to No. When the process proceeds to 19, the excitation mode of the first distribution stepping motor 4908 is maintained continuously in two phases.

  Control No. 20: direction of rotation: stop, number of steps: none, pulse width (ms): none, excitation time (ms): 324, excitation mode: 2 phases, voltage (V): +5 (voltage for stop), excitation phase Designation: φ1, φ2 are defined. Control No. When the first distribution stepping motor 4908 is driven in accordance with No. 20, the control number no. The position of the first electric distribution piece 4835 rotated by 19 (management number No. 18) is maintained. As a result, the first electric distribution piece 4835 is maintained at the position of the mechanical end on the right and kept stopped, and is distributed to the left track flowing to the left toward the front of the ball passage 4834 and connected to the second distribution portion 4829b. State is maintained. Control No. No. 19 to management number No. When the process proceeds to 20, the excitation mode of the first distribution stepping motor 4908 continues and is maintained in two phases, and the voltage switches from +12 V, which is the operating voltage, to +5 V, which is the stopping voltage.

  Control No. In No. 20, the management number No. The rotation direction at 19: stop, excitation mode: While the two phases are respectively maintained, the voltage is switched from +12 V (operation voltage) to +5 V (stop voltage). Moreover, the management number No. In No. 19, the excitation time (ms) is 12, while the control number No. At 20, the excitation time (ms) is 324. That is, the management number No. In No. 20, the management number No. The voltage is as small as about 42% of the voltage specified in No. 19 and the excitation time is 27 times longer and the stop time is longer. As a result, even if the first distribution stepping motor 4908 is always driven, the first distribution stepping motor 4908 can be prevented (suppressed) from excessively generating heat, so that the first distribution stepping motor 4908 has a defect or a failure. It can be prevented from occurring.

  Here, the management number No. in the setting value 1 described above. At 20, the excitation time (ms): 324 is preset. On the other hand, the management number No. in the setting value 2 is. At 20, the excitation time (ms): 320 is set in advance. At 20, the excitation time (ms): 316 is set in advance. At 20, an excitation time (ms): 316 is set in advance. At 20, an excitation time (ms): 316 is set in advance. At 20, an excitation time (ms): 316 is preset.

  The management number No. Following the No. 20, again with the control number No. Return to 1 and enter the management number No. 1 to control number No. The first distribution stepping motor 4908 is repeatedly driven according to the conditions defined in 20, and the first electric distribution piece 4835 shakes like a wiper that constantly reciprocates between the position of the mechanical end on the left side and the position of the mechanical end on the right side. Move. The first motorized distribution piece 4835 is stopped at the position of the mechanical end on the right side under the control number No. The excitation time (ms) specified in No. 19: 12, control number No. The excitation time (ms) specified in 20: 324, and the control number no. While the excitation time (ms) specified in 1 is 348 ms with 12 added, the time for stopping at the position of the mechanical end on the left side is the control number No. The excitation time (ms) specified in 10 is 8 alone, 8 ms, and the stop time at the left and right mechanical end positions is different, and the voltage is at the left mechanical end position where the stop time is long. The operating voltage is switched from +12 V to the stopping voltage +5 V.

  In addition, the first electric distribution piece 4835 is stopped (that is, the rotation shaft 4908a of the first distribution stepping motor 4908 is stopped), and the management number No. is stored. 1, management number No. 10, management number No. 19, and management number No. In the excitation mode of No. 20, two phases are defined. 1, management number No. 10, management number No. 19, and management number No. In the excitation phase designation of 20, φ1 and φ2 are defined. 1, management number No. 10, and management number No. The voltage of 19 is defined as +12 V. For the voltage of 20, +5 V is defined. That is, when the first electric distribution piece 4835 is stopped (when the rotation shaft 4908a of the first distribution stepping motor 4908 is stopped), the excitation mode always has two phases, the excitation phase regardless of the magnitude of the voltage. The first distribution stepping motor 4908 is driven as φ1 and φ2 as designated.

  In addition to power-on, at the time of power recovery when power is recovered by power failure and momentary power failure, management number No. 1 to control number No. Of 20, the direction of rotation: management number No. which is the management number prescribed as stop. 1, management number No. 10, management number No. 19, and management number No. Starting from one management number except for 20, the management number No. The first distribution stepping motor 4908 is driven in accordance with the conditions defined in the management number one by one toward 20. And, management number No. Following No. 20, the management number No. 1, management number No. The first distribution stepping motor 4908 is driven in accordance with the respective conditions defined by the management number one before the one management number, and the management number No. 2. 1 to control number No. The first distribution stepping motor 4908 is repeatedly driven in accordance with the conditions defined in FIG. The “one management number” may be predetermined as an initial value (default), or a random number is acquired at the time of power recovery, and the acquired random number is subjected to a predetermined operation according to the acquired random number. It may be determined based on the result obtained by execution, or the unique ID code stored in advance in the non-volatile RAM of the main control MPU 1310a may be extracted and determined based on the extracted ID code.

  The game backup information may include the management number immediately before the power shutoff of the pachinko machine 1 (including a power failure and an instantaneous blackout). In this case, the main control MPU 1310a reads the management number from the game backup information at the time of power recovery, and starts driving the first distribution stepping motor 4908 in accordance with the condition defined by the read management number.

  In the present embodiment, when the rotation shaft 4908a of the first distribution stepping motor 4908 is rotating in CW (clockwise) or CCW (counterclockwise), φ1, φ2, / φ1, / 1, of the first distribution stepping motor 4908. Although excitation to φ2 is performed as so-called 1-2 phase excitation, it may be performed by 1-1 phase excitation or 2-2 phase excitation. For example, in the case of performing 1-1 phase excitation in CW (clockwise), when excited in the order of φ1, φ2, / φ1 and / φ2, the first to fourth of the first distribution stepping motor drive IC 1310 n The diodes convert the back electromotive force from φ1, φ2, / φ1, / φ2 of the first distribution stepping motor 4908 into heat in the order of the first diode, the third diode, the second diode, and the fourth. Become a diode of Thereby, as described above, the chip in which the first diode and the second diode are in a pair and the chip in which the third diode and the fourth diode are in a pair can alternately generate heat. This can contribute to the reduction of the temperature rise of the package of the first distribution stepping motor drive IC 1310 n. Therefore, failure of the first to fourth NPN Darlington transistors due to heat can be prevented.

  Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, the positions of the mechanical ends overlap between the excitation phase of the first distribution stepping motor 4908 and the rotational position of the first electric distribution piece 4835, but the positions of the mechanical ends In order not to overlap, the excitation phase of the first distribution stepping motor 4908 and the rotational position of the first electric distribution piece 4835 may be determined. For example, when the first distribution stepping motor 4908 is driven, as described above, the rotation shaft 4908a of the first distribution stepping motor 4908 is driven by the first gear mechanism (see FIGS. 240, 247, and 248). As it is configured to be transmitted to electric distribution piece 4835, in this gear mechanism, the gear ratio (current gear ratio) in the above-described embodiment is changed to reduce the number of steps so that the positions of the mechanical ends do not overlap. The first electric distribution stepping motor 4908 excites a range in which the first electric distribution piece 4835 always swings in a wiper shape (a wiper shape which always reciprocates between the position of the left mechanical end and the position of the right mechanical end). And the rotational position of the first motor distribution piece 4835 can be determined, and the first vibration Only it can be defined driving management block of the stepping motor 4908.

[Drive management block of second distribution stepping motor]
The drive management block of the second distribution stepping motor 4909 is, as shown in FIG. 258, a management number (No.) of the drive management block, rotation direction, number of steps, pulse width (milliseconds (ms)), excitation time (milliseconds) Seconds (ms), excitation mode, voltage (V), and excitation phase designation. As the management number, No. 1 to No. It is regulated up to 21.

  Control No. 1 for rotation direction: stop, step number: none ("-" symbol in the figure), pulse width (ms): none ("-" symbol in the figure), excitation time (ms): 12, excitation mode: 2 Phase, voltage (V): +12 (operating voltage, described as “12” in the figure, the same applies hereinafter) Excitation phase designation: φ1, φ2 (in the figure, the phase to be excited is “o” symbol, the same applies hereinafter) It is prescribed. Control No. When the second distribution stepping motor 4909 is driven according to 1, the second electric distribution piece 4840 reaches the position of the mechanical end vertically inverted and is connected to the start gate 4803 via the left-hand passage 4842. Thus, the right rear passage 4841 connected to the third distribution unit 4829c is closed.

  Note that, as described above, the angles of the D-cut surface formed on the rotating shaft 4909a are made counterclockwise from the horizontal center line by exciting (ON) φ1 and φ2 set to the reference excitation phase. It becomes a position rotated by 10 ° (tolerance ± 3 °) and becomes a D-cut angular position. In the present embodiment, the angle of the D-cut surface formed on the rotation shaft 4909a is 10 ° counterclockwise from the horizontal center line in a state where the second electric distribution piece 4840 is at the position of the mechanical end on the left. It is designed in advance to have a position rotated by 3 °) and a D-cut angular position.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, it is possible to determine the excitation phase of the second distribution stepping motor 4909 and the rotational position of the second electric distribution piece 4840 (excluding the position of each mechanical end). Therefore, when the second motor distribution piece 4840 rotates toward the position of the mechanical end on the left, the second motor distribution piece is excited by exciting (on) φ1 and φ2 set in the reference excitation phase. When the second motor distribution piece 4840 rotates toward the position of the mechanical end vertically inverted while the 4840 is at the position of the mechanical end on the left, φ1 and φ2 set as the reference excitation phase are excited. By being turned on (ON), the second electric distribution piece 4840 is at the position of the mechanical end which is vertically inverted.

  Control No. Direction of rotation: 2 CW (clockwise), number of steps: 1, pulse width (ms): 4, excitation time (ms): 4, excitation mode: 1 phase, voltage (V): +12 (operating voltage And excitation phase designation: φ2 is specified. Control No. When the second distribution stepping motor 4909 is driven according to 2, the rotation axis 4909a of the second distribution stepping motor 4909 is at a rotational position CW (clockwise) by one step, and the rotation of the rotation axis 4909a is a gear mechanism (see FIG. 241). Transmitted from the position of the mechanical end where the second electric distribution piece 4840 is vertically inverted to the left mechanical end position by an angle corresponding to one step (that is, CCW Clockwise)) rotate. Control No. No. 1 to management number No. If it progresses to 2, the excitation mode of 2nd distribution stepping motor 4909 will switch from 2 phases to 1 phase.

  Control No. 3, rotation direction: CW (clockwise), number of steps: 1, pulse width (ms): 4, excitation time (ms): 4, excitation mode: 2 phases, voltage (V): +12 (operating voltage And excitation phase designation: φ2, / φ1 are specified. Control No. When the second distribution stepping motor 4909 is driven in accordance with step 3, the rotation shaft 4909a of the second distribution stepping motor 4909 is at a rotational position CW (clockwise) by one step, and the rotation of the rotation shaft 4909a is a gear mechanism (see FIG. 241). Transmitted to the second electric distribution piece 4840 via the reference number). It rotates from the position of the second motorized distribution piece 4840 rotated by 2 toward the position of the mechanical end on the left side by an angle corresponding to one step (that is, CCW (counterclockwise)). Control No. 2 to the management number No. If it progresses to 3, the excitation mode of 2nd distribution stepping motor 4909 will switch from 1 phase to 2 phases.

  Control No. Direction of rotation: CW: clockwise (CW), step number: 1, pulse width (ms): 4, excitation time (ms): 4, excitation mode: 1 phase, voltage (V): +12 (operating voltage And excitation phase designation: / φ1 is specified. Control No. When the second distribution stepping motor 4909 is driven according to 4, the rotation axis 4909a of the second distribution stepping motor 4909 is at a rotational position CW (clockwise) by one step, and the rotation of the rotation axis 4909a is a gear mechanism (see FIG. 241). Transmitted to the second electric distribution piece 4840 via the reference number). It rotates toward the position of the mechanical end on the left (that is, CCW (counterclockwise)) by an angle corresponding to one step from the position of the second motorized distribution piece 4840 rotated by 3. Control No. 3 to the management number No. If it progresses to 4, the excitation mode of 2nd distribution stepping motor 4909 will switch from 2 phases to 1 phase.

  Control No. 5, rotation direction: CW (clockwise), number of steps: 1, pulse width (ms): 4, excitation time (ms): 4, excitation mode: 2 phases, voltage (V): +12 (operating voltage And excitation phase designations: / φ1 and / φ2 are specified. Control No. When the second distribution stepping motor 4909 is driven according to 5, the rotation axis 4909a of the second distribution stepping motor 4909 is at a rotational position CW (clockwise) by one step, and the rotation of the rotation axis 4909a is a gear mechanism (see FIG. 241). Transmitted to the second electric distribution piece 4840 via the reference number). It rotates toward the position of the mechanical end on the left side (that is, CCW (counterclockwise)) by an angle corresponding to one step from the position of the second motorized distribution piece 4840 rotated by 4. Control No. 4 to the management number No. If it progresses to 5, the excitation mode of 2nd distribution stepping motor 4909 will switch from 1 phase to 2 phases.

  Control No. 6, rotation direction: CW (clockwise), number of steps: 1, pulse width (ms): 4, excitation time (ms): 4, excitation mode: 1 phase, voltage (V): +12 (operating voltage And excitation phase designation: / φ2 is specified. Control No. When the second distribution stepping motor 4909 is driven according to 6, the rotation axis 4909a of the second distribution stepping motor 4909 is at a rotational position CW (clockwise) by one step, and the rotation of the rotation axis 4909a is a gear mechanism (see FIG. 241). Transmitted to the second electric distribution piece 4840 via the reference number). It rotates toward the position of the mechanical end on the left side (that is, CCW (counterclockwise)) by an angle corresponding to one step from the position of the second motorized distribution piece 4840 rotated by 5. Control No. No. 5 to management number No. If it progresses to 6, the excitation mode of 2nd distribution stepping motor 4909 will switch from 2 phases to 1 phase.

  Control No. 7, rotation direction: CW (clockwise), number of steps: 1, pulse width (ms): 4, excitation time (ms): 4, excitation mode: 2 phases, voltage (V): +12 (operating voltage , Excitation phase designation: / φ2, φ1 are specified. Control No. When the second distribution stepping motor 4909 is driven according to 7, the rotation position of the rotation axis 4909a of the second distribution stepping motor 4909 is CW (clockwise) by one step, and the rotation of the rotation axis 4909a is a gear mechanism (see FIG. 241). Transmitted to the second electric distribution piece 4840 via the reference number). It rotates toward the position of the mechanical end on the left side by an angle corresponding to one step from the position of the second motorized distribution piece 4840 rotated by 6 (that is, CCW (counterclockwise)). Control No. 6 to the management number No. When the process proceeds to 7, the excitation mode of the second distribution stepping motor 4909 is switched from one phase to two phases.

  Control No. 8, rotation direction: CW (clockwise), number of steps: 1, pulse width (ms): 4, excitation time (ms): 4, excitation mode: 1 phase, voltage (V): +12 (operating voltage And excitation phase designation: φ1 is specified. Control No. When the second distribution stepping motor 4909 is driven in accordance with step 8, the rotation shaft 4909a of the second distribution stepping motor 4909 is at a rotational position CW (clockwise) by one step, and the rotation of the rotation shaft 4909a is a gear mechanism (see FIG. 241). Transmitted to the second electric distribution piece 4840 via the reference number). 7 from the position of the second motorized distribution piece 4840 rotated by 7 toward the position of the mechanical end on the left side by an angle corresponding to one step (that is, CCW (counterclockwise)). Control No. 7 to No. If it progresses to 8, the excitation mode of 2nd distribution stepping motor 4909 will switch from 2 phases to 1 phase.

  Control No. 9, rotation direction: CW (clockwise), number of steps: 1, pulse width (ms): 4, excitation time (ms): 4, excitation mode: 2 phases, voltage (V): +12 (operating voltage And excitation phase designations: φ1 and φ2 are specified. Control No. When the second distribution stepping motor 4909 is driven according to 9, the rotation axis 4909a of the second distribution stepping motor 4909 is at a rotational position CW (clockwise) by one step, and the rotation of the rotation axis 4909a is a gear mechanism (see FIG. 241). Transmitted to the second electric distribution piece 4840 via the reference number). It rotates from the position of the second motorized distribution piece 4840 rotated by 8 toward the position of the mechanical end on the left by an angle corresponding to one step (that is, CCW (counterclockwise)). As a result, the second electric distribution piece 4840 reaches the position of the mechanical end on the left side, and is connected to the third distribution portion 4829 c via the right rear passage 4841. That is, the right rear passage 4841 connected to the third distribution unit 4829c is opened. Control No. 8 to No. When the process proceeds to 9, the excitation mode of the second distribution stepping motor 4909 is switched from one phase to two phases.

  When φ1 and φ2 set in the reference excitation phase are excited (ON), as described above, the angle of the D cut surface formed on the rotation shaft 4909a is 10 ° counterclockwise from the horizontal center line It becomes a position rotated by (a tolerance of ± 3 °) and becomes a D-cut angular position. In the present embodiment, the angle of the D-cut surface formed on the rotation shaft 4909a is 10 ° counterclockwise from the horizontal center line in a state where the second electric distribution piece 4840 is at the position of the mechanical end on the left. It is designed in advance to have a position rotated by 3 °) and a D-cut angular position.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, it is possible to determine the excitation phase of the second distribution stepping motor 4909 and the rotational position of the second electric distribution piece 4840 (excluding the position of each mechanical end). Therefore, when the second motor distribution piece 4840 rotates toward the position of the mechanical end on the left, the second motor distribution piece is excited by exciting (on) φ1 and φ2 set in the reference excitation phase. When the second motor distribution piece 4840 rotates toward the position of the mechanical end vertically inverted while the 4840 is at the position of the mechanical end on the left, φ1 and φ2 set as the reference excitation phase are excited. By being turned on (ON), the second electric distribution piece 4840 is at the position of the mechanical end which is vertically inverted. Control No. 8 to No. By moving to 9, the second electric distribution piece 4840 becomes the position of the mechanical end on the left side, and the angle of the D cut surface formed on the rotary shaft 4909a is 10 ° counterclockwise from the horizontal center line (tolerance ± 3 ° And the D-cut angular position.

  Control No. 10: direction of rotation: stop, number of steps: none, pulse width (ms): none, excitation time (ms): 12, excitation mode: 2 phases, voltage (V): +12 (voltage for operation), excitation phase Designation: φ1, φ2 are defined. Control No. When the second distribution stepping motor 4909 is driven in accordance with No. 10, the control number No. 10 is transmitted. The position of the second motorized distribution piece 4840 rotated by 9 is maintained. As a result, the second electric distribution piece 4840 is maintained at the position of the mechanical end on the left and kept stopped, and is connected to the third distribution portion 4829 c via the right rear passage 4841 (ie, the third The right back passage 4841 connected to the distribution unit 4829c is maintained open. Control No. 9 to the management number No. If it progresses to 10, the excitation mode of 2nd distribution stepping motor 4909 will be continued, and it will be maintained by 2 phases.

  Control No. 11, rotation direction: stop, number of steps: none, pulse width (ms): none, excitation time (ms): 32, excitation mode: 2 phases, voltage (V): +5 (stop voltage), excitation phase Designation: φ1, φ2 are defined. Control No. When the second distribution stepping motor 4909 is driven in accordance with No. 11, the control number No. 1 is set. The position of the second motorized distribution piece 4840 rotated by 10 (management number No. 9) is maintained. As a result, the second electric distribution piece 4840 is maintained at the position of the mechanical end on the left and kept stopped, and is connected to the third distribution portion 4829 c via the right rear passage 4841 (ie, the third The right back passage 4841 connected to the distribution unit 4829c is maintained open. Control No. 10 to the management number No. When the process proceeds to 11, the excitation mode of the second distribution stepping motor 4909 continues and is maintained in two phases, and the voltage switches from +12 V, which is the operating voltage, to +5 V, which is the stopping voltage.

  Control No. In No. 11, the management number No. The rotational direction at 10: stop, excitation mode: While the two phases are maintained, the voltage is switched from +12 V (operating voltage) to +5 V (stop voltage). Moreover, the management number No. In No. 10, the excitation time (ms) is 12, whereas in the case of control number No. In 11, the excitation time (ms) is 32. That is, the management number No. In No. 11, the management number No. The voltage is as small as about 42% of the voltage specified in 10, and the excitation time is about 2.7 times longer, and the stop time is longer. As a result, even if the second distribution stepping motor 4909 is constantly driven, the second distribution stepping motor 4909 can be prevented (suppressed) from excessively generating heat, so that the second distribution stepping motor 4909 has a defect or a failure. It can be prevented from occurring.

  Control No. 12, direction of rotation: stop, number of steps: none, pulse width (ms): none, excitation time (ms): 4, excitation mode: 2 phases, voltage (V): +12 (voltage for operation), excitation phase Designation: φ1, φ2 are defined. Control No. When the second distribution stepping motor 4909 is driven in accordance with T.12, the management number No. is stored. The position of the second motorized distribution piece 4840 rotated by 11 (management number No. 10, management number No. 9) is maintained. As a result, the second electric distribution piece 4840 is maintained at the position of the mechanical end on the left and kept stopped, and is connected to the third distribution portion 4829 c via the right rear passage 4841 (ie, the third The right back passage 4841 connected to the distribution unit 4829c is maintained open. Control No. No. 11 to management number No. When advancing to 12, the excitation mode of the second distribution stepping motor 4909 continues and is maintained in two phases, and the voltage is switched from +5 V as the stopping voltage to +12 V as the operating voltage again.

  The reason for switching the voltage from +5 V, which is the stopping voltage, to +12 V, which is the operating voltage again, is that the second electric distribution piece 4840 is larger in size and larger in inertia than the first electric distribution piece 4835. When starting to rotate the second motorized distribution piece 4840 from the position of the mechanical end on the left side (that is, the state where the second motorized distribution piece 4840 is inclined obliquely) toward the position of the mechanical end vertically inverted, a strong torque is required. Management number no. In the step 12, the voltage is switched from +5 V which is the stopping voltage to +12 V which is the operating voltage.

  Control No. 13, rotation direction: CCW (counterclockwise), number of steps: 1, pulse width (ms): 8, excitation time (ms): 8, excitation mode: 2 phases, voltage (V): +12 (for operation Voltage), excitation phase designation: / φ2, φ1 are specified. Control No. When the second distribution stepping motor 4909 is driven according to 13, the rotation position of the rotation axis 4909a of the second distribution stepping motor 4909 is CCW (counterclockwise) by one step, and the rotation of the rotation axis 4909a is a gear mechanism (FIG. 241). Transmitted to the second electric distribution piece 4840 via the control number no. It rotates from the position of the mechanical end on the left side which is the position of the first electric distribution piece 4835 rotated by 12 toward the position of the mechanical end vertically inverted by an angle corresponding to one step (that is, CW (clockwise)). Control No. The position of the first electric distribution piece 4840 rotated by 13 is the same as the management number No. Control number no. The position of the second electric distribution piece 4840 rotated by 7 is obtained. Control No. 12 to the management number No. If it progresses to 13, the excitation mode of 2nd distribution stepping motor 4909 will be continued, and it will be maintained by 2 phases.

  This is because, as described above, since the second electric distribution piece 4840 is larger in size and larger in inertia than the first electric distribution piece 4835, the second electric distribution piece 4840 is at the position of the mechanical end on the left (that is, When starting to rotate from the second electric distribution piece 4840 obliquely to the position of the mechanical end vertically inverted, a strong torque is required. 12 to the management number No. If it progresses to 13, the excitation mode of 2nd distribution stepping motor 4909 will be continued and it will be maintained by 2 phases, and a strong torque can be obtained when it starts rotation. And, management number No. The excitation time (ms) specified in 8: 4, and the control number no. Excitation time (ms): 8 with an excitation time (ms) specified by 7 plus 4; By defining as No. 13, management number No. The position of the first electric distribution piece 4840 rotated by 13 is the same as the management number No. Control number no. The position of the second electric distribution piece 4840 rotated by 7 is obtained.

  Control No. 14: Direction of rotation: CCW (counterclockwise), number of steps: 1, pulse width (ms): 8, excitation time (ms): 8, excitation mode: 1 phase, voltage (V): +12 (for operation Voltage), excitation phase designation: / φ2 is specified. Control No. When the second distribution stepping motor 4909 is driven according to 14, the rotation position of the rotation axis 4909a of the second distribution stepping motor 4909 is CCW (counterclockwise) by one step, and the rotation of the rotation axis 4909a is a gear mechanism (FIG. 241). Transmitted to the second electric distribution piece 4840 via the control number no. It rotates toward the position of the mechanical end vertically inverted by an angle corresponding to one step from the position of the second motorized distribution piece 4840 rotated by 13 (that is, CW (clockwise)). Control No. The position of the second motorized distribution piece 4840 rotated by 14 is the same as the control number No. The position of the second electric distribution piece 4840 rotated by 6 is obtained. Control No. 13 to the management number No. When the process proceeds to 14, the excitation mode of the second distribution stepping motor 4909 is switched from the two phase to the one phase.

  Control No. In 14, an excitation time (ms): 8 is defined, which is a mode in which the second electric distribution piece 4840 is gradually rotated from the inclined state to the position of the mechanical end vertically inverted. By creating, the state of being connected to the third distribution unit 4829c via the right rear passage 4841 (that is, the right rear passage 4841 connected to the third distribution unit 4829c is opened) is gradually closed. It is possible to realize an aspect of transitioning to the second state.

  Control No. Direction of rotation: CCW (counterclockwise), step number: 1, pulse width (ms): 8, excitation time (ms): 8, excitation mode: 2 phases, voltage (V): +12 (for operation Voltage), excitation phase designation: / φ1, / φ2 are specified. Control No. When the second distribution stepping motor 4909 is driven according to 15, the rotation position of the rotation shaft 4909a of the second distribution stepping motor 4909 is CCW (counterclockwise) by one step, and the rotation of the rotation shaft 4909a is a gear mechanism (FIG. 241). Transmitted to the second electric distribution piece 4840 via the control number no. It rotates from the position of the second motorized distribution piece 4840 rotated by 14 toward the position of the mechanical end vertically inverted by an angle corresponding to one step (that is, CW (clockwise)). Control No. The position of the second motorized distribution piece 4840 rotated by 15 is the same as the control number No. The position of the second electric distribution piece 4840 rotated by 5 is obtained. Control No. No. 14 to management number No. If it progresses to 15, the excitation mode of 2nd distribution stepping motor 4909 will switch from 1 phase to 2 phases.

  Control No. In No. 15, the management number No. The same excitation time (ms) defined in 14 is defined as 8. However, as described above, the position of the mechanical end vertically inverted from the state in which the second electromotive distribution piece 4840 is inclined obliquely The right back passage 4841 connected to the third distribution unit 4829c via the right back passage 4841 (that is, the right back passage 4841 connected to the third This is because it is possible to realize an aspect of transitioning to a state in which the state is gradually closed.

  Control No. Direction of rotation: CCW (counterclockwise), number of steps: 1, pulse width (ms): 4, excitation time (ms): 4, excitation mode: 1 phase, voltage (V): +12 (for operation Voltage), excitation phase designation: / φ1 is specified. Control No. When the second distribution stepping motor 4909 is driven according to 16, the rotation position of the rotation axis 4909a of the second distribution stepping motor 4909 is CCW (counterclockwise) by one step, and the rotation of the rotation axis 4909a is a gear mechanism (FIG. 241). Transmitted to the second electric distribution piece 4840 via the control number no. It rotates toward the position of the mechanical end vertically inverted by an angle corresponding to one step from the position of the second electric distribution piece 4840 rotated by 15 (that is, CW (clockwise)). Control No. The position of the second motorized distribution piece 4840 rotated by 16 is the same as the control number No. The position of the second electric distribution piece 4840 rotated by 4 is obtained. Control No. No. 15 to management number No. When the process proceeds to 16, the excitation mode of the second distribution stepping motor 4909 is switched from the two phase to the one phase.

  Control No. Direction of rotation: CCW (counterclockwise), step number: 1, pulse width (ms): 4, excitation time (ms): 4, excitation mode: 2 phases, voltage (V): +12 (for operation Voltage) and excitation phase designation: φ2, / φ1 are specified. Control No. When the second distribution stepping motor 4909 is driven in accordance with 17, the rotation position of the rotation shaft 4909a of the second distribution stepping motor 4909 is CCW (counterclockwise) by one step, and the rotation of the rotation shaft 4909a is a gear mechanism (FIG. 241). Transmitted to the second electric distribution piece 4840 via the control number no. It rotates toward the position of the mechanical end vertically inverted by the angle corresponding to one step from the position of the second motorized distribution piece 4840 rotated by 16 (that is, CW (clockwise)). Control No. The position of the second motorized distribution piece 4840 rotated by 17 is the same as the control number No. The position of the second electric distribution piece 4840 rotated by 3 is obtained. Control No. No. 16 to management number No. When the process proceeds to step 17, the excitation mode of the second distribution stepping motor 4909 is switched from one phase to two phases.

  Control No. Direction of rotation: CCW (counterclockwise), number of steps: 1, pulse width (ms): 4, excitation time (ms): 4, excitation mode: 1 phase, voltage (V): +12 (for operation Voltage), excitation phase designation: φ2 is specified. Control No. When the second distribution stepping motor 4909 is driven according to the rotation of the second distribution stepping motor 4909, the rotation position of the rotation axis 4909a of the second distribution stepping motor 4909 is CCW (counterclockwise) by one step, and the rotation of the rotation axis 4909a is a gear mechanism (FIG. Transmitted to the second electric distribution piece 4840 via the control number no. It rotates from the position of the second electric distribution piece 4840 rotated by 17 toward the position of the mechanical end vertically inverted by an angle corresponding to one step (that is, CW (clockwise)). Control No. The position of the second motorized distribution piece 4840 rotated by 18 is the same as the control number No. The position of the second electric distribution piece 4840 rotated by 2 is obtained. Control No. No. 17 to No. If it progresses to 18, the excitation mode of 2nd distribution stepping motor 4909 will switch from 2 phases to 1 phase.

  Control No. Direction of rotation: 19 CCW (counterclockwise), number of steps: 1, pulse width (ms): 4, excitation time (ms): 4, excitation mode: 2 phases, voltage (V): +12 (for operation Voltage), excitation phase designation: φ1, φ2 are specified. Control No. When the second distribution stepping motor 4909 is driven according to 19, the rotation position of the rotation axis 4909a of the second distribution stepping motor 4909 is CCW (counterclockwise) by one step, and the rotation of the rotation axis 4909a is a gear mechanism (FIG. 241). Transmitted to the second electric distribution piece 4840 via the control number no. It rotates from the position of the second electric distribution piece 4840 rotated by 18 toward the position of the mechanical end vertically inverted by an angle corresponding to one step (that is, CW (clockwise)). Control No. The position of the second motorized distribution piece 4840 rotated by 19 is the same as the control number No. The position of the second electric distribution piece 4840 rotated by 1 is obtained. As a result, the second electric distribution piece 4840 reaches the position of the mechanical end vertically inverted and is connected to the start gate 4803 via the passage 4842 between the left hand. That is, the right rear passage 4841 connected to the third distribution unit 4829c is closed. Control No. No. 18 to No. When the process proceeds to 19, the excitation mode of the second distribution stepping motor 4909 is switched from one phase to two phases.

  When φ1 and φ2 set in the reference excitation phase are excited (ON), as described above, the angle of the D cut surface formed on the rotation shaft 4909a is 10 ° counterclockwise from the horizontal center line It becomes a position rotated by (a tolerance of ± 3 °) and becomes a D-cut angular position. In the present embodiment, the angle of the D-cut surface formed on the rotation shaft 4909a is 10 ° counterclockwise from the horizontal center line in a state where the second electric distribution piece 4840 is at the position of the mechanical end on the left. It is designed in advance to have a position rotated by 3 °) and a D-cut angular position.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, it is possible to determine the excitation phase of the second distribution stepping motor 4909 and the rotational position of the second electric distribution piece 4840 (excluding the position of each mechanical end). Therefore, when the second motor distribution piece 4840 rotates toward the position of the mechanical end on the left, the second motor distribution piece is excited by exciting (on) φ1 and φ2 set in the reference excitation phase. When the second motor distribution piece 4840 rotates toward the position of the mechanical end vertically inverted while the 4840 is at the position of the mechanical end on the left, φ1 and φ2 set as the reference excitation phase are excited. By being turned on (ON), the second electric distribution piece 4840 is at the position of the mechanical end which is vertically inverted. Control No. No. 18 to No. By moving to No. 19, the second motorized distribution piece 4840 is at the position of the mechanical end vertically inverted, and the management number No. 4 is obtained. The position of the second electric distribution piece 4840 rotated by 1 is obtained.

  Control No. 20: direction of rotation: stop, number of steps: none, pulse width (ms): none, excitation time (ms): 12, excitation mode: 2 phases, voltage (V): +12 (voltage for operation), excitation phase Designation: φ1, φ2 are defined. Control No. When the second distribution stepping motor 4909 is driven in accordance with No. 20, the control number No. is stored. The position of the second motorized distribution piece 4840 rotated by 19 is maintained. As a result, the second electric distribution piece 4840 is maintained at the position of the mechanical end vertically inverted and kept stopped, and is connected to the start gate 4803 via the left-hand passage 4842 (ie, the third The right back passage 4841 connected to the distribution unit 4829c is closed). Control No. No. 19 to management number No. If it progresses to 20, the excitation mode of 2nd distribution stepping motor 4909 will be continued, and it will be maintained by 2 phases.

  Control No. 21: direction of rotation: stop, number of steps: none, pulse width (ms): none, excitation time (ms): 428, excitation mode: 2 phases, voltage (V): +5 (voltage for stop), excitation phase Designation: φ1, φ2 are defined. Control No. When the second distribution stepping motor 4909 is driven in accordance with V.21, the control number no. The position of the second motorized distribution piece 4840 rotated by 20 (management number No. 19) is maintained. As a result, the second electric distribution piece 4840 is maintained at the position of the mechanical end vertically inverted and kept stopped, and is connected to the start gate 4803 via the left-hand passage 4842 (ie, the third The right back passage 4841 connected to the distribution unit 4829c is closed). Control No. No. 20 to No. When advancing to 21, the excitation mode of the second distribution stepping motor 4909 continues and is maintained in two phases, and the voltage is switched from +12 V which is the operating voltage to +5 V which is the stopping voltage.

  Control No. In No. 21, the management number No. The rotation direction at 20: stop, excitation mode: While the two phases are respectively maintained, the voltage is switched from +12 V (operating voltage) to +5 V (stop voltage). Moreover, the management number No. In No. 20, the excitation time (ms) is 12, whereas in the case of control number No. At 21, the excitation time (ms) is 428. That is, the management number No. In No. 21, the management number No. The voltage is as small as about 42% of the voltage specified in No. 20, the excitation time is about 35.7 times longer, and the stop time is longer. As a result, even if the second distribution stepping motor 4909 is constantly driven, the second distribution stepping motor 4909 can be prevented (suppressed) from excessively generating heat, so that the second distribution stepping motor 4909 has a defect or a failure. It can be prevented from occurring.

  Here, the management number No. in the setting value 1 described above. At 21, an excitation time (ms): 428 is set in advance. On the other hand, the management number No. in the setting value 2 is. In 21, the excitation time (ms): 428 is set in advance. In 21, an excitation time (ms): 428 is set in advance. In 21, an excitation time (ms): 420 is set in advance. In 21, an excitation time (ms): 416 is set in advance. In 21, an excitation time (ms): 412 is preset.

  The management number No. Following No. 21, again, the control number No. Return to 1 and enter the management number No. 1 to control number No. The second distribution stepping motor 4909 is repeatedly driven according to the conditions defined in 21. The second motor distribution piece 4840 is a wiper that constantly reciprocates between the position of the left mechanical end and the vertically inverted position of the mechanical end. Rock in the shape of Then, for the time when the second motorized distribution piece 4840 stops at the position of the mechanical end which is inverted in the vertical direction, the control number No. 4 is used. Excitation time (ms) specified in No. 20: 12, control number no. The excitation time (ms) specified in No. 21: 428, and the control number no. The excitation time (ms) specified in 1 is 452 ms plus 12 and the voltage is switched from +12 V, which is the operating voltage, to +5 V, which is the stopping voltage, and stops at the position of the mechanical end on the left side The time is management number No. Excitation time (ms) specified in 10: 12, control number no. The excitation time (ms) specified in No. 11: 32 and the control number no. The excitation time (ms) specified in 12 is 48 ms plus 4. The voltage is switched from +12 V, which is the operating voltage, to +5 V, which is the stopping voltage. Thus, although the stop time at the position of the mechanical end on the left side is different from the stop time at the position of the mechanical end inverted in the vertical direction, the voltage is always the operating voltage when the second electric distribution piece 4840 stops. The voltage is switched from +12 V to +5 V which is a stopping voltage.

  In addition, the second electric distribution piece 4840 is stopped (that is, the rotation shaft 4909a of the second distribution stepping motor 4909 is stopped), and the management number No. 4 is stopped. 1, management number No. 10, management number No. 11, management number No. 12, management number No. 20, and management number No. Two phases are defined in the excitation mode of No. 21, and control number No. 1, management number No. 10, management number No. 11, management number No. 12, management number No. 20, and management number No. In the excitation phase designation of No. 21, φ1 and φ2 are defined. 1, management number No. 10, management number No. 12, and management number No. For the voltage of 20, +12 V is defined. 11, and management number No. The voltage of 21 defines + 5V. That is, when the second electric distribution piece 4840 is stopped (when the rotation shaft 4909a of the second distribution stepping motor 4909 is stopped), the excitation mode always has two phases, the excitation phase, regardless of the voltage level. The second distribution stepping motor 4909 is driven as φ1 and φ2 as designated.

  In addition to power-on, at the time of power recovery when power is recovered by power failure and momentary power failure, management number No. 1 to control number No. 21 among the rotation directions: management number No. which is a management number prescribed as stop. 1, management number No. 10, management number No. 11, management number No. 12, management number No. 20, and management number No. The control number No. 21 starts with one control number. The second distribution stepping motor 4909 is driven according to the condition defined in the management number one by one toward the direction 21. And, management number No. Following No. 21, the management number No. 1, management number No. The second distribution stepping motor 4909 is driven in accordance with each condition defined by the management number one before the one management number, and the management number No. 2. 1 to control number No. The second distribution stepping motor 4909 is repeatedly driven in accordance with the conditions defined in FIG. The “one management number” may be predetermined as an initial value (default), or a random number is acquired at the time of power recovery, and the acquired random number is subjected to a predetermined operation according to the acquired random number. It may be determined based on the result obtained by execution, or the unique ID code stored in advance in the non-volatile RAM of the main control MPU 1310a may be extracted and determined based on the extracted ID code.

  The game backup information may include the management number immediately before the power shutoff of the pachinko machine 1 (including a power failure and an instantaneous blackout). In this case, the main control MPU 1310a reads the management number from the game backup information at the time of power recovery, and starts driving the second distribution stepping motor 4909 according to the condition defined by the read management number.

  In the present embodiment, when the rotation shaft 4909a of the second distribution stepping motor 4909 is rotated CW (clockwise) or CCW (counterclockwise), φ1, φ2, / φ1, / of the second distribution stepping motor 4909 Although the excitation to φ2 is performed as so-called 1-2 phase excitation, it may be performed by 1-1 phase excitation or 2-2 phase excitation. For example, in the case of performing 1-1 phase excitation with CW (clockwise), when excited in the order of φ1, φ2, / φ1 and / φ2, the first to fourth of the second distribution stepping motor drive IC 1310 q The diodes convert the back electromotive force from φ1, φ2, / φ1, / φ2 of the second split stepping motor 4909 into heat in the order of the first diode, the third diode, the second diode, and the fourth. Become a diode of Thereby, as described above, the chip in which the first diode and the second diode are in a pair and the chip in which the third diode and the fourth diode are in a pair can alternately generate heat. This can contribute to the reduction of the temperature rise of the package of the second distribution stepping motor drive IC 1310 q. Therefore, failure of the first to fourth NPN Darlington transistors due to heat can be prevented.

  Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, the positions of the mechanical ends overlap in the excitation phase of the second distribution stepping motor 4909 and the rotational position of the second electric distribution piece 4840, but the positions of the mechanical ends The excitation phase of the second distribution stepping motor 4909 and the rotational position of the second electric distribution piece 4840 may be determined so as not to overlap with each other. For example, when the second distribution stepping motor 4909 is driven, as described above, the rotation shaft 4909a of the second distribution stepping motor 4909 is transmitted to the second electric distribution piece 4840 via the gear mechanism (see FIG. 241). In this gear mechanism, the gear ratio (current gear ratio) in the above-described embodiment is changed to reduce the number of steps so that the position of each mechanical end is not overlapped. The excitation phase of the second distribution stepping motor 4909, and the range in which the 4840 is always swung like a wiper (a wiper that always reciprocates between the position of the left mechanical end and the position of the vertically inverted mechanical end), 2) The rotational position of the two electric distribution pieces 4840 can be determined, and the second distribution step It is possible to define the drive control block Gumota 4909.

  Incidentally, conventionally, there has been proposed a gaming machine provided with a sorting device for driving a solenoid and sorting a gaming ball to a specific area by a sorting member (for example, JP-A-2016-036378 (paragraph [0029], FIG. 4). By the way, in the gaming machine described in this document, although the distributing member is driven by the solenoid, the solenoid is originally released by the moving speed of the distributing member when driven and the restoring force of the spring released. There is a difference in the moving speed of the distributing member returning to the position, and there are individual differences among the solenoids, so it is not possible to stabilize the distribution ratio by the distribution device and to finely adjust the distribution ratio. There was a problem that.

[Method of mounting field effect transistor]
Next, a method of arranging the field effect transistor MF50 of the first distribution stepping motor voltage switching circuit 1310 m and the field effect transistor MF60 of the second distribution stepping motor voltage switching circuit 1310 p will be briefly described. FIG. 259 is a schematic view of a method of mounting a field effect transistor.

  As shown in FIG. 259, the main control board box 1320 of the main control unit 1300 is composed of a transparent cover body 1301 and a transparent base body 1302, and accommodates the main control board 1310X. Thus, in the state where the main control board 1310X is accommodated in the main control board box 1320, the distance dimension from the mounting surface of the main control board 1310X in the present embodiment to the back surface (ceiling) of the cover 1301 is 15.0 mm. It is necessary to mount various electronic components on the main control board 1310X within this distance dimension.

  However, the package of the field effect transistors MF50 and MF60 adopted in this embodiment is a so-called TO system, and the height of the main body of the field effect transistors MF50 and MF60 is large, and the package protrudes from the main body of the field effect transistors MF50 and MF60 If the various terminals to be mounted are mounted on the mounting surface of the main control board 1310X as they are, the main bodies of the field effect transistors MF50 and MF60 interfere with the back surface (ceiling) of the cover 1301 to make the main control board 1310X a main control board box 1320 Can not be accommodated.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, various terminals of the field effect transistors MF50 and MF60 are bent at a predetermined angle using a predetermined jig and then mounted on the mounting surface of the main control substrate 1310X. As a result, the main body of the field effect transistors MF50 and MF60 is mounted on the mounting surface of the main control substrate 1310X while maintaining the predetermined distance dimension d with the main body of the field effect transistors MF50 and MF60 being inclined. The main body does not interfere with the back surface (ceiling) of the cover 1301 and the main control board 1310X can be accommodated in the main control board box 1320, and the main body of the field effect transistor MF50 is inclined obliquely. Can be visually recognized through the transparent cover 1301 and resistances MR52 and MR53 (including the part number attached to the mounting surface) which are electronic components mounted on the field effect transistor Resistors MR62 and MR63 (on the mounting surface) are electronic components mounted under the body of the MF60. By part number also includes.) Was, can be viewed through a predetermined distance dimension field effect transistor MF50 to d are arranged keeping became tilted obliquely, MF60 transparent cover member 1301 from between the main body.

[Docky Got measures]
Next, the pachinko machine 1 is shaken or beaten, vibration is applied to the pachinko machine 1 to change the course of the game balls flowing down the game area 5a defined in the game board 5 and provided in the game board 5 A circuit for detecting fraudulent acts (referred to as "dotkigot") that causes the player to enter various winning openings and gates will be described. FIG. 260 is a circuit showing a vibration detection circuit.

  In the game board 5, an upper vibration detection switch 3005 and a lower vibration detection switch 3006a and 3006b are arranged at predetermined positions (see FIG. 237). A circuit that can set sensitivity for detecting vibration is provided on panel relay substrate 1710. As shown in FIG. 260, the panel relay substrate 1710 can set the sensitivity of vibration detection by the upper vibration detection switch 3005, and the sensitivity of vibration detection by the upper vibration detection switch sensitivity setting circuit 1710za and the lower vibration detection switch 3006a. The lower vibration detection switch sensitivity setting circuit 1710zb can be set, and the lower vibration detection switch sensitivity setting circuit 1710zc can set the sensitivity of vibration detection by the lower vibration detection switch 3006b.

  The upper vibration detection switch 3005 is mounted near the upper portion of the left side wall of the back box 3010 as described above, and the lower vibration detection switch 3006 a is mounted near the lower portion of the left side wall of the back box 3010 as described above There is. As described above, the upper vibration detection switch 3005 and the lower vibration detection switch 3006a are attached with the lower vibration detection switch 3006a. By swinging or hitting the pachinko machine 1, vibration is applied to the pachinko machine 1 to change the course of the game balls flowing down the game area 5a defined in the game board 5, and various prizes provided in the game board 5 It is possible to detect an illegal act to enter the mouth or gate, and in particular, the game ball enters the specific receiving port 4855v of the distribution disc 4853 provided in the ball swirl type distribution device 4843 in the lower layer game zone 4825 It is possible to detect a fraudulent act of applying vibration to the pachinko machine 1 by shaking or striking the pachinko machine 1 so that it can be balled.

  On the other hand, in the lower vibration detection switch 3006b, as described above, the lower vibration detection switch 3006b is attached to the front of the base that is the lower portion of the right side wall of the back box 3010 and becomes the bottom plate of the back box 3010 . As described above, the lower vibration detection switch 3006 b applies vibration to the pachinko machine 1 by shaking or striking the pachinko machine 1 in the same manner as the upper vibration detection switch 3005 and the lower vibration detection switch 3006 a. It is possible to change the course of the game balls flowing down the game area 5a, which is divided into zones, and detect fraudulent acts to enter the various winning openings and gates provided on the game board 5, especially right-handed By placing the gaming ball toward the ball receiving recess 4809 formed on the rotating ball receiving member 4808 in the game zone 4824 and swinging or tapping the pachinko machine 1 so that the ball can be entered into the V prize hole 4810 It is possible to detect a fraudulent act of applying vibration to the pachinko machine 1.

  Here, since the sensitivity setting circuit for upper vibration detection switch 1710za, the sensitivity setting circuit for lower vibration detection switch 1710zb, and the sensitivity setting circuit for lower vibration detection switch 1710zc have the same circuit configuration, the sensitivity settings for upper vibration detection switch In the description of the circuit 1710za, the lower vibration detection switch sensitivity setting circuit 1710zb, and the lower vibration detection switch sensitivity setting circuit 1710zc, the lower vibration detection switch sensitivity setting circuit 1710zb is followed by the reference numerals regarding the upper vibration detection switch sensitivity setting circuit 1710za The reference symbols relating to the lower vibration detection switch sensitivity setting circuit 1710 zc are shown in parentheses.

  The upper vibration detection sensor, which is a detection signal from the upper vibration detection switch 3005, and the lower vibration detection sensor 1, which is a detection signal from the lower vibration detection switch 3006a, become signals wired or connected at the panel relay substrate 1710 and vibrate. The detection sensor 1 is transmitted to the main control board 1310X, and is input to the main control MPU 1310a via the above-described main control input circuit 1310b. Further, the lower vibration detection sensor 2 which is a detection signal from the lower vibration detection switch 3006 b is transmitted to the main control substrate 1310 X as the vibration detection sensor 2 in the panel relay substrate 1710, and via the above-mentioned main control input circuit 1310 b It is input to the main control MPU 1310a. The main control MPU 1310 a is a vibration detection sensor 1 which is a wired-OR connected signal in the switch input process of step S104 in the main control side timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 177 which is repeatedly performed every 4 milliseconds (ms), The vibration detection sensor 2 is read, and this read-out wired connection is made in an abnormal vibration two-step notification process to be described later in the fraud detection process in step S112 in the main control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. Based on the vibration detection sensor 1 which is a signal, it is determined whether or not there is a dog tick, and an abnormal vibration two-step notification process described later in the fraud detection process of step S112 in the main control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. In this, this read vibration The presence or absence of the dog pie is determined based on the outlet sensor 2 (in the abnormal vibration two-step informing process for the special winning opening and the abnormal vibration two-step informing process for the sorting device, the fraudulent action is detected as a fraudulent action detection when the dodsy goto is detected. If the flag FD-FLG is set to the value 1 while no detection is detected, the cheating detection flag FD-FLG is set to the value 0 as no cheating detection), and the main control side shown in FIG. In the port output process of step S118 in the timer interrupt process, the determination result (presence or absence of a dock) is output to the external terminal board 558 described above, and the peripheral control board command of step S120 in the main control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. In the transmission process, a command to convey the determination result that the dock is It adapted to transmit to the sides control board 1510.

  The panel relay substrate 1710 is supplied with +35 V from the main control substrate 1310X and is the same ground (GND) as the ground (GND) of the main control substrate 1310X. The ground (GND) to the upper vibration detection switch 3005 and the lower vibration detection switches 3006 a and 3006 b is electrically connected to the ground (GND) of the panel relay substrate 1710.

  The sensitivity setting circuit 1710za (1710zb, 1710zc) for the upper vibration detection switch mainly includes the resistors MR70 to MR73 (MR80 to MR83, MR90 to MR93), the Zener diode MD70 (MD80, MD90), and the shunt regulator MIC70 (MIC80, MIC90). It comprises an electrolytic capacitor MC70 (MC80, MC90). The shunt regulator MIC 70 (MIC 80, MIC 90) has a reduced temperature drift due to the ambient temperature, and can create and supply a regulated power supply that is held at a constant voltage to the load.

  The other end of the resistor MR70 (MR80, MR90) whose one end is electrically connected to the +35 V power supply line is the cathode terminal of a Zener diode MD70 (MD80, MD90) whose anode terminal is electrically connected to the ground (GND) It is electrically connected and also electrically connected to one end of the resistor MR71 (MR81, MR91). The other end of the resistor MR71 (MR81, MR91) is electrically connected to one end of the resistor MR72 (resistor MR82, MR82) and electrically connected to the K terminal which is a cathode terminal of the shunt regulator MIC70 (MIC80, MIC90). It is connected and supplied to the upper vibration detection switch 3005 (3006a, 3006b) as a vibration detection power supply 1 (vibration detection power supply 2 and vibration detection power supply 3). The positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor MC70 (MC80, MC90) whose negative terminal is electrically connected to the ground (GND) is electrically connected to the line supplying the vibration detection power supply 1 (vibration detection power supply 2 and vibration detection power supply 3). Are connected to each other, and ripples of the vibration detection power supply 1 (the vibration detection power supply 2 and the vibration detection power supply 3) are removed and smoothed. The electrolytic capacitor MC70 (MC80, MC90) also plays a role as a low pass filter.

  The other end of the resistor MR72 (MR82, MR92) is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR73 (MR83, MR93) whose one end is electrically connected to the ground (GND), and the shunt regulator MIC70 (MIC80, MIC80, It is electrically connected to the REF terminal which is the reference voltage input terminal of the MIC 90). The A terminal, which is the anode terminal of the shunt regulator MIC70 (MIC80, MIC90), is electrically connected to the ground (GND).

  The vibration detection power supply 1 is determined by 2.5V × (MR72 + MR73) / MR73 by the resistance values of the resistors MR72 and MR73. The vibration detection power supply 2 is determined by the resistance value of the resistors MR 82 and MR 83 in the same manner as the vibration detection power supply 1 by 2.5 V × (MR 82 + MR 83) ÷ MR 83.

  The upper vibration detection switch 3005 and the lower vibration detection switches 3006a and 3006b can change the sensitivity of vibration detection by the supplied power, and the sensitivity setting circuit for upper vibration detection switch 1710za and the lower vibration detection switch The sensitivity setting circuit 1710zb and the sensitivity setting circuit for lower vibration detection switch 1710zc can respectively set the sensitivity of vibration detection by the upper vibration detection switch 3005 and the lower vibration detection switches 3006a and 3006b.

  In the present embodiment, the upper vibration detection sensor which is a detection signal from the upper vibration detection switch 3005 and the lower vibration detection sensor 1 which is a detection signal from the lower vibration detection switch 3006 a are arranged on the panel relay substrate 1710 as described above. It is wired-OR connected and transmitted to the main control board 1310X as the vibration detection sensor 1, and is input to the main control MPU 1310a via the main control side input circuit. This is because one or both of the upper vibration detection switch 3005 and the lower vibration detection switch 3006a do not react at all, depending on the mode (the hitting position, the hitting angle, the hitting strength, etc.) by the dog radio. Since one or both may react excessively, the sensitivity of the vibration detection of the upper vibration detection switch 3005 and the sensitivity of the vibration detection of the lower vibration detection switch 3006 a are mutually compensated.

  In addition, the lower vibration detection sensor 2 which is a detection signal from the lower vibration detection switch 3006b is transmitted to the main control substrate 1310X as the vibration detection sensor 2 in the panel relay substrate 1710 as described above, and the main control side input circuit 1310b is It is input to the main control MPU 1310 a via This is because the lower vibration detection switch 3006b may not react at all or may excessively react depending on the mode (dipping position, tapping angle, tapping strength, etc.) by the drag torque. This is to make it possible to adjust the sensitivity of vibration detection.

  The resistances of the resistors MR72 and MR73, the resistances of the resistors MR82 and MR83, and the resistances of the resistors MR92 and MR93 are respectively selected by various tests, and the sensitivity of the vibration detection of the upper vibration detection switch 3005 and the lower vibration The sensitivity of vibration detection of the detection switch 3006 a and the sensitivity of vibration detection of the lower vibration detection switch 3006 b are respectively set.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, the upper vibration detection sensor which is a detection signal from the upper vibration detection switch 3005 and the lower vibration detection sensor 1 which is a detection signal from the lower vibration detection switch 3006 a Although wired or connected at 1710 and transmitted as the vibration detection sensor 1 to the main control board 1310 X and input to the main control MPU 1310 a via the main control side input circuit 1310 b, the wired relay is not connected at the panel relay board 1710. It may be independently transmitted to the main control board 1310X as it is, and may be input to the main control MPU 1310a via the main control side input circuit 1310b. In this way, the mode of the main operation is mainly determined using a combination of the upper vibration detection sensor which is a detection signal from the upper vibration detection switch 3005 and the lower vibration detection sensor 1 which is a detection signal from the lower vibration detection switch 3006a. The control MPU 1310 can determine and transmit the information to the outside (from the external terminal board 558 to the hall computer installed in the game hall).

  For example, in the case where both the upper vibration detection switch 3005 and the lower vibration detection switch 3006 a do not react, the 0th (zero) tapping mode in which the dog rock is not performed and the upper vibration detection switch 3005 react. If the lower vibration detection switch 3006a does not react, the first tapping mode, which may have been performed, may occur. If the upper vibration detection switch 3005 does not react and the lower vibration detection switch 3006a responds, the dogggot is performed In the case where both the upper vibration detection switch 3005 and the lower vibration detection switch 3006 a react, there may be mentioned the third striking mode in which the drag is performed.

[Error notification of various distribution units]
Next, abnormality notification of the first, second, and third distribution units 4829a, 4829b, and 4829c will be briefly described. As described above, the first distribution unit 4829a is configured to be divided into the right track flowing to the right and the left track flowing to the left toward the front of the ball passage 4834 according to the swing timing of the first electric distribution piece 4835 It is done. As described above, the first electric distribution piece 4835 always swings in the form of a wiper (a wiper that constantly reciprocates between the position of the mechanical end on the left side and the position of the mechanical end on the right). The first distribution unit 4829a is provided with an optical type first electric distribution plate sensor (not shown) for detecting whether or not it is detected. As described above, the second distribution unit 4829 b is configured to be divided into the right back passage 4841 and the left-hand passage 4842 according to the swing timing of the second electric distribution piece 4840. As described above, the second electric distribution piece 4840 always swings in the form of a wiper (a wiper that constantly reciprocates between the position of the left mechanical end and the position of the vertically inverted mechanical end), An optical second motor-driven split sensor (not shown) for detecting whether or not it is oscillating is provided in the second distributor 4829b. As described above, the third distributing unit 4829c is configured such that the rotating member 4846 of the ball swing type distributing device 4843 is always rotated, and is an optical rotating member (not shown) that detects whether it is rotating or not. A sensor for the third distribution unit 4829c is provided.

  Detection signals from the first and second motor distribution split sensors and the rotation member sensor are input to the main control board 1310X, and are input to the main control MPU 1310a via the above-described main control input circuit 1310b. The main control MPU 1310a causes the main control MPU 1310a to execute the switch input process of step S104 in the main control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 177 which is repeatedly performed every 4 milliseconds (ms). The detection signals from the sensor and the sensor for the rotating member are read, and in the fraud detection process in step S112 in the main control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 177, the read first and second sensors for the electric distribution piece, and It is determined whether the swing abnormality or the rotation abnormality is detected based on the detection signal from the rotating member sensor, and the result of the determination (the first motor distribution piece in the port output process of step S118 in the main control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. Whether the 4835 rocking movement has occurred or not, the second electric distribution piece 4840 rocking movement The main control timer interrupt shown in FIG. 177 individually outputs a lighting signal to the corresponding decoration lamp provided on the game board 5 with or without occurrence of normal occurrence or presence or absence of occurrence of rotational operation abnormality of the rotation member 4846). In the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in the process, the determination result (a rocking operation abnormality occurrence of the first electric distribution piece 4835, a rocking movement abnormality occurrence of the second electric distribution piece 4840, or a rotation operation of the rotating member 4846 A command to convey the occurrence of an abnormality is sent to the peripheral control board 1510.

  The main control board 1310 X (main control MPU 1310 a) lights up in a red light emission mode the corresponding first electric distribution decoration lamp provided on the game board 5 when there is an occurrence of a rocking operation abnormality of the first electric distribution distribution 4835 When the second electric distribution piece 4840 swings abnormally, the corresponding second electric distribution piece decoration lamp provided on the game board 5 lights in green, and the rotation member 4846 rotates abnormally. The corresponding decoration lamp for the rotary member provided on the game board 5 is lit in a blue light emission mode. In addition, using a single full-color LED, a red LED element is associated with the presence or absence of the occurrence of the rocking operation abnormality of the first electric distribution piece 4835 and notified, and the green LED element is rocked of the second electric distribution piece 4840 It is also possible to associate and notify the blue LED element as the presence or absence of the rotational operation abnormality occurrence of the rotary member 4846 in association with the presence or absence of the operation abnormality occurrence.

  The peripheral control board 1510 is a command for transmitting the occurrence of the rocking operation abnormality of the first electric distribution piece 4835 from the main control board 1310X, the generation of the rocking movement abnormality of the second electric distribution piece 4840, or the generation of the rotation movement abnormality of the rotating member 4846. Is received, control is made to flow the notification sound for the first electric distribution piece from the various speakers when there is a rocking operation abnormality of the first electric distribution piece 4835 based on the command, and the second electric distribution piece 4840 When there is a rocking movement abnormality, control is made to flow a second electric distribution piece alarm sound different from the first electric distribution piece alarm sound from the various speakers, and when there is a rotation movement abnormality of the rotating member 4846 Control is performed such that notification sounds for a rotating member different from the notification sound for the first electric distribution piece and the notification sound for the second electric distribution piece are emitted from various speakers. The tone colors of the first electric distribution warning sound, the second electric distribution warning sound, and the rotation sound of the rotation member are different.

  Thus, by notifying the occurrence of the rocking movement abnormality of the first electric distribution piece 4835, the rocking movement abnormality of the second electric distribution piece 4840, and the rotation movement abnormality of the rotating member 4846, the presence or absence of the abnormality generation can be It can be promptly notified to the store clerk or attendant of the game hall. In addition, even if the fraudulent act of stopping the operation of the first motorized distribution piece 4835, the second motorized distribution piece 4840, and the rotating member 4846 by a wire or a string is performed, the area to be advantageous to the fraudster It is possible to quickly notify the salesperson or attendant of the gaming hall of the status of being distributed.

  Further, the main control board 1310X (main control MPU 1310a) may output a signal to be transmitted to the hall computer via the external terminal board 558, when there is an occurrence of the rocking operation abnormality of the first electric distribution piece 4835. A signal to be transmitted to the hall computer may be output via the external terminal plate 558 when there is a rocking operation abnormality of the second electric distribution piece 4840, and when there is a rotation operation abnormality of the rotating member 4846, the outside A signal to be transmitted to the hall computer may be output through the terminal plate 558. Such signals can be individually output and transmitted to the hall computer through the external terminal plate 558, but any one of the first motor distribution piece 4835, the second motor distribution piece 4840, and the rotary member 4846. When an abnormality occurs in one (that is, although it is not possible to identify the target in which the abnormality occurred), a signal may be output and transmitted to the hall computer via the external terminal plate 558. .

  Further, in the case where the game board 5 is provided with a display device such as a liquid crystal display device, the peripheral control board 1510 causes the abnormal operation of the first electric distribution piece 4835 from the main control board 1310 X, the second electric distribution piece Upon receiving a command to convey the occurrence of the rocking movement abnormality of 4840 or the rotation movement abnormality of the rotating member 4846, if there is the rocking movement abnormality occurrence of the first electric distribution piece 4835 based on the command, that effect is notified. Control may be performed to display a message on the display device, or control may be performed to display a message notifying that effect on the display device if there is an occurrence of a rocking operation abnormality of the second electric distribution piece 4840. Alternatively, when there is an abnormality in the rotational operation of the rotational member 4846, control is performed to display a message notifying that effect on the display device. There. When one of the first electric distribution piece 4835, the second electric distribution piece 4840, and the rotation member 4846 from the main control board 1310X has an abnormality (that is, the peripheral control board 1510 is abnormal). Control may be performed to display a message notifying occurrence of an abnormality on the display device) (although the target in which the

[How to monitor Dokki Goto]
Next, a method for monitoring a dog tick will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 261 is a flow chart showing an example of the vibration detection effective timer process for the sorting apparatus, FIG. 262 is a flow chart showing an example of the abnormal vibration two-step notification process for the sorting apparatus, and FIG. FIG. 264 is a flowchart showing an example of notification processing, and FIG. 264 is a flowchart showing an example of vibration determination processing. In addition, the vibration detection effective timer processing for the sorting device, the abnormal vibration two-step notification processing for the sorting device, and the abnormal vibration two-step notification processing for the special winning opening are the irregularities in step S112 in the main control timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. It is performed as one process of an action detection process.

  As described above, the determination of the presence or absence of the dog spin is a pachinko machine so that the game ball can enter the specific receiving port 4855v of the distribution disc 4853 provided in the ball swirl type distribution device 4843 in the lower layer game zone 4825 1 Detecting fraudulent activity that applies vibration to the pachinko machine 1 by shaking or hitting it, detection signals from the upper vibration detection switch 3005 and the lower vibration detection switch 3006 a, and the rotating ball in the right hitting game zone 4824 Vibration is applied to the pachinko machine 1 by shaking or striking the pachinko machine 1 so that the game ball can be placed toward the ball receiving recess 4809 formed on the receiving member 4808 and entered into the V prize hole 4810. A detection signal from the lower vibration detection switch 3006 b capable of detecting an illegal act to be added; The main control MPU1310a performs the main control board 1310X based.

  In the lower layer gaming zone 4825, as described above, the passage type first ball sensor 4870a for detecting game balls passing through the right course in the ball passage 4834 of the first distribution unit 4829a, and the right of the second distribution unit 4829b A passing type second ball sensor 4870b is provided for detecting game balls passing through the inner passage 4841. The main control MPU 1310a detects the game balls by these first and second ball sensors 4870a and 4870b. It is possible to manage the number of balls that have entered the distribution device 4843 of the distribution unit 4829c of No.3.

  For this reason, the main control MPU 1310a shakes the pachinko machine 1 so that the game ball can enter the specific receiving port 4855v of the distributing disc 4853 provided in the ball swirl type distributing device 4843 in the lower layer game zone 4825. The fraud in step S112 in the main control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 177 is repeatedly performed every 4 milliseconds (ms) to determine the fraudulent behavior (presence or absence of dodukigot) that applies vibration to the pachinko machine 1 by striking or striking. The vibration detection effective timer processing for the sorting device in the action detection processing is performed, and then the abnormal vibration two-step notification processing for the sorting device is performed and notified.

  When the sorting device vibration detection valid timer process in the fraud detection process is started, as shown in FIG. 261, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether or not there is a ball passing to the sorting device (step S420). In this determination, in the switch input process of step S104 in the main control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 177, the passage detecting the game ball passing the right course in the ball passage 4834 of the first distribution unit 4829a in the lower layer game zone 4825 The detection signal from the first ball sensor 4870a of the second type and the detection signal from the second ball sensor 4870b of the second type for detecting gaming balls passing through the right rear passage 4841 of the second distribution unit 4829b are read If it is determined that there is no ball passing, the present routine is ended as it is, but if it is determined that there is ball passing based on any one of the detection signals, the start of effective timer VT1 is set. (Step S422), this routine ends. The valid timer VT1 is preset to 30000 milliseconds (30 seconds), and is subtracted in the timer subtraction process of step S102 in the main control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. Since the main control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 177 is repeatedly performed every 4 milliseconds (ms), the value of effective timer VT1 is decremented by 4 in the timer subtraction process of step S102, and the value 0 (zero When it becomes second), it means that effective timer VT1 has passed.

  Since the main control MPU 1310a is configured to perform the determination in step S422 each time this routine is performed, 30000 can be set by repeatedly starting the valid timer VT1 every time the ball passes to the sorting apparatus. It will reset millisecond (30 seconds).

  Subsequently, when the distribution apparatus abnormal vibration two-step notification process is started, as shown in FIG. 262, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether or not the valid timer VT1 has passed 30000 milliseconds (30 seconds). (Step S430). This determination is performed based on whether the value of the valid timer VT1 is subtracted in the timer subtraction process of step S102 in the main control timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. When it is determined that 30000 milliseconds (30 seconds) have elapsed when the value is 0 (zero seconds), 30000 milliseconds (30 seconds) have elapsed when the value of the valid timer VT1 is not 0 (zero seconds). It is determined that there is not.

  In the determination of step S430, when the value of the valid timer VT1 is 0 (zero seconds), that is, when it is determined that 30000 milliseconds (30 seconds) has elapsed, the main control MPU 1310a ends the present routine as it is If the value of the valid timer VT1 is not 0 (zero seconds), that is, if it is determined that 30000 milliseconds (30 seconds) have not elapsed, vibration determination processing is performed (step S432). In this vibration determination processing, the detailed description will be described later, but the vibration detection read in the switch input processing in step S104 in the main control timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 177 which is repeatedly performed every 4 milliseconds (ms) The upper vibration detection sensor which is a detection signal from the switch 3005 and the lower vibration detection sensor 1 which is a detection signal from the lower vibration detection switch 3006 a process the vibration detection sensor 1 which is a wired OR connected signal as effective. In this case, each time the switch input processing of step S104 is performed, the number of times when the read logic of the vibration detection sensor 1 is the detection logic is counted by the vibration counter VC. In the present embodiment, the vibration counter VC is read each time the switch input processing in step S104 is performed when the vibration detection sensor 2 which is a detection signal from the lower vibration detection switch 3006b is processed as effective. Since the number of times when the logic of the vibration detection sensor 2 is the detection logic is also counted, it is a common counter.

  Following step S432, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether or not there is abnormal vibration (step S434). This determination is performed based on the value of the vibration counter VC counted in the vibration determination process of step S430, and when there is abnormal vibration when the value of the vibration counter VC reaches the determination value (the value 4 in the present embodiment) On the other hand, when the value of the vibration counter VC does not reach the determination value (in the present embodiment, the value 4), it is determined that there is no abnormal vibration.

  In the determination of step S434, when the main control MPU 1310a determines that the value of the vibration counter VC has not reached the determination value (in the present embodiment, the value 4), the value of the abnormal vibration counter AVC is a value 0 (zero). It is determined whether there is any (step S436). The abnormal vibration counter AVC counts the number of times of determination as abnormal vibration, and is stored in a general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU 1310a. The abnormal vibration counter AVC is reset to an initial value (value 0 (zero)) at the time of power recovery at power on of the pachinko machine 1 or at the time of power recovery after a power failure or at the end of the big hit gaming state (instantly At the time of power recovery after a momentary blackout, if the momentary blackout period is short (for example, within a few seconds), the abnormal vibration counter AVC is not reset, and the blackout period is long even if it can not be said that a blackout In the case (for example, in the case of a period of several tens of seconds), the abnormal vibration counter AVC is reset). When the value of the abnormal vibration counter AVC is the value 0 (zero) at the time of determination in step S434, the main control MPU 1310a determines that the number of times determined as abnormal vibration is zero, and the player has not made a goothing.

  When it is determined in step S436 that the value of the abnormal vibration counter AVC is the value 0 (zero), the main control MPU 1310a ends the present routine as it is.

  On the other hand, when the main control MPU 1310a determines in the determination of step S434 that the value of the vibration counter VC has reached the determination value (in the present embodiment, the value 4), the value 1 is added to the value of the abnormal vibration counter AVC. (Increment, step S438), it is determined whether the value of the abnormal vibration counter AVC is equal to or less than the threshold TH (step S440). The threshold value TH is set to a value of 5, so that the notification method can be changed between when the value of the abnormal vibration counter AVC exceeds the threshold value TH and when it does not exceed the threshold value TH. .

  In the determination of step S440, the main control MPU 1310a determines that the value of the abnormal vibration counter AVC is less than or equal to the threshold TH, that is, when the value of the abnormal vibration counter AVC does not exceed the threshold TH or the determination of step S436. If the main control MPU 1310a determines that the value of the abnormal vibration counter AVC is not 0 (zero), the main control MPU 1310a sets the first notification mode as a weak notification (step S442), and ends this routine.

  In the first notification mode, in the early stage of detecting the doglike, the player does not feel uncomfortable for the player who is playing the game with the pachinko machine that is adjacent to the pachinko machine that is doing the dogking. When a store clerk or clerk passes through the front of the pachinko machine 1 that is doing a dapplet, it can notify that effect, for example, in the door frame top unit 450 provided in the door frame 3 shown in FIG. 91A. A plurality of LEDs mounted respectively on the door frame top central decorative substrate 455 and the door frame top left decorative substrate 456 are set to emit light in red for 5 minutes. In addition, a plurality of LEDs mounted on various other decorative substrates provided in the door frame 3 and a plurality of LEDs mounted on various decorative substrates provided in the game board 5 have light emission modes along with the progression of effects. There is.

  When such a light emission mode is performed for 5 minutes, although it returns to the contents (light emission mode) along with the progress of the original effect, while the light emission mode according to the first notification mode proceeds, Since the content (light emission mode) along with the progress is also in progress, the content (light emission mode) that has advanced from this original effect for only 5 minutes without returning to the content (light emission mode) of the original effect just before switching to the first notification mode It becomes an aspect) and switches.

  The main control MPU 1310 a creates a weak thick alert command divided into the alert display serving as the first alert mode, and stores it as the transmit information in the transmission information storage area described above. Main control MPU 1310a reads transmission information from the transmission information storage area described above in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 177, and performs peripheral control using this transmission information as the main cycle serial data. Transmit to substrate 1510. Thus, when the CPU of the peripheral control board 1510 analyzes the received command analysis process of step S1022 in the peripheral control unit power-on process shown in FIG. 185 and the analyzed command includes a weak notification command, The light emission mode generation schedule data and the like set to the weak link information are read out (extracted) from the control ROM 1510 b and set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510 a. Then, the CPU of the peripheral control board 1510 configures the light emission mode generation schedule data already set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510 a in the display data output process of step S1016 in the peripheral control unit power-on process shown in FIG. Among the light emission data arranged in time series, the door frame top central decoration substrate 455 in the door frame top unit 450 provided in the door frame 3 shown in FIG. 91A and the door frame top left decoration according to the light emission data indicated by the pointer A plurality of LEDs mounted on the substrate 456 are set to emit light in red for 5 minutes.

  On the other hand, in the determination of step S440, when the value of the abnormal vibration counter AVC is not smaller than the threshold TH, that is, when the value of the abnormal vibration counter AVC exceeds the threshold TH, the main control MPU 1310a determines 2. Set the notification mode (step S444).

  This second notification mode is to notify the dog radio more strongly than the first notification mode described above, and it is possible for a clerk or attendant who patrols the game hall to rush immediately to the pachinko machine 1 that is doing a dog radio. For example, the dish upper left decoration unit 270, the dish upper right decoration unit 275, the dish lower left decoration unit 280, the dish lower right decoration unit 285, and various decoration substrates in the effect operation unit 300, provided in the door frame 3 shown in FIG. 91A. A light emission mode in which the plurality of LEDs mounted on each of the plurality of LEDs mounted on the door frame top unit 450 and the plurality of LEDs mounted on the door frame top left decorative substrate 456 and the door frame top right decorative substrate 457 in the door frame top unit 450 blink for 5 minutes in red. And a plurality of door frame top central decoration substrates 455 mounted on the door frame top unit 450. In addition to the warning sound for strong notification, the ED has a light emission mode that blinks for 5 minutes in white, and an announcement for strong notification that “vibration has been detected” is at a maximum volume. Various speakers (vibration speaker 354, top center speaker 462, A sound mode that flows for 90 seconds from the top side speaker 464, body frame speaker 622, etc.) and that a dog computer is being performed on the hall computer of the game hall via the external terminal board 558 shown in FIG. To stop the game ball from being projected toward the game area 5a in order to stop the game so that an unauthorized player who does a dog game can not play any more games. Is set to the value 1 in the fraud detection flag FD-FLG which can be set. In addition, several LED mounted in the various decoration board | substrate with which the game board 5 is equipped has become the light emission aspect along advancing of a production | presentation.

  When such a light emission mode is performed for 5 minutes, although it returns to the contents (light emission mode) along with the progress of the original effect, while the light emission mode according to the second notification mode is in progress, Since the content (light emission mode) along with the progress is also in progress, the content (light emission mode) which has progressed for only 5 minutes from this original effect without returning to the content (light emission mode) of the original effect just before switching to the second notification mode It becomes an aspect) and switches. Similarly for the sound mode, when the sound mode is performed for 90 seconds, the sound mode according to the second notification mode progresses although the content (sounds such as sound, sound effects, and music) returns along the progress of the original effect. Since the content (sound) along with the progress of the original effect is actually progressing during the period, the original effect content (sound) immediately before switching to the second notification mode is not returned, and this original effect It changes as the contents (sound) advanced only for 90 seconds from. When switching to the content (sound) advanced for only 90 seconds from this original effect, the sound mode according to the second notification mode is turned off, and the volume of this sound is gradually increased toward the set volume. It is switched in such a way that fades in, so that the difference in volume caused by switching does not surprise the player.

  The main control MPU 1310a creates a dog information notification command to be divided into the notification information in the second notification mode, stores it as the transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above, and sends a notification that the dog information is being performed to the hall computer. The output of penetration to be transmitted is set and stored as the output information in the above-described output information storage area. Main control MPU 1310a reads transmission information from the transmission information storage area described above in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 177, and performs peripheral control using this transmission information as the main cycle serial data. Transmit to substrate 1510. Thus, when the CPU of the peripheral control board 1510 analyzes the received command analysis process of step S1022 in the peripheral control unit power-on process shown in FIG. The light emission mode generation schedule data, the sound generation schedule data, etc. which are set to the strong notification, are read out (extracted) from the control ROM 1510 b and set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510 a. Then, the CPU of the peripheral control board 1510 configures the light emission mode generation schedule data already set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510 a in the display data output process of step S1016 in the peripheral control unit power-on process shown in FIG. Among the light emission data arranged in time series, according to the light emission data indicated by the pointer, the dish upper left decoration unit 270, the dish upper right decoration unit 275, the dish lower left decoration unit 280, the dish provided in the door frame 3 shown in FIG. A plurality of LEDs mounted respectively on various decoration substrates in the lower right decoration unit 285 and the rendering operation unit 300 and a door frame top left decoration substrate 456 and a door frame top right decoration substrate 457 in the door frame top unit 450 LEDs for 5 minutes flashing red In the light control mode, a plurality of LEDs mounted on the door frame top central decorative substrate 455 in the door frame top unit 450 are set to a light emission mode that blinks white for 5 minutes and the peripheral control unit shown in FIG. In the sound data output process of step S1018, the peripheral control is performed according to the sound command data indicated by the pointer among the sound command data arranged in time series constituting the sound generation schedule data set in the RAM of peripheral control IC 1510a. Sound control data is input from CPU of IC 1510a The sound source of peripheral control IC 1510a reads sound data from SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2, and according to the track number specified in the sound command data, the warning sound for strong notification and "vibration detected" Sound day for strong announcement Together incorporate, to set the output channel to be used according to the output channel number, outputted from the output channel specified various speakers (vibration speaker 354, top center speaker 462, topside speaker 464, main body frame speaker 622, etc.).

  Furthermore, main control MPU 1310a reads output information from the output information storage area described above in the port output process of step S118 in the main control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 177, and based on the output information, predetermined main control MPU 1310a From the output terminal of the output port, a signal is transmitted to the external terminal board 558 to convey to the hall computer that the dock is being performed.

  Furthermore, main control MPU 1310a sets the value 1 to the fraud detection flag FD-FLG in the firing permission signal setting process of step S113 in the main control side timer interrupt process shown in FIG. The firing permission logic is set to the inverted firing stopping logic (firing non-permission logic) as logic of and the above-mentioned output information storage area is stored as output information. Main control MPU 1310a reads output information from the output information storage area described above in the port output process of step S118 in the main control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 177, and based on the output information, predetermined output port of main control MPU 1310a. The output control terminal 633b outputs to the launch control unit 633b of the payout control board 633, and the launch control unit 633b can not launch the gaming ball toward the gaming area 5a. As a result, the game is stopped so that an unauthorized player who does a dog game can not play any more games.

  Following step S444, the main control MPU 1310a sets the cheating detection flag FD-FLG to the value 1 (step S446), and ends this routine. As described above, the injustice detection flag FD-FLG is a flag for notifying the presence or absence of the injustice, and the value 0 is set when the injustice is not detected, and the value when the injustice is detected. 1 is set.

  In step S446, the main control MPU 1310a sets the value 1 to the injustice detection flag FD-FLG, whereby the emission permission signal is set in the emission permission signal setting process of step S113 in the main control timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. The firing permission logic is set to the inverted firing stopping logic (firing non-permission logic) as logic of and the above-mentioned output information storage area is stored as output information. Main control MPU 1310a reads output information from the output information storage area described above in the port output process of step S118 in the main control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 177, and based on the output information, predetermined output port of main control MPU 1310a. The output control terminal 633b outputs to the launch control unit 633b of the payout control board 633, and the launch control unit 633b can not launch the gaming ball toward the gaming area 5a. As a result, the game is stopped so that an unauthorized player who does a dog game can not play any more games.

  As described above, main control MPU 1310a is a small symbol determined in the symbol lottery performed at the same time as the lottery in the special symbol and the special motorized product control processing in step S114 in the main control timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 177 as described above. Depending on the type of symbol, the execution mode of the small hit game to be executed subsequently is set to one of a plurality of modes. Specifically, in the small hit game, the second shutter plate 4806 of the first large winning opening 4807 in the right hitting game zone 4824 is operated to make it possible to enter the gaming ball into the first large winning opening 4807 It is a game, and execution of opening and closing pattern of the ball entry opening by the second shutter plate 4806 and opening time when opening is performed depending on which of the small hit symbols caused by the small hit game executed this time is a small hit symbol The mode is set to be different, and the possibility of entering the gaming ball into the first large winning opening 4807 will be different according to this execution mode. That is, the execution mode of the small hit game in which the second shutter plate 4806 is retracted for a relatively long time (for example, 1.5) is the second shutter plate 4806 for a relatively short time (for example, 0.5 seconds). It becomes easier to enter the game ball into the first large winning opening 4807 than the execution mode of the small hit game which backs the. In the small hit game, all the game balls in the first large winning opening 4807 reach the rotating ball receiving member 4808 inside the first large winning opening 4807, and the gaming balls are received by the ball receiving member 4808 If it is received in the recess 4809, the game ball that has been guided to the V winning opening 4810 by the rotation of the ball receiving member 4808 and has not been received in the ball receiving recess 4809 falls below the ball receiving member 4808. Roll on the inclined taper circumferential surface and enter the general winning opening 4801. When the gaming ball guided to the V winning opening 4810 side enters the V winning opening 4810 by the rotation operation of the rotary ball receiving member 4808, the main control MPU 1310a maximizes the opening / closing plate 4811 of the second large winning opening 4812 Perform a big hit game that opens and closes until the number of times of opening and closing is reached.

  For this reason, the main control MPU 1310a is a pachinko machine so that the game ball can be placed toward the ball receiving recess 4809 formed on the rotating ball receiving member 4808 in the right-handed game zone 4824 to enter the V winning opening 4810 The main control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 177 is repeatedly performed every 4 milliseconds (ms) to determine the fraudulent behavior (the presence or absence of the dog) that applies vibration to the pachinko machine 1 by shaking or striking 1 The abnormal vibration two-step informing process for the special winning opening in the injustice detecting process in step S112 in step S112 is performed and notified.

  When the abnormal vibration two-step informing process for the special winning opening in the injustice detecting process is started, as shown in FIG. 263, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether or not a small hit game is in progress (step S460). This determination is made based on whether or not the small hit game state is generated in the special symbol in step S114 in the main control timer interrupt process shown in FIG.

  If it is determined in step S460 that the main control MPU 1310a determines that the small hit gaming state is not generated, the main control MPU 1310a ends the present routine as it is, while the main control MPU 1310 determines that the small hit gaming state is generated, the first large It is determined whether the game ball has entered the winning opening 4807 (step S462). In this determination, in the switch input process of step S104 in the main control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 177, it is detected from the first big winning opening sensor 4807a that detects that the first big winning opening 4807 in the right hitting game zone 4824 is entered. The detection signal is read, and it is performed based on the read detection signal.

  If it is determined in step S462 that the main control MPU 1310a determines that the game ball has not entered the first large winning opening 4807, the main routine is ended as it is, while the first large winning opening 4807 is entered. When it is determined, vibration determination processing is performed (step S464). In this vibration determination process, the detailed description will be described later, but the lower vibration read in the switch input process of step S104 in the main control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 177 repeatedly performed every 4 milliseconds (ms) When the vibration detection sensor 2 which is a detection signal from the detection switch 3006 b is processed as effective, every time the switch input processing in step S 104 is performed, the read logic of the vibration detection sensor 2 is a dog detection logic The number is counted by the vibration counter VC. In the present embodiment, the vibration counter VC is connected to the upper vibration detection sensor which is a detection signal from the vibration detection switch 3005 and the lower vibration detection sensor 1 which is a detection signal from the lower vibration detection switch 3006a. When processing the vibration detection sensor 1, which is a signal, as effective, every time the switch input processing in step S104 is performed, the number of times when the read logic of the vibration detection sensor 1 is the detection logic is also counted. Therefore, it is a shared counter.

  Following step S464, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether or not there is abnormal vibration (step S466). This determination is performed based on the value of the vibration counter VC counted in the vibration determination process of step S462, and when there is abnormal vibration when the value of the vibration counter VC reaches the determination value (in the present embodiment, the value 4) On the other hand, when the value of the vibration counter VC does not reach the determination value (in the present embodiment, the value 4), it is determined that there is no abnormal vibration.

  In the determination of step S466, when the main control MPU 1310a determines that the value of the vibration counter VC has not reached the determination value (in the present embodiment, the value 4), the value of the abnormal vibration counter AVC is a value 0 (zero). It is determined whether there is any (step S468). This abnormal vibration counter AVC is a variable shared with that in the distribution device abnormal vibration two-step notification processing shown in FIG. 262 (that is, it is changed in the present routine and the distribution device abnormal vibration two-step notification processing respectively) Is a variable that can be calculated), and as described above, counts the number of times of determination as abnormal vibration, and is stored in a general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU 1310a. The abnormal vibration counter AVC is reset to an initial value (value 0 (zero)) at the time of power recovery at power on of the pachinko machine 1 or at the time of power recovery after a power failure or at the end of the big hit gaming state (instantly At the time of power recovery after a momentary blackout, if the momentary blackout period is short (for example, within a few seconds), the abnormal vibration counter AVC is not reset, and the blackout period is long even if it can not be said that a blackout In the case (for example, in the case of a period of several tens of seconds), the abnormal vibration counter AVC is reset). When the value of the abnormal vibration counter AVC is the value 0 (zero) at the time of determination in step S468, the main control MPU 1310a determines that the number of times determined as abnormal vibration is zero, and the player has not performed dogkigoto.

  When it is determined in step S468 that the value of the abnormal vibration counter AVC is the value 0 (zero), the main control MPU 1310a ends the present routine as it is.

  On the other hand, in the determination of step S466, when the main control MPU 1310a determines that the value of the vibration counter VC has reached the determination value (in the present embodiment, the value 4), the value 1 is added to the value of the abnormal vibration counter AVC. (Increment, step S470), it is determined whether the value of the abnormal vibration counter AVC is equal to or less than the threshold TH (step S472). This threshold value TH is a constant which is the same as that in the distribution device abnormal vibration two-step notification process shown in FIG. 262 (that is, the same for the present routine and the distribution device abnormal vibration two-step notification process) Is a constant set), and as described above, the notification is made when the value of the abnormal vibration counter AVC exceeds the threshold value TH and does not exceed the threshold value TH as described above. It is possible to change the way.

  In the determination of step S472, the main control MPU 1310a determines that the value of the abnormal vibration counter AVC is less than or equal to the threshold TH, that is, when the value of the abnormal vibration counter AVC does not exceed the threshold TH or the determination of step S468. If the main control MPU 1310a determines that the value of the abnormal vibration counter AVC is not 0 (zero), the main control MPU 1310a sets the first notification mode as weak notification (step S474), and ends this routine. This first notification mode is the same as that in the abnormal vibration two-step notification process for the sorting apparatus shown in FIG. 262, and the detailed description is omitted here.

  On the other hand, in the determination of step S472, when the value of the abnormal vibration counter AVC is not smaller than the threshold TH, that is, when the value of the abnormal vibration counter AVC exceeds the threshold TH, the main control MPU 1310a determines 2. Set the notification mode (step S476). This second notification mode is the same as that in the abnormal vibration two-step notification process for the sorting apparatus shown in FIG. 262, and the detailed description thereof is omitted here.

  Following step S476, the main control MPU 1310a sets the cheating detection flag FD-FLG to the value 1 (step S478), and the present routine is ended. As described above, the injustice detection flag FD-FLG is a flag for notifying the presence or absence of the injustice, and the value 0 is set when the injustice is not detected, and the value when the injustice is detected. 1 is set.

  In step S478, the main control MPU 1310a sets the value 1 to the injustice detection flag FD-FLG, whereby the emission permission signal is set in the emission permission signal setting process of step S113 in the main control timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. The firing permission logic is set to the inverted firing stopping logic (firing non-permission logic) as logic of and the above-mentioned output information storage area is stored as output information. Main control MPU 1310a reads output information from the output information storage area described above in the port output process of step S118 in the main control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 177, and based on the output information, predetermined output port of main control MPU 1310a. The output control terminal 633b outputs to the launch control unit 633b of the payout control board 633, and the launch control unit 633b can not launch the gaming ball toward the gaming area 5a. As a result, the game is stopped so that an unauthorized player who does a dog game can not play any more games.

  Next, the vibration discrimination performed as the process of step S432 in the abnormal vibration two-step notification process for the sorting apparatus shown in FIG. 262 and the process at step S464 in the abnormal vibration two-step notification process for the special winning opening shown in FIG. The process will be described.

  When the vibration determination process is started, as shown in FIG. 264, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether a vibration is generated (step S480). In this determination, the upper vibration detection sensor which is a detection signal from the vibration detection switch 3005 and the detection from the lower vibration detection switch 3006 a read in the switch input process of step S104 in the main control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. This is performed based on the logic of the vibration detection sensor 1 which is a signal in which the lower vibration detection sensor 1 which is a signal is wired-OR connected and the logic of the vibration detection sensor 2 which is a detection signal from the lower vibration detection switch 3006b. When either or both of the logic of the vibration detection sensor 1 and the logic of the vibration detection sensor 2 are doddy got detection logic, the main control MPU 1310 a determines that the vibration is abnormal and determines that there is vibration, while the vibration detection sensor 1 When both the logic of and the logic of the vibration detection sensor 2 are docketing non-detection logics obtained by reversing the dogking detection logic, it is not judged as abnormal vibration and it is judged as no vibration.

  In the determination of step S480, when the main control MPU 1310a determines that there is no vibration, the main routine is ended as it is, while when it is determined that there is a vibration, the vibration determination invalid timer VDDT is in a started state (during activation). It is determined whether or not it is (step S482). The vibration discrimination invalid timer VDDT is a detection signal from which the upper vibration detection sensor which is a detection signal from the vibration detection switch 3005 and the lower vibration detection sensor 1 which is a detection signal from the lower vibration detection switch 3006a are wired-OR connected It defines the time for processing the sensor 1 and the vibration detection sensor 2 which is a detection signal from the lower vibration detection switch 3006 b as invalid, and in the present embodiment, 1020 milliseconds (1.020 seconds) Is set in advance. When the start of the vibration determination invalidation timer VDDT is set, the value 1 is set to the vibration determination invalidation timer flag, and subtraction is performed in the timer subtraction process of step S102 in the main control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. Since the main control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 177 is repeatedly performed every 4 milliseconds (ms), the value of the vibration determination invalid timer VDDT is decremented by 4 in the timer subtraction process of step S102. When it becomes (zero seconds), the vibration determination invalidation timer VDDT has elapsed. As a result, the vibration determination invalidation timer flag is set to a value of 0, which is an initial value, in a state where the vibration determination invalidation timer VDDT is not activated (including activation completion). The value of the vibration determination invalidation timer flag is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU 1310a, and the value 0, which is the initial value, is set at power recovery at power on of the pachinko machine 1 or at power recovery after a power failure. Be done. When power is restored after a momentary power failure where a power failure occurs instantaneously, if the momentary power failure period is short (for example, within a few seconds), the vibration discrimination invalid timer flag is not set to the initial value, If it can not be said that the momentary power failure period is long (for example, in the case of a period of several tens of seconds), the vibration determination invalid timer flag is set to the initial value.

  In the determination of step S 482, when the main control MPU 1310 a determines that the vibration determination invalid timer flag is not 1 (is the value 0), that is, determines that the vibration determination invalid timer VDDT is not starting, the vibration determination valid timer VDET is started. It is determined whether it is in the running state (during activation) (step S484). The vibration discrimination effective timer VDET is a detection signal in which the upper vibration detection sensor which is a detection signal from the vibration detection switch 3005 and the lower vibration detection sensor 1 which is a detection signal from the lower vibration detection switch 3006 a are wired-OR connected It defines the time for processing the sensor 1 and the vibration detection sensor 2 which is a detection signal from the lower vibration detection switch 3006b as effective, and in the present embodiment, 12 milliseconds (0.012 seconds). Is set in advance. When the start of the vibration determination valid timer VDET is set, the value 1 is set to the vibration determination valid timer flag, and the timer subtraction processing in step S102 in the main control timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 177 is subtracted. Since the main control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 177 is repeatedly performed every 4 milliseconds (ms), the value of the vibration determination valid timer VDET is subtracted by 4 each in the timer subtraction process of step S102, and the value 0 When (zero seconds) is reached, the vibration determination effective timer VDET has elapsed. As a result, the value of 0, which is an initial value, is set in the vibration discrimination effective timer flag as a state where the vibration discrimination effective timer VDET is not activated (including activation completion). The value of the vibration determination effective timer flag is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU 1310a, and the value 0 which is the initial value is set at power recovery at power on of the pachinko machine 1 or at power recovery after power failure. Be done. When power is restored after a momentary power failure where a power failure occurs instantaneously, the vibration discrimination valid timer flag is not set to the initial value if the momentary power failure period is short (for example, within a few seconds), If it can not be said that the momentary power failure period is long (for example, in the case of a period over several tens of seconds), the vibration determination valid timer flag is set to the initial value.

  In the determination of step S484, when the vibration determination valid timer flag is not 1 (value 0), that is, when it is determined that the vibration determination valid timer VDET is not activated, the main control MPU 1310 a starts the vibration determination valid timer VDET. Are set (step S486). The main control MPU 1310a sets the value of the vibration determination valid timer flag to 1 by setting the start of the vibration determination valid timer VDET. When this routine ends, the vibration determination effective timer VDET is started to be subtracted in the timer subtraction process of step S102 in the main control timer interrupt process shown in FIG.

  Subsequent to step S486, the main control MPU 1310a adds the value 1 to the vibration counter VC (increment it, step S488), and ends this routine. The vibration counter VC counts the number of times that it is determined that vibration is present in the above-described determination of step S480 while the vibration determination valid timer VDET is activated. Since the vibration discrimination effective timer VDET is started to be subtracted in the timer subtraction process of step S102 in the main control timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 177 when this routine ends, the value of the vibration counter VC is determined by the vibration discrimination effective timer VDET. Before being subtracted, the value 1 is added. As a result, the value of the vibration counter VC becomes a value 4 when the vibration determination valid timer VDET becomes a value 0 (zero seconds). This value 4 is a determination value used for determination of step S 434 in the abnormal vibration two-step notification process for the sorting apparatus shown in FIG. 262, and in the abnormal vibration two-step notification process for the special winning opening shown in FIG. It is the determination value used for the determination of step S466.

  On the other hand, when the main control MPU 1310a determines that the vibration determination valid timer flag has the value 1 in the determination of step S484, that is, determines that the vibration determination valid timer VDET is in operation, the vibration determination valid timer VDET is 12 milliseconds. It is determined whether (0.012 seconds) has elapsed (step S490). This determination is performed based on whether the value of the vibration determination effective timer VDET is subtracted in the timer subtraction process of step S102 in the main control timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. When the value of the timer VDET is 0 (zero seconds), it is determined that 12 milliseconds (0.012 seconds) have elapsed, while when the value of the vibration discrimination effective timer VDET is not 0 (zero seconds), 12 milliseconds. It is determined that (0.012 seconds) has not elapsed.

  In the determination of step S490, the main control MPU 1310a described above when the value of the vibration determination valid timer VDET is not 0 (zero seconds), that is, when it is determined that 12 milliseconds (0.012 seconds) have not elapsed. In step S488, the vibration counter VC is incremented by 1 (incremented, step S488), and the present routine is ended.

  On the other hand, in the determination of step S 490, the main control MPU 1310 a vibrates when the value of the vibration determination valid timer VDET is 0 (zero seconds), that is, when it is determined that 12 milliseconds (0.012 seconds) have elapsed. A value of 0, which is an initial value, is set in the vibration discrimination valid timer flag as a state where the discrimination valid timer VDET is not activated (including activation completion), and the start of the vibration discrimination invalid timer VDDT is set (step S492). End the routine The main control MPU 1310a sets the value of 1 to the vibration determination invalid timer flag by setting the start of the vibration determination invalid timer VDDT. When this routine ends, the vibration determination invalidation timer VDDT is started to be subtracted in the timer subtraction process of step S102 in the main control timer interrupt process shown in FIG.

  On the other hand, when the main control MPU 1310a determines that the vibration determination invalidation timer flag has the value 1 in the determination of step S482, that is, determines that the vibration determination invalidation timer VDDT is in operation, the vibration determination invalidation timer VDDT is 1020 milliseconds. It is determined whether (1.020 seconds) has elapsed (step S494). This determination is performed based on whether the value of the vibration determination invalid timer VDDT is subtracted in the timer subtraction process of step S102 in the main control timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. When the value of the timer VDDT is 0 (zero seconds), it is determined that 1020 milliseconds (1.020 seconds) have elapsed, while when the value of the oscillation discrimination invalid timer VDDT is not 0 (zero seconds) 1020 milliseconds It is determined that (1.020 seconds) has not elapsed.

  In the determination of step S494, when the value of the vibration determination invalidation timer VDDT is not 0 (zero seconds), that is, when it is determined that 1020 milliseconds (1.020 seconds) has not elapsed, the main control MPU 1310a performs this processing as it is. When the value of the vibration determination invalidation timer VDDT is 0 (zero seconds), that is, when it is determined that 1020 milliseconds (1.020 seconds) have elapsed, the vibration determination invalidation timer VDDT is started. In the not-in-state state (including the activation completion), the vibration discrimination invalidation timer flag is set to the initial value 0, and the value of the vibration counter VC is reset by setting the value 0 (zero) (step S 496) End this routine. By resetting the value of the vibration counter VC in step S 496, it is possible to accurately count the number of times the vibration determination effective timer VDET is determined to have vibration in the determination of step S 480 described above during startup next time.

  As described above, while the vibration determination valid timer VDET of 12 milliseconds (0.012 seconds) is activated, the vibration counter VC can be updated, while when the vibration determination valid timer VDET elapses, 1020 milliseconds (1. 10 milliseconds). The vibration counter VC can not be updated while the vibration determination invalidation timer VDDT of 020 seconds is running. That is, only in a limited period in which the vibration determination valid timer VDET is in operation, it is possible to accurately count, using the vibration counter VC, the number of times the vibration is determined to be present in the determination of step S480 described above. It has become. Thereby, for example, vibration generated when the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2, vibration generated when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, and the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4 The player operates the vibration that occurs when the player moves, the vibration that occurs when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, and the effect operation unit 301 (the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303) of the effect operation unit 300. Even if a vibration or the like that occurs at any time is detected, it is possible to prevent an erroneous notification as a dog dog.

  In the embodiment described above, the vibration counter VC is a wired-or connected with the upper vibration detection sensor which is a detection signal from the vibration detection switch 3005 and the lower vibration detection sensor 1 which is a detection signal from the lower vibration detection switch 3006a. In the case where the vibration detection sensor 1 which is a signal is processed as effective, and in the case where the vibration detection sensor 2 which is a detection signal from the lower vibration detection switch 3006 b is processed as effective, it becomes a shared counter. The vibration detection sensor 1 in which the upper vibration detection sensor which is a detection signal from the vibration detection switch 3005 and the lower vibration detection sensor 1 which is a detection signal from the lower vibration detection switch 3006 a are wired or connected is effective. In the case of processing as one, use the first vibration counter and When processing the vibration sensor 2 is a detection signal from the switch 3006b as valid may be counted individually configured to use the second oscillation counter.

  In this case, the weak notification based on the first vibration counter and the weak notification based on the second vibration counter may be in the same mode or in different modes. In the case of a different mode, it can be understood which of the weak notification based on the first vibration counter and the weak notification based on the second vibration counter, so it is possible to use weak notification based on the first vibration counter. For example, by swinging or striking the pachinko machine 1 so that the game ball can enter the specific receiving port 4855v of the distributing disc 4853 provided in the ball swirl type distributing device 4843 in the lower layer game zone 4825. It is possible to grasp that the fraudulent act of applying vibration to the pachinko machine 1 is performed, and in the case of weak notification based on the second vibration counter, it is formed on the rotary ball receiving member 4808 in the right-handed game zone 4824 The pachinko machine 1 was swung so that the game ball could be placed toward the ball receiving recess 4809 and entered into the V winning hole 4810 , It is possible to understand that the abuse is occurring to add vibration to the pachinko machine 1 by or hit. Further, the strong notification based on the first vibration counter and the strong notification based on the second vibration counter may be in the same mode or in different modes. If different modes are used, it can be understood which of the strong notification based on the first vibration counter and the strong notification based on the second vibration counter. For example, by swinging or striking the pachinko machine 1 so that the game ball can enter the specific receiving port 4855v of the distributing disc 4853 provided in the ball swirl type distributing device 4843 in the lower layer game zone 4825. It is possible to grasp that the fraudulent act of applying vibration to the pachinko machine 1 is being performed, and in the case of strong notification based on the second vibration counter, it is formed on the rotating ball receiving member 4808 in the right hitting game zone 4824 The pachinko machine 1 was swung so that the game ball could be placed toward the ball receiving recess 4809 and entered into the V winning hole 4810 , It is possible to understand that the abuse is occurring to add vibration to the pachinko machine 1 by or hit.

  In the embodiment described above, the weak notification and the strong notification are performed by the plurality of LEDs mounted on each decoration substrate whose light emission mode is controlled by the peripheral control substrate 1510, but the light control mode is performed by the main control substrate 1310X. May be performed by one or more LEDs controlled.

  Incidentally, there has been proposed a gaming machine which is provided with a vibration sensor (vibration detection unit) for detecting the vibration of the game board to detect fraudulent acts such as hitting the gaming machine (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2014-042689 (paragraph 0026] and Figure 2)). By the way, in the gaming machine described in this document, the vibration sensor is disposed in the vicinity of the ball guiding path (ball unit) passing the game ball, and the vibration sensor and the ball guiding portion are attached to the same mounting member In this case, the vibration of the gaming ball passing through the ball guiding portion may be transmitted to the vibration sensor through the mounting member and erroneously notified as an abnormal vibration.

  According to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, the main control board 1310X of FIG. 255 capable of controlling the excitation of the first distribution stepping motor 4908 of FIG. 247 is accommodated in the main control board box 1320 of FIG. ing. The main control board box 1320 is formed in a box shape from the transparent cover body 1301 of FIG. 256 and the transparent base body 1302 of FIG. 256, and by breaking the crimped portion 1303 of FIG. The adhered state between the transparent cover body 1301 and the transparent base body 1302 can be released. The main control board 1310X includes the poly switch MPS 50 of FIG. 255 which is a resettable fuse. In this poly switch MPS 50, the conductivity is reduced by generating heat due to the overcurrent to the first distribution stepping motor 4908 to cut off the current, and then the conductivity can be restored by cooling. is there.

  In this manner, when an overcurrent flows to the first distribution stepping motor 4908, the current is cut off and cooled by the poly switch MPS 50 so that the current to the first distribution stepping motor 4908 can be automatically restored. Therefore, there is no need to destroy the crimped portion 1303 which is the fixed portion due to the overcurrent to the first distributing stepping motor 4908, and it is possible to prevent the main control board 1310X from being unusable. Can. Therefore, the main control board 1310X can be prevented from becoming unusable due to an overcurrent.

  Also, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, the main control board 1310 X of FIG. 255 capable of controlling the excitation of the first distribution stepping motor 4908 of FIG. 247 is provided. The right track and the ball passage 4834 are provided, and the gaming ball entered from the jumping portion 4827 in FIG. 235 which is the ball-in-the-ball portion flows toward the front of the ball passage 4834 in FIG. The first distributing unit 4829a shown in FIG. 235 is a distributing device capable of distributing the left track flowing to the left toward the front side by controlling the excitation of the first distributing stepping motor 4908. The first distribution unit 4829 a may discharge the right course flowing to the right toward the front of the ball passage 4834 and the left course flowing to the left toward the front of the ball passage 4834 to a region advantageous to the player. It has a right track that flows to the right of the front of the ball passage 4834, which is a specific ball discharge portion that can be made. The main control board 1310 X is divided into the right track flowing to the right toward the front of the ball passage 4834 and the left track flowing to the left toward the front of the ball passage 4834 other than the specific ball discharge portion. The excitation of the first distribution stepping motor 4908 can be controlled so that the distributed time and the time are different.

  Specifically, the time when the first motor-driven distribution piece 4835 is stopped at the position of the mechanical end on the right side is the management number No. The excitation time (ms) specified in No. 19: 12, control number No. The excitation time (ms) specified in 20: 324, and the control number no. While the excitation time (ms) specified in 1 is 348 ms with 12 added, the time for stopping at the position of the mechanical end on the left side is the control number No. The excitation time (ms) specified in 10 (ms) is 8 alone and is 8 ms, the stop time at the position of the mechanical end on the left and right sides is different, and the stop time is long.

  In this manner, by controlling the first distribution unit 4829a by the first distribution stepping motor 4908, the specific ball discharge unit can be divided into the right track that flows to the right toward the front of the ball passage 4834 that is the specific ball discharge unit. It is possible to finely adjust the time allotted to the left track flowing to the left toward the front of the ball passage 4834 which is the other ball discharge portion except the ball release portion, and to stabilize the distribution ratio by the first distribution portion 4829a. it can. Therefore, the distribution ratio by the first distribution unit 4829a can be stabilized, and the distribution ratio can be finely adjusted.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, the main control board 1310 X of FIG. 255 capable of controlling the excitation of the first distribution stepping motor 4908 of FIG. The first electric distribution piece 4835 shown in FIG. 235, which is a movable body capable of moving within a predetermined range by controlling the excitation, is provided. The excitation phase of the first distribution stepping motor 4908 and the position of the first electric distribution piece 4835 which is a movable body are associated in advance without overlapping. The main control board 1310 X is in the excitation phase of the first distribution stepping motor 4908 previously associated with any one of the positions of the first electric distribution piece 4835 which is a movable body in a predetermined range at the time of power recovery. It is possible to control against.

  Specifically, main control MPU 1310a of main control board 1310X follows the drive management block in the port output process of step S118 in the main control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 177 which is repeatedly performed every 4 milliseconds (ms). Swing drive data is output to the first split stepping motor drive IC 1310 n as drive control of the first split stepping motor 4908, and logic is applied to the first split stepping motor voltage switch circuit 1310 m as voltage switching control of the first split stepping motor 4908. A signal of set voltage switching 1 is output. Further, in addition to the time of power-on, at the time of recovery from power recovery due to power failure and momentary power failure, the first distribution stepping motor 4908 is repeatedly driven according to the conditions defined in the drive management block of the first distribution stepping motor 4908.

  As described above, at the time of power recovery, the first electric distribution piece 4835 that is a movable body is controlled by controlling the excitation phase of the first distribution stepping motor 4908 previously associated with any position in the predetermined range. It is possible to identify the position of Therefore, at the time of power recovery, it is possible to specify the excitation phase to first distribution stepping motor 4908 and the position of first electric distribution piece 4835 which is a movable body.

  Also, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, the main control board 1310 X of FIG. 255 capable of controlling the excitation of the first distribution stepping motor 4908 of FIG. 247 is provided. While being provided, the excitation of the first distribution stepping motor 4908 is controlled to reciprocate within a predetermined range by the first electric distribution piece 4835 of FIG. Distribution that can be divided into a right track flowing to the right toward the front of the ball passage 4834 in FIG. 235, which is a plurality of ball release parts, and a left track flowing to the left toward the front of the ball passage 4834 The device is provided with a first distribution unit 4829a of FIG. 235 which is an apparatus. The first electric distribution piece 4835 is configured such that the first electric distribution piece 4835 in FIG. 235 always swings in a wiper shape (a wiper shape that always reciprocates between the position of the mechanical end on the left and the position of the mechanical end on the right). It can be reciprocated within a predetermined range. Main control board 1310 X stops excitation of first distribution stepping motor 4908 in a state where first electric distribution piece 4835 reciprocates within a predetermined range by constantly controlling excitation of first distribution stepping motor 4908 after power recovery. Voltage that can switch between +5 V, which is the stop voltage used during operation, and +12 V, which is the voltage higher than the stop voltage and is used during operation of the first distribution stepping motor 4908. A first distributing stepping motor voltage switching circuit 1310 m shown in FIG. 255 which is a switching unit is provided.

  As described above, in the state where the first distribution stepping motor 4908 is constantly controlled after power recovery and the first distribution stepping motor 4908 is excited, the first distribution stepping motor 4908 is stopped because the operation voltage is higher than the stop voltage. By switching between the stop voltage used during operation and the operation voltage used during operation of the first distribution stepping motor 4908, the first distribution stepping motor 4908 is stopped while the first distribution stepping motor 4908 is stopped. The heat generation can be suppressed. Therefore, the heat generation of the first distribution stepping motor 4908 can be suppressed.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, the game ball B fired by the ball launching device 540 of FIG. 92 as the launching means is provided as the receiving port provided in the game area 5a. A main control board 1310X shown in FIG. 253 is provided as game control means capable of proceeding with the game based on entering the ball 4813 or the electric start winning opening 4871.

  The pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment has a setting switching button 1311 b provided on the setting change board 1310 Y of the main control unit 1300 of FIG. 256 as selection means, and a setting switch provided on the setting change board 1310 Y of the main control unit 1300 of FIG. It is equipped with 1311a. The setting switching button 1311 b selects one of the setting values 1 to 6 as a plurality of setting values advantageous to the player, and detects a detection signal from the setting switching button 1311 b as a selection signal. The signal from the setting switching button 1311b provided on the setting change substrate 1310Y of the main control unit 1300 of FIG. 256 as one transmission path can be output to the main control substrate 1310X via a wiring pattern or the like through which the signal is transmitted. The setting switch 1311a determines the setting value selected by the setting switching button 1311b, and uses the determination key ON signal from the setting switch 1311a as the determination signal as the second transmission path different from the first transmission path. A signal from the setting switch 1311 a provided on the setting change substrate 1310 Y of the unit 1300 can be output to the main control substrate 1310 X via a wiring pattern through which the signal is transmitted. The first transmission path and the second transmission path are spaced apart from each other.

  Specifically, in order to prevent unauthorized alteration, a signal of the setting key ON of the setting switch 1311a is transmitted, and a wiring pattern in which the signal of the determination key ON of the setting switch 1311a is transmitted, and a setting switch 1311a The setting change board 1310Y is formed so as not to be close to each other (separate from each other) as a lead-out of the wiring pattern through which the signal of OFF is transmitted and the wiring pattern through which the signal from the setting switching button 1311b is transmitted. At the same time, the connection to the terminal of the connector SMCN of the setting change substrate 1310Y (the terminal of the connector MSCN of the main control substrate 1310X) is also formed separately, and various signals from the setting switch 1311a are transmitted also in the main control substrate 1310X. Wiring pattern (that is, the setting key of the setting switch 1311a). The wiring pattern through which the signal of ON is transmitted, the wiring pattern through which the signal of the determination key ON of the setting switch 1311a is transmitted, the wiring pattern through which the signal of OFF the setting switch 1311a is transmitted, and the signal from the setting switching button 1311b The wiring with the wiring pattern to be transmitted is also formed so as not to approach each other (separately from each other), and the wiring with the wiring pattern to which the signal from the RAM clear switch 1310 f is transmitted is not as close as each other. (Spaced apart from each other).

  As described above, when one of the plurality of setting values (setting value 1 to setting value 6) which is advantageous to the player is selected and the setting value is determined, the determined setting value is selected. By the progress of the game based on, it is possible to provide the player with a game for each set value. Therefore, the range of the game can be expanded. Further, by disposing the first transmission path and the second transmission path apart from each other, unauthorized alteration can be prevented.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, the game ball B fired by the ball launching device 540 of FIG. 92 as the launching means is provided as the receiving port provided in the game area 5a. Advancement of the game can be performed based on having entered the ball 4813 or the electric start winning opening 4871.

  The pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment includes the power switch 630a of FIG. 7 as power on means, the setting switching button 1311b provided on the setting change board 1310Y of the main control unit 1300 of FIG. 256 as selection means, and the main control of FIG. The main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU 1310a provided on the substrate 1310X, the setting display 1314a provided on the setting change substrate 1310Y of the main control unit 1300 of FIG. 256 as selection display setting means and determination means, the main control unit 1300 of FIG. A setting display 1310g provided in the main control board 1310X is provided. The power switch 630 a can turn on the power of the pachinko machine 1. The setting switching button 1311 b can select any one of setting values 1 to 6 as a plurality of setting information advantageous to the player. The main control built-in RAM can store various information even after the pachinko machine 1 is powered off. The setting switch 1311a is capable of setting selection permission of the setting value by the setting switching button 1311b or display permission of the setting value stored and held in the main control built-in RAM, and also capable of determining the setting value. It is. The setting display 1310g can display setting values.

  When the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on by the power switch 630a after setting permission is set by the setting switch 1311a, the setting value selected by the setting switching button 1311b is displayed on the setting display 1310g and the setting switch is set. It is determined by 1311 a and the determined set value is stored and held in the main control built-in RAM. When the display switch of the setting value is set by the setting switch 1311a after the pachinko machine 1 is powered on by the power switch 630a, the setting value stored and held in the main control internal RAM is displayed on the setting display 1310g. It is supposed to be.

  Specifically, when changing the setting of the setting value, the setting key is inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting switch 1311a before the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, and the setting key cylinder is turned clockwise. The setting switch 1311a is turned on by turning the first switch by turning 60 degrees toward the end. Subsequently, the power switch 630 a is operated to turn on the pachinko machine 1. Thereby, the signal of the setting key ON is input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X. Subsequently, when the pressing operation portion of the setting switching button 1311b is pressed, a detection signal from the setting switching button 1311b of the setting change board 1310Y is input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X. The main control MPU 1310a increments the current setting value by 1 each time the setting control button 1311b is pressed, and the main control MPU 1310a increases the value by 1 each from the current setting value, based on the detection signal from the setting switching button 1311b of the setting change board 1310Y. When the set value 6, which is the value, is reached, the control returns to the set value 1, which is the initial value, and increases again by 1 and performs control to display the set value on the setting display 1310g. Subsequently, when the setting value is determined, the setting key cylinder is turned 120 degrees counterclockwise (that is, the original position from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting switch 1311 a is turned on) To return to the initial position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turns off the setting switch 1311a), it is turned 60 degrees counterclockwise and turned off, and further turned 60 degrees counterclockwise The setting switch 1311a is turned on by the second ON operation (turned). The signal of the determination key ON is input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X. As a result, the main control MPU 1310a stores the setting value determined by changing the setting in a specific area (setting value dedicated area) of the main control built-in RAM.

  When the confirmation display of the currently set setting value is performed, after the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the setting key is inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting switch 1311a, and the setting key is turned clockwise 60 The setting switch 1311 a is turned on by setting the setting switch 1311 a by turning operation to a first ON operation. The signal of the setting key ON is input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X. The main control MPU 1310a sets the current setting value stored in the specific area (setting value dedicated area) of the main control built-in RAM (setting value 1 to setting at the time when the setting key cylinder of the setting switch 1311a is first turned ON) The set value of 6 is displayed on the setting display 1310g.

  As described above, the main control internal RAM stores and holds the setting value determined by selecting any one of the plurality of setting values (setting value 1 to setting value 6) which is advantageous to the player. Since the game is based on the set value, it is possible to provide the player with a game for each set value. Therefore, the range of the game can be expanded. Further, since the set value stored and held in the main control built-in RAM is displayed on the setting display 1310g, the set value stored and held in the main control built-in RAM can be confirmed.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, the game ball B fired by the ball launching device 540 of FIG. 92 as the launching means is provided as the receiving port provided in the game area 5a. A main control board 1310X shown in FIG. 253 is provided as game control means capable of proceeding with the game based on entering the ball 4813 or the electric start winning opening 4871.

  The pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment is provided with a power switch 630a of FIG. 7 as a power on means, a setting switching button 1311b provided on a setting change board 1310Y of the main control unit 1300 of FIG. 256 as selection means, selection permission setting means and determination means A setting switch 1311 a is provided in the setting change board 1310 Y of the main control unit 1300 of FIG. The power switch 630 a can turn on the power of the pachinko machine 1. The setting switching button 1311 b selects any one of the setting values 1 to 6 as a plurality of setting information advantageous to the player and mainly controls the detection signal from the setting switching button 1311 b as a selection signal. It can be output to the substrate 1310X. The setting switch 1311a can output a signal of the setting key ON to the main control board 1310X as a selection permission signal for permitting selection of the setting value by the setting switching button 1311b, and the setting switching button 1311b. It is possible to determine the set value to be selected and output the signal of the determination key ON from the setting switch 1311a to the main control board 1310X as the determination signal.

  The detection signal from the setting switching button 1311b, which is a selection signal, is sent to the main control board 1310X via the setting change board 1310Y of the main control unit 1300 of FIG. 256 as another control means provided separately from the main control board 1310X. It is supposed to be input.

  The main control board 1310X has a main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU 1310a provided on the main control board 1310X of FIG. 253 as storage means, and is determined in advance in the determination of step S18 in the main control side power on process of FIG. A process to set the value 1 to the setting change permission flag CS-FLG in step S20A by determining that the set value change permission condition is satisfied, as a signal invalid control means, a step in the main control side power on process of FIG. A process of setting the value 0 to the setting change permission flag CS-FLG in step S20B, determining that a predetermined setting value change permission condition is not established in the determination of S18, the main control side of FIG. The setting change process of step 37 in the power-on process is included. The main control built-in RAM can store various information even after the pachinko machine 1 is powered off. It is determined that the preset set value change permission condition is established in the determination of step S18 in the main control side power-on process of FIG. 175 which is the signal valid control means, and the set change permission flag CS-FLG is set in step S20A. The process of setting the value 1 can validate the detection signal from the setting switching button 1311b, which is a selection signal, and the determination key ON signal from the setting switch 1311a, which is a determination signal. It is determined that the preset set value change permission condition is not established in the determination of step S18 in the main control side power-on process of FIG. 175 which is the signal invalid control means, and the set change permission flag CS-FLG is set in step S20B. In the process of setting the value 0, the detection signal from the setting switching button 1311b, which is a selection signal, and the signal of the determination key ON from the setting switch 1311a, which is a determination signal, can be invalidated. The setting change process of step 37 in the main control side power on process of FIG. 175 which is the setting change control means is previously determined in the determination of step S18 in the main control side power on process of FIG. It is determined that the setting value change permission condition is satisfied, and the process of setting the value 1 to the setting change permission flag CS-FLG in step S20A is a detection signal from the setting switching button 1311b and the determination signal. The setting value can be stored and held in the main control built-in RAM when the signal of the determination key ON from the setting switch 1311a is validated.

  It is preset that the setting key ON signal, which is a selection permission signal from the setting switch 1311a, can be input before the power on of the pachinko machine 1 is performed by the power switch 630a, and the pachinko machine 1 is set by the power switch 630a. When the power is turned on (specifically, first, the state where the power of the pachinko machine 1 is not turned on (the state where the power of the pachinko machine 1 is shut off) is confirmed. Do the work of opening the frame 4, then insert the setting key into the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting switch 1311a and turn the setting key cylinder clockwise by 60 degrees to perform the first ON operation The setting switch 1311a is turned on by the setting key, and then the power switch 630a is operated to turn on the power of the pachinko machine 1. The signal of the setting key ON which is the selection permission signal from the setting switch 1311a is input, and is determined in advance in the determination of step S18 in the main control side power-on process of FIG. It is determined that the setting value change permission condition is satisfied, and the value of 1 is set to the setting change permission flag CS-FLG in step S20A. The detection signal from the setting switching button 1311b, which is a selection signal, and the determination signal When the signal of the determination key ON from the setting switch 1311a is validated, and the setting value selected by the setting switching button 1311b is determined by the setting switch 1311a, the determined setting value is used as the setting change control means. The main control is performed by the setting change process of step 37 in the main control side power-on process of FIG. It is adapted to be stored and held in the internal RAM. The pachinko machine 1 is preset by the power switch 630a so that the setting key ON signal which is a selection permission signal from the setting switch 1311a can not be input before the pachinko machine 1 is powered on by the power switch 630a. When the power is turned on (specifically, first, the state where the power of the pachinko machine 1 is not turned on (the state where the power of the pachinko machine 1 is shut off) is confirmed. Do the work of opening the frame 4, then insert the setting key into the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting switch 1311a and turn the setting key cylinder clockwise by 60 degrees to perform the first ON operation Of the pachinko machine 1 by operating the power switch 630a without performing the procedure of turning the setting switch 1311a to the setting key ON. The source is turned on.) The signal of the setting key ON which is the selection permission signal from the setting switch 1311a is not input, and the determination of step S18 in the main control side power on processing of FIG. It is determined that the preset setting change permission condition is not satisfied, and the value of the setting change permission flag CS-FLG is set to 0 in step S20B. A signal of the determination key ON from the setting switch 1311a, which is a signal, is invalidated.

  As described above, the main control internal RAM stores and holds the setting value determined by selecting any one of the plurality of setting values (setting value 1 to setting value 6) which is advantageous to the player. Since the game is based on the set value, it is possible to provide the player with a game for each set value. Therefore, the range of the game can be expanded.

  According to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, the game ball B fired by the ball launching device 540 of FIG. 92 as the launching means is provided as the receiving port provided in the game area 5a. The game is progressed based on the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result drawn by the main control board 1310X of the main control unit 1300 of FIG. 13 as the lottery result by the lottery means after entering the electric start winning opening 4871 It can be performed.

  The pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment is provided with the setting switch 1311 a provided on the setting change board 1310 Y of the main control unit 1300 of FIG. 256 as the first operation unit and the setting switching button 1311 b provided on the setting change board 1310 RAM clear switch 1310 f provided on the main control board 1310 X of the main control unit 1300 of FIG. 253 as a second operation unit, main control built-in RAM of main control MPU 1310 a provided on the main control board 1310 X of FIG. As the setting change process of step S37 in the main control side power on process of FIG. 175, the process of step S38 in the main control side power on process of FIG. The setting switch 1311 a and the setting switching button 1311 b can receive a first operation that can change the setting of the setting value. The RAM clear switch 1310 f is separate from the setting switch 1311 a and the setting switching button 1311 b and can receive a second operation that can clear other areas except the specific area of the main control built-in RAM. . The main control built-in RAM can store various information even after the pachinko machine 1 is powered off. The setting change process of step S37 in the main control side power-on process of FIG. 175 can perform control of storing and holding the setting value which is the first information in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM. The process of step S38 in the main control side power-on process of FIG. 175 performs control to erase the game backup information which is the second information stored and held in the other area excluding the specific area of the main control built-in RAM. It is possible.

  When the setting switch 1311a and the setting switching button 1311b receive the first operation in a period in which the first operation can be received, the setting change process of step S37 in the main control side power-on process of FIG. After performing control to store the setting value which is the first information in the area, the process of step S38 in the main control side power-on process of FIG. 175 stores the information in the area other than the specific area of the main control internal RAM. It is possible to perform control to delete the game backup information which is the second information to be played.

  Specifically, when performing the first operation that can change the setting of the setting value, first, before the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the setting key of the setting key cylinder of the setting switch 1311 a is set to the setting key Is inserted, and the setting key cylinder is turned 60 degrees clockwise to perform the first ON operation, whereby the setting switch 1311 a is turned on. Subsequently, the power switch 630 a is operated to turn on the pachinko machine 1. As a result, a signal of setting key ON is input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X (perform step S18 and step S20A in the main control side power on process of FIG. 175). That is, the “period in which the first operation can be received” refers to steps S18 and S20A in the main control side power on process of FIG. 175 after the power switch 630a is operated and the pachinko machine 1 is powered on. It is a period of time until the processing of Subsequently, when the pressing operation portion of the setting switching button 1311b is pressed, a detection signal from the setting switching button 1311b of the setting change board 1310Y is input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X. The main control MPU 1310a increments the current setting value by 1 each time the setting control button 1311b is pressed, and the main control MPU 1310a increases the value by 1 each from the current setting value, based on the detection signal from the setting switching button 1311b of the setting change board 1310Y. When the set value 6, which is a value, is reached, the process returns to the set value 1, which is the initial value, increases again by 1 and performs control to display the set value on the setting display 1310g (step S216 in the setting change process of FIG. 178). Repeat steps S222)). Subsequently, in order to determine the setting value, the setting key cylinder is turned counterclockwise 120 degrees (that is, the original position from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting switch 1311 a is turned on) In order to return to the initial position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turns off the setting switch 1311a), it is turned 60 degrees counterclockwise toward the OFF position, and then turned 60 degrees counterclockwise. Setting switch 1311 a is turned on by the second ON operation. The signal of the determination key ON is input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X (the process of step S222 in the setting change process of FIG. 178 is performed). Thereby, the main control MPU 1310a stores the setting value determined by changing the setting in the specific area (setting value dedicated area) of the main control built-in RAM (performs the process of step S224 in the setting change process of FIG. 178). Subsequently, the main control MPU 1310a clears the other areas of the main control built-in RAM except for the specific area (performs the process of step S38 in the main control side power-on process of FIG. 175). Thereby, the main control MPU 1310a writes the value 0 to the other areas of the main control built-in RAM excluding the specific area (game backup information is initialized).

  When the RAM clear switch 1310 f receives the second operation in a period in which the second operation can be received, the setting change process of step S 37 in the main control side power-on process of FIG. The process of step S38 in the main control side power-on process of FIG. 175 is stored and held in another area of the main control built-in RAM other than the specific area without performing control to store and hold the setting value which is information Control can be performed to delete game backup information, which is information.

  Specifically, when performing a second operation that can clear other areas except the specific area of the main control built-in RAM, first, the power switch 630a is operated while the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f is pressed. Is operated to power on the pachinko machine 1. Thus, the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the RAM clear switch 1310 f is input to the main control MPU 1310 a (performs the process of step S 14 and step S 16 A in the process of turning on the main control power in FIG. 175). That is, the “period in which the second operation can be received” refers to steps S14 and S16A in the main control side power on process of FIG. 175 after the power switch 630a is operated and the pachinko machine 1 is powered on. It is a period of time until the processing of Subsequently, the main control MPU 1310a clears the other areas of the main control built-in RAM except for the specific area (performs the process of step S38 in the main control side power-on process of FIG. 175). Thereby, the main control MPU 1310a writes the value 0 to the other areas of the main control built-in RAM excluding the specific area (game backup information is initialized).

  Thus, the game backup information which is the second information stored and held in the other area except the specific area of the main control built-in RAM is accepted by the setting switch 1311 a and the setting switching button 1311 b or by the RAM clear switch 1310 f Since deletion is possible by receiving the second operation, variations can be given to the method of deleting the game backup information, which is the second information by a clerk such as a salesclerk of the game hall. Therefore, variations can be made to the erasing method.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, the game ball B fired by the ball launching device 540 of FIG. 92 as the launching means is provided as the receiving port provided in the game area 5a. A game is entered based on the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result drawn by the main control board 1310X of the main control unit 1300 of FIG. Progress can be made.

  The pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment includes the RAM clear switch 1310 f provided on the main control board 1310 X of the main control unit 1300 of FIG. 144A as operation means, the power switch 630 a of FIG. 7 as power on means, and the main control of FIG. Setting change button 1311b provided on the setting change board 1310Y of the unit 1300, main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU 1310a provided on the main control board 1310X of FIG. 253 as storage means, selection control means of the main control unit 1300 of FIG. Setting switch 1311a provided on the setting change board 1310Y, setting change processing of step S37 in the main control side power on processing of FIG. 175 as information storage control means, step of main control side power on processing of FIG. S3 Processing, and a main control side timer interrupt process of FIG. 177 as the activation execution control unit. The RAM clear switch 1310 f has a pressing operation unit as an operation unit. The power switch 630 a can turn on the power of the pachinko machine 1. The setting switching button 1311b is any one of setting value 1 to setting value 6 in the change setting mode of the actual machine checking operation after clearing the RAM as a plurality of activation time operation setting information which can be executed at the time of activation of the gaming machine. It is possible to select a set value.

  As described above as a mode of change setting of the actual machine check operation after clearing the RAM (Modified example (1) by the common hardware configuration described above), the movable object (character object) to be controlled by the main control MPU 1310a The actual machine check operation pattern 1 for designating "all operations (operation of movable body (characters), lighting of light emitter)" as the setting value 1 is assigned to the operation, lighting of the light emitter such as a lamp or LED, The actual machine confirmation operation pattern 2 for designating “operation of movable body (character)” as the set value 2 is allocated, and the actual machine confirmation operation pattern 3 for designating “lighting of the light emitter” is allocated as the set value 3 4 as “Detailed movement of movable body (object) (variable movement speed, movement across the operation area, interference check with other structures or other movable bodies (object), other movable body (object Working order with) Operation) 4 is assigned, and the setting value 5 is set to “1 light emitter port unit (lighting of the light emitter according to a predetermined output port unit of the main control MPU 1310 a (that is, every 1 output port)) The actual machine check operation pattern 5 for designating “lighting” is assigned, and the actual machine check operation pattern 6 for designating “no operation” as the setting value 6 is assigned.

  The main control built-in RAM can store various information even after the pachinko machine 1 is powered off. The setting switch 1311a can permit selection of a setting value which is activation operation setting information by the setting switching button 1311b, and can also determine a setting value which is activation operation setting information. . The setting change process of step S37 in the main control side power-on process of FIG. 175 performs control to store and retain the setting value, which is the operation setting information at start-up determined by the setting switch 1311a, in the specific area of the main control internal RAM. It can be done. The process of step S38 in the main control side power-on process of FIG. 175 can perform control to erase information stored and held in the other areas excluding the specific area of the main control built-in RAM. The main control side timer interrupt process of FIG. 177 can perform control of executing the start of the gaming machine based on the set value which is the start time operation setting information stored and held in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM. is there.

  When the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on by the power switch 630a after the setting switch 1311a permits the selection of the setting value which is the startup operation setting information, the startup operation setting selected by the setting switching button 1311b The setting value, which is information, is determined by the setting switch 1311a, and the setting value, which is operation setting information at start-up, is stored in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM by the setting change process of step S37 in the main control side power-on process of FIG. The information held and stored in the other areas except the specific area of the main control internal RAM is erased by the processing at step S38 in the main control side power-on process of FIG. 175 and is stored in the specific area of the main control internal RAM The main control of the pachinko machine 1 shown in FIG. 177 is based on the setting value which is the start-up operation setting information held. It adapted to be executed by the timer interrupt processing.

  Specifically, when changing the setting of the setting value, the setting key is inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting switch 1311a before the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, and the setting key cylinder is turned clockwise. The setting switch 1311a is turned on by turning the first switch by turning 60 degrees toward the end. Subsequently, the power switch 630 a is operated to turn on the pachinko machine 1. As a result, a signal of setting key ON is input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X (perform step S18 and step S20A in the main control side power on process of FIG. 175). Subsequently, when the pressing operation portion of the setting switching button 1311b is pressed, a detection signal from the setting switching button 1311b of the setting change board 1310Y is input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X. The main control MPU 1310a increments the current setting value by 1 each time the setting control button 1311b is pressed, and the main control MPU 1310a increases the value by 1 each from the current setting value, based on the detection signal from the setting switching button 1311b of the setting change board 1310Y When the set value 6, which is a value, is reached, the process returns to the set value 1, which is the initial value, increases again by 1 and performs control to display the set value on the setting display 1310g (step S216 in the setting change process of FIG. 178). Repeat the process of S222). Subsequently, when the setting value is determined, the setting key cylinder is turned 120 degrees counterclockwise (that is, the original position from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting switch 1311 a is turned on) To return to the initial position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turns off the setting switch 1311a), it is turned 60 degrees counterclockwise and turned off, and further turned 60 degrees counterclockwise The setting switch 1311a is turned on by the second ON operation (turned). The signal of the determination key ON is input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X (the process of step S222 in the setting change process of FIG. 178 is performed). Thereby, the main control MPU 1310a stores the setting value determined by changing the setting in the specific area (setting value dedicated area) of the main control built-in RAM (performs the process of step S224 in the setting change process of FIG. 178). Subsequently, the main control MPU 1310a clears the other areas of the main control built-in RAM except for the specific area (performs the process of step S38 in the main control side power-on process of FIG. 175), and In the process at step S40 of the input process, the work area of the main control built-in RAM is set as an initial setting, and the game is advanced based on the set value stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM.

  On the other hand, the setting switch 1311a does not permit the selection of the setting value which is the operation setting information at start-up, and the power switch 630a performs power on of the pachinko machine 1 and operates the RAM clear switch 1310f within a predetermined period. When the unit is operated, the information stored and held in the other areas except for the specific area of the main control internal RAM is erased by the processing at step S38 in the main control side power-on process of FIG. The activation of the pachinko machine 1 is executed by the main control side timer interrupt process of FIG. 177 based on the setting value which is the activation time operation setting information stored and held in the specific area.

  Specifically, the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is not rotated 60 degrees clockwise, and the power switch of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on by the power switch 630a. The main control MPU 1310a starts the processing when the main control side power is turned on in FIG. When the main control side power-on process of FIG. 175 is started, the main control MPU 1310 a performs processing within a predetermined period from the start of the main control side power-on process of FIG. 175 to the process of step S14. It is determined whether or not the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310 f is operated, and when the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310 f is operated, thereafter, in the process of step S 38 of the main control side power on process of FIG. Clear the other area excluding the specific area of the main control built-in RAM, and set the work area of the main control built-in RAM as an initial setting in the processing of step S40 of the main control side power-on process of FIG. The game is advanced based on the set value stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of.

  As described above, the setting value which is the startup operation setting information selected from any one of the setting value 1 to the setting value 6 which is the plurality of startup operation setting information that can be executed when the pachinko machine 1 starts up. Is stored in a specific area of the main control built-in RAM, the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on and the operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310 f is operated within a predetermined period. If the information stored and held in the other area excluding the specific area of the main control internal RAM is erased by the processing of step S38 in the main control side power-on process of FIG. 175, the information is stored in the specific area of the main control internal RAM The pachinko machine 1 can be started based on the setting value which is the start-up operation setting information. Therefore, variations can be made to the activation method.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, the game ball B fired by the ball launching device 540 of FIG. 92 as the launching means is provided as the receiving port provided in the game area 5a. Advancement of the game can be performed based on having entered the ball 4813 or the electric start winning opening 4871.

  The pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment includes the RAM clear switch 1310 f provided on the main control board 1310 X of the main control unit 1300 of FIG. 144A as operation means, the power switch 630 a of FIG. 7 as power on means, and the main control of FIG. Setting change button 1311b provided on the setting change board 1310Y of the unit 1300, main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU 1310a provided on the main control board 1310X of FIG. 253 as storage means, selection control means of the main control unit 1300 of FIG. Setting switch 1311a provided on the setting change board 1310Y, setting change processing of step S37 in the main control side power on processing of FIG. 175 as information storage control means, step of main control side power on processing of FIG. S3 It has a processing. The RAM clear switch 1310 f has a pressing operation unit as an operation unit. The power switch 630 a can turn on the power of the pachinko machine 1. The setting switching button 1311 b can select any one of setting values 1 to 6 as a plurality of setting information advantageous to the player. The main control built-in RAM can store various information even after the pachinko machine 1 is powered off. The setting switch 1311a can permit selection of the setting value by the setting switching button 1311b, and can also determine the setting value. The setting change process of step S37 in the main control side power-on process of FIG. 175 can perform control of storing and holding the setting information determined by the setting switch 1311a in a specific area of the main control built-in RAM. The process of step S38 in the main control side power-on process of FIG. 175 can perform control to erase information stored and held in the other areas excluding the specific area of the main control built-in RAM.

  When the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on by the power switch 630a after setting of the setting value is permitted by the setting switch 1311a, the setting value selected by the setting switching button 1311b is determined by the setting switch 1311a. The set value determined is stored and held in a specific area of the main control internal RAM, and the information stored and held in the other areas excluding the specific area of the main control internal RAM is step S38 in the main control side power-on process of FIG. It is designed to be erased by processing.

  Specifically, when changing the setting of the setting value, the setting key is inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting switch 1311a before the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, and the setting key cylinder is turned clockwise. The setting switch 1311a is turned on by turning the first switch by turning 60 degrees toward the end. Subsequently, the power switch 630 a is operated to turn on the pachinko machine 1. As a result, a signal of setting key ON is input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X (perform step S18 and step S20A in the main control side power on process of FIG. 175). Subsequently, when the pressing operation portion of the setting switching button 1311b is pressed, a detection signal from the setting switching button 1311b of the setting change board 1310Y is input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X. The main control MPU 1310a increments the current setting value by 1 each time the setting control button 1311b is pressed, and the main control MPU 1310a increases the value by 1 each from the current setting value, based on the detection signal from the setting switching button 1311b of the setting change board 1310Y When the set value 6, which is a value, is reached, the process returns to the set value 1, which is the initial value, increases again by 1 and performs control to display the set value on the setting display 1310g (step S216 in the setting change process of FIG. 178). Repeat the process of S222). Subsequently, when the setting value is determined, the setting key cylinder is turned 120 degrees counterclockwise (that is, the original position from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting switch 1311 a is turned on) To return to the initial position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turns off the setting switch 1311a), it is turned 60 degrees counterclockwise and turned off, and further turned 60 degrees counterclockwise The setting switch 1311a is turned on by the second ON operation (turned). The signal of the determination key ON is input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X (the process of step S222 in the setting change process of FIG. 178 is performed). Thereby, the main control MPU 1310a stores the setting value determined by changing the setting in the specific area (setting value dedicated area) of the main control built-in RAM (performs the process of step S224 in the setting change process of FIG. 178). Subsequently, the main control MPU 1310a clears the other areas of the main control built-in RAM except for the specific area (performs the process of step S38 in the main control side power-on process of FIG. 175).

  When the power on of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on by the power switch 630a without setting the setting information being permitted by the setting switch 1311a and the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f is operated within a predetermined period, the main Information stored and held in other areas except for the specific area of the control built-in RAM is erased by the process of step S38 in the main control side power-on process of FIG.

  Specifically, the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is not rotated 60 degrees clockwise, and the power switch of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on by the power switch 630a. The main control MPU 1310a starts the processing when the main control side power is turned on in FIG. When the main control side power-on process of FIG. 175 is started, the main control MPU 1310 a performs processing within a predetermined period from the start of the main control side power-on process of FIG. 175 to the process of step S14. It is determined whether or not the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310 f is operated, and when the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310 f is operated, thereafter, in the process of step S 38 of the main control side power on process of FIG. Clear the other areas excluding the specific area of the main control built-in RAM.

  As described above, the main control internal RAM stores and holds the setting value determined by selecting any one of the plurality of setting values (setting value 1 to setting value 6) which is advantageous to the player. Since the game is based on the set value, it is possible to provide the player with a game for each set value. Therefore, the range of the game can be expanded. After setting switch 1311a permits setting information selection, power switch 630a turns on power of pachinko machine 1, and setting information selected by setting switch button 1311b is determined by setting switch 1311a. Information stored and held in another area of the main control built-in RAM other than the specific area of the main control built-in RAM is stored in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM in step S38 of FIG. The power is turned on by the pachinko machine 1 by the power switch 630a without setting “erasing information with setting change” to be erased by processing and setting information selection is not permitted by the setting switch 1311a, and within a predetermined period On the basis of the operation of the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f, the master The information stored and held in the area other than the specific area of the built-in RAM is erased by the process of step S38 in the main control side power-on process of FIG. It is possible to erase one of the information in the "erasing information".

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result, etc. drawn by the main control board 1310X of the main control unit 1300 of FIG. From the vibration detection switch 3005 in FIG. 237, the lower vibration detection switches 3006a and 3006b, and the lower vibration detection switch 3006b as vibration detection units capable of detecting the progress of the game based on The main control board 1310 X of FIG. 253 and the peripheral control board 1510 as control means capable of controlling various decoration boards provided in the door frame 3 of FIG. 91A as a game effect device while monitoring the detection signal of There is. The main control board 1310X can transmit various commands to the peripheral control board 1510 so that the peripheral control board 1510 can control various decorative boards provided in the door frame 3. Therefore, the main control board 1310X and the peripheral control board can be controlled. The various decoration boards provided in the door frame 3 which is a game effect device can be controlled by 1510.

  Of the main control board 1310X and the peripheral control board 1510, the main control board 1310X detects a vibration during activation of the vibration determination effective timer VDET (12 milliseconds (0.012 seconds)) as a predetermined period for proceeding with the game. Based on the detection signals from the switch 3005 and the lower vibration detection switches 3006a and 3006b, various decoration substrates provided in the door frame 3 are controlled stepwise by performing a situation where an illegal act of giving vibration to the pachinko machine 1 is performed. Can be notified.

  Specifically, in the case of performing notification in stages, the main control MPU 1310a sets the first notification mode as weak notification when the value of the abnormal vibration counter AVC is less than or equal to the threshold value TH. In this first notification, a clerk in the game hall should not feel uncomfortable for a player playing a game with a pachinko machine that is adjacent to the pachinko machine that is playing a doggie goto at an early stage of detecting the dotsukigoto. When a person in charge passes through the front of the pachinko machine 1 that is carrying out a droop, that effect can be reported, for example, the door in the door frame top unit 450 provided in the door frame 3 shown in FIG. 91A. A plurality of LEDs mounted respectively on the frame top central decorative substrate 455 and the door frame top left decorative substrate 456 are set to emit light in red for 5 minutes.

  The main control MPU 1310 a creates a weak thick alert command divided into the alert display serving as the first alert mode, and stores it as the transmit information in the transmission information storage area described above. Main control MPU 1310a reads transmission information from the transmission information storage area described above in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 177, and performs peripheral control using this transmission information as the main cycle serial data. Transmit to substrate 1510. Thus, when the CPU of the peripheral control board 1510 analyzes the received command analysis process of step S1022 in the peripheral control unit power-on process shown in FIG. 185 and the analyzed command includes a weak notification command, The light emission mode generation schedule data and the like set to the weak link information are read out (extracted) from the control ROM 1510 b and set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510 a. Then, the CPU of the peripheral control board 1510 configures the light emission mode generation schedule data already set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510 a in the display data output process of step S1016 in the peripheral control unit power-on process shown in FIG. Among the light emission data arranged in time series, the door frame top central decoration substrate 455 in the door frame top unit 450 provided in the door frame 3 shown in FIG. 91A and the door frame top left decoration according to the light emission data indicated by the pointer A plurality of LEDs mounted on the substrate 456 are set to emit light in red for 5 minutes.

  Then, when the value of the abnormal vibration counter AVC is not equal to or less than the threshold value TH, that is, when the value of the abnormal vibration counter AVC exceeds the threshold value TH, the main control MPU 1310a sets the second notification mode as a strong notification. Do. This second notification is a notification that strongly warns of the doglike in comparison with the above-described first notification mode, and it is possible that a store clerk or an attendant who patrols the game hall rushes to the pachinko machine 1 that is doing a dogily. For example, the dish upper left decoration unit 270, the dish upper right decoration unit 275, the dish lower left decoration unit 280, the dish lower right decoration unit 285, and various decoration substrates in the effect operation unit 300, provided in the door frame 3 shown in FIG. 91A. A light emission mode in which the plurality of LEDs mounted on each of the plurality of LEDs mounted on the door frame top unit 450 and the plurality of LEDs mounted on the door frame top left decorative substrate 456 and the door frame top right decorative substrate 457 in the door frame top unit 450 blink for 5 minutes in red. And the plurality of LEs mounted on the door frame top central decorative substrate 455 of the door frame top unit 450 In addition to the warning sound for the strong notification, the strong notification annunciation “The vibration has been detected” is added to the light emission mode that blinks white for 5 minutes, and various announcements at maximum volume are various speakers (vibration speaker 354, top center speaker 462, top Sound form that flows for 90 seconds from the side speaker 464, body frame speaker 622, etc.), and further, that a dog computer is being performed on the hall computer of the game hall via the external terminal board 558 shown in FIG. It is impossible to launch the game ball toward the game area 5a in order to output a signal to transmit and to stop the game so that an unauthorized player who is playing a game can not play any more games. The possible cheating detection flag FD-FLG is set to the value 1.

  The main control MPU 1310a creates a dog information notification command to be divided into the notification information in the second notification mode, stores it as the transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above, and sends a notification that the dog information is being performed to the hall computer. The output of penetration to be transmitted is set and stored as the output information in the above-described output information storage area. Main control MPU 1310a reads transmission information from the transmission information storage area described above in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 177, and performs peripheral control using this transmission information as the main cycle serial data. Transmit to substrate 1510. Thus, when the CPU of the peripheral control board 1510 analyzes the received command analysis process of step S1022 in the peripheral control unit power-on process shown in FIG. The light emission mode generation schedule data, the sound generation schedule data, etc. which are set to the strong notification, are read out (extracted) from the control ROM 1510 b and set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510 a. Then, the CPU of the peripheral control board 1510 configures the light emission mode generation schedule data already set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510 a in the display data output process of step S1016 in the peripheral control unit power-on process shown in FIG. Among the light emission data arranged in time series, according to the light emission data indicated by the pointer, the dish upper left decoration unit 270, the dish upper right decoration unit 275, the dish lower left decoration unit 280, the dish provided in the door frame 3 shown in FIG. A plurality of LEDs mounted respectively on various decoration substrates in the lower right decoration unit 285 and the rendering operation unit 300 and a door frame top left decoration substrate 456 and a door frame top right decoration substrate 457 in the door frame top unit 450 LEDs for 5 minutes flashing red In the light control mode, a plurality of LEDs mounted on the door frame top central decorative substrate 455 in the door frame top unit 450 are set to a light emission mode that blinks white for 5 minutes and the peripheral control unit shown in FIG. In the sound data output process of step S1018, the peripheral control is performed according to the sound command data indicated by the pointer among the sound command data arranged in time series constituting the sound generation schedule data set in the RAM of peripheral control IC 1510a. Sound control data is input from CPU of IC 1510a The sound source of peripheral control IC 1510a reads sound data from SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2, and according to the track number specified in the sound command data, the warning sound for strong notification and "vibration detected" Sound day for strong announcement Together incorporate, to set the output channel to be used according to the output channel number, outputted from the output channel specified various speakers (vibration speaker 354, top center speaker 462, topside speaker 464, main body frame speaker 622, etc.).

  Furthermore, main control MPU 1310a reads output information from the output information storage area described above in the port output process of step S118 in the main control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 177, and based on the output information, predetermined main control MPU 1310a From the output terminal of the output port, a signal is transmitted to the external terminal board 558 to convey to the hall computer that the dock is being performed.

  Furthermore, main control MPU 1310a sets the value 1 to the fraud detection flag FD-FLG in the firing permission signal setting process of step S113 in the main control side timer interrupt process shown in FIG. The firing permission logic is set to the inverted firing stopping logic (firing non-permission logic) as logic of and the above-mentioned output information storage area is stored as output information. Main control MPU 1310a reads output information from the output information storage area described above in the port output process of step S118 in the main control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 177, and based on the output information, predetermined output port of main control MPU 1310a. The output control terminal 633b outputs to the launch control unit 633b of the payout control board 633, and the launch control unit 633b can not launch the gaming ball toward the gaming area 5a. As a result, the game is stopped so that an unauthorized player who does a dog game can not play any more games.

  As described above, detection from the vibration detection switch 3005 and the lower vibration detection switches 3006 a and 3006 b during activation (12 milliseconds (0.012 seconds)) of the vibration discrimination effective timer VDET which is a predetermined period in which the game proceeds For example, the various decoration substrates provided in the door frame 3 can be controlled to be notified in stages, based on the signal, for example, the situation in which the fraudulent act of giving vibration to the pachinko machine 1 is performed. Even if the vibration detection switch 3005 and the lower vibration detection switches 3006a and 3006b detect the vibration generated when the door frame 3 is opened from the main body frame 4 of FIG. Of the substrate 1310X and the peripheral control substrate 1510, the main control substrate 1310X does not judge that the pachinko machine 1 is a cheating act that gives vibration. Not erroneously informed as excessive vibration vibration caused when the opening. Therefore, false notification as an abnormal vibration can be prevented.

  In the above embodiments, the following solutions are included as technical ideas with respect to the following background art and problems.

[Background technology]
Conventionally, there has been proposed a gaming machine which is provided with a vibration sensor (vibration detection unit) for detecting the vibration of the game board to detect fraudulent acts such as hitting the gaming machine (for example, JP-A 2014-42689 (paragraph [0026] and Figure 2)).

[Problems to be solved by the invention]
By the way, in the conventional gaming machine, when the vibration sensor detects a vibration that occurs when the glass frame (door frame) is opened from the front frame (main frame) in which the game can not be progressed, it is erroneously reported as abnormal vibration I was afraid to know.

[Means for Solving the Problems]
(Solution means I)
A gaming machine capable of advancing a game based on a lottery result by the lottery means, wherein a vibration detection unit capable of detecting a vibration, monitoring a detection signal from the vibration detection unit, and Control means capable of controlling, the control means performing an illegal act of giving vibration to the gaming machine based on a detection signal from the vibration detection unit in a predetermined period in which a game proceeds A gaming machine characterized by controlling the gaming effect device and reporting it in stages.

  In this gaming machine, the game can be advanced based on the lottery result by the lottery means, and a vibration detection unit capable of detecting vibration, monitoring signals detected from the vibration detection unit, and playing a game And control means capable of controlling the apparatus.

  The control means controls the game effect device in a step-by-step manner by controlling a situation where an illegal act of giving vibration to the gaming machine is performed based on a detection signal from the vibration detection unit during a predetermined period in which the game proceeds. It can be notified.

  As described above, based on the detection signal from the vibration detection unit in a predetermined period in which the game proceeds, the game effect device is controlled to gradually control the situation in which the illegal act of giving vibration to the gaming machine is performed. Since the notification can be made, for example, even if the vibration detection unit detects the vibration generated when the door frame is opened from the main body frame in a situation where the game can not proceed, the control means is It does not judge that it is a fraudulent act that gives vibration to the gaming machine, and does not erroneously notify the vibration that occurs when opening it as an abnormal vibration. Therefore, false notification as an abnormal vibration can be prevented.

  In the present embodiment, for example, the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result drawn by the main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 of FIG. 13 corresponds to the “lottery result by the drawing means”. The pachinko machine 1 corresponds to a game machine, the vibration detection switch 3005 in FIG. 237 and the lower vibration detection switches 3006a and 3006b correspond to a vibration detection unit, and various decoration boards provided in the door frame 3 in FIG. The main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 in FIG. 253 correspond to the control means, and “during activation of the vibration determination effective timer VDET” corresponds to the “predetermined period for proceeding with the game”, the first The notification and the second notification correspond to "stepwise notification".

(Solution means II)
The gaming machine according to Solution I, wherein the gaming machine is a drum-type gaming machine.

  Since the gaming machine is a drum-type gaming machine, the operational effects of the solution I can be obtained in the drum-type gaming machine. As a basic configuration of the reeling type gaming machine, after variably displaying a symbol information row (for example, a plurality of reel rows attached with a plurality of symbol information) including a plurality of symbol information, the display result of the symbol information is stopped and displayed A variable display means is provided, and variable display of symbol information is started based on the operation of the start operation means (for example, the start lever), and based on the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or the elapse of a predetermined time Stop the variable display of symbol information. And while being provided with a profit giving state generating means for generating a profit giving state (big hit gaming state) on condition that the symbol information is in a predetermined specific display mode, a medal is used as a game medium, and a profit giving state is generated. Sometimes it is configured to pay out a large amount of medals.

(Solution means III)
The gaming machine according to Solution I, wherein the gaming machine is a fusion gaming machine in which a pachinko gaming machine and a reel-type gaming machine are fused.

Since the gaming machine is a fusion gaming machine in which a pachinko gaming machine and a drum-type gaming machine are fused, in the fusion gaming machine in which a pachinko gaming machine and a drum-type gaming machine are fused, the operation effect of the solution means I is can get. As a basic configuration of a fusion gaming machine in which a pachinko gaming machine and a reel-type gaming machine are fused, symbol information strings (for example, a plurality of reel strings attached with a plurality of symbols) composed of a plurality of symbol information are variably displayed. After that, while being provided with the variable display means for stopping and displaying the display result of the symbol information, the variable display of the symbol information is started based on the operation of the starting operation means (for example, start lever), and the stopping operation means (for example, stop) The variation display of the symbol information is stopped based on the operation of the button or the elapse of a predetermined time. And while providing a profit giving state generating means for generating a profit giving state (big hit gaming state) on condition that the symbol information is in a predetermined specific display mode, a game ball is used as a game medium, and a profit giving state is A lot of game balls are paid out at the time of occurrence.
In the gaming machines of the above solutions I to III, an erroneous notification can be prevented as an abnormal vibration.

In addition, the following technical ideas are also included in the above embodiments.
"It is a gaming machine provided with a ball rolling member for rolling a game ball in a game area that can be viewed by a player,
The ball rolling member is
A ball flow passage having at least a bottom wall portion and a peripheral wall portion and being curved in an annular or arc shape so that a centrifugal force toward the peripheral wall portion side is applied to the gaming ball rolling on the bottom wall portion;
A ball guiding portion which is provided in the ball flow channel and which can contact the lower side than the center of the gaming ball rolling on the bottom wall to guide the gaming ball to a position slightly away from the peripheral wall. Gaming machine. "
According to such a technical idea, it is possible to provide a gaming machine provided with a ball rolling member capable of preventing actual damage caused by the dog radio.
In addition, in order to make the ball guiding portion sink more securely under the gaming ball by vibration, the shape of the ball guiding portion is formed into a wedge shape which is inclined downward toward the contact point with the bottom wall of the gaming ball Is good.

Also, from the above, the embodiment includes the following technical ideas.
"It is a gaming machine that uses a game medium to play a predetermined game and is equipped with a display device for effect within the gaming area,
The display device (third display device) is
A display member capable of variably displaying characters, figures, images and the like;
And a display frame for supporting the display member,
The display frame is
A frame body variably mounted within the gaming area;
A game machine comprising: a movable portion variably attached to the frame body. "
Such a game machine changes the position or the attitude of the display member by changing the frame main body within the game area while performing effects by an image etc. by the display member of the display device, and further moving the movable portion to the frame main body. The movement of the display member can be effectively enhanced by moving it.

  The embodiment of the present invention has been described above, but in the embodiment, with regard to the third display device 4818 which is an example of the display device, the first movable portion 4888 and the second movable portion 4889 are used as the lifting device of the third display device 4818 Although it is made to fluctuate at 4897, a drive source different from the lifting device 4897 may be provided to make the operations of the first movable portion 4888 and the second movable portion 4889 independent. By doing so, more complicated rendition can be performed.

  Of course, the present invention is not limited to the above embodiment. For example, although a pachinko machine has been illustrated as a game machine in the embodiment, the invention is also applicable to other game machines such as ball ball machines and arrange ball machines, and further, a plurality of drums The present invention is also applicable to slot machines that rotate reels. Here, the slot machine will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 265 is a schematic perspective view of the slot machine.

  As shown in FIG. 265, the slot machine 6000 includes a front door 6002 and a main body portion 6004. The front door 6002 and the main body portion 6004 are mutually connected via a hinge not shown. The front door 6002 can be released from the main body 6004 by inserting a key into a keyhole 6005 provided at the right end of the front door 6002 and turning it clockwise with the hinge as a rotation center.

  The upper half of the front door 6002 is provided with a game panel 6006, and the lower half of the front door 6002 is formed with a projection projecting forward from the game panel 6006. A medal insertion slot 6008, bet buttons 6010 and 6012, a start lever 6014, a left stop button 6016, a middle stop button 6018, a right stop button 6020 and the like are arranged along the lower edge of the game panel 6006 in this projection. A storage settlement button 6022 and a decorative plate 6024 are disposed in the lower half of the front door 6002, and a tray 6026 is provided below the decorative plate 6024. The bet buttons 6010 and 6012, the start lever 6014, the left stop button 6016, the middle stop button 6018, the right stop button 6020, and the stored payment button 6022 are electrically connected to the main control board 1310X that controls the progress of the game. It is done. The main control board 1310 X is attached and fixed to a not-shown board holder provided in the main control board box 1320 of the main control unit 1300 and provided inside the main body portion 6004.

  A rectangular display window (not shown) is formed at approximately the center position of the game panel 6006, and three variable rotary bodies (not shown), a rendering device (not shown), etc. installed inside the slot machine 6000 through this display window. It is possible to see through. Three variable rotary bodies (not shown) are attached and fixed to a main body side attachment member (not shown) provided inside the main body portion 6004. On the other hand, the effect device (not shown) is attached and fixed to a door side attachment member (not shown) provided on the back side of the front door 6002.

  In these variable rotary bodies, a translucent design band on which plural types of designs (eg, bell, watermelon, cherry, 7, V, etc.) are printed as design information is attached to each cylindrical skeleton ing. Such a cylindrical variable rotary body is called a reel or a drum in a gaming machine such as a slot machine, and an output shaft of a stepping motor (not shown) and each variable rotary body are connected. These stepping motors are driven and controlled by the main control board 1310X, and when the output shaft of the stepping motor rotates, plural kinds of symbols continuously change from the top to the bottom from the display window described above It looks like

  The effect device includes a plurality of movable effect bodies (not shown), the effect display device 1600 described above, various decorative substrates on which a plurality of LEDs (not shown) are mounted, and the peripheral control unit 1500 described above. The peripheral control unit 1500 performs operation control of a plurality of movable rendering units, drawing control of the effect display device 1600, light emission control of a plurality of LEDs mounted on various decoration substrates, and the like based on various commands from the main control substrate 1310X. The progress of the effect is controlled by performing various controls. The peripheral control unit 1500 includes the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 described above.

  A predetermined number of medals as game media are inserted into the medal insertion slot 6008, and the main control board 1310X starts fluctuating display of symbol information based on the operation of the start lever 6014, the left stop button 6016, the middle stop button 6018, the right The variation display of the symbol information is stopped based on the operation of the stop button 6020 or the elapse of a predetermined time. Then, the main control board 1310 X generates a profit giving state (big hit gaming state) on the condition that the symbol information is in a predetermined specific display mode, and pays out a large amount of medals as game media to the tray 6026.

  In the integrated gaming machine, the medal insertion slot 6008 becomes the ball insertion slot 6008 ', and a predetermined number of game balls are inserted into the ball insertion slot 6008' as gaming media for the main control board 1310X, and the operation of the start lever 6014 is performed. The variable display of symbol information is started based on the operation of the left stop button 6016, the middle stop button 6018 and the right stop button 6020 or the variable display of the symbol information is stopped based on the elapse of a predetermined time. Then, the main control board 1310 X generates a profit giving state (big hit gaming state) on the condition that the symbol information is in a predetermined specific display mode, and pays out a large amount of game balls as a game medium to the tray 6026.

In the above description, the following technical ideas are included.
(Technical thought a)
A game machine comprising game control means capable of proceeding with a game based on the fact that a game ball fired by a shooting means enters a socket provided in a game area, and a plurality of machines are advantageous for the player Selection means capable of selecting any one of the setting information and outputting a selection signal to the game control means via the first transmission path, and setting information to be selected by the selection means Determining means capable of outputting a determination signal to the game control means via a second transmission path different from the first transmission path, wherein the first transmission path and the second transmission path are mutually different A game machine characterized by being spaced apart.

  This gaming machine is provided with gaming control means capable of proceeding with the game based on the fact that the gaming ball fired by the launching means has entered the receptacle provided in the gaming area.

  This gaming machine includes selection means and determination means. The selection means is capable of selecting any one of a plurality of setting information advantageous to the player and outputting a selection signal to the game control means via the first transmission path. The determination means is capable of determining setting information selected by the selection means and outputting a determination signal to the game control means via a second transmission path different from the first transmission path. The first transmission path and the second transmission path are spaced apart from each other.

  In this manner, when any one of the plurality of setting information that is advantageous to the player is selected and the setting information is determined, the game based on the determined setting information is advanced, thereby setting each setting information. Can be provided to the player. Therefore, the range of the game can be expanded. Further, by disposing the first transmission path and the second transmission path apart from each other, unauthorized alteration can be prevented.

  In this embodiment, for example, the ball launcher 540 of FIG. 92 corresponds to the launch means, and the first start port 2002, second start port 2004 of FIG. 131, fixed start winning port 4813 of FIG. The main control MPU 1310a provided on the main control board 1310X of FIG. 151 and the main control MPU 1310a provided on the main control board 1310X of FIG. 253 correspond to game control means, and the pachinko machine 1 of FIG. Correspondingly, setting value 1 to setting value 6 correspond to a plurality of setting information, a detection signal from the setting switching button 1311 b corresponds to a selection signal, and setting switching provided on the setting change board 1310 Y of the main control unit 1300 of FIG. Wiring pattern through which the signal from the button 1311 b is transmitted (provided on the setting change substrate 1310 Y of the main control unit 1300 in FIG. 256) Setting switching button 1311 b provided on the setting change board 1310 Y of the main control unit 1300 of FIG. 144A, and the main control unit 1300 of FIG. The setting change button 1311b provided on the setting change substrate 1310Y corresponds to the selection means, the signal of the determination key ON from the setting switch 1311a by the setting key K1 corresponds to the determination signal, and the setting change substrate of the main control unit 1300 of FIG. The wiring pattern through which the signal from the setting switch 1311a included in 1310Y is transmitted (the wiring pattern through which the signal from the setting switch 1311a included in the setting change substrate 1310Y of the main control unit 1300 in FIG. 256 is transmitted) Main control unit of FIG. 144A. The setting switch 1311a provided on the setting change substrate 1310Y of 1300, and the setting switch 1311a provided on the setting change substrate 1310Y of the main control unit 1300 of FIG. 256 correspond to the determining means, “To the wiring pattern to the setting switch 1311a and the setting switching button 1311b And the terminals of the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1310Y (the terminals of the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310X) as being drawn away from each other (separately from each other) in the setting change board 1310Y. The connection to the main control board 1310X is also formed separately, and the wiring pattern through which the signal from the setting switch 1311a is transmitted is also close to the wiring pattern through which the signal from the setting switching button 1311b is transmitted. Not to be They are formed (spaced apart from each other), and are also formed so as not to be close to each other (spaced apart from each other) with the wiring pattern through which the signal from the RAM clear switch 1310 f is transmitted. The description “is equivalent to the point that“ the first transmission path and the second transmission path are spaced apart from each other ”.

[Other crime prevention structure of the game setting]
In the pachinko machine 1 of the above embodiment, as the crime prevention structure of the game setting, the change operation means provided in the main control unit 1310 is targeted, but other than that, the crime prevention measures of the game setting using the pachinko machine 1 structure May be performed. Such a crime prevention structure will be described below.

[Game setting change device]
The gaming machine (pachinko machine 1) of the embodiment is, as described above, the frame-like outer frame 2 or the box-like main body portion fixedly attached to the gaming machine installation section (island facility) in the facility (game hall). And a door frame 3 formed so as to cover the front of the outer frame 2 and to be able to turn in a half-opened state, and a fixed portion (hereinafter, described with the outer frame 2) which is 6004 grade. Of the door frame 3 and the outer frame 2 and has a main frame 4 formed so as to be able to turn in a half-opened manner, and the game setting of the winning probability by lottery is specified. The game setting change device which can change within the range of is provided.
This game setting change device is to change the hit probability of the lottery for determining the hit performed by the main control unit 1310 described above, and the setting key switch 131Xa to be turned ON / OFF with the dedicated setting key, or Is a setting switching unit 131Xb for changing the setting value of the hit probability by an operation such as rotation, a setting display unit 131Xc for displaying the setting value of the hit probability, and a power switch 630a of the power supply unit 620c of the pachinko machine 1 It has an operating means. It should be noted that what kind of element the change operation means is configured can be arbitrarily set. For example, the power switch 630a may be excluded from the component or an input key for inputting a password may be added to the component .

[How to change set value by change operation means]
Next, a method of changing the setting value of the hit probability by the change operation means of the game setting change device will be described. In addition, although the unlocking process which rotates the door frame 3 or the main body frame 4 is required as a premise of operating a change operation means, operation of the change operation means including such an unlocking process is mentioned later.

First, the setting key for setting change is inserted into the setting key switch 131Xa, and in the state as it is, the power is turned off by the power switch 630a.
Next, the setting key of the setting key switch 131Xa is turned to switch from OFF to ON, and in this state, power is turned on by the power switch 630a. As a result, the main control unit 1310 is switched to the setting change mode, and the current setting value of the hit probability is visibly displayed on the 7-segment display or the lighting of the LED in the setting display unit 131Xc. In addition, the hit probability of the game setting is, for example, “setting 1 = 1⁄20.0”, “setting 2 = 1 / 19.8”, “setting 3 = 1 / 19.6”, “setting 4 = 1/19. .4 "," setting 5 = 1 / 19.2 "," setting 6 = 1 / 19.0 "and so on.
Next, while looking at the setting display section 131Xc, the setting switching section 131Xb is operated to change the setting value of the hit probability, and when it comes to the setting value scheduled to be changed, the setting key switch 131Xa is returned to OFF and removed. As a result, the set value of the hit probability is fixed, the display of the set value by the setting display unit 131Xc disappears, and the setting change mode ends and the game becomes possible.
To check the current setting, turn on the setting key switch 131Xa with the setting change setting key while the power is on, and after confirmation, turn off the setting key switch 131Xa and exit the setting key. For example, the display of the setting value by the setting display unit 131Xc disappears.
Of course, the procedure of the above-mentioned change method is one example, and may be changed appropriately according to the combination of the elements of the change operation means.

[Specific example of change operation means]
Next, specific examples of the change operation means of the game setting change device will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 234, 236, and 266 to 269.

[Specific example 1]
All of the change operation means of the game setting change device shown in FIGS. 234 and 236 are installed in the upper left corner of the front component 1000 outside the game area 5 a of the game board 5.
That is, the change operation means of the first specific example includes a setting display unit 131Xc which is shared by the function display unit 1400, and a setting key switch 131Xa disposed obliquely upward in the vicinity of the function display unit 1400 along the game area 5a. A power switch 630a similarly disposed obliquely above the setting key switch 131Xa, and an operation rod type setting switching portion 131Xb similarly disposed obliquely above the power switch 630a.
The game board 5 is detachably mounted on the front of the main body frame 4 and substantially constitutes a part of the main body frame 4. Therefore, in the game setting change device shown in FIGS. 234 and 236, all of the change operation means for changing the setting value are provided on the front side of the main body frame 4.
Further, the power switch 630a is obtained by transferring the one provided in the power unit 620c, and the function of turning on / off the power does not change.

A procedure for changing the setting value of the game setting change device by the change operation means of this specific example 1 will be described.
First, in the pachinko machine 1, the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2 are locked by the locking unit 650 attached to the main body frame 4 as described above, and the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 are locked. The frame 3 is locked to the outer frame 2 via the main body frame 4.
Therefore, before operating the change operation means, insert the setting key into the key hole 132 of the cylinder lock 130 from the front of the door frame 3 and rotate it in a predetermined direction (for example, counterclockwise in front view) to lock the door frame 3 After turning the door frame 3 only in the opening direction, the employee stands in front of the main body frame 4 (game board 5) with the open door frame 3 seen on the left side (unlocking process).
Then, in this state, the change of the setting value by the change operation means of the game setting change device is executed according to the procedure described above, and then the door frame 3 is returned to the original state and locked.
In addition, the game setting change apparatus of all the specific examples provides the door frame opening switch 4a (refer to FIG. 269) in the door frame 3, detects the opening of the door frame 3, and the door frame 3 is opened to change the setting mode. At the time of switching, a sound of "setting change in progress" flows from the body frame speaker 622 or the like at a large volume and a signal in the setting change is transmitted from the external terminal board 558. As a result, since the setting change operation of the game setting change device is clearly transmitted to those around and the manager, it is difficult to make an unauthorized setting change. Also, depending on the opening degree of the door frame 3, a sound notifying that the setting is flowing from the body frame speaker 622 is loud, for example, when the opening of the door frame 3 is small, while the opening of the door frame 3 is external If the angle is larger than the easy-to-check angle (for example, the opening angle is 80 degrees or more), the volume difference may be provided such that the volume is lower than or equal to the middle volume. By doing so, when the opening of the door frame 3 is small, it is possible to detect frauds around the voice when the opening of the door frame 3 is large, and when the opening of the door frame 3 is large. It is possible to reduce the stress due to the sound for the regular setting change work performed by opening.

Although the change operation means of the game setting change device of the above-described specific example 1 is provided at the upper left corner corresponding to the outside of the game area 5a of the gaming board 5, it is not shown It may be provided at the corner, at the lower left corner, and at the lower right corner. Alternatively, as shown in FIGS. 266 (a) and (b), the main unit frame 4 may be provided below the game board 5.
In this case, the door of the employee who is opening the door frame 3 and stealing the eyes of the employee who is dealing with troubles such as a ball jam etc., the tampering act of the malicious person who tries to operate the tampering manipulation means At least one element of the game board 5 (preferably, the setting switching section 131Xb for directly inputting the setting value) in one of the upper left corner and the upper right corner of the game board 5, or a plurality of elements are dispersedly provided in both (for example, The setting key switch 131Xa may be the upper right corner, and the setting switching unit 131Xb may be the upper left corner). If there is a change operation means at these positions, it is far from the player sitting in the chair, and the gesture to extend the hand up is unnatural and there is a high risk that the employee will notice it, so I think that he / she is cheating. It is because it can be a psychological pressure to stop it. From this, it is far from the player sitting in the chair and it is difficult to see from the player because the view is blocked by the employee who works and all the change operation means or the change operation means in the upper left corner of the game board 5 It is best to provide part (preferably part of the conversion operation).
Conversely, as shown in FIGS. 266 (a) and 266 (b), when the change operation means is provided below the game board 5 of the main unit frame 4, it is likely to be disadvantageous for crime prevention because it is close to the player at the low position. In order to solve such a crime prevention surface problem, the main frame 4 is formed with a hidden area 131 X d which is obscured and difficult to see from the perspective viewed from an oblique direction avoiding the open door frame 3 The 131Xe may be provided, and all or part of the change operation means may be provided in the hidden area 131Xd. In FIGS. 266 (a) and (b), the hidden surface 131Xf of the step portion 131Xe which is shaded from the viewpoint (for example, a viewpoint viewed obliquely from the open side (anti-hinge side) of the door frame 3 opened for ball jamming). In addition, as shown in the flat or the enlarged view of FIG. 266 (a), the depression is further provided and the setting display portion 131Xc by the LED is provided, and the player is forced to open the door frame 3 during business hours. The set value is almost invisible from Of course, providing all of the change operation means on the hidden surface 131Xf of the step 131Xe is the most advantageous in terms of crime prevention measures, but providing only a part of the change operation means on the hidden surface 131Xf of the step 131Xe is illegal. It is effective as a crime prevention measure because it becomes difficult to do. In particular, since the setting display unit 131 Xc of the change operation means can be installed if there is a small step 131 Xe that only arranges the LEDs in a line, securing of the installation place becomes easy.

[Specific Example 2]
The change operation means of the second specific example is provided on the rear side of the door frame 3 as shown in FIG. The elements constituting the change operation means are as described above, and the description thereof is omitted.
When the change operation means is provided on the rear side of the door frame 3, when the door frame 3 is opened in response to the trouble as described above, the change operation means is located near the player's hand as a result. There is a possibility that the operation may be performed illegally by pushing the clearance of a member, but in the second example, the cover body 131Xg which can be opened and closed is provided on the rear side of the door frame 3 to cover the change operation means. Can not be done.
This cover body 131Xg can be pivoted in a half-opened manner by providing a hinge portion 131Xh on one side, but by providing the hinge portion 131Xh on the free end side of the door frame 3, as shown by an imaginary line in FIG. In the open state, the change operation means is hidden from the player. Such a cover body 131 Xg can be applied to the first embodiment, and by providing the hinge portion between the change operation means and the player, it goes without saying that the change operation means can be protected in the closed state. In the open state, it is possible to hide the change operation means from the player's point of view.

  In specific examples 1 and 2, a hole is made by a heated rod or the like in the door frame 3 made of synthetic resin, and the change operation means may be tampered with from the hole, so the front of the change operation means is not shown. It is preferable to provide a protective plate (for example, a metal plate) excellent in heat resistance and rigidity. Of course, the cover body 131Xg may be formed of a material excellent in heat resistance and rigidity so as to be an open / close protective plate.

[Specific Example 3]
The change operation means of the third example is provided such that a part of the change operation means of the first example or the second example is provided on the rear side of the main body frame 4 and / or the outer frame 2 on the rear side of the closed main body frame 4. It is
For example, the change operation means of the third embodiment includes, in one element, a power switch 630a integrated with the power unit 620c attached to the rear side of the main body frame 4 shown in FIG. In the same manner as in (2), it is provided on the rear side of the door frame 3 or on the front side of the main body frame 4. For example, the power switch 630a, which is an element of the change operation means, may be provided inside the outer frame 2 (fixed portion).
When changing the setting value of the game setting change device by the change operation means of the third specific example, a key is inserted into the cylinder lock 130 from the front of the door frame 3 as the unlocking step and in a predetermined direction (for example, clockwise in front view) After turning and unlocking the outer frame 2 of the main frame 4, the key inserted into the cylinder lock 130 is rotated in the reverse direction to unlock the main frame 4 of the door frame 3 as well. Each change operation means may be operated as described above. In the same manner as the door frame 3, the main body frame 4 is provided with a main body frame open switch 4b (see FIG. 269) for detecting the opening of the main body frame 4, and both the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 are opened. When the mode is switched to the change mode, a sound of “setting in progress” flows at a large volume from the main body frame speaker 622 and the like, and a signal in progress of setting change is transmitted from the external terminal board 558.

  As described above, since the change operation means of the third specific example needs to unlock the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 in order to execute the change operation, it takes a lot of time for fraud. Since the risk of finding that it takes time for fraud is high, it is difficult for a person who attempts fraud to recognize it as a type that is difficult to attack, and of course it becomes difficult to be targeted.

[Setting auxiliary device for change operation means]
FIG. 268 is a perspective view showing a setting assisting device 131Xi which can correspond to any one of the changing operation means of the first to third embodiments.
The setting auxiliary device 131Xi has a portable size device case 131Xj, a setting key 131Xk for setting change matching at least the setting key switch 131Xa, an auxiliary setting operation unit 131X1 for operating the setting switching unit 131Xb, and a game setting changing device And an auxiliary setting visual display unit 131 Xm for acquiring and visually displaying setting information of

  The setting key 131Xk matching the setting key switch 131Xa protrudes to the rear side of the device case 131Xj, and can be rotated clockwise or counterclockwise by the auxiliary key lever 131Xn protruding to the front side of the device case 131Xj.

  The auxiliary setting operation unit 131X1 for operating the setting switching unit 131Xb manually operates (rotates) the auxiliary setting connection unit 131Xo (hexagonal wrench) protruding to the rear side of the device case 131Xj and the auxiliary setting connection unit 131Xo, for example. And an auxiliary input unit 131Xp. The game setting change device on the pachinko machine 1 side is configured to be able to rotate the setting switching unit 131Xb with a hexagonal wrench of the same standard as the auxiliary setting connection unit 131Xo in accordance with the auxiliary setting operation unit 131X1. In addition, if setting change part 131Xb of game setting change apparatus and auxiliary setting connection part 131Xo are set to the combination of a special standard, change operation of setting change part 131Xb can not be performed unless auxiliary setting connection part 131Xo is used. , Improve the crime prevention performance.

  The auxiliary setting visual display unit 131Xm that acquires setting information of the game setting change device and displays it visually converts the light signal acquired by the light sensor 131Xq of the round axis shape and the light sensor 131Xq into a visible display And auxiliary setting display means 131 Xr to be displayed. The setting display portion 131Xc of the game setting change device is, for example, a round hole that can be fitted with the light sensor 131Xq, and the setting value is one-sided by an invisible means such as blinking of light behind the round hole. The blinking of the light is acquired by the optical sensor 131Xq and converted to a visible display by the auxiliary setting display means 131Xr. Therefore, since the setting value of the game setting change device can be viewed only through the auxiliary setting visible display unit 131Xm, the person who does not have the setting auxiliary device 131Xi does not know the setting value, and the crime prevention performance is improved.

  According to the setting auxiliary device 131Xi, when changing the setting value of the change operation means in the above manner, after firmly inserting the setting key 131Xk of the setting auxiliary device 131Xi to the root after the unlocking step of opening the door frame 3, The auxiliary setting connection unit 131Xo (hexagonal wrench) of the auxiliary setting operation unit 131X1 fits into the setting switching unit 131Xb in order of the length, and the light sensor 131Xq of the auxiliary setting visible display unit 131Xm fits into the round hole of the setting display unit 131Xc. If the light sensor 131Xq is finally fitted while being guided by the setting key 131Xk and the auxiliary setting connection part 131Xo in this manner, damage to the delicate light sensor 131Xq can be prevented.

Next, with the setting auxiliary device 131Xi set as described above, the power of the power switch 630a (one of the power switches 630a refer to specific examples 1 to 3), which is an element of the change operation means, is turned off. When the setting key switch 131Xa is turned ON by turning the setting key 131Xk with the key lever 131Xn, and the power switch 630a is turned ON in this state, the setting change mode is switched. Then, the setting information emitted as a one-sided light signal at the back of the circular hole of the setting display section 131Xc is read by the optical sensor 131Xq and visually displayed by the auxiliary setting display means 131Xr. The set value is changed by turning the auxiliary input unit 131Xp while visually checking with means 131Xr.
When the set value is reached, the setting key switch 131Xa is returned to OFF, the setting assisting device 131Xi is removed from the pachinko machine 1, and the door frame 3 or the body frame 4 is locked to complete the setting operation.

The setting auxiliary device 131Xi illustrated is provided with a schedule display unit 131Xs that displays setting values to be changed, in addition to the auxiliary setting display unit 131Xr that displays the current setting values. The setting value to be changed is previously input to the internal data of the setting auxiliary device 131Xi together with the individual number of the pachinko machine 1.
On the other hand, the setting display unit 131Xc of the game setting change device of the pachinko machine 1 transmits its own individual number as a light signal together with the current setting value, and reads it by the light sensor 131Xq of the setting auxiliary device 131Xi Thus, the setting values of the target pachinko machine 1 to be changed are displayed.
Therefore, the person who changes the setting can use the auxiliary input unit of the auxiliary setting operation unit 131X1 until the setting value of the change schedule displayed on the schedule display unit 131Xs matches the display of the auxiliary setting display unit 131Xr indicating the current setting value. Since it is sufficient to rotate the 131Xp, setting work can be performed efficiently and setting errors are less likely to occur.

  Further, the auxiliary input unit 131Xp of the setting auxiliary device 131Xi is driven by an electric motor (not shown), and in the setting change mode, the schedule display unit 131Xs indicating at least the setting value to be changed is hidden and the auxiliary input unit 131Xp is automatically If the setting change is displayed by turning on the auxiliary setting display means 131 Xr simultaneously, for example, the person who performs the setting operation does not know the set value of the hit probability. There is no risk of leakage of information of the high pachinko machine 1.

[Relationship between concrete examples and technical ideas]
The game setting change devices of the specific examples 1 and 2 correspond to the embodiments of the following technical ideas.
“A frame or box-like fixed part fixedly attached to the game machine installation part in the facility,
A door frame formed so as to cover the front surface of the fixed portion and to be able to turn in a half-opened manner;
It is a game machine which has a main frame located on the rear side of the door frame and formed so as to be able to turn in a half-opening manner with respect to the door frame and the fixing portion,
It is equipped with a game setting change device that can change the game setting of the winning probability by lottery within a predetermined range,
A game machine characterized by providing all the change operation means for changing the setting value of the game setting change device on the rear side of the door frame and / or on the front side of the main body frame. "
According to this gaming machine, when changing the setting of the hitting probability with the game setting change device, it is only necessary to turn the door frame provided with the parts for presentation, so the risk of disconnection at the time of turning In addition, the inside of the island facility is closed by the main frame even if the door frame is turned, so the risk of damage to the ball circulation facility by dropping foreign objects such as tools is small, and employees Therefore, the risk of fraud that the wrong part is supplied to the back of the gaming machine is small. In addition, even if the door frame is turned, there is almost no risk that the out-of-sphere / safe-ball counter setting will be shifted, so there is almost no risk of data failure due to the out-of-counter setting, and the door frame has a ball tank Since the weight is not so light, the physical burden of setting change can be reduced.

The game setting change device of Example 3 corresponds to an embodiment of the following technical idea.
[Technical thought of specific example 3]
“A frame or box-like fixed part fixedly attached to the game machine installation part in the facility,
A door frame formed so as to cover the front surface of the fixing portion and to be pivotable in a half-opening manner with respect to the fixing portion;
It is a game machine which has a main frame located on the rear side of the door frame and formed so as to be able to turn in a half-opening manner with respect to the door frame and the fixing portion,
It is equipped with a game setting change device that can change the game setting of the winning probability by lottery within a predetermined range,
A portion of the change operation means for changing the setting value of the game setting change device is provided on the rear side of the door frame and / or the front side of the main body frame, and the other portion of the change operation means is on the rear of the main body frame A gaming machine provided in the fixed portion on the rear side of the main body frame in the side and / or closed state. "
According to such a gaming machine, it is necessary to unlock the door frame and the body frame in order to execute the change operation. Since the risk of finding that it takes time for fraud is high, it is difficult for a person who attempts fraud to recognize it as a type that is difficult to attack, and of course it becomes difficult to be targeted.

  As mentioned above, although the crime prevention structure of the game setting which used the structure of the pachinko machine 1 was explained, internal RAM is cleared automatically, for example by changing main control part 1310 to setting change mode besides the above However, a RAM clear switch for manually clearing the RAM of the main control unit 1310 may be provided near the change operation means so that maintenance of the gaming machine including the change of the hit probability can be efficiently performed.

In the above, the game setting change device can change the game setting of the winning probability by lottery within a predetermined range, but as described above, it is possible to change to a specific receiving port (for example, fixed start winning opening 4813). It may be possible to change the entry probability (feature lottery) of
Specifically, the management number No. in FIG. 20, “set 1 = 324”, “set 2 = 320”, and “set 3 to set 6 = 316” for the excitation time (ms) of the first distribution stepping motor 4908. Even if the excitation time (ms) of the second distribution stepping motor 4909 at 21 is set as “setting 1 to setting 3 = 428”, “setting 4 = 420”, “setting 5 = 416”, and “setting 6 = 412” Good. By doing this, since the time during which the first electric distribution piece 4835 and the second electric distribution piece 4840 are stopped at the disadvantage of the player changes, the ball entering probability to the specific receiving port changes. The target of change is set to the first electric distribution piece 4835 in the setting 1 to the setting 3, the target of change is set to the second electric distribution piece 4840 in the setting 4 to the setting 6, and the places where the change of movement appears are dispersed As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice the change due to the setting change.

  Further, although a pachinko machine has been exemplified as a game machine in the above description, the invention is also applicable to other game machines such as ball ball machines, arrange ball machines, and the above-mentioned combination machines, and further, a plurality of drums using game medals. The present invention is also applicable to a slot machine that rotates (rolling drum or reel).

1 ... Pachinko machine (game machine)
3 ... Door frame (opening and closing part)
5a ... game area 101a ... door window (window)
420 ... placement area (predetermined part)
450 ... Door frame top unit (front decoration part)

Claims (1)

An opening / closing portion which constitutes a front side of the gaming machine and has a window portion for making a predetermined gaming area visible.
And a front decoration portion positioned in front of a predetermined portion of the opening and closing portion and disposed to project forward than the window portion,
The front decoration portion is configured to be changeable between a game available state in which an operation for effect is possible and a maintenance state in which an operation for effect is not possible,
Further, a power supply path used for electrical connection to the front decorative portion is configured using a drawer connector without using a harness.